SIP5 7SJ82-85 V09.70 Manual C017-M en

Preface
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
SIPROTEC 5 Basic Structure of the Function 2
Overcurrent Protection
System Functions 3
7SJ82/7SJ85
Applications 4
V9.70 and higher Function-Group Types and Bay Proxy 5
Protection and Automation Functions 6
Manual
Capacitor Bank Protection 7
Control Functions 8
Supervision Functions 9
Measured Values, Energy Values, and
Supervision of the Primary System 10
Power Quality – Basic 11
Functional Tests 12
Technical Data 13
Appendix A
Literature
Glossary
C53000-G5040-C017-M Index
NOTE
i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Subject to changes and errors. The information given in Copyright © Siemens 2023. All rights reserved.
this document only contains general descriptions and/or The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
performance features which may not always specifically document, or utilization and communication of the content
reflect those described, or which may undergo modifica- are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
tion in the course of further development of the products. including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
The requested performance features are binding only when utility model or a design, are reserved.
they are expressly agreed upon in the concluded contract.
Document version: C53000-G5040-C017-M.02 Trademarks
Edition: 12.2023
SIPROTEC, DIGSI, SIGRA, SIGUARD, SIMEAS, SAFIR, SICAM
Version of the product described: V9.70 and higher Insights Hub, and OT Companion are trademarks of
Siemens. Any unauthorized use is prohibited.
Preface
Purpose of the Manual

This manual describes the protection, automation, control, and monitoring functions of the SIPROTEC 5
devices.
Target Audience
Protection system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and
maintenance of automation, selective protection and control equipment, and operational crew in electrical
installations and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to the SIPROTEC 5 device family.
Further Documentation
[dw_product-overview_SIP5_device-manual, 5, en_US]
• Device manuals
Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The printed
manual and the online help for the device have the same informational structure.
SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual 3

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Preface
• Hardware manual
The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks and device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5
device family.
• Operating manual
The Operating manual describes the basic principles and procedures for operating and assembling the
devices of the SIPROTEC 5 range.
• Communication protocol manual

The Communication protocol manual contains a description of the protocols for communication within
the SIPROTEC 5 device family and to higher-level network control centers.
• Security manual
The Security manual describes the security features of the SIPROTEC 5 devices and DIGSI 5.
• Process bus manual

The process bus manual describes the functions and applications specific for process bus in SIPROTEC 5.
• Product information
The Product information includes general information about device installation, technical data, limiting
values for input and output modules, and conditions when preparing for operation. This document is
provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.
• Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the essential steps when engineering with DIGSI 5. In addition, the
Engineering Guide shows you how to load a planned configuration to a SIPROTEC 5 device and update
the functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
• DIGSI 5 online help

The DIGSI 5 online help contains a help package for DIGSI 5 and CFC.
The help package for DIGSI 5 includes a description of the basic operation of software, the DIGSI princi-
ples and editors. The help package for CFC includes an introduction to CFC programming, basic examples
of working with CFC, and a reference chapter with all the CFC blocks available for the SIPROTEC 5 range.
• SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial

The tutorial on the DVD contains brief information about important product features, more detailed
information about the individual technical areas, as well as operating sequences with tasks based on
practical operation and a brief explanation.
• SIPROTEC 5 catalog
The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the devices of SIPROTEC 5.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Commun-
ities on harmonization of the laws of the Member States concerning electromag-
netic compatibility (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU), restriction on usage of hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU), and
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
2014/35/EU).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to the Council Directive
in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 (for EMC directive), the standard
EN IEC 63000 (for RoHS directive), and with the product standard EN 60255-27 (for
Low Voltage Directive) by Siemens.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German
standard VDE 0435.
Standards
IEEE Std C 37.90
4 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Preface
The technical data of the product is approved in accordance with UL.

For more information about the UL database, see ul.com
You can find the product with the UL File Number E194016.
IND. CONT. EQ.

69CA
Additional Support
For questions about the system, contact your Siemens sales partner.
Customer Support Center
Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.

Siemens Electrification & Automation
Global Support
Single entry point
Phone: +49 9131 1743072
E-mail: [email protected]
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD Phone: +49 911 9582 7100
Humboldtstraße 59 E-mail: [email protected]
90459 Nuremberg Internet: www.siemens.com/poweracademy
Germany
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well
as to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger:
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Preface
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
NOTE
i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation
which must be given attention.
Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

Only qualified electrical engineering personnel may commission and operate the equipment (module, device)
described in this document. Qualified electrical engineering personnel in the sense of this document are
people who can demonstrate technical qualifications as electrical technicians. These persons may commission,
isolate, ground and label devices, systems and circuits according to the standards of safety engineering.
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
• Proper transport
• Proper storage, setup and installation
• Proper operation and maintenance

When electrical equipment is operated, hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts. If proper
action is not taken, death, severe injury or property damage can result:
• The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
• All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.
• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
• Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
• The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.
Selection of Used Symbols on the Device
Nr. Symbol Beschreibung
1 Direct current, IEC 60417, 5031
2 Alternating current, IEC 60417, 5032

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Preface
Nr. Symbol Beschreibung
3 Direct and alternating current, IEC 60417, 5033
4 Earth (ground) terminal, IEC 60417, 5017
5 Protective conductor terminal, IEC 60417, 5019
6 Caution, risk of electric shock
7 Caution, risk of danger, ISO 7000, 0434
8 Protective insulation, IEC 60417, 5172, safety class II devices
9 Guideline 2002/96/EC for electrical and electronic devices
10 Guideline for the Eurasian market
11 Mandatory conformity mark for electronics and electrotechnical products in Morocco
12 Extra low voltage (ELV), IEC 60417, 5180, Safety Class III devices
OpenSSL
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in OpenSSL Toolkit (http://
www.openssl.org/).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
Preface.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................47
1.1 General.............................................................................................................................48
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5................................................................................................... 49
2 Basic Structure of the Function.................................................................................................................. 51

2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device...............................................................................52
2.2 Application Templates/Adaptation of Functional Scope...................................................... 58
2.3 Function Control............................................................................................................... 60
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications.....................................66
2.5 Information Lists............................................................................................................... 68
3 System Functions....................................................................................................................................... 69
3.1 Indications........................................................................................................................ 70
3.1.1 General....................................................................................................................... 70
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel..................................................... 70
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5............................................................... 72
3.1.4 Displaying Indications.................................................................................................. 73
3.1.5 Logs............................................................................................................................ 76
3.1.5.1 General..................................................................................................................76
3.1.5.2 Operational Log..................................................................................................... 77
3.1.5.3 Fault Log................................................................................................................79
3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log................................................................................................... 80
3.1.5.5 User Log................................................................................................................ 82
3.1.5.6 Setting-History Log.................................................................................................84
3.1.5.7 Communication Log............................................................................................... 85
3.1.5.8 Communication-Supervision Log............................................................................ 87
3.1.5.9 Security Log........................................................................................................... 88
3.1.5.10 Device-Diagnosis Log............................................................................................. 89
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs....................................................................................... 90
3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5....................................................................92
3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel...........................................92
3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device.................................................................94
3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group ..................................................... 95
3.1.11 Application Mode/Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Auto-
mation Technology......................................................................................................95
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ............................................................................................. 97
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups...........................................99
3.3.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................99
3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking...................................................................................... 99
3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups........................................................................................102

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
3.3.4 Frequency Tracking Groups – Interpretation of Measured Values................................ 107

3.4 Processing Quality Attributes...........................................................................................109
3.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................109
3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values........................... 111
3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts................................................ 117
3.4.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions.......................... 121
3.5 Fault Recording...............................................................................................................126
3.5.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 126
3.5.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 126
3.5.3 Function Description..................................................................................................126
3.5.4 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................130
3.5.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................133
3.5.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 134
3.6 Protection Communication..............................................................................................135
3.6.1 Overview...................................................................................................................135
3.6.2 Protection Communication in the Overall System....................................................... 136
3.6.4 Available Variants for the Protection Communication................................................. 148
3.6.5 Classic Protection Communication............................................................................. 149
3.6.5.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 149
3.6.5.2 Classic Protection Communication in the Overall System.......................................149
3.6.5.3 Structure of the Function Group........................................................................... 149
3.6.5.4 Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5.............................................. 151
3.6.5.5 Setting Notes for the Device Combination............................................................ 152
3.6.5.6 Setting Notes on Selecting the Communication Medium.......................................156
3.6.5.7 Setting Notes for the Classic Protection Interface.................................................. 156
3.6.5.8 Indications and Measured Values in the Classic Protection Interface...................... 160
3.6.5.9 Remote Data........................................................................................................ 165
3.6.5.10 Constellation Measured Values for Type 1 and Type 2........................................... 172
3.6.5.11 Settings............................................................................................................... 173
3.6.5.12 Information List................................................................................................... 174
3.6.6 Advanced Protection Communication ........................................................................177
3.6.6.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 177
3.6.6.2 Advanced Protection Communication in the Overall System..................................177
3.6.6.3 Structure of the FG Protection Communication..................................................... 178
3.6.6.4 Configuration of the Advanced Protection Communication in DIGSI 5................... 179
3.6.6.5 Setting Notes for the Protection Interface............................................................. 183
3.6.6.6 Indications and Measured Values of the Advanced Protection Interface................. 187
3.6.6.7 Setting Notes for the Device Combination............................................................ 190
3.6.6.8 Constellation Measured Values for Type 1 and Type 2........................................... 195
3.6.6.9 Setting Notes for External Synchronization........................................................... 197
3.6.6.10 Indications and Measured Values of the External Synchronization......................... 202
3.6.6.11 Setting Notes for the Remote Data....................................................................... 203
3.6.6.12 Description Phase Swapping.................................................................................203
3.6.6.13 Setting Notes for Phase Swapping........................................................................ 204
3.6.6.14 Settings............................................................................................................... 206
3.6.7 Assignment of the Protection Function Group to the FG Protection Communication....208
3.6.8 Application Examples and Setting Notes for IP Communication...................................209
3.6.8.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 209
3.6.8.2 Device Combination of 2 Devices and Redundant Communication Connection...... 209
3.6.8.3 Device Combination of 3 Devices and Only IP Communication.............................. 210
3.6.8.4 Device Combination of 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media.....................211

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
3.6.8.5 Device Combination of 6 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media.....................213

3.6.8.6 Unsupported Configurations................................................................................ 216
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization....................................................................................... 218
3.7.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 218
3.7.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................224
3.8 User-Defined Objects...................................................................................................... 226
3.8.1 Overview...................................................................................................................226
3.8.2 Basic Data Types........................................................................................................ 227
3.8.3 Pulse and EnergyMetered Values, Transformer Taps................................................... 231
3.8.4 Additional Data Types................................................................................................ 231
3.8.5 External Signals......................................................................................................... 231
3.9 Other Functions.............................................................................................................. 233
3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals................................................ 233
3.9.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating.................................................................237
3.9.3 Persistent Commands................................................................................................ 240
3.9.4 Device Logout........................................................................................................... 240
3.9.4.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 240
3.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 241
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions.............................244
3.10.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................244
3.10.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5.............................................................. 244
3.10.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device....................... 251
3.11 Device Settings............................................................................................................... 253
3.11.1 General Device Settings............................................................................................. 253
3.11.1.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 253
3.11.1.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 256
3.11.2 Settings-Group Switching.......................................................................................... 260
3.11.2.1 Overview of Functions .........................................................................................260
3.11.2.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 260
3.11.2.3 Function Description............................................................................................ 261
3.11.2.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 262
3.12 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit ....................................................264
3.13 Display-Page Editor......................................................................................................... 267
4 Applications.............................................................................................................................................. 269
4.1 Overview........................................................................................................................ 270
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SJ82/7SJ85........................271
5 Function-Group Types and Bay Proxy.......................................................................................................283

5.1 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase................................................................. 284
5.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................284

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group................................................................................ 284

5.1.4 Write-Protected Settings............................................................................................ 289
5.1.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................289
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase................................................................. 291
5.2.1 Overview...................................................................................................................291
5.2.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................296
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase............................................................................. 298
5.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................298
5.3.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................299
5.4 Function-Group Type Capacitor Bank............................................................................... 301
5.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................301
5.4.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................312
5.5 Function-Group Type Capacitor Bank Differential Protection ............................................314
5.5.1 Function-Group Types................................................................................................314
5.5.2 Function-Group Type Capacitor Bank Diff................................................................... 315
5.5.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 315
5.5.3 Function-Group Type Capacitor-Bank Side.................................................................. 319
5.5.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 319
5.5.3.4 Write-Protected Settings.......................................................................................326
5.5.3.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 327
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units.................................................................................. 328
5.6.1 Overview...................................................................................................................328
5.6.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet..................................................................................................330
5.6.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 330
5.6.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet........................................................... 331
5.6.3.5 20-mA Channel.................................................................................................... 332
5.6.3.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 336

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
5.6.4 20-mA Unit Serial...................................................................................................... 338

5.6.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 338
5.6.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 340
5.6.5 Communication with 20-mA Unit...............................................................................342
5.6.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit........................................................................ 342
5.6.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet....................................................................345
5.6.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs..........................................................347
5.6.6.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 347
5.6.6.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 353
5.6.7 RTD Unit Ethernet...................................................................................................... 355
5.6.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 355
5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit......................................................................... 356
5.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor.............................................................................................358
5.6.7.6 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 359
5.6.7.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 360
5.6.8 RTD Unit, Serial..........................................................................................................360
5.6.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 360
5.6.8.3 Parameter............................................................................................................ 361
5.6.9 Communication with RTD Unit................................................................................... 363
5.6.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200)..................................................... 363
5.6.9.2 Integration of an RTD Unit Ether. (TR1200 IP)....................................................... 366
5.6.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors ............................................................ 368
5.6.10 Temperature Acquisition via Protocols........................................................................368
5.6.10.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 368
5.6.10.3 Stage Temperature Acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850............................... 369
5.6.10.4 PROFINET IO Configuration for the Temperature Acquisition................................. 370
5.6.10.5 IEC 61850 Configuration for the Temperature Acquisition.....................................373
5.6.10.6 Stage Temperature Acquisition via GOOSE............................................................375
5.6.10.7 GOOSE Configuration for the Temperature Acquisition......................................... 376
5.6.10.9 Settings............................................................................................................... 389
5.6.11 LPIT Module IO240.................................................................................................... 389
5.6.11.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 389
5.6.11.3 Function Description ........................................................................................... 391
5.6.11.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 397
5.7 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker............................................................................... 400
5.7.1 Overview...................................................................................................................400

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
5.7.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................403
5.7.6 Trip Logic.................................................................................................................. 405
5.7.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 406
5.7.7 Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 407
5.7.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 407
5.7.7.2 Tripping, Opening and Closing the Circuit Breaker................................................ 407
5.7.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information..............409
5.7.7.4 Definitive Tripping, Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression.............................411
5.7.7.5 Tripping and Opening Information....................................................................... 412
5.7.7.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 416
5.7.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions........... 416
5.7.8.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 416
5.7.9 Detection Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)......................................... 417
5.7.9.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 419
5.8 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker [without Current]....................................................420
5.8.1 Overview...................................................................................................................420
5.8.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................422
5.8.5 Trip Logic.................................................................................................................. 422
5.8.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 424
5.8.6 Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 424
5.8.6.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 424
5.8.6.2 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker............................................... 424
5.8.6.3 Detection of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information................426
5.8.6.4 Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression.......................................................... 428
5.8.6.5 Tripping and Opening Information....................................................................... 429
5.8.6.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 432
5.8.7 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions........... 432
5.8.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 432
5.8.8 Detection Manual Closure (for Processor Monitor)......................................................433
5.8.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 435
5.9 Process Monitor.............................................................................................................. 436
5.9.3 Current-Flow Criterion............................................................................................... 437

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
5.9.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion).............................................. 438

5.9.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object......................................................438
5.9.6 Closure Detection...................................................................................................... 439
5.9.8 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional)....................................................................... 440
5.9.9 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection) ...................................... 441
5.9.10 Settings.....................................................................................................................442
5.10 Function-Group Recording.............................................................................................. 443
5.10.1 Overview...................................................................................................................443
5.11 Bay Proxy........................................................................................................................ 445
5.11.1 Overview...................................................................................................................445
5.11.2 Structure of the Bay................................................................................................... 446
5.11.3 Application and Setting Notes (Mode Behavior of Bay)............................................... 447
5.11.4 Application and Setting Notes (Bay-Related Switching Authority)................................449
5.11.5 Application and Setting Notes (Displays and Connections for Bay).............................. 449
5.11.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................453
6 Protection and Automation Functions..................................................................................................... 455

6.1 Power-System Data......................................................................................................... 457
6.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................457
6.1.2 Structure of the Power-System Data...........................................................................457
6.1.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings....................................................... 457
6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3‑Phase (I-3ph)................ 458
6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 1‑Phase (I-1ph)................ 461
6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph)............... 463
6.1.7 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 1‑Phase (V-1ph)............... 467
6.1.8 Disconnection of Measuring Points............................................................................ 468
6.1.8.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 468
6.1.8.2 Description.......................................................................................................... 469
6.1.8.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 471
6.1.9 Settings.....................................................................................................................472
6.2 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions.................................................... 483
6.2.1 Description ............................................................................................................... 483
6.3 Overcurrent Protection, Phases........................................................................................484
6.3.2 Structure of the Function .......................................................................................... 484
6.3.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain........................................................................................... 486
6.3.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 486
6.3.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 488
6.3.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................ 489
6.3.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 489

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents

6.3.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 497
6.3.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................. 501
6.3.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 501
6.3.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 508
6.3.6 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve............................................................. 511
6.3.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 511
6.3.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 514
6.3.7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection..........................517
6.3.7.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 517
6.3.8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings..................................................... 518
6.3.8.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 518
6.3.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) ..................................................522
6.4 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases......................................................... 523
6.4.3 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Dependent......................... 524
6.4.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 524
6.4.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 528
6.4.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released.............................530
6.4.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 530
6.4.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 532
6.4.5 Stage with Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Undervoltage Seal-In...................... 534
6.4.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 534
6.4.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 536
6.4.6 Stage with Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released Under-
voltage Seal-In...........................................................................................................538
6.4.6.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 538
6.4.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 541
6.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground...................................................................................... 543
6.5.3 General Functionality................................................................................................ 544
6.5.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 544
6.5.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 546
6.5.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 547
6.5.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 552

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents

6.5.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 555
6.5.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 559
6.5.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 562
6.5.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 565
6.5.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 568
6.5.8.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 569
6.5.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) ..................................................573
6.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases...................................................................... 575
6.6.3 Stage Control............................................................................................................ 577
6.6.3.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 577
6.6.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 578
6.6.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 583
6.6.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 587
6.6.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 593
6.6.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 596
6.6.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 598
6.6.7 Direction Determination............................................................................................ 601
6.6.7.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 601
6.6.8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings .................................................... 604
6.6.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends ............. 605
6.6.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection ........................................... 606
6.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground..................................................................... 608
6.7.3.1 Measured-Value Selection.................................................................................... 610
6.7.3.2 Direction Determination....................................................................................... 611
6.7.3.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 615

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
6.7.4 Stage Control............................................................................................................ 616

6.7.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 616
6.7.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 618
6.7.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 624
6.7.6.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 628
6.7.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 635
6.7.7 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse Char-
acteristic Curve..........................................................................................................639
6.7.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 639
6.7.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 642
6.7.8 Stage with Knee-Point Characteristic Curve................................................................ 646
6.7.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 646
6.7.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 648
6.7.9.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 650
6.7.9.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 652
6.8 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection....................................................................657
6.8.1 Inrush-Current Detection........................................................................................... 657
6.8.1.1 Overview of Functions......................................................................................... 657
6.8.1.2 Structure of the Function .................................................................................... 657
6.8.1.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 662
6.8.2 2nd Harmonic Ground Detection............................................................................... 663
6.8.2.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 665
6.8.3 2nd Harmonic Detection 1-Phase............................................................................... 666
6.8.3.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 668
6.9 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping...............................................................................669

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
6.9.3 Standard Release Procedure....................................................................................... 670

6.9.5 Release Procedure via Protection Interface................................................................. 672
6.9.6 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................... 674
6.9.7 Settings.....................................................................................................................674
6.10 Arc Protection................................................................................................................. 676
6.10.1 Overview of Function ................................................................................................676
6.10.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings....................................................... 679
6.10.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Stage............................................................... 680
6.10.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................681
6.10.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode:
Light Only................................................................................................................. 684
6.10.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 684
Light and Current...................................................................................................... 687
6.10.9.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 687
6.10.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors via External Trip Initiation..689
6.10.10.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 689
6.10.11 Application Example for Arc Protection with a Line Sensor in Operating Mode:
Light and Current...................................................................................................... 693
6.10.11.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 693
6.11 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault.................................................................... 696
6.11.3 Stage Description...................................................................................................... 697
6.11.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................698
6.12 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase...................................................................................... 699
6.12.1 Function Overview ....................................................................................................699
6.12.3.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 701
6.12.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 702
6.12.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 704
6.12.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 706

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents

acteristic Curve..........................................................................................................708
6.12.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 708
6.12.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 711
6.12.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 712
6.12.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 714
6.12.7 Fast Stage................................................................................................................. 715
6.12.7.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 715
6.12.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 716
6.12.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 716
6.12.9 Application Example: High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault Protection..................718
6.12.9.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 718
6.12.10 Application Example: Tank Leakage Protection........................................................... 724
6.12.10.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 724
6.13 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection....................................................................... 726
6.13.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 727
6.13.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 730
6.13.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 732
6.13.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 734
6.14 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection......................................................736
6.14.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................743
6.15 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection............................................................. 745
6.15.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................755

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
6.16 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection.................................................................................... 757

6.16.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 760
6.16.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 765
6.16.4 Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement............................................. 766
6.16.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 766
6.16.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 775
6.16.5 Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage................................................................... 776
6.16.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 776
6.16.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 784
6.16.6 Directional 3I0 Stage with φ (V0,3I0) Measurement................................................... 785
6.16.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 785
6.16.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 791
6.16.7 Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement.......................................................792
6.16.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 792
6.16.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 801
6.16.8 Directional Stage with Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic........................................ 802
6.16.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 802
6.16.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 809
6.16.9 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage..................... 811
6.16.9.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 811
6.16.9.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 815
6.16.10 Non-Directional 3I0 Stage.......................................................................................... 815
6.16.10.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 815
6.16.10.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 819
6.16.11 Non-Directional Y0 Stage........................................................................................... 819
6.16.11.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 819
6.16.11.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 823
6.16.12 Non-Directional 3I0 Harmonic Stage.......................................................................... 824
6.16.12.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 824
6.16.12.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 826
6.16.13 Pulse-Pattern Detection Stage.................................................................................... 827
6.16.13.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 827

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents

6.16.13.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 835
6.16.14 Intermittent Ground-Fault Blocking Stage.................................................................. 836
6.16.14.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 836
6.16.14.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 838
6.17 Undercurrent Protection..................................................................................................839
6.17.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................843
6.18 Negative-Sequence Protection.........................................................................................845
6.18.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 846
6.18.4.1 Stage Description ................................................................................................ 848
6.18.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 849
6.18.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 852
6.18.5.2 Application and Settings Notes............................................................................. 853
6.18.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 854
6.19 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection....................................................................... 855
6.19.4 Application and Setting Notes for Direction Determination ........................................ 860
6.19.5 Application and Setting Notes for Stages....................................................................860
6.19.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................862
6.20 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced........................................................... 865
6.20.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain........................................................................................... 865
6.20.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 865
6.20.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 867
6.20.4 Stage with Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced.....................................869
6.20.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 869
6.20.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 878

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents

6.21 Thermal Overload Protection, User-Defined Characteristic Curve...................................... 880
6.21.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................889
6.22 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase............................................................................. 892
6.22.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................901
6.23 Unbalanced-Load Protection............................................................................................903
6.23.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................908
6.24 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage...................................................................910
6.24.3.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 911
6.24.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 914
6.24.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 917
6.24.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 922
6.25 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage..............................923
6.25.3.1 Stage Description ................................................................................................ 924
6.25.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 928
6.25.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 929
6.25.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 934

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
6.26 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage................................................... 936

6.26.3 Stage Description ......................................................................................................937
6.26.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................938
6.27 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage................................................. 940
6.27.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 940
6.27.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 942
6.27.4 Stage with Negative-Sequence Voltage...................................................................... 943
6.27.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 943
6.27.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 945
6.28 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage.........................................................................947
6.28.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................951
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-Sequence Voltage ....... 953
6.29.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 953
6.29.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 955
6.29.4 Stage with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-Sequence Voltage ............................ 956
6.29.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 956
6.29.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 958
6.30 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage................................................................ 960
6.30.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 961
6.30.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 966
6.30.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 969

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
6.30.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 976

6.31 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage.................................................978
6.31.3 Stage Description ......................................................................................................979
6.31.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................983
6.32 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage.......................................................................985
6.32.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................989
6.33 Rate-of-Voltage-Change Protection..................................................................................992
6.33.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 993
6.33.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 994
6.33.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................996
6.34 Overfrequency Protection................................................................................................999
6.34.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage.............................................................................. 1000
6.34.4 Application and Setting Notes..................................................................................1001
6.34.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1003
6.34.6 Information List....................................................................................................... 1003
6.35 Underfrequency Protection........................................................................................... 1005
6.35.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1005
6.35.2 Structure of the Function.........................................................................................1005
6.35.3 Underfrequency-Protection Stage............................................................................ 1006
6.35.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1009
6.36 Underfrequency Load Shedding.................................................................................... 1011
6.36.3 General Functionality.............................................................................................. 1012
6.36.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1012
6.36.3.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1015

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
6.36.4 Stage Description.................................................................................................... 1018

6.36.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1018
6.36.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1021
6.37 Rate of Frequency Change Protection............................................................................ 1023
6.37.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................ 1023
6.37.3 General Functions (Undervoltage Test, df/dt Calculation)......................................... 1023
6.37.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1023
6.37.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1025
6.37.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1027
6.38 Vector-Jump Protection................................................................................................. 1029
6.38.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1029
6.38.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1032
6.38.3.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1032
6.38.4 Δφ Stage................................................................................................................. 1033
6.38.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1033
6.38.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1035
6.38.5 I1 < Release Stage ...................................................................................................1035
6.38.5.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1035
6.38.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1036
6.39 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase.................................................................................... 1037
6.39.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 1037
6.39.3 Active Power Stage ................................................................................................. 1038
6.39.4 Reactive Power Stage ..............................................................................................1040
6.39.5 Application Example................................................................................................ 1041
6.39.6 Setting Notes for the Active Power Stage................................................................. 1042
6.39.7 Setting Notes for the Reactive Power Stage.............................................................. 1043
6.39.8 Settings...................................................................................................................1044
6.40 Reverse-Power Protection..............................................................................................1047
6.40.3.1 Description ....................................................................................................... 1048

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
6.40.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1051

6.40.4.1 Description ....................................................................................................... 1052
6.40.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1053
6.41 Overexcitation Protection..............................................................................................1055
6.41.3 Stage with Dependent Characteristic Curve (Thermal Stage).....................................1056
6.41.3.1 Function Description.......................................................................................... 1056
6.41.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1060
6.41.4 Stage with Independent Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1062
6.41.4.2 Application and Setting Notes ........................................................................... 1062
6.41.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1063
6.42 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection...................................................... 1065
6.42.3 Protection Stage...................................................................................................... 1066
6.42.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1066
6.42.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1069
6.42.4 Reclosure Stage....................................................................................................... 1071
6.42.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1071
6.42.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1073
6.43 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection...................................................................................1074
6.43.3 Function Description................................................................................................1075
6.43.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1090
6.44 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection................................................................................. 1093
6.44.1 Overview of Function.............................................................................................. 1093
6.44.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1100
6.45 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection................................................................................ 1102

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents

6.45.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1117
6.46 External Trip Initiation 3-Pole........................................................................................ 1119
6.46.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1121
6.47 External Trip Initiation with Current-Flow Criterion 3-Pole.............................................. 1122
6.47.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1124
6.48 Automatic Reclosing Function....................................................................................... 1126
6.48.3 Cooperation of the Automatic Reclosing Function and Protection Functions............. 1129
6.48.4 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function........................................................................ 1130
6.48.4.1 Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function.................................. 1130
6.48.4.2 Structure of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function.......................................... 1133
6.48.4.3 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Tripping .................................................. 1134
6.48.4.4 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Pickup......................................................1135
6.48.4.5 Start.................................................................................................................. 1136
6.48.4.6 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time................1137
6.48.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time.................. 1139
6.48.4.8 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time...........1141
6.48.4.9 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 4: With Pickup/Without Action Time............. 1142
6.48.4.10 Stage Release.....................................................................................................1143
6.48.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Tripping.................................................... 1144
6.48.4.12 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Pickup.......................................................1145
6.48.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time.................................................. 1146
6.48.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command.............................................................. 1148
6.48.4.15 Reclaim Time..................................................................................................... 1151
6.48.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness .................................................................................. 1152
6.48.4.17 Blockings........................................................................................................... 1153
6.48.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT)................................... 1157
6.48.4.19 Settings............................................................................................................. 1159
6.48.5 Automatic Reclosing Function with Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)................................. 1163
6.48.5.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1163
6.48.5.2 Settings ............................................................................................................ 1164
6.48.6 Cooperation with External Automatic Reclosing Function......................................... 1166
6.48.6.1 Description ....................................................................................................... 1166
6.48.7 Application and Setting Notes for General Settings...................................................1168

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
6.48.8 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function 1174
6.49 Fault Locator.................................................................................................................1177
6.49.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1189
6.50 Fault Locator Plus..........................................................................................................1190
6.50.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1200
6.51 Temperature Supervision.............................................................................................. 1203
6.51.3 Function Description ...............................................................................................1204
6.51.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................. 1205
6.51.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1206
6.52 Phase-Sequence Switchover.......................................................................................... 1213
6.52.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1217
6.53 Current-Jump Detection................................................................................................ 1219
6.53.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1221
6.54 Voltage-Jump Detection................................................................................................ 1222
6.54.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1224
6.55 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection................................................................................ 1226

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents

6.56 Pole Discrepancy Protection.......................................................................................... 1229
6.56.3 Description.............................................................................................................. 1229
6.56.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1232
6.57 Protection and Automation Functions (CEI 0-16 Standard)............................................. 1233
6.57.1 Introduction............................................................................................................ 1233
6.58 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage (CEI 0-16 Standard).................................. 1234
6.58.2.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1234
6.58.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve, 10-Min RMS Value............................ 1235
6.58.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1235
6.58.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve, Fundamental Component................. 1237
6.58.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1237
6.58.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1238
6.59 Frequency Protection (CEI 0-16 Standard) .....................................................................1241
6.59.2.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1242
6.59.3 Overvoltage-Protection Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage ............1248
6.59.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1248
6.59.4 Frequency Protection S1 Stages .............................................................................. 1250
6.59.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1250
6.59.5 Frequency Protection S2 Stages............................................................................... 1252
6.59.5.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1252
6.59.6 Settings...................................................................................................................1254
6.60 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage (CEI 0-16 Standard) ............................... 1258
6.60.2.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1258
6.60.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve.......................................................... 1260
6.60.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1260
6.60.4 Settings...................................................................................................................1262

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
6.61 PI Trip Logic (CEI 0-16 Standard) in FG Circuit Breaker ................................................... 1264
6.61.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 1264
7 Capacitor Bank Protection...................................................................................................................... 1267

7.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................1268
7.2 Overcurrent Protection for Capacitor Banks....................................................................1269
7.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................1269
7.2.2 Overcurrent Protection, Phases for Protection of RLC Filter-Circuit Elements..............1269
7.2.2.1 Structure of the Function .................................................................................. 1269
7.2.2.2 Function Description ......................................................................................... 1270
7.2.2.4 Settings............................................................................................................. 1272
7.3 Thermal Overload Protection for Capacitor Banks...........................................................1273
7.3.3 Function Description ...............................................................................................1273
7.3.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1275
7.4 Current-Unbalance Protection for Capacitors, 3-Phase....................................................1277
7.4.3 General Functions and Measuring-Point Selection.................................................... 1277
7.4.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1277
7.4.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1292
7.4.4 Overcurrent-Protection Stage I>............................................................................... 1295
7.4.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1295
7.4.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1298
7.4.5 Counter Stage......................................................................................................... 1300
7.4.5.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1300
7.4.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1302
7.5.3 General Functions and Measuring-Point Selection.................................................... 1303
7.5.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1303
7.5.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1313
7.5.4 Overcurrent-Protection Stage I>............................................................................... 1314
7.5.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1314
7.5.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1316

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
7.5.5 Counter Stage......................................................................................................... 1318

7.5.5.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1318
7.5.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1320
7.6 Neutral-Point Voltage-Unbalance Protection for Isolated Capacitor Banks in Star
Connection................................................................................................................... 1322
7.6.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1323
7.6.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1327
7.6.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1328
7.6.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1331
7.7 Peak Overvoltage Protection for Capacitors....................................................................1333
7.7.3 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1334
7.7.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1334
7.7.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1338
7.7.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1340
7.7.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1342
7.7.5 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1342
7.7.5.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1342
7.7.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1344
7.8 Voltage Differential Protection for Capacitors.................................................................1345
7.8.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1345
7.8.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1353
7.8.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1355
7.9 Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks.....................................................................1357

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
7.9.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1382
7.10 Detuning Supervision for Capacitor Banks......................................................................1385
7.10.1 AC-Filter Detuning Supervision................................................................................ 1385
8 Control Functions................................................................................................................................... 1387

8.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................1388
8.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................1388
8.1.2 Concept of Controllables..........................................................................................1388
8.2 Switching Devices......................................................................................................... 1391
8.2.1 General Overview.................................................................................................... 1391
8.2.2 Switching Device Circuit Breaker.............................................................................. 1391
8.2.2.1 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device................................................1391
8.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker.......................................................... 1397
8.2.2.4 Settings............................................................................................................. 1405
8.2.3 Disconnector Switching Device................................................................................ 1409
8.2.3.1 Structure of the Disconnector Switching Device.................................................. 1409
8.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector...................................................................1415
8.2.3.4 Settings............................................................................................................. 1418
8.3 Control Functionality.....................................................................................................1421
8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection........................................ 1421
8.3.2 Command Logging.................................................................................................. 1440
8.3.3 Settings...................................................................................................................1444
8.4 Synchronization Function..............................................................................................1446
8.4.3 Connection and Definition....................................................................................... 1447
8.4.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1450
8.4.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1461
8.4.5 Dynamic Measuring-Point Switching........................................................................ 1462
8.4.6 Sequence of Functions............................................................................................ 1463
8.4.7 Stage Synchrocheck.................................................................................................1465
8.4.7.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1465
8.4.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1466
8.4.8 Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous........................................................................... 1468
8.4.8.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1468
8.4.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1474
8.4.9 Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous with Balancing Commands.................................. 1476
8.4.9.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1476
8.4.9.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1493

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents

8.4.10 Expanded Checks (df/dt and Smoothing of Oscillations)........................................... 1496
8.4.11 Closing at De-Energized Line/Busbar.........................................................................1497
8.4.11.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1497
8.4.12 Direct Close Command ............................................................................................1500
8.4.13 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing (AREC), and External Triggering......... 1501
8.4.14 External Synchronization......................................................................................... 1503
8.4.14.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1503
8.4.14.2 Application and Setting Notes (External Synchronization)................................... 1505
8.4.14.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1506
8.4.15 Settings...................................................................................................................1508
8.5 Switching Sequences.................................................................................................... 1513
8.5.4 Settings...................................................................................................................1519
8.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control]........................................................................... 1520
8.6.4 Settings...................................................................................................................1523
8.7 CFC-Chart Settings........................................................................................................ 1525
8.7.4 Settings...................................................................................................................1526
8.8 Tap Changers................................................................................................................ 1527
8.8.3 Settings...................................................................................................................1538
8.9 Voltage Controller......................................................................................................... 1539
8.9.3.1 General..............................................................................................................1540
8.9.3.2 Logic of the Function......................................................................................... 1547
8.9.3.3 Control Response............................................................................................... 1549
8.9.3.4 Function Supervision..........................................................................................1552
8.9.3.5 Dynamic Voltage Control (DVC).......................................................................... 1552
8.9.3.6 Line Compensation............................................................................................ 1555
8.9.3.7 Limiting Values.................................................................................................. 1557
8.9.3.8 Blockings........................................................................................................... 1557

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
8.9.3.9 Parallel Operation.............................................................................................. 1558

8.9.3.10 Creating a GOOSE Later Binding for Parallel Control ........................................... 1570
8.9.3.11 Functional Measured Values...............................................................................1578
8.9.4.1 General..............................................................................................................1582
8.9.4.2 Controlling.........................................................................................................1584
8.9.4.3 Voltage Controller.............................................................................................. 1585
8.9.4.4 Dynamic Voltage Control (DVC).......................................................................... 1590
8.9.4.5 Line Compensation............................................................................................ 1592
8.9.4.6 Limiting Values.................................................................................................. 1595
8.9.4.7 Blockings........................................................................................................... 1596
8.9.4.8 Parallel Control...................................................................................................1597
8.9.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1598
8.10 Point-on-Wave Switching.............................................................................................. 1617
9 Supervision Functions............................................................................................................................ 1619

9.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 1620
9.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision...............................................................................1621
9.2.1 Load Model............................................................................................................. 1621
9.2.2 Function Points........................................................................................................1623
9.2.3 CFC Resources......................................................................................................... 1624
9.3 Supervision of the Secondary System............................................................................ 1626
9.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................1626
9.3.2 Measuring-Voltage Failure....................................................................................... 1626
9.3.2.1 Overview of Functions....................................................................................... 1626
9.3.2.2 Structure of the Function................................................................................... 1627
9.3.2.3 Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure...............................................................1629
9.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure.....................................................................1630
9.3.2.5 Switching onto a 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure, Low Load..........................1631
9.3.2.7 Settings............................................................................................................. 1633
9.3.3 Signaling-Voltage Supervision..................................................................................1634
9.3.3.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1638
9.3.4 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker.........................................................................1640
9.3.4.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1641
9.3.5 Voltage-Balance Supervision.................................................................................... 1641
9.3.5.1 Overview of Functions .......................................................................................1641
9.3.5.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1644

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
9.3.6 Voltage-Sum Supervision......................................................................................... 1644

9.3.6.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1647
9.3.7 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision......................................................................... 1647
9.3.7.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1649
9.3.8 Voltage-Comparison Supervision..............................................................................1649
9.3.8.3 Description........................................................................................................ 1650
9.3.8.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1654
9.3.9 Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Supervision.........................................................................1655
9.3.9.3 Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Measurement................................................................ 1656
9.3.9.4 Stage Description............................................................................................... 1657
9.3.9.6 Settings............................................................................................................. 1659
9.3.10 Broken-Wire Detection............................................................................................. 1660
9.3.10.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1661
9.3.11 Current-Balance Supervision.................................................................................... 1662
9.3.11.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1664
9.3.12 Current-Sum Supervision......................................................................................... 1664
9.3.12.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1667
9.3.13 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision......................................................................... 1668
9.3.13.5 Settings............................................................................................................. 1670

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
9.3.14 Trip-Circuit Supervision............................................................................................ 1670

9.3.14.3 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs....................................................... 1671
9.3.14.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input.........................................................1672
9.3.14.6 Settings............................................................................................................. 1676
9.3.15 Closing-Circuit Supervision...................................................................................... 1676
9.3.15.3 Closing-Circuit Supervision with 3 Binary Inputs..................................................1677
9.3.15.4 Closing-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs..................................................1682
9.3.15.5 Closing-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input................................................... 1683
9.3.15.7 Settings............................................................................................................. 1686
9.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware.............................................................................. 1688
9.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................1688
9.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum....................................................1689
9.5 Supervision of Device Firmware.....................................................................................1693
9.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration......................................................................... 1694
9.7 Supervision of Communication Connections..................................................................1695
9.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures...................................................................... 1696
9.8.1 Overview.................................................................................................................1696
9.8.2 Defect Severity 1..................................................................................................... 1697
9.8.3 Defect Severity 2..................................................................................................... 1701
9.8.4 Defect Severity 3..................................................................................................... 1702
9.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)...............................................................................1703
9.9 Group Indications..........................................................................................................1705
10 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System........................................... 1707
10.1 Overview of Functions.................................................................................................. 1708
10.2 Structure of the Function.............................................................................................. 1709
10.3 Operational Measured Values........................................................................................ 1711
10.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components..................................................................1712
10.5 Average Values............................................................................................................. 1713
10.5.1 Function Description of Average Values................................................................... 1713
10.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values.................................................... 1713
10.6 Minimum/Maximum Values...........................................................................................1716
10.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values.................................................1716
10.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values.................................. 1717
10.7 Energy Values............................................................................................................... 1718
10.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values..................................................................... 1718
10.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Energy Values...................................................... 1719
10.8 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)...................................................................................1721

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
10.8.2 Structure of the Function Group.............................................................................. 1721

10.8.4 Transmitted Data..................................................................................................... 1726
10.8.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)....................................................................... 1726
10.8.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI..........................................................................1728
10.8.7 Parameterizing the PMU on the Device.....................................................................1739
10.8.9 Settings...................................................................................................................1744
10.9 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring ........................................................................................... 1746
10.9.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1747
10.9.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1749
10.9.4 ΣIx Method.............................................................................................................. 1750
10.9.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1750
10.9.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1752
10.9.5 2P Method...............................................................................................................1756
10.9.5.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1756
10.9.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1760
10.9.6 I2t Method.............................................................................................................. 1764
10.9.6.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1764
10.9.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1765
10.9.7 Make Time.............................................................................................................. 1769
10.9.7.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1769
10.9.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1770
10.9.8 Break Time.............................................................................................................. 1775
10.9.8.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1775
10.9.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1776
10.9.9 Pole Scatter Time Open............................................................................................1780
10.9.9.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1780
10.9.9.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1781
10.9.10 Pole Scatter Time Close............................................................................................1783
10.9.10.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1783
10.9.10.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1784

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
10.9.11 Mechanical Switching Time Open............................................................................ 1786

10.9.11.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1786
10.9.11.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1789
10.9.12 Mechanical Switching Time Close............................................................................ 1794
10.9.12.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1794
10.9.12.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1797
10.9.13 Operation counter................................................................................................. 1801
10.9.13.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1801
10.9.13.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1802
10.10 Disconnector-Switch Monitoring................................................................................... 1806
10.10.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1806
10.10.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1806
10.10.4 Mechanical Switching Time Open............................................................................ 1808
10.10.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1808
10.10.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1810
10.10.5 Mechanical Switching Time Close............................................................................ 1811
10.10.5.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1811
10.10.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1813
10.11 User-Defined Metered Values........................................................................................ 1815
10.11.1 Function Description of Pulse-Metered Values.......................................................... 1815
10.11.2 Application and Setting Notes for Pulse-Metered Values........................................... 1816
10.12 Measuring Transducers................................................................................................. 1819
10.12.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1823
10.13 Statistical Values of the Primary System......................................................................... 1826
11 Power Quality – Basic............................................................................................................................. 1827

11.1 Voltage Variation.......................................................................................................... 1828
11.1.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1829

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
11.1.4 Stage Dip.................................................................................................................1829

11.1.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1829
11.1.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1834
11.1.5 Stage Swell..............................................................................................................1835
11.1.5.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1835
11.1.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1838
11.1.6 Stage Interruption................................................................................................... 1839
11.1.6.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1839
11.1.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1842
11.2 Voltage Unbalance........................................................................................................ 1844
11.2.3 Stage V2/V1.............................................................................................................1845
11.2.3.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1845
11.2.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1850
11.2.4 Stage V0/V1.............................................................................................................1851
11.2.4.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1851
11.2.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1855
11.3 THD and Harmonics...................................................................................................... 1857
11.3.3 Stage Current.......................................................................................................... 1858
11.3.4 Stage Voltage.......................................................................................................... 1859
11.3.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1864
11.4 Total Demand Distortion............................................................................................... 1866
11.4.3 Stage Current.......................................................................................................... 1867
11.4.5 Settings...................................................................................................................1870
12 Functional Tests......................................................................................................................................1871
12.1 General Notes............................................................................................................... 1872
12.2 Enabling/Disabling the Application/Test Mode for the Entire Device................................1873
12.3 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection)....................... 1875

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
12.4 Direction Test of Ground Quantities for Directional Ground-Fault Functions................... 1876
12.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................1876
12.4.2 Directional Testing for Solid or Resistive-Grounded Systems..................................... 1876
12.4.3 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems................................ 1878
12.5 Functional Test of Thermal Overload Protection ............................................................ 1880
12.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection............................ 1882
12.7 Circuit-Breaker Test....................................................................................................... 1885
12.8 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection ............................................................ 1888
12.9 Functional Test of Transient Ground-Fault Protection .................................................... 1889
12.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision .............................................................. 1890
12.11 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal............................................................. 1891
12.12 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual
Voltage ........................................................................................................................ 1892
12.13 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function.................................... 1894
12.14 Testing the Negative-Sequence Current ........................................................................ 1898
12.15 Functional Test for Reverse-Power Protection................................................................ 1899
12.15.1 Secondary Test........................................................................................................ 1899
12.15.2 Primary Test............................................................................................................ 1899
12.16 Functional Test Protection Communication....................................................................1902
12.16.1 Checking the Protection-Data Communication......................................................... 1902
12.16.2 Directional Test .......................................................................................................1903
12.17 Functional Test for Overexcitation Protection ................................................................1904
12.18 Functional Test Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks.............................................1905
12.18.1 Secondary Tests.......................................................................................................1905
12.18.2 Primary Tests........................................................................................................... 1906
12.19 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control...................................................................... 1907
12.19.1 Secondary Tests.......................................................................................................1907
12.19.1.1 General..............................................................................................................1907
12.19.1.2 Checking the Transformer Tap Position...............................................................1907
12.19.1.3 Check of the Voltage-Control Function............................................................... 1910
12.19.1.4 Further Tests......................................................................................................1911
12.19.1.5 Voltage-Control Function for Parallel Transformers............................................. 1914
12.19.2 Primary Tests........................................................................................................... 1919
13 Technical Data........................................................................................................................................ 1923

13.1 General Device Data......................................................................................................1926
13.1.1 Analog Inputs.......................................................................................................... 1926
13.1.2 Supply Voltage........................................................................................................ 1931
13.1.3 Binary Inputs........................................................................................................... 1932
13.1.4 Relay Outputs.......................................................................................................... 1933
13.1.5 Design Data.............................................................................................................1935
13.2 Protection Interface and Protection Topology................................................................ 1940
13.3 Date and Time Synchronization..................................................................................... 1942
13.4 Function Group Analog Units........................................................................................ 1943
13.5 Overcurrent Protection, Phases......................................................................................1944

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
13.5.3 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve .......................................................... 1954

13.6 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases....................................................... 1958
13.7 Overcurrent Protection, Ground.................................................................................... 1961
13.7.1 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve ......................................................... 1961
13.8 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases.................................................................... 1966
13.9 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground................................................................... 1973
acteristic Curve........................................................................................................1976
13.9.4 Stage with Knee-Point Characteristic Curve ............................................................. 1978
13.10 Inrush-Current Detection...............................................................................................1983
13.11 2nd Harmonic Detection Ground................................................................................... 1985
13.12 2nd Harmonic Detection 1-Phase.................................................................................. 1987
13.13 Arc Protection............................................................................................................... 1989
13.14 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping.............................................................................1990
13.15 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault.................................................................. 1991
13.16 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase.................................................................................... 1992
acteristic Curve........................................................................................................1995
13.17 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Fast Stage)................................................................. 1999
13.18 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection..................................................................... 2000
13.19 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection....................................................2003
13.20 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection........................................................... 2005
13.21 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection.................................................................................. 2007
13.21.1 General................................................................................................................... 2007
13.21.2 Directional 3I0 Stage with cos φ or sin φ Measurement............................................ 2008
13.21.3 Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage................................................................. 2009
13.21.4 Directional 3I0 Stage with φ(V0,3I0) Measurement.................................................. 2010
13.21.5 Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement (Admittance)................................2011
13.21.6 Directional Stage with Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic...................................... 2012
13.21.7 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage................... 2013
13.21.8 Non-Directional 3I0 Stage........................................................................................ 2014
13.21.9 Non-Directional Y0 Stage......................................................................................... 2014
13.21.10 Non-Directional 3I0 Harmonic Stage.......................................................................2015

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
13.21.11 Pulse-Pattern Detection Stage................................................................................ 2016

13.21.12 Intermittent Ground-Fault Blocking Stage...............................................................2017
13.22 Undercurrent Protection................................................................................................2019
13.23 Negative-Sequence Protection.......................................................................................2021
13.24 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Delay...............................2025
13.25 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase – Advanced........................................................ 2027
13.26 Thermal Overload Protection, User-Defined Characteristic Curve.................................... 2031
13.27 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase........................................................................... 2032
13.28 Unbalanced-Load Protection..........................................................................................2035
13.29 Overcurrent Protection for Capacitor Banks....................................................................2037
13.32 Neutral-Point Voltage-Unbalance Protection for Isolated Capacitor Banks in Star
Connection................................................................................................................... 2055
13.33 Voltage-Differential Protection for Capacitors................................................................ 2056
13.34 Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks.....................................................................2057
13.35 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage.................................................................2060
13.36 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage............................2062
13.37 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage ................................................ 2065
13.38 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage .............................................. 2066
13.39 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage.......................................................................2067
13.40 Peak Overvoltage Protection for Capacitors....................................................................2069
13.41 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-Sequence Voltage ..... 2071
13.42 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage.............................................................. 2072
13.43 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage...............................................2075
13.44 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage ....................................................................2077
13.45 Rate-of-Voltage-Change Protection................................................................................2079
13.46 Overfrequency Protection..............................................................................................2081
13.47 Underfrequency Protection........................................................................................... 2082
13.48 Underfrequency Load Shedding.................................................................................... 2083
13.49 Rate of Frequency Change Protection............................................................................ 2085
13.50 Vector-Jump Protection................................................................................................. 2087
13.51 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase.................................................................................... 2088
13.52 Reverse-Power Protection..............................................................................................2090
13.53 Overexcitation Protection..............................................................................................2091
13.54 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection...................................................... 2093
13.55 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection ..................................................................................2095
13.56 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection................................................................................. 2097
13.57 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection................................................................................ 2098

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
13.58 External Trip Initiation................................................................................................... 2100

13.59 External Trip Initiation with Current-Flow Criterion........................................................ 2101
13.60 Automatic Reclosing..................................................................................................... 2102
13.61 Fault Locator.................................................................................................................2103
13.62 Fault Locator Plus..........................................................................................................2104
13.63 Temperature Supervision.............................................................................................. 2105
13.64 Current-Jump Detection................................................................................................ 2106
13.65 Voltage-Jump Detection................................................................................................ 2107
13.66 Pole Discrepancy Protection.......................................................................................... 2108
13.67 Protection and Automation Functions (CEI 0-16 Standard)............................................. 2109
13.67.1 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage (CEI 0-16 Standard)............................ 2109
13.67.2 Frequency Protection (CEI 0-16 Standard)................................................................ 2109
13.67.3 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage (CEI 0-16 Standard).......................... 2111
13.68 Synchronization Function..............................................................................................2113
13.69 Voltage Controller......................................................................................................... 2116
13.70 Current-Balance Supervision..........................................................................................2121
13.71 Voltage-Balance Supervision .........................................................................................2122
13.72 Current-Sum Supervision...............................................................................................2123
13.73 Voltage-Sum Supervision.............................................................................................. 2124
13.74 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision .............................................................................. 2125
13.75 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision .............................................................................. 2126
13.76 Voltage-Comparison Supervision................................................................................... 2127
13.77 Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Supervision.............................................................................. 2128
13.78 Trip-Circuit Supervision ................................................................................................ 2129
13.79 Closing-Circuit Supervision............................................................................................ 2130
13.80 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum .........................................................2131
13.81 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection............................................................................. 2132
13.82 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker ............................................................................. 2134
13.83 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values....................................................... 2135
13.84 Energy Values............................................................................................................... 2140
13.85 Phasor Measurement Unit............................................................................................. 2141
13.86 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring............................................................................................ 2142
13.87 Disconnector Supervision.............................................................................................. 2143
13.88 Power Quality – Basic.................................................................................................... 2144
13.88.1 Voltage Variation.....................................................................................................2144
13.88.2 Voltage Unbalance.................................................................................................. 2144
13.88.3 THD and Harmonics................................................................................................. 2145
13.88.4 Total Demand Distortion.......................................................................................... 2146
13.89 CFC...............................................................................................................................2147
13.90 Point-on-Wave Switching.............................................................................................. 2151
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 2153
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options...........................................................................2154
A.2 Ordering Spare Parts and Accessories............................................................................ 2155
A.3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions........................................................................... 2158

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table of Contents
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SJ82.......................................................................................... 2161

A.5 Standard Variants for 7SJ85.......................................................................................... 2164
A.6 Requirements for Current Transformers ........................................................................ 2168
A.7 Connection Examples for Current Transformers............................................................. 2174
A.8 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices............................... 2181
A.9 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non-Modular Devices........................2188
A.10 Connection Examples for LPIT Module IO240................................................................. 2193
A.11 Prerouting 7SJ82/85 General......................................................................................... 2197
A.12 Prerouting 7SJ82/85 Capacitor Bank Applications...........................................................2199
Literature................................................................................................................................................ 2201
Glossary.................................................................................................................................................. 2203
Index.......................................................................................................................................................2225

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
1 Introduction
1.1 General 48
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 49

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Introduction
1.1 General
1.1 General
The digital multifunctional protection and bay controllers of the SIPROTEC 5 device series are fitted with
a powerful microprocessor. As a result, all tasks, from acquiring measurands to entering commands in the
circuit breaker, are processed digitally.
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs transform the currents and voltages sent by the instrument transformers and adapt
them to the internal processing level of the device. A SIPROTEC 5 device consists of inputs for measuring
current and voltage. The current inputs are intended for the detection of phase currents and ground current.
The ground current can be detected sensitively using a core balance current transformer. In addition, phase
currents can be detected very sensitively for a particularly precise measurement. The voltage inputs detect the
measuring voltage of device functions requiring voltage measured values.
The analog values are digitized in the microprocessor for data processing.
Microprocessor System
All device functions are processed in the microprocessor system.
This includes, for example:
• Filtering and preparation of the measurands
• Constant monitoring of the measurands
• Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protection functions
• Querying of limiting values and time sequences
• Control of signals for logic functions
• Control of open and close commands
• Recording of indications, fault data, and fault values for fault analysis
• Administration of the operating system and its functions, for example data storage, real-time clock,
communication, interfaces
• External distribution of information
Binary Inputs and Outputs

Using the binary inputs and outputs, the device receives information from the system or from other devices
(such as locking commands). The most important outputs include the commands to the switching devices and
the indications for remote signaling of important events and states.
Front Elements
For devices with an integrated or offset operation panel, LEDs and an LC display on the front provide infor-
mation on the device function and report events, states, and measured values. In conjunction with the LC
display, the integrated keypad enables on-site operation of the device. All device information such as setting
parameters, operating and fault indications or measured values can be displayed, and setting parameters
changed. In addition, system equipment can be controlled via the user interface of the device.
Serial Interfaces
The serial interface in the front panel enables communication with a personal computer when using the DIGSI
operating program. As a result, the operation of all device functions is possible. Additional interfaces on the
rear are used to implement various communication protocols.
Power Supply
The individual functional units of the device are powered by an internal power supply. Brief interruptions in
the supply voltage, which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply, are bridged by
capacitor storage (see also the Technical Data).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Introduction
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5

The SIPROTEC 5devices at the bay level are compact and can be installed directly in medium and high-voltage
switchgear. They are characterized by comprehensive integration of protection and control functions.
General Properties
• Powerful microprocessor
• Fully digital measured-value processing and control, from sampling and digitizing of measurands to
closing and tripping decisions for the circuit breaker
• Complete galvanic and interference-free isolation of the internal processing circuits from the system
measuring, control, and supply circuits through instrument transformers, binary input and output
modules, and DC and AC voltage converters
• Easy operation using an integrated operator and display panel, or using a connected personal computer
with user interface
• Continuous display of measured and metered values at the front
• Storage of min/max measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-term average values
• Storage of fault indications for system incidents (faults in system) with real-time assignment and instan-
taneous values for fault recording
• Continuous monitoring of the measurands as well as the device hardware and software
• Communication with central control and storage devices possible via the device interface
• Battery-buffered, synchronizable clock
Modular Concept
The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and integrity of all functionalities across the entire
device series. Significant features here include:
• Modular system design in hardware, software, and communication
• Functional integration of various applications, such as protection, control, and fault recorder
• The same expansion and communication modules for all devices in the family
• Innovative terminal technology with easy assembly and interchangeability and the highest possible
degree of safety
• The same functions can be configured individually across the entire family of devices
• Ability to upgrade with innovations possible at all times through libraries
• Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new functions
• Multi-layered security mechanisms in all links of the security chain
• Self-monitoring routines for reliable localization and indication of device faults
• Automatic logging of access attempts and security-critical operations on the devices and systems
Redundant Communication
SIPROTEC 5devices maintain full communication redundancy:
• Multiple redundant communication interfaces
• Redundant and independent protocols to control centers possible (such as IEC 60870-5-103 and
IEC 61850, either single or redundant)
• Redundant time synchronization (such as IRIG B, SNTP or IEEE 1588).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
2 Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device 52

2.2 Application Templates/Adaptation of Functional Scope 58
2.3 Function Control 60
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications 66
2.5 Information Lists 68

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device

General
SIPROTEC 5 devices offer great flexibility in the handling of functions. Functions can be individually loaded
into the device. Additionally, it is possible to copy functions within a device or between devices. The necessary
integration of functions in the device is illustrated by the following example.
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions
available on the device!
EXAMPLE
A 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout of the 7SA86 distance protection device serves as an example. The following
protection functions are required for implementation (simplified and reduced):
• Distance protection (21)
• Overcurrent protection, phases (51)
• Circuit-breaker failure protection (50BF), for circuit breakers 1 and 2
• Basic functionality (for example handling of tripping)
Several predefined function packages that are tailored to specific applications exist for each device family. A
predefined functional scope is called an application template. The existing application templates are offered
for selection automatically when you create a new device in DIGSI 5.
EXAMPLE
When creating the device in DIGSI 5, you must select the appropriate application template. In the example,
select the application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout. This
application template covers the required functional scope. Selecting this application template determines the
preconfigured functional scope. This can be changed as necessary (see 2.2 Application Templates/Adaptation
of Functional Scope).
Function Groups (FG)

Functions are arranged in function groups. This simplifies handling of functions (adding and copying). The
function groups are assigned to primary objects, such as a line, transformer, or circuit breaker.
The function groups bundle functions with regard to the following basic tasks:
• Assignment of functions to currentand/or voltage transformers (assignment of functions to the meas-

uring points and thus to the protected object)
• Exchange of information between function groups

When a function is copied into a function group, it automatically works with the measuring points assigned
to the function group. Their output signals are also automatically included in the configured interfaces of the
function group.
EXAMPLE
The selected application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
comprises 3 function groups:
• Protection function group Line 1
• Circuit-breaker function group QA 1
• Circuit-breaker function group QA 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The following figure shows the embedding of functions via function groups.
[dw_eifkfg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-1 Embedding the Functions via Function Groups
Depending on the type of device, there are different types of function groups:
• Protection function groups
• Circuit-breaker function groups

Protection function groups bundle functions that are assigned to one protected object – for example to the
line. Depending on the device type and nature of the protected object, there are different types of protection
function groups (for example line, voltage/current 3-phase, transformer, motor, generator).
Circuit-breaker function groups bundle functions assigned to the local switches – for example, circuit breakers
and disconnectors (such as processing of tripping, circuit-breaker failure protection, automatic reclosing).
The number and type of function groups differ in the respective application templates, depending on the type
of the device and application. You can add, copy, or even delete function groups for a specific application.
You can also adapt the functional scope within a function group according to the use case. For detailed
information on this, refer to the DIGSI 5 Online Help manual.
Interface Between Function Group and Measuring Point

The function groups receive the measurands of the current and voltage transformers from measuring points.
For this, the function groups are connected to 1 or more measuring points.
The number of measuring points and the assignment of function groups to the measuring points are preset by
the selected application template in accordance with the specific application. Therefore, this specifies which
measuring point(s) and the corresponding measurands have to be used by which function within the function
group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
EXAMPLE
The measuring points are assigned to the function groups in the application template in Figure 2-1 as follows:
• The protection function group Line is assigned to the measuring points I-3ph 1, I-3ph 2, and V-3ph 1.
The function group therefore receives the measured values from the current transformers 1 and 2,
as well as from the voltage transformer 1. The currents of measuring points I-3ph 1 and I-3ph 2 are
geometrically added, for a feeder-related processing.
• The circuit-breaker function group QA1 is assigned to the measuring point I-3ph 1 and receives the
measured values from current transformer 1.
• The circuit-breaker function group QA2 is assigned to the measuring point I-3ph 2 and receives the
measured values from current transformer 2.
You can change the assignment on demand, that is, function groups can be assigned to any available
measuring points of the device.
To check or change the assignment of measuring points to the function groups, double-click Function-group
connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
[sc_fgverb, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-2 Project Tree in DIGSI 5 (Detail)
The window for routing of the measuring points opens in the working area (see the following figure, does not
correspond to the example).
[scmscofg-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-3 Connecting Measuring Points and Function Groups

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Interface Between Protection and Circuit-Breaker Function Groups

The protection function group(s) is/are connected to one or several circuit-breaker function groups. This
connection generally determines:
• Which circuit breaker(s) is/are started by the protection functions of the protection FG.
• Starting the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the Circuit-breaker function
group) through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Further information on this is included
later. Figure 2-6 shows how to reach the detail configuration. Figure 2-7 shows the possible assignments in
detail.
These definitions are also set appropriately for the specific application by the selected application template.
You can change this connection, if needed. That is, the protection function groups can be assigned to the
circuit-breaker function groups as desired.
To check or change the assignment of the protection function groups to the Circuit-breaker function groups,
double-click Function group connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree → Name of device.
[sc_fgverb, 1, en_US]
The window for general routing of the function groups opens in the working area.
[scfgcols-220211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-5 Connection of Protection Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Proceed as follows:
• Open the SIPROTEC 5 device folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
• Open the function settings folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
• Open the appropriate protection function group in the DIGSI 5 project tree, for example Line 1.
[sclsinta-190214-01, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Double-click Circuit-breaker interaction (see Figure 2-6).
• The window for the detailed configuration of the interface between the protection function group and
the Circuit-breaker function group(s) opens in the working area.
• In this view, configure the interface via the context menu (right mouse button), see Figure 2-7.
[sc_detail, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-7 Detail Configuration of the Interface Between the Protection Function Group and the Circuit-
Breaker Function Groups
In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
• Which protection functions start the Automatic reclosing function
• Which protection functions block the Automatic reclosing function
• Which protection functions start the Circuit-breaker failure protection function
Functions (FN), Tripping Stages/Function Blocks (FB)

As already illustrated in Figure 2-1, functions are assigned to the protected objects or other primary objects via
function groups.
Functions can be further subdivided. For example, protection functions often consist of multiple protection
stages (for example, the Overcurrent-protection function). Other functions can contain one or more function
blocks.
Each stage, each function block, and each function (without stages/function blocks) can be individually
switched into specific operating modes (for example, switch on/off). This is termed function control and is
explained in 2.3 Function Control.
To adjust the functionality to the specific application, functions, stages, and function blocks can be added,
copied, and deleted (see 2.2 Application Templates/Adaptation of Functional Scope).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
2.2 Application Templates/Adaptation of Functional Scope

Application Template
The application template defines the preconfigured functional scope of the device for a specific use case. A
certain number of application templates is predefined for each device type. DIGSI 5 automatically offers the
application templates for selection when a new device is installed. The available application templates with
the respective functional scope are described in more detail in 4 Applications.
The selection of the application template first predefines which function groups and functions are present in
the device (see also Figure 2-1 in 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device).
You can adjust the functional scope to your specific application.
Adjusting the Functional Scope

Adjust the functional scope based on the selected application template. You can add, copy or delete functions,
tripping stages, function blocks, or complete function groups.
In the DIGSI 5 project tree, this can be done via the following Editors:
• Single-line configuration
• Information routing
• Function settings
Siemens recommends the Single-line configuration Editor to adjust the functional scope.
Complete missing functionalities from the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Then, the default settings of the added
functionality are active. You can copy within a device and between devices as well. Settings and routings are
also copied when you copy functionalities.
NOTE
i If you delete a parameterized function group, function, or stage from the device, all settings and routings
will be lost. The function group, function, or tripping stage can be added again, but then the default
settings are active.
In most cases, the adaptation of the functional scope consists of adding and deleting functions, stages, and
function blocks. As previously described, the functions, tripping stages, and function blocks automatically
connect themselves to the measuring points assigned to the function group.
In few cases, it may be necessary to add a protection or circuit-breaker function group. These newly added
function groups do not contain (protection) functions. You must individually load the (protection) functions
for your specific application. You must also connect the protection or circuit-breaker function group to one
or more measuring points (see 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device). You must connect newly added
protection function groups to a circuit-breaker function group (see 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device).
Functions, tripping stages, function blocks, and function groups can be added up to a certain maximum
number. The maximum number can be found in the respective function and function-group descriptions.
Function Points
Function points (FP) are assigned to specific functions, but not to other functions. You can find more detailed
information in the description of application templates, in 4 Applications.
The device is supplied with the acquired function-point credit. Functions with function points can be loaded
into the device only within the available function-point credit. The functional scope cannot be loaded into the
device if the required number of points of the functional scope is higher than the function-point credit. You
must either delete functions or upgrade the function-point credit of the device.
In addition to function-point classes (10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 to 1400) beginning with firmware version
V09.20, any function-point values in the range from 0 to 5000 are supported as a credit in the device. Thus,
the precise function-point credit required can be loaded into the device by the Function-Point Manager. Alter-
natively, you can order classless devices with 0 points (new option beginning with V09.20) or class-bound
with the required function-point class.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Extending the Function-Point Credit

You can reorder function points if the function-point credit for the device is not enough or if you have ordered
a classless device with 0 points. Proceed as follows:
• Determine the function-point requirement of certain functions, for example, with DIGSI 5 or the
SIPROTEC 5 Configurator.
• Create a signed license file for your device with the SIPROTEC Function-Point Manager at www.siprotec-
function-point-manager.siemens.com or order the license file from your sales partner.
• Once you have ordered the license file using the Function-Point Manager, you can download it from
there directly.
• Once you have ordered the license file from your sales partner, you will receive it by e-mail or to
download.
• Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file onto your device. The procedure is described in the Online Help
of DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
2.3 Function Control

Function control is used for:
• Functions that do not contain stages or function blocks
• Stages within functions
• Function blocks within functions
NOTE
i Simplifying functions and function control will be discussed in the following. The description also applies
to tripping stage control and function block control.
Functions can be switched to different operating modes. You use the parameter Mode to define whether you
want a function to run (on) or not (off). In addition, you can temporarily block a function. For the purpose of
commissioning, you can switch it into test mode (parameter Mode = test).
Devices with the activated IEC 61850 allow you to switch the operating mode by using the logical node
zero LLN0. Depending on the option LDevice Mod controllable1 in DIGSI 5 under Settings > Device
settings, the logical devices (as well as the child logical devices and logical nodes) can be set to one of the
following operating modes:
• On
• Off
• Test
• Relay blocked
• Test/Relay blk.
The following table describes the relationship between the LLN0 and the setting LDevice Mod control-
lable.
LLN0.Mod Setting LDevice Mod controllable

Deactivated Activated
Application/LLN0.Mod Controllable Controllable
Logical device/LLN0.Mod Status only Controllable
Child logical device/LLN0.Mod Status only Controllable
Logical node/LLN0.Mod Status only Controllable
_:51 Mode (controllable) of Controllable Controllable
an individual tripping stage of a
protection function
With the setting LDevice Mod controllable being activated, the behavior of a logical device (as well as
the child logical devices and logical nodes) can be controlled also by the parameter SetMod (SetMod = on:
behavior = on; SetMod = off: behavior = off) of the LLN0.
The function shows the current status – such as an Alarm – via the Health signal.
For more details, refer to the Application Notes SIPROTEC 5 IEC 61850 Mod/Beh.
The following explains the different operating modes and mechanisms and how you set the functions into
these modes. The function control is shown in Figure 2-8. It is standardized for all functions. Therefore, this
control is not discussed further in the individual function descriptions.
1 This parameter is only applicable if IEC 61850 is active.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_steurg, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-8 General Control of a Function
State Control
You can control the state of a function via the parameter Mode, the controllable Mod and the input Superor-
dinate state.
The superordinate state is also influenced by the state of the superordinate logical devices (LD) of the
IEC 61850 structure.
You set the specified operating state of the function via the parameter Mode. You can set the function mode
to on, off and test. The operating principle is described in Table 2-2. You can set the parameter Mode via:
• DIGSI 5
• On-site operation at the device
• Browser-based user interface
• Certain systems control protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103)

You can also set the set point operating state of the function through the controllable Mod. You can set
the function mode to On, Off, Test, Relay blocked and Test/Relay blk.. The operating principle is
described in Table 2-2. You can set the controllable Mod via:
• IEC 61850-8-1
• CFC
The superordinate state can accept the values On, Relay blocked Test and Test/Relay blk..
The state of the function resulting from the parameter Mode, the controllable Mod and the Superordinate
state is shown in the following table. The resulting state of the function results from the combination
of all sources (parameters Mode, Controllable Mod and Superordinate state). For simplicity, the table
represents only the combination of 2 sources.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table 2-1 Resulting State of the Function
Inputs State of the Function

Source A Source N
On On On
On Off Off
On Test Test2
On Relay blocked Relay blocked
On Test/Relay blk. Test/Relay blk.
Test On Test2
Test Off Off
Test Test Test2
Test Relay blocked Test/Relay blk.
Test Test/Relay blk. Test/Relay blk.
Off On Off
Off Off Off
Off Test Off
Off Relay blocked Off
Off Test/Relay blk. Off
Relay blocked On Relay blocked
Relay blocked Off Off
Relay blocked Test Test/Relay blk.
Relay blocked Relay blocked Relay blocked
Relay blocked Test/Relay blk. Test/Relay blk.
Test/Relay blk. On Test/Relay blk.
Test/Relay blk. Off Off
Test/Relay blk. Test Test/Relay blk.
Test/Relay blk. Relay blocked Test/Relay blk.
Test/Relay blk. Test/Relay blk. Test/Relay blk.
NOTE
i The browser-based user interface shows an easy-to-read list of the states of all functions if they deviate
from the state On.
The following table describes the possible states of a function:
2 With the parameter (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test, you define whether functions in test mode can activate relay outputs. If the
parameter (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test and the test mode are activated for the entire device, all functions – including the
relay outputs – are in Test state. If the parameter (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test is not active and the test mode is activated for
the entire device, all functions – except the relay outputs – are in Test state. The relay outputs adopt the Test/Relay blk. state.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table 2-2 Possible States of a Function
State of the Explanation

Function
On The function is activated and operating as defined. The prerequisite is that the health of the
function is OK.
Relay blocked The function is activated and operating as defined. The prerequisite is that the health of the
function is OK. All outputs of indications of this function to relays are blocked.
Note:
Logics outside this function block, for example, superordinate group indications, are not
affected by the blocking. Their output to a relay still leads to an activation.
Off The function is turned off. It does not create any information. The health of a disabled
function always has the value OK.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Function
Test The function is set to test mode. This state supports the commissioning. All outgoing infor-
mation from the function (indications and, if present, measured values) is provided with
a test bit. This test bit significantly influences the further processing of the information,
depending on the target.
For instance, among other things, it is possible to implement the functionality Blocking of
the command relay known from SIPROTEC 4.
When leaving the state Test, functions that process measured values are briefly reset for
∼500 ms and blocked internally. This state is documented by the message Inactive and
other function-specific messages, where appropriate.
Target of the Informa- Processing
tion
Log The indication is labeled as Test in the log.
Binary output An indication routed to binary outputs does not control the
switching contact, unless the behavior of the binary output is
in test state.
Light-emitting diode (LED) An indication routed to the LED triggers the LED (normal
processing)
CFC Here, the behavior depends on the state of the CFC chart.
• CFC chart itself is not in test state:

The CFC chart is not triggered by a status change of infor-
mation with a set test bit. The initial state of the informa-
tion (state before test bit was set) is not processed during
execution of the CFC chart.
• CFC chart itself is in test state:
The CFC chart continues to process the information (indica-
tion or measured value) normally. The CFC outgoing infor-
mation is provided with a test bit. The definitions in this
table apply to its continued processing.
A CFC chart can be set to the test state by switching the entire
device to test mode or by using the CFC block CHART_STATE to
switch a single CFC chart to Test mode.
Protocol Indication and measured value are transmitted with set test bit,
provided that the protocol supports this functionality.
If an object is transmitted as a GOOSE message, the test bit is
set spontaneously and the GOOSE message is transmitted imme-
diately. The receiver of the GOOSE message is automatically noti-
fied of transmitter test mode.
If an object is transmitted via the protection interface, the test
bit is not transmitted. The Test state must also be transmitted
as information for this state to be taken into account in the
application on the receiver side. You must route the Test signal
in the DIGSI 5 project tree → Device → Communication routing.
The test mode of the differential protection is dealt with sepa-
rately in the application.
Test/Relay blk. The function works as described under Test. All output information (indications) of this
function which is routed to a relay is blocked.
All output information from the function (indications and, if available, measured values) is
provided with a test bit. This test bit significantly influences the further processing of the
information, depending on the target.
Logics outside this function block, for example, superordinate group indications, are not
affected by the blocking. If the state of these functions allows the processing of indications

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Function
with a test bit (target function in the state Test or Test/Relay blk.), the output information
routed to a relay continues to the control of the relays.
Health
Health signals if a selected function can perform its designated functionality. If so, the health is OK. In case
the functionality is only possible in a limited way or not at all, due to state or problems within the device, the
health will signal Warning (limited functionality) or Alarm (no functionality).
Internal self-monitoring can cause functions to assume the health state Alarm (see 9 Supervision Functions).
If a function assumes the health state Alarm, it is no longer active (indication not active is generated).
Only a few functions can signal the health state Warning. The health state Warning results from function-
specific supervision and - where it occurs - it is explained in the function description. If a function assumes the
Warning status, it will remain active, that is, the function can continue to work in a conditional manner and
trip in the case of a protection function.
Not Active
The indication Inactive signals that a function is currently not working. The indication Inactive is active
in the following cases:
• Function is disabled
• The function is in the health state Alarm
• Function is blocked by an input signal (see Figure 2-8)
• All protection-function steps are disabled via the Enable protection controllable (state = false). The
indication Protection inactive is active.
• The function is briefly Inactive when exiting the state Test.
Blocking of the Operate Indication, No Fault Recording at Pickup

With the parameter Blk. Op. Ind. & Fault Rec. , you define whether a function works as a protection
or a monitoring function. Further, you use this to determine the type and scope of the logging (see following
table).
Parameter Value Description
No The function works as a protection function. It generates an operate indica-
tion and starts fault recording with pickup. During fault recording, a fault is
created and logged as a fault record in the fault log.
Yes The function works as a supervision function. The logic runs normally,
but without creating the operate indication. The time-out indication is still
generated and can be processed further if necessary. No fault recording
starts with pickup.
NOTE
i With the IEC 61850 structure editor, you can assign the logical nodes (LN) of the stages of a function to
different logical devices (LD).
Always assign all LNs of a function to the same LD.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
Each parameter and each indication has a unique reference number within every SIPROTEC 5 device. The
reference number gives you a clear reference, for example, between an indication entry in the buffer of
the device and the corresponding description in the manual. You can find the reference numbers in this
document, for example, in the application and setting notes, in the logic diagrams, and in the parameter and
information lists.
In order to form unique texts and reference numbers, each function group, function, function block/stage, and
indication or parameter has a text and a number. This means that structured overall texts and numbers are
created.
The structure of the texts and reference numbers follows the already shown in Figure 2-1, hierarchy:
• Function group:Function:Stage/Function Block:Indication
• Function group:Function:Stage/Function Block:Parameter

The colon serves as a structure element to separate the hierarchy levels. Depending on the functionality,
not all hierarchy levels are always available. Function Group and Stage/Function block are optional. Since the
function groups, functions as well as tripping stages/function blocks of the same type can be created multiple
times, a so-called instance number is added to these elements.
EXAMPLE
The structure of the text and reference number is shown in the protection-function group Line as an example
of the parameter Threshold value and the indication Pickup of the 2nd definite-time overcurrent protec-
tion stage of the function Overcurrent protection, phases (see Figure 2-9). Only one function and one
function group exist in the device. The representation of the stage is simplified.
[lo_stuumz, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-9 Stage of the Overcurrent Protection Function, Phases (without Representation of Stage
Control)
The following table shows the texts and numbers of the hierarchy elements concerned:
Name Number of the Type Instance Number
Protection function group Line 2 1
Function Overcurrent 3ph 20 1
Stage Definite-time overcurrent 66 2
protection
Settings Threshold value 3 –
Indication Pickup 55 –
The instance numbers arise as follows:
• Function group: Line 1

1 instance, because only one Line function group exists in the device
• Function: Overcurrent 3ph 1

1 instance, because only one Overcurrent 3ph function exists in the Line function group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Stage: Definite-time overcurrent protection 2

2 instances, because 2 definite-time overcurrent protection stages exist in the Overcurrent 3ph function
(here the 2nd instance as an example)
This results in the following texts and numbers (including the instance numbers):
Parameter: Number
Line 1:Overcurrent 3-ph 1:Definite-time overcurrent 21:201:662:3
protection 2:Threshold value
Indication: Number
Line 1:Overcurrent 3-ph 1:Definite-time overcurrent 21:201:662:55
protection 2:Pickup
The structure is simplified accordingly for parameters and indications with fewer hierarchy levels.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
2.5 Information Lists
2.5 Information Lists

For the function groups, functions, and function blocks, settings and miscellaneous signals are defined that
are shown in the settings and information lists.
The information lists merge the signals. The data type of the information may differ. Possible data types are
ENS, ACD, ACT, SPS and MV.
One type is assigned to the individual data types. The following table shows the possible types:
Type Meaning
I Input – input signal
O Output – output signal
C Controllable – control signal
EXAMPLE:
The following table shows the types for some data types as examples:
Data Type Type
ENS O
ACD O
ACT O
SPS I or O
SPC C
MV O
For further information, refer to 3.8.2 Basic Data Types.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
3 System Functions
3.1 Indications 70
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition 97
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups 99
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes 109
3.5 Fault Recording 126
3.6 Protection Communication 135
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization 218
3.8 User-Defined Objects 226
3.9 Other Functions 233
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 244
3.11 Device Settings 253
3.12 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit 264
3.13 Display-Page Editor 267

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1 Indications
3.1.1 General
During operation, indications deliver information about operational states. These include:
• Measured data
• Power-system data
• Device supervisions
• Device functions
• Function procedures during testing and commissioning of the device

In addition, indications give an overview of important fault events after a failure in the system. All indications
are furnished with a time stamp at the time of their occurrence.
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. The following number of
indications are saved at least in the respective buffer (depending on the scope of the indications):
• Operational log 2000 indications
• Fault log 1000 indications
• Switching-device log 2000 indications
• Ground-fault log 100 indications
• User-defined log 200 indications
• Motor-starting log 200 indications

If the maximum capacity of the user-defined log or of the operational log is exhausted, the newest entries
overwrite the oldest entries. If the maximum capacity of the fault log or of the ground-fault log is reached,
the number of the last fault is output via the signal Fault recording buffer is full. You can route this signal
in the information routing. If indications in the information routing of DIGSI 5 are routed to a log, then they
are also saved. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery buffering
or storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The device
display and navigation using keys allow you to read and analyze the logs on site.
Indications can be output spontaneously via the communication interfaces of the device and through external
request via general interrogation. In DIGSI 5, indications can be tracked spontaneously duringonline mode
in a special indication window. Indications can be made accessible to higher-level control systems through
mapping on various communication protocols.
NOTE
i All indications are assigned to certain device functions. The text of each indication contains the corre-
sponding function designation. You can find explanations of the meaning of indications in the corre-
sponding device functions. However, you can also define indications yourself and group them into your
own function blocks. These can be set by binary inputs or CFC logic.
Reading Indications
To read the indications of your SIPROTEC 5 device you can use the on-site operation panel of the device or a PC
on which you have installed DIGSI 5. The subsequent section describes the general procedure.
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel
Procedure
The menus of the logs begin with a header and 2 numbers at the top right corner of the display. The number
after the slash signifies the number of indications that are available. The number before the slash indicates

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
how many indications have just been selected or shown. The end of the indication list is closed with the entry
***END***.
[sc_oprlog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-1 On-Site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indications)
Menu Path Log

Main menu → Indications → Operational log
Fault log
Switch. device log
Ground-fault log
Setting-history log
User log 1
User log 2
Motor-starting log
Com supervision log
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Log → Device diagnosis
Security log
Communication log
To reach the desired log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
² Navigate inside the log using the navigation keys (top/bottom). You will find the most current indication
at the top of the list. The selected indication is shown with a dark background.
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix or is predefined. Every indication contains date, time, and its state as additional information.
You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
In some logs, you are given the option of deleting the entire indication list by softkey in the footer of the
display. To learn more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
NOTE
i No password entry is necessary to read indications from the device.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5
Procedure
Menu Path (Project) Log

Project → Device → Process data → Log → Operational log
Fault log
Switch. device log
Ground-fault log
Setting-history log
User log 1
User log 2
Motor-starting log
Com supervision log
Online access → Device → Device information → Device-diagnosis log
Logs tab → Security indications
Online access → Device → Test suite → Communica- Communication log
tion module → Hardware3
To read the indications with DIGSI 5 your PC must be connected via the USB user interface of the on-site
operation panel or via an Ethernet interface of the device. You can establish a direct connection to your PC
via the Ethernet interfaces. It is also possible to access all connected SIPROTEC 5 devices via a data network
from your DIGSI 5 PC.
² You reach the desired logs of the SIPROTEC 5 device using the project-tree window. If you have not
created the device within a project, you can also do this via the Online access menu item.
After selecting the desired log, you are shown the last state of the log loaded from the device. To update, it is
necessary to synchronize with the log in the device.
² Synchronize the log. For this purpose, click the appropriate button in the headline of the log (see the
ground-fault indications example in Figure 3-2 a)).
[sc_grflmd, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-2 DIGSI 5 Display of an Indication List (Example of Ground-Fault Log)
3 There may potentially be several communication modules to select from

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
You will find additional information about deleting and saving logs in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the
Logs.
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix or is predefined. You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
Setting Relative Time Reference

² Reference the display of log entries, if needed, to the real time of a specific entry. In this way, you
determine a relative time for all other indications. The real-time stamps of events remain unaffected.
3.1.4 Displaying Indications
Displayed indications are supplemented in DIGSI 5 and on the on-site operation panel with the following
information:
Table 3-1 Overview of Additional Information
Indications in DIGSI 5 Information Device Display Information

Log for operational indications and Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
log for user-defined and switching- Relative time, Function structure,
device indications Entry number, Name,
Function structure, Value
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Log for fault indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Fault number,
Fault number, Value
Entry number,
Function structure,
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Log for motor-starting indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Motor-starting time, Function structure,
Starting current, Name,
Starting voltage, Value
Starting duration

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Indications in DIGSI 5 Information Device Display Information

Log for ground-fault indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Fault number,
Fault number, Value
Entry number,
Function structure,
Name,
Value,
Indication number,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Log for parameter changes Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Function structure,
Entry number, Name,
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Spontaneous indication window Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
(DIGSI 5) Relative time, Fault number,
Indication, Value
Value,
Quality,
Additional Information
Log for safety indications4 Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Indication number, Indication
Indication
Log for device-diagnostic indica- Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
tions4 Indication number, Indication
Indication
Log for communication indications4 Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Indication number, Indication
Indication
Log for communication supervision Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
(GOOSE) Relative time, Function structure,
Entry number, Name,
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
4 Only online access

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Overview of Displayed Quality Attributes

If values are shown on the device display or in DIGSI, the following quality attributes are different for
measured values and metered values.
Table 3-2 Measured Values
IEC 61850 Device Display/ Description

Detail Quality Validity DIGSI
Good Invalid Questionable
– X Value The measured value is valid.
Failure X Fault The device is defective. Contact
Support.
Inaccurate X --- The measured value was not
calculated (for example, the
angle between current and
voltage if 1 of the 2 variables is
missing).
Bad Reference X ≈ Value The measured value can be inac-
curate (for example, outside the
frequency-tracking range).
Out of Range X > Value The measured value exceeds the
measuring range.
Table 3-3 Metered Values
IEC 61850 Device Display/ Description

Validity DIGSI
Good Invalid Questionable
X Value The metered value is invalid.
X --- The metered value was not calcu-
lated.
X ≈ Value The metered value has no refer-
ence.
Indication Columns
The following table shows the meaning of the individual columns in the log:
Indication Column Meaning
Time stamp Time stamp of the indication in device time using the local time
zone of the device or the query time for the motor log
Relative time Relative time to a reference entry
Error number Number of the error that occurred in the device. This number incre-
ments continuously.
Entry number Entry identification of buffer entries. This identification displays the
sequence of buffer entries.
Indication number Number of the indication that occurred in the device. This number
increments continuously and is necessary for an analysis by
Siemens.
Indication Indication text
Function structure Path of the signal with the signal name
Name Signal name
Value Current state of the command. Also pay attention to the value
quality to check whether the value is up to date.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Indication Column Meaning

Quality The quality of the value shows the source of the value and whether
the value is up to date.
Cause Additional information such as the cause and validity
Number DIGSI address of the signal
Motor startup time Time of motor starting
Starting current Current needed by the motor to start up
Starting voltage Voltage needed by the motor to start up
Start duration Time needed by the motor to start up
3.1.5 Logs
3.1.5.1 General
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. Different logs allow
categorization of indication logging based on operating states (for example, operational and fault logs) and
based on fields of application.
Table 3-4 Log Overview
Log Logging
Operational log Operational indications
Fault log Fault indications
Switching-device log Switching operation and circuit-breaker statistics
Ground-fault log Ground-fault indications
Setting-history log Setting changes
User-defined log User-defined indication scope
Security log Access with safety relevance
Device-diagnosis log Error of the device (software, hardware) and the connection circuits
Communication log Status of communication interfaces
Motor-starting log Information on the motor starting
Communication-supervision log Communication supervision (GOOSE)
Log Management
Logs have a ring structure and are automatically managed. If the maximum capacity of a log is exhausted, the
oldest entries disappear before the newest entries. If the maximum capacity of the fault or ground-fault log
is reached, the number of the last fault is output via the signal Fault recording buffer is full. You can route
this signal in the information routing. If indications in the information routing of DIGSI 5 are routed to a log,
then they are also saved. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery
buffering or storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The
device display and the navigation allow you to read and evaluate the logs on site using keys.
Configurability of Logs
The indication capacity to be recorded in configurable logs (for example, ground-fault log) is laid down in
columns of the information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5 specifically defined for this purpose.
Procedure
To reach the information routing of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. Access is only
through the project:
• Open the information routing.

Project → Device → Information routing

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• Select the appropriate routing column.

Destination → Logs → Column Ground-fault log (G)
The routing of the selected indication is done via right click.
• Select one of the options in the list box shown:

– Routed (X)
– Unrouted
[sc_infpuf, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-3 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 (Example: Ground-Fault Log, Column G)
For non-configurable logs (for example, setting-history logs) scope and type of logged indications are
described separately (see following chapter about logs).
3.1.5.2 Operational Log

Operational indications are information that the device generates during operation. This includes information
about:
• State of device functions
• Measured data
• Power-system data
Exceeding or dropping below limiting values is output as an operational indication. Short circuits in the
network are indicated as an operational indication Fault with sequential fault number. For detailed informa-
tion about the recording of system incidents, refer to the description of the fault log (chapter 3.1.5.3 Fault
Log). Up to 2000 indications can be stored in the operational log.
Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5
• To reach the operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Operational log
• The status of the operational log last loaded from the device is shown to you. To update (synchronization
with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indication list (Figure 3-4 a)).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_betrmd, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-4 Reading the Operational Log with DIGSI 5
Reading on the Device via the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the operational log via the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Operational log
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
• Using the Info softkey, you can retrieve auxiliary information on the entry depending on the context.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_operlog1, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-5 On-Site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indications)
Deletability
The operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. This is done usually after testing or commis-
sioning the device. To know more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The indication scope of the operational log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Operational log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library bring with them a predefined set of operational
indications which you can adjust individually at any time.
3.1.5.3 Fault Log

Fault indications are events which arise during a fault. They are logged in the fault log with real-time stamp
and relative-time stamp (reference point: fault occurrence) . Faults are numbered consecutively in rising order.
With fault recording engaged, a corresponding fault record with the same number exists for every fault logged
in the fault log. A maximum of 128 fault logs can be stored. A maximum of 1000 indications can be recorded
in each fault log.
Fault Definition
In general, a fault is started by the raising pickup of a protection function and ends with the cleared pickup
after the trip command.
When using an automatic reclosing function, the complete reclosing cycle (successful or unsuccessful) is
preferably integrated into the fault. If evolving faults appear within reclosing cycles, the entire clearing
process is logged under one fault number even in multiple pickup cycles. Without automatic reclosing function
every pickup is also recorded as its own fault.
User-defined configuration of a fault is also possible.
NOTE
i The definition of the fault is done through settings of the fault recording (see Device manual). Events are
logged in the fault log even when fault recording is switched off.
Apart from the recording of fault indications in the fault log, spontaneous display of fault indications of the
last fault on the device display is also done. You will find details about this in chapter 3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault
Display on the On-Site Operation Panel.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Deletability
The fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. For more details about this, refer to chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Fault logs
operation panel.
[sc_faullg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-6 Reading the Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Configurability
The indication scope of the fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information routing
(matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Fault log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see Device Manual) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is every 180 ms). However, this
can mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the analog channels. The recording
of these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing processes.
3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log

Ground-fault indications are events which arise during a ground fault. They are logged in the ground-fault
log with real-time stamp and relative-time stamp (reference point: ground-fault occurrence). Ground faults
are numbered consecutively in rising order. A maximum of 10 ground-fault logs are stored, and for each
ground-fault log it is guaranteed that at least 100 indications are recorded.
The following functions can start the logging of a ground fault with the raising ground-fault indication:
• Directional sensitive ground-fault protection for deleted and isolated systems (67Ns)
• Sensitive ground current protection with I0 (50Ns/51Ns)
• Intermittent ground-fault protection

The logging ends with the clearing ground-fault indication.
• To reach the ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Ground-fault log

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the ground-fault log is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the
indication list (Figure 3-7 a)).
[sc_grflmd, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-7 Reading the Ground-Fault Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the ground-fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main menu → Indications → Ground-fault indication
operation panel.
[scgfllg1-191012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-8 Reading the Ground-Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter 3.1.6 Saving
and Deleting the Logs.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Configurability
The indication scope of the ground-fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Column Ground-fault log
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
3.1.5.5 User Log

With the user-defined log (up to 2), you have the possibility of individual indication logging parallel to the
operational log. This is helpful, for example, in special monitoring tasks but also in the classification into
different areas of responsibility of the logs. Up to 200 indications can be stored in the user-defined log.
• To reach the user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → User log 1/2
The status of the user-defined log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the Read log entries button in the headline of the
indication list (Figure 3-9 a)).
[sc_application_md, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-9 Reading the User-Defined Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach user-specific logs from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → User-defined log 1/2
operation panel.
• Using the Info softkey, you can retrieve auxiliary information on the entry depending on the context.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_userrlog1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-10 Reading the User-Defined Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. You will find details about this in chapter
Configuration of a User-Defined Log

The indication capacity of a created user-defined log can be configured freely in the associated column of the
information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → U1 or U2
[sc_diu1u2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-11 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 (Example: User-Defined Log U1/2)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.5.6 Setting-History Log

All individual setting changes and the downloaded files of entire parameter sets are recorded in the log for
setting changes. This enables you to determine setting changes made are associated with events logged (for
example faults). On the other hand, it is possible to obtain verification with fault analyses, for example, that
the current status of all settings truly corresponds to their status at the time of the fault. Up to 200 indications
can be stored in the setting-history log.
• To reach the log for setting changes of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Log → Setting changes
The status of the setting-history log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the Read log entries button in the headline of the
indication list (Figure 3-12).
[sc_paramd, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-12 Reading the Setting-History Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the setting-history log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main menu → Indications → Setting changes
operation panel.
[sc_hislog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-13 Reading the Setting-History Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Indication Categories in the Setting-History Log

For this log, there is selected information that is stored in case of successful as well as unsuccessful setting
changes. The following list gives you an overview of this information.
Table 3-5 Overview of Indication Types
Displayed Information Explanation

Selection edit+ Selection of settings group to be edited
Cancelation+ Cancelling of all changes successful
SG activation+ SG activation via command successful
SG activation- SG activation via command failed
Set+ Parameter value was changed
Confirmation+ Confirmation of change successful
Confirmation- Confirmation of change failed
DCF uploaded DCF loaded into device
SG 1 Settings group 1
NOTE
i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
• The log, which is organized as a ring buffer, cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information of the device without loss of information, you
must regularly read this log.
• You cannot route additional indication objects to the setting-history log.
3.1.5.7 Communication Log

The logging of the respective status such as ensuing faults, test and diagnosis operation, and communication
capacity utilizations is done for all hardware-based configured communication interfaces. Up to 500 indica-
tions can be stored in the communication log. Logging occurs separately for each communication port of the
configured communication modules.
• Use the project-tree window to reach the communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Online access → Device → Test suite → Communication module
• Then select:
J:Onboard Ethernet → Communication log
The communication log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
• Before this, refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_compuf, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-14 Reading the Communication Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the communication log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Communication logs
operation panel.
[sc_commlg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-15 Reading the Communication Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Configurability
The communication logs are not freely configurable. The entries are preconfigured.
3.1.5.8 Communication-Supervision Log

The communication-supervision log is used to log communication events.
The following events are currently logged:
• Status for each GOOSE subscription (if configured)

A log is kept of whether the GOOSE subscription has received valid messages or not.
• Aggregated status for all GOOSE subscriptions

The status is TRUE if at least one GOOSE subscription does not receive any valid message.
• Subscriber in simulation mode

GOOSE messages are processed with a simulation flag. The status is TRUE if at least one GOOSE subscrip-
tion processes simulated messages.
• To reach the communication-supervision log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Com supervision log
The status of the communication-supervision log last loaded from the device is shown.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the
indication list.
[sc_comsuperv, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-16 Reading the Communication-Supervision Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the communication-supervision log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site
operation panel.
Main menu → Logs → Com supervision log
operation panel.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_comsupervlg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-17 Reading the Communication-Supervision Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The communication-supervision log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in
chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The communication-supervision log cannot be freely configured. The entries are preconfigured.
3.1.5.9 Security Log

Access to areas of the device with restricted access rights is recorded in the security log. Unsuccessful and
unauthorized access attempts are also recorded. Up to 2048 indications can be stored in the security log.
• To reach the security log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. The device must be in
Online access.
Project → Online access → Device → Device Information → Logs tab → Security logs
The state of the security log last loaded from the device is displayed.
[sc_secmld, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-18 Reading the Security Indications with DIGSI 5

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• To reach the security log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Security log
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[sc_seclog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-19 Reading the Security Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
• This log, which is organized as a ring buffer, cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information of the device without loss of information, you
must regularly read this log.
3.1.5.10 Device-Diagnosis Log

Concrete take-action instructions are logged and displayed in the device-diagnosis log for the following items:
• Required maintenance (for example, battery supervision)
• Identified hardware defects
• Compatibility problems
Up to 500 indications can be stored in the device-diagnosis log. In normal operation of the device, it is
sufficient for diagnostic purposes to follow the entries of the operational log. This specific significance is
assumed by the device-diagnosis log when the device is no longer ready for operation due to hardware defect
or compatibility problems and the fallback system is active.
Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 in Normal Operation
• To reach the device-diagnosis log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Online access → Device → Device information → Logs tab → Device-diagnosis log
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the device is shown to you.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_devdia, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-20 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log with DIGSI 5
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel in Normal Operation
• To reach the diagnosis log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Device diagnosis
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[sc_devdia_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-21 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
i • The device-diagnosis log cannot be deleted!
• The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs
Deleting the logs of the device in the operating state is unnecessary. If storage capacity is no longer sufficient
for new indications, the oldest indications are automatically overwritten with new incoming events. In order
for the memory to contain information about the new faults in the future, for example, after a revision of the
system, a deletion of the log makes sense. Resetting the logs is done separately for the various logs.
NOTE
i Before you delete the content of a log on your SIPROTEC 5 device, save the log with DIGSI 5 on the hard
disk drive of your PC.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
NOTE
i Not all logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. These limitations apply especially to logs with
relevance for security and after-sales (security log, device-diagnosis log, setting-history log).
NOTE
i If you delete any files directly from the fault log or fault record, the error number for new fault records
continues incrementing up to the maximum number 2^32. It does not reset to 0.
If you initialize flash partitioning of the fault log and fault record, the error number for new fault records
resets to 0.
NOTE
i If the device executes an initial start, for example after an update of the device software, the following logs
are automatically deleted:
• Operational log
• Fault log
• Switching-device log
• Ground-fault log
• Setting-history log
• User-defined log
• Motor-starting log
• Communication-supervision log
Back up the deletable logs using DIGSI 5.
NOTE
i If a ground fault is currently active, the ground-fault log cannot be deleted.
Deleting Logs on the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the selected log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel
(example operational log):
Main menu → Logs → Operational log
[sc_oprlog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-22 Deleting the Operational Log on the On-Site Operation Panel

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
operation panel.
• The option to delete the entire log is offered to you in the footer of the display at the bottom left. Use the
softkeys below under the display to activate the command prompts. Confirm the request to Delete.
• After being requested, enter the password and confirm with Enter.
• After being requested, confirm the Deletion of all entries with Ok.
Deleting Logs from the PC with DIGSI 5
• To reach the selected log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window (for example opera-
tional log).
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Operational log
3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5
With DIGSI 5 you have the possibility of displaying all currently transmitted indications of the selected device
in a special indication window.
Procedure
• Call up the spontaneous indications of your selected device in the navigation window under Online
access.
• Click Indications in the path:

Online access → Interface → Device → Indications
• The raising indications appear immediately without you having to wait for a cyclical update or initiate the
manual update.
[sc_spnmld, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-23 Displaying Spontaneous Device Indications in DIGSI 5
3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel
After a fault, the most important data of the last fault can be displayed automatically on the device display
without further operational measures. In SIPROTEC 5 devices, protected objects and even circuit breakers
can be freely created and configured depending on the application (even several instances). In DIGSI 5,
several spontaneous fault displays can be configured, depending on the application, with each individual one
being assigned a particular circuit breaker. These displays remain stored in the device until they are manually
confirmed or released by LED reset.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Configuration of a Spontaneous Fault Display with DIGSI 5
• To reach the Fault-display configuration of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Display pages → Fault-display configuration
• In the main window, all configured circuit breakers are displayed. A list of a maximum of 6 configurable
display lines is offered for each circuit breaker. The activation of a spontaneous fault display occurs for
each circuit breaker by selection via checkmark in the column Display.
• With the parameter (_:139) Fault-display (under Device → Parameter → Device settings) you
determine whether spontaneous fault displays should be shown for each pickup or only pickups with the
trip command.
[sc_konstf, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-24 Configuration of the Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device
For every display line the following display options can be selected:
Table 3-6 Overview of Display Options
Displayed Information Explanation

Pickup indication Display of the first function stage picked up in a fault, as needed with auxiliary
information (phases, ground, direction)
PU time Display of the entire pickup duration of the fault
Operate indication Display of the first function stage triggered in a fault, as needed with auxiliary
information (phases)
Trip time Display of the operate time related to the beginning of the fault (pickup start)
Fault distance Display of the measured fault-location distance
Operate result indication Display of the control or switching device triggered in a fault, with auxiliary
information (phases) where necessary
Acknowledgment of the Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device

After faults, the last occurred fault is always displayed to you. In cases where more than one circuit breaker
is configured, several stored fault displays can be present after faults, with the latest being displayed. These
displays remain stored in the device until manual acknowledgment or release by LED reset.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_stfanz, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-25 Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device
Method 1: Manual acknowledgment
• Press the softkey button Quit in the base bar of the display. The display is irretrievably closed. Repeat this
step until no further spontaneous fault displays appear.
• After completion of all confirmations the last display view is showed before the faults.
Method 2: Acknowledgment via LED reset
• An LED reset (device) causes the reset of all stored LEDs and binary output contacts of the device and also
to the confirmation of all fault displays stored in the display.
You can find more details on the topic of LED reset in chapter 3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5
Device
3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device
In your SIPROTEC 5 device, you can also configure indications as stored. This type of configuration can be
used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it is
acknowledged. Acknowledgment occurs via:
• On-site operation panel
• DIGSI 5
• Binary input
• Protocol of substation automation technology
Configuration of Stored Indications with DIGSI 5

In the Information Routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals, among others, to
LEDs and output contacts.
• To do this, proceed in the project tree to:

Project → Device → Information routing
• Right-click the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the
routing range of the targets.
You are offered the following options:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Table 3-7 Overview of Routing Options
Routing Options LEDs BOs BIs Description

H (active) X The signal is routed as active with voltage.
L (active) X The signal is routed as active without voltage.
V (unlatched) X X The signal is routed as unlatched. Activation and reset of
the output (LED, BO) occurs automatically via the binary-
signal value.
G (latched) X X The binary signal is latched when the output (LED) is acti-
vated. To reset, a targeted confirmation must occur.
NT (conditioned latching) X Fault indications are stored during control of the output
(LED) as a function of the parameter (_:91:139)
Fault-display. In the event of a new fault, the previ-
ously stored states are reset.
• If the fault gets terminated via a trip command from

the assigned circuit breaker, the status of an indica-
tion remains as latched with the setting option with
trip. Without a trip command, the status is displayed
before the fault (if necessary, the status of the last
fault) is restored.
• With the setting option with pickup the current
indication image of a pickup gets stored. The image
comprises all indications of functions that are effective
in the event of tripping on the same circuit breaker,
like the picked up function.
TL (stored only with tripping) X Routing option TL (tripping stored) is only possible for the
switching object circuit breaker.
The output is saved with protection tripping. The contact
remains activated until acknowledged.
Control commands are not affected. A control command
is pending above the parameterized command period until
feedback has been successfully received.
Note:
You can realize the functionality of the Lockout (ANSI 86)
by storing the output relay with the routing option TL.
3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group
You can configure indications of individual functions as "stored" in a function group. This type of configuration
can be used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it
is acknowledged.
The protection and the circuit-breaker function groups contain the block Reset LED FG. The block
Reset LED FG is visible only in the Information routing under the corresponding function group in DIGSI
5. You use the binary input signal >Reset LED to reset the stored LEDs in the respective function group. The
configured outputs (contacts) are not reset.
3.1.11 Application Mode/Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation

Automation Technology
With the controllable Application mode = Test or Test/Relay blk., you switch on or off the test
mode for the entire device.
For further information, refer to 12.2 Enabling/Disabling the Application/Test Mode for the Entire Device.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
If the test mode of the device or of individual functions is switched on, the SIPROTEC 5 device marks
indications sent to substation automation technology station control system with an additional test bit. This
test bit makes it possible to determine that an indication was set during a test.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition

Basic Principle
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with a powerful measured-value acquisition function. In addition to a
high sampling frequency, they have a high measurand resolution. This ensures a high degree of measuring
accuracy across a wide dynamic range. The 24-bit sigma/delta analog-digital converter represents the core of
measured-value acquisition. In addition, the oversampling function supports the high measurand resolution.
Depending on the requirements of the individual method of measurement, the sampling frequency is reduced
(Downsampling).
In digital systems, deviations from the rated frequency lead to additional errors. In order to avoid this, 2
algorithm-dependent processes are used in all SIPROTEC 5 devices:
• Sampling-frequency tracking:
The analog input channels are scanned for valid signals in cycles. The current power frequency is deter-
mined and the required sampling frequency is defined by using a resampling algorithm. The tracking is
effective in the frequency range between 10 Hz and 90 Hz.
• Fixed sampling frequency – correction of the filter coefficients:

This method operates in a limited frequency range (frated +/- 5 Hz). The power frequency is determined
and, depending on the degree of the frequency deviation, the filter coefficients are corrected.
The following figure shows the basics of dealing with sampled values (SAV) in the measured-value acquisition
chain. Figure 3-26 shows to whom the various sampling frequencies are made available. In order to limit
the bandwidth of the input signals, a low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter to maintain the sampling theorem)
is installed downstream. After sampling, the current input channels are adjusted. Meaning that magnitude,
phase, and transformer time constant are corrected. The compensation is designed to ensure that the current
transformer terminal blocks can be exchanged randomly between the devices.
[dw_meserf, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-26 Measured-Value Acquisition Chain
fa Sampling frequency
SMV Sampled measured value
CMV Conventional measured value
LPIT Low-power instrument transformer
The internal sampling frequency of the SIPROTEC 5 devices is fixed at 16 kHz (sampling rate: 320 samplings
per 50 Hz cycle). All current and voltage inputs are sampled. If magnitude, phase, and transformer time

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
constant are corrected, the sampling frequency is reduced to 8 kHz (160 samplings per 50-Hz cycle). This is
the basic sampling frequency to which various processes, such as fault recording, RMS measured values, refer.
For the RMS measurement, the measured-value window is adjusted on the basis of the power frequency.
For numerous measurement and protection applications , 20 samplings per cycle are sufficient (if frated =
50 Hz): sampling every 1 ms, at frated = 60 Hz: sampling every 0.833 ms). This sampling rate is an adequate
compromise between accuracy and the parallel processing of the functions (multi-functionality).
The 20 samplings per cycle will be made available to the algorithms processed in the function groups in
2 variants:
• Fixed (not resampled)
• Resampled (frequency range from 10 Hz to 90 Hz)

Depending on the algorithms (see function descriptions), the respective data flow is considered. A higher
sampling frequency is used for selected methods of measurement. You can find detailed information in the
corresponding function description.
NOTE
i The Power-system data (starting in 6.1 Power-System Data) contain the measuring points for current and
voltage. Each measuring point has its own parameters.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
3.3.1 Overview
Starting from platform version V07.80, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups in
SIPROTEC 5 devices. The device operates with a maximum of 6 Frequency tracking groups.
The chapter 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking provides the necessary hints on the operating principle of
sampling-frequency tracking and its application.
The chapter 3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups describes the principle and application of frequency tracking
groups.
3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with powerful sampling-frequency tracking as explained in 3.2 Measured-
Value Acquisition . This ensures high measuring accuracy over a wide frequency operating range (10 Hz to
90 Hz).
To determine the actual sampling frequency, the voltage and current measuring points are checked for valid
input signals, the actual power frequency is determined and the tracking frequency (sampling frequency =
20 ⋅ tracking frequency) is adapted. The method is implemented in such a way that the number of samplings
per actual power frequency or the frequency of the system is always constant. The number of samplings is 20
per cycle, as described in 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition .
During engineering, you set the parameters specifying which measuring points are used for frequency
tracking. All 3-phase voltage and current measuring points and 1-phase voltage and current measuring points
are allowed.
NOTE
i Using a measuring point for sampling-frequency tracking requires this measuring point to be suitable
for reliably determining the power frequency. This is the case, as long as the measuring point has been
connected to the power system and the rated voltages and currents are measured. If the measured values
for the rated voltages and currents are unavailable, sampling-frequency tracking must be switched off for
this measuring point.
Examples of these kind of conditions are as follows:
• 1-phase measuring points: Measuring points that measure zero-sequence voltages or zero-sequence
currents must not be used for frequency tracking.
• 3-phase measuring points: Measuring points that measure unbalanced currents and voltages for a
capacitor bank must not be used for frequency tracking.
The following figure shows where you set the parameters for the corresponding measuring point and activate
sampling-frequency tracking in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Settings → Power-system data.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_MP_Powersys trackfreq, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-27 Using the Measuring Point to Determine the Sampling Frequency
If the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point is used to determine the actual tracking
frequency. If the parameter Tracking is set to active for several measuring points, the ID of the measuring
point determines the sequence in which these are checked for valid input signals. The algorithm starts with
the lowest ID number, as follows:
• First, the 3-phase measuring points are scanned. If no valid voltage is found, the selected current
measuring points are next. In this case, the following sequence applies:
3-phase voltage measuring point → 3-phase current measuring point → 1-phase voltage measuring point
→ 1-phase current measuring point
If a trigger signal comes from a current measuring point, the voltage measuring points are still continu-
ously scanned for valid voltages and switched immediately if a voltage is found.
• If the true RMS value is greater than 2.5 % of the set secondary device rated value, a measuring point is
valid. For example, this is 2.5 V at 100 V, 25 mA at 1 A or 125 mA at 5 A.
• A 3-phase measuring point is scanned in the sequence of phase A → phase B → phase C.

In the case of the voltage measuring points, the phase-to-phase voltage VAB, VBC, and VCA is always used
for evaluation. The phase-to-phase voltage is calculated in the event of a phase-to-ground connection.
• The tracking frequency is tracked using different interval steps. If the tracking frequency deviates only
slightly from the measured frequency, the frequency is tracked using small steps of 0.010 Hz. In the case
of greater deviations, the interval is 1 Hz. To react faster in the event of larger deviations, for example
in switchover conditions, tracking occurs in 5-Hz steps. When switching on measurands immediately the
measured tracking frequency is used.
• If no tracking frequency can be determined, the appropriate rated frequency of the electrical power
system is used as the tracking frequency. This case occurs before the measurands are switched on, after
they are switched off or when the device is powered on. If the measurands are switched on, the starting
frequency is the set power frequency, for example 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Since rated-frequency input variables
can be assumed for most applications, the measuring algorithms start with the fixed sampling frequency,
for example, 1 kHz for 50 Hz and 1.2 kHz for 60 Hz.
Figure 3-28 shows the behavior of sampling-frequency tracking across the frequency band and at the
frequency limits.
The x-axis shows the actual power frequency (fsys) and the y-axis shows the set tracking frequency (ftrack).
Between 10 Hz and 90 Hz, the relationship is linear. If the actual power frequency is less than 10 Hz, the
tracking frequency is kept at 10 Hz. In this case, sampling occurs at 20 ⋅ 10 Hz = 200 Hz. If the power
frequency is greater than 90 Hz, the tracking frequency is kept constant at 90 Hz.
If the frequency is outside the frequency operating range (10 Hz to 90 Hz), frequency tracking generates
the indication Freq. out of range. The individual protection functions evaluate this indication. If an
overfunction can occur, the protection functions are blocked internally to avoid a failure.
You can find more detailed information on the behavior of the protection functions in 13 Technical Data.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[dw_working-area_sampling-frequency-tracking, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-28 Operating Range of Sampling-Frequency Tracking
Siemens recommends routing the calculated power frequency (fsys) and the determined tracking frequency
(ftrack) as a measured value trace in the fault record. In this way, you can document the behavior of the device
in transient conditions. The following figure shows that you find the both measured values in the information
routing under Power-system data → General:
[sc_rout meas freq, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-29 Routing of the Frequency Measured Values
EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-30 shows the behavior of sampling-frequency tracking using an example.
The voltage was reduced linearly from 57.7 V (100 V phase-to-phase) to 35 V (60.6 V phase-to-phase) and, at
the same time, the frequency was reduced from 50 Hz to 35 Hz, for example motor coasting down. Then, an
abrupt switch to the rated values of 57.7 V at 50 Hz was made.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
The upper trace shows the power-system voltage on 1 phase (A) as an example. The center trace is the
calculated power frequency and the lower trace is the determined tracking frequency. If you multiply the
determined tracking frequency of the lower trace by 20, you can determine the sampling frequency.
[sc_example freqtrack, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-30 Example of Frequency Tracking and Reaction to a Step Change in the Input Variable
3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups
In the SIPROTEC 5 devices before platform version V07.80, sampling-frequency tracking applies to the entire
device. This means that the 1st valid measuring point, for example, a 3-phase voltage measuring point,
determines the selected tracking frequency based on the detected frequency.
If all measuring points in a system are galvanically coupled to each other, the power frequency is identical for
all measuring points.
There are problems with electrical power system states or system states where galvanic separation is possible
and measuring points of the separated system parts are connected to the SIPROTEC 5 device. For these
problematic electrical power system states or system states, different frequencies are possible for a limited
time. Depending on the measuring point set for tracking, the device selects which frequency to use. As a
result, measuring errors and a failure of protection functions are possible.
Starting with platform version V7.80, you can assign the measuring points to different frequency tracking
groups. This ensures high flexibility and high measuring accuracy for a variety of applications. In this case,
every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. In the case of galvanic separation
and different system frequencies, different sampling frequencies arise as a result. This occurs temporarily in
systems with rotating machines, for example. A way to achieve galvanic separation is to use an open circuit
breaker.
NOTE
i In the measured-value acquisition chain in Figure 3-26 in the chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ,
only the data stream designated as tracked is adapted. The data stream represented as fixed derives its
sampling frequency exclusively from the set rated frequency. In this case, the constant sampling frequency
of 1 kHz at frated = 50 Hz and 1.2 kHz at frated = 60 Hz is used. This applies to every measuring point,
regardless of the frequency tracking group to which it is assigned.
EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-31 shows an example for the necessity of frequency tracking groups. The generator circuit breaker
(GCB) and the high-voltage circuit breaker (HVCB) are the galvanic disconnection points. In this way, different
switching states are possible. The device uses current measuring points (CTs 1 to 6) and voltage measuring
points (VTs 1 to 4) located on different sides of the circuit breakers. In addition, it is assumed that the
generator is started using a starting-frequency converter. In a gas-turbine application, the starting-frequency
converter accelerates the generator from 0 Hz to about 70 % of the rated speed (roughly 35 Hz at
frated = 50 Hz). After this, the gas turbine is fired up and brings the generator to the rated speed. Then,
the voltage is built up to the rated voltage and synchronized. During this start-up operation, the GCB is open
and the HVCB is closed. As a result, the measuring points VT 1, CTs 1, 2, 4 have a frequency that deviates from

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
the other measuring points during start-up operation. The other measuring points are usually at the rated
frequency due of the connection to the power system.
Furthermore, protection tripping can result in a switching state where the HVCB is open and the GCB remains
closed. In this case, the generator and a generator transformer can assume a frequency that deviates from
the power frequency. In the event of load shedding, the generator accelerates before the speed controller
intervenes. This is particularly pronounced in hydro generators.
An evaluation of the individual scenarios shows that different frequencies can occur at the different meas-
uring points for a limited time. For this reason, 3 frequency tracking groups are necessary in this example.
These groups are marked with different colors in the following figure.
NOTE
i The measuring point (CT 4) marked with 1) in the following figure will be discussed later.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[dw_example_frequency-tracking-groups, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-31 Example of the Necessity of Frequency Tracking Groups
To strike a balance between application flexibility and the required computing power, the number of addi-
tional frequency tracking groups was limited to 5. Together with the basic functionality, a total of 6 frequency
tracking groups are possible.
If you wish to use frequency tracking groups, use the following engineering recommendations. Before starting
work, make sure you know how many frequency tracking groups are needed. Select only the required
number.
If you start with an application template that you have expanded by the necessary measuring points, you must
load the necessary number of additional frequency tracking groups from the Global DIGSI 5 Library into the
Power system folder.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_loading freq group, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-32 Loading the Required Frequency Tracking Groups
If you instantiate an additional frequency tracking group, the system automatically assigns the ID of the
frequency tracking group in DIGSI using consecutive numbers. As the device already has 1 frequency tracking
group, the ID numbering for additional frequency tracking groups starts with 2.
[sc_ID freqgroup, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-33 ID of the Frequency Tracking Group
NOTE
i If you have activated several frequency tracking groups during engineering and you then delete a
frequency tracking group again later, the assigned ID is also deleted. All other frequency tracking groups
retain their assigned IDs.
Try to avoid discontinuities by deleting the frequency tracking group with the highest ID if possible.
You will find the frequency measured values and the indications of the corresponding frequency tracking
group in the routing matrix (see Figure 3-29).
Assign the measuring points to the frequency tracking groups in the Function-group connections Editor.
As soon as you have instantiated another frequency tracking group from the Global DIGSI 5 Library, the
additional column Frequency tracking group ID appears in the routing matrix. In this column, you select the
number of the corresponding frequency tracking group for each measuring point using the list box.
[sc_routing MP to freqgroup, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-34 Assignment of the Measuring Point to the Frequency Tracking Group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
NOTE
i Keep the following in mind when assigning the measuring points to the frequency tracking groups:
• The function groups (FGs) can operate only with 1 frequency tracking group.
• This applies also to interconnections between the function groups as for the Transformer differential
protection.
In the case of the Transformer differential protection, the Transformer side FG is interconnected
with the Transformer FG and all Transformer side FGs of one transformer must operate in the same
frequency tracking group.
The same applies when the neutral-point current is measured using a 1-phase function group.
There are also exceptions such as the FG Circuit breaker (see chapter 5.7 Function-Group Type Circuit
Breaker). The voltage measured values are processed by the Synchronization function which operates
only with a fixed sampling frequency. In this way, voltage measuring points from different frequency
tracking groups can be connected.
The cited rules are checked using scripts and infractions reported during engineering.
Now, you can select the measuring points to be used to determine the tracking frequency for the appropriate
frequency tracking group as explained in chapter 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking. If possible, use at least
1 voltage measuring point and 1 current measuring point. Give preference to 3-phase measuring points.
When the tracking frequency has been determined, all measuring points of the frequency tracking group are
set to this frequency and the tracked sampling frequency is adapted.
NOTE
i As described in the chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition , the measured-value current with fixed
sampling frequency is unaffected by this.
To avoid errors, the ID of the measuring point and the ID of the assigned frequency tracking group are
displayed in the setting sheet of the measuring points in DIGSI 5 (see Figure 3-35).
[sc_MP additional setting freqgroup, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-35 Example: Settings of the 3-Phase Current Measuring Point; Additional Display of the ID for the
Frequency Tracking Group
In addition, the ID of the frequency tracking group is displayed in the function group in the General block (see
Figure 3-36). Here, you can also check the consistency.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_MP additional setting FG, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-36 Display of the ID for the Frequency Tracking Group in the Block General of the Function Group
A special feature is explained using Figure 3-31 as an example.

The measuring point marked in Figure 3-31 with 1) uses a current transformer that is located on the generator
side but is used by the transformer differential protection. As a result, this current transformer must be
assigned to the frequency tracking group 2 in accordance with the rules above. Since the generator is
started using a starting-frequency converter in the application example, the frequency at this measuring point
deviates from the frequency at the other measuring points of group 2. For this reason, the measuring point
with CT 4 must not be used to determine the tracking frequency.
Depending on the application, the current of the CT 4 acts as a disturbance variable when forming the
Kirchhoff's current law. As a rule, this current is not particularly strong (< 15 % of Irated) so that the disturbance
effect remains small. If required, you must set the differential protection to be less sensitive. Decide this for
the specific application.
The following table shows the possible assignment of measuring points used to determine the tracked
sampling frequency for the example. For this purpose, the parameter Tracking = active in the corre-
sponding measuring point:
Frequency Tracking 1 2 3
Group
Recommended measuring VT 4 VT 3 VT 1
points for tracking VT 2 CT 1
CT 5
3.3.4 Frequency Tracking Groups – Interpretation of Measured Values
If you use frequency tracking groups, you must keep in mind special features when interpreting the measured
values. The measuring points of a frequency tracking group are to be treated as decoupled for measurement
purposes. This means that the complex measured values of a single function group, like phasor measured
values, always match. Since phase A of the 1st measuring point is always assumed to be the reference value
when representing the measured value, the phasor measured values cannot be compared between frequency
tracking groups. This also applies if all measuring points are galvanically connected to one another.
NOTE
i When selecting the reference variable, a voltage measuring point always takes precedence over a current
measuring point. If the frequency tracking group does not contain a voltage measuring point, the 1st
current measuring point is used.
EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-37 shows an example of the phasor representation of the analog measured values of the measuring
points.
The phasor representation of the analog measured values of the measuring points can be found in the DIGSI 5
project tree under Online access → Device → Test suite → Analog inputs.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Each of the 2 frequency tracking groups contains one 3-phase voltage measuring point V-3ph and one
3-phase current measuring point I-3ph.
Frequency tracking group 1 contains the measuring points V-3ph 1 and I-3ph 1, frequency tracking group 2
contains the measuring points V-3ph 2 and I-3ph 2. The frequencies between the frequency tracking groups
differ by 0.5 Hz. A phase displacement of -30° is set between the voltage and the current.
In Figure 3-37, you can see that the fundamental RMS measured values are identical. The phasor measured
angles are shown as decoupled (see Phase angle). In this case, VA is the reference value in the corresponding
frequency tracking group. With decoupled sampling-frequency tracking, the measurement of the measurands
is exact, even with a different system frequency.
[sc_measured_val_DIGSI, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-37 DIGSI Online Mode: Phasor Representation of the Measuring Points with 2 Frequency Tracking
Groups and a Different Frequency
If the circuit breaker in a system is closed, the measuring points are galvanically connected to one another. If
you want to compare the phasor variables of all measuring points to one another when using frequency
tracking groups, Siemens recommends starting a fault record. Evaluate the fault record using SIGRA in
the Phasor representation mode. The comparison is possible here because sampled values that are not
frequency-tracked are used in the fault record. If the frequency deviates from the rated frequency, the
measured values differ slightly.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
3.4.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard defines certain quality attributes for data objects (DO), the so-called Quality. The
SIPROTEC 5 system automatically processes some of these quality attributes. In order to handle different
applications, you can influence certain quality attributes and also the values of the data objects depending on
these quality attributes. This is how you can ensure the necessary functionality.
The following figure describes roughly the general data flow within a SIPROTEC 5 device. The following figure
also shows at which points the quality can be influenced. The building blocks presented in the figure are
described in more detail in the following.
[lo_quali1, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-38 Data Flow within a SIPROTEC 5 Device
Supported Quality Attributes

The following quality attributes are automatically processed within the SIPROTEC 5 system.
• Validity using the values good or invalid

The Validity quality attribute shows if an object transferred via a GOOSE message is received (valid,
invalid) or not received (invalid). The invalid state can be suppressed in the receiver device by also
setting a substitute value for the object that is not received (see 3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the
User for Received GOOSE Values). The substitute value is forwarded to the functions.
If the device receives one of these values, it is replaced by the invalid value and thus processed further
as invalid.
If one of the detailed quality attributes (detailQual) has the value TRUE, then Validity is set to the
invalid value, unless this was already done at the transmitter end.
• Test using the values TRUE, FALSE
The Test quality attribute indicates to the receiver device that the object received via a GOOSE message
was created under test conditions and not operating conditions.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
• OperatorBlocked using the values TRUE, FALSE

The OperatorBlocked quality attribute indicates whether an object transferred via GOOSE message
originates from a device that is in a functional logoff state. When the sending device is switched
off, the object is no longer being received and assumes the invalid state. However, since the Opera-
torBlocked quality was previously identified on the receiver device, the object can be treated differently
at the receiving end (see 3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values). At
the receiving end, the object may be treated like a dropped signal.
• Source using the values process, substituted

The Source quality attribute indicates whether the object was updated in the sending device.
You can find more detailed information in 3.9.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating.
Influencing Quality by the Operating Modes

In addition to the normal operation, the device also supports further operating modes that influence quality:
• Test mode of the device

You can switch the entire device to test mode. In this case, all data objects generated in the device (state
values and measured values) receive the quality attribute Test = TRUE.
The CFC charts are also in test mode and all output data receive the quality attribute Test =TRUE.
• Test mode for individual functions, stages, or function blocks

You can switch individual functions, stages, or function blocks into test mode. In this case, all data
objects generated by the function, stage, or function block (state values and measured values) receive
the quality attribute Test = True.
• Functional logoff of the device

If you take the device out of operation and want to isolate it from the supply voltage, you can function-
ally log off the device ahead of time. Once you functionally log off the device, all data objects generated
in the device (state values and measured values) receive the quality attribute OperatorBlocked =TRUE.
This also applies to the output from CFC charts.
If objects are transferred via a GOOSE message, the receiver devices can assess the quality. The receiver
device detects a functional logoff of the transmitting device. After shutting down the sending device,
the receiver device identifies that the sending device has been logged off operationally and did not
fail. Now the receiving objects can automatically be set to defined states (see chapter 3.4.2 Quality
Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values).
• Switching off individual functions, stages, or function blocks

You can switch off individual functions, stages, or function blocks. In this case, all data objects generated
by the function, stage, or function block (state values or measured values) receive the device-internal
quality attribute Off. The states of the inputs and measured values remain unchanged in this case; input
changes are not processed. As the quality attribute Off is not provided for in communication protocol
IEC 61850, the data objects are transferred with the quality attribute Invalid.
Influencing the Quality through Hardware Supervision

Supervision functions monitor the device hardware (see 9.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware). If the
supervision functions identify failures in the data acquisition of the device, then all recorded data will receive
the quality attribute Validity = invalid.
Influencing the Quality through Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breakers

If tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker is detected (see 9.3.4 Voltage-Transformer Circuit
Breaker), all recorded data will receive the quality attribute Validity = invalid.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Influencing the Quality by the User

You can influence the processing of data and their quality differently. In DIGSI 5, this is possible at the
following 3 locations:
• In the Information routing editor for external signals from GOOSE connections
• In the CFC chart
• In the Information routing editor for binary input signals of device-internal functions
The following chapters describe in more detail the options regarding this influence as well as the automatic
quality processing.
If a GOOSE connection is the data source of a binary input signal of a device-internal function, you can
influence processing of the quality at 2 locations: at the GOOSE connection and at the input signal of
the function. This is based on the following: A GOOSE date can be distributed within the receiving device
to several functions. The GOOSE connection setting (influence) affects all functions. However, if different
functions require customized settings, these are then set directly at the binary input signal of the function.
3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values
The properties of quality processing have changed with the introduction of GOOSE Later Binding. You can
find information about the former quality processing in Previous Quality Processing/Affected by the User for
Received GOOSE Values, Page 115.
In the Information Routing Editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The
following figure shows the possible influence using the example of a DPC data type. All setting options are
effective for the device receiving the data.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
• Select either the desired signal in the External Signals group or the signal of a function activated via the
GOOSE column.
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_LB_GOOSE_2, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-39 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object
Depending on the selected data type of the object, various selection options are offered to you for the Safe
state item in the Common settings section. At this point, you select the manually updated values that allow
a safe operating state as soon as the data access via the communication path is disturbed.
• Select the property for the selected data object.

You can also set the Advanced quality attributes of the data object for GOOSE Later Binding.
The following figure shows the advanced quality attributes using the example of a DPC data type.
• Open the Properties window and select the Advanced quality attributes sheet.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Figure 3-40 Advanced Quality Attributes for GOOSE Later Binding
With the following advanced quality attributes, you can filter the transmitted GOOSE indications and check
and set their quality. The values that have been adapted, if necessary, are forwarded to the receiver.
For the tests, you can select from the following setting options depending on the data type.
Table 3-8 Value Definitions
Setting Value Description

Apply safe state value The value configured in the Safe state is forwarded as valid to the
application as soon as communication disturbance occurs.
Keep value The disturbed quality attribute is overwritten with good and the received
value is forwarded as valid to the application. If no value was received,
the output value is assumed being in safe state.
Keep last valid value If an invalid quality attribute is received, the last valid value is forwarded
to the application. If no value has yet been received, the output value is
assumed being in safe state.
Set value to "false" Applies only to Boolean communication objects. Every invalid quality
attribute causes the valid value false to be forwarded to the applica-
tion.
Set value to "true" Applies only to Boolean communication objects. Every invalid quality
attribute causes the valid value true to be forwarded to the application.
These settings of the Advanced quality attributes apply to the advanced quality attributes listed below. The
selection can vary depending on the data type.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Figure 3-41 Value Definition of a Data Object of the SPS Type
You can also forward the quality attributes unchanged. To do this, you must mark the Keep flag check box.
NOTE
i By default, the Keep flag checkbox is disabled when the signal is routed to the LED or the binary output.
Functional Logoff by Operator Blocked

You have set the Operation mode to Device logoff = true in the transmitting device. As a result,
every indication issued from the functions and subject to Device logoff is transmitted with the quality
information operator blocked and Validity = good. The receiver recognizes this for this indication and
reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8). A different quality processing can take place only once you have
set the Operation mode to Device logoff = false in the transmitting device.
Communication Outage
There is communication disturbance (time allowed to live) between the transmitter and the receiver indicated
by the transmitter. The indication is set in accordance with the settings (Table 3-8).
Invalidity
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = invalid. The receiver
recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8).
Questionable
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = questionable. The
receiver recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8).
Test Mismatch
The transmitting device or the function in the transmitting device that issues this indication is in test mode. As
a result, the indication is transmitted with the quality information test. The receiving function block recog-
nizes this for this indication and reacts, depending on its own test-mode state (specified in IEC 61850-7-4
Annex A), according to the settings (Table 3-8).
NOTE
i Follow the sequence of tests. First, the Functional logoff by operator blocked is tested. Then comes
Communication outage and so on. If a case is recognized as active, the test chain is canceled with the
configured setting for the active case.
In the case of Invalidity, the tests are first performed for Functional logoff by operator blocked (not
applicable) and then for Communication outage (not applicable) and canceled with the configured action for
Invalidity.
If an indication is routed into the log, manual updating of a value is also logged based on the conditions listed
above and on the reason for the manual update. Manually updating a value based on the conditions listed

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
above causes a change in the Health Warning function block, inherited up to Device health (specified
in IEC 61850-7-4).
Keep Flag
The quality attributes and values indicated by the transmitter are accepted without change. Quality processing
must be performed by the user via a logic diagram. The outputs of the logic diagram following the user-
specific quality processing can be connected to the function-block inputs as before.
Data Substitute Values

Depending on the data type, different data substitute values must be used.
Data Type Possible Data Substitute Values
ACD, ACT general 0 (False), 1 (True)
The directional information is manually updated with unknown
if the option Apply safe state value, Set value to
"false", and Set value to "true" are selected; or main-
tain the received value with the options Keep value or Keep
last valid value selected.
PhsA, phsB, phsC, and neut are manually updated with the same
value just like how the general value is set.)
BAC, APC mxVal Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
BCR actVal –263 to 263 – 1
CMV mag, ang Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
DPC, DPS stVal 0, 1, 2, 3 (intermediate-state, off, on, bad-state)
INC stVal –2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647
INS stVal –2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647
ISC, BSC valWTr.posVal –64 to 64
valWTr.transInd 0 (False), 1 (True)
SPC, SPS stVal 0 (False), 1 (True)
MV mag Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
For controllable types, the following substitute values apply in addition to the settable state values or meas-
ured values:
ctlNum = 0
stSeld = False
origin.orIdent = Substituted by quality processing
origin.orCat = AUTOMATIC_BAY
Previous Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values

In the Information Routing editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The
following figure shows the possible influence using the example of a DPC data type.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
• Select the desired signal in the External Signals group.
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_GOOSE values, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-42 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object
The setting options work for the device receiving the data.
Quality Attribute: Validity
The validity values reserved and questionable are replaced at the receiving end by the invalid value.
• Check box is not set. The validity attribute and data value are forwarded
without change.
• Check box is set and receipt of Validity = good
Check box is set and receipt of Validity = invalid • The validity attribute is set to good and
is set (also applies to values reserved and ques- processed further using this value.
tionable). • The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked (opBlk)

• Check box is not set. The OperatorBlocked attribute and data value are
forwarded without change.
• Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked
= FALSE
Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked = • The OperatorBlocked attribute is set to FALSE
TRUE and processed further using this value.
• The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Interaction of the Quality Attribute Validity and OperatorBlocked

OperatorBlocked check box is set and receipt of Oper- Regardless of whether the validity check box is set
atorBlocked = TRUE or not, and regardless of the current validity, the
validity attribute is set to good and the substitute
value of the OperatorBlocked data object is set. That
is, the OperatorBlocked settings overwrite the Validity
settings.
OperatorBlocked check box is not set and receipt of The OperatorBlocked attribute remains set and is
OperatorBlocked = TRUE forwarded.
If the Validity check box is set and the receipt of
validity = invalid is set, the respective data object
substitute value is used.
For continued signal processing and influence, it must
be taken into account that in this configuration the
data object substitute value for validity = invalid is
set, but the quality attribute OperatorBlocked is not
yet set.
3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
In DIGSI 5, you can control the quality processing of CFC charts. In the project tree, you can find the CFC
building block (see the following figure) under Device name →, Settings → Device settings in the editor:
[sc_quali_cfc, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-43 Influencing CFC Quality Handling in DIGSI 5
With the CFC chart quality handling parameter, you control whether you want to influence the
quality of CFC charts in a Manual or Automatic (default setting) manner.
If you select Manual, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is always valid regardless of the quality of
individual signals (Validity = good)!
Only the Test quality attribute of the CFC chart is processed. If the device is in test mode or the input TEST of
the CHART_STATE CFC building block is set, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is set to Test.
If you select Automatic, the quality processing of the CFC charts is influenced as follows:
In the case of CFC charts, a distinction has to be made between the general quality processing and certain CFC
building blocks that are specifically designed for quality processing.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
General Processing
Most of the CFC building blocks do not have an explicit quality processing. For these building blocks, the
following general mechanisms shall apply.
If one invalid signal is received in the case of CFC input data, then all CFC output data will also be
set to invalid if they originate from building blocks without explicit quality processing. In other words,
the quality is not processed sequentially from building block to building block but the output data are set
globally.
This does not apply to CFC output data that originate from building blocks with explicit quality processing
(see next section).
Quality Attribute: Test

CFC chart is in normal state. CFC input data with the Test = TRUE attribute are ignored. When
the CFC chart is executed, then the data value that was used
before the Test = TRUE attribute is used. The quality of this old
value is also processed.
This means that on the output side, the attribute Test = FALSE.
CFC chart is in Test1) state. If the CFC chart is executed, then the attribute Test = TRUE is
set for all data leaving the CFC chart. This does not depend on
whether the data are formed via CFC building blocks with or
without quality processing.
1)ACFC chart can be switched to the test state by switching the entire device to test mode or the input TEST of
the CFC building block CHART_STATE is set.
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked
CFC chart is in normal state. In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
is ignored.
CFC chart is in functionally logged off1) In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
state . is ignored. All CFC output data are labeled as functionally logged
off.
1)This state only occurs if the device is functionally logged off. In this case, the quality attributes of all CFC
outputs are labeled as functionally logged off.
Quality Processing Building Blocks (Condition Processing)

The first 3 building blocks (x_SPS) process the quality automatically according to the stated logic. The other
building blocks are used to isolate the quality from a data object and add them back after separate logical
processing.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Building Blocks Description

OR_SPS The building blocks also process the supported quality attributes according to their logic.
The following tables describe the logic using input values in connection with the quality
AND_SPS attribute Validity. The input values are 0 or 1, the quality attribute Validity can have the
value good (=g) or invalid (=i).
NEG_SPS
x = placeholder for the input value and quality attribute Validity
OR_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 0, x 0, i
0, g 0, g 0, g
1, g x, x 1, g
1, i 0, x 1, i
1, i 1, i 1, i
The output thus has the logical value 1 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 1 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
OR operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
AND_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, g x, x 0, g
0, i 1, x 0, i
1, i 1, x 1, i
1, g 1, g 1, g
The output thus has the logical value 0 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 0 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
AND operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
NEG_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 1, i
0, g 1, g
1, i 0, i
1, g 0, g
SPLIT_SPS The building blocks isolate the data value and quality of a data object.
The requirement is that the quality is available from the input end. This is the case if the
SPLIT_DPS building block is interconnected with CFC input data, or is connected downstream with a
quality processing building block (x_SPS). In other cases, the CFC editor does not allow a
SPLI_XMV
connection.
SPLIT_Q The building block performs binary separation of the quality into good, bad (= invalid),
test, off and OperatorBlocked.
These 5 attributes can then be processed individually in a binary operation. The building
block must be connected downstream to a SPLIT_(DO) building block.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Building Blocks Description

BUILD_Q The building block enters a binary value for good and bad (= invalid) in each quality
structure. Thus, with this building block the quality attributes good and bad (=invalid)
can be set explicitly, for example, as the result of a monitoring logic.
All other quality attributes are set to the default state, for instance, Test = FALSE. If, for
example, the entire CFC chart is in the test state (see Quality Attribute: Test Under General
Processing), this default status can again be overwritten on the CFC output side.
The building block is normally connected downstream to a BUILD_(DO) building block.
BUILD_ACD These building blocks merge data value and quality. The building-block output is generally
used as a CFC output.
BUILD_ACT Generally, the BUILD_Q building block is connected upstream from these building blocks.
BUILD_BSC
BUILD_DPS
BUILD_ENS
BUILD_SPS
BUILD_XMV
CFC charts have a standard behavior in the processing of signals. If an input signal of the CFC chart has the
quality invalid, all output signals of the CFC chart also get the quality invalid. This standard behavior is
not desirable in some applications. If you use the building blocks for quality processing, the quality attributes
of the input signals in the CFC chart are processed.
EXAMPLE: Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE

The following conditions apply to the example:
• The interlocking condition for switchgear interlocking protection is stored in the device as a CFC chart.
• The removed device sends the release signal for the interlocking condition via a GOOSE telegram.
If the communication connection has been interrupted, the release signal (GOOSEStr) incoming via the
GOOSE telegram gets the quality invalid. If the CFC chart obtains an invalid input signal, there are the
following possibilities: The last signal valid before the communication interruption is used (quality = good) or
a substitute data value with the quality good is used (True, False).
To do this, you have to create a separate CFC chart in addition to the interlocking plan of the switchgear
interlocking. Use the building blocks for quality processing in a separate CFC chart. With the SPLIT_SPS
building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. You can then
continue to process these signals separately in the CFC chart. Use the quality information as an input signal
for a BUILD_SPS building block and assign the quality good to the signal. You obtain an SPS signal as a result,
with the quality good. You can use this to process release messages correctly. You can process the release
messages with the quality good in the CFC chart of the actual interlocking. Therefore, the release signal for
a switch illustrated in the interlocking logic is available as a valid result with the quality good. The following
figure shows an example of the CFC chart with the building blocks for quality processing:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_cfc_ran, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-44 CFC Chart with Building Blocks for Quality Processing (Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE)
If you do not want to convert the invalid release signal to a valid signal, as described, during the communica-
tion interruption, you can also assign a defined data value to the release signal. Proceed as follows: With the
SPLIT_SPS building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. Link
the VALID output of the SPLIT_SPS building block with the data value of the input signal (AND gate). This way,
you can set the value to a non-risk state with the valid input signals. In the example, the output of the CFC
chart is set to the value FALSE when the input signal is invalid.
3.4.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions
Figure 3-45 provides an overview for processing the quality of data objects within a device-internal function.
A function can receive internal data or input data that is routable by the user (binary input signal or double
commands). The respective quality attributes supported are evaluated by the function on the input side. The
attributes are not passed through the specific algorithm/the specific logic of the function. The output data are
supplied with a quality that is specified by the function state and device-operating mode.
NOTE
i Take into account that pickup of chatter blocking (see chapter 3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking
for Input Signals) sets the corresponding Validity attribute to invalid.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Figure 3-45 Overview for Processing Quality within an Internal Function
Internal Input Data

The quality processing is automatic for internal input data.
Supported Quality Attributes Description
Validity • At the receiving end, internal values can only be invalid
or good.
• If invalid, the function health is set to Alarm and the
function is reset.
Causes for invalid internal data are, for example:
• The frequency operating range of the device was left.

• The device is not calibrated.
• The A/D converter monitoring identified an error.
Routable Binary Input Signals (SPS Data Type)

Figure 3-46 shows the possible sources for connecting a binary input signal. Depending on the source,
different quality attributes can be set:
• CFC chart: See description in chapter 3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
• GOOSE connection: See description in chapter 3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received
GOOSE Values
• Device hardware: No quality attributes are set and supported.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Figure 3-46 Sources for Connecting a Binary Input Signal
For this signal type (SPS), you can influence the processing of the quality, see overview in Figure 3-45.
The following figure shows the possible influence on a binary input signal of a protection stage.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information routing.
• In the operating range, select the desired binary input signal.
• In the Properties window, select the Details entry. There, you will find the item Processing quality
attributes.
[sc_influence, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-47 Influence Options for a Binary Input Signal (SPS Input Signal)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

The Validity attribute can have the values good or invalid (reserved and questionable were already
replaced at the input end of the device by the value invalid).
The input signal source is invalid. The current data value of the source signal is ignored. You can
select between the following options:
• Further process last valid data value of the source signal

(this is the default setting with only a few exceptions)
• Set the binary value to be processed further to 0.
• Set the binary value to be processed further to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different
applications.
The function health switches to Warning.
The input signal source is good. The source signal data value is processed further.
Quality Attribute: Test

• The input signal source and The source signal data value is processed further.
processed function are in test state.
• The input signal source is not in
test state and the function to be
processed is in test state.
The input signal source is in a test state The data value of the source signal is ignored. You can select
and the function to be processed is in between the following options:
normal state.
• Further processing of the last valid source signal data value,
before the source switches to the test state (that is the
default setting)
• The binary value to be processed further is set to 0.
• The binary value to be processed further is set to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different applica-
tions.
Quality Attribute OperatorBlocked

The quality cannot be influenced at this position and does not lead to a response within the logic
Output Data
The quality is not processed through the actual algorithm/logic of the function. The following table displays
the conditions required to set the quality of output signals of a function.
Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute
After internal (to To the IEC 61850
the SIPROTEC 5 interface, in buffer
system, for example,
in the direction of a
CFC chart)
Functional state = Test Unchanged Test = TRUE Test = TRUE
(thus, result of device operating
mode = Test or function mode
= Test)
Functional state = Off Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(thus, result of device operating sponding to the definition for
mode = Off) switched off

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute

Function health = Alarm Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(for example, result of invalid sponding to the definition for
receive data) reset
Device operating mode = func- Unchanged Validity = good Validity = good
tionally logged off OperatorBlocked = detailQual =
TRUE oldData
OperatorBlocked =
TRUE

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
3.5 Fault Recording
3.5.1 Overview of Functions
All SIPROTEC 5 devices have a fault memory in which fault recordings are kept securely. Fault recording
documents operations within the power system and the way in which protection devices respond to them.
You can read out fault recordings from the device and analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as
SIGRA.
A fault record contains the following information:
• Sample values of the analog input channels
• Measured values calculated internally
• Any binary signals (for example, pickup signals and trip signals of protection functions)
You can individually configure the signals to be recorded. Furthermore, you can define the starting condition,
the record duration, and the saving criterion of a recording. Fault records saved in the device are also available
after a loss of auxiliary voltage.
3.5.2 Structure of the Function
The Fault recorder function is a central device function. Both the recording criterion and the measured-value
and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application templates. You are
able to individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5. The fault recording and the fault log are subject to the
same control. This ensures that real time, relative time, and numbering of the fault data are synchronized.
This means that all fault recordings function on the same real-time and relative-time basis.
The data read out via the DIGSI-PC are saved in COMTRADE format. Fault recording data can be transferred
to the substation automation technology by request in accordance with the standards via existing commu-
nication connections (such as IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103). The central device analyzes the data using
appropriate programs.
3.5.3 Function Description
The Fault recorder function records the sampled values, specific to each device, of all analog inputs, the
internally calculated measured values, and the binary signals. The configuration, which is predefined for each
device via an application template, can be adapted individually.
NOTE
i For detailed information about selecting and deleting fault records, refer to the Operating Manual
(C53000-G5040-C003).
The fault memory of the device is automatically updated with every recording. When the fault memory is filled
completely, the oldest recordings are overwritten automatically. Thus, the most recent recordings are always
stored safely. The maximum number of recordings is 128.
Sampling Frequency
The analog measuring channels are sampled at a different sampling rate for fault recording. The Sampling
frequency parameter is used to set the desired sampling frequency. Possible setting values are 1 kHz, 2 kHz,
4 kHz, and 8 kHz . This setting value applies only to fault recording and does not affect protection functions or
calculated measured values.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Record Duration
The overall duration of a single fault recording comprises the total duration of the configurable recording
criterion, the Pre-trigger time and the Post-trigger time . You can set the parameters for these
components individually.
[dw_sigrar, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-48 Example of a Fault Recording
With the Fault recording parameter, you specify the start criterion of the recording.
You can set the following values:
• with pickup:
The fault recording records the complete fault until dropout. The resulting pickup signals of all function
groups are taken into account.
• with pickup & AR cyc.:

In connection with an active automatic reclosing function (internal/external), the fault recordings record
the fault including the short and long interruptions (automatic reclosing cycles).
• user-defined:
With this setting value, you can individually specify the recording criterion for the fault recording in
DIGSI 5. Function-specific recording criteria can be realized in this way.
If a recording criterion reoccurs during the pickup time and post-trigger time, the recording which is currently
active is extended to include a new post-trigger time.
For a sampling frequency of 8 kHz and 24 analog channels to be recorded, the duration of one individual fault
recording can be up to 20 s.
The maximum record duration can be limited by the Maximum record time parameter.
In addition to starting the fault recording via the pickup, the following alternatives are possible:
• Externally via binary input signal >External start (for example, from an external protection device
without fault recording by an object transferred via a GOOSE message)
• By way of a configurable input signal >Manual start, you can start fault records with a configurable
length (parameter Manual record time).
• From DIGSI 5, you can start test fault records with a fixed length of 1 s.
• With a command from a central device via an existing communication connection (IEC 61850,
IEC 60870-5-103)
NOTE
i If a pickup signal is present continuously, the fault record is closed after the Maximum record time
expires and the fault recording is not restarted!

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Saving the Recording

Not every fault recording that is started actually needs to be saved. With the Storage parameter, you specify
whether you want to save the fault recording that has started. You can also save only fault data for which
the pickup of a protection function also caused a tripping . With this setting, faults beyond the self-protection
range will not lead to replacing fault recordings that have already been saved.
Configuration of Signals to Be Recorded

All analog inputs of the device that have been configured (currents and voltages) are recorded as sampled
channels.
Function-specific binary signals (for example, pickup and trip signals) and measured value channels can be
configured individually for recording in the DIGSI information-routing matrix. For this purpose, a separate
Recorder column is available.
You can rename the signals in the DIGSI Information-routing matrix. You can change the order of the binary
signals and measured-value channels to be recorded in DIGSI under Signal order. You can find more detailed
information on this in the DIGSI 5 Online Help, version V07.50 and higher (Order number: C53000-D5000-
C001-D).
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see the Device Manual, chapters 10.3 Operational Measured Values and 10.4 Fundamental and
Symmetrical Components) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is every 180 ms). However, this can
mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the analog channels. The recording of
these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing processes.
Numbering and Time Stamping

All fault recordings saved are automatically numbered in ascending order and assigned a real-time stamp for
the start time. The fault recording logs the fault with a relative time. The reference-time point is the start of
the recording. Every fault recording has a corresponding fault log with the same number. This ensures that the
fault recording can be uniquely assigned to the event log.
NOTE
i When the Fault recorder function detects a negative time stamp of the measurand or the binary signal, an
entry is added in the Device-diagnosis log in DIGSI. Meanwhile, the fault recording continues. The entry
for an incorrect measurand or binary signal shows the prefix Bad quality.
Fault Memory
The device manages its available fault memory dynamically, so that the maximum recording capacity is always
available. When exceeding the limits of the fault memory, the oldest recordings are automatically overwritten.
This means that the most recent recordings are always available. The sampling rate, type, and number of
measured value trends to be recorded are the crucial variables when it comes to restricting the length and
number of recordings possible. Parallel to the sampled tracks, up to 50 tracks with function-specific measured
values and up to 200 binary tracks can be recorded. The following table provides an overview of the maximum
storage capacities, in seconds, for different connection variations of the protection devices.
Table 3-9 Maximum Length of All Stored Recordings
Connection Examples Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling

1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz
Feeder: 1365 s 819 s 455 s 241 s
4I, 6 measured values, 20 binary tracks
Feeder: 1125 s 566 s 284 s 142 s
4l, 4V, 20 binary tracks

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Connection Examples Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling

1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz
Feeder: 890 s 500 s 266 s 137 s
4I, 4V, 6 measured values, 20 binary tracks
Feeder 1.5 CB: 525 s 281 s 145 s 74 s
8I, 8V, 6 measured values, 20 binary tracks
Input and Output Signals

The Fault recorder function provides several input signals that allow the precise starting, deleting of record-
ings. The output signals provide information about the function status.
In the following table, you can find input signals of the Fault recorder function:
Name Type Description
Control: Start recording SPC Start recording via the function key
Control: Reset memory SPC Delete all recording via the function key. The
error numbers are reset.
Control: Delete memory SPC Delete all recording via the function key. The
error numbers remain as is.
Control: >External start SPS Start recording with an external binary signal,
for example, by the trip command of an external
protection device. The set pre-trigger and post-
trigger time are taken into account.
Control: >Manual start SPS Start a recording of fixed duration (parameter
Manual record time ) by way of an
external binary signal, for example, manually via
the function key or by an external binary signal.
In the following table, you can find output signals of the Fault recorder function:
Name Type Description
Control: Error number INS The indication of the current error number
allows a unique allocation of entries in the
message buffers for the recorded fault records.
Control: Recording started SPS Fault recording running
Control: Recording done SPS Fault recording done
Control: Tmax reduced SPS Fault recording ends before the set Maximum
record time expires, because the fault log is
full.
Control: Fault log is full INS The fault log is full.
Configuring Stored Indications Using DIGSI 5
• In the Information Routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals to LEDs and
output contacts. To do this, open the project tree.
Project -> Device -> Information routing
• Right-click the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the
routing range of the targets.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
[sc_FR_information routing, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-49 Routing of the Signals in the Information Routing
3.5.4 Application and Setting Notes
Parameter: Fault recording
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:130) Fault recording = with pickup

With the Fault recording parameter, you define the time interval at which faults are recorded. The total
record duration is defined as the duration of the fault plus the total of the parameters Pre-trigger time,
Post-trigger time and is limited by the maximum record duration.
with pickup The fault recording time is determined by the total number of all protection
pickups. The resulting pickup signals of all function groups are considered.
Note: When the post-trigger time has expired, the indications of an auto-
matic reclosing function are not recorded. Evolving faults after expiry of
the post-trigger time can result in the opening of a new fault with its own
recording.
with pickup & AR cyc. The fault recording time is determined by the total number of all protec-
tion pickups including short and long interruptions (automatic reclosing
cycles). It includes the resulting pickup signals of all function groups and
the runtimes of initiated automatic reclosing cycles for all active automatic
reclosing functions.
user-defined The fault recording time is defined user-specific.
Note: Specify all signals for individual definition of the fault recording
time in the DIGSI 5 information-routing matrix. In the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix, right-click the routing field for your binary indication in the
Recorder column. The record duration is calculated from the logical OR
operation of all initiated, configured signals.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Parameter: Storage
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:131) Storage = always

With the Storage parameter, you define the storage criterion for a fault recording that has already started.
always Each fault recording that has been started is saved.
with trip If at least one protection function issues an operate indication during the
record time, any fault recording that has been started is saved.
Parameter: Maximum record time
• Default setting (_:2761:111) Maximum record time = 5.00 s

With the Maximum record time parameter, you configure the maximum record duration for an individual
fault recording. When the time configured expires, an ongoing fault recording is canceled. This parameter
merely limits the duration of the fault recording. It does not affect the logging of faults in the fault log.
Parameter: Pre-trigger time
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:112) Pre-trigger time = 0.50 s

With the Pre-trigger time parameter, you configure the pre-trigger time for an individual fault recording.
The set pre-trigger time is prepended to the actual recording criterion for the fault recording.
Parameter: Post-trigger time
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:113) Post-trigger time= 0.50 s

With the Post-trigger time parameter, you configure the post-trigger time for an individual fault
recording. The post-trigger time that has been configured is added to the actual recording criterion for the
fault recording after the dropout.
The following table shows how the setting range changes for the Post-trigger time parameter
depending on the Sampling frequency.
Sampling Frequency Setting Range for the Post-trigger time Parameter
8 kHz 0.05 s to 4 s
4 kHz 0.05 s to 8 s
2 kHz 0.05 s to 16 s
1 kHz 0.05 s to 24 s
Parameter: Manual record time
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:116) Manual record time = 0.50 s

With the Manual record time parameter, you set the length of a recording if the fault recording is
activated dynamically (edge-triggered) via a separately configured input signal >Manual start.
In this case, pre-trigger and post-trigger times do not take effect.
Parameter: Sampling frequency
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:140) Sampling frequency = 2 kHz

With the Sampling frequency parameter, you define the sampling frequency of the fault record that you
want to download via DIGSI 5. Possible setting values are 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, and 8 kHz for the bay units and
1 kHz and 2 kHz for the central unit. Possible setting values are 1 kHz and 2 kHz.
Parameter: Sampl. freq. IEC 61850 rec.
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:141) Sampl. freq. IEC 61850 rec. = 1 kHz

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
With the parameter Sampl. freq. IEC 61850 rec., you define the sampling frequency of the fault
record that you want to download using the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Possible setting values are
8 kHz, 4 kHz, 2 kHz, and 1 kHz.
You cannot set the parameter Sampl. freq. IEC 61850 rec. to be greater than the set value of
the parameter Sampling frequency. The setting options of the parameter Sampl. freq. IEC 61850
rec. which are greater than the set value of the parameter Sampling frequency are invisible.
If the size of the COMTRADE file exceeds the maximum permissible storage capacity of the device, the original
recording is truncated. The truncated data are discarded.
NOTE
i If you have created a fault record with a certain sampling frequency and then set the sampling frequency to
a lower value, you can no longer download this fault record using the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
You must reset the sampling frequency to the original value. Then you can download the fault record again
using the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
Parameter: Cal.zero.seq.cur.channel
• Default setting (_:2761:129) Cal.zero.seq.cur.channel = no

With the Cal.zero.seq.cur.channel parameter, you determine whether the calculated zero-sequence
current 3I0 or -3I0 is recorded in a separate channel or not. The separate channel is visible in the DIGSI 5
Information routing under the I 3-phase measuring point.
The zero-sequence currents can be calculated only with the following current-transformer connection types:
• 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase

no The zero-sequence current calculated from the sampled values of the
currents is not recorded.
-3I0 The calculated zero-sequence current -3I0 is recorded for each I 3-phase
measuring point.
-3I0 is calculated from the sampled current values using the following
equation: -3I0 = - (IA + IB + IC).
3I0 The calculated zero-sequence current 3I0 is recorded for each I 3-phase
measuring point.
3I0 is calculated from the sampled current values using the following equa-
tion: 3I0 = (IA + IB + IC).
Parameter: Cal.zero seq.volt.channel
• Default setting (_:2761:132) Cal.zero seq.volt.channel = no

With the Cal.zero seq.volt.channel parameter, you determine whether the calculated zero-sequence
voltage V0 or3V0 is recorded in a separate channel or not. The separate channel is visible in the DIGSI 5
Information routing under the V 3-ph measuring point.
The zero-sequence voltages can be calculated only with the following current-transformer connection types:
• 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-gnd voltages

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording

no The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the sampled voltage values is
not recorded.
V0 The calculated zero-sequence voltage V0 is recorded for each V 3-ph meas-
uring point.
V0 is calculated from the sampled voltage values using the following equa-
tion: V0 = (VA + VB + VC)/3.
3V0 The calculated zero-sequence voltage 3V0 is recorded for each V 3-ph
measuring point.
3V0 is calculated from the sampled voltage values using the following
equation: 3V0 = (VA + VB + VC).
3.5.5 Settings
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting

Control
_:2761:130 Control:Fault recording • with pickup with pickup
• with pickup & AR cyc.
• user-defined
_:2761:131 Control:Storage • always always
• with trip
_:2761:111 Control:Maximum record 0.20 s to 80.00 s 5.00 s
time
_:2761:112 Control:Pre-trigger time 0.05 s to 16.00 s 0.50 s
_:2761:113 Control:Post-trigger time 0.05 s to 16.00 s 0.50 s
_:2761:116 Control:Manual record 0.20 s to 80.00 s 0.50 s
time
_:2761:140 Control:Sampling • 8 kHz 2 kHz
frequency
• 4 kHz
• 2 kHz
• 1 kHz
_:2761:141 Control:Sampl. freq. • 8 kHz 1 kHz
IEC 61850 rec.
• 4 kHz
• 2 kHz
• 1 kHz
_:2761:129 Control:Cal.zero.seq.cur. • no no
channel
• -3I0
• 3I0
_:2761:132 Control:Cal.zero • no no
seq.volt.channel
• V0
• 3V0

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
3.5.6 Information List
No. Information Data Class Type

(Type)
_:2761:300 Control:Start record SPC C
_:2761:305 Control:Reset memory SPC C
_:2761:306 Control:Clear memory SPC C
_:2761:502 Control:>External start SPS I
_:2761:503 Control:>Manual start SPS I
_:2761:310 Control:Fault number INS O
_:2761:311 Control:Recording started SPS O
_:2761:314 Control:Record made SPS O
_:2761:327 Control:Tmax reduced SPS O
_:2761:324 Control:Fault log is full INS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
3.6.1 Overview
The Protection communication includes all functionalities necessary for data exchange via the protection
interface (PI).
Devices that communicate with each other via protection interfaces form a device combination. A device
combination consists of 2 to 6 devices. The devices communicate via point-to-point connections (protection
connections). In this case, a device has only one connection to another device via a protection interface (PI).
With a 2nd protection interface, you can establish a connection to another device or a redundant connection
to the same device. With their protection connections, the devices form a protection topology in the form of a
redundant ring (ring topology) or as a chain structure (chain topology).
[dw_PDC_chain_3devices, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-50 Device Combination of 3 Devices in a Chain Topology
[dw_PDC_ring_3devices, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-51 Device Combination of 3 Devices in a Ring Topology
[dw_PDC_ring_2devices, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-52 Device Combination of 2 Devices in a Ring Topology
Within a device combination, the point-to-point connections can have different bandwidths. Depending on
the bandwidth, a certain amount of binary information and measured values can be transmitted bidirection-
ally between the devices. The connection with the lowest bandwidth defines the amount of binary informa-
tion and measured values.
The following information is important for protection communication and is transmitted additionally. You
cannot change this information:
• Topology data and values are exchanged for monitoring and testing the connection and displayed on the
device or with DIGSI 5.
• Protection data and measured values, such as line differential protection data or binary data of the
teleprotection schemes for distance protection and ground-fault protection are transmitted.
• The time synchronization of the devices is possible directly via the connection, whereby a device of the
protection topology assumes the role of the timing master.
The point-to-point connection between the devices is continuously monitored for data faults and failure and
the signal-transit time of the data is measured.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
The protection communication is typically used for line differential protection and with the teleprotection
schemes for distance protection and ground-fault protection. In SIPROTEC 5, you can configure the protection
communication in all devices and use it for further protection applications. At the same time, any binary
information and measured values can be transferred between the devices.
NOTE
i The protection communication is compatible with the successor versions from firmware version V04.00
and higher.
3.6.2 Protection Communication in the Overall System
The following figure illustrates the interaction of protection communication, protection function groups, and
communication modules. The Protection communication is integrated as follows in the overall system:
[dw_protcom_compl_system, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-53 Protection Communication in the Overall System
If protection functions want to use the protection interfaces, their superordinate protection function group,
for example, the FG Line 1, must be connected to a Protection communication function group. With this
connection, each protection function in the FG Line 1 can use protection communication.
In addition, a connection must be configured between the logical protection interface in the FG Protection
communication and a channel on the physical communication module. The physical communication module
must support the protection-interface protocol.
The following chapters describe the configuration of the connections.
Type of Protection Communication

The protection communication in a device can be either type 1 or type 2. The following table shows the typical
applications:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Types Description
Type 1 With type 1, the Line differential protection function is the primary appli-
cation. This application requires the greatest portion of the bandwidth, so
Application during use of Line
that with type 1 the quantity of customer-specific remote data available
differential protection
is lower. This becomes noticeable with a 64 kBit/s protection connection
via a G703.1 or X21 interface. If a multiple-end line differential protection
application is realized, all protection communications in the devices must be
of type 1.
A maximum of 6 line ends (devices) is possible.
If the Line differential protection and Teleprotection scheme functions
are to operate in parallel in the device, the bit rate must not be less than
512 kBit/s!
Type 2 Type 2 provides considerably more bandwidth for customer-specific remote
data, as the line differential protection application is not used in this
Application without use of Line
example. The transmission of protection data and other data, such as meas-
differential protection
ured values as well as the teleprotection scheme, is predominant here.
Using type 2 protection communication, a maximum of 6 devices can be
connected to one another and different device types (for example, 6MD,
7VK, 7SA, and 7SJ) can exchange data.
NOTE
i In the case of devices with the Line differential protection function, for instance 7SD and 7SL, protection
communication type 1 is preset in the application templates of the devices. Type 2 is preset in the
application templates for other devices, and is used for other data transmission.
Type 1 and type 2 protection communication do not work together in pairs via a protection function.
The protection interfaces (PI) establish a direct point-to-point connection between devices via different
communication media. Devices connected to one another via protection interfaces form a protection
topology. See following figure.
[dw_intert, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-54 Data Exchange between 4 Devices with Protection Communication of Type 1 or Type 2 in a
Protection Topology
Device Combination with 2 Devices: Simple or Redundant Transmission

In a device combination with 2 devices, one protection communication with a protection interface is required
per device to establish a protection connection (see next figure).
The most frequent application is the point-to-point exchange of data between 2 devices (the protection
communication is of type 2), as performed by protection transmission devices.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[dw_interface, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-55 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each with Protection Connection
NOTE
i The index describes the consecutive numbering of the devices in a device combination (see parameter
(_:5131:101) Local device is device).
A maximum of 2 protection interfaces per FG Protection communication are possible in one device, see
following figure. If the Protection communication function groups are connected to each other in the devices
via 2 protection connections of the same type, this results in 100 % redundancy regarding the transmission
route. The devices then search for the communication connection with the highest bandwidth (for example,
optical fiber). If this protection connection fails, the system switches over automatically to the 2nd protection
connection until the 1st protection connection is available again. As the protection connection with lower
bandwidth defines the maximum amount of transferable information, the same information is exchanged via
both protection connections. Both protection communications in the device are then of type 1.
[dw_intera, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-56 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each Having 2 Protection Connections, Redundant Transmission
Route
Remote Data
With the Remote data function, customer-specific indications and measured values can be communicated via
the protection interface with settable update cycles (priorities).
There are 3 different priorities for the transmission of remote data:
• Priority 1: Use Priority 1 for the transmission of fast protection signals that are transferred and updated
at a maximum of every 20 ms in a telegram.
• Priority 2: Use Priority 2 for the transmission of fast single-point or double-point indications that are
transferred and updated at a maximum of every 40 ms.
• Priority 3: Use Priority 3 for all indications, measured, and metered values that are transferred and
updated a maximum of every 100 ms.
The number of customer-specific signals, indications, and measured values available conform with the
remaining bandwidth. The remaining bandwidth is lower when using Line differential protection (type 1) than
with all other protection functions (type 2). Customer-specific measured values consume more bandwidth
than single-point indications.
Communication Media
The communication takes place via direct fiber-optic connections, via communication networks or via 2-wire
copper conductors. Siemens recommends a direct fiber-optic connection, as this offers a high transmission

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
rate and is immune to failures in the transmission route while offering the shortest transmission time. This
also enables the transmission of a large amount of remote data in line differential protection applications and
the remote control of remote devices with DIGSI 5.
The distance to be bridged and the transmission paths (communication media) available determine the
settings of the protection interface. External communication converters are used for the connection to
communication networks via G703.1-, X21-, or G703.6 interfaces. The connection to 2-wire copper cores
also takes place via a communication converter. The C37.94 interface, for example, with 2 MBit/s, offers a
direct fiber-optic connection to a multiplexer with the corresponding interface.
Table 3-10 to Table 3-11 show examples of communication connections.
In the case of a direct connection, the transmission distance depends on the fiber type of the optical fiber. This
distance can also be extended via external repeaters.
The modules in the device can be replaced from outside, so that adaptation to a transmission route is possible.
In the case of the 820-nm double module USART-AE-2FO, 2 protection-interface channels can be operated on
one module.
The modules can be located at slots E and F in the base device, and at slots N and P in the plug-in module
assembly with integrated power supply.
When using communication converters, the connection from the device to the communication converter by a
module is established via optical fibers.
Table 3-10 Plug-In Modules for Applications with Protection Communication
Plug-In Modules
Module Type: USART-AH-1LDFO5
Module Type: USART-AX-2LDFO7
Module Type: USART-AY-2LDFO8

Module Type: USART-AW-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AJ-1LDFO6

Module Type: USART-AG-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AU-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AK-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AV-2LDFO

Module Type: USART-AF-1LDFO
Module Type: ETH-BD-2F09

Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 24 km ●
via 9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber or 4 km via
62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber
2 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 24 km ●
via 9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber or 4 km via
62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber
1 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 60 km via ●
9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber
5 USART-AH-1LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO

6 USART-AJ-1LDFO only pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
7 USART-AX-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO
8 USART-AY-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
9 Suitable for DIGSI 5, IEC 61850, process bus, busbar protection etc.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Plug-In Modules
Module Type: USART-AH-1LDFO5
Module Type: USART-AX-2LDFO7
Module Type: USART-AY-2LDFO8

Module Type: USART-AW-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AJ-1LDFO6

Module Type: USART-AG-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AU-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AK-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AV-2LDFO

Module Type: USART-AF-1LDFO
Module Type: ETH-BD-2F09

Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, bidirectional using 1 optical fiber, ●
1300/1550 nm (Tx/Rx), simplex LC plug, 40 km using
1550/1300 nm (Tx/Rx), simplex LC plug, 40 km using
1300/1550 nm (Tx/Rx), 2 x simplex LC plug, 40 km using
1550/1300 nm (Tx/Rx), 2 x simplex LC plug, 40 km using
2 x optical Ethernet 100 Mbit/s, 1300 nm, duplex LC ●
plug, 2 km via 50/125 μm or 62.5/125 μm multimode
optical fiber
Table 3-11 Plug-In Modules USART-AD-1FO and USART-AE-2FO
Plug-In Module
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 2 km via 62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber ●
2 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 2 km via 62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber ●
Application
Protection interface (Sync. HDLC, IEEE C37.94) ● ●
NOTE
i The USART plug-in module types can be used in slots E and F in the base module as well as in slots N and P
in the CB202 expansion module. They are not suitable for use in port M in the CB202 expansion module.
5 USART-AH-1LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO

6 USART-AJ-1LDFO only pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
7 USART-AX-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO
8 USART-AY-2LDFO only pairs with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
9 Suitable for DIGSI 5, IEC 61850, process bus, busbar protection etc.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[dw_multim, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-57 Connection over Short Distances, up to 2 km via Multimode Optical Fiber
[dw_multim-02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-58 Connection over Maximum 4 km via Multimode Optical Fiber
[dw_single2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-59 Connection via Different Distances via Singlemode Optical Fiber
[dw_attenuator, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-60 Optical Remote Connection with Attenuators
NOTE
i Connect two 7XV5107-0AA00 attenuators if you use the communication modules USART-AV-2LDFO or
USART-AK-1LDFO for transmission routes of less than 30 km. To continue using the duplex LC plug, attach
both attenuators to one end of the protection connection (see Figure 3-60).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[dw_single, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-61 Connection via Singlemode Optical Fiber
Figure 3-62 Connection via Communication Network with a G703.1 Interface
The connection to the multiplexer is established via a communication converter with a G703.1 interface
(64 kBit/s) or X21 interface (64 kBit/s to 512 kBit/s). You can set the bit rate for the KU-XG-512 (for X21), KU-
XG-256 (for X21), KU-XG-128 (for X21), and KU-XG-64 (for X21 or G703.1) with the parameter Connection
via.
You can find more detailed information in Table 3-12.
Figure 3-63 Connection via Communication Network with a G703.6 Interface
The connection to the multiplexer is established with 512 kBit/s via a communication converter with a G703.6
interface (E1 with 2 MBit/s or T1 with 1.44 MBit/s). The communication converter offers a 2nd interface for
connecting an additional protection interface.
Adjust the setting for the bit rate with KU-2M-512 at 512 kBbit/s in accordance with Table 3-12 with the
parameter (_:105) Connection via.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[dw_multi_7, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-64 Connection via 2-Wire Copper Cables
The connection to a communication converter with an integrated isolation voltage of 5 kV is established with
128 kBit/s (KU-KU-128 setting in accordance with Table 3-12). An isolation of 20 kV of the 2-wire connection is
possible via an external 7XR9516 isolating transformer.
[dw_repeat, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-65 Direct Fiber-Optic Connection via an External Repeater
The repeater offers an interface for connecting an additional protection interface. The connection to a
repeater is established with 512 kBit/s (repeater 512 kBit/s setting in accordance with Table 3-12).
[dw_mutip8, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-66 Direct Optical Connection to a Multiplexer with a C37.94 N * 64 kBit/s Interface (Time Slot N =
1; 2 or 8)
NOTE
i The redundancy of different communication connections (for the ring topology) requires rigorous separa-
tion of all devices involved in the communication. Therefore, avoid different transmission routes via the
same multiplexer board, as no more substitute paths are possible if the board fails.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Supervision of the Communication

Communication is continuously monitored by the devices and displayed with indications and measured
values.
If a number of defective data telegrams, or no data telegrams at all, are received, this is regarded as a failure
in the communication as soon as a failure time of 100 ms (default setting can be changed) is exceeded.
For each protection interface, a list of the measured values is shown in a window in DIGSI 5 (defective
telegrams per minute/hour; transmitted and received telegrams per minute/hour, percentage fault rate per
minute/hour). A corresponding failure indication is always available. If no alternative transmission route exists
(as in the ring topology), the protection function operating with the protection interface is not operating and
remote data is not updated on the receiver side.
If the communication is interrupted for longer than an adjustable time Data-connection failure, this is
regarded as a communication failure. A corresponding failure indication is always available.
Time Synchronization via the Protection Interface, Timing Master

All devices in a device combination can synchronize their time with each other. Synchronization is carried out
with millisecond accuracy. The synchronization works independently of the protection function and is used
exclusively for simultaneous time keeping in the devices of a device combination.
The device you set in the parameter (_:5131:102) Address of device 1 is the device with index 1.
This device functions takes on the role of the timing master in a device combination. If the timing master is
logged off and switched off, the device with the next highest device index takes on the function of the timing
master. The timing master synchronizes the clocks of the other devices via the protection interfaces.
The time of the timing master itself can be synchronized via the following time sources:
• IRIG B
• DCF77
• IEEE 1588
• SNTP
For this, these time sources must be set as the 1st time source and optionally as the 2nd time source in the
timing master. If available, the system switches over to the 2nd time source upon failure of the 1st time
source in the timing master.
The following chapters describe how a device is set as a timing master:
• For classic protection communication, see Parameter: Address of Device x, Page 154.
• For advanced protection communication, see Parameter: Device index, Page 192.
Set the protection interface as the 1st time source in the other devices of the device combination. You can find
the setting value in DIGSI 5 via the Project tree → Parameters → Time settings → Timer → Time source 1
→ PI.
In this way, all events in the devices of the device combination are recorded with the same time and are
time-synchronized even across different switchgears. This simplifies fault analysis and the fault records are
recorded with the same time in all devices.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[dw_time_sy, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-67 Time Synchronization in a Device Combination
Figure 3-67 shows how device 1 with index 1 is synchronized with devices 2, 3, and 4 via the protection
interface. Device 1 is the timing master, whose time is synchronized with a selectable, external time source.
Time Synchronization of the Line Differential Protection Measured Values with Millisecond Accuracy
The measured values of the devices connected via the protection interfaces are synchronized via telegram
measurement with microsecond accuracy (1*10E-06 s). The protection interface displays this state with the
indication PI synchronized RAISING.
If communications problems occur, it is possible that the measured values may not be properly synchronized.
In this case, the protection interface generates the indication PI synchronized CLEARED. The line differen-
tial protection is blocked. This state can be corrected only manually.
NOTE
i You can reset the synchronization of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Reset synchron.
For special line differential protection applications or synchrophasor measuring devices, you can also time-
synchronize the measured values with microsecond accuracy as follows:
• Via a high-precision electrical synchronization pulse (PPS electrical, 1-second pulse) from a satellite
receiver at time-synchronization port G
• Via a high-precision optical synchronization pulse (PPS optical, 1-second pulse) from a satellite receiver
at a USART communication module
• Via the IEEE 1588 time-synchronization protocol

This allows you to measure and display the signal-transit time of the transmission route in transmit and
receive direction separately. This lets you achieve the maximum responsivity with the line differential protec-
tion in communication networks even with differences in the signal-transit time in the transmit and receive
direction (unbalanced runtimes). For the transmission of protection data in type 2 protection communication,
different signal-transit times are irrelevant.
Log Off the Device

A device can be logged off for protection-function tests, system inspections, or disconnection of a feeder
for operational reasons from the device combination. The logged off device no longer participates in the

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
distributed functionality and is therefore no longer an active component of the device combination. The
protection functions are still in operation for the other end or ends.
The following conditions are necessary for a successful logoff of the device from the point of view of
protection communication:
• The device combination is not in a transient state and is stable in operation without switchovers of
the protection connections. This displays the message of the device combination Status of topo.
recog. with the value Valid.
• In a given chain topology, the device to be logged off is one of the 2 devices at the end of the
communication chain.
• The circuit breaker must be open on the side of the device to be logged off and current must not be
flowing.
NOTE
i If one of these conditions is not fulfilled, the device cannot be logged off.
You can find more detailed information in 3.9.4 Device Logout.
Constellation Measured Values

Constellation measured values are measured values predefined by Siemens with the following properties:
• They are synchronized in the devices in a device combination.
• They are substituted using the protection interface.
• They are available on every device.

You can view the constellation measured values with DIGSI 5.
In the device, current and voltage measured values are displayed in absolute value and phase as a percentage.
100 % conform to the rated current or the rated voltage of the line (see next figure). These measured
values are recorded every 2 seconds by the devices participating in the device combination and then sent to
the other respective devices. At the same time, the current and voltage values of the different devices are
time-synchronous with one another.
When displaying the constellation measured values the local device is prioritized. The device connected
directly with DIGSI 5 is the local device.
For the protection communication, the display of the constellation measured values differs between Type 1
and Type 2.
• Protection communication Type 1:

The phasors of the current and voltage measured values of the local device have an angle of 0°. The
angles of the measured values of the other devices relate to the local values, meaning that the angle
difference to the remote ends is displayed.

The voltage phasor VA of the local device has an angle of 0°. The angles of the other local measured
values and the measured values of the remote devices relate to VA (0°).
You can find these measured values in the device under the following DIGSI mask:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_const mv, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-68 Example of Constellation Measured Values with Phases
Multiplex Operation
With extended protection communication, you have the option of having a physical USART channel used by
2 logical protection interfaces. In this way, a transmission route can be double used, for example to implement
Parallel line protection with Line differential protection without additional hardware. To do this, configure
the channel according to chapter 3.6.6.4 Configuration of the Advanced Protection Communication in DIGSI
5.
[dw_channel-mux, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-69 Multiplex Operation

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
NOTE
i Note that in case of multiple use of a physical channel, the available bandwidth is divided equally between
the logical protection interfaces. Therefore, this operating mode is not suitable for baud rates under
128 kBit/s.
NOTE
i In case of multiple use of a physical USART connection – for example, for protection of a double line – you
must provide further redundancy concepts.
3.6.4 Available Variants for the Protection Communication
The following variants are available for protection communication:
• Classic protection communication

The scope of parameterization is small for the classic protection communication. The following
constraints exist:
– IP-based communication protocols are not supported.
– Increased parameterization effort when changing the number of devices in the device combination
subsequently, for example, protection of a multi-terminal line.
• Advanced protection communication

The advanced protection communication provides greater flexibility and is used with IP-based communi-
cation protocols. For this purpose, the devices must be equipped with an Ethernet BD module. The
following advantages also exist for devices equipped with USART communication modules:
– Easy subsequent expansion of the number of devices in a device combination
– Multiple function groups Protection communication can be instantiated
– Multiplex operation of a physical protection connection
– Hierarchically structured representation in DIGSI 5 project tree
For further information on the 2 variants, refer to 3.6.5 Classic Protection Communication and 3.6.6 Advanced
Protection Communication .
NOTE
i Do not confuse the 2 variants of the protection communication with type 1 and type 2 of the protection
communication!
NOTE
i If you are unsure about the suitable variant for your use case during selection, use the advanced protection
communication.
NOTE
i If you want to change an existing classic protection communication to an advanced protection communica-
tion or vice versa, a window appears in DIGSI where you are asked whether you want to keep the mapping
or not - that is, the communication settings or communication-information routing that has previously
been set. In this case, click No

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.6.5 Classic Protection Communication
3.6.5.1 Overview
The classic protection communication enables the data exchange between the devices via synchronous serial
point-to-point connections from 64 kBit/s to 2 mBit/s. These connections can be directly via optical fiber or
via other communication media, for example, via dedicated lines or via communication networks. IP-based
communication is not supported.
The function groups of the classic protection communication always support a fixed number of devices in the
device combination:
• 2-device protection communication
3.6.5.2 Classic Protection Communication in the Overall System

The classic protection communication is integrated as follows in the overall system:
[dw_simple_protcom_compl_system, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-70 Classic Protection Communication in the Overall System
(1) The device automatically routes the connection between the protection FG and the Protection
communication FG in DIGSI 5.
3.6.5.3 Structure of the Function Group

If you select the communication protocol Protection interface and the number of devices on a channel in
the communication module, the classic function group Protection communication is automatically created in
the DIGSI 5 information routing.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
The classic function group Protection communication contains the following functionalities and function
blocks (FB):
• Device combination
• Protection interface
• FBs for Remote data
• FB External synchronization for the synchronization of the transferred data through an external
synchronous pulse (1-second-pulse, PPS10)
[dw_structure_FG_protcom_simple, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-71 Structure of the Classic FG Protection Communication
The function Device combination manages the devices that exchange data via protection communication.
In the device-combination settings, you set the general settings for the device combination and the device
addresses.
The function Device combination issues the following indications:
• General indications like the

– Number of devices
– Type and status of the device topology
• Indications of the devices in the device combination like:

– The availability of the device
– The state of the device, that is whether the device is logged on or off in the device combination
Measured values are transmitted via protection communication and are acquired and exchanged at the same
time in the devices. The synchronization of the measured-value acquisition can be done either internally via
the telegram measurement or via an external synchronous pulse (1-second pulse, PPS) using the function
block External synchronization. The external synchronization is switched on in the function block of the
protection interface. You can find the indications of the external synchronization in the function block
External synchronization.
The function block Remote data is used to transfer selected and user-specific signals and measured values
from the SIPROTEC 5 system. You select the signals and measured values to be transmitted in the communica-
tion mapping of DIGSI. The remote data does not issue status indications.
The function block Protection interface is automatically connected to a physical channel of a communication
module and can therefore send signals and measured values to the neighboring device or receive them from
the neighboring device. You can find the status indications of the FB Protection interface in the DIGSI 5
information routing in the function group Protection communication.
10 PPS - Pulse Per Second

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
NOTE
i In contrast to the protection interface in extended protection communication, the protection interface in
classic protection communication is automatically connected to a physical channel of the communication
module (refer to Figure 3-70).
3.6.5.4 Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5

If the device is provided with modules, proceed as follows:
• Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device.
• In the Properties of the communication module > Protocols > Channel x Protocols, select the
Protection interface protocol.
[sc_PDC_classic_protocol, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-72 Selection of the Communication Protocol

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
• Then select the number of devices under Mapping (see next figure).
[sc_PDC_classic_mapping, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-73 Selecting the Device Combination
NOTE
i The function groups shown in Figure 3-73 are not available in the DIGSI library.
You can change the number of devices (for example 2 protection communication devices) depending on
the product code any way you like via the Mapping text box.
If you change the number of devices via the Mapping text box, all activated remote data, settings of the
device combination and of the protection interface are lost.
If the module slot is not yet provided with modules, proceed as follows:
• Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device.
• Select the module from the catalog and drag it to a channel. Thus is the channel configured with a
module. DIGSI 5 indicates whether the module can be used for protection communication under Device
Information.
• Use the Protocols text box to select the Protection interface, see Figure 3-72.
• Then use the Mapping text box to select the number of devices, for example 2 devices protection com.,
see Figure 3-73.
3.6.5.5 Setting Notes for the Device Combination

Select the communication module in the Project tree > Hardware and protocols in the Device view. In
the properties of the communication module, you can find the setting sheets for the parameterization of the
device-combination settings and the settings for protection communication.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_config1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-74 Selection of the Protocol: Communication via the Protection Interface
[sc_config, 4, en_US]
Figure 3-75 Protection-Interface Initialization and Configuration
Changes in the device-combination settings are always visible on the other channel as well. All further
parameters can be set separately for individual channels.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Parameter: Address of Device x
• Default setting (_:5131:102) Address of device 1 = 101

The parameters Address of device 1 to Address of device 6 can be used to give an address to each
device. Set a unique and unambiguous address for each device.
NOTE
i The number of device addresses displayed corresponds to that of the number selected during the device-
combination configuration.
NOTE
i The device 1 is the timing master device in a device combination.

If all other devices in the device combination are to obtain their time from the timing master device, note
the following:
• Under Address of device 1 set the address for the timing master device.
• Parameterize the other devices such that they get their time from the timing master device via the
protection connections.
For more information, refer to 3.7.3 Function Description. Select as the adjustable synchronization
option Protection interface.
In the timing master device you must not set the protection interface as the synchronization source!
Parameter: Local device is device
• Default setting (_:5131:101) Local device is device = 1

With the parameter Local device is device, you set the index (number) of your device in the device
combination. A maximum of 6 devices can be present in one device combination.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE
You have a device combination with 2 devices.
For example, in DIGSI 5, select the parameter setting Address of device 1 with the parameter value 101
for device 1 and the parameter setting Address of device 2 with the parameter value 102 for device 2.
Then, use the Local device is device parameter to set the index of the local device. The local device is
the device that you parametrize.
The addresses must be set identically for all devices in the device combination. Functional protection commu-
nication requires that you also assign the same index in all devices of the device combination for a device with
a unique address.
Parameter: Lowest appearing bit rate
• Default setting (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit rate = 64 kBit/s

With the parameter Lowest appearing bit rate, you set the lowest bit rate occurring in the device
group. Set the lowest value in each device with a three-end constellation with 2 fiber-optic connections (2
MBit/s) and one 64 kBit/s connection with the lowest value (64 kBit/s). This value determines the maximum

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
number of selected and self-created signals and measured values which are to be transmitted within the
device combination (refer to 3.6.5.9 Remote Data).
Apart from the default value, you can also set the following bit rates:
• 128 kBit/s
• 512 kBit/s
• 2048 kBit/s
NOTE
i If you use optical fibers for a connection between the devices, set the value to 2048 kBit/s.
Parameter: Number of devices
• Default setting (_:5131:125) Number of devices = 6

With the parameter Number of devices, you set the number of devices actually connected via protection
interfaces. This parameter is set by default to the maximum number of devices permitted in the device
combination.
This parameter lets you configure a planned final expansion of a system with a planned number of devices
already at this point in time and to put it into operation with a lower number of devices. When configuring
the protection interface, select the number of devices present in the final phase of the system in the Mapping
text box. If you set the parameter Number of devices to a smaller value than the maximum value, you
achieve functional protection communication with fewer devices. In this procedure, all settings, for example,
routing, you made for the device combination are retained, even if you subsequently increase the number
of devices. If you wish to operate, for example, a planned 3-device protection communication as a 2-device
protection communication, you must set the parameter Number of devices to 2. If you expand the system
later, change the Number of devices parameter to the planned maximum number.
For more detailed information regarding the configuration of the protection interface, refer to 3.6.5.4 Config-
uration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5.
NOTE
i The Number of devices parameter is only visible for device combinations with more than 2 devices.
Set the same number of devices used in all devices that are part of the device combination.
Connection mode
• Default setting Connection mode = SIPROTEC 5

With the parameter Connection mode, you select the device type with which the SIPROTEC 5 device is to
work in the device combination. As soon as a SIPROTEC 4 device works in the device combination, you must
set the parameter Connection mode accordingly.
SIPROTEC 5 The SIPROTEC 5 device only works with SIPROTEC 5 devices in the device
combination.
SIPROTEC 4 7SD610 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with at least one SIPROTEC 4 Differential
protection device 7SD610 with firmware version V4.72 and higher in the
device combination.
SIPROTEC 4 7SD5 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with at least one SIPROTEC 4 Differential
protection device 7SD5x with firmware version V4.72 and higher in the
device combination.
SIPROTEC 4 7SA5/6 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with at least one SIPROTEC 4 Distance protec-
tion device 7SA522 and 7SA6x with firmware version V4.72 and higher in
the device combination.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.6.5.6 Setting Notes on Selecting the Communication Medium
• Default setting (_:105) Connection via = fiber optic

The Connection via parameter is used to set the bit rate required for the protection interface. Different
discrete values can be entered depending on the means of communication (see following table).
Also refer to Communication Media, Page 138
Table 3-12 Means of Communication
Means of Communication See Setting Value Bit Rate

Fiber-optic direct connection Figure 3-5 fiber optic 2 MBit/s
7 to
Figure 3-6
1
CC-XG-512 communication converter Figure 3-6 CCXG 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
2
2
2
Repeater 512 communication converter Figure 3-6 repeater 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
5
CC-CC-128 Communication converter Figure 3-6 CCPW 128 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
4
CC-2M-512 Communication converter Figure 3-6 CC2M 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
3
Multiplexer with C37.94 interface Figure 3-6 C37.94 1 * 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
6 C37.94 2 * 64 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
C37.94 8 * 64 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
Other (freely adjustable bit rates for a direct 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
connection for special applications) 128 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
2048 kBit/s 2,048
kBit/s
3.6.5.7 Setting Notes for the Classic Protection Interface
Parameter: Max. error rate per hour
• Default setting (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per hour = 1.0%

If the number of faulty telegrams per hour exceeds the value set in the parameter Max. error rate per
hour, you receive the error message Error rate / hour exc..
Parameter: Max. error rate per min
• Default setting (_:5161:106) Max. error rate per min = 1.0%

If the number of faulty telegrams per minute exceeds the value set in the parameter Max. error rate per
min, you receive the error message Error rate / min exc..
Parameter: Disturbance alarm after
• Default setting (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after = 100 ms

With the parameter Disturbance alarm after, you determine the time delay after which defective or
missing telegrams are signaled as faulty where the indication Status of lay. 1 and 2 is PI data
fault.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Parameter: Transm. fail. alarm after
• Default setting (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after = 6.0 s

With the parameter Transm. fail. alarm after, you determine the time delay after which a communi-
cation failure is signaled where the indication Status of lay. 1 and 2 is PI data failure.
Parameter: Delay time threshold
• Default setting (_:5161:109) Delay time threshold = 30.0 ms

The time taken to transmit and receive a signal via a protection connection is the signal-transit time. You can
monitor the signal-transit time. For the Delay time threshold, the default setting is selected in such a
way that normal communication networks do not exceed the signal-transit time. If this signal-transit time is
exceeded during operation (for example upon switchover to another transmission route), the indication Time
delay exceeded is issued.
Increased runtimes only affect the operate time, and therefore the fault-clearing time of the protection
functions using the protection interface. If you use the Line differential protection function, this remains in
effect.
Parameter: Difference Tx and Rx time
• Default setting (_:5161:110) Difference Tx and Rx time = 0.1 ms

For time synchronization of the measured values with microsecond accuracy using telegram measurement,
the signal-transit times in the send and reception direction must be approximately the same. The device
monitors the signal-transit times in the send and reception direction.
With the parameter Difference Tx and Rx time, you set a maximum permitted signal-transit time
difference between the send and reception paths (runtimes unbalanced). Set the parameter Difference Tx
and Rx time to the maximum difference expected.
Set this value to 0 for a direct fiber-optic connection. A higher value is necessary for transmission via commu-
nication networks. Reference value: 0.1 ms (recommended setting value).
If the difference in the signal-transit times between the send and reception path exceeds the value set, the
indication Time delay jump is issued.
If the difference from consecutive measurements of the signal-transit times between the send and reception
paths exceeds the set value and remains for more than 5 s, the indication Time delay different is
issued. The Line differential protection function is no longer working properly and is ineffective.
NOTE
i The parameter Difference Tx and Rx time only shows when the function Line differential protec-
tion is instantiated and the parameter Synchronization is not set to External synch. only.
NOTE
i If you use a multiplexer with a C37.94 interface as a means of communication, Siemens recommends a
setting value of 0.25 ms to 0.6 ms.
Parameter: Synchronization
• Default setting (_:5161:113) Synchronization = External synchron. off

With the parameter Synchronization, you control the time synchronization of the measured values with
microsecond accuracy.
If the SIPROTEC device operates with the external synchronization, use the Synchronization parameter to
define how the protection is activated after restoration of the communication connection (basic state or after
transmission fault). See Figure 3-77.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

External synchron. off The external synchronization is disabled:
No external synchronization is performed at the protection interface. Select
this setting value if you do not expect any differences between the signal-
transit times in the transmission and reception directions. Then the meas-
ured values are only synchronized internally with the telegram measure-
ment.
Telegr. and ext. synch. Synchronization via telegram measurement and external synchronization:
The measured values are synchronized internally with the telegram meas-
urement, supported by the external synchronization. You can set the
external synchronization with the parameter External synchroniza-
tion. The synchronization is possible via the IEEE 1588 protocol or via the
synchronous pulse of a satellite receiver.
In this case, an existing line differential protection is only released when a
new connection is established and one of the following conditions is met.
• The protection connection is synchronized with the help of the

external synchronization.
• Symmetric signal-transit times are signaled via the binary input signal
>Sync reset or the controllable Reset synchronization. This
means that the signal-transit times are the same in the send and
receive direction.
Telegr. or ext. synch. Synchronization via telegram measurement or external synchronization:
urement, supported by the external synchronization. You can set the
external synchronization with the parameter External synchroniza-
tion. The synchronization is possible via the IEEE 1588 protocol or via the
An available line differential protection is enabled immediately upon
renewed establishment of connection (data telegrams are received). The
internal synchronization is used up to synchronization.
External synch. only External synchronization only:
The measured values are synchronized only through the external synchroni-
zation.
You can set the external synchronization with the parameter External
synchronization. The synchronization is possible via the IEEE 1588
protocol or via the synchronous pulse of a satellite receiver.
Parameter: External synchronization
• Default setting (_:5161:117) External synchronization = PPS electrical (Port G)

The parameter External synchronization is visible only if the parameter Synchronization is not set
to External synchron. off.
External synchronization is possible separately for each protection interface.
PPS electrical (Port G) The electrical synchronous pulse of a satellite receiver (1-second-pulse,
PPS11) is the synchronization source on the port G, the time synchronization
interface.
IEEE 1588 The time synchronization protocol IEEE 1588 for an Ethernet-BD communi-
cation module is used for synchronization.
11 PPS - Pulse Per Second

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
NOTE
i The configuration option IEEE 1588 is only visible if the device has an Ethernet-BD communication
module and you have selected the communication protocol IEEE 1588, see following figure.
[sc_BD_1588, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-76 Ethernet-BD Communication Module: Selection of the IEEE 1588 Protocol
NOTE
i External synchronization takes into account the signal-transit time in the transmission and reception direc-
tions. If external synchronization fails for a short time, for example, due to a receiving interference or an
unfavorable satellite position for a brief period, internal synchronization via telegram measurement is still
active.
NOTE
i In contrast to the protection interface in extended protection communication, the protection interface in
classic protection communication is automatically connected to a channel of a communication module (see
Figure 3-70).
Parameter: Max. inaccuracy
• Default setting (_:5161:119) Max. inaccuracy = 0.500 ms

With the parameter Max. inaccuracy, you configure the maximum expected inaccuracy of the synchro-
nization sourced used. The set value is only effective if the synchronization source used does not supply
any information on the current inaccuracy in the synchronization signals. If you have not used any of the
information on the inaccuracy of the synchronization source used, use the default setting.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
NOTE
i The inaccuracy of the synchronization source enters the stabilization of the Line differential protection as
an error signal.
This means that a greater inaccuracy increases the calculated restraining quantity and makes the Line
differential protection less sensitive.
If IEEE 1588 is used as the synchronization source in the synchronization status SmpSynch = global,
accuracy values are supplied with the synchronization signals and the parameter Max. inaccuracy is not
used. If the supplied accuracy values become invalid, the value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is
used.
If the synchronization source IEEE 1588 works in the synchronization status SmpSynch = local, then the
value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as permanently available inaccuracy.
If the synchronization source PPS electrical (Port G) or PPS optical (USART) is used, then the value set in the
parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as permanent inaccuracy.
If a USART communication module with the PPS protocol and the PPS generatoroperating mode is also used
as a synchronization source at the same time, the value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as
permanent inaccuracy.
Parameter: Check synchron.-source
• Default setting (_:5161:121) Check synchron.-source = yes

With the parameter Check synchron.-source, you can switch on or off the synchronization-sources
check. During the check of the synchronization sources on the ends of a protection connection, a check
is conducted as to whether both synchronization sources are working in the same synchronization status
SmpSynch.
If both synchronization sources are working in the synchronization status SmpSynch = global, the check has
been passed.
If both synchronization sources are working in the synchronization statusSmpSynch = local, that is decou-
pled from a global reference time, an additional check is conducted as to whether the synchronization source
(gmIdentity) is the same. Synchronicity can only be guaranteed if the synchronization sources are the same.
If the synchronization sources display a different synchronization status, that is one displays the synchroniza-
tion status SmpSynch = local and the other the synchronization status SmpSynch = global, synchroniza-
tion cannot be guaranteed.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Check synchron.-source = yes.
If you have problems with the synchronization-source check, you can switch off the synchronization-source
check. Switch off the synchronization-source check only if the synchronization sources are synchronous at the
end of their protection connection.
The parameter Check synchron.-source is visible only if the parameter (_:5161:113) Synchroni-
zation is set to External synch. only.
NOTE
i If you use PPS electrical (port G) as the synchronization source, the synchronization status (SmpSynch) is
permanently set to global.
If you use PPS optical (USART) as the synchronization source, you can use the setting (_:107)
Received. SmpSynch to set the synchronization status to (SmpSynch) local or global.
For synchronization with microsecond accuracy, for example with Line differential protection, adjust the
parameter (_:107) to Accepted. SmpSynch = global.
3.6.5.8 Indications and Measured Values in the Classic Protection Interface

Each individual protection interface provides different indications for commissioning and diagnostics of
communication:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Indication (_:5161:301) Status of lay. 1 and 2

The indication (_:5161:301) Status of lay. 1 and 2 informs you about the status of the connec-
tion. The following indications are possible:
Table 3-13 Status Indications Status of lay. 1 and 2
Indication Description
initialized: The protection interface is not connected and is in the Initial state.
PI connected: The protection interface is connected to the protection interface of the
partner device.
PI data fault: The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after .
PI data failure: The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after .
not existing: The protection interface has not been assigned to a communication
channel.

The indication (_:5161:302) Status of lay. 3 and 4 informs about errors during the connection
establishment. The following indications values are possible:
Status Indication Description
no error: No errors occurred during the connection establishment.
SW ver.incomp.: The connection is not established because the firmware versions of the
devices are incompatible.
Update the firmware.
wrong dev. ID: The connection is not established because the device address of the local
device or the partner device is incorrect or set incorrectly.
Check the settings for the parameters Address of device 1 to
Address of device n (_:5131:102 and following).
const.sett.error: The connection is not established because the parameters are set differ-
ently.
Check whether the parameter (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit
rate has been set the same in all devices in the device combination.
diff.sett error: The connection is not established because the parameters are set differ-
ently.
The line differential protection settings for the connected devices are
incompatible. Check whether the devices are set to operate with or without
line differential protection.
The rated current of the line (parameter (_:9001:101) Rated
current) must have the same setting in all devices.
With a transformer in the line, the (_:9001:103) Rated apparent
power must be set to the same value in all devices.
net mirroring The connection is not established. The protection interface is receiving its
own data.
Check the wiring.
wrong dev. idx. The connection is not established because the device index of the local
device or the partner device is incorrect.
Check the setting for the parameter (_:5131:101) Local device is
device.
Furthermore, the following output signals are available:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Output Signal Description

(_:5161:303) Connection The signal Connection broken indicates that during a parameterized
broken time (parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after) no tele-
grams or faulty telegrams were continuously received. If the indication
Connection broken is issued, the affected protection connection is
reset. This can cause the blocking of an active line differential protection
or a ring topology can change to a chain topology.
(_:5161:316) Error The signal Error rate / min exc. indicates that the set maximum
rate / min exc. error rate per minute (parameter (_:5161:106) Max. error rate
per min) has been exceeded.
In this manner, a brief increase of the operate time and thus of the fault-
clearing time is possible for the protection functions using the protection
interface. If you use the Line differential protection function, this remains
in effect.
(_:5161:317) Error The signal Error rate / hour exc. indicates that the set maximum
rate / hour exc. error rate per hour (parameter (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per
hour) has been exceeded.
in effect.
(_:5161:318) Time delay The signal Time delay exceeded indicates that the threshold value
exceeded for the set signal-transit time (parameter (_:5161:109) Delay time
threshold) has been exceeded.
Increased transmission times only affect the operate time, and therefore
the fault-clearing time of the protection functions using the protection
in effect.
(_:5161:319) Time delay The signal Time delay different indicates that the threshold value for
different the difference in signal runtimes in the transmission and reception direction
(asymmetrical runtimes) has been exceeded. The setting value results from
the setting value of the parameter (_:5161:110) Difference Tx and
Rx time.
The indication is visible only if the parameter (_:5161:113) Synchro-
nization is not set to External synch. only.
If the indication Time delay different appears, the Line differential
protection function is no longer working properly and is ineffective.
(_:5161:320) Time delay The signal Time delay jump indicates that the signal runtimes of the
jump data changed abruptly. This is caused by a switchover of the communica-
tion path in the communication network.
(_:5161:321) PI The signal PI synchronized indicates that the synchronization with
synchronized microsecond accuracy of the measured values transferred between the local
device and partner device is working correctly.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

(_:5161:340) Telegram The signal Telegram lost indicates that an expected telegram has failed
lost to arrive or a faulty telegram has been received. Reasons for this can be for
example switching operations in the primary system or operations on the
components of the communication network.
If you want to assign the communication failures or faults to other events,
route the signal Telegram lost temporarily into the operational log.
Note: If the signal is constantly routed, the operational log can overflow.
Siemens recommends routing the signal only for clarification of problems.
(_:5161:343) Partner The indication shows the address of the partner device. A value of 0 means
that no partner address is available.
(_:5161:323) PPS: time This indication is only visible if you are working with a synchronous pulse.
del. unsym. The indication shows that the difference in the signal runtimes between
the sending and receiving path exceeds the value set with the parameter
(_:5161:110) Difference Tx and Rx time.
Note: The Line differential protection function remains effective.
(_:5161:324) PI with This indication is only visible if you are working with a synchronous pulse.
PPS synchron. This indication is only visible if, in parallel to synchronization with the
synchronization pulse, you are also working with the synchronization via
telegram measurement. If both synchronization methods are working prop-
erly, the indication PI with PPS synchron. = RAISING is generated.
Measured Values of the Protection Interface

The protection interface provides the following measured value for the diagnosis of the protection-interface
communication:
Measured Value Description
(_:5161:308) Tx tel/h Telegrams transmitted during the last hour
(_:5161:309) Rx tel/h Telegrams received during the last hour
(_:5161:310) Tx tel/min Telegrams transmitted during the last minute
(_:5161:311) Rx tel/min Telegrams received during the last minute
(_:5161:312) Tx err/h Transmission failure rate during the last hour
(_:5161:313) Rx err/h Receive error rate during the last hour
(_:5161:314) Tx err/min Transmission failure rate during the last minute
(_:5161:315) Rx err/min Receive error rate during the last minute
(_:5161:325) Aver.Δt Average singal runtime (average value of the runtime in transmission and
reception path divided by 2, without external synchronization)
(_:5161:326) Rec. Δt Signal runtime for reception path (with external synchronization)
(_:5161:327) Sen. Δt Signal runtime for transmission path (with external synchronization)
(_:5161:334) Number of telegram failures within the last minute
Miss.tel/min
(_:5161:335) Miss.tel/h Number of telegram failures within the last hour
(_:5161:336) Miss.tel/d Number of telegram failures within the last day
(_:5161:337) Miss.tel/w Number of telegram failures within the last week
(_:5161:338) M. loss/d Longest lasting telegram failure within the last day
(_:5161:339) M. loss/w Longest lasting telegram failures within the last week
(_:5161:331) Recept. Receipt of a telegram (0 = no receipt, 1 = receipt)
You can use this indication to make the telegram exchange visible in the
fault record.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
NOTE
i You can reset the measured values of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Release measured values.
Indications of External Synchronization

The following indications are visible only if the parameter (_:5161:117) External synchronization
is set to PPS electrical (Port G).
• (_:9181:501) >PPS pulse loss

• (_:9181:301) PPS pulse loss
• (_:9181:302) PPS pulse
• (_:9181:303) PPS pulse OK
The following indications are visible only if the parameter (_:5161:117) External synchronization
is set to IEEE 1588.
• (_:304) Synchronization loss

• (_:305) Synchronization OK
• (_:306) Synchronization pulse
(_:9181:500) >Block This indication shows the blocking of the external synchronization via a
stage binary input. The external synchronization can be set to inactive through
this binary input indication.
(_:9181:501) >PPS pulse The binary input (_:9181:501) >PPS pulse loss can be used to
loss signal an externally detected failure in the PPS synchronous pulse (for
example, an error message from the satellite receiver). Setting this binary
input also leads to the indication (_:9181:301) PPS pulse loss. The
external synchronization detects immediately that there is a problem with
the connected synchronization pulse. Otherwise, the problem will only be
noticed after approx. 2.1 s – after the test for synchronous-pulse failure.
(_:9181:301) PPS pulse This indication shows that the synchronization has failed. This can be due to
loss the following reasons:
• The input indication (_:9181:501) >PPS pulse loss has

occurred.
• The synchronous pulse has failed.
• The quality of the synchronous pulse is inadequate.
• There is another problem with the synchronization source.
If no further PPS synchronous pulse is received within 2.1 s, the time-out
monitoring responds. If no new second pulse occurs after the expiry of
the monitoring time, the indication (_:9181:301) PPS pulse loss is
issued (see Figure 3-77).
(_:9181:302) PPS pulse This indication displays the synchronous pulse directly. As a rule, one pulse
is generated per second. This indication works well to make the synchro-
nous pulse visible.
(_:9181:303) PPS pulse This indication shows that the synchronization is working properly.
OK
(_:9181:304) Synchroni- The synchronization has failed. This can be due to a problem with the
zation loss synchronization source.
(_:9181:305) Synchroni- The synchronization is working properly.
zation OK

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
(_:9181:306) Synchroni- You can use this indication to make the virtual synchronous pulse visible. As
zation pulse a rule, one pulse is generated per second.
(_:9181:307) Synchron. If the set synchronization source operates in the global synchronization
imprecise status (SmpSynch) and the time of the synchronization source deviates
from the global time by more than 0.5 ms, the indication Synchron.
impreciseis generated and the Line differential protection becomes
ineffective.
The indication Synchron. imprecise is visible only if the parameter
External synchronization is set to IEEE 1588.
[lo_pps_syn, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-77 Logic for the Generation of the Indication PPS pulse loss
3.6.5.9 Remote Data

Between the devices in a device combination, a data bar is exchanged which can be written or read by the
devices. It can be used for exchanging various signals between the devices. For this, each signal demands a
certain number of data fields.
[dw_data, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-78 Data Bar Exchanged between Devices
The data bar is divided into 3 priorities, which have different transmission rates and data volumes.
For all signals sent, the basic principle is that only pure data contents are transmitted. The quality, for
example, Valid, is not automatically transmitted as well. If you want to transmit the quality as well, for
example, for further processing of GOOSE messages, you must transmit the quality separately, for example,
using CFC. If a function is in test mode, all signals of the function are provided with a test flag. If a signal with
a test flag is transmitted, all signals on the receiving side are provided with a test flag. If the connection is
broken, which means there are devices that cannot be reached anymore, all received signals are flagged with
the quality invalid. Additionally, the value is set to a predefined state after a selectable dropout time or the
last value received can be retained (setting Hold). This can be configured separately for each received signal,
refer to Table 3-17.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Behavior When Devices Are Logged Off or Switched Off

If you log off a device, the behavior of the remote data is not affected. A logged-off device sends remote data
as well. Logged-off devices can also receive and evaluate remote data.
If you switch off a device in the device combination, the remaining devices in the device combination do
not send or receive any remote data. A failsafe state is adopted for the remote data received before that,
according to the settings in the communication mapping in DIGSI. The previously received values can be either
retained or replaced with a dropout value.
If you switch off a logged-off device, the remaining devices keep sending or receiving remote data. The
remote data of a logged-off and switched-off device is no longer available in the communication. The
remaining devices behave as if the logged-off and switched-off device has never been part of the device
combination.
NOTE
i For ACT type signals, only the phase information is transmitted.
Signals that are transferred data fields of priority 1 are sent with every telegram. They are preferably used for
the transmission of rapid signals, for example, release for circuit-breaker intertripping. A strictly deterministic,
rapid transmission is required there.
Signals of priority 2 are transmitted with at least every 2nd telegram. For bit rates >256 kbit, there are no
differences between priority 1 and priority 2.
Priority 3 signals are transmitted at least every 100 ms. This priority is used for transmission of measured and
metered values. Complex values must be routed separately as the real and the imaginary part for transmission.
Measured-value thresholds that lead to an updating of a measured value are set centrally as a property of the
measured value. These measured-value thresholds apply with the corresponding reporting, for example, also
for the transfer via IEC 61850 to a substation automation technology.
Signals which are written to a data area x under a priority on the data bar must be routed to an indication
of the same type in the device reading this information. Otherwise, they are processed incorrectly on the
receiving side. The data bar is organized in terms of bits. For information on the bit requirement of each signal
type, refer to Table 3-16.
Table 3-14 and Table 3-15 show the number of data areas in the data bar in relation to the available baud
rate.
NOTE
i Adjust the parameter (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit rate in each device for the protection
interfaces in a device combination. This determines the number of data areas.
If, for example, in a device combination with 3 devices with a type 2 chain topology 2 devices are connected
via direct optical fibers and 2 devices with a bit rate of 64 kBit/s, the 64 kBit/s section is the limiting factor for
the entire device combination.
Table 3-14 Available Bits – Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 64/128 kBit/s
Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3

Type 1 8 bits 24 bits 128 bits
Table 3-15 Available Bits – Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 512/2048 kBit/s
Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Table 3-16 Requirement in Bits
Signal Type Size in Bits

SP (single-point indication) 1 bit
DP (double-point indication) 2 bits
IN (metered values) 32 bits
MW (measured values)12 32 bits
ACT 4 bits
Table 3-17 Possible Dropout Values
Signal Type Dropout Thresholds

SP (single-point indication) Outgoing, Incoming, Hold
DP (double-point indication) On, Off, Intermediate Position, Disturbed Position,
Hold
IN (metered values) 0, Hold
MW (measured values) 0, Hold
ACT Hold
NOTE
i If the protection link fails, these values can be set on the receiver side.
EXAMPLE
2 devices are connected via a 64-kBit channel. This is a type 1 protection communication. There are 8 bits
available for priority 1. Now, for example, 4 SPS and 2 DPS can be routed:
4 x 1 Bit + 2 x 2 Bits = 8 Bits
NOTE
i Measured values are transmitted as primary values.
EXAMPLE
For the display of the rated current in the receiving device

When Irated = 1000 A in the transmitting device and ILoad = 200 A, the number 200 is displayed in the receiving
device.
Configuration of Remote Data in DIGSI 5:

To configure remote data, navigate in DIGSI 5 through the project tree to the communication mapping.
12 The complex phasors of a measuring point are prerouted

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_comm_select, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-79 Communication Mapping in DIGSI 5
Figure 3-80 to Figure 3-84 show the routing for a type 1 protection communication.
To transmit signals to other devices, these signals must be routed in the communication matrix under
Transmit. Binary inputs 1 and 2 are single-point indications (SPS) and are routed to bit position 1 and bit
position 2 of the transmission with the highest priority (priority 1). For 64 kBit/s, for example, only 8 of
these data areas are available for type 1 protection communication; they are exchanged between the devices
with each telegram. Signals 3 and 4 are double-point indications (DPS), for example, a switch position that
is transmitted by device 1. A double-point indication occupies 2 bit positions on the data bar. In addition, a
measured and metered value are communicated with priority 3.
As a measured or metered value uses 32 bits, value 2 starts at bit position 33. DIGSI 5 shows the next free bit
position.
[sc_ran_sps, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-80 Routing of Single-Point Indications to Protection Communication in Device 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_rang_mw, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-81 Routing of Measured Values to Protection Communication in Device 1
[sc_rang_zw, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-82 Routing of Metered Values to Protection Communication in Device 1
Device 1 also receives signals (in the communication mapping under Receive, see next figure). These signals
must be routed with the other devices under Transmit. The binary outputs 1 and 2 in device 1 receive
their information via the protection communication. This is priority 1 information, which has been routed in
another device to position 3 and 4 of the data bar for transmission. The secure state is predefined in the
Fallback value column. If the protection connection fails, the single-point indication is reset to raising or
cleared as the fallback value or its value is retained (Hold). For signals of the various priorities, you can also
set a dropout time after which the reset (see following figure) to the fallback value occurs, in order to retain
the original state for a short time in the event of brief interruptions. These 3 dropout times apply for all signals
of one transmission priority and are set as parameters.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_remotedata, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-83 Parameterization of Dropout Time for Signals of Different Priorities
[sc_spsemp, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-84 Routing of Single-Point Indications (Receive) to Protection Communication in Device 1
The following figure shows the routing in the 2nd device. Binary inputs 1 and 2 are routed with priority 1 to
bit positions 3 and 4 there. In device 1, bit positions 1 and 2 are already occupied (see Figure 3-80). If you also
route the signals to bit positions 1 and 2, the signals of both devices are then connected to the corresponding
bit position with a logical OR operation. If measured and metered values are routed in the same data areas,
this results in implausible values for the receivers. As a user, you are therefore responsible for the correct
routing.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_baspsr, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-85 Routing of Single-Point Indications to be Sent to Protection Communication in Device 2
The binary outputs 1 and 2 (Receive) in the 2nd device are connected to priority 1 signals 1 and 2 from
the 1st device. This takes place via the data areas at positions 1 and 2 of the data bar, which transfer the
state of the signals. Other devices can also read this information and logically link it to their internal signals.
Here, too, the secure state, which is assumed when the protection connection is interrupted, is entered. This
state depends on the information. With single-point indications, states 0 or 1 make sense. In the case of
double-point indications, bit combinations 00, 01, 10, or 11 are possible to directly signal a disturbed position
upon failure of the protection connection, for example.
Hold is used to retain the state before the failure of the protection connection.
[sc_bausps, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-86 Routing of Received Single-Point Indications to Protection Communication in Device 2
[sc_bausmw, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-87 Routing of Received Measured Values to Protection Communication in Device 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_bauszw, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-88 Routing of Metered Values to Protection Communication in Device 2
3.6.5.10 Constellation Measured Values for Type 1 and Type 2
NOTE
i The constellation measured values are only available for the FG Line.
Each device in the device combination determines measured values predefined by Siemens, known as constel-
lation measured values. You can find the constellation measured values in the DIGSI 5 information routing
under the FG n Device protection comm. > Constell. measured values. The following measured values and
indications are issued for each device:
Measured Value Meaning
(_:1351:6811:302) Vph This measured value shows the voltage of the 3 phases that is synchronized
with all devices of the device combination. The absolute value and angle are
issued for each phase.
(_:1351:6811:303) Iph This measured value shows the current of the 3 phases that is synchronized
(_:1351:6811:300) Dev.adr. This indication shows the device address. This allows you to assign the
measured values and the circuit-breaker position in a better way.
(_:1351:6811:301) CB This indication shows the position of the local circuit breaker and can have
the following values:
• 0:
The switch position of the local circuit breaker is unknown.
• 1
The local circuit breaker is open.
• 2
The local circuit breaker is closed.
The constellation measured values have the following properties:
• They are available on every device in the device combination.

100 % conform to the rated current or the rated voltage of the line (see Figure 3-89). These measured values
are recorded every 2 seconds by the devices and then sent to the other respective devices. At the same time,
the current and voltage values of the different devices are time-synchronous with one another.
When displaying the constellation measured values, the local device is prioritized. The device connected

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
The angle reference depends on the type of the FG Protection communication used:

– The angle values of the voltages show the angle difference between the local and the remote
voltage. The local voltage serves as the reference with an angle of 0°.
– The angle values of the currents show the angle difference between the local and the remote
current. The local current serves as the reference with an angle of 0°.

The angles of the phase-to-ground voltages and the phase currents relate to the voltage VA of the remote
device.
3.6.5.11 Settings

Device combin.
_:5131:102 Device combin.:Address 1 to 65534 101
of device 1
of device 2
of device 3
of device 4
of device 5
of device 6

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

_:5131:101 Device combin.:Local 1 to 6 1
device is device
_:5131:122 Device combin.:Lowest • 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
appearing bit rate
• 128 kBit/s
• 512 kBit/s
• 2048 kBit/s
_:5131:125 Device combin.:Number 2 to 6 6
of devices
_:5131:127 Device combin.:Dev. • no yes
comb. is time source
• yes
Prot. interf.1
_:5161:1 Prot. interf.1:Mode • off on
• on
_:5161:105 Prot. interf.1:Max. error 0.000 % to 100.000 % 1.000 %
rate per hour
rate per min
_:5161:107 Prot. interf.1:Distur- 0.05 s to 2.00 s 0.10 s
bance alarm after
_:5161:108 Prot. interf.1:Transm. 0.0 s to 6.0 s 6.0 s
fail. alarm after
_:5161:109 Prot. interf.1:Delay time 0.1 ms to 30.0 ms 30.0 ms
threshold
_:5161:110 Prot. interf.1:Difference 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms 0.100 ms
Tx and Rx time
_:5161:113 Prot. interf.1:Synchroni- • External synchron. off External
zation synchron. off
• Telegr. and ext. synch.
• Telegr. or ext. synch.
• External synch. only
_:5161:117 Prot. interf.1:External • PPS electrical (Port G) PPS electrical
synchronization (Port G)
• IEEE 1588
3.6.5.12 Information List

(Type)
Device combin.
_:5131:52 Device combin.:Behavior ENS O
_:5131:53 Device combin.:Health ENS O
_:5131:301 Device combin.:Status of topo. recog. ENS O
_:5131:302 Device combin.:Topology is ENS O
_:5131:303 Device combin.:Devices form ENS O
_:5131:304 Device combin.:Number of detect. dev. INS O
_:5131:305 Device combin.:Fct. logout device 1 SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

(Type)
_:5131:312 Device combin.:Device 1 available SPS O
Prot. interf.1
_:5161:81 Prot. interf.1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5161:500 Prot. interf.1:>Sync reset SPS I
_:5161:341 Prot. interf.1:Reset synchronization SPC C
_:5161:342 Prot. interf.1:Reset measurements SPC C
_:5161:52 Prot. interf.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5161:53 Prot. interf.1:Health ENS O
_:5161:301 Prot. interf.1:Status of lay. 1 and 2 ENS O
_:5161:303 Prot. interf.1:Connection broken SPS O
_:5161:316 Prot. interf.1:Error rate / min exc. SPS O
_:5161:317 Prot. interf.1:Error rate / hour exc. SPS O
_:5161:318 Prot. interf.1:Time delay exceeded SPS O
_:5161:319 Prot. interf.1:Time delay different SPS O
_:5161:320 Prot. interf.1:Time delay jump SPS O
_:5161:321 Prot. interf.1:PI synchronized SPS O
_:5161:340 Prot. interf.1:Telegram lost SPS O
_:5161:308 Prot. interf.1:Tx tel/h MV O
_:5161:309 Prot. interf.1:Rx tel/h MV O
_:5161:310 Prot. interf.1:Tx tel/min MV O
_:5161:311 Prot. interf.1:Rx tel/min MV O
_:5161:312 Prot. interf.1:Tx err/h MV O
_:5161:313 Prot. interf.1:Rx err/h MV O
_:5161:314 Prot. interf.1:Tx err/min MV O
_:5161:315 Prot. interf.1:Rx err/min MV O
_:5161:334 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/min MV O
_:5161:335 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/h MV O
_:5161:336 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/d MV O
_:5161:337 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/w MV O
_:5161:338 Prot. interf.1:M. loss/d MV O
_:5161:339 Prot. interf.1:M. loss/w MV O
_:5161:331 Prot. interf.1:Recept. MV O
_:5161:323 Prot. interf.1:PPS: time del. unsym. SPS O
_:5161:324 Prot. interf.1:PI with PPS synchron. SPS O
_:5161:325 Prot. interf.1:Aver.Δt MV O
_:5161:326 Prot. interf.1:Rec. Δt MV O
_:5161:327 Prot. interf.1:Sen. Δt MV O
Ext. Synchron.
_:9181:500 Ext. Synchron.:>Block stage SPS I

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

(Type)
_:9181:501 Ext. Synchron.:>PPS pulse loss SPS I
_:9181:52 Ext. Synchron.:Behavior ENS O
_:9181:54 Ext. Synchron.:Inactive SPS O
_:9181:53 Ext. Synchron.:Health ENS O
_:9181:301 Ext. Synchron.:PPS pulse loss SPS O
_:9181:303 Ext. Synchron.:PPS pulse OK SPS O
_:9181:302 Ext. Synchron.:PPS pulse SPS O
_:9181:304 Ext. Synchron.:Synchronization loss SPS O
_:9181:305 Ext. Synchron.:Synchronization OK SPS O
_:9181:306 Ext. Synchron.:Synchronization pulse SPS O
Meas.val.dev.1
_:1351:6811:300 Meas.val.dev.1:Dev.adr. INS O
_:1351:6811:301 Meas.val.dev.1:CB ENS O
_:1351:6811:302 Meas.val.dev.1:Vph WYE O
_:1351:6811:303 Meas.val.dev.1:Iph WYE O
Meas.val.dev.2
Meas.val.dev.3
Meas.val.dev.4
Meas.val.dev.5
_:1351:6931:300 Meas val.dev.5:Dev.adr. INS O
_:1351:6931:301 Meas val.dev.5:CB ENS O
_:1351:6931:302 Meas val.dev.5:Vph WYE O
_:1351:6931:303 Meas val.dev.5:Iph WYE O
Meas.val.dev.6

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.6.6 Advanced Protection Communication
3.6.6.1 Overview
The advanced protection communication contains all functionalities of classic protection communication. The
view of parameters and indications is structured differently in DIGSI 5. In addition, the advanced protection
communication supports the IP-based communication protocol.
You can easily change the number of devices in the device combination. Further differences include support
for external synchronization sources and an exchange of phase-selective information while sending and
receiving.
In the DIGSI 5 library, you can find the available function groups for the advanced protection communication
in the Advanced protection communication folder. The following function-group types can be instantiated:
• FG Protection communication type 1 (line differential protection)
• FG Protection communication type 2

For configurations with line differential protection, instantiate the FG Protection communication type 1 (line
differential protection). In all other cases, instantiate the FG Protection communication type 2.
3.6.6.2 Advanced Protection Communication in the Overall System

The Advanced protection communication is integrated as follows in the overall system:
[dw_advanced_protcom_compl_system, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-90 Advanced Protection Communication in the Overall System
(1) The following applies for the FG Line and the FG Voltage/Current 3-phase: You must route the
connection between the protection FG and the FG Protection communication in DIGSI 5.
(2) You must assign a channel to the protection interface, see Parameter: PI assignment, Page 183.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.6.6.3 Structure of the FG Protection Communication

The instantiated FG Protection communication contains the function blocks (FB) for a protection interface
and for the device combination. If you need a 2nd protection interface, add another instance.
The FG Protection communication contains the following functionalities and function blocks:
• FB Device combination
• FB for the Protection interface

In addition, the following FBs can be instantiated:
• A 2nd protection interface

You can find the 2nd protection interface in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Extended protection
communication > Second protection interface.
• 1 or 2 FBs for the External synchronization of the transmitted measured values by an external synchro-
nization pulse (1-second pulse, PPS) or via the IEEE 1588 synchronization protocol
You can find the FB External synchronization in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Extended protection
communication > Synchronization.
• The FB Remote data is instantiated automatically, as soon as you configure remote data.
• The FB Phase swap
[dw_structure_FG_protcom_advanced, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-91 Structure of the FG Extended Protection Communication
Device Combination
The function Device combination manages the devices that exchange data via the protection communica-
tion.
The following FBs are preconfigured in the device combination:
• FB General
• FBs for each device in the device combination

In the Device combination, you configure general settings for the protection communication and the device
addresses. The function Device combination issues the following indications:
• General indications like the

– Amount of devices
– Type and status of the device topology

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
• Indications of the devices in the device combination like:

– The availability of the device
– The state of the device, that is whether the device is logged on or off in the device combination
– Measured values of the device that have been recorded and synchronized through the device
combination (constellation measured values)
– Test of the function Line differential protection in the device combination (only for protection
communication type 1)
– Test of the function Line differential protection in the local device (only for protection communica-
tion type 1)
Protection Interface
The FB Protection interface transmits and receives signals and measured values to/from the partner device.
For this, the protection interface uses the channel of a communication module.
External Synchronization
Measured values that are acquired and exchanged in the devices at the same time, with microsecond accuracy
are transmitted via the protection communication. The measured values can be synchronized as follows:
• Internally via the telegram measurement with the Ping-Pong method
• Externally via
– An external, synchronous pulse 1-second-pulse (PPS)
– Via the IEEE 1588 protocol
If you want to use an external synchronization, you must instantiate the FB External synchronization.
You can use a different synchronization procedure for the 2nd protection interface than for the 1st
protection interface.
Remote Data
If you want to exchange selected and user-specific data or measured values via the protection communication,
you must use the Remote data function. If you route a specific signal or a measured value to the protection
communication, the device automatically creates the Remote data functionality. The routed signals are then
transmitted and received via the protection interface. The available bandwidth limits the amount of remote
data that can be transmitted.
Phase Swap
If you want to exchange information via the protection communication with a device showing phases with
a different sequence but with the same rotating field as your device, the SIPROTEC 5 device can swap the
phase information when sending and receiving. It is no longer necessary to swap phases when connecting the
current transformers.
This use case exists on some tie lines of different power-system operators.
For more information, refer to 3.6.6.12 Description Phase Swapping and 3.6.6.13 Setting Notes for Phase
Swapping.
3.6.6.4 Configuration of the Advanced Protection Communication in DIGSI 5
Steps during Configuration

Siemens recommends the following procedure when configuring the advanced protection communication:
• Select the desired communication module.
• Select the protocol Adv.Prot.Intf..

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
• The further parameterization depends on the selected communication module and is described in the
following under:
– Advanced Protection Interface for a USART Communication Module, Page 180
– Advanced Protection Interface for an Ethernet-BD Communication Module, Page 182
Advanced Protection Interface for a USART Communication Module
[sc_USART_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-92 USART Communication Module: Selection of the Protocol Advanced Protection Interface
After selecting the protocol, click Settings in the right column to get to the connection settings of the USART
protection-interface module for channel 1.
[sc_USART_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-93 USART Communication Module: Settings for the Advanced Protection Interface
Parameter: Connection via
• Default setting (_:105) Connection via = fiber optic

The Connection via parameter is used to set the bit rate required for the protection interface. Different
discrete values can be entered depending on the means of communication (see following table).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Table 3-18 Communication Media
Communication Media See Setting Value Bit Rate

Fiber-optic direct connection Figure 3-5 fiber optic 2 MBit/s
7 to
Figure 3-6
1
2
2
2
Repeater 512 communication converter Figure 3-6 repeater 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
5
CC-CC-128 communication converter Figure 3-6 CCPW 128 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
4
CC-2M-512 communication converter Figure 3-6 CC2M 512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
3
Multiplexer with C37.94 interface Figure 3-6 C37.94 1 * 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
6 C37.94 2 * 64 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
C37.94 8 * 64 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
Other (freely adjustable bit rates for a direct 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
connection for special applications) 128 kBit/s 128 kBit/s
512 kBit/s 512 kBit/s
2048 kBit/s 2048 kbit/s
Parameter: Multiplex operation
• Default setting (_:112) Multiplex operation = no

With the parameter Multiplex operation, you can designate the physical channel for multiplex opera-
tion. You can then route 2 protection interfaces to this channel.
Refer to 3.6.3 Function Description.
NOTE
i For safety reasons, you cannot route 2 protection interfaces from the same device combination to one
channel, as this results in apparent redundancy.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Advanced Protection Interface for an Ethernet-BD Communication Module
[sc_ETH-BD_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-94 Ethernet-BD Communication Module: Selection of the Protocol Advanced Protection Interface
After selecting the protocol, click Settings in the right column to get to the connection settings of the
Ethernet-BD communication module for channel 1.
[sc_ETH-BD_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-95 Ethernet-BD Communication Module: Settings for the Advanced Protection Interface
Parameter: UDP Port
• Default setting (_:112) User port = 33000

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
With the UDP port parameter, you set the value of the destination port in the UDP header of the protection-
interface IP messages. You must set the same value for the parameter UDP port for all protection devices
of a device combination that use the IP-based protection interface. Different device combinations can use
the same value for the UDP port parameter. Normally, the default setting can always be applied. It can be
necessary, for example, due to firewall policies, to configure a UDP port that differs from the default setting.
Parameterize the IP address of the Ethernet-BD communication module in the properties of the module.
[sc_IPadr, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-96 Parameterization of the IP Address for the Ethernet-BD Communication Module
The configuration and parameterization of the protection-interface communication module is now complete.
3.6.6.5 Setting Notes for the Protection Interface

The chapter provides setting notes for the logical protection interface (FB Protection interface).
Parameter: PI assignment
• Default setting (_:5161:120) PI assignment = Setting options depend on configura-

tion
In addition, you must select the channel for the protection interface in DIGSI 5 as follows: Project tree > Prot.
com. > Prot. interf..
In the input area under PI assignment, select the channel of a communication module that supports
the required protection-interface protocol. As a prerequisite for this, you must have selected the protocol
Advanced protection interface for the channel of the desired communication module, see
3.6.6.4 Configuration of the Advanced Protection Communication in DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_WSselect, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-97 Assignment of the Protection-Interface Channel to the Protection Interface
Parameter: Max. error rate per hour
• Default setting (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per hour = 1.0 %

If the number of faulty telegrams per hour exceeds the value set in the parameter Max. error rate per
hour, you receive the error message Error rate / hour exc..
Parameter: Max. error rate per min
• Default setting (_:5161:106) Max. error rate per min = 1.0 %

If the number of faulty telegrams per minute exceeds the value set in the parameter Max. error rate per
min, you receive the error message Error rate / min exc..
Parameter: Disturbance alarm after
• Default setting (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after = 100 ms

With the parameter Disturbance alarm after, you determine the time delay after which faulty or
missing telegrams are signaled as disturbed with the indication Status of lay. 1 and 2 = PI data
fault.
Parameter: Transm. fail. alarm after
• Default setting (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after = 6.0 s

With the parameter Transm. fail. alarm after, you determine the time delay after which a communi-
cation failure is signaled with the indication Status of lay. 1 and 2 = PI data failure.
Parameter: Delay time threshold
• Default setting (_:5161:109) Delay time threshold = 30.0 ms

The time taken to transmit and receive a signal via a protection connection is called the signal-transit time.
You can monitor the signal-transit time. For the Delay time threshold, the default setting is selected in
such a way that it is not exceeded by normal communication networks. If the signal-transit time is exceeded
during operation (for example, upon switchover to another transmission path), the indication Time delay
exceeded is issued.
Increased runtimes only affect the operate time, and therefore the fault-clearing time of the protection
functions that use the protection interface. If you use the Line differential protection function, this remains
in effect.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Parameter: Difference Tx and Rx time
• Default setting (_:5161:110) Difference Tx and Rx time = 0.1 ms

For a time synchronization of the measured values with microsecond accuracy by means of telegram measure-
ment, the signal-transit times in the transmission and receive direction must be approximately the same. The
device monitors the signal-transit times in the transmission and reception direction.
With the parameter Difference Tx and Rx time, you can set a maximum permitted signal-transit
time difference between the transmission and reception paths (runtimes unbalanced). Set the parameter
Difference Tx and Rx time to the maximum difference expected.
Set this value to 0 for a direct fiber-optic connection. A higher value is necessary for transmission via commu-
nication networks. 0.1 ms (recommended setting value) is the reference value.
If the difference in the signal-transit times between the transmission and reception path exceeds the set value,
the indication Time delay jump is issued.
If the difference in the signal-transit times between the transmission and reception path exceeds the set value
and remains for more than 5 s, the indication Time delay different is issued. The Line differential
NOTE
i The parameter Difference Tx and Rx time is only visible if the Line differential protection function
is instantiated and the parameter Synchronization is not set to External synch. only.
NOTE
i If you use a multiplexer with a C37.94 interface as a communication medium, Siemens recommends a
setting value of 0.25 ms to 0.6 ms.
Parameter: Synchronization
• Default setting (_:5161:113) Synchronization = External synchron. off

With the parameter Synchronization, you control the time synchronization of the measured values with
microsecond accuracy.
The parameter Synchronization is only visible if you have instantiated the FB External synchronization
from the Global DIGSI 5 library in the FG Protection communication.
If you have not instantiated the FB External synchronization, the measured values are time-synchronized
internally with microsecond accuracy.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

External synchron. off The external synchronization is disabled:
No external synchronization is performed on the protection interface. Select
this setting value if you do not expect any differences between the signal-
transit times in the transmission and reception directions. Then, the meas-
ured values are only synchronized internally with the telegram measure-
ment.
Telegr. and ext. synch. Synchronization via telegram measurement and external synchronization:
urement, supported by the external synchronization. The synchronization
is possible via the IEEE 1588 protocol or via the synchronous pulse of a
satellite receiver and configurable in the FB External synchronization.
In this case, an existing line differential protection is only enabled when a
new connection is established and one of the following conditions is met.
• The protection communication link is synchronized with the help of

the external synchronization.
• Symmetric signal-transit times are signaled via the binary input signal
>Sync reset or the controllable Reset synchronization. This
means that the signal-transit times are the same in the send and
receive direction.
Telegr. or ext. synch. Telegram measurement or external synchronization:
urement, supported by the external synchronization. The synchronization
is possible via the IEEE 1588 protocol or via the synchronous pulse of a
satellite receiver and configurable in the FB External synchronization.
An existing line differential protection is enabled immediately upon
renewed establishment of a connection (data telegrams are received). The
internal synchronization is used up to synchronization.
External synch. only External synchronization only:
The measured values are synchronized only via the external synchroniza-
tion.
You can set the external synchronization in the FB External synchroniza-
tion. This enables synchronization via the IEEE 1588 protocol or via the
NOTE
i If the protection interface is connected to a channel on a USART communication module (see Parameter: PI
assignment, Page 183), the external synchronization is used to take into account the signal-transit times in
the transmission and receive direction.
If the external synchronization fails for a short time, for example, due to a receiving interference or an
unfavorable satellite position for a brief period, the internal synchronization via the telegram measurement
is still active.
NOTE
i If the protection interface is connected to a channel on an Ethernet-BD communication module (see

Parameter: PI assignment, Page 183), the parameter Synchronization is permanently set to External
synch. only.
Parameter: FB External synchron.
• Default setting (_:5161:117) FB External synchron. = Ext. synchronization 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
With the external synchronization, the time synchronization of the measured values with microsecond accu-
racy is possible through an external synchronization source.
The parameter FB External synchron. is only visible if you have instantiated at least 1 FB External
synchronization from the Global DIGSI 5 library into the FG Protection communication. You can instantiate a
maximum of 2 FBs for external synchronization.
With the parameter FB External synchron., you specify whether the protection interface uses the FB
Ext. synchronization 1 or the FB Ext. synchronization 2 for the synchronization. You parameterize the
synchronization source in the corresponding FB External synchronization, see 3.6.6.9 Setting Notes for
External Synchronization.
NOTE
i The external synchronization is possible separately for each protection interface.
Parameter: Check synchron.-source
• Default setting (_:5161:121) Check synchron.-source = yes

With the parameter Check synchron.-source, you can switch the synchronization-sources check on
or off. During the check of the synchronization sources on the ends of a protection connection, a check
is conducted as to whether both synchronization sources are working in the same synchronization status
SmpSynch.
If both synchronization sources are working in the synchronization status SmpSynch = global, the inspec-
tion has been passed.
If both synchronization sources are working in the synchronization status SmpSynch = local, that is
decoupled from a global reference time, an additional check is conducted as to whether the synchronization
source (gmIdentity) is the same. Synchronicity can only be guaranteed if the synchronization sources are
the same.
If the synchronization sources display a different synchronization status, that is one displays the synchroniza-
tion status SmpSynch = local and the other the synchronization status SmpSynch = global, synchroniza-
tion cannot be guaranteed.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Check synchron.-source = yes.
If you have problems with the synchronization-source check, you can switch off the synchronization-source
check. Switch off the synchronization-source check only if the synchronization sources are synchronous at the
end of their protection connection.
The parameter Check synchron.-source is visible only if the parameter (_:5161:113) Synchroni-
zation is set to External synch. only.
NOTE
i If you use PPS electrical (port G) as the synchronization source, the synchronization status (SmpSynch) is
permanently set to global.
If you use PPS optical (USART) as the synchronization source, you can use the parameter (_:107)
Received. SmpSynch to set the synchronization status to (SmpSynch) local or global.
For a synchronization with microsecond accuracy, for example, for the Line differential protection, set the
parameter (_:107) Received. SmpSynch = global.
3.6.6.6 Indications and Measured Values of the Advanced Protection Interface

Each individual protection interface provides different indications for commissioning and diagnostics of
communication:

The indication (_:5161:301) Status of lay. 1 and 2 informs you about the status of the connec-
tion. The following indications are possible:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Table 3-19 Status Indications Status of lay. 1 and 2
initialized: The protection interface is not connected and is in the Initial state.
PI connected: The protection interface is connected to the protection interface of the
partner device.
PI data fault: The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after.
PI data failure: The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after.
not existing: The protection interface has not been assigned to a communication
channel.

The indication (_:5161:302) Status of lay. 3 and 4 informs about errors during the connection
establishment. The following indications are possible:
Status indication Description
no error: No errors occurred during the connection establishment.
SW ver.incomp.: The connection is not established because the firmware versions of the
devices are incompatible.
Update the firmware.
wrong dev. ID: The connection is not established because the device address of the local
device or the partner device is incorrect or set incorrectly.
Check the settings for the parameters Address of device 1 to
Address of device n (_:5131:102 and following).
const.sett.error: The connection is not established because the parameters are set differ-
ently.
Check whether the parameter (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit
rate has been set the same in all devices in the device combination.
diff.sett error: The connection is not established because the parameters are set differ-
ently.
The line differential protection settings for the connected devices are
incompatible. Check whether both devices are set to operate with or
without line differential protection.
The rated current of the line (parameter (_:9001:101) Rated
current) must have the same setting in all devices.
With a transformer in the line, the (_:9001:103) Rated apparent
power must be set to the same value in all devices.
net mirroring The connection is not established. The protection interface is receiving its
own data.
Check the wiring.
wrong dev. idx. The connection is not established because the device index of the local
device or the partner device is incorrect.
Check the setting for the parameter (_:5131:101) Local device is
device.
Furthermore, the following output signals are available:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

(_:5161:303) Connection The signal Connection broken indicates that during a parameterized
broken time (parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after) no tele-
grams or faulty telegrams were continuously received. If the indication
Connection broken is issued, the affected protection connection is
reset. This can cause the blocking of an active line differential protection
or a ring topology can change to a chain topology.
(_:5161:316) Error The signal Error rate / min exc. indicates that the set maximum
rate / min exc. error rate per minute (Parameter (_:5161:106) Max. error rate
per min) has been exceeded.
in effect.
(_:5161:317) Error The signal Error rate / hour exc. indicates that the set maximum
rate / hour exc. error rate per hour (Parameter (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per
hour) has been exceeded.
In this manner, a brief increase in operate time and thus the fault-clearing
time is possible for the protection functions using the protection interface.
If you use the Line differential protection function, this remains in effect.
(_:5161:318) Time delay The signal Time delay exceeded indicates that the threshold value
exceeded for the set signal runtime (parameter (_:5161:109) Delay time
threshold) has been exceeded.
Increased runtimes only affect the operate time, and therefore the fault-
clearing time of the protection functions using the protection interface. If
you use the Line differential protection function, this remains in effect.
(_:5161:319) Time delay The signal Time delay different indicates that the threshold value for
different the difference in signal runtimes in the transmission and reception direction
(asymmetrical runtimes) has been exceeded. The setting value results from
the setting value of the parameter (_:5161:110) Difference Tx and
Rx time.
If the indication Time delay different appears, the Line differential
(_:5161:320) Time delay The signal Time delay jump indicates that the signal runtimes of the
jump data changed abruptly. This is caused by a switchover of the communica-
tion path in the communication network.
(_:5161:321) PI The signal PI synchronized indicates that the synchronization with
synchronized microsecond accuracy of the measured values transferred between the local
device and partner device is working correctly.
(_:5161:340) Telegram The signal Telegram lost indicates that an expected telegram has failed
lost to arrive or a faulty telegram has been received.
If you want to assign the communication failures or faults to other events,
route the signal Telegram lost temporarily into the operational log.
Such events can be switching operations in the primary system or opera-
tions on the components of the communication network.
Note: If the signal is constantly routed, the operational log can overflow.
Siemens recommends routing the signal only for clarification of problems.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

(_:5161:343) Partner The indication shows the address of the partner device. A value of 0 means
that no partner address is available.
(_:5161:323) PPS: time This indication is only visible if you are working with a synchronous pulse.
del. unsym. The indication shows that the difference in the signal runtimes between
the sending and receiving path exceeds the value set with the parameter
(_:5161:110) Difference Tx and Rx time.
Note: The Line differential protection function remains effective.
(_:5161:324) PI with This indication is only visible if you are working with a synchronous pulse.
PPS synchron. This indication is only visible if, in parallel to synchronization with the
synchronization pulse, you are also working with the synchronization via
telegram measurement. If both synchronization methods are working prop-
erly, the indication PI with PPS synchron. = RAISING is generated.
Measured Values of the Protection Interface

The protection interface provides the following measured value for the diagnosis of the protection-interface
communication:
(_:5161:308) Tx tel/h Telegrams transmitted during the last hour
(_:5161:309) Rx tel/h Telegrams received during the last hour
(_:5161:310) Tx tel/min Telegrams transmitted during the last minute
(_:5161:311) Rx tel/min Telegrams received during the last minute
(_:5161:312) Tx err/h Transmission failure rate during the last hour
(_:5161:313) Rx err/h Receive error rate during the last hour
(_:5161:314) Tx err/min Transmission failure rate during the last minute
(_:5161:315) Rx err/min Receive error rate during the last minute
(_:5161:325) Aver.Δt Average signal runtime (average value of the runtime in transmission and
reception direction divided by 2, without external synchronization)
(_:5161:326) Rec. Δt Signal runtime for reception path (with external synchronization)
(_:5161:327) Sen. Δt Signal runtime for transmission path (with external synchronization)
(_:5161:334) Number of telegram failures within the last minute
Miss.tel/min
(_:5161:335) Miss.tel/h Number of telegram failures within the last hour
(_:5161:336) Miss.tel/d Number of telegram failures within the last day
(_:5161:337) Miss.tel/w Number of telegram failures within the last week
(_:5161:338) M. loss/d Longest lasting telegram failure within the last day
(_:5161:339) M. loss/w Longest lasting telegram failures within the last week
(_:5161:331) Recept. Receipt of a telegram (0 = no receipt, 1 = receipt)
You can use this indication to make the telegram exchange visible in the
fault record.
NOTE
i You can reset the measured values of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > Protection comm. (Type x) > Protection interface y > Reset measured values.
3.6.6.7 Setting Notes for the Device Combination

In the Project tree > Settings > Protection comm. (type 1) or Protection comm. (type 2), select the
function block Device combination. In the input area, you parameterize the general settings for the device
combination, instantiate the number of devices in the device combination, and set the parameters for each
device. A device combination consists of at least 2 devices.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Parameter: Local device is device
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Local device is device = 1

With the Local device is device parameter, you set the index (number) of your device in the device
combination. A maximum of 6 devices can be present in a device combination.
Parameter: Lowest appearing bit rate
• Default setting (_:2311:122) Lowest appearing bit rate = 64 kBit/s

With the parameter Lowest appearing bit rate, you set the lowest bit rate occurring in the device
combination. This value determines the maximum number of signals and measured values to be transferred in
the Remote data function within the device combination.
EXAMPLE:
For a device combination consisting of 3 devices in a ring topology with 2 fiber-optic connections (2 MBit/s)
and a 64-kBit/s connection, set the smallest value (64 kBit/s) in each device.
Apart from the default value, you can set the following bit rates:
• 128 kBit/s
• 512 kBit/s
• 2048 kBit/s
NOTE
i If you use optical fibers for all protection connections, set the value to 2048 kBit/s.
Connection mode
• Default setting (_:2311:126) Connection mode = SIPROTEC 5

With the parameter Connection mode, you select the device type with which the SIPROTEC 5 device works
in the device combination via the protection connections.
NOTE
i As soon as a SIPROTEC 4 device is present in the device combination, the SIPROTEC 5 devices must operate
in a compatibility mode. For this reason, the parameter Connection mode must be set to the same
value in all SIPROTEC 5 devices in the device combination. Select the type of SIPROTEC 4 device from the
following table:

SIPROTEC 5 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with a SIPROTEC 5 device in the device combi-
nation.
SIPROTEC 4 7SD610 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with a SIPROTEC 4 differential protection
device 7SD610 with firmware version V4.72 and higher in the device combi-
nation.
SIPROTEC 4 7SD5 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with a SIPROTEC 4 differential protection
device 7SD5x with firmware version V4.72 and higher in the device combi-
nation.
SIPROTEC 4 7SA5/6 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with a SIPROTEC 4 distance protection device
7SA522 and 7SA6x with firmware version V4.70 and higher in the device
combination.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Parameter: Dev. comb. is time source
• Default setting (_:2311:129) Dev. comb. is time source = yes

The parameter Dev. comb. is time source is only visible if you have instantiated several function
groups Protection comm. and you have selected the setting value PI for the parameters Time source 1 or
Time source 2.
The parameter Dev. comb. is time source determines from which FG Protection comm. the time is
taken over.
Parameter: Protection com.
• Default setting (_:2311:128) Protection com. = Type 1 (Line diff. prot.)

The parameter Protection com. is write-protected and displays only the type of the instantiated device
combination.
The device combination Type 1 (Line diff. prot.) supports the function Line differential protection.
The device combination Type 2 (no Line diff. pr.) does not support the function Line differential
protection.
NOTE
i In the Global DIGSI 5 library, the function groups Protection communication type 1 (line diff. protection)
and Protection com. Type 2 are available for the advanced protection communication. When instanti-
ating the respective function group, the corresponding type of the device combination is automatically
pre-instantiated.
NOTE
i If you have instantiated the FG Protection com. Type 2, the Device combination Type 2 is automatically
pre-instantiated in this FG and the Line differential protection function is not supported.
If you subsequently want to use the Line differential protection function in the device combination of the
FG Protection com. Type 2, proceed as follows:
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, delete the function block Device combination from the FG protection
comm. (type 2).
• Instantiate the function block Device combination type 1 (line diff. protection) from the Global
DIGSI 5 library into the FG Protection com. Type 2.
• Parameterize the device combination in the input area again.
• Reroute the indications of the device combination in the DIGSI 5 information routing.
All other parameterizations and routings are retained!
Parameter: Device index
• Default setting (_:22711:101) Device index = 1

The value of the parameter Device index is the number of the device in the device combination. Set the
device index in all devices of a device combination for the same devices in the same way. The device indices
must start with 1 and be incremented continuously. DIGSI 5 assigns the device indices automatically. You can
change the device indices if necessary.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
NOTE
i The device with the Device index = 1 is the timing-master device in a device combination.
If all other devices in the device combination are to obtain their time from the timing-master device,
consider the following
• Set the Device index to 1 for the timing-master device.
• Parameterize the other devices in such a way that they get their time from the timing-master device
via the protection connections.
For more information, refer to 3.7.3 Function Description. Select Protection interface as the
adjustable synchronization option.
In the timing-master device, you must not set the protection interface as the synchronization source!
Parameter: Address in Device combi.
• Default setting (_:22711:102) Address in Device combi. = 101

With the parameter Address in Device combi., you assign a unique and unambiguous address for each
device.
NOTE
i If the preset values do not fit, Siemens recommends the following procedure:
Define a number for the device combination that is unambiguous in your area of responsibility and that
must be at least 2 digits, for example, 100. The setting value of the parameter Address in Device
combi. is then calculated as follows: Number in the device combination + Device index.
For device 2, this leads to Address in Device combi. = 102.
Parameter: IP Address
• Default setting (_:22711.103) IP address = 0.0.0.0

The IP address of the local device is taken from the settings of the Ethernet-BD communication module and
displayed. The local IP address cannot be edited at this point.
NOTE
i If all devices of a device combination are equipped with an Ethernet-BD communication module and use
the IP communication, you must enter the IP addresses for all other devices in the device combination here.
The topology detection automatically sets a ring or chain topology.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
NOTE
i If you have a hybrid configuration, that is not all protection connections of a device combination use the IP
communication, you must observe the following when setting the IP addresses:
• The topology detection does not generate the topology automatically.
• First define the order for the communication between the devices. Define chain or ring topologies for
this purpose.
The defined topology results in the partner devices for each device, with which the device communi-
cates directly.
Only set the IP addresses for the partner devices that are equipped with an Ethernet-BD communica-
tion module here.
• You can find examples of the parameterization of the IP addresses in hybrid configurations in
the chapters 3.6.8.4 Device Combination of 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media and
3.6.8.5 Device Combination of 6 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media.
Indications and Measured Values in the Device Combination
Indication Meaning
(_:3321:2311:301) The devices form a topology via the protection connections. This indication
Status of topo. recog. shows the status of the topology detection and can have the following
values:
• Unknown:
The topology is unknown.
• Invalid:
The detected topology is not supported.
• Transient:
The topology has just been modified.
• Valid:
The topology has been detected. The indication Devices form
shows the type of the detected topology.
(_:3321:2311:302) The indication shows whether all configured devices in the device combi-
Topology is nation communicate with each other via the protection connections. The
indication can have the following values:
• Unknown:
• Incomplete:
At least one device in the device combination does not communicate
via the protection connections.
• Complete:
All configured devices in the device combination communicate via the
protection connections.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Indication Meaning
(_:3321:2311:303) This indication shows the type of the detected topology that the devices in
Devices form the device combination form via the protection connections. The indication
can have the following values:
• Unknown topol:
• Chain topology:
The devices and their protection connections form a chain topology.
• Ring topology
The devices and their protection connections form a ring topology.
(_:3321:2311:304) The indication shows the number of devices that communicate via the
Number of detect. dev. protection connections in the device combination.
Indication and Measured Values of the Devices

The following indications and measured values are displayed for each device in the device combination and
are explained using the example of a device.
Indication Meaning
(_:22711:300) Dev.addr. This indication shows the address of the device.
(_:22711:318) is This indication shows whether the device is involved in protection commu-
present nication.
(_:22711:317) is logged This indication shows whether the local device has been logged off. If the
off device has been logged off, it is no longer involved in communication
via the protection interfaces. If a device has been logged off, information
relevant for the protection functions is no longer exchanged.
(_:22711:301) circuit This indication shows the position of the circuit breaker and can have the
breaker following values:
• 0:
The switch position of the circuit breaker is unknown.
• 1
The circuit breaker is open.
• 2
The circuit breaker is closed.
(_:22711:328) Line This message indicates whether the function Line differential protection is
diff. test 13 in the state Test or Test/Relay blk..
(_:22711:329) Local This message indicates whether the function Line differential protection is
Line diff. test 13 in the special test mode Test local device.
3.6.6.8 Constellation Measured Values for Type 1 and Type 2
NOTE
i The constellation measured values are only available for the FG Line.
Each device in the device combination determines measured values predefined by Siemens, known as constel-
lation measured values. You can find the constellation measured values in the DIGSI 5 information routing
under the FG Protection comm. (Type x) > Device combination > Device x. The following measured values
and indications are issued for each device:
13 This message is only available in the FG Protection communication type 1 (line diff. protection).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Measured value Meaning

(_:3321:22711:302) Vph This measured value shows the voltage of the 3 phases that is synchronized
(_:3321:22711:303) Iph This measured value shows the current of the 3 phases that is synchronized
(_:3321:22711:304) f The measured value supplies the locally calculated frequency of the meas-
ured voltage or the current.
The constellation measured values have the following properties:
• They are available on every device.

100 % conform to the rated current or the rated voltage of the line (see Figure 3-98). These measured
values are recorded every 2 seconds by the devices involved in the device combination and then sent to
the other respective devices. At the same time, the current and voltage values of the different devices are
time-synchronous with one another.
When displaying the constellation measured values the local device is prioritized. The device connected
The reference of the angle information depends on whether a line differential protection has been instanti-
ated in the FG Line. If a line differential protection is instantiated, the protection communication is type 1,
otherwise type 2.

– The angle values of the voltages show the angle difference between the local and the remote
voltage. The local voltage serves as the reference with an angle of 0°.
– The angle values of the currents show the angle difference between the local and the remote
current. The local current serves as the reference with an angle of 0°.

The angles of the phase-to-ground voltages and the phase currents relate to the voltage VA of the
relevant device.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.6.6.9 Setting Notes for External Synchronization

With the FB External synchronization, you can synchronize the measured values of the devices connected via
protection connections with microsecond accuracy using external synchronization sources (1*10E-06 s).
The measured values transmitted via protection communication for the line differential protection must be
time-synchronized. The synchronization is possible as follows:
• Internally via telegram measurement
• Externally via the IEEE 1588 protocol
• Externally via a synchronous pulse from a satellite receiver

If you use Ethernet-BD communication modules for the protection communication of the line differential
protection, the external synchronization of the measured values transmitted via the protection interface is
mandatory.
If you use USART communication modules, you can synchronize the transmitted measured values either
internally via telegram measurement or via external synchronization. If you do not use the external synchroni-
zation, the device automatically uses the internal synchronization.
If you want to use the external synchronization of the measured values, you must instantiate the FB External
synchronization from the Global DIGSI 5 library into the FG Protection comm.. You can find the External
synchronization in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Advanced protection communication > Synchroniza-
tion.
The external synchronization is possible for line differential protection applications or synchrophasor meas-
uring devices as follows:
• Via a high-precision electrical synchronous pulse (PPS electrical (Port G), 1-second pulse) from a
satellite receiver at the time-synchronization interface (Port G)
• Via a high-precision optical synchronous pulse (PPS optical (USART), 1-second pulse) from a satel-
lite receiver at a USART communication module
• Via the IEEE 1588 time-synchronization protocol

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
With external synchronization, you can measure and display the signal-transit time of the transmission and
receive path separately. This allows you to achieve maximum sensitivity even with unequal (unbalanced)
signal-transit times in communication networks with the line differential protection. For the transmission of
protection data in the type 2 protection communication, different signal-transit times do not play a role.
If an FB External synchronization is instantiated, the parameter Synchronization is visible in the FB
Protection interf.. With this parameter, you establish the connection between the protection interface and
the type of external synchronization. See 3.6.6.5 Setting Notes for the Protection Interface.
If you use 2 protection interfaces in the FG Protection comm., you can set a different synchronization source
for each protection interface if required. For this use case, you must instantiate 2 FBs External synchroniza-
tion into the FG Protection comm. and set the desired synchronization source separately.
Parameter: Name of synchron. block
• Default setting (_:101) Name of synchron. block = Ext. synchronization 1

The parameter FB External synchron. shows the name of the FB External synchronization.
If you have instantiated 2 FBs External synchronization into the FG Protection comm., you can use this
parameter to switch between the FB Ext. synchronization 1 and the FB Ext. synchronization 2.
Parameter: Synchronization source
• Default setting (_:117) Synchronization source = nothing

With the parameter Synchronization source, you select the desired synchronization source for the
external synchronization of the measured values.
NOTE
i The possible setting options of the parameter Synchronization source depend on the configuration
of the protocol for the respective channel of the communication module.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
To display the selection text for the selection of an optical synchronous pulse, you must configure the protocol
PPS on a USART communication module as follows:
[sc_PPS, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-99 Configuration of the Optical Synchronous Pulse (PPS) on a Channel of a USART Communication
Module

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
To display the selection text for the selection of the protocol IEEE 1588, you must configure the protocol IEEE
1588 on an Ethernet-BD communication module as follows:
[sc_1588, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-100 Configuration of the Protocol IEEE 1588 on an Ethernet-BD Communication Module
The setting options for the parameter Synchronization source then look as follows, for example:
[sc_syncopt, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-101 Possible Setting Options for the Synchronization Source
Depending on the configuration, the following synchronization sources are displayed:

G:Timesynchron..PPS The electrical synchronization pulse of a satellite receiver (PPS: 1 Pulse Per
Second) at the time-synchronization interface Port G is the synchronization
source.
[Port]:USART-AD-1FO.Channel The optical synchronization pulse of a satellite receiver (PPS: 1 Pulse Per
1.PPS Second) on channel 1 of a USART communication module is the synchroni-
zation source.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

[Port]:USART-AE-2FO.Channel The optical synchronization pulse of a satellite receiver (PPS: 1 Pulse Per
2.PPS Second) on channel 2 of a USART communication module is the synchroni-
zation source.
[Port]:ETH-BD-2FO.Channel The time-synchronization standard IEEE 1588 on an Ethernet-BD communi-
1.IEEE 1588 cation module is the synchronization source.
NOTE
i You can select different synchronization sources for the same protection connection in the devices
involved, for example, the synchronization via the IEEE 1588 protocol in device 1 and via the protocol
PPS electrical in device 2.
Siemens recommends using the same synchronization source for the same protection connection. If it is
not possible to use the same synchronization source, check the differential current in the line differential
protection in the mode Test on all devices. If the differential current is not in the expected range, the set
synchronization sources are not synchronous to each other and therefore not usable.
NOTE
i For detailed information on the communication protocols, refer to the SIPROTEC 5 manual Communication
Protocols.
Parameter: Synchronization using
• Default setting (_:118) Synchronization using = nothing

This parameter Synchronization using cannot be adjusted. The parameter shows further information for
the selected synchronization source:
nothing You have not selected any external synchronization source.
PPS electrical (Port G) The electrical synchronization pulse of a satellite receiver (PPS: 1 Pulse Per
Second) at the time-synchronization interface Port G is the synchronization
source.
PPS optical (USART) The optical synchronization pulse of a satellite receiver (PPS: 1 Pulse Per
Second) on channel 1 of a USART communication module is the synchroni-
zation source.
IEEE 1588 The time-synchronization standard IEEE 1588 on a BD communication
module is the synchronization source.
Parameter: Max. inaccuracy
• Default setting (_:119) Max. inaccuracy = 0,001 ms

With the Max. inaccuracy parameter, you set the maximum expected inaccuracy of the synchronization
sourced used. The set value is only effective if the synchronization source used does not supply any informa-
tion on the current inaccuracy in the synchronization signals. If you no information on the inaccuracy of the
synchronization source used, use the default setting.
NOTE
i The inaccuracy of the synchronization source enters the stabilization of the Line differential protection as
an error signal.
This means that greater inaccuracy increases the calculated stabilization quantity and makes the Line
differential protection less sensitive.
If IEEE 1588 is used as the synchronization source in the synchronization status SmpSynch = global,
accuracy values are supplied with the synchronization signals and the parameter Max. inaccuracy is not

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
used. If the supplied accuracy values become invalid, the value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is
used.
If the synchronization source IEEE 1588 works in the synchronization status SmpSynch = local, then the
value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as permanently available inaccuracy.
If PPS electrical (Port G) or PPS optical (USART) are used as synchronization source, then the value set in the
parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as permanently available inaccuracy.
If a USART communication module with the PPS protocol and the PPS generator operating mode is also used
as a synchronization source at the same time, the value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as
permanently available inaccuracy.
3.6.6.10 Indications and Measured Values of the External Synchronization
(_:501) >PPS pulse loss The indication (_:501) >PPS pulse loss is only visible with the
following setting options of the parameter (_:117) Synchronization
source:
• G:Timesynchron.PPS
• [Port]:USART-AD-1FO.Channel x.PPS
• [Port]:USART-AE-2FO.Channel x.PPS
The binary input (_:501) >PPS pulse loss can be used to signal
an externally detected failure in the PPS synchronous pulse, for example,
an error message from the satellite receiver. If the binary input (_:501)
>PPS pulse loss is set, this leads to the indication (_:304)
Synchronization loss. The external synchronization detects immedi-
ately that there is a problem with the connected synchronization pulse.
Otherwise, the problem will only be noticed after approx. 2.1 s – after the
test for synchronous-pulse failure.
(_:304) Synchronization The synchronization has failed. This can be due to a problem with the
loss synchronization source.
The indication (_:304) Synchronization loss shows that the
synchronization has failed. This can be due to the following reasons:
• The input indication (_:501) >PPS pulse loss has occurred.

• The synchronous pulse has failed.
• The quality of the synchronous pulse is inadequate.
• There is another problem with the synchronization source.
(_:305) Synchronization The synchronization is operating correctly.
OK
(_:306) Synchronization You can use this indication to make the synchronous pulse visible. As a rule,
pulse one pulse is generated per second.
(_:307) Synchron. If the set synchronization source operates in the global synchronization
imprecise status and the time of the synchronization source deviates from the global
time by more than 0.5 ms, the indication Synchron. imprecise is
generated and the line differential protection becomes ineffective.
The indication Synchron. imprecise is visible if you select ETH-
BD-2FO.Channel1.IEEE1588 in the parameter _:103 Synchronization
source. The read-only parameter (_:118) Synchronization using
then displays IEEE 1588.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[lo_pps_syn, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-102 Logic for the Generation of the Indication >PPS pulse loss
3.6.6.11 Setting Notes for the Remote Data
Parameter: Dropout Time Prio. x
• Default setting (_:22741:111) Dropout time prio. 1 = 2.00 s

If you use user-specific remote data, you can set how long the last received state of your remote data is held
in case of a communication failure. This allows you to bridge short-term communication failures. The time can
be set separately for each priority of the remote data.
For further information, refer to 3.6.5.9 Remote Data.
3.6.6.12 Description Phase Swapping
Phase Swap
If you want to exchange information via the protection communication with a device showing phases with
a different sequence but with the same rotating field as your device, the SIPROTEC 5 device can swap the
phase information when sending and receiving. It is no longer necessary to swap phases when connecting the
current transformers.
This use case exists on some tie lines of different power-system operators.
Figure 3-103 shows an example of the different designation of the same phases at the line ends. For example,
phase A on the left side of the line becomes phase C on the right side. If a SIPROTEC 5 device is used on the
right side, you can instantiate the FB Phase swap in the FG Advanced protection communication. Use the
FB Phase swap to set how the phases are swapped when sending and receiving phase-selective information
via the protection interface.
This results in the following SIPROTEC 5 device behavior:
• Connect the current and voltage transformers to the terminals A, B, and C of the protection device as
usual.
• Connect the circuit breaker without swapping phases.
• The protection functions in both devices, such as Line differential protection or Teleprotection with
distance protection cooperate without any problems.
• The phase-selective messages and measured values are displayed correctly from the point of view of the
respective device.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[dw_different_phs-designation_are_compens_send-receive, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-103 Differing Phase Designations Are Compensated for while Sending and Receiving
(1) Other phase designations than at the opposite end for the same physical phase
NOTE
i Phase swapping does not support the I2-DIFF stage of the function Line differential protection.
Swapping of user-specific phase-selective information sent and received using the function Remote data is
not supported.
3.6.6.13 Setting Notes for Phase Swapping
NOTE
i When using the FB Phase swap, the phase rotation must be set identically in all devices of the device
combination, see Parameter: Phase sequence, Page 457.
Swap in Send Direction
• Default setting (_:101) Swap in send direction = No phase swap

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
With the parameter Swap in send direction, you select phase swapping. The phases are swapped from
the send direction view. The following options are possible:

No phase swap When sending phase-selective information, there is no phase swap.
A → B, B → C, C → A The local data such as measured values and status information of the
phases are swapped and sent to the neighboring device as follows:
• The local data of phase A as data of phase B

• The local data of phase B as data of phase C
• The local data of phase C as data of phase A
A → C, B → A, C → B The local data such as measured values and status information of the
phases are swapped and sent to the neighboring device as follows:
• The local data of phase A as data of phase C

• The local data of phase B as data of phase A
• The local data of phase C as data of phase B
Swap in Receive Direction

Depending on the setting value of the parameter Swap in send direction, the reverse swap direction
results from the receive direction view. The read-only parameter (_:102) Swap in receive direction
then indicates the resulting phase swap.

No phase swap When receiving phase-selective information, there is no phase swap.
A → C, B → A, C → B The data received from the neighboring device such as measured values
and status information of the phases are used as follows:
• The received data of phase A as local data of phase C

• The received data of phase B as local data of phase A
• The received data of phase C as local data of phase B
A → B, B → C, C → A The data received from the neighboring device such as measured values
and status information of the phases are used as follows:
• The received data of phase A as local data of phase B

• The received data of phase B as local data of phase C
• The received data of phase C as local data of phase A
Examples of a Device Combination with 3 Devices:

For a device combination with more than 2 devices, you need to mentally divide the device combination into
a section using the phase swap and a section not using the phase swap. In the section using the phase swap,
you need to instantiate the FB Phase swap in the SIPROTEC 5 devices. When using SIPROTEC 4 devices, you
need to swap phases when connecting the transformers and the circuit breaker.
The following figure shows a device combination with 3 devices. The device on the left can be a SIPROTEC 4
or SIPROTEC 5 device. There is a SIPROTEC 5 device in the middle and a SIPROTEC 4 device on the right
side. The device in the middle swaps phases by using the FB Phase swap. The FB Phase swap is used for
both protection interfaces, but it is instantiated only once for each FG Advanced protection communication.
In the SIPROTEC 4 device on the right, you can implement the phase swap only by changing the wiring of
the current and voltage transformers and of the circuit breaker. You must reinterpret the phase-selective
indications accordingly.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[dw_Device combination with 3 devices, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-104 Device Combination with 3 Devices
3.6.6.14 Settings

Remote data
_:22741:111 Remote data:Dropout 0.00 s to 300.00 s 2.00 s
time prio. 1
time prio. 2
time prio. 3
Prot. interf.1
_:5161:1 Prot. interf.1:Mode • off on
• on
rate per hour
rate per min
_:5161:107 Prot. interf.1:Distur- 0.05 s to 2.00 s 0.10 s
bance alarm after
_:5161:108 Prot. interf.1:Transm. 0.0 s to 6.0 s 6.0 s
fail. alarm after
_:5161:109 Prot. interf.1:Delay time 0.1 ms to 30.0 ms 30.0 ms
threshold
_:5161:110 Prot. interf.1:Difference 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms 0.100 ms
Tx and Rx time
_:5161:113 Prot. interf.1:Synchroni- • External synchron. off External
zation synchron. off
• Telegr. and ext. synch.
• Telegr. or ext. synch.
• External synch. only

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

_:5161:117 Prot. interf.1:FB External • Ext. synchronization 1 Ext. synchroni-
synchron. zation 1
• Ext. synchronization 2
_:5161:120 Prot. interf.1:Check • no yes
synchron.-source
• yes
_:5161:120 Prot. interf.1:PI assign- Setting options depend on
ment configuration

(Type)
Prot. interf.1
_:5161:81 Prot. interf.1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5161:500 Prot. interf.1:>Sync reset SPS I
_:5161:341 Prot. interf.1:Reset synchronization SPC C
_:5161:342 Prot. interf.1:Reset measurements SPC C
_:5161:52 Prot. interf.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5161:53 Prot. interf.1:Health ENS O
_:5161:303 Prot. interf.1:Connection broken SPS O
_:5161:316 Prot. interf.1:Error rate / min exc. SPS O
_:5161:317 Prot. interf.1:Error rate / hour exc. SPS O
_:5161:318 Prot. interf.1:Time delay exceeded SPS O
_:5161:319 Prot. interf.1:Time delay different SPS O
_:5161:320 Prot. interf.1:Time delay jump SPS O
_:5161:321 Prot. interf.1:PI synchronized SPS O
_:5161:340 Prot. interf.1:Telegram lost SPS O
_:5161:323 Prot. interf.1:PPS: time del. unsym. SPS O
_:5161:324 Prot. interf.1:PI with PPS synchron. SPS O
_:5161:343 Prot. interf.1:Partner INS O
_:5161:308 Prot. interf.1:Tx tel/h MV O
_:5161:309 Prot. interf.1:Rx tel/h MV O
_:5161:310 Prot. interf.1:Tx tel/min MV O
_:5161:311 Prot. interf.1:Rx tel/min MV O
_:5161:312 Prot. interf.1:Tx err/h MV O
_:5161:313 Prot. interf.1:Rx err/h MV O
_:5161:314 Prot. interf.1:Tx err/min MV O
_:5161:315 Prot. interf.1:Rx err/min MV O
_:5161:334 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/min MV O
_:5161:335 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/h MV O
_:5161:336 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/d MV O
_:5161:337 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/w MV O
_:5161:338 Prot. interf.1:M. loss/d MV O
_:5161:339 Prot. interf.1:M. loss/w MV O
_:5161:331 Prot. interf.1:Recept. MV O
_:5161:325 Prot. interf.1:Aver.Δt MV O
_:5161:326 Prot. interf.1:Rec. Δt MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

(Type)
_:5161:327 Prot. interf.1:Sen. Δt MV O
Prot.interf.1B
_:23461:81 Prot.interf.1B:>Block stage SPS I
_:23461:500 Prot.interf.1B:>Sync reset SPS I
_:23461:341 Prot.interf.1B:Reset synchronization SPC C
_:23461:342 Prot.interf.1B:Reset measurements SPC C
_:23461:52 Prot.interf.1B:Behavior ENS O
_:23461:53 Prot.interf.1B:Health ENS O
_:23461:301 Prot.interf.1B:Status of lay. 1 and 2 ENS O
_:23461:302 Prot.interf.1B:Status of lay. 3 and 4 ENS O
_:23461:303 Prot.interf.1B:Connection broken SPS O
_:23461:316 Prot.interf.1B:Error rate / min exc. SPS O
_:23461:317 Prot.interf.1B:Error rate / hour exc. SPS O
_:23461:318 Prot.interf.1B:Time delay exceeded SPS O
_:23461:340 Prot.interf.1B:Telegram lost SPS O
_:23461:323 Prot.interf.1B:PPS: time del. unsym. SPS O
_:23461:324 Prot.interf.1B:PI with PPS synchron. SPS O
_:23461:343 Prot.interf.1B:Partner INS O
_:23461:308 Prot.interf.1B:Tx tel/h MV O
_:23461:309 Prot.interf.1B:Rx tel/h MV O
_:23461:310 Prot.interf.1B:Tx tel/min MV O
_:23461:311 Prot.interf.1B:Rx tel/min MV O
_:23461:312 Prot.interf.1B:Tx err/h MV O
_:23461:313 Prot.interf.1B:Rx err/h MV O
_:23461:314 Prot.interf.1B:Tx err/min MV O
_:23461:315 Prot.interf.1B:Rx err/min MV O
_:23461:334 Prot.interf.1B:Miss.tel/min MV O
_:23461:335 Prot.interf.1B:Miss.tel/h MV O
_:23461:336 Prot.interf.1B:Miss.tel/d MV O
_:23461:337 Prot.interf.1B:Miss.tel/w MV O
_:23461:338 Prot.interf.1B:M. loss/d MV O
_:23461:339 Prot.interf.1B:M. loss/w MV O
_:23461:331 Prot.interf.1B:Recept. MV O
_:23461:325 Prot.interf.1B:Aver.Δt MV O
_:23461:326 Prot.interf.1B:Rec. Δt MV O
_:23461:327 Prot.interf.1B:Sen. Δt MV O
3.6.7 Assignment of the Protection Function Group to the FG Protection

Communication
If protection functions want to use the protection interfaces in a protection function group, you must route
the connection of the protection function group, for example, the FG Line 1, with a function group Protection
communication in DIGSI 5. Then, each protection function in the FG Line 1 can use the protection communi-
cation.
Route the connection between the FG Line and the FG Protection communication in DIGSI 5 as follows:
Project tree > Function-group connections > Tab Protection FG ↔ Protection FG. Right-click to route the
connection in the desired line/column.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_PDC_rout1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-105 Routing of the Connection between the Protection FG and the FG Protection Communication
in DIGSI 5
NOTE
i If only one protection function group and one FG Protection communication are instantiated in the
device, DIGSI 5 connects both function groups automatically.
3.6.8 Application Examples and Setting Notes for IP Communication
3.6.8.1 Overview
The advanced protection communication supports the IP communication via MPLS14 communication
networks.
• If existing systems are to be upgraded for protection-interface communication via IP, you must retrofit an
Ethernet-BD communication module in the respective SIPROTEC 5 devices.
• The protection-interface communication via IP requires an Ethernet-BD communication module per

device in the device combination.
• In a device, only one Ethernet-BD communication module can be used per device combination.
• However, another device combination can use the same Ethernet-BD communication module of the
device.
The following application examples show what you must consider when using the IP communication via MPLS
communication networks.
3.6.8.2 Device Combination of 2 Devices and Redundant Communication Connection

If redundancy of the communication connection is required for a device combination consisting of 2 devices, 2
different procedures are possible:
• You can use the redundancy mechanisms of the LAN and the Ethernet-BD communication module
(PRP, HSR, RSTP). In this case, the redundant communication route runs through the same Ethernet-BD
communication module.
• You can set up a 2nd communication connection via a physically separate path. It is best to use a
different medium for this, for example, a fiber-optic direct connection, a direct cable connection (pilot
wire), or a connection based on C37.94. That is, for the 2nd communication connection, you must use
another communication module in each device. The following figure shows this case from a physical and
logical view:
14 MPLS = Multi-Protocol Label Switching

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[dw_network_with_2-device_redundant-comm, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-106 Device Combination with 2 Devices and Redundant Communication Connection
3.6.8.3 Device Combination of 3 Devices and Only IP Communication

If you configure a device combination with 3 devices and all devices are using the IP communication, then,
from the view of a device, the 2 other devices in the network are visible and reachable. For this, you
configure in each device the protocol Advanced protection interface on the Ethernet-BD communi-
cation module and the Protection interface 1. The Ethernet-BD communication module is assigned to the
Protection interface 1.
The special feature of this configuration is that the topology detection automatically generates a 3-device
ring topology (logical view). That is, 3 point-to-point communication connections are established between the
devices. In addition, another Protection interface 1B is automatically visible in each device, which provides
the necessary 2nd communication channel for the ring topology, see the following figure:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Figure 3-107 Device Combination with 3 Devices in the IP Communication Network
The Protection interface 1B takes over the settings of Protection interface 1, that is Protection interface
1B does not have its own settings view. The Protection interface 1B has its own indications and measured
values, which you can see in the information routing.
NOTE
i If you use 3 devices in the device combination with IP communication, the aim of the topology detection
is to form a ring topology, as in addition to a redundant connection, shorter transmission times are also
possible.
If you have instantiated a 2nd protection interface, for example to establish a communication connection via
another medium, the device hides the Protection interface 1B.
NOTE
i In the following cases, the Protection interface 1B becomes inactive and does not have any messages or
measured values:
• A 2nd protection interface is instantiated.
• Only 2 devices are present in the device combination.
• No protection interface is assigned to an Ethernet-BD communication module.
3.6.8.4 Device Combination of 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media

If you extend a system, it can be necessary to extend a device combination consisting of 2 existing devices by
1 device, see the following figure.
The previous 2 devices are connected to each other, for example, via a fiber-optic direct connection or via
other communication media. The left device, for example, a SIPROTEC 4 device, and the middle SIPROTEC 5

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
device are the 2 devices previously present in the system. This device combination is to be extended by adding
the right SIPROTEC 5 device. The communication between the middle and the right device is to take place via
an IP communication network.
[dw_network_with_3-device_mixed-comm, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-108 Device Combination with 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media
For this configuration of a 3-device chain topology, you must configure a device combination with 3 devices
in all devices.
In the middle device, an Ethernet-BD communication module is additionally required. Configure the protocol
Advanced protection interface in the properties of the Ethernet-BD communication module. Instan-
tiate the function block Protection interface 2 in the FG Protection communication. Assign the Ethernet-BD
communication module to the Protection interface 2.
The device on the right must also have an Ethernet-BD communication module. Also configure here the
protocol Advanced protection interface in the properties of the Ethernet-BD communication module
and assign the Ethernet-BD communication module to the Protection interface 1. Protection interface 1B is
created here as a special feature, but it is not used.
If a redundant communication connection is required for this configuration, Siemens recommends estab-
lishing a 3-device ring topology. For this purpose, you must connect the left and right devices via another
communication channel. This creates the 3-device ring topology. The following figure shows this configura-
tion:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[dw_3-device_and_mixed-comm, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-109 Device Combination with 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media and Redundant
Communication Connection
The SIPROTEC 4 device (left device) does not support any IP communication. In this case, you must switch
to another communication medium and retrofit a corresponding SIPROTEC 4 communication module. In any
case, the communication medium used is also supported by the SIPROTEC 5 device on the right side, by
retrofitting a corresponding equivalent communication module there. Configure this communication module
with the protocol Advanced protection interface, add an additional Protection interface 2 to the FG
Protection communication. Assign the Protection interface 2 to the communication module.
3.6.8.5 Device Combination of 6 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media
IP Addresses in Hybrid Topologies

To ensure redundancy or downward compatibility, the devices also allow a mix of classic and IP-based
communication media.
In such applications, special consideration must be given to the configuration of the IP addresses. When para-
metrizing the devices, you must first clarify which path the communication is to take through the network.
That is, it must be clear which devices communicate with each other. To define a route, you may only
configure its planned communication partners in a device. The following examples illustrate the correct IP
configuration.
For device combinations with more than 3 devices and hybrid communication media, different configurations
are possible. If you want to use the IP communication, consider that only one Ethernet-BD communication
module per device combination is supported for the protection-interface communication.
The following figure shows a device combination with 6 devices. In the example, several devices are
connected by other communication media, which form 3 device groups. The device groups are connected
by an IP network. The result is a 6-device chain topology. The yellow line illustrates the communication route.
To establish this communication route, you may only parameterize the IP addresses of their direct communica-
tion partners in the devices. The following example applies:
• The devices 2 and 4 only know the IP address of device 3.
• Device 3 only knows the IP addresses of the devices 2 and 4.
• Leave all other IP addresses at 0.0.0.0.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Figure 3-110 Example 1 of a Device Combination with 6 Devices
Another example shows 2 device groups whose devices are connected to each other via IP networks. The 2
device groups are connected to each other by a different communication medium. The topology detection in
turn forms a 6-device chain topology.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
To establish this communication route, you may only parameterize the IP addresses of their direct communica-
tion partners in the devices. The following example applies:
• Leave all other IP addresses at 0.0.0.0.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[dw_network_with_6-device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-111 Example 2 of a Device Combination with 6 Devices
3.6.8.6 Unsupported Configurations

The following figure shows an example of a device combination with 3 devices. In the example, all devices
use the IP communication. The middle device contains 2 Ethernet-BD communication modules, which are both
configured with the Advanced protection interface protocol.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
NOTE
i You can only use 1 Ethernet-BD communication module in one device!

2 Ethernet-BD communication modules with the Advanced protection interface protocol are not
supported.
[dw_non-supported-confic_network_with_3-device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-112 Unsupported Configuration of a Device Combination with 3 Devices
NOTE
i If you use the IP communication, the aim of the topology detection is to form a chain topology if there
are 4 or more devices. For certain configurations, the topology detection cannot form a working chain
topology.
The following figure shows an example of a device combination with 6 devices and hybrid communication
media. In this case, the topology detection cannot form a functioning 6-device chain topology.
[dw_non-supported-confic_network_with_6-device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-113 Unsupported Configuration of a Device Combination with 6 Devices

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization
Timely recording of process data requires precise time synchronization of the devices. The integrated date/
time synchronization allows the exact chronological assignment of events to an internally managed device
time that is used to time stamp events in logs, which are then transmitted to a substation automation tech-
nology or transferred via the protection interface. A clock module internal to the device and having battery
backup is synchronized cyclically with the current device time so that the right device time is available and
used even in case of auxiliary-voltage failure. At the same time, this permits hardware-supported monitoring
of the device time.
The integrated date/time synchronization is a supervisory device function. Setting parameters and indications
can be found in the following menus for the DIGSI and the device:
Set date and time:
• DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
• Device: Main menu → Device functions → Date & Time

Parameter:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Parameter -> Time Settings

Indications:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Information routing ->Time keeping or Time Sync.
Every SIPROTEC 5 device maintains an internal device time with date. The date and time can also be set on the
device via the on-site operation panel or via DIGSI 5. Within a system, or even beyond, it is usually necessary to
record the time of process data accurately and to have exact time synchronization of all devices. For SIPROTEC
5 devices, the sources of time and synchronization options can be configured.
Configurable Synchronization Options:
• None (default setting)

The device functions without any external time synchronization. The internal time synchronization
continues to work with the help of the back-up battery even when the auxiliary voltage is shut down
temporarily. The time can be adjusted manually.
• Telegram
The time is synchronized via a telegram with an appropriately configured communication interface in
accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol.
• Connection to a radio clock

The time synchronization takes place with the set time telegram from an external IRIG B or DCF77
receiver via the time synchronization interface of the device.
• Ethernet
The time synchronization is done via Ethernet-based SNTP protocol (Simple Network Time Protocol), for
example with IEC 61850 stations or via IEEE 1588. If you enable both services during configuration of
Ethernet interfaces, these protocols are available as an option for the time synchronization.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
• Protection interface
The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces configured for your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Here, the timing master takes over the time management.
Configurable Time Sources:
• 2 time sources can be taken into consideration with the SIPROTEC 5 devices. For each time source, the
synchronization type may be selected based on the options provided.
• Time source 1 takes precedence over Time source 2, that is, Time source 2 will be effective for
the synchronization of the device time only if Time source 1 fails. If only one time source is available
and it fails, then only the internal clock continues unsynchronized. The status of the time sources is
indicated.
• For every time source, it is possible to define via the Time zone time source 1 parameter (or
Time zone time source 2) if this source transmits its time by UTC (universal time) or if the settings
correspond to the local time zone of the device.
NOTE
i Make sure that the settings for the time sources coincide with the actual hardware configuration of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In any event, incorrect settings cause the status indications of time sources to pick up.
Configurable Date Format

Regardless of a feed time-synchronization source, a uniform format is maintained internally within the device.
The following options are available for the customary local representation of the date format:
• Day.Month.Year: 24.12.2009
• Month/Day/Year: 12/24/2009
• Year-Month-Day: 2009-12-24
Taking Local Time Zones into Account

The internal device time is maintained in universal time (UTC). To display time stamps in DIGSI and on the
device display, you can define the local time zone of the device (parameter Offset time zone for GMT),
including the applicable daylight saving times (start, end, and offset of daylight saving time) using parame-
ters. This allows the display of the local time.
NOTE
i • For time sources that transmit the status of the switch to daylight saving time, this will be taken into
account automatically when creating the internal device time in the UTC format. The differential time
of the daylight saving time set in the device (parameter Offset daylight saving time) is taken into
consideration. However, in contrast, the settings of the start of daylight saving time and end of the
daylight saving times are ignored when converting into the device internal UTC format.
• For active time sources, it is not possible to set the time via the device display or DIGSI 5. An exception
is setting the calendar year for active time protocol IRIG B.
Status, Supervision, and Indications of Time Management

Your SIPROTEC 5 device generates status and monitoring indications that provide important information
regarding the correct configuration of the time source and the status of the internal time management during
startup and device operation.
Internal time synchronization is monitored cyclically. Important synchronization processes, the status of the
time sources and errors detected are reported. A device time that has become invalid will be marked accord-
ingly so that affected functions can go to a safe state.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Device: This indication signals a high difference between the
Clock fail internally managed time and the time of the clock
module that is not permissible. The pickup of the
indication can point to a defect in the clock module
or to an unacceptable high drift of the system quartz
crystal. The time maintained internally is marked as
invalid.
Time management: This indication signals whether daylight saving time
Daylight saving time has been enabled.
Time management: This indication signals that the device time has been
Clock set manually set manually via the on-site operation panel or via
DIGSI 5.
Time synchronization: These 2 indications signal whether the active time
Status time source 1 sources are recognized as valid and active from the
Status time source 2 device point of view. When the indications pick up, it
can also be an indication that an incorrect configura-
tion of the port or channel numbers was done at the
on-site operation panel.
Time synchronization: This indication signals after the parameterized time
Time sync. error Fault indication after that synchronization
using an external time source has failed.
Time synchronization: This indication signals that a Leap second
Leap second has occurred during time synchronization using
an external GPS receiver (protocol variant IRIG
B 005(004) with extension according to IEEE
C37.118-2005).
Time synchronization: This indication signals that the device is synchronized
High accuracy with an accuracy better than 1 μs The indication is
only of significance when the PMU function is used.
NOTE
i In case of a missing or discharged battery, the device starts without active external time synchronization
with the device time 2011-01-01 00:00:00 (UTC).
For the device, DIGSI 5 provides a compact overview of the status of the time synchronization of your
SIPROTEC 5 device in online mode. All displays are updated continuously. You can access the overview in the
project-tree window via Online access.
DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_time_dg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-114 Time Information in DIGSI
For every time source, you see the following:
• Last received time (with date)
• Receipt time of the last received time telegram
• Configured type of timer
• Indication of timer outage or failure
• Whether the device time is currently synchronized from the time source
The lower section displays the device time, which is continuously updated. If the internal device time and the
infeed time source were synchronous at the time of telegram receipt, both displayed times are identical.
NOTE
i All times displayed (also the time source) take into consideration the local time settings (zone and daylight
saving time of the device) in the form of a numerical offset for UTC (universal time).
Parameter: Date Format
• Default setting Date format = YYYY-MM-DD

With the parameter Date format, you define the local customary format of the date display.
DD.MM.YYYY Day.Month.Year: Typical European display
Example: 24.12.2010
MM/DD/YYYY Month/Day/Year: Typical US representation
Example: 12/24/2010
YYYY-MM-DD Year-Month-Day: Typical Chinese display
Example: 2010-12-24
Parameter: Time zone time source 1, Time zone time source 2
• Default setting Time zone time source 1 = local, Time zone time source 2 = local
With the parameters Time zone time source 1 and Time zone time source 2, you define the
handling of time zones of the external timer.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

local Local time zone and daylight saving time are considered as time zone
offsets to GMT.
UTC Time format according to UTC (universal time)
Parameter: Time source 1, Time source 2
• Default setting Time source 1 = none, Time source 2 = none

With the parameters Time source 1 and Time source 2, you can configure an external timer. The
prerequisite is to have the corresponding hardware configuration of the communication interfaces of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. This is listed as a prefix when making a selection in DIGSI 5.
none The time source is not configured.
IRIG-B Time synchronization by an external GPS receiver:
SIPROTEC 5 devices support several protocol variants of the IRIG-B standard:
• IRIG-B 002(003)
The control function bits of the signal are not occupied. The missing
year is formed from the current device time. In this case, it is possible
to set the year via the online access in DIGSI 5.
• IRIG-B 006(007)
The bits for the calendar year are not equal to 00. The calendar year is
set automatically by the time protocol.
• IRIG-B 005(004) with extension according to IEEE C37.118-2005
If, in the time signal, other control function bits are occupied in addi-
tion to the calendar year, then the device takes the additional informa-
tion into consideration for leap seconds, daylight saving time, time
offset (zone, daylight saving time), and time accuracy.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2:
The value of this setting is not evaluated by the device, since this
protocol either transmits in UTC or in the case of local time, specifies
the appropriate offset to UTC in each set time telegram.
DCF77 Time synchronization by an external DCF77 receiver
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = local
Note: There are also clocks that generate a DCF77 signal representing UTC.
In this case, UTC must be set.
PI The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces config-
ured for your SIPROTEC 5 device. Here, the timing master takes over the
time management. Signal-transit times of the protection interface commu-
nication are calculated automatically.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC
A slave that receives a time or a SIPROTEC 5 master, receives its system time
kept in UTC.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

SNTP The time synchronization is done via the Ethernet service SNTP (SNTP server
or via IEC 61850).
SIPROTEC 5 devices support both Edition1 and Edition2 in accordance with
IEC 61850-7-2. In Edition2, the logical attributes LeapSecondsKnown, Clock-
Failure, ClockNotSynchronized, and the value TimeAccuracy are maintained
in each time stamp. For Edition1, these signals contain default settings.
Thus, the interoperability for substation automation technology is ensured
for both editions!
The SNTP service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet inter-
faces so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC
IEC 60870-5-103 The time is synchronized via telegram with an appropriately configured
communication interface in accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = local
However, there are also T103 systems that send the UTC.
DNP3 The time is synchronized via telegram with the appropriately configured
communication interface in accordance with the DNP3 protocol.
2 characteristics are supported in the process:
• Time synchronization via UTC

• Time synchronization with local time
The daylight saving time status is not transmitted. The device assumes
that the DNP3 master follows the same rules for the start and end of
the daylight saving time as those that were set for the device.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 =
UTC is the current implementation, local concerns older implementa-
tions.
IEEE 1588 Time is synchronized via an IEEE 1588 timing master. In this case, SIPROTEC
5 devices operate as slave-only clocks. IEEE 1588 v2 is supported with P2P
and Ethernet Transport.
The IEEE 1588 service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet
interfaces so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC.
Parameter: Fault indication after
• Default setting Fault indication after = 600 s

With the parameter Fault indication after, you set the time delay after which the unsuccessful
attempts of time synchronization with external time sources configured are indicated.
Parameter: Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time

This parameter block contains all the settings for the local time zone and daylight saving time of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In addition to the individual parameters, configure the basic settings by preselecting via
the option buttons or check box.
[sc_time_zo, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-115 Settings for Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time in DIGSI

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Selection Button Description

Manual settings (local time This setting must be selected if you want to select the local time zone and
zone and daylight saving time daylight saving time zone regulations of your SIPROTEC 5 device regardless
regulation) of the PC settings.
Input: Offset time zone for GMT [min]
Selection: Switchover to daylight saving time [yes/no] via check box
• Input: Start of daylight saving time [Day and time]

• Input: End of daylight saving time [Day and time]
• Input: Offset daylight saving time [min]
• Default settings as in the picture above
3.7.5 Settings

Time sync.
_:102 Time sync.:Time source • none none
1
• IRIG-B
• DCF77
• PI
• SNTP
• IEC 60870-5-103
• PROFIBUS DP
• Modbus
• DNP3
• IEEE 1588
• IEC 60870-5-104
_:103 Time sync.:Time source • port J
1 port
• port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port G
_:104 Time sync.:Time source • Ch1
1 channel
• Ch2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

_:105 Time sync.:Time source • none none
2
• IRIG-B
• DCF77
• PI
• SNTP
• IEC 60870-5-103
• PROFIBUS DP
• Modbus
• DNP3
• IEEE 1588
• IEC 60870-5-104
_:106 Time sync.:Time source • port J
2 port
• port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port G
_:107 Time sync.:Time source • Ch1
2 channel
• Ch2
_:108 Time sync.:Time zone • UTC local
time source 1
• local
_:109 Time sync.:Time zone • UTC local
time source 2
• local
_:101 Time sync.:Fault indica- 0 s to 3600 s 600 s
tion after

(Type)
Time managem.
_:300 Time managem.:Daylight saving time SPS O
_:301 Time managem.:Clock set manually SPS O

(Type)
Time sync.
_:303 Time sync.:Status time source 1 SPS O
_:304 Time sync.:Status time source 2 SPS O
_:305 Time sync.:Time sync. error SPS O
_:306 Time sync.:Leap second SPS O
_:307 Time sync.:High accuracy SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects
3.8.1 Overview
With help from user-defined function groups and user-defined functions you can group user-defined objects,
for example user-defined function blocks. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see following figure).
[sc_udef_lib, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-116 User-Defined Objects in the DIGSI 5 Library
The user-defined function block allows you to add (see following figure) single-point indications, pickup
indications, operate indications (ADC, ACT), single and double commands, commands with a controllable
whole number as well as measured values. You can assign the group a superordinate name (for example
process indications for a group of single-point indications which are read via binary inputs). This function can
be deactivated using the mode. The standby mode is also analyzed or displayed.
The user-defined function blocks can be instantiated at the highest level (alongside other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
In addition, there is a user-defined function block [control]. Alongside the aforementioned possibilities
presented by user-defined function blocks, this block offers additional tests for user-defined control signals,
for example SPC or DPC.
These are described in chapter 8.6.1 Overview of Functions.
[sc_user, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-117 Information Routing with Incorporated User-Defined Function Block: Process Indications and
some Single-Point Indications

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.8.2 Basic Data Types
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals. Additionally, a folder for external signals is available (see chapter 3.8.5 External Signals).
User-Defined Signals
[sc_LB_userdefsig, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-118 User-Defined Signals
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS: Single-Point Status)

The status of a binary input can be registered in the form of a single-point indication or forwarded as the
binary result from a CFC chart.
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS unsaved: Single-Point Status Unsaved)

In contrast to SPS single-point indications, the state of the SPS unsaved indication is not maintained after the
device restarts.
For this purpose, go to Properties > Details > Initialization > Restart and set the Value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_spsfas, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-119 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)
Double-Point Indication (Type DPS: Double-Point Status)

When using a double-point indication, the status of 2 binary inputs can be captured simultaneously and
mapped in an indication with 4 possible conditions (ON, Intermediate position, OFF, Disturbed
position).
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
Marker Command (Type SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This data type can be used as a command without feedback for simple signaling or as an internal variable
(marker).
Integer Status Value (Type INS)

The data type INS is used to create a whole number that represents a CFC result.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can be
shown on the display of the device.
State of an Enumeration Value (Type ENS)

The data type ENS is used to create an enumerated value that represents a CFC result.
Controllable Single-Point Indication (SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a single feedback.
Command with Double-Point Feedback (DPC, Double-Point Controllable)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via double-point indication as feedback.
Command with a Whole Number (INC, Controllable Integer Status)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or more relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a whole number as feedback.
Complex Measured Values (CMV)

This data type provides a complex measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for example.
Measured Values (MV)

This data type provides a measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for example.
NOTE
i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
• Transformer taps
• Metered values
Phase-to-Ground Measured Values (WYE)

This data type represents the phase-to-ground measured values of a 3-phase system.
Phase-to-Phase Measured Values (DEL, Delta)

This data type represents the phase-to-phase measured values of a 3-phase system.
Protection Activation Information (ACT)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Tripping. It is available in the library for receiving
protection information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Tripping.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
The status indications for the ACT data type are built as follows:
[lo_ACT-information, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-120 Building of the Status Indications ACT
Protection Activation Information with Direction (ACD)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Pickup. It is available in the library for receiving
protection information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Pickup. In addition, both ACD
and ACT, can be generated and processed by CFC charts.
The status indications for the ACD data type are built as follows:
[lo_ACD-information, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-121 Building of the Status Indications ACD
(1) Further information, see Table 3-20

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Table 3-20 Building of the Direction Information for the Data Type ACD
Direction Information Description

forward All picked up phases have picked up in forward direction.
backward All picked up phases have picked up in backward direction.
unknown The direction could not be determined for the pickup.
both At least 1 phase has picked up in forward direction and at least 1 phase has
picked up in backward direction.
3.8.3 Pulse and EnergyMetered Values, Transformer Taps
Pulse-Metered Values
Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the DIGSI library under
User-defined Functions.
You can find the functionality and the settings of the pulse-metered values in 10.11.1 Function Description of
Pulse-Metered Values.
Transformer Taps
Transformer taps are contained in the Transformer tap changers switching element. When the Transformer
tap changer switching element is created in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data
object of type BSC (binary controlled tap changer with tap-position information).
You can find detailed information in 8.8.1 Function Description.
Energy-Metered Values
Energy-metered values no longer need to be created by the user separately. They are available as active and
reactive power in each Line function group for reference and output direction. The calculation is based on the
current and voltage transformers associated with the protected object.
You can find more detailed information in 10.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values.
3.8.4 Additional Data Types
The following data types are also used in the system but are not available for general use as user-defined
signals in the library:
• ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)

The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.
• SEQ (Sequence)
• BSC (Binary Controlled Step Position)

The data type BSC can, for example, be used to control a transformer tap changer. The commands up,
down can be given.
NOTE
i Transformer taps are included in the Transformer tap changer switching element. If this switching
element is created in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data object of type BSC
(binary controlled step position information).
3.8.5 External Signals
User-defined signals of different types (see Figure 3-122) are available for GOOSE Later Binding. After instan-
tiation in a logical node, an external reference is generated during IID export and provided to a IEC 61850

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
system tool (for example, System Configurator) for GOOSE Later Binding (according to the Later-Binding
procedure specified in IEC 61850-6).
[sc_LB_extsign, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-122 External Signals
NOTE
i Consider the chapter on GOOSE Later Binding in the DIGSI Online Help. User-defined signals exist as
external signals and as preconfigured inputs that have been activated via the GOOSE column.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
3.9 Other Functions
3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals
Input signals can be filtered to suppress brief changes at the binary input. Chatter blocking can be used
to prevent continuously changing indications from clogging the event list. After an adjustable number of
changes, the indication is blocked for a certain period.
The settings for indication filtering can be found at the individual signals. The next figure shows the settings
using the example of a controllable (circuit-breaker switch position).
NOTE
i The software filtering time is available only for the circuit breaker and disconnector in the controllable
Cmd. with feedback (control function block), as this is used for logging purposes. The controllable
position (circuit breaker or disconnector function block) is used for interlocking conditions and must
always show the unfiltered position of the switching object.
[sc_lposi, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-123 Settings for Circuit-Breaker Switch Position
The setting range for the Software filter time parameter ranges from 0 ms to 100 000 ms in ms
increments. The Retrigger filter check box can be used to select whether to restart the filtering time
whenever a status change is performed within the software filtering time. When activated, the Indication
timestamp before filtering check box backdates the time stamp by the set software filtering time. In
this case, the time stamp corresponds to the actual status change of the signal. If you activate the Suppress
intermediate position check box, the intermediate position is suppressed for the duration of this
software filtering time.
If you leave the software filtering time at 0 ms, the time for the suppression of the intermediate position is
also 0 ms. The activated Suppress intermediate position check box then remains ineffective.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
If you do not activate the Suppress intermediate position check box, the software filtering time
affects the on, off, intermediate, and disturbed positions of the circuit breaker or disconnector switch.
With the parameter Spontaneous position changes filtered by:, you set how such position
changes are to be filtered. Spontaneous position changes are caused by external switching commands, for
example. If you select the General software filter setting, the general settings for software filtering of
spontaneous position changes and for position changes caused by a switching command apply. The settings
for spontaneous position changes then cannot be edited. A separate filtering for spontaneous position
changes is activated with the Spontaneous software filter setting and you can edit the settings for
this.
Chatter blocking can be activated or deactivated as an input parameter, for example as a parameter of the
position in the Circuit breaker or Disconnector function block.
[sc_flatte, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-124 Setting Chatter Blocking
The settings for the chatter blocking function are set centrally for the entire device in DIGSI. They are
accessible as settings in the General function group (see the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
[sc_parafl, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-125 Chatter-Blocking Settings
The chatter-blocking settings have the following meaning (see also Figure 3-126 and Figure 3-127 in the
examples shown in the following):
• No. permis.state changes

This number specifies how often the state of a signal may toggle within the chatter-test time and the
chatter-checking time. If this number is exceeded, the signal will be or remains blocked.
Enter a number from 0 to 65535 in this field. If the entry is 0, chatter blocking is essentially inactive.
• Initial test time

During this time, the number of times a signal changes its status is checked. This time is started if chatter
blocking is configured for at least one signal and this signal changes its status. If the configured number
of permissible status changes is exceeded during the initial test time, the signal is temporarily blocked
and the indication Chatter blocking is set.
Enter a number from 1 to 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in seconds.
When the set time has expired, the timer restarts automatically (cycle time).
• No. of chatter tests

This number specifies the maximum number of test cycles to be run. If the number of permissible status
changes of the signal stays exceeded during the initial test time of the last test cycle, the signal is finally
blocked. In this case, the indication Group warning (Alarm handling group and Device group) is set
additionally to the Chatter blocking indication after expiry of the set number. Restarting the devices
removes this block again.
Enter a number from 0 to 32767 in this field. The value Infinite (∞) is also permissible here.
Enter this value as character string oo.
• Chatter idle time

If the number of permissible status changes for a signal is exceeded during the initial test time or
the subsequent test time, the Chatter idle time starts. Within this time, this signal is blocked
temporarily and the Chatter blocking indication is set. The blocked input signal is assigned the
oscillatory quality.
Enter a number from 1 to 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in minutes. An
entry here is only considered if the number of chatter tests does not equal to 0.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
• Subsequent test time

During this second test time, the number of times a signal changes its status is checked once again.
The time begins when the Chatter idle time expires. If the number of status changes is within the
permissible limits, the signal is released. Otherwise, an additional dead time begins, unless the maximum
number of chatter tests has been reached.
Enter a number from 2 to 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in seconds. An
entry here is only considered if the number of chatter tests does not equal 0.
Example 1: Permanent Blocking

The chatter-blocking settings are set as follows:
• No. permis.state changes = 4
• No. of chatter tests = 2

After more than 4 state changes within the Initial test time, the input signal is set to the original
state by the chatter blocking and the oscillatory quality is assigned. Additionally, a corresponding indication
is added to the operational log. At the same time, the Chatter blocking indication is set. After expiry of
the settable Chatter idle time, during the following Subsequent test time, it is checked whether
the input signal is still chattering. This check is repeated, as the No. of chatter tests is set to 2 in this
example.
If, during the 2nd Subsequent test time, it has been detected that the number of status changes of
the input signal exceeds the set No. permis.state changes, the chatter blocking detects a persistent
violation of the signal stability and sets the Group warning indication. The original state of the signal is
permanently frozen. Only a device restart removes the chatter blocking again.
[dw_chatter-block-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-126 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with too Important Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time
(1) The input signal is permanently blocked starting from this point in time.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
Example 2: Temporary Blocking

The chatter-blocking settings are set as follows:
• No. permis.state changes = 4
• No. of chatter tests = 2

After more than 4 state changes within the Initial test time, the input signal is set to the original
state by the chatter blocking and the oscillatory quality is assigned. Additionally, a corresponding indication
is added to the operational log. At the same time, the Chatter blocking indication is set. After expiry of
the settable Chatter idle time, during the following Subsequent test time, it is checked whether
the input signal is still chattering. This check is repeated, as the No. of chatter tests is set to 2 in this
example.
If, during the 2nd Subsequent test time, it has been detected that the number of state changes of the
input signal is within the set No. permis.state changes, the temporary blocking of state changes of the
signal is removed and the actual signal state is released.
The quality bit oscillatory is removed and the Chatter blocking indication is reset. As the temporary
blocking of the signal is removed, the Group warning indication is not set. The chatter test starts again.
[dw_chatter-block-02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-127 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with Permissible Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time
3.9.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating
During commissioning, maintenance, or testing, a brief interruption of the connection between the logical
signals and binary inputs may be useful. It allows you to manually update the status of a switching device that
is not providing feedback correctly. Before this can take place, you must first set acquisition blocking.
To set the acquisition blocking, proceed as follows:
• Using the navigation keys, move in the main menu of the device display to
Commands→Equipment→Aq.blkman. update.
• Select the appropriate device (for example, a circuit breaker) from among the several switching devices
using the navigation keys.
• Press the Change softkey.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
• Enter the confirmation ID (not relevant for active role-based access control (RBAC) in the device).
• Confirm the process with the softkey marked OK in the display.

After entering the confirmation ID (only with the RBAC inactive), acquisition blocking is switched on.
[sc_detection, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-128 Activating the Acquisition Blocking
Manual updating of the switching device is possible from within the same menu.
• Select Manual update (Figure 3-129) using the navigation keys.
• Select the switching device setting to be manually updated using the navigation keys (for example, off,
Figure 3-130).
• Confirm the process with the softkey marked Ok in the display.
[sc_status, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-129 Activating Manual Update
[sc_statu2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-130 Selecting Position
The manually updated position of the switching device will be displayed.
[sc_statu3, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-131 Position of the Switching Device
NOTE
i For security reasons, manual updating is possible only directly through the on-site operation panel of the
device and not through DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
NOTE
i Setting acquisition blocking and the subsequent manual updating are also possible via the IEC 61850
system interface.
You can set acquisition blocking also via a binary input. If you want to put in the feeder or the switching
device in revision, you can set the acquisition blocking with an external toggle switch for one or more
switching devices. For this purpose, every switching device in the Switch function block (circuit breaker or
disconnector switch) has the input signal >Acquisition blocking. This signal can also be set from the
CFC.
[sc_beerfa, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-132 Input Signals >Acquisition Block and >Release Acquisition Block & Manual
Updating on the Switching Device
NOTE
i Interlockings are carried out with the status changes of the switching device. Remove acquisition blocking
again manually. Otherwise, position changes of the switching device are not detected and interlockings are
ineffective.
If the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are set using the operation panel of the device
or the system interface IEC 61850, these are retained until the acquisition blocking is manually deactivated.
When you initially start the device, the acquisition blocking is deactivated.
Except for a restart, the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are retained.
If the acquisition blocking is activated via the input signal >Acquisition blocking, it is retained as long as
the binary input is active.
To set the acquisition blocking of a switching device, the following sources are possible:
• Operation panel of the device
• System interface IEC 61850
• Input signal >Acquisition blocking

All sources undergo OR operations, that is, the acquisition blocking remains set until all the sources are
deactivated.
After deactivation of the acquisition blocking, the actual position of the switching device is adopted and
displayed in the operation panel of the device.
NOTE
i When the acquisition blocking is activated or the switching device updated manually while the entire
device or the switching device is in application mode, these states are not saved. The acquisition blocking
and the manual updating are not retained after a restart.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
The acquisition blocking and the manual update for the circuit breaker, the disconnector, and the tap changer
are reset by way of the >Reset AcqBlk&Subst binary input. Setting acquisition blocking and manual
update is blocked with the input activated.
3.9.3 Persistent Commands
In addition to the switching commands, which are issued as pulse commands, and stored for the standard
switching devices (circuit breaker, disconnector switch), persistent commands are also possible. In this case, a
distinction must be drawn between controllables with the Continuous output operating mode and a stored
signal output that is immune to reset.
You can change a controllable from pulse to persistent command with the Command output parameter.
[sc_command, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-133 Setting the Command Type in DIGSI 5
Select Pulse output or Continuous output for the command output type. If a persistent command is
selected, the Pulse parameter is irrelevant.
3.9.4 Device Logout
3.9.4.1 Overview
In the case of multibay functions, a device uses information from one or more other devices. For some
applications, it may be necessary for you to remove a device with all effective functions temporarily from the
plant and even to switch it off. These applications are, for example:
• Maintenance work
• System upgrades
• Testing the local protection functions

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
The Device logout functionality informs the receiver devices about the imminent disconnection of the
transmitter devices. To do this, the last valid received information is stored in the receiver devices and used for
the multibay functions.
NOTE
i If you need to remove a device temporarily from the plant, you must log off the device.
Protection functions distributed to several devices operate in a healthy manner with the remaining devices
only if you have logged off the device.
You can log off the device as follows:
• Via the on-site operation panel
• Via a communication interface using the Device logout (_:319) controllable
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Dev. funct.logout on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logout off
(_:508)
You can find the controllable and the binary inputs in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →
Information routing in the working area in the General block.
During the log-off process, the device checks whether all conditions for a logout have been met. If the
conditions for the log off have not been met, the logout is rejected.
The logout is rejected under the following conditions:
• The devices are communicating via the protection interface and switching off the device leads to an
interruption in protection-interface communication.
NOTE
i The path used to log the device off is stored in the operational log.
Even if you switch off the device after logout, the Device logged off (_:315) state is stored.
If you want to establish the initial state again after logging off the device, you must log on the device again.
To log on the device, you must use the same option used for logout. For example, if you have logged off the
device via binary inputs, you must log it on again via the binary inputs. This applies in similar manner if you
have logged off the device via DIGSI or via on-site operation.
3.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes
Logoff Options for a Device

You can log a device off as follows:
• Via the on-site operation panel
• Via communication through the controllable Device logout (_:319)
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Dev. funct.logout on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logout off
(_:508)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
Conditions for Logging off the Device
[lo_functional logoff device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-134 Logic for Logging off the Device
The conditions for a successful logout of the device result from the conditions for every activated protection
function.
Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination with Communication via the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) Protocol
If devices are exchanging data using the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) protocol – for example in the case of
substation interlocking – for each received data point the value of this data point can be set in the receiver
device when the transmitter device logs off. This value remains effective in the receiver device until the
logout is canceled by the transmitter device, even if the transmitter and/or the receiver are switched off in the
meantime.
Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination Using Protection Communication

If devices in a device combination communicate via the protection interface, you can only log off a device
under the following conditions:
• Logging off and switching off a device in a device combination must not result in an interruption in the
protection communication.
• For series-connected topologies, the device must be located at one end of the communication chain as
otherwise the protection communication is interrupted when the device is logged off and switched off.
For this reason, devices not at one of the ends in series-connected topologies cannot be logged off.
Logout via Binary Inputs

The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs. If you want to use push-
buttons, switch on this function as shown in the following figure. Log off the device using the push-button
Key2; log on the device again with the push-button Key1.
[lo_extta logoff device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-135 External Push-Button Wiring for Logging off the Device
If a switch is being used for control, route the binary input >Dev. funct.logout on as H (active with
voltage) and the binary input >Dev. funct.logout off as L (active without voltage). If the
switch S is closed, the device is logged off.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
[lo_extsx logoff device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-136 External Switch Wiring for Logging off the Device
Indications
The logged-off device reports the status ((_:315) Device logged off) and cause of the logout.
If you have logged off the device using binary inputs, the indication (_:313) Logged off via BI results.
If you have logged off the device using on-site operation, via DIGSI 5 or via the protection interface,the
indication (_:314) Logged off via control is issued.
The indications are stored in the operational log.

(Type)
General
_:507 General:>Dev. funct.logout on SPS I
_:508 General:>Dev. funct.logout off SPS I
_:319 General:Device logout SPC C
_:313 General:Logged off via BI SPS O
_:314 General:Logged off via control SPS O
_:315 General:Device logged off SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection

Functions
3.10.1 Overview
You can set the threshold values of protection functions directly on the device or by using DIGSI 5.
An innovative design was implemented for the protection settings.
You can switchover the edit mode between the following setting views:
• Primary
• Secondary
• Percent
If you change settings in a setting view, DIGSI 5 calculates the settings of the 2 inactive views in the
background. If you wish to save, for example, conversion to secondary values, then select the primary view.
Configure all the settings and switchover to the secondary view.
Edit Mode: Primary

The parameters are set as primary values and thus refer directly to the primary system. The manual conversion
on the secondary circuit omitted.
Edit Mode: Secondary

The settings refer to the secondary circuit of the transformer. This means that the settings must be converted.
The secondary setting is the customary setting view. For secondary tests, the pickup values can be read
directly.
Edit Mode: Percent

This setting type is beneficial for electric machines (generators, transformers, motors, and busbars). The
setting values can be standardized regardless of the machine size. The reference values for the percentage
settings are the rated values of the function groups, for example, rated voltage and rated current or rated
apparent power. The setting values are, thus, related exclusively to the primary settings. If other reference
values are used, then this is documented for the respective protection function in the application and setting
notes.
If parameters are selected it may happen that they are set only in percent in all 3 setting views.
Recommendation for Setting Sequence

When setting the protection function, Siemens recommends the following procedure:
• First, set the transformation ratios of the transformers. You can find these under Power-system data.
• Subsequently, set the reference parameters for the percent setting. You will find these parameters in
function group .
• Next, set the parameter of the protection functions.

If the transformer data have changed after completing the protection setting, remain in the setting sheet
(for example, primary setting) and change the transformer data. In the background, DIGSI 5 obtains the
new settings in the inactive setting views (for example, new secondary values).
The following section explains, by way of an example, how to modify the transformer ratios in DIGSI 5 using
the corresponding alternatives.
3.10.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5
In the delivery setting, DIGSI 5 is set to the edit mode Secondary.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
The following setting example shows how you can change the transformer ratio in DIGSI 5, and what impact
this has on the settings in the setting views Primary and Secondary. The protection setting is observed in the
example of the function Overcurrent protection.
The following output data are assumed:
Current transformer: 1000 A/1 A
Protection pickup 1.5 A
value:
The following figure shows the protection setting of the function Overcurrent protection in the secondary
view. The threshold value of the stage is set to 1.5 A.
[scmodsek_1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-137 Protection Setting, Display of the Active Setting Sheet
When you click the green arrow in the setting sheet at the upper left, you get to the window for switching
over to the setting view (see the following figure). Select the setting view you prefer.
[scmodums_2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-138 Switchover to the Desired Setting View
The following figures show the setting sequence in the edit mode Primary. Set the transformer data. In the
example, the current transformer has a transformation ratio of 1000 A/1 A.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[scpwandl_3, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-139 Setting Sheet: Transformer Data
In the function group Voltage/current 3-phase, you set the rated current and the rated voltage (see following
figure). Rated current, rated voltage are the reference variables for the percent setting.
[scui3phd, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-140 Reference Data for Percentage Settings
The following figure shows the threshold value of the function Overcurrent protection in the primary view at
1500 A.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[scumzpri_5, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-141 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage (Edit Mode:
Primary)
When switching over to the percent view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/1000 A · 100 % = 150 %

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[scumzpro_6, 1, en_US]
Percent)
When switching over to the secondary view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/(1000 A/1 A) = 1.5 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[scumzsek_7, 1, en_US]
Secondary)
If you only want to work in the secondary view, DIGSI 5 supports you if the transformer ratio changes during
the project phase.
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. Change the secondary
rated current of the current transformer in the setting sheet of the transformer data from 1 A to 5 A (Edit
mode: Secondary). If you change the transformer data, a window will appear (see the following figure) that
will ask you for the action desired.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[scfragew_8, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-144 Query after Changing the Transformer Data (Setting View: Secondary)
If you answer the question with Yes, then DIGSI 5 will recalculate the pickup values (threshold values) in the
active secondary view. For the new secondary transformer current 5 A, the new secondary threshold value
obtained is 7.5 A (1.5 A * 5 = 7.5 A). The primary and percent values remain unchanged.
The following figure shows the newly calculated threshold value in the secondary view.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[scsekneu_9, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-145 Automatically Recalculated Secondary Values After Changes in the Transformer Data
If you have already set the settings in the secondary view by including the new transformation ratio of the
transformer in the calculation, then answer the question with No. In this case, the protection settings in the
secondary view remain unchanged. DIGSI 5 recalculates the settings (threshold values) of the primary view. In
the example, the primary threshold value is then 300 A (1.5 A · 1000 A/5 A = 300 A).
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. The following table
summarizes the pickup values that DIGSI 5 will recalculate in the setting view. The new values (in bold)
depend on the reply to your question (refer to Figure 3-144).
Reply to the Question
Yes No
Threshold value secondary (active setting view) 7.5 A 1.5 A
Threshold value primary (covered setting view) 1500 A 300 A
Changing the Transformer Ratio in the Single-Line Editor

If you want to change the primary or secondary rated currents of the current transformer in the Single-Line
Editor, select the current transformer. You can view and change the currents in the tab Properties of the
object bar.
If you change the rated currents, the corresponding field has a red border to indicate currents that differ
between the Single-Line Editor and the power-system data. During synchronization in the Single-Line Editor,
these rated currents are adopted into the power-system data.
3.10.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device
In the delivery setting, the device is preset to secondary values. Only secondary values can be set directly on
the device.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
If you change transformer data directly on the device, it is not followed by a query, like in DIGSI 5 (see
Figure 3-144). Instead, the device assumes that all settings remain unchanged in the secondary view.
NOTE
i If the device works with IEC 61850 protocol, then change the transformer data only via DIGSI 5 and
not directly on the device. If you change the transformer data directly on the device, the IEC 61850
configuration of the measurement and metered values can be faulty.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings
3.11.1 General Device Settings
3.11.1.1 Overview
In Device settings in DIGSI 5, you find the following general settings.
[sc_deSeDe1, 1, en_US]
[sc_deSeAl, 4, en_US]
[sc_measurement, 1, en_US]
[sc_control, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_deSeBB, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-146 General Device Settings
The following list shows you the chapters containing the desired information.
You can find more about:
• Chatter blocking in 3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals.
• Control in 8.3 Control Functionality.
• Measured values in 10.1 Overview of Functions
• Spontaneous indications in 3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5.
• Continuous Function Chart Quality Treatment in 3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC
Charts.
Under Device, you set the parameters for the device that are valid across functions.
With Test support, indications issued via communication interfaces are labeled with an additional test bit,
if this is supported by the protocol. With this test bit you can determine whether an indication is generated
in a test and all or individual functions of the device are in the test mode. In this manner the reactions that
are necessary in normal operation due to an indication can be suppressed in other devices that receive these
indications. You can also permit, for example, a trip command to close an energized binary output for test
purposes. Siemens recommends deactivating the Test support again after the test phase.
From version DIGSI V09.70 on, you can control the state of the logical nodes (LLN0) in a logical device (LD)
under IEC 61850 with the parameter LDevice Mod controllable. If you want to test and change the
behavior of logical nodes individually, place a checkmark on the parameter LDevice Mod controllable.

The major portion of the settings is described in the chapters cited above. Then, the parameters on the section
Device, Spontaneous indication and Test support are described.
Parameter: Rated frequency
• Default setting (_:101) Rated frequency = 50 Hz

With the parameter Rated frequency, you set the rated frequency of the electrical power system.
Parameter: Minimum operate time
• Default setting (_:102) Minimum operate time = 0.00 s

With the parameter Minimum operate time, you set the minimum duration for the trip command of the
functions. The trip command is maintained for the set duration.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Parameter: Block monitoring dir.
• Default setting (_:138) Block monitoring dir. = off

With the parameter Block monitoring dir., you set whether indications are output via the system
interface(s) of the SIPROTEC 5 device or not.
If transmission blocking is switched on, no indications are output via the system interface(s) of a SIPROTEC 5
device, except via the IEC 61850 interface(s).
To avoid receiving IEC 61850 data, the corresponding IEC 61850 Client must stop the reporting or freeze the
data. You can find more information in the Communication Protocols Manual (C53000-L1840-C055-3).
Parameter: Fault-display
• Default setting (_:139) Fault-display = with pickup

With the parameter Fault-display, you set whether spontaneous fault indications which are signed as NT
(conditioned latching) in the matrix, get stored with every pickup or only for one tripping.
Keep the DIGSI 5 routing options in chapters 3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5 and 3.1.9 Stored
Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device in mind.
Parameter: Activate device test mode
• Default setting (_:150) Activate device test mode = inactive

With the parameter Activate device test mode, you can activate the test mode for the complete
device. This means that all indications generated in the device are given a test bit.
For further information, refer to 12.2 Enabling/Disabling the Application/Test Mode for the Entire Device.
Apart from activating the test mode via this parameter, you can also activate the test mode using the
IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. For more information, refer to the manual SIPROTEC 5 Communication protocol.
When the test mode is activated for the complete device, but the parameter Oper.bin.outp. under test
is not, the routed relay outputs of the device are not activated by the generated the indications.
NOTE
i The device remains in test mode during every restart until you intentionally set the device back into process
mode or you have carried out an initial start.
You can set the process mode by switching the parameter Activate device test mode to inactive
again (removing the check mark) or by deactivating the test mode again via the protocol IEC 61850-8-1.
NOTE
i Besides the cross device test mode, you also have the option to place an individual function or stage
into test mode depending on the supported operating modes of a function or stage. To do this, see the
description of the relevant function or stage.
When you place an individual function or stage into the test mode, all indications issued by this function or
stage are given a test bit.
When you activate the test mode for an individual function or stage, but not the parameter
Oper.bin.outp. under test, the routed relay outputs of the function or stage are not activated
by the generated indications.
An individual function or stage remains in the test mode during every restart until you have intentionally
deactivated the test mode for this function or stage again or carried out an initial start.
Parameter: Oper.bin.outp. under test
• Default setting (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test = inactive

If you activate the parameter Oper.bin.outp. under test, the indications generated in the device and
marked with a test bit can be issued to a routed relay output of the device, that is, you enable the relay
outputs of the device to be opened and closed.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
If only one individual function or stage of the device is in test mode, that is, the cross device tested mode has
not been activated, only the indications of this function or stage are marked with a test bit and the routed
relay outputs of the device are activated.
With the parameter (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test, you define whether the functions in Test
state can activate relay outputs. If the parameter (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test and the test
mode are activated for the entire device, all functions – including the relay outputs – are in Test state. If the
parameter (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test is not active and the test mode is activated for the entire device,
all functions – except the relay outputs – are in Test state. The relay outputs adopt the Test/Relay blk. state.
Output Signal: Functions in Test mode

Normally, the output signal Functions in Test modeis prerouted to the last LED of the device base
module. If one or more protection or control functions are in test mode, the output signal Functions in
Test mode is generated and the corresponding LED of the device lights up red.
Parameter: LDevice Mod controllable
• Default setting (_:181) LDevice Mod controllable = inactive

With the parameter LDevice Mod controllable, you control the state of the logical nodes (LLN0) in
a logical device (LD). If you want to test and change the behavior of logical nodes individually, place a
checkmark on the parameter LDevice Mod controllable.
Once the checkmark is placed, the LLN0:Mode can be controlled in a logical device.
3.11.1.3 Settings

Device
_:101 General:Rated frequency • 50 Hz 50 Hz
• 60 Hz
_:102 General:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
operate time
_:138 General:Block moni- • off off
toring dir.
• on
_:164 General:Station name Freely editable text
Chatter blocking
_:123 General:No. permis.state 0 to 65 535 0
changes
_:127 General:Initial test time 1 s to 65 535 s 1s
_:124 General:No. of chatter 0 to 32 767; ∞ 0
tests
_:125 General:Chatter idle time 1 min to 65 535 min 1 min
_:137 General:Subsequent test 2 s to 65 535 s 2s
time
Change group
_:113 General:Number settings 1 to 8 1
groups

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

_:114 General:Activat. of • via control settings group 1
settings group
• via binary input
• settings group 1
_:162 General:Blk setting • 0 false
change
• 1
_:163 General:Reserv.time for 0 s to 65 535 s 120 s
com.prot.
Measurements
_:111 General:Energy restore 0 min to 60 min 10 min
interval
_:112 General:Energy restore • none none
time
• hh:00
• hh:15
• hh:30
• hh:45
_:120 General:Energy restore • latest value latest value
• delta value
_:121 General:Energy restore • 0 false
by A.time
• 1
_:104 General:Average calc. 1 min to 60 min 60 min
interval
_:105 General:Average update • 1 min 60 min
interval
• 2 min
• 3 min
• 4 min
• 5 min
• 6 min
• 10 min
• 15 min
• 20 min
• 30 min
• 60 min
_:106 General:Average • hh:00 hh:00
synchroniz. time
• hh:15
• hh:30
• hh:45

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

_:107 General:Min/Max cyclic • no yes
reset
• yes
_:108 General:Min/Max reset 1 day(s) to 365 day(s) 1 day(s)
each
_:109 General:Min/Max reset 0 min to 1439 min 0 min
minute
_:110 General:Min/Max days 1 day(s) to 365 day(s) 1 day(s)
until start
Control
_:118 General:Enable sw.auth. • 0 false
station
• 1
_:119 General:Multiple • 0 false
sw.auth. levels
• 1
_:152 General:Specific sw. • 0 false
authorities
• 1
_:153 General:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for
• station/remote
• remote
_:154 General:Num. of specific 2 to 5 2
sw.auth.
_:156 General:Ident. sw.auth. Freely editable text
1
2
3
4
5
_:155 General:Multiple specific • 0 false
sw.auth.
• 1
_:166 General:Show • 0 false
int.lck.cond. on HMI
• 1
Spontan.indic.
_:139 General:Fault-display • with pickup with pickup
• with trip
CFC
_:161 General:CFC chart • automatic manual
quality handling
• manual
Test support
_:150 General:Activate device • 0 false
test mode
• 1
_:151 General:Oper.bin.outp. • 0 false
under test
• 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

IEC 61850
_:181 General:LDevice Mod • 0 false
controllable
• 1

(Type)
General
_:500 General:>SG choice bit 1 SPS I
_:503 General:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:504 General:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:505 General:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:506 General:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:510 General:>Test mode on SPS I
_:511 General:>Test mode off SPS I
_:507 General:>Dev. funct.logout on SPS I
_:508 General:>Dev. funct.logout off SPS I
_:512 General:>LED reset SPS I
_:513 General:>Light on SPS I
_:514 General:>Block relays SPS I
_:300 General:Act. settings group 1 SPC C
_:318 General:Active settings group INS O
_:308 General:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:324 General:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:311 General:Switching authority ENS O
_:312 General:Switching mode ENS O
_:309 General:Sw.authority key/set ENS O
_:310 General:Sw.mode key/set ENS O
_:330 General:Acq.blocking active SPS O
_:331 General:Manual update active SPS O
_:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:53 General:Health ENS O
_:51 General:Test mode ENC C
_:56 General:Application mode ENC C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

(Type)
_:321 General:Protection on SPC C
_:54 General:Protection inactive SPS O
_:319 General:Device logout SPC C
_:313 General:Logged off via BI SPS O
_:314 General:Logged off via control SPS O
_:315 General:Device logged off SPS O
_:323 General:LED reset SPC C
_:320 General:LED have been reset SPS O
_:509 General:>Block monitoring dir. SPS I
_:317 General:Block monitoring dir. SPS O
_:329 General:Functions in Test mode SPS O
3.11.2 Settings-Group Switching
3.11.2.1 Overview of Functions

For different applications you can save the respective function settings in so-called Settings groups, and if
necessary enable them quickly.
You can save up to 8 different settings groups in the device. In the process, only one settings group is active at
any given time. During operation, you can switch between settings groups. The source of the switchover can
be selected via a parameter.
You can switchover the settings groups via the following alternatives:
• Via the on-site operation panel directly on the device
• Via an online DIGSI connection to the device
• Via binary inputs
• Via a communication connection to the substation automation technology.

The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, DNP, or Modbus TCP can
be used for switching the settings groups.
A settings group includes all switchable settings of the device. Except for a few exceptions (for example,
general device settings such as rated frequency), all device settings can be switched.
For detailed information about the settings groups, refer to the Operating Manual and to the DIGSI 5 Online
Help.
3.11.2.2 Structure of the Function

The function of the Settings group switching is a supervisory device function. Accordingly, the settings and
indications of the settings group switching can be found in DIGSI 5 and at the on-site operation panel of the
device, below the general device settings respectively.
If you want to switchover a settings group, navigate to DIGSI 5 or proceed on the on-site operation panel of
the device, as follows:
• Via the project tree in DIGSI 5:

Project -> Device -> Settings -> Device settings
• Via the on-site operation panel of the device:

Main menu → Settings → General → Group switchover
The indications for the settings group switching can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under:
Project → Device → Information routing → General

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.11.2.3 Function Description
Activation
If you want to use the Settings group switching function, you must first set at least 2 settings groups in DIGSI
5 (parameter Number of settings groups > 1). You can set up a maximum of 8 settings groups. The settings
groups set in DIGSI 5 are subsequently loaded into the device.
Mechanism of the Switchover

When switching over from one settings group to another, the device operation is not interrupted. With
the parameter Active settings group you are either specifying a certain settings group or you allow
switching via control (IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850) or via binary input.
Switching via Control

When using the Control function for switching, the settings groups can be switched via a communication
connection from the substation automation technology or via a CFC chart.
The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, DNP, or Modbus TCP can be
used for switching the settings groups via a communication connection.
In order to use a CFC chart for switching, you must create a new CFC chart in DIGSI 5. Create the CFC chart in
the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →Charts →Add new chart. Link the signals that control
settings group switching in the CFC chart.
Switching via Binary Input

There are 3 appropriate input signals available for switching via binary inputs. These input signals allow
selection of the settings group via a binary code. If one of the 3 signals changes, the signal image present will,
after 100 ms (stabilization time), result in switching over to the appropriate settings group. If only 2 settings
groups must be switched over, only 1 binary input is required. The following table shows the possible binary
codes (BCD) and applicable settings groups (PG).
Table 3-21 Binary Codes of the Input Signals and Applicable Settings Groups
BCD Code via Binary Inputs PG 1 PG 2 PG 3 PG 4 PG 5 PG 6 PG 7 PG 8

>PG selection bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Copying and Comparing Settings Groups

In DIGSI 5, you can copy or compare settings groups with each other.
If you want to copy settings groups, select a source and target parameter group in DIGSI 5 in the device
settings, and then start the copy process. The device settings can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under
Project → Device → Settings → Device settings.
If you want to compare settings groups, it is possible to do so in all setting sheets for settings. You will then
select in addition to the active settings group, a 2nd settings group for comparison. Active setting values
and the comparable values are displayed next to each other. For settings that cannot be switched over, no
comparable values are displayed.
Indication of Settings Group Switchings

Every settings group shows an applicable binary indication as well as its activation and deactivation. The
process of settings group switching is also logged in the log for settings changes.
Parameter: Number settings groups
• Default setting (_:113) Number settings groups = 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
With the parameter Number settings groups, you can set the number of available settings groups; you
can switch between these.
Parameter: Activat. of settings group
• Default setting (_:114) Activat. of settings group = settings group 1

With the parameter Activat. of settings group, you specify the settings groups that you want to
activate, or the mechanisms via which the switchover is allowed. You can switchover only between the
settings groups specified with the parameter Number settings groups.
via control The switchover between the settings groups can only be initiated via a
communication connection from a substation automation technology or via
a CFC chart.
The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC
61850, DNP, or Modbus TCP can be used for switching the settings groups
via a communication connection.
via binary input The switchover between the settings groups functions exclusively via the
binary input signals routed to the settings group switching.
settings group 1 They define the active settings groups. You can define the active settings
... groups in DIGSI 5, or directly on the device via the on-site operation.
settings group 8
3.11.2.5 Settings

Change group
_:113 General:Number settings 1 to 8 1
groups
_:114 General:Activat. of • via control settings group 1
settings group
• via binary input

(Type)
General

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions

(Type)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.12 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit

Overview with the Distributed Busbar Protection as an Example (IEC 61850 Compliant):
• Process bus: for cross-device transmission of the measured values for current and voltage
• GOOSE: For cross-device transmission of the position information of disconnectors and circuit breakers,
their trip commands and additional signals
• Distributed busbar protection
• Further information
Process Bus:
The process bus is available for the modular SIPROTEC 5 devices. The current and voltage measured values can
be transmitted across devices using the process bus. Prerequisite: a ETH-BD-2FO communication module with
the appropriate communication protocols. In the following figure, you can see the 7SS85 as an example of the
client, and the 6MU85 and other modular SIPROTEC 5 devices as merging units.
[dw_bb8_proj-71-star, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-147 Star Structure for Distributed Busbar Protection with Merging Units Connected via Optical
Fibers
Prerequisites for the Merging Units for the Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)
You can use all modular SIPROTEC 5 devices (except the railway protection devices 7ST8x and 6MD89) and
other IEC 61850 compliant devices as merging units. The following prerequisites apply:
• All clients and merging units must have the firmware version V8.0x or higher.
• All clients and merging units must be connected to the ETH-BD-2FO communication module and must
use the process-bus protocols. These include:
– Consistent use of IEC 61850 Edition 2.x. Siemens recommends IEC 61850 Edition 2.1.
– Process-bus protocol 9-2 Merging Unit for Merging Units and 9-2 Client for clients
– Joint time synchronization. Siemens recommends the IEEE 1588 protocol.
• The current and voltage transformers suitable for the target application in the client must be present in
the merging units.
GOOSE:
As an alternative to using the local binary inputs and binary outputs of a SIPROTEC 5 device, you can use the
inputs and outputs of other SIPROTEC 5 devices and transmit them via IEC 61850 including GOOSE.
Examples of binary routings for transmission using GOOSE.
• Circuit-breaker and disconnector position information from the transmitters to the receivers
• Circuit-breaker trip commands from the transmitter to the receivers

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
Distributed Busbar Protection

The distributed busbar protection is a distributed protection system with the 7SS85 as the central unit (CU)
and other SIPROTEC 5 devices, the merging units (MU) as bay units.
The distributed busbar protection provides the following advantages over the centralized busbar protection or
the distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant):
• Transmission of current measured values (SMV) as per IEC 61850-9-2 (process bus) from the merging
units
• Automatic interconnection of current measured values, disconnector-switch and circuit-breaker switch

positions
• Local functional enhancements of the merging units
• Maximum number of bays and busbar zones
Functional Enhancements in the Devices

Starting with V8.40, the merging units have the following functional enhancements that are especially
intended for use with the distributed busbar protection and evaluated there:
• End-fault protection (1-pole/3-pole, 3-pole)
• External tripping
• Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection
• Extension in circuit-breaker failure protection
• Measuring point out of service
NOTE
i You can find these functional enhancements in the Global DIGSI 5 Library in the respective device, under
FG Circuit breaker > dBBP Function extensions. You can find the function Measuring point out of
service under Measuring inputs > Current 3-phase > dBBP Function extensions in the respective device.
Functional Enhancement in DIGSI 5

If a distributed busbar protection is present in the project, the following functional enhancements especially
intended for use with the distributed busbar protection are provided in the Single-Line Editor:
• New CU – BU assignment tab with the Update central unit function.
• Additional Include in distributed busbar system check box for current transformers, circuit breakers,
and disconnectors in the Properties tab.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
[sc_bbp8_SLE_incl, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-148 Extension in the Properties Tab if the Distributed Busbar Protection is Available
Further Information
NOTE
i Analog measured values, binary inputs, and binary outputs are routed across devices in the IEC 61850
System Configurator.
For a detailed description of how to use it as a Merging Unit/bay unit for the distributed busbar protection or
distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant), refer to the Project Engineering chapter in the Busbar
Protection 7SS85 device manual.
For further information on the process bus, GOOSE, IEC 61850 System Configurator, descriptions of stream
types, GOOSE Later Binding, VLAN priority, network redundancies, for example, PRP protocol or the sample
and time synchronization using IEEE 1588, refer to the Process Bus, Communication Protocols, IEC 61850
System Configurator and the DIGSI 5 Help manuals.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Functions
3.13 Display-Page Editor
3.13 Display-Page Editor

If you order a SIPROTEC 5 device with display, you can preconfigure one or more display pages with the
DIGSI 5 Editor Display page.
Via a display page, you can quickly obtain an overview of the following information:
• Text
• Signals
• Static and dynamic graphics

In DIGSI 5 Editor Display page, default names that are numbered in a consecutive order are assigned to the
newly added display pages. When a display page is added or deleted, a binary signal (SPS) that has the same
name is created or deleted automatically in Information routing > Display pages. With the activation of this
binary signal, the device display switches to the corresponding display page automatically. The display page is
maintained until another display-page signal is activated or the HMI is used.
From firmware version V9.50, you can create up to 30 different display pages for each SIPROTEC 5 device. By
pressing the left and right navigation keys, you can toggle between the display pages in the device.
For more information, refer to DIGSI 5 Online Help.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
4 Applications
4.1 Overview 270

4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SJ82/7SJ85 271

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
4.1 Overview
4.1 Overview
The Global DIGSI 5 library provides application templates for the applications of the devices. The application
template
• Supports the fast realization of complete protection solutions for applications
• Contains the basic configuration for the use case
• Contains functions and default settings for the use case
When using an application template, note the following:
• Adapt the application template to your specific use (check/adapt default settings, delete/add functions).
For more detailed information on this, refer to 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device.
• Check the routing of binary outputs with respect to fast and normal relays.
• Check the CFC charts for the group-warning indications and group-fault indications.
The following describes the application templates and maximum functional scope for the devices shown in
this manual.
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions
available on the device!

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SJ82/7SJ85
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices

7SJ82/7SJ85
Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applications of the non-modular device 7SJ82 and the
modular device 7SJ85. The application templates contain the basic configurations, required functions, and
default settings.
The following application templates are available for the device 7SJ82 and 7SJ85 in the DIGSI 5 function
library:
• Non-directional OC (4*I), 7SJ82 only
• Non-directional OC (4*I, 4*V)
• Directional OC, grounded system
• Directional OC, resonant-grounded/isol. system
• Capacitor bank H-bridge + 1*RLC, 7SJ85 only
• Capacitor bank MSCDN, 7SJ85 only
• Capacitor bank H-bridge, 7SJ82 only

For the application templates to function in the device, the following minimum requirements for the hardware
configuration must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration Minimum
Requirement
Template 1 Non-directional OC (4*I) 9 BI, 8 BO, 4 I
Template 2 Non-directional OC (4*I, 4*V) 9 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V
Template 3 Directional OC, grounded system
Template 4 Directional OC, resonant-grounded / isol.
system
Template 5 Capacitor bank: H-bridge + 1*RLC 2 BI, 2 BO, 12 I
Template 6 Capacitor bank: MSCDN 2 BI, 2 BO, 28 I, 4 V
Template 7 Capacitor bank: H-bridge 2 BI, 2 BO, 8 I
The following table shows the functional scope and the required function points of the application templates
for the device 7SJ82/7SJ85:
Table 4-1 Functional Scope of the Application Template for the Device 7SJ82/7SJ85
ANSI Function Abbr.

Available in 7SJ82
Available in 7SJ85
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
Template 5
Template 6
Template 7
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x x x x x x x x

Hardware quantity structure expand- I/O x x x x x x
able
24 Overexcitation protection V/f x x
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization func- Sync x x
tion
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x x
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase (CEI V< x x
0-16 standard)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
Available in 7SJ82
Available in 7SJ85
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
Template 5
Template 6
Template 7
27 Undervoltage protection, positive- V1< x x
sequence system
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx< x x
universal, Vx
27 Undervoltage protection, 1-phase, Vx< x x
universal, Vx
27R, Rate-of-voltage-change protection dV/dt x x
59R
27/Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive QU x x
power protection
32R Reverse-power protection -P< x x
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> x x
37 Undercurrent protection I< x x x x x
38 Temperature supervision TmpUb x x
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent I2> x x x x x
protection
46 Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) I22t> x x
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent protec- I2>, ∠ x x
tion with direction (V2, I2)
49 Thermal overload protection Θ, I2t x x 3 x
49 Thermal overload protection, user- Θ, I2t x x
defined characteristic
49 Thermal overload protection for RLC Θ, I2t x x x
filter elements of a capacitor bank
50TD/ Overcurrent protection, phases - I> x x x
51 advanced
50TD/ Overcurrent protection, phases - basic I> x x x x x x 3 x
51
50TD/ Positive-sequence overcurrent protec- x x
51 tion
50TD/ OC-3ph protection for RLC elements x x
51
50NTD/ Overcurrent protection, ground - IN> x x x
51N advanced
50NTD/ Overcurrent protection, ground - basic IN> x x x x x x x
51N
50N/ Overcurrent protection, 1-phase - I>1pA x x
51N advanced
50N/ Overcurrent protection, 1-phase - basic I>1pB x x
51N
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping I>>> x x
50Ns/ Sensitive ground-current protection for INs> x x
51Ns systems with resonant or isolated
neutral

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
Available in 7SJ82
Available in 7SJ85
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
Template 5
Template 6
Template 7
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x x
RBRF Restrike protection x x
51V Overcurrent protection, voltage x x
dependent
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase (CEI V> x x
0-16 standard)
59 Overvoltage protection, positive- V1> x x
sequence system
47 Overvoltage protection, negative- V2> x x
sequence system
47 Overvoltage protection, negative- V2/V1> x x
sequence/positive-sequence system
59N Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence V0> x x
system
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase or 1- Vx> x x
phase, universal, Vx
59C Peak overvoltage protection for capaci- x x x 2 x
tors
59NU Neutral-point voltage-unbalance x x
protection for isolated capacitor banks
in star connection
60 Voltage-comparison supervision x x
60C Current-unbalance protection for Iunbal> x x x 2 x
capacitor banks, 3-phase
60C Current-unbalance protection for Iunbal> x x
capacitor banks, 1-phase
67 Directional overcurrent protection, I>, ∠(V,I) x x
phases – advanced
67 Directional overcurrent protection, I>, ∠(V,I) x x x x
phases – basic
67N Directional overcurrent protection, IN>, ∠ x x
ground - advanced (V,I)
67N Directional overcurrent protection, IN>, ∠ x x x
ground - basic (V,I)
67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault INs>, ∠ x x x
detection for systems with resonant or (V,I)
isolated neutral
67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault G0>, B0> x x
detection via admittance measurement
for systems with resonant or isolated
neutral
67Ns Transient ground-fault function, for W0p,tr> x x
transient and permanent ground faults
in resonant-grounded or isolated
networks

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
Available in 7SJ82
Available in 7SJ85
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
Template 5
Template 6
Template 7
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for V0>, ∠ x x
systems with resonant or isolated (Uharm.,I
neutral with phasor measurement of harm.)
3rd or 5th harmonic
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for IN-pulse x x
systems with resonant or isolated
neutral via 3I0 pulse pattern detection
67Ns Intermittent ground-fault blocking x x x
for directional sensitive ground-fault
detection
74TC Trip-circuit supervision TCS x x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x
81U Underfrequency load shedding x x
81R Rate of frequency change protection df/dt x x
81 Frequency protection (CEI 0-16 x x
standard)
Vector-jump protection x x
86 Lockout x x 4 4 4 4 x x x
87C Differential protection, capacitor bank x x x
87V Voltage differential protection, capac- ΔV x
itor bank
87N Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN x x
90V Voltage controller x x
Arc Arc protection x x
Prot
DIGFP Directional intermittent ground-fault x x
protection
IGFP Intermittent ground-fault protection x x
FL Fault locator, single-side FL-one x x
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto SOTF x x x x x x
fault
Monit Circuit-breaker supervision x x
VSEL Voltage measuring-point selection x x
20mA 20-mA unit Ethernet x x
MT
20mA 20-mA unit serial x x
MS
RTDMT RTD unit Ethernet x x
RTDMS RTD unit Serial x x
LPIT module IO240 x
Signaling-voltage supervision x x
Measuring-voltage failure detection x x x x

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
Available in 7SJ82
Available in 7SJ85
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
Template 5
Template 6
Template 7
Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision x x
CB Test x x x x x x x x x
Interlocking x x 4 4 4 4 x x x
I-jump detection x x
V-jump detection x x
Pulse metered value x x
Measured values, standard x x x x x x x 2 x
User-defined function block x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, x x
Avg
Switching statistic counters x x
Voltage variation x x
Voltage unbalance x x
THD and harmonics x x
Total demand distortion x x
CFC (Standard, control) x x x x x x x x x
CFC arithmetic x x
Switching sequences function x x
Inrush-current detection x x x x x x
2nd harmonic ground detection x x
2nd harmonic detection 1-phase x x
External trip initiation x x
External trip initiation with current-flow x x
criterion
Control x x 4 4 4 4 x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary x x x x x x x x x
signals
Monitoring and supervision x x x x x x x x x
Protection interface, serial x x
Capacitor bank x x x 2 x
Circuit breaker x x x x x x x x x
Circuit breaker [control] x x
Circuit breaker [status only] x x
PI trip (CEI 0-16 standard) x x
Pole discrepancy protection x
Disconnector x x 3 3 3 3
Disconnector [status only] x x
Tap changer x x
Analog unit x x
Communication modules x x x x x x x x x
Access control x x x x x x x x x
Security logging x x x x x x x x x

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
Available in 7SJ82
Available in 7SJ85
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
Template 5
Template 6
Template 7
Temperature acquisition via communi- x x
cation protocol
Point-on-wave switching15 x
Disconnector-switch monitoring x x
Sum of function points: 0 0 30 45 90 295 80
Application Template: Non-directional OC (4*I)
[dw_7SJ8x_AppTemp1_Non-directional OC (4I), 1, en_US]
Figure 4-1 Application Template: Non-directional OC (4*I)
15 You could find the description of this function in the Point-on-Wave Switching Function Manual.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
Application Template: Non-directional OC (4*I, 4*V)
[dw_7SJ8x_AppTemp2_Non-directional OC (4I4V), 1, en_US]
Figure 4-2 Application Template: Non-directional OC (4*I, 4*V)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
Application Template: Directional OC, Grounded System
[dw_7SJ8x_AppTemp3_Directional OC_grounded, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-3 Application Template: Directional OC, Grounded System

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
Application Template: Directional OC, Resonant-Grounded/Isol. System
[dw_7SJ8x_AppTemp4_Directional OC_resonant-grounded/isol., 1, en_US]
Figure 4-4 Application Template: Directional OC, Resonant-Grounded/Isol. System

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
Application Template: Capacitor Bank H-bridge + 1*RLC
[dw_7SJ8x_AppTemp5_CapBank H-bridge_1RLC, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-5 Application Template: Capacitor Bank H-bridge + 1*RLC

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
Application Template: Capacitor Bank MSCDN
[dw_7SJ8x_AppTemp6_CapBank MSCDN, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-6 Application Template: Capacitor Bank MSCDN

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications
Application Template: Capacitor Bank H-bridge
[dw_7SJ8x_AppTemp7_CapBank Hbridge, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-7 Application Template: Capacitor Bank H-bridge

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5 Function-Group Types and Bay Proxy
5.1 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase 284

5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase 291
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase 298
5.4 Function-Group Type Capacitor Bank 301
5.5 Function-Group Type Capacitor Bank Differential Protection 314
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units 328
5.7 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker 400
5.8 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker [without Current] 420
5.9 Process Monitor 436
5.10 Function-Group Recording 443
5.11 Bay Proxy 445

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Function-Group Types and Bay Proxy
5.1 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
5.1.1 Overview
In the Voltage-current 3-phase function group, you can use all the functions for protection and supervision
of a protected object or equipment that allows 3-phase current and voltage measurement. The function group
also contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
10 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System).
You will find the Voltage-current 3-phase function group under each device type in the Global DIGSI 5
library. You will find all protection and supervision functions that you can use for this function-group type
in the function group Voltage-current 3-phase. These functions are described in chapter 6 Protection and
Automation Functions.
For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, refer to chapter 2 Basic Structure
of the Function. For information regarding the functional scope of the application templates for the various
device types, refer to chapter 4 Applications.
5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group
The function group always contains the following blocks:
• Protected object/equipment data (FB General)
• Operational measured values
• Process monitor
• Output logic of the function group
• Reset the LED group

These blocks are essential for the function group under all circumstances, so they cannot be loaded or deleted.
You can load the protection and supervision functions required for your application in the function group. The
functions are available in the function library in DIGSI 5. Functions that are not needed can be deleted from
the function group.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group Voltage-current 3-phase:
[dw_fg_ui3p, 4, en_US]
Figure 5-1 Structure of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The function group has interfaces with:
• Measuring points
• Function group Circuit breaker
Interface with Measuring Points

The function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the measuring points. If you
are using an application template, the function group is already connected to the necessary measuring points.
If you add functions to the function group, they will automatically receive the measured values from the
correct measuring points. If you add protection functions to the function group but the necessary measuring
point is not connected, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. Configure the measuring points in DIGSI 5 via the
Function-group connections Editor. For more detailed information, refer to 2 Basic Structure of the Function.
The function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
• 3-phase current
The measurands from the 3-phase current system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, these are, for example, IA, IB, IC, IN or 3I0. All values that can be
calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface. The function group must always be
connected to the I-3ph measuring point.
You can connect the 3-phase current interface to a maximum of four 3-phase current measuring points,
(for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts). If 2 current measuring points have been connected with
the 3-phase current interface, the total current is also determined from measured values from both
measuring points in the function group. All functions in the function group have access to these values.
• 3-phase voltage (optional)

The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. There are various types
of transformer connections possible. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are also
provided via this interface. Connecting the function group to the V-3ph measuring point is optional.
You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface. For more information, refer to
6.55 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.
If you want to test or change the connection between the voltages and the V-3ph measuring point,
double-click in the DIGSI 5 project tree → (Name of the device) > Measuring point routing (Connection
type = 3 phase-to-ground voltage). For more information, refer to the description of the power-system
data starting with 6.1 Power-System Data.
Interface to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group

All required data are exchanged between the function groups Voltage-current 3-phase and Circuit breaker
via the interface of the Circuit-breaker function group.
This data includes, for example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions sent in the
direction of the Circuit-breaker function group and, for example, the circuit-breaker position information in
the direction of the protection function groups.
The Voltage-current 3-phase function group is connected to one or more Circuit-breaker function groups.
This connection generally determines:
• Which circuit breaker(s) is/are activated by the protection functions of the protection function group
• Starting the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Protection function group
Besides the general allocation of the protection function group to the Circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using the
Circuit-breaker interaction Editor in the protection function group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:

If you are using an application template, the function groups are already connected to each other, because
this connection is absolutely essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection in DIGSI 5
via the Function-group connections Editor.
For more information, refer to 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device.
If the connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Protected Object/Equipment Data (FB General)

The rated voltage and rated current as well as the neutral-point treatment of the protected object or the
equipment are defined here. These data apply to all functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.
Resetting the LED Group

Using the Reset the LED group function, you can reset the stored LEDs of the functions in one specific
function group while the activated, stored LEDs of other functions in other function groups remain activated.
For more detailed information, refer to 3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group .
Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and cannot be
removed.
The process monitor provides the following information in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
• Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/activated protected object/equipment based on the flow of leakage current
• Closure detection:
Detection of the switching on of the protected object/equipment
• Cold-load pickup detection (optional, only for protection devices):

This information applies to all functions available in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.
The description of the process monitor begins with 5.9 Process Monitor.
Operational Measured Values

The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and
cannot be deleted.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
Table 5-1 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence A A Rated operating current of the primary values
current
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
INS Sensitive ground current A mA Rated operating current of the primary values
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
values/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

dary
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
values/√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
voltage values/√3
f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency
Ptotal Active power MW W Active power of the primary values
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
Qtotal Reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary values
Stotal Apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary values
Cos φ Active factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to cos φ = 1
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW W Active power of the phase
Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the phase
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent MVA VA Apparent power of the phase
power Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
For a more detailed explanation of the operational measured values, refer to 10.3 Operational Measured
Values.
Inversion of Power-Related Measured and Statistical Values (FB General)

The following directional values calculated in operational measured values are defined positively in the
direction of the protected object.
• Power
• Active factor
• Energy
• Minimum, maximum values
• Average values
With the parameter P, Q sign, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a
power flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
For more information on this, refer to 10.1 Overview of Functions.
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the protection and supervision functions that are avail-
able in the function group separately, in a pickup logic and a trip logic, respectively. The pickup and trip logic
generate the overreaching indications (group indications) of the function group. These group indications are
transferred via the Protection information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are processed
further there.
The pickup signals of the protection and supervision functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
are combined in a phase-selective manner and output as a group indication.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_anrlin, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-2 Creation of the Pickup Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
The trip signals from the protection and supervision functions of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
always result in 3-pole tripping of the device.
[lo_auslin, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-3 Creation of the Operate Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group

With this, you define which circuit breaker(s) is/are affected by the protection functions of the Protection
function group. A feasible default setting has already been provided in the application templates. You can find
more information in chapter 2.

The set data applies to all functions in the function group.
Set the protected object/equipment data for your specific application.
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:9451:101) Rated current = 1000 A

With the parameter Rated current, you can set the primary rated current of the protected object or
equipment. The parameter Rated current is significant for protection functions if current values are set in
percentages. In this case, it is the reference value. In addition it is the reference value for the measured values
in percent.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter
via DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:9451:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV

With the parameter Rated voltage, you can set the primary rated voltage of the protected object or
equipment. The parameter Rated voltage is significant for protection functions if current values are set in
percentages. In this case, it is the reference value. In addition it is the reference value for the measured values
in percent.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter
Parameter: Power-sys. neutral point
• Default setting (_:9451:149) Power-sys. neutral point = grounded

With the parameter Power-sys. neutral point, you specify whether the system neutral is grounded,
isolated , or suppress. coil grounded (grounded via arc-suppression coil). Currently, the parameter
does not affect any protection function; only if the Automatic reclosing function uses the voltage measure-
ment.
For more information, refer to 6.48.1 Overview of Functions.
Parameter: P, Q sign
• Default setting (_:9451:158) P, Q sign = not reversed

The power and energy values are defined by the manufacturer such that power in the direction of the
protected object is considered positive. You can also positively define the power output by the protected
object (for example, as seen by the consumer). With the parameter P, Q sign, you can invert the sign for
these components. This inversion does not influence any protection function.
5.1.4 Write-Protected Settings
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Addr. Parameters C Range of Values Default Setting
Network data
_:103 General:rated apparent power 0.20 MVA to 5 000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA
NOTE
i For more detailed information on the process monitor, refer to 5.9 Process Monitor.
5.1.5 Settings

Rated values
_:9451:101 General:Rated current 1.00 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
_:9451:102 General:Rated voltage 0.10 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
Power-system data
_:9451:149 General:Power-sys. • grounded grounded
neutral point
• suppress. coil grounded
• isolated
Measurements
_:9451:158 General:P, Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
General
_:9451:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:9451:53 General:Health ENS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
_:4501:52 Group indicat.:Behavior ENS O
_:4501:53 Group indicat.:Health ENS O
Reset LED Group
_:7381:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset SPS I
_:7381:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SPS O
_:7381:52 Reset LED Group:Behavior ENS O
_:7381:53 Reset LED Group:Health ENS O
Closure detec.
_:1131:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open SPS I
_:1131:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SPS O
_:1131:4681:52 Closure detec.:Behavior ENS O
_:1131:4681:53 Closure detec.:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.2.1 Overview
In the Voltage-current 1-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring
a protection object or equipment that allow a 1-phase current and voltage measurement or a zero-sequence
voltage measurement via the 3-phase voltage measuring point. The function group also contains the opera-
tional measurement for the protected object or equipment (see chapter 10 Measured Values, Energy Values,
and Supervision of the Primary System).
The function group Voltage-current 1-phase has interfaces to the measuring points and the function group
Circuit breaker.
[dw_1spstr, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-4 Structure of the Function Group Voltage-Current 1-Phase

You connect the function group Voltage-current 1-phase to the current and voltage measuring points via the
interfaces to the measuring points. At least one measuring point has to be connected. The other is optional.
This assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree → Function group connections. To connect the
interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
The function group has the following interfaces to the measuring points:
• 1-phase current
The 1-phase current measured values are provided via this interface.
You can only connect a 1-phase current measuring point to the interface 1-phase current.
• Voltage 1-phase or Voltage 3-phase

You can connect the voltage interface of the function group Voltage-current 1-phase with a 1‑phase
or a 3-phase measuring point. The calculated zero-sequence voltage or the measured residual voltage is
available for connection with a 3-phase measuring point. The phase-to-ground voltages are not available
in the function group Voltage-current 1-phase. You can use both connection types at the same time.
You configure the 1-phase voltage measuring points via the voltage interface (see the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[scVI1ph_V1ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-5 Connecting Measuring Points to the Function Group Voltage-Current 1-Phase
If you select the voltage type VN broken-delta for the 1-phase voltage measuring point in the measuring
point routing (see the following figure), the device measures the residual voltage VN at the broken-delta
winding. The residual voltage is converted into the voltage equivalent of the zero-sequence voltage. This
converted voltage is used as the voltage input for all functions in the function group Voltage-current
1-phase.
[scvnopen, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-6 Selection of the VN broken-delta Voltage Type for the 1-Phase Voltage Measuring Point
The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the 3-phase voltage system or the measured residual voltage is
available via the voltage interface (see the following figure).
The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the 3-phase voltage system is available via the voltage interface
(see the following figure).
[scVI1ph_V3ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-7 Connecting Measuring Points 3-Phase Voltage and 1-Phase Current to the Function Group
1-Phase Voltage-Current
You can connect the voltage interface of the function group Voltage-current 1-phase with precisely one
3-phase voltage measuring point. 3 types of 3-phase voltage measuring-point connection are supported.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the different connection types, the type of voltage input for the functions in the function group Voltage-
current 1-phase also changes.
The following table shows the properties of the voltage input for the function group Voltage-current 1-phase
depending on the connection types.
Connection Type of the 3- Voltage Input
Phase Voltage Measuring
Point
3 ph-to-gnd voltages The zero-sequence voltage is calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages
and used as a voltage input for all functions.
3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN The residual voltage VN is converted into the voltage equivalent of the
3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN zero-sequence voltage. This converted voltage is used as a voltage input for
functions.

All required data is exchanged between the function group Voltage-current 1-phase and the function group
Circuit breaker via the interface of the function group Circuit breaker.
In this example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions are exchanged in the direction
of the Circuit-breaker function group.
You must connect the function group Voltage-current 1-phase with the function group Circuit breaker.
This assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree → Function group connections. To connect the
interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix. If the interface is not
connected, the functions operate as supervision functions in the function group Voltage-current 1-phase.
[sc_1stspc, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-8 Connecting Function Group Voltage-Current 1-Phase with Function Group Circuit Breaker
Fundamental Components
The fundamental components are always present in the function group Voltage-current 1-phase and cannot
be deleted.
The following table shows the fundamental components of the function group Voltage-current 1-phase:
Table 5-2 Fundamental Components of the Function Group Voltage-Current 1-Phase
Measured Values Primary Secondary % Referring to

I 1-phase current A A Parameter Rated operating current
V16 1-phase voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating voltage
V0 17 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating
voltage/√3
VN18 Residual voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating
voltage/√3
16 The 1-phase voltage V is only visible if it is connected to a 1-phase voltage measuring point.
17 The zero-sequence voltage V0 is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point with the connection type 3-phase
phase-to-ground voltage.
18 The residual voltage VN is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point with the connection type 3-phase
phase-to-ground voltage + VN or 3-phase phase-to-phase voltage + VN.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
You can find the parameters Rated operating current and Rated operating voltage in the
function block General of the function group Voltage-current 1-phase.

The operational measured values are not preconfigured in the function group Voltage-current 1-phase. You
can instantiate them in the function group or delete them from the function group. You can find the opera-
tional measured values in the DIGSI library, in the folder FG Voltage-current 1-phase under Measurements
→ Operational values.
[scui1pom, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-9 Operational Measured Values
Table 5-3 Operational Measured Values of the Function Group Voltage-Current 1-Phase
Measured Values Primary Secondary % Referring to

I 1-phase current A A Parameter Rated operating current
V19 1-phase voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating voltage
VN 20 Residual Voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating
voltage/√3
V021 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating
voltage/√3
f Frequency Hz Hz Parameter Rated frequency
P Active power MW W Parameter Rated apparent power
Q Reactive power Mvar var Parameter Rated apparent power
You can find the parameters Rated operating current, Rated operating voltage, and Rated
apparent power in the function block General of the function group Voltage-current 1-phase. You can
find the parameter Rated frequency in the function block General of the Device settings.
NOTE
i The frequency can be calculated from the voltage or current measured value.
The active and reactive power are only displayed if the voltage and the 1-phase current are connected to
the function group. If the connected voltage is a phase-to-ground voltage (VA, VB , VC) or any voltage Vx,
the specific power values are displayed. Otherwise the power is displayed as not available.
19 V is only visible if it is connected to a 1-phase voltage measuring point.

20 VN is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point of the type 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN or 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN.
21 V0 is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point of the type 3 ph-to-gnd voltages.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i Before creating the protection functions in the function group, you should connect them to the suitable
function group Circuit breaker.
• Default setting (_:9421:101) Rated current = 1000 A

With the parameter (_:9421:101) Rated current, you set the primary rated current of the protected
object. The parameter (_:9421:101) Rated current set here is the reference value for the percentage
measured values and setting values made in percentages.

With the parameter Rated voltage, you set the primary rated voltage of the protected object. The param-
eter Rated voltage set here is the reference value for all voltage-related percentage values in the function
group Circuit breaker.
If you connect the Voltage-current 1-phase function group to the 1-phase measuring point the following
applies:
• With connection type VAB, VBC, VCB, or VN , you set the parameter Rated voltage as the phase-to-phase
voltage.
• With the connection type VA, VB, VC, or VN (broken-delta winding) you set the parameter Rated voltage as
phase-to-ground voltage.
• With the connection type VX, you set the parameter Rated voltage as either the phase-to-phase
voltage or the phase-to-ground voltage
• Default setting (_:9421:150) P, Q sign = not reversed

The power values are set at the factory so that power in the direction of the protected object is considered
positive. You can also define the power output by the protected object as positive. You can invert the signs
of active and reactive power with the parameter P, Q sign. This inversion has no effect on the protection
functions.
Parameter: Rated current (Write Protected)
• Default setting (_9421:104) Rated current = 1000 A

With the parameter Rated current, you can set the primary rated current. The Rated current set here is
the reference value for the percentage measured values and setting values made in percentages.
NOTE
i If an interface to a 3-phase function group exists and voltage transformers or current transformers are
assigned, the write-protected parameters: (_9421:104) Rated current and (_:9421:105) Rated
voltage are present. The parameters (_:9451:101) Rated current and (_:9421:102) Rated
voltage are hidden.
Parameter: Rated voltage (Write Protected)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the parameter Rated voltage, you set the primary voltage to which all voltage-related percentage
values in the function group Circuit breaker are related.
Parameter: Rated apparent power (Write Protected)
• Default setting (_:91:103) Rated apparent power = 692.82 MVA

With the parameter Rated apparent power, you can set the primary rated apparent power of the trans-
former to be protected.
The parameter Rated apparent power is relevant for the main protection function of the device. The
parameter Rated apparent power set here is the reference value for the percentage measured values and
setting values made in percentages.
Parameter: M I-1ph uses MeasP with ID (Write Protected)
• Default setting (_:91:214) M I-1ph uses MeasP with ID = 0

The parameter M I-1ph uses MeasP with ID shows you which 1-phase measuring point is connected to
the transformer side. Every measuring point is assigned a unique ID.
Parameter: Scale Factor M I-1ph (Write Protected)
• Default setting (_:91:223) Scale factor M I-1ph = 0.000

The parameter Scale factor M I-1ph shows you the magnitude scaling of the transformer neutral-point
current.
Rated values
_:9421:103 General:Rated apparent -1.00 MVA to -1.00 MVA 0.00 MVA
power
Power-system data
_:9421:214 General:M I-1ph uses 0 to 100 0
MeasP with ID
_:9421:223 General:CT mismatch M 0.00 to 100.00 0.00
I-1ph
5.2.5 Settings

Rated values
_:9421:101 General:Rated current 1 A to 100 000 A 1000 A
Measurements
_:9421:150 General:P, Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Reset LED Group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
5.3.1 Overview
In the Voltage 3-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a
protected object or equipment which allows a 3-phase voltage measurement. The function group also
contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
10 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System). Applicable functions are, for
example, Voltage protection or Frequency protection.
The function group Voltage 3-phase has interfaces to the measuring points and the function group Circuit
breaker.
[dw_3phase_voltage, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-10 Structure of the Function Group Voltage 3-Phase

You connect the function group Voltage 3-phase to the voltage measuring points via the interface to the
measuring points. This assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree → Function group connec-
tions. To connect the interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
[sc_3_voltage1, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-11 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
If you add functions to the function group Voltage 3-phase, these are connected to the measuring point
automatically.
You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface. For more information, refer to chapter
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via the interface V 3-ph. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, for example, VA, VB, VC, Vgnd. All values that can be calculated from the
measurands are also provided via this interface.
Interface to the Function Group Circuit Breaker

All required data is exchanged between the function group Voltage 3-phase and the function group Circuit
breaker via the interface of the function group Circuit breaker.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
In this example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions are exchanged in the direction
of the function group Circuit breaker.
You must connect the function group Voltage 3-phase with the function group Circuit breaker. This assign-
ment can be made in DIGSI only via Project tree → Connect function group. To connect the interfaces, set a
cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
[sc_3_voltage2, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-12 Connecting the Function Group Voltage 3-Phase with the Function Group Circuit Breaker

The operational measured values are always present in the function group Voltage 3-phase and cannot be
deleted.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the function group Voltage 3-phase:
Table 5-4 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secondary % with respect to

VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
values/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
values/√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
NOTE
i Before creating the protection functions in the function group, you should connect them to the appropriate
Circuit-breaker function group.

With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary rated voltage. The parameter Rated voltage set
here is the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.
5.3.4 Settings

Rated values

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Reset LED Group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.4 Function-Group Type Capacitor Bank
5.4.1 Overview
In the Capacitor bank function group, all the functions that are necessary for protecting and monitoring a
capacitor bank can be used.
You can find the Capacitor bank function group under 7SJ82/7SJ85 device types in the Global DIGSI 5 Library.
The Capacitor bank function group contains all of the protection and supervision functions that you can use
for this device type.
Some of these functions are exclusively used for protecting capacitor banks, and others are universal standard
functions which can be used for other protected objects as well. You find the exclusive protection functions in
the directory Capacitor-bank protection.
[scfgcapb-250314-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-13 Capacitor Bank Function Group - Functional Scope for Device Type 7SJ85
For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, refer to chapter 2. For information
about the overall functional scope of the application templates for the various device types, refer to chapter 4.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The Capacitor bank function group always contains the following functionality:
• Protected object/equipment data (function block General)
• Capacitor bank device status and blocking of circuit-breaker closing during discharging (function block
General)
• Process monitor
• Global compensation (function block General)
• Reset LED group

This functionality is essential for the Capacitor bank function group, so it cannot be loaded or deleted.
You can load the protection functions and supervision functions required for your application in the Capacitor
bank function group. The functions are available from the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Functions that are not
needed can be deleted from the function group.
[dw_str_cap, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-14 Structure of the Capacitor Bank Function Group
The Capacitor bank function group has interfaces with the following parts:
• Circuit-breaker function group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Interfaces with the Measuring Points

The Capacitor bank function group receives the required measured values via the interfaces with the meas-
uring points. If you are using an application template, the Capacitor bank function group is already connected
to the specific measuring points.
You can find more detailed information in Chapter 2.
The Capacitor bank function group has the following 6 interfaces with the measuring points. The universal
standard functions only work with the standard interfaces 3-phase current and/or 3-phase voltage;
the other 4 interfaces are provided for the functions which are exclusively used for the capacitor banks. Refer
also to the example given below.
The Capacitor bank function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
• 3-phase current:
The measurands from the 3-phase current system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the current transformers, the measurands can be for example IA, IB, IC, IN, or 3I0. All
values that can be calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface.
The Capacitor bank function group must always be connected to the 3-phase current measuring point.
You can connect the 3-phase current measuring point interface to the maximum of two 3-phase
current measuring points. If 2 current measuring points have been connected to the 3-phase current
interface, the total current is determined by adding the measured values from both measuring points in
the function group. The functions in the Capacitor bank function group evaluate the total current.
For a 3-phase current measuring point connected to the 3-phase current interface of the Capac-
itor bank function group, the following connection types are not allowed:
– 3-phase, 2 primary CT
– 3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep
– 2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep
• 3-phase voltage (optional):

The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the voltage transformers, these can be for example VA, VB, VC, VN, or 3V0. All values
that can be calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface.
The connection of the 3-phase voltage interface is optional. This connection is only required if protec-
tion functions or supervision functions are applied, which require voltage measurements.
• 3-phase voltage CB tap (optional):

The measurands of a 3-phase tap voltage within a capacitor bank are supplied via this interface.
The connection of the 3-phase voltage CB tap interface is optional. You can connect the 3-phase voltage
CB tap interface to a maximum of one 3-phase voltage measuring point.
• Voltage unbalance (optional):

The unbalanced-voltage measurands (for example, an isolated neutral point of the capacitor bank) are
supplied via this interface.
The connection of the voltage unbalance interface is optional. You can connect the voltage unbalance
interface to a maximum of one 1-phase voltage measuring points.
• Current unbalance (optional):

The unbalanced-current measurands are supplied via this interface.
The connection of the current unbalance interface is optional. You can connect the current unbalance
interface to a maximum of two 3-phase current measuring points and six 1-phase current measuring
points. The interface allows mixed connections to 3-phase current measuring point and 1-phase current
measuring point; however the sum of the connections is no more than 6.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• 3-phase current RLC (optional)

The measurands from a tuning or filtering section (R, L, or C) of a capacitor bank are supplied via this
interface.
The connection of the 3-phase current RLC interface is optional. You can connect the 3-phase current
RLC interface to a maximum of nine 3-phase current measuring points.
For an overview which functions are applicable on this interface, refer to Figure 5-15.
Example
The following figure shows an example of a capacitor in H-configuration and tuning section. In the single line,
the primary current and voltage measurement are shown. The required device measuring points and their
connections to the function group interfaces are shown as well. In addition, it is indicated which protection
function receives its measuring value from which measuring point.
[dw_asscap, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-15 An Example of Assignment of Measuring Points to the Capacitor-Bank Functions
You can connect the Capacitor bank function group to the current and voltage measuring points via inter-
faces. You make this assignment in DIGSI via Project tree → Function group connections. To connect the
interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
[scrconba-110314-03, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-16 Connecting Measuring Points to the Capacitor Bank Function Group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
For the protection functions applied on the interfaces 3-phase current and 3-phase voltage, if you add these
functions to the Capacitor bank function group, these functions will automatically receive the measured
values from the correct measuring points. If you add protection functions to the function group but the
necessary interface is not connected to any measuring point, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. Configure the
measuring points in DIGSI 5 using the Function group connections editor.
For the protection functions applied on the interfaces Current unbalance and 3-phase current, you have
to select the desired measuring points via a setting MP selection, which offers a list of all measuring
points connected to the specific interface. The setting MP selection is located on the setting page of the
protection function.
The following figure shows an overview of the protection functions and the interface assignment in the
Capacitor bank function group.
[dw_cap_bank, 4, en_US]
Figure 5-17 Overview of the Protection Functions and Interface Assignment in the Capacitor Bank Function
Group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Interfaces with Circuit-Breaker Function Group

All required data are exchanged between the protection function group and the Circuit-breaker function
group via the interface with the Circuit-breaker function group. These data include, for example, the pickup
and operate indications of the protection functions sent in the direction of the Circuit-breaker function group
and, for another example, the information about the circuit-breaker condition sent in the direction of the
protection function group.
The Capacitor bank function group is connectable to a Circuit-breaker function group. This connection
generally determines:
• Which circuit breaker is activated by the protection functions of the Capacitor bank function group
• Starting of the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the Circuit-breaker function
group) through the protection functions of the connected Capacitor bank function group
• Starting of the Automatic reclosing function (if available in the Circuit-breaker function group) through
the protection functions of the connected Capacitor bank function group
NOTE
i For capacitor bank protection, the Automatic reclosing function is not applied in most cases. However,
due to flexibility and standardization, the respective interface is offered.
[scrconb1-180713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-18 Connecting Capacitor Bank Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Besides the general assignment of the Capacitor bank function group to the Circuit-breaker function group,
you can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using
the Circuit breaker interaction editor in the Capacitor bank function group.
In the detailed configuration of the interface, define:
[sc_concap, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-19 Connecting Protection Functions and Stage Using the Circuit-Breaker Interaction Editor

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If an application template is used, the function groups have already been connected to each other because
this link is essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the link in DIGSI 5 using the Function-group
connections editor.
You can find more information in chapter 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device. If this link is missing,
DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.

Capacitor-bank rated and reference data are defined as well as further protected object/equipment data. The
data applies for all functions in the Capacitor bank function group.
For further information, refer to chapter 5.4.3 Application and Setting Notes.
Capacitor Bank Device Status and Blocking of Circuit-breaker Closing during Discharging (FB General)
The functionality detects whether a capacitor bank is online or offline. When the status of the capacitor bank
changes from online to offline, the signal Discharge is issued during the capacitor-bank discharging time.
[lo_cap_zap, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-20 Logic Diagram of Capacitor Bank Device Status and Blocking of Circuit-breaker Closing during
Discharging
The device can block the closing of the circuit breaker automatically when a capacitor bank discharges.
The configuration is made with the parameter Blk.cls.cmd.dur.discharge. If the parameter
Blk.cls.cmd.dur.discharge is set to on, the device generates a trip/open command during the
discharge time and blocks closing commands additionally, see the following figure. This blocking condition is
signaled via the message Blocked by discharge.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_discharge, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-21 Logic Diagram of Processing the Blocked by Discharge Signal
Global Compensation (FB General)

The Global compensation function block provides the binary input signal >Compensate to carry out the
manual compensation for all functions in the FG using compensated measuring values.
In addition, the binary input signal >Reset comp. val. is provided to reset all compensation values for the
functions using compensated measuring values.
Process Monitor
The Process monitor detects the current state of the protected object. It is always present in the function
group and cannot be removed.
For detailed description of the Process monitor, refer to 5.9.1 Overview of Functions.
Reset LED Group

The Reset LED group function block allows you to reset only the stored LEDs of the functions contained in the
respective function group, while stored LEDs activated from functions in other function groups remain active.
For more information refer to chapter 3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group .
Operational, Fundamental, Symmetrical Components Measurements

The operational fundamental, symmetrical components and functional measurements are always available in
the Capacitor bank function group and cannot be deleted.
Table 5-5 Operational Measured Values (True RMS) of the Function Group Capacitor Bank
Measured Values Primary Secondary % Referenced to

IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary
system
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary
system
3I0 Residual current A A Rated operating current of the primary
system
system/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
system

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
system/√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
voltage system/√3
Ptot Active power (total power) MW – Rated operating voltage and rated oper-
ating current of the primary system
√3 · Vrated · Irated
Qtot Reactive power (total power) MVAr – Rated operating voltage and rated oper-
√3 ·Vrated · Irated
Stot Apparent power (total power) MVA – Rated operating voltage and rated oper-
√3 ·Vrated · Irated
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW – Apparent power of the phase Vrated Lx ·
Irated Lx
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power MVAr – Apparent power of the phase Vrated Lx ·
Irated Lx
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent power MVA – Apparent power of the phase Vrated Lx ·
Irated Lx
Table 5-6 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components Measurement Values of the Function Group
Capacitor Bank

IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary
system
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary
system
Iseq:0 Zero-sequence current A A Rated operating current of the primary
system
Iseq:1 Positive-sequence current A A Rated operating current of the primary
system
Iseq:2 Negative-sequence current A A Rated operating voltage of the primary
system
system/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
system
VN Neutral-point phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
system/√3
Vseq:0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
system/√3
Vseq:1 Positive-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
system/√3
Vseq:2 Negative-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
system/√3
Voltage and power measurements are only available if V-3ph measuring point connected to the Capacitor
bank function group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The energy measurements are not predefined. If required, they must be loaded from the Global DIGSI 5
Library.
Inversion of Power-Related Measured and Statistical Values (FB General)

The following values calculated in operational measured values are defined positively in the direction of the
protected object.
• Power
• Power factor
• Energy
• Minimum, maximum values of the power
• Average values of the power

With the P, Q sign setting, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a power
flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
More information can be found in Chapter 10.1 Overview of Functions.
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions and supervision func-
tions in the Capacitor bank function group separately, in a pickup logic and an output logic respectively. The
pickup and output logics generate the group indications of the function group. These group indications are
transferred to the Circuit-breaker function group via the protection-information interface and are processed
further there.
The pickup and operate indications of the protection functions and the supervision functions in the Capacitor
bank function group are combined according to the following figures of group indications.
[lo_gepiin_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-22 Generation of the Pickup Indication of the Capacitor Bank Function Group
[lo_geopin_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-23 Generation of the Operate Indication of the Capacitor Bank Function Group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Interface to Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The Capacitor bank protection function group is linked to one Circuit-breaker function group. This Circuit-
breaker function group is assigned to the circuit breaker of the capacitor bank.

The following application and setting notes apply for the general data. The data are configured in the function
block General of the Capacitor bank function group and apply for all functions in the function group.
Parameter: Capacitor reference curr.
• Default setting (_:14641:101) Capacitor reference curr. = 1000 A

With the Capacitor reference curr. parameter, you set the reference current for the capacitor bank to
be protected. This Capacitor reference curr. specified here is the reference value for the percentage-
Depending on the user philosophy, the reference value could be the capacitor-bank rated current, which
includes harmonics, or the capacitor-bank fundamental current.
Parameter: Capacitor reference volt.
• Default setting (_:14641:102) Capacitor reference volt. = 400.00 kV

With the parameter Capacitor reference volt., you set the reference voltage of the capacitor bank to
be protected. This Capacitor reference volt. specified here is the reference value for the percentage-
Depending on the user philosophy, the reference value could be the system rated voltage (bus voltage), or the
capacitor rated voltage
Parameter: Capacitor element type
• Default setting (_:14641:106) Capacitor element type = fused

With the parameter Capacitor element type, you set if the capacitor elements contain internal fuses or
not. This information is required in the current-unbalance protection for the fault position annunciation.
Parameter: Blk.cls.cmd.dur.discharge
• Default setting (_:14641:107) Blk.cls.cmd.dur.discharge = off

With the parameter Blk.cls.cmd.dur.discharge, you set whether closing of the circuit breaker is
blocked automatically or not when a capacitor bank discharges.
NOTE
i If the parameter Blk.cls.cmd.dur.discharge is set to on, the device generates a trip/open command
during the discharge time.
Parameter: Discharge time
• Default setting (_:14641:108) Discharge time = 300 s

With the parameter Discharge time, you define capacitor-bank discharging duration. You get the value
from the capacitor manufacturer.
Parameter: Cap.-bank neutral point
• Default setting (_:14641:109) Cap.-bank neutral point =isolated

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the parameter Cap.-bank neutral point, you can specify whether the neutral point of capacitor
bank is isolated or grounded. This information is required when applying the function 87V voltage
differential protection.
• Default setting (_:14611:158) P, Q sign =not reversed

The power and energy values are defined by the manufacturer such that power in the direction of the
protected object is considered positive. You can also define the power output by the protected object as
positive. With the P, Q sign parameter, you can invert the sign for these components. This inversion does
not influence any protection function.
The settings listed here are primarily to aid understanding when configuring the function groups. They are
calculated as a function of other settings and cannot be changed directly.
Rated values
_:14641:103 General:Rated apparent -1.00 MVA to -1.00 MVA 0.00 MVA
power
NOTE
i You can find more detailed information on the Process monitor in chapter 5.7.1 Overview.
5.4.5 Settings

Rated values
_:14641:101 General:Capacitor refer- 1.00 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
ence curr.
_:14641:102 General:Capacitor refer- 0.10 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
ence volt.
Cap.bank data
_:14641:106 General:Capacitor • fused fused
element type
• unfused
_:14641:107 General:Blk.cls.cmd.dur. • off off
discharge
• on
_:14641:108 General:Discharge time 1 s to 1200 s 300 s
_:14641:109 General:Cap.-bank • grounded isolated
neutral point
• isolated
Measurements
_:14611:158 Further settings:P, Q • not reversed not reversed
sign
• reversed

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Group indicat.
Reset LED Group
General
_:1781:14641:500 General:>Compensate SPS I
_:1781:14641:501 General:>Reset comp. val. SPS I
_:1781:14641:300 General:Blocked by discharge SPS O
_:1781:14641:302 General:Discharge SPS O
_:1781:14641:303 General:Cap.bank device status SPS O
_:1781:14641:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:1781:14641:53 General:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.5 Function-Group Type Capacitor Bank Differential Protection
5.5.1 Function-Group Types
In the following graphic, you can see the structural association of the function-group types to the Capacitor
bank differential protection.
[dwfgueca-120214-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-24 Function-Group Types Capacitor Bank Diff
The following function-group types are summarized in the Global DIGSI 5 library:
• Capacitor bank diff
• Capacitor bank side

You can find the description of the function group Capacitor bank in chapter 5.4.1 Overview.
The individual function-group types are stored in the Capacitor bank diff function group folder and can be
selected. In the protection function folders, you find all protection functions which are operational in each
function group. A Capacitor bank diff function group always includes the Capacitor bank and Capacitor
bank side function groups. In total, you can assign a maximum of 3 function groups Capacitor bank or
Capacitor bank side to the Capacitor bank diff function group.
The following table shows you the number of function-group types that can be instantiated for device 7SJ85.
Table 5-7 Function-Group Types in the Device
Function-Group Type
Device Capacitor Bank Diff Capacitor Bank Capacitor Bank Side
7SJ85 Max. 2 Max. 9 Max. 9
Interconnection of the function groups is necessary so that the capacitor bank differential protection functions
properly. The Circuit-breaker function group is not listed.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table 5-8 Assignment of Protection Function Groups to Protection Function Groups
Capacitor Bank Diff 1

Side
(2 to 3)
Capacitor bank X
Capacitor bank side 1 X
Capacitor bank side 2 X
The individual function-group types are described in the following.
5.5.2 Function-Group Type Capacitor Bank Diff
5.5.2.1 Overview
The Capacitor bank diff. function group contains the differential protection function and protection-function-
relevant measured values.
You can find more information in the chapter 10 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the
Primary System.
You will find the corresponding function groups and the folders with the usable protection functions in the
Global DIGSI library under each device type. In the Capacitor bank diff. function group, you can load only the
differential protection functions.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[scfgcadf-300414-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-25 Function Group Capacitor Bank Diff. - Functional Scope
For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, refer to chapter 2 Basic Structure of
the Function. For application templates of the various device types, refer to chapter 4 Applications.

The Capacitor bank diff. function group, according to 5.5.2.1 Overview , has interfaces with the Capacitor
bank, the Capacitor bank side, and the Circuit-breaker function groups. The Capacitor bank diff. function
group contains the function blocks:
• Protection function (execution of the differential protection function)
• Trip logic (generation of forwarding of the operate indication)

In the Capacitor bank diff. function group, the differential protection function must always be available
so that the protection functionality can be ensured. If you do not use an application template, load the
differential protection function from the Global DIGSI library.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dwfgcadf-030314-01, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-26 Structure of the Capacitor Bank Diff. Function Group
The Capacitor bank diff. function group has interfaces to the following components:
• Function group Capacitor bank
• Function group Capacitor bank side
Interfaces with the Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The interface with the Circuit-breaker function group is used to exchange all required data between the
protection function group and the Circuit-breaker function group. The following data is required:
• Pickup and operate indications of the protection functions in the direction of the Circuit-breaker function
group
• Information on the circuit-breaker condition in the direction of the Protection function groups
You can connect the Capacitor bank diff. function group to one or more Circuit-breaker function groups.
This connection determines the following:
• Which circuit breakers are activated by the protection functions of the Capacitor bank diff. function
group
• Start of the Circuit-breaker failure protection function, if available in the Circuit-breaker function
group, through the protection functions of the connected Capacitor bank diff. function group
Besides the general assignment of the Capacitor bank diff. function group to the Circuit-breaker function
group, you can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5
via the Circuit-breaker interaction Editor in the Capacitor bank side diff. function group.
For the detail configuration of the interface, define the following:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions are included when the trip command is generated
• Which protection functions activate the Circuit-breaker failure protection function

If an application template is used, the function groups are connected to each other because this link is abso-
lutely essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection in DIGSI 5 via the Function-group
connections Editor. If the connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device.


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Interface with Protection Communication (optional)

All required data is exchanged between the protection function group and the protection communication via
the interface with Protection communication. These are for example:
• Binary signals
• Measured values
• Complex data
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.6 Protection Communication.
Capacitor-Bank Data (General)

The capacitor-bank data characterizes the data of the capacitor bank to be protected. The data relevant for
the differential protection is shown. The Capacitor bank diff. function group takes the data from the coupled
function groups Capacitor bank and Capacitor bank side.
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the protection and supervision functions in the function
group separately. Pickup logic and output logic are each assigned to the signals. The pickup and output logic
generate the overarching indications (group indications) of the function group. These group indications are
transferred via the Protection-information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are processed
further there.
The pickup and operate indications of the protection and supervision functions in the Capacitor bank diff.
function group are combined into one group indication using the following numbers and outputs.
Figure 5-27 Generation of Pickup Indication of the Capacitor Bank Diff. Function Group
[lo_geopi1-231013-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-28 Generation of Operate Indication of the Capacitor Bank Diff. Function Group

(Type)
General

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Group indicat.
Reset LED Group
5.5.3 Function-Group Type Capacitor-Bank Side
5.5.3.1 Overview
In the Capacitor bank side function group, all of the functions that are necessary for protecting and super-
vising a capacitor bank side can be used. The Capacitor bank side function group also contains the measuring
functions.
You can find more information in chapter 10 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary
System.
The Capacitor bank side function group must always have interfacing to the Capacitor bank diff. function
group.
You will find the corresponding function groups and the folders with the usable protection functions in the
Global DIGSI library under each device type. Depending on the connected measuring points, you can load the
respective protection and supervision functions in the Capacitor bank side function group. The functions are
described in chapter 6 Protection and Automation Functions.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[scfgcasd-300414-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-29 Capacitor Bank Side Function Group - Functional Scope
For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, refer to chapter 2 Basic Structure of
the Function. For application templates for the various device types, refer to chapter 4 Applications.

The Capacitor bank side function group always contains the following function blocks:
• Side-dependent capacitor-bank data
• Process monitor

These blocks are required for the Capacitor bank side function group and therefore cannot be loaded or
deleted.
You can load the protection and supervision functions required for your application in the Capacitor bank
side function group. The functions are available in the Global DIGSI 5 library. Functions that are not needed
can be deleted from the function group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_fgcabsi-201114-01, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-30 Structure of the Capacitor Bank Side Function Group
The Capacitor bank side function group has interfaces to the following components:
• Capacitor bank diff. function group
Interfaces with Measuring Points

The Capacitor bank side function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the
measuring points. If you are using an application template, the Capacitor bank side function group is
connected to the necessary measuring points.
If you add functions to the Capacitor bank side function group, they will automatically receive the measured
values from the correct measuring points. If you add protection functions to the function group but the
necessary measuring point is not connected, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. Configure the measuring points
in DIGSI 5 via the Function group connections Editor.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 2 Basic Structure of the Function.
The Capacitor bank side function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
• 3-phase current
The measurands from the 3-phase power system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
transformer connection type, these are for example: I A, I B, I C, I N or 3 I 0. All values that can be calculated
from the measurands are also provided via this interface. The Capacitor bank side function group must
always be linked to the I-3ph measuring point.
You can connect the 3-phase current interface with a maximum of two 3-phase current measuring
points. If 2 current measuring points have been connected to the 3-phase current interface, the total
current is also determined from measured values from both measuring points in the Capacitor bank side
function group. All functions in the Capacitor bank side function group have access to these values.
• 3-phase voltage (optional):

The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. Different transformer
connection types are possible. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are also provided
via this interface.
The connection of the 3-phase voltage is optional. This connection is necessary only if protection or
supervision functions that require voltage measurements are used.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Interfaces to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The interface with the Circuit-breaker function group is used to exchange all required data between the
protection function group and the Circuit-breaker function group. The following data is required:
• Pickup and operate indications of the protection functions in the direction of the Circuit-breaker function
group
• Information on the circuit-breaker condition in the direction of the Protection function groups
You can connect the Capacitor bank side function group to one or more Circuit-breaker function groups.
This connection determines the following:
• Which circuit breakers are activated by the protection functions of the Capacitor bank side function
group
• Start of the Circuit-breaker failure protection function, if available in the Circuit-breaker function
group, through the protection functions of the connected Capacitor bank side function group
Besides the general assignment of the Capacitor bank side function group to the Circuit-breaker function
group, you can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5
using the Circuit-breaker interaction Editor in the Capacitor bank side function group.
For the detail configuration of the interface, define the following:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions are included when the trip command is generated
• Which protection functions activate the Circuit-breaker failure protection function

If an application template is used, the function groups are connected to each other because this link is abso-
lutely essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection in DIGSI 5 via the Function-group
connections Editor. If the connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device.
Interface with Protection Communication (optional)

the interface with Protection communication, for example:
• Binary signals
• Measured values
• Complex data
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.6 Protection Communication.

Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Capacitor bank side function group and cannot be removed. The
process monitor provides the following information in the Capacitor bank side function group:
• Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/activated capacitor bank side based on the flow of leakage current
• Closure detection:
Detection of closure of the capacitor bank side
• Cold-load pickup detection (optional):

This information is in the Capacitor bank side function group and is available to all the functions in the
function group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

The operational measured values are always present in the Capacitor bank side function group and cannot be
deleted. If a 3-phase voltage measuring point is connected, the following table shows the total scope. If only
current is connected, only the first 3 lines apply.
Table 5-9 Possible Operational Measured Values of the Capacitor Bank Side Function Group

dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary system
3I0 Calculated residual current A A Rated operating current of the primary system
IN Measured residual current A A Rated operating current of the primary system
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating current of the primary
system/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
system
V0 Calculated zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating current of the primary
system/√3
Vr Measured neutral-point displace- kV V Rated operating current of the primary
ment voltage system/√3
P Active power MW – Rated operating voltage and rated operating
(total power) current of the primary system
Q Reactive power MVAr – Rated operating voltage and rated operating
S Apparent power MVA – Rated operating voltage and rated operating
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW – Active power of the phase
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power MVAr – Reactive power of the phase
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent power MVA – Apparent power of the phase
If a V-3ph measuring point was connected to the Capacitor bank side function group, voltage and phase
measurements are available.
The energy measurements are not predefined. If necessary, you must load them from the Global DIGSI 5
library.
Depending on the protection and supervision functions used, additional function measurements may be
available. The function values are listed in the information list of the appropriate protection or supervision
function (see chapter 6 Protection and Automation Functions).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see chapter 10.2 Structure of the Function Structure of
the Function, section Inversion of Power-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active power (total): P total
• Active power (phase-related): PA, PB, PC
• Reactive power (total): Q total
• Reactive power (phase-related): QA, QB, QC
Capacitor-Bank Data (Side-Dependent)

The capacitor-bank data characterizes the data of the capacitor bank to be protected. The side-dependent
capacitor-bank data applies to all of the functions in the Capacitor bank side function group.
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the protection and supervision functions in the function
group separately. Pickup logic and output logic are each assigned to the signals. The pickup and output logic
generate the overarching indications (group indications) of the function group. These group indications are
transferred via the Protection information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are processed
further there.
The pickup and operate indications of the protection and supervision functions in the Capacitor bank side
function group are combined into one group indication using the following numbers and outputs.
Figure 5-31 Generation of Pickup Indication of the Capacitor Bank Side Function Group
[lo_geopi1-231013-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-32 Generation of Operate Indication of the Capacitor Bank Side Function Group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

The Capacitor bank side function group is usually connected to 1 Circuit-breaker function group. The
Circuit-breaker function group is assigned to the circuit breaker of the capacitor bank.
Parameter: Rated apparent power
• Default setting (_:1781:15571:103) Rated apparent power = 692.82 MVA.

The Rated apparent power parameter shows the primary rated apparent power of the capacitor
bank to be protected. The setting value is determined of the Capacitor reference volt. and the
Capacitor reference curr. parameters.
• Default setting (_:1781:15571:102) Capacitor reference volt. = 400.00 kV

You can use the Capacitor reference volt. parameter to set the reference voltage of the capacitor
bank to be protected. The reference voltage set here is the reference value for the percentage measured
values and setting values made in percent.
Depending on user philosophy you can use the system rated voltage (busbar voltage) or the capacitor rated
voltage as a reference value.
• Default setting (_:1781:15571:101) Capacitor reference curr. = 1000 A

You can use the Capacitor reference curr. parameter to set the reference current for the capacitor
bank to be protected. The capacitor reference current set here is the reference value for the percentage
measured values and setting values in percent.
For Differential protection, these values are used for absolute-value correction (rated current of the protected
object).
If the capacitor bank is part of a delta connection, the value to be set here can differ from the capacitor
reference current set in the Capacitor bank function group (by factor √3). Otherwise, set always the same
values.
Depending on user philosophy, you can use the capacitor-bank rated current including the harmonics or the
capacitor-bank fundamental-component current as a reference value.
Parameter: Neutral point
• Default setting (_:1781:15571:149) Neutral point = isolated

With the Neutral point parameter, you specify whether the neutral point in the protection range of the
differential protection is grounded or isolated. If there is no neutral point in the protection zone, use the
parameter isolated. The neutral point of a capacitor bank is usually not in the protection zone. Therefore,
even if the neutral point is grounded, set isolated here.
You can find further information in the Device manual 7UT8 Chapter 6.2.3 function description neutral point-
current handling.
Parameter: Winding configuration
• Default setting (_:1781:15571:104) Winding configuration = Y (Wye)

You can use the Winding configuration parameter to set D (Delta) for a delta connection. Another
setting option is Y (Wye) for a star connection. The Winding configuration parameter is relevant for
the Differential protection function.
Parameter: Vector group numeral
• Default setting (_:1781:15571:100) Vector group numeral = 0

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
This parameter is used to account for phase-angle rotation, which is expressed by a numeral.
Phase-angle rota- 0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180° 210° 240° 270° 300° 330°
tion
Vector group 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
numeral
In the function group, the following information is displayed additionally in the setting sheet:
• Side number
• Identification of the measuring points used
• Adaptation factor for the 3-phase measuring point (with reference to the side)
Each Vector group numeral can be set from 0 to 11 to the extent possible. Thus, for example, only even
numbers are possible for the vector group Yy and Dd and only odd numbers are possible for Yd and Dy.
Parameter: Side number
• Default setting (_:1781:14611:130) Side number = not assigned

The Side number parameter shows you which capacitor bank side is currently valid for the following param-
eters. The side number (Side 1 to Side 3) is automatically assigned with the connection to a capacitor bank
side.
Parameter: MI3ph1 usesMeasP with ID
• Default setting (_:1781:14611:210) MI3ph1 usesMeasP with ID = 0

The MI3ph1 usesMeasP with ID parameter shows you which 3-phase measuring point is connected to
the capacitor bank side. Every measuring point is assigned a unique ID.
Parameter: MI3ph2 usesMeasP with ID
• Default setting (_:1781:14611:211) MI3ph2 usesMeasP with ID = 0

The MI3ph2 usesMeasP with ID parameter shows you which 3-phase measuring point is connected to
the capacitor bank side. Every measuring point is assigned a unique ID.
Parameter: CT mismatch M I-3ph 1
• Default setting (_:1781:14611:215) CT mismatch M I-3ph 1 = 0.000

The CT mismatch M I-3ph 1 parameter shows you the magnitude adaptation of the phase currents of the
1st assigned measuring point. The numerical value results from the ratio of the primary rated current of the
current transformer to the rated current of the side.
Parameter: CT mismatch M I-3ph 2
• Default setting (_:1781:14611:217) CT mismatch M I-3ph 2 = 0.000

The CT mismatch M I-3ph 2 parameter shows you the magnitude adaptation of the phase currents of the
2nd assigned measuring point.
5.5.3.4 Write-Protected Settings

Addr. Parameter C Range of Values Default Setting
Rated values
_:1781:15571:103 Rated apparent power 0.20 MVA to 5000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Addr. Parameter C Range of Values Default Setting

Side data
_:1781:14611:130 Side number • not assigned Side 2
• Side 1
• Side 2
• Side 3
_:1781:14611:210 MI3ph1 usesMeasP with ID 0 to 100 8
_:1781:14611:215 CT mismatch M I-3ph 1 0.010 to 100.000 1.000
5.5.3.5 Settings

Rated values
_:1781:15571 General:Capacitor refer- 1.00 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
:101 ence curr.
_:1781:15571 General:Capacitor refer- 0.10 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
:102 ence volt.
Side data
_:1781:15571 General:Neutral point • grounded isolated
:149
• isolated
_:1781:15571 General:Winding config- • Y (Wye) Y (Wye)
:104 uration
• D (Delta)
• Z (Zig-Zag)
_:1781:15571 General:Vector group 0 to 11 0
:100 numeral
Measurements
_:1781:14611 Further settings:P, Q • not reversed not reversed
:158 sign
• reversed

(Type)
Group indicat.
Reset LED Group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.1 Overview
The function group Analog units is used to map analog units and communicate with them. Analog units are
external devices, such as RTD units, or analog plug-in modules or measuring-transducer modules.
You can find the function group Analog units for many device types in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
[sc_20_maee, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-33 Analog Unit Function Group in DIGSI
If the device has a measuring transducer, it is automatically mapped in the function group Analog units. If
one or more RTD units are connected to the device, you have to load one or more RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit
serial functions from the Global DIGSI 5 library in order to map the RTD units.
If the device is connected to a power-plant control system or another protection device, you must load one or
more Temperature acquisition via protocols functions from the Global DIGSI 5 library to form the protocols.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_str_the, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-34 Structure of the Function Group Analog Unit
Gray: Optionally wired, optionally available

White: Always wired, always available
The function group Analog units has interfaces to protection function groups. The function group Analog
units provides, for example, measured temperature values that come from an external RTD unit , a measuring
transducer or via protocols. These measured temperature values are available for all protection function
groups in which a temperature monitoring function works.
The function RTD unit Ether. is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 20 function instances
can operate simultaneously.
The structure of the function RTD unit serial is identical to the structure of the function RTD unit Ether..
The function 20-mA unit Ether. is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 4 function instances
can operate simultaneously. The structure of the function 20 mA serial unit is identical to the structure of the
function 20-mA unit Ether..

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols has 2 stage types: The Temperature acquisition via
PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 and the Temperature acquisition via GOOSE. One instance of the Temperature
acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 is preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 12 instances
can operate simultaneously for both stage types.
5.6.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet
5.6.3.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Ether.:
• Communicates in series with a 20-mA unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the values
measured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process tags such as temperature or gas
pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
• Monitors communication with the 20-mA unit

The function 20-mA unit Ether. can only work in the function group Analog units. A maximum of 4 function
instances can work simultaneously. Each instance contains 12 preconfigured channel function blocks.
The function 20-mA unit Ether. contains input and output channels which can be configured independently
of one another.
[dw_str_fn2, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-35 Structure/Embedding of the Function

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.6.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Logic
[lo_20mtcp, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-36 Logic of the Function 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Communication with 20-mA Unit

The function is used to communicate with a 20-mA unit connected via an Ethernet connection. When a
connection of the function to an external 20-mA unit via an Ethernet interface has successfully been estab-
lished, the 20-mA unit sends the measured values of all connected channels to the function 20‑mA unit.
Ether.. For the connection to be established successfully, specific communication settings must be specified.
You can find more detailed information in 5.6.3.4 Application and Setting Notes.
The 20-mA measuring unit 7XV5674 is supported.
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the status Health transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.
Table 5-10 Error Responses
Error Description Status Health

The function 20-mA unit Ether. cannot establish a Alarm
connection witha communication module.
The function 20-mA unit Ether. sends TCP settings to Alarm
the communication module, which evidently would
like to connect to the 20-mA unit via a serial protocol.
This communication module does not establish a
connection to the 20-mA unit.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

The connection between the communication module Warning
and the 20-mA unit causes a time-out indication.
A communication module has not received any more Warning
data from the 20-mA unit for 9 sec.
The signal Failure is issued as soon as one of the channel function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = port J

With the parameter Port, you define the port connecting the 20-mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device.
Parameter: IP address
• Default setting (_:2311:104) IP address = 10.16.60.1

With the parameter IP address, you set the IP address of the 20-mA unit connected to the communication
module via the TCP protocol. You must assign each 20-mA unit an unambiguous IP address. The IP address to
be set depends on your network configuration. You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause conflicts
with other IP addresses in the network. First set an IP address for the 7XV5674 20-mA unit. Then specify the
parameter IP address for the communication module to the same address.
Settings on the 20-mA Unit

Set the 7XV5674 20-mA unit with a Web browser on the laptop computer via the latter's Ethernet interface.
Set Modbus TCP as a bus protocol/operating mode.
You can find detailed notes on the settings in the 7XV5674 manual that accompanies the 20-mA unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (www.support.industry.siemens.com).
5.6.3.5 20-mA Channel
Logic
[lo_20mcha, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-37 Logic Diagram of the Function 20-mA Channel

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
(1) If the setting Range active is set to test , the setting Transformation ratio is not
displayed.
(2) If the setting Range active is set to false, the settings Upper limit, Transformation
ratio upper limit, Lower limit and Transformation ratio are not displayed.
Measured-Value Calculation
The function 20-mA channel processes a single 20-mA current signal supplied by the 20-mA unit of the
corresponding channel. The 20-mA current measured value is converted into the correct physical quantities
such as temperature or pressure. In each 20-mA functional unit (Ether. and serial) there are always 12 of the
20-mA channel function blocks, even if fewer channels are connected with the 20-mA unit. The calculated
values are available for further processing via CFC, GOOSE, protocols, and the display image.
Measured-Value Processing
The 20-mA unit typically transmits a value which represents a physical quantity, such as a temperature or
a pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that maps the physical quantity to the
20-mA value. If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range 0 mA to 20 mA. If a value smaller than 0 mA or greater than 20 mA is active at the input of the
20-mA unit, the measured value is identified as invalid. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from
a usable range of 0 mA to 20 mA. The following figure shows an example.
[sckanumw-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-38 Settings for Example 1
In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 °C and the measured value 20 mA means
a temperature of 100 °C. So enter as Unit = °C and Conversion factor = 100. The resolution (decimal
place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select Resolution = 0.1.
[dw_knges3, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-39 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Input (Example 1)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameters Upper limit and
Lower limit indicate the range of the input current in mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Lower limit setting. The setting of the range for the scaled value corresponds to the useable
range between Lower limit and Upper limit (see following figure).
[sckanumf-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-40 Settings for Example 2
[dw_knges2, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-41 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Unit (Example 2)
In this example, the Range active setting is selected. The setting Upper limit is at 20 mA, the setting
Lower limit is at 4 mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is at 55 and the setting Lower limit -
Sensor is at -33. If the input current is smaller than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA, the quality of the scaled
measured value in this example is invalid.
Each 20-mA channel makes available the scaled measured value in the information routing (these are the
temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further processing.
The 20-mA values can be displayed in the display page and processed with CFC charts.
Error Responses
If the current input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output value is set to
invalid That status for Health and the defect status assume the states displayed in the table.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Error Description Status Health Error Status

The input value lies outside the OK Yes
given limits
Channel not connected OK No
Parameter: Unit
• Default setting (_:13111:103) Unit = °C

With the Unit parameter, you set the physical unit of measurement the measured values. The possible setting
values are listed in the settings table.
Parameter: Conversion factor
• Default setting (_:13111:104) Conversion factor = 100

With the Conversion factor parameter, you set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.
Parameter: Resolution
• Default setting (_:13111:108) Resolution = 0.1

With the Resolution parameter, you set the resolution of the scaled values.
Parameter: Range active
• Default setting (_:13111:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the parameter Range active (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range 0 mA to 20 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 0 mA to
20 mA.
If you activate the parameter Range active, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Upper limit -
Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Parameter: Upper limitLower limitUpper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor
• Default setting (_:13111:105) Upper limit = 20.000 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
• Default setting (_:13111:106) Lower limit = 4.000 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100

If you activate the parameter Range active , the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameter Upper limit -
Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit
setting. The parameter Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current
corresponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of
the 12 channels do not differ.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.6.3.7 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port E port J
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Channel 1
_:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

• W/s
• Wh
_:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001
_:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 1000000 100
factor
_:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor
_:13111:106 Channel 1:Lower limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:13111:110 Channel 1:Lower limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor

(Type)
General
_:2311:56 General:Failure SPS O
Channel 1
_:13111:50 Channel 1:Behavior ENS O
_:13111:53 Channel 1:Health ENS O
_:13111:71 Channel 1:Failure SPS O
_:13111:301 Channel 1:20-mA output scale MV O
_:13111:302 Channel 1:20-mA output raw MV O
5.6.4 20-mA Unit Serial
5.6.4.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Serial:
• Provides serial communications with a 20-mA unit via the Modbus protocol and records the values
measured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process variables such as temperature or
gas pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
• Monitors communication with the 20-mA unit

The function 20-mA unit Serial is structured in the same way as the function 20-mA Unit Ether.. The
mode of operation is also identical. The only difference is that the measured values are transferred to the
communication module via a serial connection instead of an Ethernet connection.
You can find more information in Chapter 5.6.3.2 Structure of the Function.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = Port J

With the parameter Port, you specify the slot for the communication module that will be used for the
connection with an external 20-mA unit.
Parameter: Channel number
• Default setting (_:2311:105) Channel number = 1

A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the parameter Channel number, you
specify the channel number (1 or 2) used to connect the 20-mA unit to the device. The communication
module inputs are labeled with the channel numbers.
Parameter: Slave address
• Default setting (_:2311:106) Slave address = 1

With the parameter Slave address, you define the device address of the 20-mA unit. If only one 20-mA
unit is connected to the serial bus, the default value 1 can be used. Set the same device address as used with
the 20-mA unit. The device address is important for distinguishing several 20-mA units that are connected to a
serial bus. Set an unambiguous device address on every 20-mA unit, for example, 1, 2 and 3 when connecting
3 of the 20-mA units. On every 20-mA unit, set for the parameter Slave address in the 3 functions 20-mA
Unit Serial.
Parameter: Unit

With the parameter Unit, you set the physical unit of measurement the measured values. The possible setting
values are listed in the settings table.
• Default setting (_:13111:104) Conversion factor = 100

With the parameter Conversion factor, you set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.
Parameter: Resolution
• Default setting (_:13111:108) Resolution = 0.1

With the parameter Resolution, you set the resolution of the scaled values.
• Default setting (_:13111:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the parameter Range active (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range 0 mA to 20 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 0 mA to
20 mA.
If you activate the parameter Range active, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Upper limit -
Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor
• Default setting (_:13111:105) Upper limit = 20 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
• Default setting (_:13111:106) Lower limit = 4 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If you activate the parameter Range active, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameter Upper limit -
Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit
setting. The parameter Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current
corresponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of
the 12 channels do not differ.
5.6.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port F port J
• port E
• port J
• port N
• port P
_:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 1
_:2311:106 General:Slave address 1 to 247 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Channel 1
_:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

• W/s
• Wh
_:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001
_:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 1000000 100
factor
_:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor
_:13111:106 Channel 1:Lower limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:13111:110 Channel 1:Lower limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor

(Type)
General
Channel 1
_:13111:50 Channel 1:Behavior ENS O
_:13111:53 Channel 1:Health ENS O
_:13111:71 Channel 1:Failure SPS O
_:13111:301 Channel 1:20-mA output scale MV O
_:13111:302 Channel 1:20-mA output raw MV O
5.6.5 Communication with 20-mA Unit
5.6.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit
Connection of the Communication Lines

Figure 5-42 shows how to connect the 20-mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device. Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45 plug
is connected to RTD-B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD-A.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dwve20au-150213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-42 Connection of the 20-mA Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device
Adding a USART Module

Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module must be
inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the CB202
expansion module (refer to the following figure).
[sc20ser3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-43 Insertion Position for a USART Module
Selecting the SUP Protocol

Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the
SIPROTEC 5 device and the 20-mA unit.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[scauser4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-44 Selecting the SUP Protocol
Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the 20-mA unit. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the
settings of the 20-mA unit. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The setting of the
parameter Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
Figure 5-45 Making the Communication Settings
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit DIGSI automatically adds the function group
Analog units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function 20-mA unit serial 1 (see the
following figure).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc20ser6-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-46 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Serial 1
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the
20‑mA unit. This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit (refer to the following figure).
For the first use of the 20-mA unit, the following device configuration must be set on the 20-mA unit:
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1
• Baud rate: 9600
• Parity: no
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-47 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Device Address
Finally, load the configuration in the device.
5.6.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Device Configuration
In DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus adding the module to the device configu-
ration. Figure 5-48 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB202.
Alternatively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_autcp1, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-48 Inserting an Ethernet Module
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.
Figure 5-49 Activation of the Protocol
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
Figure 5-50 Selection of the Protocol
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the 20-mA unit Ether. 1 function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_20tcp4, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-51 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Ether. 1
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the 20-mA unit (refer to
the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit.
Figure 5-52 Setting the Port and IP Address
5.6.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs
5.6.6.1 Overview
The fast analog measuring-transducer inputs process voltage values (DC -10 V to +10 V) as well as current
values (DC -20 mA to 20 mA).
The function MT fast input:
• Provides sampled values for recording in the fault record (the maximum sampling frequency is 8 kHz
for all other SIPROTEC 5 devices). The recorded sampling frequency results from the setting of the
fault-recorder function.
• Calculated measured values from the sampled values. These measured values have been deduced from
the arithmetic mean values. The measuring range for the mean-value calculation is adjustable in the
interval from 10 ms to 100 ms.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Converts the measured current or voltage values into process values, for example, temperature, gas
pressure, etc.
• Provides the recorded process variables for further processing by the fault recorder, the CFC, and in
GOOSE-applications for transmission via communication protocols, and for visualization
The fast measuring-transducer inputs are located on the IO212 module with 8 inputs (optionally current or
voltage inputs), and the IO210 module with 4 inputs (optionally current or voltage inputs).

The function MT fast input works in the function group Analog units and contains the number of available
measuring-transducer inputs, depending on the hardware configuration. You can configure these channels
independently from one another either as current or voltage inputs.
[dw_mu-structure, 1, en_US]

Once you have instantiated the MT fast input function, it will be visible in the project tree in the function
group Analog units. You can find the function group Analog units in DIGSI in the Settings folder.
If you open the subdirectory MT fast input, you reach the setting sheet for the respective input (for more
details, see 5.6.6.4 Application and Setting Notes).
The hardware is designed in such a way that either a current or a voltage can be processed at each input.
Use the corresponding terminals (see Hardware manual). Configure the input in accordance with the selected
connection (Parameter TD input-signal type). With the parameter Measuring window, you set the
measuring range with which the arithmetic mean value is determined. With the parameter Measuring
window, you also determine measurement speed for the input. For example, a setting of 100 ms means that
the measured value is updated every 100 ms.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[scmuio212, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-54 Parameters of the Measuring-Transducer Channels.
The fast measuring-transducer channels can be configured either as current or as voltage inputs. Apart from
this, their function corresponds to the basic function of the 20-mA channels (see chapter 5.6.3.5 20-mA
Channel).
Parameter: TD input-signal type
• Default setting (_:101) TD input-signal type = Current input

With the parameter TD input-signal type, you determine whether the measuring-transducer input
channel works as a Current input or as a Voltage input.
Make sure that the selected channel has also been wired correctly (see Hardware manual, Input and Output
Module IO212).
Parameter: Unit
• Default setting (_:103) Unit = A

With the parameter Unit, you set the physical unit of measurement of the measured values. The possible
setting values are listed in the settings table.
Parameter: Measuring window
• Default setting (_:142) Measuring window = 10 ms

With the parameter Measuring window, you set the measuring window that is used to determine the
arithmetic mean value from the sampled values. In case of slowly varying signals, Siemens recommends
setting the top value to 100 ms. With this value, a new, current measured value is provided every 100 ms for
further processing.
• Default setting (_:107) Range active = false

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If you do not activate the Range active parameter, the function assumes a range of -20 mA to +20 mA
or -10 V to +10 V. The setting of the range for the scaled value then assumes a usable range of -20 mA to
+20 mA or -10 V to +10 V.
If you activate the parameter Range active, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit,Upper limit -
Note that this setting is activated by either placing, or not placing the relevant check mark in DIGSI (see
Figure 5-54).
• Default setting (_:104) Conversion factor = 1.00

With the parameter Conversion factor, you set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.
Parameter: Upper limit, Upper limit - Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor
With the following parameters, you set the scaling of the measuring variables. By that, you can scale in an
application-specific way:
• Default setting Upper limit = 20.00 mA
• Default setting Upper limit - Sensor = 1.00
• Default setting Lower limit = -20.00 mA
• Default setting Lower limit - Sensor = 1.00

With these setting parameters, you set the operating range of the measuring transducer as well as the
conversion of the values transmitted to the sensor values. Harmonize the operating range of the measuring
transducer with the transmitter of the sensor. Using the free scalability of the system, you can meet different
requirements. The following figure shows the setting parameters in general terms.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_measured-value-scaling, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-55 Scaling Principle
If you keep the preset limiting values, the following conditions are possible:
• If the input current is < 2.000 mA

The function issues the indication Broken wire and the quality of the output value is invalid. The
functions that use the output value as the measured value can be deactivated.
• If the input current is > 2.500 mA

The indication Broken wire drops out.
Setting Example 1:
A measuring transducer transmitting a current signal of 4 mA to 20 mA is used as a transmitter. Currents
well below -25.6 mA or above +25.6 mA indicate a transmitter failure. A sensor detecting a temperature
is attached to the transmitter. The upper value corresponds to 200 °C and the lower value to -100 °C. This
results in the following characteristic. In accordance with the set characteristic curve, the function calculates
the sensor value from the measured current. The coefficients of the linear equation (gradient and foot point)
are calculated from the set threshold and the sensor values are determined. A supplied current of 9.333 mA
corresponds to a temperature of 0 °C.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_measuring-transducer-characteristic, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-56 Characteristic Curve of Setting Example 1
NOTE
i The hardware of the measuring transducer has been designed in such a way that measured values are
transmitted and analyzed using the setting range (Upper limit orLower limit). Therefore, special
applications are possible, if necessary. The limits are at approx. +20 mA and -20 mA or +10 V and -10 V.
Setting Example 2:
For special applications, the transmitter sends a maximum of ±12 V. This voltage shall be issued accordingly as
sensor voltage.
Set the parameters as follows:
• Upper limit = 10.00 V
• Upper limit - Sensor = 10.00 V
• Lower limit = -10.00 V
• Lower limit - Sensor = -10.00 V

With this setting, a signal of 12 V is issued as a 12-V measured value (see following figure).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_measuring-transducer-setting, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-57 Parameter Settings and Representation of an Input Signal Greater than 10 V
5.6.6.5 Settings

MT fast #
_:101 MT in #:TD input-signal • Voltage input Current input
type
• Current input

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:103 MT in #:Unit • % A
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W
• W/s
• Wh

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:142 MT in #:Measuring • 10 ms 10 ms
window
• 20 ms
• 40 ms
• 60 ms
• 80 ms
• 100 ms
_:107 MT in #:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:104 MT in #:Conversion -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00
factor
_:105 MT in #:Upper limit -20.00 m Ato 20.00 mA 5.00 mA
_:109 MT in #:Upper limit - -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00
Sensor
_:106 MT in #:Lower limit -20.00 m Ato 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:110 MT in #:Lower limit - -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00
Sensor

(Type)
MT in #
_:307 MT in #:Broken wire SPS O
_:302 MT in #:TD scale MV MV O
_:306 MT in #:TD scale SAV SAV O
_:300 MT in #:Behavior ENS O
_:303 MT in #:Health ENS O
5.6.7 RTD Unit Ethernet
5.6.7.1 Overview
The RTD unit Ether. function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the measured
temperatures from the RTD unit
• Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature monitoring function
• Monitors communication with the RTD unit

The RTD unit Ether. function can only work in the Analog units function group. A maximum of 20 function
instances can work simultaneously. Each instance contains 12 preconfigured sensor function blocks.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_str_fnc, 2, en_US]
5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit
Logic
[lo_rtdtcp, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-59 Logic of the RTD Unit Ether. Function

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Communication with an RTD Unit

The function is used to communicate with an RTD unit connected via an Ethernet connection. If the connec-
tion of the function is successfully established to the external RTD unit via the Ethernet interface, the RTD unit
transmits the temperatures of all connected sensors to the RTD unit Ether. function. For the connection to
be established successfully, specific communication settings must be set, see chapter 5.6.7.4 Application and
Setting Notes.
The RTD unit Ziehl TR1200 IP supports only an Ethernet connection of 10 MBit/s. A direct connection to a
100-Mbit communication module is therefore not possible. For this reason, you must connect the RTD unit
to the communication module via a 10/100 MBit/s autosensing switch which automatically recognizes the
transmission rates and adapts them accordingly. Further information can be found in the Application and
setting notes, see chapter 5.6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes.
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.

The RTD unit Ether. function cannot establish a Alarm
connection with a communication module.
The connection between the communication module Warning
and the RTD unit causes a time-out.
A communication module has not received any more Warning
data from the RTD unit for 9 sec.
The Failure signal is issued as soon as one of the sensor function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = port J

Use the Port parameter to define over which port the external RTD unit is connected to the SIPROTEC 5
device.
If you want to connect the external RTD unit to the integrated Ethernet interface, set the parameter Port =
Port J. If you want to connect the external RTD unit to an Ethernet plug-in module, set the parameter Port
= Port F, Port E, Port P, or Port N.
You can connect directly the RTD unit to the device via the internal 10-Mbit Ethernet port J. If you operate
the RTD unit on another port via a 100-Mbit communication module, you need an interconnected 10/100-Mbit
autosensing switch, which adapts transmission rates accordingly.
Parameter: IP address
• Default setting (_:2311:104) IP address = 10.16.60.1

With the parameter IP address, you set the IP address of the RTD unit connected to the communication
module via the SUP protocol. Every RTD unit has to be assigned a unique IP address. The IP address to be set
depends on your network configuration. You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause conflicts with
other IP addresses in the network. Set an appropriate IP address first at the Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD unit. Then
specify the parameter IP address for the communication module to the same address.
Settings on the RTD Unit

The Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD unit is set with the front keys or in a Web browser on a laptop computer via its
Ethernet interface. Set the connection type of the sensors (3-wire connection or resistance value for 2-wire
connection), the idle state of the fault-indication relay, as well as the IP interface setting.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The code lock has to be switched off for parameterization. This is only possible using the front keys of the RTD
unit. The code lock is off (switched off) in as-delivered condition and has pin 504.
For detailed information on the settings, refer to the TR1200 IP manual that comes with the RTD unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (http://www.siprotec.de) under Accessories ->
7XV5662-xAD.
For an Ethernet connection to a SIPROTEC 5 device communicating with the RTD unit TR1200 IP via the SUP
protocol (Slave Unit Protocol), the Modbus TCP setting must be activated in the RTD unit. You can activate
the Modbus TCP protocol using the function keys under the tcP. → Mod / on menu item or with the Web
browser in the TCP/UDP Config tab. The RTD (RTD protocol) and UDP Port settings have no effect here. The
Modbus TCP port is permanently set to 502 and cannot be changed.
5.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor
Logic
[lo_tmpval, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-60 Logic Diagram of the Temperature Sensor Function Block
Measured Temperature Value

The Temperature sensor function block processes one single measured temperature value delivered from the
RTD unit for the assigned sensor. 12 temperature sensor function blocks are always available in each RTD unit
function (both via Ethernet and serial), even if fewer sensors are connected to the RTD unit.
Various temperature sensor types are supported: Pt100, Ni100, and Ni120 sensors. The function block is
notified regarding the selection of connected type via the Sensor type parameter.
The function block delivers a measured temperature value in °C or °F as an output variable. The measured
temperature value is available as an operational measured value and can be monitored by the Temperature
supervision function.
Error Responses
If the measured input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output measured
temperature value is set to invalid. The statuses for Health and Error take the statuses in accordance with
the following table:
Table 5-13 Error response
Error Description Health Status Error Status

Sensor or line short circuited Alarm Yes
Sensor or line interrupted Alarm Yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Error Description Health Status Error Status

Measured temperature value Alarm Yes
outside the valid measuring range
specified in the technical data. The
valid measuring range depends on
the sensor type.
Sensor not connected OK No
Parameter: Sensor type
• Default setting (_:11611:102) Sensor type = Pt 100

The Sensor type parameter is used to set the sensor element used. You can select between Pt 100, Ni
100 and Ni 120.
Parameter: Temperature unit

To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from °C to °F, adapt the DIGSI user
default settings accordingly.
Proceed as follows:
• In DIGSI select the menu item Extras --> Settings.
• In the Settings view select the menu item DIGSI 5 User preferences.
• Under Standard unit system change the setting value of the unit system used from SI units to US
units.
[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-61 Change of the Display Between °C and °F
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.6.7.7 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port E port J
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P
Sensor 1
_:11611:102 Sensor 1:Sensor type • Pt 100 Pt 100
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

(Type)
General
Sensor 1
_:11611:51 Sensor 1:Behavior ENS O
_:11611:52 Sensor 1:Health ENS O
_:11611:60 Sensor 1:Failure SPS O
_:11611:80 Sensor 1:TmpOut MV O
5.6.8 RTD Unit, Serial
5.6.8.1 Overview
The RTD unit serial function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit serial via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the meas-
ured temperatures from the RTD unit
• Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature supervision function
• Monitors communication with the RTD unit

The RTD unit Serial function is set up structurally in the same manner as the RTD unit Ether. function. The
mode of operation is also identical (see 5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit).
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = F

With the parameter Port, you set the slot for the communication module that will be used for the connection
with an external RTD unit.
If you want to connect the external RTD unit to an Ethernet plug-in module, set the parameter Port = Port
F , Port E, Port P, or plug-in module position.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Channel number
• Default setting (_:2311:105) Channel number = 1

A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the parameter Channel number, you set
the channel number (1 or 2) through which the RTD unit is connected to the device. The communication
module inputs are labeled with the channel numbers.
Parameter: Slave address
• Default setting (_:2311:106) Slave address = 1

With the parameter Slave address, you define the device address of the RTD unit. If only one RTD unit is
connected to the serial bus, the default value 1 can be used. The same device address has to be set on the RTD
unit. The device address is important for distinguishing among several RTD units connected to a serial bus. Set
a unique device address (for example 1, 2, and 3 when connecting 3 RTD units) for each RTD unit and the
same device address for the parameter Slave address in the 3 RTD unit serial functions.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.
5.6.8.3 Parameter

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port F port J
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port J
_:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 1
_:2311:106 General:Slave address 1 to 254 1
Sensor 1
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 2
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 3
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 4
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 5
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Sensor 6
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 7
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 8
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 9
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 10
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 11
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 12
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

(Type)
General
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Sensor 3

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Sensor 4
Sensor 5
Sensor 6
Sensor 7
Sensor 8
Sensor 9
Sensor 10
Sensor 11
Sensor 12
5.6.9 Communication with RTD Unit
5.6.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200)
Connection of the Communication Lines

Figure 5-62 shows how you connect the RTD unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device. Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45 plug is
connected to RTD-B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD-A.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dwverbau-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-62 Connection of the RTD Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device
Adding a USART Module

Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module must be
inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the CB202
expansion module (refer to the following figure).
[scauser3-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-63 Insertion Position for a USART Module
Selecting the SUP Protocol

Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the
SIPROTEC 5 device and the RTD Unit.
Figure 5-64 Selecting the SUP Protocol

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the RTD box. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the settings
of the RTD box. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The setting of the parameter
Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
Figure 5-65 Making the Communication Settings
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD box DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function RTD unit serial 1 (refer to the
following figure).
[sc_auser6, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-66 Analog-Unit Instance
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the RTD
unit. This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box (refer to the following figure).
The following device configuration must be set on the TR1200 RTD unit when the RTD unit is used for the first
time:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1
• Baud rate: 9600
• Parity: no
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-67 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Slave Address
5.6.9.2 Integration of an RTD Unit Ether. (TR1200 IP)
Device Configuration
In the DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus adding the module to the device config-
uration. Figure 5-68 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB202.
Alternatively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface port J.
Figure 5-68 Inserting an Ethernet Module
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 5-69 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
Figure 5-70 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation (Base Module)
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the RTD unit Ether. function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).
[sc_auser6, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-71 Analog Unit Instance
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the RTD unit (refer to the
following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the RTD unit.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 5-72 Setting the Port and IP Address
5.6.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors

Connect a resistor on the sensor terminals of the RTD unit. Using this resistor, simulate a constant tempera-
ture. The resistance value should be around 50 Ω to 200 Ω.
If you want to simulate a changeable temperature, connect an adjustable resistor of maximum 470 Ω instead
of a fixed resistor.
5.6.10 Temperature Acquisition via Protocols
5.6.10.1 Overview
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols:
• Obtains the temperature from a power-plant control system or from another protection device
• Processes the temperature, for example, supervises the temperature in the CFC
• Transfers the temperature to other protection devices

The function Temperature acquisition via protocols can work only in the function group Analog units. In
this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
• 12 stages Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850

The stage can obtain the temperature from a power‑plant control system via the PROFINET IO protocol or
the IEC 61850 protocol.
• 12 stages Temperature acquisition via GOOSE

The stage can obtain the temperature from another SIPROTEC 5 protection device via the GOOSE
protocol.
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols comes factory‑set with 1 stage Temperature acquisi-
tion via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_structure_TmpviaProt, 1, en_US]
5.6.10.3 Stage Temperature Acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850
Logic
Figure 5-74 Logic Diagram of the Stage
The stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 supports 2 protocols:
• PROFINET IO protocol
If you set the PROFINET IO protocol for the temperature acquisition, you can only get the analog value.
• IEC 61850 protocol

If you set the IEC 61850 protocol for the temperature acquisition, you get the analog value, the quality,
and the time stamp.
Invalid Temperature Indication

If the received temperature is invalid, the failure indication Temperature failure is issued.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Stage Application
You can use the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 for the following purposes:
• Acquire the cold‑gas temperature from the power‑plant control system
• Process the received cold‑gas temperature value
• Send the processed cold‑gas temperature value to other functions for further processing
[dw_app-example_IEC, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-75 Application Example
The following table explains the data.

Data Name Description
Tmp With this variable, you can set the PROFINET IO protocol or the IEC 61850 protocol for the
temperature acquisition.
In the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850, the data type is APC.
Unit With this parameter, you can select the unit °F or °C for the temperature which is acquired
from the power‑plant control system.
5.6.10.4 PROFINET IO Configuration for the Temperature Acquisition

With the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850, to acquire the cold-gas temperature
via the PROFINET IO protocol, the following configurations are necessary.
IP-Address Configuration and Protocol Selection

² In the project tree, navigate to your device and double‑click Hardware and protocols.
² In the Device view tab, select an Ethernet communication module for which you want to configure the
PROFINET IO protocol.
² In the Properties tab of the communication module, select General > IP interface settings.
² Set the IP address for the communication module.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_PROFINET IP, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-76 IP-Address Configuration
² Select General > Protocols > Communication.

² Under SCADA, select the item PROFINET IO.
[sc_PROFINET_IO, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-77 Protocol Selection
Function Instantiation
² In the project tree, navigate to your device and select Settings > Analog units.
If there is no function group Analog units, instantiate one.
² Instantiate the function Tmp.Acq.viaCom in the function group Analog units.
Signal Mapping and Configuration

² In the project tree, navigate to your device and double‑click Communication mapping.
² In the Communication mapping matrix, set Show protocol to PROFINET IO.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_PROFI_Filter, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-78 Protocol Filter
² In the column Signals, select Analog units > Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1 > Tmp.Ctl 1.
² Route the data Tmp in column R and set the value to 1.
[sc_PROFI_Setting, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-79 Signal Configuration

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.6.10.5 IEC 61850 Configuration for the Temperature Acquisition

With the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850, to acquire the cold-gas temperature
via the IEC 61850 protocol, the following configurations are necessary.
IEC 61850 Edition Selection

² In the project tree, navigate to your device and double‑click Device information.
² In the Device information tab, set the parameter Edition to IEC 61850 Edition 2 or a higher
edition.
[sc_iec_edition, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-80 IEC 61850 Edition
IP-Address Configuration and Protocol Selection

² In the project tree, navigate to your device and double‑click Hardware and protocols.
² In the Device view tab, select the communication module for which you want to configure the
IEC 61850 protocol.
[sc_iec_61850_ip, 2, en_US]

² Under IEC61850, select the item IEC 61850-8-1.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_iec_61850_sel, 2, en_US]
Function Instantiation
² In the project tree, navigate to your device and select Settings > Analog units.
² Instantiate the function that requires the cold-gas temperature in the corresponding function group.
The function 49R RotorTOLP is taken as an example in the following steps.
² Under General of the function 49R RotorTOLP, set the parameter Temperature acquisition to
Protocol COM.
² Set the parameter Temperature via protocol to Analog units.Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1.Tmp.Ctl
1.
[sc_iec_61850_3, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-83 Parameter Configuration
Configuration in the IEC 61850 structure

² In the project tree, navigate to your device and double‑click IEC 61850 structure.
² In the column Name, select AnUn_TmpAcqCom 1 > VIAC_STMP1 > CTmp.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_iec_61850_cgt, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-84 Data Selection
5.6.10.6 Stage Temperature Acquisition via GOOSE
Logic
Invalid Temperature Indication

If the received temperature is invalid, the failure indication Temperature failure is issued.
Stage Application
The following terms are used for the stage Temperature acquisition via GOOSE:
• Source device
SIPROTEC 5 protection device that provides data
• Target device
SIPROTEC 5 protection device that requests data from the source device

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
In the target device, you can use the stage Temperature acquisition via GOOSE for the following purposes:
• Acquire the cold‑gas temperature from the source device
• Process the received cold‑gas temperature value
• Send the processed cold‑gas temperature value to other functions for further processing
In the following figure, the source device is SIPROTEC 5 device 2 and the target device is SIPROTEC 5 device 1.
[dw_app-example_GOOSE, 2, en_US]
The following table explains the data.

Data Name Description
Tmp With this variable, you can set the GOOSE protocol for the temperature acquisition.
In the stage Temperature acquisition via GOOSE, the input measured value with a
COM template is designed to acquire the data from another SIPROTEC 5 protection
device.
Unit With this parameter, you can select the unit °F or °C for the temperature which is
acquired from another SIPROTEC 5 protection device.
5.6.10.7 GOOSE Configuration for the Temperature Acquisition

To acquire the cold-gas temperature with the stage Temperature acquisition via GOOSE, the following
configurations are necessary.
IEC 61850 Edition Selection – Source Device

² In the project tree, select the source device and double‑click Device information.
edition.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
IP-Address Configuration and Protocol Selection – Source Device

² In the project tree, select the source device and double‑click Hardware and protocols.
² In the Device view tab, select the communication module for which you want to configure the
IEC 61850 protocol.

² Under IEC61850, select the item IEC 61850-8-1.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Configuration in IEC 61850 structure – Source Device

² In the project tree, select the source device and double‑click IEC 61850 structure.
² In the column Name, select AnUn_TmpAcqCom 1 > VIAC_STMP1 > CTmp.
[sc_iec_61850_cgt, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-90 Data Selection
Now, the device can be used to send the cold‑gas temperature to other devices.
IEC 61850 Edition Selection – Target Device

² In the project tree, select the target device and double‑click Device information.
edition.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
IP-Address Configuration and Protocol Selection – Target Device

² In the project tree, select the target device and double‑click Hardware and protocols.
² In the Device view tab, select the communication module for which you want to configure GOOSE.
² Select Protocols > Communication > IEC 61850-8-1.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Function Instantiation – Target Device

² In the project tree, select the target device and select Settings > Analog units.
² Instantiate the stage Tmp.GOOSE in the function Tmp.Acq.viaCom.
Configuration in Information Routing – Target Device

² In the project tree, select the target device and double‑click Information routing.
² In the column Signals, select Analog units > Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1 > Tmp.Goose 1.
² Set the value to 1 in the column GOOSE for the data Tmp.
[sc_station_10, 1, en_US]
Configuration of the Protection Function – Target Device

² Instantiate the function that requires the cold-gas temperature in the corresponding function group.
The function 49R RotorTOLP is taken as an example in the following steps.
² Under General of the function 49R RotorTOLP, set the parameters Temperature acquisition to
Protocol COM.
² Set the parameter Temperature via protocol to Analog units.Tmp.Acq.viaCom
1.Tmp.GOOSE 1 .
[sc_GOOSE_CGT, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-94 Parameter Configuration

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Connection of the Source Device and the Target Device

² In the project tree, select IEC 61850 stations > IEC station 1.
If there is no station, double‑click Add new station and create one.
² Double‑click IEC station 1 and set the parameter IEC Edition to IEC 61850 Edition 2 or a higher
edition in the Properties tab.
[sc_iec_station, 2, en_US]
² Assign the available devices to the IEC station.
[sc_device_assign, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-96 Device Assignment
² Right‑click the station and select Export changes to IEC 61850 System Configurator in the context
menu.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_export_IEC, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-97 Export Changes to IEC 61850 System Configurator
² If the following dialog appears, click OK and save the SCD file to a folder.
[sc_iec_confim, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-98 SCD File Creation
² In the opened IEC 61850 System Configurator window, select GOOSE in the toolbar.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 5-99 GOOSE-Function Selection
² In the GOOSE messages view, right‑click the IEC station and select GOOSE application in the context
menu.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The GOOSE application is listed under the IEC station.
Figure 5-100 GOOSE Application Creation
² In the Source catalog area, navigate to the source device and select AnUn_TmpAcqCom 1 >
VIAC_STMP1 > CTmp.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 5-101 Source-Data Selection
² Drag the data CTmp and drop it to GOOSE application in the GOOSE messages view.
You can see the assigned source data.
Figure 5-102 Source-Data Assignment
² Unfold the assigned source data.

² In the Destination catalog area, navigate to the target device and select AnUn_TmpAcqCom1 >
RxTmp1.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 5-103 Target-Data Selection
² Drag the data RxTmp1 and drop it to the assigned source data.
Now, the target data is connected with the source data.
Figure 5-104 Destination-Data Assignment
² Save the configurations.

² In DIGSI 5 in the project tree, right‑click the IEC station and select Import changes from IEC 61850
System Configurator in the context menu.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 5-105 Import Changes from IEC 61850 System Configurator
If the following dialog appears, the source device and the target device are successfully connected.
[sc_End, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-106 Successful Device Connection
² Click OK to finish the connection.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Change of the Temperature Unit

Commonly, the temperature unit °C is used in the display and evaluation of measured temperature values.
• To change the temperature unit from °C to °F for all devices in the current DIGSI project, proceed as
follows:
– In DIGSI, select the menu item Options > Settings.
– In the Settings view, select the menu item DIGSI 5 user preferences.
– Set the parameter Standard unit system to US units.
[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-107 Change of the Temperature Unit between °C and °F for all Devices
• To change the temperature unit from °C to °F for 1 device, proceed as follows:

– In the project tree, navigate to your device and select Settings > Device settings.
– In the Device settings view, navigate to the menu item Localization.
– Set the parameter Unit system to ANSI.
[sc_SITmp, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-108 Change of the Temperature Unit between °C and °F for 1 Device

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i If the parameter Unit system is set to ANSI, only the unit of the measuring values and parameters
changes to °F.
The unit of the following data is still °C:
• Other temperature data in the device
• The temperature thresholds in DCF
Parameter: Unit

You use the setting Unit to specify which physical unit of the source data the measured values represent. The
possible setting values are listed in the settings table.
5.6.10.9 Settings

Tmp.Ctl 1
_:19801:101 Tmp.Ctl 1:Unit • °C °C
• °F

(Type)
Tmp.Ctl 1
_:19801:501 Tmp.Ctl 1:>COM channel inactive SPS I
_:19801:300 Tmp.Ctl 1:Tmp APC C
_:19801:52 Tmp.Ctl 1:Behavior ENS O
_:19801:53 Tmp.Ctl 1:Health ENS O
_:19801:301 Tmp.Ctl 1:Failure SPS O
_:19801:302 Tmp.Ctl 1:TmpOut MV O
5.6.11 LPIT Module IO240
5.6.11.1 Overview
The input module IO240 for the low-power instrument transformer in the gas insulated switchgear (GIS-LPIT)
and for the resistive-capacitive voltage transformer (RCVT) from Siemens Energy (LPIT module IO240):
• Measures temperature values, voltage values, and current values
• Provides an interface for SIPROTEC 5 modular devices to connect to Siemens Energy GIS-LPIT (GIS-LPVT
and GIS-LPCT) and RCVT
• Converts current values into primary values
• Converts voltage values into primary values according to the sensor type (GIS-LPVT or RCVT)
• Provides primary values for protection functions, the voltage measurement, and the current measure-
ment
The input module IO240 is available in a hardware variant of the 6MU85 device as part of the 1/3 base module
or as an expansion module for installation in modular SIPROTEC 5 devices.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i Due to the higher power demand of the IO240 boards, a maximum of 2 IO240 modules are allowed per
device row and totally a maximum of 4 IO240 modules are allowed in a SIPROTEC 5 device. This limitation
also applies to the case that 1 of the IO240 modules is used in the 1/3 basic housing.
For more information on the use and configuration of the IO240 module combined with the connected LPIT,
refer to the Application Note APN-090 IO240 and LPITs.

The function LPIT module IO240 works in the function group Analog units.
The function LPIT module IO240 contains the following function blocks:
• 3 for GIS-LPIT pole
• 3 for RCVT
• 1 for IO240 calibration data
[dw_strIO240, 4, en_US]
Figure 5-109 Structure of the Function LPIT module IO240
(1) It is available when the parameter Use RCVT as volt. sensor under LPIT General is
checked.
(2) It is available when the parameter Use cal. data IO240 board under IO240 general data is
checked.
[dw_strIO240_LPIT General, 4, en_US]
Figure 5-110 Structure of the Function Block LPIT general

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_strIO240_LPIT Sensor, 5, en_US]
Figure 5-111 Structure of the Function Block GIS-LPIT pole
(1) It is available when the parameter GIS-LPIT type under LPIT General is set to LPIT 1-
phase.

Once you have instantiated the LPIT module IO240, it is visible in the project tree in the function group
Analog units. You can find the function group Analog units in the folder Settings of the device in the DIGSI 5
project tree.
If you open the subdirectory LPIT-IO240, you reach the setting sheet for the function blocks LPIT General,
GIS-LPIT pole, RCVT, and IO240 cal.data. For more information, refer to 5.6.11.4 Application and Setting
Notes and 5.6.11.5 Settings.
Logic of the LPIT Module IO240
[lo_IO240_logic_diagram, 4, en_US]
Figure 5-112 Logic of the LPIT Module IO240
NOTE
i The parameter IO240 production ID is only used for calculation when the parameter Use cal.
data IO240 board in the function block IO240 general data is checked.
The parameters Magnitude corr. factor and Phase offset correction are only used for calcu-
lation when the parameter Use RCVT as volt. sensor in the function block LPIT General is checked.
Calculation of the Primary Values

When RCVT is not used, the LPIT module IO240 obtains the temperature values and secondary values
from the GIS-LPIT sensor. When RCVT is used, the LPIT module IO240 obtains the temperature values and
secondary-current values from the GIS-LPIT sensor, and the secondary-voltage values from the RCVT sensor.
The secondary values are converted into the corresponding primary values based on the settings in the
function blocks LPIT general, GIS-LPIT pole, RCVT, and IO240 calibration data. The primary values are then
internally provided to the device for the measurement functions or protection functions, and can be optionally
published as sampled measured values.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Temperature Value of the GIS-LPIT Sensor

The LPIT module IO240 measures the temperature value of the GIS-LPIT sensor via the PT100 sensors of
the GIS-LPIT. The temperature is used to compensate the temperature influence of the measured secondary
values. This allows an accurate calculation of the primary values. The measured resistance of the PT100 sensor
and the resulting temperature are available as information in the device for further use, such as customized
logic charts (CFC) and recording. The resistance and temperature values are shown on the HMI.
If RCVT is used as the voltage input, the temperature value of the GIS-LPIT sensor has no influence on the
voltage measurement.
Calibration Data
The calibration data of the GIS-LPIT sensor, the GIS-LPIT connection box, and the IO240 board are stored in a
cloud storage. Therefore, the calibration data for DIGSI are available independently from the DIGSI 5 version
and can be updated for newly produced GIS-LPIT and IO240 board. To update the local copy of the calibration
data file, you can click the refresh button . The feedback of a successful or unsuccessful update of the
calibration data file is given in the Info tab.
[sc_refresh button and message, 2, en_US]
Settings of the LPIT General
[sc_LPIT_General, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-113 Settings of the LPIT General

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Slot number

The parameter specifies the mounting location of the IO240 board in the SIPROTEC 5 device and is used to
identify the board mounting location when multiple IO240 boards are used in a device.
Parameter: GIS-LPIT type
• Default setting (_:20821:119) GIS-LPIT type = LPIT 3-phase

With the parameter GIS-LPIT type, you set the GIS type used.
Parameter Value Connection to the LPIT Module IO240 GIS-LPIT Sensor Type
LPIT 3-phase Rogowski coil 3-phase encapsulated
Capacitive voltage sensor (8DN8-5, 8DN8-6, 8VN1)
3-phase without LPVT Rogowski coil
LPIT 1-phase Rogowski coil 1-phase encapsulated
Capacitive voltage sensor
1-phase without LPVT Rogowski coil
Parameter: LPIT Production ID

To load the calibration data of your GIS-LPIT sensor from the calibration data file, enter the corresponding
GIS-LPIT production ID. You can find the GIS-LPIT Production ID at the GIS-LPIT sensor name plate.
NOTE
i Each LPIT Production ID is unique.
Parameter: Primary Phase A, Primary Phase B, Primary Phase C
• Default setting (_:142) Primary Phase A = LPIT Sensor of GIS Pole I
• Default setting (_:143) Primary Phase B = LPIT Sensor of GIS Pole II
• Default setting (_:144) Primary Phase C = LPIT Sensor of GIS Pole III
With these parameters, you define the mapping relationship between the primary phase and the LPIT sensor
of GIS pole, according to the physical connection. The LPIT module IO240 takes the settings of the corre-
sponding LPIT sensor of GIS pole for each phase.
Parameter: Use RCVT as volt. sensor
• Default setting: the parameter (_:20281:159) Use RCVT as volt. sensor is unchecked.
With the parameter Use RCVT as volt. sensor, you decide whether to use the GIS-LPVT or RCVT as the
voltage sensor type for the primary-voltage measurement. When this parameter is checked, the 3 function
blocks for RCVTs are available and all the settings related to GIS-LPVT are invisible.
Parameter: Crosstalk RCVT 1 to 2, Crosstalk RCVT 2 to 1, Crosstalk RCVT 2 to 3, Crosstalk RCVT

3 to 2, Crosstalk RCVT 3 to 1, Crosstalk RCVT 1 to 3
• Default setting (_:160) Crosstalk RCVT 1 to 2 = 0.000 %

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With these parameters, you configure the mutual influence of crosstalk from the RCVT in one phase to the one
in another phase.
Parameter: Use cal. data IO240 board
• Default setting: the parameter (_:20821:177) Use cal. data IO240 board is unchecked.
With the parameter Use cal. data IO240 board, you decide whether to use the calibration data of the
IO240 board for the primary-value calculation to achieve measuring accuracy class 0.1. When this parameter is
checked, the function block IO240 cal.data is available.
Settings of the LPIT-GIS Pole
[sc_LPIT-GIS_pole, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-114 Settings of the LPIT-GIS Pole, Example
Parameter: Current polarity inverse

With this parameter, you confirm whether the polarity of the physically-connected current is inversed. If the
current polarity is inversely connected, set this parameter to yes.
Parameter: LPIT connection-box type

After the GIS-LPIT production ID is entered, the type of the LPIT connection box is visible in DIGSI. It is not
configurable.
Settings of the RCVT Sensors
[sc_settings_RCVT, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-115 Settings of the RCVT
Parameter: Magnitude corr. factor, Phase offset correction
• Default setting (_:101) Magnitude corr. factor = 1.0000

With the parameter Magnitude corr. factor, you adjust the magnitude for the voltage input.
• Default setting (_:102) Phase offset correction = 0.0 '

With the parameter Phase offset correction, you adjust the phase angle for the voltage input.
These parameters allow you to correct the tolerances of the primary-voltage transformer phase-selectively.
Magnitude correction and phase-offset correction are probably required for high-precision measurements.
Settings of the IO240 Calibration Data

To achieve the measuring accuracy class 0.1, the calibration data of the IO240 board used are required. The
board-specific calibration data can be ordered separately from the supplier of the LPIT sensor.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
In the function block IO240 cal.data, there are 2 parameters IO240 production ID and Database
version.
[sc_IO240 cal. data, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-116 Settings of the IO240 Calibration Data
For the parameter IO240 production ID, you must enter the value manually. You can find the production
ID of the IO240 board in DIGSI 5 via Online access > Device information > Hardware inform. > HW module
with the board type: IO240. You can also get the production ID of the specific IO240 board from the LPIT
supplier.
[sc_IO240_production_ID, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-117 IO240 Production ID
After the production ID is entered, the corresponding version of database is visible in DIGSI. The version is not
configurable.
Measuring-Points Routing
The LPIT module IO240 only supports the 3 ph-to-gnd voltages connection type of voltage and the
3-phase connection type of current in the Measuring-points routing.
2 groups of 3-phase voltage measuring channels with different voltage-transformer types derived from the
connected voltage sensor are available in the Measuring-points routing. For each LPIT module IO240, you
can only route 1 group of the 3-phase voltage measuring channels according to the connected voltage sensor,

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
either GIS-LPVT or RCVT. The measuring-points routing must be consistent with the configuration of the
parameter Use RCVT as volt. sensor. Otherwise, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
[sc_IO240 voltage connection type, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-118 IO240 Voltage Connection Type
NOTE
i The voltages in the following channels are for the GIS-LPVT sensor:
• LP-VT3.1
• LP-VT3.2
• LP-VT3.3
The voltages in the following channels are for the RCVT sensor:
• RC-VT3.1
• RC-VT3.2
• RC-VT3.3
2 groups of 3-phase current measuring channels with different measuring ranges derived from the connected
Rogowski coil are available in the Measuring-points routing. The protection channel supplies a dynamic
range of 100 times the rated primary current of the assigned current measuring point. The measuring channel
supplies a dynamic range of 1.6 times the rated primary current of the assigned measuring point, with higher
accuracy than the protection channel. The rated primary current must be set accordingly in the settings for the
current measuring points. The settings for the current measuring points can be found in the device settings
under Settings and Power System.
[sc_IO240 current connection type, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-119 IO240 Current Connection Type
NOTE
i The currents in the following channels are for the protection function:
• LP-PT3.1
• LP-PT3.2
• LP-PT3.3
The currents in the following channels are for the measurement function:
• LP-MS3.1
• LP-MS3.2
• LP-MS3.3

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measuring Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph)

For the voltage measuring points of the LPIT module IO240, the value of the parameter Rated secondary
voltage is the basis for the configuration of the parameters in secondary values. When connected to the
GIS-LPVT sensor, the rated secondary voltage is preset permanently to a virtual voltage of 100 V and is
invisible in DIGSI. When connected to the RCVT sensor, the rated secondary voltage is preset permanently to a
real voltage of 100 V, which is visible and read-only in DIGSI.
For more information on the measuring point voltage 3-phase (V-3ph), refer to 6.1.6 Application and Setting
Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph).
Measuring Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph)

For the current measuring point of the LPIT module IO240 for both the protection and measuring channels,
the rated secondary current is preset permanently to a virtual current of 1 A. This value is the basis for
the parameterization of the settings in secondary values. The parameter Rated secondary current is
invisible in DIGSI.
For more information on the measuring point current 3-phase (I-3ph), refer to 6.1.4 Application and Setting
Notes for Measuring Point Current 3‑Phase (I-3ph).
Avoiding Unauthorized Access to IO240 Terminals

For revenue metering, to protect the measurement chain against unauthorized access, you have the following
options:
• Use a shield cover; if necessary a sealing can be applied.
• Extend the shield cover with an optional microswitch (product code P1X596).
Application of the Optional Microswitch

After connection of the 2 leads from the microswitch to the terminals D9 and D10, the IO240 module
can detect an opening of the shield cover and report it via SCADA communication. When the connected
microswitch is actuated, the information (_:76) Shield cover changes the status. The information can
be further processed via the information routing and reported to the control system, for example.
For more information on the installation, refer to the SIPROTEC 5 Hardware manual.
5.6.11.5 Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting

LPIT General
_:118 LPIT General:Slot number 1 to 12 Physical slot
Not settable number of the
IO240 board
connection
_:119 LPIT General:GIS-LPIT type • LPIT 1-phase LPIT 3-phase
• LPIT 3-phase
• 1-phase without LPVT
• 3-phase without LPVT
_:120 LPIT General:LPIT Production Production ID of the GIS sensor –
ID22
_:142 LPIT General:Primary Phase A • LPIT Sensor of GIS Pole I LPIT Sensor of GIS
Pole I
• LPIT Sensor of GIS Pole II
• LPIT Sensor of GIS Pole III
22 This parameter is visible under GIS-LPIT of each sensor when you set GIS-LPIT type to LPIT 1-phase.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:143 LPIT General:Primary Phase B • LPIT Sensor of GIS Pole I LPIT Sensor of GIS
Pole II
_:144 LPIT General:Primary Phase C • LPIT Sensor of GIS Pole I LPIT Sensor of GIS
Pole III
_:20821:157 LPIT General:Database version The database version from which –
the LPIT calibration data are derived
It is not configurable, but obtained
from the used calibration data after
the LPIT production ID is entered.
_:20281:159 LPIT General:Use RCVT as volt. • no no
sensor
• yes
IO240 general data
_:20821:177 LPIT General:Use cal. data • no no
IO240 board
• yes
Voltage channels for RCVT
_:160 LPIT General:Crosstalk RCVT 1 -5.000 % to 5.000 % 0.000 %
to 2
to 1
to 3
to 2
to 1
to 3
Cable
_:111 LPIT General:Cable type LEONI L45551-P42-B5 LEONI L45551-P42-
B5
_:115 LPIT General:Cable length 0.1 m to 100.0 m 10.0 m
The following setting table shows only 1 of the 3 LPIT-GIS poles, as the setting possibilities of the 3 poles are
the same.
GIS-LPIT23
_:102 LPIT-GIS Pol #:LPIT Production Production ID of the GIS sensor –
ID
GIS LPCT
_:106 LPIT-GIS Pol #:Current polarity • no no
inverse
• yes
LPIT connection box
_:109 LPIT-GIS Pol #:LPIT connec- Type of the LPIT connection box –
tion-box type
23 This parameter section is visible only when you have set GIS-LPIT type under LPIT General to LPIT 1-phase.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The following setting table shows only 1 of the 3 RCVTs, as the setting possibilities of the 3 RCVTs are the
same.
Only when the parameter Use RCVT as volt. sensor is checked, the following function block is
available.
RCVT #
_:101 RCVT #:Magnitude corr. factor 0.9000 to 1.1000 1.0000
_:102 RCVT #:Phase offset correction -300.0 ' to 15.0 ' 0.0 '
Only when the parameter Use cal. data IO240 board is checked, the following function block is
available.
IO240 cal.data
_:100 IO240 cal.data:IO240 produc- Production ID of the IO240 board –
tion ID
_:101 IO240 cal.data:Database The database version from which –
version the IO240 board calibration data are
derived
It is not configurable, but obtained
from the used calibration data after
the IO240 production ID is entered.

(Type)
LPIT General
_:20821:76 LPIT General:Shield cover SPS O
_:20821:77 LPIT General:GIS LPIT cali. data error SPS O
_:20281:315 LPIT General:RCVT unsupported SPS O
_:20281:316 LPIT General:RCVT cali. data error SPS O
The following table shows only 1 of the 3 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the 3 sensors do not differ.
(Type)
LPIT-GIS Pol #
_:80 LPIT-GIS Pol #:TmpOut MV O
_:79 LPIT-GIS Pol #:R MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.7 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
5.7.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function group combines all the user functions that relate to a circuit breaker.
You will find the Circuit-breaker function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The
Circuit-breaker function group contains all of the protection, control, and supervision functions that you can
use for this device type. The following figure shows, for example, the functional scope of the Circuit-breaker
function group.
[sc_fg_leis, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-120 Circuit-Breaker Function Group – Example of the Functional Scope
The Circuit-breaker function group includes 3 different types of circuit breakers:
• Circuit breaker
• Circuit-breaker [control]
• Circuit breaker [status only]

The type circuit breaker can accept additional basic function blocks for protection functions along with the
actual circuit-breaker control.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The type circuit breaker [status only] is used only for acquiring the circuit-breaker switch position. This type
can be used to model switches that can only be read but not controlled by the SIPROTEC 5 device.
The available functions are described in 6 Protection and Automation Functions and 8 Control Functions.
Besides the user functions, the Circuit-breaker function group contains certain functionalities that are essen-
tial for general purposes and therefore cannot be loaded or deleted:
• Trip logic
• Mapping the physical circuit breaker
• Circuit-breaker position recognition for protection functions
• Detection of manual closure
• General settings
The following figure shows the structure of the Circuit-breaker function group. The individual function blocks
in the image are described in the following chapters.
[dw_fg_stru, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-121 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
The Circuit-breaker function group has interfaces with:
• Protection function groups

The function group contains the measured values needed from the measuring points associated with this
function group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If an application template is used, the function group is connected to the measuring point of the 3-phase
current because this connection is essential. It can be necessary to connect additional measuring points to the
function group, depending on the nature of the user functions used. The configuration is done via the Func-
tion-group connections editor in DIGSI 5. You can find more detailed information on this in 2.1 Embedding of
Functions in the Device.
If a user function, for example, synchronization, is used in the function group but the required measuring
point has not linked to it, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. This inconsistency provides an indication of the
missing measuring-point connection.
The function group Circuit breaker has interfaces with the following measuring points:
• 3-phase line current

The measurands from the 3-phase current system are supplied via this interface. The function group must
always be connected to this measuring point.
• Voltage
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, in the 3-phase voltage system these are, for example, VA, VB, VC of
the line or the feeder. The connection of the function group to this measuring point is optional.
• Sync. Voltage1, Sync. Voltage2

A 1-phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 1-phase connection) or
a 3-phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 3-phase connection) is
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if synchronization is used.
Interface with Protection-Function Groups

All required data are exchanged between the protection function group and the function groups Circuit
breaker via the interfaces of the function group Circuit breaker. This data includes, for example, the pickup
and operate indications of the protection functions sent in the direction of the function group circuit-breaker
and, for example, the circuit-breaker position information in the direction of the protection function groups.
If an application template is used, the function groups are connected to each other because this connection is
essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection using the Function-group connections
Editor in DIGSI 5.
You can find more detailed information in 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device.
If the linkage is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Besides the general assignments of the protection function group or groups to the Circuit-breaker function
groups, you can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions are included when the trip command is generated?
• Which protection functions activate the Automatic reclosing function?
• Which protection functions activate the Circuit-breaker failure protection function?

You can find more detailed information in 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device.

The interface with the 3-phase current system must have been configured. Otherwise, DIGSI 5 supplies an
inconsistency message.
If the function Synchronization is used, the measuring points that represent voltages V1 and V2 of the
power-supply units to be synchronized must be connected.
For further information refer to 8.4 Synchronization Function.
The function Automatic reclosing provides the auxiliary functions Dead-line check and Reduced dead time.
For these auxiliary functions, the 3-phase voltage system has to be measured. If you want to use these auxil-
iary functions, the measuring point of the 3-phase voltage system must be connected to the function-group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
interface Voltage. This connection is also necessary if the function type Automatic reclosing function with
adaptive dead time is used.
Interface with Protection-Function Groups

The protection-function group is connected to 2 circuit breakers (2 function groups Circuit breaker) for 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layouts.
Parameter: I Reference for % Values
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated normal current = 1000.00 A

With the parameter Rated normal current, you set the primary current, which serves as a reference
for all current-related % values within the function group Circuit breaker. This applies both for operational
measured values and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated current of the protected object here.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only
Parameter: V Reference for % Values

With the parameter Rated voltage, you set the primary voltage, which serves as a reference for all
voltage-related % values within the function group Circuit breaker. This applies both for operational measured
values and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated voltage of the protected object (for example, the line) here.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only
Parameter: Current Threshold Circuit Breaker Open
• Default setting (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.10 A

With the parameter Current thresh. CB open, you specify the current threshold below which the
circuit-breaker pole or the circuit breaker is recognized as open.
Set the parameter Current thresh. CB open so that the current measured when the circuit-breaker pole
is open will certainly fall below the parameterized value. If parasitic currents (for example, due to induction)
are excluded with the line deactivated, you can make a secondary setting of the value with a high degree of
sensitivity, to 0.05 A for example.
If no special requirements exist, Siemens recommends retaining the setting value of 0.10 A for secondary
purposes.
5.7.4 Settings

Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated normal 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
current

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current thresh. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
CB open 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:136 General:Op. mode BFP • unbalancing unbalancing
• I> query

(Type)
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:4261:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:4261:505 Circuit break.:>Trip release BBP SPS I
_:4261:506 Circuit break.:>Manual start HSBT SPS I
_:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:4261:52 Circuit break.:Behavior ENS O
_:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position DPC C
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. SPS O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:4261:326 Circuit break.:BBP trip relays blocked SPS O
_:4261:327 Circuit break.:no release of trip cmd SPS O
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:4261:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:4261:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. BCR O
_:4261:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. BCR O
_:4261:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. BCR O
_:4261:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk. BCR O
_:4261:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:4261:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:4261:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:4261:317 Circuit break.:Break. current 3I0/IN MV O
_:4261:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:4261:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:4261:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:4261:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:4261:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.7.6 Trip Logic

The Trip logic function block receives the group operate indication from the Protection function group or
Protection function groups and forms the protection trip command that is transmitted to the Circuit-breaker
function block.
The Circuit-breaker function block activates the device contact and thus causes the circuit breaker to open
(see 5.7.7 Circuit Breaker). The command output time is also effective here.
The trip logic also decides when the protection trip command is reset (see Figure 5-123).
[lo_ausbef, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-122 Trip Command
Trip-Command Reset
[lo_befe3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-123 Trip-Command Reset
Once a trip command is issued, it is stored (see Figure 5-122).

You determine the criteria for resetting a trip command that has been issued with the parameter Reset of
trip command. The following setting options are possible:
• with dropout
If the function that initiated tripping resets its operate indication the trip command is reset. This occurs
typically with dropout. Command reset of the trip command takes place regardless of verification of the
circuit-breaker condition.
• with I<

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• with I< & aux.contact

For these criteria, the state of the circuit breaker is also taken into account as a further criterion in
addition to the dropout of the tripping function (operate indication is reset by command). You can select
whether the state is determined by means of the current (with I<) or by means of the current in
conjunction with the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts (with I< & aux.contact). The behavior of
these setting options only differs in one situation of the circuit-breaker state. If the circuit breaker is
in the opening state, the trip command is reset in the case of the option with I<, whereas it is not
reset yet in the case of the option with with I< & aux.contact. The opening state is detected
if the auxiliary contacts still detect the circuit breaker as being closed and opening is detected via the
decreasing current flow.
As long as the circuit breaker is detected unambiguously as closed (fully closed), the trip command will
not be reset with these setting options.
The information about the condition of the circuit breaker and the determination of the various condi-
tions is supplied by the Circuit-breaker position recognition function block. You can find further infor-
mation in chapter 5.7.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions.
Parameter: Reset of trip command
• Recommended setting value (_:5341:103) Reset of trip command = with I<

with I< The trip command is reset under the following conditions:
• Dropout of the tripping function

• The current falls short of the value set in the parameter
(_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open
with I< & aux.contact The trip command is reset under the following conditions:
• The current falls short of the value set in the parameter

(_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open
• The circuit-breaker auxiliary contact reports that the circuit breaker is
open.
This setting assumes that the setting of the auxiliary contact has been
routed via a binary input (for more information, see 5.7.7.3 Acquisition
of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information).
with dropout If the load current in the system cannot be interrupted during the protec-
tion device test and the test current is fed in parallel with the load current
this setting is useful.
The setting can be selected for special applications in which the trip
command does not result in complete interruption of the current in every
case. In this case, the trip command is reset if the pickup of the tripping
protection function drops out.
5.7.6.3 Settings

Trip logic
_:103 Trip logic:Reset of trip • with I< with I<
command
• with dropout

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Trip logic
_:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O
_:52 Trip logic:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Trip logic:Health ENS O
5.7.7 Circuit Breaker
5.7.7.1 Overview
The function block Circuit breaker represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device.
The basic tasks of this function block are:
• Operation of the circuit breaker (CB)
• Acquisition of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
• Acquisition of other circuit-breaker information

The function block Circuit breaker provides the following information:
• Number of switching cycles
• Breaking current, breaking voltage, and breaking frequency
• Summation breaking current
5.7.7.2 Tripping, Opening and Closing the Circuit Breaker

The circuit breaker is operated in the following situations:
• Tripping of the circuit breaker as a result of a protection trip command
• Opening of the circuit breaker as a result of control operations
• Closing of the circuit breaker as a result of an automatic reclosing or of control operations

Tripping is always the result of a protection function. The operate indications of the individual protection
functions are summarized in the Trip logic function block. The trip command that causes the tripping in the
function block Circuit breaker is generated there.
For the operational handling of the circuit breaker, the function block Circuit breaker provides the output
signals that must be routed to the corresponding binary outputs of the device (see Table 5-14).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_ausssc, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-124 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table 5-14 Description of the Output Signals
Signal Description Routing Options

Trip/open cmd. This signal executes all tripping and opening opera- • Unlatched
tions.
• Only saved in
The Output time parameter affects the signal. the event of
The signal is pending for the duration of the output protection trip-
time, with the following exceptions: ping (not when
opened)
• Only when switched off by the control:
The signal is reset before expiration of the period
if the auxiliary contacts report that the circuit
breaker is open before expiration of the period.
• Only in the event of protection tripping:
– The signal remains active as long as the
trip command is still active after expiration
of the period (see also 5.7.6.1 Function
Description).
If the trip signal is no longer active and
the auxiliary contacts report that the circuit
breaker is open before expiration of the
period, the signal is canceled before expira-
tion of the period.
– With the routing option Only saved in
the event of tripping, the signal remains
pending until it is acknowledged manually.
This only applies for protection tripping.
Close command This signal executes all closing operations. Normal routing
The Output time parameter affects the signal.
The signal is pending for the duration of the output
time, with the following exception: The signal is
canceled before expiration of the period if the auxil-
iary contacts report that the circuit breaker is closed
before expiration of the period.
Command active This signal is active if one of the following binary Normal routing
outputs is active:
• Trip/open cmd.
• Close command
The binary outputs are active as long as a switching
command is being executed by the control.
5.7.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information

To determine the circuit-breaker position, the function block Circuit breaker provides position signals. These
signals are of the Double-point indication (DPC) type. A double-point indication can be routed to 2 binary
inputs so that the open and closed circuit-breaker switch positions can be reliably acquired.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_erfass, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-125 Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Information
Signal Type Description

Position DPC Acquisition of the circuit-breaker switch position
The switch position CB 3-pole open and/or the position CB 3-pole closed
can be detected by routing to 1 or 2 binary inputs.
The signals must be routed to the binary input that is with the CB auxiliary contacts. The open and closed
signals do not necessarily have to be routed in parallel. The advantage of parallel routing is that it can be used
to determine an intermediate or disturbed position. If you route only one signal (open or closed), you cannot
determine an intermediate position or a disturbed position.
In the monitoring direction, the position signals generate the following information when the open and
closed positions are detected (see following table). This information is further processed by the Circuit-
breaker position recognition and Control function blocks.
Information Type Description
Open SPS The circuit-breaker switch position is opened.
Closed SPS The circuit-breaker switch position is closed.
Intermediate position SPS The circuit-breaker switch position is in the intermediate position. The
signal open and the signal closed have not been set.
Disturbed position SPS The circuit-breaker switch position is in the disturbed position. The
signal open and the signal closed have been set simultaneously.
Not selected SPS The circuit breaker is not selected for a control operation.
The following table shows the additional input signals:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

>Acquisition SPS This is used to activate acquisition blocking of the circuit-breaker auxil-
blocking iary contacts (see Other Functions 3.9.3 Persistent Commands for a
description of acquisition blocking).
>Reset SPS This is used to reset acquisition blocking and manual update of the
AcqBlk&Subst circuit breaker. If the signal is active, acquisition blocking and manual
update are reset.
>Ready SPS The active signal indicates that the circuit breaker is ready for an Open-
Closed-Open cycle.
The signal remains active as long as the circuit breaker is unable to trip.
The signal is used in the Automatic reclosing and Circuit-breaker test
functions.
The following table shows one additional output signal:

External health ENS This can be used to indicate the health of the physical circuit breaker.
For this, all failure information of the circuit breaker must be detected
via a binary input. This failure information can set the appropriate
state of the External health signal with a CFC chart (using the
BUILD_ENS block).
The signal has no effect on the health of the function block.
5.7.7.4 Definitive Tripping, Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
Definitive Tripping
Definitive tripping is always pending whenever the Automatic reclosing (AREC) function does not carry out
any reclosing after tripping. It follows that this is the case whenever an automatic reclosing is not present or
the AREC has been switched off.
Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression

In certain systems, the user may wish to actuate an alarm (for example, a horn) when tripping (circuit-breaker
tripping) occurs. This alarm should not be issued if it is to be reclosed automatically after tripping, or if it is to
be closed or opened via the control. The alarm is only to be issued in the event of definitive tripping.
Depending on how the alarm is generated (for example, triggered by a fleeting contact of the circuit breaker),
the Alarm suppression signal can be used to suppress the alarm.
If one of the following conditions is met, the Alarm suppression signal is generated:
• The definitive protection tripping is not present.
• The integrated automatic reclosing function executes a closure.
• The integrated control executes a closure or opening action.
• The function Manual close detects an external closing.

For further information about its use, refer to 5.7.9.2 Application and Setting Notes.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_unterd, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-126 Definitive Tripping and Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
5.7.7.5 Tripping and Opening Information

When a trip or opening command is issued, the breaking information shown in the next figure is saved in the
fault log.
[lo_ausloe, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-127 Breaking Information
The following statistics information is saved for the circuit breaker:
• Number of switching cycles:

All tripping, opening, and closing operations are counted.
• Number of closing operations by the automatic reclosing function
• Total of breaking currents

The statistics information can be individually set and reset via the device control. It is also possible to reset all
values via the binary input signal >Reset switch statist..
[lo_statistics information circuit-breaker, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-128 Statistics Information About the Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Routings for Activation of the Circuit Breaker

Figure 5-129 shows the necessary routings for the device:
• 3-pole tripping via the protection
• 3-pole opening via the control
• 3-pole closing by the automatic reclosing or by the control
[lo_ansteu, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-129 Activation of the Circuit Breaker
By routing the Trip/open cmd. signals to 1 or 2 binary outputs, you can carry out 1-, 1.5-, and 2-pole
activations of the circuit breaker. You can find a detailed description of this in 8.2.2.3 Connection Variants of
the Circuit Breaker.
NOTE
i Do not confuse these 1-pole, 1.5-pole, and 2-pole activations of the circuit breaker with 1-pole or 3-pole
tripping of the circuit breaker.
Routing to Evaluate the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position

For certain functions of the device, it is useful to detect the circuit-breaker switch position via its auxiliary
contacts. The following shows a number of examples:
• Circuit-breaker position recognition function block
• Circuit-breaker failure protection function
• Control function block

The operating principle of the auxiliary contacts is described in the individual functions.
Siemens recommends capturing the information Circuit breaker is open in 3 poles and Circuit
breaker is closed in 3 poles via auxiliary contacts. This is the optimal configuration for the control
functionality. For purely protection applications, it is also sufficient to acquire just one of the 2 circuit-breaker
switch positions. When used as a protection and control device, Siemens recommends the following evalua-
tion of the circuit-breaker switch position:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_evaluation2, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-130 Recommended Evaluation of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position
The following diagram shows the recommended routing, in which OH stands for active with voltage.
[sc_polg3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-131 Routing for Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position via 2 Auxiliary Contacts
The device can also function without the analysis from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts, that is, routing of
the auxiliary contacts is not absolutely necessary. However, this is a requirement for control functions.
Parameter: Output Time
• Default setting (_:101) Output time = 0.10 s

The Output time parameter acts on the signals for tripping, opening, and closing of the circuit breaker.
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the control
circuit. If this happens, the device contacts will burn out.
² Set a time that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open or closed) after a control operation.
Parameter: Indicat. of breaking values
• Default setting (_:105) Indicat. of breaking values = always

With the parameter Indicat. of breaking values, you specify whether the measured values are to be
reported if the circuit breaker is opened via the control function.
always With this setting, the measured values are reported if the circuit breaker
is opened either via the control function or via the trip command of a
with trip With this setting, the measured values are only reported if the circuit
breaker is opened via the trip command of a protection function.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measured Values
When a protection function opens the circuit breaker, the following measured values can be stored in the fault
log:
• Break.-current phs A
• Break.-current phs B
• Break.-current phs C
• Break. current 3I0/IN
• Break. voltage phs A
• Break. voltage phs B
• Break. voltage phs C
The measured value Break. current 3I0/IN is the neutral-point current. Dependent on the connection
type of the measuring point I-3ph that is connected with the function group Circuit breaker, the neutral-
point current differs as follows:
Connection Type of the Meas- Neutral-Point Current
uring Point I-3ph
3-phase Calculated zero-sequence current 3I0
3-phase + IN Measured neutral-point current IN
3-phase + IN-separate If the secondary ground current exceeds the linear section of the sensi-
3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep tive measuring input (1.6 Irated) with sensitive current transformers, the
2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep neutral-point current of the measured IN is switched to the calculated 3I0.
2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep
Output Signal: Indication Suppression

Whereas in the case of feeders without an automatic reclosing function every trip command is final due to a
protection function, the use of an automatic reclosing function should only cause the motion detector of the
circuit breaker (fleeting contact on the circuit breaker) to trigger an alarm if tripping of the circuit breaker is
definitive (see next figure for more details). Likewise, a tripping alarm should not be triggered for switching
operations by the control.
For this, the alarm activation circuit should be looped via a suitably routed output contact of the device
(output signal Alarm suppression). In the idle state and when the device is switched off, this contact is
always closed. For this, an output contact with a break contact must be routed. The contact opens whenever
the output signal Alarm suppression becomes active, so that tripping or a switching operation does not
cause an alarm.
You can find more detailed information in the logic in 5.7.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts
and Further Information.
[lo_schalt, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-132 Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.7.7.7 Settings

Circuit break.
_:101 Circuit break.:Output 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 0.10 s
time
_:105 Circuit break.:Indicat. of • with trip always
breaking values
• always

(Type)
Circuit break.
_:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:52 Circuit break.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:58 Circuit break.:Position DPC C
_:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. SPS O
_:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. BCR O
_:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. BCR O
_:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. BCR O
_:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk. BCR O
_:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:317 Circuit break.:Break. current 3I0/IN MV O
_:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O
5.7.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary

Functions
5.7.8.1 Overview
This function block calculates the position of the circuit breaker from the evaluation of the auxiliary contacts
and the current flow.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
This information is needed in the following protection-related additional functions:
• Trip logic (see 5.7.6.1 Function Description)
• Detection of manual closing (see 5.7.9.1 Function Description)
• Process monitor (Standard V/I) 5.9 Process Monitor)

The specified chapters describe the way the protection-related additional functions are processing the infor-
mation of this function block.
The control does not use this information. The control evaluates the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
[lo_zust3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-133 Overview of the Circuit-Breaker Condition Position Function
Based on the link between the information from the auxiliary contacts and the current flow, shown in
Figure 5-133, the circuit breaker can assume the following positions. The following table shows the possible
circuit-breaker conditions:
Circuit-Breaker Condition Description
Open The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as open according to
both criteria.
Closed The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as closed according to
both criteria.
Possibly open, possibly These conditions can occur if the information is incomplete due to the
closed routing of the auxiliary contacts and the condition can no longer be deter-
mined reliably. These uncertain conditions are evaluated differently
by certain functions.
Opening This is a dynamically occurring condition that results when, while a trip
command is active and the auxiliary contact is still closed, the current is
detected to have fallen below the threshold value. The reason for that is
that the current-flow criterion takes effect faster than the auxiliary contact
can open.
5.7.9 Detection Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)
Detection of Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)

The Manual closure function block detects any closure carried out by hand. This information is used in func-
tion, the automatic reclosing (AREC) and Process monitor functions (within protection function groups).
You can find detailed information in the chapters Automatic reclosing function and Process monitor.
The following figure shows the logic for manual closure detection.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_hand_3p, 4, en_US]
Figure 5-134 Logic for Manual Closure Detection
External Manual Closure

An external manual closure is communicated to the device via the input signal >Input. The input signal can
also be connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing coil. For this reason, detection is
suppressed in the event of a close command by the AREC function. Detection via the input signal >Input is
also blocked if the circuit breaker is closed or if a protection trip is active.
Internal Manual Closure

Manual closure is detected in all cases if a close command is transmitted by the internal control function
of the device. This is possible because the control carries out plausibility checks itself and is also subject to
interlocking.
Input Signals: >Input, >Blocking of Manual Closure

In practice, the input signal >Input is connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing
coil (see following figure).
[lo_steuer, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-135 Connection of the Input Signal to the Control Circuit of the Circuit-Breaker Closing Coil
Every closure of the circuit breaker is recorded in the process. Therefore, detection is suppressed in the event
of a close command by the internal AREC function of the device.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If external close commands are possible (actuation of the circuit breaker by other devices), which are not
intended to promptly detect a manual closure (for example, with an external reclosing device), this can be
ensured in 2 ways:
• The input signal is connected in such a way that it is not activated in the event of external close
commands.
• The external close command is connected to the blocking input >Block manual close for manual
closure detection.
Parameter: Action time
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Action time = 0.30 s

In order to ensure independence from manual activation of the input signal, the detection function is
extended for a defined length of time using the parameter Action time.
Siemens recommends an action time of 0.30 s.
Parameter: CB open dropout delay
• Default setting (_:102) CB open dropout delay = 0.00 s

With the CB open dropout delay parameter, you can maintain the effectiveness of internal indication CB
open for the set time. If the input signal >Input becomes active after external delayed manual closure, the
indication (_:300) Detected is output as long as the dropout delay is effective.
5.7.9.3 Settings

Manual close
_:101 Manual close:Action time 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s

(Type)
Manual close
_:501 Manual close:>Block manual close SPS I
_:500 Manual close:>Input SPS I
_:300 Manual close:Detected SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.8 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker [without Current]
5.8.1 Overview
The function group Circuit breaker [without current] is a circuit-breaker function group that does not
measure the primary current of the circuit breaker. For the applications that do not need to monitor the
current information of circuit breakers, the function group Circuit breaker [without current] is a good option.
You can find the function group Circuit breaker [without current] under the device types in the Global
DIGSI 5 Library.
[sc_fg cb without I_7sk_7sj82_7sj85, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-136 Function Group Circuit Breaker [without Current]
The following functions are available in the function group Circuit breaker [without current]:
• Circuit-breaker control
• Circuit-breaker interlocking
• Circuit-breaker test
• Synchronization
• External synchronization
• Trip-circuit supervision
• Closing-circuit supervision
• Voltage measuring-point selection
Besides the user functions, the function group Circuit breaker [without current] contains certain functionali-
ties that are essential for general purposes. These functionalities cannot be loaded or deleted:
• Trip logic
• Mapping the physical circuit breaker
• Circuit-breaker position recognition for protection functions
• Detection of manual closure
• General settings
The following figure shows the structure of the function group Circuit breaker [without current]. The
individual function blocks in the figure are described in the following chapters.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_fg_stru, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-137 Structure of the Function-Group Type Circuit breaker [without current]
Gray: Optionally connected
The function group Circuit breaker [without current] has interfaces with the following items:
• Function groups

The function group receives the required measured values from the measuring points which are connected to
this function group.
If a user function, for example, the function Synchronization, is used in the function group, but the required
measuring point is not linked to the function group, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. This inconsistency
provides an indication of the missing measuring-point connection.
The function group Circuit breaker [without current] has interfaces with the following measuring points:
• 3-phase voltage
The measurands of the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. The voltages are different
due to the different connection types of the voltage transformers, for example, VA, VB, and VC in one
3-phase voltage system, but VAB, VBC, and VCA in another 3-phase voltage system.
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if a function that needs the
measurand of the 3‑phase voltage system is used.
• Sync. voltage1, Sync. voltage2

A 1-phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 1‑phase connection) or
a 3‑phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 3‑phase connection) is
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if the function Synchronization
is used.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Interface with Function Groups

All required data is exchanged between the function group Circuit breaker [without current] and the other
function groups via the interfaces of the function group Circuit breaker [without current]. This data includes,
for example, the circuit-breaker position information in the direction of the other function groups.
If an application template is used, the function groups are connected to each other because this connection
is essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection using the Editor Function-group
connections in DIGSI 5. If the connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Besides the general assignments of other function groups to the circuit-breaker function groups, you can
assign the protection functions to the desired circuit‑breaker function groups for the tripping operation in the
Editor Circuit‑breaker interaction under the corresponding protection function group.
For more information, refer to 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device.

If the function Synchronization is used, the measuring points that represent voltages V1 and V2 of the parts
of the electrical power systems to be synchronized must be connected.
You can find more detailed information in 8.4 Synchronization Function.

With the parameter Rated voltage, you set the primary rated voltage of the protected object. The primary
rated voltage serves as a reference for all voltage-related % values within the function group Circuit breaker
[without current]. This setting applies both for the operational measured values and for the setting values
in %.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, you can only change the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5. If you change the setting value directly on the device, the IEC 61850 configuration of the metered
values can be faulty.
5.8.4 Settings

Ref. for %-values
5.8.5 Trip Logic

The Trip logic function block receives the operate group indication from the protection function groups and
forms the protection trip command that is transmitted to the Circuit-breaker function block.
The Circuit-breaker function block activates the device contact and thus causes the circuit breaker to open
(see 5.7.7 Circuit Breaker). The command output time is also effective here.
The trip logic also decides when the protection trip command is reset (see Figure 5-139).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_ausbef, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-138 Trip Command
Trip-Command Reset
[lo_befe3p_4CB_without_I, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-139 Trip-Command Reset
Once a trip command is issued, it is stored (see Figure 5-138).

You determine the criteria for resetting a trip command that has been issued with the parameter Reset of
trip command. The following setting options are possible:
• with dropout
If the function that initiated tripping resets its operate indication the trip command is reset. This occurs
typically with dropout. Command reset of the trip command takes place regardless of verification of the
circuit-breaker condition.
• with aux.contact
For this criteria, the state of the circuit breaker is also taken into account as a further criterion in addition
to the dropout of the tripping function (operate indication is reset). The state is determined by the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts (with aux.contact).
As long as the circuit breaker is detected unambiguously as closed (fully closed), the trip command will
not be reset with this setting option.
The information about the condition of the circuit breaker and the determination of the various condi-
tions is supplied by the Circuit-breaker position recognition function block. You can find further infor-
mation in chapter 5.7.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions.
Parameter: Reset of trip command
• Default setting (_:5341:103) Reset of trip command = with aux.contact

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

with aux.contact The trip command is reset if the state of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact
indicates that the circuit breaker is open.
This setting assumes that the setting of the auxiliary contact has been
routed via a binary input. For more information, refer to 5.8.6.3 Detection
of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information.
with dropout The trip command is reset if the pickup of the tripping protection function
drops out.
5.8.5.3 Settings

Trip logic
_:103 Trip logic:Reset of trip • with aux.contact with aux.contact
command
• with dropout

(Type)
Trip logic
_:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O
_:52 Trip logic:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Trip logic:Health ENS O
5.8.6 Circuit Breaker
5.8.6.1 Overview
The function block Circuit breaker represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device.
The basic tasks of this function block are:
• Operation of the circuit breaker
• Acquisition of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
• Acquistion of other circuit-breaker information

The function block Circuit breaker provides the following information:
• Number of switching cycles
• Breaking voltage and breaking frequency
5.8.6.2 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker

The circuit breaker is operated in the following situations:
• Tripping of the circuit breaker as a result of a protection trip command
• Opening of the circuit breaker as a result of control operations
• Closing of the circuit breaker as a result of control operations

Tripping is always the result of a protection function. The operate indications of the individual protection
functions are summarized in the Trip logic function block. The trip command that causes the tripping in the
function block Circuit breaker is generated there.
To operate the circuit breaker, the Circuit-breaker function block provides the output signals that must be
routed to the corresponding binary outputs of the device (see Table 5-14).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_CB_tripping-opening-closing, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-140 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table 5-15 Description of the Output Signals
Signal Description Routing Options

Trip/open cmd. This signal executes all tripping and opening opera- • Unlatched
tions.
• Only saved in
The Output time parameter affects the signal. the event of
The signal is pending for the duration of the output protection trip-
time, with the following exceptions: ping (not when
opened)
• Only when switched off by the control:
The signal is reset before expiration of the period
if the auxiliary contacts report that the circuit
breaker is open before expiration of the period.
• Only in the event of protection tripping:
– The signal remains active as long as the
trip command is still active after expiration
of the period (see also 5.7.6.1 Function
Description).
If the trip signal is no longer active and
the auxiliary contacts report that the circuit
breaker is open before expiration of the
period, the signal is canceled before expira-
tion of the period.
– With the routing option Only saved in
the event of tripping, the signal remains
pending until it is acknowledged manually.
This only applies for protection tripping.
Close command This signal executes all closing operations. Normal routing
The Output time parameter affects the signal.
The signal is pending for the duration of the output
time, with the following exception: The signal is
canceled before expiration of the period if the auxil-
iary contacts report that the circuit breaker is closed
before expiration of the period.
Command active This signal is active if one of the following binary Normal routing
outputs is active:
• Trip/open cmd.
• Close command
The binary outputs are active as long as a switching
command is being executed by the control.
5.8.6.3 Detection of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information

To determine the circuit-breaker position, the function block Circuit breaker provides position signals. These
signals are of the Double-point indication (DPC) type. A double-point indication can be routed to 2 binary
inputs so that the open and closed circuit-breaker switch positions can be reliably acquired.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_erfass_4CB_withoout_I, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-141 Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Information

Position DPC Acquisition of the circuit-breaker switch position
The switch position CB 3-pole open and/or the position CB 3-pole closed
can be detected by routing to 1 or 2 binary inputs.
The signals must be routed to the binary input that is with the CB auxiliary contacts. The open and closed
signals do not necessarily have to be routed in parallel. The advantage of parallel routing is that it can be used
to determine an intermediate or disturbed position. If you route only one signal (open or closed), you cannot
determine an intermediate position or a disturbed position.
In the monitoring direction, the position signals generate the following information when the open and
closed positions are detected (see following table). This information is further processed by the Circuit-
breaker position recognition and Control function blocks.
Information Type Description
Open SPS The circuit-breaker switch position is opened.
Closed SPS The circuit-breaker switch position is closed.
Intermediate position SPS The circuit-breaker switch position is in the intermediate position. The
signal open and the signal closed have not been set.
Disturbed position SPS The circuit-breaker switch position is in the disturbed position. The
signal open and the signal closed have been set simultaneously.
Not selected SPS The circuit breaker is not selected for a control operation.
The following table shows the additional input signals:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

>Acquisition SPS This is used to activate acquisition blocking of the circuit-breaker auxil-
blocking iary contacts (see Other Functions 3.9.3 Persistent Commands for a
description of acquisition blocking).
>Reset SPS This is used to reset acquisition blocking and manual update of the
AcqBlk&Subst circuit breaker. If the signal is active, acquisition blocking and manual
update are reset.
>Ready SPS The active signal indicates that the circuit breaker is ready for an Open-
Closed-Open cycle.
The signal remains active as long as the circuit breaker is unable to trip.
The signal is used in the Circuit-breaker test function.
The following table shows one additional output signal:

External health ENS This can be used to indicate the health of the physical circuit breaker.
For this, all failure information of the circuit breaker must be detected
via a binary input. This failure information can set the appropriate
state of the External health signal with a CFC chart (using the
BUILD_ENS block).
The signal has no effect on the health of the function block.
5.8.6.4 Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression

In certain systems, you possibly want to actuate an alarm (for example, a horn) when tripping (circuit-breaker
tripping) occurs. This alarm should not to be issued if the control is used to switch on or off. The alarm is only
to be issued in the event of final tripping.
Depending on how the alarm is generated (for example, triggered by a fleeting contact of the circuit breaker),
the Alarm suppression signal can be used to suppress the alarm.
If one of the following conditions is met, the Alarm suppression signal is generated:
• The definitive protection tripping is not present.
• A close command is issued via the Circuit-breaker test function.
• The integrated control executes a closure or opening action.
• External closing is detected via the Manual close function.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_unterd_4CB_without_I, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-142 Definitive Tripping and Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
5.8.6.5 Tripping and Opening Information

When a trip or opening command is issued, the breaking information shown in the next figure is saved in the
fault log.
[lo_ausloe_4CB_without_I, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-143 Breaking Information
The number of switching cycles is saved for the circuit breaker as the statistics information. All tripping,
opening, and closing operations are counted.
The statistics information can be individually set and reset via the device control. It is also possible to reset all
values via the binary input signal >Reset switch statist..
[lo_statistics information CB_4CB_without_I, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-144 Statistics Information about the Circuit Breaker
Routings for Activation of the Circuit Breaker

Figure 5-145 shows the necessary routings for the device:
• 3-pole tripping via the protection
• 3-pole opening via the control

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_ansteu, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-145 Activation of the Circuit Breaker
By routing the Trip/open cmd. signals to 1 or 2 binary outputs, you can carry out 1-pole, 1.5-pole, and
2-pole activations of the circuit breaker. You can find a detailed description of this in chapter 8.2.2.3 Connec-
tion Variants of the Circuit Breaker.
NOTE
i Do not confuse these 1-pole, 1.5-pole, and 2-pole activations of the circuit breaker with 1-pole or 3-pole
tripping of the circuit breaker.
Routing for Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position

For certain functions of the device, it is useful to detect the circuit-breaker switch position via its auxiliary
contacts. The following shows a number of examples:
• Function block Circuit-breaker position recognition
• Function block Control

The operating principle of the auxiliary contacts is described in the individual functions.
Siemens recommends detecting the Circuit breaker is open in 3 poles and Circuit breaker
is closed in 3 poles information via auxiliary contacts. This is the optimal configuration for the control
functionality. For purely protection applications, it is also sufficient to detect just one of the 2 circuit-breaker
switch positions. When used as a protection and control device, Siemens recommends the following analysis
of the circuit-breaker switch position:
[lo_evaluation2, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-146 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position
The following figure shows the recommended routing, in which OH stands for active with voltage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_polg3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-147 Routing for Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position via 2 Auxiliary Contacts
The device can also function without the analysis from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts, that is, routing of
the auxiliary contacts is not absolutely necessary. However, this is a requirement for the control functions.
Parameter: Output Time
• Default setting (_:101) Output time = 0.10 s

The Output time parameter acts on the signals for tripping, opening, and closing of the circuit breaker.
! CAUTION
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the control
circuit. If this happens, the device contacts will burn out.
² Set a time that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open or closed) after a control operation.
Parameter: Indicat. of breaking values
• Default setting (_:105) Indicat. of breaking values = always

With the parameter Indicat. of breaking values, you specify whether the measured values are to be
reported if the circuit breaker is opened via the control function.
always With this setting, the measured values are reported if the circuit breaker
is opened either via the control function or via the trip command of a
with trip With this setting, the measured values are only reported if the circuit
breaker is opened via the trip command of a protection function.
Measured Values
When a protection function opens the circuit breaker, the following measured values can be stored in the fault
log:
• Break. voltage phs A

• Break. voltage phs B
• Break. voltage phs C
Output Signal: Indication Suppression
For this, the alarm activation circuit should be looped via a suitably routed output contact of the device
(output signal Alarm suppression). In the idle state and when the device is switched off, this contact is
always closed. For this, an output contact with a break contact must be routed. The contact opens whenever
the output signal Alarm suppression becomes active, so that tripping or a switching operation does not
cause an alarm.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
You can find more detailed information in the logic in 5.7.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts
and Further Information.
[lo_schalt, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-148 Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
5.8.6.7 Settings

Circuit break.
_:101 Circuit break.:Output 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 0.10 s
time
_:105 Circuit break.:Indicat. of • with trip always
breaking values
• always

(Type)
Circuit break.
_:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:58 Circuit break.:Position DPC C
_:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. SPS O
_:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
5.8.7 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary

Functions
5.8.7.1 Overview
This function block calculates the position of the circuit breaker from the evaluation of the auxiliary contacts.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
This information is needed in the following protection-related additional functions:
• Trip logic (see 5.8.5.1 Function Description)
• Detection of manual closing (see 5.8.8.1 Function Description)
• Process monitor (Standard V/I) (see 5.9 Process Monitor)

The specified chapters describe the way the protection-related additional functions are processing the infor-
mation of this function block.
The control does not use this information. The control evaluates the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
[lo_zust3p_4CB_without_I, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-149 Overview of the Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition
Based on the link between the information from the auxiliary contacts, shown in Figure 5-133, the circuit
breaker can assume the following positions. The following table shows the possible circuit-breaker positions:
Circuit-Breaker Position Description
Open The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as open according to
both criteria.
Closed The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as closed according to
both criteria.
Possibly open This condition occurs if the information is incomplete due to the routing
of the auxiliary contacts and the condition can no longer be determined reli-
ably. This uncertain condition is evaluated differently by certain functions.
5.8.8 Detection Manual Closure (for Processor Monitor)
Detection of Manual Closure (for Process Monitor)

The Manual closure function block detects any closure carried out by hand. This information is used in the
Process monitor functions (within protection function groups).
You can find detailed information in the chapter Process monitor.
The following figure shows the logic for manual closure detection.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_hand_3p_4CB_without_I, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-150 Logic for Manual Closure Detection
External Manual Closure

An external manual closure is communicated to the device via the input signal >Input. The input signal can
also be connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing coil. Detection via the input
signal >Input is also blocked if the circuit breaker is closed or if a protection trip is active.
Internal Manual Closure

Manual closure is detected in all cases if a close command is transmitted by the internal control function
of the device. This is possible because the control carries out plausibility checks itself and is also subject to
interlocking.
Input Signals: >Input, >Blocking of Manual Closure

In practice, the input signal >Input is connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing
coil (see following figure).
[lo_steuer, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-151 Connection of the Input Signal to the Control Circuit of the Circuit-Breaker Closing Coil
Every closure of the circuit breaker is recorded in the process.

If external close commands are possible (actuation of the circuit breaker by other devices), which are not
intended to promptly detect a manual closure, this can be ensured in 2 ways:
• The input signal is connected in such a way that it is not activated in the event of external close
commands.
• The external close command is connected to the blocking input >Block manual close for manual
closure detection.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Action time = 0.30 s

In order to ensure independence from manual activation of the input signal, the detection function is
extended for a defined length of time using the parameter Action time.
Siemens recommends an action time of 0.30 s.
Parameter: CB open dropout delay
• Default setting (_:102) CB open dropout delay = 0.00 s

With the CB open dropout delay parameter, you can maintain the effectiveness of internal indication CB
open for the set time. If the input signal >Input becomes active after external delayed manual closure, the
indication (_:300) Detected is output as long as the dropout delay is effective.
5.8.8.3 Settings

Manual close
_:101 Manual close:Action 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
time
_:102 Manual close:CB open 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
dropout delay

(Type)
Manual close
_:6541:501 Manual close:>Block manual close SPS I
_:6541:500 Manual close:>Input SPS I
_:6541:300 Manual close:Detected SPS O
_:6541:52 Manual close:Behavior ENS O
_:6541:53 Manual close:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.9 Process Monitor
5.9 Process Monitor
All function groups that have functions with dependencies on the state of the protected object contain a
process monitor. The process monitor detects the current state of the protected object.
The Process monitor function is used in the Standard V/I 3-phase protection function group.
The Process monitor function is provided by the manufacturer with the following function blocks:
• Cold-load pickup detection (optional)
• Current-flow criterion
• Circuit-breaker condition
• Closure detection
[dw_pro3pt, 2, en_US]
You can activate the cold-load pickup detection as needed. All other stages of the process monitor run
permanently in the background and are not displayed in DIGSI.
The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.9 Process Monitor
[lo_pro_3pt, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-153 Logic Diagram of the Overall Function Process Monitor
5.9.3 Current-Flow Criterion
Logic
[lo_proikr, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-154 Logic Diagram of the Current-Flow Criterion Function Block
The phase currents are provided via the interface to the protection function group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.9 Process Monitor
The I open signal of one phase is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
• A phase current falls below the set threshold of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. The
hysteresis stabilizes the signal.
• The corresponding phase current, for example, I A, falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
If a protection function group with integrated process monitor is connected to several Circuit breaker FGs,
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is present in each FG Circuit breaker. The smallest setting
value of the parameter Current thresh. CB open is used.
5.9.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion)
Parameter: Current thresh. CB open
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.100 A

The Current thresh. CB open parameter is used to define the threshold for the leakage current as the
criterion for a deactivated line.
Set the Current thresh. CB open parameter so that the current measured when the feeder is deacti-
vated falls below the value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter with certainty. The hysteresis is
additionally active if the threshold is exceeded.
If parasitic currents, for example, due to induction, are ruled out when the feeder is deactivated, set the
Current thresh. CB open parameter sensitively.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.100 A.
5.9.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object
Logic
[lo_prolsz, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-155 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.9 Process Monitor
[lopromon LS railway prot, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-156 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block
The circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker (CB) function group provides the circuit-breaker
condition by way of the internal signal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example with the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,
then the circuit-breaker switch position of the protected object must be determined with the aid of both
circuit breakers. In this case, the Circuit-breaker position recognition for the protected object function
block connects the individual CB states. The connection provides the internal CB pos. recogn. prot.
obj. signal to the other function blocks of the process monitor and to other functions, for example, Trip in
the event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection method, within the same function group.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Open state:
• All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state internally.
• The >Disconnector open input is active.

If the following 2 conditions are met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Closed state:
• At least one of the connected circuit breakers signals the Closed state internally.
• The >Disconnector open input is not active.
5.9.6 Closure Detection
The closure detection enables the immediate tripping of selected protection functions or protection stages
when switching to short circuit or the reduction of the responsivity. The closure detection determines whether
the protected object is switched on.
Logic
[lo_ein_6md, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-157 Logic Diagram of Closure Detection
For an applied binary input signal (_:6541:300) Detected (from Manual close function block), the
indication (_:4681:300) Closure is active.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.9 Process Monitor

(Type)
Closure detec.
_:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open SPS I
_:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SPS O
5.9.8 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional)
Logic
[lo_pro_cls, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-158 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block
The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deactiva-
tion of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.9 Process Monitor
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min.
CB-open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.
With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup func-
tion. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-load
indication directly.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.
If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.
5.9.9 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection)
NOTE
i The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-load
pickup detection function block.
Parameter: Operating mode
• Default setting (_:101) Operating mode = I open

With the Operating mode parameter, you set the criteria with which the Closure-detection function block
operates.
I open When the Current-flow criterion function block detects a clearing open
condition, the decision is made for pickup. For this setting, make sure
that the Current thresh. CB open parameter is set lower than the
possible load current. If this is not the case, open is detected continuously
and each fault current that exceeds the Current thresh. CB open
parameter is interpreted as closure.
CB and I open Closure is detected if one of the following conditions is met:
• Analysis of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact detects a clearing open

condition in at least one phase.
• The current-flow criterion detects a clearing open condition.
Parameter: Dropout threshold current
• Default setting (_:102) Dropout threshold current = 1.00 A

With the Dropout threshold current parameter, you set the threshold at which the output signal
Cold-load pickup is deactivated when the current in at least one phase falls below this threshold.
Parameter: Dropout delay current criterion
• Default setting (_:103) Dropout delay curr.crit. = 600 s

With the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, you set the time for which the actual value must be
below the Dropout threshold current threshold so that the output signal Cold-load pickup can be
deactivated prematurely.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.9 Process Monitor
Parameter: Dropout delay CB closed
• Default setting (_:104) Dropout delay CB closed = 3600 s

With the Dropout delay CB closed parameter, you set the action time for the dynamic parameter set
switching in the event of cold-load pickup detection.
Parameter: Min. CB open time
• Default setting (_:105) Min. CB-open time = 3600 s

With the Min. CB-open time parameter, you set the time after which the dynamic parameter set is
activated in the event of cold-load pickup when the line is opened.
5.9.10 Settings

Cold-load PU
_:1 Cold-load PU:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Cold-load PU:Operating • I open I open
mode
• CB and I open
_:102 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
threshold current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:103 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 s to 600 s 600 s
delay curr.crit.
_:104 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 s to 21600 s 3600 s
delay CB closed
_:105 Cold-load PU:Min. CB- 0 s to 21600 s 3600 s
open time

(Type)
Cold-load PU
_:81 Cold-load PU:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Cold-load PU:>Block fast dropout SPS I
_:501 Cold-load PU:>Activate cold-load SPS I
_:54 Cold-load PU:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Cold-load PU:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Cold-load PU:Health ENS O
_:300 Cold-load PU:Cold-load pickup SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.10 Function-Group Recording
5.10.1 Overview
The device has a flash memory in which records can be saved. The recording documents operations within the
power system and how devices respond to them. You can read out records from the device and analyze them.
Depending on the recorder, the records are available in different file formats (see the following table).
Table 5-16 File Format Used by Individual Recorders
Interface File Format FR24 SSR25 CR26 TR27

DIGSI 5 SIPROTEC 5 – X X X
DIGSI 5 COMTRADE X – – –
IEC 61850 SIPROTEC 5 – X – –
IEC 61850 COMTRADE X X – –
IEC 61850 PQDIF – – X X
Browser-based user interface SIPROTEC 5 – X – –
Browser-based user interface COMTRADE X X – –
Browser-based user interface PQDIF – – X X
T103 COMTRADE X – – –
T104 COMTRADE X – – –
DNP COMTRADE X – – –
The Recording function group consists of the following functionalities:
• General function block
• Fault recorder function
• Slow-scan recorder function
• Continuous recorder function
• Trend recorder function

The following figure shows the structure of the Recording function group. The function blocks are described
in the following chapters.
24 FR: Protection fault recorder

25 SSR: Slow-scan recorder
26 CR: Continuous recorder
27 TR: Trend recorder

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_fg_recorder, 4, en_US]
Figure 5-159 Structure of the Recording Function Group
NOTE
i If you want to use one of the following functions, the device must be equipped with the CP300, CP150, or
CP050 CPU printed circuit board assembly:
• Slow-scan recorder
• Continuous recorder
• Trend recorder
The function group Protection Recording is a central device function. The recording criterion, measured-
value channels, and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application
templates. You can individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5 after enabling Recorder Routing functions.
For more information on the Fault recorder function, refer to Fault Recording, starting at 3.5.1 Overview of
Functions .
For more information on the function group Recording, refer to the SIPROTEC 5 Protection Recording manual
(C53000-H5040-C089).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.11 Bay Proxy
5.11 Bay Proxy
5.11.1 Overview
In a substation, the Bay represents a feeder, a line, a transformer, or a coupler. The Bay comprises func-
tion groups such as Voltage/current 3-phase, Circuit breaker, and Disconnector. For the complete list of
supported function groups, refer to 5.11.2 Structure of the Bay.
SIPROTEC 5 can protect multiple feeders in one device. To have a clear structure and additional configuration
and testing benefits, you can group the functions groups inside Bays.
NOTE
i This functionality is available for SIPROTEC 5 modular devices.
[sc_SL_doubleBB_AOMBay, 1, --_--]
Figure 5-160 Example of Bays
NOTE
i The single-line diagram is not mandatory for the Bay.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.11 Bay Proxy
5.11.2 Structure of the Bay
You can find the Bay under the device in the Global DIGSI 5 Library.
[sc_AOMBay, 3, en_US]
You can instantiate the following function groups under the Bay:
• FG Circuit breaker
– Circuit breaker
– Circuit breaker [control]
– Circuit breaker [status only]
• FG Voltage/current 1-phase
• FG Voltage/current 3-phase
• FG Voltage 3-phase
• FG Voltage controller
– Voltage control grid coupling transformer
– Voltage control three-winding transformer
– Voltage control two-winding transformer
• Switching device
– Disconnector
– Disconnector [status only]
– Tap changer
• User-defined function group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.11 Bay Proxy
[dw_structure AOM Bay Universal, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-161 Structure of the Bay
The Bay has interfaces to:
• Function group Analog units
• Function group Circuit breaker
• Protection communication
Interfaces with Measuring Points and Function Group Analog Units

The function groups in the Bay receive the required measured values via the interfaces with the measuring
points and via the interfaces with the function group Analog units.
For details, refer to the descriptions of the specific function-group types.
Interface with the Function Group Circuit Breaker

All required data is exchanged between the function groups in the Bay and the function group Circuit breaker
out of Bays via the interface of this function group Circuit breaker.
For details, refer to the descriptions of the specific function-group types.
Interface with Protection Communication

the interface with the Protection communication. These data are for example:
• Binary signals
• Measured values
• Complex data
For more details, see 3.6 Protection Communication.
5.11.3 Application and Setting Notes (Mode Behavior of Bay)
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:1) Mode = on

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.11 Bay Proxy
A Bay, including all functions under the Bay, can be switched to different operating modes. With the param-
eter Mode, you define whether you want a Bay to run (on) or not (off). In addition, you can temporarily block
a Bay or switch it into test mode for commissioning (parameter Mode = test).
Additionally, the state of the Bay can be influenced using the controllable Mod in the IEC 61850 representa-
tion. The Mode (controllable) in the DIGSI 5 Information routing supports the states On, Off, Test,
Relay blocked, and Test/Relay blk.
[sc_Mode(controllable), 2, en_US]
Figure 5-162 Controllable Mod and parameter Mode in the IEC 61850 structure
The overall device state can have the values On, Relay blocked, Test, and Test/Relay blk..
The states of the Bay resulting from the parameter Mode, the controllable Mod, and the overall device state
are shown in the following table. The resulting state of the Bay results from the combination of all sources
(parameter Mode, controllable Mod, and overall device state). As a simplification, the table only shows the
combination of 2 sources.
Table 5-17 Resulting State of the Bay
Inputs State of the Bay

Device Bay
On On On
Relay blocked Relay blocked
Test Test28
Test/Relay blk. Test/Relay blk.
Off Off
Relay blocked On Relay blocked
Relay blocked Relay blocked
Test Test/Relay blk.
Off Off
Test On Test28
Relay blocked Test/Relay blk.
Test Test28
Off Off
28 With the parameter (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test, you can set whether the relay outputs are to be activated by functions in the
Test state. If this parameter is deactivated (default setting), the Test state of a function is changed to Test/Relay blk..

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.11 Bay Proxy
Inputs State of the Bay

Device Bay
Test/Relay blk. On Test/Relay blk.
Relay blocked Test/Relay blk.
Test Test/Relay blk.
Off Off
For more information about function state control, refer to 2.3 Function Control.
5.11.4 Application and Setting Notes (Bay-Related Switching Authority)
Parameter: Bay-related sw.auth.
• Default setting (_:151) Bay-related sw.auth. = false

When activating the parameter Bay-related sw.auth., an individual switching authority as well as an
individual switching mode for this bay are configured. They are valid for all switching devices in the bay
provided no own Swi.dev. related sw.auth., is activated. Additional signals are displayed in the
information routing (see also 8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Parameter: Specific sw. authorities
• Default setting (_:152) Specific sw. authorities = false

You can enable additional options for the switching authority check. For more information about these
options, see Specific Switching Authority, Page 1428.
5.11.5 Application and Setting Notes (Displays and Connections for Bay)
Displays for the Bay on the On-Site Operation Panel

If Bays are instantiated, the displays contain the Bay menu items on the on-site operation panel, as shown in
the following example screenshots.
• Measurements • Control

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.11 Bay Proxy
• Settings • Circuit breaker test
• Device functions
→ →
• Reset functions
→ →

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.11 Bay Proxy
Fault Display for the Bay

For the Bay, the configuration of the fault display with DIGSI 5 and the acknowledgment of the fault display
on the on-site operation panel are as follows:
[sc_fault_display_configure_AOMBay, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-163 Configuration of the Fault Display for the Bay with DIGSI 5
[sc_fault_display_ack_AOMBay, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-164 Fault Display for the Bay on the On-Site Operation Panel
For more information about fault display, refer to 3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation
Panel .
Connecting Measuring Points to Function Groups in a Bay

Under Function-group connections > Connect measuring points to function group, you can connect
measuring points to the function groups in a Bay, as shown in the following figure.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.11 Bay Proxy
[Connecting measuring points to function groups in a bay, 2, en_US]
Connecting Function Groups in a Bay to Circuit Breakers

Under Function-group connections > Connect function group to circuit-breaker groups, you can connect
protection function groups in a Bay to function groups Circuit breaker in the Bay or out of Bays, as shown in
the following figure.
[Connecting function groups in a bay to circuit breakers, 2, en_US]
Besides the general allocation of the protection function groups to the function groups Circuit breaker, you
can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using the
Circuit-breaker interaction Editor in the protection function groups, as shown in the following figure.
[Circuit-breaker interaction, 2, en_US]
In the preceding figure, the routable function groups Circuit breaker are those connected under Function-
group connections > Connect function group to circuit-breaker groups.
Connecting Function Groups in the Same Bay

Under Function-group connections > Connect protection-function group to protection-function group,
you can connect function groups to other function groups in the same Bay, as shown in the following figure.
You cannot connect a function group in a Bay to a function group out of the Bay.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.11 Bay Proxy
[Connecting function groups in the same bay, 2, en_US]
5.11.6 Settings

General
_:1 General:Mode • off on
• on
• test
Switching authority
_:151 General:Bay-related • 0 false
sw.auth.
• 1
_:152 General:Specific sw. • 0 false
authorities
• 1
_:153 General:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for
• station/remote
• remote
_:154 General:Num. of specific 2 to 5 2
sw.auth.
1
2
3
4
5
_:170 General:Multiple specific • 0 false
sw.auth.
• 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
5.11 Bay Proxy

(Type)
General
_:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:53 General:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6 Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data 457

6.2 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions 483
6.3 Overcurrent Protection, Phases 484
6.4 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases 523
6.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground 543
6.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases 575
6.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground 608
6.8 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection 657
6.9 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping 669
6.10 Arc Protection 676
6.11 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault 696
6.12 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase 699
6.13 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection 726
6.14 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection 736
6.15 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection 745
6.16 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection 757
6.17 Undercurrent Protection 839
6.18 Negative-Sequence Protection 845
6.19 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection 855
6.20 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced 865
6.21 Thermal Overload Protection, User-Defined Characteristic Curve 880
6.22 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase 892
6.23 Unbalanced-Load Protection 903
6.24 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 910
6.25 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage 923
6.26 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 936
6.27 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage 940
6.28 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage 947
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-Sequence Voltage 953
6.30 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 960
6.31 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 978
6.32 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage 985
6.33 Rate-of-Voltage-Change Protection 992
6.34 Overfrequency Protection 999

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Underfrequency Protection 1005

6.36 Underfrequency Load Shedding 1011
6.37 Rate of Frequency Change Protection 1023
6.38 Vector-Jump Protection 1029
6.39 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase 1037
6.40 Reverse-Power Protection 1047
6.41 Overexcitation Protection 1055
6.42 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection 1065
6.43 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 1074
6.44 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection 1093
6.45 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection 1102
6.46 External Trip Initiation 3-Pole 1119
6.47 External Trip Initiation with Current-Flow Criterion 3-Pole 1122
6.48 Automatic Reclosing Function 1126
6.49 Fault Locator 1177
6.50 Fault Locator Plus 1190
6.51 Temperature Supervision 1203
6.52 Phase-Sequence Switchover 1213
6.53 Current-Jump Detection 1219
6.54 Voltage-Jump Detection 1222
6.55 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection 1226
6.56 Pole Discrepancy Protection 1229
6.57 Protection and Automation Functions (CEI 0-16 Standard) 1233
6.58 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage (CEI 0-16 Standard) 1234
6.59 Frequency Protection (CEI 0-16 Standard) 1241
6.60 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage (CEI 0-16 Standard) 1258
6.61 PI Trip Logic (CEI 0-16 Standard) in FG Circuit Breaker 1264

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.1 Power-System Data
6.1.1 Overview
The Power-system data are provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device and cannot be deleted. You can find them
in DIGSI under Settings → Power-system data.
6.1.2 Structure of the Power-System Data
The Power-system data contain the block General and the Measuring points of the device. The following
figure shows the structure of the Power-system data:
[dw_system data, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-1 Structure of the Power-System Data
In order to adjust its functions to the application, the device requires some data about the power system. The
necessary settings can be found in the Power-system data under General as well as in the Measuring points.
NOTE
i You can find information on the supervision-function parameters in 9.3 Supervision of the Secondary
System.
Type and scope of the required measuring points depend on the application. Possible measuring points are:
• Voltage 3-phase (measuring point V 3-ph)
• Current 3-phase (measuring point I 3-ph)
• Voltage 1-phase (measuring point V 1-ph)
• Current 1-phase (measuring point I 1-ph)

The measuring points have interfaces to the function groups, which require voltage and/or current measured
values of the power system.
6.1.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings
Parameter: Phase sequence
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Phase sequence= ABC

The parameter Phase sequence is used to set the phase sequence (ABC) or (ACB). The setting value applies
to the entire SIPROTEC 5 device.
Use the General function to set the settings in the power-system data.
You can find detailed information about phase-rotation reversal in chapter 6.52.1 Overview of Functions.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3‑Phase (I-3ph)
The supervision function settings are also located in the current measuring point. You can find the description
of these parameters in 9 Supervision Functions.
Parameter: CT connection
• Default setting (_:8881:115) CT connection = 3-phase + IN-separate

The parameter CT connection shows the connection type of the current transformer for the 3‑phase
current measuring point. You can find the parameter in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device
→ Settings → Power-system data → Measuring point I-3ph. You cannot change the connection type of the
current transformer in the Power-system data.
You can change the connection type of the current transformer only under measuring point routing in DIGSI 5.
Under Name of the device → Measuring point routing → Current measuring points, select the desired
connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
• 3-phase, 2 primary CT
• 3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep
• 2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep
• 2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep
NOTE
i The following connection types are not permitted for the Capacitor bank function group:
Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
current measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for current transformers in A.7 Connec-
tion Examples for Current Transformers. The connection examples provide assistance when selecting the type
of connection.
Parameter: CT connection = 2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep

The ground current is measured both by way of an input of normal sensitivity (I2) and a sensitive input (I4)
with the connection type 2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep. The phase current IB is calculated by way of the
ground current IN2 measured with normal sensitivity.
The calculated phase current IB is not shown in SIGRA. If you wish to display the current IB in SIGRA, you must
define the equation for calculating IB in SIGRA using the menu item Insert → Insert calculated signal.
Calculate IB in SIGRA using one of these 2 equations:
• IB = - IA - IC - IN2 or
• IB = - IC - IA - IN2
The currents in the equations are primary values.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i • This connection type is possible only in the function groups Voltage/current 3-phase and Circuit
breaker.
• This connection type is possible only with current terminals of the type Current, 3x protec-
tion, 1x sensitive and the following routing in the Measuring point I-3-ph:
[sc_ENEL_MP_route, 1, en_US]
As long as IN2 and IN are connected to the same core balance current transformer, the parameters
Rated primary current and Rated secondary current from CT IN are also valid for the CT
IN2. You can find the parameter in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings
→ Power-system data → Measuring point I-3-phase. You can find more information on this in
6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3‑Phase (I-3ph).
IN is used as the measured ground current for ground-fault protection functions.
Parameter: Tracking
• Default setting (_:8881:127) Tracking = active

With the parameter Tracking, you specify whether you would like to work with the sampling-frequency
tracking function.
active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point
will be included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only
the 3-phase measuring points shall be considered.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Note: If the parameter is Tracking = active , the determined sampling
frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling
rates.
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points
into Frequency tracking groups in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every
frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You can
find more information on this in 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and
Frequency Tracking Groups.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for deter-
mining the sampling frequency, select the setting value inactive.
Parameter: Measuring-point ID
• Default setting (_:8881:130) Measuring-point ID = 1

The parameter Measuring-point ID is write-protected and displays the ID of the measuring point. If you
are using several measuring points, the Measuring-point ID is continuously incremented.
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups
in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You
can find more information on this in 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Rated primary current
• Default setting (_:8881:101) Rated primary current = 1000 A

With the parameter Rated primary current, you set the active rated primary current of the current
transformer.
Parameter: Rated secondary current
• Default setting (_:8881:102) Rated secondary current = 1 A

With the parameter Rated secondary current, you set the active rated secondary current of the current
transformer.
Parameter: Current range
• Default setting 7SJ82 (_:8881:117) Current range = 50 x IR
• Default setting 7SJ85 (_:8881:117) Current range = 100 x IR

The parameter Current range allows you to set the dynamic range for the current input. Retain the default
setting for power-system protection applications. The current measuring range 1.6 x IR applies for the
connection type 3-phase + IN-separate and the sensitive current input or for the measuring inputs.
Parameter: Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj
• Default setting (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj = yes

The Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter is used to set the direction of the neutral point of the
current transformer (see following figure). Often, the neutral point of the current transformer is determined
by the direction of the protected object (for example, in the direction of the line, cable, transformer). For this
reason, the default setting of the parameter was defined as yes.
When switching the parameter, the direction of the phase currents and of the ground current IN or IN-separate
is rotated device-internally.
[dw_polstromwdl, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-2 Polarity of Current Transformers
Parameter: Inverted phases
• Default setting (_:8881:114) Inverted phases = none

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The parameter Inverted phases is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-storage hydro-
power plants (refer to 6.52 Phase-Sequence Switchover). This default setting may be retained for power-
system protection applications.
Parameter: Magnitude correction
• Default setting (_:3841:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000

When using the parameter Magnitude correction, you set the magnitude (magnitude correction) for the
current input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selectively.
The magnitude correction may be required for high-precision measurements. Use a comparison measurement
to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a primary
correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
Note Regarding Routable Data

You can find indications for the current rotating field and the information pertaining to the sampling-
frequency tracking in Information routing under Power system → General in DIGSI 5. The indication
Freq.out of oper.range means that the frequency operating range has been exceeded. Either the
frequency is out of range (10 Hz to 90 Hz) or the input signals are too small for a manual update. If this state
occurs, the system switches the update frequency to a sampling rate that corresponds to the rated frequency.
Furthermore, 2 frequency measured values are available, f sys and f track:
• f sys:
The measured value f sys shows the current frequency of the plant. It is calculated with the angle
difference algorithm. If no voltage or current is present, the default value is 0 Hz.
• f track:
The measured value f track shows the set sampling frequency. It is calculated from f sys and
the angle. If the voltage frequency or current frequency change, f track adjusts automatically. If no
voltage or current is present, the default value is 50 Hz.
Siemens recommends routing both measured values as fault-recording channel.
6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 1‑Phase (I-1ph)
If you insert a Measuring point I 1-ph in DIGSI 5, you must route a current to the measuring point under
Name of the device → Measuring-point routing → Current measuring points.
You can only route the current Ix.
Parameter: Rated primary current
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated primary current = 1000 A

With the parameter Rated primary current, you set the active rated primary current of the current
transformer.
Parameter: Rated secondary current
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated secondary current = 1 A

With the parameter Rated secondary current, you set the active rated secondary current of the current
transformer.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Current range
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Current range = 50 x IR

The parameter Current range allows you to set the dynamic range for the current input.
Parameter: Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj.
• Default setting (_:2311:116) Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj. = yes

With the parameter Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj., you define the direction of the current. If you set
the parameter Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj. = yes, the direction of the current to the protected
object is defined as forward.
Parameter: Tracking

With the parameter Tracking, you specify whether you would like to work with the sampling-frequency
tracking function.
active If the parameter Tracking is active has been set, the measuring point
will be included when determining the sampling frequency.
Note: If the parameter Tracking is active, the determined sampling
rates.
into Frequency tracking groups in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every
frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You can
find more information on this in 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and

in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You
can find more information on this in 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups.

With the parameter Magnitude correction, you set the amplitude (amplitude correction) for the current
input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selectively. The
magnitude correction can be required for high-precision measurements. Use a comparison measurement
NOTE
circuit.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph)
Settings for the supervision functions are also located in the voltage measuring point. You can find the
description of these settings in Supervision functions.
Parameter: Rated primary voltage
• Default setting (_:8911:101) Rated primary voltage = 400.000 kV

With the parameter Rated primary voltage, you set the primary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
Parameter: Rated secondary voltage
• Default setting (_:8911:102) Rated secondary voltage = 100 V

With the parameter Rated secondary voltage, you set the secondary rated voltage of the voltage
transformer.
Parameter: Matching ratio Vph / VN
• Default setting (_:8911:103) Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73

With the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, you set the deviation between the calculated zero-
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measured directly via a measuring input. The different transmission
ratio of the voltage transformers is the cause for the deviation (refer to Figure 6-3).
The Matching ratio Vph / VN is equal to the ratio 3V0 sec/VN sec
with
V0 sec Calculated zero-sequence voltage
VN sec Measured residual voltage
The zero-sequence voltage is calculated as phase-to-ground voltages. The residual voltage is measured on the
broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer. For 1-phase voltage transformers, the residual voltage is
measured in the generator or the transformer neutral point.
NOTE
i The measurement residual voltage VN sec is converted to a zero-sequence voltage in the device as follows:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
EXAMPLE 1:
[dw_bsp1uwdl_anpassfaktor, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-3 3-Phase Voltage Transformer: Connection = 3 Phase-to-Ground Voltage + VN
When the type of connection for the voltage transformer is 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN (parameter: VT
connection) and the voltage input V4 is connected to the broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer
(da/dn), the Matching ratio Vph / VN is as follows:
When changing the neutral point according to Figure 6-3, this results in the following values:
• The calculated secondary zero-sequence voltage V0 sec is equal to the secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
Expressed as secondary transformer rated voltage, then Vrated sec/√3.
• The measured residual voltage on the broken-delta winding is the sum of the voltage drops on the
3 sides. Expressed with the side ratio, the result is VN, sec = 3 Vrated sec /3.
Calculate the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN as follows:
[fo_example_1, 2, en_US]
Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73.
In example 1 Vrated sec, the phase-to-ground voltage and the secondary voltage on the broken-delta winding
were identical. If these voltages are different, use the actual numerical values in the calculation.
EXAMPLE 2:
Phase-to-ground voltage Vrated sec = 100 V

Broken-delta winding (for Vrated sec = 500 V
example, grounding trans- The voltage input of the device is designed for a continuous operation,
former in generator protection) using 230 V max. Therefore, the voltage on the broken-delta winding (500
V) is reduced to a 5:2 ratio, using an ohmic divider. In order to calculate the
matching factor, the secondary voltage of 200 V will be applied.
Calculate the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN as follows:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[fo_example_2, 1, en_US]
Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 0.866.

Interpretation of the result:
The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltage is 57.73 V (= 100V/√3). The meas-
ured residual voltage is 200 V. The calculated adaptation factor is 0.866. The measured residual voltage is
converted to a zero-sequence voltage inside the device:
[fo_conversion2, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i During the ground-fault test, the set adaptation factor can be checked by comparing the operational
measured values. The operational measured values contain the calculated zero-sequence voltage V0 sec and
the measured residual voltage VN sec. Proceed with the compilation as follows:
The parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN is significant for the following functions:
• Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• Measured-value supervision
• Scaling of the faulty and measured values
Parameter: VT connection
• Default setting (_:8911:104) VT connection = 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN

The parameter VT connection shows the connection type of the voltage transformer for the 3-phase
voltage measuring point. You can find the parameter in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →
Settings → Power-system data → Measuring point V 3-phase. You cannot change the connection type of
the voltage transformer in the power-system data.
You can change the connection type of the voltage transformer only under measuring point routing in
DIGSI 5. Under Name of the device → Measuring-point routing → Voltage measuring points, select the
desired connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
• 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-ph voltages
Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
voltage measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for voltage transformers in A.9 Connec-
tion Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non-Modular Devices and A.8 Connection Examples of Voltage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Transformers for Modular Devices. The connection examples provide assistance when selecting the type of
connection.
• Default setting (_:8911:106) Inverted phases = none

The parameter Inverted phases is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-storage hydro-
power plants (refer to 6.52 Phase-Sequence Switchover). This default setting can be retained for power-
system protection applications.
Parameter: Tracking

The parameter Tracking is used to determine whether the measuring channels of this measuring point shall
be used to determine the sampling frequency.
The sampling frequency of the device is adjusted to the power frequency. The device selects a measuring
channel, through which the sampling frequency is determined. Preferably, this should be a voltage measuring
channel. This validity of the signal is monitored (minimum level, frequency range). If these values are invalid,
the device switches to another channel (etc.). Once switched to a current channel, the system automatically
switches back to this channel if a voltage channel is valid again.
active If you set the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point will be
included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only the
3-phase measuring points shall be considered.
Note: If the parameter Tracking = active, the determined sampling
rates.
into Frequency tracking groups in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case,
every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. For
more information, refer to 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency
Tracking Groups.

in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. For
more information, refer to 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups.

With the parameter Magnitude correction, you adjust the magnitude (magnitude correction) for the
voltage input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selectively.
The magnitude correction may be required for high-precision measurements. Use a comparison measurement

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i The parameter Magnitude correction has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
6.1.7 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 1‑Phase (V-1ph)
If you insert a Measuring point V 1-ph in DIGSI 5, you must route a voltage to the measuring point under
Name of the device → Measuring point routing → Voltage measuring points.
You can route the following voltages:
• V A
• V B
• V C
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• Vx
• VN broken-delta29
• VN30
Parameter: Rated primary voltage
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated primary voltage = 400.000 kV

The Rated primary voltage parameter is used to set the primary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
Parameter: Rated secondary voltage
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated secondary voltage = 100 V

The Rated secondary voltage parameter is used to set the secondary rated voltage of the voltage
transformer.
Parameter: Matching ratio Vph / VN
• Default setting (_:2311:108) Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73

With the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, you set the deviation between the calculated zero-
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measured directly via a measuring input.
For more detailed information, refer to 6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage
3‑Phase (V-3ph).
NOTE
i The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is only visible in the Measuring point V-1ph if the voltage
VN broken-delta has been routed.
29 If you route this voltage, the protection functions operate with the voltage measured directly at the broken-delta winding of the
voltage transformer.
30 If you route this voltage, the protection functions operate with the neutral-point displacement voltage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Tracking
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Tracking = inactive

The Tracking parameter is used to determine whether the measuring channels of this measuring point shall
be used to determine the sampling frequency.
The sampling frequency of the device is adjusted to the power frequency. The device selects a measuring
channel, through which the sampling frequency is determined. Preferably, this should be a voltage metering
channel. The validity of the signal is monitored (minimum level, frequency range). If these values are invalid,
the device switches to another channel (etc.). Once switched to a current channel, the system automatically
switches back to the voltage channel if a voltage channel is valid again.
active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point
will be included when determining the sampling frequency.
Note: If the parameter is Tracking = active, the determined sampling
rates.
Starting from platform version V07.80, you can merge measuring points
into Frequency tracking groups in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case,
every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. For
more detailed information, refer to 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and

Starting from platform version V07.80, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups in
SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. For
more detailed information, refer to 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups.

When using the Magnitude correction parameter, you adjust the magnitude (magnitude correction)
for the voltage input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-
selectively. The magnitude correction may be required for high-precision measurements. Use a comparison
measurement to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If
a primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
circuit.
6.1.8 Disconnection of Measuring Points
6.1.8.1 Overview
Maintenance work or specific operating and switching states of the power system can require disconnec-
tion of measuring point. Therefore, it is sometimes necessary to take individual measuring points out of
processing, for example, to prevent an unwanted tripping of the Differential protection. With the Disconnec-

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
tion of measuring points functionality, you can disconnect the connection of the Measuring point I-3ph to a
If the measuring point has been disconnected, you can carry out any work without influencing the work
of the protection functions that are assigned to the measuring point. Once the measuring point has been
disconnected, the Differential protection, for example, does not take the measured values of this measuring
point into account anymore for calculating the differential current.
An exception applies for the following protection functions of the FG Line:
• Distance Protection with Classic Method
• Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
• Power-Swing Blocking
• Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems (67N)
• Measuring-voltage failure detection
NOTE
i If one of the current measuring points is disconnected, the mentioned protection functions of the FG Line
switch to the Alarm state and are not active.
There is another exception for the disconnection of measuring points for the FG Circuit breaker: If the FG
Circuit breaker is connected to a disconnected measuring point, the functional measured values are indicated
as usual and used by the functions in the FG Circuit breaker. That is, the disconnection does not set the
functional measured values to 0. If a circuit-breaker failure detection is instantiated in the FG Circuit breaker,
Siemens recommends blocking the function for current tests.
6.1.8.2 Description
Logic
[lo_measuring point isolation, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-4 Logic of the Disconnection of Measuring Point
You can find the signals for the Disconnection of measuring points in the Information routing matrix in
DIGSI under Settings → Power system→ Meas.point I-3ph.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The following signals are available for activating the Measuring point I-3ph:
• The binary inputs (_:8881:500) >Disconnection on and (_:8881:501) >Disconnection

off
• The controllable (_:8881:308) Disconnection
You can control whether the Measuring point I-3ph may only be disconnected if the measured currents fall
below the set threshold value. The measuring point can also be disconnected without checking the threshold
value. If you want to disconnect the measuring point without threshold-value check, consider that no currents
are flowing anymore in the primary plant.
Disconnection messages are also available after a restart of the device. The device stores the disconnection
efficacy in NVRAM31 The last information on disconnection remains available, even if the auxiliary voltage
fails. When the auxiliary voltage returns, the device compares the stored state with that of the binary inputs.
Parameter: Current check
• Default setting (_:8881:173) Current check = active

With the Current check parameter, you can set whether you want to compare the RMS values of the phase
currents IA, IB, IC and of the measured zero-sequence current IN with a threshold value.
active The RMS values of the phase currents IA, IB, IC and of the measured zero-
sequence current IN are compared to the setting value of the parameter I<
threshold.
The Measuring point I-3ph can only be activated if the current measured
values fall below the threshold value.
inactive The RMS values of the phase currents IA, IB, IC and of the measured zero-
sequence current IN are not compared to the setting value of the parameter
I< threshold.
Parameter: I< threshold
• Default setting (_:8881:112) I< threshold = 0.100 A

With the I< threshold parameter, you set the threshold for disconnection of a measuring point. If the
current measured values fall below the threshold value, the Measuring point I-3ph can be activated.
Set the I< threshold parameter so that the measured current will certainly fall below the parameterized
value, for example, if the circuit-breaker pole is open. If parasitic currents, for example, due to induction,
are not possible with the line/feeder deactivated, you can make a secondary setting of the value with a high
degree of sensitivity, to 0.050 A for example. If no special requirements exist, Siemens recommends retaining
the setting value of 0.100 A for secondary purposes.
31 NVRAM = Non-Volatile Random Access Memory; RAM, which does not lose the stored data, even when there is no power.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
EXAMPLE
Temporary Disconnection of a Connection of a Current Measuring Point to the Protection Function

Group 3-ph Voltage/Current
[dw_similar-application_7SJ8_with_2-MU, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-5 Possible Disconnection of Measuring Point for the Feeder Protection
(1) Temporary disconnection of the connection of the Measuring point I-3ph 1 to the FG 3-ph
voltage/current
6.1.8.4 Settings

MP disconnection
_:8881:173 CT 3-phase:Current • inactive active
check
• active
_:8881:112 CT 3-phase:I< threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A

(Type)
General
_:8881:500 CT 3-phase:>Disconnection on SPS I
_:8881:501 CT 3-phase:>Disconnection off SPS I
_:8881:308 CT 3-phase:Disconnection SPC C
_:8881:322 CT 3-phase:Disconnection via BI SPS O
_:8881:324 CT 3-phase:Disconnect. via control SPS O
_:8881:319 CT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8881:320 CT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8881:321 CT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.1.9 Settings
General

General
_:2311:101 General:Phase sequence • ABC ABC
• ACB
Measuring Point I-3ph

General
_:8881:115 CT 3-phase:CT connec- • not assigned 3-phase + IN
tion
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
_:8881:127 CT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:8881:130 CT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID
CT phases
_:8881:101 CT 3-phase:Rated 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
primary current
_:8881:102 CT 3-phase:Rated secon- • 1A 1A
dary current
• 5A
_:8881:117 CT 3-phase:Current • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
range
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
_:8881:118 CT 3-phase:Internal CT • CT protection CT protection
type
• CT measurement
• CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
_:8881:116 CT 3-phase:Neutr.point • no yes
in dir.of ref.obj
• yes
_:8881:114 CT 3-phase:Inverted • none none
phases
• AC
• BC
• AB
_:8881:107 CT 3-phase:CT error 1.00 to 10.00 1.00
changeover
_:8881:108 CT 3-phase:CT error A 0.5 % to 50.0 % 5.0 %
_:8881:109 CT 3-phase:CT error B 0.5 % to 50.0 % 15.0 %

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

CT IN2
range
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
type
• CT measurement
• CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
CT IN
_:8881:104 CT 3-phase:Rated 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
primary current
_:8881:105 CT 3-phase:Rated secon- • 1A 1A
dary current
• 5A
range
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
type
• CT measurement
• CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
CT 1
_:3841:103 CT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
• IN2
CT 2
tion
_:3842:117 CT 2:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
• IN2
CT 3
tion

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:3843:117 CT 3:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
• IN2
CT 4
tion
_:3844:117 CT 4:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
• IN2
Brk.wire det.
_:5581:1 Brk.wire det.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
Supv. balan. I
_:2491:1 Supv. balan. I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2491:101 Supv. balan. I:Release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:2491:102 Supv. balan. I:Threshold 0.10 to 0.95 0.50
min/max
_:2491:6 Supv. balan. I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:2551:1 Supv. ph.seq.I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2551:6 Supv. ph.seq.I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. sum I
_:2431:1 Supv. sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:2431:102 Supv. sum I:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2431:101 Supv. sum I:Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 0.10
_:2431:6 Supv. sum I:Delay failure 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
indication
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:1 Supv.ADC sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test

General
_:2311:101 General:Rated primary 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
current
_:2311:102 General:Rated secondary • 1A 1A
current
• 5A
_:2311:103 General:Current range • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
_:2311:104 General:Internal CT type • CT protection CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
_:2311:116 General:Term. 1,3,5,7 in • no yes
dir. of obj.
• yes
_:2311:105 General:Tracking • inactive inactive
• active
_:2311:130 General:Measuring-point 0 to 100 0
ID
CT 1
tion
_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measuring Point V-3ph

General
_:8911:101 VT 3-phase:Rated 0.100 kV to 1200.000 kV 400.000 kV
primary voltage
_:8911:102 VT 3-phase:Rated secon- 80 V to 230 V 100 V
dary voltage
_:8911:103 VT 3-phase:Matching 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
ratio Vph / VN
_:8911:104 VT 3-phase:VT connec- • not assigned 3 ph-to-gnd
tion volt. + VN
_:8911:106 VT 3-phase:Inverted • none none
phases
• AC
• BC
• AB
_:8911:111 VT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:8911:130 VT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID
VT 1
_:3811:103 VT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 2
tion

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:3812:108 VT 2:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 3
tion
_:3813:108 VT 3:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 4
tion
_:3814:108 VT 4:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2521:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:2521:102 Supv. balan. V:Threshold 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
min/max
_:2521:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2581:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. sum V
_:2461:1 Supv. sum V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2461:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 25.000 V
_:2461:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time

General
_:2311:101 General:Rated primary 0.100 kV to 1200.000 kV 400.000 kV
voltage
_:2311:102 General:Rated secondary 80 V to 340 V 100 V
voltage
_:2311:108 General:Matching ratio 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
Vph / VN
_:2311:103 General:Tracking • inactive inactive
• active
_:2311:130 General:Measuring-point 0 to 100 0
ID
VT 1
tion
_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
• VN broken-delta
_:3811:107 VT 1:Sequence number 1 to 2147483647 2147483647
device

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time
General

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Phs-rotation reversal SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Invert Phases SPS I
General
_:2311:319 General:Phase sequence ABC SPS O
_:2311:320 General:Phase sequence ACB SPS O
_:2311:321 General:Freq.out of oper.range SPS O
_:2311:322 General:f sys MV O
_:2311:323 General:f track MV O

(Type)
General
_:8881:319 CT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8881:320 CT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8881:321 CT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
Meas.val.dist
_:8881:325 CT 3-phase:Meas.point mult.config. SPS O
CT 1
_:3841:300 CT 1:Sampled val. current SAV O
CT 2
CT 3
CT 4
Calc.IN
_:20191:300 Calc.IN:Sampled val. current SAV O
Brk.wire det.
_:5581:82 Brk.wire det.:>Block function SPS I
_:5581:54 Brk.wire det.:Inactive SPS O
_:5581:52 Brk.wire det.:Behavior ENS O
_:5581:53 Brk.wire det.:Health ENS O
_:5581:301 Brk.wire det.:Phs A BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:302 Brk.wire det.:Phs B BW suspected SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:5581:303 Brk.wire det.:Phs C BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:304 Brk.wire det.:Phase A broken wire SPS O
_:5581:305 Brk.wire det.:Phase B broken wire SPS O
_:5581:306 Brk.wire det.:Phase C broken wire SPS O
_:5581:307 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire suspected SPS O
_:5581:308 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire confirmed SPS O
Supv. balan. I
_:2491:82 Supv. balan. I:>Block function SPS I
_:2491:54 Supv. balan. I:Inactive SPS O
_:2491:52 Supv. balan. I:Behavior ENS O
_:2491:53 Supv. balan. I:Health ENS O
_:2491:71 Supv. balan. I:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:2551:82 Supv. ph.seq.I:>Block function SPS I
_:2551:54 Supv. ph.seq.I:Inactive SPS O
_:2551:52 Supv. ph.seq.I:Behavior ENS O
_:2551:53 Supv. ph.seq.I:Health ENS O
_:2551:71 Supv. ph.seq.I:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum I
_:2431:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2431:54 Supv. sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2431:52 Supv. sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2431:53 Supv. sum I:Health ENS O
_:2431:71 Supv. sum I:Failure SPS O
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:82 Supv.ADC sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2401:54 Supv.ADC sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2401:52 Supv.ADC sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2401:53 Supv.ADC sum I:Health ENS O
_:2401:71 Supv.ADC sum I:Failure SPS O
Saturat. det.
_:17731:54 Saturat. det.:Inactive SPS O
_:17731:52 Saturat. det.:Behavior ENS O
_:17731:53 Saturat. det.:Health ENS O

(Type)
CT 1
_:3841:52 CT 1:Behavior ENS O
_:3841:53 CT 1:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
General
_:8911:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8911:316 VT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8911:317 VT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
VT 1
_:3811:300 VT 1:Sampled val. voltage SAV O
_:3811:52 VT 1:Behavior ENS O
_:3811:53 VT 1:Health ENS O
VT 2
VT 3
VT 4
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:2521:51 Supv. balan. V:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:2521:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:2521:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:2521:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:2521:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:2581:51 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:2581:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:2581:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:2581:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:2581:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum V
_:2461:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:2461:51 Supv. sum V:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:2461:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:2461:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:2461:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:2461:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I
_:2641:52 VT miniatureCB:Behavior ENS O
_:2641:53 VT miniatureCB:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Calc.VN
_:20221:300 Calc.VN:Sampled val. voltage SAV O

(Type)
VT 1
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I
_:2641:52 VT miniatureCB:Behavior ENS O
_:2641:53 VT miniatureCB:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.2 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions
6.2 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions
6.2.1 Description
The function block Group indications of the overcurrent protection functions uses the pickup and operate
indications of the following functions:
• Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Overcurrent Protection, Ground
• Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection
• Directional overcurrent protection, phases
• Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
• Instantaneous High-Current Tripping

The group indications of the overcurrent protection are generated by a logical OR of the stage-selective pickup
and operate indications of the functions listed above (see also Figure 6-6):
• Pickup
• Operate
The pickup and operate indications are output, where present, with direction information.
[lo_oc_gri2, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-6 Logic Diagram of the Overcurrent Protection Group Indications

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.3 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Overcurrent protection, phases function (ANSI 50/51):
• Detects short circuits in electrical equipment
• Can be used as backup overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection
The Overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups. 2 kinds of functions are
available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Overcurrent protection, phases – advanced (50/51 OC-3ph-A)
• Overcurrent protection, phases – basic (50/51 OC-3ph-B)

The Basic function type is provided for standard applications. The Advanced function type offers more func-
tionality and is provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
stages and with 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the Overcurrent protection, phase – advanced function type, the following stages can be operated
simultaneously:
• Maximum of 4 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection – advanced
• 2 stages Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced
• 2 stages User-defined overcurrent protection characteristic curve

In the Overcurrent protection, phases – basic function type, the following stages can be operated simultane-
ously:
• Maximum of 4 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection – basic
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – basic
Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figures. Apart from the tripping delay
characteristic, the stages are identical in structure.
The optional function block Filter offered in the advanced function allows to gain harmonics or to compensate
the amplitude attenuation for the RMS value.
The group-indication output logic generates the following group indications of the protection function by the
logical OR of the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_ocp_ad with filter, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-7 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Advanced
[dw_ocp_bp_1, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-8 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Basic
If the device-internal functions listed in the following are present in the device, these functions can influence
the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection
• Binary input signal

If the device is equipped with an Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against
tripping due to transformer-inrush currents (available in both function types).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.3.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain
6.3.3.1 Description
The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means:
• To gain harmonics in a defined way. Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more
than lower harmonics. This is the case for reactors applied in AC filters. In addition, the amplitude attenu-
ation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter of the device is automatically compensated by
the filter
• To only compensate the amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter
The filter gain (amplitude response) is realized by a 9-order FIR filter.
Logic
[lo_tolp_filter_stage, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-9 Logic Diagram of the Function Block Filter
The FIR filter gains the 8-kHz sampled values according to the set filter coefficients. Afterwards, the RMS value
is calculated. The symmetrical 9-order filter coefficients are set via the values of the respective parameters
h(0), h(1), h(2), h(3), and h(4).
NOTE
i A FIR-filter configuration tool is provided as an auxiliary PC tool. With this PC tool, the coefficients h(0),
h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4) of the FIR filter are generated according to the required gain factors (amplitude
response).
If you require the tool, contact the local Siemens representative to download it via the Intranet of Siemens
Industry Online Support (SIOS). The tool is available on SIOS under Protection > Engineering tools for
protection > Further Tools.
The gained RMS value is delivered to the protection stages only when the function block Filter is instantiated
and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes. Otherwise, the normal RMS value is used.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Functional Measured Values
Values Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to

Iph:A Gained RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current A
Iph:B Gained RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current B
Iph:C Gained RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current C
You can find the parameter Rated current in the FB General of function groups where the Overcurrent
protection, phases – advanced function is used.
If the parameter Enable filter is set to no, the functional measured values are shown as ---.
Parameter: Enable filter
• Default setting (_:1) Enable filter = no.

With the parameter Enable filter, you set whether the Filter is enabled.
yes If gained RMS values should be used in one of the protection stages, set
parameter Enable filter = yes.
no If no gained RMS values are needed, set the parameter Enable filter =
no.
Parameter: h(0), h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4)
• Default setting (_:2) h(0) = 0.000

With the default value of the coefficients, the filter has no effect and no gain is applied.
If the filter shall be applied to adapt the RMS value calculation to a specific protection object such as a reactor,
the reactor manufacturer has to provide the required amplitude response (gain factors) for the reactor. To
determine the coefficients h(0) to h(4) for the FIR filter, you must enter the gain factors into the auxiliary
PC tool which is available in the SIPROTEC download area. The 5 required coefficients are generated by the
tool. They have to be entered manually as settings to configure the filter. The amplitude attenuation of higher
frequencies due to the anti aliasing filter of the device is automatically taken into account and compensated
by the filter.
To only compensate the attenuation of higher frequencies by the device, set the following coefficients in the
filter.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Rated Frequency Filter Coefficients for Only Compensating the Device Amplitude Attenu-
ation
50 Hz h(0) = -0.002
h(1) = -0.012
h(2) = 0.045
h(3) = -0.110
h(4) = 1.151
60 Hz h(0) = -0.005
h(1) = -0.020
h(2) = 0.058
h(3) = -0.128
h(4) = 1.170
6.3.3.3 Settings

Filter
_:1 Filter:Enable filter • no no
• yes
_:2 Filter:h(0) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:3 Filter:h(1) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:4 Filter:h(2) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:5 Filter:h(3) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:6 Filter:h(4) -100.000 to 100.000 1.000

(Type)
Filter
_:301 Filter:Iph:A MV O
_:302 Filter:Iph:B MV O
_:303 Filter:Iph:C MV O
_:52 Filter:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Filter:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.3.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve
6.3.4.1 Description
Logic of the Basic Stage
[lo_ocp_3b1, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-10 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Advanced Stage
[lo_ocp_advanced_umz_stage_control, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-11 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_ocp_3p1, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-12 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced
Method of measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:

This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
• Measurement of the RMS value:

This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
RMS-Value Selection (Advanced Stage)

If RMS value is selected as the method of measurement, the protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS
measurement.
• Normal RMS value
• Gained RMS value from the function block Filter

If the function block Filter is configured and if you have enabled the filter, the gained RMS value is automati-
cally used.
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one 3-phase current measuring point is allowed to be
connected to the 3-phase current interface of the function group.
I0 Elimination (Advanced Stage)

In order to increase the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the transformer low-voltage side, use the
I0 elimination of the phase currents for the overcurrent-protection application on one transformer.
In order to determine the I0 elimination of the phase currents, the transformer neutral point current IY must be
measured.
[dw_sgaocp, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-13 I0 Elimination Principle
The transformer neutral point current IY is measured via a 1-phase current measuring point that is connected
to the Voltage/current 1-phase. The function group Voltage/current 1-phase must be connected to the
function group Voltage/current 3-phase in which the function Overcurrent protection, phases is being
used.
[sc_cpfo_int, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-14 Connection of the Voltage/Current 1-Phase Function Group with the Neutral Point Input of the
Voltage/Current 3-Phase Function Group
In case of an I0 elimination, the following calculations result:

IA-elim. = IA - 1/3 IY
IB-elim. = IB - 1/3 IY
IC-elim. = IC - 1/3 IY

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The phase current Iphx-elim. is necessary for the following protection process.
If the Method of measurement parameter is set to fundamental comp., the I0 elimination is applied.
The currents Iphx-elim. are available as functional values.
Pickup Delay (Advanced Stage)

If the current exceeds the threshold value, the pickup delay is generated. If the threshold remains exceeded
during the pickup delay time, the pickup signal is generated.
Dropout Delay (Advanced Stage)

If the current falls below the dropout threshold, the dropout can be delayed for the time specified by the
parameter Dropout delay. During the dropout delay, the pickup is maintained. Meanwhile, the operate
delay continues to run (parameter Operate delay mode = Running dur. DO-delay) or is frozen
(parameter Operate delay mode = Frozen dur. DO-delay). If the operate delay expires while the
pickup is still maintained, the stage operates.
Blocking of the Stage (Basic and Advanced Stage)

The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (only available in the Advanced function type, see
Influence of other functions via dynamic settings and 6.3.8.1 Description ).
Blocking of the Time Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and
thus also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and the fault logging and
recording takes place.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in 6.3.7.1 Description .
Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings (Advanced Stage)

If available in the device, the following functions can influence the overcurrent-protection stages:
• Automatic reclosing

The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in 6.3.8.1 Description .
Parameter: Method of measurement
• Default setting (_:661:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.
Parameter: Operate delay mode
• Default setting (_:661:7) Operate delay mode = Running dur. DO-delay

This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
With the parameter Operate delay mode, you specify whether the operate delay continues to run or is
frozen during the dropout delay.
This setting is only valid if the parameter Dropout delay is not 0.
Running dur. DO-delay During the dropout delay, the operate delay continues to run.
Frozen dur. DO-delay During the dropout delay, the operate delay is frozen. If the current exceeds
the threshold value again, the operate delay continues to run.
Parameter: Threshold, Operate delay
• Default setting (_:661:3) Threshold = 1.500 A (for the 1st stage)
• Default setting (_:661:6) Operate delay = 0.30 s (for the 1st stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite-time overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):
The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current. Pickup by overload must be excluded
since overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short-circuit protection and not as overload
protection. Therefore, set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to
approx. 20 % above the maximum load that is expected.
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Safety factor = 1.1
Settings in primary and secondary measurands result in the setting values:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[fo_ocp_ph1, 2, en_US]
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system.
2nd Stage (High-Current Stage):

This tripping stage can also be used for current grading. This applies in the case of very long lines with
low source impedance or ahead of high reactances (for example, transformers, shunt reactors). Set the
Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short circuit at the end of the
line.
Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value.
Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis. The following example
illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the begin-
ning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:
[fo_ocp_002, 1, en_US]
The 3-phase short-circuit current at the end of the line is Isc end:
[fo_ocp_ph4, 1, en_US]
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:
If short-circuit currents exceed 2365 A (primary) or 19.7 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to be
protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source
impedance and line impedance have different angles, you have to use complex numbers to calculate the
Threshold .
Parameter: I0 elimination
• Default setting (_:661:120) I0 elimination = no

The I0 elimination in phase currents for overcurrent-protection applications can be used in a transformer.
This increases the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the transformer low-voltage side. The following
conditions must be fulfilled:
• The transformer neutral point current IY is measured and is available for the protection function group.
• The parameter Method of measurement is set to fundamental comp..

With the I0 elimination parameter, you can switch the I0 elimination function on or off.
Parameter: Pickup delay
• Default setting (_:661:102) Pickup delay = 0.00 s

For special applications, it is desirable that a short exceeding of the current threshold does not lead to the
pickup of the stage and start fault logging and recording. If this stage is used as a thermal overload function,
that is considered a special application.
When using the Pickup delay parameter, a time interval is defined during which a pickup is not triggered if
the current threshold is exceeded.
For all short-circuit protection applications, this value is 0.00 s as a default.
Parameter: Dropout delay
• Default setting (_:661:101) Dropout delay = 0.00 s

Siemens recommends using the default setting 0 since the dropout of a protection stage must be done as fast
as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it together
with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electromechanical
relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Technical Data) and
set the result.
Parameter: Dropout ratio
• Default setting (_:661:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95

The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications.
To achieve high-precision measurements, the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio can be
reduced, for example, to 0.98. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you
can increase the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed
• Default setting (_:661:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no

The parameter must be set for the specific application.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

no The stage always operates 3-pole.
yes The stage operates phase-selectively. However, tripping by the device (generated in
the trip logic of the Circuit-breaker function group) is always 3-pole because the
device does not support phase-selective tripping.
6.3.4.3 Settings

General
_:661:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:661:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:661:11 Definite-T 1:1-pole • no no
operate allowed
• yes
_:661:26 Definite-T 1:Dynamic • no no
settings
• yes
_:661:27 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect.
• yes
_:661:8 Definite-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:661:120 Definite-T 1:I0 elimina- • no no
tion
• yes
_:661:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:661:4 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:661:102 Definite-T 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:661:101 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:661:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s
delay
_:661:7 Definite-T 1:Operate • Running dur. DO-delay Running dur.
delay mode DO-delay
• Frozen dur. DO-delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:661:28 Definite-T 1:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready
• yes
_:661:35 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:661:29 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:661:33 Definite-T 1:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:661:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:661:84 Definite-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:661:500 Definite-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:661:51 Definite-T 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:661:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:661:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:661:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:661:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:661:62 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:661:65 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:661:66 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:661:67 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:661:68 Definite-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:661:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:661:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:661:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O
_:661:302 Definite-T 1:I0el.Iph WYE O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.3.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
6.3.5.1 Description
[lo_ocp3b2, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-15 Logic Diagram Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_stage_control_OCP, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-16 Logic Diagram Stage Control
[lo_ocp_3p2, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-17 Logic Diagram Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
RMS-Value Selection (Advanced Stage)

If RMS value is selected as the method of measurement, the protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS
measurement.

If the function block Filter is configured and if you have enabled the filter, the gained RMS value is automati-
cally used.
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one 3-phase current measuring point is allowed to be
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according
to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
Minimum Time of the Curve (Advanced Stage)

With the parameter Min. time of the curve, you define a minimum operate delay time. The operate
delay time of inverse-time characteristic curve never falls below the minimum operate delay time.
[dw_ocp_3_mi, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-18 Minimum Operating Time of the Curve

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Additional Time Delay (Advanced Stage)

With the parameter Additional time delay, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay. With this setting, the whole curve is shifted on the time axis by this additional definite time.
Method of Measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage)



I0 Elimination (Advanced Stage)

In order to increase the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the transformer low-voltage side, use the
I0 elimination of the phase currents for the overcurrent-protection applications on one transformer.
In order to determine the I0 elimination of the phase currents, the transformer neutral point current IY must be
measured.
[dw_sgaocp, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-19 I0 Elimination Principle
The transformer neutral point current IY is measured via a 1-phase current measuring point that is connected
to the Voltage/current 1-phase. The function group Voltage/current 1-phase must be connected to the
function group Voltage/current 3-phase in which the function Overcurrent protection, phases is used.
[sc_cpfo_int, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-20 Connection of the Function Group Voltage/Current 1-Phase with the Neutral Point Input of the
In case of an I0 elimination, the following calculations must be considered:

IA-elim. = IA - 1/3 IY
IB-elim. = IB - 1/3 IY
IC-elim. = IC - 1/3 IY

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The phase current Iphx-elim. is necessary for the following protection process.
If the Method of measurement parameter is set to fundamental comp., the I0 elimination is operating.
The currents Iphx-elim. are available as functional values.
Pickup Delay (Advanced Stage)

If the current exceeds the threshold value, the pickup delay starts. If the threshold is exceeded during the
pickup delay time, the pickup signal is generated.

• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (only available in the Advanced function type, see
Influence of other functions via dynamic settings and 6.3.8.1 Description ).

is described in 6.3.7.1 Description .


• Recommended setting value (_:691:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

an overfunction.
added currents.
Parameter: Type of character. curve
• Default setting (_:691:130) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse

The device offers all the usual inverse-time characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI. Select the Type
of character. curve required for your specific application. For more information about the parameter
Type of character. curve, refer to chapter 13.5.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve.
Parameter: Min. time of the curve
• Default setting (_:691:113) Min. time of the curve = 0.00 s

This parameter is only available in the advanced stage.
With the Min. time of the curve parameter, you define a minimum operate delay time. The operate
delay time of inverse-time characteristic curve never falls below the minimum operate delay time. If the
setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic curve.
This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens
recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.
NOTE
i If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the
parameter has no influence on the delay time.
Parameter: Additional time delay
• Default setting (_:691:115) Additional time delay = 0.00 s

With the Additional time delay parameter, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic
time.
Parameter: Threshold
• Default setting (_:691:3) Threshold = 1.500 A

Set the Threshold and Type of character. curve parameters for the specific application.
protection. Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to approx.
20 % above the maximum expected load.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Note that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value. The stage only picks up at approx.
10 % above the Threshold.
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Settings in primary and secondary measurands result in the setting values:
Parameter: I0 elimination
• Default setting (_:661:120) I0 elimination = no

The I0 elimination in phase currents for overcurrent-protection applications can be used in a transformer. This
increases the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the low-voltage side of the transformer. The following
conditions must be fulfilled:
• The transformer neutral point current IY is measured and is available for the protection function group.
• The parameter Method of measurement is set to fundamental comp..

With the I0 elimination setting, you can switch the I0 elimination function on or off.

For special applications it is desirable if the current threshold is briefly exceeded, that this will not lead to the
pickup of the stage and starts fault logging or recording. If this stage is used as a thermal overload function,
that is considered a special application.
When using the Pickup delay parameter, a time interval is defined during which a pickup is not trigger if
the current threshold is exceeded.
For all short-circuit protection applications, this value is 0.00 s and is considered as a default.
Parameter: Time dial
• Default setting (_:691:101) Time dial = 1.00

With the Time dial parameter, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared
for the electrical power system.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the
parameter Time dial at 1 (default setting).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Reset
• Default setting (_:691:131) Reset = disk emulation

With the Reset parameter, you define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
disk emulation Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.
• Default setting (_:691:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no

yes The stage operates phase-selectively. However, tripping by the device
(generated in the trip logic of the Circuit-breaker function group) is always
3-pole because the device does not support phase-selective tripping.
6.3.5.3 Settings

General
_:691:1 Inverse-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:691:2 Inverse-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:691:11 Inverse-T 1:1-pole • no no
operate allowed
• yes
_:691:26 Inverse-T 1:Dynamic • no no
settings
• yes
_:691:27 Inverse-T 1:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect.
• yes
_:691:8 Inverse-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:691:120 Inverse-T 1:I0 elimina- • no no
tion
• yes
_:691:3 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:691:108 Inverse-T 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:691:130 Inverse-T 1:Type of char-
acter. curve

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:691:113 Inverse-T 1:Min. time of 0.00 s to 1.00 s 0.00 s
the curve
_:691:131 Inverse-T 1:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:691:101 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
_:691:115 Inverse-T 1:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:691:28 Inverse-T 1:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready
• yes
_:691:35 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:691:29 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:691:33 Inverse-T 1:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1
_:691:81 Inverse-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:691:500 Inverse-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:691:51 Inverse-T 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:691:54 Inverse-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:691:52 Inverse-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:691:53 Inverse-T 1:Health ENS O
_:691:60 Inverse-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:691:59 Inverse-T 1:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:691:55 Inverse-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:691:56 Inverse-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:691:57 Inverse-T 1:Operate ACT O
6.3.6 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve
6.3.6.1 Description
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.3.5.1 Description ). The only differences are as follows:
• You can define the characteristic curve as desired.
• The pickup and dropout behaviors of this stage are determined by the standard parameter Threshold
and, if necessary, by an additional parameter Threshold (absolute).
User-Defined Characteristic Curve

With the user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using up to 30
value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic curve from
these values. You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve

When the input variable exceeds the Threshold value by 1.1 times, the characteristic curve is processed.
An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the
characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x Threshold
value), the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior
via setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
[dw_ocp_ken_02, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-21 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
NOTE
i The currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not extend
the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest character-
istic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve point do
not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest
characteristic-curve point.
If you want to change the pickup threshold of the stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve,
you can use the additional Threshold (absolute) parameter.
You can set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be greater than 1.1 times the Threshold value.
Then the stage behaviors are as follows:
• The stage picks up when the measured current value exceeds the Threshold (absolute) value.
• The stage starts dropout when the measured current value falls short of the Threshold (absolute)
value by 0.95 times.
• For measured current values lower than the Threshold (absolute) value, no pickup takes place and
consequently the characteristic curve is not processed.
If you set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be less than 1.1 times the Threshold value, the
pickup and dropout behaviors are not affected by the Threshold (absolute) parameter.

This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage. The
only differences are described in chapter 6.3.6.1 Description . This chapter provides only the application and
setting notes for setting characteristic curves and for setting the Threshold (absolute) parameter. You
can find more information on the other parameters of the stage in chapter 6.3.5.2 Application and Setting
Notes .

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Current/time value pairs (from the operate curve)

With these settings, you define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to shift the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is shifted via the Time dial parameter.
NOTE
i The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
• Default setting (_:101) Time dial = 1

for the electrical power system. Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve is required, leave the Time dial parameter at 1.
Parameter: Reset
• Default setting (_:110) Reset = disk emulation

disk emulation In the case of this setting, a dropout characteristic curve has to be set in
addition to the operate curve.
Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
but an instantaneous dropout is desired.
Parameter: Current/time value pairs (of the dropout characteristic curve)

NOTE
• Default setting (_:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

yes The stage operates phase-selectively. However, tripping by the device (gener-
ated in the trip logic of the Circuit-breaker function group) is always 3-pole
because the device does not support phase-selective tripping.
Parameter: Threshold (absolute)
• Default setting (_:113) Threshold (absolute) = 0.000 A

With the Threshold (absolute) parameter, you define and change the absolute pickup threshold of the
stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve.
The parameter is only used for special applications. With the default setting, this functionality is disabled.
You can find more information in Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve ,
Page 511.
6.3.6.3 Settings

General
_:1 User curve #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 User curve #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:11 User curve #:1-pole • no no
operate allowed
• yes
_:26 User curve #:Dynamic • no no
settings
• yes
_:27 User curve #:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:8 User curve #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:120 User curve #:I0 elimina- • no no
tion
• yes
_:3 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
(absolute) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 200.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 40.000 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 200.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.000 A
_:111 User curve #:Pickup 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:110 User curve #:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:101 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:115 User curve #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:28 User curve #:Effect. by • no no
AR off/n.ready
• yes
_:35 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:29 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:33 User curve #:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

(Type)
User curve #
_:81 User curve #:>Block stage SPS I
_:84 User curve #:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:500 User curve #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 User curve #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 User curve #:Behavior ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:53 User curve #:Health ENS O
_:60 User curve #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:62 User curve #:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:65 User curve #:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:66 User curve #:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:67 User curve #:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:68 User curve #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:59 User curve #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 User curve #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 User curve #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 User curve #:Operate ACT O
6.3.7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection
6.3.7.1 Description
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
The following figure only shows the part of the stage (exemplified by definite-time overcurrent protection
stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the blocking. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection
(see chapter 13.10 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.
[lo_ocp3pha, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-22 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.
• Default setting (_:661:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

no The transformer inrush-current detection does not affect the stage.
Select this setting in the following cases:
• In cases where the device is not used on transformers.
• In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold

value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the
transformer. This, for example, applies to the high-current stage that
is set such according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc of the transformer
that it only picks up on faults from the high-voltage side. The trans-
former inrush current cannot become larger than the maximum trans-
mittable short-circuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current
that would lead to a tripping of the stage, the start of the time delay and
tripping of the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the trans-
former. This applies to the overcurrent-protection stage, which is used as a
backup stage with grading time for faults on the undervoltage side of the
transformer.
6.3.8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings
6.3.8.1 Description
The parameters Threshold and Operate delay used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings.
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically (see
Figure 6-23). Depending on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically. This functionality
is only available in function type Advanced.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_ocp_3dpa, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-23 Principle of the Dynamic Settings Exemplified by 1st Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings of the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is
provided with a configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings
(Operate delay and Threshold). The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be
active or not, this means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for
example, signal function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these settings become dynamic, that is,
instantly active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal
becomes inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Automatic Reclosing (Advanced Stage)
[lo_ocp3_awe, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-24 Influence of the AREC Signals on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and Operate delay parameters of the
protection stage and its blocking.
• AREC is ready for reclosing 1 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 1)
• AREC is ready for reclosing 4 (= Automatic reclosing cycle >3)

The following signal can only block the protection stage:
• AREC is not ready or switched off (= Automatic reclosing off / not ready)
This means that if the AREC is ready and the protection stage is in the idle state, the settings for
AREC cycle 1 are active and not the standard settings. The standard settings are active in the case of
AREC off/not ready.
The influence can be activated for each signal individually. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate
delay or Stage blocked parameters, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way AREC signals are generated is described in 6.48.1 Overview of Functions.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Advanced Stage)
[lo_ocp3kal, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-25 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
In the case of cold-load pickup, you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters of the protection stage. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate the
influence of the cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign
settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in 5.9.1 Overview of Functions.
Link to an External Function via a Binary Input Signal (Advanced Stage)
[lo_ocp3bin, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-26 Influence of the Binary Input on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay parameters of the protection stage. You can also block the stage. To do so, you
must activate the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or
assign settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.3.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage)
Parameter: Dynamic settings
• Default setting (_:661:26) Dynamic settings = no

no The influence on the overcurrent-protection stage by device-internal or
external functions is not necessary.
yes If a device-internal function (automatic reclosing function or cold-load
pickup detection) or an external function should affect the overcurrent-
protection stage (such as change the setting of the threshold value or time
delay, blocking of the stage), the setting must be changed to yes.
This makes the configuration parameters Influence of function...
as well as the dynamic settings Threshold, Operate delay and Stage
blocked of the stage visible and enables the settings to be set for the
specific influence.
Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing
describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent stage (1st stage) results from the time-grading schedule. Additionally, it is to
be used as fast stage before an automatic reclosing. Because a fast disconnection of the short-circuit current
takes priority over the selectivity prior to reclosing, the tripping delay can be set to 0 or a very small value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set
to the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage trips
instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time delay of
600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.
Influence of External Devices

The influence of an external device can also be configured. The above is an example of how the overcurrent-
protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing, in which case the AREC
function is performed by an external device.
To realize the application, the configuration setting Effected by binary input must be changed to yes
(= influenced). This activates the >Activ. dyn. settings input signal within the stage. When the input
signal becomes active, it switches to the assigned dynamic settings. The external device must provide the
Cycle 1 and Cycle 2 signals or, alternatively, the AR ready signal. The signals must be connected with
the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings.
The dynamic setting Operate delay, which is assigned to the input signal (source of influence) >Activ.
dyn. settings, is set to the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The dynamic setting Threshold
assigned to this input signal is set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.4 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V) function:
• Detects short circuits affecting electric equipment
• Can be used for special network conditions where the overcurrent pickup level should be decreased
depending on the fault voltage
• Can be used for generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals and the
overcurrent pickup should be kept depending on the fault voltages
The Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with 3-phase
current and voltage measurement.
The function Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection comes with the following factory-set stages:
• Inverse-time overcurrent protection, voltage-dependent stage
• Definite-time overcurrent protection, undervoltage seal-in stage

In this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
• A maximum of 2 inverse-time overcurrent protection, voltage-dependent stages
• A maximum of 2 inverse-time overcurrent protection, voltage-released stages
• A maximum of 2 definite-time overcurrent protection, undervoltage seal-in stages
• A maximum of 2 definite-time overcurrent protection, voltage-released undervoltage seal-in stages
[dw_stuvol_release, 3, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.4.3 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Dependent
6.4.3.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo_ocp_volt-dependent, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-28 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Dependent
Method of Measurement

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Measurement of the fundamental comp.:


Voltage-Dependent Pickup Threshold

The pickup threshold of the overcurrent stage depends on the voltage magnitude. A lower voltage decreases
the current pickup value (see Figure 6-29). In the range between V/Vrated = 1.00 to 0.25 a linear, directly
proportional dependence is realized.
[dw_volpic, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-29 Voltage Influence of the Pickup Threshold
With:
V = Measured phase-to-phase voltage
Vrated = Rated voltage (parameter Rated voltage in the function block General of the protec-
tion function group)
PU sett. = Pickup threshold setting (parameter address: _11491:3)
PU(V) = Applied pickup threshold according to the voltage influence
The minimum current pickup threshold value is 0.03 * Irated. This value cannot be decreased any further even
not by voltage-dependent pickup threshold factor.
Decreasing the pickup threshold is carried out phase-selectively. The following table shows the assignment of
voltages to current-carrying phases.
Table 6-1 Controlling Voltages in Relation to the Fault Current
Current Controlling Voltage

IA VAB
IB VBC
IC VCA
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Influence On the Operate Curve

The current pickup threshold is decreased proportional to the voltage decrease. Consequently, for a constant
current I the I/Threshold-value ratio is increased and the operate time is reduced. Compared with the standard
curves represented in the Technical Data, the operate curve shifts to the left side as the voltage decreases.
Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection

In case of a measuring-voltage failure detection the input voltage value is automatically set to Vrated, so that
the pickup threshold factor will be 1.
Blocking of the Time Delay

is described in chapter 6.3.7.1 Description .

no The transformer inrush-current detection does not affect the stage. Select
this setting in the following cases:

transformer. This applies, for example, to the high-current stage that
is set according to the short-circuit voltage uk of the transformer in
such a way that the stage only picks up on faults from the high-voltage
side. The transformer-inrush current cannot become larger than the
maximum transmittable short-circuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush-current detection detects an inrush current
transformer.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

an overfunction.
added currents.

The recommended setting value of 1.500 A is suitable for most applications.
protection.
Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx.10 %, for transformers and motors to approx. 20 % above
the maximum expected load.
Parameter Type of character. curve

of character. curve required for your specific application.
Parameter: Reset

The Reset parameter allows you to define whether the stage decreases according to the dropout character-
istic curve (behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disc) or instantaneously.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout does not have to be performed after a disk
emulation and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.
• Default setting (_:11491:103) Time dial = 1

You can use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The setting value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been
prepared for the electrical power system.
6.4.3.3 Settings

V-dependent 1
_:11491:1 V-dependent 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11491:2 V-dependent 1:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:11491:27 V-dependent 1:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:11491:8 V-dependent 1:Method • fundamental comp. fundamental
of measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:11491:3 V-dependent 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
1:Threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:11491:101 V-dependent 1:Type of
character. curve
_:11491:102 V-dependent 1:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:11491:103 V-dependent 1:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

(Type)
Group indicat.
V-dependent 1
_:11491:81 V-dependent 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:11491:500 V-dependent 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:11491:51 V-dependent 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:11491:54 V-dependent 1:Inactive SPS O
_:11491:52 V-dependent 1:Behavior ENS O
_:11491:53 V-dependent 1:Health ENS O
_:11491:60 V-dependent 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:11491:59 V-dependent 1:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:11491:55 V-dependent 1:Pickup ACD O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:11491:56 V-dependent 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:11491:57 V-dependent 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.4.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released
6.4.4.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo_ocp_volt-release, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-30 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released
This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent, voltage-dependent stage (see
6.4.3.1 Description). The only differences are the conditions for the pickup and the influence on the operate
curve.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measuring-Element Release
When the controlling voltage drops below the setting Undervoltage threshold, the respective measuring
element is released.
The release of the measuring elements is carried out phase-selectively. The assignment of voltages to current-
carrying phases is shown in Figure 6-29.
Blocking of the Stage with Measuring-Voltage Failure

The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In case of a blocking, the picked up stage is
reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.

This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent, voltage-dependent stage. The
only differences are the conditions for the pickup and the influence on the operate curve. This chapter
only provides the application and setting notes for the setting Blk. by meas.-volt. failure and
Undervoltage threshold. For guidance on the other parameters of this stage, refer to 6.4.3.2 Application
and Setting Notes.
Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure
• Recommended setting value (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

You can use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal Measuring-voltage failure detection function is configured and switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

no The overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked when a measuring-voltage
failure is detected.
yes The overcurrent-protection stage is blocked when a measuring-voltage
failure is detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting, as
correct operation of the stage cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-voltage
failure occurs.
Parameter: Undervoltage threshold
• Default setting (_:104) Undervoltage threshold = 75.0 V

When the controlling voltage is below the set value, the Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage is
released.
The parameter is set to a value just below the lowest phase-to-phase voltage admissible during operation, for
example, from 75 % to 80 % of Vrated.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.4.4.3 Settings

V-release #
_:1 V-release #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 V-release #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:10 V-release #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:27 V-release #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect.
• yes
_:8 V-release #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:3 V-release #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:101 V-release #:Type of char- • ANSI long-time inv. IEC normal
acter. curve inverse
• ANSI short-time inv.
• ANSI extremely inv.
• ANSI very inverse
• ANSI normal inverse
• ANSI moderately inv.
• ANSI definite inverse
• IEC normal inverse
• IEC very inverse
• IEC extremely inv.
• IEC long-time inverse
_:102 V-release #:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:103 V-release #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:104 V-release #:Under- 0.300 V to 175.000 V 75.000 V
voltage threshold

(Type)
V-release #
_:81 V-release #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 V-release #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 V-release #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 V-release #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 V-release #:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:60 V-release #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:59 V-release #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 V-release #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 V-release #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 V-release #:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.4.5 Stage with Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Undervoltage Seal-In
6.4.5.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo_seal-in, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-31 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Undervoltage Seal-in
Undervoltage Seal-In
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the short-circuit current
decreases quickly in the event of close-in faults (for example, in a generator or a generator-transformer
range). The current decreases to a value below the current threshold within a few seconds because of the

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
absence of the excitation voltage. To avoid a dropout of the relay, the positive-sequence voltages are used as
an additional criterion for detecting a short circuit.
The pickup signal is maintained for a settable seal-in time Duration of V-seal-in time, if the positive-
sequence voltage falls below a settable threshold V-seal-in threshold after an overcurrent pickup, even
if the current falls below the threshold again. If the voltage recovers before the seal-in time has elapsed, or if
the undervoltage seal-in is blocked via a binary input >Block V-seal-in, the signal Pickup I>+V-seal-
in drops out immediately.
You can switch off the undervoltage seal-in via the parameter State of V-seal-in.
Blocking of the Undervoltage Seal-in with Measuring-Voltage Failure

The Undervoltage seal-in can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In case of a blocking, the
pickup signal Pickup I>+V-seal-in drops out immediately. The following blocking options are available
for the Undervoltage seal-in:
• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block VT miniature CB, which
links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be used to control the measuring-voltage failure
detection. The Undervoltage seal-in remains unaffected if the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure is switched off.
Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked
• Default setting (_:16951:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no

With the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked, you can block the operate indication, the fault
recording, and the fault log.

The setting is mainly determined by the maximum operating current.
Pickup by overload must be excluded since the protection may trip if a short operate delay time is set. Set
the Threshold parameter for generators to a value between 20 % and 30 %, for transformers and motors
approx. 40 % above the expected peak load.
Parameter: Operate delay
• Default setting (_:16951:6) Operate delay = 3.00 s

The parameter Operate delay must be coordinated with the time grading of the network protection to
guarantee the selectivity. Practical time delays are between 1 s to 2 s.
• Default setting (_:16951:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

With the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure, you can activate (yes) or deactivate (no) the
blocking by the Measuring voltage failure detection function. The recommended setting is the default
setting.
Parameter: State of V-seal-in
• Default setting (_:16951:101) State of V-seal-in = off

With the parameter State of V-seal-in, the seal-in functionality can be activated (switched on). Siemens
recommends this setting if the excitation transformer is connected to the main lead of the generator.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: V-seal-in threshold
• Default setting (_:16951:102) V-seal-in threshold = 46.2 V

The V-seal-in threshold (positive-sequence voltage) is set to a value below the lowest phase-to-phase
voltage admissible during an operation, for example 80 % of the rated voltage of a generator. The positive-
sequence voltage is evaluated. The practicable value for a voltage transformer with a rated secondary voltage
of 100 V is 46.2 V.
The following table shows an example of a specification:
Threshold 1.4 * Irated, Gen
Operate delay 3.00 s
Undervoltage seal-in 0.8 * Vrated, Gen
Duration of V-seal-in time 4.00 s
Dropout ratio 0.95
Rated current Irated, Gen 483 A Rated voltage Vrated, Gen 6.3 kV
Rated current Irated, VT, prim 500 A Rated voltage Vrated, VT, prim 6.3 kV
Rated current Irated, VT, sec 1A Rated voltage Vrated, VT, sec 100 V
The following secondary setting values result from this specification:
[fo_ocp_uvsi_threshold, 1, en_US]
[fo_ocp_uvsi_seal-in, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Duration of V-seal-in time
• Default setting (_:16951:104) Duration of V-seal-in time = 4.00 s

The parameter Duration of V-seal-in time limits the pickup seal-in induced by an overcurrent or
undervoltage. The value must be set higher than the value of the parameter Operate delay. The difference
shall be greater than 0.5 s. In the default setting, a difference of 1 s is used.
6.4.5.3 Settings

V-seal-in 1
_:16951:1 V-seal-in 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:16951:2 V-seal-in 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:16951:3 V-seal-in 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.75 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.75 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.750 A
_:16951:6 V-seal-in 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:16951:10 V-seal-in 1:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:16951:101 V-seal-in 1:State of V- • off off
seal-in
• on
_:16951:102 V-seal-in 1:V-seal-in 0.300 V to 175.000 V 46.200 V
threshold
_:16951:104 V-seal-in 1:Duration of V- 0.10 s to 60.00 s 4.00 s
seal-in time

(Type)
V-seal-in 1
_:16951:81 V-seal-in 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:16951:500 V-seal-in 1:>Block V-seal-in SPS I
_:16951:52 V-seal-in 1:Behavior ENS O
_:16951:53 V-seal-in 1:Health ENS O
_:16951:54 V-seal-in 1:Inactive SPS O
_:16951:55 V-seal-in 1:Pickup ACD O
_:16951:300 V-seal-in 1:Pickup I>+V-seal-in SPS O
_:16951:56 V-seal-in 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:16951:57 V-seal-in 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.4.6 Stage with Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released

6.4.6.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo_seal-in_rel, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-32 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released Undervoltage
Seal-in, Part 1
Signal 4 in the following figure refers to Figure 6-32.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_seal-in_rel2, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-33 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released Undervoltage
Seal-in, Part 2
Voltage Release
In addition to the current criterion with undervoltage seal-in, a voltage-released logic must be present
to issue the indication Pickup. The voltage-released logic monitors the negative-sequence voltage and
phase-to-phase voltages respectively for detecting unsymmetrical faults and symmetrical faults. With the
voltage-released logic, the setting value of the parameter Threshold can be reduced in a certain range and
the reliability and sensibility of this function can be improved correspondingly.
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the short-circuit current
decreases quickly in the event of close-in faults (for example, in a generator or a generator-transformer
range). The current decreases to a value below the current threshold within a few seconds because of the
absence of the excitation voltage. To avoid a dropout of the relay, the positive-sequence voltages are used as
an additional criterion for detecting a short circuit.
The pickup signal is maintained for a settable seal-in time Duration of V-seal-in time, if the positive-
sequence voltage falls below a settable threshold V-seal-in threshold after an overcurrent pickup, even
if the current falls below the threshold again. If the voltage recovers before the seal-in time has elapsed, or if
the undervoltage seal-in is blocked via a binary input >Block V-seal-in, the signal Pickup I>+V-seal-
in drops out immediately.
You can switch off the undervoltage seal-in via the parameter State of V-seal-in.
Blocking of the Undervoltage Seal-in with Measuring-Voltage Failure

The Undervoltage seal-in can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In case of a blocking, the
pickup signal Pickup I>+V-seal-in drops out immediately. The following blocking options are available
for the Undervoltage seal-in:
• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block VT miniature CB, which
The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be used to control the measuring-voltage failure
detection. The Undervoltage seal-in remains unaffected if the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure is switched off.
• Default setting (_:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 1.350 A

The setting is mainly determined by the maximum operating current.
Pickup by overload must be excluded since the protection may trip if a short operate delay time is set. Set
the Threshold parameter for generators to a value between 20 % and 30 %, for transformers and motors
approx. 40 % above the expected peak load.
• Default setting (_:6) Operate delay = 3.00 s

The parameter Operate delay must be coordinated with the time grading of the network protection to
guarantee the selectivity. Practical time delays are between 1 s to 2 s.
• Default setting (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

With the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure, you can activate (yes) or deactivate (no) the
blocking by the Measuring voltage failure detection function. The recommended setting is the default
setting.
Parameter: State of V-seal-in
• Default setting (_:101) State of V-seal-in = off

With the parameter State of V-seal-in, the seal-in functionality can be activated (switched on). Siemens
recommends this setting if the excitation transformer is connected to the main lead of the generator.
Parameter: V-seal-in threshold
• Default setting (_:102) V-seal-in threshold = 46.2 V

The V-seal-in threshold (positive-sequence voltage) is set to a value below the lowest phase-to-phase
voltage admissible during an operation, for example 80 % of the rated voltage of a generator. The positive-
sequence voltage is evaluated. The practicable value for a voltage transformer with a rated secondary voltage
of 100 V is 46.2 V.
The following table shows an example of a specification:
Threshold 1.4 * Irated, Gen
Operate delay 3.00 s
Undervoltage seal-in 0.8 * Vrated, Gen
Duration of V-seal-in time 4.00 s
Dropout ratio 0.95
Rated current Irated, Gen 483 A Rated voltage Vrated, Gen 6.3 kV
Rated current Irated, VT, prim 500 A Rated voltage Vrated, VT, prim 6.3 kV
Rated current Irated, VT, sec 1A Rated voltage Vrated, VT, sec 100 V
The following secondary setting values result from this specification:
[fo_ocp_uvsi_threshold, 1, en_US]
[fo_ocp_uvsi_seal-in, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Duration of V-seal-in time
• Default setting (_:104) Duration of V-seal-in time = 4.00 s

The parameter Duration of V-seal-in time limits the pickup seal-in induced by an overcurrent or
undervoltage. The value must be set higher than the value of the parameter Operate delay. The difference
shall be greater than 0.5 s. In the default setting, a difference of 1 s is used.
Parameter: Vph-ph< threshold
• Default setting (_:105) Vph-ph< threshold = 60.000 V

With the parameter Vph-ph< threshold, you can set the threshold at which the output signal Voltage
release is activated when the minimum phase-to-phase voltage falls below this threshold.
Parameter: V2> threshold
• Default setting (_:106) V2> threshold = 4.600 V

With the parameter V2> threshold, you can set the threshold at which the output signal Voltage
release is issued when V2 exceeds the threshold.
6.4.6.3 Settings

Vseal-in+Vrel#
_:1 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:3 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 6.750 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 6.750 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.750 A
_:6 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
delay
_:10 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:101 Vseal-in+Vrel#:State of • off off
V-seal-in
• on
_:102 Vseal-in+Vrel#:V-seal-in 0.300 V to 175.000 V 46.200 V
threshold
_:104 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Duration 0.10 s to 60.00 s 4.00 s
of V-seal-in time
_:105 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Vph-ph< 0.300 V to 175.000 V 60.000 V
threshold
_:106 Vseal-in+Vrel#:V2> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 4.600 V
threshold

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Vseal-in+Vrel#
_:81 Vseal-in+Vrel#:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Vseal-in+Vrel#:>Block V-seal-in SPS I
_:52 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Health ENS O
_:54 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Inactive SPS O
_:55 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Pickup I>+V-seal-in SPS O
_:301 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Voltage release SPS O
_:56 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
The Overcurrent protection, ground function (ANSI 50N/51N):
• Detects short circuits in electrical equipment
The Overcurrent protection, ground function is used in protection function groups. 2 kinds of functions are
available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Overcurrent protection, ground – advanced (50N/51N OC-gnd-A)
• Overcurrent protection, ground – basic (50N/51N OC-gnd-B)

The function type Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more func-
Both function types are pre-configured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
In the function type Overcurrent protection, ground – advanced the following stages can be operated
simultaneously:
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced
• 1 stage User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection

In the function type Overcurrent protection, ground – basic the following stages can be operated simultane-
ously:

The non-preconfigured stages are shown in gray in the following figures. Apart from the tripping delay
The measured-value selection (only advanced stage) is general functionality and has a uniform effect on the
stages (see Figure 6-34 and 6.5.3.1 Description). This ensures that all stages of the function receive the same
measured current value.
• Pickup
• Operate

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_ocp_ga2, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-34 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced
[dw_ocp_gb1, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-35 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic
If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an

tripping due to transformer-inrush currents (available in both function types).
6.5.3 General Functionality
6.5.3.1 Description
Measured-Value Selection
The function provides the option to select between the values IN measured or 3I0 calculated.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_meas_value_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-36 Logic Diagram of Measured-Value Selection
Both options are only available for the current-transformer connection types 3-phase + IN and 3-phase
+ IN-separate. For other connection types respectively, only one option is possible. If you select an option
that is not allowed, an inconsistency message is given.
Depending on the CT secondary rated current, the CT connection type, and the selected setting, the secondary
threshold setting range varies according to the following table.
Table 6-2 Threshold Setting Range
Connec- Measured CT Threshold Setting Threshold Setting Threshold Setting Threshold Setting
tion Value Terminal Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.:
Type Type ph = 1 A, IN = 1 A) ph = 1 A, IN = 5 A) ph = 5 A, IN = 1 A) ph = 5 A, IN = 5 A)
3I0 calcu- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 40.000 A N/A N/A 0.050 A to 200.00 A
lated tion
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A N/A N/A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
3ph + IN
urement
IN meas- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 40.000 A N/A N/A 0.050 A to 200.00 A
ured tion
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A N/A N/A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
urement
3I0 calcu- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 40.000 A 0.010 A to 40.000 A 0.050 A to 200.00 A 0.050 A to 200.00 A
lated tion
3 * Protec- 0.010 A to 40.000 A 0.010 A to 40.000 A 0.050 A to 200.00 A 0.050 A to 200.00 A
tion, 1 *
sen.
3ph + IN-separate
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A

urement
IN meas- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 40.000 A 0.050 A to 200.00 A 0.010 A to 40.000 A 0.050 A to 200.00 A
ured tion
3 * Protec- 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
tion, 1 *
sen.
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
urement
Parameter: Measured value
• Recommended setting value Measured value = IN Measured

This parameter is not available in the basic function.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

IN Measured The function operates with the measured ground current IN. This is the
recommended setting unless there is a specific reason to use the calculated
zero-sequence current 3I0.
3I0 Calculated The function operates with the calculated zero sequence current 3I0. This
setting option can be used when applying a redundant 50N/51N function for
safety reasons.
6.5.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:9 General:Measured • 3I0 calculated IN measured
value
• IN measured

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.5.4.1 Description
[lo_ocp_gb1, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-37 Logic Diagram Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_ocp_gnd_umz_adv_stage_control, 2, en_US]
[lo_ocp_gn1, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-39 Logic Diagram Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Advanced

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023




If the current falls below the dropout threshold, the dropout can be delayed for the time specified by the
parameter Dropout delay. During the dropout delay, the pickup is maintained. Meanwhile, the operate
delay continues to run (parameter Operate delay mode = Running dur. DO-delay) or is frozen
(parameter Operate delay mode = Frozen dur. DO-delay). If the operate delay expires while the

• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see Influence of other functions via dynamic
settings and 6.5.8.1 Description ).

is described in 6.5.7.1 Description.




C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

an overfunction.
added currents.
Parameter: Operate delay mode
• Default setting (_:661:7) Operate delay mode = Running dur. DO-delay

With the parameter Operate delay mode, you specify whether the operate delay continues to run or is
frozen during the dropout delay.
This setting is only valid if the parameter Dropout delay is not 0.
Running dur. DO-delay During the dropout delay, the operate delay continues to run.
Frozen dur. DO-delay During the dropout delay, the operate delay is frozen. If the current exceeds
the threshold value again, the operate delay continues to run.
• Default setting (_:751:3) Threshold = 1.20 A (for the first stage)
• Default setting (_:751:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite-time overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):

The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be determined.
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system.
2nd stage (high-current stage):

This tripping stage can also be used for current grading. This applies in the case of very long lines with
low source impedance or ahead of high reactances (for example, transformers, shunt reactors). Set the
Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short-circuit at the end of the
line.
Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value.
Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis. The following example
illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the
beginning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:
The 1-pole short-circuit current at the end of the line is IscG end:
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:
[fo_ocp_gr4, 3, en_US]
In case of short-circuit currents exceeding 1246 A (primary) or 10.39 A (secondary) there is a short-circuit on
the line to be protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source impe-
dance, line impedance and zero-sequence impedance have very different angles, you have use complex
numbers to calculate the Threshold.
• Recommended setting value (_:751:101) Dropout delay = 0

Siemens recommends using the default setting 0 since the dropout of a protection stage must be done as fast
as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it together
with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electromechanical
relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Technical Data) and
set the result.
• Recommended setting value (_:751:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

To achieve high-precision measurements, the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio can be
reduced, for example, to 0.98. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you
can increase the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the stage.
6.5.4.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
settings
• yes
• yes
_:751:102 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. 2nd • no no
harm. gnd. det.
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
ratio
delay
delay
_:751:7 Definite-T 1:Operate • Running dur. DO-delay Running dur.
delay mode DO-delay
• Frozen dur. DO-delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
6.5.5.1 Description
[lo_ocp_gr2, 6, en_US]
Figure 6-40 Logic Diagram Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_ocp_gn2, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-41 Logic Diagram Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Advanced
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

With the parameter Min. time of the curve, you define the minimum operate delay time. The operate
[dw_ocp_gr3_mi, 1, en_US]





• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see Influence of other functions via dynamic
settings and 6.5.8.1 Description ).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

is described in 6.5.7.1 Description.



an overfunction.
added currents.

Type of character. curve, refer to chapter13.7.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve.

With the Min. time of the curve parameter, you define a minimum operate delay time. The operate

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
• Recommended setting value (_:781:115) Additional time delay = 0.00 s

time delay.
curve.
recommend keeping the default setting of 0 s.

The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be determined.

Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the Time
dial parameter at 1.
Parameter: Reset

6.5.5.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

settings
• yes
curr. detect.
• yes
_:781:111 Inverse-T 1:Blk. w. 2nd • no no
harm. gnd. det.
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
acter. curve
the curve
• disk emulation
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1
6.5.6.1 Description
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.5.5.1 Description ). The only differences are as follows:
• You can define the characteristic curve as desired.
• The pickup and dropout behaviors of this stage are determined by the standard parameter Threshold
and, if necessary, by an additional parameter Threshold (absolute).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023


When the input variable exceeds the Threshold value by 1.1 times, the characteristic curve is processed.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x Threshold
value), the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior
NOTE
i The currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not extend
the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest character-
istic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve point do
not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest
characteristic-curve point.
If you want to change the pickup threshold of the stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve,
you can use the additional Threshold (absolute) parameter.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
You can set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be greater than 1.1 times the Threshold value.
Then the stage behaviors are as follows:
• The stage picks up when the measured current value exceeds the Threshold (absolute) value.
• The stage starts dropout when the measured current value falls short of the Threshold (absolute)
value by 0.95 times.
• For measured current values lower than the Threshold (absolute) value, no pickup takes place and
consequently the characteristic curve is not processed.
If you set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be less than 1.1 times the Threshold value, the
pickup and dropout behaviors are not affected by the Threshold (absolute) parameter.

This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage. The
only differences are described in chapter 6.5.6.1 Description . This chapter provides only the application and
setting notes for setting characteristic curves and for setting the Threshold (absolute) parameter. You
can find more information on the other parameters of the stage in chapter 6.5.5.2 Application and Setting
Notes .

NOTE

for the electrical power system. Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve is required, leave the Time dial parameter at 1.
Parameter: Reset

but an instantaneous dropout is desired.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

NOTE
Parameter: Threshold (absolute)
• Default setting (_:113) Threshold (absolute) = 0.000 A

With the Threshold (absolute) parameter, you define and change the absolute pickup threshold of the
stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve.
The parameter is only used for special applications. With the default setting, this functionality is disabled.
You can find more information in Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve ,
Page 563.
6.5.6.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
settings
• yes
• yes
_:111 User curve #:Blk. w. 2nd • no no
harm. gnd. det.
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
(absolute) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 200.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 40.000 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 200.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.000 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

• disk emulation
_:115 User curve #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

(Type)
User curve #

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
6.5.7.1 Description
The Blk. w. 2nd harm. gnd. det. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when the detected 2nd harmonic component of the ground current exceeds a
threshold value. In case of a blocking and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time
delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication.
If the blocking drops out and the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the
stage operates.
stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-current detection. Only if the central function Inrush-
current detection (see section 13.10 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.
[lo_ocp_grd, 2, en_US]
(1) From FB Inrush-current detection

(2) From FB 2nd harmonic ground-current detection

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023


transformer.
Parameter: Blk. w. 2nd harm. gnd. det.
• Default setting (_:751:102) Blk. w. 2nd harm. gnd. det. = no

no If no 3I0/IN current flow due to CT saturation with a level above the pickup
threshold is expected, select this setting.
yes If 3I0/IN current flow due to CT saturation with a level above the pickup
threshold is expected, the blocking must be activated. This provides stability
for the following conditions:
• CT saturation without inrush current since a saturated signal also

contains 2nd-harmonic content
• Phase inrush current that leads to CT saturation and therefore causes
2nd-harmonic inrush current being present also in the parasitic 3I0
current
6.5.8.1 Description
The Threshold and Operate delay settings used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings.
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically. Depending
on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically. This functionality is only available in function
type Advanced.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_ocp_gnd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-45 Principle of the Dynamic Settings in the Example of 1st Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings for the Threshold and the Operate
delay are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is provided with a
configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings (Operate delay
and Threshold). The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not, this
means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for example, signal
function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these parameter settings become dynamic, that is, instantly
active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes
inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Automatic Reclosing (Advanced Stage)
[lo_ocp_grnd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-46 Influence of the AREC Signals on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage and its blocking.
• AREC is ready for reclosing 4 (= Automatic reclosing cycle >3)

The following signal can only block the protection stage:
• AREC is not ready or switched off (= Automatic reclosing off / not ready)
This means that if the AREC is ready and the protection stage is in the idle state, the settings for
AREC cycle 1 are active and not the standard settings. The standard settings are active in the case of
AREC off/not ready.
The influence can be activated for each signal individually. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate
delay or Stage blocked parameters, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way AREC signals are generated is described in chapter 6.48.1 Overview of Functions.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Advanced Stage)
[lo_ocp_kal_gnd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-47 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage for a cold-load pickup. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate the influence of the
cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to Stage
blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in chapter 5.9.8 Cold-Load Pickup Detection
(Optional).
Link to an External Function via a Binary Input Signal (Advanced Stage)
[lo_ocp_bin_gnd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-48 Influence of the Binary Input on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay of the protection stage. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign
settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
6.5.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage)
Binary Input Signal: Dynamic settings

yes If a device-internal function (automatic reclosing function or cold-load
pickup detection) or an external function should affect the overcurrent-
protection stage (such as change the setting of the threshold value or time
delay, blocking of the stage), the setting must be changed to yes.
This makes the configuration parameters Influence of function...
as well as the dynamic settings Threshold, Operate delay and Stage
blocked of the stage visible and enables the settings to be set for the
specific influence.
Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent-protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic
reclosing describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent level (1st level) results from the time-grading schedule. It is to be used as fast
stage before an automatic reclosing. Because fast disconnection of the short-circuit current takes priority over
the selectivity prior to reclosing, the Operate delay parameter can be set to 0 or to a very low value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set
to the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
Influence of External Devices

The influence of an external device can also be configured. The above is an example of how the overcurrent-
protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing, in which case the AREC
function is performed by an external device.
To realize the application, the configuration setting Effected by binary input must be changed to yes
(= influenced). This activates the >Activ. dyn. settings input signal within the stage. When the input
signal becomes active, it switches to the assigned dynamic settings. The external device must provide the
Cycle 1 and Cycle 2 signals or, alternatively, an AREC ready signal. The signals must be connected with
the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings.
The dynamic setting Operate delay, which is assigned to the input signal (source of influence) >Activ.
dyn. settings, is set to the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The dynamic setting Threshold
assigned to this input signal is set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function (ANSI 67):
• Detects short circuits at electrical equipment
• Ensures selective fault detection for parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end
• Ensures selective fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to form ring
topologies
The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups. 2 function
types are offered:
• Directional overcurrent protection, phases – advanced (67 Dir.OC-3ph-A)
• Directional overcurrent protection, phases – basic (67 Dir.OC-3ph-B)

The Basic function type is provided for standard applications. The Advanced function type offers more func-
Both function types are preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 directional, definite-time overcurrent
protection stages and with 1 directional inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the advanced function type Directional overcurrent protection, phases – advanced the following stages
can be operated simultaneously:
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced
• 1 stage User-defined overcurrent protection characteristic curve

In the Basic function type Directional overcurrent protection, phases – basic the following stages can be
operated simultaneously:

Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figures. Apart from the tripping delay
The direction determination occurs on function level and has the same effects in all stages (see following
figure and 6.6.7.1 Description ). In this way, it is ensured that all stages of a function receive the same
direction result. Every stage can be set to the forward or reverse direction.
• Pickup
• Operate

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_diocan, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-49 Structure/Embedding the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Advanced
[dw_diocba, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-50 Structure/Embedding the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Basic
If the device-internal functions listed in the following are present in the device, these functions can influence
the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an

If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against
tripping due to transformer-inrush currents.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.6.3 Stage Control
6.6.3.1 Description
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages.
[lo_docp_n2, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-51 Stage-Control Logic Diagram
Blocking of the Stage with Measuring-Voltage Failure (Basic and Advanced Stage)
The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see chapter 9.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions)
• Recommended setting value (_:8131:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following two conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and

switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 9.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

yes The directional overcurrent-protection stage is blocked. Siemens recom-
mends that you retain the default setting, as correct direction determination
cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-voltage failure occurs.
no The directional overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked.
6.6.4.1 Description
[lo_docg6b, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-52 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Basic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_docp_31, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-53 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Advanced
Directional Mode (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse
direction.
Direction determination itself works across stages (see section 6.6.7.1 Description ).
Non-Directional Pickup, Voltage Memory (Basic and Advanced Stage)

If a 3-phase close-up fault occurs, all 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop to almost 0. If this happens, direc-
tion determination can fall back on a voltage memory (see chapter 6.6.7.1 Description ). If no voltage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
measurements which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory, the basic
stage generally picks up without direction determination, that is non-directionally. For the advanced stage,
the response can be defined via the Non-directional pickup parameter. With the at volt.< &
mem.empty setting, the function picks up in such a situation without direction determination. With the no
setting, the function does not pick up.
Directional Comparison Protection (Advanced Stage)

The stage can be used for directional comparison protection. This is set using the Directional compar-
ison parameter. With the yes setting, the function uses the threshold-value violation to determine the
direction (forward or reverse) and reports the indication Direction. The direction indicated is independent
of the directional mode set for the stage.
The Release via input signal setting and the >Release delay & op. input signal are available
with directional comparison protection. If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the
start of the time delay, and therefore the tripping of the stage, are only enabled if the >Release delay &
op. input signal is active.




If the value falls below the dropout threshold, the dropout can be delayed. The pickup is maintained for
the specified time. The tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires while the pickup is still
maintained, the stage operates.

• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.6.3.1 Description )
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.6.3.1 Description )
• Via the dynamic settings function (only provided in the Advanced function type, see chapter Influence of
other functions via dynamic settings and chapter 6.3.8.1 Description )


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023


The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.3.8.1 Description .
Parameter: Directional mode
• Default setting (_:8131:105) Directional mode = forward

You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in a forward direction (in the
direction of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in a reverse direction (in the
direction of the busbar).

an overfunction.
added currents.
Parameter: Directional comparison, Release via input signal
• Default setting (_:8131:104) Directional comparison = no
• Default setting (_:8131:106) Release via input signal = no

These 2 parameters are not visible in the basic stage.
You use these parameters to define whether the stage is to be used for directional comparison protection.
Directional comparison protection is performed via the Direction and >Release delay & op. signals.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

no The stage is not used for directional comparison protection.
yes If the Directional comparison parameter is set to yes, the Release
via input signal parameter, the Direction output signal, and the
>Release delay & op. input signal become available.
If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the start
of the time delay, and therefore also the operate signal of the stage, are
only enabled if the >Release delay & op. input signal is active. The
>Release delay & op. input signal must be connected to the release
information from the opposite end (forward information from the Direc-
tion output signal); see also the application example in 6.6.10 Application
Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .
Parameter: Non-directional pickup
• Recommended setting value (_:8131:107) Non-directional pickup = at volt.< &

mem.empty
at volt.< & mem.empty Select this setting if the stage is to pick up in a non-directional manner if the
voltage memory is empty and determining of direction has to be performed
at low voltages (3-phase close-up fault). An empty voltage memory may
exist, for example, if there is a voltage transformer at the line end and the
circuit breaker (CB) trips.
no Select this setting if determining of direction is required under all circum-
stances, that is, even in the event of pickup on a 3-phase close-up fault.

The same considerations apply to setting the threshold value as for non-directional overcurrent protection. For
further information, refer to section 6.3.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the system.
Typical examples of grading times are provided in 6.6.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable Runs
with Infeed at Both Ends and 6.6.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .

For high-precision measurements, the setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter can be reduced, for
example to 0.98. If you expect heavily fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you can increase the
setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
• Recommended setting value (_:8131:101) Dropout delay = 0 s


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Siemens recommends using this setting value, since the dropout of a protection stage must be performed as
fast as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 s to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use
it together with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the
electromechanical relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see
Technical Data) and set the result.
6.6.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 ° to 180 ° 45 °
of ref. volt.
General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:8131:105 Definite-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:8131:107 Definite-T 1:Non-direc- • no at volt.< &
tional pickup mem.empty
• at volt.< & mem.empty
_:8131:104 Definite-T 1:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:8131:106 Definite-T 1:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
_:8131:10 Definite-T 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
settings
• yes
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
ratio
delay
delay

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:501 General:>Test of direction SPS I
_:2311:301 General:Test direction ACD O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:8131:501 Definite-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:8131:300 Definite-T 1:Direction ACD O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.6.5.1 Description
[lo_doci6b, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-54 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Basic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_docp_33, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-55 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Advanced

direction.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.6.7.1 Description ).
Non-Directional Pickup, Voltage Memory (Basic and Advanced Stage)

If a 3-phase close-up fault occurs, all 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop to almost 0. If this happens, direc-
tion determination can fall back on a voltage memory (see chapter 6.6.7.1 Description ). If no voltage
measurements which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory, the basic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
stage generally picks up without direction determination, that is non-directionally. For the advanced stage,
the response can be defined via the Non-directional pickup parameter. With the at volt.< &
mem.empty setting, the function picks up in such a situation without direction determination. With the no
setting, the function does not pick up.

ison parameter. With the yes setting, the function uses the threshold-value violation to determine the
direction (forward or reverse) and reports the indication Direction. The direction indicated is independent
of the directional mode set for the stage.
The Release via input signal setting and the >Release delay & op. input signal are available
with directional comparison protection. If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the
start of the time delay, and therefore the tripping of the stage, are only enabled if the >Release delay &
op. input signal is active.
Advanced Stage)

[dw_docp_01, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023


• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.6.3.1 Description )
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.6.3.1 Description )
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (only in the advanced function type, see subtitle
Influence of other functions via dynamic settings and chapter 6.3.8.1 Description ).

You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is opened.


The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.3.8.1 Description .

forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in a forward direction (in the
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in a reverse direction (in the


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

an overfunction.
added currents.
• Default setting (_:8161:112) Release via input signal = no

These 2 parameters are not visible in the basic stage.
You use these parameters to define whether the stage is to be used for directional comparison protection.
If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the start
of the time delay, and therefore also the operate signal of the stage, are
only enabled if the >Release delay & op. input signal is active. The
>Release delay & op. input signal must be connected to the release
information from the opposite end (forward information from the Direc-
tion output signal); see also the application example in 6.6.10 Application
Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .
Parameter: Non-directional pickup
• Recommended setting value (_:8161:113) Non-directional pickup = at volt.< &

mem.empty
at volt.< & mem.empty Select this setting if the stage is to pick up in a non-directional manner if the
voltage memory is empty and determining of direction has to be performed
at low voltages (3-phase close-up fault). An empty voltage memory may
exist, for example, if there is a voltage transformer at the line end and the
CB trips.
no Select this setting if determining of direction is required under all circum-
stances, that is, even in the event of pickup on a 3-phase close-up fault.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

NOTE

time delay.
curve.

The same considerations apply to setting the threshold value as for non-directional overcurrent protection.
Therefore, refer to 6.3.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for further information.

Use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for
the electrical power system.
dial parameter at 1 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset

You use the Reset parameter to define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.6.5.3 Settings

General
_:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 ° to 180 ° 45 °
of ref. volt.
General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:8341:111 Inverse-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
_:8341:11 Inverse-T 1:1-pole • no no
operate allowed
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:8341:113 Inverse-T 1:Non-direc- • no at volt.< &
_:8341:110 Inverse-T 1:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:8341:112 Inverse-T 1:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
_:8341:10 Inverse-T 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
settings
• yes
curr. detect.
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
acter. curve
the curve
• disk emulation
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
off/n.ready
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

(Type)
General
Group indicat.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Inverse-T 1
_:8161:501 Inverse-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:8161:84 Inverse-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:8161:62 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:8161:65 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:8161:66 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:8161:67 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:8161:68 Inverse-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:8161:300 Inverse-T 1:Direction ACD O
6.6.6.1 Description
The structure of this stage is identical to that of the advanced stage with directional inverse-time characteristic
curve (6.6.4.1 Description ). The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.

With the directional, user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using
up to 30 value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic
curve from these values. You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with User-Defined Characteristic Curve

When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by 1.1 times, the characteristic curve is processed.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 6-57 Pickup and Dropout Behaviors when Using a Directional User-Defined Characteristic Curve
NOTE
i Note that the currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do
not extend the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest
characteristic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve
point do not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the
largest characteristic-curve point.

This stage is structured in the same way as the stage with a directional inverse-time characteristic curve. The
only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired. This chapter only provides application
and setting notes for setting characteristic curves.

Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-curve
point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
NOTE


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for
the electrical power system. Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve
is required, leave the Time dial parameter set to 1.
Parameter: Reset


NOTE
6.6.6.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:110 User curve #:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:112 User curve #:Non-direc- • no at volt.< &
_:109 User curve #:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:111 User curve #:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
_:10 User curve #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

settings
• yes
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
• disk emulation
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
User curve #
_:501 User curve #:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:309 User curve #:Direction ACD O
6.6.7 Direction Determination
6.6.7.1 Description
General
Every phase has a separate direction-measuring element. If the threshold value in a phase is exceeded, the
direction determination is started for this phase. If there are multiphase short circuits, all measuring elements
involved perform direction determination independently. If one of the determined directions matches the set
direction, the stage picks up (see descriptions of the stage logic).
The direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between the short-circuit current and a reference
voltage.
Measurands for Direction Determining

The directional measuring element uses the short-circuit current of the phase concerned and the cross-polar-
ized phase-to-phase voltage (as the reference voltage) to determine the direction. This means that the
direction can still be determined unambiguously and correctly, even if the short-circuit voltages collapse
completely when a 1-phase or 2-phase fault occurs (close-up fault).
The phase-to-phase voltages are calculated when phase-to-ground voltages are connected.
The cross-polarized voltage (reference voltage) is vertical in relation to the short-circuit voltages for 1-phase-
to-ground faults (Figure 6-58, left). For 2-phase short circuits, the position of the reference voltages changes
up to 30o, depending on the extent to which the short-circuit voltages collapse (Figure 6-58, right).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 6-58 Cross-Polarized Voltages for Direction Determination
The following table shows how measurands are assigned for direction-determination purposes in the event of
different types of fault.
Table 6-3 Measurands for Direction Determining
Threshold- Measuring Element

Value A B C Ground
Exceeding Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage
A IA VBC – – – – – –
B – – IB VCA – – – –
C – – – – IC VAB – –
Gnd – – – – – – Ir V0
A, Gnd – VBC – – – – Ir V0
B, Gnd – – IB VCA – – Ir V0
C, Gnd – – – – IC VAB Ir V0
A, B IA VBC IB VCA – – – –
B, C – – IB VCA IC VAB – –
A, C IA VBC – – IC VAB – –
A, B, Gnd IA VBC IB VCA – – Ir V0
B, C, Gnd – – IB VCA IC VAB Ir V0
A, C, Gnd IA VBC – – IC VAB Ir V0
A, B, C IA VBC IB VCA IC VAB – –
A, B, C, Gnd IA VBC IB VCA IC VAB Ir V0
Voltage Memory
Saved voltages are used if, when a 3-pole close-up fault occurs, the measuring voltages are not sufficient
for reliable direction determination. Insofar as and as long as no sufficient measuring voltage is available
after the storage time (2 s) has elapsed, the detected direction is retained. If the memory does not contain
any voltages (when closing onto a short circuit, for example), the behavior of the stage is defined using the
Non-directional pickup parameter.
Direction Determination
As mentioned in the General section, the direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between
short-circuit current and reference voltage. To take different system conditions and applications into account,
the reference voltage can be rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt.
parameter). This moves the vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector of the short-circuit

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
current. Consequently, the result of direction determination is as reliable as possible. Figure 6-59 illustrates
the relationship based on a 1-phase ground fault in phase A. The short-circuit current IscA lags the short-circuit
voltage by the short-circuit angle φsc. The reference voltage, in this case VBC for measuring element A,
is rotated positively (counterclockwise) by the setting value of the Rotation angle of ref. volt.
parameter. In the scenario illustrated here, the rotation is +45o.
Figure 6-59 Rotation of the Reference Voltage, Phase-Measuring Element
The rotated reference voltage defines the forward and reverse range, as shown in Figure 6-60. The forward
range is calculated as ±88o around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. If the short-circuit current vector is
located in this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range, the device decides on
the backward direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.
Figure 6-60 Forward Characteristic of the Directional Function, Phase-Measuring Element
Direction Determination for Test Purposes

If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction, the direction is determined and indicated even
without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. The direction can be determined as soon
as current and voltage are greater than approx. 7 % of their secondary rated values.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Rotation angle of ref. volt.
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rotation angle of ref. volt.= 45o

The directional characteristic, that is, the position of the forward and reverse ranges, is set with the Rota-
tion angle of ref. volt. parameter. The short-circuit angle is typically to be found in a range from 30°
to 60° inductive. Therefore, in most cases, the default setting of +45o can be retained to position the reference
voltage, as it ensures a reliable directional result.
Some example settings for special applications appear in the following (Table 6-4). Please note that for
phase-to-ground faults (PG faults), the reference voltage (fault-free voltage) is vertical in relation to the
short-circuit voltage. This results in the following setting for the rotation angle:
Rotation angle of ref. volt. = 90 - φsh phase-measuring elements (PG faults)
Please also note that for phase-to-phase faults, the reference voltage is rotated between 0° (distant fault) and
30o (close-up fault) dependent upon the collapse of the faulted voltage (see Figure 6-59). You can take this
into account with an average value of 15°.
Rotation angle of ref. volt. = 90 - φsh - 15o phase-measuring elements (PP faults)
Table 6-4 Example settings
Application φsh typical Setting

Rotation angle of ref. volt.
60o Range 30o to 0o for PP faults
Selected: 15o

Selected: 45o

Selected: 45o
Input signal: >Test of direction

without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. This provides an easy means of checking
the direction during commissioning, without changing the threshold values of the stages.
The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.3.8.1 Description and chapter
6.3.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) .

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.6.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends
Parallel Lines or Transformers

In parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end (see Figure 6-61), if there is no directional measuring
element, a fault on feeder T1 will also trip the other feeder T2. In contrast, a directional measuring element
in the devices on busbar B prevents the tripping of the circuit breaker in the parallel feeder. Therefore, in
Figure 6-61, directional overcurrent protection is used in the places marked with direction arrows. Please note
that the forward direction of the protection device represents the direction towards the object to be protected.
This does not have to be the same as the power direction of normal power flow.
Set time grading in opposition to the power flow with increasing time. As load can only flow in one direction,
you can set the directional devices without time delay.
Figure 6-61 Parallel Line with Transformers
Legend for Figure 6-61

Stage ▶: Directional stage, forward direction set
Stage: Non-directional stage
T: Grading time
Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends

Cable runs with infeed at both ends and lines connected to form ring topologies also require that you supple-
ment overcurrent protection with the directional criterion. Figure 6-62 shows a ring system implementation,
with the 2 infeeds shown merging in the ring to form a single infeed. For the directional devices whose
forward direction matches the power-flow direction, set time grading in opposition to the power flow with
increasing time. As power flow from both ends is possible, grading has to be set at both ends.
Figure 6-62 Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends

Stage ▶: Directional stage, forward direction set
Stage: Non-directional stage
T: Grading time

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.6.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection
The direction determination of directional overcurrent protection can be used to implement directional
comparison protection for cable runs with infeed at both ends. Directional comparison protection is used
for the selective isolation of a faulted line section (for example, subsections of closed rings). Sections are
isolated in fast time, that is, they do not suffer the disadvantage of long grading times.
This technique requires that directional information can be exchanged between the individual protection
stations. You can implement this information exchange using a communication channel (protection interface
or IEC 61850 GOOSE) or with pilot wires for signal transmission via an auxiliary voltage loop.
Protection Principle
The protection principle is shown in Figure 6-63. 2 devices (one at the start of the line and the other at the
end of the line) work together in each line section. The information fault in forward direction is transferred
between them. A directional definite-time overcurrent protection level is in operation in both devices in the
forward direction (1st level). However, this level is not enabled in the idle state. The level is only released
when the information fault in forward direction is received from the opposite end. If the enabled level also
defines the fault in the forward direction, the fault must be on this line section and the level trips immediately.
As this protection principle works with an enable procedure (and not with a blocking procedure), there is no
need to delay the level.
A second directional definite-time overcurrent protection stage with standard time grading works in parallel
with the first stage as a selective backup stage. This ensures full selectivity of protection in the following
situations:
• Infeed at one end or weak infeed at one end: In this case, no release signal is generated.
• Failure of the communication route: In this case, the release signal is not transmitted.
To provide selective protection in fast time for busbars between the line sections also, you can combine this
protection principle with the principle of reverse interlocking. This principle is not discussed in further detail in
this document.
Figure 6-63 Selectivity through Directional Comparison Protection

Stage ▶: Stage is set in the forward direction; stage 1 is instantaneous, stage 2 is graded
▶, ◀: If a threshold value is exceeded, the stage indicates the direction (forward or reverse)
If you are using a communication channel, the protocol-transmission methods detect if the channel is inter-
rupted. If you are using pilot wires, Siemens recommends an operation based on a closed-circuit connection.
The device uses a CFC chart to check and indicate if the binary input is dead for an unexpectedly long period.
In contrast with the blocking procedure, overfunction is not possible if communication is lost. Therefore, a
loss of communication is not critical where this procedure is concerned, although it must be detected and
indicated.
Directional comparison protection can also be implemented as a blocking procedure. This procedure works
under all system switching states, i.e. also with infeed at one end (or weak infeed). However, to use it
you must delay the stage (typically by 100 ms) so that the blocking signal is received in time under all

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
circumstances. It is also essential that you monitor the communication channel to avoid overfunction in the
event of failure followed by a system incident.
Configuration of the Stage, CFC Chart

To configure the stage, proceed as follows:
• The Directional mode parameter of both stages must be set to forward
• The Directional comparison and Release via input signal parameters of the first stage
must be set to yes. This is so that the first stage is only released if the >Release delay & op. input
signal is active. Furthermore, the direction is indicated if a threshold value is exceeded.
• The first stage can be set without a time delay. The second stage has to be graded
• The information forward from the Direction signal in the first stage must be transmitted to the
opposite end. The routing is determined by the type of transmission
• A CFC chart has to be implemented at the receive end to link the received (forward information) and
release signals, dependent upon the type of transmission.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
The Directional overcurrent protection, ground function (ANSI 67N):
• Detects short circuits to ground affecting electric equipment
• Ensures selective ground-fault detection for parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end
• Ensures selective ground-fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to
form ring topologies
The Directional overcurrent protection, ground function can be used in protection function groups which
provide zero-sequence current and zero-sequence voltage measurements. 2 function types are offered:
• Directional overcurrent protection, ground – advanced (67N Dir.OC-gnd-A)
• Directional overcurrent protection, ground – basic (67N Dir.OC-gnd-B)

The basic function type shall be used for standard applications. The advanced function type provides more
functionalities and is intended for more sophisticated applications.
Both function types are preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
stages and 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the advanced function type Directional overcurrent protection, ground – advanced, the following stages
can operate simultaneously:
• A maximum of 4 Definite-time overcurrent protection – advanced stages
• 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage
• 1 Logarithmic inverse-time overcurrent protection stage
• 1 Logarithmic inverse time with knee-point overcurrent protection stage
• 1 User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection stage

In the basic function type Directional overcurrent protection, ground – basic, the following stages can
operate simultaneously:
• A maximum of 4 Definite-time overcurrent protection – basic stages
• 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection – basic stage

Referring to Figure 6-64 and Figure 6-65, the stages not preconfigured are shown in gray. Apart from the
operate-delay characteristic curve, the stages are similar in structure.
The general functionality includes the direction determination and the measured-value selection (only
advanced function). They take place on the functional level and have a uniform effect on the stages (see
Figure 6-64 and chapter 6.5.3 General Functionality). This ensures that all stages of the function receive the
same measured current value and the same direction result. Each stage can be set to work in forward or
reverse direction.
The group indication output logic generates the following group indications for the protection function by the
logic OR from the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_rdirad, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-64 Structure/Embedding of the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced
[dw_rdirba, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-65 Structure/Embedding of the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic
If the following listed device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and operate delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an

operate due to transformer-inrush currents.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.7.3.1 Measured-Value Selection
Logic
The function provides the option to select between the values IN measured or 3I0 calculated.
[lo_meas_value, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-66 Logic Diagram of Measured-Value Selection
Both options are only available for the current-transformer connection types 3-phase + IN and 3-phase
+ IN-separate. For other connection types respectively, only one option is possible. If you select an option
that is not allowed, an inconsistency message is given.
Depending on the CT secondary rated current, the CT connection type, and the selected setting, the secondary
threshold setting range varies according to the following table.
Connec- Measured CT Terminal Type Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold

tion Type Value Setting Range Setting Range Setting Range Setting Range
(rated I-sec.: (rated I-sec.: (rated I-sec.: (rated I-sec.:
ph = 1 A, IN = 1 ph = 1 A, IN = 5 ph = 5 A, IN = 1 ph = 5 A, IN = 5
A) A) A) A)
3I0 calculated 4 * Protection 0.030 A to N/A N/A 0.15 A to
40.000 A 200.00 A
4 * Measurement 0.001 A to N/A N/A 0.005 A to
3ph + IN
1.600 A 8.000 A
IN measured 4 * Protection 0.030 A to N/A N/A 0.15 A to
40.000 A 200.00 A
4 * Measurement 0.001 A to N/A N/A 0.005 A to
1.600 A 8.000 A
3I0 calculated 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 0.030 A to 0.15 A to 0.15 A to
40.000 A 40.000 A 200.00 A 200.00 A
3 * Protection, 1 * 0.030 A to 0.030 A to 0.15 A to 0.15 A to
sen. 40.000 A 40.000 A 200.00 A 200.00 A
3ph + IN-separate
4 * Measurement 0.001 A to 0.001 A to 0.005 A to 0.005 A to

1.600 A 1.600 A 8.000 A 8.000 A
IN measured 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 0.15 A to 0.030 A to 0.15 A to
40.000 A 200.00 A 40.000 A 200.00 A
3 * Protection, 1 * 0.001 A to 0.005 A to 0.001 A to 0.005 A to
sen. 1.600 A 8.000 A 1.600 A 8.000 A
4 * Measurement 0.001 A to 0.005 A to 0.001 A to 0.005 A to
1.600 A 8.000 A 1.600 A 8.000 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.7.3.2 Direction Determination
Logic of Direction Determination

The following figure represents the logic of the direction determination. It applies to all types of stages.
[lo_dirdet, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-67 Logic Diagram of Direction Determination
Measurand for the Direction Determination

With the parameter Direct. determination with you define whether the direction determination is
calculated with the zero-sequence components 3I0 and V0 or with the negative-sequence components I2 and
V2, which are present during faults in the network.
The angle between IN (=-3I0) and V0 (respectively -I2 and V2) in case of using the negative-sequence compo-
nents is available as a functional measured value. This value is only present during faults in the network.
[dw_UI_kenn, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-68 Measured-Value Definition
Start of the Direction Determination

If the zero-sequence current 3I0 exceeds the pickup threshold of a stage and the selected voltage (V0 or V2)
exceeds the parameter Min. voltage V0 or V2 as well, the direction determination is started.
Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence Values

The direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between the short-circuit current -3I0 and the
rotated reference voltage Vref, rot. Contrary to the Directional overcurrent protection, phase function, which
works with the healthy voltage as reference voltage, the fault voltage V0 itself is the reference voltage for the
Directional overcurrent protection, ground function. To take different system conditions and applications

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
into account, the reference voltage V0 can be rotated through an adjustable angle (parameter Rotation
angle of ref. volt. ). This moves the vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector of
the short-circuit current -3I0. Consequently, the result of direction determination is as reliable as possible.
Figure 6-69 illustrates the relationship based on a 1-phase-to-ground fault in phase A. The fault current has
a phase displacement of 180° to the fault current IscA and lags the fault voltage by the fault angle φsc. The
reference voltage V0 is rotated by φrot which is -45°.
[dw_roreze, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-69 Rotation of the Reference Voltage, Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Function with
Zero-Sequence Values
The rotated reference voltage Vref, rot and the parameter Forward section +/- define the forward and
reverse ranges, see Figure 6-70. The forward range is calculated as ± Δφ° around the rotated reference voltage
Vref, rot. Δφ is set with the parameter Forward section +/- . If the short-circuit current vector -3I0 is
located in this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range, the device decides on
the reverse direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_forrev, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-70 Forward/Reverse Characteristic of the Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Function
Direction Determination with Negative-Sequence Values

The method works in the same way as for zero-sequence values. Instead of 3I0 and V0, the negative-sequence
values I2 and V2 are used for determining the direction.
Direction Determination for Test Purposes

If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction , the direction is determined and indicated
even without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. The direction can be determined
as soon as the zero-sequence current 3I0 and the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds approx. 7 % of the
secondary rated values of phase current and voltage.
• Recommended setting value (_:9) Measured value = IN Measured

This parameter is not available in the basic function.
IN Measured The function operates with the measured ground current IN. This is the
recommended setting unless there is a specific reason to use the calculated
zero-sequence current 3I0.
3I0 Calculated The function operates with the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0. This
setting option can be used when applying a redundant 50N/51N function for
safety reasons.
Parameter: Min. voltage V0 or V2
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Min. voltage V0 or V2 = 2 V

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
This parameter is not available in the basic function. The basic function uses a fixed value of 2 V.
You use the Min. voltage V0 or V2 parameter to define the minimum zero-sequence voltage or
negative-sequence voltage for the direction determination. The minimum voltage must be set greater than
the maximum operational unbalance plus the voltage-transformer measuring errors.
As the measuring error of the individual voltage transformer is not added up, the critical measuring-error
influence is the unbalance of the primary system.
Siemens recommends observing the operational zero-sequence voltage V0 of the protected object (for
example, the line) via the operational measured values of the device and providing the maximum value
with a certainty of 50 %.
EXAMPLE
Maximum operational measured value of zero-sequence voltage V0 = 0.5 Vsec
Min. voltage V0 or V2 = 1.5 ⋅ 0.5 V = 0.75 Vsec
If you have no information about maximum operational unbalance, Siemens recommends using the default
setting.
Parameter: Rotation angle of ref. volt. / Forward section +/-
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) Rotation angle of ref. volt.= -45°
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:103) Forward section +/- = 88°

The parameter Forward section +/- is not available in the basic function. The basic function uses a fixed
value of 88°.
The direction characteristic, that is, the area of the forward and reverse ranges, is set with the Rotation
angle of ref. volt. and the Forward section +/- parameters. The short-circuit angle is typically to
be found in a range from -30° to -60° inductively. Therefore, in most cases, the default setting of -45° can be
retained to position the reference voltage, as it ensures a reliable directional result.
Some example settings for special applications appear below Table 6-6. Note that for 1-phase-to-ground faults
(PG faults), the reference voltage is the zero-sequence voltage V0. This results in the following setting for the
rotation angle:
Rotation angle of ref. volt. = -φk ground-measuring elements (PG faults)
Table 6-6 Example Settings
Application φk Typical Setting

Rotation angle of ref. volt.
60° -60°

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
30° -30°
30° -30°
Parameter: Direct. determination with
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Direct. determination with = zero sequence

This parameter is not available in the basic function. The basic function uses always zero-sequence compo-
nents for the direction determination.
You use the parameter Direct. determination with to select the values for the direction determina-
tion.
zero sequence Select zero sequence to determine the direction via the zero-sequence
components V0 and 3I0.
Siemens recommends using the zero-sequence components for the direction
determination.
negative sequence Select negative sequence to determine the direction via the negative-
sequence components V2 and I2.
The negative-sequence system can be used in case of danger that the zero-
sequence voltage is too small due to unfavorable zero-sequence impedance
conditions or that a parallel line influences the zero-sequence system.
Input Signal: >Test of direction

without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. This provides an easy means of checking
the direction during commissioning, without changing the threshold values of the stages.
6.7.3.4 Settings

General
_:2311:9 General:Measured value • 3I0 calculated IN measured
• IN measured
_:2311:101 General:Min. voltage V0 0.150 V to 20.000 V 2.000 V
or V2
_:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 ° to 180 ° -45 °
of ref. volt.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:2311:103 General:Forward section 0 ° to 90 ° 88 °
+/-
_:2311:104 General:Direct. determi- • zero sequence zero sequence
nation with
• negative sequence

(Type)
General
_:2311:351 General:Phi(I,V) MV O
6.7.4 Stage Control
6.7.4.1 Description
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages.
[lo_sta_con, 2, en_US]
Blocking of Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure

The stages can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• From an internal source on the pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links to the trip of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set to either block or not block the stage when the
Measuring-voltage failure detection function picks up.

You can use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a

yes The directional overcurrent-protection stage is blocked when a measuring-
voltage failure is detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting,
as correct direction determination cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-
voltage failure occurs.
no The directional overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked when a meas-
uring-voltage failure is detected.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.7.5.1 Description
[lo_dirovb, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-72 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_dirova, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-73 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced
Measurand (Basic and Advanced Stage)

The function uses the zero-sequence current (3I0) as a criterion for the ground fault.
Depending on the parameter setting connection type of the Measuring point I-3ph, the zero-sequence
current is measured or calculated. Depending on the applied CT terminal type, the 3I0 Threshold range
varies according to the following table.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Connection Type of the Ground Current CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting Range
Measuring Point (Secondary)
I-3ph
3-phase Calculated 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 40.000 A
3 * Protection, 1* sensitive 0.030 A to 40.000 A
4 * Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
x + IN Measured 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 40.000 A
x + IN-separate 3 * Protection, 1* sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A


This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nents numerically.

This measuring procedure determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the
defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse
direction.
The direction determination works across all stages (see chapter 6.7.3.2 Direction Determination).

• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.7.4.1 Description)
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.7.4.1 Description)
• Via the dynamic settings functionality (only available in the advanced function type, see Influence of
Other Functions via Dynamic Settings and chapter 6.7.10 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic
Settings)
Blocking of the Operate Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the operate delay and
thus also the generation of the operate signal. A running operate delay is reset. The pickup is indicated. Fault
logging and fault recording take place.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function (Basic
and Advanced Stage)
is described in chapter 6.5.7.1 Description

In case of undershooting of the dropout threshold, the dropout can be delayed. The pickup is maintained for
the specified time. The operate delay continues to run. If the operate delay expires while the pickup is still
maintained, the stage operates.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

ison parameter. With the yes setting, the direction indication Direction is released and the direction
(forward or reverse) is determined, if the current exceeds the threshold of the stage. The direction indicated is
independent of the directional mode set for the stage.
The Release via input signal parameter and the >Release delay & op. input signal are available
with directional comparison protection. If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes,
the start of the operate delay, and therefore the operate signal of the stage, are only enabled when the
>Release delay & op. input signal is active.

If available in the device, the following functions can exert an influence on the overcurrent-protection stage:

The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.7.10 Influence of Other
Functions via Dynamic Settings.

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in forward direction (in the direction
of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in reverse direction (in the direction
of the busbar).

an overfunction.
added currents.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Default setting (_:4861:106) Release via input signal= no

The parameters Directional comparison and Release via input signal are not visible for the
basic stage.
You can use these settings to define whether the stage is to be used for directional comparison protection.
If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the starts of
the operate delay and operate signal are only enabled when the >Release
delay & op. input signal is active. The >Release delay & op. input
signal must be connected to the enable information from the opposite end
(forward information from the Direction output signal).
See also the application example in 6.6.10 Application Notes for Directional
Comparison Protection

This parameter is not visible for the basic stage.
yes If a device-internal function (Automatic reclosing or Cold-load pickup
detection) or an external function should affect the overcurrent-protection
stage (such as change the setting of the threshold value or operate delay,
blocking of the stage), the setting must be changed to yes.
This makes the configuration parameters affected by Auto reclosing/Cold-
load PU/Binary input as well as the dynamic settings Threshold, Operate
delay, and Stage blocked of the stage visible and enables the settings to
be set for the specific influence.
For further setting notes, refer to 6.5.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) of the function
Overcurrent Protection, Ground.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023


transformer. This applies, for example, to the high-current stage that
is set according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc of the transformer in
such a way that the stage only picks up on faults from the high-voltage
side. The transformer inrush current cannot become larger than the
maximum transmittable short-circuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush-current detection detects an inrush current that
would lead to an operate of the stage, the start of the operate delay and
operate of the stage are blocked.
transformer.

For setting the threshold value, the same considerations apply as for the non-directional overcurrent protec-
tion function.
For further information, refer to 6.5.4.2 Application and Setting Notes .

The recommended setting value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications.
For high-precision measurements, the setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter can be reduced, for
example to 0.98. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup threshold, you can increase the
setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter. This avoids chattering of the stage.
• Recommended setting value (_:4861:101) Dropout delay = 0 s

Siemens recommends using the dropout delay of 0 s, since the dropout of a protection stage must be
performed as fast as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 s to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use
it together with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the
electromechanical relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see
Technical data) and set the result.
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for the system.
Typical examples of grading times are provided in sections 6.6.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable
Runs with Infeed at Both Ends and 6.6.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.7.5.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:4861:105 Definite-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:4861:104 Definite-T 1:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:4861:106 Definite-T 1:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
settings
• yes
• yes
harm. gnd. det.
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
ratio
delay
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:4861:501 Definite-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:4861:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:4861:300 Definite-T 1:Direction ACD O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.7.6.1 Description
[lo_diinvb, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-74 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_diinva, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-75 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced
Measurand (Basic and Advanced Stage)

The function uses the zero-sequence current (3I0) as a criterion for the ground fault.
Depending on the parameter setting connection type of the Measuring point I-3ph, the zero-sequence
current is measured or calculated. Depending on the applied CT terminal type, the 3I0 Threshold range
varies according to the following table.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Connection Type of the Ground Current CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting Range
Measuring Point I-3ph (Secondary)
3-phase Calculated 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 40.000 A
3 * Protection, 1* sensitive 0.030 A to 40.000 A
x + IN Measured 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 40.000 A
x + IN-separate 3 * Protection, 1* sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A

You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the standard method
(fundamental comp.) or the calculated RMS value.

This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nents numerically.

This measuring procedure determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the
defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse
direction.
The direction determination works across all stages (see 6.7.3.2 Direction Determination).
Advanced Stage)


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_min_time, 1, en_US]


• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see 6.7.4.1 Description)
• Measuring-voltage failure (see 6.7.4.1 Description)
• Via the dynamic settings functionality (only available in the advanced function type, see Influence of
Other Functions via Dynamic Settings and 6.7.10 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings)
Blocking of the Operate Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the operate delay and
thus also the generation of the operate signal. A running operate delay is reset. The pickup is indicated. Fault
logging and fault recording take place.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function (Basic
and Advanced Stage)
is described in Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection
For more information, refer to 6.5.7.1 Description.

ison parameter. With the yes setting, the direction indication Direction is released and the direction
(forward or reverse) is determined, if the current exceeds the threshold of the stage. The direction indicated is
independent of the directional mode set for the stage.
The Release via input signal parameter and the >Release delay & op. input signal are available
with directional comparison protection. If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes,
the start of the operate delay, and therefore the operate signal of the stage, are only enabled when the
>Release delay & op. input signal is active.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

If available in the device, the following functions can exert an influence on the overcurrent-protection stage:

The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in 6.7.10 Influence of Other Functions via
Dynamic Settings.

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in forward direction (in the
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in reverse direction (in the

an overfunction.
added currents.
• Default setting (_:4891:112) Release via input signal= no

The parameters Directional comparison and Release via input signal are not visible for the
basic stage.
You can use these settings to define whether the stage is to be used for directional comparison protection.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

yes If the Directional comparison parameter is set to yes, the
Release via input signal parameter, the Direction output
signal, and the >Release delay & op. input signal become avail-
able.
If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the
starts of the operate delay and operate signal are only enabled when
the >Release delay & op. input signal is active. The >Release
delay & op. input signal must be connected to the release infor-
mation from the opposite end (forward information from the Direc-
tion output signal).
See also the application example in chapter 6.6.10 Application Notes
for Directional Comparison Protection .

no The influence on the overcurrent-protection stage by device-internal
or external functions is not necessary.
yes If a device-internal function (Automatic reclosing or Cold-load
pickup detection) or an external function should affect the overcur-
rent-protection stage (such as change the setting of the threshold
value or operate delay, blocking of the stage), the setting must be
changed to yes.
This makes the configuration parameters affected by Auto reclosing/
Cold-load PU/Binary input as well as the dynamic settings
Threshold, Time dial, and Stage blocked of the stage visible
and enables the settings to be set for the specific influence.
For further setting notes, refer to chapter 6.5.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) of the
function Overcurrent Protection, Ground.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023


• In cases where the device is used on transformers and the
threshold value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush
current of the transformer. This applies, for example, to the high-
current stage that is set according to the short-circuit voltage
Vsc of the transformer in such a way that the stage only picks
up on faults from the high-voltage side. The transformer inrush
current cannot become larger than the maximum transmittable
shortcircuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush-current detection detects an inrush
current that would lead to an operate of the stage, the start of the
operate delay and operate of the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the
threshold value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current
of the transformer. This applies to the overcurrent-protection stage,
which is used as a backup stage with grading time for faults on the
undervoltage side of the transformer.

NOTE

time delay.
curve.
recommend keeping the default setting of 0 s.

The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be detected.
Consider that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value. The stage only picks up at
approx. 10 % above the Threshold.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023


prepared for the electrical power system.
dial parameter at 1 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset

You can use the Reset parameter setting to define whether the stage decreases according to the dropout
characteristic curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emula-
tion.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout does not have to be performed after a
disk emulation and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.
6.7.6.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:4891:111 Inverse-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:4891:110 Inverse-T 1:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:4891:112 Inverse-T 1:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
_:4891:10 Inverse-T 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
settings
• yes
curr. detect.
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

harm. gnd. det.
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
acter. curve
the curve
• disk emulation
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

(Type)
Inverse-T 1
_:4891:501 Inverse-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:4891:84 Inverse-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:4891:60 Inverse-T 1:Inrush blocks operate SPS O
_:4891:65 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:4891:66 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:4891:67 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:4891:68 Inverse-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:4891:300 Inverse-T 1:Direction ACD O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.7.7 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse

Characteristic Curve
6.7.7.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo_diloin, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-77 Logic Diagram of the Directional Logarithmic Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protection
– advanced stage (see chapter 6.7.6.1 Description).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.7.6.1 Description.
Operate Curve
If the function picks up, the logarithmic inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. A time value Top is
calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the pickup value. An integrator accumulates the value
1/Top. If the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the stage operates.
The curve used to calculate the time value Top is shown in the following figure. The Threshold multi-
plier parameter defines the beginning of the characteristic curve. The Max. time of the curve
determines the initial value of the characteristic curve. The Time dial parameter changes the slope of the
characteristic curve. At high currents, the Min. time of the curve parameter indicates the lower time
limit.
[dw_loginv, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-78 Operate Curve of Logarithmic Inverse-Time Characteristic
The time to operate is calculated with the following formula:
[fo_mula_01, 1, en_US]
Where
Tmax Maximum time of the curve (parameter Max. time of the curve)
Td Time dial (parameter Time dial)
Top Operate time
3I0 Measured zero-sequence current

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Ithresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)

Imul Threshold multiplier (parameter Threshold multiplier)
If the calculated time is less than Tmin (parameter Min. time of the curve), Tmin is used.

Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse-
time delay according to IEC and ANSI (advanced function type) (see 6.7.6.1 Description).
This section only discusses the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.7.6.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Stage Type Selection

If the operate delay is to be dependent on the current level according to a logarithmic characteristic curve,
select this stage type.
Dynamic Settings: Threshold

Define the pickup value corresponding to the application. In doing so, for time-graded stages, the settings of
the superordinate and of the subordinate stages in the time-grading chart must be taken into consideration.
Parameter: Threshold multiplier
• Default setting (_:116) Threshold multiplier = 1.1

You can use the Threshold multiplier parameter to define the beginning of the characteristic curve on
the current axis (in relation to the threshold value).
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.
EXAMPLE
Threshold (Secondary current) Ithresh = 1.2 A

Threshold multiplier Imul = 1.1
Pickup value (Secondary current) IPU = 1.2 A ×1.1 = 1.32 A
Dynamic Settings: Time dial
• Default setting (_:6) Time dial = 1.250 s

You can use the Time dial parameter to change the slope of the characteristic curve.
Parameter: Max. time of the curve
• Default setting (_:114) Max. time of the curve = 5.800 s

The parameter Max. time of the curve determines the initial value of the characteristic curve (for 3I0 =
Threshold).
• Default setting (_:113) Min. time of the curve = 1.200 s

The parameter Min. time of the curve determines the lower time limit (at high currents).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Recommended setting value (_:115) Additional time delay = 0 s

You can set an additional current-independent time delay. This additional delay is intended for special applica-
tions.
Siemens recommends setting this time to 0 s so that it has no effect.
6.7.7.3 Settings

General
_:1 Log.-inv.-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:119 Log.-inv.-T #:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
_:8 Log.-inv.-T #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:118 Log.-inv.-T #:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:120 Log.-inv.-T #:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
_:10 Log.-inv.-T #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:26 Log.-inv.-T #:Dynamic • no no
settings
• yes
_:27 Log.-inv.-T #:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:121 Log.-inv.-T #:Blk. w. 2nd • no no
harm. gnd. det.
• yes
_:3 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:6 Log.-inv.-T #:Time dial 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.250 s
_:113 Log.-inv.-T #:Min. time 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
of the curve
_:114 Log.-inv.-T #:Max. time 0.000 s to 60.000 s 5.800 s
of the curve
_:116 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1.00 to 4.00 1.10
multiplier
_:115 Log.-inv.-T #:Additional 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.000 s
time delay

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:28 Log.-inv.-T #:Effect. by • no no
AR off/n.ready
• yes
_:35 Log.-inv.-T #:Stage • no no
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:29 Log.-inv.-T #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:33 Log.-inv.-T #:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

(Type)
Log.-inv.-T #
_:81 Log.-inv.-T #:>Block stage I
_:501 Log.-inv.-T #:>Release delay & op. I
_:84 Log.-inv.-T #:>Activ. dyn. settings I
_:500 Log.-inv.-T #:>Block delay & op. I
_:54 Log.-inv.-T #:Inactive O
_:52 Log.-inv.-T #:Behavior O
_:53 Log.-inv.-T #:Health O
_:60 Log.-inv.-T #:Inrush blocks operate O
_:62 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:65 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act O
_:66 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. CLP active O
_:67 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. BI active O
_:68 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup O
_:55 Log.-inv.-T #:Pickup O
_:300 Log.-inv.-T #:Direction O
_:56 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate delay expired O
_:57 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.7.8 Stage with Knee-Point Characteristic Curve
6.7.8.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo_dilokn, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-79 Logic Diagram of the Directional Logarithmic Inverse Time with Knee-Point Overcurrent Protec-
tion, Ground
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is almost identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protec-
tion – advanced stage (see chapter 6.7.6.1 Description). The only difference is that the dynamic settings
change functionality is not available.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Operate Curve
calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the threshold value. An integrator accumulates the value
The curve used to calculate the time value Top is shown in the following graphic. The curve is composed of
2 sections with different slops. 7 parameters are used to define the logarithmic inverse time with knee-point
characteristic curve. The parameter Max. time of the curve determines the initial time value of the
characteristic curve, and relates to the 3I0 Threshold value. The transition point is defined by parameter
Knee-point current and parameter Knee-point time. The parameter Min. time of the curve
indicates the lower time limit, and parameter Current at Min. time determines the current value at
Min. time of the curve. The parameter Time dial servers as a time factor to the operate time.
[dw_loinkn, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-80 Operate Curve of the Logarithmic Inverse Time with Knee-Point Characteristic (In the Example
of Threshold = 0.004 A)

Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is almost identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protec-
tion – advanced stage (see chapter 6.7.6.1 Description). The only difference is that the dynamic settings
change functionality is not available.

You can use the Threshold parameter to define the pickup value of the stage corresponding to the specific
application.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Default setting (_:6) Time dial = 0.2

You can use the Time dial parameter to displace the operate curve in the time direction.
Parameter: Knee-point
• Default setting (_:101) Knee-point current = 1.300 A
• Default setting (_:105) Knee-point time = 23.60 s

You use the Knee-point current parameter and the Knee-point time parameter to define the knee-
point of the operate curve.
General information cannot be provided. Define the values corresponding to the application.
Parameter: Minimum Time of the Operate Curve
• Default setting (_:102) Current at Min. time = 1.500 A

Via the parameters Min. time of the curve and Current at Min. time, the point of the operate
curve is defined where higher currents do no longer cause shorter operate times.
Parameter: Maximum Time of the Operate Curve

You can use the parameter Max. time of the curve to determine the initial value of the operate curve
(for 3I0 = Threshold).
6.7.8.3 Settings

General
_:1 Log.inv.T KP #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Log.inv.T KP #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:108 Log.inv.T KP #:Direc- • forward forward
tional mode
• reverse
_:8 Log.inv.T KP #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:107 Log.inv.T KP #:Direc- • no no
tional comparison
• yes
_:106 Log.inv.T KP #:Release • no no
via input signal
• yes
_:10 Log.inv.T KP #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:27 Log.inv.T KP #:Blk. w. • no no
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:121 Log.inv.T KP #:Blk. w. • no no
2nd harm. gnd. det.
• yes
_:3 Log.inv.T KP #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:109 Log.inv.T KP #:Time dial 0.05 to 1.50 0.20
_:101 Log.inv.T KP #:Knee- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.300 A
point current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.500 A
_:105 Log.inv.T KP #:Knee- 0.00 s to 100.00 s 23.60 s
point time
_:102 Log.inv.T KP #:Current at 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
Min. time 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:104 Log.inv.T KP #:Min. time 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.80 s
of the curve
_:103 Log.inv.T KP #:Max. time 0.00 s to 200.00 s 93.00 s
of the curve

(Type)
Stage #
_:81 Log.inv.T KP #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 Log.inv.T KP #:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:500 Log.inv.T KP #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Log.inv.T KP #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Log.inv.T KP #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Log.inv.T KP #:Health ENS O
_:60 Log.inv.T KP #:Inrush blocks operate SPS O
_:55 Log.inv.T KP #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Log.inv.T KP #:Direction ACD O
_:56 Log.inv.T KP #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Log.inv.T KP #:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.7.9.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo_dirusr, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-81 Logic Diagram of the Directional User-Defined Characteristic Curve Overcurrent Protection,
Ground
This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.7.6.1 Description). The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

With the directional, user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using
up to 30 value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic
curve from these values. You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with User-Defined Characteristic Curves

When the measured value falls short of the threshold value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 × 1.1× threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as outgoing. You can influence the dropout behavior
weighted reduction of the time is started from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The following figure shows the pickup behavior and dropout behavior when a directional user-defined charac-
teristic curve is used.
[dw_pidrbe, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-82 Pickup and Dropout Behaviors when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
NOTE

This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage.
The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as required. This section only provides
application and setting notes for setting the characteristic curves. For guidance on the other parameters of the
stage, see chapter 6.7.6.2 Application and Setting Notes.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Current/time value pairs (of the Operate Curve)

point. The setting follows the characteristic curve you want to realize.
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold setting afterwards if you
want to displace the characteristic curve.
Specify the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
NOTE

prepared for the system. Where no grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is
required, leave the Time dial set to 1.
Parameter: Reset

The Reset parameter is used to define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
disk emulation Both operate curve and a dropout characteristic curve have to be specified
with this setting.
Use this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical devices or
other devices performing dropout after disk emulation.
instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation,
that is, if instantaneous dropout is required.
Parameter: Current/time value pairs (of the Dropout Curve)

point. The setting is determined by the characteristic curve you want to achieve.
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold setting afterwards if you
want to displace the characteristic curve.
Specify the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
NOTE
6.7.9.3 Settings

General
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:113 User curve #:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:112 User curve #:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:114 User curve #:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
_:10 User curve #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
settings
• yes
• yes
harm. gnd. det.
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
• disk emulation
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 40.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 200.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

(Type)
User curve #
_:501 User curve #:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:60 User curve #:Inrush blocks operate SPS O
_:300 User curve #:Direction ACD O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.5.8.1 Description and 6.5.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) describe the influence of
other functions on dynamic settings.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.8 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
6.8.1 Inrush-Current Detection

The function Inrush-current detection
• Recognizes an inrush process on transformers
• Generates a blocking signal for protection functions that protect the transformer (protected object) or for
protection functions that are affected in undesirable ways when transformers are switched on
• Allows a sensitive setting of the protection functions

The following protection functions evaluate the blocking signal
• Overcurrent protection with a pickup value below the maximum inrush current
• Negative-sequence protection as sensitive backup protection for transformers

The function Inrush-current detection is not an individual protection function. In the connection process of
a transformer, it transmits a blocking signal to other protection functions. For this reason, the inrush-current
detection must be in the same function group as the functions that are to be blocked.
The following figure shows the embedding of the function. The setting parameter Blk. w. inrush curr.
detect. establishes the connection between inrush-current detection and the functions that are to be
blocked. If the parameter is set to yes, the connection is effective.
A jump detection or the threshold value exceeding of the functions to be blocked is used as trigger signal for
synchronization of the internal measurement methods.
The jump detection reacts to changes in the current. The threshold value exceeding is recognized due to an
internal pickup of the protection function that is to be blocked.
[dw_irsh01, 1, en_US]

The function Inrush-current detection analyzes the trigger signal of the jump detection or the threshold-
value violation of the function to be blocked in a start logic and synchronizes the method of measurement.
In order to securely record the inrush processes, the function uses the methods of measurement Harmonic
Analysis and the CWA method (current wave shape analysis). Both methods work in parallel and link the
results with a logical OR.
If you wish to work with only one process, deactivate the other method by way of the parameters Blocking
with 2. harmonic or Blocking with CWA .

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_inru_02, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-84 Basic Structure of the Inrush-Current Detection
Harmonic Analysis
For this method of measurement, the content of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental component (1st
harmonic) are determined for each of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC and the quotient I2nd harm / I1st harm is
formed from this. If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a phase-selective signal is issued.
If 75 % of the set threshold value is exceeded, this leads to a pickup reset (dropout ratio = 0.75).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_inrush_10, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-85 Logic of the Harmonic Analysis Function (T = 1 Period)
CWA Method (Current Wave Shape Analysis)

The CWA method executes a wave shape analysis of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC. If all 3 phase currents
show flat areas at the same point in time, the inrush-current detection signal will be issued. This signal applies
for all 3 phases simultaneously. The following figure shows a typical inrush-current characteristic, with the
simultaneously occurring flat areas clearly recognizable.
[dw_inrush_03, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-86 Inrush-Current Characteristic
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the CWA method.
From the present fundamental-component current (1st harmonic), the threshold value for identification of the
flat areas is derived via an internal factor.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 6-87 Logic of the CWA-Method Function (T = 1 Period)
Logic of the Inrush-Current Detection

The following logic diagram shows the link of the 2 methods of measurement Harmonic Analysis and CWA
method.
The crossblock function influences the Harmonic Analysis process. If you have set the parameter Cross-
blocking to yes, you will receive a blocking indication in the event of threshold-value violation for all
3 phase currents and the measured or calculated zero-sequence current (l2nd harm / l1st harm). The crossblock
function works via a timer. Set parameters for time depending on the expected duration factor via the
parameter Cross-blocking time.
If the phase current exceeds the maximum permissible current Operat.-range limit Imax, the inrush-
current detection will be blocked.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 6-88 Logic Diagram of the Inrush-Current Detection
Parameter: Operat.-range limit Imax
• Recommended setting value (_:106) Operat.-range limit Imax = 7.5 A

With the parameter Operat.-range limit Imax, you can specify at which current the inrush-current
detection is blocked internally. Set the value to be greater than the RMS value of the maximum inrush
current of the transformer. A practicable value is 7.5 times the transformer rated current.
Parameter: Blocking with CWA
• Recommended setting value = (_:111) Blocking with CWA = yes

yes CWA process activated.
no CWA process deactivated.
Parameter: Blocking with 2. harmonic
• Recommended setting value (_:110) Blocking with 2. harmonic = yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

yes Harmonic analysis process activated.
no Harmonic analysis process deactivated.
NOTE
i Make sure that at least one process is activated. Siemens recommends retaining the advised setting values.
Parameter: 2nd harmonic content
• Recommended setting value (_:102) 2nd harmonic content = 15 %

With the parameter 2nd harmonic content, you can specify the pickup value of the harmonic
analysis function. The setting value of 15 % is practicable for most transformers.
Parameter: Cross-blocking
• Recommended setting value (_:112) Cross-blocking = no

no Through the CWA process working in parallel in the inrush-current detec-
tion, the function is not activated as standard.
yes If a subfunction of the inrush-current detection is identified in the course
of the closure trials during commissioning, set the parameter Cross-
blocking to yes.
Parameter: Cross-blocking time
• Default setting (_:109) Cross-blocking time = 0.06 s

You define the duration of this blocking with the Cross-blocking time parameter. The default
setting of 0.06 s (about 3 periods) has proven practicable. Set the time as short as possible and
check the value during the closure trials. The parameter Cross-blocking time is inactive at Cross-
blocking = no.
Parameter: Start flt.rec
• Default setting (_:114) Start flt.rec = yes

With the Start flt.rec parameter, you determine whether a fault record should be started upon
pickup of the inrush-current detection. The following settings are possible:

no No fault recording starts with pickup.
yes The fault recording starts with pickup. When the protection function is
blocked by the inrush-current detection, a fault recording is started never-
theless.
6.8.1.5 Settings

Inrush detect.
_:1 Inrush detect.:Mode • off on
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:106 Inrush detect.:Operat.- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 7.500 A
range limit Imax 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 37.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 7.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 37.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 7.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 37.500 A
_:111 Inrush detect.:Blocking • no yes
with CWA
• yes
_:110 Inrush detect.:Blocking • no yes
with 2. harmonic
• yes
_:102 Inrush detect.:2nd 10 % to 45 % 15 %
harmonic content
_:112 Inrush detect.:Cross- • no no
blocking
• yes
_:109 Inrush detect.:Cross- 0.03 s to 200.00 s 0.06 s
blocking time
_:114 Inrush detect.:Start • no yes
flt.rec
• yes

(Type)
Inrush detect.
_:81 Inrush detect.:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Inrush detect.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Inrush detect.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inrush detect.:Health ENS O
_:300 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase A SPS O
_:301 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase B SPS O
_:302 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase C SPS O
_:305 Inrush detect.:CWA SPS O
_:306 Inrush detect.:Cross-blocking SPS O
_:55 Inrush detect.:Pickup ACD O
6.8.2 2nd Harmonic Ground Detection

The 2nd harmonic to ground detection function:
• Detects the content of 2nd harmonics in the neutral-point phase current IN or in the calculated zero-
sequence current 3I0.
• Generates a blocking signal for protection functions that use the neutral-point phase current IN or the
calculated zero-sequence current 3I0 as a measured value

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The following protection functions analyze the blocking signal:
• Overcurrent protection, ground
• Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
• Non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection

The 2nd harmonic ground detection function is not an autonomous protection function. In the connection
process of a transformer, it sends a blocking signal to other protection functions. For this reason, the 2nd
harmonic ground detection function must be in the same function group as the functions that are to be
blocked.
Logic
[lo_2harm_detec_gnd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-89 Logic of 2nd Harmonic Detection Ground
Harmonic Analysis
harmonic) is determined for the neutral-point phase current IN or the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0
and the quotient I2nd harm/I1st harm is formed from this. If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a
blocking signal is issued.
NOTE
i During a transformer saturation, the high content of the 2nd harmonic in the ground current must not lead
to a pickup of the function.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i If the ground current is measured in case of a sensitive transformer and the measured value exceeds the
saturation threshold of 1.6 ⋅ IN, the function switches to the calculated 3I0 value.
[lo_harmon-analyse, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-90 Logic of the Harmonic Analysis Function
• Default setting = (_:9) Measured value = IN measured

IN measured The function evaluates the measured neutral-point phase current IN.
3I0 calculated The function evaluates the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0.
• Default setting (_:102) 2nd harmonic content = 15 %

With the parameter 2nd harmonic content, you can specify the percentage content of the 2nd harmonic
in IN measured or in 3I0 calculated at which the inrush-current detection is blocked internally.
6.8.2.5 Settings

2.hrm.det. gnd
_:1 2.hrm.det. gnd:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:9 2.hrm.det. gnd:Meas- • 3I0 calculated IN measured
ured value
• IN measured
_:102 2.hrm.det. gnd:2nd 10 % to 45 % 15 %
harmonic content

(Type)
2.hrm.det. gnd
_:81 2.hrm.det. gnd:>Block stage SPS I

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:51 2.hrm.det. gnd:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:54 2.hrm.det. gnd:Inactive SPS O
_:52 2.hrm.det. gnd:Behavior ENS O
_:53 2.hrm.det. gnd:Health ENS O
_:55 2.hrm.det. gnd:Pickup ACD O
6.8.3 2nd Harmonic Detection 1-Phase

The 2nd harmonic detection 1-phase function:
• Detects the content of 2nd harmonics of a 1-phase current
• Generates a blocking signal for protection functions that use this 1-phase current as a measured value

The following protection functions analyze the blocking signal:
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase

The function 2nd harmonic detection 1-phase is not an autonomous protection function. In the connection
process of a transformer, it sends a blocking signal to other protection functions. For this reason, the function
2nd harmonic detection 1-phase must be instantiated in the same function group as the function Inrush-
current detection and the functions that are to be blocked.
If the function 2nd harmonic detection 1-phase and the functions to be blocked are not instantiated in the
same function group, you must interconnect the protection function groups. Interconnect the protection func-
tion groups in the DIGSI 5 Project tree > Function-group connections > Protection-FG <-> Protection-FG.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_2harm_detec_1ph, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-91 Logic of 2nd Harmonic Detection 1-Phase
Harmonic Analysis
harmonic) is determined for the 1-phase current and the quotient I2nd harm/I1st harm is formed from this. If this
quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a blocking signal is issued.
NOTE
i During a transformer saturation, the high content of the 2nd harmonic in the 1-phase current must not
lead to a pickup of the function.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_harmon-analyse_1ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-92 Logic of the Harmonic Analysis Function
• Default setting (_:102) 2nd harmonic content = 15 %

With the parameter 2nd harmonic content, you can specify the percentage content of the 2nd harmonic
at which the inrush-current detection is blocked internally.
6.8.3.5 Settings

2.hrm.det. 1ph
_:1 2.hrm.det. 1ph:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:102 2.hrm.det. 1ph:2nd 10 % to 45 % 15 %
harmonic content

(Type)
2.hrm.det. 1ph
_:81 2.hrm.det. 1ph:>Block stage SPS I
_:51 2.hrm.det. 1ph:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:54 2.hrm.det. 1ph:Inactive SPS O
_:52 2.hrm.det. 1ph:Behavior ENS O
_:53 2.hrm.det. 1ph:Health ENS O
_:55 2.hrm.det. 1ph:Pickup ACD O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.9 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
The function Instantaneous high-current tripping (ANSI 50) has the following tasks:
• Instantaneous tripping when switching onto an existing fault, for example, if a grounding switch is
closed.
• Instantaneous disconnection of high currents above the highest overcurrent-protection stage.
• The function works independently of other functions.
The Instantaneous high-current tripping function offers 2 different increment types:
• Stage with standard release method
• Stage with release method via protection interface (only applicable if the device is equipped with a
protection interface)
The function with the stage for the standard release procedure is factory-set.
[dw_ihc_str, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.9.3 Standard Release Procedure
Logic
[lo_hlore3, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-94 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Standard Release Method
Activation
Using the Activation parameter, you set the conditions under which the stage is released.
• on CB closure
With this procedure, the stage is released only if the circuit breaker is about to be closed (the CB is open)
or if the circuit breaker is being closed or the binary input signal >release is active. The way the Rel.
by CB switch on signal is generated is described in chapter 5.7.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition
for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions.
• always active
The stage is always released and is thus independent of the closing of the circuit breaker switch and of
the binary input signal>release.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• only with binary signal

The stage is released only if the binary input signal >release is active.
Method of Measurement, Threshold Value

The stage works with 2 different methods of measurement:

component numerically. A DC component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the fundamental compo-
nent is compared with the set threshold value.
• Evaluation of the unfiltered measurand:

The stage also works with unfiltered sampled values. Thus, very short operate times are possible. The
current sampling values are compared with the threshold value of 2 · √2 of the preset threshold value.
Parameter: Activation
• Default setting (_:3901:101) Activation = on CB closure

With the parameter Activation, you define the conditions under which the stage is released.
on CB closure Select this setting to activate the stage only when the circuit breaker is closed.
always active Select this setting to release the stage statically.
only with binary Select this setting to release the stage via an external signal.
signal
• Default setting (_:3901:3) Threshold = 10.0 A for Irated = 1 A or 50.0 A for Irated = 5 A
The stage works independently of the position of the remote circuit breakers. For this reason, set the
Threshold so that the fault current flowing through does not trigger the stage. Thus, use this stage only if
current grading over the protected object is possible, that is, for transformers, shunt reactors or long lines with
low source impedance. In other cases, deactivate the stage.
EXAMPLE
Calculation example for current grading of a 110-kV overhead line measuring 150 mm2
s (length) = 100 km;
R1/s = 0.21 Ω/km;
X1/s = 0.43 Ω/km
Since the stage is non-directional, the calculation must consider the maximum short-circuit power at the start
of the line or at the opposite end:
Ssc" = 3.5 GVA (subtransient, because the function can respond to the 1st peak value)
Current transformer: 600 A/5 A
The line impedance ZL and the minimum source impedance ZS are calculated on this basis:
[fo_glchzv, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The maximum 3-phase short-circuit current I"sc flowing through is (at a source voltage of 1.1 VN):
[fo_glchik, 1, en_US]
With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting value results:
[fo_glnste, 1, en_US]
If short-circuit currents exceed 1496 A (primary) or 12.5 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to be
protected. It can be disconnected immediately.
NOTE
i The calculation was performed with absolute values, which is accurate enough for overhead lines. A
complex calculation is required only if the source impedance and the line impedance have extremely
different angles.

The recommended setting value of 0.90 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain high-precision meas-
urements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup
threshold, you can increase the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the
tripping stage.
6.9.5 Release Procedure via Protection Interface
This stage can be applied only if the device is equipped with a protection interface.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_hinre3, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-95 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Release Procedure via Protection
Interface
Release
If one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the stage is released (the internal Release signal is present) (for
further information, refer to 5.9 Process Monitor):
• No voltage has yet been applied to the protected object, which means that the remote circuit breakers
are open, or
• Switching to the local circuit breaker is imminent.

These conditions are recognized internally if a circuit breaker is open or just closed
Furthermore, the stage can be activated externally via the >release binary input signal.
NOTE
i To enable internal release of the stage, the devices at all ends of the protected object must be informed
of the circuit-breaker position (the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be connected to the devices; the
respective binary input signals must be routed).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Method of Measurement, Threshold Value

The stage works with 2 different methods of measurement:

component numerically. A DC component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the fundamental compo-
nent is compared with the set threshold value.

If the current exceeds a preset threshold value by the
current ≥ 2·√2·threshold value
this stage will use unfiltered measurands in addition. Thus, very short operate times are possible.
• Default setting (_:3901:3) Threshold = 2.5 A for Irated = 1 A or 12.5 A for Irated = 5 A
Select the value high enough for the protection not to pick up on the RMS value of the inrush current that
occurs when the local circuit breaker is closed. You do not have to consider short-circuit currents flowing
through, because the stage is released only if the circuit breakers are opened at all remote ends of the
protected object or the release was caused by the binary input >release.

The recommended setting value of 0.90 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain extremely accurate
measurements, the dropout ratio can be reduced. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup
threshold, you can increase the dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
6.9.7 Settings

Standard 1
_:3901:1 Standard 1:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:3901:101 Standard 1:Activation • on CB closure on CB closure
• only with binary signal
• always active
_:3901:3 Standard 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 50.000 A
_:3901:4 Standard 1:Dropout ratio 0.50 to 0.90 0.90

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Group indicat.
Standard 1
_:3901:500 Standard 1:>release SPS I
_:3901:81 Standard 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:3901:51 Standard 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:3901:54 Standard 1:Inactive SPS O
_:3901:52 Standard 1:Behavior ENS O
_:3901:53 Standard 1:Health ENS O
_:3901:300 Standard 1:Rel. by CB switch on ACT O
_:3901:55 Standard 1:Pickup ACD O
_:3901:57 Standard 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
6.10 Arc Protection
6.10.1 Overview of Function
The function Arc protection:
• Detects arcs in air-insulated switchgear parts without delay and in a fail-safe way
• Limits system damage through instantaneous high-speed tripping
• Protect systems from thermal overload
• Increases safety of personnel
• Trips in a 3-pole way
• Is suitable for use in all voltage levels
The Arc protection function can be added to function groups that provide current measured values.
The Arc protection function consists of the following blocks.
• General
• 3 stages
• Output logic 3-phase

The Arc protection function is preconfigured with 3 stages. A maximum of 17 tripping stages can be operated
simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The following figure shows the basic structure of the Arc protection function.
[dw_structure_arcprot, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-96 Structure/Embedding of the Arc Protection Function

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
General Logic of the Function Block
[lo_fb0_arcprot, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-97 General Logic Diagram of the Function Block

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
Logic of the Stage
[lo_stage_arcprotection, 2, en_US]
The Arc protection function uses a locally connected optical arc sensor or an external trip initiation by other
devices in order to detect arcs.
NOTE
i Install the arc sensors inside the switchgear in such a way that they are not hidden behind other system
components!
Shadowing of the arc sensors must be avoided!
NOTE
i Once an optical sensor has detected an arc, you must replace the affected optical sensor!
Within the Arc protection function, you can use a fast current-flow criterion as an additional release criterion.
The parameters for the current-flow criterion can be found in the General block. For each stage, you can
select individually whether the current-flow criterion must be evaluated as well.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
Method of Measurement, Current-Flow Criterion

The current-flow criterion works with 2 different methods of measurement:

component numerically. A direct-current component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the funda-
mental component is compared with the set threshold value.

If the current exceeds the threshold value set by the current ≥ 2 ⋅√2 ⋅ threshold value, the stage uses
additional unfiltered measurands. Thus, very short operate times are possible.
NOTE
i If using the current-flow criterion in addition to the light, prevent a potential overfunction caused by the
suddenly occurring light signal.
If you use the current-flow criterion, arcs are typically detected in 4 ms!
Self Monitoring
The Arc protection function uses a self-monitoring circuit. This circuit monitors the optical arc sensors and the
fiber-optic cables. The arc-protection module uses the fiber-optic cable to send a cyclic test signal (light) to the
arc sensors. If the channel is operating properly, the test signal is sent back to the arc protection module. If
the test signal is not returned to the arc protection module, the indication channel # Sensor failure is
generated.
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault, the indication Health is set to Alarm and the stage/function is
blocked.
6.10.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings
Go to General under the function Arc protection and set the following parameters. The setting values apply
to all stages.
Parameter: Sensor supervision
• Default setting (_:2311:2) Sensor supervision = yes

With the parameter Sensor supervision, you set whether you want to monitor the arc sensors or not.
Parameter: Threshold I>
• Default setting (_:2311:3) Threshold I>= 2.000 A

With the parameter Threshold I>, you define the trigger threshold of the phase currents. The Threshold
I> is relevant for the current-flow criterion of the function Arc protection.
Set the Threshold I> of the function Arc protection in such a manner that the RMS value of the inrush
current does not exceed the Threshold I> when activating the local circuit breaker.
For more information about how to calculate the setting value, refer to 6.3.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Parameter: Threshold 3I0>
• Default setting (_:2311:4) Threshold 3I0>= 1.000 A

With the parameter Threshold 3I0>, you determine the tripping threshold for the zero-sequence current.
The Threshold 3I0> is relevant for the current-flow criterion of the function Arc protection.
Set the Threshold 3I0> of the function Arc protection in such a manner that the RMS value of the inrush
current does not exceed the Threshold 3I0> when activating the local circuit breaker.
For more information about how to calculate the setting value, refer to 6.5.4.2 Application and Setting Notes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
NOTE
i If you set the parameter CT connection = 3-phase, 2 primary CT for the 3-phase current meas-
uring point, the parameter Threshold 3I0> has no effect.
If you set the parameter CT connection = 3-phase + IN for the 3-phase current measuring point,
the function works with the measured current IN.
If you set the parameter CT connection = 3-phase + IN-separate for the 3-phase current meas-
uring point, the function works with the calculated current 3I0.
6.10.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Stage
Parameter: External trip initiation
• Default setting (_:14551:9) External trip initiation = no

With the External trip initiation parameter, you set whether an external input signal is used to
trigger the stage.
no The stage does not operate with an external input signal.
current The stage operates with an external input signal.
If the stage operates with an external input signal, the binary input signal
>External current must be routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing.
In this setting option, the binary input signal >External current is only
visible in the DIGSI 5 information routing
light The stage operates with an external input signal.
If the stage operates with an external input signal, the binary input signal
>External light must be routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing.
In this setting option, the binary input signal >External light is only
visible in the DIGSI 5 information routing
Note: When working with the light external trip initiation, do not select
a channel. If an additional channel is selected with this setting value, the
DIGSI 5 will signal an inconsistency.
• Default setting (_:14551:8) Operating mode = current and light

With the Operating mode parameter, you define the basic functionality of the stage.
current and light The stage operates with the input variables current and light.
The current-flow criterion ensures that the light signal originates from an
arc.
Siemens recommends using this setting value.
light only This stage operates only with the input signal 'light' and is triggered even if
current is not measured.
This operating mode can cause a overfunction if light is detected suddenly.
Use this setting value only if the effect caused by external light signals is
impossible.
Parameter: Sensor
• Default setting (_:14551:11) Sensor = point sensor

With the Sensor parameter, you set which sensor type is connected to the device.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection

point sensor A point sensor is connected to the device.
line sensor A line sensor is connected to the device.
custom If you select this setting option, the parameter Threshold light is
visible.
Siemens recommends the default setting values point sensor or line
sensor. This allows arcs to be detected reliably regardless of diffused light.
Parameter: Threshold light
• Default setting (_:14551:7) Threshold light = -20.00 dB

With the Threshold light parameter, you set the light sensitivity. If you set Threshold light to
a smaller value, the sensitivity increases. If you set Threshold light to a higher value, the sensitivity
decreases. If the sensors even pick up in case of a switching arc of the circuit breaker, set the Threshold
light parameter to a higher value.
Siemens recommends the default settings for point or line sensors.
Set the parameter Threshold light manually only if you have special default settings for light sensitivity.
Parameter: Channel
• Default setting (_:14551:10) Channel = No channel is selected

With the Channelparameter, you select which sensor channel the stage uses.
If the Arc protection function has several stages, a different channel must be selected for each stage.
For parameter Channel, the selection texts are identical to the name of the arc-protection module and its
channels.
6.10.6 Settings

General
_:2311:1 General:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:2311:2 General:Sensor supervi- • no yes
sion
• yes
_:2311:3 General:Threshold I> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
_:2311:4 General:Threshold 3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection

Stage 1
_:14551:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:14551:2 Stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:14551:9 Stage 1:External trip • no no
initiation
• light
• current
_:14551:8 Stage 1:Operating mode • light only current and light
• current and light
_:14551:11 Stage 1:Sensor • point sensor point sensor
• line sensor
• custom
_:14551:7 Stage 1:Threshold light -34.00 dB to -10.00 dB -20.00 dB
_:14551:10 Stage 1:Channel Setting options depend on
configuration
Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
initiation
• light
• current
• line sensor
• custom
configuration
Stage 3
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
initiation
• light
• current

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection

• line sensor
• custom
configuration

(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:2311:301 General:Current detected SPS O
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:14551:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:14551:82 Stage 1:>External light SPS I
_:14551:501 Stage 1:>External current SPS I
_:14551:51 Stage 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:14551:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:14551:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:14551:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:14551:318 Stage 1:Fault arc counter INC C
_:14551:58 Stage 1:Arc detected SPS O
_:14551:301 Stage 1:Light detected SPS O
_:14551:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:14551:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection

(Type)
Stage 3
Information about the Self-Monitoring Function of the Arc Protection Module

(Type)
channel #
_:307 channel #:Sensor failure SPS O
Light Only
6.10.8.1 Description
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and
2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = light only.
The following items are considered in the example below:
• Positioning the optical point sensors in the switchgear
• Connecting the optical point sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed
• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed
• Setting notes about the selected parameters in the stages of the function
The following figure shows the arrangement and the connection of the optical point sensors:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
[dw_arcprot-light-only, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-99 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Light only)
For this example, the following is assumed:
• The circuit breaker of the infeed must be switched off. This ensures that the arcs in the busbar compart-
ments of the infeed and the feeders or in the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders are off.
Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartments (BB compartment) of the infeed and feeders.
Install additional optical point sensors in the circuit-breaker compartment (CB compartment) of the
feeders. Connect all optical point sensors to the protection device of the infeed.
• The optical point sensors in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders detect arcs in this compart-
ment. Install one optical point sensor in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders and connect
it to the protection device of the feeder. This allows for the selective clearing of arcs inside the cable-
connection compartment.
Due to the pressure waves that occur during the formation of an arc, partitions can deform and cause
undesirable light influences in adjacent compartments. This can result in a non-selective tripping.
• If there is an arc in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device must switch off.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates in Operating mode = light only, the effects of external light
can result in non-selective tripping.
NOTE
i It must be considered that the number of arc protection modules connected to the device depends on the
hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If using non-modular devices, a
maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
General Notes
• Connect one optical point sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 1 to the protection
device in feeder 1. Arcs in the cable-connection compartment are cleared selectively by the circuit
breaker in feeder 1.
• Connect one optical point sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 2 to the protection
device in feeder 2. Arcs in the cable-connection are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in feeder 2.
• Connect optical point sensors from all busbar compartments and all circuit-breaker compartments of
feeders 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in these compartments are detected and
cleared by the device in the infeed.
Setting Notes for the Protection Device in Feeder 1

The Arc protection function operates with one stage.
Set the parameters of the stage as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = light only
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor
• Parameter: External trip initiation = no
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1

The parameters in block General are not relevant since the Operating mode = light only.

The Arc protection function operates with one stage.

Setting Notes for the Protection Device in the Infeed

The Arc protection function operates with 5 stages.
Set the parameters of the stages as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = light only (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: External trip initiation = no (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision in

feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 2 (Stage 2) → Circuit-breaker compartment supervision
in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 3 (Stage 3) → Busbar compartment supervision in
feeder 2
in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 2 (Stage 5) → Busbar compartment supervision in the
infeed

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
Light and Current
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and 2
feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
The following items are considered in the example:
• Setting notes about selected parameters in the stages of the function
[dw_light-and-current, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-100 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)
• The current-flow criterion offers additional security to prevent unwanted tripping caused by sudden light
influences.
Depending on the arc location in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder, it is not always
possible to measure the current. If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder,
the current will therefore be evaluated in the infeed.
• Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the
cable-connection compartment of the feeders as well as the busbar compartment of the infeed. Connect
the optical point sensors to the protection device in the infeed.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
• The protection device in the infeed clears all arcs in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker
compartment, and the cable-connection compartment of feeder 1 and 2. Furthermore, the protection
device clears arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed.
• If the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the cable-
connection compartment of the feeders, or in the busbar compartment of the infeed detect an arc, the
protection device in the infeed evaluates the current as well.
• If an arc occurs in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device must trip.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light, the addi-
tional current-flow criterion prevents unwanted tripping caused by external light influences.
NOTE
i This application example requires the connection of several optical point sensors to a single protection
device. It must be considered that the number of arc-protection modules that are connected to the device
depends on the hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If you use non-modular devices,
a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
General Notes
• Connect the optical point sensors from the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and
the cable-connection compartment of feeders 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in
the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment and the cable-connection compartment of
feeders 1 and 2 are detected and cleared by the device in the infeed.
• Connect an optical point sensor from the busbar compartment in the infeed to the protection device in
the infeed. Arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in
the infeed.

• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: External trip initiation = no (applies to all stages)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision in

feeder 1
in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 3 (Stage 3) → Cable-connection compartment supervi-
sion in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 1 (Stage 4) → Busbar compartment supervision in
feeder 2
in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 3 (Stage 6) → Cable-connection compartment supervi-
sion in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 3 channel 1 (Stage 7) → Busbar compartment supervision in the
infeed
You can find more information about the settings of the parameters Threshold I> and Threshold 3I0>
in chapter 6.10.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings.
6.10.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors via External Trip
Initiation
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and
2 feeders. The stages of the Arc protection function are triggered by External trip initiation.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
[dw_arcprot-extern-input, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-101 Arc Protection with External Trip Initiation
cable-connection compartment of the feeder and the infeed. Connect the optical point sensors to the
respective protection device in the feeder and infeed.
• If the optical point sensors detect an arc in the busbar compartment or the circuit-breaker compartment
of the feeders, the Light detected indication is sent via binary inputs/outputs, a protection interface,
or IEC 61850 GOOSE to the protection device in the infeed. Then, the protection device in the infeed
evaluates the current as well. If the measured current exceeds the thresholds Threshold I> and/or
Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed switches off the malfunction.
You can find detailed information in chapter 6.10.10.2 Application and Setting Notes
• Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders can also be switched off selectively by the
protection device of the affected feeder. To do this, the Current detected pickup indication from the
infeed unit must be sent to the appropriate protection device in the feeder.
infeed, the superordinate protection device trips.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates via the External trip initiation, only 3 optical point
sensors are required per feeder protection device in order to detect the arcs (only one arc-protection
module).
The number of GOOSE messages is not limited. Therefore, the number of feeders is not limited, and the
protection of complex systems is feasible.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
General Notes:
cable-connection compartment of the feeders and the infeed to the respective protection devices.
• Arcs in the busbar compartment and the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders must be switched
off by the protection device in the infeed. To do this, the protection devices in the feeder device must
send the indication Light detected to the infeed device. Use the binary inputs/outputs, a protection
interface, or IEC 61850 GOOSE.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0> threshold values, the protection device in the infeed switches
off faults on the busbar and the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders.
Connect the signals over 4 stages, using the external trip initiation or a CFC chart.
• Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders are switched off locally. The protection device
in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold values Threshold
I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the Current detected indication is sent to the protection devices in
the feeders. If, at the same time, an optical sensor in a cable-connection compartment detects light, the
protection device trips in the corresponding feeder.

Stage 1 and 2 (supervision of busbar compartment and circuit-breaker compartment):
• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = yes
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (stage 1) → busbar-compartment supervision in

feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 2 (stage 2) → circuit-breaker compartment supervision
in feeder 1
Stage 3 (supervision of cable-connection compartment):
• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light
• Parameter: External trip initiation = current

The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold
values Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed returns the indica-
tion Current detected to the protection device in the feeder.
Only if the indication in the feeder device Current detected is connected with the signal >External
current an external trip initiation for this stage is effective.
• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no

Stage 1 and 2 (supervision of busbar compartment and circuit-breaker compartment):

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (stage 1) → busbar-compartment supervision in

feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 2 (stage 2) → circuit-breaker compartment supervision
in feeder 2
Stage 3 (supervision of cable-connection compartment):
• Parameter: External trip initiation = current

The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold
values Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed returns the indica-
tion Current detected to the protection device in the feeder.
Only if the indication in the feeder device Current detected is connected with the signal >External
current an external trip initiation for this stage is effective.

Stage 1 (busbar-compartment supervision):

If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment of the infeed and the thresholds Threshold I> and/or
Threshold 3I0> are exceeded, an operate indication is generated immediately.

Stage 2 (circuit-breaker compartment supervision):

If an arc is detected in the circuit-breaker compartment of the infeed (light-gray point sensors in
Figure 6-101), a pickup indication is generated immediately. The arc is switched off by a superordinate
protection device.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
Stage 3 (cable-connection compartment supervision):

If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed (light-gray point sensors in
Figure 6-101), a pickup indication is generated immediately. The arc is switched off by a superordinate
protection device.
Depending where the arc is generated in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed, it is not
always possible to measure the current. If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the current must be evaluated by the superordinate protection device.

Stage 4 to 7 (External trip initiation):
• Parameter: External trip initiation = light

If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment or the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeder, the
feeder device sends the Light detected indication to the infeed device. Only if the indication in
the infeed device Light detected is connected with the signal >External light, an external trip
initiation via these stages is effective.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0> threshold values, the protection device in the infeed switches
off the arc.
6.10.11 Application Example for Arc Protection with a Line Sensor in Operating Mode:
Light and Current
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with 1 infeed and
2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
• Optical line sensor placement in the switchgear
• Optical line sensor connection to the protection device in the infeed
• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the infeed protection device

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection
[dw_line sensor, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-102 Layout and Connection of the Optical Line Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)
• The current-flow criterion offers additional protection to prevent unwanted tripping caused by the
sudden effects of light.
• Figure 6-102 shows how the optical line sensors should be routed. Start in the infeed busbar compart-
ment and route the optical line sensor along the busbar and back again to the protection device in the
infeed. Connect the optical line sensor to the protection device in the infeed.
• Depending on the routing options in the control cabinet, you can also route the optical line sensor
through the circuit-breaker and cable-connection compartments of the feeders.
If this is not possible, you can detect arcs in these compartments using point sensors. For more detailed
information, see chapters 6.10.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating
Mode: Light Only and 6.10.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating
Mode: Light and Current.
infeed, the superordinate protection device will shut off.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light, the addi-
tional current-flow criterion will prevent unwanted tripping caused by external light effects.
NOTE
i Note that the number of arc protection modules that are connected to the device depend on the hardware
configuration of the equipment.
When using modular equipment, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If using non-modular
equipment, a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
Depending on the use case, you can combine point and line sensors.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.10 Arc Protection

The Arc protection function operates with 1 stage.
• Parameter: Sensor = line sensor
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision (infeed,
feeder 1, feeder 2)
You can find more information about the settings of the parameters Threshold I> and Threshold 3I0>
in chapter 6.10.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.11 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
The Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function serves for immediate tripping when switching onto
a fault.
The function does not have its own measurement and must be linked to another protection function with the
pickup (measurement).
The function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault can be used in all protection function groups.
The function is preconfigured with 1 stage. A maximum of 2 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously
within the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
[dw_strsto, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.11.3 Stage Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo_gisotf, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-104 Logic Diagram of the Stage Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
Connection of the Stage

The stage is intended to initiate instantaneous tripping when switching onto a fault. To do this, the stage must
be connected to one or more pickups from protection functions or protection stages, for example, to pickup
of an overcurrent-protection stage. That is, the stage of the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault
function does not have its own measuring function but requires the pickup of another protection function or
protection stage to pick up.
The stage is active only if switching is pending or executed (refer to 6.3 Overcurrent Protection, Phases).
NOTE
i If a protection stage picks up and tripping is blocked by the Inrush-current detection function, the
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function does not pick up. In this case there is no fault
recording either.
Despite this, if a fault recording is necessary, you can activate it with the parameter (_:114) Start
flt.rec of the Inrush-current detection function (refer to 6.8.1 Inrush-Current Detection).
Parameter: Configuration
• Default setting (_:5941:102) Configuration = no stage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The Configuration parameter is used to define the pickup of a protection function or protection stage that
the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function uses to respond.
Normally, the pickups of protection functions and stages with high fault current are selected:
• Distance protection
• Overcurrent protection (phase and ground)
• Directional overcurrent protection (phase and ground)

A specific protection stage is generally used. This can be one of the protection stages provided for the
protection application, which itself trips with a delay. An additional protection stage with settings optimized
for this use case, for example, increased threshold value and blocking of self-tripping, can also be used.
• Recommended setting value (_:5941:6) Operate delay = 0.00 s

When switching onto a fault, the tripping should usually be instantaneous. The tripping delay is therefore set
to 0.
6.11.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
_:5941:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
_:5941:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:5941:102 Stage 1:Configuration Setting options depend on
configuration

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.12 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.12.1 Function Overview
The Overcurrent protection, 1-phase function (ANSI 50N/51N):
• Detects and monitors the current measured in a transformer neutral point grounding
• Can operate as sensitive tank leakage protection
• Detects and monitors the circulating current between the neutral points of 2 capacitor banks
• Switches off high-current faults instantaneously
The Overcurrent protection, 1-phase function is used in protection function groups with 1-phase current
measurement. 2 function types are available:
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – advanced (50N/51N OC-1ph-A)
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – basic (50N/51N OC-1ph-B)

The function type Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more func-
Both function types are pre-configured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
In the function type Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – advanced the following stages can be operated
simultaneously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection (UMZ)
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection (AMZ)
• 1 stage Logarithmic inverse-time overcurrent protection
• 1 stage User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection
• 1 Fast stage
In the function type Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – basic, the following stages can operate simultane-
ously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection

The non-preconfigured stages in Figure 6-105 and Figure 6-106 are shown in gray. Apart from the operate-
delay characteristic curve, the Definite-time overcurrent protection stage, the Inverse-time overcurrent
protection stage, the Logarithmic inverse-time overcurrent protection stage, and the User-defined char-
acteristic curve-time overcurrent protection stage are structured identically.
The Fast stage uses a fast tripping algorithm. It is therefore suited in particular for sensitive ground-fault
detection according to the high-impedance principle.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_ocp_1pa, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-105 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase – Advanced
[dw_ocp_1pb, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-106 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase – Basic
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the stages against
issuing of the operate indication due to transformer inrush-currents.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of a Stage
[lo_inv_ocp, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-107 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Method of measurement



C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Blocking of the Stage

The picked up stage can reset completely via the binary input signal >Block stage.

also tripping. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is reported and a fault is opened.
Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection

is described in chapter 6.3.7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection.

an overfunction.
added currents.
• Default setting (_:12661:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
6.12.3.3 Settings

Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
• yes
harm. 1ph det.
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_def_ocp, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-108 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (1-Phase)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023




also tripping. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is reported and a fault is opened.

is described in chapter 6.3.7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection.

an overfunction.
added currents.


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023


Parameter: Reset

6.12.4.3 Settings

Inverse-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
curr. detect.
• yes
harm. 1ph det.
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:12691:108 Inverse-T 1:Type of char- • ANSI long-time inv. IEC normal
• disk emulation

(Type)
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.12.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse

Logic of the Stage
[lo_ocp 1phase logarithmic, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-109 Logic Diagram of the Logarithmic Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (1-Phase)
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage
(see chapter 6.12.4.1 Description ).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.12.4.1 Description .

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Operate Curve
calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the pickup value. An integrator accumulates the value
The curve used to calculate the time value Top is shown in the following figure. The Threshold multi-
plier parameter defines the beginning of the characteristic curve. The Max. time of the curve
determines the initial value of the characteristic curve. The Time dial parameter changes the slope of the
characteristic curve. At high currents, the Min. time of the curve parameter indicates the lower time
limit.
[dw_ocp 1phase logarithmic, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-110 Operate Curve of Logarithmic Inverse-Time Characteristic
The time to operate is calculated with the following formula:
[fo_ocp 1phase logarithmic, 1, en_US]
Where
Tmax Maximum time of the curve (parameter Max. time of the curve)
Td Time dial (parameter Time dial)
Top Operate time
I 1-phase current
Ithresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
Imul Threshold multiplier (parameter Threshold multiplier)
If the calculated time is less than Tmin (parameter Min. time of the curve), Tmin is used.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse-
time delay according to IEC and ANSI (see chapter 6.12.4.1 Description ).
6.12.4.2 Application and Setting Notes .
Stage Type Selection

If the operate delay is to be dependent on the current level according to a logarithmic characteristic curve,
select this stage type.

With the parameter Threshold, you define the pickup value corresponding to the application. In doing so,
for the time-graded stages, the setting for the superordinate and subordinate stages must be taken into
account in the grading chart.
Parameter: Threshold multiplier
• Default setting (_:116) Threshold multiplier = 1.1

With the parameter Threshold multiplier, you define the beginning of the characteristic curve on the
current axis (in relation to the threshold value).
EXAMPLE
Threshold (Secondary current) Ithresh = 1.2 A

Threshold multiplier Imul = 1.1
Pickup value (Secondary current) IPU = 1.2 A ×1.1 = 1.32 A
• Default setting (_:6) Time dial = 1.250 s

With the parameter Time dial, you change the slope of the characteristic curve.
Parameter: Max. time of the curve

The parameter Max. time of the curve determines the initial value of the characteristic curve (for I =
Threshold).

The parameter Min. time of the curve determines the lower time limit (at high currents).
• Default setting (_:115) Additional time delay = 0 s

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the parameter Additional time delay, you set an additional current-independent time delay. This
additional delay is intended for special applications.
Siemens recommends setting this time to 0 s so that it has no effect.
6.12.5.3 Settings

Log.-inv.-T #
_:1 Log.-inv.-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:27 Log.-inv.-T #:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:102 Log.-inv.-T #:Blk. w. 2nd • no no
harm. 1ph det.
• yes
_:8 Log.-inv.-T #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:113 Log.-inv.-T #:Min. time 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
of the curve
_:114 Log.-inv.-T #:Max. time 0.000 s to 60.000 s 5.800 s
of the curve
_:116 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1.00 to 4.00 1.10
multiplier
_:115 Log.-inv.-T #:Additional 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.000 s
time delay

(Type)
Log.-inv.-T #
_:81 Log.-inv.-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Log.-inv.-T #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Log.-inv.-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Log.-inv.-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Log.-inv.-T #:Health ENS O
_:60 Log.-inv.-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 Log.-inv.-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection stage is only available in the advanced func-
tion type.
This stage is structured the same way as the stage with the inverse-time characteristic curve. The only
difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.


When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE

This stage is structured the same way as the stage with the inverse-time characteristic curve. The only
difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired. This chapter only provides application and
setting notes for setting characteristic curves.

NOTE

dial parameter at 1.
Parameter: Reset
• Default setting Reset = disk emulation



C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
6.12.6.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
• yes
harm. 1ph det.
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
• disk emulation

(Type)
User curve #

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.12.7 Fast Stage
Logic of a Stage
The fast stage is only available in function type Advanced.
[lo_ocp_1phs, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-112 Logic Diagram of the Fast Stage, 1-Phase
Method of Measurement, Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Fast Stage

This stage evaluates the unfiltered measurands. Thus, very short response times are possible. When the
absolute values of 2 consecutive sampled values of the last half period exceed the Threshold, the stage
picks up. When all sampled values of the previous period are less than the dropout threshold, the stage drops
out.


Ensure that the sampled values are compared directly without an additional factor with the set threshold
value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Recommended setting value (_:4) Dropout ratio = 0.90

The recommended setting value of 0.90 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain high-precision meas-
urements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup
threshold, you can increase the Dropout ratio setting. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
6.12.7.3 Settings

Fast stage #
_:1 Fast stage #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Fast stage #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:3 Fast stage #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 50.000 A
_:4 Fast stage #:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.90
ratio
_:6 Fast stage #:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay

(Type)
Fast stage #
_:81 Fast stage #:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Fast stage #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Fast stage #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Fast stage #:Health ENS O
_:55 Fast stage #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Fast stage #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Fast stage #:Operate ACT O
The Blk. w. 2nd harm. 1ph det. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when the detected 2nd harmonic component of the 1-phase current exceeds a

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
stage operates.
stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-current detection. Only if the central function Inrush-
current detection (see section 13.10 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.
[lo_blk_by_inrush_ocp_1phase, 1, en_US]
(1) From FB Inrush-current detection

(2) From FB 2nd harmonic detection 1-phase

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023


transformer.
Parameter: Blk. w. 2nd harm. 1ph det.
• Default setting (_:12661:102) Blk. w. 2nd harm. 1ph det. = no

no If no 1-phase current flow due to CT saturation with a level above the
pickup threshold is expected, select this setting.
yes If 1-phase current flow due to CT saturation with a level above the pickup

2nd-harmonic inrush current being present also in the parasitic
1‑phase current
6.12.9 Application Example: High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
With the high-impedance method, all current transformers operate in parallel at the limits of the protection
range on a common, relatively high-impedance resistor R, the voltage of which is measured.
The current transformers must be of the same type of construction and have at least one core of their own for
the High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection. Furthermore, they must have the same transfer ratio
and approximately the same knee-point voltage.
The high-impedance principle is especially suited for ground-fault detection in grounded networks at trans-
formers, generators, motors, and shunt reactors.
The left part of Figure 6-114 shows an application example for a grounded transformer winding or a grounded
motor/generator. The example at the right shows an ungrounded transformer winding or an ungrounded
motor/generator. In this example, it is assumed that the network is grounded at a different point.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_himpef, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-114 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection According to the High-Impedance Principle
Function of the High-Impedance Principle

The high-impedance principle is explained using the example of a grounded transformer winding.
In normal state, no residual currents flow, that is, in the transformer neutral point IY = 0 and in the phases
3I0 = IA + IB + IC = 0.
With an external ground fault (on the left in Figure 6-115), the short-circuit current of which is fed via a
grounded neutral point, the same current flows in the transformer neutral point and in the phases. The
respective secondary currents (with the same transfer ratio of all current transformers) draw each other off.
They are connected in series. At the resistor R, only a little voltage arises, which results from the internal
resistances of the transformers and those of the transformer connection lines. Even if a current transformer is
briefly saturated, it becomes a low-impedance during the time of the saturation and forms a low-impedance
shunt to the high-impedance resistor R. The high resistance of the resistor thus has a stabilizing effect
(so-called resistor stabilization).
[dw_prhimp, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-115 Principle of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection According to the High-Impedance Principle
With a ground-fault in the protection range (on the right in Figure 6-115), a neutral-point current IY flows in
any case. The magnitude of the residual current in the phase currents depends on the grounding conditions in
the rest of the network. A secondary current corresponding to the entire short-circuit current attempts to flow
via the resistor R. But since this resistor is high-impedance, a high voltage arises there which causes the satura-
tion of the current transformers. The effective voltage at the resistor therefore corresponds approximately to
the knee-point voltage of the current transformers.
The resistor R is thus dimensioned in such a way that even the smallest ground-fault current to be detected
leads to a secondary voltage that corresponds to half of the knee-point voltage of the current transformers
(see chapter 2.5.4).
Further information can be found at Sensitivity view for high-impedance ground-fault differential protection
in chapter 6.12.9.2 Application and Setting Notes .

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault Protection with a SIPROTEC 5 Device

Use the I4 measuring input of the SIPROTEC 5 device for the high-impedance restricted ground-fault protec-
tion. This input for this application is to be executed as a sensitive measuring input. Since this is a current
input, the current is detected by this resistor instead of the voltage at the resistor R.
Figure 6-116 shows the connection diagram. The protection device is connected in series with the resistor R
and thus measures its current.
The varistor V limits the voltage in case of an internal fault. The varistor cuts the high instantaneous voltage
peaks in the case of transformer saturation. Simultaneously, a smoothing of the voltage arises without any
relevant reduction of the average value.
[dw_anedif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-116 Connection Diagram of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection According to the High-Impe-
dance Principle
As a protection against overvoltages, it is important that you connect the device directly at the grounded side
of the current transformer. The high voltage at the resistor is thus kept away from the device.
In a similar manner, the high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection for generators, motors, and shunt
reactors is used. With auto transformers, you must connect the upper-voltage side and low-voltage side
current transformers and neutral-point transformer in parallel.
The method can be realized for each protected object. As busbar protection, the device, for example, is
connected via the resistor to the parallel connection of the transformers of all feeders.

A prerequisite for the application of the high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection is that neutral-
point current detection is possible on the station side (see example in (Figure 6-116). Furthermore, a sensitive
input transformer must be available at device input I4. Set the pickup value for current at input I4 with the
function Overcurrent protection, 1-phase.
Observe the interaction between current-transformer characteristic curve, external resistor R, and the voltage
at R for the overall function of the high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection. Notes on this follow.
Current Transformer Data for High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

All affected current transformers must have the same ratio and approximately the same knee-point voltage.
This is normally the case when the current transformers are of the same type and have the same rated data.
You can calculate the knee-point voltage from the rated data as follows:
[fo_ukniep, 1, en_US]
VKP Knee-point voltage

Ri Internal resistance of the current transformer
Prated Rated power of the current transformer

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Irated Secondary rated current of the current transformer

n Rated overcurrent factor
Rated current, rated power, and overcurrent factor are found on the name plate of the transformer.
EXAMPLE
Current transformer with the following data on the name plate: 800/5; 5P10; 30 VA
You can read the following transformer data with this data:
Irated = 5 A (out of 800/5)
n = 10 (out of 5P10)
Prated = 30 VA
The internal resistance is frequently to be found in the test report of the transformer. If it is not known, it can
be approximately determined by a direct current measurement at the secondary winding.
EXAMPLE
Calculation of the knee-point voltage
Current transformer 800/5; 5P10; 30 VA with Ri = 0.3 Ω
[fo_ukp5aw, 1, en_US]
Current transformer 800/1; 5P10; 30 VA with Ri = 5 Ω
[fo_ukp1aw, 1, en_US]
Besides the current-transformer data, the resistance of the longest connection line between transformer and
device must be known.
Stability Consideration for High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

The stability condition is based on the simplified assumption that one current transformer is completely
saturated and the others transfer their partial currents proportionately in the case of an external fault. This is
theoretically the worst case. A safety margin is automatically provided, since, in practice, even the saturated
transformer still delivers some current.
Figure 6-117 shows an equivalent circuit of this simplification. CT1 and CT2 are assumed to be ideal trans-
formers with their internal resistances Ri1 and Ri2. Ra are the core resistances of the connection lines between
transformer and resistance R; they are used doubled (forward line and return line). Ra2 is the resistance of the
longest connection line.
CT1 transmits the current I1. CT2 is assumed to be saturated. This is indicated by the dotted short-circuit line.
The transformer thus represents a low-impedance shunt by its saturation.
A further prerequisite is R >> (2Ra2 + Ri2).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_vebhdi, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-117 Simplified Connection Diagram of a Layout for High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault
Protection
The voltage at R is, then,

VR = I1· (2Ra2 + Ri2)
A further assumption is that the pickup value of the SIPROTEC 5 device corresponds to half of the knee-point
voltage of the current transformers. In the edge case,
VR = VKP/2
The stability limit ISL results, which means the through fault current up to which the arrangement remains
stable:
[fo_istabl, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE
For the 5 A transformer as above with VKP = 75 V and Ri = 0.3 Ω
Longest connection line = 22 m with 4 mm2 cross-section; that corresponds to Ra = 0.1 Ω
[fo_isl5aw, 1, en_US]
In the example, the stability limit is 15 × rated current or 12 kA primary.

For the 1 A transformer as above with VKP = 350 V and Ri = 5 Ω
Longest connection line = 107 m with 2.5 mm2 cross-section; that corresponds to Ra = 0.75 Ω
[fo_isl1aw, 1, en_US]
In the example, the stability limit is 27 × rated current or 21.6 kA primary.
Sensitivity Consideration for High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

The voltage present at the set of current transformers is supplied to the protection device via a series resistor
R as proportional current for evaluation. For dimensioning of the resistor, the following must be taken into
account:
The high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection should pick up at approximately half of the knee-point
voltage of the current transformers. From this, you can calculate the resistor R.
Since the device measures the current through the resistor, the resistor and measuring input of the device
must be connected in series. Since the resistor still should be high-impedance (aforementioned condition R >>
2Ra2 + Ri2 ), the inherent resistance of the measuring input can be neglected. The resistance results thus from
the pickup current Ipick and half of the knee-point voltage:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[fo_berecr, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE
For the 5 A transformer as above
Desired pickup value Ipick = 0.1 A (corresponds to 16 A primary)
[fo_ber5aw, 1, en_US]
For the 1 A transformer as above

Desired pickup value Ipick = 0.05 A (corresponds to 40 A primary)
[fo_ber1aw, 1, en_US]
The series resistor R must be designed for a minimum continuous load Pcontinuous.
[fo_pdau5a, 1, en_US]
[fo_pdau1a, 1, en_US]
Further, the series resistor R must be designed for a fault current lasting approximately 0.5 s. This time is
usually sufficient for fault clearing through backup protection.
The thermal stress of the series resistor depends on the voltage VRMS,stab that is present during an internal fault.
It is calculated according to the following equations:
[fo_usta5a, 1, en_US]
[fo_usta1a, 1, en_US]
IK,max,int corresponds to the maximum fault current here in the case of an internal fault.
5-A current transformer 800/5 with 40 kA primary corresponds to IK,max,int = 250 A secondary.
1-A current transformer 800/1 with 40 kA primary corresponds to IK,max,int = 50 A secondary.
This results in a temporary load for the series resistor over 0.5 s of:
[fo_p05s5a, 1, en_US]
[fo_p05s1a, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Observe that with the selection of a higher pickup value Ipick, the resistor value must be lowered and therefore
the dissipation rises sharply.
The varistor (see following figure) must be sized such that it remains high impedance up to the knee-point
voltage, for example:
• Approx. 100 V with 5 A transformer
• Approx. 500 V with 1 A transformer
[dw_anedif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-118 Connection Diagram of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection According to the High-Impe-
dance Principle
Even with unfavorable wiring, the maximum occurring voltage peaks do not exceed 2 kV for safety reasons.
When for performance reasons, several varistors must be connected in parallel, give preference to types with
flat characteristic curves, in order to avoid an unbalanced load. Siemens therefore recommends the following
types by METROSIL:
600A/S1/S256 (k = 450, β = 0.25)
600A/S1/S1088 (k = 900, β = 0.25)
In the example, set the pickup value of the first Definite-time overcurrent protection stage (setting
Threshold) to 0.1 A for 5-A transformers or 0.05 A for 1-A transformers. No further protection stages are
needed. Delete these or switch them off. Set the Operate delay setting to 0 s.
If several current transformers are connected in series, for example, with use as busbar protection with several
feeders, the magnetization currents of the transformers switched in parallel can no longer be neglected.
In this case, add up the magnetization currents at half of the knee-point voltage (corresponds to the set
Threshold). These magnetization currents reduce the current through the resistor R. Thus, the actual pickup
value is correspondingly higher.
6.12.10 Application Example: Tank Leakage Protection
Tank leakage protection records short-circuits to ground – including high-impedance ones – between a phase
and the tank of a transformer. The tank is thus insulated, or at least grounded with high impedance. The tank
must be connected with a line to ground. The current that flows through this line is fed to the protection
device. If a short-circuit to ground occurs in a tank, a fault current (tank current) flows to substation ground
via the ground connection.
The function Overcurrent protection, 1-phase detects the tank current. If the tank current exceeds the set
Threshold, the function Overcurrent protection, 1-phase generates an operate indication. Depending on
the set Operate delay, the transformer is tripped immediately or time-delayed on all sides.
For tank protection, a sensitive, 1-phase current measuring input is used.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_prkess, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-119 Tank-Control Principle

A prerequisite for the application of tank protection is the availability of a sensitive input transformer at device
input I4.
If you connect Measuring point I 1-ph with the function group Voltage-current 1-phase, the function
Overcurrent protection, 1-phase works with the 1-phase current connected to input I4.
Use only the first definite-time overcurrent protection stage of function Overcurrent protection, 1-phase.
The Threshold setting is used to set the pickup value. No further protection stages are needed. Delete these
or switch them off. Set the Operate delay setting to 0 s.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.13 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
The Positive-sequence overcurrent protection function (ANSI 50/51):
• Detects short circuits in electric equipment
• Can be applied when the zero-sequence current or negative-sequence current should not influence the
tripping, for example, on the tertiary delta winding of an auto transformer
You can find a typical application scenario in the chapter 6.13.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.
The Positive-sequence overcurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with 3-phase
current measurement.
The function comes factory-set with 2 Definite-time positive-sequence overcurrent protection stages.
The following stages can be operated simultaneously within the function:
• 3 stages Definite-time positive-sequence overcurrent protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time positive-sequence overcurrent protection

Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure. Apart from the tripping delay
• Pickup
• Operate
[dw_PSP_structure, 1, en_US]
tripping due to transformer-inrush currents.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_PSP_definite, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-121 Logic Diagram of the Stage Definite-Time Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the posi-
tive‑sequence current is calculated.

You can block the stage externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the event of
blocking, the picked up stage is reset.
Blocking of Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function

If the device is equipped with the additional Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer inrush currents.
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The start of the time delay and tripping are however blocked. The stage signals this by way of
a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the
tripping delay (time delay) is started. After that time, the stage operates.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Application Example
The Positive-sequence overcurrent protection function is applied to the tertiary delta winding of the auto
transformer as shown in the following figure.
Short circuits on the delta winding must be detected. The stage should be as sensitive as possible but must
not pick up in case of faults in the circuits connected to the low-voltage side of the auxiliary transformer. A
single Positive-sequence overcurrent protection stage without time delay is applied and is connected with
the CTs marked in the following figure. When the stage operates, both the high-voltage and low-voltage sides
of the auto transformer will trip.
[dw_PSP_application_example, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-122 Auto Transformer with Tertiary Delta Winding
During ground faults on the high-voltage side (220 kV) or low-voltage side (110 kV) of the auto transformer,
large currents circulate in the delta winding. This circulating current is a pure zero-sequence current. The
protection function applied to the delta winding must not respond to this zero-sequence current. For this
purpose, the Positive-sequence overcurrent protection function is applied.
In this application example, there is no circuit breaker on the delta winding, and the load on the delta winding
is directly connected via the 500-kVA auxiliary transformer.
The application data in this application example is as follows:
Application Data Value
Rated apparent power of the auto transformer 300 MVA
Rated apparent power of the auxiliary transformer (Srated, aux) 500 kVA
Short-circuit voltage of the auxiliary transformer (uk-aux) 12 %
Rated apparent power of the delta winding 30 MVA
Rated voltage of the delta winding (Vrated, delta) 22 kV
Connected load on the delta winding 500 kVA
Current transformer ratio in the delta winding (RatioI) 800 A/1 A
Generally, for the delta winding, the short-circuit current is substantially larger than the rated current, and
the expected maximum load current is substantially smaller than the rated current. Therefore, you only
need to consider the short-circuit current when determining the pickup threshold of the Positive-sequence
overcurrent protection function.
As there is no circuit breaker between the delta winding and the connected auxiliary transformer, the
pickup threshold of the Positive-sequence overcurrent protection function is graded against the maximum
short-circuit current due to a short circuit on the low-voltage (400 V) side of the auxiliary transformer. The

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
maximum fault current for a fault on the low-voltage side of the auxiliary transformer must therefore be
determined to establish the pickup threshold.
To determine the pickup threshold (setting of the Threshold parameter) of the stage, the following calcula-
tions must be carried out:
• Maximum short-circuit current (ISC, max) on the high-voltage side of the auxiliary transformer due to a
short circuit on the low-voltage (400 V) side
[fo_max_fault_current, 1, en_US]
• Primary-current pickup threshold (I1stage1, prim)

In this example, a safety margin (kS) of 200 % is applied.
[fo_prim_threshold, 1, en_US]
• Secondary-current pickup threshold (I1stage1, sec), which is the setting of the Threshold parameter
[fo_sec_threshold, 1, en_US]
• Default setting (_:20581:3) Threshold = 1.200 A (for the 1st stage)
As time coordination with other protection functions is not required, you can set the Operate delay
parameter to a rather small value of 0.03 s.

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you stabilize the stage against tripping due to
transformer-inrush currents. If transformers are parts of the protection zones, set this parameter to yes.
When the pickup threshold is set to 2 times the maximum short-circuit current, the threshold value should be
above the current flowing during an inrush to the auxiliary transformer. Consequently, the setting of the Blk.
w. inrush curr. detect. can remain no. For more sensitive pickup thresholds, the Blk. w. inrush
curr. detect. should be set to yes.

With the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter, you block the operate indication, the fault recording,
and the fault log.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.13.3.3 Settings

Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
• yes
delay
Definite-T 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
• yes
delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Definite-T 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_PSP_inverse, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-123 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the posi-
tive‑sequence current is calculated.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

• Default setting (_:105) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse


Note that a safety margin is set between the pickup value and the threshold value. The stage only picks up at
approx. 10 % above the Threshold.

parameter Time dial at 1.00 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset

• Default setting (_:104) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you stabilize the stage against tripping due to
6.13.4.3 Settings

Inverse-T #
_:1 Inverse-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Inverse-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:104 Inverse-T #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect.
• yes
_:105 Inverse-T #:Type of char- • ANSI long-time inv. IEC normal
_:106 Inverse-T #:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:107 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:81 Inverse-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:52 Inverse-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inverse-T #:Health ENS O
_:54 Inverse-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:56 Inverse-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:60 Inverse-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:59 Inverse-T #:Disk emulation running SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:55 Inverse-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:57 Inverse-T #:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.14 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
A typical characteristic of intermittent ground faults is that they often extinguish automatically and strike
again after some time. The fault duration can last between a few milliseconds and many seconds. Thus, such
faults are not detected at all or not selectively by the ordinary overcurrent protection. If pulse durations are
extremely short, not all protection devices in a short-circuit path can pick up. Thus, selective tripping is not
ensured.
Due to the time delay of the overcurrent protection function, such faults are too short to initiate switching off
the faulted cable. The short-circuit protection can clear such ground faults selectively only if the ground faults
have become permanent.
But such intermittent ground faults already bear the risk of damaging the equipment thermally. This is why
SIPROTEC 5 devices feature a protection function that is able to detect such intermittent ground faults and
accumulates their duration. If the sum reaches a configurable value within a certain time, the limit of the
thermal rating has been reached. If intermittent ground faults are distributed over a long period or if the
ground fault disappears and does not restrike after some time, the equipment under load is expected to cool
down. Tripping is not necessary in this case.
The function Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protection is used to protect against intermittent
ground faults which occur, for example, in cables due to poor insulation or water ingress in cable joints.
The function Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protection can be used in protection function
groups with current measurement. The function comes factory-set with 1 stage, and a maximum of 2 stages
can be operated simultaneously. The non-preconfigured stages are shown in gray in the following figure.
[dw_int_GFP, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_Intnon, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-125 Logic of the Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measured Value 3I0

The intermittent ground-fault current 3I0 can either be measured via the standard ground-current input IN or
via the sensitive ground-current input INS. It can also be calculated from the sum of the 3-phase currents. The
current value and its setting range depend on the parameter Connection type of the measuring point I-3ph.
Table 6-9 Threshold Setting Range with Different Connection Types
Connection Type of Current Threshold 3I0/IN CT Terminal Type Setting Range

the Measuring Point Threshold Value
I-3ph (Secondary)32
3-phase Calculated 3I033 4 x Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 x Protection, 1 x sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 x Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3-phase + IN Measured IN34 4 x Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3-phase + IN-separate 4 x Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Measured IN and calculated 3 x Protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 35.000 A
3I0 when IN > 1.6 A
The stage calculates the RMS value of 3I0 since this value takes into account the higher-order harmonics
components and the direct component (DC). Both components contribute to the thermal load.
Maximum 3I0 of the Fault

The stage records the maximum RMS value of 3I0 during the intermittent ground fault. The statistical value
3I0 max. is a percentage value calculated through dividing the primary maximum RMS value by the rated
current value of the protected object. With the coming operate signal, this value is logged via the information
3I0 max..
Pickup and Intermittent Ground-Fault Indication

When 3I0 exceeds the threshold value, the pickup signals Pickup and Limited pickup (log) are
issued. The stage generates the signal Stabilized pickup by extending the Pickup for a defined time
(parameter Pickup extension time).
The stage counts the signals Pickup. If the counted number reaches the configured No. pickups till
interm.GF, the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is issued. The signal Limited pickup (log) is not
issued anymore after the issue of the signal Intermittent gnd.flt..
32 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is
5 A.
33 If the connection type is without IN, such as 3-phase, the current threshold value is a calculated 3I0 value.
34 If the connection type is with IN, such as 3-phase + IN, the current threshold value is a measured IN value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_int_FaD, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-126 Fault Detection of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Text. Defined time for extending the signal Pickup
Number of Pickups
The stage counts the number of signals Pickup during the intermittent ground fault. With the operate of the
stage this number is logged via the information No. of pickups.
Accumulation of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Current and Issuing the Operate Signal
An intermittent ground fault can result in thermal stress on the protected equipment. The magnitude and the
duration of the ground-fault current are decisive for the thermal stress. In order to calculate the thermal stress,
the stage sums up the duration of the stabilized pickups with a sum of times. If the integration value reaches
the predefined Sum of extended PU times, the limit of the thermal load is reached. The stage issues the
signal Sum limit reached and operates when the signal Pickup is active.
Reset Timer for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike again within a larger time, the stressed equipment can cool down. In this case, an operation is not
necessary. The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset timer. If a ground fault occurs,
the Timer T-reset with its setting Reset time is launched simultaneously with Integrator T-sum. Unlike
the integrator, each new ground fault restarts the reset timer with its initial value. If Timer T-reset expires,
that is, no new ground fault was detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are reset.
Timer T-reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as
intermittent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later is considered
as a new fault event.
Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset.
• The Intermittent ground-fault protection stage operates.
• The general operate indication is going.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Under one of the following conditions, Integrator T-sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset
and returns to its idle state.
• Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
• The operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protection stage is going.
• The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault
protection stage issued.
Fault Log and Fault Recording

You can select between the ground-fault log without fault recording or the normal fault log with fault
recording. If you set the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes, the operate of the stage and
fault recording are blocked and the information automatically appears in the ground-fault log. Otherwise, the
operate and fault recording are not blocked and the information appears in the normal fault log.
Start & Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The signal Stabilized pickup initiates the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the
function group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the signal Stabilized
pickup rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.
Influence on Other Functions to Avoid a Burst of Signals

Intermittent ground faults may cause other functions, based on overcurrent measurement, to pick up, which
may result in a burst of signals. In order to avoid an overflow of the fault log, a special mechanism is applied
to the signals of these functions after detection of an intermittent ground fault (signal Intermittent
gnd.flt.).
The special mechanism is applied for the following listed functions and other functions are not influenced:
• Overcurrent protection, phases
• Directional overcurrent protection, ground
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase
• Negative-sequence protection with definite-time characteristic curve
• Directional negative-sequence protection with definite-time delay
• Directional overcurrent-protection stage with cos phi or sin phi measurement
• Directional overcurrent-protection stage with 3I0-phi (V,I) measurement
• Sensitive ground-current protection with 3I0

If a function picks up, normally its output signals are sent directly to the information targets, for example, the
pickup signal is written to the fault log. To avoid overflow of logs due to intermittent ground faults, a special
log buffer mechanism is used. If one of the preceding functions or stages picks up after an intermittent ground
fault has been detected (signal Intermittent gnd.flt. has been issued), its output signals are processed
as shown in the following 2 tables.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table 6-10 Processing of the Signal Status Changes
Processing of Signal Status Changes Description

Special buffering mechanism The status changes of signals are written to a special
buffer. This buffer can store the latest change for
each signal.
With the pickup signal as example, if one of the
preceding protection functions or stages picks up
during an active signal Intermittent gnd.flt.,
the pickup signal is not written in the fault log
anymore unless one of the preceding functions oper-
ates. After the operation, the buffered signals are
written to the information target with the original
time stamp. This measure ensures that a pickup
signal, although delayed, is always signaled in associ-
ation with each operate command.
Discard The signal status changes are discarded.
Pass through The signal is forwarded to the information target
without restriction.
Special buffering does not apply for specific infor-
mation targets as protection measure, for example,
reverse interlocking, need these signals for proper
operation.
Table 6-11 Information Target with Different Processing of Signal Status Changes
Information Target Processing of Signal Status Changes

Processing of Signal Status Operational log Special buffering mechanism
Changes Fault log
Ground-fault log
User-defined log
Communication interface IEC 61850-8-1 Client/Server Special buffering mechanism
IEC 60870-5-103/104
DNP V3.0
Automatic reclosing function Discard
Circuit-breaker failure protection Discard
Group indications Discard(1)
Protection interface PDI Pass through
IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE Pass through
CFC Pass through
LEDs Pass through
Binary output Pass through
Fault recorder Pass through
(1) Note for reverse-interlocking applications: To ensure that the interlocking signal is not discarded
during an intermittent ground fault, Siemens recommends using the individual pickup signals
of the function stages instead of the group indications for reverse-interlocking applications in
combination with the intermittent ground-fault protection function.
No Start of the Automatic Reclosing Function

Automatic reclosing is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults as the protection function
only operates after repeated detection of a fault or after the integration value reaches the predefined Sum of

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
extended PU times. Besides this, its basic design is to prevent thermal overload. For these reasons, the
intermittent ground-fault protection function is not intended to start the automatic reclosing function.
Rooting of Pickup Signals

The signal Pickup is supposed to be routed to LED and relay. The signal Limited pickup (log) is only
reported to the fault log and communication interface before the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is issued.
This scheme prevents a burst of messages.
NOTE
i To avoid a burst of messages, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and fault log.

With the parameter Threshold, you set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0, measured as RMS
value.
A rather sensitive setting is possible to respond also to short ground faults since the pickup time shortens as
the ground-fault current increases.
Parameter: No. pickups till interm.GF
• Default setting (_:11341:101) No. pickups till interm.GF = 3

With the parameter No. pickups till interm.GF, you set the number of counted Pickup signals after
which the ground fault is considered as intermittent.
Parameter: Pickup extension time
• Default setting (_:11341:102) Pickup extension time = 0.10 s

You can get a stabilized pickup signal with the parameter Pickup extension time. This stabilization is
especially important for the coordination with existing static or electromechanical overcurrent protections.
Parameter: Sum of extended PU times
• Default setting (_:11341:103) Sum of extended PU times = 20 s

With the parameter Sum of extended PU times, you set the threshold value for the integrator. If the
integration reaches Sum of extended PU times, the stage operates if the pickup state is present.
This Sum of extended PU times represents one of the 4 selectivity criteria (pickup threshold, pickup
extension time, reset time, and integrator threshold value) for coordination of the relays on adjacent feeders.
It is comparable to the time grading of the overcurrent protection. The protection in the radial system which
is closest to the intermittent fault and picks up, has the shortest summation time Sum of extended PU
times.
Parameter: Reset time
• Default setting (_:11341:104) Reset time = 300 s

With the parameter Reset time, you can define the maximum interval between 2 adjacent ground faults. If
the interval is larger than the Reset time, the counter and integrator are reset.
The parameter Reset time must be much higher than the operate value of the Sum of extended PU
times.
NOTE
i Siemens recommends setting the parameter Reset time to a value not lower than 40 ms. A too low
value will lead to a risk that the intermittent ground-fault protection function never picks up.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

You can block the operate indication, the fault recording, and the fault log with the parameter Operate &
flt.rec. blocked. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.
EXAMPLE
[TiExaInt, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-127 Example of Selectivity Criteria of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
6.14.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:11341:3 Stage 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:11341:101 Stage 1:No. pickups till 2 to 10 3
interm.GF
_:11341:102 Stage 1:Pickup extension 0.00 s to 10.00 s 0.10 s
time
_:11341:103 Stage 1:Sum of 0.00 s to 180.00 s 20.00 s
extended PU times
_:11341:104 Stage 1:Reset time 0.00 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:11341:302 Stage 1:Stabilized pickup ACD O
_:11341:303 Stage 1:Limited pickup (log) ACD O
_:11341:304 Stage 1:Intermittent gnd.flt. SPS O
_:11341:301 Stage 1:Sum limit reached SPS O
_:11341:305 Stage 1:Reset time running SPS O
_:11341:306 Stage 1:3I0 max. MV O
_:11341:307 Stage 1:No. of pickups MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.15 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection:
• Detects the intermittent ground faults in grounded, compensated, or isolated cable systems selectively
• Can be operated in 2 different modes:

– Operate only by counting directional ground-current pulses
– Operate by integration of the fault current in combination with a directional criterion by counting
directional ground-current pulses
The intermittent ground faults in cable systems are frequently caused by weak insulation or water ingress in
cable joints. The ground faults are characterized by the following properties:
• Intermittent ground faults show very short high ground-current pulses (up to several hundred amperes)
with a duration of less than 1 ms.
• Intermittent ground faults are self-extinguishing and reignite within one half period up to several
periods, depending on the power-system conditions and the fault type.
• Intermittent ground faults can persist over longer periods (several seconds to minutes) and develop to
static ground faults.
The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection can be used in protection function groups
with current and voltage measurement. The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 stage, and a
maximum of 2 stages can be operated simultaneously.
[dw_structure_dirI_GFP, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Overview
[lo_overview, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-129 Logic of the Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Blocking of the Stage with Measuring-Voltage Failure

• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that the measuring-voltage failure detection

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic for Direction Determination and Pulse Counting
[lo_int_dir1, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-130 Logic Diagram of Direction Determination and Pulse Counting
(1) The input signal 3 is from Figure 6-131.
Measurement Values for Direction Determination

The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection determines the direction of the ground-
current pulse by comparing the maximum 3I0 and the VN changing trend of the ground-current pulse.
The zero-sequence voltage v0(t) can either be measured via the voltage input VN or can be calculated from
the sum of 3 phase-to-ground voltages. The measured value depends on the parameter Connection type of
the measuring point V-3ph.
The intermittent ground-fault current 3i0(t) can either be measured via the ground-current input IN or via the
sensitive ground-current input INS. It can also be calculated from the sum of the 3 phase currents. The current
value and its setting range depend on the parameter Connection type of the measuring point I-3ph.
Table 6-12 Threshold Setting Range with Different Connection Types
Connection Type of Current Threshold 3I0/IN CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting

the Measuring Point Range
I-3ph (Secondary)35
3-phase Calculated 3I036 4 x Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 x Protection, 1 x sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 x Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
35 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5
A.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Connection Type of Current Threshold 3I0/IN CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting

the Measuring Point Range
I-3ph (Secondary)35
3-phase + IN Measured IN37 4 x Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3-phase + IN-separate 4 x Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Measured IN and calculated 3 x Protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 35.000 A
3I0 when IN > 1.6 A
Direction Determination and Pulse Counting

When the RMS value of 3I0 exceeds the set threshold value (signal no. 3 in Figure 6-130), the direction
determination process is started and is continuously carried out until the function resets. At first, the current
pulse (current peak) detection takes place. If a current pulse is detected, the direction determination for this
pulse is carried out.
The direction is determined by the maximum 3I0 and the VN changing trend of the ground-current pulse.
The plus or minus sign of the maximum 3I0 is compared to the plus or minus sign of the VN changing trend,
resulting in the directional decision forward or reverse. If the VN changing trend is smaller than 0.03 Vrated
or if the maximum 3I0 is smaller than 0.1 Irated, the direction is undefined.
During the ongoing intermittent ground fault, the directional results for all current pulses are counted.
Directional Mode and Directional Pulse Counter Criterion

The parameter Directional mode defines whether the function operates in forward or in reverse
direction. The pulses in the specified direction are counted. If the pulse counter reaches the threshold
value set in the parameter No. of pulses for operate, the signal Pulse no. reached is issued.
Depending on the operating mode (Counter or Integrator and counter) of the function, the signal
can immediately cause the operate of the function (Counter mode) or it is processed as directional release
criteria (Integrator and counter operating mode). Refer to the further description in the following
sections.
The directional pulse counter is reset when a different direction than the set Directional mode is detected.
An undefined direction result does not reset the counter.
Operating Mode
2 different functional operating modes are available: Counter and Integrator and counter. You can
select the different operating modes using the parameter Operating mode.
• Operating mode Counter:

Many ground-current pulses of intermittent ground faults can result in a damage of the protected object.
In this mode, the criterion for operate is only the number of directional current pulses. This is similar to
the SIPROTEC 4 implementation.
• Operating mode Integrator and counter:

An intermittent ground fault can result in thermal stress on the protected object. The magnitude and
the duration of the ground-current pulses are decisive for the thermal stress. In order to calculate
the thermal stress, the stage sums up the duration of the stabilized pickups with an integrator. If the
integration value reaches the threshold value, one criterion for the operate is fulfilled. The 2nd criterion
for the operate is the ground-fault direction. The ground-fault direction is determined by counting the
directional ground-current pulses.
35 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5
A.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Pickup, Operate, and Reset logic for the Counter Mode
Figure 6-131 Pickup, Operate, and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Counter
(1) The internal signal 4 is from Figure 6-130.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Pickup, Operate, and Reset logic for the Integrator and Counter Mode
Figure 6-132 Pickup, Operate, and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Integrator and Counter
(1) The internal signal 4 and 5 are from Figure 6-130.
Measurement Value for Pickup and Integration

The stage calculates the RMS value of 3I0 since this value takes into account the higher-order harmonic
components and the direct component (DC). Both components contribute to the thermal load.
Pickup, Limited Pickup, and Stabilized Pickup

Whenever 3I0 exceeds Threshold, the stage issues the signal Pickup. The signal is intended to be applied
for LED and relay output.
Stabilized pickup is formed by prolonging the pickup indication by a settable time Pickup extension
time. This stabilization is especially important for the coordination with the existing static or electromechan-
ical overcurrent protection.
The Limited pickup (log) signal is intend to be applied for logging and communication interface. The
Limited pickup (log) signal will be entered in the fault log and reported via the system interface unless
the Intermittent gnd.flt. indication is given. This behavior prevents a burst of indications.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Intermittent Ground-Fault Indication

The stage counts the 3I0 pulses. If the sum of forward pulse counts, reverse counts, and directional undefined
counts is equal to or greater than No.of pulses for interm.GF, the signal Intermittent gnd.flt.
is issued.
If the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is issued, the pickup indications of some protection functions will be
restraint to avoid an indication burst during an intermittent ground fault.
Operate
The conditions for issuing the signal Operate depend on the operating mode.
Operating Mode Conditions for Issuing the Operate Signal
Counter • The current-pulse counter reached the No. of pulses for
operate, which is signaled via the Pulse no. reached indication.
• The timer Minimum operate delay expired. The timer is started
with the first pickup and is reset when the function resets.
• The pickup is active, which is signaled via the Pickup indication.
Integrator and counter • The 3I0 current integration value reaches the predefined Sum of
extended PU times, which is signaled via the Sum limit
reached indication.
• The current-pulse counter reached the No. of pulses for
operate, which is signaled via the Pulse no. reached indication.
• The pickup is active, which is signaled via the Pickup indication.
When an opposite current pulse against the setting Directional mode is detected, the Integrator T-sum
and the Counter are reset.
Reset Time for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a long interval between independent ground faults or if the ground fault extinguishes and does
not restrike again within a long time, the function must not operate. The interval between ground faults is
monitored with the reset time. If a ground fault occurs, the Timer T-reset with the setting Reset time
and the Integrator T-sum are launched simultaneously. Unlike the integrator, each new ground-current pulse
restarts the reset time with its initial value. If the Timer T-reset expires, that is, no new ground fault was
detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are reset. The Timer T-reset thus determines
the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as intermittent ground fault in
connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later is considered as a new ground-fault event.
Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset:
• The intermittent ground-fault protection stage operates.
• The general operate indication is going.

Under one of the following conditions, Integrator T-sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset
and returns to its idle state:
• The Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
• The operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protection stage is going.
• The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault
protection stage issued.
Maximum Value 3I0 of the Ground Fault

The stage records the maximum RMS value of 3I0 during the intermittent ground fault.The statistic value 3I0
max. is a percentage value calculated through dividing the primary maximum RMS value by the rated current
value of the protected object. If the function resets or operates, this value is logged via the signal 3I0 max..

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Fault Log and Fault Recording

You can select between the ground-fault log without fault recording or the normal fault log with fault
recording. If you set the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes, the operate of the stage and
fault recording are blocked and the information automatically appears in the ground-fault log. Otherwise, the
operate and fault recording are not blocked and the information appears in the normal fault log.
Start and Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The Stabilized pickup signal initiates fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the
function group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the Stabilized pickup
signal rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.
Influence on Other Functions to Avoid a Burst of Indications

In this case, the function uses the same mechanism as the Non-directional intermittent ground-fault
protection. For more information, refer to chapter Influence on Other Functions to Avoid a Burst of Signals,
Page 740.
No Start of the Automatic Reclosing Function

Automatic reclosing is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults. For this reason, the
function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection is not intended to start the Automatic reclosing
function.
Routing of Pickup Signals

The signal Pickup is supposed to be routed to an LED and a relay. The signal Limited pickup (log)
is only reported to the fault log and communication interface until the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is
issued. This scheme prevents a burst of indications.
NOTE
i To avoid a burst of indications, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and to the fault log.

With the parameter Threshold, you set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0, measured as RMS
value.
A rather sensitive setting is possible to respond also to short ground faults since the pickup time shortens as
the ground-fault current increases.

With the parameter Directional mode, you define if the function operates in forward or in reverse
direction.
Parameter: Pickup mode
• Default setting (_:16291:102) Pickup mode = with 3I0>

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the parameter Pickup mode, you define under which conditions pickup is detected and fault logging
and recording start:
• When the parameter Pickup mode is set to with 3I0>, the signal Pickup is released without consid-
ering the ground fault direction. The signal Pickup is issued once the IN/3I0 exceeds the threshold
value.
• When the parameter Pickup mode is set to with direction, the signal Pickup is issued when
at least one pulse direction is the same as the direction specified by the set value of parameter Direc-
tional mode.
• Default setting (_:16291:103) Operating mode = Counter

With the parameter Operating mode, you define if the function operates in Counter or in Integrator
and counter mode.
Operating Mode Application and Setting Notes
Counter The number of directional pulses is the determining operate criterion. This
is a simple method which is similar to the implementation in the 7SJ
SIPROTEC 4 devices. Siemens recommends using this method if no time
grading or only simple time grading between protection devices (time
grading of only 2 or 3 devices) is required.
Time grading is then carried out by increasing the parameter value No.
of pulses for operate towards the infeed.
Integrator and counter The integrator and the counter are the determining operate criteria while
the counter criterion is only used for the direction determination. The
integrator works in the same way as for the non-directional intermittent
ground fault function. This allows the same time-grading principles as
for the non-directional intermittent ground fault function. Refer to this
function for more description.
Parameter: No.of pulses for interm.GF
• Default setting (_:16291:104) No.of pulses for interm.GF = 3

With the parameter No.of pulses for interm.GF, you set the total number of pulse counts (forward,
reverse and non-dir. pulses) at which the ground fault is considered to be intermittent. Siemens
recommends using the default setting.
• Default setting (_:16291:105) Pickup extension time = 0.10 s

With the parameter Pickup extension time, you get a prolonged and thus stabilized pickup signal. This
stabilization is especially important for the coordination with existing static or electromechanical overcurrent
protections.
Parameter: No. of pulses for operate
• Default setting (_:16291:108) No. of pulses for operate = 5

The pulses in the specified direction from Directional mode are counted. If the pulse counter reaches the
set value of the parameter No. of pulses for operate, the directional counter criterion is fulfilled.
The setting of parameter No. of pulses for operate depends on the Operating mode.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Operating Mode Application and Setting Notes

Counter The number of directional pulses is the determining operate
criterion. Thus do not set the value for parameter No. of
pulses for operate too small. Consider that a permanent
intermittent ground fault will cause many current pulses. If no
time-grading considerations are required, Siemens recommends
using a value in the range of 10 to 20.
Integrator and counter The integrator and the counter are the determining operate
criteria while the counter criterion is only used for the direction
determination. The value for parameter No. of pulses for
operate to fulfill the directional criterion can be set to a rather
small value in the range of 3 to 5.
Parameter: Sum of extended PU times
• Default setting (_:16291:106) Sum of extended PU times = 20.00 s

This parameter is only relevant in the operating mode Integrator and counter.
With the parameter Sum of extended PU times, you set the threshold value for the integrator. If the
integration reaches Sum of extended PU times, the stage operates if the signal Pulse no. reached
and the pickup state is present.
The parameter Sum of extended PU times represents one of the 5 selectivity criteria (ground-fault
direction, pickup threshold, pickup extension time, reset time, and integrator threshold value) for coordination
of the relays on subordinate devices. It is comparable to the time grading of the overcurrent protection.
The Sum of extended PU times has the shortest summation time in the radial system for the device that
is closest to the intermittent ground fault and that picks up.
• Default setting (_:16291:107) Reset time = 300 s

With the parameter Reset time, you can define the maximum interval between 2 adjacent ground faults. If
the interval is larger than the Reset time, the counter and integrator are reset.
The parameter Reset time must be much higher than the operate value of the Sum of extended PU
times.
NOTE
i Siemens recommends setting the parameter Reset time to a value not lower than 40 ms. A too low
value will lead to a risk that the intermittent ground-fault protection function never picks up.

recording, and the fault log. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.
Parameter: Minimum operate delay
• Default setting (_:16291:112) Minimum operate delay = 0.00 s

This parameter is only relevant in the operating mode Counter.
The parameter Minimum operate delay is used to avoid too fast tripping in case of frequent restriking (for
example, restriking occurs every 30 ms).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.15.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:16291:10 Stage 1:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:16291:101 Stage 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
_:16291:102 Stage 1:Pickup mode • with 3I0> with 3I0>
• with direction
_:16291:103 Stage 1:Operating mode • Counter Counter
• Integrator and counter
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:16291:105 Stage 1:Pickup extension 0.00 s to 10.00 s 0.10 s
time
_:16291:104 Stage 1:No.of pulses for 2 to 10 3
interm.GF
_:16291:106 Stage 1:Sum of 0.00 s to 180.00 s 20.00 s
extended PU times
_:16291:107 Stage 1:Reset time 0.00 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s
_:16291:108 Stage 1:No. of pulses for 2 to 100 5
operate
_:16291:112 Stage 1:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
operate delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:16291:302 Stage 1:Stabilized pickup ACD O
_:16291:303 Stage 1:Limited pickup (log) ACD O
_:16291:304 Stage 1:Intermittent gnd.flt. SPS O
_:16291:301 Stage 1:Sum limit reached SPS O
_:16291:308 Stage 1:Pulse no. reached SPS O
_:16291:305 Stage 1:Reset time running SPS O
_:16291:306 Stage 1:3I0 max. MV O
_:16291:310 Stage 1:Forward pulses MV O
_:16291:311 Stage 1:Reverse pulses MV O
_:16291:312 Stage 1:Non-dir. pulses MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.16 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
2 functions are available for ground-fault detection: a directional one and a non-directional one.
The Directional sensitive ground-fault detection (ANSI 67Ns) serves:
• For directional detection of permanent ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded systems
• For directional detection of fast extinguishing transient ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded
systems
• For determination of the faulty phase
• For detection of high-impedance ground faults in effectively (solidly) or low-impedance (semi-solidly)

grounded systems
The Non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection (ANSI 51Ns) serves:
• For ground-fault detection in isolated or resonant-grounded systems
• For detection of high-impedance ground faults in effectively (solidly) or low-impedance (semi-solidly)

grounded systems
Directional Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

The Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function can be used in protection function groups that
make current and voltage zero-sequence systems (3I0 and V0) available. The function comes factory-set with
a non-directional V0> stage with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage, a directional 3I0> stage with
cos φ or sin φ measurement, a directional transient ground-fault stage, and an intermittent ground-fault
blocking stage.
• 2 non-directional V0> stages with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• 4 directional 3I0> stages with cos φ or sin φ measurement
• 2 directional transient ground-fault stages
• 4 directional 3I0> stages with φ(V0, 3I0) measurement
• 4 directional Y0> stages with G0 or B0 measurement (admittance method)
• 4 directional stages with phasor measurement of a harmonic
• 4 non-directional 3I0> stages
• 2 non-directional Y0> stages
• 2 non-directional pulse-pattern detection stages
• 1 intermittent ground-fault blocking stage

The general functionality works across stages on the function level.
The group-indications output logic generates the following group indications of the entire function by the
logical OR from the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate indication

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_str_GFP, 6, en_US]
Figure 6-133 Structure/Embedding of the Directional Function in Protection Function Groups
Non-Directional Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

The Non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection function can be used in protection function groups
that only make the zero-sequence system (3I0) available. The function comes factory-set with a non-direc-
tional 3I0> stage.
• 4 non-directional 3I0> stages
• 2 non-directional Y0> stages
• 4 non-directional 3I0> harmonic stages
• 2 non-directional pulse-pattern detection stages

The group-indications output logic generates the following group indications of the entire function by the
logical OR from the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate indication

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_SGFP_u4, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-134 Structure/Embedding of the Non-Directional Function in Protection Function Groups

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_gfp_ger, 8, en_US]
Figure 6-135 Logic Diagram of the Cross-Stage Functionality of the Directional Function
[lo_gfp_non, 6, en_US]
Figure 6-136 Logic Diagram of the Cross-Stage Functionality of the Non-Directional Function

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Operational Measured Value φ(I,V)

The function block calculates the angle between IN and V0 and makes the angle available as function
measured value Phi(I,V).
[dw_ph_I_N_U0, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-137 Sign Definition for the Measured Value
Network Topology
The parameter Network topology parameter is only used in the Directional transient ground-fault stage.
With this parameter, the algorithm of the directional transient ground-fault stage adopts its processing of an
operational 3I0.
Fault-Extinction Detection
The extinction of the fault is characterized by the fact that the zero-sequence voltage subsides. Depending
on the system conditions and fault characteristics, this process can last several 100 ms. If a continuously
falling zero-sequence voltage is detected during the set time Decay time V0, then the fault is considered
extinguished. The signal Flt. extinction det. is issued.
Thus, the possibility exists, for example, to block the stage 3I0> with cos φ or sin φ measurement directly
after the fault extinction, in order to avoid an overfunction during the subsiding process with a very sensitive
setting of the stage.
Angle-Error Compensation
The high reactive power factor in the arc-suppression-coil-ground system and the unavoidable air-gap of the
core balance current transformer often make necessary a compensation of the angle error of the core balance
current transformer. Using the characteristic shown in the following figure, the device approaches the angle
error of the core balance current transformer with sufficient precision.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_erdwdl, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-138 Correction of the Transmission Characteristic Curve of a Core Balance Current Transformer
Ground-Fault Indication, Stabilization at Intermittent Ground Fault

The indication Ground fault indicates the ground fault and manages the ground-fault log (see Ground-
Fault Log, Page 762). The corresponding information of the stages used is accessed for the generation of this
indication.
The indication Ground fault contains the direction information, independent of the parameterized
working direction of a stage. The indication is thus suited for transfer to a station.
To avoid a flood of indications in case of an intermittent ground fault, a maximum of 30 status changes of
this indication is logged per ground fault. An intermittent ground fault must be treated as one ground fault so
that the stabilization can take action. This is ensured with the parameter Dropout delay, by the dropout of
the indication Ground fault being delayed. If the next ignition of the ground fault takes place during the
dropout delay, the indication does not drop out and the log remains open.
NOTE
i The Ground fault indication in the general stage must be routed into the ground-fault log. If not, you
can meet a flood of ground-fault logs when an intermittent ground fault occurs.
Ground-Fault Log
Ground faults can be recorded in a designated buffer, the ground-fault log. As long as the Operate &
flt.rec. blocked parameter is set to yes, all indications routed into the ground-fault log are written in
the ground-fault log.
The criterion for opening the ground-fault log is the raising of any indication which is routed to the ground-
fault log, for example, the indication Ground fault . The criterion for closing is the clearing of all routed
indications.
Related Topics
You can find general notes on the ground-fault login chapter Indications under 3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log.
Value Indications in Log and Real-Time Functional Values

If the value indications listed in Table 6-13 can be calculated, they are written into the log (ground-fault log or
fault log) at the time of the 1st raising ground-fault indication and the 1st operate indication of any stage.
The function also provides some real-time functional values, as described in Table 6-13.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table 6-13 Value Indications in Log and Real-Time Functional Values
Value Indication in Log Real-Time Functional Value Description

IN – Neutral-point current IN
IN active IN act. Active component IN
IN reactive IN react. Reactive component IN
V0 – Zero-sequence voltage V0
Phi(IN, V0) Phi(I,V) Angle between IN and V0
Refer to Operational Measured Value
φ(I,V) , Page 761.
If the ground current is measured via a sensitive input and the measured value exceeds the measuring range
of 1.6 ⋅ Irated, the function switches from the measured IN value to the calculated 3I0 value and the 3I0 values
are displayed.
Group-Indication Blocking
[lo_SGFP block group ind., 1, en_US]
Figure 6-139 Logic Diagram of the Group-Indication Blocking of the Directional and Non-Directional Func-
tions
By setting the Block. group indications parameter to yes, the following indications are blocked:
• The group indications of the function and the corresponding group indications of the function group
• The trip command from the function Sensitive ground-fault detection to the FB Circuit breaker
Fault recording and logging are not affected by the setting.
Indication: Ground fault

To indicate the ground fault and its direction via the protocol, Siemens recommends using the indication
(_:2311:302) Ground fault. The indication contains the direction information, independent of the
parameterized working direction of a stage. And this indication is also stabilized against a flood of indications
in case of an intermittent ground fault.
Parameter: Decay time V0
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Decay time V0 = 0.10 s

With the Decay time V0 parameter, you specify the time slot for the detection of a fault extinction. If V0
continuously falls within this time, fault extinction is detected and the indication Flt. extinction det. is
issued.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) Dropout delay = 1.00 s

To avoid chattering of the indication Ground fault during an intermittent ground fault and thus a frequent
opening and closing of the ground-fault log, the dropout of the indication Ground fault (and thus the
closing of the log) can be delayed by the Dropout delay.
Using the default setting ensures that no flood of indications arises in case of an intermittent ground fault
for the indication Ground fault. The intermittent ground fault is then treated as a ground fault, and the
stabilization of the indication Ground fault can thus take action.
Angle-Error Compensation of the Core Balance Current Transformer
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Core balance CT- current 1 = 0.050 A
• Default setting (_:2311:104) Core balance CT- current 2 = 1.000 A
• Default setting (_:2311:105) CT angle error at I1 = 0.0°
• Default setting (_:2311:106) CT angle error at I2 = 0.0°

The high reactive-power factor in the arc-suppression-coil-ground system and the unavoidable air gap of the
core balance current transformer often make necessary a compensation of the angle error of the core balance
current transformer. For the burden actually connected, the maximum angle error CT angle error at I1
and the corresponding secondary current Core balance CT- current 1 as well as a further operating
point CT angle error at I2/Core balance CT- current 2 are entered, from which point the angle
error no longer changes appreciably.
In the isolated or grounded system, angle compensation is not necessary.
Parameter: Block. group indications
• Default setting (_:2311:119) Block. group indications = no

The Block. group indications parameter supports in applying the Sensitive ground-fault detection
function as a supervision function. If you set this parameter to yes, the following indications are blocked:
• The group indications of the function and the corresponding group indications of the function group are
blocked.
Consequently, the group-indications of the function group are then related to short-circuit protection
functions and can be forwarded to a station controller in the meaning of short-circuit protection.
• The trip command from the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function to the FB
Circuit breaker is blocked.
Fault recording and logging are not affected by the setting.
Parameter: Network topology
• Default setting (_:2311:121) Network topology = ring/meshed

This parameter is only used in the Directional transient ground-fault stage.
With the Network topology parameter, you set the network topology with reference to the network
section to be protected by the individual device.
Network Topology Description
ring/meshed The device is applied in a meshed system or a closed feeder ring.
radial The device is applied in a single feeder with radial topology. This setting has
to be also selected if parallel feeders are closed rings, as long as the own
feeder is single.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.16.3.3 Settings
Directional sensitive ground-fault detection

General
_:2311:121 General:Network • ring/meshed ring/meshed
topology
• radial
_:2311:101 General:Decay time V0 0.03 s to 0.20 s 0.10 s
_:2311:102 General:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
_:2311:103 General:Core balance 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
CT- current 1 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:2311:104 General:Core balance 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
CT- current 2 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:2311:105 General:CT angle error at 0.0° to 5.0° 0.0°
I1
_:2311:106 General:CT angle error at 0.0° to 5.0° 0.0°
I2
_:2311:119 General:Block. group • no no
indications
• yes
Non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection

General
_:2311:102 General:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
_:2311:119 General:Block. group • no no
indications
• yes
Directional sensitive ground-fault detection

(Type)
General
_:2311:302 General:Ground fault ACD O
_:2311:303 General:Flt. extinction det. SPS O
_:2311:309 General:Pos. measuring window SPS O
_:2311:306 General:IN MV O
_:2311:307 General:V0 MV O
_:2311:311 General:IN act. MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:2311:312 General:IN react. MV O
Non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection

(Type)
General
_:2311:302 General:Ground fault ACD O
6.16.4 Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement
Logic
[lo_gfp_3i0_stufe, 4, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_gfp_3i0f, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-141 Logic Diagram of the Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement
Measured Value V0, Method of Measurement

The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage VN is
converted to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available
to the device as a measurand, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground
voltages VA, VB, and VC using the defining equation.
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
Measured Value 3I0, Method of Measurement

The function usually evaluates the sensitively measured ground current 3I0 via a core balance current trans-
former. Since the linearity range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 current calculated from the phase currents. This results in a
very large linearity and settings range.
Depending on the setting of the Connection type parameter of the measuring point I-3ph as well as
the current terminal block used, the following different linearity and settings ranges result in addition to the
common application:
Connection Type of the Current Threshold 3I0/IN Current Terminal Block 3I0 Threshold Value
Measuring Point I-3ph Settings Range (Secon-
dary) 38
3-phase Calculated 3I039 4 × protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 × protection, 1 × sensi- 0.030 A to 35.000 A
tive
4 × measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3-phase + IN Measured IN40 4 × protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3-phase + IN-separate 4 × measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep Measured IN and calculated 3 × protection, 1 × sensi- 0.001 A to 35.000 A
3I0 when IN > 1.6 A tive
3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep Measured IN 4 × protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep 4 × measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3 × protection, 1 × sensi- 0.001 A to 1.600 A
tive
With the use of the function within a 1-phase function group and therefore at a 1-phase measuring point
I-1ph, the following different linearity and settings ranges result:
Measuring Point Current Threshold Current Terminal Block 3I0 Threshold Value
I-1ph Settings Range (Secon-
dary) 41
Measured Sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
The methods of measurement are characterized by high accuracy and by insensitivity to harmonics, especially
the 3rd and 5th harmonics frequently present in the ground-fault (residual) current.
Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup

If the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 exceeds the threshold value 3I0> threshold value and
the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value V0> threshold value,
the stage recognizes the ground fault. The direction determination (see the next paragraph) is started when
the V0 threshold value is exceeded. The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal (in the
General function block). If the direction result equals the parameterized direction (parameter Directional
mode), the stage picks up.
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The
direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir.
determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result form the direction deter-
mination is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its threshold value.
38 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. For a secondary rated current of 5 A, the values must be multiplied by 5.
41 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. For a secondary rated current of 5 A, the values must be multiplied by 5.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for
the cos-φ direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight lines from 0
(parameter φ correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an
arc-suppression-coil-ground system where the variable 3I0 ⋅ cos φ is decisive for the direction determination.
[dw_cosphi, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-142 Direction-Characteristic Curve with Cos φ Measurement
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is basically the reference value for the real axis. The axis of symmetry of the
direction-characteristic curve coincides with the 3I0reactive axis for this example. For the direction determina-
tion, basically the portion of the current vertical to the set direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry)
is decisive (3I0 dir.). In this example, this is the active portion 3l0active of the current 3l0. The current 3l0dir.
(here = 3I0active) is calculated and compared with the setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det.. If
the current 3I0 dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is forward. If the current 3I0 dir. exceeds
the negative setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.
With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in the figure. With this, the direction determination is secured in case
of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle φ correction parameter) in a range of ±45°.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a rotation of +45°.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_phicor, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-143 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with Cos φ Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to sin φ and the φ correction parameter to 0,
the symmetry axis of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the 3I0active axis and the V0 axis.
Since the portion of the current vertical to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive
(3l0dir.), here, the current 3l0reactive is included in the direction determination. If the current 3l0dir. (here =
3I0reactive) exceeds the negative setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., the direction is forward.
If the current 3l0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the
direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_sin_phi, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-144 Direction-Characteristic Curve with Sin φ Measurement
Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal

blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.
Blocking the Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure

will be reset.
The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that Measuring-voltage failure detection
Blocking the Stage in Case of an Intermittent Ground Fault

In case of an intermittent ground fault, the stage can be blocked upon receiving the internal signal
Interm.gnd.flt.det from the Intermittent ground-fault blocking stage. In the event of blocking, the
picked-up stage will be reset.
After the release of the blocking, the timer Dir. determination delay is newly started and must expire
before a new ground fault or pickup is annunciated.
With the Blk.by interm.gnd.flt. parameter, you can enable or disable the blocking of the stage in case
of an intermittent ground fault.
Blocking the Pickup with Detection of the Fault Extinction

Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value developing of the zero-sequence voltage, the fault extinction
can be recognized faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental-component value under the pickup
value. The pickup of the stage is blocked with the fast detection of the fault extinction. With this, the pickups

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence system after the fault extinction. With the
Blk. after fault extinction parameter, you enable or disable this accelerated detection of the fault
extinction.
Blocking the Time Delay

also the operate indication. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is opened.

You can block the operate indication, the fault recording, and the fault log with the Operate & flt.rec.
blocked parameter. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.


enabled.

yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). If V0 is calculated from
the phase-to-ground voltages, Siemens recommends using the blocking.
no The protection stage is not blocked. If V0 is obtained from the VN meas-
urement of a broken-delta winding, Siemens recommends not using the
blocking.
• Recommended setting value (_:12601:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you specify whether the operate is blocked during
detection of an inrush current.
Siemens recommends disabling the blocking. The fundamental component of the zero-sequence voltage is a
reliable criterion for the ground fault and remains unaffected by a switching-on procedure.
Parameter: Blk.by interm.gnd.flt.
• Default setting (_:12601:111) Blk.by interm.gnd.flt. = no

With the Blk.by interm.gnd.flt. parameter, you specify whether the stage is blocked upon receiving an
internal signal Interm.gnd.flt.det from the Intermittent ground-fault blocking stage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
During intermittent ground faults, stages designed for detecting permanent ground faults (based on contin-
uous RMS measurement) tend to generate a flood of signals and probably even temporary wrong directional
information. This can be avoided by blocking these stages in case of an intermittent ground fault.
If intermittent ground faults in your network are probable, Siemens recommends enabling the blocking.
Parameter: Blk. after fault extinction
• Recommended setting value (_:12601:110) Blk. after fault extinction = yes

If the Blk. after fault extinction parameter is set to yes, the pickup is blocked after detection
of the fault extinction. With this, the pickups are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence
system after the fault extinction. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

When a fault is detected, the selection of the parameter Directional mode defines whether the pickup of
the stage occurs in forward or backward direction.
Parameter: Dir. measuring method, φ correction, Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., 3I0> threshold
value
• Default setting (_:12601:109) Dir. measuring method = cos φ
• Default setting (_:12601:107) φ correction = 0.0°
• Default setting (_:12601:102) Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. = 0.030 A
• Default setting (_:12601:101) 3I0> threshold value = 0.050 A

These parameters are used to define the direction characteristic of the stage. The direction characteristic to
use is dependent on the neutral-point treatment of the system.
Note that, for the direction determination, basically only a portion of the current vertical to the set direction-
characteristic curve (3I0dir.) is decisive, refer to 6.16.4.1 Description. This portion of the current is compared
to the threshold value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det.. In contrast, the absolute value of the current 3I0
is compared with the 3I0> threshold value parameter.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
System Type/ Description

Neutral-Point Treat-
ment
Arc-suppression coil In the arc-suppression-coil-ground system, the watt-metric residual current 3I0 · cos φ
grounded of the arc-suppression coil is decisive for the direction determination.
To evaluate the watt-metric residual current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = cos φ

• φ correction = 0.0°
The direction determination for a ground fault is made more difficult in that a much
larger capacitive or inductive reactive current is superimposed on the small watt-metric
residual current. Therefore, depending on the system configuration and the fault eval-
uation, the total ground current supplied to the device can vary considerably in its
values regarding the magnitude and the phase angle. However, the device should only
evaluate the active component of the ground-fault current.
This requires extremely high accuracy, particularly regarding the phase-angle measure-
ment of all the instrument transformers. Furthermore, the device must not be set
to operate too sensitively. A reliable direction measurement can only be expected
with connection to a core balance current transformer. For the setting of the
Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. parameter, the rule of thumb is: Set the pickup
value only to half of the expected measuring current as only the watt-metric residual
current can be put into use.
The 3I0> threshold value parameter can also be set to half of the expected
measuring current, whereby here the entire zero-sequence current can be put to use.
Isolated In the isolated system, the capacitive ground reactive current 3I0 · sin φ is decisive for
the direction determination.
To evaluate the capacitive ground reactive current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = sin φ

In an isolated system, the capacitive ground-fault currents of the entire electrically
connected system flow through the measuring point in case of a ground fault. The
ground current of the faulty feeder is compensated in the measuring point. As the
pickup value of the Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. and 3I0> threshold
value parameters, select about half of this capacitive ground-fault current flowing
via the measuring point.
Resistance- In the resistance-grounded system, the ohmic-inductive ground-fault current is decisive
Grounded for the direction determination.
To evaluate this short-circuit current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = cos φ

• φ correction = -45.0°
Set the Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. and 3I0> threshold value parame-
ters to a value below the minimum ground-fault current to be expected.
Parameter: α1 reduction dir. area, α2 reduction dir. area
• Recommended setting value (_:12601:105) α1 reduction dir. area = 2°
• Recommended setting value (_:12601:106) α2 reduction dir. area = 2°

With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you specify the angle
for the limitation of the direction range. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 2°.
In an arc-suppression-coil-ground system in feeders with a very large reactive current, it can be practical to set
a somewhat larger angle α1 to avoid a false pickup based on transformer and algorithm tolerances.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: V0> threshold value
• Default setting (_:12601:103) V0> threshold value = 30.000 V

The V0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero-sequence voltage sensitivity of the stage.
Set the threshold value smaller than the minimum absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 that must
still be detected.
Parameter: Dir. determination delay
• Default setting (_:12601:104) Dir. determination delay = 0.00 s

The start of the ground fault normally shows a significant transient behavior. This can lead to an incorrect
direction decision. The direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence
voltage with the Dir. determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The dura-
tion of the transient cycle is determined from the system conditions and the respective fault characteristics. If
you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting.

The Operate delay parameter determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to
issue the operate indication. The operate indication is issued when this time expires.
6.16.4.3 Settings

3I0> cos/sinφ1
_:12601:1 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:12601:2 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:12601:10 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:12601:111 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Blk.by • no no
interm.gnd.flt.
• yes
_:12601:27 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:12601:110 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Blk. after • no yes
fault extinction
• yes
_:12601:108 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Direc- • forward forward
tional mode
• reverse
_:12601:109 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Dir. • cos φ cos φ
measuring method
• sin φ
_:12601:107 3I0> cos/sinφ1:φ correc- -45° to 45° 0°
tion
_:12601:102 3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
cos/sinφ1:Min.polar.3I0> 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
for dir.det.
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 0.150 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:12601:105 3I0> cos/sinφ1:α1 reduc- 1° to 15° 2°
tion dir. area
_:12601:106 3I0> cos/sinφ1:α2 reduc- 1° to 15° 2°
tion dir. area
_:12601:101 3I0> cos/sinφ1:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
threshold value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
_:12601:103 3I0> cos/sinφ1:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
threshold value
_:12601:104 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Dir. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
determination delay
_:12601:6 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 2.00 s
delay

(Type)
3I0> cos/sinφ1
_:12601:81 3I0> cos/sinφ1:>Block stage SPS I
_:12601:501 3I0> cos/sinφ1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:12601:54 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Inactive SPS O
_:12601:52 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Behavior ENS O
_:12601:53 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Health ENS O
_:12601:60 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:12601:302 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Ground fault ACD O
_:12601:55 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Pickup ACD O
_:12601:56 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:12601:57 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Operate ACT O
6.16.5 Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage
Overview
Ground faults occurring in arc-suppression-coil-ground systems often extinguish a short time after the igni-
tion, mostly within a few milliseconds. Such transient occurrences are called transient ground faults. In order
to detect the ground-fault direction, based on these transient occurrences, a special method of measurement
is required that can also capture high frequencies. Conventional methods based on phasor calculations are not
suitable. Even for ground faults lasting for a short time, usually, a high-frequency charging process occurs in
healthy phases. The transient charging process is evaluated by an energy-integrating method to determine the
ground-fault direction. This method ensures high sensitivity and positive stability against parasitic signals in
the zero-sequence system.
Since permanent ground faults also start with the transient charging process in healthy phases, those errors
will be detected as well.
This stage is most suitable for the use in closed loops or meshed systems. Operational, circulating zero-
sequence currents are eliminated and therefore, cannot affect the directional result.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Stage-Control Logic
[lo_stu_wis, 3, en_US]


• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c. b., which
blocks the stage or not.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Transient Ground-Fault Functionality
[lo_wisfut, 10, en_US]
Figure 6-146 Logic Diagram of the Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage
Measured Values, Method of Measurement

The zero-sequence voltage and zero-sequence current are measured directly or calculated from the phase
variables. When measuring directly, the following is detected:
• Zero-sequence voltage on the broken-delta winding
• Zero-sequence current via Holmgreen connection or via core balance current transformer
The voltage measured on the broken-delta winding will be converted to the zero-sequence voltage V0.
The instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage v0(t) that are sampled at a high frequency (8 kHz)
serve to determine the point in time of the ground fault occurrence T0.
The instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage v0(t) and the ground current 3i0(t), which are sampled
at a high frequency (8 kHz), are the basis for direction determination.
The fundamental-component values of the zero-sequence voltage V0 serve to release the directional result
and the pickup as well as a criterion for the stabilization against switching operations.
The positive-sequence system (if it exists as a measured value) serves as an additional criterion for the
stabilization against switching operations.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 will be used for the pickup and the
optional trip logic.
Operational, meaning circulating zero-sequence currents, can occur in closed loops or meshed systems.
This type of zero-sequence current is also present in case of a failure and can falsify the directional result.
Therefore, an operational zero-sequence current is eliminated.
Determining the Time of the Ground-Fault Ignition

The algorithm uses the evaluation of the instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage to verify continu-
ously whether a ground fault occurred. This takes place regardless of whether the set threshold value for V0
is exceeded. If a ground fault occurs, the measuring window for determining the direction is positioned and
the direction determination is performed. The position of the measuring window is logged via the indication
Pos. measuring window (in FB General). The precise identification of the time T0 at which the ground
fault occurs is decisive for the correct direction determination.
Determination of Direction, Method of Measurement

The active energy of the zero-sequence system is calculated for the direction determination. Once the
ground-fault occurrence has been detected, the active energy will be calculated across approximately 1 cycle
frequency. If the active energy of the zero-sequence system is negative, a forward fault is present; otherwise it
is a backward fault.
Directional Ground-Fault Signal, Pickup

Determining the time of the ground-fault ignition and the direction is always done with maximum sensitivity.
With the parameters V0> threshold value and 3I0> threshold for pickup, you define the sensi-
tivity for the indication of the direction and the pickup of the stage.
If both of the following conditions are met, the direction result will be reported:
• The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the V0> threshold
value within 100 ms after detecting the ground-fault ignition.
• The true RMS value of the zero-sequence current 3I0 exceeds the 3I0> threshold for pickup.
In this way, high-impedance ground faults are also reported in which the zero-sequence system values rise
only slowly, and, for this reason, the occurrence of the ground fault is detected noticeably earlier than the
exceedance of the parameterized threshold value.
The direction result will be reported to the function via the (_:2311:302) Ground fault of the function
block General information. This indication is reported irrespective of the parameterized direction of the
function.
If the determined direction corresponds with the parameterized direction (parameter Directional mode), a
pickup occurs.
Reset of the Algorithm

To allow a new directional measurement, the algorithm needs to be reset. The normal reset takes place when
all the following conditions are met:
• The fundamental component of the zero-sequence voltage V0 drops below the V0 reset threshold. This
reset threshold is a small device-internal V0 threshold. It is also depending on an operational V0 and is
thus a dynamic threshold. The threshold value is 2.0 V secondary without dynamic influence.
• The duration of 120 ms after T0 has expired.
Stabilization against Switching Operations

Switching operations in the system to be protected can cause transient signals in the zero-sequence system.
The stage is stabilized against possible overfunction due to switching operations.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The following mechanisms are applied:
• The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 is usually only marginal influenced
by switching operations and is thus a good criterion for distinguishing the ground fault from a switching
operation. The condition that the fundamental-component value must exceed the V0> threshold
value for reporting the direction result effectively suppresses the influence of switching operations.
For rare cases in which high zero-sequence voltages occur over longer time ranges after switching off the
feeder or line, a criterion based on the positive-sequence current is also effective. This criterion compares
the positive-sequence current before and after the transient event and thus detects a disconnection. In
case of disconnection, the direction result is not reported.
Through stabilization mechanisms, the direction result is reported 100 ms after the ground-fault ignition.
Thus a pickup occurs with a 100-ms delay.
If the stage is used in a 1-phase function group, the additional criterion via the positive-sequence current
is not effective.
• The function detects transient ground faults using the zero-sequence voltage. In systems with opera-
tional zero-sequence voltages, if the measuring voltage is switched on, the function can internally be
started. If the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage does not exceed the threshold
of the Maximum operational V0 parameter in a time slot of 100 ms after the function start, the
function is reset internally. For an unexpected case where the function is started due to a switching
transient event, a further reset criterion exists to ensure that the function does not permanently remain
in the start condition. After the time of 100 ms, if the fundamental-component value is continuously less
than the Maximum operational V0 threshold for 10 s, the function is reset as well.
Trip Logic
[lo_auswis, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-147 Trip Logic Diagram

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
In many applications, the transient ground-fault stage is used only to indicate the direction. In this case, the
trip logic is not required and remains disabled. However, this stage can also be used to trip a permanent
ground fault. For this, you enable the optional trip logic with the Operate functionality parameter. If
the fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 exceed the set threshold values, the
tripping delay (Operate delay parameter) starts with the pickup. If the parameter Operate & flt.rec.
blocked is set to no, the stage operates when the tripping delay expires.
An intermittent ground fault has the characteristics of periodical extinction and reignition within one half
period up to several periods. You can find more information in chapter 6.15.1 Overview of Functions. Due
to the tripping delay and the too short fault durations (contact to ground), reliable tripping is not possible.
To ensure reliable tripping under such conditions, the parameter Dropout delay can be used. When the
fault extinguishes, the fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 drop below the
threshold values. A dropout can be delayed for a time specified with the Dropout delay parameter. The
tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires within the dropout delay, the stage operates.
You can set the Dropout delay according to the application. The default setting is 0 s. The setting of
the dropout delay does not affect the direction determination. When the fault reignites, a new direction
determination takes place if the function has dropped out before. If the determined direction is opposite to
the parameterized direction or is unknown, the tripping delay is reset immediately.
Blocking the Tripping Delay with Detection of the Fault Extinction

Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value cycle of the zero-sequence voltage, the fault extinction of the
ground fault can be detected faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental-component value under the
pickup value. The fast detection of the fault extinction (see function block General information) blocks the
tripping delay after the dropout delay expires. With the parameter Blk. after fault extinction, this
accelerated blocking mechanism can be enabled or disabled.
Parameter: Operate functionality
• Default setting (_:13021:108) Operate functionality = no

If the transient ground-fault stage is used only to indicate the direction, this optional trip logic is not required
and remains disabled. If the transient ground-fault stage is used to trip permanent faults as well, this optional
trip logic must be enabled. Pickup of the stage will initiate the tripping delay.



enabled.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

blocking.
• Recommended setting value (_:13021:107) Blk. after fault extinction = yes

If the Blk. after fault extinction parameter is set to yes, the tripping delay is reset after the
detection of the fault extinction. Therefore, if the tripping delay is set for a short time, the possibility of an
overfunction is avoided. The reason for an overfunction is a slower attenuation in the zero-sequence system
following the fault extinction. Siemens recommends keeping this default setting if the stage is used for
tripping.
To protect against intermittent ground faults, the stage uses the parameter Dropout delay to delay a
dropout due to fault extinction. If you are using the stage for protection against intermittent ground faults,
disable the blocking.

• Default setting (_:13021:103) V0> threshold value = 15.000 V

With the parameter V0> threshold value, you define the sensitivity for the indication of the direction and
the pickup of the stage.
Note that the sensitivity of the direction determination itself is not influenced. The direction determination
always works with maximum sensitivity.
If high-resistive ground faults must also be reported, very sensitive settings are possible, for example, V0>
threshold value = 5 V secondary.
Parameter: Maximum operational V0
• Recommended setting value (_:13021:105) Maximum operational V0 = 3.000 V

With the parameter Maximum operational V0, you define the maximum operational zero-sequence
voltage V0. If the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 does not exceed the
parameter Maximum operational V0 in a time slot of 100 ms after the function has started, the stage is
reset.
The setting is made with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0 according to its definition.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Network Structure Description

Radial network In radial networks, operational zero-sequence voltages are rather small.
Siemens recommends using the default value of 3.000 V.
Ring network, meshed network Greater operational zero-sequence voltages can occur in ring or meshed
networks.
The secondary operational zero-sequence voltages can be determined by
reading the residual voltage VN sec or the zero-sequence voltage V0 sec under
the symmetrical components from the device or via DIGSI.
In case you read the secondary residual voltage VN sec, you convert it to V0 sec
with the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter. For more information,
see also 6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage
3‑Phase (V-3ph).
If V0 sec is greater than 2.5 V, the value of Maximum operational V0
shall be increased to V0 sec ⋅ 1.2.
Example:
VN sec = 5.000 V
Matching ratio Vph / VN = √3
V0 sec = 5.000 V ⋅ √3 / 3 = 2.887 V
Maximum operational V0 = 2.887 V ⋅ 1.2 = 3.464 V
In most cases, the operational zero-sequence voltages are smaller than
2.500 V. Siemens recommends using the default value of 3.000 V.
Parameter: 3I0> threshold for pickup
• Default setting (_:13021:109) 3I0> threshold for pickup = 0.000 A

With the parameter 3I0> threshold for pickup, you define the sensitivity for the indication of the
direction and the pickup of the stage.
In ring or meshed systems, you can use this parameter to reduce the number of ground-fault reporting
devices. The parameter needs to be set according to the user experience on the specific network. For radial
systems, normally you can keep the default value of 0 A which sets this parameter to inactive.
Parameter: 3I0> threshold for operate
• Default setting (_:13021:104) 3I0> threshold for operate = 0.030 A

The setting is significant only for optional trip logic for switching off permanent ground faults. Select the
setting such that the static ground-fault current exceeds the threshold value. You can disable this criterion by
setting the value to 0 A.

The parameter Dropout delay allows you to use the function also as a protection against intermittent
ground faults. With the parameter Dropout delay, the dropout of the pickup state after fault extinction is
delayed or held until the next ignition. Thus, the operate delay can go on and trip the fault.
Set the time to a value within which the new ignition can still be assigned to the previous fault. Typical values
are in a range between several hundred milliseconds and a few seconds.

The setting of the Operate delay depends on the specific application. Ensure that the pickup is delayed by
100 ms regarding the time of the ground-fault ignition.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.16.5.3 Settings

Trans.Gnd.flt1
_:13021:1 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13021:2 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13021:10 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:13021:107 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Blk. after • no yes
fault extinction
• yes
_:13021:108 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate • no no
functionality
• yes
_:13021:106 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Direc- • forward forward
tional mode
• reverse
_:13021:103 Trans.Gnd.flt1:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 15.000 V
threshold value
_:13021:105 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Maximum 0.300 V to 200.000 V 3.000 V
operational V0
_:13021:109 Trans.Gnd.flt1:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
threshold for pickup 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.000 A
_:13021:104 Trans.Gnd.flt1:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
threshold for operate 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.150 A
_:13021:6 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s
delay
_:13021:7 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay

(Type)
Trans.Gnd.flt1
_:13021:81 Trans.Gnd.flt1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13021:54 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Inactive SPS O
_:13021:52 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Behavior ENS O
_:13021:53 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Health ENS O
_:13021:302 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Ground fault ACD O
_:13021:55 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Pickup ACD O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:13021:56 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13021:57 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate ACT O
6.16.6 Directional 3I0 Stage with φ (V0,3I0) Measurement
Logic
[lo_gfp_pvi, 3, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_dir sensGFP 3I0 phi VI, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-149 Logic Diagram of the Directional 3I0 Stage with φ (V0,3I0) Measurement

The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage is converted
to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device
as a measurand, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA,
VB, and VC using the defining equation.
nent numerically.

nent numerically.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point and on the current terminal blocks used, different
linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in chapter Measured Value 3I0, Method of
Measurement , Page 767.

If the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 vector exceeds the threshold value 3I0> threshold value
and the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 vector exceeds the threshold value Min. V0>
for dir. determ., the stage detects the ground fault. The direction determination (see in the following
paragraph) is started when the zero-sequence voltage exceeds the threshold. The result from the direction
determination is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 vector has also exceeded its
threshold value. The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal (in the General function
block).
As long as the direction result equals the parameterization direction (parameter Directional mode), the
stage picks up.
determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands.
The direction is determined via the determination of the phase angle between the angle-error compensated
ground current 3I0com. and the rotated zero-sequence voltage V0, indicated in the following as reference
voltage Vref,rot. To take different system conditions and applications into account, the reference voltage can
be rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt. parameter). This moves the
vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector ground current -3I0com. Consequently, the result of
direction determination is as reliable as possible.
The rotated reference voltage Vref,rot and the Forward section +/- parameter define the forward and
reverse area. The forward area results as range ± Δφ around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. The value
± Δφ is set with the Forward section +/- parameter. The remaining area besides the forward area is the
reverse area. Between the forward and reverse area, a hysteresis is defined, refer to Figure 6-150.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_dirrot, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-150 Directional Characteristic in Forward Mode


will be reset.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023




enabled.

blocking.
• Recommended setting value (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

reliable criterion for the ground fault and remains unaffected by a switching-on procedure.
• Default setting (_:111) Blk.by interm.gnd.flt. = no


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Default setting (_:106) Directional mode = forward

the stage occurs in forward or reverse direction.
When the parameter Directional mode is set as non-directional, the direction determination is
not considered. The pickup condition depends only on the absolute values 3I0 and V0 and the respective
thresholds. The forward direction is the direction towards the motor.
Parameter: Rotation angle of ref. volt.,Forward section +/-
• Default setting (_:104) Rotation angle of ref. volt. = -45°
• Default setting (_:103) Forward section +/- = 88°

With the Rotation angle of ref. volt. and Forward section +/- parameters, you set the
direction characteristic, that is, the areas of forward and reverse. With this, you set the direction characteristic
according to the system conditions and the neutral-point treatment.
Typical settings for the Rotation angle of ref. volt. parameter are:
• Arc-suppression-coil-ground system: 0°
• Isolated system: +45° to +90°
• Grounded system: -45°

The Forward section +/- parameter can normally be left at its default setting. A reduction of the forward
area by a few degrees is practical, for example, in an arc-suppression-coil-ground system with long cable
feeders, that generate high capacitive fault currents.
NOTE
i In isolated networks, the setting is near +90°.

The generator protection is also an isolated system. However, to take into account the loading resistor in
the busbar connection of the generator, the setting is near +45°.
Parameter: Min. V0> for dir. determ.
• Default setting (_:102) Min. V0> for dir. determ. = 2.000 V

With the Min. V0> for dir. determ. parameter, you determine the minimum voltage V0 necessary
for the release of the direction determination that must be attained within the time delay Dir. determina-
tion delay.
Parameter: 3I0> threshold value
• Default setting (_:101) 3I0> threshold value = 0.050 A

The 3I0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the ground-current sensitivity of the stage. Set
the threshold value lower than the minimum absolute value of the ground-fault current 3I0 that must still be
detected.
• Default setting (_:105) Dir. determination delay = 0.10 s


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

6.16.6.3 Settings

3I0> φ(VI) #
_:1 3I0> φ(VI) #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 3I0> φ(VI) #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:10 3I0> φ(VI) #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:111 3I0> φ(VI) #:Blk.by • no no
interm.gnd.flt.
• yes
_:27 3I0> φ(VI) #:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:106 3I0> φ(VI) #:Directional • non-directional forward
mode
• forward
• reverse
_:104 3I0> φ(VI) #:Rotation -180° to 180° -45°
angle of ref. volt.
_:103 3I0> φ(VI) #:Forward 0° to 180° 88°
section +/-
_:102 3I0> φ(VI) #:Min. V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 2.000 V
for dir. determ.
_:101 3I0> φ(VI) #:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
_:105 3I0> φ(VI) #:Dir. deter- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
mination delay
_:6 3I0> φ(VI) #:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.50 s
delay

(Type)
3I0> φ(VI) #
_:81 3I0> φ(VI) #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 3I0> φ(VI) #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 3I0> φ(VI) #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 3I0> φ(VI) #:Behavior ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:53 3I0> φ(VI) #:Health ENS O
_:301 3I0> φ(VI) #:Fault not in trip area SPS O
_:60 3I0> φ(VI) #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:303 3I0> φ(VI) #:Ground fault ACD O
_:55 3I0> φ(VI) #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 3I0> φ(VI) #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 3I0> φ(VI) #:Operate ACT O
6.16.7 Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement
Logic
[lo_stage_control_Y0G0B0, 3, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_Y0_G0_B0, 6, en_US]
Figure 6-152 Logic Diagram of the Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement

voltages VA, VB, and VC using the definition equation.
The method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

The function usually evaluates the ground current 3I0 sensitively measured via a core balance current trans-
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 calculated from the phase currents. This results in a very
large linearity and settings range.
nent numerically. The methods of measurement are characterized by high accuracy and by insensitivity to
harmonics, especially the 3rd and 5th harmonics frequently present in the ground-fault (residual) current.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point as well as the current terminal blocks used,
different linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in section Measured Value 3I0,
Method of Measurement , Page 767.
Y0, G0, B0
The fundamental-component values of V0 and 3I0 are used to calculate the admittance Y0 = G0 + jB0. You can
choose to use G0 or B0 to determine the direction.

If the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 exceeds the threshold value 3I0> release thresh.
value and the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value V0> threshold
value, the stage recognizes the ground fault. The calculation of G0 or B0 is started with exceeding the
threshold values and then, the direction determination (see the following) is performed. The direction result
is indicated via the Ground fault signal (in the General function block). If the direction result equals the
parameterized direction (parameter Directional mode), the stage picks up.
determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result from the direction deter-
mination is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its release threshold
value.
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
G0 direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight line from 0 (Parameter φ
correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-suppres-
sion-coil-ground system where the value G0 is decisive for the direction determination.
[dw_Y0_dire, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-153 Direction-Characteristic Curve for the G0 Measurement
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is generally the reference value for the real axis and is identical to the G0
axis. The axis of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the B0 (reactive) axis for
this example. For the direction determination, the component of the admittance perpendicular to the set
direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive G0dir (=Y0dir). In this example, this is the
active component G0active of the admittance Y0. The conductance G0dir. (here = G0active) is calculated and
compared with the setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the
positive setting value, the direction is forward. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the negative setting value,
the direction is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in Figure 6-154. With this, the direction determination is secured in
case of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle (φ correction parameter) in a range of ±45.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a turn of +45° (see following
figure).
[dw_Y0_meas, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-154 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with G0 Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to B0 and the φ correction parameter to 0, the axis
of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the G0 and V0 axes. Since the component of
the admittance Y0 perpendicular to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (B0dir.
(=Y0dir.)), here, the susceptance B0 (reactive) is used in the direction determination. If the susceptance B0dir.
(B0reactive) exceeds the negative setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold, the direction is forward. If
the susceptance B0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between,
the direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_si_co_Y0, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-155 Direction-Characteristic Curve for the B0 Measurement


will be reset.

Blocking the Pickup with Detection of the Fault Extinction

Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value developing of the zero-sequence voltage, the fault extinction
can be recognized faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental-component value under the pickup
value. The pickup of the stage is blocked with the fast detection of the fault extinction. With this, the pickups

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence system after the fault extinction. With the
Blk. after fault extinction parameter, you enable or disable this accelerated detection of the fault
extinction.



enabled.

blocking.
• Recommended setting value (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

reliable criterion for the ground fault and remains untouched by a switching-on procedure.


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Recommended setting value (_:110) Blk. after fault extinction = yes

If the Blk. after fault extinction parameter is set to yes, the pickup is blocked after detection
of the fault extinction. With this, the pickups are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence
system after the fault extinction. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Parameter: Dir. measuring method, φ correction, Polarized G0/B0 threshold, 3I0> release
thresh. value
• Default setting (_:109) Dir. measuring method = G0
• Default setting (_:107) φ correction = 0.0°
• Default setting (_:102) Polarized G0/B0 threshold = 2.00 mS
• Default setting (_:101) 3I0> release thresh. value = 0.002 A

These parameters are used to define the direction characteristic of the stage. The direction characteristic to
use is dependent on the neutral-point treatment of the system.
Note that, for the direction determination, basically only the component of the admittance perpendicular to
the set direction-characteristic curve is decisive, see also 6.16.7.1 Description. This admittance component
is compared to the threshold value Polarized G0/B0 threshold. In contrast, the absolute value of the
current 3I0 is compared with the 3I0> release thresh. value parameter.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

ment
Grounded In the arc-suppression-coil-ground system, the watt-metric residual current 3I0 · cos φ
of the arc-suppression coil is decisive for the direction determination.
To evaluate the watt-metric residual current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = G0

The direction determination for a ground fault is made more difficult in that a much
larger reactive current of capacitive or inductive character is superimposed on the
small watt-metric residual current. Therefore, depending on the system configuration
and the fault evaluation, the total ground current supplied to the device can vary
considerably in its values regarding the magnitude and the phase angle. However, the
device should only evaluate the active component of the ground-fault current.
This requires extremely high accuracy, particularly regarding the phase-angle measure-
ment of all the instrument transformers. Furthermore, the device must not be set to
operate too sensitively. A reliable direction measurement can only be expected with
connection to a core balance current transformer. For the setting of the Polarized
G0/B0 threshold parameter, the following formula applies:
where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current (watt-metric residual current) of
the protected line
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0>: Pickup threshold of the residual voltage ≈ 0.1
If a parallel resistor Rp is used on the arc-suppression coil, the threshold value G0 must
also be smaller than:
where:
ks: Safety margin ≥ 1.5
IRp: Secondary rated current of the parallel resistor
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter can be set to half of the expected
measuring current and here, the entire zero-sequence current can be put to use.
Isolated In the isolated system, the capacitive ground reactive current 3I0 · sin φ is decisive for
the direction determination.
To evaluate the capacitive ground reactive current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = B0

In isolated systems, a ground fault allows the capacitive ground-fault currents of the
entire electrically connected system, except for the ground current in the faulty cable
itself, to flow through the measuring point as the latter flows directly away from the

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

ment
fault location (that is, not via the measuring point). The following formula can be used
to determine the pickup value of the Polarized G0/B0 threshold parameter.
where:
I0min: Ground current in the healthy case

In healthy operation, B0 ≤ 0.
For the 3I0> release thresh. value parameter, select around half of this capac-
itive ground-fault current flowing via the measuring point.
Resistance- In the resistance-grounded system, the ohmic-inductive ground-fault current is decisive
Grounded for the direction determination.
To evaluate this short-circuit current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = G0

• φ correction= -45.0°
For the setting of the Polarized G0/B0 threshold parameter, the rule of thumb
is: Set the pickup value according to the following formula where only the active
ground-fault current can be put into use.
where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current of the protected line
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter must be set to a value below the
minimum expected ground-fault current.
Parameter: α1 reduction dir. area, α2 reduction dir. area
• Recommended setting value (_:105) α1 reduction dir. area = 2°
• Recommended setting value (_:106) α2 reduction dir. area = 2°

With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you specify the angle
for the limitation of the direction range. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 2°.
In an arc-suppression-coil-ground system in feeders with a very large reactive current, it can be practical to set
a somewhat larger angle α1 to avoid a false pickup based on transformer and algorithm tolerances.
• Default setting (_:103) V0> threshold value = 30.000 V

The threshold value must be smaller than the minimum amount of the zero-sequence voltage V0 which must
still be detected.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

The start of the ground fault normally indicates a significant transient behavior. This can lead to an incorrect
direction decision. The direction determination can be delayed for this reason from the occurrence of the
zero-sequence voltage with the Dir. determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measur-
ands. The duration of the transient cycle is determined from the system conditions and the respective fault
characteristics. If you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay, Siemens recommends keeping the default
setting.

6.16.7.3 Settings

Y0> G0/B0 #
_:1 Y0> G0/B0 #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:10 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:111 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk.by • no no
interm.gnd.flt.
• yes
_:27 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:110 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk. after • no yes
fault extinction
• yes
_:108 Y0> G0/B0 #:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
_:109 Y0> G0/B0 #:Dir. meas- • G0 G0
uring method
• B0
_:107 Y0> G0/B0 #:φ correc- -45° to 45° 0°
tion
_:102 Y0> G0/B0 #:Polarized 0.10 mS to 100.00 mS 2.00 mS
G0/B0 threshold
_:105 Y0> G0/B0 #:α1 reduc- 1° to 15° 2°
tion dir. area
_:106 Y0> G0/B0 #:α2 reduc- 1° to 15° 2°
tion dir. area
_:101 Y0> G0/B0 #:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
release thresh. value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 0.150 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:103 Y0> G0/B0 #:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
threshold value
_:104 Y0> G0/B0 #:Dir. deter- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
mination delay
_:6 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 2.00 s
delay

(Type)
Y0> G0/B0 #
_:81 Y0> G0/B0 #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 Y0> G0/B0 #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Y0> G0/B0 #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Y0> G0/B0 #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Y0> G0/B0 #:Health ENS O
_:60 Y0> G0/B0 #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 Y0> G0/B0 #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate ACT O
6.16.8 Directional Stage with Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic
The Directional stage with phasor measurement of a harmonic is based on a continuous measuring
direction-determination method. The stage determines the direction via the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic phasors
of the zero-sequence voltage V0 and current 3I0.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_sensGFP V0 dir harmonic, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-156 Logic Diagram of the Directional Stage with Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_start condition and dir. determ, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-157 Logic Diagram of the Start Conditions and of the Direction Determination
Measured Values, Methods of Measurement

The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage is converted
to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device
as a measurand, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA,
VB, and VC using the defining equation.
For the measured value 3I0 and the method of measurement, you can find more information in section
Measured Value 3I0, Method of Measurement , Page 767.
The function uses the fundamental-component value of V0 and the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic phasor of V0
and 3I0 for direction determination. The specific harmonic phasor to be used is determined by the Harmonic
selection setting.

If the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold V0>
threshold value, the stage detects the ground fault and the timer Dir. determination delay starts.
If the following 2 conditions are met, the ground-fault signaling and direction determination start:
• The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 keeps exceeding the threshold V0>
threshold value during the period of the timer Dir. determination delay.
• The absolute value of the zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm. exceeds the threshold Min. 3I0>
harmonic when the timer Dir. determination delay expires.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
To carry out the direction determination, the following condition must also be met in addition to the
preceding 2 conditions:
The zero-sequence harmonic voltage V0harm. must exceed the threshold which is 0.02 % of the secondary
rated voltage of the voltage transformer. If this condition is not met, the direction result is unknown.
The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal.
The stage pickup depends on the direction result and on the Directional mode parameter:
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as forward or reverse, the stage picks up when the
direction result equals the parameterized direction, and the Pickup is signaled with the determined
direction.
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as non-directional, the stage picks up regardless of the
direction result, and the Pickup is signaled with the unknown information.
With the Harmonic selection parameter, you can select the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic phasor for direction
determination. The direction is determined via the calculation of the phase angle between the following
values:
• Zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm.
• Rotated zero-sequence harmonic voltage V0harm., indicated in the following as reference voltage Vref,rot
The reference voltage is rotated by the angle +90° in relation to V0. This provides the maximum security for
the direction determination assuming that 3I0harm. is a reactive current.
The rotated reference voltage Vref,rot and the Forward section +/- parameter define the forward and
reverse area. For details, refer to Figure 6-158.
The areas in the following figure are as follows:
• The forward area results as range ± Δφ around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. You can set the
value ± Δφ with the Forward section +/- parameter. If the vector of the secondary ground current
-3I0harm. lies within this area, the direction result is forward.
• The mirror area of the forward area is the reverse area. If the vector of the secondary ground current
-3I0harm. lies within this area, the direction result is reverse.
• In the intermediate range, the direction is unknown.
[dw_sensGFP V0 dir harmonic, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-158 Direction Characteristic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Stabilization Counter
To determine a reliable direction result, the function uses a stabilization counter. For indicating a direction
result, the determined direction must be stable for 4 successive measuring cycles. The cycle time is 10 ms.
Direction-Result Extension
With the timer Dir.-result extension, you can extend the last determined direction result if the
conditions for a further direction determination are no longer met. The last direction result is held until
the conditions for a further direction determination are met again (timer is reset) or until the timer expires.
The behavior of the direction-result extension varies according to the setting of the Directional mode
parameter:
• Directional mode = forward or reverse

As soon as the zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm. or the zero-sequence harmonic voltage
V0harm. falls below its respective dropout value, the timer Dir.-result extension starts. If the
direction result equals the setting of the Directional mode parameter, the last Pickup signal is also
extended.
If both 3I0harm. and V0harm. exceed their thresholds again, the timer Dir.-result extension is
reset immediately and the direction determination is carried out again.
• Directional mode = non-directional

As soon as the zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm. falls below its dropout value, the timer Dir.-
result extension starts.
In this directional mode, the Pickup is signaled only with the direction information unknown regardless
of the actual direction that is indicated via the Ground fault signal. Therefore, the Pickup signal with
the unknown information is extended.
If 3I0harm. exceeds its threshold again, the timer Dir.-result extension is reset immediately and
the direction determination is carried out again.
Measured Value Display

After the timer Dir. determination delay expires and the V0 fundamental-component value keeps
exceeding the V0> threshold value, the following measured values are issued:
• V0 harm.
• 3I0 harm.
• Phi(I,V) harm.
These measured values are displayed as --- if 3I0harm. or V0harm. is smaller than 0.005 % of the rated
secondary current or voltage.


will be reset.
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that the Measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion blocks the stage or not.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023


The V0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero-sequence (fundamental) voltage sensi-
tivity of the stage. Set the threshold value smaller than the minimum absolute value of the zero-sequence
voltage V0 that must still be detected. Typical values are in the range of 15 V to 25 V.

Parameter: Forward section +/-
• Default setting (_:103) Forward section +/- = 80°

With the Forward section +/- parameter, you set the direction characteristic, that is, the forward and
reverse areas.
The Forward section +/- parameter can normally be left at its default setting. With reducing the forward
area, you can provide more security for the direction result, but on the other hand, you increase the proba-
bility of an underfunction.
Parameter: Dir.-result extension
• Default setting (_:110) Dir.-result extension = 5.00 s

With the Dir.-result extension parameter, you define the time for extending the last determined
direction result if the conditions for further direction determination are no longer met.
This timer can be used to generate a stable direction indication under fluctuating zero-sequence harmonics.
A stable direction indication again can be required for the implementation of a prioritization schema between
different parallel working detection methods (stages).
Parameter: Harmonic selection
• Default setting (_:201) Harmonic selection = 5th harmonic

With the Harmonic selection parameter, you select to use the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic phasor of the
zero-sequence voltage V0 and of the zero-sequence current 3I0 for direction determination.
Parameter: Min. 3I0> harmonic
• Default setting (_:203) Min. 3I0> harmonic = 0.030 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the Min. 3I0> harmonic parameter, you define the threshold value of the zero-sequence harmonic
current 3I0harm. for detecting the ground fault and for starting direction determination. For more informa-
tion, see also Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup, Page 804.
This parameter needs to be set according to the experience from the specific network. This requires the anal-
ysis of permanent ground faults from the network. If such information is unavailable, Siemens recommends a
rather low setting in the area of 5 mA to 10 mA secondary.
Parameter: 3I0 harm. dropout ratio
• Default setting (_:204) 3I0 harm. dropout ratio = 0.60

With the 3I0 harm. dropout ratio parameter, you define the dropout threshold for the Min. 3I0>
harmonic parameter.
Lowering this dropout threshold enlarges the range and the period of direction determination under fluctu-
ating zero-sequence harmonics. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

With the Directional mode parameter, you define for which direction result the function generates the
pickup state:
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as forward or reverse, the stage picks up when the
direction result equals the parameterized direction, and the Pickup is signaled with the determined
direction.
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as non-directional, the stage picks up regardless of the
direction result, and the Pickup is signaled with the unknown information.

NOTE
i When both the Operate delay and the Dir.-result extension are applied, the Operate delay
should usually be set to a considerably greater value than the Dir.-result extension. If the Operate
delay is less than the Dir.-result extension, the function will operate for each fault regardless of
the fault duration, as long as the fault direction equals the set direction.

and the fault log. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

enabled.

blocking.

6.16.8.3 Settings

V0>dir.harm.#
_:1 V0>dir.harm.#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 V0>dir.harm.#:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:10 V0>dir.harm.#:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:111 V0>dir.harm.#:Blk.by • no no
interm.gnd.flt.
• yes
_:106 V0>dir.harm.#:Direc- • non-directional forward
tional mode
• forward
• reverse
_:103 V0>dir.harm.#:Forward 0° to 90° 80°
section +/-
_:102 V0>dir.harm.#:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 20.000 V
threshold value
_:201 V0>dir.harm.#:Harmonic • 3rd harmonic 5th harmonic
selection
• 5th harmonic
• 7th harmonic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:203 V0>dir.harm.#:Min. 3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
harmonic 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 0.150 A
_:204 V0>dir.harm.#:3I0 harm. 0.10 to 0.95 0.60
dropout ratio
_:110 V0>dir.harm.#:Dir.-result 0.00 s to 60.00 s 5.00 s
extension
_:105 V0>dir.harm.#:Dir. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
determination delay
_:6 V0>dir.harm.#:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay

(Type)
V0>dir.harm.#
_:81 V0>dir.harm.#:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 V0>dir.harm.#:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 V0>dir.harm.#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 V0>dir.harm.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 V0>dir.harm.#:Health ENS O
_:303 V0>dir.harm.#:Ground fault ACD O
_:55 V0>dir.harm.#:Pickup ACD O
_:56 V0>dir.harm.#:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 V0>dir.harm.#:Operate ACT O
_:308 V0>dir.harm.#:Phi(I,V) harm. MV O
_:307 V0>dir.harm.#:V0 harm. MV O
_:306 V0>dir.harm.#:3I0 harm. MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.16.9 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Logic
[lo_gfps v0, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-159 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Measured Value, Method of Measurement


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental component (standard filter):

This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
• Measurement of the RMS value (true RMS):

This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window:
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
13.21.7 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the Threshold with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter, you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the Threshold.
Determination of the Faulty Phase

With the Detection of faulty phase parameter, you can enable or disable the determination of the
ground-fault phase. Determining is released when the stage picks up. If 2 phases exceed the threshold value
V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. and one phase falls below the threshold value V< faulty ph-to-gnd
volt., the last phase is determined to be faulty and is signaled as such.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• From inside on pickup of the measuring-voltage failure detection function. The Blk. by meas.-
volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or
does not block it.
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by
meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the
stage or not.

The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the
fundamental component or the calculated RMS value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

fundamental comp. This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
Siemens recommends using this setting as the standard method.
into account (for example at capacitor banks).
fund. comp. long filter To implement particularly strong damping of harmonics and transient
faults, select this method of measurement. At 2 periods, the length of the
filter is longer than that of the standard filter.
Note that in this case the pickup time of the stage increases slightly (see
13.21.7 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual
Voltage).
• Recommended setting value (_:12391:107) Pickup delay = 0 ms

The Pickup delay parameter allows you to delay the analysis of the measurand (to generate the pickup)
depending on the occurrence of the residual voltage. A pickup delay can be necessary if high transients are
anticipated after fault inception due to high line and ground capacitances.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Pickup delay = 0 ms.
• Default setting (_:12391:3) Threshold = 30 V

The threshold value of the function is set as the zero-sequence voltage V0. The device calculates the zero-
sequence voltage V0 either from the residual voltage measured via the broken-delta winding or from the
3 phase-to-ground voltages.
The setting value depends on the system grounding:
• Since virtually the full residual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems, the setting value is uncritical there. Siemens recommends setting the value between
20 V and 40 V. A higher sensitivity (= lower threshold value) can be necessary for high fault resistances.
• Siemens recommends setting a more sensitive (smaller) value in grounded systems. This value must be
higher than the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
EXAMPLE
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
• At full residual voltage, the zero-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3 = 57.7 V

Setting value: 0.5 ⋅ 57.7 V = 28.9 V ≈ 30 V

The recommended setting value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement
precision, the dropout ratio can be reduced to 0.98, for example.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The Operate delay allows you to prevent transient residual voltages from initiating a trip. The setting
depends on the specific application.


enabled.

blocking.
Parameter: Detection of faulty phase
• Default setting (_:12391:109) Detection of faulty phase = no

The Detection of faulty phase parameter controls how the stage responds to determine which phase
is affected by the ground fault.
no The phase affected by the ground fault is not determined.
Select the default setting if you do not want to use the stage to detect
ground faults, for example for applications in grounded systems.
yes After a pickup by the residual voltage, the device tries to determine which
phase is affected by the ground fault.
Select this setting for applications in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems.
Parameter: V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt.
• Default setting (_:12391:104) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 30 V

Set the threshold value for determining which phase is affected by the ground fault in the V< faulty
ph-to-gnd volt. parameter. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 30 V.
Parameter: V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt.
• Default setting (_:12391:101) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 70 V

Set the threshold value for the 2 healthy phases in the V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. parameter. The
setting value is a phase-to-ground measurand.
The set value must be above the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation, but below
the minimum phase-to-phase voltage present during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, the value has to be set to 70
V, for example. Siemens recommends using the default setting V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 70 V.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Operation as Supervision Function

If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, the generation of the operate indication and fault
logging can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.
6.16.9.3 Settings

V0> 1
_:12391:1 V0> 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:12391:2 V0> 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
_:12391:10 V0> 1:Blk. by meas.-volt. • no yes
failure
• yes
_:12391:109 V0> 1:Detection of faulty • no no
phase
• yes
_:12391:8 V0> 1:Method of meas- • fundamental comp. fundamental
urement comp.
• fund. comp. long filter
• RMS value
_:12391:3 V0> 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
_:12391:4 V0> 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:12391:107 V0> 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:12391:6 V0> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 3.00 s
_:12391:101 V0> 1:V> healthy ph-to- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 70.000 V
gnd volt.
_:12391:104 V0> 1:V< faulty ph-to- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
gnd volt.

(Type)
V0> 1
_:12391:81 V0> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:12391:54 V0> 1:Inactive SPS O
_:12391:52 V0> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:12391:53 V0> 1:Health ENS O
_:12391:300 V0> 1:Faulty phase ACT O
_:12391:55 V0> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:12391:56 V0> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:12391:57 V0> 1:Operate ACT O
6.16.10 Non-Directional 3I0 Stage
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function, the Non-directional 3I0 stage also works on
demand.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_sensitive ground-current protection 3I0, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-160 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional 3I0 Stage
Measured Value 3I0


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023




The Blk. w. 2nd harm. gnd. det. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when the detected 2nd harmonic component of the ground current exceeds a
stage operates.

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine whether the tripping is blocked
during the detection of an inrush current.
Parameter: Blk. w. 2nd harm. gnd. det.
• Default setting (_:103) Blk. w. 2nd harm. gnd. det. = no

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

no If no 3I0/IN current flow due to CT saturation with a level above the pickup
threshold is expected, select this setting.
yes If 3I0/IN current flow due to CT saturation with a level above the pickup

2nd-harmonic inrush current being present also in the parasitic 3I0
current
• Recommended setting value (_:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

an overfunction.
added currents.

The Threshold parameter allows you to set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0.
• Default setting (_:102) Pickup delay = 0.00 s

With the parameter Pickup delay you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed or not. If the
transient cycle of the ground fault occurrence should not be evaluated, set a delay of 100 ms, for example.


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.16.10.3 Settings

3I0> #
_:1 3I0> #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 3I0> #:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
_:27 3I0> #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect.
• yes
_:103 3I0> #:Blk. w. 2nd harm. • no no
gnd. det.
• yes
_:8 3I0> #:Method of meas- • fundamental comp. fundamental
urement comp.
• RMS value
_:3 3I0> #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
_:102 3I0> #:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6 3I0> #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s

(Type)
3I0> #
_:81 3I0> #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 3I0> #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 3I0> #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 3I0> #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 3I0> #:Health ENS O
_:60 3I0> #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 3I0> #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 3I0> #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 3I0> #:Operate ACT O
6.16.11 Non-Directional Y0 Stage
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function, the Non-directional Y0 stage also works on
demand.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_gfp_sy_0, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-161 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional Y0 Stage

converted to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available,
the device calculates the zero-sequence voltage V0 from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and
VC using the defining equation.
nent numerically.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

nent numerically.
Y0
The fundamental-component values of V0 and 3I0 are used to calculate the admittance Y0 through the
formula Y0 = 3I0/V0. This stage uses Y0 as a condition to recognize the ground fault.
Minimum 3I0 Threshold

To start the Y0 calculation, the IN/3I0 value must exceed a minimum 3I0 threshold. For protection-class
current transformers, the threshold value is 30 mA (Irated, sec = 1 A) or 150 mA (Irated, sec = 5 A). For sensitive
current transformers, the threshold value is 1 mA (Irated, sec = 1 A) or 5 mA (Irated, sec = 5 A).

If the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value V0> threshold value
and Y0 exceeds the threshold value Threshold Y0>, the stage recognizes the ground fault. If the threshold
values remain exceeded during the Pickup delay, the stage picks up.

Blocking of the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the
event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.

will be reset.
• From inside on pick up of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023



enabled.

blocking.

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine whether the operate is blocked
during the detection of an inrush current.

The threshold value must be smaller than the minimum amount of the zero-sequence voltage V0 which must
still be detected.
Parameter: Threshold Y0>
• Default setting (_:102) Threshold Y0> = 2.00 mS

With the parameter Threshold Y0>, you set the threshold value of the ground admittance Y0. If the ground
admittance for the setting value is unknown, you can assume the following relation:
[fo_se_g_f_Y0, 2, en_US]
ks Factor, takes into account the ohmic components of the current

(1.2 for overhead lines, 1.0 to 1.05 for cable systems)
Ic,line Secondary capacitive ground-fault current for the protected line
Vph-gnd Secondary phase-to-ground voltage in the healthy case

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
3I0min Secondary ground current in the healthy case (resulting from transformer error),
5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0> Secondary pickup threshold of the residual voltage
• Default setting (_:103) Pickup delay = 0.00 s

With the parameter Pickup delay, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed or not. If the
transient cycle of the ground fault occurrence should not be evaluated, set a delay of 100 ms, for example.

6.16.11.3 Settings

Y0> #
_:1 Y0> #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Y0> #:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
_:10 Y0> #:Blk. by meas.-volt. • no yes
failure
• yes
_:27 Y0> #:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect.
• yes
_:101 Y0> #:V0> threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 5.000 V
value
_:102 Y0> #:Threshold Y0> 0.10 mS to 100.00 mS 2.00 mS
_:103 Y0> #:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6 Y0> #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s

(Type)
Y0> #
_:81 Y0> #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 Y0> #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Y0> #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Y0> #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Y0> #:Health ENS O
_:60 Y0> #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 Y0> #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Y0> #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Y0> #:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.16.12 Non-Directional 3I0 Harmonic Stage
The Non-directional 3I0 harmonic stage detects ground faults via the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic component
of the zero-sequence current 3I0.
Logic
[lo_3I0_harmonic, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-162 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional 3I0 Harmonic Stage

Depending on the connection type of the measuring point and on the current terminal blocks used, different
linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in chapter 6.16.4.1 Description.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The function uses the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic component of the ground current 3I0 for detecting the
ground fault. The specific harmonic component to be used is determined by the Harmonic selection
setting.
Stabilization, Pickup
To avoid a wrong pickup in case of transient current peaks, the function uses the Stabilization counter
parameter. If the magnitude of the zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm. exceeds the 3I0 harm.
threshold, the stabilization counter starts. If the 3I0harm. current keeps exceeding the 3I0 harm.
threshold for a specified number of measuring cycles, the stage picks up. You can define the specified
number via the Stabilization counter parameter.
Pickup Extension
Considering the discontinuity of the 3I0harm. current, the Pickup signal does not drop out immediately after
the 3I0harm. current falls below the 3I0 harm. threshold.
When the 3I0harm. current falls below the 3I0 harm. threshold, the timer Pickup extension time
starts to hold the Pickup signal until the timer expires. The timer resets after the 3I0harm. current exceeds
the 3I0 harm. threshold again during the extension time.


also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated. Fault logging and fault recording
take place.

3I0 harm. 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic A A Parameter Rated current
component of the ground
current
You can find the parameter Rated current in the FB General of the function group where the Sensitive
ground-fault detection function is used. If the 3I0harm. current is smaller than 0.005 % of the rated secon-
dary current, the functional measured value is displayed as ---.
Parameter: Harmonic selection
• Default setting (_:201) Harmonic selection = 5th harmonic

With the Harmonic selection parameter, you select to use the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic component of
the zero-sequence current 3I0 for detecting the ground fault.
Parameter: 3I0 harm. threshold
• Default setting (_:202) 3I0 harm. threshold = 0.030 A

With the 3I0 harm. threshold parameter, you define the threshold value of the zero-sequence harmonic
current 3I0harm. for detecting the ground fault.
This parameter needs to be set according to the experience from the specific network. The experience requires
the analysis of permanent ground faults from the network. If such information is unavailable, Siemens
recommends a rather low setting between 5 mA and 10 mA secondary.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Stabilization counter
• Default setting (_:204) Stabilization counter = 4

With the Stabilization counter parameter, you define the number of measuring cycles in which the
3I0harm. current must keep exceeding the 3I0 harm. threshold to meet the pickup condition. With this
setting, you can optimize the pickup-condition reliability versus the pickup time.
For example, the Stabilization counter value is 4. Then, if the 3I0harm. current exceeds the 3I0
harm. threshold and keeps exceeding the threshold for 4 measuring cycles, the stage picks up. The
measuring cycle time is half of the network period. For 50 Hz, the cycle time is 10 ms. To avoid a false pickup
due to CB switching operations, Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: 3I0 harm. dropout ratio
• Default setting (_:203) 3I0 harm. dropout ratio = 0.60

With the 3I0 harm. dropout ratio parameter, you define the dropout threshold for the 3I0 harm.
threshold parameter. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
• Default setting (_:110) Pickup extension time = 0.00 s

With the Pickup extension time parameter, you define the time for extending the Pickup signal if the
zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm. falls below the 3I0 harm. threshold.
This extension time can be used to generate a stable pickup indication under fluctuating zero-sequence
harmonics.

With the Operate delay parameter, you determine the time during which the pickup conditions must be
met to issue the operate indication. The operate indication is issued when this time expires.

and the fault log. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.
6.16.12.3 Settings

3I0> harmonic#
_:1 3I0> harmonic#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 3I0> harmonic#:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:201 3I0> • 3rd harmonic 5th harmonic
harmonic#:Harmonic
selection
• 5th harmonic
• 7th harmonic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:202 3I0> harmonic#:3I0 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
harm. threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 0.150 A
_:203 3I0> harmonic#:3I0 0.10 to 0.95 0.60
harm. dropout ratio
_:204 3I0> harmonic#:Stabili- 1 to 10 4
zation counter
_:110 3I0> harmonic#:Pickup 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
extension time
_:6 3I0> harmonic#:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay

(Type)
3I0> harmonic#
_:81 3I0> harmonic#:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 3I0> harmonic#:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 3I0> harmonic#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 3I0> harmonic#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 3I0> harmonic#:Health ENS O
_:55 3I0> harmonic#:Pickup ACD O
_:56 3I0> harmonic#:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 3I0> harmonic#:Operate ACT O
_:306 3I0> harmonic#:3I0 harm. MV O
6.16.13 Pulse-Pattern Detection Stage
Overview
The Pulse-pattern detection stage detects a faulty feeder during a permanent ground fault in overcompen-
sated systems. This method is not reliably applicable to undercompensated systems.
The following figure shows a simplified network that applies the pulse-pattern detection method.
The pulse pattern in the ground current 3I0 is generated by switching on and off a capacitor in parallel to the
arc-suppression coil:
• When the capacitor is switched on, an additional capacitive ground current is generated and the 3I0
compensation changes.
• When the capacitor is switched off, the additional capacitive ground current is vanished and the 3I0
compensation returns to the normal state.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_pulse detection network, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-163 Network that Uses the Pulse-Pattern Detection
Cs Capacitance of the switched capacitor

L Inductance of the arc-suppression coil
Pulse Pattern during a Ground Fault

The following figure shows the 3I0 pulse pattern in an overcompensated system for a low-impedance ground
fault and a high-impedance ground fault.
• For low-impedance ground faults, the 3I0 pulse pattern exists only in the faulty feeder.
• For high-impedance ground faults, the pulse pattern is also present in the healthy feeders with lower
amplitude but in phase opposition to the faulty feeder.
Applying a different switch-on/switch-off duration allows distinguishing between faulty and healthy
feeders in case of high-impedance ground faults.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_pulse pattern in overcompensation network, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-164 Current Pulse Pattern in the Overcompensated System
For the faulty feeder, the current pulse pattern is as follows:
• When the clocking pulse is on, the capacitor is switched on, the zero-sequence current 3I0 in the faulty
feeder is reduced, and the corresponding current pulse pattern is off.
• When the clocking pulse is off, the capacitor is switched off, 3I0 in the faulty feeder is increased, and the
current pulse pattern is on.
Clocking Pulse Capacitor 3I0 in the Faulty Feeder Current Pulse Pattern of the Faulty Feeder
On On Reduced Off
Off Off Increased On

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_sensGFP pulse detection, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-165 Logic Diagram of the Pulse-Pattern Detection Stage

nent numerically.

The function usually evaluates the ground current 3I0 sensitively measured via a core balance current trans-

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 calculated from the phase currents. This results in a very
large linearity and settings range.
nent numerically.
different linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in Measured Value 3I0, Method of
Measurement , Page 767.
Pulse Detection, Pulse Counter

For this stage, voltage routing is optional and current routing is mandatory.
• If VN or V0 is available, the voltage is the only criterion for starting the pulse-detection logic. When the
fundamental-component value of V0 exceeds the V0> threshold value, the pulse-detection logic is
started.
• If VN or V0 is not available, the current is the only criterion for starting the pulse-detection logic. When
the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence current 3I0 exceeds the 3I0> threshold
value, the pulse-detection logic is started.
If the measured current pulse-off duration equals to the value of the Pulse-on duration parameter and
the measured current pulse-on duration equals to the value of the Pulse-off duration parameter, a valid
pulse is detected.
After the first valid pulse is detected, the pulse counter is started to count the number of pulses continuously
until the stage resets.
Pickup, Operate
After the first valid pulse is detected, the stage picks up.
If the number of detected pulses within the pulse monitoring time reaches the setting of the No. of
pulses for operate parameter, the stage operates. The pulse monitoring time is calculated via the
following formula:
Pulse monitoring time = Value Monitoring time(in pulses) ⋅ (Value Pulse-on duration + Value
Pulse-off duration)
For example, the value of the No. of pulses for operate parameter is 3, and the value of the
Monitoring time(in pulses) is 5. Then the pickup and operate time diagram is as follows:
[dw_pulse pickup and operate, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-166 Pickup and Operate Time

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• After the 3rd valid pulse is detected, the stage does not operate because the time between the 1st and
the 3rd valid pulses is greater than the pulse monitoring time which is 5 clocking pulses.
• After the 4th valid pulse is detected, the stage operates because the time between the 2nd and the 4th
valid pulses is within the pulse monitoring time which is 5 clocking pulses.
Dropout Delay
Switching on the capacitor usually causes 3I0 to decrease in the faulty feeder. This must not cause the stage to
drop out. For that reason, a dropout delay is active for the sum of the Pulse-on duration and Pulse-off
duration values.
Detected Pulses of the Ground Fault

The stage records the total number of detected pulses during the permanent ground fault. If the function
resets or the operate condition is met, this number is issued via the signal Detected pulses.


The V0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero-sequence (fundamental) voltage sensi-
voltage V0 that must still be detected.
If VN or V0 is not available, the V0> threshold value parameter is hidden and the 3I0> threshold
value parameter is visible and used.
Parameter: 3I0> threshold value
• Default setting (_:101) 3I0> threshold value = 0.200 A

If VN or V0 is not available, the 3I0> threshold value parameter is visible and used.
The 3I0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero-sequence (fundamental) current sensi-
current 3I0 that must still be detected.
Parameter: Pulse-on duration, Pulse-off duration
• Default setting (_:104) Pulse-on duration = 1.00 s
• Default setting (_:105) Pulse-off duration = 1.50 s

With the Pulse-on duration and Pulse-off duration parameters, you define the switch-on and
switch-off duration of the capacitor.
These values must be set according to the operation of the clocking device that determines the switch-on and
switch-off duration of the capacitor. If you set these 2 parameters to the same or similar values, there is a risk
of failure because the stage cannot distinguish the healthy and faulty feeders by only evaluating the ground
current during a high-impedance ground fault.
Parameter: Max.tolera.pulse-on or off
• Default setting (_:109) Max.tolera.pulse-on or off = 0.15 s

With the Max.tolera.pulse-on or off parameter, you define the tolerance for the measured pulse-on/
pulse-off duration. The tolerance is the maximum deviation from the set values for the Pulse-on duration
and Pulse-off duration parameters.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The recommended setting for this parameter is the maximum tolerance of the clocking device plus 40 ms
(tolerance of the SIPROTEC 5 device). For the tolerance of the clocking device, you have to consider the
tolerances of the pulse-on and pulse-off durations individually and select the larger tolerance of both.
EXAMPLE
Clocking device:
Set pulse-on duration for the clocking device 1.00 s

Max. tolerance pulse-on duration of the clocking device 70 ms
Set pulse-off duration for the clocking device 1.50 s
Max. tolerance pulse-off duration of the clocking device 110 ms
Larger tolerance of both 110 ms
Tolerance to be set:
Tolerance of the SIPROTEC 5 device 40 ms

Total tolerance to be set 110 ms + 40 ms = 150 ms
Consequently, you must set the respective device settings as:
• Pulse-on duration = 1.00 s
• Pulse-off duration = 1.50 s
• Max.tolera.pulse-on or off = 0.15 s

The following figure shows the measured pulse durations which are within the maximum stated tolerances of
the example.
[dw_tolerance, 1, en_US]
If you have no information about the tolerance of the clocking device, you can carry out a test recording
while the clocking device is in operation. From the test recording, you can read the inaccuracy of the pulse-on/
pulse-off durations. Add a safety margin of 20 ms on the read inaccuracy and consider this as the maximum
tolerance of the clocking device. For the setting, add another 40 ms for the tolerance of the SIPROTEC 5
device.
Parameter: 3I0 delta pulse off-on
• Default setting (_:103) 3I0 delta pulse off-on = 10 %

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the 3I0 delta pulse off-on parameter, you define the minimum percentage value of the ground-
current delta between the capacitor switched-on and capacitor switched-off states to detect the pulse pattern.
That is, to detect the pulse pattern, the following condition must be met:
[fo_delta ratio, 1, en_US]
To prevent minor current fluctuations from leading to a maloperation of the function, the setting of the 3I0
delta pulse off-on parameter cannot be less than 2 %.
The setting of the 3I0 delta pulse off-on parameter can be calculated with the following formula:
[fo_3I0_delta_pulse_off-on, 1, en_US]
Where
Kf Safety factor
Siemens recommends applying the factor 0.6 to also detect high-impedance ground faults.
Cs Capacitance of the switched capacitor
ω Angular frequency, which equals to 2πf, where f is the power frequency
L Inductance of the arc-suppression coil
C0Σ Zero-sequence capacitance of the whole network
C0i Zero-sequence capacitance of the protected feeder
EXAMPLE
Kf 0.6
Cs 1.1 ⋅ 10-6 F
ω 314 rad/s
L 0.577 H
C0Σ 5.4297 ⋅ 10-6 F
C0i 1.5502 ⋅ 10-6 F
Then the setting of the 3I0 delta pulse off-on parameter is calculated as follows:
[fo_delta calculate, 1, en_US]
If the network information for the setting calculation is not available, Siemens recommends using the default
setting of 10 %.
Parameter: No. of pulses for operate, Monitoring time(in pulses)
• Default setting (_:107) No. of pulses for operate = 3
• Default setting (_:108) Monitoring time(in pulses) = 5

With the No. of pulses for operate parameter, you determine the number of pulses to be detected
within the pulse monitoring time, so that the stage operates.
With the Monitoring time(in pulses) parameter, you define the pulse monitoring time, which is
calculated via the following formula:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Pulse monitoring time = Value Monitoring time(in pulses) ⋅ (Value Pulse-on duration + Value
Pulse-off duration)
6.16.13.3 Settings

Pulse detect.#
_:1 Pulse detect.#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Pulse detect.#:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:102 Pulse detect.#:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
threshold value
_:101 Pulse detect.#:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.200 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
_:103 Pulse detect.#:3I0 delta 2 % to 50 % 10 %
pulse off-on
_:104 Pulse detect.#:Pulse-on 0.20 s to 10.00 s 1.00 s
duration
_:105 Pulse detect.#:Pulse-off 0.20 s to 10.00 s 1.50 s
duration
_:109 Pulse 0.02 s to 2.00 s 0.15 s
detect.#:Max.tolera.puls
e-on or off
_:107 Pulse detect.#:No. of 2 to 100 3
pulses for operate
_:108 Pulse detect.#:Moni- 2 to 100 5
toring time(in pulses)

(Type)
Pulse detect.#
_:81 Pulse detect.#:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Pulse detect.#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Pulse detect.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Pulse detect.#:Health ENS O
_:302 Pulse detect.#:Detected pulses MV O
_:55 Pulse detect.#:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Pulse detect.#:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Pulse detect.#:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.16.14 Intermittent Ground-Fault Blocking Stage
Most functions designed for the detection of permanent ground faults may show a disadvantageous behavior
in case of intermittent ground faults. An example of these functions is the 3I0> stage with cos φ or sin
φ measurement. In case of an intermittent ground fault, these functions may cause a flood of information
due to continuously exceeding and dropping below thresholds. Also short-term wrong directional results are
possible due to the nature of the intermittent signals. To avoid this disadvantage, these functions should be
blocked in case of intermittent grounds faults.
The Intermittent ground-fault blocking stage detects and classifies a ground fault as intermittent and sends
a blocking signal to the following stages:
• Directional 3I0> stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement
• Directional 3I0> stage with φ(V0, 3I0) measurement
• Directional Y0> stage with G0 or B0 measurement
• Directional stage with phasor measurement of a harmonic
Logic
[lo_sensGFP_IGFB, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-167 Logic Diagram of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Blocking Stage
(1) This signal is sent to the protection stages described in the preceding sections.
Measured Value 3I0

The algorithm evaluates the true RMS value of the ground current to ensure that ground-current pulses are
considered.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
You can find more information about possible connection types and measuring angles in chapter Measured
Value 3I0, Method of Measurement , Page 767.
Pulse Counting and Intermittent Ground-Fault Indication

If the true RMS value of 3I0 exceeds the Threshold value, the current-pulse (current-peak) detection takes
place. During the ongoing intermittent ground fault, all current pulses are counted.
If the pulse count reaches the threshold value set in the parameter No.of pulses for interm.GF, the
signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is issued. At once, the internal signal Interm.gnd.flt.det is sent to
the following stages:
• Directional 3I0> stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement
• Directional 3I0> stage with φ(V0, 3I0) measurement
• Directional stage with phasor measurement of a harmonic
• Directional Y0> stage with G0 or B0 measurement

If the Blk.by interm.gnd.flt. parameter in one of these stages is set to yes, the stage is blocked.
Reset Time for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if the ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike within a large time, an intermittent ground fault can be considered as definitely disappeared.
The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset time. If a ground fault occurs, the Timer
T-reset with the setting Reset time is launched. Each new ground-current pulse restarts the Reset time
with its initial value. If the Timer T-reset expires, that is, if no new ground fault was detected during that
period, all memories and the stage logics are reset.
The Timer T-reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed
yet as an intermittent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later is
considered as a new ground-fault event.
Start and Reset Conditions of the Timer T-reset

The Timer T-reset is started if one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
• The true RMS value of 3I0 exceeds the Threshold value.
• A new pulse is detected. That is, with each new pulse, the timer starts again with its initial value.
The Timer T-reset can be reset via the binary input signal >Reset blocking.
Reset Conditions of the Counter and the Protection-Stage Blocking

The whole stage, including the counter and protection-stage blocking signal, is reset if one of the following
conditions is fulfilled:
• The Timer T-reset expires.
• The binary input signal >Reset blocking is activated.

With the parameter Threshold, you set the intermittent ground-fault pickup threshold. This setting must be
coordinated with the applied protection stage for detecting a permanent ground fault, which shall be blocked
for an intermittent fault, for example, the 3I0> stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement.
The parameter Threshold must be set to the same value as the respective 3I0> threshold value of the
protection stage. For example, in case of the 3I0> stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement, the value from
the parameter (_:12601:101) 3I0> threshold value must be applied for the parameter Threshold.
It is not required to set a lower value than the respective 3I0> threshold value of the protection stage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If the 3I0> threshold value of the protection stage is set to a higher value than the setting range for the
parameter Threshold, set the maximum setting value for the parameter Threshold.
Parameter: No.of pulses for interm.GF
• Default setting (_:20161:104) No.of pulses for interm.GF = 3

With the parameter No.of pulses for interm.GF, you set the total number of pulse counts at which the
ground fault is considered to be intermittent. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
• Default setting (_:20161:107) Reset time = 5.00 s

With the parameter Reset time, you define the minimum time between 2 adjacent ground faults/impulses.
If the time is larger than the Reset time, the intermittent ground fault is considered as disappeared. This
can mean that the ground fault has disappeared or that the intermittent ground fault has changed to a static
ground fault. The function resets and a blocking is cleared.
6.16.14.3 Settings

Blk.interm.GF
_:20161:1 Blk.interm.GF:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:20161:3 Blk.interm.GF:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:20161:104 Blk.interm.GF:No.of 2 to 50 3
pulses for interm.GF
_:20161:107 Blk.interm.GF:Reset time 1.00 s to 600.00 s 5.00 s

(Type)
Blk.interm.GF
_:20161:81 Blk.interm.GF:>Reset blocking SPS I
_:20161:304 Blk.interm.GF:Intermittent gnd.flt. SPS O
_:20161:305 Blk.interm.GF:Reset time running SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.17 Undercurrent Protection
The Undercurrent protection function (ANSI 37):
• Detects the going current in a feeder after the opening of the infeed circuit breaker
• Detects the loss of loads
• Detects and protects pumps from running idle
The Undercurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with current measurement.
The Undercurrent protection function comes with 1 protection stage preconfigured at the factory. A
maximum of 2 protection stages can be operated simultaneously in this function. The protection stages are
structured identically.
[lo_stuundcu, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_UCP-3pol, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-169 Logic Diagram of the Undercurrent Protection
You use the parameter Method of measurement to define whether the stage uses the fundamental

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

This measurement method processes the sampled current values and numerically filters out the funda-
mental component.
• Measurement of the parameter value RMS value:

This measurement method determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the
definition equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.
Measurement Repetition
To enable the pickup stabilization, you set the parameter Measurement repetition to a value other
than 0. Then, if the input current keeps below the Threshold for a specified number (Measurement
repetition value) of successive measuring cycles, the stage picks up. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time
is 5 ms (Method of measurement = fundamental comp.) or 10 ms (Method of measurement = RMS
value).
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued
immediately after the input current falls below the parameter Threshold.
Pickup Mode
The parameter Pickup mode defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the undercurrent condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element has to detect the undercur-
rent condition (1 out of 3).
Blocking the Stage

When blocked, the picked-up protection stage will drop out. Blocking the stage is possible externally or
internally via the binary input signal >Block stage.
Activation and Blocking of the Stage Depending On the Circuit-Breaker Condition

With the parameter Activation, you define if the stage Undercurrent protection is always active or only
active if the circuit breaker is indicating closed.
If the parameter Activation is set to with CB closed and the local circuit breaker is not closed, the
function Undercurrent protection is blocked and no pickup is generated.
The circuit-breaker position is detected as closed if one of the following conditions is met:
• The binary inputs are connected to the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. The circuit-breaker switch
position is detected as closed via the related binary inputs of the indication Position. This is also true
under the condition that no phase current is flowing.
• The current-flow criterion indicates that the circuit breaker is closed. This is also true under the condition
that the auxiliary contacts indicate the circuit breaker as open.
Behavior on Leaving the Operating Range

The sampling frequency tracking makes a wide frequency operating range possible. If the stage has picked up
before leaving the frequency operating range, the pickup is maintained. The signal Pickup is reset when a
blocking condition becomes active.
Parameter: Activation
• Default setting (_:13051:103) Activation = with CB closed

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

with CB closed The Undercurrent protection is active only when the circuit-breaker posi-
tion is detected as closed.
A precondition is, that the Position indication is routed to binary inputs to
obtain the CB position information via the CB auxiliary contacts. If this is not
the case, the function will always be inactive.
always active The Undercurrent protection stage is always active independent of the
position of the circuit breaker.

an overfunction.
added currents.
• Default setting (_:13051:102) Pickup mode = 3 out of 3

Use the Pickup mode parameter to define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the undercurrent condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element has to detect the undercur-
rent condition (1 out of 3).

For special applications, it could be desirable that a short falling below the current threshold does not lead to
the pickup of the stage and to the start of fault logging and recording.
With the Pickup delay parameter, you define a time interval during which a pickup is not triggered if the
current falls below the threshold.

Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application.
Parameter: Measurement repetition
• Default setting (_:13051:105) Measurement repetition = 0

For special applications, it could be desirable that a short falling of the input current below the pickup value
does not lead to the pickup of the stage, which starts fault logging and recording. This is achieved by setting
the parameter Measurement repetition to a value other than 0.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
For example, if you set this parameter to 2, the pickup signal is issued when the current keeps being below
the Threshold for 2 additional measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 5 ms (Method of
measurement = fundamental comp.) or 10 ms (Method of measurement = RMS value).

Operate delay must be set according to the specific application. No general application notes can be given.
6.17.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13051:103 Stage 1:Activation • always active with CB closed
• with CB closed
_:13051:8 Stage 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:13051:105 Stage 1:Measurement 0 to 10 0
repetition
_:13051:102 Stage 1:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 3 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:13051:104 Stage 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:13051:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.18 Negative-Sequence Protection
The function Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46):
• Detects 1-phase or 2-phase short circuits in the electrical power system with clearly increased sensitivity
compared to the classical overcurrent protection
• Protects electric machines during excessive unbalanced load
• Reports unbalanced load conditions in the electricity supply system
• Detects phase interruptions in the primary system
• Locates short circuits or inversions in the connections to the current transformers
The Negative-sequence protection function is used in protection function groups with current measure-
ment.
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time negative-sequence protection
stages.
In the function Negative-sequence protection, the following stages can be operated simultaneously:
• 3 stages Definite-time negative-sequence protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time negative-sequence protection

The stages have an identical structure. Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following
figure.
[dw_nsp_str, 3, en_US]
operate due to transformer-inrush currents.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of the general functionality which applies across all configured
stages. It contains:
• Selection of the reference value
• Current-release criterion
[lo_general_functionality_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-171 Logic Diagram of the General Functionality
(1) Switchover to I1 with (_:2311:106) Reference value = pos. seq. current
Reference Value
With the parameter Reference value, the negative-sequence current I2 is normalized to the rated object
current Irated, obj or to the positive-sequence current I1. When I2 is normalized to I1, the sensitivity of the
function for low short-circuit currents is increased.
Current Limitation and Maximum Phase Current

With the parameters Current limitation Imax and Maximum phase current, you restrict the oper-
ating range of the function. When the limiting is activated, pickup of the stages is blocked as soon as the
maximum phase-current threshold value is exceeded. For more information, refer to the stage description.
Release Current
The threshold value of the Release current serves to release the negative-sequence protection.
Parameter: Reference value
• Default setting (_:2311:106) Reference value = rated current

With the parameter Reference value, you define the normalization of the negative-sequence current I2 to
the rated object current Irated, obj (I2/Irated, obj) or to the positive-sequence current I1 (I2/I1).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

I2/Irated, obj The negative-sequence current is referred to the rated current of the
protected object. This is a preferred normalization for electrical machines,
because the permissible limiting values are indicated exclusively referred to
the machine rated current. You can also use this normalization for other
applications.
I2/I1 The normalization of the negative-sequence system to the positive-
sequence system yields a higher sensitivity. Use this normalization when
detecting interruptions in the primary system.
Set the parameter depending on the application.
Parameter: Current limitation Imax, Maximum phase current
• Default setting (_:2311:107) Current limitation Imax = no
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Maximum phase current = 10.0 A at 1 A

If the protection function needs a maximum current limitation, set the value of the Current limitation
Imax parameter from no to yes. With the parameter Maximum phase current, you set the upper limit
of the phase current. CT saturation will cause negative-sequence current in the secondary system. To avoid
overfunction due to the CT saturation, a suitable phase-current limit value is 10 times of the rated protection-
object current.
Parameter: Release current
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Release current = 0.05 A at 1 A

For the safe calculation of negative-sequence currents, the current in at least one phase must be greater than
5 % of the secondary rated device current. For a 1-A device, the value of Release current is 0.05 A (0.25 A
for a 5-A device).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.18.4.1 Stage Description
Logic of a Stage
[lo_giknsp, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-172 Logic Diagram of the Stage Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Characteristic
Curve
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the negative-
sequence system and the positive-sequence system are calculated. Following this, the negative-sequence
current is normalized to the reference current. The selection of the reference current is made in the FB
General.

When blocked, the picked-up stage will drop out.
Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Recommended setting value (_:1981:3) Threshold = 10 %

The setting of the parameter Threshold depends on the respective application. A threshold value of 10 % is
a practicable value for fault indications of electrical machines.
• Recommended setting value (_:1981:6) Operate delay = 1500 ms

The setting of the Operate delay depends on the application. Observe the time grading in the power-
system protection and do not set the time for monitoring too short. The default setting is practicable. For
motors, the time depends on the permissible time period for the set unbalanced load.

With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect., the stage can be stabilized against tripping on
6.18.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:106 General:Reference value • pos. seq. current rated current
• rated current
_:2311:107 General:Current limita- • no no
tion Imax
• yes
_:2311:101 General:Maximum phase 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 50.000 A
_:2311:104 General:Release current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:1981:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 5.0 % to 999.9 % 10.0 %

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

ratio
• yes
delay
delay
Definite-T 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:1982:3 Definite-T 2:Threshold 5.0 % to 999.9 % 65.0 %
ratio
• yes
delay
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:Overcurrent blocking SPS O
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Definite-T 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of a Stage
[lo_nsp_inverse, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-173 Logic Diagram of the Negative-Sequence Protection with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the negative-
sequence system and the positive-sequence system are calculated. Following this, the negative-sequence
current is normalized to the reference current. The selection of the reference current is made in the FB
General.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

When blocked, the picked-up protection stage will drop out.
Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage.
6.18.5.2 Application and Settings Notes
• Default setting (_:105) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse

• Recommended setting value (_:3) Threshold = 10.0 %

The setting of the parameter Threshold depends on the respective application. A threshold value of 10 % is
a practicable value for fault detection for different applications.
• Recommended setting value (_:107) Time dial = 1.00

With the parameter Time dial, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the parameter Time dial is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared
dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset

With the parameter Reset, you define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect., the stage can be stabilized against tripping on
6.18.5.3 Settings

Inverse-T #
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 5.0 % to 999.9 % 10.0 %
_:104 Inverse-T #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect.
• yes
_:105 Inverse-T #:Type of char-
acter. curve
_:106 Inverse-T #:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation

(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:300 Inverse-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:59 Inverse-T #:Disk emulation running SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.19 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection
The function Directional negative-sequence protection with current-independent time delay (ANSI 46)
serves as the backup short-circuit protection for unbalanced faults.
With the negative-sequence system, various supervision and protection tasks can be realized, for example:
• Recording of 1 or 2-phase short circuits in the system with a higher sensitivity than in classic overcurrent
protection. The pickup value can be set under the rated object current.
• Recording of phase conductor interruptions in the primary system and in the current-transformer secon-
dary circuits
• Location of short circuits or reversals in the connections to the current transformers
• Indication of unbalanced states in the energy system
• Protection of electrical machines following unbalanced loads that are caused by unbalanced voltages or
conductor interruptions (for example, through a defective fuse)
The Directional negative-sequence protection with definite time delay function can be used in protection
function groups with 3-phase current and voltage measurement.
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of 6 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously
in the function.
[dw_nsp_dir, 1, en_US]
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the tripping stages can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents.
Stage Control
The following figure shows a stage control. It is available separately for each stage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_stensp, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-175 Stage Control of the Directional Negative-Sequence Protection
In addition to the generally valid stage control, the stage is blocked in the event of a measuring-voltage
failure, provided the stage is working directionally.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_nsp_dir, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-176 Logic Diagram of the Function Directional Negative-Sequence System Protection with Current-
Independent Time Delay
Measurand
The negative-sequence current I2 is used as a measurand. From the 3-phase currents, the fundamental
phasors are determined via a 1-cycle filter and, corresponding with the definition equation of the symmetrical
components, the negative-sequence system is calculated from this.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Functioning
The stage picks up if the negative-sequence system current exceeds the set threshold value and the parame-
terized direction agrees with the measured direction. The pickup drops out if the negative-sequence system
current falls below 95 % of the set threshold.
Stabilization with Phase Current

Unbalance in operation and unbalanced transformer ratios can lead to spurious pickups and incorrect tripping.
In order to avoid this, the directional negative-sequence system stage is stabilized with the phase currents.
The threshold value increases with rising phase currents (see next image).
You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz. w. phase current parameter.
[dw_stabil, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-177 Stabilization with Phase Currents
The direction determination takes place with the negative-sequence system measurements I2 and V2.
The forward and reverse region is defined through the parameters Angle forward α and Angle forward
β (see next figure). The reference for the 2 angles that must be set is the positive real axis. The angles are
positively defined in a mathematical sense (counter-clockwise). The region between the limit angle α and the
limit angle β - counted from the former in a positive direction - is the forward region. The remaining region is
the reverse region.
For determining of the direction, the function places the measuring current I2 on the real axis. If the phasor
of the negative-sequence system voltage V2 is located within the defined forward region, the function
determines the direction as forward. In the other case, the function determines the direction as reverse.
The requirement for determining the direction is that the adjustable minimum variables have been exceeded
for the negative-sequence system current and negative-sequence system voltage (parameters Min. neg.-
seq. current I2 and Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_phasor, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-178 Phasor Diagram for Direction Determination with Negative-Sequence System Values
If the device determines a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit (through the binary input
voltage transformer circuit-breaker dropout or through measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion), direction determination will be disabled and every directionally set stage will be blocked. Non-direction-
ally set stages become active again if there are faults in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit.
[lo_richtu, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-179 Logic of Direction Determination
Directional Mode
direction. Non-directional operation is also possible.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Blocking the Tripping by Pickup of the Main Protection Functions

The pickup and type of pickup for the main protection functions can block the tripping of the stage. You can
perform this setting via 2 parameters:
• Blocking by
This setting is used to select the zone or stage at which blocking is to occur in the event of pickup.
• Blocking by prot. pickup

The pickup type at which the blocking is to occur is defined with this parameter. The blocking can occur
at any pickup or only at 1-pole or only at multipole pickups.
This parameter is also used to set that no blocking should occur when the main protection has picked up.
Blocking of Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The start of the time delay and tripping are however blocked. The stage signals this by way of
a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the
tripping delay (time delay) is started. After that time, the stage operates.
6.19.4 Application and Setting Notes for Direction Determination
Parameter: Limit Angle Region Forward
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Angle forward α = 338°
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) Angle forward β = 122°

With the parameters Angle forward α and Angle forward β, you can change the location of the
directional characteristic curve.
Siemens recommends using the defaults, because the function with these settings reliably determines the
direction.
Parameter: Minimum Negative-Sequence System Variables V2 and I2
• Default setting (_:2311:107) Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2 = 0.7 V
• Default setting (_:2311:106) Min. neg.-seq. current I2 = 0.05 A

With the parameters Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2 and Min. neg.-seq. current I2, you can
specify the minimum negative-sequence system values for direction determination with V2 and I2. The set
limiting values must not be exceeded by operational unbalances.
6.19.5 Application and Setting Notes for Stages


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

non-directional If the stage is to work in the forward and reverse direction (in the direction of
the line and busbar), then select this setting.
The stage will work with this setting even if no direction measurement is
possible, for example due to insufficient polarization voltage (or none at all),
or due to failure of the measuring voltage.
forward Select these settings if the stage is only to work in a forward direction (in
reverse Select this setting if the level is only to work in the reverse direction (in the


no The transformer inrush current detection does not affect the stage.
1) In cases where the device is not used on transformers.
2) In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold value of
the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the transformer.
yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current that
can lead to a tripping of the stage, the start of the time delay and tripping of
the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold value
of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the transformer.
Parameter: Blocking by the main Protection
• Recommended setting value (_:8101:140) Blocking by =

If you wish to give selective fault clarification through the main protection function precedence over tripping
through the directional negative-sequence protection, you can define this via the 2 parameters Blocking by
and Blocking by prot. pickup. The Blocking by parameter is used to select the zones or tripping
stages of the main protection function(s), upon whose pickup the negative-sequence protection is to be
blocked.
Parameter: Blocking by prot. pickup
• Default setting (_:8101:130) Blocking by prot. pickup = every pickup

The Blocking by prot. pickup parameter can be used to define the type of pickup, which leads to the
blocking.
every pickup Blocking at every pickup
1-phase pickup Blocking only at 1-pole pickup
multi-phase pickup Blocking only at multipole pickup
no pickup If the pickup of the main protection function should not lead to blocking of the
negative-sequence protection, select this setting.
Parameter: Hold mode 1-p dead time
• Default setting (_:8101:112) Hold mode 1p dead time = 0.040 s

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The parameter Hold mode 1p dead time is used to define the time by which the device-internal signal for
the 1-pole interruption is extended after the end of the 1-pole interruption.
At all line ends, there is no simultaneous switch-in after a 1-pole dead time. Thus, the parameterized operating
mode for a 1-pole dead time must be retained for a certain time after the switch-in (end of the 1-pole dead
time) until the other end or ends have securely switched in. The time to be set here corresponds to the
maximum time between the switch-in of the 1st circuit breaker and the switch-in of the last circuit breaker at
all ends of the feeder after a 1-pole dead time.
NOTE
i The Hold mode 1p dead time parameter is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.
Parameter: Stabiliz. w. phase current
• Recommended setting value (_:8101:111) Stabiliz. w. phase current = 10 %

In order to avoid unwanted pickups and tripping, the negative-sequence system current stage is stabilized
with the phase currents.
More information can be found in chapter 6.19.3 Function Description.
The threshold value increases as the phase currents increase.
You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz. w. phase current parameter.
Siemens recommends a default setting of 10 % under normal operations.

Define the pickup value corresponding to the application. In doing so, for the time-graded stages, the setting
for the superordinate and subordinate stages must be taken into account in the grading chart.
With a very sensitive setting, you must make sure that the negative-sequence system current does not lead to
undesired response of the stage due to unbalance (for example non-twisted line).

The tripping delay (time delay) to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for
the system.
When selecting the current and time setting, pay attention to whether the stage must work dependent on the
direction.
6.19.6 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Angle forward α 0 ° to 360 ° 338 °
_:2311:102 General:Angle forward β 0 ° to 360 ° 122 °
_:2311:107 General:Min. neg.-seq. 0.150 V to 34.000 V 1.213 V
voltage V2
_:2311:106 General:Min. neg.-seq. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
current I2 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:8101:114 Definite-T 1:Directional • non-directional forward
mode
• forward
• reverse
_:8101:111 Definite-T 1:Stabiliz. w. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
phase current
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
• yes
_:8101:130 Definite-T 1:Blocking by • every pickup every pickup
prot. pickup
• 1-phase pickup
• multi-phase pickup
• no pickup
_:8101:129 Definite-T 1:Op.mode at • blocked blocked
1p dead time
• non-directional
_:8101:112 Definite-T 1:Hold mode 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
1p dead time
_:8101:140 Definite-T 1:Blocking by Setting options depend on
configuration

(Type)
General
Group indicat.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Definite-T 1
_:8101:302 Definite-T 1:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:8101:301 Definite-T 1:Mode1p dead-tm.active SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.20 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
The Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function (ANSI 49) is used to:
• Protect the equipment (motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables) against
thermal overloads
• Monitor the thermal state of motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables
The Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function is used in protection function groups with
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 Thermal overload protection, 3-phase –
advanced stage.
The non-preconfigured function block Filter can optionally be applied to gain the RMS value used by the
Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced stage.
[dw_TOLP_with_filter_stage, 2, en_US]
6.20.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain
The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means:
• To gain harmonics in a defined way. Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more
than lower harmonics. This is the case for reactors applied in AC filters. In addition, the amplitude attenu-
ation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter of the device is automatically compensated by
the filter
• To only compensate the amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies by the device (due to the anti-
aliasing filter)
The filter gain (amplitude response) is realized by a 9-order FIR filter.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_tolp_filter_stage, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-181 Logic Diagram of the Function Block Filter
The FIR filter gains the 8-kHz sampled values according to the set filter coefficients. Afterwards the RMS value
is calculated. The symmetrical 9-order filter coefficients are set via the respective parameters h(0), h(1),
h(2), h(3) and h(4).
NOTE
i A FIR-filter configuration tool is provided as an auxiliary PC tool. With this PC tool, the coefficients h(0),
h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4) of the FIR filter are generated according to the required gain factors (amplitude
response). The tool can be obtained from the SIPROTEC download area. For more information about the
tool, refer to the tool help function.
The gained RMS value is delivered to the protection stages only when the function block Filter is instantiated
and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes . Otherwise, the normal RMS value is used.
Values Description Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
Iph:A Filtered RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current A
Iph:B Filtered RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current B
Iph:C Filtered RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current C
You can find the parameter Rated current in the FB General of function groups where the Thermal
overload protection, 3-phase - advanced function is used.
If the parameter Enable filter is set to no, the function values are shown as ---.
Parameter: Enable filter
• Default setting (_:1) Enable filter = no.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the parameter Enable filter, you set whether the Filter is enabled.
yes If gained RMS values should be used in one of the protection stages, set
parameter Enable filter = yes.
no If no gained RMS values are needed, set the parameter Enable filter =
no.
Parameter: h(0), h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4)

With the default value of the coefficients, the filter has no effect and no gain is applied.
If the filter shall be applied to adapt the RMS value calculation to a specific protection object such as a reactor,
the reactor manufacturer has to provide the required amplitude response (gain factors) for the reactor. To
determine the coefficients h(0) to h(4) for the FIR filter, you must enter the gain factors into the auxiliary
PC tool which is available in the SIPROTEC download area. The 5 required coefficients are generated by the
tool. They have to be entered manually as settings to configure the filter. The amplitude attenuation of higher
frequencies due to the anti aliasing filter of the device is automatically taken into account and compensated
by the filter.
To only compensate the attenuation of higher frequencies by the device, set the following coefficients in the
filter.
Rated Frequency Filter Coefficients for Only Compensating the Device Amplitude Attenu-
ation
50 Hz h(0) = -0.002
h(1) = -0.012
h(2) = 0.045
h(3) = -0.110
h(4) = 1.151
60 Hz h(0) = -0.005
h(1) = -0.020
h(2) = 0.058
h(3) = -0.128
h(4) = 1.170
6.20.3.3 Settings

Filter
_:1 Filter:Enable filter • no no
• yes
_:2 Filter:h(0) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:3 Filter:h(1) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:4 Filter:h(2) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:5 Filter:h(3) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:6 Filter:h(4) -100.000 to 100.000 1.000

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Filter
_:301 Filter:Iph:A MV O
_:302 Filter:Iph:B MV O
_:303 Filter:Iph:C MV O
_:52 Filter:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Filter:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.20.4 Stage with Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
Logic
[lo_tolp_with_filter_stage, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-182 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Stage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_stage_control_TOLP, 2, en_US]
RMS-Value Selection
The protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS measurement:

The gained RMS value is automatically used if the function block Filter is configured and the filter has been
enabled.
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one current measuring point I-3ph is allowed to be
Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the phase currents based on a thermal single-
body model according to the thermal differential equation with
[fo_diffgl-170914, 2, en_US]
With the following standardization:
[fo_normie_01, 3, en_US]
Θ Current overtemperature, in relation to the final temperature at a maximum permissible

phase current k Irated, obj
ΘAmb Standardized ambient temperature, where ϑAmbdescribes the coupled ambient temperature.
The coupled ambient temperature ϑAmb can be the measured ambient temperature or the
ambient temperature preset using the Default temperature parameter.
Δ ϑrated obj Overtemperature of the protected object set at rated current

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
τ th Thermal time constant (temperature rise/cooling) of the protected object

k This factor indicates the maximum continuous permissible phase current. The factor refers
to the rated current of the protected object (k = Imax/Irated, obj)
Irated, obj Rated current of the protected object
At the same time, Irated, obj is the rated current of the assigned protected object side:
• In the case of transformers, the rated current of the winding to be protected, which the device calculates
from the set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.
• The uncontrolled winding forms the basis in the case of transformers with voltage control
• In the case of generators, motors and reactors, the rated current, which the device calculates from the
set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.
• In the case of lines, nodes and busbars, the rated current of the protected object is set directly
In a steady state, the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e-function whose asymptote repre-
sents the final overtemperature Θend. The time constant τth determines the rise. After reaching an initial
adjustable overtemperature threshold Θwarn ( Threshold thermal warn. ), a warning indication is given.
If the overtemperature limit ΘOff (tripping overtemperature) is exceeded, an operate indication is immediately
issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply. This threshold is specified at 100 % and
corresponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current (Imax).
Figure 6-184 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds.
[dw_temp_ve, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-184 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents ( K-factor = 1.1)
The overtemperature is calculated separately for each phase. The current overtemperature can be obtained
from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent. An indication of 100 % means that the
thermal threshold has been reached. The maximum overtemperature of the phases is regarded as the tripping
temperature. This means that the highest of the 3 phase currents is always assumed.
The analysis of the RMS values of the currents over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic
components. These harmonic components contribute to the temperature rise of the equipment.
If the flowing current falls below an adjustable minimum current Imin cooling , the Cooling time
constant is activated.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Operate Curve
If the ambient temperature is not measured and set to 40°C, you can get the operate curve as following:
[fo_auslos, 1, en_US]
t Operate time
τth Time constant
I Measured load current
Ipreload Preload current
k Setting factor according to VDE 0435 part 3011 or IEC 60255-149 (K factor)
Ambient Temperature
This function takes the ambient temperature into consideration. The reference temperature of the thermal
model is 40 °C.
Compared to the reference temperature, a different ambient temperature leads to different results.
• The ambient temperature is smaller than the reference temperature.

If the ambient temperature is smaller than the reference temperature, the thermal limit increases. This
means that the persistent maximum permissible current increases and results in a higher actual K factor.
• The ambient temperature is larger than the reference temperature.

If the ambient temperature is larger than the reference temperature, the thermal limit decreases. This
means that the persistent maximum permissible current decreases and results in a lower actual K factor.
The ambient temperature can be measured with an RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) element and
can influence the thermal limit dynamically. Alternatively, a higher or lower ambient temperature can be
considered statically with the parameter Default temperature, which results in a lower or higher actual K
factor compared to the parameter that corresponds to an ambient temperature of 40 °C.
So, the parameter Default temperature is a fixed value to describe the ambient temperature if no sensor
is connected or it is the value to be considered if the temperature sensor is defective. The parameter Minimal
temperature parameter limits the coupled ambient temperature. If the measured ambient temperature is
lower than the minimum temperature, the minimum temperature is processed in the thermal model.
To calculate the actual K factor depending on the ambient temperature, the value of the parameter Tempera-
ture rise at Irated is required.
The ambient temperature is measured by an external RTD unit or by an IO111 module and provided by
the functions RTD unit Ether., RTD unit serial, or Temperature module IO111 of the function group
Analog unit. When using the parameter Temperature sensor , the respective temperature sensor can be
selected.
If the temperature measurement is faulty, for example, due to an open circuit between the device and the
RTD unit, the health state of the function Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced changes to
Warning. In this case, the process continues with either the temperature measured last or the value set under
the parameter Default temperature, depending on which value is higher.
Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations
(short circuits, motor startup currents). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal
replica must be influenced for overcurrents (exceeding l threshold). You can select between 2 strategies for this:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Freezing of the thermal memory
• Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the set current. The temperature rise is thereby
retarded at high currents.
Warning Thresholds
The thermal warning threshold issues a warning indication before the tripping threshold (tripping tempera-
ture) is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection
avoided. At a normal K-factor of 1.1, a thermal memory value of 83 % sets in at continuously flowing
rated current.
Apart from the thermal warning threshold, the overload protection also has a current-warning threshold. This
current-warning threshold can signal an overload current in sufficient time before the overtemperature value
has reached the warning or tripping threshold.
Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate , the
trip command is canceled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see Technical Data).
Behavior in the Event of Auxiliary-Voltage Failure

The behavior of the thermal replica can be controlled upon auxiliary-voltage failure via the setting parameter
Storage of thermal replica . You can save the thermal state for a time of 500 min. Once the supply
voltage returns, the thermal replica continues to function with the saved thermal state.
If the thermal replica is not saved, it will be reset to 0 upon failure of the auxiliary voltage.
Resetting the Thermal Map

You can reset the thermal memory via the binary input indication >Reset thermal replica . The thermal
memory will then have a 0 value. A reparameterization will also lead to resetting the thermal memory.
Emergency Start
Depending on the operating conditions, tripping can be blocked or closure enabled despite the permissible
thermal limits being exceeded. Upon activation of the binary input signal >Emergency start , tripping
is blocked and closure enabled. This does not affect the state of the thermal memory. After the input >Emer-
gency start disappears, the blocking remains in effect for the set Emerg. start T overtravel .
Blocking the Function

Blocking will cause a picked up function to be reset. The tripping function can be blocked externally or
internally by the binary input signal >Block stage .
All indications then drop out and the thermal memory is set to the value 0.
Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load.
The signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and canceled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.

(_:601:305) Time until trip Expected time until tripping s s s
(_:601:304) Time until close Time until close release s s s
(_:601:306) Overload phase A Thermal measured values of % % Tripping temperature
(_:601:307) Overload phase B the phases
(_:601:308) Overload phase C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(_:601:309) Overload Thermal measured value of the % % Tripping temperature
maximum overload protection
(_:601:310) Equival. current Current measured value which A A Rated operating current of
phs A serves as basis for the overload the primary values
(_:601:311) Equival. current measured value
phs B
(_:601:312) Equival. current
phs C
(_:601:313) Equival. current Maximum current measured A A Rated operating current of
max. value which serves as basis for the primary values
the overload measured value
Parameter: Threshold current warning
• Default setting (_:101) Threshold current warning = 1.000 A at Irated = 1 A
Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current (Imax, perm). This results in the same setting
value as for the K-factor.
Parameter: Threshold thermal warn.
• Default setting (_:104) Threshold thermal warn. = 90 %

The default setting can be left at a K-factor, of 1.1, as the thermal memory results for 83 % at continuously
flowing rated current. The calculation uses the rule of three: 100 % corresponds to (K-factor)2 and x %
corresponds to 12.
[fo_warnsc, 2, en_US]
At a K-factor of 1.05, the thermal memory for rated current is already 91 % filled. Increase the Threshold
thermal warn. to 95 %.
Parameter: Dropout threshold operate
• Default setting (_:105) Dropout threshold operate = 90 %

The Dropout threshold operate parameter is used to drop out pickup and tripping when the value
drops below this threshold. A setting on the order of magnitude of the warning threshold is recommended.
You can select a lower setting value for special applications, desired additional cooling or longer blocking of
closing.
Note that the calculation of the operational measured value Time until close refers to this value.
Parameter: Emerg. start T overtravel
• Default setting (_:112) Emerg. start T overtravel = 300 s

This functionality is not required for protection of lines and cables. If the logical binary indication is not routed,
the Emerg. start T overtravel will be ineffective. The Emerg. start T overtravel presetting
can therefore be retained.
Parameter: K-factor
• Default setting (_:106) K-factor = 1.10

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The K-factor parameter is used to describe the limiting value for the maximum permissible continuous load.
The rated current Irated, obj of the protected object (for example, cable) is the basic current for overload sensing.
You can determine the K-factor on the basis of the thermally permissible continuous current Imax, perm.:
[fo_tolp_kf, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or
from the specifications of the manufacturer!
In the case of cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross-section, insulation material,
design type, and the manner in which the cables have been laid. In the case of overhead lines, an overload of
10 % is permissible.
EXAMPLE
For the Permissible Continuous Current
Cross-linked polyethylene cables (N2XS2Y): 10 kV 150 mm2 (Cu)
Current-carrying capacity (underground laying): Imax, perm = 406 A
Selected K factor of 1.1
This yields a rated current of Irated, obj = 369 A
Parameter: Thermal time constant
• Default setting (_:110) Thermal time constant = 900 s

The Thermal time constant parameter is used to define the tripping characteristics of the stage. If
no data on the Thermal time constant is available, you can determine this from the short-time current-
rating capacity of the cable, for example, from the 1-s current. The 1-s current is the maximum current
permissible for 1 s application time. The 1-s current can be found in the cable specifications. Calculate the
Thermal time constant according to the following formula:
[fo_perm_1.0-s-continuous-current, 1, en_US]
If the short-term current-rating capacity is specified for an application time other than 1 s, use the short-time
current instead of the 1-s current. Multiply the result by the specified application time.
For a given short-term current-carrying capacity of 0.5 s, use the following formula:
[fo_perm_0.5-s-continuous-current, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE for a Cable

For a cable
Permissible continuous current: Imax, perm = 406 A
Maximum short-circuit current for 1 s: I1s = 21.4 kA
Therefore, for the Thermal time constant, it follows

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[fo_konsta, 2, en_US]
with 46.29 min = 2777 s
Parameter: Cooling time constant
• Default setting (_:111) Cooling time constant = 3600 s

The Cooling time constant parameter is used to define the dropout behavior of the stage. Cables and
overhead lines have the same time constant for both heating and cooling. Therefore, set the same value for
the Cooling time constant as for the parameter Thermal time constant.
Parameter: Imax thermal
• Default setting (_:107) Imax thermal = 2.5 A at Irated = 1 A
The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax
therm. parameter. The selected threshold current of 2.5 Irated, obj is a practicable value.
Parameter: Imin cooling
• Default setting (_:108) Imin cooling = 0.500 A

If only the thermal time constant (parameter Thermal time constant) must provide protection, set the
current parameter Imin cooling to 0 A.
Parameter: Temperature rise at Irated
• Default setting (_:109) Temperature rise at Irated = 70 K

Consider this parameter only if the ambient temperature is not 40 °C or if you use a sensor for the measure-
ment of the ambient temperature.
At an ambient temperature of 40 °C, if the equipment operates continuously with the rated current, the
temperature rise is 70 K. Here, the rated current refers to the protected object. You can find the temperature
value in the technical data of the equipment or measure it. If you use a temperature sensor when measuring
at the rated current, deduct the actual ambient temperature or the coolant temperature from the measured
value.
When selecting the setting value, you can also use the specified temperature class for orientation. Usually, you
will find the overtemperature expressed in Kelvin (K), which can be accepted as is. If the absolute temperature
is given, the ambient temperature must be deducted. As a rule, this is 40 °C.
The overtemperature at maximum permissible current (ϑmax) and the Temperature rise at Irated
(ϑrated,obj.) can be converted by using the following formula:
[fo_ueb_for_Irated, 3, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
Temperature class B for continuous operation: permissible overtemperature = 80 K
From this, a temperature for Irated of 120 °C (80 K + 40 °C) can be derived when using a temperature sensor for
the measurement.
Temperature class F as thermal limiting value: permissible overtemperature = 105 K.
From this, a maximum temperature of 145 °C (105 K + 40 °C) derives.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
From these values, the K factor can be derived:
[fo_bsp_kfaktor, 3, en_US]
If you select a setting value of 1.1 for the K-factor, your selection can be considered as conservative.
NOTE
i For electrical machines, the limits can vary depending on the type of coolant.
Consult the machine manufacturer to agree on a setting value for the overtemperature.
Parameter: Storage of thermal replica
• Default setting (_:113) Storage of thermal replica = no

If a continuous auxiliary voltage for the bay units is ensured, the bay default setting can be retained.
Parameter: Behav. at I> Imax therm.
• Default setting (_:114) Behav. at I> Imax therm. = current limiting

The Behav. at I> Imax therm. parameter is used to select the process by which the function reacts to
short-circuit currents. To prevent premature tripping of the overload protection at low time constants, high
preloading and high short-circuit currents, the thermal replica can be modified.
freeze therm. rep. If input currents exceed the Imax thermal parameter, the thermal replica
will be frozen for the time the parameter is exceeded. This parameter value
is provided to enable compatibility with older products!
current limiting The input currents are limited to the value set in the Imax thermal
parameter. If the measured current exceeds the set current value, the
limited current value is supplied to the thermal replica. An advisable current
threshold is approx. 2 to 2.5 Irated, obj.
Parameter: Temperature sensor
• Default setting (_:44) Temperature sensor = none

With the Temperature sensor parameter, you determine which temperature sensor to use to detect the
ambient temperature.
A temperature sensor is used to measure the ambient temperature of the protected object and to feed
it to the device via an RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) or via an IO111 module. The
function Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – Advanced receives the measured temperature value via
the functions RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit Serial or Temperature module IO111 from the function group
Analog units.
Parameter: Default temperature
• Default setting (_:118) Default temperature = 40 °C

The Default temperature defines the ambient temperature under the following conditions:
• No temperature sensor for measuring the ambient temperature is connected.
• The temperature measurement is faulty and the last measured temperature value is less than the
Default temperature.
The actual K factor which defines the thermal limit of the function Thermal overload protection, 3-phase –
Advanced is influenced by the parameter Default temperature. For the default value 40 °C, the persis-

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
tent maximum permissible current equals to K times the Irated, motor. A lower or higher Default tempera-
ture results in a higher or lower actual K factor. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Minimal temperature
• Default setting (_:117) Minimal temperature = -20 °C

If the measured ambient temperature drops below the set value, the set value is assumed as the ambient
temperature. If the overload protection works with a prespecified outside temperature, and this temperature
drops below the value set in the Minimal temperature parameter, the Minimal temperature is also
used.
6.20.4.3 Settings

49 Th.overl. #
_:1 49 Th.overl. #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 49 Th.overl. #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:101 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
current warning 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:104 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 50 % to 100 % 90 %
thermal warn.
_:105 49 Th.overl. #:Dropout 50 % to 99 % 90 %
threshold operate
_:112 49 Th.overl. #:Emerg. 0 s to 15000 s 300 s
start T overtravel
_:106 49 Th.overl. #:K-factor 0.10 to 4.00 1.10
_:110 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal 10 s to 60000 s 900 s
time constant
_:111 49 Th.overl. #:Cooling 10 s to 60000 s 3600 s
time constant
_:107 49 Th.overl. #:Imax 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 2.500 A
thermal 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 12.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 12.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 12.500 A
_:108 49 Th.overl. #:Imin 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 10.000 A 0.500 A
cooling 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 50.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 10.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 50.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:109 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- 40 K to 200 K 70 K
ture rise at Irated

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:113 49 Th.overl. #:Storage of • no no
thermal replica
• yes
_:114 49 Th.overl. #:Behav. at • current limiting current limiting
I> Imax therm.
• freeze therm. rep.
_:118 49 Th.overl. #:Default -55°C to 55°C 40°C
temperature
_:117 49 Th.overl. #:Minimal -55°C to 40°C -20°C
temperature
_:44 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- Setting options depend on
ture sensor configuration

(Type)
49 Th.overl. #
_:500 49 Th.overl. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 49 Th.overl. #:>Reset thermal replica SPS I
_:51 49 Th.overl. #:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:54 49 Th.overl. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 49 Th.overl. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 49 Th.overl. #:Health ENS O
_:301 49 Th.overl. #:Current warning SPS O
_:302 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal warning SPS O
_:303 49 Th.overl. #:Block close SPS O
_:55 49 Th.overl. #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 49 Th.overl. #:Operate alarm only ACT O
_:57 49 Th.overl. #:Operate ACT O
_:304 49 Th.overl. #:Time until close MV O
_:305 49 Th.overl. #:Time until trip MV O
_:306 49 Th.overl. #:Overload MV O
_:310 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.21 Thermal Overload Protection, User-Defined Characteristic Curve
The Thermal overload protection, user-defined characteristic curve function (ANSI 49) is used to:
• Protect the equipment (motors, generators, and transformers) against thermal overloads
• Realize a manufacturer specific overload characteristic curve for specific equipment, for example, shunt
reactors
• Monitor the thermal state of motors, generators, and transformers
The Thermal overload protection, user-defined characteristic curve function is used in protection function
groups with 3-phase current measurement.
The function comes factory-set with 1 Thermal overload protection, user-defined characteristic curve
stage.
The non-preconfigured function block Filter can optionally be applied to gain the RMS value used by the
Thermal overload protection, user-defined characteristic curve stage.
[dw_TOLP_user_curve_str, 2, en_US]
Filter for RMS Value Gain

You can find more information about the function block Filter in chapter 6.3.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_tolp_user_curve_stage, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-186 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection, User-Defined Characteristic Curve Function
(1) The (_:101) Rated current parameter is from the protected object.
(2) The (_:104) Rated primary current parameter is from the used current transformer.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_stage_control_TOLP, 2, en_US]
RMS-Value Selection
The protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS measurement:

The gained RMS value is automatically used if the function block Filter is configured and the filter has been
enabled.
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one current measuring point I-3ph is allowed to be

For specific equipment (for example, shunt reactors and transformers) or for special applications, the manu-
facturer specifies an overload characteristic curve. This curve cannot be described accurately with a single-
body model so that deviations can occur. The following figure shows an example of a predefined overload
characteristic curve and 2 standard characteristic curves based on the single-body model.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_TOLP_user_curve_characteristic, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-188 User-Defined Characteristic Curve with Replica of Standard Characteristics
The calculation is identical to the realization of the standard Thermal overload protection, 3-phase -
advanced function. You can find more information in the function description Thermal overload protection,
3-phase - advanced starting from chapter 6.20.1 Overview of Functions.
The main deviations are as follows:
• The thermal characteristic is set with a flexible characteristic (ttrip = f(I/Irated,obj)).
– The first point of the characteristic curve is important and is used to calculate the internal k-Factor.
To meet the applications with a minimum internal k-Factor value of 1.001, the minimum I/Irated,obj
value of 1.011 can be set as the first point of the characteristic curve.
– The point at I/Irated,obj = 1.5 is used to calculate the internal thermal time constant. If there is no
point at I/Irated,obj = 1.5, the point which is the closest to I/Irated,obj = 1.5 from I/Irated,obj = 1.1 is used to
calculate the internal thermal time.
– The points are set according to the maximum permissible load current.
• The Curve based on preload parameter describes for which thermal preload the user-defined
characteristic curve is valid. Normally, such a curve is given for protected objects under rated load.
• The Cool-down factor Tau parameter is used for the determination of the cooling time constant.
The set factor is multiplied with the internal calculated time constant.
• The thermal model is based on a constant ambient temperature of 40 °C. It cannot be corrected via the
external measurement.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the phase currents on the basis of a thermal
single-body model according to the thermal differential equation with
[fo_tolp_diffgl, 1, en_US]
[fo_tolp_normie, 1, en_US]
Θ Current overtemperature, in relation to the final temperature at a maximum permis-

sible phase current k Irated, obj
Δ ϑrated obj Overtemperature of the protected object set at rated current
τ th Thermal time constant (temperature rise/cooling) of the protected object. The value is
calculated internally.
K This factor indicates the maximum continuous permissible phase current. The factor
refers to the rated current of the protected object (K = Imax/Irated, obj) and is calculated
internally.
[dw_TOLP_temperature, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-189 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents ( K-factor = 1.1)
The overtemperature is calculated separately for each phase. The current overtemperature can be obtained
from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent. An indication of 100 % means that the
thermal threshold has been reached. The maximum overtemperature of the phases is regarded as the tripping
temperature. This means that the highest of the 3 phase currents is always assumed.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The analysis of the RMS values of the currents over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic
Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies only with limitations to high overcurrent situa-
tions (short circuits, motor startup currents). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal
replica must be influenced in case of overcurrents (exceeding Ithreshold). You can select between 2 strategies for
this:
Warning Thresholds
ture) is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection can be
avoided. If the first setting value of the user-defined characteristic curve is set to 1.1 of the rated current, a
thermal memory value of 83 % is set to the continuously flowing rated current.
Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate, the
trip command is cancelled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see Technical Data).

The behavior of the thermal replica can be controlled upon auxiliary-voltage failure via the setting parameter
Storage of thermal replica. You can save the thermal state for a time of 500 min. Once the supply
Resetting the Thermal Memory

You can reset the thermal memory via the binary input indication >Reset thermal replica. The thermal
memory will then have a 0 value.
Emergency Start
Depending on the operating conditions, tripping can be blocked or closure enabled despite the permissible
thermal limits being exceeded. Upon activation of the binary input signal >Emergency start, tripping is
blocked and closure enabled. This does not affect the state of the thermal memory. After the input >Emer-
gency start disappears, the blocking remains in effect for the set Emerg. start T overtravel.

Blocking will cause a picked up function to be reset. The tripping function can be blocked externally or
internally by the binary input signal >Block stage.
All indications then drop out and the thermal memory is not calculated.
Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load.
The signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and cancelled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(_:601:305) Time until trip Expected time until tripping s s s
(_:601:304) Time until close Time until close release s s s
(_:601:306) Overload phase A Thermal measured values of % % Tripping temperature
(_:601:307) Overload phase B the phases
(_:601:308) Overload phase C
(_:601:309) Overload maximum Thermal measured value of the % % Tripping temperature
overload protection
(_:601:310) Equival. current phs Current measured value which A A Rated operating current
A serves as basis for the overload of the primary values
(_:601:311) Equival. current phs B measured value
(_:601:312) Equival. current phs C
(_:601:313) Equival. current max. Maximum current measured A A Rated operating current
value which serves as basis for of the primary values
the overload measured value
Motors and generators as well as transformers are at risk from long-lasting overloads. You can adapt the given
overload characteristic curve to the user-defined characteristic curve with the Thermal overload protection,
user-defined characteristic curve function. You can find the predefined characteristic curve in the chapter
13.26 Thermal Overload Protection, User-Defined Characteristic Curve.
When setting the parameters, consider the following:
• The settings for the used current transformer (primary values and secondary values) must be set correctly
in the power system.
• The rated values for the protected object must be correct in the used function group.
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold current warning = 1.1 A at Irated = 1 A
value as for the first value of the user-defined characteristic curve.
• Recommended setting value (_:104) Threshold thermal warn.= 90 %

If the first value of the user-defined characteristic curve is 1.1 of the rated current, the default setting can be
left. The thermal memory results for 83 % at continuously flowing rated object current.
If the first value of the user-defined characteristic curve is 1.05 of the rated object current, the thermal
memory for rated current is already 91 % filled. Increase the Threshold thermal warn. to 95 %.
• Recommended setting value (_:105) Dropout threshold operate= 90 %

The Dropout threshold operate parameter is used to drop out pickup and tripping when the value
drops below this threshold. A setting on the order of magnitude of the warning threshold is recommended.
You can select a lower setting value for special applications, desired additional cooling or longer blocking of
closing.
Note that the calculation of the operational measured value Time until close refers to this value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Emerg. start T overtravel
• Default setting (_:112) Emerg. start T overtravel = 300 s

The Emerg. start T overtravel parameter is used to set the time for which blocking of the tripping has
to remain active after an outgoing binary input signal >Emergency start. With an outgoing input signal,
the load on the protected object is removed. The emergency start T-overtravel must be set long enough to
allow the thermal memory to fall below the dropout threshold after cooling. Select a time on the order of
magnitude of the Cooling time constant. In the example, 5 min (300 s) have been assumed.
• Recommended setting value (_:107) Imax thermal = 2.5 A at Irated = 1 A
therm. parameter. If you calculate with relatively long start times for motors (longer than 25 s), the current
limiting must be reduced to 2 I/Irated, obj.
Parameter: Imin cooling
• Recommended setting value (_:108) Imin cooling = 0.5 A at Irated = 1 A
When defining the minimum current Imin cooling, you can use the no-load current for orientation. If no
data is available, set 0.5 I/Irated, obj. If the current falls below this value, the internal thermal time constant τ
automatically switches to the internal cooling time constant with the Cool-down factor Tau parameter.
• Recommended setting value (_:113) Storage of thermal replica = no

If a continuous auxiliary voltage for the bay units is ensured, the default setting can be retained.
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Behav. at I> Imax therm. = current limiting
The Behav. at I> Imax therm. parameter is used to select the process by which the function reacts
to short-circuit currents. To prevent premature tripping of the overload protection at low time constants,
high preloading and high short-circuit currents, the thermal replica can be modified. As overcurrent due to
a starting of the motor also leads to a certain heating of the stator winding, limiting the input current is
recommended for machines.
current limiting The input currents are limited to the value set in the Imax thermal
parameter. If the measured current exceeds the set current value, the
limited current value is supplied to the thermal replica. An advisable current
threshold is approx. 2 to 2.5 Irated, obj.
freeze therm. rep. If input currents exceed the Imax thermal parameter, the thermal replica
will be frozen for the time the parameter is exceeded.
Parameter: Curve based on preload
• Default value (_:101) Curve based on preload = 100 %

The Curve based on preload parameter is used for a certain load case. In most cases, it applies for an
operation under rated conditions. For that, it is assumed that rated current is flowing permanently. This is
referred to as warm condition. In this case, the default setting 100 % is applied.
Thus, the thermal behavior is also correct for different preloads.
For cases without preload or cold condition, set the parameter to 0 %.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Cool-down factor Tau
• Default value (_:108) Cool-down factor Tau = 7.0

If the current becomes lower than the setting value of the Imin cooling parameter, you can set the
Cool-down factor Tau parameter to calculate the internal cooling time constant.
Parameter: Operate char. curve
• Default value Operate char. curve = 1.1 p.u., 600.00 s

With the Operate char. curve parameter, you define the characteristic curve in a tabular form with
ordered normalized current values and associated normalized time values.
When setting the parameter, consider the following:
• Set the current value as per-unit value with the rated current of the protected object as reference.
• Set the time value in seconds.
• Enter the values in continuous order.
EXAMPLE
With the following 12 points, you can get a user-defined characteristic curve as shown in the following figure.
Table 6-14 User-Defined Points
I / Iobj t (s)
1.16 120.00
1.21 96.00
1.25 76.00
1.28 62.00
1.35 48.00
1.42 37.50
1.48 33.50
1.58 27.50
1.84 20.50
2.09 14.00
2.25 9.85
8.00 9.85

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_TOLP_predefined curve, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-190 Example of the User-Defined Characteristic Curve
6.21.5 Settings

General
_:1 User charact.#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 User charact.#:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:102 User charact.#:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:104 User charact.#:Threshold 50 % to 100 % 90 %
thermal warn.
_:105 User charact.#:Dropout 50 % to 99 % 90 %
threshold operate
_:106 User charact.#:Emerg. 0 s to 15000 s 300 s
start T overtravel

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:107 User charact.#:Imin 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 10.000 A 0.500 A
cooling 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 50.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 10.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 50.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:108 User charact.#:Cool- 0.5 to 20.0 7.0
down factor Tau
_:109 User charact.#:Storage • no no
of thermal replica
• yes
_:110 User charact.#:Imax 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 12.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 12.500 A
_:111 User charact.#:Behav. at • current limiting current limiting
I> Imax therm.
_:112 User charact.#:Operate Setting options depend on 1.1 p.u., 600 s
char. curve configuration
_:101 User charact.#:Curve 0 % to 100 % 100 %
based on preload

(Type)
User charact.#
_:81 User charact.#:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 User charact.#:>Reset thermal replica SPS I
_:501 User charact.#:>Emergency start SPS I
_:51 User charact.#:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:54 User charact.#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 User charact.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 User charact.#:Health ENS O
_:300 User charact.#:Current warning SPS O
_:301 User charact.#:Thermal warning SPS O
_:302 User charact.#:Block close SPS O
_:55 User charact.#:Pickup ACD O
_:303 User charact.#:Operate alarm only ACT O
_:57 User charact.#:Operate ACT O
_:304 User charact.#:Time until close MV O
_:305 User charact.#:Time until trip MV O
_:306 User charact.#:Overload phase A MV O
_:307 User charact.#:Overload phase B MV O
_:308 User charact.#:Overload phase C MV O
_:309 User charact.#:Overload maximum MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:310 User charact.#:Equival. current phs A MV O
_:311 User charact.#:Equival. current phs B MV O
_:312 User charact.#:Equival. current phs C MV O
_:313 User charact.#:Equival. current max. MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.22 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
The Thermal overload protection 1-phase function (ANSI 49) is used to:
• Protect the equipment (reactors or resistors in the neutral point of a transformer) from thermal overload
The Thermal overload protection 1-phase function is used in 1-phase protection function groups with
The Thermal overload protection, 1-phase function is steplessly preconfigured.
[dw_tolp1p, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_tolp_1p, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-192 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection Function
Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the current flowing in the protected object (for
example, reactor or resistance in the transformer neutral point) on the basis of a thermal single-body model
according to the thermal differential equation with

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[fo_diffgl, 2, en_US]
[fo_normie, 2, en_US]
Θ Current overtemperature, in relation to the final temperature at a maximum permissible

current k Irated,obj
ΘV Standardized ambient temperature, where ϑAmb describes the coupled ambient tempera-
ture. The coupled ambient temperature ϑAmb can be the measured ambient temperature or
the ambient temperature preset using the Default temperature parameter.
Δ ϑrated,obj Overtemperature of the protected object set at rated current
τth Thermal time constant (temperature rise/cooling) of the protected object
k This factor indicates the maximum continuous permissible phase current. The factor refers
to the rated current of the protected object (k = Imax/Irated,obj)
Irated,obj Rated current of the protected object
At the same time, Irated,obj is the rated current of the protected object.
In a steady state, the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e-function whose asymptote repre-
sents the final overtemperature Θend. The time constant τth determines the rise. After reaching an initial
adjustable overtemperature threshold Θwarn (Threshold thermal warn.), a warning indication is given.
If the overtemperature limit ΘOff (tripping overtemperature) is exceeded, an operate indication is immediately
issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply. This threshold is specified at 100 % and
corresponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current (Imax).
Figure 6-193 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_temp_ve, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-193 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents (K-factor = 1.1)
The current overtemperature can be obtained from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent.
An indication of 100 % means that the thermal tripping threshold has been reached.
The analysis of the RMS value of the current over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic
Operate Curve
If the ambient temperature is not measured and set to 40°C, you get the following operate curve:
[fo_auslos, 1, en_US]
t Operate time
τth Time constant
I Measured load current
Ipreload Preload current
k Setting factor according to VDE 0435 part 3011 or IEC 60255-149 (K factor)
Irated,obj Rated current of the protected object
Ambient Temperature
This function can take the ambient temperature into consideration The reference temperature of the thermal
model is 40 °C. If the ambient temperature drops below the reference temperature, the thermal limit
increases. The equipment can be stressed more. If the ambient temperature is higher, the conditions change.
The Default temperature parameter can be used to fix or measure the ambient temperature. The
Minimal temperature parameter limits the coupled ambient temperature. If the measured ambient
temperature is lower than the minimum temperature, the minimum temperature is processed in the thermal
model.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The ambient temperature refers to the overtemperature of the protected object, which sets itself at the rated
current (parameter Temperature rise at Irated).
The measured ambient temperature is measured by an external RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature
Detector) or by an IO111 module and provided by the functions RTD unit Ether., RTD unit serial, or Tempera-
ture module IO111 of the function group Analog unit. When using the Temperature sensor parameter,
the respective temperature sensor can be selected.
If the temperature measurement is disrupted, for example, due to an open circuit between the device and the
RTD unit, the health state of the Thermal overload protection, 1-phase function changes to Warning. In this
case, the process continues with either the temperature measured last or the value set under the Default
temperature parameter, whichever value is the highest.
Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations
(short circuits). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal replica must be influenced
for overcurrents (exceeding llimit). You can select between 2 strategies for this:
Warning Thresholds
ture) is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection
avoided. At a normal K-factor of 1.1, a thermal memory value of 83 % sets in at continuously flowing rated
current.
Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate, the
trip command is cancelled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see technical data).

The behavior of the thermal replica can be controlled upon auxiliary-voltage failure via the Storage of
thermal replica parameter. You can save the thermal state for a down time of 500 min. If the supply

You can reset the thermal memory via the binary input indication >Reset thermal replica. The thermal
memory will then have a 0 value. A reparameterization will also lead to resetting the thermal memory.

Blocking will cause a picked up function to be reset. The function can be blocked externally or internally by the
binary input signal >Block stage.
All indications then drop out and the thermal memory is set to the value 0.
Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load. The
signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and cancelled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(_:310) Equival. Besides the thermal measured values in percent, the equivalent current is
current also issued as a thermal current-measured value (A or kA). The current
equivalent is the primary current, which corresponds to the thermal meas-
ured value in percent, assuming steady-state conditions.
(_:304) Time until The Time until close is the expected time until it is possible for the
close protected object for reclosure. The calculation of this value is based on the
assumption of constant currents. The thermal replica has then fallen below
the setting value of the dropout threshold.
(_:305) Time until trip The Time until trip is the expected time until tripping (100 % value
exceeded) occurs. The calculation of this value is based on the assumption
of constant currents.
(_:306) Overload The value Overload indicates the current temperature of the protected
object in percent. Tripping occurs if 100 % is exceeded.
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold current warning = 1.1 A for lrated = 1 A
value as for K-factor.
• Recommended setting value (_:104) Threshold thermal warn. = 90 %

The default setting can be left at a K-factor of 1.1, because the thermal memory sets itself to 83 % at
continuously flowing rated current. The calculation uses the rule of three: 100 % corresponds to (K-factor)2
and x % corresponds to 12.
[fo_warnsc, 2, en_US]
At a K-factor of 1.05, the thermal memory for rated current is 91 % filled. Increase the Threshold
thermal warn. to 95 %.
• Recommended setting value (_:105) Dropout threshold operate = 90 %

The Dropout threshold operate parameter is used to cancel pickup and tripping when the value drops
below this threshold. A setting on the order of magnitude of the warning threshold is recommended. You can
select a lower setting value for special applications, desired additional cooling, or longer blocking of switching
on.
The calculation of the operational measured value Time until close refers to this value.
Parameter: K-factor
• Recommended setting value (_:106) K-factor = 1.1

The K-factor parameter is used to describe the limiting value for the maximum permissible continuous load.
The rated current Irated, obj of the protected object (for example, resistance) is the basic current for overload
sensing.
You can determine K-factor on the basis of the thermally permissible continuous current Imax, perm.:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[fo_tolp_kf, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or
from the specifications of the manufacturer!
Siemens recommends using the default value as it is a typical value for many applications.
Parameter: Thermal time constant
• Default value (_:110) Thermal time constant = 900 s (15 min)

The Thermal time constant parameter is used to define the operate curve of the stage. If no time
constant is given, you can derive it from other values.
EXAMPLE
Protection of a current-limiting resistance

Rated current of the resistance: Irated = 100 A
Values for the overload capability:
• 1.1 Irated permanent (k-Factor = 1.1; k = 1.1)
• 1.5 Irated for 20 s for charge by cold
The following time constant results from these assumed values:
[fo_time_constance, 1, en_US]
For Thermal time constant, set 26 s.

The following time-dependent characteristic results from the data. In case of a current increase to 1.5 I rated,
the tripping occurs in 20 s.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_time-dependent, 1, en_US]
• Recommended setting value (_:107) Imax thermal= 2.5 A for lrated = 1 A
therm. parameter. The selected current threshold of 2.5 Irated, obj is a practicable value.
Parameter: Temperature rise at Irated
• Default setting (_:109) Temperature rise at Irated = 70 K
NOTE
i For an application as a 1-phase overload protection, the ambient temperature measured via the tempera-
ture sensor is not taken into account. Therefore, the setting has no influence. You can keep the default
setting. If you take into account the temperature, note the following descriptions.
Set the overtemperature as the value that is the result if the equipment is continuously operated with the
rated current and at an ambient temperature of 40 °C. Here, the rated current refers to the protected object.
You can find the temperature value in the Technical data of the equipment or you can measure the value. If
you use a temperature sensor when measuring at the rated current, deduct the actual ambient temperature or
the coolant temperature from the measured value.
When selecting the setting value, you can also use the specified temperature class for orientation. Usually, you
will find the overtemperature expressed in Kelvin (K), which can be accepted as is. If the absolute temperature
is given, the ambient temperature must be deducted. As a rule, this is 40 °C.
The overtemperature (ϑmax) at maximum permissible current and the Temperature rise at Irated
(ϑrated,obj.) can be converted by using the following formula:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[fo_ueb_for_Irated, 3, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
Temperature class B for continuous operation: permissible overtemperature = 80 K
From this, a temperature for Irated of 120 °C (80 K + 40 °C) can be derived when using a measuring element for
the measurement.
Temperature class F as thermal limiting value: permissible overtemperature = 105 K.
From this, a maximum temperature of 145 °C (105 K + 40 °C) derives.
From these values, the magnitude of the K factor can also be derived.
[fo_bsp_kfaktor, 3, en_US]
If selecting a setting value of 1.1 for the K-factor, your selection can be considered as conservative.
• Recommended setting value (_:113) Storage of thermal replica = no

If a continuous auxiliary voltage of the bay units is ensured, the default setting can be retained.
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Behav. at I> Imax therm. = current limiting
The Behav. at I> Imax therm. parameter is used to select the process by which the function reacts to
short-circuit currents. To prevent premature tripping of the overload protection at low time constants, high
preloading and high short-circuit currents, the thermal replica can be modified.
The default setting has been selected compatible with SIPROTEC 4 devices. If you wish to take further
temperature rise into consideration, the current limiting procedure is recommended.
current limiting The input current is limited to the value set in the Imax thermal parameter.
If the measured current exceeds the set current value, the limited current value
is supplied to the thermal replica. An advisable current threshold is approx. 2 to
2.5 Irated, obj.
freeze therm. rep. If the input current exceeds the Imax thermal parameter, the thermal replica
will be frozen for the time the parameter is exceeded. This parameter value is
provided to enable compatibility with older products!
Parameter: Temperature sensor
• Default setting (_:44) Temperature sensor = none

Use the Temperature sensor parameter to determine which temperature sensor to use to detect the
ambient temperature.
A temperature sensor is used to measure the ambient temperature of the protected object and to feed it to
the device via an RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) or via an IO111 module. The function
Thermal overload protection receives the measured temperature value via the functions RTD unit Ether.,
RTD unit Serial, or Temperature module IO111 from the function group Analog units.
Parameter: Default temperature
• Recommended setting value (_:118) Default temperature = 40 °C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Under the following conditions, the Default temperature will be set as ambient temperature:
• A temperature sensor for measuring the ambient temperature is not connected.
• The temperature measurement is interrupted and the measured temperature value is less than the
Default temperature.
Parameter: Minimal temperature
• Default setting (_:117) Minimal temperature = -20 °C

If the measured ambient temperature drops below the preset value, the set value will be assumed as the
ambient temperature. If the overload protection works with a prespecified outside temperature, and this
temperature drops below the value set in the Minimal temperature parameter, the Minimal tempera-
ture can also be used.
6.22.5 Settings

49 Th.overl. #
_:1 49 Th.overl. #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 49 Th.overl. #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:101 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:104 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 50 % to 100 % 90 %
thermal warn.
_:105 49 Th.overl. #:Dropout 50 % to 99 % 90 %
threshold operate
_:106 49 Th.overl. #:K-factor 0.10 to 4.00 1.10
_:110 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal 10 s to 60000 s 900 s
time constant
_:107 49 Th.overl. #:Imax 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 2.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 12.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 12.500 A
_:109 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- 40 K to 200 K 70 K
ture rise at Irated
_:113 49 Th.overl. #:Storage of • no no
thermal replica
• yes
_:114 49 Th.overl. #:Behav. at • current limiting current limiting
I> Imax therm.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:118 49 Th.overl. #:Default -55°C to 55°C 40°C
temperature
_:117 49 Th.overl. #:Minimal -55°C to 40°C -20°C
temperature
_:44 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- Setting options depend on
ture sensor configuration

(Type)
49 Th.overl. #
_:500 49 Th.overl. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 49 Th.overl. #:>Reset thermal replica SPS I
_:51 49 Th.overl. #:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:54 49 Th.overl. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 49 Th.overl. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 49 Th.overl. #:Health ENS O
_:301 49 Th.overl. #:Current warning SPS O
_:302 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal warning SPS O
_:303 49 Th.overl. #:Block close SPS O
_:55 49 Th.overl. #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 49 Th.overl. #:Operate alarm only ACT O
_:57 49 Th.overl. #:Operate ACT O
_:304 49 Th.overl. #:Time until close MV O
_:305 49 Th.overl. #:Time until trip MV O
_:306 49 Th.overl. #:Overload MV O
_:310 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.23 Unbalanced-Load Protection
The Unbalanced-load protection function detects unbalanced loads or line interruptions of electrical
machines (generators and motors). Unbalanced loads create a counter-rotating magnetic field at double
frequency in the rotor. The skin effect leads to local overheating on the surface of the rotor bars in the
transition between the slot wedges and the winding bundles. Another effect of unbalanced loads is the
overheating of the damper winding.
The Unbalanced-load protection function is used in the protection function group. The Unbalanced-load
protection function is preconfigured with 1 stage. A maximum of 2 stages can operate simultaneously in the
function.
[dw_unbla, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_unbala-load, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-195 Logic Diagram of the Unbalanced-Load Protection Function
The stage uses the negative-sequence current I2 as a measurand. The negative-sequence current is calculated
from the measured 3-phase currents according to the defining equation of symmetrical components.
Warning Stage
If the negative-sequence current I2 continuously exceeds the parameter Max. continuously perm. I2,
the Warning indication is given after expiry of a set time Warning delay.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Thermal Characteristic Stage

The machine manufacturers indicate the permissible unbalanced load using the following formula:
[fo_rbanl, 1, en_US]
With:
tI2Perm Permissible time of the negative-sequence current
K Unbalanced-load factor of the machine (parameter Unbalanced load factor K)
I2/Irated,machine Actual unbalanced-load current as a per unit value(negative-sequence current/rated
current of the machine)
[dw_unbalo, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-196 Operate Curve of the Unbalanced-Load Protection
The parameter Unbalanced load factor K depends on the machine. It also represents the time in
seconds during which the machine can be loaded with a 100 % unbalanced load. This factor is typical in
a range from 5 s to 40 s. The heating of the protected object starts to calculate as soon as the negative-
sequence current I2 exceeds the parameter Max. continuously perm. I2. The operate time is calculated
from the flowing negative-sequence current I2 with an integrating method of measurement depending on the
thermal characteristic. As soon as the integrate result reaches the parameter Unbalanced load factor K,
the thermal characteristic stage operates.
Limitation of Operate Curve

To avoid an overfunction of the thermal characteristic stage in the situation of unbalanced short circuits
(for example, 2-phase short circuit), the input current I2 is restricted to an upper limit. The limiting value is
10 times of Max. continuously perm. I2. If I2 exceeds the limit, the operate time of the function is
constant.
In addition, the thermal memory is limited to 200 % of Unbalanced load factor K. The limitation avoids
a too long cooling after a delayed short-circuit tripping (for example, of external power-system faults).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Cooling Time Thermal Replica

The thermal replica starts to cool down as soon as the negative-sequence current I2 is lower than Max.
continuously perm. I2. The thermal replica decreases according to the parameter Cooling time
therm.replica. The parameter Cooling time therm.replica is the time required by the thermal
replica to cool down from 100 % to 0 %. If the parameter Cooling time therm.replica is set to 0, the
thermal replica is reset immediately.
The parameter Cooling time therm.replica depends on the construction type of the machine, espe-
cially of the damper winding. Preloading is considered when unbalanced loading occurs again during the
cooling time. The protection device thus operates in a shorter time.

The following formula is used to calculate the functional measured value ΘI2/Θop:
[fo_runbl2, 1, en_US]
With
ΘI2/Θop Functional measured value indicating the thermal replica of the unbalanced
load
Integrating method of measurement of the thermal replica of the negative-
sequence system
K Unbalanced-load factor of the machine (parameter Unbalanced load

factor K)
I2/Irated,machine Unbalanced-load as a per unit value (negative-sequence current/rated current
of the machine)
If the functional measured value reaches 100 %, the operate of the function is initiated.
The function is used in the applications of machines. You can get the necessary settings from the technical
data of the synchronous generators and motors. The setting example is applied for a generator application.
Parameter: Max. continuously perm. I2, Warning delay
• Default setting (_:11011:101) Max. continuously perm. I2 = 10.0 %
• Default setting (_:11011:104) Warning delay = 15 s

If the negative-sequence current I2 exceeds Max. continuously perm. I2 , the stage picks up and a
warning indication is given after the set time delay Warning delay .
The parameter Max. continuously perm. I2 is given in percentage of the rated current of the
protected object.
The setting value of the parameter Max. continuously perm. I2 depends on following parts:
• Design of the machine (salient pole or non-salient pole rotor synchronous machine)
• Cooling system (directly or indirectly cooled)
• Size of the machine

Depending on the standards IEEE C50.12 and IEC 60034-1, the parameter is given in the range between
5 % and 12 %. To set the parameter Max. continuously perm. I2 , technical data of the machine

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
is required. The technical data of the machine is provided in the Technical Data Sheet of the machine
manufacturer.
EXAMPLE
The following example shows the setting of the parameter Max. continuously perm. I2 . The value 10
% is selected in the example.
To avoid issuing the Warning indication too fast, Siemens recommends a longer delay. Setting the param-
eter Warning delay in the range of 10 s to 20 s is practicable. 15 s is selected in the example.
[dw_unbloc, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-197 Example of an Unbalanced-Load Characteristic Specified by the Machine Manufacturer
Parameter: Unbalanced load factor K
• Default setting (_:11011:102) Unbalanced load factor K = 15 s

Unbalanced load factor K can be derived from the unbalanced-load characteristic according to
Figure 6-197. You can read the time corresponding to Unbalanced load factor K at the point I2 /
Irated,machine= 1. In the example, this is the p.u. value 10° which corresponds to a time of 15 s. As the example
shows, the time is often written directly on the characteristic curve.
Parameter: Cooling time therm.replica
• Default setting (_:11011:103) Cooling time therm.replica = 1500 s

The parameter Cooling time therm.replica establishes the time required by the protected object
to cool down the thermal replica to the initial value. If the machine manufacturer does not provide this
information, the setting value of Cooling time therm.replica can be calculated from the setting
values of Unbalanced load factor K and Max. continuously perm. I2 by the formula in the
following example.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
EXAMPLE
[fo_rbala2_02, 1, en_US]
Max. continuously perm. I2 = 10.0 % (corresponds to 0.1)

Unbalanced load factor K = 15 s
Cooling time therm. replica = 1500 s
6.23.5 Settings

Therm. Stage 1
_:11011:1 Therm. Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11011:2 Therm. Stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:11011:101 Therm. Stage 1:Max. 3.0 % to 30.0 % 10.0 %
continuously perm. I2
_:11011:102 Therm. Stage 1:Unbalanced 1.0 s to 100.0 s 15.0 s
load factor K
_:11011:103 Therm. Stage 1:Cooling 0 s to 50000 s 1500 s
time therm.replica
_:11011:104 Therm. Stage 1:Warning 0.0 s to 60.0 s;∞ 15.0 s
delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Therm. Stage 1
_:11011:81 Therm. Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:11011:501 Therm. Stage 1:>Reset thermal replica SPS I
_:11011:51 Therm. Stage 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:11011:53 Therm. Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:11011:54 Therm. Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:11011:52 Therm. Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:11011:302 Therm. Stage 1:Thermal replica reset SPS O
_:11011:301 Therm. Stage 1:Warning ACD O
_:11011:55 Therm. Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:11011:56 Therm. Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:11011:57 Therm. Stage 1:Operate ACT O
_:11011:303 Therm. Stage 1:ΘI2/Θop MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.24 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Monitor the permissible voltage range
• Protect equipment (for example, plant components, machines, etc.) against damages caused by over-
voltage
• Decouple systems (for example, wind power supply)

Abnormally high voltages in power systems are caused by voltage controller failure at the transformer or on
long transmission lines under low-load conditions.
When using common-mode reactors in the protected power system, the device must shut down the line
quickly if the reactors fail (for example, due to fault clearance). The insulation is endangered by the over-
voltage condition.
Overvoltages at capacitor banks can be caused by resonances with line or transformer inductances.
In power plants increased voltage levels can be due to one of these factors:
• Incorrect operation when controlling the excitation system manually
• Failure of the automatic voltage controller
• After full load shedding of a generator
• Generators which are disconnected from the network or in island mode
The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function is used in protection function groups with
The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function comes factory-set with 2 Definite-time over-
voltage protection stages. In this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
• 3 stages Definite-time overvoltage protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time overvoltage protection

Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure.
[dw_3-phase_ovp, 5, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_3phas_i, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-199 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value.
• Measurement fundamental comp.:

• Measurement RMS value:

Pickup Stabilization
To enable the pickup stabilization, you set the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than
zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps exceeding the Threshold for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-
tion counter value) of successive measuring cycles, the stage picks up. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle
time is 10 ms.
immediately after the input voltage exceeds the Threshold.
Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the overvoltage
condition (1 out of 3).
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the tripping stage analyzes the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the

With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental compo-
nent (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends this method of measurement as the default setting.
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
value of the stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
• Default setting (_:181:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage monitors the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.

phase-to-phase If you want to monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the
default setting. In this case, the function will not pick up on ground faults.
Siemens recommends the measured value phase-to-phase as the
default setting.
phase-to-ground Select the phase-to-ground setting if you want to detect voltage unbal-
ances and overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as phase-to-
ground quantity. The default setting assumes that the voltage range is monitored on long-distance transmis-
sion lines under low-load conditions.
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Stabilization counter = 0

You can configure the Stabilization counter parameter in the function block General.
For special applications, it could be desirable that a short exceeding of the input voltage above the pickup
value does not lead to the pickup of the stage, which starts fault logging and recording. This is achieved by
setting the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than zero.
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps exceeding the
Threshold for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.
• Default setting (_:181:6) Operate delay = 3 s

The Operate delay must be set for the specific application.

The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement
precision, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.
• Recommended setting value (_:181:101) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3

With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring
elements detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the
overvoltage condition (1 out of 3).
1 out of 3 Select the setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting. This reflects how
the function behaved in previous generations (SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC 3).
3 out of 3 Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power
system (in the case of wind farms, for example).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault logging
can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.
EXAMPLE
Example for 2-stage overvoltage protection
The example describes the possible settings for a 2-stage overvoltage protection function. We will look at the
settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay.
• 1. Stage:
To detect stationary overvoltages, set the threshold value of the first overvoltage-protection element at
least 10 % above the max. stationary phase-to-phase voltage anticipated during normal operation. When
setting the parameter Measured value to phase-to-phase voltage and a secondary rated voltage of
100 V, the secondary setting value of the first overvoltage-protection element is calculated as follows:
Threshold value: 10 % above Vrated
Vthreshold, sec = 1.1 Vrated, sec = 1.1 × 100 V = 110 V

This requires that the primary rated voltages of protected object and voltage transformer are identical. If they
are different, you have to adjust the pickup value.
For the Operate delay set a value of 3 s.
• 2. Stage:
The second overvoltage-protection stage is intended for high overvoltages with short duration. A high
pickup value is selected here, for example, 1.5 times the rated voltage. A time delay setting of 0.1 s to
0.2 s is sufficient then.
Stage Setting Values

Threshold value Time delay
1 1.1 Vrated 3s
2 1.5 Vrated 0.1 s to 0.2 s
6.24.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Stabilization 0 to 10 0
counter
Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:181:9 Definite-T 1:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:181:101 Definite-T 1:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:181:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

ratio
delay
Definite-T 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
• 3 out of 3
ratio
delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:181:300 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:181:301 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:181:302 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop CA SPS O
Definite-T 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_3ph_inv, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-200 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value .
• Measurement fundamental comp. :

• Measurement RMS value :

zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps exceeding the pickup value for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-
time is 10 ms.
immediately after the input voltage exceeds the pickup value.
Pickup Mode
elements detect the overvoltage condition ( 3 out of 3 ) or if only 1 measuring element detects the
overvoltage condition ( 1 out of 3 ).
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages VAB,
VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
picked up.
Pickup and Operate Curve

When the input voltage exceeds the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor , the stage picks
up and the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. Operate delay starts. The operate delay is the sum of
inverse-time delay and additional time delay.
Where
Top Operate delay
Tinv Inverse-time delay
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay )
After pickup, the time value Tinv is calculated for every input voltage that exceeds the threshold. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/Tinv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The additional time delay Tadd starts. The stage operates after the additional time delay expires.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The inverse-time characteristic is shown in the following figure.
[dw_ovp_inv, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-201 Operate Curve of Inverse-Time Characteristic
The inverse-time delay is calculated with the following formula:
Where
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial )
V Measured voltage
Vthresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold )
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k )
α Curve constant α (parameter Charact. constant α )
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c )
When V/Vthresh is equal to or greater than 20, the inverse-time delay does not decrease any further.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage falls below the dropout threshold (0.95 × pickup factor × threshold value), the pickup
signal is going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time .
Instantaneous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the
desired delay time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the pickup value is exceeded again
within this period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Blocking the Stage

binary input signal >Block stage .

With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental
component (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
voltage peaks.
value of the tripping stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
• Default setting (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the tripping stage monitors the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.

phase-to-phase If you want to monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the
default setting. In this case, the function will not pick up on ground faults.
default setting.
ances and overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.
Parameter: Threshold, Pickup factor
• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 110.000 V
• Default setting (_:101) Pickup factor = 1.10

The stage picks up when the measured voltage value exceeds the pickup value Threshold × Pickup
factor.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as phase-to-
ground quantity.
With the Pickup factor parameter, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long-time operate delay
after pickup when the measured value is slightly over the threshold, Siemens recommends using the default
setting.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) and Pickup factor for the specific application.

For special applications, it could be desirable that a short exceeding of the input voltage above the pickup
value does not lead to the pickup of the stage, which starts fault logging and recording. This is achieved by
setting the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than zero.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps exceeding the
pickup value for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.

elements detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the
overvoltage condition (1 out of 3).
range.
Parameter: Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, Charact. constant c
• Default setting (_:102) Charact. constant k = 1.00
• Default setting (_:103) Charact. constant α = 1.000
• Default setting (_:104) Charact. constant c = 0.000

With the parameters Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, and Charact. constant c,
you define the required inverse-time characteristic curve.

As usually, there is no time grading for voltage protection and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve, Siemens recommends leaving the Time dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).
• Default setting (_:106) Additional time delay = 0.00 s

time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, only the inverse-time delay is operative.
• Default setting (_:107) Reset time = 0.00 s

With the Reset time parameter, you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage falls
below the dropout threshold. Set the parameter Reset time to 0 s when instantaneous reset is desired.
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession, Siemens recom-
mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value (> 0 s) to ensure the operation. Otherwise Siemens
recommends keeping the default value to ensure a fast reset of the function.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.24.4.3 Settings

Inverse-T #
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:9 Inverse-T #:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value
• phase-to-phase
_:8 Inverse-T #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:108 Inverse-T #:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
_:101 Inverse-T #:Pickup factor 1.00 to 1.20 1.10
_:102 Inverse-T #:Charact. 0.00 to 300.00 1.00
constant k
constant α
constant c
_:106 Inverse-T #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
_:107 Inverse-T #:Reset time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:300 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:301 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:302 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop CA SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.25 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
6.25 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual

Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage (ANSI 59N):
• Detects ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-grounded systems
• Determines the phase affected by the ground fault
• Works with electrical machines to detect ground faults in the stator winding
The function Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage is used in protection
function groups with voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage comes factory-set with
1 stage Definite-time overvoltage protection. In this function, the following stages can operate simultane-
ously:
• 3 stages Definite-time overvoltage protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time overvoltage protection

[dw_u0_ovps, 3, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_ovp_u_03, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-203 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/
Residual Voltage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

The device measures the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage is converted
to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand, the
zero‑sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC using the
defining equation.
With the parameter Method of measurement, you select the relevant method of measurement, depending
on the application:
• fundamental comp. (standard filter):

• RMS value (true RMS):

• fund. comp. long filter (fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window):
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (refer to
the technical data in 13.36 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the Threshold with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The parameter Pickup delay
allows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the parameter Dropout ratio, you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the Threshold.

You can use the parameter Detection of faulty phase to enable or disable the determination of the
phase affected by the ground fault. Determining is released when the stage picks up. If 2 phases exceed the
threshold value V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. and 1 phase falls below the threshold value V< faulty
ph-to-gnd volt., the last phase is considered to be affected by the ground fault and is signaled as such.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage is reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• From inside on pickup of the function Measuring-voltage failure detection (refer to 9.3.2.1 Overview
of Functions). The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be set so that the measuring-
voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The parameter
Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be set so that the measuring-voltage failure detection blocks
the stage or does not block it.
• Default setting (_:331:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

With the parameter Method of measurement, you define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

peaks.
fund. comp. long filter To implement a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient
faults, select this method of measurement. With this method, the length of
the filter is longer than that of the standard filter.
Note: In this case, the pickup time of the stage increases slightly (refer
to the technical data in 13.36 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence
Voltage/Residual Voltage).
• Recommended setting value (_:331:107) Pickup delay = 0.00 ms

The Pickup delay parameter allows you to delay the analysis of the measurand (to generate the pickup)
depending on the occurrence of the residual voltage. A pickup delay can be necessary if high transients are
anticipated after fault inception due to high line and ground capacitances.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Pickup delay = 0.00 ms.
• Default setting (_:331:3) Threshold = 30.000 V 42

The threshold value of the function is set as the zero-sequence voltage V0. The device calculates the zero-
sequence voltage V0 either from the residual voltage measured via the broken-delta winding or from the
3 phase-to-ground voltages.
The setting value depends on the system grounding:
• Since virtually the full residual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems, the setting value is uncritical there. It should range between 20 V and 40 V. A higher
sensitivity (= lower threshold value) can be necessary for high fault resistances.
• You should select a more sensitive (smaller) value in a grounded system. This value must be higher than
the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
EXAMPLE
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
• At full residual voltage, the zero-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3 = 57.7 V

Setting value: 0.5 ⋅ 57.7 V = 28.9 V ≈ 30 V

The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. The dropout ratio can be reduced
for example, to 0.98 to achieve a high measurement precision.
42 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

The Operate delay allows you to prevent transient residual voltages from initiating a trip. The setting
depends on the specific application.

With the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure, you control the behavior of the stage when a

switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is
connected to the voltage-transformer circuit breaker (refer to 9.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.
• Default setting (_:331:109) Detection of faulty phase = no

With the parameter Detection of faulty phase, you control how the stage responds to determine
which phase is affected by the ground fault.
ground faults, for example, for applications in grounded systems.
grounded systems.
• Default setting (_:331:104) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40.000 V 43

With the parameter V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt., you set the threshold value for determining which
phase is affected by the ground fault. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The setting value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting of 40.000 V.
• Default setting (_:331:101) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 75.000 V 43

With the parameter V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt., you set the threshold value for the 2 healthy phases.
The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The setting value must be greater than the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation,
but smaller than the minimum phase-to-phase voltage occurring during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, set the
value, for example, to 75.000 V. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 75.000 V.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, you can set the parameter Operate & flt.rec.
blocked to disable the generation of the operate indication and fault logging.
6.25.3.3 Settings

Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:331:109 Definite-T 1:Detection of • no no
faulty phase
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
ratio
_:331:107 Definite-T 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 320.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:331:101 Definite-T 1:V> healthy 0.300 V to 200.000 V 75.000 V
ph-to-gnd volt.
_:331:104 Definite-T 1:V< faulty ph- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 40.000 V
to-gnd volt.

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:331:300 Definite-T 1:Faulty phase ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_ovp_V0_3pole_inverse, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-204 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/
Residual Voltage

The device measures the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage is converted
to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand, the

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
zero‑sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC using the
defining equation.
With the parameter Method of measurement, you select the relevant method of measurement, depending
on the application:
• fundamental comp. (standard filter):

• RMS value (true RMS):

• fund. comp. long filter (fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window):
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (refer to
the technical data in 13.36 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage).

When the input voltage exceeds the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor, the stage picks up
and the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. The operate delay starts. The operate delay is the sum
of the inverse-time delay and the additional time delay.
Where
Top Operate delay
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay)
After pickup, the inverse-time delay Tinv is calculated for every input voltage that exceeds the threshold.
An integrator accumulates the value 1/Tinv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the
inverse-time delay expires. The additional time delay Tadd starts. The stage operates after the additional time
delay expires.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The inverse-time characteristic curve is shown in the following figure.
[dw_ovp_inv, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-205 Operate Curve of Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Where
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial)
V Zero-sequence voltage
Vthresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k)
α Curve constant α (parameter Charact. constant α)
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c)
When V/Vthresh is equal to or greater than 20, the inverse-time delay does not decrease any further.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage falls below the dropout threshold (0.95 ⋅ pickup factor ⋅ threshold value), the dropout is
initiated. You can define the dropout behavior via the parameter Reset time. An instantaneous reset takes
place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired time delay.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the pickup value is exceeded again
within this period, the stage operates when the rest of the operate delay expires.

You can use the parameter Detection of faulty phase to enable or disable the determination of the
phase affected by the ground fault. Determining is released when the stage picks up. If 2 phases exceed the

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
threshold value V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. and 1 phase falls below the threshold value V< faulty
ph-to-gnd volt., the last phase is considered to be affected by the ground fault and is signaled as such.
Blocking the Stage

stage:
• From inside on pickup of the function Measuring-voltage failure detection (refer to 9.3.2.1 Overview
of Functions). The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be set so that the measuring-
voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The parameter
Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be set so that the measuring-voltage failure detection blocks
the stage or does not block it.
• Default setting (_:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

With the parameter Method of measurement, you define whether the function works with the funda-
peaks.
fund. comp. long filter To implement a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient
faults, select this method of measurement. With this method, the length of
the filter is longer than that of the standard filter.
Note: In this case, the pickup time of the stage increases slightly (refer
to the technical data in 13.36 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence
Voltage/Residual Voltage).

The stage picks up when the measured voltage value exceeds the pickup value Threshold ⋅ Pickup
factor.
With the parameter Pickup factor, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long-time operate delay
after pickup when the measured value is slightly over the threshold, Siemens recommends using the default
setting.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the parameters Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, and Charact. constant c,
you define the required inverse-time characteristic curve.

With the parameter Time dial, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
curve, Siemens recommends leaving the parameter Time dial at 1.00 (default setting).

time delay.
If you keep the default setting of 0.00 s, only the inverse-time delay is operative.

With the parameter Reset time, you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage falls
below the dropout threshold. Set the parameter Reset time to 0.00 s when an instantaneous reset is
desired.
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in fast succession, Siemens recommends
setting the Reset time to an appropriate value (> 0.00 s) to ensure the operation. Otherwise, Siemens

With the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure, you control the behavior of the stage when a

switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is
connected to the voltage-transformer circuit breaker (refer to 9.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

• Default setting (_:109) Detection of faulty phase = no

With the parameter Detection of faulty phase, you control how the stage responds to determine
which phase is affected by the ground fault.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

ground faults, for example, for applications in grounded systems.
grounded systems.
• Default setting (_:6) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40.000 V 44

With the parameter V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt., you set the threshold value for determining which
phase is affected by the ground fault. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The setting value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting of 40.000 V.
• Default setting (_:5) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 75.000 V 44

With the parameter V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt., you set the threshold value for the 2 healthy phases.
The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The setting value must be greater than the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation,
but smaller than the minimum phase-to-phase voltage occurring during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, set the
value, for example, to 75.000 V. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 75.000 V.

6.25.4.3 Settings

Inverse-T #
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:10 Inverse-T #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:109 Inverse-T #:Detection of • no no
faulty phase
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

constant k
constant α
constant c
time delay
_:5 Inverse-T #:V> healthy 0.300 V to 200.000 V 75.000 V
ph-to-gnd volt.
_:6 Inverse-T #:V< faulty ph- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 40.000 V
to-gnd volt.

(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:51 Inverse-T #:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:300 Inverse-T #:Faulty phase ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.26 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Detect symmetric stationary overvoltages
• Supervise the voltage range if the positive-sequence voltage is the decisive quantity
Unbalanced overvoltages, for example, caused by ground faults and unbalanced faults, are not detected due
to the evaluation of the positive-sequence voltage.
The Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups,
which are based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A
maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an
identical structure.
[dw_ovp_u1s, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of a Stage
[lo_govpu1, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-207 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured
phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.
Blocking the Stage


The Threshold is set according to the definition of the positive-sequence system.
• Default (_:211:6) Operate delay = 3 s


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

The default value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement precision, the
Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.
General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.

If you want the tripping stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault
6.26.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
blocked
• yes
_:211:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 65.000 V
_:211:4 Stage 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
Stage 2
• on
• test
blocked
• yes

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.27 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage (ANSI 47) is used to:
• Monitor the power system and electric machines for voltage unbalances
• Establish a release criterion of overcurrent protection for unbalanced faults

Voltage unbalances can be caused by various factors:
• The most common cause is unbalanced load, caused by different consumers in the individual phases, for
example.
• Voltage unbalance can also be caused by phase failure, for example due to a tripped 1-phase fuse, a
broken conductor, etc.
• Other causes can include faults in the primary system, for example, at the transformer or in installations
for reactive-power compensation.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups,
which are based on voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function comes factory-set with 2 stages.
A maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function.
The stages have an identical structure.
[dw_u2ovps_ext, 2, en_US]
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of the average-value calculation of the negative-sequence voltage.
The average value is forwarded to all subordinate stages.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_general functionality, 1, en_US]
Measurand
The average value of negative-sequence voltage is determined by a settable time interval (parameter: Meas-
uring window). With the parameter Measuring window, you can adapt this function to all power-system
conditions.
You can set the parameter Measuring window with a large value to get a more accurate calculated result,
which leads to a longer pickup time however.
Blocking the Function with Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection

In case of blocking, the picked up function is reset. The following blocking options is available for the function:
• From inside on pick up of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 9.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions).
The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be set so that the measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the function or does not block it.
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Measuring window = 1 cycle

With the parameter Measuring window, you can optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time
of this function.
For sensitive settings of the parameter Threshold, for example, lower than 10 % of the rated voltage,
Siemens recommends using a higher number of cycles. Siemens recommends 10 cycles, and in this
case, the pickup time is increased.
For further information, refer to chapter 13.38 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage .

You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the function when a

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

switched on.

yes The protection function is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
no The protection function is not blocked.
6.27.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:10 General:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:2311:101 General:Measuring 1 cycles to 10 cycles 1 cycles
window

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:V2 average MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.27.4 Stage with Negative-Sequence Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_ovp_v2_3pol, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-210 Logic Diagram of the Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the average value of the negative-sequence voltage, which is calculated from the function
block General Functionality. For more information, refer to chapter 6.27.3.1 Description.
Blocking the Stage

In case of blocking, the picked up function is reset. The following blocking option is available for the function:
• From an external or internal source via the binary input signal >Block stage
• Default setting (_:271:3) Threshold = 5.800 V

The parameter Threshold is set according to the definition of the negative-sequence system.
The secondary voltage of the voltage transformer can be used if the voltage transformer is adapted to the
rated voltage. The value of the 10 % negative-sequence voltage at a 100 V rated secondary voltage is:
100 V / 1.73 * 0.1 = 5.77 V

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

The default setting of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications.
You can decrease the dropout ratio to avoid chattering of the stage if the threshold value is low. For example,
for the stage with a 2 % setting, you can use a dropout ratio of 0.90.

Specify the Operate delay for the specific application. 3.00 s is a practicable value.
For a higher threshold value, a shorter tripping delay is required.

Example 1:
Releasing an overcurrent protection stage for unbalanced faults
The following section describes how to set the function to release an Overcurrent-protection stage when
unbalanced faults occur. Set the Overcurrent-protection stage only slightly higher than the load current,
that is very sensitive. To prevent the Overcurrent-protection stage from picking up inadvertently, the Over-
current-protection stage is released when the Negative-sequence voltage stage picks up. The Overcurrent-
protection stage remains blocked as long as the Negative-sequence voltage stage has not picked up.
Figure 6-211 shows the voltage phasors during a 2-phase local fault between phases B and C. The phase-to-
phase voltage VBC is virtually 0.
[dw_ua_zeig, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-211 Voltage Phasors during a 2-Phase Local Fault
A 2-phase local fault generates a relatively large negative-sequence voltage of up to 50 % referred to the
phase-to-ground voltage. The portion of the negative-sequence decreases in case of a remote fault. The
lower setting limit results from the possible unbalance at full load. If you assume for example 5 % negative-
sequence voltage, the pickup value must be higher. A setting value of 10 % warrants sufficient stability during
unbalanced operating states and sufficient sensitivity to release the Overcurrent-protection stage when a
fault occurs.
For a secondary rated voltage of 100 V, set the following secondary threshold value:
[fo_ovp_v2_secondary threshold, 1, en_US]
You can keep the default setting of 0.95 for the dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the stage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Set the Negative-sequence voltage stage so that it does not generate a fault when it picks up and does not
initiate tripping. The Overcurrent-protection stage generates a fault indication. The pickup of the Negative-
sequence voltage stage is used as the release criterion because the Short-circuit function must be released
immediately when the Negative-sequence voltage stage has picked up. The time delay is thus not relevant
and can be left at the default setting.
You implement the release of the Overcurrent-protection stage using a logic block chart. An inverter links
the pickup of the Negative-sequence voltage stage with the Overcurrent-protection stage blocking.
[lo_invert, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-212 Linking the Pickup of the Negative-Sequence Voltage Stage

Secondary Threshold Value Time Delay Dropout Ratio
1 5.800 V 3.00 s 0.95
The second stage is not needed. It is deleted or remains off.
Example 2:
A negative-sequence voltage in the auxiliary system of the power plant causes negative-sequence currents on
motors. This leads to a thermal overload of the rotors. The following estimation can be used as a basis: 1 %
negative-sequence voltage can lead to approximately 5 % or 6 % negative-sequence current.
A negative-sequence voltage can be caused by a broken conductor on the high-voltage side. If a negative-
sequence voltage occurs, this can, for example, initiate a switching of the infeed in order to prevent a
protection trip of an unbalanced-load protection of the motors.
Siemens recommends using multiple stages for a better grading, whereby a sensitive setting of the threshold
permits an increased tripping delay.
For a reference, only 2 stages are discussed.
The first stage has a pickup threshold of 10 % with a time delay of 1.5 s. The second stage has a pickup
threshold of 3 % with a time delay of 8 s, see Table 6-15. Further, it is assumed that the voltage transformer is
well adapted to the rated voltage.
[fo_ovp_v2_secondary_threshold2, 1, en_US]
Table 6-15 Recommended Settings
Stage Threshold Operate Delay

Stage 1 5.800 V 1.50 s
Stage 2 1.730 V 8.00 s
6.27.4.3 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:V2 average MV O
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.28 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 59) detects any 1-phase overvoltages and is
intended for special applications.
The Overvoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are
based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A maximum of
3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical
structure.
[dw_ovp_uxs, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of a Stage
[lo_ovp_Vx_any-volt, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-214 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param-
eter Measured value is not visible.
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-

• Measurement of the parameter value RMS value:

Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter
Measured value is not visible.
Blocking the Stage


Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental
voltage peaks.
into account (for example at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
• Default setting (_:391:9) Measured value = VA measured

The Measured value parameter is used to specify which voltage is monitored by the stage.
The scope of setting options depends on the connection type for the voltage transformers and the routing of
the measured values to the terminals of the voltage measuring point. You can find connection examples for
voltage transformers in the Appendix.
The following setting options can be available:
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VA (VA measured)
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VB (VB measured)
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VC (VC measured)
• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB measured)
• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC measured)
• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA measured)
• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB calculated)
• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC calculated)
• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA calculated)
• Calculated voltage V0 (V0 calculated)

The selection depends on the corresponding application.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i From V7.30 on, the value VN measured is no longer provided. If you have selected this value in earlier
versions, you can use either the following methods instead after upgrading the configuration to V7.30 or a
later version:
• Select the value V0 calculated for the Measured value parameter in the function Overvoltage
protection with any voltage.
• Use the function Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage.

If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param-
eter Measured value is not visible.

Depending on the measured value, the Threshold is set either as Measured voltage or as Phase-to-
phase quantity.
NOTE
i If the function is used in a Voltage-current 1-phase function group connected to the 1-phase voltage
measuring point with the voltage type VN broken-delta, you set the threshold value based on the
equivalent zero-sequence voltage.
Calculate the equivalent zero-sequence voltage V0 equiv. sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the
following formula:
For more information about the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, refer to 6.1.6 Application and
Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph).


precision, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.28.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
blocked
• yes
_:391:9 Stage 1:Measured value • VA measured VA measured
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• V0 calculated
_:391:8 Stage 1:Method of measure- • fundamental comp. fundamental
ment comp.
• RMS value
Stage 2
• on
• test
blocked
• yes
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• V0 calculated
_:392:8 Stage 2:Method of measure- • fundamental comp. fundamental
ment comp.
• RMS value

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-Sequence Voltage
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-

Sequence Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage/positive-sequence voltage is used

to:
• Monitor the power system and electric machines for voltage unbalances
• Establish a release criterion of overcurrent protection for unbalanced faults

Voltage unbalances can be caused by various factors:
• The most common cause is unbalanced load, caused by different consumers in the individual phases, for
example.
• Voltage unbalance can also be caused by phase failure, for example due to a tripped 1-phase fuse, a
broken conductor, etc.
• Other causes can include faults in the primary system, for example, at the transformer or in installations
for reactive-power compensation.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage/positive-sequence voltage function is used

in protection function groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage/positive-sequence voltage function comes
factory-set with 2 stages. A maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The stages
have an identical structure.
[lo_structure_V2_V1, 2, en_US]
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of the average-value calculation of the ratio of negative-sequence
voltage to positive-sequence voltage. The average value is forwarded to all subordinate stages.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_V2-to-V1_FB general, 1, en_US]
Measurand
The average value of the ratio of negative-sequence voltage to positive-sequence voltage is determined by a
settable time interval (parameter: Measuring window). With the parameter Measuring window, you can
adapt this function to all power-system conditions.
You can set the parameter Measuring window with a large value to get a more accurate calculated result,
which leads to a longer pickup time however.
Blocking the Function with Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection

In case of blocking, the picked up function is reset. The following blocking options is available for the function:
• From inside on pick up of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 9.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions).
The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be set so that the measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the function or does not block it.
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Measuring window = 1 cycle

With the parameter Measuring window, you can optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time
of this function.
For sensitive settings of the parameter Threshold, for example, lower than 10 % of the rated voltage,
Siemens recommends using a higher number of cycles. Siemens recommends 10 cycles, and in this
case, the pickup time is increased.
For further information, refer to chapter 13.41 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage/
Positive-Sequence Voltage .

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the function when a

switched on.

yes The protection function is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
no The protection function is not blocked.
6.29.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:10 General:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:2311:102 General:Measuring 1 cycles to 10 cycles 1 cycles
window
_:2311:101 General:Minimum 0.300 V to 60.000 V 5.000 V
voltage V1

(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:Undervoltage blocking SPS O
_:2311:301 General:V2/V1 MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.29.4 Stage with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-Sequence Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_V2_V1_Prov, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-217 Logic Diagram of the Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage/Positive-
Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the average value of the negative-sequence voltage/positive-sequence voltage, which is calcu-
lated from the function block General Functionality. For more information, refer to chapter 6.29.3.1 Descrip-
tion.
Blocking the Stage

In case of blocking, the picked up function is reset. The following blocking option is available for the function:
• From an external or internal source via the binary input signal >Block stage
• Default setting (_:17071:3) Threshold = 10.00 %

The parameter Threshold is set in percentage according to the definition of the symmetrical compents. It is
the ratio of the negative-sequence voltage to positive-sequence voltage.
In the application with a lower threshold setting of about 2.00 %, there is a risk of an overfunction due to the
measuring errors with small values as well as an influence via disturbances.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

The default setting of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications if a higher threshold is used.
You can decrease the dropout ratio to avoid chattering of the stage if the threshold value is low. For example,
for the stage with a 2 % setting, you can use a dropout ratio of 0.90.

Specify the Operate delay for the specific application. When using the sensitive setting of the threshold
value that is described in this chapter, the function can be delayed by 3.00 s.
For a higher threshold value, a shorter tripping delay is required.

Example 1:
Releasing an overcurrent protection stage for unbalanced faults
The following section describes how to set the function to release an Overcurrent-protection stage when
unbalanced faults occur. Set the Overcurrent-protection stage only slightly higher than the load current,
that is very sensitive. To prevent the Overcurrent-protection stage from picking up inadvertently, the Over-
current-protection stage is released when the Negative-sequence voltage stage picks up. The Overcurrent-
Protection stage remains blocked as long as the Negative-sequence voltage stage has not picked up.
Figure 6-218 shows the voltage phasors during a 2-phase local fault between phases B and C. The phase-to-
phase voltage VBC is virtually 0.
[dw_ua_zeig, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-218 Voltage Phasors during a 2-Phase Local Fault
A 2-phase local fault generates a relatively large negative-sequence voltage of up to 100 % referred to the
positive-sequence voltage. The portion of the negative-sequence decreases in case of a remote fault. The
lower setting limit results from the possible unbalance at full load. If you assume for example 5 % of the
negative-sequence voltage to positive-sequence voltage, the pickup value must be higher. A setting value of
10 % warrants sufficient stability during unbalanced operating states and sufficient sensitivity to release the
Overcurrent-protection stage when a fault occurs.
You can keep the default setting of 0.95 for the dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the stage.
Set the Negative-sequence voltage stage so that it does not generate a fault when it picks up and does not
initiate tripping. The Overcurrent-protection stage generates a fault indication. The pickup of the Negative-
sequence voltage stage is used as the release criterion because the Short-circuit function must be released
immediately when the Negative-sequence voltage stage has picked up. The time delay is thus not relevant
and can be left at the default setting.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
You implement the release of the Overcurrent-protection stage using a logic block chart. An inverter links
the pickup of the Negative-sequence voltage stage with the Overcurrent-protection stage blocking.
[lo_pickup V2, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-219 Linking the Pickup of the Negative-Sequence Voltage Stage

Percentage of the Negative- Time Delay Dropout Ratio
Sequence Voltage to Positive-
Sequence Voltage
1 10.00 % 3.00 s 0.95
The second stage is not needed. It is deleted or remains off.
Example 2:
A negative-sequence voltage in the auxiliary system of the power plant causes negative-sequence currents on
motors. This leads to a thermal overload of the rotors. The following estimation can be used as a basis: 1 %
negative-sequence voltage can lead to approximately 5 % or 6 % negative-sequence current.
A negative-sequence voltage can be caused by a broken conductor on the high-voltage side. If a negative-
sequence voltage occurs, this can, for example, initiate a switching of the infeed in order to prevent a
protection trip of an unbalanced-load protection of the motors.
Siemens recommends using multiple stages for a better grading, whereby a sensitive setting of the threshold
permits an increased tripping delay.
For a reference, only 2 stages are discussed.
The first stage has a pickup threshold of 10 % with a time delay of 1.5 s. The second stage has a pickup
threshold of 3 % with a time delay of 8 s, seeTable 6-16.
Table 6-16 Recommended Settings
Stage Threshold Operate Delay

Stage 1 10.00 % 1.50 s
Stage 2 3.00 % 8.00 s
6.29.4.3 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:17071:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.50 % to 100.00 % 10.00 %
Stage 2
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:17072:3 Stage 2:Threshold 0.50 % to 100.00 % 15.00 %

(Type)
Stage 1
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.30 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 27):
• Monitors the permissible voltage range
• Protects equipment (for example, plant components and machines) against damages caused by under-
voltage
• Handles disconnection or load shedding tasks in a system
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage is used in protection function groups with
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage comes factory-set with 2 Definite-time under-
voltage protection stages.
In the function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage, the following stages can be operated simul-
taneously:
• 3 stages Definite-time undervoltage protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time undervoltage protection

The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec-
tion stages (see Figure 6-220). If the protection function group used has no current measurement, you can
only set the current-flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.
[dw_stru_3p, 5, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_uvp_3phs_stage-control, 4, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_uvp_3ph, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-222 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
With the Method of measurement parameter, you select the relevant method of measurement, depending
on the application.
• Measurement fundamental component:


Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
picked up.
To enable the pickup stabilization, you set the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than 0.
Then, if the input voltage keeps being below the Threshold for a specified number (1 + Stabilization

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
counter value) of successive measuring cycles, the stage picks up. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10
ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued after
the input voltage falls below the threshold value.
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in
all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).
Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before
the current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay
parameter to prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is
achieved by delaying the pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded. A current below the minimum current blocks
the stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-222 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
i If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see 9.3.2.1 Overview of
Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage
failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends using this parameter value as the default setting.
• Recommended setting value (_:421:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC. Parameter Value

phase-to-phase If you want to detect voltage dips caused by multiphase short circuits, or
generally monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the default
setting. The function will not pick up on ground faults.
default setting.
ances or overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

The Threshold is set in accordance with the Measured value as either a phase-to-phase or phase-
to-ground variable.
For the default setting, the lower limit of the voltage range to be monitored is assumed to be 80 % of the
rated voltage of the protected object.
EXAMPLE:
Rated voltage of the protected object: Vrated, obj.= 10 kV

Voltage transformer:
Threshold value: 80 % of Vrated, obj.
The secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
[fo_schw_lw, 2, en_US]

For special applications, it could be desirable that a short falling of the input voltage below the pickup value
the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than zero.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps being below
the Threshold for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.

With the Pickup mode parameter, you specify whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
1 out of 3 Use this setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
• Default setting (_:421:102) Pickup delay = no

The Pickup delay parameter is only available if you are using the current-flow criterion of the function
(parameter Current-flow criterion = on). If the current-flow criterion is deactivated, no pickup delay is
required.
With the Pickup delay parameter, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
40 ms or not. The delay avoids possible brief pickup of the stage when the circuit breaker opens.
When applied in parallel, the pickup delay and the delay through pickup stabilization add up.
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want stage pickup to be subject to a
time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup and, where
applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
Note that switching procedures (opening of the CB) can result in brief
pickup of the stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for under-
voltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted trip-
ping, you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
yes Use this setting when switching procedures (opening of the CB) are not
permitted to result in stage pickup.
Note that pickup is delayed by approximately 40 ms. This delay is added to
the operate time.
• Default (_:421:6) Operate delay = 3 s


The recommended setting value of 1.05 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high-precision
measurements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced (to 1.02, for example).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter, you control the behavior of the stage when a
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following two conditions is met:

switched on.
breaker (see 9.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).

Parameter: Current-flow criterion
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion = on

Depending on the system, the voltage transformers are arranged on either the supply side or the junction side.
These 2 possible voltage transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and
opening of the circuit breaker:
• If they are located on the supply side, the voltage still exists.
• If they are located on the junction side, the voltage does not exist.

on If the voltage transformers are located on the junction side, you can use the
current-flow criterion to make the pickup drops out when the current falls
below a minimum value (parameter Threshold I>).
off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage protection
stage persists when the current-flow criterion is not used.
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Threshold I> = 0.05 A

The Threshold I> parameter makes it possible to detect when the circuit breaker is closed. Siemens
recommends setting the Threshold I> parameter to 5% of the rated current. With a secondary rated
transformer current of 1 A, the secondary setting value for Threshold I> would be 0.05 A.
If the sensitivity of the Threshold I> parameter is set too high, compensation processes in the secondary
circuit of the current transformer extend the dropout time when breaking extremely high currents. To speed
up dropout, increase the default setting.

6.30.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:104 General:Current-flow • off on
criterion
• on

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:2311:103 General:Stabilization 0 to 10 0
counter
Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
• 3 out of 3
_:421:102 Definite-T 1:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
ratio
delay
Definite-T 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
• 3 out of 3
_:422:102 Definite-T 2:Pickup delay • no no
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

ratio
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Current flow-criterion SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Current crit. fulf. SPS O
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
Definite-T 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_UVP3ph_in_stage control, 4, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_UVP3ph_In, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-224 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
comp. or the RMS value.
• Measurement fundamental comp.:


Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
picked up.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps being below the pickup value for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-
time is 10 ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued after
the input voltage falls below the pickup value.
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-

When the input voltage falls below the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor, the stage picks
up and the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. The operate delay starts. The operate delay is the
sum of inverse-time delay and additional time delay.
Top=TInv+ Tadd
Where:
Top Operate delay
TInv Inverse-time delay
Tadd Additional time delay (Parameter Additional time delay)
After pickup the time value TInv is calculated for every input voltage less than the dropout value. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/TInv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The stage operates after the additional time delay.
[fo_uvp_3ph_inverse, 2, en_US]
Where
TInv Inverse-time delay
Tp Time multiplier (Parameter Time dial)
V Measured undervoltage
VThresh Threshold value (Parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (Parameter Charact. constant k)
α Curve constant α (Parameter Charact. constant α)
c Curve constant c (Parameter Charact. constant c)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The inverse-time characteristic is shown in the following figure:
[dw_uvp_3ph_inverse, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-225 Inverse-Time Characteristics for Undervoltage Protection
Pickup Delay
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before
the current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay
parameter to prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is
achieved by delaying the pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage exceeds the dropout value (1.05 x pickup factor x threshold value), the pickup signal
is going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time.
Instantaneous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the
desired delay time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the stage picks up again within this
period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage-protection stages only pick
the stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked-up stage is reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see 9.3.2.1 Overview of
Functions) . The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage
failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
block it.

voltage peaks.
• Recommended setting value (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase


phase-to-phase If you want to detect voltage dips caused by multiphase short circuits, or
generally monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the default
setting. The function will not pick up on ground faults.
default setting.
ances or overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The stage picks up when the measured voltage value falls below the pickup value Threshold × Pickup
factor.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as
phase-to-ground quantity.
With the Pickup factor parameter, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long operate delay time after
pickup, Siemens recommends using the default value of Pickup factor.

For special applications, it could be desirable that a short falling of the input voltage below the pickup value
the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than zero.
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps being below
the pickup value for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3

With the Pickup mode parameter, you specify whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
1 out of 3 Use this setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
• Default setting (_:102) Pickup delay = no

required.
With the Pickup delay parameter, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
When applied in parallel, the pickup delay and the delay through pickup stabilization add up.
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want stage pickup to be subject to a
time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup and, where
applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
pickup of the stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for under-
voltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted trip-
ping, you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
permitted to result in stage pickup.
the operate time.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

With the Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, and Charact. constant c parameters,
you define the required inverse-time characteristic.

curve, Siemens recommends leaving the Time dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).

With the Reset time parameter, you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage exceeds
the dropout value. Set the parameter Reset time to 0 s when instantaneous reset is desired.
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession, Siemens recom-
mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value > 0 s to ensure the operation. Otherwise, Siemens

time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, only the inverse-time delay is operative.

With the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter, you control the behavior of the stage when a

switched on.
breaker (see 9.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).


These 2 possible voltage-transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage protection
6.30.4.3 Settings

Inverse-T #
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:10 Inverse-T #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:9 Inverse-T #:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:101 Inverse-T #:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:102 Inverse-T #:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
constant k
constant α
constant c
time delay

(Type)
Inverse-T #

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:300 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:301 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:302 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop CA SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.31 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function (ANSI 27):
• Monitors the permissible voltage range
• Protects equipment (for example, plant components and machines) from damages caused by under-
voltage
• Protects motors and generators from inadmissible operating states and a possible loss of stability in the
event of voltage dips
2-phase short circuits or ground faults lead to an unbalanced voltage collapse. In comparison to three 1-phase
measuring systems, such events have no noticeable impact on the positive-sequence voltage. This makes this
function particularly suitable for the assessment of stability problems.
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function
groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function comes factory-set with 2 tripping
stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages
have an identical structure.
tion stages (see Figure 6-226). If the protection function group used has no current measurement, you can
only set the current-flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.
[dw_stuvu1, 3, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_uvP_3pol-V1, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-227 Logic Diagram of the Stage Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured
phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Pickup Delay
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the tripping stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup
delay parameter to prevent the tripping stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker
opens. This is achieved by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded in at least one phase. A current below the
minimum current blocks the tripping stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled via the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
NOTE
i If the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched off, the device picks up immediately if a missing
measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The parameter setting can be
changed even when the device has picked up.
Blocking the Stage

stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see chapter 9.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set to either block or not
block the tripping stage when the measuring-voltage failure detection picks up.
block it.

Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application. For the default setting, the lower limit
of the voltage range to be monitored is assumed to be 80 % of the rated voltage of the protected object.
• Default setting (_:481:101) Pickup delay = no

required.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the parameter Pickup delay you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want tripping-stage pickup to be
subject to a time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup
and, where applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
pickup of the tripping stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for
undervoltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted
tripping, you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
permitted to result in tripping-stage pickup.
the operate time.


The recommended setting value of 1.05 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain extremely accurate
indications, the Dropout ratio can be reduced.


switched on.


Depending on the system, the voltage transformers can be located on the supply or the output side. These 2
possible voltage transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and opening
of the circuit breaker:
• If they are located on the output side, the voltage does not exist.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

on If the voltage transformers are located on the output side, you can use the
below a minimum value (parameter Threshold value I>).
off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage-protection
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Threshold I> = 0.05 A

The Threshold I> parameter makes it possible to detect when the circuit breaker is closed. Siemens
recommends setting the Threshold I> parameter to 5% of the rated current. With a secondary rated
transformer current of 1 A, the secondary setting value for Threshold I> would be 0.05 A.
If the sensitivity of the Threshold I> parameter is set too high, compensation processes in the secondary
up dropout, increase the default setting.

EXAMPLE of a 2-stage undervoltage protection

The undervoltage protection can be used for the protection of motors within the power plant's own power
system. The example describes the possible settings for a two-stage undervoltage-protection function. We will
look at the settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay.
1. Stage:
Set the Threshold to approx. 80 % of the rated voltage. In the case of voltage dips down to that value, the
motors can still start up. Depending on the machine characteristic, the Threshold can also be set somewhat
lower.
The following data apply:
Rated motor voltage: Vrated,M = 6 kV
Minimum startup voltage: 80 % of rated motor voltage
Voltage-transformer ratio:
When setting the threshold value, make sure that the positive-sequence voltage as defined is equal to the
value of one phase-to-ground voltage. Taking into account the rated primary voltage of the motor, the
primary setting value of the first stage is calculated as follows:
[fo_compensation1, 2, en_US]
When setting secondary values, you calculate the secondary setting value as follows, taking into account the
voltage-transformer ratio:
[fo_compensation3, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Set a value of 3 s for the Operate delay.

2. Stage:
Undervoltage causes excessive torques and current surges which place inadmissible strains on the motor.
The voltage at which motors do no longer start up is in the range of (0.55 … 0.70) Vrated,M. If no data are
available, use the empirical value of approx. 70% of the rated voltage for setting the parameter Threshold.
Set the Operate delay so that it slightly overlaps the tripping time of the overcurrent protection for the
power-plant auxiliary power. Unless otherwise required by the motor manufacturer, set an Operate delay
between 0.5 s and 3 s. The shorter time should be preferred.
Threshold value Time delay
1 0.70 to 0.85 Vrated,M Approx. 3 to 5 s
(for example, 0.80 Vrated,M)
2 0.55 to 0.70 Vrated,M 0.5 s to 3 s
(for example, 0.70 Vrated,M)
6.31.5 Settings

General
criterion
• on
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:481:101 Stage 1:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:481:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000V 46.000V
Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

volt. failure
• yes
_:482:101 Stage 2:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:482:3 Stage 2:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 40.000V

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.32 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 27) detects any 1-phase undervoltage and is
intended for special applications.
The Undervoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are
based on voltage measurement.
The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A maximum of
3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical
structure.
tion stages (see Figure 6-228).
[dw_stuvux, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of a Stage
[lo_uvp_Vx_any-volt, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-229 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the
parameter Measured value is not visible.
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.
If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter
Measured value is not visible.
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up when the current-flow criterion has been set to fulfilled via the binary input signal >Current
flow-criterion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
NOTE
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally
via the binary input signal >Block stage.

Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental
voltage peaks.
• Default setting (_:571:9) Measured value = VA measured

The Measured value parameter is used to specify which voltage is monitored by the stage.
The scope of setting options depends on the connection type for the voltage transformers and the routing of
the measured values to the terminals of the voltage measuring point. You can find connection examples for
voltage transformers in the Appendix.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The following setting options can be available:
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VA (VA measured)
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VB (VB measured)
• Measured phase-to-ground voltage VC VC measured)
• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB measured)
• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC measured)
• Measured phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA measured)
• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB calculated)
• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC calculated)
• Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA calculated)
• Calculated voltage V0 (V0 calculated)

The selection depends on the corresponding application.
NOTE
i From V7.30 on, the value VN measured is no longer provided. If you have selected this value in earlier
versions, you can select the value V0 calculated instead after upgrading the configuration to V7.30 or a
later version.
If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the
parameter Measured value is not visible.

Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as measured voltage or as a phase-
to-phase variable.
NOTE
i If the function is used in a Voltage-current 1-phase function group connected to the 1-phase voltage
measuring point with the voltage type VN broken-delta, you set the threshold value based on the
equivalent zero-sequence voltage.
Calculate the equivalent zero-sequence voltage V0 equiv. sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the
following formula:
For more information about the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, refer to 6.1.6 Application and
Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph).


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
precision, the Dropout ratio can be reduced to 1.02, for example.

on Because of the application, it makes sense that the stage is only active (that
is, not blocked) when a certain current flow is present (see note).
off Current flow monitoring does not make sense for the application.
NOTE
i Because of the flexible setting options of the voltage measurand, the function itself does not determine
the current associated with the voltage. A suitable current-flow monitoring function must be created by
the user with the Continuous Function Chart (CFC), and connected to the binary input signal >Current
flow-criterion.

6.32.5 Settings

General
criterion
• on
Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• V0 calculated
measurement comp.
• RMS value

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• V0 calculated
measurement comp.
• RMS value

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Stage 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.33 Rate-of-Voltage-Change Protection
In a power system, in addition to short circuits, there are other situations which also cause voltage changes.
For example, too high loads can reduce the voltage level at the end of the line, or too high power production
can cause a voltage-level increase.
The function Rate-of-voltage-change protection can be used to:
• Prevent the system from not secure states caused by unbalance between the generated and consumed
active power
• Detect a network island state
• Advanced load-shedding applications
• Detect a rather fast voltage change related to a fault in the power system
The function Rate-of-voltage-change protection can be used in protection function groups with 3‑phase
2 stage types are available:
• dV/dt rising
• dV/dt falling
The function Rate-of-voltage-change protection comes factory-set with 1 dV/dt rising stage and 1 dV/dt
falling stage. A maximum of 5 dV/dt rising stages and 5 dV/dt falling stages can be operated simultaneously
within the function. Both stage types are similar in structure.
• Pickup
• Operate
[dw_dVdt structure, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
The following figure shows the dV/dt calculation logic. It applies to all configured stages.
[lo_dvdt_general, 1, en_US]
dV/dt Calculation
The measured phase-to-phase voltages are used for calculating the rate of voltage change.
The measuring-window interval is used for calculating the dV/dt mean value for further processing. A larger
measuring window increases the accuracy of the dV/dt mean value while simultaneously increasing the pickup
time.
The ratio between the voltage difference and the time difference reflects the voltage change which can be
positive or negative.
Functional Measured Value
Value Description
dV/s Calculated mean voltage change per second
• Default setting (_:13171:137) Measuring window = 5 periods

With the Measuring window parameter, you optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time of
the function. If the measuring window increases, the measuring accuracy increases while the pickup time
increases as well. You can find more information about the pickup time and measuring accuracy in the
technical data in chapter 13.45 Rate-of-Voltage-Change Protection.
If you do not have specific requirements for an especially short pickup time, Siemens recommends using the
default setting. The default setting is a reasonable compromise between the measuring accuracy and the
pickup time. If the measuring window is smaller than 5 periods, the accuracy of the calculated dV/dt value is
affected.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_dvdt_stage, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-232 Logic Diagram of the dV/dt Falling Stage
(1) For the stage type dV/dt rising, the value dV/dt rising (AB) is used.
Voltage Change
The stage dV/dt falling is used to detect a system-voltage decrease and the stage dV/dt rising is used to
detect a system-voltage increase.
You set the threshold value dV/second as the absolute voltage change per second. You define the
voltage‑change direction via the stage type.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements detect the
voltage‑change condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the voltage‑change condition
(1 out of 3).
Dropout Delay
If the dV/dt value falls below the dropout threshold, the dropout of the stage can be delayed. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The operate delay continues to run. If the operate delay expires while the


Parameter: dV/second
• Default setting (_:22831:3) dV/second = 20.000 V

With the dV/second parameter, you determine the pickup value of the stage. The pickup value depends on
the application.
For the load-shedding application, it is necessary to detect faster rates of voltage change in the range from 20
V to 30 V per second.
For an island-state detection of the network, the pickup value can be set much lower in the range of 1 V per
second or less.

The Dropout delay parameter maintains the pickup even if the measured value drops temporarily below
the threshold value. A delay is required for very low pickup values to prevent a chattering of the function.

You can use the Operate delay parameter to avoid overfunction due to disturbing influences (for example,
switching operations). If the protection function is supposed to respond immediately, set the Operate
delay to 0.00 s.
• Default setting (_:22831:102) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
elements detect the voltage falling/rising condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the
voltage falling/rising condition (1 out of 3).
range.
This setting reflects how the function operated in previous generations
(SIPROTEC 4).
system (for example in the case of wind farms).



enabled.

6.33.5 Settings

General
_:13171:137 General:Measuring 2 periods to 50 periods 5 periods
window
dV/dt falling1
_:22831:1 dV/dt falling1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:22831:2 dV/dt falling1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:22831:10 dV/dt falling1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:22831:102 dV/dt falling1:Pickup • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
mode
• 3 out of 3
_:22831:3 dV/dt falling1:dV/second 0.500 V to 200.000 V 20.000 V
_:22831:6 dV/dt falling1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
delay

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:22831:101 dV/dt falling1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
dV/dt rising 1
_:22801:1 dV/dt rising 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:22801:2 dV/dt rising 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:22801:10 dV/dt rising 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:22801:102 dV/dt rising 1:Pickup • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
mode
• 3 out of 3
_:22801:3 dV/dt rising 1:dV/second 0.500 V to 200.000 V 20.000 V
_:22801:6 dV/dt rising 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
delay
_:22801:101 dV/dt rising 1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay

(Type)
General
_:13171:320 General:dV/s DEL O
_:13171:53 General:Operate ENS O
Group indicat.
dV/dt falling1
_:22831:81 dV/dt falling1:>Block stage SPS I
_:22831:51 dV/dt falling1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:22831:54 dV/dt falling1:Inactive SPS O
_:22831:52 dV/dt falling1:Behavior ENS O
_:22831:53 dV/dt falling1:Health ENS O
_:22831:55 dV/dt falling1:Pickup ACD O
_:22831:303 dV/dt falling1:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:22831:304 dV/dt falling1:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:22831:305 dV/dt falling1:Pickup loop CA SPS O
_:22831:56 dV/dt falling1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:22831:57 dV/dt falling1:Operate ACT O
dV/dt rising 1
_:22801:81 dV/dt rising 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:22801:51 dV/dt rising 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:22801:54 dV/dt rising 1:Inactive SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:22801:52 dV/dt rising 1:Behavior ENS O
_:22801:53 dV/dt rising 1:Health ENS O
_:22801:55 dV/dt rising 1:Pickup ACD O
_:22801:303 dV/dt rising 1:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:22801:304 dV/dt rising 1:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:22801:305 dV/dt rising 1:Pickup loop CA SPS O
_:22801:56 dV/dt rising 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:22801:57 dV/dt rising 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.34 Overfrequency Protection
The Overfrequency protection function (ANSI 81O):
• Detect overfrequencies in electrical power systems or machines
• Monitor the frequency band and output failure indications
• Disconnect generating units when the power frequency is critical
• Provide additional turbine protection if the speed limiter fails

Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed.
Overfrequency is caused by load shedding (island network), power system disconnection or disturbances of
the frequency controller. Overfrequency implies a risk of self excitation of machines which are connected to
long lines without load.
Overfrequency protection is available in two functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.
The Overfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The overfrequency protection function comes with 2 factory-set stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can
be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.
[dw_stofqp, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.34.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_stofqp, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-234 Logic Diagram of the Overfrequency-Protection Stage
Frequency-Measurement Method
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
• Angle-difference method (method A):

The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
• Filtering method (method B):

The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency
using a suitable combination of filters. The frequency-protection function selects automatically the
largest voltage as the measurand. In a multiphase connection, the phase-to-phase voltage is always the
largest. If in a multiphase connection the selected voltage is no longer available, the function changes
over automatically to the next maximum voltage. The function can even operate with just one voltage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short
response time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
NOTE
i The angle difference method (method A) requires the sampling-frequency tracking.

If you use the angle difference method as method of measurement, ensure that sampling-frequency
tracking is active (see 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking).

The angle-difference method provides the following measured value:
f Frequency calculated with the angle-difference method

The sampling-frequency tracking makes a wide frequency operating range possible. If the stage has picked
up before leaving the frequency operating range and the measuring voltage is higher than the set minimum
voltage, the pickup is maintained. A dropout of the pickup is only possible by means of a blocking.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, a picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Externally or internally via the logical binary input >Block stage
• Internally when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the reliability of protection.
Frequency-Measurement Description
Method
Angle difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.
• Recommended setting value (_:31:3) Threshold = 50.20 Hz for frated = 50 Hz
With the parameter Threshold, you define the pickup threshold of the overfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 50.20 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.
• Recommended setting value (_:31:6) Operate delay = 10 s

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the parameter Operate delay, you set the stage so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences
(for example, switching operations) are avoided. Fairly high time delays are sufficient for warning indications.
Parameter: Minimum voltage
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Minimum voltage = 37.500 V

For the Undervoltage blocking, Siemens recommends 65 % of the rated voltage of the protected object
as the setting value.
Calculate the secondary or primary setting value with the phase-to-ground voltage, that is, Vrated/√3.
For Vrated = 100 V secondary, the setting value of the Minimum voltage is calculated as follows:
[fo_minimal voltage A, 1, en_US]
In the angle-difference method, the setting value relates to the positive-sequence system.
NOTE
i If in DIGSI you switch over the settings view of the parameters to Percent, the phase-to-phase value of
the rated voltage is the reference value for the Minimum voltage in both methods of measurement.
Parameter: Dropout differential
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:109) Dropout differential = 20 mHz

Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the recommended setting value for the Dropout
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For example, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 50.20 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the
stage will drop out at 50.10 Hz.
Application example of the overfrequency protection

Overfrequency protection can be used for monitoring the frequency range. If the frequency deviates from the
rated frequency by for example, 0.2 Hz, an alarm indication is generated. The trip command is delayed to
avoid overfunction due to disturbing influences (for example, switching operations). A delay of a few seconds
(for example, 10 s) is deemed to be a good value. You can leave the Dropout differential at the default
value of 20 mHz. The following table shows a setting recommendation.
For this application, 1 stage of the overfrequency protection is used. The following table shows a setting
suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
At frated = 50 Hz At frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1> Warning 50.20 Hz 60.20 Hz 10.00 s
f2> Not used (OFF) - - -
NOTE
i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.34.5 Settings

General
voltage
_:2311:109 General:Dropout differ- 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
ential
Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:31:3 Stage 1:Threshold Overfrequency A 40.00 Hz to 90.00 Hz 51.50 Hz
Overfrequency B 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz
Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:32:3 Stage 2:Threshold Overfrequency A 40.00 Hz to 90.00 Hz 54.00 Hz
Overfrequency B 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:f MV O
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.35 Underfrequency Protection
The Underfrequency protection function (ANSI 81U) is used to:
• Detect underfrequencies in electrical power systems or machines
• Monitor the frequency band and output failure indications
• Decouple power systems
• Load shedding to ensure power system stability and protect motors
• Disconnect generating units when the power system frequency is critical (for example, f < 0.95 frated)
Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed.
Underfrequency is caused by an increase of the consumers' active power demand or by a decrease of the
power generated. These conditions occur in the case of power system disconnection, generator failure, or
disturbances of the power and frequency controller.
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.
The Underfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The Underfrequency protection function comes with 3 factory-set stages. A maximum of 5 tripping stages
can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.
[dw_stufqp, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.35.3 Underfrequency-Protection Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_stuf_qp, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-236 Logic Diagram of the Underfrequency-Protection Stage
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
• Angle-difference method (method A):

The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
• Filtering method (method B):

The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency
using a suitable combination of filters. The frequency-protection function selects automatically the
largest voltage as the measurand. In a multiphase connection, the phase-to-phase voltage is always the
largest. If in a multiphase connection the selected voltage is no longer available, the function changes
over automatically to the next maximum voltage. The function can even operate with just one voltage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short
response time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
NOTE
i The angle difference method (method A) requires the sampling-frequency tracking.

If you use the angle difference method as method of measurement, ensure that sampling-frequency
tracking is active (see 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking).

Sampling-frequency tracking makes an additional frequency operating range possible. If the stage has picked
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, a picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Internally when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the security of protection.
Method of Measurement Description
Angle-difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.
• Recommended setting value (_:61:3) Threshold = 49.80 Hz for frated = 50 Hz
With the parameter Threshold, you define the pickup threshold of the underfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 49.8 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.

With the parameter Operate delay, you set the stage so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences
(for example switching operations) are avoided. Fairly high time delays are sufficient for warning indications.

For the Undervoltage blocking, Siemens recommends 65 % of the rated voltage of the protected object
as the setting value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Calculate the secondary or primary setting value with the phase-to-ground voltage, that is, Vrated/√3.
For Vrated = 100 V secondary, the setting value of the Minimum voltage is calculated as follows:
[fo_minimal voltage A, 1, en_US]
In the angle-difference method, the setting value relates to the positive-sequence system.
NOTE
i If in DIGSI you switch over the settings view of the parameters to Percent, the phase-to-phase value of
the rated voltage is the reference value for the Minimum voltage in both methods of measurement.
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:109) Dropout differential = 20 mHz

differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For example, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 49.8 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the stage
will drop out at 49.9 Hz.
Application Example of Underfrequency Protection

Frequency protection can be used for load shedding. The UCTE has defined a 5-stage plan for the Western
European power grid. The setting values of the stages are based on that plan (see table below).
Table 6-17 Stage Plan
Frequency Activity
49.80 Hz Alarm and activation of reserves following an established plan
49.00 Hz Undelayed disconnection of 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.70 Hz Undelayed disconnection of another 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.40 Hz 3rd load-shedding stage. Another 15 % to 20 % of the power system load is
disconnected.
47.50 Hz Power plants are decoupled from the electrical power system
For this application, 3 stages of the underfrequency protection are used. 2 of these stages are used for load
shedding. The following table shows a setting suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
At frated = 50 Hz At frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1< Warning 49.80 Hz 59.80 Hz 10.00 s
f2< 1st load shedding 49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz 0.00 s
f3< 2nd load shedding 48.70 Hz 58.70 Hz 0.00 s
NOTE
i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.35.5 Settings

General
voltage
_:2311:109 General:Dropout differ- 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
ential
Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:61:3 Stage 1:Threshold 30.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 49.80 Hz
Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
Stage 3
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

(Type)
General
Group indicat.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.36 Underfrequency Load Shedding
The Underfrequency load shedding function:
• Detects underfrequencies in the electrical power systems
• Switches off the medium-voltage busbar or feeders that consume active power to stabilize the frequency
• Maintains operations for the medium-voltage busbar or feeders that generate active power
The Underfrequency load shedding function can be used in the Voltage/Current 3-phase function group
and in the Line function group.
The Underfrequency load shedding function comes factory-set with 8 stages. A maximum of 12 stages can
be operated simultaneously within the function. These stages are identical in structure.
[dw_load shedding_structure, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_UFLS_general functionality, 2, en_US]
(1) n means the number of the protection stage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measurands
The general functionality requires the following input measurands:
• Positive-sequence voltage V1
• Positive-sequence current I1
• Positive-sequence system apparent power S1
• Positive-sequence system active power P1
• Frequency
S1 and P1 are both calculated from V1 and I1. The frequency is calculated from V1.
The frequency and the frequency change rate df/dt are calculated via the angle difference algorithm. For more
information, see 6.34.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage.
Undervoltage Blocking
The frequency of the Underfrequency load shedding function is calculated from the positive-sequence
voltage V1. In order to obtain a reliable and accurate frequency calculation result, the magnitude of V1 is
monitored. If the magnitude of V1 is smaller than the Minimum voltage, all the protection stages are
blocked and the V1< block indication is issued.
Power Criterion
If a feeder delivers active power towards the busbar, or if the medium-voltage busbar delivers active power to
the high-voltage busbar, it is meaningless to switch off this feeder or the medium-voltage busbar during the
load-shedding process. The power criterion determines the power-flow direction and includes this information
as a blocking criterion into the load-shedding decision of all protection stages.
The parameter Positive power direction defines the positive active-power flow direction of the func-
tion in relation to the standard forward direction of the protection functionality. For more information, see
In the following figures, if the power flow is located in the release area which is marked in gray, the protection
stages are released. In the remaining area, the protection stages are blocked.
The release area is configured via the following parameters:
• The parameter Phi (power criterion) defines the area which limits the range of the power angle.
• The parameter Min. current (power crit.) defines the minimum positive-sequence current that
must be present to calculate the active power in a reliable way. In the following figures, the minimum
current is indicated as the circle whose center is the origin of the coordinates.
The power criterion is checked only when the following 2 conditions are fulfilled:
• The positive-sequence current I1 exceeds the threshold Min. current (power crit.), that is, I1 is
out of the circle in the following figures.
• The undervoltage blocking is not fulfilled, that is, the magnitude of V1 is not smaller than the Minimum
voltage.
The dashed lines in the figures show the dropout characteristics. The dropout differential of the power angle is
1°.
The symbol φ in the following figures represents the setting value of the parameter Phi (power crite-
rion).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_load_shedding_power_crit<0, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-239 Power-Criterion Checking at Phi (power criterion) ≤ 0
[dw_load shedding_power_crit>0, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-240 Power-Criterion Checking at Phi (power criterion) > 0 (according to

VDE‑AR‑N 4142:2020-04)
The power criterion contains the check of the current criterion and of the power-angle criterion.
You can determine whether to check the power criterion or not by setting the Power criterion parameter.
The power criterion is carried out only when the Power criterion parameter is set to yes.
The working method of the current criterion and of the power-angle criterion differ at Phi (power crite-
rion) ≤ 0 and Phi (power criterion) > 0.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
For Phi (power criterion) ≤ 0, the power criterion is checked as follows:
• When the positive-sequence current I1 falls below the Min. current (power crit.), the current
criterion is not fulfilled and the I1< blocking indication is issued. Therefore, all the protection stages
are blocked and the power-angle criterion is not considered.
• When I1 exceeds the Min. current (power crit.) and the power angle is out of the release area,
the Power crit. blocking indication is issued and all the protection stages are blocked.
For Phi (power criterion) > 0, the power criterion is checked as follows:
• When I1 falls below the Min. current (power crit.), all the protection stages are released and
the power-angle criterion is not considered.
• When I1 exceeds the Min. current (power crit.) and the power angle is out of the release area,
the Power crit. blocking indication is issued and all the protection stages are blocked.
df/dt Blocking
If the change rate of df/dt is too high, the Underfrequency load shedding function may not be applicable
anymore.
The df/dt blocking comprises the df/dt-rising blocking and the df/dt-falling blocking.
The df/dt-rising criterion and the df/dt-falling criterion can be individually switched on or off. These 2 df/dt
criteria are operative only when the magnitude of the positive-sequence voltage V1 is greater than the
Minimum voltage:
• The df/dt-rising blocking takes place when the df/dt-rising value exceeds the setting value of the param-
eter df/dt-rising blk. threshold. It is signaled via the indication df/dt-rising blocking.
• The df/dt-falling blocking takes place when the df/dt-falling value exceeds the setting value of the
parameter df/dt-falling blk. threshold. It is signaled via the indication df/dt-falling
blocking.
Frequency-Tracking Criterion
The frequency-tracking criterion is only checked when no undervoltage blocking is given.
The frequency of the Underfrequency load shedding function is calculated via the angle difference algo-
rithm, which requires the sampling-frequency tracking to be active (see 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking).
If the sampling-frequency tracking is inactive, all the protection stages are blocked and the signal Invalid
freq. blocking is issued.
Activating/Deactivating Protection Stages

The mechanism of exclusive stage activation is described in Exclusive Stage Activation, Page 1019.
Value Description
df/dt Calculated rate of frequency change
• Default setting (_:18121:101) Minimum voltage = 0.700 p.u.

If the magnitude of V1 is smaller than the Minimum voltage, all protection stages are blocked.
The Minimum voltage parameter is set as a per-unit value related to the rated voltage of the connected
voltage measuring point. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Positive power direction
• Default setting (_:18121:115) Positive power direction = inv. to CT neu.pnt sett.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the Positive power direction parameter, you define the positive active-power flow direction of
the function in relation to the standard forward direction of the protection functionality.
The following figure shows 2 application scenarios of protection devices with the Underfrequency load
shedding function.
[dw_UFLS_positive power direction, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-241 Application Scenarios
Dotted arrow: Standard forward direction of the protection functionality

Solid arrow: Positive active-power flow direction
The standard forward direction of the protection functionality is from the busbar to the protected object which
is the transformer for device 1 or the feeder for device 2. The standard forward direction of the protection
functionality is configured via the (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter of the
measuring point I-3ph (see chapter 6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3‑Phase
(I-3ph)). For the load-shedding function, the positive active-power flow direction can differ from the standard
forward direction of the protection functionality, such as for device 1. To adapt the function to this condition,
the Positive power direction parameter is used. With the Positive power direction parameter,
you can set the positive active-power flow direction either to the same as or to the inverse of the standard
forward direction.
• For device 1, set the Positive power direction parameter to inv. to CT neu.pnt sett..
Then, the positive active-power flow direction of the power criterion is opposite to the standard forward
direction of the protection functionality. Consequently, the Underfrequency load shedding function
sheds the medium-voltage busbar when the positive power-flow direction is from the high-voltage
busbar to the medium-voltage busbar.
• For device 2, set the Positive power direction parameter to acc. to CT neu.pnt sett..
Then, the positive active-power flow direction of the power criterion is the same as the standard forward
direction of the protection functionality. Consequently, the Underfrequency load shedding function
sheds the feeder when the positive power-flow direction is from the medium-voltage busbar to the
feeder.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Power criterion, Phi (power criterion), Min. current (power crit.)
• Default setting (_:18121:103) Power criterion = yes
• Default setting (_:18121:106) Phi (power criterion) = -5°
• Default setting (_:18121:104) Min. current (power crit.) = 0.050 p.u.

The power criterion evaluates the power-flow direction as a blocking criterion for the protection stages.
• With the Power criterion parameter, you configure whether to apply the power criterion or not.
If a feeder can deliver active power towards the busbar, or if the medium-voltage busbar can deliver
active power to the high-voltage busbar, Siemens recommends using the power criterion to exclude
the feeder or the medium-voltage busbar from being shed under this condition. If a feeder or the
medium-voltage busbar is always consuming active power, the power criterion is not required.
• With the Phi (power criterion) parameter, you decide whether the protection stage is blocked
or released in the case of low active-power flow. If the active-power flow is low, the determined active
power-flow direction is not always reliable.
For Phi (power criterion) ≤ 0, the protection stage is released for a clear forward active power-
flow direction. If the active power-flow direction is not reliable, the protection stages are blocked. For
Phi (power criterion) > 0, the behavior is the contrary.
The Phi (power criterion) parameter can be set depending on your philosophy.
• With the Min. current (power crit.) parameter, you set the minimum positive-sequence current
threshold to achieve a reliable active-power criterion result. The Min. current (power crit.)
parameter is set as a per-unit value related to the rated current of the connected current measuring
point. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: df/dt-rising blk. criterion, df/dt-rising blk. threshold, df/dt-falling blk.

criterion, df/dt-falling blk. threshold
• Default setting (_:18121:107) df/dt-rising blk. criterion = no
• Default setting (_:18121:108) df/dt-rising blk. threshold = 1.0 Hz/s
• Default setting (_:18121:109) df/dt-falling blk. criterion = no
• Default setting (_:18121:110) df/dt-falling blk. threshold = 3.0 Hz/s

If the change rate of df/dt is too high, the Underfrequency load shedding function may not be applicable
anymore.
With the parameters df/dt-rising blk. criterion and df/dt-falling blk. criterion, you
determine whether to check the df/dt-rising blocking and the df/dt-falling blocking.
With the parameters df/dt-rising blk. threshold and df/dt-falling blk. threshold, you set
the threshold rates of df/dt-rising and df/dt-falling.
Parameter: df/dt measuring window
• Default setting (_:18121:111) df/dt measuring window = 5 periods

With the df/dt measuring window parameter, you optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time of
the function.
The default setting provides the maximum measuring accuracy. If you do not have specific requirements for a
decreased pickup time, Siemens recommends using the default setting.
For a non-sensitive setting (high threshold value), you can set the df/dt measuring window parameter to
a value which is smaller than 5 periods.
Parameter: df/dt dropout differential
• Default setting (_:18121:112) df/dt dropout differential = 0.1 Hz/s

With the df/dt dropout differential parameter, you define the dropout threshold of the parameters
df/dt-rising blk. threshold and df/dt-falling blk. threshold.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The default setting is a reasonable value. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Logic of the Stage
[lo_load shedding_stage, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-242 Logic Diagram of the Underfrequency Load Shedding Stage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Pickup and Operate

If the following 3 conditions are all fulfilled, a Pickup indication is issued:
• The frequency value drops below the Threshold.
• The Blocking input from the function block General is inactive.
• The preceding 2 conditions are fulfilled during the configured number of frequency measurement cycles
(cycle time = 10 ms). You can set the number with the parameter f< stabilization counter.
If the Pickup signal is maintained during the Operate delay time, an Operate indication is issued.
Exclusive Stage Activation

A load-shedding schema defines in which order feeders (power consumers) are disconnected. To not discrimi-
nate power consumers, this order is changed regularly. The mechanism of exclusive stage activation supports
this order change efficiently.
Even though multiple protection stages are instantiated and their Mode parameters are set to on, you can only
activate one stage at a time via the exclusive stage activation in an Underfrequency load shedding function.
The exclusive stage activation comprises the following input signals:
• The SPS signal >Exclusive activation which is offered in the protection stage.
• The SPC signal Exclusive activation which is offered in the protection stage.
This SPC signal allows the exclusive stage activation from a station controller.
• The SPS signal >Activate all stages which is offered in the function block General.
The protection stage which receives the newest SPS signal >Exclusive activation or SPC signal Exclu-
sive activation remains active and all other stages are deactivated. If 2 or more protection stages
simultaneously receive the SPS signals >Exclusive activation and/or the SPC signals Exclusive
activation, only the protection stage with the largest stage number is activated.
If the SPS signal >Activate all stages is activated, the exclusive stage activation is reset, that is, all
protection stages whose Mode parameters are set to on become active again.
After a normal device restart (reset), the statuses of the protection stages which were influenced by the SPS
signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal Exclusive activation are still maintained.
After an initial startup, the exclusive stage activation is reset.
EXAMPLE
Configured protection stages: Protection stages 1 to 8
Protection stages whose Mode parameters are set to on: Protection stages 1 to 8
The following cases occur in sequence:
• Case 1:
Scenario: In the protection stage 1, the SPS signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal
Exclusive activation is activated.
Result: The protection stage 1 remains active and stages 2 to 8 are deactivated.
• Case 2:
Scenario: In the protection stage 2, the SPS signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal
Exclusive activation is activated.
Result: The protection stage 2 is activated, the stage 1 is deactivated, and stages 3 to 8 remain deacti-
vated.
• Case 3:
Scenario: The SPS signal >Activate all stages is activated.
Result: The protection stages 1 to 8 are activated.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Case 4:
Scenario: In the protection stages 2 to 4, the SPS signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal
Exclusive activation is activated simultaneously.
Result: The protection stage 4 is activated and the other stages are deactivated.
• Case 5:
Scenario: A normal device restart (reset) occurs.
Result: After the device restart, the protection stage 4 remains activated and the other stages remain
deactivated.
Blocking the Stage

stage:
• Via the Inactive input from the function block General

The sampling frequency tracking makes a wide frequency-operating range possible. If the stage has picked up
before leaving the frequency-operating range, the pickup is maintained. The Pickup signal is reset when a
blocking condition becomes active.
• Default setting (_:18151:3) Threshold = 49.00 Hz for frated = 50 Hz
With the Threshold parameter, you define the underfrequency pickup value of the stage. The specific value
depends on the application and the total number of the stages applied in parallel.

Set the Operate delay parameter for the specific application.
• Default setting(_:18151:5) Dropout differential = 20 mHz

With the Dropout differential parameter, you define the dropout threshold. For example, if you set the
Threshold to 49.00 Hz and the dropout differential to 20 mHz, the stage drops out at 49.02 Hz.
Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the setting value can remain at the default value of
20 mHz.

With the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter, you can block the operate indication, the fault
Parameter: f< stabilization counter
• Default setting(_:18121:113) f< stabilization counter = 6

You can configure the f< stabilization counter parameter in the function block General.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the f< stabilization counter parameter, you set the number of measurement cycles in which the
measured frequency value must be lower than the frequency threshold to meet the pickup condition. With
this setting, you can optimize the pickup-condition reliability versus the pickup time.
The measuring cycle time is 10 ms. With the default setting of 6, the pickup time is the sum of the inherent
frequency measuring time (approx. 10 ms to 30 ms) plus the 6 times measuring repetition of 60 ms, which is
70 ms to 90 ms in total.
In order to avoid a wrong pickup in case of a phase jump, Siemens recommends setting the value of the f<
stabilization counter parameter not below 5.
6.36.5 Settings

General
_:18121:101 General:Minimum 0.300 p.u. to 0.900 p.u. 0.700 p.u.
voltage
_:18121:103 General:Power criterion • no yes
• yes
_:18121:104 General:Min. current 0.020 p.u. to 0.200 p.u. 0.050 p.u.
(power crit.)
_:18121:115 General:Positive power • inv. to CT neu.pnt sett. inv. to CT
direction neu.pnt sett.
• acc. to CT neu.pnt sett.
_:18121:106 General:Phi (power crite- -30° to 30° -5°
rion)
_:18121:107 General:df/dt-rising blk. • no no
criterion
• yes
_:18121:108 General:df/dt-rising blk. 0.1 Hz/s to 20.0 Hz/s 1.0 Hz/s
threshold
_:18121:109 General:df/dt-falling blk. • no no
criterion
• yes
_:18121:110 General:df/dt-falling blk. 0.1 Hz/s to 20.0 Hz/s 3.0 Hz/s
threshold
_:18121:111 General:df/dt measuring 2 periods to 5 periods 5 periods
window
_:18121:112 General:df/dt dropout 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s
differential
_:18121:113 General:f< stabilization 1 to 20 6
counter
Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:18151:5 Stage 1:Dropout differ- 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
ential

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
General
_:18121:501 General:>Activate all stages SPS I
_:18121:300 General:V1< block SPS O
_:18121:306 General:Invalid freq. blocking SPS O
_:18121:301 General:Power crit. blocking SPS O
_:18121:302 General:I1< blocking SPS O
_:18121:303 General:df/dt-rising blocking SPS O
_:18121:304 General:df/dt-falling blocking SPS O
_:18121:305 General:df/dt MV O
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:18151:500 Stage 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:18151:502 Stage 1:>Exclusive activation SPS I
_:18151:347 Stage 1:Exclusive activation SPC C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.37 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
The function Rate of frequency change protection is used to:
• Detect a frequency change quickly
• Prevent the system from not secure states caused by unbalance between the generated and consumed
active power
• Network decoupling
• Load shedding
The function Rate of frequency change protection can be used in protection function groups containing a
3‑phase voltage measurement.
2 function block types are available:
• df/dt rising
• df/dt falling
The function Rate of frequency change protection is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 df/dt rising
stage and 1 df/dt falling stage. A maximum of 5 df/dt rising stages and 5 df/dt falling stages can operate
simultaneously within the function. Both of the function block types are similar in structure.
Undervoltage check and df/dt calculation are general functionalities and take place on the function level. All
stages use these general functionalities.
[dw_dfdt 01, 1, en_US]
6.37.3 General Functions (Undervoltage Test, df/dt Calculation)
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of undervoltage check and df/dt calculation. It applies to all types of
stages.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_dfdtgf, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-244 Logic Diagram of General Functionality
Measurand
This function uses the frequency calculated via the angle difference algorithm.
For more information, refer to chapter 6.34.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage.
The frequency difference is calculated over a settable time interval (default setting: 5 periods).
The ratio between the frequency difference and the time difference reflects the frequency change which can
be positive or negative.
A stabilization counter works to avoid overfunction. This counter is increased if the set threshold value is
exceeded. If the value drops below the threshold value, the counter is reset immediately. The counter is set to
8 internally and is activated at each half system cycle.
If the measuring voltage drops below the Minimum voltage, the Rate of frequency change protection is
blocked because precise frequency values cannot be calculated anymore.
Value Description
df/dt Calculated rate of frequency change

For the Undervoltage blocking, 65 % of the rated voltage of the protected object is recommended.
The method of measurement uses the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage. When determining the setting
value, keep in mind that the absolute value of the sound positive-sequence voltage is equal to the absolute
value of the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value.
• Default setting (_:13171:137) Measuring window = 5 periods

You can use the Measuring window parameter to optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time of
the function. For information regarding pickup time and measuring accuracy, refer to the technical data.
The default setting provides maximum measuring accuracy. If you do not have specific requirements for a
decreased pickup time, Siemens recommends using the default setting.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The default setting is a reasonable compromise between measuring accuracy and pickup time. For a non-
sensitive setting (high threshold value), you can set the parameter Measuring window to a smaller value.
Logic of the Stage
[lo_dfdt_st, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-245 Logic Diagram of Rate of Frequency Change Protection
(1) For the stage type df/dt rising, the value df/dt rising is used.
Frequency Rising/Falling
The stage df/dt falling is used to detect frequency falling and the stage df/dt rising is used to detect
frequency rising.
You set the threshold value as an absolute value. You define the frequency-change direction via the selected
stage type.

• Via the binary input signal >Block stage
• Via the undervoltage blocking when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Default setting (_:13231:3) Threshold = 3.000 Hz/s

The pickup value depends on the application and is determined by power-system conditions. In most cases,
a network analysis will be necessary. A sudden disconnection of loads leads to a surplus of active power. The
frequency rises and causes a positive frequency change. On the other hand, a failure of generators leads to a
deficit of active power. The frequency drops and results in a negative frequency change.
The following relations can be used as an example for estimation. They apply for the change rate at the
beginning of a frequency change (approximate 1 s).
Where:
frated Rated frequency
ΔP Active power change
ΔP = PConsumption - PGeneration
Srated Rated apparent power of the machines
H Inertia constant
Typical data for H:

For hydro generators (salient-pole machines) H = 1.5 s to 6 s
For turbine-driven generators (non-salient pole rotors) H = 2 s to 10 s
For industrial turbine-driven generators H = 3 s to 4 s
EXAMPLE
frated = 50 Hz
H=3s
Case 1: ΔP/Srated = 0.12
Case 2: ΔP/Srated = 0.48
Case 1: df/dt = -1 Hz/s
Case 2: df/dt = -4 Hz/s

You can use the Operate delay parameter to avoid overfunction due to disturbing influences (for example,
switching operations). If the protection function is supposed to respond quickly, set the Operate delay
parameter to 0 s.
For monitoring small changes (< 1 Hz/s), a small time delay is useful to avoid overfunctioning.
• Recommended setting value (_:13231:4) Dropout differential = 0.10 Hz/s

You can use the Dropout differential parameter to define the dropout value. The recommended value
is 0.10 Hz/s.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i In case of power-system incidents, especially in case of transmission incidents and influence of voltage-
stabilizing measures via power-electronic components (reactive-power compensation through SVC), the
magnitude and the phase angle of the voltage can change. Sensitive settings can lead to overfunction.
Therefore, it is reasonable to block the Rate of Frequency Change Protection if other protection func-
tions, for example, residual voltage or negative-sequence voltage, pick up. To do this, use the blocking
input >Block stage and connect it via CFC.
6.37.5 Settings

General
voltage
_:13171:137 General:Measuring 2 periods to 5 periods 5 periods
window
df/dt falling1
_:13231:1 df/dt falling1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13231:2 df/dt falling1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13231:3 df/dt falling1:Threshold 0.100 Hz/s to 20.000 Hz/s 3.000 Hz/s
_:13231:4 df/dt falling1:Dropout 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s
differential
_:13231:6 df/dt falling1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay
df/dt rising1
_:13201:1 df/dt rising1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13201:2 df/dt rising1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13201:3 df/dt rising1:Threshold 0.100 Hz/s to 20.000 Hz/s 3.000 Hz/s
_:13201:4 df/dt rising1:Dropout 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s
differential
_:13201:6 df/dt rising1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay

(Type)
General
_:13171:301 General:df/dt MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Group indicat.
df/dt falling1
_:13231:81 df/dt falling1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13231:54 df/dt falling1:Inactive SPS O
_:13231:52 df/dt falling1:Behavior ENS O
_:13231:53 df/dt falling1:Health ENS O
_:13231:55 df/dt falling1:Pickup ACD O
_:13231:56 df/dt falling1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13231:57 df/dt falling1:Operate ACT O
df/dt rising1
_:13201:81 df/dt rising1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13201:54 df/dt rising1:Inactive SPS O
_:13201:52 df/dt rising1:Behavior ENS O
_:13201:53 df/dt rising1:Health ENS O
_:13201:55 df/dt rising1:Pickup ACD O
_:13201:56 df/dt rising1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13201:57 df/dt rising1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.38 Vector-Jump Protection
The Vector-jump protection function:
• Is used for network decoupling of the power generating unit in case of a load loss
• Evaluates the phase-angle jump of the voltage phasors
The Vector-jump protection function can be used in the following function groups:
• Voltage-current 3-phase
• Voltage 3-phase
The Vector-jump protection function comes factory-set with a Δφ stage.
The following stages can operate simultaneously within the function:
• 1 Δφ stage
• 1 I1 < Release stage
[dw_VJP_structure, 1, en_US]
Basic Principle of Vector-Jump Protection

The following 2 figures show the basic principle of the function Vector-jump protection.
The following figure shows the voltage vector of the steady state condition. The load current causes a voltage
drop between the internal voltage Vp and the generator terminal voltage V.
If the load is switched off, the following situations occur:
• The current is reduced.
• A smaller voltage drop is caused.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_load loss, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-247 Voltage Vector of the Steady State
The following figure shows the situations after the load is switched off:
• The terminal voltage V changes to V'.
• An additional phase-angle jump occurs.

A phase-angle jump occurs with load loss and is the evaluation criterion for the function Vector-jump protec-
tion. If the phase-angle differential exceeds a set threshold, the generator circuit breaker or the circuit breaker
of the system switch opens. Therefore, the generator unit can be protected against unacceptable stress.
[dw_vector change, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-248 Vector Change after the Load Shedding
Table 6-18 Vector Description
Vector Description
Vp Vector of the generator internal voltage (rotor voltage)
V Vector of the generator terminal voltage
ΔV Vector of the voltage differential
V' Vector of the terminal voltage after the load shedding
ΔV' Vector of the voltage differential after the load shedding

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The following measures are applied to avoid unwanted tripping:
• Correction of steady-state deviations from rated frequency
• Frequency operating range limited to frated ± 3 Hz
• High measuring accuracy by using frequency-tracked measured values and evaluation of the positive-
sequence phasor
• Enabling the minimum voltage for the function Vector-jump protection
• Blocking the function when the primary voltage is switched on or off as switching can lead to a phase-
angle jump
Logic
[lo_VJP_general, 1, en_US]
[lo_VJP_general_2, 2, en_US]
Phase-Angle Calculation
The phase-angle differential is calculated at different time intervals (t-T, t-2T, t-3T45) from the vector of the
positive-sequence voltage via a delta-interval measurement. With the current measured power frequency, the
measuring errors of the angle measurement caused by frequency deviations are compensated.
Range
If the measured frequency or voltage is below the set threshold, the function Vector-jump protection is
blocked.
The voltage and frequency bands have the following limits:
• The threshold of the voltage band is configurable.
• The frequency band ranges is fixed from frated - 3 Hz to frated + 3 Hz.
45 T = period or cycle time of the power system

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measurand
The general functionality calculates the phase-angle displacement Δφ and sends it to the Δφ stage. Δφ is used
for comparison with the parameter Threshold Δφ. Δφ is displayed in the functional measured value and can
be routed in a fault record and displayed in the fault log.
The functional measured values of Δφ in HMI are displayed differently in the following situations:
• If the function Vector-jump protection is inactive, the function value of Δφ is displayed as “---”
• If the function Vector-jump protection is active and has not picked up, the functional measured value of
Δφ is displayed as 0.0°
• If the function Vector-jump protection is active and has picked up, the functional measured value of Δφ
is displayed as a calculated value (for example, 12.0°) and remains unchanged until the next pickup of
the function Vector-jump protection.
Parameter: Threshold V1 min
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Threshold V1 min = 46.189 V

With the parameter Threshold V1 min, you can define the minimum threshold of the voltage band.
The setting value is closed to the allowed lower limit of the voltage band. The default setting is 80 % of the
rated positive-sequence voltage. The value of the rated positive-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3.
Parameter: Threshold V1 max
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Threshold V1 max = 75.058 V

With the parameter Threshold V1 max, you can define the maximum threshold of the voltage band.
The setting value is closed to the allowed higher limit of the voltage band. The default setting is 130 % of the
rated positive-sequence voltage. The value of the rated positive-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3.
Parameter: T Block
• Default setting (_:2311:6) T Block = 0.10 s

With the parameter T Block, you set the dropout delay of the Δφ stage.
When voltages are connected or disconnected, the overfunction can be avoided with the timer T Block.
Siemens recommends to use the default setting of the parameter T Block. Keep in mind that the parameter
T Block has always to be set to 2 cycles more than the measuring window for vector-jump measurement.
6.38.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:102 General:Threshold V1 0.300 V to 175.000 V 46.189 V
min
_:2311:101 General:Threshold V1 0.300 V to 175.000 V 75.058 V
max
_:2311:6 General:T Block 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:Δφ MV O
_:2311:300 General:Δφ out of meas. range SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
6.38.4 Δφ Stage
Logic
[lo_delta_phi_stage, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-250 Logic Diagram of the Δφ Stage
In the logic diagram, the I1 < Release stage is instantiated. You can find more information in chapter
If the I1 < Release stage is not instantiated, the AND operation has no influence. The Operate indication is
issued under the following conditions:
• The parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked is set to no.
• The operate delay expires.
• The phase-angle differential exceeds the parameter Threshold Δφ.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measurand
The Δφ stage gets the measured value Δφ from the general functionality.
Pickup
The Δφ stage compares the value of the vector jump Δφ with the Threshold Δφ.
If the value of the Threshold Δφ is exceeded, the pickup delay starts.
The vector jump Δφ is stored in an RS flip-flop. Trippings can be delayed by the associated time delay.
Blocking the Stage

stage:
• The parameter Mode is in the state off.
• The binary input signal >Block stage is active.
• The signal Δφ out of meas. range is active.

recording, and the fault log. If you want the stage to have a warning indication only, set the parameter
Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes.
Parameter: Threshold Δφ
• Default setting (_:19261:101) Threshold Δφ = 10°

With the parameter Threshold Δφ, you can set the pickup value of the Δφ stage.
The parameter value to be set for the vector jump depends on the supply and load conditions. Load changes
cause a jump of the voltage vector. The value to be set must be established in accordance with the particular
power system. An estimation can be done based on the system equivalent circuit in Figure 6-248. A network
calculation considering the relevant source and load situations will be more precise.
If the setting for the parameter Threshold Δφ is too sensitive, every time loads are connected or discon-
nected, the protection function performs a network decoupling. Therefore, If no other calculated value is
applicable to the setting of this parameter, Siemens recommends using the default setting.

With the parameter Operate delay, you can set the operate delay of the Δφ stage. For the tripping stage,
set the operate delay between 0.00 s and 60.00 s.
Siemens recommends the default setting.
The following requirements can necessitate a change of the parameter Operate delay with respect to the
default setting:
• The operate indication should be transmitted with delay to a programmable logic.
• There shall be enough time for an external blocking to take effect.
Parameter: T Reset
• Default setting T Reset = 5.00 s

With the parameter T Reset, you can set the reset time for the Pickup indication stored in the RS flip-flop.
When the timer T Reset expires, the protection function is reset automatically.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The reset time meets the following conditions:
• The reset time depends on the decoupling requirements
• The reset time must expire before the circuit breaker is reclosed
6.38.4.3 Settings

Stage Δφ 1
_:19261:1 Stage Δφ 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:19261:2 Stage Δφ 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:19261:101 Stage Δφ 1:Threshold 2.0° to 30.0° 10.0°
Δφ
_:19261:6 Stage Δφ 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:19261:7 Stage Δφ 1:T Reset 0.00 s to 60.00 s 5.00 s

(Type)
Stage Δφ 1
_:19261:81 Stage Δφ 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:19261:54 Stage Δφ 1:Inactive SPS O
_:19261:52 Stage Δφ 1:Behavior ENS O
_:19261:53 Stage Δφ 1:Health ENS O
_:19261:55 Stage Δφ 1:Pickup ACD O
_:19261:56 Stage Δφ 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:19261:57 Stage Δφ 1:Operate ACT O
6.38.5 I1 < Release Stage
Logic
[lo_undercurrent_release_stage, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-251 Logic Diagram of the I1 < Release Stage
The I1 < Release stage is an optional stage and is used to reduce the risk of overfunction.
The indication Undercurrent release is an additional safety criterion to avoid an unexpected trip. It
indicates a load loss of the connected line to the system and the phase-angle criterion is released. If any load
in the network is switched on or off, an unexpected trip can occur.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If the I1 < Release stage is not instantiated, the Δφ stage works without current-flow criterion. You can find
more information in chapter 6.38.4.1 Description.
If the positive-sequence current falls below the parameter I< Threshold, the message Undercurrent
release is issued and is forwarded to the Δφ stage.
Parameter: I< Threshold
• Default setting (_:101) I< Threshold = 0.100 A

With the parameter I< Threshold, you can set the pickup value of the I < Release stage corresponding to
the specific application. Consider that the current measuring point must be on the line side. The parameter I<
Threshold depends on the load situation.
6.38.5.3 Settings

I1 < Release #
_:101 I1 < Release #:I< 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
Threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A

(Type)
I1 < Release #
_:300 I1 < Release #:Undercurrent release SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.39 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function (ANSI 32) is used to:
• Detect whether the active or reactive power rises above or drops below a set threshold
• Monitor agreed power limits and output warning indications
• Detect both active and reactive power feedback in the power systems or on electric machines
• Detect machines (motors, generators) running without load and output an indication to shut them down.
• Be integrated into any automation solution, for example, to monitor very specific power limits (further
logical processing in CFC)
The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function can be integrated in function groups, which provide measured
voltages and currents of the 3-phases for calculation of the power.
The 3-phase power protection (P,Q) function comes with one factory-set stage each for the active and the
reactive power. The following stages are preconfigured:
• Power P>
• Power Q>
• Power P<
• Power Q<
A maximum of 4 active power stages and 4 reactive power stages can be operated simultaneously in the
function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
[dw_GPP 3-phase structure, 2, en_US]
Logical Combination of Output Signals

The operate indications of the active and reactive power stage(s) can be logically combined in CFC. When an
operate indication is present in both the active and the reactive power stage, an alarm indication is generated.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_GPP operate indication logical comb, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-253 Logical Combination of Operate Indications in CFC
6.39.3 Active Power Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_3-phase active power, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-254 Logic Diagram of the Active Power Stage (Stage Type: Power P<)
Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is analyzed by the tripping
stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of phase A,
power of phase B or power of phase C.
Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power P>) or as a smaller
stage (stage type: Power P<).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the
definition of the signs.
[dw_tilt-power active power, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-255 Tilt-Power Characteristic
Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
P> or Power P<) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.
Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, a picked-up stage is reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• Internally or externally via the binary input signal >Block stage
• The frequency is less than or equal to 10 Hz.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.39.4 Reactive Power Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_3phase reactive power, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-256 Logic Diagram of the Reactive Power Stage (Stage Type: Power Q<)
Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is processed by the tripping
stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of phase A,
power of phase B or power of phase C.
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power Q>) or as a smaller
stage (stage type: Power Q<).
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the
definition of the signs.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_tilt-power reactive power, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-257 Tilt-Power Characteristic
Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
Q> or Power Q<) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.
Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally
via the binary input signal >Block stage.
6.39.5 Application Example
The setting of the function will be explained using an active/reactive power range as an example. If the appa-
rent power phasor is within the power range (in Figure 6-258 tripping zone defined by characteristics), an
alarm indication is generated. For this purpose, you have to make an AND operation of the stage indications
of the active and reactive power stage in CFC. The function used is 3-phase power measurement. Figure 6-258
shows the threshold values and the location of the characteristics in the PQ diagram.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_GPP PQ diagram, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-258 Pickup Values and Characteristic Curves
6.39.6 Setting Notes for the Active Power Stage
Stage Type
In the following example, a drop of the active power below a threshold is to be monitored. In the 3-phase
circuit breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power P<.
• Recommended setting value (_:6271:105) Measured value = positive seq. power

The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is evaluated. For 3-phase
measurement, Siemens recommends to evaluate the positive-sequence system power.

The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the active power stage. In the example,
the pickup characteristic runs across the point of origin of the coordinates. Set the parameter Threshold to
0 %.
NOTE
i If you use several settings groups, consider the following:
• The threshold of a stage must have the same sign in all settings groups.
• Switching from a positive threshold to a negative threshold or vice versa is not allowed. As a result,
DIGSI reports an inconsistency.
• If you want to change the sign of the threshold of a stage in an additional settings group, instantiate
a new stage and enable it. If the new stage should not be effective in another settings group, disable
the stage there.

A hysteresis of 5 % is sufficient for most applications. The setting value for the lower stage is therefore 1.05.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Tilt power characteristic
• Recommended setting value (_:6271:103) Tilt power characteristic = +70°

The Tilt power characteristic parameter is used to incline the pickup characteristic. In the above
example, an inclination is required. The setting value is +70° (for a definition of the sign, see Figure 6-255).
• Recommended setting value (_:6271:7) Dropout delay = 20 ms

The Dropout delay parameter maintains the pickup even if the measured value drops momentarily below
the threshold value. A delay is required for very low pickup values to prevent a so-called chattering of the
function. In the example, the setting value is 20 ms.

The Operate delay must be set for the specific application. In the example, a setting value of 100 ms has
been selected.
6.39.7 Setting Notes for the Reactive Power Stage
Stage Type
In the example, the reactive power is to be monitored if it falls below the threshold. In the 3-phase circuit
breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power Q<.
• Recommended setting value (_:6331:105) Measured value = positive seq. power

The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is evaluated. For 3-phase
measurement, Siemens recommends to evaluate the positive-sequence system power.

The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the reactive power stage. In the example,
the pickup characteristic runs across the point of origin of the coordinates. Set the parameter Threshold to 0
%.
NOTE
i If you use several settings groups, consider the following:
• The threshold value of a stage must have the same sign in all settings groups.
• Switching from a positive threshold value to a negative threshold value or vice versa is not allowed. As
a result, DIGSI reports an inconsistency.
• If you want to change the sign of the threshold value of a stage in an additional settings group,
instantiate a new stage and enable it. If the new stage should not be effective in another settings
group, disable the stage there.

A hysteresis of 5 % is sufficient for most applications. The setting value for the lower stage is therefore 0.95.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Tilt power characteristic
• Recommended setting value (_:6331:103) Tilt power characteristic = +20°

The Tilt power characteristic parameter is used to incline the pickup characteristic. In the example
(see Figure 6-258), the power characteristic has a tilt of 20°. Set the Tilt power characteristic
parameter to +20° (for a definition of the sign, see Figure 6-257).
• Recommended setting value (_:6331:7) Dropout delay = 20 ms

The Dropout delay parameter maintains the pickup even if the measured value drops momentarily below
the threshold value. A delay is required for very low pickup values to prevent a so-called chattering of the
function. In the example, the setting value is 20 ms.

The Operate delay must be set for the specific application. In the example, a setting value of 100 ms has
been selected.
6.39.8 Settings

Power P> 1
_:6241:1 Power P> 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6241:2 Power P> 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:6241:104 Power P> 1:Measured value • power of phase A positive seq.
power
• power of phase B
• power of phase C
• positive seq. power
_:6241:3 Power P> 1:Threshold -200.0 % to -1.0 % 80.0 %
1.0 % to 200.0 %
_:6241:101 Power P> 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:6241:103 Power P> 1:Tilt power char- -89.0 ° to 89.0 ° 0.0 °
acteristic
_:6241:7 Power P> 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6241:6 Power P> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Power P< 1
_:6271:1 Power P< 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6271:2 Power P< 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:6271:105 Power P< 1:Measured value • power of phase A positive seq.
power
_:6271:3 Power P< 1:Threshold -200.0 % to -1.0 % 5.0 %
1.0 % to 200.0 %
_:6271:101 Power P< 1:Dropout ratio 1.01 to 1.10 1.05
_:6271:103 Power P< 1:Tilt power char- -89.0 ° to 89.0 ° 0.0 °
acteristic
_:6271:7 Power P< 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6271:6 Power P< 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Power Q> 1
_:6301:1 Power Q> 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6301:2 Power Q> 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:6301:105 Power Q> 1:Measured • power of phase A positive seq.
value power
_:6301:3 Power Q> 1:Threshold -200.0 % to -1.0 % 70.0 %
1.0 % to 200.0 %
_:6301:101 Power Q> 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:6301:103 Power Q> 1:Tilt power char- -89.0 ° to 89.0 ° 0.0 °
acteristic
_:6301:7 Power Q> 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6301:6 Power Q> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Power Q< 1
_:6331:1 Power Q< 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6331:2 Power Q< 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:6331:105 Power Q< 1:Measured • power of phase A positive seq.
value power
_:6331:3 Power Q< 1:Threshold -200.0 % to -1.0 % -30.0 %
1.0 % to 200.0 %
_:6331:101 Power Q< 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:6331:103 Power Q< 1:Tilt power char- -89.0 ° to 89.0 ° 0.0 °
acteristic
_:6331:7 Power Q< 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6331:6 Power Q< 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Power P> 1
_:6241:81 Power P> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6241:54 Power P> 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6241:52 Power P> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6241:53 Power P> 1:Health ENS O
_:6241:55 Power P> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6241:56 Power P> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6241:57 Power P> 1:Operate ACT O
Power P< 1
_:6271:81 Power P< 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6271:54 Power P< 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6271:52 Power P< 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6271:53 Power P< 1:Health ENS O
_:6271:55 Power P< 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6271:56 Power P< 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6271:57 Power P< 1:Operate ACT O
Power Q> 1
_:6301:81 Power Q> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6301:54 Power Q> 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6301:52 Power Q> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6301:53 Power Q> 1:Health ENS O
_:6301:55 Power Q> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6301:56 Power Q> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6301:57 Power Q> 1:Operate ACT O
Power Q< 1
_:6331:81 Power Q< 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6331:54 Power Q< 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6331:52 Power Q< 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6331:53 Power Q< 1:Health ENS O
_:6331:55 Power Q< 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6331:56 Power Q< 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6331:57 Power Q< 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.40 Reverse-Power Protection
The Reverse-power protection function (ANSI 32R):
• Monitors the motor operation of generators and thus detects driving-power failure
• Prevents endangering the turbine (e.g. the turbine-blade damage due to overheating) by opening the
circuit breaker of the system
• Protects a turbo-generator set

For the generator, there is a danger that the turbo-generator set accelerates and reaches overspeed in case
of an incorrect residual-steam passage (quick-stop valves defective) after the circuit breaker has opened.
Consequently, disconnecting the system (opening the circuit breaker of the system) shall only occur after
reverse power (active-power consumption) has been detected.
The Reverse-power protection function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of 2 stages can be
operated simultaneously within the function.
In all function groups, the function works with a 3-phase voltage and current interface.
[dw_rpp_structure, 3, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Function
[lo_RPP general functionality, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-260 Logic Diagram of the Cross-Stage Functionality
Calculating the Reverse Power

The reverse-power protection calculates the active power from the symmetrical components of the funda-
mental components of the voltages and currents. It generates the average value of the active power over
a fixed number of cycles. Since positive-sequence variables are used for evaluation, the reverse power is
determined independently of unbalance in currents or voltages. The frequency-tracking sampled values are
used for calculation. The determined reverse power corresponds to the load on the driving-power side. The
calculated active-power value corresponds to the total active power.
Taking the phase-displacement angle of the voltage and current transformers into account, the function
calculates the exact active power even with a high apparent power and a small cos φ. A constant correction
angle φcorr makes correction possible. The influence of the current-transformer angle error is predominant
here. Determine this constant correction angle when you commission the protection device in the plant and
adjust it as specified in the table (see Table 12-1).
Power Calculation and Angle Correction

To satisfy the high measuring-accuracy requirements, the power measured value is additionally averaged
over 16 cycles before it is supplied to the protection function. The active power is calculated from the
symmetrical-component vectors of voltage V1 and current I1. The total power is evaluated as power. The
complex apparent power results from the following relationship. The real component is the active power:
S = 3V 1 ⋅ I 1 * = 3V1 ejϕV ⋅ I1 e-jϕI = 3V1 I1 ej(ϕV-ϕI)
P = 3V1 I1 cos(φ V-φ I)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The angle error between voltage transformer and current transformer has a strong influence on the measuring
accuracy. With the parameter (_:2311:101) Angle correction , you can correct the angle error. The
following 2 methods are possible here:
• Determine the angle error from the transformer test report data. Ask the transformer manufacturer for
these values when you order the transformer.
• While the generator is connected to the power system, measure to determine the angle error (see
chapter 12.15.2 Primary Test).
The influence on the power-system voltage makes it very difficult to test high-power generators with a
measurement while the generator is connected to the power system. In this case, you must determine the
angle error from the transformer test report data (see chapter 6.40.3.2 Application and Setting Notes).
Alternatively, you can use instrument transformers with small angle errors. This is ensured with class 0.2
instrument transformers (voltage and current). The following equation describes the influence of the angle
error:
P = 3V1 I1 cos(φ V + φ V,F - (φ I + φ I,F)) = 3V1 I1 cos(φ U - φ I + (φ V,F - φ I,F))
The angle error to be corrected results as:
ϕ Corr = φ V,F - φ I,F
To rotate in the correct direction, the correction angle is considered with inverted sign inside the unit.

You can use the following functional measured values to check the behavior of the protection function and to
support commissioning. The total power is represented as the measured value.
P1fast Positive-sequence system active power Angle correction influences the measured
calculated per cycle value
Q1fast Positive-sequence system reactive power Angle correction influences the measured
calculated per cycle value
P1avg Positive-sequence system active power Input value for Reverse-power protection
calculated from P1fast over 16 cycles
Q1avg Positive-sequence system reactive power –
calculated from Q1fast over 16 cycles

In the general functionality, you can adjust the parameter (_:2311:101) Angle correction. The param-
eter results from the angle error of the primary transformer. In SIPROTEC 5, the input transformers are
calibrated so that the angle error is negligible. You can assume an error of < 0.1°. There is no difference
between a protection input and an instrument-transformer input.
NOTE
i If you use class 0.2 instrument transformers on the primary side to avoid the influence of the angle, you
can connect a protection device with a protection current transformer without any problems.
Class 0.2 voltage transformers have a maximum admissible angle error of 10 min (0.17°). The angle error
of a class 0.2 measuring current transformer at rated current is approximately 10 min, at 0.2 Irated = 15 min,
and at 0.05 Irated = 30 min.
Parameter: Angle correction
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Angle correction = 0°

To determine the correction angle via measurement with the primary system, follow the instructions in
chapter 12.15.2 Primary Test.
You can use the method that is explained in the following section to derive the necessary correction angle
from the transformer measuring reports.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Example
This example uses a class 0.2 voltage transformer with a rated burden of 45 VA. The following data was taken
from the measuring report.
Table 6-19 For Phase A
V/Vn Sb = Sbr Sb = Sbr/4

ε v [%] δ v [min] ε v [%] δ v [min]
0.8 -0.14 0.31 0.16 -0.34
1 -0.15 0.43 0.15 -0.24
1.2 -0.16 0.68 0.14 -0.06
The values resulting for the phases B and C are almost identical.
Furthermore, a termination with a rated burden (other measuring devices are still connected) is assumed so
that an angle error of +0.43 min (rated-voltage value) is used as the calculation variable.
A current transformer of type 5PR is used here. This current transformer features a gap that limits the
remanence to 10 %. However, this gap results in larger angle errors. The following tables show excerpts from
the test reports.
Table 6-20 Phase A
I/In [%] Sb = Sbr (cos β = 0.8)

ε i [%] δ i [min]
100 0.314 46.40
Table 6-21 Phase B
I/In [%] Sb = Sbr (cos β = 0.8)

ε i [%] δ i [min]
100 0.247 35.10
Table 6-22 Phase C
I/In [%] Sb = Sbr (cos β = 0.8)

ε i [%] δ i [min]
100 0.702 41.10
Since the positive-sequence system power is evaluated in the device, take the sign into account when you add
the angle errors per phase, and divide the result by 3.
The following value results in this example:
The resulting correction angle is:
Set the parameter (_:2311:101) Angle correction = -0.67 °.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Minimum voltage V1
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Minimum voltage V1 = 5.000 V

With the parameter Minimum voltage V1, you can limit the operating range of the reverse-power protec-
tion. If the positive-sequence voltage falls below the set value, the reverse-power protection is deactivated. If
no other restrictions are known, Siemens recommends using the default setting.
6.40.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Angle correction -10.00 ° to 10.00 ° 0.00 °
voltage V1

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:P1avg MV O
_:2311:302 General:Q1avg MV O
_:2311:303 General:P1fast MV O
_:2311:304 General:Q1fast MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_RPP stage, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-261 Logic Diagram of the Reverse-Power Protection Stage
Trip Command
To bridge brief power consumption during synchronization or during power swings caused by system inci-
dents, tripping (shutdown of the generator via reverse power) is delayed by a settable time (for example,
10 s).
A brief delay is enough when the quick-stop valve is closed. Couple the position of the quick-stop valve via
the binary input signal >Stop valve closed . When quick stop is tripped, the short Operate delay thus
becomes effective.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking of the stage is possible externally or
internally via the binary input signal >Block stage .

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

If reverse power occurs in a power plant, the turbo-generator set must be disconnected from the electrical
power system. Operating the turbine without the minimum steam flow (cooling effect) is dangerous. For a
gas turbine cogeneration unit, the motor load can also be too great for the electrical power system.
• Recommended setting value (_:991:3) Threshold = -1.00 %

The friction losses that have to be overcome mainly determine the active power consumed by a turbo-gener-
ator set. Depending on the plant, the consumed active power is of the following ranges:
Steam turbines Preverse/Srated = 1.00 % to 3.00 %
Diesel drives Preverse/Srated> 5.00 %
Gas turbines Preverse/Srated = up to 30.00 %
You can measure the reverse power of the turbo-generator set yourself in a primary test by using the
protection function. Set the setting value P reverse, for example, to 0.5 times the value of the measured reverse
power. This power is shown additionally in the functional measured values in the Reverse-power protection
function (P1avg). For large machines with very small reverse power, you must use the angle-error correction
option of the current and voltage transformers.
NOTE
i In the current-input selection, you can select protection current transformers or instrument transformers
on the device side. Since the transformers are calibrated at the factory, there are hardly any differences
between the transformers for the Reverse-power protection function. You can thus always select device
inputs with a protection current transformer.
In contrast, a primary current transformer significantly influences the measuring accuracy via its angle
error. The angle error of a class 0.2 instrument transformer is significantly smaller than the angle error
of a class 5P protection current transformer. A separate function group is necessary for the connection to
an instrument transformer. Use a Voltage/current 3-phase function group and load the Reverse-power
protection function from the library.
Do not connect the Reverse-power protection function to a linear core-type transformer (for example, a
TPZ type), as these transformers have a large angle error (for example, approx. 180 min).
6.40.4.3 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:991:3 Stage 1:Threshold -30.00 % to -0.30 % -1.00 %
_:991:102 Stage 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
stop valve

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:991:500 Stage 1:>Stop valve closed SPS I
_:991:300 Stage 1:Operate del. stop val. ACT O
_:991:301 Stage 1:Operate w. stop valve ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.41 Overexcitation Protection
The Overexcitation protection (ANSI 24) is used for detecting high induction values in generators and
transformers. It protects the equipment from excessive thermal loads.
The induction is recorded indirectly by analyzing the V/f ratio (also referred to as Volt per Hertz protection).
Overvoltage leads to excessive magnetizing currents, while underfrequency leads to higher losses when
resetting the magnetization.
If the power system is disconnected and the voltage and frequency control function in the remaining system
does not react quickly or the power imbalance is excessive, there is a risk of overexcitation.
The Overexcitation protection function is used within protection function groups that have a 3-phase
voltage input. The function comes with the following factory-set stages:
• Thermal stage adjustable with a user-defined characteristic curve
• Definite-time stage which can be delayed using a time component

Within this function, the following maximum number of stages can be operated simultaneously: one stage
with a user-defined characteristic curve and 2 definite-time stages.
The group-indication output logic (see following figure) uses the logical OR function from the stage-selective
indications to generate the following group indications of the entire Overexcitation protection function:
• Pickup
• Operate Indication
[dw_ovexuf, 3, en_US]
Function Measured Value

(_:2311:322) V/f Value calculated by the voltage and the frequency

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.41.3 Stage with Dependent Characteristic Curve (Thermal Stage)
Logic
[lo_therm-char_V-f, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-263 Logic of the Overexcitation Protection with Thermal Characteristic Curve
(1) Heating
(2) Cooling
V/f Method of Measurement

The input values of the protection function are the continuously measured voltage and the frequency. The
phase-to-phase voltage is used to process the voltage. The angle difference method (see 6.34 Overfrequency
Protection) is used to determine the frequency. Both values form the V/f ratio. In order to arrive at an absolute
value, standardized data is applied.
Thus, the ratio is derived from:
[fo_verufn, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
with
V Measured voltage (maximum phase-to-phase voltage)
Vrated, obj. Adjusted rated voltage of the protected object
f Measured frequency
frated Adjusted rated frequency
Based on the definition above, the protection function refers exclusively to primary values of the protected
object. A deviation between the primary rated voltage of the voltage transformer and the protected object is
corrected automatically.
NOTE
i This fact must be considered during a secondary test.

More information can be found in chapter 12.17 Functional Test for Overexcitation Protection .
The function compares the calculated value of the measured V/f ratio with the threshold value and the
user-defined thermal characteristic curve.
Depending on the characteristic curve, a thermal trip signal is triggered after a pre-determined duration.
You can freely configure the thermal characteristic curve with the user-defined values. This provides a flexible
adjustment to the specified characteristics of the protected object. If the set threshold value (parameter
(_:13591:3) Threshold) is exceeded, the evaluation of the characteristic curve is initiated. Exceeding the
threshold value triggers an indication ((_:13591:55) Pickup). In addition, a definite-time stage may be
used to generate a delayed indication output as ((_:13591:301) Warning).
The pickup is used to start the integration process (weighted counting) of the thermal characteristic curve. If
the time as a factor of V/f is reached, the pickup is triggered. Based on the replica of the thermal behavior, the
trigger value is always 100 % (see Thermal Behavior, Page 1058).
If the value drops below the pickup threshold, the trip command is rescinded and the internal counter of the
parameterized cooling time (parameter (_:13591:102) Cooling time therm.replica) is reduced.
The dropout threshold of the pickup threshold is fixed to 0.98 * Threshold.
The thermal characteristic curve can be set through a maximum of 30 overexcitation value pairs V/f (referring
to the rated values) and the operate time t can be set. The default characteristic curve refers to a standard
transformer.
[sc_aulskn, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-264 Data Sheet for Adjustment of Thermal Characteristic Curve
The parameter Threshold (pickup threshold) affects the evaluation of the characteristic curve as follows:
If the Threshold is smaller than the first characteristic pair, the set time will be extended (see Figure 6-265).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_ovexak, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-265 Tripping Zone of the Thermal Characteristic Curve (I)
If the Threshold is greater, then a cutoff occurs (see Figure 6-266).
[dw_ovexab, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-266 Tripping Zone of the Thermal Characteristic Curve (II)
Warning Threshold
If the Threshold is exceeded, the time delay (parameter (_:13591:101) Warning delay) is started. If
the time delay has elapsed, the indication ((_:13591:301) Warning) will be displayed.
Thermal Behavior
The time derived from the characteristic curve and associated with the V/f value is set to 100 %. With each
function call, the time will be increased according to the respective weighted invocation interval. If the 100 %
value is exceeded, tripping is initiated. If the V/f value is changed, the associated time from the characteristic
curve is added as a new 100 % value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
In order to prevent excessive cooling times, the thermal storage has been limited internally to 150 %. The
fill level of the thermal storage will be provided as functional measured value.
(_:13591:321) V/f th. Thermal tripping of the overexcitation protection. If
the value reaches 100 %, the tripping occurs.
Cooling Time
If the value drops below the threshold value ((_:13591:3) Threshold), tripping of the thermal character-
istic curve (dependent characteristic curve) is reverted. However, the parameterized cooling time (Cooling
time therm.replica) reduces the thermal storage (counter content) to 0. This parameter is defined as
time. It is required by the thermal replica in order to cool down from 100 % to 0 %.

The binary input indication (_:13591:501) >Reset thermal replica can be applied to reset the
thermal replica. The thermal replica will then have a value of 0. A reparameterization will also lead to resetting
the thermal replica.
Blocking the Stage

The function can be blocked externally or internally by the binary input signal (_:13591:81) >Block
stage. Blocking will cause a picked up function to be reset.

Thermal overloads extended over a longer period will jeopardize electric equipment, for example, synchro-
nous motors, generators, or transformers and may cause damage. When using the thermal, user-defined
characteristic curve, the overexcitation protection is ideally suited for adjusting the specified limits of the
protection equipment.
The following provides the recommended settings:
NOTE
i One requirement for the correct mode of operation of the function is based on the proper setting of the
power-system data.
You can find more detailed information on this in 6.1 Power-System Data.
For additional setting recommendations, verity the following parameter in the power-system data:
• Adjusted rated frequency
• Adjusted rated voltage of the protected object
• Adjusted rated voltage of the voltage transformer of the applicable measuring point
Parameter: Threshold Value
• Default setting (_:13591:3) Threshold = 1.10

The Threshold parameter is used to describe the value for the permissible continuous overexcitation.
The default value is a practical value used for transformers. The value may be less for generator applica-
tions. These values can be found in the manufacturer's information.
Parameter: Time Delayed Warning
• Default setting (_:13591:101) Warning delay = 10.00 s

When using the Warning delay parameter, the time can be determined by which the warning indica-
tion of the stage should be delayed after the pickup. This time delay depends on the specific application.
This time must clearly exceed the reaction time of the regulators. 10 seconds is a feasible value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Cooling Time Therm. Replica
• Default setting (_:13591:102) Cooling time therm.replica = 3600 s

The Cooling time therm.replica parameter is used to define the cooling characteristics of the thermal
replica. If concrete specifications are not given, the default value can be retained.
Parameter: V/f/time value pairs (operate curve)

With this parameter, the number of potting points along the thermal operate curve are defined. This is
required for the calculation. The number of points defines the accuracy of the image of the specified charac-
teristic curve. Adjust the value individually.
Set a V/f/time value pair for each characteristic-curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve
you want to realize. The default settings refer to a Siemens standard transformer.
NOTE
NOTE
i Note that the V/f values that are lower than the V/f values of the smallest characteristic-curve point do
not extend the operate time. Up to the smallest characteristic-curve point, the characteristic curves runs
parallel to the V/f axis. V/f values that are larger than the V/f value of the largest characteristic-curve point
do not reduce the operate time. From the largest characteristic-curve point, the pickup characteristic runs
parallel to the V/f axis (seeCharacteristic Curve, Page 1057).
6.41.3.3 Settings

Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13621:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1.00 to 1.40 1.40
_:13621:6 Definite-T 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
General
_:13591:1 Therm.charact.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13591:2 Therm.charact.:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13591:3 Therm.charact.:Threshold 1.00 to 1.20 1.10
_:13591:101 Therm.charact.:Warning 0.00 s to 60.00 s 10.00 s
delay
_:13591:102 Therm.charact.:Cooling 0 s to 100000 s 3600 s
time therm.replica

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
General
_:2311:322 General:V/f MV O
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
Therm.charact.
_:13591:81 Therm.charact.:>Block stage SPS I
_:13591:501 Therm.charact.:>Reset thermal replica SPS I
_:13591:51 Therm.charact.:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:13591:54 Therm.charact.:Inactive SPS O
_:13591:52 Therm.charact.:Behavior ENS O
_:13591:53 Therm.charact.:Health ENS O
_:13591:55 Therm.charact.:Pickup ACD O
_:13591:301 Therm.charact.:Warning ACT O
_:13591:57 Therm.charact.:Operate ACT O
_:13591:321 Therm.charact.:V/f th. MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.41.4 Stage with Independent Characteristic Curve
Logic
[lo_dtchuf, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-267 Logic of the Overexcitation Protection with Independent Characteristic Curve (Definite-Time
Stage)
This stage also evaluates the V/f value that is identical to the input value of the thermal stage.
For measurement-relevant details, see also 6.41.3 Stage with Dependent Characteristic Curve (Thermal
Stage).
Operating Principle of the Definite-Time Stage

The stage comprises a threshold value and a time-delay stage. If the V/f value is greater than the set threshold
value ((_:13621:3) Threshold), then the stage is tripped after an adjustable time delay has elapsed. You
can set the time delay with the parameter (_:13621:6) Operate delay.
The dropout ratio for the Threshold is fixed to 98 %.

The definite-time stage can be applied when fast tripping is required in the presence of high V/f values. In this
case, the stage acts superimposed on the thermal, dependent stage.
Parameter: Threshold Value

The Threshold parameter is used to describe the overexcitation value that causes the tripping function.
The default value matches a feasible upper limit.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Tripping delay

The Operate delay parameter is used to determine the time by which the stage is delayed after
the pickup. This time delay depends on the specific application. The default value is practical for the
application described in the previous chapter.
6.41.4.3 Settings

Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13621:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1.00 to 1.40 1.40
delay
Therm.charact.
_:13591:1 Therm.charact.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13591:2 Therm.charact.:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13591:3 Therm.charact.:Threshol 1.00 to 1.20 1.10
d
_:13591:101 Therm.charact.:Warning 0.00 s to 60.00 s 10.00 s
delay
_:13591:102 Therm.charact.:Cooling 0 s to 100 000 s 3600 s
time therm.replica

(Type)
General
_:2311:322 General:V/f MV O
Group indicat.
df/dt falling1
Therm.charact.
_:13591:81 Therm.charact.:>Block stage SPS I

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:13591:501 Therm.charact.:>Reset thermal replica SPS I
_:13591:54 Therm.charact.:Inactive SPS O
_:13591:52 Therm.charact.:Behavior ENS O
_:13591:53 Therm.charact.:Health ENS O
_:13591:55 Therm.charact.:Pickup ACD O
_:13591:301 Therm.charact.:Warning ACT O
_:13591:57 Therm.charact.:Operate ACT O
_:13591:321 Therm.charact.:V/f th. MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.42 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function (ANSI 27/Q):
• Detects critical power-system situations, mainly in case of regenerative generation
• Prevents a voltage collapse in power system by disconnecting the power-generation facility from the
main power systems
• Ensures reconnection under stable power-system conditions
The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function can be used in protection function groups
containing 3-phase voltage and current measurement. Depending on the device, it is preconfigured by the
manufacturer with 1 Protection stage and 1 Reclosure stage. A maximum of 2 Protection stages and 1
Reclosure stage can operate simultaneously within the function.
[dw_qvprot, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.42.3 Protection Stage
Logic of the Stage
[lo_qvprst, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-269 Logic Diagram of the Protection Stage of the Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protec-
tion

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measurand
To detect critical power-system situations, the Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function
uses the fundamental values of the phase-to-phase voltages, the positive-sequence current, and the reactive
power.
Q-Measurement Direction
The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the protected object. Via parameter Q sign, the direction of the
positive reactive-power flow Q can be changed by inverting the sign of the reactive power Q.
Pickup
The protection stage picks up under the following conditions:
• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are below the parameterized threshold value.
• The positive-sequence current I1 is above the parameterized threshold value.
• The power-generation facility requires more than the parameterized reactive power (Q is above the
parameterized threshold value).
Trip Interface
The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid). Depending
on the parameter Trip interface contains, one or none of them will be forwarded to the trip interface
of the circuit-breaker interaction.

• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage
• Measuring-voltage failure
For further information, refer to chapter 6.7.4.1 Description.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter permits you to define whether the operate delay should
be blocked by a threshold-value violation due to an inrush current.
For further information about device-internal Inrush-current detection function, refer to chapter
6.3.7.1 Description .

You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

yes The Protection stage is blocked when a measuring-voltage failure is
detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting, as there is
no assurance that the Protection stage will function correctly if the
measuring voltage fails.
no The Protection stage is not blocked when a measuring-voltage failure
is detected.

You use the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter to determine whether the operate delay and
operate signal are blocked during the detection of an inrush current.
Parameter: I> release threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:13921:105) I> release threshold = 0.100 A

You use the I> release threshold parameter to define a precondition that the stage can pick up. The
default setting is at 10 % of the rated current. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: V< threshold value
• Recommended setting value (_:13921:103) V< threshold value = 85.000 V

You use the V< threshold value parameter to define one of the 2 pickup criteria. If all 3 phase-to-phase
voltages drop below the parameterized undervoltage threshold value, the pickup criterion is fulfilled.
The setting should be set below the lower value of the permissible voltage range, according to the national
transmission code. In Germany, the recommended undervoltage threshold is 85 % of the rated voltage.
Therefore Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Q> threshold value
• Default setting (_:13921:3) Q> threshold value = 5 %

You use the Q> threshold value parameter to define the second of the 2 pickup criteria. If the positive
reactive power exceeds the parameterized Q> threshold value, the pickup criterion is fulfilled.
In the following example, the pickup takes place if Q exceeds 5 % of the power-supply system rated power.
EXAMPLE
The following example is given for settings in secondary values.
Rated voltage: Vrated, sec = 100 V
Rated current: Irated, sec = 1 A
Threshold value: 5 % of the power-supply system rated power
You can calculate the setting value as follows:
[fo_qvprot, 1, en_US]
• Default setting (_:13921:6) Operate delay grid CB = 1.50 s
• Default setting (_:13921:108) Oper. delay generator CB = 0.50 s

You can set the Operate delay grid CB for the circuit breaker at the power-supply system connection
point, or set the Oper. delay generator CB for the circuit breaker of the facility, for example, the
generator.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The time of the Operate delay grid CB should always be set longer than the time of the Oper. delay
generator CB.
Parameter: Trip interface contains
• Default setting (_:13921:101) Trip interface contains = operate (grid)

The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid).
You use the Trip interface contains parameter to define whether one or none of them will be
forwarded to the trip interface of the circuit-breaker interaction. The selected operate signal will trip the circuit
breaker that has been connected to the protection function group.
The setting depends on the specific application.
Parameter: Q sign
• Default setting (_:13921:102) Q sign = not reversed

The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the main protected object (for example, a feeder). You use the Q
sign parameter to reverse the sign and therefore the direction of the reactive-power flow Q. This reversal
may be required for specific application, where the main protected object (for example, a line towards the
main power systems) is in different direction to the power-generation facility.
not reversed The protected object is in the same direction as the power-gener-
ation facility.
reversed The protected object is not in the same direction as the power-
generation facility.
6.42.3.3 Settings

Prot. stage 1
_:13921:1 Prot. stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13921:2 Prot. stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13921:10 Prot. stage 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:13921:27 Prot. stage 1:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:13921:101 Prot. stage 1:Trip inter- • no operate operate (grid)
face contains
• operate (generator)
• operate (grid)
_:13921:102 Prot. stage 1:Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed
_:13921:3 Prot. stage 1:Q> 1.00 % to 200.00 % 5.00 %
threshold value
_:13921:103 Prot. stage 1:V< 3.000 V to 175.000 V 85.000 V
threshold value

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:13921:105 Prot. stage 1:I> release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:13921:108 Prot. stage 1:Oper. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s
generator CB
_:13921:6 Prot. stage 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.50 s
delay grid CB

(Type)
Group indicat.
Prot. stage 1
_:13921:81 Prot. stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13921:51 Prot. stage 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:13921:54 Prot. stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:13921:52 Prot. stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:13921:53 Prot. stage 1:Health ENS O
_:13921:60 Prot. stage 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:13921:55 Prot. stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:13921:301 Prot. stage 1:Op.delay expir.(gen.) ACT O
_:13921:302 Prot. stage 1:Operate (generator) ACT O
_:13921:56 Prot. stage 1:Op.delay expir.(grid) ACT O
_:13921:57 Prot. stage 1:Operate (grid) ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.42.4 Reclosure Stage
Logic of the Stage
[lo_qvclst, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-270 Logic Diagram of Reclosure Stage in Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Measurand
The stage works with fundamental values of voltage and current.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Release for Reconnecting

The release for reconnecting the power-generation facility is given under the following conditions:
• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are above the threshold value.
• The power frequency is within a specified range.
• The reclosure time delay, started by the operate of specific protection functions, has elapsed. The time
delay is started by the first operate signal of the protection stages configured via the Configuration
parameter. All protection stages of the voltage protection, the frequency protection, and the QV protec-
tion are available for configuration.
External Start of Reclosure Time Delay

Reclosure time delay can be started via the binary input signal >V, f trip, which can be connected to
external voltage and frequency protection trip signals.

The stage can be blocked via the binary input signal >Block stage.
Parameter: Configuration
• Default setting (_:13951:102) Configuration = no stage

You use the Configuration parameter to define which operate signal of specific protection functions starts
the release time delay of the Reclosure stage:
• Overfrequency protection
• Underfrequency protection
• Overvoltage protection
• Undervoltage protection
• Protection stage of undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection

When the protection stage of undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection is selected, only the signal
Operate (generator) can start the release time delay of this stage. The signal Operate (grid) cannot
start the release time delay.
The configuration depends on the specific application.
Parameter: I> release threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:13951:106) I> release threshold = 0.100 A

You use the I> release threshold parameter to define a precondition that the stage can work.
The default setting is at 10 % of the rated current. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: V> threshold value
• Recommended setting value (_:13951:101) V> threshold value = 95.000 V

You use the V> threshold value parameter to set one of the 2 release criteria. The setting should be set
above the lower value of the allowed voltage range, according to the national transmission code. In Germany,
the recommended overvoltage threshold is 95 % of the rated voltage. Therefore Siemens recommends using
the default setting.
Parameter: Frequency range
• Recommended setting value (_:13951:104) f difference positive = 0.05 Hz
• Recommended setting value (_:13951:105) f difference negative = -2.50 Hz

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
You use these 2 parameters to define the admitted frequency deviation from the rated frequency. f differ-
ence positive defines the upper frequency range limit. f difference negative defines the lower
frequency range limit.
Siemens recommends using the default settings, which reflect common practice in Germany. Other national
transmission codes may require a slightly different range.
Parameter: Time delay
• Default setting (_:13951:108) Time delay = 0.00 s

You use the Time delay parameter to specify the minimum time delay for releasing the reconnection of the
power-generation facility after tripping by protection.
The setting depends on the specific application.
6.42.4.3 Settings

Reclos. stage
_:13951:1 Reclos. stage:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13951:101 Reclos. stage:V> 3.000 V to 340.000 V 95.000 V
threshold value
_:13951:104 Reclos. stage:f difference 0.01 Hz to 5.00 Hz 0.05 Hz
positive
_:13951:105 Reclos. stage:f difference -5.00 Hz to -0.01 Hz -2.50 Hz
negative
_:13951:106 Reclos. stage:I> release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:13951:108 Reclos. stage:Time delay 0.00 s to 3600.00 s 0.00 s
_:13951:102 Reclos. stage:Configura- Setting options depend on
tion configuration

(Type)
Reclos. stage
_:13951:81 Reclos. stage:>Block stage SPS I
_:13951:501 Reclos. stage:>V, f trip SPS I
_:13951:54 Reclos. stage:Inactive SPS O
_:13951:52 Reclos. stage:Behavior ENS O
_:13951:53 Reclos. stage:Health ENS O
_:13951:301 Reclos. stage:Release closure ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.43 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
The Circuit-breaker failure protection function (ANSI 50BF) monitors the tripping of the associated circuit-
breaker (CB) and generates a backup trip signal if the circuit-breaker fails.
Starting with version V7.50, the previous function CB failure has been replaced with the new Circuit-breaker
failure protection with an adaptive algorithm Adaptive CB failure protection. In this way, you achieve a
faster, more reliable detection of the opening of the circuit breaker in the event of complex signal histories.
The 2 functions are identical, with the exception of a slightly increased processor load, in terms of setting
options, logic and indications. Siemens recommends using the adaptive circuit-breaker failure protection and
avoiding mixing the protection types in one device. You can find additional information on the processor load
in DIGSI for each device under Device information in the Resource consumption tab.
The function Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.
[dw_strbfp, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-272 shows the functionalities and the function control of the function.
The start is initiated by the device-internal protection function or by an external protection. Along with the
start, the current-flow criterion or the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is used to check whether the
circuit breaker is closed. If the circuit breaker is closed, the function picks up and starts the time delay. During
the time delay, the system continuously checks whether the circuit breaker has opened. If this is the case, the
function drops out. If the circuit breaker is not opened, the function trips upon expiration of the time delay.
The following description elaborates on the detailed functionality of the individual function blocks.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_svs_bfp, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-272 Function Logic Overview
The circuit-breaker failure protection function is started by device-internal protection functions and/or exter-
nally (via a binary input or an interface, such as GOOSE). Figure 6-273 and Figure 6-274 show the function-
ality.
Internal Start
By default, each device-internal protection stage that must control the local circuit breaker starts the circuit-
breaker failure protection. The function is started by the tripping of the protection stage. In the default setting,
the starting signal Internal start (see Figure 6-273) is held when the pickup signal has a falling edge
or the protection function has tripped. The Circuit-breaker failure protection function can in this case only
drop out if the circuit breaker is detected to be open. This is detected using the current flow or circuit-breaker
auxiliary contact criterion. If necessary, the Circuit-breaker failure protection function can also drop out when
the pickup signal has a falling edge or the protection function trips (internal starting signal is not held).
You can use routing to determine whether individual protection stages or protection functions are used as a
starting source or whether the start is only supposed to be external.
The internal starting sources are routed in the protection function groups via the entry Circuit-breaker
interaction (for this, see2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device. Figure 2-6.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_anwint, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-273 Internal Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
External Start
The parameter Start via binary input is used to set whether the external start is initiated by a
1-channel or 2-channel signal. The required routing of the input signals is compared with the setting. If a
routing is missing, an error message is generated. The Health signal changes to the state Warning.
[lo_anwext, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-274 Configuration of the External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
In 1-channel operation, the start is initiated with the binary input signal >Start only.
In 2-channel operation, the binary input signal >Release must also be activated to initiate the start. In the
default setting, the starting signal External start drops out immediately when the input signals have a
falling edge (see Figure 6-275). If necessary, the starting signal can be held. In this case the start remains
active when the binary input signals have a falling edge.
The input signals are monitored to avoid an unwanted pickup of the function.
If either of the signals >Start or >Release is active for more than the set supervision time of the corre-
sponding signal without the function being picked up, an error in the binary input circuit is assumed. The
corresponding signal is blocked to exclude an external pickup of the function. An indication to this effect is
output, and the Health signal changes to the state Warning. The blocking is reset as soon as the binary input
signal drops out.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Supervision is disabled in the following cases:
• On pickup of the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (only in the case of an external start). This
prevents an unwanted pickup of the supervision if the external protection that starts the Circuit-breaker
failure protection function uses a lockout functionality. When the starting signal drops out, supervision is
enabled again.
• As long as the function or the device is in test mode. This allows to check the function without the
supervision blocking the function.
If the signal >Start is active and no release signal is present after elapse of a settable supervision time for the
starting signal, the pickup is blocked and an indication to this effect is output. The Health signal changes to
the state Warning. The blocking is reset with the dropout of the starting signal.
The binary input signals only take effect if the binary inputs are activated for at least 10 ms (SW filter, see
Figure 6-275).
[lo_ext, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-275 External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function, Logic
The current-flow criterion is the primary criterion for determining the circuit-breaker switch position. A circuit-
breaker pole is supposed to be closed, and the current-flow criterion fulfilled, as soon as one of the phase
currents exceeds the phase-current threshold value, and at the same time a plausibility current exceeds the
associated threshold value. The plausibility current can be either a 2nd phase current (to compare with the
threshold value for phase currents) or the zero-sequence or negative-sequence current (to compare with

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
the sensitive threshold value). The additional evaluation of the plausibility current increases the safety of a
criterion.
If you are using the transformer connection type 3-phase, 2prim.trans., the ground current is neither meas-
ured nor calculated. The plausibility check via the ground current is therefore not possible. The setting
Direct release via the ground current does not lead to a pickup of the circuit-breaker failure protection.
In the case of ground faults, the sensitive threshold value can be dynamically applied to the phase currents as
well. The current-flow criterion is in this case fulfilled when the currents exceed the sensitive threshold value.
The phase-current threshold value is then ineffective. The binary signal >Threshold sensitive is used for
the switchover.
If you set the parameter 3I0 criterion to Direct release, you block the plausibility check of the
zero-sequence current. In this way a pickup can only be achieved by way of this current. The Threshold 3I0
dir. release parameter is used to set the threshold value to be exceeded.
If you set the parameter I2 criterion to Direct release, you also switch off the plausibility check of
the negative-sequence current. The Threshold I2 dir. release parameter is used to set the threshold
value to be exceeded.
If you set the parameter I2 criterion to Direct release, a plausibility check is performed via the phase
currents with 1/3 * Threshold I2 dir. release.
The measuring algorithm is optimized for fast dropout when the value drops below the threshold value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_current1, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-276 Current-Flow Criterion
Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contact Criterion

Settings allow you to specify whether the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are permitted for determining the
circuit-breaker switch position.
The double-point indication 3-pole position (from the function block Circuit-breaker) is used to deter-
mine whether all 3 poles of the circuit breaker are closed. If the double-point indication is not routed, the
output is an error message. Furthermore, the Health signal changes to the state Warning.
The detection of a static disturbed position (not an intermediate position) has the effect that the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact criterion is not used (the internal signal Aux.co.crit.: CB Clsd is disabled).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_criter, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-277 Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contact Criterion
Pickup/Dropout
After the start, a check is performed whether the circuit breaker is closed. The current-flow criterion and the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion are available for this purpose.
Even if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is permitted, preference is given to the fulfilled current-
flow criterion because the current-flow criterion is the most reliable criterion for detecting whether the circuit
breaker is closed. This means that the circuit breaker is deemed to be closed if it is closed according to the
current-flow criterion but at the same time open according to the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion.
If no current is flowing at the start time, the function can only pick up on the basis of the circuit-breaker auxil-
iary contact criterion. For this purpose, the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be permitted as criterion.
When the current begins to flow after the start, the function switches over to the current-flow criterion.
If the circuit breaker is detected as closed and the starting condition is present, the function picks up.
The pickup starts a time delay (see Delay/Tripping). While the delay is running, the system checks continuously
whether the circuit breaker has opened. In the default setting, the opening of the circuit breaker is checked
on the basis of the currently valid criterion, which is normally the current-flow criterion because it is preferred.
If until expiration of the time delay, no current flow above the set threshold values has been detected, the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion becomes effective.
The function has also a setting in which dropout is only possible if both criteria in parallel detect the circuit
breaker to be open (dropout with auxiliary contact and current-flow criterion).
In the default setting, the internal starting signal is held (see Figure 6-273 and Figure 6-275). This means that
dropout is controlled solely by the current or the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion. If dropout is also
to occur on the falling edge of the starting signal (that is, when the pickup signal has a falling edge or the
protection function trips), holding of the start signal must be disabled.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_pickup1, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-278 Pickup/Dropout of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
Delay/Tripping
In a first step, tripping at the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of the
settable delay T1. If the local CB was not yet tripped, for example, in the event of an external start of the
circuit-breaker failure protection, the trip logic of the circuit breaker itself is activated when the time delay T1
elapses.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can commence in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of
time T1.
If time delay T2 expires without a dropout of the function, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed and the backup
tripping signal Tripping T2 is output. If there is a protection interface in the device, if needed a transfer-trip
signal can be sent to the opposite end.
For detailed information, see 3.6 Protection Communication.
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed, and the backup tripping
signal T2 is generated immediately (without delay). The binary input of the >CB defect input signal must be
activated for at least 20 ms before the signal becomes valid.
With help of the CB failure pole indication, you can determine the phase currents that are above the
threshold value at the tripping time T2.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for tripping the function. In contrast
to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the setting is inde-
pendent of the identically named global parameter that is set in the Device settings.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_bbp-verza-3ph, 6, en_US]
Figure 6-279 Delay/Tripping of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
With the parameter Immediate dropout, you determine whether the circuit-breaker switch position is
checked continuously or on expiration of the T1 and T2 time delays. If the circuit-breaker switch position is
checked once the time delays have expired, the function picks up using Start.
Figure 6-280 gives an overview of the functions involved in an external start of the CBFP function. In the case
of an internal start, there is no external protection device and the protection functionality is located in the
CBFP device.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_extpol, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-280 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection with External Start, Tripping Repetition, and 3‑Pole Tripping
(T2)
Routing: Configuration of Internal Starting Sources (Internal Protection Function)

Configuration of the internal starting sources takes place in the protection function groups via the Circuit-
breaker interaction entry ( 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device, Figure 2-6).
By default, the function can be started by any tripping of the internal protection functions that control
the local circuit breaker. Depending on the specific application, it can be necessary to exclude certain
device-internal protection functions from starting the CBFP. For instance, busbar disconnection following a
local circuit-breaker failure may be undesirable in the case of load-shedding applications or ground faults in
isolated/resonant-grounded systems.
Where a start exclusively from external sources is required, all internal protection functions must be routed so
that they are excluded as a starting source.
Parameter: Start via binary input
• Default setting (_:107) Start via binary input = no

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

no If no external start is intended, the parameter is set to no.
2 channel 2-channel start is used if there is a danger that the circuit-breaker failure
protection causes a tripping due to a faulty activation of the start binary
input. This is the case in the following situations:
a) The CBFP pickup value (threshold value) is set to less than the load
current.
b) There can be operating conditions under which the current flow is higher
than the pickup value.
To avoid a possible overfunction, Siemens recommends using the 2-channel
start.
1 channel The 1-channel start must be used where only one control circuit of a binary
input is available for starting the CBFP.
Input Signals: >Start, >Release

The start and release input signals have a filtering time of 10 ms as default setting. If a transient control signal
to the binary inputs is to be expected due to the design of the external binary-input control circuits and due to
environmental conditions, the filtering time can be extended. This delays the start of the CBFP function.
Input Signals Description
>Start The start input signal is linked with the tripping of the external protection
device (Figure 6-280).
>Release The release input signal is normally linked with the pickup of the external
protection device (Figure 6-280). Another common configuration is the
parallel wiring of the external trip initiation to both binary inputs (start and
release).
Parameter: Supervision time f. release signal
• Default setting (_:111) Sup.time f. release signal = 0.06 s

The setting depends on the external function which generates the release signal. If the pickup or tripping of
the external protection is used as release signal, the default setting can be kept. If it is ensured that the release
signal is always present before the start signal, the time can be set to 0.
Parameter: Holding internal start signal
• Recommended setting value (_:105) Holding int. start signal = yes

yes In the case of an internal start, the start signal is hold. The dropout of
the CBFP depends exclusively on the determination of the circuit-breaker
position.
This setting must be selected if it is not ensured that all 3 poles of the CB
have opened when the pickup signal of the protection function has a falling
edge.
no Holding of the start signal can be disabled if it is ensured by the application
that the CB has reliably opened when the start signal has a falling edge, or if
the CBFP is explicitly required to drop out when the start signal has a falling
edge.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
EXAMPLE
Holding Internal Start Signal (Setting Value: yes)

In the event of a 2-pole fault, only one contact of the CB opens. The fault current is thus reduced, and the
starting phase short-circuit protection drops out.
Parameter: Holding external start signal
• Recommended setting value (_:106) Holding ext. start signal = no

no The CBFP drops out when the external start signal has a falling edge.
This setting prevents the CBFP from generating a tripping signal when an
unwanted pulse is received at the binary input and the current flow is high
enough.
yes You can hold the start signal if it is not ensured that the circuit breaker is
open when the external start signal has a falling edge.
EXAMPLE
Holding External Start Signal (Setting Value: Yes)

The function is started from the opposite end via an auxiliary device for command transmission. This device
generates only a signal pulse.
NOTE
i Siemens would like to point out that, with a hold signal, the CBFP generates a trip signal each time a
starting pulse is received and the current flow is high enough. Remember this particularly in the case of an
external start.
Parameters: Threshold phase current/Threshold sensitive
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold phase current = approx. 0.50 Isc, min
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold sensitive = approx. 0.50 Isc,min
In order to ensure that the disconnection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can drop out
quickly, Siemens recommends setting both thresholds to half the minimum short-circuit current (Isc, min).
If – depending on the neutral-point treatment and/or load conditions – ground faults lead to relatively low
fault currents, a sensitive setting of the parameter Threshold sensitive must be selected according to
the rule (0.5 Isc, min). There can also be values which are noticeably below the rated or load current.
Input Signal: >Threshold sensitive

In order to ensure that the function picks up reliably in all switch positions of the power system (examples:
opposite end of line open, switching onto a ground fault), the setting of the parameter Threshold sensi-
tive can be applied dynamically to all currents - including phase currents – in the presence of ground faults.
For this purpose, the binary signal >Threshold sensitive must be activated. This can be done via a
device-internal function for ground-fault detection (if provided in the device), for example, using Overvoltage
protection with zero-sequence voltage. In this case, the pickup of the V0> function must be linked with
the binary signal. Alternatively, the signal can be coupled from a separate device for sensitive ground-fault
detection via a binary input.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion allowed for protection
• Recommended setting value (_:103) CB aux.cont. crit. allowed = no

no If sufficient current flow is ensured under all conditions with the CB closed,
Siemens recommends not to permit the auxiliary contacts as a further crite-
rion for determining the CB position, because measurement based on the
current flow is the most reliable criterion.
w. 'CB pos. closed 3p.' The auxiliary contacts are permitted as a further criterion in applications
(see the following examples) where the current is no reliable criterion for
determining the circuit-breaker position.
Parameter: 3I0 criterion
• Recommended setting value (_:120) 3I0 criterion = Plausibility check

Plausibility check The ground current is only used to check the plausibility of the phase
currents. The value set under the parameter Threshold sensitive is
used as the threshold for the ground current.
Direct release The current-flow criterion can be fulfilled only by the ground current
without the phase currents exceeding their set threshold value. The value
set under the parameter Threshold 3I0 dir. release is used in this
case as the threshold for the ground current.
If you have set the Threshold phase current to be larger than the maximum load current, overfunction
because of a false start is impossible. To ensure Circuit-breaker failure protection for smaller ground faults
even with this setting, you can select 3I0 criterion to be Direct release and Threshold 3I0 dir.
release to be appropriately smaller than Threshold phase current.
Parameter: I2 criterion
• Recommended setting value (_:121) I2 criterion = Plausibility check

Plausibility check The negative-sequence current is only used to check the plausibility of the
phase currents. The value set under the parameter Threshold sensi-
tive is used as the threshold for the negative-sequence current.
Direct release If a phase current exceeds 1/3 of the Threshold I2 dir. release,
the current-flow criterion can be fulfilled only by the negative-sequence
current without the phase currents exceeding their set threshold value.
The threshold for the negative-sequence current uses the value set in the
Threshold I2 dir. release parameter in this case.
If you have set the Threshold phase current to be larger than the maximum load current, overfunction
because of a false start is impossible. To have Circuit-breaker failure protection function for smaller unbal-
anced faults even with this setting, you can select I2 criterion to be Direct release and Threshold
3I0 dir. release to be appropriately smaller than Threshold phase current.
Parameter: Threshold 3I0 dir. release

Recommended setting value (_:122) Threshold 3I0 dir. release = approx. 0.5 Iscmin
This parameter is effective only if the 3I0 criterionparameter is set to Direct release. Siemens
recommends setting the threshold to half the minimum short-circuit current (Iscmin) to ensure that the
disconnection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can drop out quickly.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Threshold I2 dir. release

Recommended setting value (_:123) Threshold I2 dir. release = approx. 0.5 I2min
This parameter is effective only if the I2 criterionparameter is set to Direct release. Siemens recom-
mends setting the parameter to half the permissible negative-sequence current (I2min) to achieve a fast fault
clearing in the event of an undesired negative-sequence system component.
Parameters: Monit. time for BI ">Start"/Monit.tm. f.BI ">Release"
• Default setting (_:124) Monit. time for BI ">Start" = 15 s
• Default setting (_:125) Monit.tm. f.BI ">Release" = 15 s

With these parameters, you set the monitoring time of the binary inputs >Start/>Release. If the Circuit-
breaker failure protection does not pick up during this monitoring time, a failure in the binary-input circuit is
assumed. Siemens recommends retaining the default setting of 15 s.
EXAMPLES
Applications which Require you to Permit the Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary-Contact Criterion:
• Tripping of the high and low-voltage side CB on the transformer. If only one of the 2 CBs trips, there is no
more current flow.
• Tripping of protection functions whose tripping decision is not based on a current measurement in
combination with voltage or frequency protection functions
• Injection of the tripping signal from Buchholz protection
Parameter: Dropout
• Recommended setting value (_:104) Dropout = with effective criterion

The parameter Dropout is available if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is permitted (see param-
eter CB aux.cont. crit. allowed).
with effective crite- Siemens recommends keeping the default setting, because it prefers the
rion current as a reliable criterion for detection of an open CB and thus for
dropout of the CBFP function.
w. aux.c. and Select this setting for applications on transformers or generators (see the
curr.crit. preceding examples) in which the current flow is such that the current is no
longer a reliable criterion for detecting the opening of the CB.
Parameter: Retrip
• Default setting (_:108) Retrip after T1 = no

no Where no redundant CB control is provided, a repetition of the trip signal to
the local CB is not required.
start T2 after T1 Where a redundant CB control (2nd trip coil with 2 trip circuits) is provided,
a repetition of the trip signal to the local CB makes sense.
Siemens recommends the setting start T2 after T1 because it
provides a clear chronological separation of the processes for trip repeat
and backup tripping. Remember here that the overall fault-clearance time in
case of a failure of the local CB is the sum of T1 and T2.
parallel start T2, T1 As an alternative to the setting start T2 after T1, the user can start T2
and T1 in parallel.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip
• Default setting (_:109) Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip = 0.05 s

The parameter is visible only when retripping is set.
The setting depends on the user's philosophy.
The following settings make sense:
• If the minimum fault-clearing time has top priority, Siemens recommends setting the time to 0. This
setting causes initiation of the retrip immediately upon the start. The drawback is that a defect of the 1st
trip circuit is not detected.
• With a small time delay of, for instance, 50 ms, the defect of the 1st trip circuit can be detected based on
the evaluation of the fault record.
• With a long time delay, which reliably ensures the dropout of the CBFP with the CB open, the rising edge
indication of the trip repeat Retrip T1 is a sure signal for a fault in the 1st trip circuit. The following
example shows how this time is determined.
EXAMPLE
Determining the T1 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:
Time of binary device output 5 ms

(when tripping is caused by device-internal protec-
tion)
CB inherent time up to current interruption 2 periods (assumed rated frequency = 50 Hz)
Dropout time of CBFP function 1 period
Subtotal 65 ms
Security Factor 2
Total (time T1) 130 ms
Parameter: Delay T2 for 3-pole trip
• Default setting (_:110) Delay T2 for 3-pole trip = 0.13 s

This setting has to ensure that after opening of the local CB the function drops out reliably and that backup
tripping is avoided under all circumstances. The setting depends on the parameter Retrip after T1.
If T2 is started after T1, there is no need to consider the time T1 for the setting of T2.
EXAMPLE
Determining the T2 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:
Time of binary device output 5 ms

(when tripping is caused by device-internal protec-
tion)
CB inherent time up to current interruption 2 periods (assumed rated frequency = 50 Hz)
Dropout time of CBFP function 1 period
Subtotal 65 ms
Security Factor 2
Total (time T2) 130 ms
If T1 and T2 are started in parallel, take into account the time T1 for the setting of T2.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
EXAMPLE
Simultaneous Start of T2 and T1
Time for a reliable dropout after the local CB has 130 ms

opened
Setting of T1 50 ms
Total (= T2) 180 ms
• Default setting (_:112) Minimum operate time = -

The Minimum operate time parameter is used to set the minimum duration for tripping the function.
! CAUTION
Too short setting times for the minimum tripping duration
If you set a time that is too short for tripping, there is a risk (dropout of the function without the
current-flow criterion) that the device contacts will interrupt the control loop. If this happens, the
device contacts will burn out.
² Set a minimum time period that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches the
end position Open after a control operation.
Input Signal: >CB defect

The input signal >CB defect has a default filtering time of 20 ms. This filtering time prevents the input
signal from becoming effective in the case of a transient activation of the physical binary input, which can be
caused by the pressure change when the CB opens.
This time can be set to 0 if such a transient pickup of the physical binary input can be excluded due to the CB
design.
Output Signal: Retrip T1

If only 1 control circuit is available for the local circuit breaker, the output signal does not necessarily have to
be routed because the signal also controls the circuit-breaker trip logic.
If a 2nd control circuit is present, the Retrip T1 output signal must be routed to the associated binary
output.
Output Signal: Trip T2

For operational handling of the adjacent circuit breakers, the backup tripping (indication Trip T2) must be
routed to a binary output; and if necessary, to an interface (intertripping to opposite end).
Parameter: CBFP interact. with dBBP
• Default setting (_:153) CBFP interact. with dBBP = No

If you use a merging unit as the bay unit of the distributed busbar protection, the CBFP interact.
with dBBP parameter becomes visible after the successful central-unit update in the merging unit.

no With this parameter, you specify that this function operates independently
from the distributed busbar protection.
yes With this parameter, the function will work with the distributed busbar
protection.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Immediate dropout
• Recommended setting (_:154) Immediate dropout =

The criteria are checked continuously and the circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion drops out immediately once the criteria have no longer been met.
Siemens recommends keeping this setting.
This setting is used to take alternating load cases into account in the event
of a fault, for example when using a breaker-and-a-half layout. The time
delays and function pickup are actuated separately using a starter. The
criteria for determining a closed circuit breaker are only checked once the
time delays have expired. Select the monitoring times for the binary inputs
>Start and >Release in such a way that supervision for these inputs
does not respond prior to achieving the current or circuit-breaker auxiliary-
contact criterion.
Parameter: BI start external latch
• Default setting (_:155) BI start external latch =

In the case of buffered sources (for example lock-out mechanism after
tripping) the start binary signal is latched externally after the protection
trip. This means that the binary-input supervision remains inactive until the
binary-input source has been reset. Supervision is only activated after this
has taken place.
In the case of sources that are not buffered for an external start, the expect-
ation is that they will drop out once the circuit-breaker failure protection
has picked up. If this is not the case, the binary input may fail. This is why
this setting results in binary-input supervision being reactivated once the
Circuit-breaker failure protection function drops out.
6.43.5 Settings

50BF Ad.CBF #
_:1 50BF Ad.CBF #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:105 50BF Ad.CBF #:Holding • no yes
int. start signal
• yes
_:107 50BF Ad.CBF #:Start via • no no
binary input
• 2 channel
• 1 channel
_:106 50BF Ad.CBF #:Holding • no no
ext. start signal
• yes
_:111 50BF Ad.CBF #:Sup.time 0.00 s to 1.00 s 0.06 s
f. release signal
_:103 50BF Ad.CBF #:CB • no no
aux.cont. crit. allowed
• w. 'CB pos. closed 3p.'

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:104 50BF Ad.CBF #:Dropout • with effective criterion with effective
criterion
• w. aux.c. and curr.crit.
_:108 50BF Ad.CBF #:Retrip • no no
after T1
• start T2 after T1
• parallel start T2, T1
_:102 50BF Ad.CBF #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
phase current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
sensitive 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
_:109 50BF Ad.CBF #:Delay T1 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.050 s
for 3-pole retrip
_:110 50BF Ad.CBF #:Delay T2 0.050 s to 60.000 s 0.130 s
for 3-pole trip
_:112 50BF Ad.CBF #:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
operate time
_:120 50BF Ad.CBF #:3I0 crite- • Direct release Plausibility
rion check
• Plausibility check
_:121 50BF Ad.CBF #:I2 crite- • Direct release Plausibility
rion check
• Plausibility check
3I0 dir. release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
I2 dir. release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
_:124 50BF Ad.CBF #:Monit. 0.05 s to 60.00 s 15.00 s
time for BI ">Start"
_:125 50BF Ad.CBF 0.05 s to 60.00 s 15.00 s
#:Monit.tm. f.BI
">Release"
_:154 50BF Ad.CBF #:Imme- • 0 true
diate dropout
• 1
_:155 50BF Ad.CBF #:BI start • 0 true
external latch
• 1
Table 6-23 Starting with V8.40, the Merging Units Have the Following Enhancement that is Especially
Intended for Use with the Distributed Busbar Protection and Evaluated there:

50BF Ad.CBF #
_:153 50BF Ad.CBF #:CBFP • no no
interact. with dBBP
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
50BF Ad.CBF #
_:501 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Start SPS I
_:502 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Release SPS I
_:82 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Block function SPS I
_:503 50BF Ad.CBF #:>CB defect SPS I
_:500 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Threshold sensitive SPS I
_:54 50BF Ad.CBF #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 50BF Ad.CBF #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 50BF Ad.CBF #:Health ENS O
_:55 50BF Ad.CBF #:Pickup ACD O
_:305 50BF Ad.CBF #:Retrip T1 ACT O
_:306 50BF Ad.CBF #:Trip T2 ACT O
_:302 50BF Ad.CBF #:BI start routing miss. SPS O
_:304 50BF Ad.CBF #:BI aux.ct. rout. miss. SPS O
_:300 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'start' SPS O
_:307 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. no BI release SPS O
_:301 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'release' SPS O
_:315 50BF Ad.CBF #:Immediate Operate SPS O
_:316 50BF Ad.CBF #:CB failure pole ACD O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.44 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
6.44.1 Overview of Function
The Circuit-breaker restrike protection function:
• Monitors the circuit breaker against restriking, for example, caused by an overvoltage over the circuit-
breaker poles after switching off a capacitor bank
• Generates a backup operate signal in case of a circuit-breaker restriking
The Circuit-breaker restrike protection function is used in the Circuit-breaker function group. A maximum
of 2 functions can operate simultaneously within the function group.
[lo_strrestrike, 2, en_US]
The function logic is grouped into the parts shown in Figure 6-282. In the following chapter, these logic parts
are described in detail.
[lo_respro, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-282 Logic Overview of the Function
Plausibility Release
The function Circuit-breaker restrike protection issues a trip command to a superordinated circuit breaker,
usually the infeed circuit breaker of a busbar. Overfunction of this protection can cause extreme problems for
the whole application.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The logic of plausibility release strongly reduces the risk of a false start of the function by adding an extra
release criteria for a function start.
Each criterion can be switched on or off individually.
[lo_paus, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-283 Logic Diagram for the Plausibility Release of the Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
The plausibility-release logic checks the following conditions:
• When the parameter Plausibility via 50BF fct. is set to yes, the pickup signal of the Circuit-
breaker failure protection is monitored. The plausibility release is given if the Circuit-breaker failure
protection has picked up.
• When the parameter Plaus. via open/trip cmd is set to yes, the trip/open command is moni-
tored. The plausibility release is given if the trip/open command has been generated.
• When the parameter Plaus. via binary input is set to yes, the >release signal is monitored.
The plausibility release is given if the >release signal has been received.
If one of the conditions is fulfilled, the plausibility release is given for 5 s. The 5-s timer ensures that the
release criterion and start condition relate to the same circuit-breaker opening/tripping process.
If all the 3 plausibility settings are set to no, the start/stop-monitoring logic considers the release as fulfilled.
For safety reasons, the input signal >release has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.
Start/Stop Monitoring
Via the start/stop monitoring logic, the monitoring duration of the current signal regarding restriking is
determined.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_starstop, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-284 Logic Diagram for Start/Stop Monitoring of the Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
The monitoring is started if one of the following conditions is met:
• The circuit-breaker position is detected as open via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts during the time
set with the parameter Position recognition delay.
The Position recognition delay time is used for safety means to ensure that the circuit breaker is
definitely open when the monitoring starts. This parameter allows to adapt this start criterion to all kinds
of auxiliary-contact configurations.
• The binary input signal >Start is activated.

For safety reasons, the input signal has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.
In addition to the active start criterion, the plausibility release (refer to the Plausibility Release, Page 1093)
must be present to start the monitoring duration.
With the fulfilled start condition, the Monitoring duration timer is started. This timer defines how long
the current signal is monitored regarding restriking. If the time expires, the monitoring is terminated.
The monitoring is also terminated immediately if one of the following conditions is met:
• The circuit-breaker position is detected no longer as open.
• A close command is given by the device.
• The binary input signal >Stop is activated.

For safety reasons, the input signal has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.
Measuring Value, Pickup/Dropout

During the Monitoring duration, the current signal is monitored phase-selectively regarding restriking.
As a measuring value, the fundamental component of the current is used.
• On one hand, current peaks are damped but still detected reliably by the fundamental-component value.
• On the other hand, a DC (Direct Current) component is suppressed. A DC component can occur after
switching off the circuit breaker.
Thus, the fundamental-component value is a good choice for a reliable restrike detection.
If any phase current exceeds the set current threshold value, the function picks up. The coming pickup
indicates the first restrike current pulse. With the pickup, the operate delay timers are started, see also the
following description Delay/Tripping, Page 1096.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_pickdrop, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-285 Logic Diagram for Measuring Value, Pickup/Dropout of the Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
If restriking occurs, the current signal drops below the current threshold if the time between restrike pulses
is long enough. In this case, the operate delay must not be reset. During the dropout delay, the pickup is
extended to ensure that the operate delay timers are not reset. However, if the dropout delay time expires (no
new current peak occurred), the function drops out and the operate delay timers are reset.
Delay/Tripping
In the first step, tripping of the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of
the settable delay T1. The retrip on the local circuit breaker is as a safety mechanism as well. In the event of a
wrong start and pickup, only the local circuit breaker is opened instead of the superordinated circuit breaker.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can start in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of time
T1.
If time delay T2 expires, circuit-breaker restriking takes place and the backup-tripping signal Trip T2 is
generated.
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed and the backup-trip-
ping signal Trip T2 is generated immediately (without delay). For safety reasons, a default software filter
time of 20 ms is preset (configurable in DIGSI) for the binary input signal >CB defect.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for the trip command of the func-
tion. In contrast to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the
setting is independent of the identically named comprehensive parameter that is set in the Device settings.
[lo_del_trip, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-286 Logic Diagram for Delay/Tripping of the Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Switch On or Off Additional Plausibility Release Criteria
• Default setting (_:101) Plausibility via 50BF fct. = no
• Default setting (_:102) Plaus. via open/trip cmd = no
• Default setting (_:103) Plaus. via binary input = no

When using the plausibility release, the start condition and the release condition instead of only the start
condition must be present to start the current monitoring regarding restriking. Since the current threshold
value is set below the operating current, a false start would directly cause tripping. Thus, the plausibility
release strongly reduces the risk that a falsely given start criterion leads to a wrong tripping of the superordi-
nated circuit breaker.
3 different release criteria are available. You can use one or more than one or none of them. The selection
depends on the application.
NOTE
i When using release criteria, it must be ensured that the criteria are given under all the conditions where
the Circuit-breaker restrike protection shall be started. If you choose no release criteria, the release is
permanently given.
• Open/trip command by the device

Use this criterion in case that all control or trip commands are given by the protection device.
NOTE
i Opening the circuit breaker manually without using the device will not release the start of the Circuit-
breaker restrike protection.
• Pickup of the Circuit-breaker failure protection

Use this criterion if the Circuit-breaker restrike protection should only be started in case that the Circuit-
breaker failure protection was started (picked up) before.
NOTE
i Opening the circuit breaker by control or manually will not trigger the Circuit-breaker failure protection.
Consequently the Circuit-breaker restrike protection cannot be released either.

Use this option if neither of the above 2 release criteria fit the application and you want to define your own
release criterion.
Input signals: >Start, >release, >Stop
Input Signals Description

>Start This input signal allows to start the monitoring, for example, via
protocol commands from a master (by use of a CFC chart) or by other
specific conditions.
>release This input signal allows to define specific release conditions by use
of a CFC chart. Also refer to Parameter: Switch On or Off Additional
Plausibility Release Criteria , Page 1097.
>Stop This input signal allows to stop the monitoring, for example, via
protocol commands from a master (by use of a CFC chart) or by other
specific conditions.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The input signals >Start , >release , and >Stop have a filtering time of 20 ms as default setting. If a
transient spurious signal to the binary inputs is expected due to the design of the external binary-input control
circuits and environmental conditions, the filtering time can be extended.
Parameter: Position recognition delay
• Default setting (_:105) Position recognition delay = 0.02 s

With the parameter Position recognition delay, you define how long the circuit breaker must be
detected as open (via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts) before the monitoring time is started. This
definition is a safety feature to ensure that the monitoring is not started too early. For example, in case that
due to a non-standard auxiliary-contacts configuration, the circuit-breaker is already detected as open while
current flow is still present.
The setting depends on the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contacts configuration. If it can be ensured that the
auxiliary contacts announce the circuit breaker as open after the current flow is interrupted, the time can be
set to zero.
Parameter: Monitoring duration
• Default setting (_:104) Monitoring duration = 200.00 s

With the parameter Monitoring duration , you define how long the current signal is monitored regarding
restriking after the circuit breaker has been opened.
With ongoing discharging of the capacitor bank, the probability of restriking is decreasing. There is no need to
set the monitoring time longer than the discharging time. Siemens recommends setting the monitoring time
in the range of 0.5 * discharging time to 1 * discharging time.

After opening of the circuit breaker, the phase currents are compared with the threshold value. If no restriking
takes place, the current is zero. Consequently the threshold for detecting restriking can be set much smaller
than the operating current. A typical value is 25 % of the operating current.
With a threshold below the operating current, a falsely-given start directly cause tripping. For minimizing
this risk, Siemens recommends applying a release criterion additionally. Refer to Parameter: Switch On or Off
Additional Plausibility Release Criteria , Page 1097.
• Default setting (_:7) Dropout delay = 0.05 s

The parameter Dropout delay ensures that a short dropping below the current threshold does not cause
the operate delay timers to be reset.
Since restriking is normally a periodical effect, the dropout delay can be set to a rather small time. Siemens
recommends applying the default value of 50 ms.
Input signal: >CB defect

The input signal >CB defect has a preset filtering time of 20 ms. This filtering time prevents the input
signal from becoming effective in the case of a transient activation of the physical binary input, which can be
caused by the pressure change when the circuit breaker opens.
This time can be set to 0 if such a transient response of the physical binary input can be excluded due to the
circuit-breaker design.
Parameter: Retrip after T1
• Default setting (_:106) Retrip after T1 = start T2 after T1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

start T2 after T1 The retrip on the local circuit breaker is a safety mechanism to avoid
false tripping of the superordinated circuit breaker. With generating a
retrip, only the local circuit breaker is tripped in the event of a false
start. Afterwards the Circuit-breaker restrike protection function drops
out during the T2 delay time.
Siemens recommends applying a retrip on the local circuit breaker.
Siemens also recommends applying the parameter value start T2
after T1. The parameter value provides a clear chronological separa-
tion of the processes for trip repeat and backup tripping. Remember that
the overall fault-clearance time in case of circuit-breaker restriking is the
sum of T1 and T2.
no No retrip is given
parallel start T2, T1 As an alternative to the setting parallel start T2, T1 the
customer can start T2 and T1 in parallel.
Parameter: Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip
• Default setting (_:109) Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip = 0.00 s

The parameter is visible only when the parameter Retrip after T1 is set to start T2 after T1 or
parallel start T2, T1 .
The retrip on the local circuit breaker is as a safety mechanism to avoid false tripping of the superordinated
circuit breaker. In the event of a false start, only the local circuit breaker is tripped by the retrip. Afterwards the
Circuit-breaker restrike protection function will drop out during the T2 delay time.
Siemens recommends applying a retrip on the local circuit breaker. Since the retrip is a safety mechanism, it
can be given without a delay time. Siemens recommends setting the delay time to 0 s.
Parameter: Delay T2 for 3-pole trip
• Default setting (_:110) Delay T2 for 3-pole trip = 0.15 s

This parameter defines the duration of restriking after the backup tripping is sent. The following should be
considered:
• When using the retrip functionality, this delay time must ensure a safe function dropout after giving the
retrip on the local circuit breaker.
Siemens recommends applying a delay time of 150 ms which is the default setting.

The Minimum operate time parameter is used to set the minimum duration for the trip command of the
function.
! CAUTION
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger (dropout of the function without the current-flow
criterion) that the device contacts interrupt the control circuit. If this happens, the device contacts
burn out.
² Set a duration that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open) after a control operation.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Output signal: Retrip T1

The output signal Retrip T1 must be routed to a binary output.
If only one control circuit is available for the local circuit breaker, the output signal must be routed to the
binary output to which the general circuit breaker trip command (command Position) is routed.
If a second control circuit is present, the Retrip T1 output signal can be routed to the associated binary
output.
Output signal: Trip T2

In order to trip the adjacent circuit breakers, the backup tripping (indication Trip T2 ) must be routed to a
binary output and if necessary, to an interface (intertripping to the opposite end). Thus, the circuit breaker on
the opposite end can be tripped without delay.
6.44.5 Settings

Restrike prt.#
_:1 Restrike prt.#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Restrike prt.#:Plausibility • no no
via 50BF fct.
• yes
_:102 Restrike prt.#:Plaus. via • no no
open/trip cmd
• yes
_:103 Restrike prt.#:Plaus. via • no no
binary input
• yes
_:106 Restrike prt.#:Retrip after • no start T2 after T1
T1
• start T2 after T1
• parallel start T2, T1
_:104 Restrike prt.#:Monitoring 1.00 s to 600.00 s 200.00 s
duration
_:105 Restrike prt.#:Position 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.02 s
recognition delay
_:3 Restrike prt.#:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
_:7 Restrike prt.#:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
delay
_:107 Restrike prt.#:Delay T1 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
for 3-pole retrip
_:108 Restrike prt.#:Delay T2 0.05 s to 60.00 s 0.15 s
for 3-pole trip
_:109 Restrike prt.#:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.15 s
operate time

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Restrike prt.#
_:500 Restrike prt.#:>Start SPS I
_:501 Restrike prt.#:>Stop SPS I
_:502 Restrike prt.#:>release SPS I
_:82 Restrike prt.#:>Block function SPS I
_:503 Restrike prt.#:>CB defect SPS I
_:54 Restrike prt.#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Restrike prt.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Restrike prt.#:Health ENS O
_:304 Restrike prt.#:Release by plausibility SPS O
_:303 Restrike prt.#:Monitoring running SPS O
_:55 Restrike prt.#:Pickup ACD O
_:301 Restrike prt.#:Retrip T1 ACT O
_:302 Restrike prt.#:Trip T2 ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.45 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
The Restricted ground-fault protection function (ANSI 87N, REF):
• Detects ground faults in transformers, shunt reactors, neutral reactors, or rotating machinery in which
the neutral point is grounded.
• Has high sensitivity to ground faults near the neutral point.
• Is supplemental main protection to longitudinal differential protection.
• Protects grounding transformers in the protection range. It is required that a current transformer be used
in the case of neutral point feed, that is, between neutral point and grounding conductor. The neutral
point transformer and the phase current transformer define the protection range.
• Automatically adapts itself to the highest-amperage side with auto transformers, and thereby prevents
overfunction in the event of external ground faults.
The function Restricted ground-fault protection is used in the protection function group Transformer side
or Auto transformer . Furthermore, you can use the function in the stabilizing winding of the auto trans-
former as well as in the function Standard UI. The function depends upon application in the corresponding
application template preconfigured by the manufacturer or can be copied during the engineering into the
corresponding function group.
The function Restricted ground-fault protection is stepless.
[dw_stru_pt, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_reffkt, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-288 Logic Diagram of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection Function
The protection function processes the neutral-point current IY* and the zero-sequence current 3 I0 calculated
from the phase currents (see following figure). The amount-adapted (compensated) currents are described by
the * symbol. They are normalized to the rated object current of the respective side. The protection range
extends exclusively over the transformer winding, including current transformer.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
In case of an internal ground fault, the zero-sequence currents flow to the fault location. With an external
ground fault, the fault current inverts itself in the phase current transformers. In this way, the direction of
current flow serves as the decisive criterion for an internal fault.
[dw_grdpri, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-289 Basic Principle of the Function
NOTE
i Consider the polarity of the current transformers. It must be set in accordance with the connection type.
Connect the neutral point to the 3-pole measuring points on the device side using the even-numbered
terminals.
The protection function operates in 3 steps according to the logic diagram Figure 6-288:
• Effect of pickup value:

Increasing the set pickup threshold using the restraint current. This prevents overfunction in the event of
high-current external ground faults.
• Pickup:
If the calculated current IDiff,REF exceeds the adapted pickup threshold, pickup starts.
• Operate curve based on phase-angle difference:

The angle difference between the neutral-point current (Iy*) and the calculated zero-sequence current
(3I0*) in the operate curve is taken into consideration to differentiate between internal and external
faults.
Effect of Pickup Value

The restraint current (IRest,REF) is calculated from the measured currents. The reference arrows are defined as
positive when pointing to the protected object (see Figure 6-289). Consider that the neutral-point current (IY)
detected using the 1-phase measuring point is displayed as positive in the fault record and in the DIGSI 5 Test
Suite if the current flows from the protected object to ground.
NOTE
i The following calculation applies to the configurations with one current measuring point for the side. In
a special case of 2 current measuring points per side, the calculation of the restraint current must be
performed in greater detail.
IY* = kyx · 3Iy

3I0* = ksx · (IA + IB + IC)
with
kyx = IN,transformerY/IN,side with the secondary current measured in the neutral point (Y)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
ksx = IN,transformerS/IN,side with the secondary current measured on the transformer side (S)
IDiff,REF = |IY* + 3I0*|
IRest,REF = |IY*| + |IA*| + |IB*| + |IC*| with all currents normalized to the rated object current
where:
IY Measured zero-sequence current at neutral point
kyx Factor for magnitude adaptation (neutral point)
ksx Factor for magnitude adaptation (side)
IN,transformer Primary transformer rated current
IN,side Primary rated current of the transformer side (rated object current)
IDiff,REF Differential current
IRest,REF Restraint current
Using the calculated restraint current, a current IChar which represents the pickup value for the tripping is
determined from the characteristic curve (Figure 6-290). In this way, the protection function is stabilized in
the event of external, multiphase ground faults, for example, a 2-pole ground fault. This means that the
protection function becomes less sensitive.
If the Slope = 0 is set here (as an exception), the set Threshold of the operate curve is passed regardless of
the restraint current.
[dw_stab_ke, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-290 Stabilized Characteristic Curve
The ratio between the neutral-point current and the value for the current IChar determined from Figure 6-290 is
observed in the operate curve.
[fo_trip current, 1, en_US]
Pickup
If the IDiff,REF calculated differential current exceeds the calculated current IChar (see Figure 6-288), pickup
occurs and the internal processing is enabled. The pickup is indicated.
Operate Curve Based on Phase-Angle Difference

The operate curve represented in the following figure consists of 2 parts. In the right part of the characteristic
curve (angle magnitude ≤ 90°), you will find the case of an internal ground fault. Under ideal conditions,
the angle between the evaluated currents (∠(IY*, 3I0*)) equals 0 in the event of an internal fault. In the right
section of the characteristic curve (internal fault), the trip threshold for the current Iop_charact. is >1.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If the measured current on the transformer side yields only a very small 3I0* amount, there is no sense in
determining the angle difference. If, in the event of an internal fault, a small 3I0* current simulates an angle
error due to a measuring error, the extended operate range allows reliable tripping with an angle difference
of >90°.
[dw_ausken, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-291 Operate Curve Depending on the Phase Angle
NOTE
i The characteristic curve shown in Figure 6-291 shows the limit of the tripping range with the angle
criterion. The extended operate range is shown symbolically for 2 conditions:
• Condition 1: |IY*| = |3I0*|
• Condition 2: |IY*| = 3 ⋅ |3I0*|
The characteristic curve |IY*| = |3I0*| is the angle limit of the extended operate range for this condition.
In the event of an external fault with |IY*| = |3I0*|, the phase angle is between IY* and 3I0* ≈ 180°.
If a measuring error now changes the angle and this angle error is <80°, unwanted tripping does not occur.
In Figure 6-291, that is the section to the left of 100°.
If, for example, the ratio is |IY*| >> |3I0*|, tripping is theoretically not possible for an angle difference of
180°. This is the case if no fault current is flowing on the transformer side and the current 3I0* results from
a measuring error. With the extended operate range, internal faults are cleared in a secured way.
In case of an external ground fault, the zero-sequence current calculated from the phase currents reverses by
180°. The phase angle between the zero-sequence currents thus (∠(IY*, 3I0*)) equals ± 180°. They are located
in the left part of the operate curve and detect a clearly increased tripping limit.
As specified in Figure 6-291, the characteristic-curve limit with regard to the angle specification on the x-axis
depends on the ratio |IY*| to |3I0*|. If the amounts differ, the characteristic curve shifts.
The current IAngle,REF for the Angle decision is determined from the following subtraction and summation:
IAngle,REF = |IY* - 3I0*| - |IY* + 3I0*|

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The resulting current IAngle,REF results from the respective fault conditions, which are illustrated in the following
figure. With an internal fault (angle difference ≈ 0°) a value results for IAngle,REF that has a negative sign. The
sign remains negative, even when angle errors occur. The amount of IAngle,REF decreases.
With an external short circuit (≈180°), the value of IAngle,REF becomes positive. The current IAngle,REF remains
positive, even if an angle error occurs. The amount also decreases.
The following figure shows this for IAngle,REF = (-Term) - (+Term).
[dw_angle-decision_for_external-faults, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-292 Angle Decision in Internal and External Faults
For tripping to occur, the neutral-point current IY* must reach the value IREF,Trip.
The following table shows the relationship between angle magnitude φ(IY*, 3I0*), angle dimension IAngle,REF,
and trip variable IREF,Trip
Angle Magnitude Angle Dimen- Trip Variable Comments

ϕ(IY*, 3I0*) sion IREF,Trip
IAngle,REF
0° < φ ≤ 90° IAngle,REF = 0 IREF,Trip = |IY*| Internal fault
90° < φ < 180° IAngle,REF > 0 IREF,Trip = max (0, |IY*| - kREFIAngle,REF) Normal operation or external
fault
where:
kREF Factor (permanently set to 4.05657)
With this value, the limit angle at |IY*| = |3I0*| is precisely 100°. No tripping is possible from
this angle on.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The following figure shows an example of the effect on the extended operate by the different ratio IY* to
3I0* (Irest,REF is not considered in the representation).
[dw_angle_trip_relationship, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-293 Ratio IY* to 3I0*
Tripping is possible for each angle from a ratio of IY* to 3I0* > 8.2.
Processing of Several Measuring Points on One Side

If several measuring points are present on one side of a star winding, as with a 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout, the
angle decision occurs separately for each measuring point. The maximum current IAngle,REF is used to establish
the tripping decision.
NOTE
i With an external fault, the current IAngle,REF is always > 0.
The following figure shows the behavior under different fault conditions.
Also observe that the restraint current (IRest.,REF) always results from the sum of all currents (phase currents
of the measuring points and the neutral-point current). For pickup, the differential current IDiff,REF is neces-
sary. This differential current results from the geometric sum of all adapted zero-sequence currents. The
zero-sequence currents of the measuring points on the outgoing side and of the neutral-point current are
meant here.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_fehler, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-294 Behavior under Different Fault Conditions
Processing a Ground Side for Auto Transformer

Instead of a 1-phase neutral point, with an auto transformer, a 3-phase ground side can also be used.
[dw_autraf, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-295 Connecting a Ground Side on the Auto Transformer

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i The largest rated object current from both sides of the auto transformer is used as a reference current
(IN,side) for an auto transformer. It is the rated object current on the 230-kV side in Figure 6-295.
In this case, the neutral-point current is calculated as the sum of the phase currents of the ground side as
follows:
IY* = kmy · (IGnd,A + IGnd,B + IGnd,C)
with
kmy = INY,transformer/IN, M2 side
The following applies for the restraint current:
IRest,REF = |IGnd,A*| + |IGnd,B*| + |IGnd,C*| + |IM1A*| + |IM1B*| + |IM1C*| + |IM2A*| + |IM2B*| + |IM2C*|
NOTE
i If both the 1-phase neutral point and the 3-phase ground side are connected, the restricted ground-fault
protection uses only the 1-phase neutral point. The 3-phase ground side is not considered.

(_:306) I REF,operate Operate quantity of the restricted ground-fault protection from
the angle criterion and can be displayed in the fault record
(_:307) I Angle,REF Stabilizing value (angle) of the restricted ground-fault protection
from the angle criterion and can be displayed in the fault record
(_:311) I REF,Trip operate Operate quantity of the restricted ground-fault protection when
OFF; will be issued in the log
(_:312) I angle,REF operate Stabilizing value of the restricted ground-fault protection when
OFF; will be issued in the log
(_:301) I diff. Differential current; can be displayed in the fault record
(_:302) I restr. Restraint current; can be displayed in the fault record
You can find the measured values for the Restricted ground-fault protection under the following device
menu items:
• Main menu → Measurements → function → Function values → 87N REF
NOTE
i You can determine the setting limits for the threshold values as follows (the adaption is done automatically
and a setting is only possible within the permissible range):
Lower limit:
Threshold value ≥ max {0.05 I/Irated,S ; 0.05 I/Irated,S * Iprim transf. max / Irated, protected object}
Upper limit:
Threshold value ≤ min {2.00 I/Irated,S ; 100.00 I/Irated,S * Iprim transf. max / Irated, protected object}
The value 0.05 I/Irated,S is the minimum possible setting value and 2.00 I/Irated,S the
maximum possible. Iprim,transf. max is the largest transformer current and Irated,protected object the protected object
rated current (reference current) 100.00 I/Irated,S is the upper measurement limit.
The adaptation of the setting limits is done automatically. In addition, a setting is prevented outside of
these limits.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
In the following, typical applications are described for the restricted ground-fault protection.
Protection of a Solidly Grounded Star Winding (Y Side)
[dw_anster, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-296 Application Star Side
This application is a standard application. Here the phase currents of one side and the neutral-point current
are processed. The function is located in the Transformer Side function group.
The following figure shows the structural division of the function. The restricted ground-fault protection gets
its measurands from the current transformers, which are connected to the Transformer side function group.
The neutral-point current is guided via the Transformer neutral point function group to the Transformer
side function group. The current Iy measured at the neutral point is inverted by 180° in the fault record
(COMTRADE). This is due to the fact that, for a Holmgreen connection, the summation current flows via
the terminal with an even connection number, and for a 1-phase connection, it flows via the terminal with
an uneven connection number. To be compatible with SIPROTEC 4 (including reference arrow definition of
the restricted ground-fault protection), in addition to the magnitude scaling of the neutral-point current, a
rotation of the polarity (phase rotation by 180°) is also carried out in the function group Transformer neutral
point.
NOTE
i The fault record indicates the analog traces according to the connection. For this reason, the neutral-point
current is shown rotated by 180° in comparison to SIPROTEC 4. This is due to the fact that, for a Holmgreen
connection, the summation current flows via the terminal with an even connection number, and for a
1-phase connection, it flows via the terminal with an uneven connection number.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_2wtyde, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-297 Function Group Structure of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
Explanations on the Connection and Current-Direction Definition

Uniform reference arrows and transformer burdens are defined for the SIPROTEC 5 device series. These
agreements also apply to the transformer protection devices. The special handling of the neutral-point current
described previously is a result of this.
Due to the current definition, the current in the direction of the protected object is always positive. For the
3-phase current-transformer connection, the representation in Figure 6-298 and Figure 6-299 applies. For a
Holmgreen connection, the summation current is always generated with the neutral point at the terminals
with even numbers. If a separate IN is detected (Figure 6-299), for example, with a core balance current
transformer, the current I4 must have the same directional mode as in Figure 6-298 with Holmgreen. The
protected object is located to the right or left of the transformer set. The polarity in case of a 3-phase
transformer connection is set with the neutral point (in the direction of the protected object or not). The
following basic connections result from this.
[ti_phase_2, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-298 Current-Transformer Connection (1) According to Definition
or

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[tileite4-260313-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-299 Current-Transformer Connection (2) According to Definition
The following connection is defined for the transformer according to Figure 6-300. The current flow for an
external ground fault is entered at the same time. It is recognized that the secondary currents each flow from
the device. From this, a differential current (IDiff,REF = |IY + IA + IB + IC| = | -I4 - I3|) results, according to the
reference arrow definition for the restricted ground-fault protection (positive to the protected object) with an
external ground fault. To prevent that, the neutral-point current is rotated in the Transformer neutral-point
function group. It follows that: IDiff, REF = |I4 – I3| = 0.
[dw_stwnas, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-300 Current-Transformer Connection on the Transformer

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The setting of the 1-phase measuring point based on the definition is carried out as follows:
[scedsall-200214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-301 DIGSI 5 Setting
The point in Figure 6-300 describes the polarity of the current transformer. At the same time, the current
terminal is designed so that this side is fed out on an odd number terminal point. Since in the SIPROTEC 5
system each current transformer can be assigned a 1-phase measuring point, the odd number terminal points
are named in the setting parameters. According to Figure 6-300, the setting must be yes.
• Default setting (_:115) terminal 1,3,5,7 in dir.obj.= yes

The polarity of the 3-phase transformer connection is always configured on the side of the terminals with even
numbers for orientation of the neutral point.
Threshold Value
The following view can be used to derive the threshold value. The transformer is supplied, for example, via the
delta winding and a 1-pole ground fault occurs on the star side.
NOTE
i For estimation of the short-circuit current, note that the inductance changes quadratically with the winding
and linearly with the voltage.
The right part in the following figure represents the fault current as a function of the fault location. The fault
current curve IF1 shows that the longitudinal differential protection with faults near the neutral point has
sensitivity problems due to the sinking current. On the other hand, the neutral-point current IF2 is sufficiently
large. There is therefore no need to set the Threshold (current through the neutral point transformer) to
sensitive.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_f1pole, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-302 Principal Fault Current Curves with a 1-Pole Ground Fault
• Recommended setting value (_:103) Threshold = 0.2 I/Irated,S

The previously mentioned setting limits must be maintained during the setting process (refer to the following
example):
[fo_schwe1, 1, en_US]
The following lower limiting value results from the data from Figure 6-296:
The recommended setting value of 0.2 I/Irated,S lies above it.
• Recommended setting value (_:105) Slope = 0.07

You can stabilize the protection function with external multiphase short-circuits to ground with the parameter
Slope. To determine the setting value, no pickup value increase can occur up to the rated current. After this,

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
the gradient must be active. To derive the gradient, it is assumed that continuation of the straight line must go
through the coordinate origin (see Figure 6-303). Determine the intersection from the threshold value and the
restraint current at rated current. Calculate the gradient as follows:
[fo_stbref, 2, en_US]
[dw_steiga, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-303 Derivation of the Setting Value for the Gradient
If you have several measuring points on an outgoing side (see Figure 6-294), Siemens recommends using
the value 3 I/Irated,S in the intersection calculation for the restraint current. In the load case, the maximum
transformer rated current flows on one side.
If, however, several measuring points are on the supply side (for example, breaker-and-a-half layout), Siemens
recommends including all phase currents in the intersection calculation, in order to avoid too strong a
stabilization. With 2 measuring points, a value of 6 I/Irated,S results as intersection with the threshold value.
The slope becomes flatter (0.2 I/Irated,S/6 I/Irated,S = 0.03).
Protection of a Shunt Reactor
[dw_anquer, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-304 Application with Neutral Reactor

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
As side rated value, the following results:

10 MVA/(√3 · 132 kV) = 43.7 A
You can thus define the lower limit for the threshold value:
Select 0.35 I/Irated,S as threshold value.
• Recommended setting value (_:103) Threshold = 0.35 I/Irated,S

There are no fault currents which could potentially lead to a current-transformer saturation flowing through
the protection range of the shunt reactor. The characteristic curve therefore does not require an increased
value for stabilization (parameter (_:11041:100) Slope 1). You can set the operate curve very flat since
there are no transient faults due to magnetization, transformer tap changers, or transformer faults. Siemens
recommends a minimum slope of 0.05.
• Recommended setting value (_:105) Slope = 0.05
6.45.5 Settings

87N REF #
_:1 87N REF #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 87N REF #:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
_:103 87N REF #:Threshold 0.05 I/IrObj to 2.00 I/IrObj 0.20 I/IrObj
_:105 87N REF #:Slope 0.00 to 0.95 0.07
_:109 87N REF #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; ∞ 0.00 s
_:191 87N REF #:Reference side is • not assigned not assigned
• Side 1
• Side 2
• Side 3
• Side 4
• Side 5

(Type)
87N REF #
_:82 87N REF #:>Block function SPS I
_:54 87N REF #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 87N REF #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 87N REF #:Health ENS O
_:55 87N REF #:Pickup ACD O
_:57 87N REF #:Operate ACT O
_:303 87N REF #:Operate delay expired ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:305 87N REF #:Block by direct. det. SPS O
_:306 87N REF #:I REF,operate MV O
_:307 87N REF #:I Angle,REF MV O
_:311 87N REF #:I REF,Trip operate MV O
_:312 87N REF #:I angle,REF operate MV O
_:301 87N REF #:I diff. MV O
_:302 87N REF #:I restr. MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.46 External Trip Initiation 3-Pole
The External trip initiation function:
• Processes any signals from external protection or supervision devices
• Enables the integration of any signals from external protection equipment in the indication and tripping
processing, for example from transient ground-fault relays or Buchholz protection
• Enables direct tripping of the circuit breaker in conjunction with busbar-protection applications
• Enables direct tripping of the circuit breaker in the case of circuit-breaker failure at the other line end
The function External trip initiation includes one stage. You can instantiate the External trip initiation
function in DIGSI 5 multiple times.
[dw_strext, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_ext-trip-initiation, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-306 Logic Diagram for the External Trip-Initiation Stage
Binary Input Signal >External Trip

The binary input signal >External trip starts the Pickup and the Operate delay.
Blocking the Stage

The stage can be switched to ineffective via a number of signals. If the stage is in the pickup state at the time
of blocking, it will be immediately reset. However, the operate indication remains stopped for the minimum
operating time (_:102) Minimum operate time.

The Operate delay parameter must be set for the specific application. After expiry of the Operate delay
the time-out and tripping are signaled. The duration of the initiation signal as well as the adjustable minimum
command time determine the signal duration of the Operate.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.46.5 Settings

Stage 1
_:901:1 Stage 1:Mode • off on
• on
• test
blocked
• yes

(Type)
Stage 1
_:901:82 Stage 1:>Block function SPS I
_:901:501 Stage 1:>External trip SPS I

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.47 External Trip Initiation with Current-Flow Criterion 3-Pole
The External trip initiation with current-flow criterion function enables the use of a current-flow criterion.
Otherwise, the function operates as the External trip initiation (see 6.46.1 Overview of Functions).
The External trip initiation with current-flow criterion function contains 2 fixed steps. You can instantiate
the External trip initiation with current-flow criterion function in DIGSI 5 multiple times.
[dw_strext_CfC-051021, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Stage Logic
[lo_ext-trip-initiation_CfC, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-308 Logic Diagram of the Stage External Trip Initiation with Threshold Value I>
Binary Input Signal >External Trip

The binary input signal >External trip starts the Pickup and the Operate delay.
Blocking the Stage

The stage can be switched to ineffective via a number of signals. If the stage is in the activate state at the time
of blocking, it will be immediately reset. However, the operate indication remains for the minimum operating
time (_:102) Minimum operate time.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

The Operate delay parameter must be set for the specific application. After the expiry of the Operate
delay, the time-out and tripping are signaled. The duration of the initiation signal and the adjustable
minimum command time determine the signal duration of the Operate.
• Recommended setting value (_:4) Current-flow criterion = on

With the parameter Current-flow criterion, you can switch off the stage. When switched off, the external trip
initiation can work without current criterion.
• Recommended setting value (_:2) Threshold I> = 0.05 A

The Threshold I> parameter must be set for the specific application. The tripping is only output if the
current exceeds the threshold value I>. This is also signaled by (_:55) Current crit. fulf..
6.47.5 Settings

Stage 1
_:901:1 Stage 1:Mode • off on
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
Curr.criterion
_:4 Curr.criterion:Current- • off on
flow criterion
• on
_:2 Curr.criterion:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
I> 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A

(Type)
Stage 1
_:901:82 Stage 1:>Block function SPS I
_:901:501 Stage 1:>External trip SPS I

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Curr.criterion
_:51 Curr.criterion:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:52 Curr.criterion:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Curr.criterion:Health ENS O
_:55 Curr.criterion:Current crit. fulf. SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.48 Automatic Reclosing Function
The Automatic reclosing function (ANSI 79/RREC)
• Automatically closes overhead lines after arc short-circuits
• Is only permissible for overhead lines, because only the possibility of self-activated extinguishing of an
arc short-circuit exists here
• Can be controlled by integrated protection functions and by external protection devices
• The automatic reclosing can be controlled via an external automatic reclosing function via binary input
signals.
The automatic reclosing function (AREC) takes over automatic reclosing after a switch off via a short-circuit
protection. The following figure shows an example for the normal procedure with a two-time automatic
reclosing where the 2nd automatic reclosing attempt is successful.
[dw_2awewz, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-309 Process Diagram of a Two-Time Reclosing with Action Time (2nd AREC Successful)
The integrated Automatic reclosing function allows up to 8 reclosing attempts. Each of the 8 disruption cycles
can work with different parameters.
The following figure shows an example for normal procedure with a two-time automatic reclosing after
disconnection via the internal overload protection. The 2nd automatic reclosing attempt is successful.
[dw_ablaufdiagramm_2-AWE-nach Abschalt-Thermo, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-310 Process Diagram of a Two-Time Reclosing after Disconnection via Overload Protection
The integrated Automatic reclosing function allows up to 8 reclosing attempts here as well. In contrast to
disconnection through the short-circuit protection, each of the 8 disruption cycles can work with its own
parameters that are the same for all cycles.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The Automatic reclosing function is used in function groups for circuit breakers. In a function group for circuit
breakers, one of the 3 types of functions illustrated in the following figures can be used. The Automatic
reclosing function has a central function control.
[dw_fkt_awe, 1, en_US]
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function

The Cyclic automatic reclosing function (Figure 6-312) allows up to 8 reclosing attempts. Here each disruption
cycle can work with different settings.
For the Cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be deleted. You can add
and delete additional cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.
[dw_zyk_awe, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-312 Structure/Embedding of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function
Automatic Reclosing Function with Adaptive Dead Time

The Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead time (ADT) works without set disruption cycles
(Figure 6-313). The requirement for the usage of ADT is that voltage transformers on the line-side are
connected or there is a possibility for the transmission of a close command to a remote line end. With the ADT,
the Automatic reclosing function decides independently if and when an automatic reclosing is reasonable and
permissible and when it is not. The criteria is the phase-to-ground voltage, which is switched through after
reclosing from the opposite line end. The Automatic reclosing function with ADT occurs as soon as it is known
that the line from the opposite end has been placed back under voltage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_aweasp, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-313 Structure/Embedding of the Automatic Reclosing Function With Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)
Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function

If an external reclosing device operates together with the SIPROTEC protection device, use the function type
Operation with external automatic reclosing function (Figure 6-314). The function only provides binary
inputs for the influence of the protection functions in the SIPROTEC protection device. The external reclosing
device delivers the close command. The SIPROTEC protection functions then provide for the trip commands.
[dw_extawe, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-314 Structure/Embedding of the Operating Function With External Automatic Reclosing Function
Function Control
The Automatic reclosing function contains a central function control, see the following figure. You can find
detailed information on the function control in the chapter Function/Stage Control.
[lo_arc_fkt, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-315 Function Control for the Automatic Reclosing Function

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.48.3 Cooperation of the Automatic Reclosing Function and Protection Functions
The Automatic reclosing function (AREC) can be influenced by the protection functions in the following way:
• The AREC is started through pickup indications and operate indications by the selected protection func-
tions or protection stages.The start depends on the set operating mode for the AREC.
• Individual protection functions or protection stages can be configured so that their operate indication
blocks the AREC. If such a blocking exists, the AREC cannot be started. If the AREC is already started, the
blocking will lead to the cancellation of the AREC.
The automatic reclosing device can thus have an influence on the effects of the protection functions. The
following influence possibilities exist:
• The AREC provides signals that can be used by protection functions for the blocking or release of special
stages or zones. An example is the release of overreaching zones with distance protection.
The configuration of the interaction between internal protection functions and automatic reclosing functions
can be set separately for each protection function, see Figure 6-316.
[lo_awesig, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-316 Signals between Protection Functions and Automatic Reclosing Functions
The configuration occurs in a matrix view in DIGSI, see the following figure.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-317 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI 5
If a protection function or the stage of a protection function is connected with the AREC through the matrix,
this means that the respective pickup and operate indications are forwarded to the AREC.
The links can be conducted separately
• For starting the automatic reclosing function and
• For the blocking of the automatic reclosing function

The Automatic reclosing function also has the corresponding binary inputs and binary outputs through which
the external protection devices can be connected to the internal Automatic reclosing function.
6.48.4 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function
6.48.4.1 Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function

For the cyclic automatic reclosing function, there are 4 operating modes, from which one can be selected for
the parameterization (parameter (_:6601:101) 79 operating mode).
The selection of the operating mode is dependent on the tripping behavior of the protection functions and the
circuit breaker.
For applications with 3-pole tripping, all 4 operating modes are available.
• Operating mode 1: with op., with act. time
• Operating mode 2: w.pickup, w. action time
• Operating mode 3: with op., w/o act. time
• Operating mode 4: w.pickup, w/o act. time

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Operating Mode 1: with op., with act. time

The operating mode with op., with act. time allows different automatic reclosing cycles depending
on the tripping type and operate time of the protection function(s). With this operating mode, the automatic
reclosing must be started with the operate indications. Additionally, the general pickup must also be consid-
ered.
With raising general pickup, the action times of the configured automatic reclosing cycles start. The general
pickup is in this connection the group indication of all internal protection functions configured for starting the
automatic reclosing and the external binary input for general pickup >Gen. pickup for start.
Through the time between the raising general pickup and clearing operate indication, the automatic reclosing
cycle to be started will be determined. Here for multiple automatic reclosing cycles, the sequence of the
expiring automatic reclosing cycles is not fixed, like the operating modes without action time.
The following example in Figure 6-318 shows a tripping that comes after expiration of the action time of cycle
1, but still before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Cycle 2 is now active.
Within the following reclaim time, there will be another pickup and tripping. Since cycle 2 is already complete,
these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The 2nd operate indication comes during the running
action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 is now active.
[dw_arce1d, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-318 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Tripping/With Action Time
Through the action time, there is a direct influence on the dead time behavior of the automatic reclosing
function. With faults with short operate times, other dead times can be realized than for removed faults with
longer tripping time. With faults with short operate time, an automatic reclosing is executed, with removed
faults this does not occur with longer operate time. The operating mode with op., with act. time
allows for different automatic reclosing cycles depending on the operate time of the protection function(s).
Operating Mode 2: w.pickup, w. action time

The operating mode w.pickup, w. action time allows different automatic reclosing cycles depending
on the operate time and type of fault. It is only suitable and applicable for applications with 3-pole tripping.
With this operating mode, the automatic reclosing must be started with the operate indications from the
protection functions. Additionally, the pickup sample from the conductor pickups and the general pickup are
considered:
• With 1-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 1-phase dead times are activated. 1-phase
pickup includes both pickup samples phase-to-ground and only grounding.
• With 2-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 2-phase dead times are activated.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With raising general pickup, the action times of the configured automatic reclosing cycles start. The general
pickup is in this connection the group indication of all internal protection functions configured for starting the
automatic reclosing and the external binary input for general pickup >Gen. pickup for start.
Through the time between the raising general pickup and raising trip command, the automatic reclosing cycle
to be started will be determined. Here for multiple automatic reclosing cycles, the sequence of the expiring
automatic reclosing cycles is not fixed, like the operating modes without action time.
The following example shows a tripping that comes after expiration of the action time of cycle 1, but still
before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Since it is a 2-phase pickup, cycle 2 is active
with the dead-time setting for 2-phase faults.
After reclosing, there will be another, this time 3-phase, pickup and tripping within the following reclaim time.
Since cycle 2 is already complete, these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The trip command
comes during the current action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 is active, with the dead time setting for 3-phase
faults.
[dw_arcbm2, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-319 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Pickup/With Action Time
Operating Mode 3: with op., w/o act. time

With the operating mode with op., w/o act. time, the respective dead time is started after each trip
command. The pickups are not considered. If more than one automatic reclosing cycle is configured, the
sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is identical with the cycle number (1, 2, and 3.).
[dw_aweb3d, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-320 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Tripping/Without Action Time
Operating Mode 4: w.pickup, w/o act. time

With the operating mode w.pickup, w/o act. time, the automatic reclosing must be started with the
operate indications from the protection functions. It is only suitable and applicable for applications with 3-pole
tripping.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The start of the dead time occurs after each trip command. Additionally, the pickup sample from the
conductor pickups is considered:
• With 1-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 1-phase dead times are activated. 1-phase
pickup includes both pickup samples phase-to-ground and only grounding.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup. If more
than one automatic reclosing cycle is configured, the sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is
identical with the cycle number (1, 2, 3, etc.).
[dw_arcbs4, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-321 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Pickup/Without Action Time
6.48.4.2 Structure of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function

In Figure 6-322, the functional structure of the cyclic automatic reclosing function is illustrated as a block
diagram. The figure displays the important signals, coming from outside of the cyclic automatic reclosing
function, and the most important signals between the individual function blocks.
The automatic reclosing function works as a state machine. From the idle state AREC ready, the automatic
reclosing function gets through the tripping or pickup indications of the protection functions to the Dead
time state. After expiration of the dead time, the subsequent state is reached with the closing indication. The
reclaim time is also started together with the closing indication. If the reclaim time can expire without further
operate or pickup indications, the automatic reclosing is successful and the automatic reclosing function turns
back to idle state.
If the automatic reclosing function is restarted during the current reclaim time, there will be either a dynamic
blocking or other reclosing cycles will be executed. If other reclosing cycles are possible, there will be a dead
time start and the described process starts again.
After the end of a dynamic blocking, the automatic reclosing function switches back to idle state or goes
into the state Static Blocking if the blocking condition is permanently present. In the following sections, the
individual function blocks are described in detail.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_zyk_awe, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-322 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing: Block Diagram of Automatic Reclosing
6.48.4.3 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Tripping

The operate indications are used as starting signals. For operating modes with action time, the start of the
action time(s) occurs with the pickup messages. During all operating modes, the pickup indications are also
required during the processing of faults and for supervision during the reclaim time.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Applications with 3-Pole Tripping

For applications with only 3-pole tripping options, the internal operate indications are always 3-pole. For
external starts, there is a binary input, which signalizes a 3-pole tripping of the external protection device.
The outputs of the input logic signalize that the reclosing start has occurred through a 3-pole operate
indication.
[lo_bta_aus, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-323 Input Logic for Operating Modes: With Tripping
6.48.4.4 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Pickup

The operate indications and the pickup indications are used as starting signals. The internal pickup indications
are processed selective to the phase. Through binary inputs, the pickup information can also be coupled by
external protection devices (>Pickup A for start, >Pickup B for start and >Pickup C for
start). Optionally, the pickup information can be externally captured as a pickup sample, thus, as a 1-phase,
2-phase and 3-phase pickup.
The outputs of the input logic signalize if the automatic reclosing start occurs through a 1-phase, 2-phase, or
3-phase pickup:
• On Start with 3-phase pickup, it is recognized if all 3 phases were picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing outgoing pickup indication.
• On Start with 2-phase pickup, it is recognized if all 2 phases were picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication and at no time 3 phases.
• On Start with 1-phase pickup, it is recognized if only 1 phase was picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
For operating modes with action time, the start of the action time(s) occurs with the pickup indications.
During operating modes with pickup, the pickup indications affect the selection of the dead times. During all
operating modes, the pickup indications are also required during the processing of faults and for supervision
during the reclaim time.
The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only ideal for applications with 3-pole tripping.
Therefore, the outputs of the input logic always signal 3-pole operate indications.
[lo_btaanr, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-324 Input Logic for Operating Modes: With Pickup
6.48.4.5 Start
In the Start function block, the automatic reclosing function is switched from the idle state AREC ready to the
state Dead time, see Figure 6-325. The length of the starting signals is controlled with a supervision time.
Start-Signal Supervision Time

The start-signal supervision stops the automatic reclosing if the short circuit is not switched off within the
normal time; for example, in the case of a circuit-breaker failure.
With the first raising operate indication, the start-signal supervision time is initiated, parameter Start
signal supervis.time. The time is stopped as soon as no operate indication is active.
The automatic reclosing function is blocked if there is an expiration of the start-signal supervision time
through a long operate indication. The blocking lasts until the operate indication dropout, extended by a
further 0.5 s.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Transition to the Dead-Time State

The transition of the automatic reclosing function to the dead-time state occurs for:
• Clearing operate indications if none of the signal inputs for operate indications are active
• or if the circuit breaker can no longer be recognized as 3-pole closed
• and the start-signal supervision time is not expired

Additionally, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
• The circuit breaker signalizes the readiness for automatic reclosing typically through a binary input.
If the circuit breaker is not ready, the automatic reclosing function can be statically blocked. In this
situation, the automatic closing function is not in idle state automatic closing function ready. The
control of the circuit-breaker readiness is optional and can be turned off through settings, see also
6.48.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and 6.48.4.17 Blockings.
• The circuit breaker must be closed before the 3-pole trip command. This condition is not considered if the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected to the protection device.
You can delay the transition to the dead time state through the binary input >Dead time start delay.
As long the corresponding binary signal is present, the dead time of the automatic reclosing function will
not be started. The maximum duration of this binary signal is monitored through a time stage that can be
set, parameter Max. dead-time delay. Upon expiration of this time stage, that is, if the binary signal is
present longer than permitted, the automatic reclosing function will be blocked until the dropout of the binary
signal, additionally extended by another 0.5 s, see also 6.48.4.17 Blockings.
[lo_gistar, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-325 Logic for Function Block Start
6.48.4.6 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-326, the cycle control is illustrated.
Cycle Availability
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, there is no automatic reclosing function if theDead time

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
aft. 1-pole trip 46 is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective automatic
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the
associated automatic reclosing cycle.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection
functions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only
after 1p. trip). The release or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of faults that
lead to 1-pole tripping.
Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming
general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are
released through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no longer
active.
46 is not available for devices with only 3-pole tripping

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_auswir, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-326 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Tripping/With Action Time
6.48.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-327, the cycle control is illustrated.
Cycle Availability
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary
input. In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits. This also applies to Dead time aft.2ph.
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
automatic reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can
block the associated automatic reclosing cycle.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming
general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are
released through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no longer
active.
[lo_anrwir, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-327 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Pickup/With Action Time

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.48.4.8 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-328, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, there is no automatic reclosing function after 1-pole tripping
if the Dead time aft. 1-pole trip 47 is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the
respective automatic reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle,
you can block the associated automatic reclosing cycle.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection
functions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only
after 1p. trip). The release or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of faults that
lead to 1-pole tripping.
47 not available for devices with only 3-pole tripping

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_auowrk, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-328 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Tripping/Without Action Time
6.48.4.9 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 4: With Pickup/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-329, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary
input. In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
automatic reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can
block the associated automatic reclosing cycle.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_anowrk, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-329 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Pickup/Without Action Time
6.48.4.10 Stage Release

The function block Stage release creates output indications for the release or switching over of special stages
for protection functions (stage release in the 1st cycle or stage release in the n. cycle). Examples of this are
the release of overreaching zones with distance protection and the dynamic adjustment of time delays or
threshold values with overcurrent protection.
Figure 6-330 shows the stage release for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. With available automatic reclosing
functions, the tripping stage release typically occurs up to the expiration of the dead time.
In this state the cycle number is 1. If the automatic reclosing cycle is only set for 1-phase 48, the stage release
will be reset to the beginning of the 1-phase dead time. This is necessary, since every additional evolving fault
48 not for devices with only 3-phase tripping

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
that occurs within the dead time causes a 3-pole cut-off, and subsequently, the automatic reclosing function
can no longer take place.
[lo_1awezk, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-330 Stage Release for Protection Functions in the 1st Automatic Reclosing Cycle
The tripping stage release for higher automatic reclosing cycles is set to the beginning of the reclaim time for
rising edge close commands. Simultaneously, the cycle number is increased. The reset condition is identical to
the condition for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. If the reduced dead time (RDT) mode is selected and no
additional reduced dead time occurs, the release will be maintained for the 2nd cycle, since it can be assumed
that the opposite end of the line is still open-circuited.
[lo_2awezk, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-331 Stage Release for Protection Functions Starting With the 2nd Automatic Reclosing Cycle
6.48.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Tripping

In the Dead time function block, that dead time which corresponds with the previous trip command is
started. After expiration of the dead time, the automatic reclosing function changes to the status Switch on.
Figure 6-332 shows the dead time logic.
There are the following time stages that can be set differently:
• Dead time after 3-pole tripping
• Dead time after evolving fault

Setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to ∞ (= invalid) avoids an automatic reclosing after
3-pole tripping.
As soon as an evolving fault is recognized (see 6.48.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time),
switching to an automatic reclosing cycle for 3-pole interruption occurs. With the 3-pole cut-off of the
evolving fault, a separate adjustable dead time for the evolving fault begins. The total dead time is composed
of the part of the dead time that expired until the evolving fault was stopped for the 1st disruption plus the
dead time for the evolving fault.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_pausjk, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-332 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: With
Tripping
6.48.4.12 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Pickup

In the Dead time function block, the dead time corresponding to the type of short circuit that led to the trip
command is started. The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only suitable for applications
with 3-pole tripping. After expiration of the dead time, the automatic reclosing function changes to the status
Switch on. Figure 6-333 shows the dead time logic.
There are 4 time stages that can be set differently:
• Dead time after 1-phase short circuits
• Dead time for evolving faults

In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup.
As soon as an evolving fault is recognized (see chapter 6.48.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead
Time), a separate dead time for faults begins with the stopping of the fault. The total dead time is composed
of the part of the dead time that expired until the evolving fault was stopped for the 1st disruption plus the
dead time for the evolving fault. With the setting of the Dead time aft. evolv. fault to invalid, no
other automatic reclosing cycle is executed after tripping due to evolving faults. The tripping through evolving
faults is then finished.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_pauare, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-333 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function – Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: With
Pickup
6.48.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time

Evolving faults are short circuits, which occur after switching off a short circuit during dead time. This may be
the case during 1-pole tripping and there is a short circuit in the non-switched conductors after this.
After 3-pole tripping there may also be evolving faults if the line is fed through a second (non-3-pole) opened
circuit breaker, for example, for systems with a 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout.
The evolving-fault detection is divided into components:
• Detection of evolving faults
• Evolving-faults processing
• 3-pole coupling of a circuit breaker during evolving faults

The procedure during evolving faults is illustrated in Figure 6-334.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Detection of Evolving Faults

For the detection of an evolving fault, the following criteria can be selected through parameters:
• Parameter Evolving-fault detection = with trip

For this setting, any tripping during the dead time leads to evolving-fault detection. At any tripping it is
decided if an internal protection function is tripped or if the tripping is signaled through a binary input.
Thus, it does not matter if the tripping-protection function is configured for the start of the Automatic
reclosing function or not.
• Parameter Evolving-fault detection = with pickup

Evolving faults are detected if during the dead time a protection function configured for the Automatic
reclosing function start is picked up or if an external pickup is recognized through a binary input.
• Binary input >Evolving fault start

The evolving-fault detection can also be introduced through a binary input without an internal protection
pickup being available.
Reaction to Evolving Faults

After a recognized evolving fault, the Automatic reclosing function can be influenced in 2 ways.
• Parameter Response to evolv. faults = blocks 79

As soon as an evolving fault is recognized, the reclosing function will be blocked. There are no other
reclosing attempts and the Automatic reclosing function is blocked until the pickup and operate indica-
tions causing the evolving fault disappear.
• Parameter Response to evolv. faults = strt. evol.flt.dead time

As soon as an evolving fault is recognized, an automatic reclosing cycle for 3-pole interruption is
switched to. The Automatic reclosing function does not allow any 1-pole tripping until the fault is solved
or there is a final switch off; thus, every following trip command will be 3-pole. When the evolving fault is
fixed, the separate dead time for faults will start, see also chapter Dead time. The further process is as by
3-pole cycles.
[dw_bspffe, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-334 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Example for an Evolving Fault
For tripping through evolving faults, the entire dead time consists of the part of the dead time expired until
disconnecting the evolving fault for the 1-pole interruption plus the dead time for the fault together, see
Figure 6-335.
The dead time for evolving faults is started with the return of the operate indication or with the opening of all
3 circuit-breaker poles, provided the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_folsjk-02, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-335 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of Evolving-Fault Detection
6.48.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command

After the expiration of the dead time, the Automatic reclosing function is in the closing state.
The closing state can depend on the following influences, see Figure 6-336:
• Through a synchrocheck if the circuit breaker was opened during the 3-pole dead time
• Through the readiness of the circuit breaker signaled through the binary input
• Through a binary input for delaying the close command (>Delay close cmd.)
The Close cmd. indication is a requirement to issue the actual close command to the circuit breaker.
The mentioned criteria must not be fulfilled directly after expiration of the dead time. If a dead-time prolonga-
tion is set, the mentioned criteria will be checked during the prolongation time. With the release of the closing
indication, the Automatic reclosing function switches to the reclaim time state.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_einsha, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-336 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing: Logic for the Closing Indication
Testing the Circuit-Breaker Readiness Directly before Closing

For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles, you can set whether a circuit-breaker readiness test
is to be carried out directly before closing (parameter CB ready check bef.close, Figure 6-337).
Independently of this, a circuit-breaker readiness test can be carried out before the start of the 1st automatic
reclosing cycle; see 6.48.4.5 Start and 6.48.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness .

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_ls_voei, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-337 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Query of the Circuit-Breaker Readiness Directly before
Closing
Synchrocheck
For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles, you can set whether a synchrocheck is to be carried
out, and which functionality is to be used here; see Figure 6-338. You can only use the internal synchrocheck
if the device is connected to a voltage transformer.
Alternatively, you can also connect an external device with synchrocheck through a binary input.
The measuring request for the synchrocheck is placed if the optional test of the circuit-breaker readiness was
positive. The measuring request for the synchrocheck exists until the synchrocheck assigns the allowance for
the closure. If the allowance is not given within the set maximum dead time extension, the closure will be
cancelled through the blocking of the Automatic reclosing function. The minimum duration of the measuring
request is 50 ms.
[lo_syncro, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-338 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Query of the Synchronism
Close Command
As soon as the test of the circuit-breaker readiness and the synchrocheck deliver a positive result, the closing
indication will be created. It will be assigned for 100 ms. The actual close command is not created by the
Automatic reclosing function, but rather from the circuit-breaker function block outside of the Automatic
reclosing function. Here the set maximum duration of the close command is also considered.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
In addition to the closing indication, additional indications will be created that describe the type of closure.
These include:
• Close command after 3-pole tripping in the 1st cycle (Cls.cmd after 3p.1.cyc
• Close command after 1-pole or 3-pole tripping starting with the 2nd cycle (CloseCmd >=2nd.cyc)
Generation of the Signal Remote close signal

The cyclic automatic reclosing function can generate the information Remote close signal. This infor-
mation can be transferred to the protection device as a binary signal on the line to be protected on the
opposite end and processed by the AREC function there in the operating mode Adaptive dead time (ADT).
Furthermore, this binary signal can be arranged as information for transmission via an existing protection
interface.
The information Remote close signal is generated by the closing logic. It can be delayed by a set time
over the local close indication. With this delay, you can make sure that information is only set if the automatic
reclosing was successful and there was no further tripping. The pulse duration of the inter-close signal has a
fixed length of 500 ms.
6.48.4.15 Reclaim Time

With the assignment of the close command, the automatic reclosing function goes into the reclaim time
state. During this time, it is decided if the current reclosing cycle was successful or not.
• If during the reclaim time no further tripping occurs, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle, and
thus the entire automatic reclosing, was successful.
• If during the reclaim time another tripping occurred, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle
was not successful. If other AREC cycles are permitted, one of these cycles will be used to continue
the process. If, in contrast, the currently executed cycle was the last permissible cycle, the automatic
reclosing process will end and be reported as unsuccessful.
In both cases, the automatic reclosing function switches back to the idle state automatic reclosing function
ready.
Short Circuits during Running Reclaim Time

A trip command that occurs during a reclaim time leads to a cancellation of the reclaim time. If further AREC
cycles are allowed, the regulation of the next cycle depends on whether the automatic reclosing function is
executed in an operating mode without action times or with action times, see Figure 6-339.
• For operating modes with action time, the action times of all higher cycles are started with the begin-
ning of the new general pickup if these are not blocked. The cycle with the lowest cycle number is
selected, whose action time is not yet expired with the incoming operate indication. If no further cycles
are possible or if the action times of all possible cycles are expired before the trip indication, there will be
no further reclosing.
• For the operating modes without action time, the cycle following the current cycle will always be
selected in the set cycle. If this is blocked, the cycle following this one will be selected, etc. If no higher
cycles exist or if they are all blocked, there will be no further automatic reclosing.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_sperre, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-339 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing: Logic for the Reclaim Time
After unsuccessful automatic reclosing with thermal automatic reclosing function, the corresponding, next-
higher cycle is started.
6.48.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness

The Automatic reclosing function needs circuit-breaker readiness for the following purposes, see Figure 6-340:
• Recognition of the circuit-breaker readiness before starting:

In idle state of the Automatic reclosing function, an unavailable circuit breaker leads to the blocking of
the Automatic reclosing function. This monitoring is optional and must be switched off through settings
if the readiness signal is not available for the protection device.
• Analysis of the circuit-breaker readiness directly before the close command:

For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles, it can be set whether the circuit-breaker readiness
is a requirement for the assignment of the close command. This monitoring is also optional.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_lsbere, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-340 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing: Logic for the Circuit-Breaker Readiness
With the thermal automatic reclosing function the setting value of the parameter CB ready check
bef.close applies to all cycles.
6.48.4.17 Blockings
The Automatic reclosing function differentiates between 2 types of blockings, see Figure 6-341:
• Static blocking
• Dynamic blocking
Static Blocking
The Automatic reclosing function is statically blocked if the function is switched on, but is not ready for
reclosing and also cannot be started as long as this blocking is present. The static blocking is signaled with the
indication Inactive.
The following conditions lead to the static blocking:
Condition Indication
Manual closing of the circuit breaker, recognition through binary Inactive
input or internal device control.
The blocking is temporary, the duration can be set with the
parameter Block. time aft. man.close.
Circuit breaker not available for automatic reclosing function, Inactive
recognition through binary input. This cause can be switched on
or off through the parameter CB ready check bef.close.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Circuit breaker not closed for 3-pole, recognition through binary Inactive
input.
This criteria is used if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
connected.
No reclosing cycle possible Inactive
Recognition due to the following causes:
• Automatic reclosing cycle is not set.

• Automatic reclosing cycles are set, but all are blocked, for
example, via binary input.
• No device-internal function and binary input have been
configured for starting the automatic reclosing function.
• With operating modes with tripping:
– both 1-pole and 3-pole cycles are blocked via binary
inputs
• With operating modes with pickup:
– 1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase automatic reclosing
cycles are blocked via binary inputs.
• With operating modes without action time:
– the first automatic reclosing cycle is blocked via binary
input.
• With the dead-line check functionality:
– if the voltage measurement is not available or is
disrupted.
Dynamic Blocking
The automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked if a blocking condition occurs while an auto-
matic reclosing function is already running. The dynamic blocking is signalized with the indication Not
ready.
After the occurrence of a dynamic blocking, it is checked at intervals of 0.5 s to see if the blocking can
be removed. If the blocking condition remains or if a different blocking condition occurs in the meantime,
the blocking will remain. If, in contrast, the cause of the blocking disappears, the dynamic blocking will be
removed if no general pickup or no tripping configured for the automatic reclosing function start is available.
A separate indication for logging exists for each individual blocking cause.
The following conditions lead to the dynamic blocking:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If no reclosing cycle fitting the fault type is released: Not ready
Block. by no cycle
• With operating modes with tripping:
If a 1-pole or 3-pole operate indication occurs at the auto-
matic reclosing function start input, however, the auto-
matic reclosing function does not start in accordance with
the parameterization for this type of tripping, the respective
dead time will be set to invalid.
• With operating modes with pickup:
If a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup indication occurs
during the automatic reclosing function starting process,
but the automatic reclosing function may not be started
in accordance with the parameterization for this type of
pickup.
If a protection function configured to block the automatic Not ready
reclosing function operates. Block. by protection
If the maximum set waiting time for the delay of the start of the Not ready
dead time through the binary input expires without the binary Blk.by max. d.t. delay
input >Dead time start delay becoming inactive during
this period of time.
If the synchrocheck is set and the synchronism conditions after Not ready
the expiration of the maximum dead-time extension are not Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
fulfilled before the assignment of the close command.
If the query of the circuit-breaker readiness is switched on Not ready
directly before the close command through the parameter and Blk.by CB ready sup.
the maximum dead-time extension expires.
If the closing indication is delayed through the binary input Not ready
>Delay close cmd. for so long until the maximum dead Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
time extension is exceeded before the assignment of the close
command
If an evolving fault occurs and the parameter Response to Not ready
evolv. faults is set to blocks 79 Blk. by evolving fault
If the start-signal supervision time for the operate indication Not ready
starting from the automatic reclosing function or the starting Blk.by strtsig.superv.
binary input expires.
In this case, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed.
If after the start of the automatic reclosing function a dead time Not ready
is already running and a blocking binary input is active, with the Block. by binary input
following binary inputs:
>Blk. 1-pole AR, >Blk. 3-pole AR, >Blk. with 1-ph
pickup, >Blk. with 2-ph pickup, >Blk. with 3-ph pickup
If the maximum number of automatic reclosing attempts is Not ready
reached and there is a trip command within the reclaim time Block. by max. cycles
With operating modes with action time: Not ready
If the action times of all released automatic reclosing cycles Blk.by action time exp
expire without a trip command

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on Not ready
functionality with dead-line check: Blk.by dead-line check
If during the dead time the required voltage criteria is not
fulfilled
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on Not ready
functionality with dead-line check: Blk.by loss of voltage
If during a running automatic reclosing cycle a failure of the
measuring voltage is determined.
After the completion of the automatic reclosing cycle, the
dynamic blocking becomes static blocking if there is a continued
failure of the measuring voltage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_blo_awe, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-341 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing: Blocking Logic in the Example for a 1-Pole Cycle (Static and
Dynamic Blocking)
6.48.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT)

The additional functions Dead-line check (DLC) and Reduced dead time (RDT), are only possible for appli-
cations with a voltage-transformer connection. Another requirement is that the voltage of the line being
switched on can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker. This is only possible if the voltage
transformer is aligned on the line-side - seen from the circuit breaker.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Both additional functions DLC and RDT are mutually exclusive, because the DLC checks if the value falls below
a voltage threshold, while the RDT checks if the value exceeds the voltage threshold.
The respectively selected additional function runs in the automatic reclosing state dead time.
Reduced Dead Time (RDT)

With the Reduced dead time, a close command can be assigned before the expiration of the set dead times if
the line to switch on is recognized as fault-free through the measurement of the line voltage.
The voltage measurement occurs with the 3 phase-to-phase-voltages.
In systems with a grounded neutral point, the 3 phase-to-ground voltages are additionally observed.
In systems with compensated or with isolated neutral points, the largest 2 of the 3 phase-to-ground voltages
are additionally considered. Through this, a RDT can also be executed with 1-phase ground connections.
For the approval of the close command with RDT, the following conditions apply:
• The automatic reclosing function is in the state dead time.
• Each measured voltage is above the set threshold values Volt. thres.f. live line/bus
The phase-to-phase voltages are divided by √3 prior to comparing the threshold value. Thus, the phase-
to-ground voltage UN√3 applies as the reference size for the parameterization.
• Exceeding the threshold is fulfilled for the set duration Voltage supervision time.
Dead-Line Check (DLC)

If after switching off a short-circuit the voltage on the switched off line does not disappear, the automatic
reclosing function can be avoided with the dead-line check (DLC).
The voltage measurement occurs with the 3 phase-to-ground voltages.
For the release of the close command with DLC, the following conditions apply:
• The automatic reclosing function is in the state dead time.
• All measured voltages for the set duration Voltage supervision time are below the set threshold
Volt. thres.f. live line/bus.
• The set dead time is expired.

As soon as the voltages fall below the threshold value for the set duration, the allowance for automatic
reclosing with DLC is assigned. This also applies if the values are not below the voltage threshold until the
expiration of the set dead time. In this way, an automatic reclosing is executed if the automatic reclosing
function is first switched to at the end of the protected line and thus, the line is exposed to voltage again.
The automatic reclosing function is blocked by the DLC under the following conditions:
• The automatic reclosing function is in the Closure state, the dead time has expired
• All measured voltages were not simultaneously below the set threshold values Volt.thres. f. dead
line/bus for the set duration Voltage supervision time during the dead time.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_vrkarc, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-342 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Functions of Reduced Dead Time and Dead-Line Check
6.48.4.19 Settings

General
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:6601:101 General:79 operating • with op., w/o act. time with op., with
mode act. time
• with op., with act. time
• w.pickup, w/o act. time
• w.pickup, w. action time
_:6601:102 General:CB ready check • no no
bef. start
• yes
_:6601:103 General:Reclai. time 0.50 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
aft.succ.cyc.
_:6601:104 General:Block. time aft. 0.00 s to 300.00 s 1.00 s
man.close
_:6601:105 General:Start signal 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.13 s
supervis.time
_:6601:106 General:CB ready superv. 0.01 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
time
_:6601:107 General:3-pole operate • no yes
by 79
• yes
_:6601:108 General:Evolving-fault • with trip with trip
detection
• with pickup
_:6601:109 General:Response to • strt. evol.flt.dead time blocks 79
evolv. faults
• blocks 79
_:6601:110 General:Max. dead-time 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.50 s
delay
_:6601:111 General:Max. dead-time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
extension
_:6601:112 General:Send delay f. 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ ∞
remot. close
DLC, RDT
_:6601:113 General:Dead-line check/ • without without
reduc.d.t
• Reduced dead t. RDT
• Dead-line check DLC
_:6601:114 General:Voltage supervi- 0.10 s to 30.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
_:6601:115 General:Volt. thres.f. live 0.300 V to 340.000 V 48.000 V
line/bus
_:6601:116 General:Volt.thres. f. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 30.000 V
dead line/bus
Cycle 1
_:6571:102 Cycle 1:Start from idle • no yes
state allow.
• yes
_:6571:103 Cycle 1:Action time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ 0.20 s
_:6571:108 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 3- 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; ∞ 0.50 s
pole trip
_:6571:107 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 1- 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
pole trip
_:6571:104 Cycle 1:Dead time 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
aft.1ph. pickup
aft.2ph. pickup

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

aft.3ph. pickup
_:6571:109 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.20 s
evolv. fault
_:6571:111 Cycle 1:CB ready check • no no
bef.close
• yes
_:6571:110 Cycle 1:Synchroch. aft. • none none
3-pole d.t.
• internal
• external
_:6571:112 Cycle 1:Intern. synchro- Setting options depend on
check with configuration

(Type)
General
_:6601:87 General:>Function off SPS I
_:6601:524 General:>Function on SPS I
_:6601:347 General:Function on SPC C
_:6601:501 General:>Release by ext.sync. SPS I
_:6601:502 General:>Blk. with 1-ph pickup SPS I
_:6601:505 General:>Blk. 1-pole AR SPS I
_:6601:507 General:>Pickup A for start SPS I
_:6601:508 General:>Pickup B for start SPS I
_:6601:509 General:>Pickup C for start SPS I
_:6601:510 General:>Pickup 1ph for start SPS I
_:6601:513 General:>Gen. pickup for start SPS I
_:6601:514 General:>General trip for start SPS I
_:6601:515 General:>Trip pole A for start SPS I
_:6601:516 General:>Trip pole B for start SPS I
_:6601:517 General:>Trip pole C for start SPS I
_:6601:518 General:>Trip 1-pole for start SPS I
_:6601:520 General:>Evolving fault start SPS I
_:6601:521 General:>Dead time start delay SPS I
_:6601:522 General:>Delay close cmd. SPS I
_:6601:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:6601:301 General:79 state ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:6601:302 General:Actual reclose cycle INS O
_:6601:303 General:Not ready SPS O
_:6601:304 General:79 successful SPS O
_:6601:305 General:CB ready superv.expir SPS O
_:6601:306 General:CB is not ready SPS O
_:6601:307 General:79 permits 1-pole trip SPS O
_:6601:308 General:AR only after 1p. trip SPS O
_:6601:309 General:In progress SPS O
_:6601:310 General:Reclaim time running SPS O
_:6601:311 General:Start sig. superv.exp. SPS O
_:6601:313 General:Evolv.-fault detected SPS O
_:6601:314 General:RDT CloseCmd indicat. SPS O
_:6601:315 General:Dead t. aft.1pole trip SPS O
_:6601:317 General:Dead t. aft.1ph pickup SPS O
_:6601:320 General:Dead t. aft.evolv.flt. SPS O
_:6601:321 General:Close cmd. indication ACT O
_:6601:322 General:Cls.cmd after 1p.1.cyc SPS O
_:6601:324 General:CloseCmd >=2nd.cyc SPS O
_:6601:325 General:3-pole operate by 79 SPS O
_:6601:326 General:Remote close signal SPS O
_:6601:327 General:Block. by binary input SPS O
_:6601:328 General:Blk.by CB ready sup. SPS O
_:6601:329 General:Blk.by strtsig.superv. SPS O
_:6601:330 General:Blk.by action time exp SPS O
_:6601:331 General:Blk.by max.d.t. expiry SPS O
_:6601:332 General:Blk.by max. d.t. delay SPS O
_:6601:333 General:Blk. by evolving fault SPS O
_:6601:337 General:Block. by no cycle SPS O
_:6601:338 General:Block. by protection SPS O
_:6601:334 General:Blk.by dead-line check SPS O
_:6601:335 General:Blk.by loss of voltage SPS O
_:6601:336 General:Block. by max. cycles SPS O
_:6601:339 General:Cyc1 1p AR INS O
_:6601:341 General:Cyc2+ 1p AR INS O
_:6601:342 General:Cyc2+ 3p AR INS O
Cycle 1
_:6571:51 Cycle 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:6571:500 Cycle 1:>Block 79 cycle SPS I
_:6571:52 Cycle 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6571:53 Cycle 1:Health ENS O
_:6571:301 Cycle 1:Cycle running SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:6571:302 Cycle 1:Stage release prot. SPS O
_:6571:303 Cycle 1:Synchrocheck request SPS O
6.48.5 Automatic Reclosing Function with Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)
Description
It is also possible to set the dead times only at one line end and to configure the adaptive dead time at the
other end or ends. The requirements for this is that the voltage transformer aligned on the line side or a
possibility to transfer a close command to a remote line end exists.
Figure 6-343 shows an example with a voltage measurement. It is assumed that device I works with defined
dead times, while the adaptive dead time is configured in device II. It is important that the line is at least fed
from busbar A, so from the side with the defined dead times.
With the adaptive dead time, the automatic reclosing function at the line end II decides independently if and
when a reclosing is reasonable and permissible and when it is not. The criteria is the voltage of the line at
the end II, which is switched through after reclosing from end I. The reclosing at end II occurs, as soon as it
exists, so that the line from end I is set back under voltage. Basically, all phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
voltages are monitored.
With an implied short-circuit, the lines at the positions I, II, and III in the example are switched off. Position I is
switched on again after the dead time set there. At position III the reduced dead time (RDT) can be executed
with the appropriate configuration (see chapter ) if an infeed is also available on busbar B.
If the short circuit has been cleared after successful reclosing, the line A-B from the busbar A will be set under
voltage through the position I. Device II recognizes this voltage and switches on to warrant adequate voltage
measurement time after a short delay The system incident is thus successfully cleared.
If the short circuit is not cleared after closure at position I, I will be switched to the fault again. At line end II,
now no healthy voltage will appear. The device here recognizes this and does not close again.
With multiple reclosing, the process may repeat if the reclosing is unsuccessful until one of the reclosings is
successful or a final disconnection occurs.
[dw_arcasp, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-343 Example for Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)
As the example shows, the adaptive dead time brings along the following advantages:
• The circuit breaker at position II does not switch off again with a remaining fault and is protected through
this.
• With non-selective tripping by overreach at position III, no further disruption cycles may occur here
because the short-circuit path via busbar B and the position II remains disrupted even with multiple
reclosing.
• At position I, with multiple reclosing and even with a final tripping, an overlapping is allowed, because
the line at position II remains open and thus, no actual overreaching can occur at position I.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The adaptive dead time also contains the reduced dead time (RDT), because the criteria are the same. A
special setting of the reduced dead time (RDT) is unnecessary if the automatic reclosing function is used with
adaptive dead time (ADT).
6.48.5.2 Settings

General
• on
• test
_:6601:101 General:79 operating mode • with op., w/o act. time with op., with
act. time
• with op., with act. time
• w.pickup, w/o act. time
• w.pickup, w. action time
_:6601:102 General:CB ready check bef. • no no
start
• yes
_:6601:103 General:Reclai. time 0.50 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
aft.succ.cyc.
_:6601:104 General:Block. time aft. 0.00 s to 300.00 s 1.00 s
man.close
_:6601:105 General:Start signal 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.13 s
supervis.time
_:6601:106 General:CB ready superv. 0.01 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
time
_:6601:107 General:3-pole operate by • no yes
79
• yes
_:6601:111 General:Max. dead-time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
extension
_:6601:114 General:Voltage supervi- 0.10 s to 30.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
_:6601:115 General:Volt. thres.f. live 0.300 V to 340.000 V 48.000 V
line/bus
ADT
_:6631:101 ADT:1-pole trip allowed • no no
• yes
_:6631:104 ADT:Action time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ 0.20 s
_:6631:105 ADT:Maximum dead time 0.50 s to 3000.00 s 5.00 s
_:6631:102 ADT:CB ready check • no no
bef.close
• yes
_:6631:103 ADT:Synchroch. aft. 3-pole • none none
d.t.
• internal
• external
_:6631:106 ADT:Intern. synchrocheck Setting options depend on
with configuration

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
General
_:6601:87 General:>Function off SPS I
_:6601:524 General:>Function on SPS I
_:6601:347 General:Function on SPC C
_:6601:501 General:>Release by ext.sync. SPS I
_:6601:507 General:>Pickup A for start SPS I
_:6601:508 General:>Pickup B for start SPS I
_:6601:509 General:>Pickup C for start SPS I
_:6601:513 General:>Gen. pickup for start SPS I
_:6601:514 General:>General trip for start SPS I
_:6601:515 General:>Trip pole A for start SPS I
_:6601:516 General:>Trip pole B for start SPS I
_:6601:517 General:>Trip pole C for start SPS I
_:6601:522 General:>Delay close cmd. SPS I
_:6601:301 General:79 state ENS O
_:6601:302 General:Actual reclose cycle INS O
_:6601:303 General:Not ready SPS O
_:6601:304 General:79 successful SPS O
_:6601:305 General:CB ready superv.expir SPS O
_:6601:306 General:CB is not ready SPS O
_:6601:307 General:79 permits 1-pole trip SPS O
_:6601:308 General:AR only after 1p. trip SPS O
_:6601:309 General:In progress SPS O
_:6601:310 General:Reclaim time running SPS O
_:6601:311 General:Start sig. superv.exp. SPS O
_:6601:312 General:Max. dead time expired SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:6601:321 General:Close cmd. indication ACT O
_:6601:325 General:3-pole operate by 79 SPS O
_:6601:327 General:Block. by binary input SPS O
_:6601:328 General:Blk.by CB ready sup. SPS O
_:6601:329 General:Blk.by strtsig.superv. SPS O
_:6601:330 General:Blk.by action time exp SPS O
_:6601:331 General:Blk.by max.d.t. expiry SPS O
_:6601:337 General:Block. by no cycle SPS O
_:6601:338 General:Block. by protection SPS O
_:6601:335 General:Blk.by loss of voltage SPS O
_:6601:336 General:Block. by max. cycles SPS O
ADT
_:6631:51 ADT:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:6631:501 ADT:>Remote close signal SPS I
_:6631:52 ADT:Behavior ENS O
_:6631:53 ADT:Health ENS O
_:6631:301 ADT:ADT is running SPS O
_:6631:302 ADT:Stage release prot. SPS O
_:6631:303 ADT:Synchrocheck request SPS O
6.48.6 Cooperation with External Automatic Reclosing Function
The operation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs through the function
mode Operation with external automatic reclosing function. In this function mode, the SIPROTEC protec-
tion functions create the trip command and the external reclosing device creates the close command.
The following figure shows the interaction of an external reclosing device with the functions of the SIPROTEC
5 device.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_aweext, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-344 Connection of an External Automatic Reclosing Function
There are no setting parameters for operation with external automatic reclosing functions. The function
provides exclusively the following described binary inputs. The external reclosing device can thus have an
influence on the effects of the internal protection functions.
The following connection possibilities exist:
• From the external reclosing function, the signal >Release stages can be coupled so that the protec-
tion functions use special stages or zones for release. An example is the release of an overreaching zone
with a distance protection or the non-delayed tripping of an overcurrent protection stage in the 1st
reclosing cycle.
• For applications with 1-pole tripping, the external reclosing can provide the signal >1-pole trip
permitted, based on which the protection functions can switch off the 1-pole circuit breaker.
• For applications with reclosing functions only with 1-pole faults and stage or zone releases through the
reclosing function can the signal >1-pole AR only be connected. The protection functions use this
information to allow the stage or zone release only affect 1-pole faults.

(Type)
Ext
_:6661:51 Ext:Mode (controllable) C
_:6661:501 Ext:>Release stages I
_:6661:502 Ext:>1-pole trip permitted I
_:6661:503 Ext:>1-pole AR only I
_:6661:52 Ext:Behavior O
_:6661:53 Ext:Health O
_:6661:54 Ext:Inactive O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.48.7 Application and Setting Notes for General Settings
For the Automatic reclosing function, 3 function specifications are available in the function library of the
device. In each function group Circuit breaker, one function specification of the Automatic reclosing function
can be used.
Configure one of the 3 following function specifications:
• Cyclic Automatic reclosing function
• Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead time (ADT)
• Operation with external Automatic reclosing function
Starting the Automatic Reclosing Function

The configuration of the interaction between internal protection functions and the Automatic reclosing func-
tion can be set separately for each protection function. The configuration occurs in a matrix view in DIGSI. The
Automatic reclosing function also has the corresponding binary inputs and binary outputs through which the
external protection devices can be connected to the internal Automatic reclosing function.
Configure the starting and blocking condition for the Automatic reclosing function at the position shown in
Figure 6-345 in DIGSI (shown here using the example of the protection function group Line) or route the
corresponding binary inputs.
[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-345 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI
General Settings
If you use the function specification Cyclic automatic reclosing function or Automatic reclosing function
with adaptive dead time (ASP), set the following settings under General.
For the function specification Operation with external automatic reclosing function there are no settings.
The control occurs exclusively through binary inputs and binary outputs.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: 79 operating mode
• Default setting (_:6601:101) 79 operating mode = with op., with act. time
With the parameter 79 operating mode, you determine which start criterion the Automatic reclosing
function operates with.
with op., with act. The Automatic reclosing function cycles are dependent on the operate time
time of the protection function(s). The start occurs with all protection function(s)
or protection stages that are configured through the Automatic reclosing
function start matrix.
Siemens generally recommends this setting for applications with 1/3-pole
tripping and for applications with 3-pole tripping if a single dead time, inde-
pendent of the type of connection working, is required in the Automatic
reclosing function cycle.
You can find detailed information in 6.48.4.1 Operating Modes for Cyclic
Automatic Reclosing Function, Operating mode 1.
w.pickup, w. action The Automatic reclosing function cycles are dependent on the operate time
time of the protection function(s) and the type of fault. The start occurs with all
protection function(s) or protection stages that are configured through the
Automatic reclosing function start matrix.
For applications with 3-pole tripping and dead time dependent on the
circuit type, Siemens recommends this setting.
Automatic Reclosing Function, in Operating mode 2.
with op., w/o act. time Each operate indication starts the Automatic reclosing function. The start
occurs with all protection function(s) or protection stages that are config-
ured through the Automatic reclosing function start matrix.
The Automatic reclosing function start must be configured so that it only
occurs from the protection stages/zones for which an Automatic reclosing
should occur after tripping.
w.pickup, w/o act. time Each operate indication starts the Automatic reclosing function. The Auto-
matic reclosing function cycles are dependent on the type of fault. The
start occurs with all protection function(s) or protection stages that are
configured through the Automatic reclosing function start matrix.
The Automatic reclosing function start must be configured so that it only
occurs from the protection stages/zones for which an Automatic reclosing
should occur after tripping.
Parameter: CB ready check bef. start
• Default setting (_:6601:102) CB ready check bef. start = no

With the parameter CB ready check bef. start, you determine whether the circuit-breaker readiness
has been checked before the start of the Automatic reclosing function.
Additionally or alternatively, it is possible to check the readiness of the circuit breaker after the expiration
of the dead time, directly before the assignment of the close command. Another parameter described in
6.48.8 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function exists for this
function.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

yes The Automatic reclosing function checks the readiness of the circuit breaker
for a switching cycle, consisting of a tripping-reclosing-switching.
If the circuit breaker is ready - signaled through a binary input - the startup
of the Automatic reclosing function can occur. If the circuit breaker is not
ready, the Automatic reclosing function reports the static blocking.
Siemens recommends using this setting.
Note: The default setting of this parameter does not correspond to the
recommended setting value for operation. The Automatic reclosing func-
tion would otherwise be blocked with a non-available circuit breaker-ready-
signal. Set the parameter as recommended.
no The readiness of the circuit breaker is not checked before starting the Auto-
matic reclosing function. The test also does not occur if the readiness signal
from the circuit breaker is connected to a binary input on the device.
Parameter: Reclai. time aft.succ.cyc.
• Default setting (_:6601:103) Reclai. time aft.succ.cyc. = 3.00 s

With the parameter Reclai. time aft.succ.cyc., you define the time in which it is decided whether or
not the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was successful. You can find detailed information on the
function of the reclaim time in 6.48.4.15 Reclaim Time.
The default setting for the reclaim time can be frequently maintained. In areas prone to thunderstorms or
gales, a shorter reclaim time is advisable in order to reduce the danger of final disconnection due to lightning
strikes or cable rollovers in rapid succession.
Select a long reclaim time if there is no possibility for circuit-breaker supervision with multiple automatic
reclosing, for example, due to missing auxiliary contacts or lacking circuit-breaker-ready-information. In that
case the reclaim time must be longer than circuit-breaker recovery time.
Parameter: Block. time aft. man.close
• Default setting (_:6601:104) Block. time aft. man.close = 1.00 s

With the parameter Block. time aft. man.close, you determine the length of time for which the
automatic reclosing is to be blocked after manual activation.
Set the time so that the circuit breaker can be safely switched on and off during connection to a short circuit
without the Automatic reclosing function being automatically closed.
Parameter: Start signal supervis.time
• Default setting (_:6601:105) Start signal supervis.time = 0.25 s

With the parameter Start signal supervis.time, you set the maximum time after which a circuit
breaker must open after a trip command. If the time expires, a failure of the circuit breaker is assumed and the
Automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked.
For detailed information about the start supervision time function, refer to 6.48.4.5 Start.
NOTE
i With the use of an internal or external circuit-breaker failure protection at the same line branch, observe
the following:
The start supervision time should be the same as the circuit-breaker failure protection time delay. With this,
you can make sure that in the case of a circuit-breaker failure followed by the tripping of the busbar, no
Automatic reclosing will be executed.
(Note: An exception to this recommendation is described below.)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: CB ready superv. time

The setting of this parameter is significant only if one of the cycle-specific parameters CB ready check
bef.close is set to yes. Otherwise, this parameter has no effect.
• Default setting (_:6601:106) CB ready superv. time = 3.00 s

With the parameter CB ready superv. time, you can determine the maximum time after which the
circuit breaker must be ready for reclosing after tripping.
Set the time somewhat longer than the regeneration time of the circuit breaker after an OFF-ON-OFF cycle.
You can find detailed information on this function in 6.48.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and
6.48.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command.
Parameter: Evolving-fault detection

This parameter is not important and cannot be set if you use the ADT function (Automatic reclosing function
with adaptive dead time).
• Default setting (_:6601:108) Evolving-fault detection = with trip

With the parameter Evolving-fault detection, you determine which criterion is used to detect an
evolving fault. The actual effect of the detected evolving fault on the Automatic reclosing function can be set
with the parameter described below Response to evolv. faults.
Evolving faults are short circuits, which occur after switching off a short circuit during dead time.
For detailed information on evolving-fault detection, refer to 6.48.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the
Dead Time.
with trip Evolving faults are recognized if an operate indication occurs during the
dead time. Thus, it does not matter if the tripping-protection function is
configured for the start of the Automatic reclosing function or not.
The pickup of a protection function without an operate indication does not
lead to evolving-fault detection.
with pickup Evolving faults are detected if during the dead time a protection function
configured for the Automatic reclosing function start is picked up or if an
external pickup is detected through a binary input.
For applications with 1-/3-pole tripping, Siemens recommends the setting with trip, if the system is
sufficiently meshed.
If several individual lines in a series form an overall transmission path, the setting with pickup may be more
suitable. With this setting, you can prevent 2 lines following each other from switching to 1-pole in different
conductors during evolving faults. The consequence of this fault would be the remainder of a single conductor
in the dead time for the overall transmission path. This is particularly important if power plants are coupled
through the overall transmission path.
Parameter: Response to evolv. faults

• Default setting (_:6601:109) Response to evolv. faults = blocks 79

With the parameter Response to evolv. faults, you determine how the Automatic reclosing function
reacts to detected evolving faults.
You can find detailed information about the Automatic reclosing function for faults in 6.48.4.13 Evolving-
Fault Detection During the Dead Time.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

blocks 79 The Automatic reclosing function is immediately blocked until the discon-
nection of the fault.
In case of blockings due to evolving faults during 1-pole dead times, you
can force a 3-pole coupling of the trip command through the Automatic
reclosing function if you set the parameter 3-pole operate by 79 to
yes.
strt. evol.flt.dead After the 3-pole trip command, to clarify that the evolving fault has been
time issued, the Automatic reclosing function starts a new 3-pole AREC cycle
with the set Dead time aft. evolv. fault.
Parameter: Max. dead-time delay

• Default setting (_:6601:110) Max. dead-time delay = 0.5 s

With the parameter Max. dead-time delay, you determine the maximum time by which the start of the
dead time may be delayed before the automatic reclosing is dynamically blocked.
The delay to the start of the dead time can be set with the binary input >Dead time start delay.
For detailed information on the functionality, refer to 6.48.4.5 Start.
Parameter: Max. dead-time extension
• Default setting (_:6601:111) Max. dead-time extension = 1.2 s

With the parameter Max. dead-time extension, you determine the maximum time by which the dead
time may be delayed before the automatic reclosing is dynamically blocked.
With the setting oo (ineffective), the extension is unlimited.
An extension of the dead time can be required under the following conditions:
• Waiting for the readiness of the circuit breaker
• Query of a synchronous test
• Delay through binary input in order, for example, to give the leading Automatic reclosing function
priority in a system with 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout.
Remember that longer dead times after 3-pole disconnection are only permissible if no stability problems
occur or if a synchronous test occurs before the reclosing.
For detailed information on the functionality, refer to 6.48.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command.
Parameter: Voltage supervision time

This parameter is only important if you use the subfunctions RDT, DLC, or the ADT function. If you do not use
any of these functions, the setting value of this parameter is free to select.
• Default setting (_:6601:114) Voltage supervision time = 0.1 s

With the parameter Voltage supervision time, you determine the measuring time that is available as a
criterion for a voltage decision. It should be longer than all transient oscillations through switching operations.
For the subfunctions Reduced dead time (RDT) and Automatic reclosing with adaptive dead time (ASP),
this measuring time applies for the determination of the exceedance of a voltage threshold. For the subfunc-
tion Dead-line check, the undercutting of a voltage threshold is checked.
Siemens recommends the setting 0.10 s.
For detailed information on the functionality, refer to the following parameters, as well as to 6.48.4.18 Dead-
Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT) and 6.48.5.1 Description.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Volt. thres.f. live line/bus

This parameter is relevant only if you use the subfunction RDT or the function ADT. If you do not use any of
these functions, the setting value of this parameter is free to select.
• Default setting (_:6601:115) Volt. thres.f. live line/bus = 48 V

With the parameter Volt. thres.f. live line/bus, you define the limit voltage above which the line is
to be considered healthy. It must be lower than the lowest expected operating voltage. The phase-to-ground
voltage applies as the reference value.
For detailed information on the functionality, refer to the following parameters, as well as to 6.48.4.18 Dead-
Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT) and 6.48.5.1 Description.
Parameter: Dead-line check/reduc.d.t

• Default setting (_:6601:113) Dead-line check/reduc.d.t = without

With the parameter Dead-line check/reduc.d.t, you determine whether the AREC is to operate with
one of the additional functions Dead-line check DLC or Reduced dead t. RDT.
without The Automatic reclosing function occurs after the expiration of the parame-
terized dead times. Dead-line check or RDT are not activated.
Reduced dead t. RDT The Automatic reclosing function works with a reduced dead time (RDT).
Dead-line check DLC The Automatic reclosing functions works with dead-line check. The closing
indication is only assigned if the line was really de-energized during the
dead time.
For detailed information on the functionality, refer to 6.48.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead
Time (RDT).
NOTE
i Use RDT or dead-line check only if the voltages of the line can be correctly measured with an open circuit
breaker. This is only possible if the voltage transformer is aligned on the line-side - seen from the circuit
breaker.
Parameter: Volt.thres. f. dead line/bus

This parameter is only important if you use the Dead-line check subfunction. If you do not use any of this
subfunction, the setting value of this parameter is free to select.
• Default setting (_:6601:116) Volt.thres. f. dead line/bus = 30 V

With the parameter Volt.thres. f. dead line/bus, you define the limit voltage below which the line
is to be considered secure due to being de-energized – that is, switched off. The threshold value is used by the
Dead-line check subfunction (dead-line check). The reference value is the phase-to-ground voltage.
For detailed information on the functionality, refer to 6.48.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead
Time (RDT).
Parameter: Send delay f. remot. close

With the parameter Send delay f. remot. close, you determine the time after automatic reclosing
after which the information is sent for remote closing.
• Default setting (_:6601:112) Send delay f. remot. close = oo (ineffective)

The transmission delay prevents the device operating in the adaptive dead time mode on the opposite end
from closing unnecessarily if the local reclosing function remains unsuccessful. Conversely, it should be borne
in mind that the line is not available for power transmission until the opposite end is also closed. In order to

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
take system stability into consideration, the Send delay f. remot. close must therefore be added to
the dead time.
For detailed information on the functionality, refer to 6.48.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command.
6.48.8 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing
Function
For the function of the cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be
deleted. You can add and delete more cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.
Parameter: Start from idle state allow.

This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating
mode with action time.
• Default setting (_:6571:102) Start from idle state allow. = yes

With the parameter Start from idle state allow. you can determine whether the action time of this
automatic reclosing cycle is started, if the automatic reclosing function is in idle state during with incoming
general pickup. Please set the parameter always to yes , if the automatic reclosing function is configured
for only 1 cycle. If several cycles are configured, you can control the effectiveness of the automatic reclosing
cycles with this parameter and various action times.
Detailed information about the functionality can be found in Chapters 6.48.4.6 Cycle Control with Operating
Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time and 6.48.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With
Action Time.

mode with action time.
• Default setting (_:6571:103) Action time = 0.2 s

With this parameter Action time you can determine, within which time frame the trip command must
appear, in order to start the automatic reclosing function. If the trip command occurs only after the action
time has expired, automatic reclosing does not occur within the active automatic reclosing cycle.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in
Chapters 6.48.4.6 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time and 6.48.4.7 Cycle
Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time.
Parameter: Dead time aft. 3-pole trip

mode with tripping.
• Default setting (_:6571:108) Dead time aft. 3-pole trip = 0.5 s

With this parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip , you can determine after which dead time the
automatic reclosing function will be executed. After a 3-pole trip of the circuit breaker, the system stability is
priority. Since the switched off line cannot develop synchronizing forces, only a short dead time is permitted
in most cases. The usual duration is 0.3 s to 0.6 s. A longer period can be tolerated if a synchrocheck is carried
out prior to reclosing. Longer 3-pole dead times are also possible in radial systems.
Parameter: Dead time aft.1ph. pickup, Dead time aft.2ph. pickup, Dead time aft.3ph. pickup
mode with pickup.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Default setting (_:6571:104) Dead time aft.1ph. pickup = 1.2 s

With the 3 dead-time parameters, you can determine after which dead time the automatic reclosing function
will be executed. Please set the times as desired for the respective type of short circuit.
• The parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup applies to dead times after 1-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A, B, C, or A-Gnd, B-Gnd, C-Gnd
the following protection tripping: A-B, B-C, C-A, or A-B-gnd, B-C-gnd, C-A-gnd
the following protection tripping: A-B-C or A-B-C-Gnd
NOTE
i If you would like to avoid automatic reclosing during individual short-circuit types, please set the respective
dead times to oo (invalid).
Example:
After 1-phase short-circuits, the automatic reclosing function should occur after 1.2 s. The automatic reclosing
function should not occur for 2-phase and 3-phase short circuits.
For this application, the parameters should be set as follows:
• Dead time aft.1ph. pickup = 1.2 s
• Dead time aft.2ph. pickup = oo (invalid)
• Dead time aft.3ph. pickup = oo (invalid)
Parameter: Dead time aft. evolv. fault

These parameters are only significant if the parameter (_:6601:109) Response to evolv. faults is
set to strt. evol.flt.dead time .
• Default setting (_:6571:109) Dead time aft. evolv. fault = 1.2 s

With the parameter Dead time aft. evolv. fault , you can determine after which dead time the
automatic reclosing function should be executed, if based on an evolving fault during the current dead time, a
3-pole trip has occurred. For this 3-pole dead time, stability concerns for the system are also important. Often,
this dead time as well as the parameter (_:6571:108) Dead time aft. 3-pole trip can be set.
Detailed information about the function during evolving faults during dead time are described in Chapter
6.48.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time.
Parameter: CB ready check bef.close
• Default setting (_:6571:111) CB ready check bef.close = no

With the parameter CB ready check bef.close you can determine if after the expiration of the dead
time (meaning, directly prior to assigning the close command) readiness of the circuit breaker should be
queried.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

no With the setting no , the automatic reclosing function does not check again
the readiness of the circuit breaker prior to assigning the close demand.
Siemens recommends this setting, if it is sufficient to check the readiness of the
circuit breaker for the entire switching cycle once before the start of a reclosing
function, consisting of tripping-reclosing-tripping. The setting for checking the
readiness of the circuit breaker prior to the start of the automatic reclosing
function is done using the parameter (_:6601:102) CB ready check
bef. start .
yes With the setting yes , the dead time can be extended if after the expira-
tion of the dead time the circuit breaker is not ready for the next ON-OFF
cycle. The maximum delay of the dead time can be set with the parameter
(_:6601:111) Max. dead-time extension .
Siemens recommends this setting, if it can be assumed that the circuit breaker
becomes available to switch on the reclosing function only after an additional
waiting period.
Detailed information about the function can be found in Chapters 6.48.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and
6.48.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command.
Parameter: Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t.
• Default setting (_:6571:110) Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t. = none

With the parameter Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t. you can determine if a synchrocheck must be
carried out for the configured automatic reclosing cycle.
If during a 3-pole interruption in the system stability problems may be a concern, the synchrocheck should
be carried out. If only 1-pole reclosure cycles are possible or stability problems are not to be expected during
the 3-pole dead time, for example, due to a highly intermeshed system or radial system, please select the
parameter none .
none During the automatic reclosing cycle a synchrocheck is not executed.
internal In the configured automatic reclosing cycle, a synchrocheck is executed after a
3-pole dead time prior to the close command of the circuit breaker.
For the synchrocheck a synchrocheck stage of the internal synchronization
function is used, which is contained in the same function group as the circuit
breaker and the automatic reclosing function. The selection of the synchro-
check stage that is used in the automatic reclosing cycle occurs through the
following described parameter Internal synchrocheck.
external In the configured automatic reclosing cycle, a synchrocheck is executed after a
3-pole dead time prior to the close command of the circuit breaker.
An external synchrocheck device initiates the synchrocheck. The external
synchrocheck device is connected with the binary signals Synchrocheck
request and >Release by ext.sync. . Detailed information about
the function can be found in Chapter 6.48.4.14 Closing Indication and Close
Command under the section Synchrocheck.
Parameter: Internal Synchrocheck

These parameters are only significant if the previously described parameter (_:6571:110) Synchroch.
aft. 3-pole d.t. is set to internal .
With the parameter Internal Synchrocheck, you can determine which function block of the synchro-
nization function for the automatic reclosing function is used after a 3-pole dead time. This selection is
only possible for function blocks of the synchronization function, and which are included in the same circuit-
breaker function group as the automatic reclosing function. The setting options of the parameter will be
generated dynamically, according to the actual parameterization.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
6.49 Fault Locator
The Fault locator function is used to determine the distance to the fault location.
Quick determination of fault location and the associated rapid troubleshooting increase the availability of the
line for the power transmission in the electrical power system. Fault-location determination is based on the
determination of the reactance of the short-circuited measuring loops.
The function Fault locator can be used in protection function groups with 3-phase current and voltage
measurement.
[dw_stbafo, 1, en_US]
The fault location is calculated based on the line parameter. The fault-location determination is always carried
out with going pickup of the short-circuit protection. There is an option to limit the fault-location
determination to cases with tripping (setting value for parameter Start = with operate).
The fault locator can be started as follows:
• Via the phase-segregated binary inputs >Fault detected phs A, >Fault detected phs B,
>Fault detected phs C, and >Fault detected gnd.
•
• Via the directional overcurrent protection, phases or ground
• Via the overcurrent protection, phases or ground
• Via the non-phase segregated binary input >Flt. det. w/o phs.&gnd.
If multiple protection functions are operating in parallel, the fault locator is only started by the protection-
function pickup with the highest priority. The functions are listed in decreasing priority.
The Fault locator function only works with the following current and voltage-transformer connection types
(see parameter value).
Parameter Parameter Value
CT connection • 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
VT connection • 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
NOTE
i The Fault locator function does not work with all possible current and voltage transformer connection
types. An error message is displayed in DIGSI 5 if the Fault locator function cannot work with the set
connection types. In this case check the current and voltage transformer connection type. You will find the
CT connection or VT connection parameters in DIGSI 5 under Power system → Meas.point I-3ph or
Power system → Meas.point V-3ph.
Starting Conditions
Each protection function that can start the fault locator also provides the fault locator with information on
the pickup and tripping times. If multiple protection functions pick up at the same time, the fault locator is
started only by the function with the highest priority. The pickup pattern for the other protection functions is
discarded.
The fault locator uses the pickup and tripping information for the protection function being started to form its
own measurand memory for the following calculations. Depending on the pickup duration of the protection
function, the measurand memory is positioned such that it contains prefault processes, short-circuit processes,
and switch-off processes. If the pickup lasts for a longer time, only the short-circuit processes and switch-off
processes are recorded by the measurand memory. The fault-location determination always starts only after
the dropout of the pickup.
Fault-location determination is also possible via the starting condition with going pickup, if the protec-
tion device only picks up and does not trigger. Fault-location determination is then performed via the starting
condition with operate only if the protection device has reported the tripping and the pickup has dropped
out.
Alternatively, the fault locator can be started via one or more binary inputs. If the phase-segregated indica-
tions >Fault detected phs A, >Fault detected phs B, >Fault detected phs C, and >Fault
detected gnd. are routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing, the fault locator interprets the binary inputs
as a phase-segregated external protection function and treats them with the highest priority.
NOTE
i The phase-segregated start of the fault locator is only possible if you have routed all 4 indications in the
DIGSI 5 information routing.
When routing the binary input >Flt. det. w/o phs.&gnd., the binary input is interpreted as a non-
segregated external protection function and is treated with the lowest priority. The fault locator starts when
the binary input drops out.
When the parameter with operate is set and the fault locator is started via the binary input, the fault-loca-
tion determination is started only when a device-internal protection function generates an operate indication,
or when the binary input >Fault locator start is activated in addition to the above mentioned binary
inputs.
[sc_rout_BE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-347 Routing Matrix for the Triggering of the Fault Locator via Binary Input

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
Determining Fault Location

The recorded sampled values of the short-circuit currents and voltages are transferred to an internal meas-
urand memory. The pickup indications are used to determine the short-circuited loops. The measurand
memory is searched for an optimal measurement window. The largest possible measurement window is
selected. If possible, the measurement window is positioned at the end of the short-circuit process. This
means that the transient response and the ring down have the least possible impact on the measuring result.
[dw_sigra_flo, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-348 Determining the Measurement Window
The impedances of the short-circuit loops are calculated of the measurement-window data. If there are
multiple short-circuited loops, a selection process is used to select a loop and the results are then issued.
If it is not possible to determine a sufficient data window with usable measured values or a plausible short-
circuited loop, the indication FLO invalid signals the invalid measuring result.
Output of the Fault Location

The following results for the fault location are output:
• The fault reactance X in Ω primary
• The fault resistance R in Ω primary
• The fault distance d of the line proportional to the reactance in kilometers or miles, converted on the
basis of the parameterized reactance per unit length of the line
• The fault distance d as a percentage of the line length, calculated on the basis of the parameterized
reactance per unit length and the parameterized line length
• The selected fault loop for calculation of the fault location

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
NOTE
i The indication of distance in kilometers, miles, or percent is applicable only for homogeneous line sections.
If the line comprises parts which exhibit different reactances per unit of length (for example, overhead-
line-cable sections), you can then analyze the reactance determined from the fault location for separate
calculation of the fault distance. Alternatively, you can use the Fault locator plus function, with which the
non-homogeneous lines can be parameterized in line sections.
Impedance-Based Fault Location

The determination of the fault distance is based on the evaluation of the imaginary part of the calculated
short-circuit impedance. The fault distance is determined by dividing the calculated reactance X with the
parameterizable reactance per unit length (parameter X per length unit). Both the impedance up to the
fault location and the fault distance are issued by the fault locator.
An impedance measuring element is available for each of the 6 possible short-circuit loops A-gnd, B-gnd,
C-gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A. The loop to be measured is selected depending on the fault type.
For 2-phase short circuits with grounding, the phase-to-phase loop is preferred for fault location. For 3-phase
short circuits, the average reactance, determined from the reactance of the 3 phase-to-phase loops is used.
A 2-phase short circuit B-C, for example, is used for the calculation of the phase-to-phase loop.
[dw_llschleife_flo, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-349 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Phase Loop
The loop equation for the calculation of the short-circuit impedance of the phase-to-phase loop B-C is:
[fo_L2-L3_schl, 1, en_US]
With:
VB, VC Short-circuit voltage phasor for phases B and C
IB, IC Short-circuit current phasor phases B and C
m Proportionate distance to the fault
mZL = m ⋅ (RL + jXL) Line impedance up to fault location
The line impedance is calculated as follows:
[fo_R_L2-L3_schl, 1, en_US]
[fo_X_L2-L3_schl, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
In case of a phase-to-ground short circuit, for example, A-gnd, for the calculation of a phase-to-ground loop,
it must be considered that the impedance of the ground-return path does not match the impedance of the
phases.
[dw_leschleife_flo, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-350 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Ground Loop
In case of A-gnd short circuit, the phase-to-ground voltage VA, the phase current IA and the ground current Ignd
are measured.
[fo_L1-E_schl, 1, en_US]
The impedance at the fault location is calculated as:
[fo_R_L1-E_schl, 1, en_US]
and
[fo_X_L1-E_schl, 1, en_US]
With:
VA Short-circuit voltage phasor
IA Short-circuit current phasor phase A
Ignd Ground-fault current phasor
IR = IA - kr⋅Ignd Auxiliary quantity
Ix = IA - kx⋅Ignd Auxiliary quantity
The factors kr = Rgnd/Rph and kx = Xgnd/Xph depend only on the line constants and not on the distance to the
fault.
Measured-Value Correction at Load Current on Lines Fed on Both Sides

In the case of faults on lines fed on both sides and with load transport and contact resistance (see
Figure 6-351), the fault voltage VA is influenced not only by the voltage source on side A, but also by the
voltage source on side B if both voltage sources feed to the fault location. Without special measures, this
leads to measuring errors in the impedance, since the current portion IB cannot be recorded at measuring
point A. For long and highly loaded lines, this measuring error in the X portion of the fault impedance can be
considerable. This X component is critical for the distance calculation.
The X component can be corrected when using load compensation. When using load compensation, the calcu-
lated R component comprises the combination of the fault resistance to be determined and the resistance of
the line up to the fault location. This form of impedance calculation corresponds to the distance-protection

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
measurement protocol using the reactance method. The load compensation impacts both the 1-pole short
circuit and the 2-pole short circuit. You can activate and deactivate the load compensation via the parameter
Load compensation. If the distance protection operates with the reactance method, Siemens recommends
switching on the load compensation for the fault locator too.
The following figure serves as an example of the description of the impedance calculation:
[dw_ueb_impedanzber, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-351 Fault Currents and Voltages of a Line Fed on Both Sides (1-Pole Display)
A Measuring point
VA, VB Voltage source
IA, IB Partial fault currents
IF Total fault current
VA Fault voltage at measuring point A
RF Common fault resistance
Z L, (1-m) ZL Fault impedances
ZA, ZB Source impedances
Impedance Calculation for Phase-to-Ground Loops

For calculation of a phase-to-ground loop, it must be considered that the impedance of the ground-return
path generally does not match the impedance of the phases. This is the case, for example, for an A-gnd short
circuit.
[dw_leschleife_rmd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-352 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Ground Loop
The loop equation for calculating the impedance is:
[fo schl le ohne icomp, 3, en_US]
The loop equation is extended with the equivalent current I Subst. on both sides and converted according to the
impedance.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
[fo schl le mit icomp, 4, en_US]
The following applies:
[fo_x_impber, 1, en_US]
The reactance X of the phase-to-ground loop is calculated as follows:
[fo xf impber, 2, en_US]
With:
A Measuring point
VA, Fault voltage at measuring point A (phase-to-ground voltage)
IA, IGnd Partial fault currents
IF Total fault current
RF Common fault resistance
ZL, ZB Line impedance
ISubst. Equivalent current
k0 Ground-fault factor
δComp Compensation angle
You can select the equivalent current ISubst. such that the impact of the fault current IB is compensated at the
fault resistance RF. This prevents the measuring error in the reactance.
The resulting measuring error in RF can be compensated only partially.
RF is calculated as follows:
[fo_rf_impber, 4, en_US]
The protection device cannot measure the fault current IF directly. Therefore, either 3I0 or 3I2 is used as an
equivalent for IF. In order to achieve the best result, the procedure uses the larger one of the 2 equivalent
currents. If the angles of the source impedances and the line impedance are not equal, you can compensate
the inhomogeneity using the compensation angles.
The compensation angles δ comp depend on the network conditions and can be calculated for the zero and
negative-sequence system using the following formulas:
[fo_kompwi_nullsys_impber, 1, en_US]
[fo_kompwi_gegensys_impber, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
With:
ZA,0, ZB,0 Source impedances in zero-sequence system
ZL,0 Line impedance in zero-sequence system
δcomp,0 Compensation angle in zero-sequence system
ZA,2, ZB,2 Source impedances in negative-sequence system
ZL,2 Line impedance in negative-sequence system
δcomp,2 Compensation angle in negative-sequence system
Impedance Calculation for Phase-to-Phase Loops

A 2-phase short circuit B-C is assumed as an example for the calculation:
[dw_llschleife_rmd, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-353 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Phase Loop
The loop equation for the calculation of the phase-to-phase loop is:
[fo schl ll ohne icomp, 2, en_US]
Thus, X is calculated as follows:
[fo xf impber LLschl, 2, en_US]
Whereby the following applies for the B-C loop: Isubst = (a - a2)⋅I2 and a = e j120°.
The rotation of the negative-sequence system, which is dependent on the fault loop, performs the fault-
locator algorithm internally.
RF is calculated as follows:
[fo rf impber LLschl, 4, en_US]
The function requires the following key line data to calculate fault distance:
• Reactance per unit length of the line per kilometer or per mile
• Line length for the correct output of the fault distance as a percentage of the line length
• Residual-compensation factors in the setting format Kr and Kx

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
Parameter: Start
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Start = with going pickup

The Start parameter is used to define the criterion for starting the fault location.
with going pickup If a pickup signal of the protection functions designated for the start has
dropped out, the fault-location determination starts.
with operate If one of the protection functions designated for start has reported the
tripping and the pickup has dropped out, the fault-location determination
starts.
As an alternative, the fault locator can be started using external binary input.
Parameter: Load Compensation
• Default setting (_:103) Load compensation = no

With the Load compensation parameter, you can correct measuring errors for 1-phase and 2-phase short
circuits on lines fed on both sides.
no The load compensation does not become effective with this setting.
yes The load compensation becomes effective with this setting.
If you use the load compensation, the following parameters are relevant
and are shown automatically:
• (_:104) Substitute for IF

• (_:106) Comp. angle zero seq.
• (_:107) Comp. angle neg. seq.
Parameter: Substitute for IF
• Default setting (_:104) Substitute for IF = 3I0

The parameter Substitute for IF is only visible and relevant if you use the load compensation.
With the Substitute for IF parameter, for ground-impedance loops, you define which substitute value to
use at the fault location for the fault current IF that cannot be measured due to the fault resistance.
First, calculate the compensation angles for the zero-sequence system and the negative-sequence system.
Set the parameter Substitute for IF according to the smaller compensation angle. The smaller compen-
sation angle indicates that the associated system (zero-sequence or negative-sequence system) is more homo-
geneous and that the fault current can be approximated in a better way through the fault resistance at the
fault location.
Parameter: Compensation Angle for Zero-Sequence System/Negative-Sequence System
• Default setting (_:106) Comp. angle zero seq. = 0.00°
• Default setting (_:107) Comp. angle neg. seq. = 0.00°

The parameters Comp. angle zero seq. and Comp. angle neg. seq. are only visible and relevant if
you use the load compensation.
If you have determined an angle difference between the measured 3I0 or 3I2 and IF based on network model
tests or calculations, you can compensate this with the parameters Comp. angle zero seq. or parameter
Comp. angle neg. seq..
A setting of the compensation angle deviating from 0 is only relevant for non-homogeneous systems.
With the Comp. angle zero seq. parameter, you compensate the angle difference between the 3I0
calculated by the device and the fault current IF.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
With the Comp. angle neg. seq. parameter, you compensate the angle difference between the 3I2
calculated by the device and the fault current IF.
Parameter: X per length unit
• Default setting (_:113) X per length unit = 0.0525 Ω/km

With the X per length unit parameter, you set the reactance per unit length for the line to be protected.
You set the X per length unit parameter as a relative value in Ω/km or Ω/miles.
Parameter: Line length
• Default setting (_:114) Line length = 60 km

With the Line length parameter, you can set the length of the line to be protected as a unit of length in km
or miles.
Parameter: Line angle
• Default setting (_:108) Line angle = 85.00°

Calculate the setting value for the parameter Line angle from the line constants for the line to be protected
as follows:
[fo_lwinkl, 1, en_US]
where:
RL Resistance of the line to be protected
XL Reactance of the line to be protected
EXAMPLE
110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 with the data

R´1 = 0.19 Ω/km
X´1 = 0.42 Ω/km
You calculate the setting value for the line angle as follows:
[fo_tan_phi, 1, en_US]
[fo_arctan_phi, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Kr and Kx
• Default setting (_:104) Kr = 1.00
• Default setting (_:105) Kx = 1.00

The Kr and Kx parameters are used to set the residual compensation factors as scalar values. The Kr and Kx
parameters are relevant for the Fault locator function.
Calculate the setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx from the line data as follows:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
Resistance ratio Reactance ratio
where:
R0 Zero-sequence system resistance of the line
X0 Zero-sequence system reactance of the line
R1 Positive-sequence system resistance of the line
X1 Positive-sequence system reactance of the line
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
EXAMPLE
110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 with the data:
R1/s 0.19 Ω/km positive-sequence system resistance

X1/s 0.42 Ω/km positive-sequence system reactance
R0/s 0.53 Ω/km zero-sequence system resistance
X0/s 1.19 Ω/km zero-sequence system reactance
s Line length
You receive the following setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx:
[fo_kr, 1, en_US]
[fo_kx, 1, en_US]
Parameter: K0 and Angle (K0)
• Default setting K0 = 1.000
• Default setting Angle (K0) = 0.00°
NOTE
i The visibility of the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters depends on the selected setting format of the residual
compensation factors. The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) are only visible if you have set the parameter
Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for the device. The Set. format residu. comp. parameter
can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Parameter → Device settings.
The K0 and Angle (K0) parameters are used to set the complex grounding-resistance factor.
Make sure that the line angle is set correctly because the device needs the line angle for calculation of the
compensation components from the K0 factor. The complex grounding-resistance factor is defined by the
value and the angle. You can calculate the complex grounding-resistance factor from the line data as follows:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
[fo_K01, 1, en_US]
where:
Z0 (Complex) zero-sequence impedance
Z1 (Complex) positive-sequence impedance
For overhead lines, you can use the values for the calculation because the angles of the zero-sequence system
and the positive-sequence system differ only slightly. For cables, however, significant angular differences can
occur, as the following example illustrates.
EXAMPLE
110-kV single-conductor liquid-filled cable 3 · 185 mm2 Cu with the data:
Z1/s 0.408 · ej73° Ω/km positive-sequence impedance

Z0/s 0.632 · ej18.4° Ω/km zero-sequence impedance
s Line length
The values for calculation of the grounding-resistance factor K0 are:
[fo_1_k0, 1, en_US]
[fo_2_k0, 1, en_US]
The setting value of the parameter K0 is calculated from:
[fo_3_k0, 1, en_US]
When determining the angle, take note of the quadrant of the result. The following table lists the quadrants
and the angle range obtained from the operational signs of the real and imaginary parts of K0.
Real Part Imaginary Part tan Phi (K0) Quadrant/Range Calculation Method
+ + + I 0° to 90° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
+ - - IV -90° to 0° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
- - + III -90° to -180° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) –180°
- + - II +90° to +180° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) +180°
In this example, the following setting value for the Angle (K0) parameter is obtained:
[fo_phi_K0, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.49 Fault Locator
6.49.5 Settings

Fault locator
_:1 Fault locator:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Fault locator:Start • with operate with going
pickup
• with going pickup
_:103 Fault locator:Load compen- • no no
sation
• yes
_:113 Fault locator:X per length 1A 0.0001 Ω/km to 9.5000 Ω/km Ω/km
unit 5A 0.0000 Ω/km to 1.9000 Ω/km 0.0000 Ω/km
_:114 Fault locator:Line length 0.10 km to 1000.00 km 60.00 km
_:108 Fault locator:Line angle 10.00 ° to 89.00 ° 85.00 °
_:104 Fault locator:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:105 Fault locator:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:118 Fault locator:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:150 Fault locator:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °

(Type)
Fault locator
_:54 Fault locator:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Fault locator:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Fault locator:Health ENS O
_:302 Fault locator:Fault resistance prim. MV O
_:303 Fault locator:Fault reactance prim. MV O
_:308 Fault locator:Fault resistance sec. MV O
_:309 Fault locator:Fault reactance sec. MV O
_:304 Fault locator:Fault distance MV O
_:305 Fault locator:Fault distance in % MV O
_:306 Fault locator:Fault loop ENS O
_:307 Fault locator:FLO invalid ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.50 Fault Locator Plus
The Fault locator plus function
• Is used for 2-sided measurement of the distance to the fault location
• Also reliably detects the fault location with 2-sided infeed, faults with ground involvement and with fault
resistances
• Can be used for fault-location determination with non-homogeneous lines

The Fault locator plus function calculates the fault location with the measured values of both line ends. For
the transmission of the measured values between the line ends, a communication connection must be present
via the protection interface.
If 2-sided fault-location determination is not possible, alternatively, the 1-sided method is used with a calcula-
tion of the reactance of the short-circuited measurement loops.
Fast fault-location determination and the associated fast fault clearance increase the availability of the line for
power transmission in the electrical power system.
The Fault locator plus function can be used in protection function groups with 3-phase current and voltage
measurement.
[dwst fo_double, 1, en_US]
The fault location is calculated based on the line parameters. Fault-location determination is always carried
out with going pickup of the short-circuit protection. There is an option to limit fault-location determina-
tion to cases with tripping (setting the value for the parameter Start = with operate).
For inhomogeneous lines, such as overhead line/cable sections, you can set parameters for separate line
sections with dedicated line data. You can instantiate a maximum of 9 line sections.
For 2-sided fault-location determination, the measured values of both line ends must to be available at each
line end. For this purpose, a SIPROTEC 5 device must be installed with a protection interface at each end of
the area to be protected. The devices exchange their measurands via protection interface. The measurands
are encrypted in digital telegrams and transmitted via protection communication. The current and voltage
transformers selectively delimit the protection range.
2-sided fault-location determination is not possible with the function Fault locator plus under the following
conditions, for example:
• The fault is not located on the line.
• The devices at the line ends do not have a protection interface.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Protection communication is disrupted.
• With a 1-sided infeed, a metallic fault occurs.
NOTE
i If 2-sided fault-location determination is not possible, the function Fault locator plus alternatively works
with the 1-sided method for fault-location determination.
[dw_example_WS, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-355 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each With Protection Communication
Fault locator plus can be started as follows:
• Via the phase-segregated binary inputs >Fault detected phs A, >Fault detected phs B,
>Fault detected phs C, and >Fault detected gnd.
•
• Via directional overcurrent protection, phases or ground
• Via overcurrent protection, phases or ground
• Via the non-phase-segregated binary input >Flt. det. w/o phs.&gnd.

If multiple protection functions are operating in parallel, the fault locator is only started by the function pickup
with the highest priority. The functions are listed in decreasing priority.
Connection Types of the Current and Voltage Transformers
NOTE
i The function Fault locator plus does not work with all possible current and voltage transformer connection
types.
An error message is displayed in DIGSI 5 if the function cannot work with the set connection type. In this
case, check the current and voltage transformer connection type.
You can find the CT connection or VT connection settings in DIGSI 5 under Power system →
Meas.point I-3ph or System data → Meas.point V-3ph.
The Fault locator plus function only works with the following current and voltage transformer connection
types (see parameter value).
Parameter Parameter Value
CT connection • 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
VT connection • 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Starting Conditions
Each protection function that can start the fault locator also provides Fault locator plus with information on
the pickup and tripping times. If multiple protection functions pick up at the same time, Fault locator plus is
started only by the function with the highest priority.
The fault locator uses the pickup and tripping information for the protection function being started to form its
own measurand memory for the following calculations. Depending on the pickup duration of the protection
function, the measurand memory is positioned such that it contains prefault processes, short-circuit processes,
and switch-off processes. If the pickup lasts for a longer time, only the short-circuit processes and switch-off
processes are recorded by the measurand memory. The fault-location determination always starts only after
the dropout of the pickup.
Fault-location determination is also possible via the starting condition with going pickup, if the protec-
tion device only picks up and does not trigger. Fault-location determination is then performed via the starting
condition with operate only if the protection device has reported the tripping and the pickup has dropped
out.
Alternatively, the Fault locator can be started via one or more binary inputs. If the phase-segregated indica-
tions >Fault detected phs A, >Fault detected phs B, >Fault detected phs C, and >Fault
detected gnd. are routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing, the Fault locator interprets the binary inputs
as a phase-segregated external protection function and treats them with the highest priority.
NOTE
i The phase-segregated start of the fault locator will only be possible if you have routed all 4 indications in
the DIGSI 5 information routing.
When routing the binary input >Flt. det. w/o phs.&gnd., the binary input is interpreted as a non-
segregated external protection function and is treated with the lowest priority. The fault locator starts when
the binary input drops out.
When the parameter with operate is set and the Fault locator is started via the binary input, the fault-loca-
tion determination is started only when a device-internal protection function generates an operate indication,
or when the binary >Fault locator start input is activated in addition to the above mentioned binary
inputs.
[scRang_FOplus, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-356 Routing Matrix for the Triggering of the Fault Locator via Binary Input
Definition of the Line Sections

For inhomogeneous lines, for example, cable/overhead line setions, you can define several line sections and
set the line parameters separately for each line section.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i If you have an inhomogeneous line with several line sections, you must enter the line sections in the device
at the opposite end back-to-front. The function checks the correct parameter configuration and issues the
inconsistency indication (_:2311:310) Line sect. setting err. in the case of a fault.
EXAMPLE:
The line between line ends A and B consists of the line sections Cable A – overhead line – Cable B. Consider
the following with the parameter configuration of the function:
• Instantiate each of 3 line ends in the device at line end A and at line end B and enter the line data for
each section.
• Ensure that you enter the data for the line sections in device B back-to-front to device A.
[dw def line sections, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-357 Line with 3 Line Sections
Installation Site Definition of Line Sections

Device A Define the line sections on device A as follows:
• Line section 1: Line data from cable A

• Line section 2: Line data from the overhead line
• Line section 3: Line data from cable B
Device B Define the line sections on device B as follows:
• Line section 1: Line data from cable B

• Line section 2: Line data from the overhead line
• Line section 3: Line data from cable A
You can rename the instantiated line sections.
Algorithm for 2-Sided Fault-Location Determination

For an unbranched line with known current and known voltage on the line ends, the voltage can be calculated
at any position x of the line. The algorithm calculates the voltage of both sides of the line. At the fault location
itself, the voltage calculated from both line ends must correspond. If both voltage curves are displayed graphi-
cally, their intersection is the position of the fault location dFL. Figure 6-358 illustrates the basic principle of
2-sided fault-location determination. The algorithm calculates the voltage curves with the measured data of
the protection devices of both line ends A and B. The voltage curve is not linear and is calculated as follows
with the telegraph equation:
[fo telegraph equation line, 1, en_US]
with

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Wave propagation constant
Wave impedance
d Distance
V, I Measured values on the line ends
[dw fault locator voltage char, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-358 Voltage Curve, Calculated from Both Sides of the Line
with:
1 Voltage curve calculated with the measured values at line end A
2 Voltage curve calculated with the measured values at line end B
dFL Fault location
The algorithm of the 2-sided fault-location determination offers the following advantages compared to the
1-sided method:
• Correct fault-location determination is also possible with power flow, 2-sided infeed and high fault
resistances.
• The algorithm is independent from the zero-sequence system and therefore also from its influencing
variables, such as inductive couplings of parallel lines.
• An imprecise setting of the residual impedance compensation factors has no influence on the precision of
the fault location.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Output of the Fault Location

The following results for the fault location are issued:
• The fault resistance in Ω primary and secondary
• The fault transfer resistance in Ω primary and secondary

This value is only issued, if 2-sided fault-location determination is possible.
• The fault reactance up to the fault location in Ω primary and secondary
• The fault distance d in km or miles
• The fault distance d in percentage of the line length
• The number of the line section, in which the fault was localized
• The selected fault loop for calculation of the fault location

The indication of distance in kilometers, miles, or percent is also applicable only for inhomogeneous line
sections (for example, overhead line cable routes). If you have defined several line sections for an inhomoge-
neous line, the Fault locator plus function issues the number of the faulty line section.
NOTE
i If 2-sided fault-location determination is not possible by the Fault locator plus function, the function
works automatically with the algorithm for the 1-sided fault-location determination.
You can find the description for the 1-sided fault locator in 6.49.1 Overview of Functions.
The following line data are relevant for the 2-sided fault-location determination:
• Reactance per unit length of the line per kilometer or per mile
• Line length for the correct output of the fault distance as a percentage of the line length
The following parameters are only relevant for the 1-sided fault-location determination:
• Load compensation
• The residual compensation factors in the setting format Kr and Kx or K0 and Angle (K0).
NOTE
i load compensation isonly possible with homogeneous lines.

If you define more than one line section and set the parameter Load compensation = yes, DIGSI reports
an inconsistency.
Parameter: Start
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Start = with going pickup

With the parameter Start, you define the criterion for starting the fault location.
with going pickup If a pickup signal of the protection functions designated for the startup has
dropped out, fault-location determination starts.
with operate If one of the protection functions designated for startup has reported
the tripping and the pickup has dropped out, fault-location determination
starts.
As an alternative, the fault locator can be started using an external binary input.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Load compensation
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Load compensation = no

This parameter is only relevant for 1-sided fault-location determination.
With the parameter Load compensation, you correct measuring errors for 1-phase short circuits on lines
fed on both sides. This is the case for overhead lines without grounding cable or with unfavorable grounding
conditions of the towers, if high contact resistances can occur in the event of 1-phase short circuits.
no The load compensation is not effective with this setting.
yes The load compensation is effective with this setting.
If you operate using load compensation, the following parameters are rele-
vant and are shown automatically:
• Substitute for IF
• Comp. angle zero seq.
• Comp. angle neg. seq.
Parameter: Substitute for IF
• Default setting (_:2311:104) Substitute for IF = 3I0

The parameter Substitute for IF is only visible and relevant if you operate using load compensation.
With the parameter Substitute for IF, you define which substitute value can be used in ground-impe-
dance loops for the unmeasurable fault current IF and replace it with the fault resistance at the fault location.
First, calculate the compensation angle for the zero-sequence system and the negative-sequence system. Set
the parameter Substitute for IF for the relatively smaller compensation angle. The relatively smaller
compensation angle indicates that the associated system (zero-sequence and negative-sequence system) is
more homogeneous and the fault current can be approximated better through the fault resistance at the fault
location.
Parameter: Compensation Angle for Zero-Sequence System/Negative-Sequence System
• Default setting (_:2311:106) Comp. angle zero seq. = 0.00°
• Default setting (_:2311:107) Comp. angle neg. seq. = 0.00°

The parameters Comp. angle zero seq. and Comp. angle neg. seq. are only visible and relevant if
you operate using load compensation.
If, based on network model tests or calculations, an angle difference between the measured 3I0 or 3I2 and
IF was determined, this can be compensated for with the parameter Comp. angle zero seq. or the
parameter Comp. angle neg. seq..
A setting of the compensation angle deviating from 0 is only relevant for non-homogeneous systems.
When using the Comp. angle zero seq. parameter, the angle difference between the 3I0 calculated by
the device and the fault current IF is being compensated.
When using the Comp. angle neg. seq. parameter, the angle difference between the 3I2 calculated by
the device and the fault current IF is being compensated.
NOTE
i For non-homogeneous lines, for example, cable/overhead line routes, you can define several line sections
and set the line parameters separately for each line section.
You can find further information on the line parameters in 6.49.4 Application and Setting Notes.
Parameter: C1 per length unit
• Default setting (_:16921:112) C1 per length unit = 0.010 μF/km

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the C1 per length unit parameter, you specify the capacitance per unit length in the positive-
sequence system for the line to be protected. You set the C1 per length unit parameter as a relative
value in μF/km or μF/miles. The capacitance per unit length in the positive-sequence system is identical to the
operating capacitance cb´.
Parameter: C0 per length unit
• Default setting (_:16921:148) C0 per length unit = 0.010 μF/km

With the C0 per length unit parameter, you specify the capacitance per unit length in the zero-sequence
system for the line to be protected. You set the C0 per length unit parameter as a relative value in
μF/km or μF/miles. The capacitance per unit length in the zero-sequence system is identical to the ground
capacitance cgnd´.
Parameter: X per length unit
• Default setting (_:16921:113) X per length unit = 0.0525 Ω/km

With the X per length unit parameter, you set the reactance per unit length for the line to be protected.
You set the X per length unit parameter as a relative value in Ω/km or Ω/miles.
Parameter: Line length
• Default setting (_:16921:114) Line length = 60 km

With the Line length parameter, you can set the length of the line to be protected as a unit of length in km
or miles.
Parameter: Line angle
• Default setting (_:16921:108) Line angle = 85.00°

Calculate the setting value for the parameter Line angle from the line constants for the line to be protected
as follows:
[fo_lwinkl, 1, en_US]
where:
RL Resistance of the line to be protected
XL Reactance of the line to be protected
EXAMPLE
110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data

R´1 = 0.19 Ω/km
X´1 = 0.42 Ω/km
You calculate the setting value for the line angle as follows:
[fo_tan_phi, 1, en_US]
[fo_arctan_phi, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Kr and Kx
• Default setting (_:16921:104) Kr = 1.00
• Default setting (_:16921:105) Kx = 1.00

The Kr and Kx parameters are used to set the residual compensation factors as scalar values. The Kr and Kx
parameters are relevant for the Fault locator function.
Calculate the setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx from the line data as follows:
Resistance ratio Reactance ratio
where:
R0 Zero-sequence system resistance of the line
X0 Zero-sequence system reactance of the line
R1 Positive-sequence system resistance of the line
X1 Positive-sequence system reactance of the line
EXAMPLE
110-kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data:
R1/s 0.19 Ω/km positive-sequence system resistance

X1/s 0.42 Ω/km positive-sequence system reactance
R0/s 0.53 Ω/km zero-sequence system resistance
X0/s 1.19 Ω/km zero-sequence system reactance
s Line length
You receive the following setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx:
[fo_kr, 1, en_US]
[fo_kx, 1, en_US]
Parameter: K0 and Angle (K0)
• Default setting (_:16921:118) K0 = 1.000
• Default setting (_:16921:150) Angle (K0) = 0.00°

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i The visibility of the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters depends on the selected setting format of the
residual compensation factors. The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) are only visible if you have set
the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for the device. You can find the parameter Set.
format residu. comp. in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings → Device
settings.
The K0 and Angle (K0) parameters are used to set the complex grounding-resistance factor.
Make sure that the line angle is set correctly because the device needs the line angle for calculation of the
compensation components from the K0 factor. The complex grounding-resistance factor is defined by the
absolute value and the angle. You can calculate the complex grounding-resistance factor from the line data as
follows:
[fo_K01, 1, en_US]
where:
Z0 (Complex) zero-sequence impedance
Z1 (Complex) positive-sequence impedance
For overhead lines, you can use the values for the calculation because the angles of the zero-sequence system
and the positive-sequence system differ only slightly. For cables, however, significant angular differences can
occur, as the following example illustrates.
EXAMPLE
110-kV single-conductor liquid-filled cable 3 · 185 mm2 Cu with the data:
Z1/s 0.408 · ej73° Ω/km positive-sequence impedance

Z0/s 0.632 · ej18.4° Ω/km zero-sequence impedance
s Line length
The values for calculation of the grounding-resistance factor K0 are:
[fo_1_k0, 1, en_US]
[fo_2_k0, 1, en_US]
The setting value of the parameter K0 is calculated from:
[fo_3_k0, 1, en_US]
When determining the angle, take note of the quadrant of the result. The following table lists the quadrants
and the angle range obtained from the operational signs of the real and imaginary parts of K0.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Real Part Imaginary Part tan Phi (K0) Quadrant/Range Calculation Method
+ + + I 0° to 90° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
+ - - IV -90° to 0° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
- - + III -90° to -180° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) –180°
- + - II +90° to +180° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) +180°
In this example, the following setting value for the Angle (K0) parameter is obtained:
[fo_phi_K0, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Blocking of the auto. recl.
• Default setting (_:16921:120) Blocking of the auto. recl. = no

With the parameter Blocking of the auto. recl., with inhomogeneous lines, you can block the
Automatic reclosing function for faults on individual line sections, for example, on cable sections.
NOTE
i The parameter Blocking of the auto. recl. is only visible, if you have instantiated the function
block Blk by FtLc. # in the Automatic reclosing function.
You can find the function block Blk by FtLc. # in the DIGSI 5 library in the FG Circuit breaker → Automatic
reclosing function → Bocking by fault locator.
no The Fault locator plus function has no impact on the Automatic reclosing
function.
yes The Fault locator plus function blocks the Automatic reclosing function.
The blocking only functions if the function block (FB) Blk by FtLc. # is
instantiated in the Automatic reclosing function. The parameter (_:102)
Min. dead time of blocking is in the FB. Set the parameter Min.
dead time of blocking to the smallest dead time of all instantiated
AREC cycles.
6.50.5 Settings

Control
_:2311:1 General:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2311:101 General:Start • with operate with going
pickup
• with going pickup
Compensation
_:2311:103 General:Load compensa- • no no
tion
• yes
_:2311:104 General:Substitute for IF • 3I2 3I0
• 3I0
_:2311:106 General:Comp. angle -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
zero seq.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:2311:107 General:Comp. angle -40.00 ° to 40.00 ° 0.00 °
neg. seq.
Line data 1
_:16921:112 Line section 1:C1 per 1A 0.000 µF/km to 100000.000 0.010 µF/km
length unit µF/km
5A 0.000 µF/km to 500000.000 0.050 µF/km
µF/km
_:16921:148 Line section 1:C0 per 1A 0.000 µF/km to 100000.000 0.010 µF/km
length unit µF/km
5A 0.000 µF/km to 500000.000 0.050 µF/km
µF/km
_:16921:113 Line section 1:X per 1A 0.0005 Ω/km to 9.5000 Ω/km 0.0525 Ω/km
length unit 5A 0.0001 Ω/km to 1.9000 Ω/km 0.0105 Ω/km
_:16921:114 Line section 1:Line 0.10 km to 1000.00 km 60.00 km
length
_:16921:108 Line section 1:Line angle 10.00 ° to 89.00 ° 85.00 °
_:16921:104 Line section 1:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:16921:105 Line section 1:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:16921:118 Line section 1:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:16921:150 Line section 1:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 1.00 °
_:16921:106 Line section 1:KmR 0.00 to 8.00 1.00
_:16921:107 Line section 1:KmX 0.00 to 8.00 1.00
_:16921:124 Line section 1:Km0 0.000 to 8.000 1.000
_:16921:125 Line section 1:Angle -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °
(Km0)
_:16921:120 Line section 1:Blocking • no no
of the auto. recl.
• yes
Settings in the AWE

Blk by FtLc. #
_:102 Blk by FtLc. #:Min. dead 0.00 s to 1800.00 s 0.50 s
time of blocking

(Type)
General
_:2311:501 General:>Fault detected phs A SPS I
_:2311:502 General:>Fault detected phs B SPS I
_:2311:503 General:>Fault detected phs C SPS I
_:2311:504 General:>Fault detected gnd. SPS I
_:2311:505 General:>Flt. det. w/o phs.&gnd. SPS I
_:2311:506 General:>Fault locator start SPS I

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:2311:302 General:Fault resistance prim. MV O
_:2311:321 General:Fault trans. resis. prim. MV O
_:2311:303 General:Fault reactance prim. MV O
_:2311:308 General:Fault resistance sec. MV O
_:2311:322 General:Fault trans. resis. sec. MV O
_:2311:309 General:Fault reactance sec. MV O
_:2311:304 General:Fault distance MV O
_:2311:305 General:Fault distance in % MV O
_:2311:306 General:Fault loop ENS O
_:2311:307 General:State ENS O
_:2311:310 General:Line sect. setting err. SPS O
Line section 1
_:16921:52 Line section 1:Behavior ENS O
_:16921:53 Line section 1:Health ENS O
_:16921:301 Line section 1:Fault on section SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.51 Temperature Supervision
The Temperature supervision function checks the thermal state of:
• Motors
• Generators
• Transformers
In rotating machines, it also checks bearing temperatures for a limit violation.
The temperatures are measured at various locations of the protected object using temperature sensors (RTD =
Resistance Temperature Detector) and are sent to the device via one or more RTD units.
The Temperature supervision function receives its measured temperature values via the RTD unit Ether. or
RTD unit serial functions from the Analog units function group.
The Temperature supervision function can work in all protection function groups. A maximum of 48 temper-
ature supervision locations can operate simultaneously in the Temperature supervision function function.
Each temperature supervision location has 2 threshold stages.
[dw_str_tmp, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_temp_supervision, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-360 Logic Diagram for a Temperature Supervision Location
The Temperature supervision location function block (Location FB) receives a measured temperature value
in °C or °F as an input variable delivered from the temperature sensor function blocks of the Analog units
function group. The Sensor number parameter is used to select the temperature sensor.
2 threshold value decisions can be performed for each measuring point. If the measured temperature value is
greater than or equal to the set threshold values, the stages generate a pickup indication independent of one
another and, after a set tripping time delay, an operate indication.
The indications from the supervision locations remain available for further processing.
NOTE
i The pickup of the stages does not result in fault logging. The operate indications of the stages do not go
into the trip logic of the device.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If you use an external RTD unit, connect the RTD unit via an interface (Ethernet or serial) to the SIPROTEC 5
device. Observe the setting notes for configuration of the interfaces in chapter Analog Transformer Function
Group Type under 5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit.
Parameter: Sensor location
• Default setting (_:11101:46) Sensor location = Other

You inform the device of the sensor installation location using the Sensor location parameter. Oil,
Ambient, Turn, Bearing and Other are available for selection. The selection is not evaluated in the device,
it only serves an informational purpose in the medium in which the temperature measurement takes place.
Parameter: Sensor number
• Default setting(_:11101:44) sensor number = no function block selected

With the sensor number parameter, you assign a specific sensor whose temperature is to be monitored to
the Location function block. You perform the assignment in DIGSI using a list box that contains all connected
RTD units and their sensors.
Parameter: Threshold stage 1
• Default setting (_:11101:40) Threshold stage 1 = 100°C

With the Threshold stage 1 parameter you establish the temperature value whose exceedance causes a
pickup of the 1st tripping stage.
Parameter: Operate delay of stage 1
• Default setting (_:11101:41) Operate delay of stage 1 = 5 s

With the Operate delay of stage 1 parameter you establish the time the operate indication of the 1st
tripping stage should be delayed after the pickup. This time delay depends on the specific application. If you
set the time delay to ∞ the operate indication is blocked.
Parameter: Threshold stage 2
• Default setting (_:11101:42) Threshold stage 2 = 120°C

With the Threshold stage 2 parameter you establish the temperature value whose exceedance causes a
pickup of the 2nd tripping stage.
Parameter: Operate delay of stage 2
• Default setting (_:11101:43) Operate delay of stage 2 = 0 s

With the Operate delay of stage 2 parameter you establish the time the operate indication of the 2nd
tripping stage should be delayed after the pickup. This time delay depends on the specific application. If you
set the time delay to ∞ the operate indication is blocked.
Temperature Unit
Temperature Unit To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from °C to °F, adapt
the DIGSI user default settings accordingly (see 5.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.51.5 Settings

Point 1
_:11101:46 Point 1:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
_:11101:1 Point 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11101:40 Point 1:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11101:41 Point 1:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
stage 2
_:11101:44 Point 1:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 2
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 3
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 4
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 5
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 6
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 7
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 8
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Point 9
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 10
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 11
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

stage 2
uration
Point 12
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration

(Type)
Point 1
_:11101:81 Point 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:11101:54 Point 1:Inactive SPS O
_:11101:52 Point 1:Behavior ENS O
_:11101:53 Point 1:Health ENS O
_:11101:61 Point 1:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11101:62 Point 1:Operate stage 1 SPS O
Point 2
Point 3

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.52 Phase-Sequence Switchover
The Phase-sequence reversal function enables correct execution of the protection of the device and supervi-
sion functions, independently of the phase sequence of the phases in a system or system section.
The phase sequence is set via parameters. You can select between the phase sequences ABC or ACB.
Binary inputs also provide the option of switching over the phase sequence with respect to the parameter
setting. For example, in pumped-storage hydropower plants with motor or motor/generator operation you
temporarily change the direction of rotation by changing over the phase sequence.
The phase sequence has an effect on calculation of the positive-sequence system and negative-sequence
system values and on calculation of phase-to-phase values. A phase-rotation reversal therefore has an effect
on all protection and supervision functions that use these values.
You can change the phase sequence in 2 ways via binary inputs.
• Change over the phase sequence for the entire device.

In doing so, all 3-phase measuring points are switched over. All analog inputs are therefore affected (for
example current and voltage inputs simultaneously).
• Change over the phase sequence per measuring point.

In doing so, only the activated measuring points are switched over. The other measuring points remain
unaffected.
The Phase-sequence switchover function is integrated in the Power-system data. You will find the signals in
the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings. There you will find the parameter for setting
the phase sequence and the binary inputs via which you can influence a change in the phase sequence.
[dw_ph_rein, 1, en_US]
General
The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter. You will find the
signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings → Power-system data → General.
There are 3 methods to change the phase sequence for different operational requirements.
• Changing the phase sequence via the setting parameter.

– Note: With version V7.50 and higher, this setting parameter is a reset parameter. If the parameter
is changed and transmitted to the device, the device performs a startup. The parameter change
affects all 3-phase measuring points. If the device is in operation and if measurands are present at
the measuring points, perform a parameter change carefully since this affects all measuring points.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• With the binary signal >Phs-rotation reversal, you change over the phase sequence of all meas-
uring points.
• With the binary signal >Invert Phases, you change over the phase sequence per measuring point.
The Inverted phases parameter available for each measuring point is used to set which phases at the
measuring point must be swapped. The parameter can be found at each 3‑phase measuring point.
The 2 binary-signal mechanisms are explained separately below.
Switchover of the Phase Sequence of All Measuring Points

The direction of rotation of the currents and voltages depends on the phase sequence. The following drawing
shows the vector definitions for the 2 phase sequences.
[dw_ph_rdrf, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-362 Vector with Different Phase Sequences
The phase sequence of a system or a system section is defined when parameterizing via the Phase
sequence parameter. The setting parameter acts on all measuring points.
The operationally induced switchover between the phase sequence ABC and the phase sequence ACB is
initiated via the binary input >Phs-rotation reversal. This switches over the phase sequence simultane-
ously at all 3-phase measuring points.
The following image shows a logic diagram for determining the current phase assignment and switchover.
The indications shown on the right show the present phase sequence. If the phase sequence is set via the
Phase sequence parameter to ABC, activation of the binary input will result in a switchover to the phase
sequence ACB.
NOTE
i The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are
pending. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change of phase sequence
is only permissible when the machine is at standstill. If the current and voltage values of all 3-phase
measuring points are below 5 % of the rated variables, this is recognized as machine standstill.
A renewed machine standstill must be detected for a resetting of the phase sequence to the set preferred
position.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_phrpsys1, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-363 Phase Sequence Switchover
Changing Over the Phase Sequence per Measuring Point

A switchover of the phase sequence per measuring point can also be necessary for operational reasons. This
switchover enables proper behavior of the protection equipment, for example at the transition from generator
operation to motor operation (pump operation).
The following example shows an application in a pumped storage plant. The switchover of the phase
sequence (change in rotational direction) realizes the transition there from generator operation to motor
operation. Which phases and measuring points are changed over depends on the conditions in the system.
[dw_phrapp, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-364 Application Example for Phase-Rotation Reversal in a Pump Station
The example shows 2 differential protection devices (IED1 and IED2) and an impedance protection (IED3) with
the connected measuring points.
The phase sequence is insignificant for the differential protection of IED1, as the protected object is not
affected by the switchover option of the phase sequence.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the differential protection of IED2, as the protected object extends
beyond the switchover option.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the impedance protection (IED3). Depending on the switch position,
the voltage measured values 1 and the current measured values 3 have a different phase sequence.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter for generator
operation. The Inverted phases parameter is used to set which phase is swapped for the relevant meas-
uring point. The swap is communicated to the measuring point via the binary input signal >Invert Phases.
The changed phase sequence is then included for calculation of the measurands at the measuring point.
In accordance with Figure 6-364 the phase sequence is set to ABC. A is swapped with C in motor operation.
The Inverted phases parameter must be set to AC for the measuring points of current measured values
2 and current measured values 3. As a result, the phase assignment for the differential protection IED2 and
the impedance protection IED3 is correct. The positive-sequence and negative-sequence current is calculated
correctly.
The following logic diagram shows the principle for determining the present phase assignment and measured
variables with the example of currents.
The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are pending
at the selected measuring points. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change
in the phase sequence is only implemented if the measurands at the measuring points that are to be switched
are under 5 % of the rated variables. If the currents of the measuring points of current measured values 2 and
current measured values 3 of the example fall below 5 % of their rated variables, the switchover is released
and the set phases are switched with active binary input.
[lo_phrgph, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-365 Measured Values for Changed-Over Phases
Parameter: Phase sequence
• Default setting (_:101) Phase sequence = ABC
ABC Phase sequence A, B, C

ACB Phase sequence A, B, C
• Default setting (_:106) Inverted phases = none
none No phase exchange

AC Phase A changed over with phase C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
BC Phase B changed over with phase C

AB Phase C changed over with phase B
NOTE
i If you change the setting value of the parameter Inverted phases, consider the following:
The device can take the new setting value only if the binary input signal >Invert Phases is not active.
Input signal: >Phs-rotation reversal

The >Phs-rotation reversal binary input is used to switch between the ABC phase sequence and the
ACB phase sequence. The switchover direction depends on the setting of the Phase sequence parameter.
In doing so, the phase sequence of all 3-phase measuring points is changed. Changing of the phase-rotation
reversal via the binary input is only possible if no measurands (< 5 % of the rated variables) are present at all
3-phase measuring points.
Input signal: >Invert Phases

The binary input >Invert Phases is used to activate the setting of the parameter Inverted phases. In
doing so, the phase sequence of the selected measuring point is changed. Changing of the phase sequence
via the binary input is only possible if no measurand (< 5 % of the rated variables) is present at the respective
3-phase measuring point.
6.52.5 Settings

General
_:101 General:Phase sequence • ABC ABC
• ACB
General
_:101 VT 3-phase:Rated primary 0.10 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
voltage
_:102 VT 3-phase:Rated secon- 80 V to 230 V 100 V
dary voltage
_:103 VT 3-phase:Matching ratio 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
Vph / VN
_:104 VT 3-phase:VT connection • 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN 3 ph-to-gnd
volt. + VN
_:106 VT 3-phase:Inverted phases • none none
• AC
• BC
• AB
_:111 VT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:107 VT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
General
_:500 General:>Phs-rotation reversal SPS I
_:501 General:>Invert Phases SPS I
General
_:319 General:Phase sequence ABC SPS O
_:320 General:Phase sequence ACB SPS O
_:321 General:Freq.out of oper.range SPS O
_:322 General:f sys MV O
_:323 General:f track MV O
General
_:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:316 VT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:317 VT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.53 Current-Jump Detection
The Current jump detection function has the following tasks:
• Detection of jumps in the phase or zero-sequence current (ΔI)
• Generation of an indication when the measurands change by more than a configured threshold value
from one system period to the next.
The function for detecting jumps in the phase or zero-sequence current is an additional function used for
indication purposes or for further processing in user-specific CFC logics. Pick up of the function therefore
neither opens a separate fault in the fault log nor generates an operate indication.
The Current-jump detection function is used in protection function groups based on current measurement. It
can be instantiated multiple times.
[dw_struki, 1, en_US]
Current-jump detection operates directly with the sampled values without numeric filtering. This provides very
short response times to sudden changes in the current. The method used is not sensitive to slow changes of
amplitude or frequency.
Using a configurable selection of measured values, you can select from 3 line currents or the residual current.
Current-jump detection is phase-selective for the line current A, B and C.
The difference from the previous sampled value of the first system cycle is calculated for each sampled value.
The rectified average is then determined for a ½ system cycle from this differential signal Δi(t). The rectified
average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value ΔI by subsequent multiplication by 1.11.
The resultant measurand ΔI is then compared with the threshold value.
If the parameter (_:101) Threshold is exceeded, the output indication Jump is generated. If you have
selected the phase currents for measurement, the output indication data type used includes the separate
phase information. If you have selected the residual current for measurement, the output indication data type
used includes the NI information. If the current-jump detection responds (ΔILimit), the general information is
generated in the output indication in all cases.
Dropout occurs with a dynamically increased threshold value (ΔILimit) in accordance with the logic in
Figure 6-367. Dynamic increase of the dropout threshold value achieves optimally short dropout times.
The output indication Pulse is formed with the configurable timer (_:102) Minimum pulse length. As
a consequence, this output indication has a consistent minimum size. If you activate the binary input >Pulse
extension, you can prolong the pulse duration even further. If the binary input >Pulse extension has
been activated, the indication Pulse drops off when the configured time has elapsed and the falling edge of
the binary input is detected.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_jump_ii, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-367 Current-Jump Detection Logic
• Default setting (_:9) Measured value = phase currents

With the parameter Measured value, you set whether the line current(s) or the residual current is to be
used for jump detection.
phase currents The tripping stage evaluates the line currents IA, IB,
and IC phase-selectively to detect a jump.
zero-sequence current The tripping stage evaluates the residual current
IN/3I0 to detect a jump.
• Default setting (_:101) Threshold = 0.10 A for Irated = 1A or 0.50 A for Irated = 5 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the parameter Threshold, you set the threshold value for the measurand which, when exceeded,
generates the output indication Jump.
Parameter: Minimum pulse length
• Default setting (_:102) Minimum pulse length = 0.10 s

With the parameter Minimum pulse length, you specify a consistent minimum size for the output indica-
tion Pulse.
6.53.5 Settings

I-jump det. #
_:1 I-jump det. #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9 I-jump det. #:Measured • phase currents phase currents
value
• zero-sequence current
_:101 I-jump det. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:102 I-jump det. #:Minimum 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
pulse length

(Type)
I-jump det. #
_:81 I-jump det. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 I-jump det. #:>Pulse extension SPS I
_:54 I-jump det. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 I-jump det. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 I-jump det. #:Health ENS O
_:301 I-jump det. #:Jump ACT O
_:302 I-jump det. #:Pulse ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.54 Voltage-Jump Detection
The Voltage-jump detection function has the following tasks:
• Recognition of jumps in the phase or zero-sequence voltage (ΔV)
• Generation of an indication when the measurands change by more than a configured threshold value
from one system cycle to the next.
The function for detecting jumps in the phase or zero-sequence voltage is an additional function used for
indication purposes or for further processing in user-specific CFC logics. Pick up of the function therefore
neither opens a separate fault in the fault log nor generates an operate indication.
The Voltage-jump detection function is used in protection function groups based on voltage measurement. It
can be instantiated multiple times.
[dw_struku, 1, en_US]
Voltage-jump detection operates directly with the sampled values without numeric filtering. This provides very
short response times to sudden changes in the voltage. The method used is not sensitive to slow changes of
amplitude or frequency.
By using a configurable selection of measured values, you can select from phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-
phase voltages or the zero-sequence voltage. Voltage-jump detection is phase-selective.
The difference from the previous sampled value of a system cycle is calculated for each sampled value. The
rectified average is then determined for a ½ system cycle from this differential signal Δv(t). The rectified
average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value ΔV by subsequent multiplication by 1.11.
The resultant measurand ΔV is then compared with the threshold value.
If the parameter (_:101) Threshold is exceeded, the output indication Jump is generated. If the meas-
ured value is set to phase-to-phase, the sudden change in voltage is signaled selectively for the individual
measuring elements that have picked up (Jump VAB, Jump VBC or Jump VCA). If you have selected the
phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltages for measurement, the output indication data type used includes
the separate phase information. If you have selected the zero-sequence voltage for measurement, the output
indication data type used includes the N information. If the voltage-jump detection responds (ΔVLimit), the
general information is generated in the output indication in all cases.
Dropout occurs with a dynamically increased threshold value ΔULimit in accordance with the information in
Figure 6-369. Dynamic increase of the dropout threshold value achieves optimally short dropout times.
A timing element is added to the indication Jump. The element generates a pulse from this. The length
of this pulse can be set using the parameter (_:102) Minimum pulse length. This gives the output
indication Pulse a reliable minimum size. If you activate the binary input >Pulse extension, you can
prolong the pulse duration even further. If the binary input >Pulse extension has been activated, the
indication Pulse drops off when the configured time has elapsed and the falling edge of the binary input

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
is detected. If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the pulse duration is signaled selectively for the
individual measuring elements that have picked up (Pulse VAB, Pulse VBC or Pulse VCA).
Logic
[lo_jump_uu, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-369 Voltage-Jump Detection Logic
• Default setting (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-ground

With the parameter Measured value , you specify which measured values of voltage are to be used for
determining the voltage jumps.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

phase-to-ground The tripping stage evaluates the phase-to-ground
voltages VA, VB and VC.
phase-to-phase The tripping stage evaluates the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC and VCA.
zero-sequence voltage The tripping stage evaluates the zero-sequence
voltage VN/V0.

With the parameter Threshold , you set the threshold value for the measurand which, when exceeded,
generates the output indication Jump .
Parameter: Minimum pulse length
• Default setting (_:102) Minimum pulse length = 0.10 s

With the parameter Minimum pulse length , you specify a consistent minimum size for the output
indication Pulse .
6.54.5 Settings

V-jump det. #
_:1 V-jump det. #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9 V-jump det. #:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-ground
value
• phase-to-phase
• zero-sequence voltage
_:101 V-jump det. #:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 5.000 V
_:102 V-jump det. #:Minimum 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
pulse length

(Type)
V-jump det. #
_:81 V-jump det. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 V-jump det. #:>Pulse extension SPS I
_:54 V-jump det. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 V-jump det. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 V-jump det. #:Health ENS O
_:301 V-jump det. #:Jump ACT O
_:302 V-jump det. #:Jump VAB SPS O
_:303 V-jump det. #:Jump VBC SPS O
_:304 V-jump det. #:Jump VCA SPS O
_:305 V-jump det. #:Pulse ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:306 V-jump det. #:Pulse VAB SPS O
_:307 V-jump det. #:Pulse VBC SPS O
_:308 V-jump det. #:Pulse VCA SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.55 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection
The function block Voltage measuring-point selection can:
• Provide the ability to switchover the voltage measuring points to be applied, if various voltage measuring
points are connected to the voltage interface of the function group
• Select the correct voltage based on the switch position of the plant
If more than one voltage measuring points are connected to the same voltage interface of the function group,
use the Voltage measuring-point selection function block in the function group to select the correct voltage
based on the switch position of the plant.
The Voltage measuring-point selection is a common functionality for the function groups of the protected
objects.
The Voltage measuring-point selection function block realizes the selection of 1-phase voltage measuring
points or of 3-phase voltage measuring points by a logic block chart. The logic block chart controls the input
>MP-ID selection depending on the switch positions of disconnectors.
Example
Figure 6-370 shows an example of voltage measuring points selection for the function group Capacitor bank
in a double busbar application.
[dw_busbar_double, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-370 Double Busbar with Capacitor Bank
Connecting Measuring Points to Capacitor Bank Function Group

Figure 6-371 shows the connection of the function group Capacitor bank with several measuring points in
DIGSI. The ID of each measuring point appears in the bracket after the name.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_connection, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-371 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Capacitor Bank Function Group
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the
function group.
• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
• If more than 1 measuring point is connected to one voltage interface, a function block must be added to
enable the selection of the voltage measuring points.
CFC Control
The voltage measuring point is selected by logic block chart on basis of the measuring point IDs. If more
than one measuring point is connected to the interface of the function group, instantiate the function block
Voltage measuring-point selection from the library in the corresponding function group.
In order to ensure the correct measuring-point connection for the function group, a logic block chart has to
define the actual valid IDs for the input >MP-ID selection of the function block.
The following logic block chart implementation is based on the example given in Figure 6-370.
If the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is closed and no matter what the position the Disconnector 2 (QB2) is, the value 2
is the output of CFC block mux_d_1 and transferred to the input >MP-ID selection. Then, the Meas.point
V-3ph with ID 2 is selected as the reference voltage. Similarly, the Meas.point V-3ph with ID 3 is selected
as the reference voltage if the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is not closed (open or in intermediate position) while
Disconnector 2 (QB2) is closed.
[sc_lo-cfcVP, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-372 Logic Block Chart: Voltage Selection Using Measuring Point ID
However, the disconnectors might be both open or in a transient state. In this case, the input IN3 of the block
bool_int_1 becomes true, the value 0 is used as the ID for voltage selection input ( >MP-ID selection). If
ID 0 is selected, then all voltage values of the respective function-group interface are set to 0 V immediately.
An alarm indication Selection invalid is issued and the indication Health is issued as OK. In case you
want to supply the function group with voltage values under the condition that both disconnectors are open
or in transient state from one or the other busbar, you can alter the CFC chart respectively.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i An invalid measuring-point selection (ID < 0 or an ID of a unconnected measuring point) for input >MP-ID
selection results in the following:
• The voltage measured values are displayed as failure.
• The validity of the voltage measured values is set to invalid.
• The indication Health is set to Alarm.
• The indication Selection invalid becomes true.

(Type)
V-MP selection
_:501 V-MP selection:>MP-ID selection INS I
_:53 V-MP selection:Health ENS O
_:301 V-MP selection:Selection invalid SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.56 Pole Discrepancy Protection
Due to the high probability of 1-phase short circuits in power systems, 1-pole tripping and automatic reclosing
is used mainly in transmission to ensure the reliable and stable operation of the system. However, this brings
about new problems, that is, open-phase operation adds certain risks to the power system.
Therefore, a function that can reflect open-phase operation conditions of CBs must be installed to open those
CBs in abnormal status. Siemens develops the function block Pole discrepancy protection for this purpose.
The function block Pole discrepancy protection has the task to detect discrepancies in the position of the 3
circuit-breaker poles. Under steady-state operating conditions, either all 3 poles of the circuit breaker must be
closed, or all 3 poles must be open. Discrepancy is permitted only for a short time interval during a 1-pole
automatic reclose cycle.
In DIGSI 5, you can find the function block Pole discrepancy protection under the directory Global DIGSI 5
libraries > FG Circuit breaker.
You can instantiate 1 function block Pole discrepancy protection in the function group Circuit breaker 1-3
pole.
[dw_structure_PD, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-373 Structure/Embedding of the Function Block
6.56.3 Description
Routing 1-Pole Positions

With the following CB signals routed, the function block Pole discrepancy protection can obtain positions of
the phase-selective CB auxiliary contacts:
• Position 1-pole phsA
• Position 1-pole phsB
• Position 1-pole phsC

If any of the signals is not routed, Health of the function block Pole discrepancy protection is set to Alarm.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_PD, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-374 Logic Diagram of the Function Block Pole Discrepancy Protection
(1) From FB Circuit breaker

(2) From FB CB position recognition

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Positions of the CB Poles

There a 2 ways to get the positions of the poles:
• With current check

The function block Circuit-breaker position recognition calculates the positions of the CB poles from the
evaluation of the CB auxiliary contacts and the current flow.
If you want to take the current flow into consideration in the function block Pole discrepancy protec-
tion, you can set the parameter Current check to yes. Then, the function block Pole discrepancy
protection reuses the results of the function block Circuit-breaker position recognition.
For more information, refer to 5.7.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary
Functions.
• Without current check

If you set the parameter Current check to no, then, the current flow is not considered and the
function block Pole discrepancy protection gets the positions of the CB poles from the function block
Circuit breaker.
For each phase, the internal signal PhaseX with current comes from the function block Circuit-breaker
position recognition. When the phase current exceeds the parameter Current thresh. CB open, the
value of the corresponding signal PhaseX with current is true.
Pickup
Whenever a pole discrepancy is detected, the function block Pole discrepancy protection issues the signal
Pickup.
Tripping
If you want the function block Pole discrepancy protection to trip the circuit breaker, set the parameter
Alarm only to no. Then, when a 1-pole-open discrepancy or a 2-pole-open discrepancy is detected, the
function block Pole discrepancy protection issues the signal Operate.
The signal Operate can block the function Automatic reclosing.
Fault Recording and Fault Logging

If you enable the function block Pole discrepancy protection, once the signal Operate is issued, the fault
recording and fault logging are triggered.
Blocking of the Function Block

In the event of blocking, the function is reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the binary input
signal >Block function.
Parameter: Alarm only
• Default setting (_:101) Alarm only = no

With the parameter Alarm only, you can decide to trip the circuit breaker or not.
With the default value no, after pickup, once the time delay expires, the signal Operate is issued.
Parameter: Current check
• Default setting (_:102) Current check = yes

With the parameter Current check, you can decide to take the current flow into consideration or not. For
more information, refer to Positions of the CB Poles, Page 1231.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Siemens recommends keeping the default setting to ensure precise positions.
Parameters: Delay for 1 pole open, Delay for 2 poles open
• Default setting (_:103) Delay for 1 pole open = 2.00 s
• Default setting (_:104) Delay for 2 poles open = 2.00 s

With these parameters, you can determine the minimum time delay for operating the function block Pole
discrepancy protection.
If you enable the function Automatic reclosing, set these parameters larger than the parameter Dead time
aft. 1-pole trip.

With the parameter Minimum operate time, you set the minimum duration for the trip command of the
function block Pole discrepancy protection.
6.56.5 Settings

Pole discrep.
_:1 Pole discrep.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Pole discrep.:Alarm only • no no
• yes
_:102 Pole discrep.:Current • no yes
check
• yes
_:103 Pole discrep.:Delay for 1 0.00 s to 60.00 s 2.00 s
pole open
_:104 Pole discrep.:Delay for 2 0.00 s to 60.00 s 2.00 s
poles open
_:105 Pole discrep.:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.12 s
operate time

(Type)
Pole discrep.
_:82 Pole discrep.:>Block function SPS I
_:51 Pole discrep.:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:54 Pole discrep.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Pole discrep.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Pole discrep.:Health ENS O
_:55 Pole discrep.:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Pole discrep.:Alarm SPS O
_:57 Pole discrep.:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.57 Protection and Automation Functions (CEI 0-16 Standard)
6.57 Protection and Automation Functions (CEI 0-16 Standard)
6.57.1 Introduction
CEI 0-16 is an Italian technical standard for the connection to the MV distribution network. In the CEI
0-16 standard, interface protection (PI) includes protection functions used to monitor frequency and voltage
parameters of the distribution network. Interface protection (PI) is required in generation plants connected to
the distribution network. Interface protection (PI) aims to disconnect the generation plant in case of faults in
the MV distribution network.
For further details, refer to the CEI 0-16 standard. The following figure shows the application.
[dw_primary main wiring_CEI, 1, en_US]
Term in CEI 0-16 Stands for Description

Standard
DG General switching A switching device whose opening (controlled by the general
device protection system) ensures the separation of the entire system
of the user from the distribution network.
DDI Interface device One (or more) switching device whose opening (controlled by
the protection system) ensures the separation of the production
plant from the network, allowing the production plant itself to
feed the privileged loads in the island operation.
DDG Generator device A switching device whose opening (controlled by the protection
system) determines the separation of the generating unit.
In the preceding figure, DG, DDI, and DDG are circuit breakers. In some applications, DG and DDI are possibly
combined into one circuit breaker. In case of faults, the interface protection (PI) trips the DDI.
SIPROTEC 5 supports the following protection functions for interface protection (PI):
• Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (CEI 0-16 standard)
• Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (CEI 0-16 standard)
• Frequency protection (CEI 0-16 standard)

The following chapters describe these functions.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.58 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage (CEI 0-16 Standard)
The function Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (CEI 0-16 standard) can be used in the following
function groups with 3-phase voltage measurement:
• Function group Voltage/current 3-phase
• Function group Voltage 3-phase
• Function group Line

The function Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (CEI 0-16 standard) comes factory-set with
1 stage Definite-time overvoltage protection, 10-min RMS value and 1 stage Definite-time overvoltage
protection, fundamental component. The following stages can be operated simultaneously within the
function:
• 2 stages Definite-time overvoltage protection, 10-min RMS value
• 2 stages Definite-time overvoltage protection, fundamental component

[dw_OVP_CEI_3-phase, 1, en_US]
Logic
[lo_OVP CEI FB General, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The general functionality calculates the RMS values of the phase-to-phase voltage of the past 10 min
(30 000 cycles for 50 Hz), according to the requirement of the CEI 0-16 standard. The calculated result
VRMS_10min is forwarded to the protection stages and is updated every 3 s.

V10min Calculated RMS values of the phase-to-phase voltage of the past 10 min.
6.58.3 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve, 10-Min RMS Value
Logic of the Stage
[lo_stage_OVP_CEI_10MinRMS, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-377 Logic Diagram of the Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve, 10-Min RMS Value

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measurand
The stage obtains the 10-min RMS value of the phase-to-phase voltage from the FB General.
Pickup, Operate, Dropout

The stage compares the 10-min RMS value with the threshold value (specified by the parameter Threshold).
If the 10-min RMS value exceeds threshold value, the pickup signal is issued.
Once the pickup signal is issued, the operate delay (specified by the parameter Operate delay) starts. After
the expiration of the operate delay, the operate signal is issued.
With the parameter Dropout ratio, you can define the ratio of the dropout threshold to the value of the
parameter Threshold.
Blocking the Stage

stage:
• Internally via the binary input signal >DDI Open (defined in the CEI 0-16 standard) from the general
functionality

In the CEI 0-16 standard, the default setting of 110.000 V is recommended. Siemens recommends using the
default setting.

The recommended setting value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high-precision
measurements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.

The parameter Operate delay determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to
In the CEI 0-16 standard, the operate delay is a fixed value of 3.00 s. Siemens recommends using the default
setting.


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.58.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve, Fundamental Component
Logic of the Stage
[lo_stage_OVP_CEI_Fund, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-378 Logic Diagram of the Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve, Fundamental Component
Measurand
The stage processes the sampled values of the phase-to-phase voltage and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

The stage compares the fundamental-component value of the phase-to-phase voltage with the threshold
value (specified by the parameter Threshold). If the fundamental-component value exceeds the threshold
value, the pickup signal is issued.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Blocking the Stage

stage:
functionality

In the CEI 0-16 standard, the default setting of 120.000 V is recommended. Siemens recommends using the
default setting.

The default setting of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high-precision measurements, the

Based on the CEI 0-16 standard, the recorded time between the start of overvoltage and the instant when the
trip contact of the function changes the state represents the tripping time. It means that the tripping time
contains the following times:
• The function pickup time
• The time from pickup to operate
• The trip-contact close time

In the CEI 0-16 standard, the default setting of the trip time is 0.60 s.
The parameter Operate delay determines the time from pickup to operate. Therefore, the default setting
of the parameter Operate delay is 0.57 s, that is, 0.60 s minus the function pickup time and the
trip-contact close time which is around 30 ms.

6.58.5 Settings

Def-T-CEI 1
_:26521:1 Def-T-CEI 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:26521:2 Def-T-CEI 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:26521:3 Def-T-CEI 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
_:26521:4 Def-T-CEI 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:26521:6 Def-T-CEI 1:Operate 0.00 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
delay
Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
ratio
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:501 General:>DDI Open SPS I
_:2311:320 General:V10min DEL O
Group indicat.
Def-T-CEI 1
_:26521:81 Def-T-CEI 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:26521:51 Def-T-CEI 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:26521:54 Def-T-CEI 1:Inactive SPS O
_:26521:52 Def-T-CEI 1:Behavior ENS O
_:26521:53 Def-T-CEI 1:Health ENS O
_:26521:55 Def-T-CEI 1:Pickup ACD O
_:26521:300 Def-T-CEI 1:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:26521:301 Def-T-CEI 1:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:26521:302 Def-T-CEI 1:Pickup loop CA SPS O
_:26521:56 Def-T-CEI 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:26521:57 Def-T-CEI 1:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.59 Frequency Protection (CEI 0-16 Standard)
The function Frequency protection (CEI 0-16 standard) can be used in the following function groups with
3-phase voltage measurement:

The function Frequency protection (CEI 0-16 standard) comes factory-set with the following stages:
• 1 stage Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• 1 stage Overfrequency protection S1
• 1 stage Overfrequency protection S2
• 1 stage Underfrequency protection S1
• 1 stage Underfrequency protection S2

• 2 stages Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• 2 stages Overfrequency protection S1
• 2 stages Overfrequency protection S2
• 2 stages Underfrequency protection S1
• 2 stages Underfrequency protection S2

[dw_Freq.Prot_CEI, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The general functionality contains 3 logic parts:
• Voltmetric unblocking
• Undervoltage blocking
• Acceleration
Voltmetric Unblocking
[lo_Freq.Prot_Voltmetric_unblock, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-380 Logic Diagram of the Voltmetric Unblocking
(1) The internal signal 81 Frequ. S1 release is sent to the stages Overfrequency protection S1
and Underfrequency protection S1.
The voltmetric unblocking logic releases the following stages:
• Frequency-protection S1 stages, that is, Overfrequency protection S1 and Underfrequency protection

S1
If the voltmetric unblocking conditions are not fulfilled, the stages are internally blocked.
• Stage Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage

If the V0 condition is fulfilled, the stage picks up.
The voltmetric unblocking logic compares the following voltage components with settable thresholds and
decides whether to issue the signals 81 Frequ. S1 release, V0 crit.fullf., V1 crit. fullf.,
and V2 crit. fullf.:
• Zero-sequence component (V0)
• Positive-sequence component (V1)
• Negative-sequence component (V2)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Meanwhile, a local control command Local enable 81V can also trigger the signal 81 Frequ. S1
release. The command can be switched to on or off by the communication control command or the
control menu for different operating modes:
• If the command Local enable 81V is in the state off, the frequency-protection S1 stages are
blocked, except in the case of the intervention of the voltmetric unblocking.
• If the command Local enable 81V is in the state on, the frequency-protection S1 stages are released
and the signal 81 Frequ. S1 release is issued, regardless of the intervention of the voltmetric
unblocking.
If the signal 81 Frequ. S1 release is issued (that is, the voltmetric unblocking conditions are fulfilled),
an internal signal 81 Frequ. S1 release is sent to the frequency-protection S1 stages to release the
stages.
If the signal V0 crit.fullf. is issued (that is, the V0 condition is fulfilled), an internal signal 59 V0
pickup is sent to the stage Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage to pick
up the stage.
The voltmetric unblocking logic can be reset using the binary input signal >DDI Open.
[lo_Freq.Prot_Undvervolt_block, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-381 Logic Diagram of the Undervoltage Blocking
(1) The internal signal Undervoltage blocking is sent to the stages Overfrequency protec-
tion S1, Overfrequency protection S2, Underfrequency protection S1, and Underfrequency
protection S2.
The frequency value to be used in each frequency-protection stage is calculated from each phase-to-phase
voltage on 3 phases.
The undervoltage blocking logic is used to avoid a wrong calculated frequency value.
If the phase-to-phase voltage falls below the threshold Minimum voltage, a signal Undervoltage
blocking is issued. In this condition, all the frequency-protection stages are blocked.
The dropout ratio of the undervoltage blocking is fixed at 1.05.
Acceleration
[lo_Freq.Prot_Acceleration, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-382 Logic Diagram of the Acceleration

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
(1) The internal signal Acceleration is sent to the stages Overfrequency protection S2, Under-
frequency protection S2, and Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual
voltage.
The acceleration logic is used to reduce the operate time of the following stages:
• Overfrequency protection S2
• Underfrequency protection S2
The preceding stages can be accelerated in either of the following ways:
• Issue of the signal >Manual close

If according to the CEI 0-16 standard, the transformers or transducers dedicated to the measurement
of the residual voltage (phase-to-ground transducers or broken-delta winding of voltage transformers)
are installed downstream of the DDI (interface device) at the generator side, the preceding stages are
accelerated upon the intentional close (manual, automatic, with remote control, etc.) of the DDI, that is,
upon the issue of the signal >Manual close.
• Removal of the signal >DDI Open

If according to the CEI 0-16 standard, the transformers or transducers for voltage or frequency measure-
ment are installed downstream of the DDI (interface device) at the generator side, all the PI functions are
blocked by the signal >DDI Open.
For the static generators or the asynchronous non-self-excited generators, at the closure of the DDI, the
preceding mentioned stages can be accelerated by the removal of the signal >DDI Open. To do so, the
parameter Static generator must be set to yes.
For other generators, the parameter Static generator is set to no, and the preceding mentioned
stages are not accelerated by the signal >DDI Open.
For detailed applications, refer to Application Example of the Acceleration Logic, Page 1246.
Voltage-Transformer Connection Types

As the zero-sequence voltage (V0) is necessary for the function Frequency protection (CEI 0-16 standard),
the function can be used in the following voltage-transformer connection types with V0:
In the voltage-transformer connection types 3 ph-to-ph voltages and 2 ph-to-ph voltages without V0, the
function cannot be used.
Parameter: Threshold V0>, Dropout ratio V0>, Extension time V0>
• Default setting (_:2311:3) Threshold V0> = 5.000 V
• Default setting (_:2311:4) Dropout ratio V0> = 0.96
• Default setting (_:2311:5) Extension time V0> = 0.20 s

With these parameters, you specify the voltmetric unblocking condition for the zero-sequence component
(V0) of voltage as well as the pickup condition of the stage Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence
voltage/residual voltage.
With the parameter Extension time V0>, you get a prolonged and therefore stabilized pickup signal of the
stage Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage. This parameter is used in case
of an intermittent arc or when a fault is cleared, to avoid repetitive pickups and dropouts of the stage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Threshold V1<, Dropout ratio V1<
• Default setting (_:2311:6) Threshold V1< = 40.416 V
• Default setting (_:2311:7) Dropout ratio V1< = 1.04

With these parameters, you specify the voltmetric unblocking condition for the positive-sequence component
(V1) of voltage.
Parameter: Threshold V2>, Dropout ratio V2>
• Default setting (_:2311:8) Threshold V2> = 8.661 V
• Default setting (_:2311:9) Dropout ratio V2> = 0.95

With these parameters, you specify the voltmetric unblocking condition for the negative-sequence component
(V2) of voltage.
Parameter: Extension time
• Default setting (_:2311:10) Extension time = 30.00 s

With the parameter Extension time, you get a prolonged and therefore stabilized voltmetric-unblocking
signal 81 Frequ. S1 release.
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Minimum voltage = 20.000 V

With the parameter Minimum voltage, you specify the voltage threshold value below which all the
frequency-protection stages are blocked.
Set this parameter to a phase-to-phase voltage value.
Parameter: Static generator
• Default setting (_:2311:11) Static generator = no

With the parameter Static generator, you specify the type of the generator.
For the static or asynchronous non-self-excited generator, set the parameter to yes. For other generator
types, set the parameter to no.
Parameter: Accel. act. T
• Default setting (_:2311:12) Accel. act. T = 30.00 s

With the parameter Accel. act. T, you specify the time range during which the operate of the following
stages is accelerated:
• Overfrequency protection S2
• Underfrequency protection S2
The default setting of 30.00 s is appropriate because it should be possible to wait for a reclose cycle in the
network.
If you set this parameter to 0.00 s, the acceleration logic is not active and the parameter Operate delay
of the preceding 3 stages takes effect.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Application Example of the Acceleration Logic

Voltage transformers can be either connected upstream or downstream of the DDI (interface device).
If inductive voltage transformers are used, only a phase-to-phase voltage connection is allowed
to measure the phase-to-phase voltages and frequencies. According to the CEI 0-16 standard, the
phase‑to‑ground voltage must be measured only with a broken-delta winding.
With reference to the position of the voltage transformer, to comply with the CEI 0-16 standard, some
parameters and signals must be used. The following provides examples.
[dw_acceleration_example_1, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-383 Application Example of Voltage-Transformer Positions: Case 1 and Case 2
Figure 6-384 Application Example of Voltage-Transformer Positions: Case 3

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 6-385 Application Example of Voltage-Transformer Positions: Case 4
For different voltage-transformer positions in the preceding cases, the usage of the following signals and
parameters is different according to the CEI 0-16 standard:
• Signal >DDI Open: indicates the state of the DDI.
• Signal >Manual close: indicates the intentional closing command of the DDI.
• Parameter Static generator: specifies the type of the generator. For the static or asynchronous
non-self-excited generator, the value of this parameter is yes. For other generator types, the value of
this parameter is no.
The following table describes the usage of the preceding signals and parameters in the cases.
Table 6-24 Usage of the Signals and Parameters in Different Cases
Case Use the Signal >DDI Open Use the Signal >Manual Set the Parameter Static
close generator
Case 1 No No Set to no
Case 2 No Yes Set to no
Case 3a Yes No Set to yes
Case 3b Yes No Set to no
Case 4a Yes Yes Set to yes
Case 4b Yes Yes Set to no

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.59.3 Overvoltage-Protection Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Logic of the Stage
[lo_Freq.Prot_V0, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-386 Logic Diagram of the Overvoltage-Protection Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual
Voltage
Pickup and Operate

If the stage receives the internal signal 59 V0 pickup from the general functionality, the pickup signal is
issued.
Once the pickup signal is issued, the operate delay starts. If the stage receives the internal signal Accel-
eration from the general functionality, the parameter Accel.oper.T takes effect as the operate delay.
Otherwise, the parameter Operate delay takes effect as the operate delay.
After the expiration of the operate delay, the operate signal is issued.
Blocking the Stage

stage:
functionality

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023


In the CEI 0-16 standard, the default setting of the tripping time is 25.00 s.
Parameter: Accel.oper.T
• Default setting (_:26791:7) Accel.oper.T = 0.17 s

If the acceleration is active, the parameter Accel.oper.T takes effect instead of the parameter Operate
delay to reduce the operate delay.


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.59.4 Frequency Protection S1 Stages
Logic of the Stage

The logic of the stage Overfrequency protection S1 is the same as that of the stage Underfrequency protec-
tion S1. The following figure shows the logic of the stage Overfrequency protection S1 as an example.
[lo_Freq.Prot_S1, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-387 Logic Diagram of the Stage Overfrequency-Protection S1
(1) For the stage Underfrequency protection S1, the symbol is:
The angle-difference method is used for frequency measurement. This method determines the phasor of the
positive-sequence voltage in multiphase systems. Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given
time interval is proportional to the frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Pickup and Operate

If both of the following conditions are fulfilled, the pickup signal is issued:
• The stage receives the internal signal 81 Frequ. S1 release from the general functionality.
• For the stage Overfrequency protection S1, the frequency value exceeds the Threshold. For the stage
Underfrequency protection S1, the frequency value falls below the Threshold.

Blocking the Stage

stage:
functionality
• Internally when the phase-to-phase voltage falls below the threshold Minimum voltage
• Default setting (_:26821:3) Threshold = 50.20 Hz for frated = 50 Hz (for the stage Overfrequency
protection S1)
• Default setting (_:26881:3) Threshold = 49.80 Hz for frated = 50 Hz (for the stage Underfre-
quency protection S1)
In the CEI 0-16 standard, the default setting of this parameter is recommended. Siemens recommends using

Based on the CEI 0-16 standard, the recorded time between the instant of the frequency deviation and the
instant when the trip contact of the function changes the state represents the tripping time. It means that the
tripping time contains the following times:

In the CEI 0-16 standard, the default setting of the tripping time is 0.15 s.
• Default setting (_:26821:109) Dropout differential = 20 mHz

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping stage in your
application, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For example, if the pickup value
(parameter Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 50.20 Hz (for the stage Overfrequency protection
S1) or to 49.80 Hz (for the stage Underfrequency protection S1) and the Dropout differential to
100 mHz, the stage drops out at 50.10 Hz (for the stage Overfrequency protection S1) or at 49.90 Hz (for
the stage Underfrequency protection S1).
6.59.5 Frequency Protection S2 Stages
Logic of the Stage

The logic of the stage Overfrequency protection S2 is the same as that of the stage Underfrequency protec-
tion S2. The following figure shows the logic of the stage Overfrequency protection S2 as an example.
[lo_Freq.Prot_S2, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-388 Logic Diagram of the Stage Overfrequency-Protection S2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
(1) For the stage Underfrequency protection S2, the symbol is:
The angle-difference method is used for frequency measurement. This method determines the phasor of the
positive-sequence voltage in multiphase systems. Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given
time interval is proportional to the frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
Pickup and Operate

For the stage Overfrequency protection S2, if the frequency value exceeds the Threshold, the pickup
signal is issued.
For the stage Underfrequency protection S2, if the frequency value falls below the Threshold, the pickup
signal is issued.
Once the pickup signal is issued, the operate delay starts. If the stage receives the internal signal Accel-
eration from the general functionality, the parameter Accel.oper.T takes effect as the operate delay.
Otherwise, the parameter Operate delay takes effect as the operate delay.
After the expiration of the operate delay, the operate signal is issued.

Blocking the Stage

stage:
functionality
• Internally when the phase-to-phase voltage falls below the threshold Minimum voltage
• Default setting (_:26851:3) Threshold = 51.50 Hz for frated = 50 Hz (for the stage Overfrequency
protection S2)
• Default setting (_:26911:3) Threshold = 47.50 Hz for frated = 50 Hz (for the stage Underfre-
quency protection S2)
• Default setting (_:26851:6) Operate delay = 0.92 s (for the stage Overfrequency protection
S2)
• Default setting (_:26911:6) Operate delay = 3.92 s (for the stage Underfrequency protection
S2)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Based on the CEI 0-16 standard, the recorded time between the instant of the frequency deviation and the
instant when the trip contact of the function changes the state represents the tripping time. It means that the
tripping time contains the following times:

In the CEI 0-16 standard, the default setting of the trip time is 1.00 s for the stage Overfrequency protection
S2 and 4.00 s for the stage Underfrequency protection S2.
of the parameter Operate delay is 0.92 s for the stage Overfrequency protection S2 and 3.92 s for
the stage Underfrequency protection S2, that is, 1.00 s for the stage Overfrequency protection S2 or 4.00 s
for the stage Underfrequency protection S2 minus the function pickup time and the trip-contact close time
which is around 80 ms.
Parameter: Accel.oper.T
• Default setting (_:26851:7) Accel.oper.T = 0.12 s

If the acceleration is active, the parameter Accel.oper.T takes effect instead of the parameter Operate
delay to reduce the operate delay.
• Recommended setting value Dropout differential = 20 mHz

differential can remain at 20 mHz. If you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping stage in your
application, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For example, if the pickup value
(parameter Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 51.50 Hz (for the stage Overfrequency protection
S2) or to 47.50 Hz (for the stage Underfrequency protection S2) and the Dropout differential to
100 mHz, the stage drops out at 51.40 Hz (for the stage Overfrequency protection S1) or at 47.60 Hz (for
the stage Underfrequency protection S1).

6.59.6 Settings

Voltmetric unblock
_:2311:3 General:Threshold V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 5.000 V
_:2311:4 General:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.96
V0>
_:2311:5 General:Extension time 0.00 s to 0.20 s 0.20 s
V0>
_:2311:6 General:Threshold V1< 0.300 V to 200.000 V 40.416 V
V1<
_:2311:8 General:Threshold V2> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 8.661 V
V2>
_:2311:10 General:Extension time 1.00 s to 240.00 s 30.00 s

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Undervoltage block
voltage
Acceleration
_:2311:11 General:Static generator • no no
• yes
_:2311:12 General:Accel. act. T 0.00 s to 60.00 s 30.00 s
59 V0 CEI 1
_:26791:1 59 V0 CEI 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:26791:2 59 V0 CEI 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:26791:6 59 V0 CEI 1:Operate 0.00 s to 300.00 s 24.97 s
delay
_:26791:7 59 V0 CEI 1:Accel.oper.T 0.00 s to 5.00 s 0.17 s
OverF.S1 CEI 1
_:26821:1 OverF.S1 CEI 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:26821:2 OverF.S1 CEI 1:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:26821:3 OverF.S1 CEI 40.00 Hz to 90.00 Hz 50.20 Hz
1:Threshold
_:26821:6 OverF.S1 CEI 1:Operate 0.00 s to 600.00 s 0.07 s
delay
_:26821:109 OverF.S1 CEI 1:Dropout 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
differential
OverF.S2 CEI 1
_:26851:1 OverF.S2 CEI 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:26851:2 OverF.S2 CEI 1:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:26851:3 OverF.S2 CEI 40.00 Hz to 90.00 Hz 51.50 Hz
1:Threshold
_:26851:6 OverF.S2 CEI 1:Operate 0.00 s to 600.00 s 0.92 s
delay
_:26851:7 OverF.S2 CEI 0.00 s to 5.00 s 0.12 s
1:Accel.oper.T
_:26851:109 OverF.S2 CEI 1:Dropout 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
differential
Und.F.S1 CEI 1
_:26881:1 Und.F.S1 CEI 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:26881:2 Und.F.S1 CEI 1:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:26881:3 Und.F.S1 CEI 30.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 49.80 Hz
1:Threshold
_:26881:6 Und.F.S1 CEI 1:Operate 0.00 s to 600.00 s 0.07 s
delay
_:26881:109 Und.F.S1 CEI 1:Dropout 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
differential
Und.F.S2 CEI 1
_:26911:1 Und.F.S2 CEI 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:26911:2 Und.F.S2 CEI 1:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:26911:3 Und.F.S2 CEI 30.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 47.50 Hz
1:Threshold
_:26911:6 Und.F.S2 CEI 1:Operate 0.00 s to 600.00 s 3.92 s
delay
_:26911:7 Und.F.S2 CEI 0.00 s to 5.00 s 0.12 s
1:Accel.oper.T
_:26911:109 Und.F.S2 CEI 1:Dropout 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
differential

(Type)
General
_:2311:502 General:>Manual close SPS I
_:2311:303 General:Local enable 81V SPC C
_:2311:304 General:V0 crit.fullf. SPS O
_:2311:305 General:V1 crit. fullf. SPS O
_:2311:306 General:V2 crit. fullf. SPS O
_:2311:300 General:81 Frequ. S1 release SPS O
_:2311:302 General:Acceleration SPS O
_:2311:307 General:f MV O
Group indicat.
59 V0 CEI 1
_:26791:81 59 V0 CEI 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:26791:51 59 V0 CEI 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:26791:54 59 V0 CEI 1:Inactive SPS O
_:26791:52 59 V0 CEI 1:Behavior ENS O
_:26791:53 59 V0 CEI 1:Health ENS O
_:26791:55 59 V0 CEI 1:Pickup ACD O
_:26791:56 59 V0 CEI 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:26791:57 59 V0 CEI 1:Operate ACT O
OverF.S1 CEI 1
_:26821:81 OverF.S1 CEI 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:26821:51 OverF.S1 CEI 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:26821:54 OverF.S1 CEI 1:Inactive SPS O
_:26821:52 OverF.S1 CEI 1:Behavior ENS O
_:26821:53 OverF.S1 CEI 1:Health ENS O
_:26821:55 OverF.S1 CEI 1:Pickup ACD O
_:26821:56 OverF.S1 CEI 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:26821:57 OverF.S1 CEI 1:Operate ACT O
OverF.S2 CEI 1
_:26851:81 OverF.S2 CEI 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:26851:51 OverF.S2 CEI 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:26851:54 OverF.S2 CEI 1:Inactive SPS O
_:26851:52 OverF.S2 CEI 1:Behavior ENS O
_:26851:53 OverF.S2 CEI 1:Health ENS O
_:26851:55 OverF.S2 CEI 1:Pickup ACD O
_:26851:56 OverF.S2 CEI 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:26851:57 OverF.S2 CEI 1:Operate ACT O
Und.F.S1 CEI 1
_:26881:81 Und.F.S1 CEI 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:26881:51 Und.F.S1 CEI 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:26881:54 Und.F.S1 CEI 1:Inactive SPS O
_:26881:52 Und.F.S1 CEI 1:Behavior ENS O
_:26881:53 Und.F.S1 CEI 1:Health ENS O
_:26881:55 Und.F.S1 CEI 1:Pickup ACD O
_:26881:56 Und.F.S1 CEI 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:26881:57 Und.F.S1 CEI 1:Operate ACT O
Und.F.S2 CEI 1
_:26911:81 Und.F.S2 CEI 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:26911:51 Und.F.S2 CEI 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:26911:54 Und.F.S2 CEI 1:Inactive SPS O
_:26911:52 Und.F.S2 CEI 1:Behavior ENS O
_:26911:53 Und.F.S2 CEI 1:Health ENS O
_:26911:55 Und.F.S2 CEI 1:Pickup ACD O
_:26911:56 Und.F.S2 CEI 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:26911:57 Und.F.S2 CEI 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.60 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage (CEI 0-16 Standard)
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (CEI 0-16 standard) can be used in the
following function groups with 3-phase voltage measurement:

The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (CEI 0-16 standard) comes factory-set with
2 stages Definite-time undervoltage protection, and a maximum of 2 stages can be operated simultane-
ously within the function.
[dw_UVP_CEI, 1, en_US]
Logic
[lo_UVP_CEI_FB General, 1, en_US]
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The parameter Current-
flow criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the parameter Current-flow criterion is activated, the undervoltage-protection stages only pick
the stages.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal Current-flow crite-
NOTE
i If the parameter Current-flow criterion is deactivated, the device picks up immediately if a missing
measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The parameter setting can be
changed even when the device has picked up.
• Default setting (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion = on

These 2 possible voltage-transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and

current-flow criterion to make the pickup drop out when the current falls
off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage-protection
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Threshold I> = 0.050 A

If the function is instantiated in the function group Voltage 3-phase, this parameter is invisible.
The parameter Threshold I> makes it possible to detect when the circuit breaker is closed. Siemens
recommends setting the parameter Threshold I> to 5 % of the rated current. With a secondary rated
transformer current of 1 A, the secondary setting value for Threshold I> is 0.05 A.
If the sensitivity of the parameter Threshold I> is set too high, compensation processes in the secondary
up the dropout, increase the default setting.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_stage_UVP_CEI_Fund, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-391 Logic Diagram of the Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve, Fundamental Component
Measurand
The stage processes the sampled values of the phase-to-phase voltage and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

If both the following conditions are fulfilled, the pickup signal is issued:
• If the parameter Current-flow criterion is activated, the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.

If the parameter Current-flow criterion is deactivated, this condition is not valid.
For details, refer to the section Current-Flow Criterion, Page 1258 in the general functionality.
• The fundamental-component value of the phase-to-phase voltage falls below the threshold value (speci-
fied by the parameter Threshold).
Blocking the Stage

stage:
functionality
• Default setting (_:421:3) Threshold = 85.000 V (for the 1st stage)
• Default setting (_:422:3) Threshold = 30.000 V (for the 2nd stage)


The default setting 1.04 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high-precision measurements, the
• Default setting (_:422:6) Operate delay = 0.17 s (for the 2nd stage)

In the CEI 0-16 standard, the default setting of the trip time is 1.50 s for the 1st stage and 0.20 s for the 2nd
stage.
of the parameter Operate delay is 1.47 s for the 1st stage and 0.17 s for the 2nd stage, that is, 1.50 s
for the 1st stage and 0.20 s for the 2nd stage minus the function pickup time and the trip-contact close time
which is around 30 ms.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

6.60.4 Settings

General
criterion
• on
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
ratio
delay
Definite-T 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
ratio
delay

(Type)
General

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
Definite-T 2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
6.61 PI Trip Logic (CEI 0-16 Standard) in FG Circuit Breaker
6.61.1 Description
The function block PI trip is located in the function group Circuit breaker for 3-pole tripping to realize the
PI trip logic. After instantiation of the function block PI trip, a new column PI Trip is available in the Editor
Circuit-breaker interaction, as shown in the following figure.
[sc_CB interaction_CEI, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-392 Column PI Trip in the Editor Circuit-breaker interaction
The PI protection functions according to the CEI 0-16 standard are prerouted to the PI trip. If you want to
use the PI trip logic for other protection functions, you can manually route them in the Editor Circuit-breaker
interaction.
The PI trip logic issues the signal PI trip, which is a normal close signal.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_PI_Trip, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-393 Logic Diagram of the PI Trip
(1) The protection device is running normally.
Direct Tripping
In the CEI 0-16 standard, the direct tripping is possible in the following ways:
• Tripping via a communication command (signal Trip command)

The signal Trip command becomes inactive after a short delay of 200 ms.
• Tripping via a GOOSE message (signal >Trip via GOOSE) using IEC 61850
• Tripping via a binary-input signal (signal >Trip via BI)

All the preceding signals can be blocked by the binary-input signal >DDI Open.
Issue of the Signal PI trip

The signal PI trip is issued when the following conditions are met:
• The protection device is running normally (in the process mode or simulation mode).
• No protection function that is routed to the PI trip operates.
• The direct tripping logic is not fulfilled.

(Type)
PI Trip
_:501 PI Trip:>DDI Open SPS I
_:502 PI Trip:>Trip via GOOSE SPS I
_:503 PI Trip:>Trip via BI SPS I
_:301 PI Trip:Trip command SPC C
_:300 PI Trip:PI trip SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7 Capacitor Bank Protection
7.1 Introduction 1268

7.2 Overcurrent Protection for Capacitor Banks 1269
7.3 Thermal Overload Protection for Capacitor Banks 1273
7.4 Current-Unbalance Protection for Capacitors, 3-Phase 1277
7.5 Current-Unbalance Protection for Capacitors, 1-Phase 1303
7.6 Neutral-Point Voltage-Unbalance Protection for Isolated Capacitor Banks in Star Connec- 1322
tion
7.7 Peak Overvoltage Protection for Capacitors 1333
7.8 Voltage Differential Protection for Capacitors 1345
7.9 Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks 1357
7.10 Detuning Supervision for Capacitor Banks 1385

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Capacitor Bank Protection
7.1 Introduction
7.1 Introduction
Capacitors and capacitor banks are used for various applications. Examples are:
• Reactive-power compensation for voltage stabilization
• Fast voltage- and reactive-power control
• Filter circuits for the elimination of certain frequencies

Capacitor banks for transmission systems are complex systems customized for the special application. The
design depends much on the used switching technology (for example, mechanically or via thyristor). In
detail hardly one capacitor bank resembles another. However, a capacitor bank consists always of the same
components (C, R, L, and switches). A capacitor bank often consists of several subcomponents which are
connected to the capacitor-bank busbar via the circuit breakers.
The modularity of the hardware and protection functionality allows to tailor the protection device exactly
to the needs of the capacitor bank or the subcomponent of the capacitor bank and to realize the complete
protection of the whole capacitor bank or the capacitor- bank subcomponent with only one 7SJ8 device.
Capacitor banks require the use of extensive protection functionality. The protection consists of standard
protection functions and specific capacitor protection functions. The following topics are described in the next
chapters:
• Extensions on standard protection functions for optimal utilization in a capacitor bank
• Specific capacitor protection functions
• Application of standard protection functions for specific protection tasks within a capacitor bank

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.2 Overcurrent Protection for Capacitor Banks
7.2.1 Overview
You can use the following overcurrent protection function types in the Capacitor bank function group:
• Overcurrent protection, phases with phase-segregated operate indications for short-circuit protection
in the area between the busbar and the capacitor and for protecting against overload of a subbank.
• Overcurrent protection, phases for protection against overload of RLC filter circuit elements (Over-
curr. -3ph RLC)
• Overcurrent protection, ground as protection or backup protection in the event of ground faults
Figure 5-17 in chapter 5.4.2 Structure of the Function Group shows
• The standard protection functions you can use in the Capacitor bank function group.
• The specific protection functions that are available for protecting a capacitor bank.
• The assignment of protection functions to the interfaces of the function group.

Figure 5-15 in chapter 5.4.2 Structure of the Function Group shows the assignment of the interfaces in the
Capacitor bank function group to the measuring points of the device with reference to an example.
NOTE
i Starting from V07.30, the function type 50/51 OC-3ph 1p is no longer offered in the DIGSI 5 global
library in the function group Capacitor bank. Instead you can use now the standard overcurrent protection
function Overcurrent protection, phases – advanced to apply phase-segregated operate indications.
7.2.2 Overcurrent Protection, Phases for Protection of RLC Filter-Circuit Elements

In the Capacitor bank function group, the Overcurr. -3ph RLC function is based on the standard overcurrent
protection function Overcurrent protection, phases – advanced.
The Overcurr. -3ph RLC function differs from the standard protection function as follows:
• Superordinate measuring-point selection
• Selecting whether the rated current of the capacitor bank or of the protected object (for example, reactor
or resistor) is taken as reference value
• Setting the rated current of the protected object (for example, reactor or resistor) within the function if
necessary
• Functional measured values of connected phase currents

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dwocpRLC-190813-01.vsd, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-1 Structure/Embedding of the Overcurr. -3ph RLC Function

A feature of the Overcurr. -3ph RLC function is the selection of measuring points. A capacitor bank can
include multiple filter circuits. Each filter can include, for example, a 3-phase current measuring device,
each of which is assigned a measuring point. In order to protect the filter circuits, multiple instances of the
Overcurr. -3ph RLC function can be created. Each instance of the function is assigned to a measuring point
via the Measuring-point selection.
The function is structured such that the Measuring-point selection is superordinate to the advanced overcur-
rent-protection stages.
Measuring-Point Selection
With the MP selection parameter, you can select from a list of measuring points a measuring point that is
connected to the I 3ph RLC interface in the Capacitor bank function group. The Overcurr. -3ph RLC function
processes the current that is connected to the measuring point.
For more information, refer to the description of the Capacitor bank function group starting from chapter
5.4.1 Overview.
Selection and Setting of the Rated Current

With the parameter Rated-current selection, you define whether this function uses the rated current
of the whole capacitor bank or the individual rated current of the protected object (for example, reactor or
resistor branch within the capacitor-bank installation) as the reference value for percentage-measured values
and for thresholds set in percentages.
If you select the individual rated current of the protected object as the reference value, set the individual rated
current in the FB General of the Overcurr. -3ph RLC function.

The function provides the connected phase currents as functional measured values for display, further
processing, or transmission to a station.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measured Values Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to

(_:13501:301) Iph 3 phase currents of the meas- kA A Parameter Capacitor
uring point reference curr. or
RLC rated current
depending on the setting of
parameter Rated-current
selection
You can find the parameter Capacitor reference curr. in the FB General of the Capacitor bank
function group, and the parameter RLC rated current in the FB General of the Overcurr. -3ph RLC
function.
Parameter: MP selection
• Default setting (_:13501:81) MP selection = None

With the MP selection parameter, you can select a measuring point that is connected to the I 3ph RLC
interface in the Capacitor bank function group.
The selection list displays the measuring points that are connected to the I 3ph RLC interface of the Capacitor
bank function group:
[scmpselection_ocp_rlc, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-2 Example of Measuring-Point Selection
The MP selection parameter is set for all stages. The setting applies equally to all stages of the function.
In the default setting, a measuring point is not selected. You must select a measuring point. If you do not
select a measuring point, an inconsistency is indicated via the read-only parameter Consistency failure:
[scinconsistency_ocp_rlc, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-3 Function Inconsistency Indication
Parameter: Rated-current selection
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated-current selection = prim. rated curr.of MP

With the parameter Rated-current selection, you define the reference value for percentage-measured
values and for thresholds set in percentages.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

prim. rated curr.of MP Select this setting if you want to use the rated current of the whole capac-
itor bank as the reference value.
RLC rated current Select this setting if you want to use the individual rated current of the RLC
object to be proteced (for example, a resistor or reactor) as the reference
value.
Parameter: RLC rated current
• Default setting (_:2311:102) RLC rated current = 1000 A

With the parameter RLC rated current, you set the primary rated current of the respective protected
object which is usually a reactor or resistor branch within the capacitor-bank installation.
7.2.2.4 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Rated-current • prim. rated curr.of MP prim. rated
selection curr.of MP
• RLC rated current
_:2311:102 General:RLC rated 1 A to 10 0000 A 1 000 A
current
MP selection
_:13501:100 MP selection:Consistency • no MP configured no MP config-
failure ured
• no Sensor configured
_:13501:81 MP selection:MP selec- Setting options depend on
tion configuration

(Type)
Group indicat.
MP selection
_:13501:301 MP selection:Iph WYE O
_:13501:52 MP selection:Behavior ENS O
_:13501:53 MP selection:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.3 Thermal Overload Protection for Capacitor Banks
The function Thermal overload protection for capacitor banks (Overload RLC) protects RLC filter circuit
elements in a capacitor bank from thermal overload.
NOTE
i The structure of the function Overload RLC differs only slightly from that of the standard Thermal over-
load protection, 3-phase – advanced function. In this chapter, only the differences between these and
the standard function are described.
For more information, refer to the function description Thermal overload protection, 3-phase –
advanced starting from chapter 6.20.1 Overview of Functions.
The function Overload RLC is used in the Capacitor bank function group.
The General functionality differs from the standard Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced
function and consists of:
• Measuring-point selection
• Selecting whether the rated current of the capacitor bank or of the protected object (for example, reactor
or resistor) is taken as reference value
• Setting the rated current of the protected object (for example, reactor or resistor) within the function if
necessary
[dwtolp_rlc-200813, 3, en_US]
A feature of the function Overload RLC is the Measuring-point selection. A capacitor bank can include
multiple filter circuits. Each filter circuit can include, for example, a 3-phase current transformer, each of
which is assigned a measuring point. In order to protect all filter circuits, multiple instances of the function
Overload RLC can be created. Each instance of the function is assigned to a measuring point via the Meas-
uring-point selection.
The function is structured such that the Measuring-point selection is superordinate to the Thermal overload
protection stage.
With the parameter MP selection, you can select from a list of measuring points a measuring point that
is connected to the I 3ph RLC interface in the Capacitor bank function group. The function Overload RLC
processes the current that is connected to the measuring point.
For more information, refer to the description of the Capacitor bank function group starting from Chapter
5.4.1 Overview.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Selection and Setting of the Rated Current

With the parameter Rated-current selection, you define whether this function uses the rated current
of the whole capacitor bank or the individual rated current of the protected object (for example, reactor or
resistor branch within the capacitor-bank installation) as the reference value. This function uses the reference
value for current normalization in thermal-replica calculation, for percentage-measured values, and for thresh-
olds set in percentages.
If you select the individual rated current of the protected object as the reference value, set the individual rated
current in the FB General of the Overload RLC function.
Measured Values Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to

(_:13501:301) Iph 3-phase currents of the meas- A A Parameter Capacitor
uring point reference curr. or
RLC rated current
selection
(_:601:304) Time Time until close release s s s
until close
(_:601:305) Time Estimated time until tripping s s s
until trip
(_:601:306) Over- Thermal measured values of % % Trip temperature
load phase A phases
(_:601:307) Over-
load phase B
(_:601:308) Over-
load phase C
(_:601:309) Over- Thermal measured values of % % Trip temperature
load maximum overload protection
(_:601:310) Current measured value as A A Parameter Capacitor
Equival. current base for overload measured reference curr. or
phs A value RLC rated current
(_:601:311) depending on the setting of
Equival. current parameter Rated-current
phs B selection
(_:601:312)
Equival. current
phs C
(_:601:313) Maximum current measured A A Parameter Capacitor
Equival. current value as base for overload reference curr. or
max. value RLC rated current
selection
• Default setting (_:13501:81) MP selection = no MP configured

With the MP selection parameter, you can select a measuring point that is connected to the I 3ph RLC
interface in the Capacitor bank function group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The selection list displays the measuring points that are connected to the I 3ph RLC interface of the Capacitor
bank function group:
[scmpselection_tolp_rlc, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-5 Example of Measuring-Point Selection
The MP selection parameter is set for all stages. The setting applies equally to all stages of the function.
In the default setting, a measuring point is not selected. You must select a measuring point. If you do
not select a measuring point, an inconsistency is indicated via the read-only parameter Consistency
failure :
[scinconsistency_tolp_rlc, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-6 Function Inconsistency Indication
Parameter: Rated-current selection
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated-current selection = prim. rated curr.of MP

With the parameter Rated-current selection, you define the reference value for current normalization
in thermal-replica calculation, for percentage-measured values, and for thresholds set in percentages.
prim. rated curr.of MP Select this setting if you want to use the rated current of the whole capac-
itor bank as the reference value.
RLC rated current Select this setting if you want to use the individual rated current of the RLC
object to be proteced (for example, a resistor or reactor) as the reference
value.
Parameter: RLC rated current
• Default setting (_:2311:102) RLC rated current = 1000 A

With the parameter RLC rated current, you set the primary rated current of the respective protected
object which is usually a reactor or resistor branch within the capacitor-bank installation.
7.3.5 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Rated-current • prim. rated curr.of MP prim. rated
selection curr.of MP
• RLC rated current

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:2311:102 General:RLC rated 1 A to 100 000 A 1 000 A
current
MP selection
failure ured
tion configuration

(Type)
MP selection
_:13501:301 MP selection:Iph WYE O
_:13501:52 MP selection:Behavior ENS O
_:13501:53 MP selection:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.4 Current-Unbalance Protection for Capacitors, 3-Phase
The Current-unbalance protection for capacitors, 3-phase function (ANSI 60C):
• Protects in case of capacitor elements (C-elements) faults of a capacitor bank in H connection
• Provides very sensitive supervision of the unbalanced current between the 2-star points
• Allows counting of individual faulty C-elements
The Current-unbalance protection for capacitors, 3-phase function is used in the Capacitor bank function
group. It is preconfigured at the factory with 2 overcurrent-protection stages I> and one stage of the type
Counter. A maximum of 3 overcurrent-protection stages and 4 counter stages can be operated simultaneously
in the function.
The function is designed so that the General functionality (including compensation) and the Measuring-
point selection can work across the stages.
[dwocpIunbalanced-300813, 4, en_US]
7.4.3 General Functions and Measuring-Point Selection
7.4.3.1 Description
The General functionality is structured in the following functional parts:
• Compensation of the unbalance
• Normalization of the unbalanced current with the current Ic
• Counting faulty C-elements (the stage type Counter is used to monitor the counter status)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic for Compensation and Normalization
[lo_FBallg_iunbal-020913.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-8 Cross-Stage Functionality
With the MP selection parameter, you can select from a list of measuring points a measuring point that
is connected to the I Unbalanced interface in the Capacitor bank function group. The Current-unbalance
protection for capacitors, 3-phase function processes the current that is connected to the measuring point.
5.4.1 Overview.
Measurands, Method of Measurement

The function receives its measurands via the I Unbalanced interface of the Capacitor bank function group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The compensated and non-compensated unbalanced currents are provided for the overcurrent-protection
stage. Within the protection stage, one of the 2 values is selected in the protection stage via the parameter
Measured value. Both values are available as functional measured values (see Figure 7-8).
Configure across the stages whether the unbalanced current must be normalized with the current Ic that
flows into the capacitor bank. You can find more information in this chapter under Normalization with Ic ,
Page 1280.
The method of measurement used processes the sampled unbalanced-current values and filters out the
fundamental component numerically. The protection stages evaluate the fundamental component of the
unbalanced current.
General Notes on the Compensation

An operational unbalanced current is added to an unbalanced current resulting from faulty capacitor
elements. This corrupts the measuring result.
Operational unbalanced currents can result from the following causes:
• Manufacturing tolerances of the capacitor
• Aging of the capacitor
• Environmental influences, for example, temperature

The compensation eliminates operational unbalanced currents by calculation. For this purpose, the phasor
of the operational unbalanced current I unbal.,op. is stored at specific times. The stored phasor (compensation
phasor), is subtracted from the actually measured unbalanced-current phasor:
[fo_compensated unbalanced, 1, en_US]
The following indications describe the status of the compensation:

Alg. not The algorithm is not compensated. The compensated values are not available under
compensated the following conditions:
• After initial startup of the device before any compensation is carried out
• After activating the binary input >Reset comp. val.
• After change of Irated,obj
Protection stages that are working with compensated values are inactive.
Compens. This indication is issued (as transient indication with a pulse duration of 10 ms) if
succeeded the existing unbalance has been compensated manually or automatically. In case of
automatic compensation, the signal is issued at each event-based situation where full
compensation is carried out.
Comp. via BI If a manual compensation has been initiated and the current Ic (current flowing into
blk.(Ic<) the capacitor bank) at this time is less than the threshold Current threshold CB
open, the manual compensation is not executed. This is signaled via the Comp. via
BI blk.(Ic<) indication.
2 different methods are available for the compensation:
• Manual compensation via binary input signals
• Automatic compensation
Manual Compensation via Binary Input Signal

If the binary input signal >Compensate is activated, the manual compensation starts. This will fully compen-
sate any unbalance that exists at this time. This means the value Iunbal.,comp. will then become 0. You can also
use the manual compensation in parallel with the automatic compensation.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
For the reliability of manual compensation, the binary input signal >Compensate has a preset software
filtering time (configurable in DIGSI) of 20 ms.
Automatic Compensation
When using the parameter Automatic compensation, this automatic compensation function can be
enabled or disabled.
The automatic compensation consists of 2 different mechanisms:
• Event-based compensation of any existing unbalance

This compensation is performed in the following situations:
– After energizing the capacitor bank or a phase of the bank (phase-selective compensation)
– After counting a faulty C-element (phase-selective compensation)
– After each startup of the device
– After specific parameter changes:
– Switching on the automatic compensation
– Changing the rated current of the capacitor bank
In order to avoid transient inrush-current effects, the compensation is delayed by 250 ms after energizing
has been detected.
Full compensation after bank energization can be avoided in case of only short de-energization by means
of parameter De-energ.time w/o comp.. If the de-energized duration is less than the setting of
parameter De-energ.time w/o comp., the full compensation is not carried out after energizing a
phase or the whole bank.
• Cyclic and thus gradual compensation of an existing unbalance in small increments

This permits, for example, the automatic compensation of environmental influences.
Resetting the Compensation

The algorithm can be reset to the non-compensated status. Compensated values are not available in this case.
Protection stages that work with compensated values are rendered inactive. The binary input signal >Reset
comp. val. of the function or function group resets the compensation (see also Figure 7-8).
For the reliability of manual compensation, the binary input signal >Reset comp. val. has a preset
software filtering time (configurable in DIGSI) of 20 ms.
NOTE
i When operating with manual compensation, changing the value of parameter capacitor reference
current will reset the compensation values.
Normalization with Ic
The threshold for the unbalanced current is usually set by assuming the rated capacitor current Ic,rated. The
current Ic flowing into the capacitor bank determines the amount of the unbalanced current. A lower Ic also
means a lower unbalanced current. If Ic < Ic,rated, the protection becomes less sensitive. This influence can be
compensated via the normalization. Normalization keeps the sensitivity of the protection function constant by
normalizing the unbalance value with the current Ic. When using the parameter Normalization with Ic,
normalization is enabled or disabled.
Ic Lower than Current Thresh.CB Open
If the current Ic is lower than the threshold Current Thresh.CB Open, the compensated value can no
longer be computed with sufficient accuracy. To avoid a malfunction, the compensated unbalanced value
Iunbal.,comp. is set to 0 A in a phase-segregated way (see Figure 7-8). This deactivates the affected phase
measuring components of the protection stages that work with compensated values.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
This condition will be indicated in a phase-segregated manner (indication I>-stage(cmp) blk.(Ic<)).

In this case, normalization with current Ic will no longer work properly either. The normalization is canceled
in a phase-segregated manner. This means that the non-normalized value is used in place of the normalized
value (see Figure 7-8).
Charging/Energizing the Capacitor Bank or a Phase of the Bank

Charging of the bank takes place when the discharged bank is switched on to the network. Charging of a
phase can occur in case of network faults. If a phase-to-ground voltage drops to 0 V due to a network fault,
the respective phase is discharged and the return of the phase-to-ground (after the fault has been cleared) will
charge the phase.
Charging the bank or a phase of the bank causes inrush currents in the respective phases. To avoid overfunc-
tion in case of sensitive threshold settings, the stages using compensated unbalanced values are blocked in a
phase-selective way by setting Iunbal.,comp. to 0 A. These stages are:
• Counter stage
• I> stage, if set to operate with compensated unbalanced values

The blocking (Iunbal.,comp. set to 0 A) lasts for 250 ms after energizing detection. Afterwards, the calculated
Iunbal.,comp. is processed again.
Energizing detection takes place in a phase-selective way by monitoring the phase current Ic flowing into
the bank. If a phase current exceeds the threshold Current Thresh.CB Open, energizing in this phase is
detected.
Logic for Counting Faulty C-Elements

This part of the General functionality is only important if counter stages are used.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo-cnt-EF-260314-01, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-9 Counting Faulty C-Elements
Activation/Blocking Counting
If at least one counter stage is enabled, the counter function is active. Furthermore, the counter function
works only if the automatic compensation is enabled.
In order to prevent counting as a consequence of the charging process, the counter function is implicitly
blocked for 250 ms by setting Iunbal.,comp. to 0 A, after the capacitor energizing has been detected.
Measurands, Counting
The measurand is the phase-selective compensated unbalanced current Iunbal.,comp.. If a single C-element is
faulty, an unbalance occurs in the H connection. This unbalance causes an unbalanced current; this means,
a small current jump is generated in the unbalanced current. Set the parameter Thresh. defective
C-elem., so that the current jump can be detected (refer also to 7.4.3.2 Application and Setting Notes). The
unbalanced current that was caused by the fault must exceed the threshold for 100 ms before the affected
group is determined and counting (incrementing the counter) takes place. There is one counter for each phase
and group. After the counting, the existing unbalance is compensated; this means, the unbalance is reset to
0 A. If the faulty group cannot be determined, the unbalance is also compensated.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Resetting/Setting the Counters

You can reset or set the counters of group 1 and group 2 via:
• On-site operation panel directly on the device
• Online DIGSI connection to the device
• Binary input >Reset all counters (only reset of all counters)
• Communication connection with the control center

You can directly set or reset the counters via IEC 61850 by setting the counter values to the desired value.
If you want to reset the counters via DNP3, IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus, or IEC 60870-5-104, an additional
configuration with CFC is necessary. For more information, refer to chapter 7.4.3.2 Application and Setting
Notes.

(_:2311:300) Iunbl.cp Compensated unbalanced kA A Parameter Rated primary
current Iunbal.,comp. current
(_:2311:301) Iunbl. Non-compensated unbal- kA A Parameter Rated primary
anced current Iunbal. current
(_:2311:323) Cp.vect. Compensation vector kA A Parameter Rated primary
Icomp.,vect. current
You can find the value of the parameter Rated primary current of the preceding table in the chapter
6.1.9 Settings according to the specified parameter MP selection.
Icomp.,vect. is normalized with Ic. The normalization is carried out no matter if the parameter Normalization
with Ic is set to yes or no. Icomp.,vect. keeps its value unchanged until the next compensation occurs.
[fo_compensation vector, 1, en_US]
Where:
I unbal.op. Operational unbalanced current at the moment the compensation is carried
out
Ic,rated Rated current of the capacitor bank
Ic Current of the capacitor bank at the moment the compensation is carried
out
Definition of the Group and Fault Location

If the capacitor is designed in an H connection, the following definition is assumed:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dwfehlerortinf_iunsy-020913, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-10 Definition of the Fault-Location Information
The black dot indicates the orientation of the current transformer. For the connection of the current trans-
former shown in the previous figure, the following definition applies:
• Group 1: C1 and C4
In order to determine the fault location (group 1 or 2) correctly, use the parameter Capacitor element
type (in FB General of the Capacitor bank function group) to tell the device whether the elements of the
capacitor bank have internal fuses or not.
The angle reference of the unbalanced-current phasor to the reference current Ic is used to determine the
direction of the unbalanced current and, thus, the affected group is determined. If the direction cannot be
determined with confidence, an appropriate indication will be generated.

With the MP selection parameter, you can select from a list the measuring point that is connected to the
I Unbalanced interface of the Capacitor bank function group.
The setting applies equally to all stages of the function.
select a measuring point, an inconsistency is indicated via the read-only parameter Consistency failure.
Parameter: Automatic compensation
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Automatic compensation = no

The parameter applies equally to all stages of the function that work with compensated measurands.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If no counter stages are applied, Siemens recommends switching the automatic compensation off and using
the manual compensation. You can find more information on this recommendation in chapter 7.4.4.2 Appli-
cation and Setting Notes (setting notes for the operate delay of the I> stage).
If the counter stages are applied, the automatic compensation must be switched on, otherwise the counting
function will not work.
Parameter: De-energ.time w/o comp.
• Default setting (_:2311:104) De-energ.time w/o comp. = 2.00 s

In case of networks faults, the faulty phases are discharged. With the returning voltage after fault clearance,
charging takes place. For such conditions, Siemens recommends that no automatic full compensation takes
place in the affected phases. Otherwise, C-element defects occurring in this period (for example, because of
discharging stress due to network-fault inception) will not be detected.
With the parameter De-energ.time w/o comp., you define the duration of short de-energization after
which no automatic compensation takes place. The parameter must be set to a value larger than the slowest
fault-clearing time in your network plus a safety margin.
If the setting is set to 0 s, an automatic full compensation is carried out after each energizing detection.
Parameter: Normalization with Ic
• Default setting (_:2311:100) Normalization with Ic = no

This parameter applies equally to all stages of the function.
no Select this setting if you can safely assume that Ic will not change for
operational reasons or if you do not desire normalization of the unbalanced
current with Ic.
Please consider that the protection sensitivity will decrease with decreasing
Ic.
yes Select this setting if you want to keep the sensitivity of the protection
stages constant during changes of Ic.
Parameter: Thresh. defective C-elem.
• Default (_:2311:102) Thresh. defective C-elem. = 0.030 A

Set the parameter Thresh. defective C-elem. to ensure that the jump in the unbalanced current
caused by the faulty C-element is detected. Information about occurring unbalanced current as a consequence
of single faulty C-elements will be provided by the manufacturer of the capacitor bank. Siemens recommends
to set the threshold value to approx. 75 % of the unbalanced current that occurs after the fault of the 1st
C-element.
Example 1: Information about the Unbalanced Current Available from the Manufacturer of the Capacitor Bank
Table 7-1 Unbalanced Current, Depending on the Number of Faulty C-Elements
Number of Faulty C-Elements Primary Unbalanced Current

0 0.00 A
1 0.71 A
2 1.47 A
3 2.29 A
... ...
Assumed current transformer ratio: 10 A/1 A

Primary unbalanced current if 1st C-element fails: 0.71 A
Secondary unbalanced current if 1st C-element fails: 0.071 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Secondary setting value: 0.75 ⋅ 0.071 A = 0.053 A
NOTE
i Use sensitive device current inputs in order to apply secondary thresholds of < 30 mA.
If no information is provided by the manufacturer of the capacitor bank, the following example can be used as
a basis in order to determine the value.
Example 2 (a to h): Unbalanced-Current Information Not Available from the Manufacturer of the Capacitor Bank,
External Capacitor-Bank Structure with Cross-Linked Cans
The following consideration applies to one phase.
2a) External Structure of the Capacitor Bank

The external structure of the capacitor bank must be known or must be determined. This information can be
requested from the manufacturer of the capacitor bank.
This example assumes the following external structure of the capacitor bank:
- 28 levels (cans) in series
- 4 cans per level
- H transformer between levels 13 and 14, counting from top to bottom
- 2 parallel cans are always cross-linked, refer to the following diagram
[dwexaufbcb-120314-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-11 External Structure of the Capacitor Bank

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
2b) Internal Structure of a Can

The internal structure of a can must be known or must be determined. This information can be requested
from the manufacturer of the capacitor bank.
This example assumes the following internal structure of the can:
- 14 parallel capacitances
- Internal fuses (one internal fuse per capacitance)
- 7 capacitance levels in series
[dwintauka-120314-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-12 Internal Structure of a Can
2c) Capacitance of a Can

The capacitance of a can must be known or must be determined. This information can be requested from the
manufacturer of the capacitor bank.
• Capacitance per can: CK = 19.67 μF
2d) Current per Phase

The unbalanced current is derived under the assumption of a certain phase current.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
In this example, the phase current is determined using the following assumptions and data:
• 1-phase rated capacitance of the capacitor bank: 2.81 μF
• Phase-to-ground voltage of the fundamental component of the capacitor bank: 249.1 kV
• Current per phase: IC = VPh. fund. ⋅ ωC = 249.1 kV ⋅ 2π ⋅ 50 Hz ⋅ 2.81 μF = 219.9 A
2e) Capacitance of a Can during an Element Fault

To do this, the capacitance of an individual C-element will be determined first:
• Capacitance of a C-element:
• Capacitance of a can during an element fault:
CK,1EF = 19.456 μF
2f) Capacitance in the Quarter of the H Connection during an Element Fault

Consider 2 special conditions:
• Cross-linking and therefore the parallel connection of 2 cans, refer to Figure 7-11
• Current transformer is not in the center of the levels

Therefore, the following calculation must be performed for the upper (C1) and lower quarter (C3).
[dw4tlkbnk-120314-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-13 Quarters of the Capacitor Bank
Based on the cross-linking of the cans, in case of an element fault, the capacitance of the parallel cans must be
determined first:
• Capacitance of 2 parallel cans in case of an element fault:

C2K,1EF = 19.456 μF + 19.67 μF = 39.126 μF
Capacitance in the quarter of C1 in case of an element fault:
C11EF = 3.0249 μF

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Capacitance in the quarter of C3 in case of an element fault:
C31EF = 2.6217 μF
2g) Capacitance in the Quarters of the H Connection without Element Fault
• Capacitance in the quarters of C1 and C3 without element fault:
2h) Unbalanced Current and Threshold-Value Setting in Case of a C-Element Fault
• Unbalanced current:
• Unbalanced current in case of an element fault in C1:
• Unbalanced current in case of an element fault in C3:
The lesser of both values is relevant for the setting of the threshold value. For instance, set the threshold to
75 % of this value:
• Threshold value (primary): 0.75 ⋅ 20.0 mA = 15.0 mA

The threshold is a primary value. In order to detect this, a 1:1 transformer is required. Under this assumption,
the secondary setting value is equal to the primary value.
NOTE
Example 3 (a to d): Unbalanced-Current Information Not Available from the Manufacturer of the Capacitor Bank,
External Capacitor-Bank Structure without Cross-Linked Cans
Example 3 is almost identical to example 2. The only difference is that the cans are not cross-linked. Here, only
the calculation part is discussed that is a result of the different external structure. Information for additional
calculations can be found in example 2.
3a) External Structure of the Capacitor Bank

The external structure of the capacitor bank must be known or must be determined. This information can be
requested from the manufacturer of the capacitor bank.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
This example assumes the following external structure of the capacitor bank:
- 28 levels (cans) in series
- 4 cans per level
- H transformer between levels 13 and 14, counting from top to bottom
- Parallel cans are not cross-linked, refer to the following diagram
[dwexafbocb-260314-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-14 External Structure of the Capacitor Bank
3b) Capacitance in the Quarter of the H Connection during an Element Fault

The current transformer is not located in the center of the levels; therefore, the following calculation for the
upper (C1) and the lower quarter (C3) must be performed.
[dw4tlkbnk-120314-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-15 Quarters of the Capacitor Bank

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Capacitance in the quarter of C1 in case of an element fault (C11EF):

Capacitance in the row without element fault:
C1RoEF = 1.5130 μF
• Capacitance in the row with element fault:
C1RmEF = 1.5118 μF
C11EF = C1RoEF + C1RmEF = 1.5130 μF + 1.5118 μF = 3.0248 μF
• Capacitance in the quarter of C3 in case of an element fault (C31EF):

Capacitance in the row without element fault:
C3RoEF = 1.3113 μF
• Capacitance in the row with element fault:
C3RmEF = 1.3104 μF
C31EF = C3RoEF + C3RmEF = 1.3113 μF + 1.3104 μF = 2.6217 μF
3c) Capacitance in the Quarters of the H Connection without Element Fault

The values are identical to those values in the example 2g) Capacitance in the Quarters of the H Connection
without Element Fault, Page 1289.
3d) Unbalanced Current and Threshold-Value Setting in Case of a C-Element Fault

Use the values determined under 3b) for those formula listed in example 2h) Unbalanced Current and
Threshold-Value Setting in Case of a C-Element Fault, Page 1289.
Resetting the Counters via Protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3, or Modbus
The following example shows how to use a function chart (CFC) to reset the counters with the protocols
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3, or Modbus.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
EXAMPLE
• Add a Marker command (SPC) signal to the information list.
[sc_add_SPC_signal, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-16 Adding Marker Command (SPC) Signal to Information List
• Set up the following CFC. Connect the SPC signal as input, and the signal >Reset all counters as
output.
[sc_CFC_60C_3ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-17 Function Chart (CFC): Activating the Binary Input Signal
• Send a single-point control command from the control center to the SPC signal to activate the signal
>Reset all counters. Then the counters are reset.
7.4.3.3 Settings

MP selection
failure ured

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

tion configuration
General
_:2311:101 General:Automatic • no no
compensation
• yes
_:2311:100 General:Normalization • no no
with Ic
• yes
_:2311:102 General:Thresh. defec- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
tive C-elem. 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.150 A
_:2311:104 General:De-energ.time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 2.00 s
w/o comp.

(Type)
Group indicat.
General
_:2311:500 General:>Compensate SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Reset comp. val. SPS I
_:2311:502 General:>Reset all counters SPS I
_:2311:302 General:Alg. not compensated SPS O
_:2311:303 General:Compens. succeeded SPS O
_:2311:304 General:Comp. via BI blk.(Ic<) SPS O
_:2311:305 General:I>-stage(cmp) blk.(Ic<) ACT O
_:2311:306 General:No auto. comp. config. SPS O
_:2311:307 General:C defect counted SPS O
_:2311:308 General:Unknown dir. phase A SPS O
_:2311:309 General:Unknown dir. phase B SPS O
_:2311:310 General:Unknown dir. phase C SPS O
_:2311:311 General:Df. G1 A INS O
_:2311:312 General:Df. G1 B INS O
_:2311:313 General:Df. G1 C INS O
_:2311:300 General:Iunbl.cp WYE O
_:2311:301 General:Iunbl. WYE O
_:2311:323 General:Cp.vect. WYE O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.4.4 Overcurrent-Protection Stage I>
7.4.4.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[lo_ocp-cap-bank_Iunbal-stage-3phs, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-18 Logic Diagram of the Overcurrent-Protection Stage I>
Measurands
Within the protection stage, the compensated and the non-compensated unbalanced currents are available.
Use the parameter Measured value to select one of the 2 values. Both values are displayed as measured
values of the function at the function stage.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Pickup, Tripping Delay

If the selected measurand in one of the phase measuring element exceeds the threshold, the pickup delay of
1 network period starts. If the threshold remains exceeded during the pickup delay, the stage picks up. The
pickup starts a tripping time delay, and a fault-location information is issued. More information can be found
in this chapter under Fault-Location Information, Page 1296. If the threshold is exceeded during the entire
tripping delay, a phase-selective operate indication is issued.
Please note that, when using the compensated measurands as well as the automatic compensation, the
currently measured current unbalance (that resulted in the threshold being exceeded) is gradually compen-
sated. This means that even in case of a constantly existing unbalance in the primary system, the compen-
sated measurand becomes gradually lower and may therefore fall below the threshold again at some time.
The timing depends on by how much the threshold is exceeded.
For this reason and under those conditions, long time delays must not be set, see also chapter 7.4.4.2 Applica-
tion and Setting Notes.
This effect does not occur if manual compensation or the non-compensated measurand is used.
Blocking While Charging

In order to prevent pickup as a consequence of the charging process, the I> stage is implicitly blocked in a
phase-selective way for 250 ms by setting Iunbal.,comp. to 0 A, after capacitor energizing has been detected.
Blocking only takes place if the stage operates with compensated unbalanced values.
Fault-Location Information
When picking up, the stage provides information about the faulty group of the capacitor bank. If the location
can be safely determined, the corresponding indication Fault position group 1 or Fault position
group 2 is issued.
Both indications also contain the information about the faulty phase. If the capacitor is implemented as an H
connection, the following definition is assumed:
[dwfehlerortinf_iunsy-020913, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-19 Definition for the Fault-Location Information

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Non-Compensated Status
If no compensated values are available and the stage has been set to use such values, the stage will be
blocked. The readiness of the stage turns to Warning. This condition will be reported on the function stage
(indication Alg. not compensated ).
• Default setting (_:13801:100) Measured value = no

With the parameter, you set the Measured value.
compensated The stage uses compensated unbalanced values. This means an opera-
tional current unbalance will be eliminated. This allows you to significantly
increase the sensitivity of the measurement.
Note the following: If the current Ic is lower than the threshold Current
threshold CB open, the affected phase measuring elements are
rendered inactive by setting Iunbal.,comp. to 0 A. This condition is held for
250 ms after energizing has been detected in order to avoid a pickup as a
consequence of the charging process.
Siemens recommends using compensated unbalanced values. In case that
automatic compensation is applied, please consider the setting notes for
the operate delay.
non-compensated The stage works with non-compensated unbalanced values. This means the
measurand may contain an existing operational current unbalance.

Set the parameter Threshold for the specific application.
When using compensated unbalanced values, very sensitive settings are possible. When using non-compen-
sated unbalanced values, the threshold must be higher than the maximum operational unbalanced current.
Set the parameter Operate delay for the specific application.
NOTE
i If the function has been set to automatic compensation and the stage works with compensated values,
the maximum permitted operate delay is 80 ms. If the operate delay is set to longer than 80 ms, the
automatic compensation might cause dropout of the picked-up stage. This risk does not exist when manual
compensation or non-compensated values are used.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.4.4.3 Settings

I> 1
_:13801:1 I> 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13801:2 I> 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
_:13801:100 I> 1:Measured value • compensated compensated
• non-compensated
_:13801:3 I> 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.000 A
_:13801:6 I> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.08 s
I> 2
_:13802:1 I> 2:Mode • off off
• on
• test
blocked
• yes
_:13802:100 I> 2:Measured value • compensated non-compen-
sated
• non-compensated
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A

(Type)
I> 1
_:13801:81 I> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13801:54 I> 1:Inactive SPS O
_:13801:52 I> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:13801:53 I> 1:Health ENS O
_:13801:55 I> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:13801:56 I> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13801:57 I> 1:Operate ACT O
_:13801:301 I> 1:Fault position group 1 ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
I> 2
_:13802:53 I> 2:Health ENS O
_:13802:60 I> 2:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:13802:55 I> 2:Pickup ACD O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.4.5 Counter Stage
7.4.5.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[lo_cnt-stage, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-20 Logic Diagram of the Counter Stage
Measurands/Input Values
The measurand/input values of the counter stage are the phase- and group-segregated counter contents that
are determined in the General FB.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Pickup, Tripping Delay

Supervision of the counter contents is phase-segregated. If a counter reaches the preset threshold (parameter
Max. no. of def. elem. phs A , Max. no. of def. elem. phs B , Max. no. of def.
elem. phs C), the stage picks up. When using the parameter Type of counting groups , a selection
is made whether the supervision function occurs group-segregated or with the sum value of both groups. The
pickup starts the time delay. If the time delay has elapsed, the operate indication will be issued.
If the automatic compensation function is enabled, the counter stage is working. If this is not the case, the
readiness status of the stage changes to the state Warning.
General Notes
• The setting notes for the current-threshold value for counting faulty C-elements are provided in chapter
7.4.3.2 Application and Setting Notes as you must set this parameter across all stages.
• In order to react quickly to the simultaneous fault of many C-elements, always use an overcurrent-protec-
tion stage I> with a short tripping delay (< 100 ms) in addition to the counter stage. This is necessary as
the counter function counts each current jump only once, regardless of its height.
Parameter: Type of counting groups
• Default setting (_:13651:104) Type of counting groups = segregated

When using the parameter Type of counting groups, you specify whether the group-segregated
counter status or the sum of both group counters are compared to the threshold.
Parameter: Maximum Number of Faulty Elements, Operate delay
• Default setting (_:13651:101) Max. no. of def. elem. phs A = 10
• Default setting (_:13651:102) Max. no. of def. elem. phs B = 10
• Default setting (_:13651:103) Max. no. of def. elem. phs C = 10
• Default setting(_:13651:6) Operate delay = 0.00 s

Set the parameters for the specific application.
It is possible to configure several stages for different tasks:
• Reporting only (with or without fault record)

Use this stage to report 1 or 2 faulty C-elements. To do this, set the 3 parameters Max. no. of def.
elem. phs A, Max. no. of def. elem. phs B and Max. no. of def. elem. phs C to a
small value (1 or 2). The parameter Operate delay can be set to 0.
If you would like to prevent the operate (tripping) and fault logging (fault log and fault record), set the
parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes.
If you would like to prevent only the operate (tripping) and the fault logging must occur, remove this
stage from the interface Trip to the circuit breaker (see also 5.4.2 Structure of the Function Group,
Interfaces with Circuit-Breaker Function Group).
• Indication with delayed operate

Use this stage to report in case of some faulty C-elements and set a relatively long time delay of the
operate, for example, 2 hours. During this time, the fault of the C-elements can be clarified. If it is
possible to find a solution, the counter status can be reset manually. This way, the stage drops out. If a
solution cannot be found within 2 hours, the stage trips and disconnects the capacitor bank.
• Immediate operate
The stage is used to initiate the operate immediately after a larger number of C-elements became faulty.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.4.5.3 Settings

Counter 1
_:13651:1 Counter 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13651:2 Counter 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13651:104 Counter 1:Type of • segregated segregated
counting groups
• sum
_:13651:101 Counter 1:Max. no. of 1 to 1000 10
def. elem. phs A
def. elem. phs B
def. elem. phs C
_:13651:6 Counter 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 10000.00 s 0.00 s

(Type)
Counter 1
_:13651:81 Counter 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13651:54 Counter 1:Inactive SPS O
_:13651:52 Counter 1:Behavior ENS O
_:13651:53 Counter 1:Health ENS O
_:13651:55 Counter 1:Pickup ACD O
_:13651:56 Counter 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13651:57 Counter 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The Current-unbalance protection for capacitors, 1-phase function (ANSI 60C):
• Protects in case of faults in capacitor elements (C-elements) of a double neutral point capacitor bank
• Provides very sensitive supervision of the unbalanced current between the 2 neutral points
• Allows counting individual faulty C-elements
The Current-unbalance protection for capacitors, 1-phase function is used in the Capacitor bank function
group. It is preconfigured at the factory with 2 overcurrent-protection stages I> and 1 stage of the type
Counter. A maximum of 3 overcurrent-protection stages and 4 counter stages can be operated simultaneously
in the function.
The function is designed so that the General functionality (including adjustment) and the Measuring-point
selection can work across the stages.
[dw_ocp_I_unb_1ph, 3, en_US]
7.5.3 General Functions and Measuring-Point Selection
7.5.3.1 Description
The General functionality is structured in the following functional parts:
• Compensation of the unbalance
• Normalization of the unbalanced current with the current Ic
• Counting faulty C-elements (the stage type Counter is used to monitor the counter status)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic for Compensation and Normalization
[lo_fb_allgiunb1ph, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-22 Cross-Stage Functionality
With the MP selection parameter, you can select from a list of measuring points a 1-phase measuring point
that is connected to the I Unbalanced interface in the Capacitor bank function group. The Current-unbal-
ance protection for capacitors, 1-phase function processes the 1-phase current that is connected to the
measuring point.
5.4.1 Overview.

The function receives its measurands via the I Unbalanced interface of the Capacitor bank function group.
The compensated and non-compensated unbalanced currents are provided for the overcurrent-protection
stage. Within the protection stage, one of the 2 values is selected in the protection stage via the parameter
Measured value. Both values are available as functional measured values (see Figure 7-22).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Configure across the stages whether the unbalanced current must be normalized with the current Ic that flows
into the capacitor bank. Phase A component of the current Ic flowing into the capacitor bank is used as the
reference for the normalization. You can find more information in this chapter under Normalization with Ic ,
Page 1306.
The method of measurement used processes the sampled unbalanced-current values and filters out the
fundamental component numerically. The protection stages evaluate the fundamental component of the
unbalanced current.

An operational unbalanced current is added to an unbalanced current resulting from faulty capacitor
elements. This corrupts the measuring result.
Operational unbalanced currents can result from the following causes:

The compensation eliminates operational unbalanced currents by calculation. For this purpose, the phasor
of the operational unbalanced current I unbal.,op. is stored at specific times. The stored phasor (compensation
phasor), is subtracted from the actually measured unbalanced-current phasor:
[fo_compensated unbalanced, 1, en_US]

Alg. not The algorithm is not compensated. The compensated values are not available under
compensated the following conditions:
• After initial startup of the device before any compensation is carried out
• After activating the binary input >Reset comp. val.
• After change of Irated,obj
Protection stages that are working with compensated values are inactive.
Compens. This indication is issued (as transient indication with a pulse duration of 10 ms) if
succeeded the existing unbalance has been compensated manually or automatically. In case of
automatic compensation, the signal is issued at each event-based situation where full
compensation is carried out.
Comp. via BI If a manual compensation has been initiated and the current Ic (current flowing into
blk.(Ic<) the capacitor bank) at this time is less than the threshold Current threshold CB
open, the manual compensation is not executed. This is signaled via the Comp. via
BI blk.(Ic<) indication.
2 different methods are available for the compensation:
• Manual compensation via binary input signals
• Automatic compensation

If the binary input signal >Compensate is activated, the manual compensation starts. This will fully compen-
sate any unbalance that exists at this time. This means, the value Iunbal.,comp. will then become 0. You can also
use the manual compensation in parallel with the automatic compensation.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
When using the parameter Automatic compensation, this automatic compensation function can be
enabled or disabled.
The automatic compensation consists of 2 different mechanisms:
• Event-based compensation of any existing unbalance

This compensation is performed in the following situations:
– After energizing the capacitor bank or a phase of the bank
– After counting a faulty C-element
– After each startup of the device
– After specific parameter changes:
– Switching on the automatic compensation
– Changing the rated current of the capacitor bank
To avoid transient inrush-current effects, the compensation is delayed by 250 ms after energizing has
been detected.
Full compensation after bank energization can be avoided in case of only short de-energization by means
of parameter De-energ.time w/o comp.. If the de-energized duration is less than the setting of
parameter De-energ.time w/o comp., the full compensation is not carried out after energizing a
phase or the whole bank.
• Cyclic and thus gradual compensation of an existing unbalance in small increments

This permits, for example, the automatic compensation of environmental influences.

The algorithm can be reset to the non-compensated status. Compensated values are not available in this case.
Protection stages that work with compensated values are rendered inactive. The binary input signal >Reset
comp. val. of the function or function group resets the compensation (see also Figure 7-22).
Normalization with Ic
The threshold for the unbalanced current is usually set by assuming the rated capacitor current Ic,rated. The
current Ic flowing into the capacitor bank determines the amount of the unbalanced current. A lower Ic also
means a lower unbalanced current. If Ic < Ic,rated, the protection becomes less sensitive. This influence can be
compensated via the normalization. Normalization keeps the sensitivity of the protection function constant
by normalizing the unbalance value with the current Ic. Phase A component of the current Ic flowing into the
capacitor bank is used as the reference for the normalization. When using the parameter Normalization
with Ic, normalization is enabled or disabled.
Ic Lower than Current Thresh. CB Open
If any phase current of Ic is lower than the threshold Current thresh. CB open, the compensated value
can no longer be computed with sufficient accuracy. To avoid a malfunction, the compensated unbalanced
value Iunbal.,comp. is set to 0 A (see Figure 7-22). This deactivates the protection stages that work with compen-
sated values.
This condition will be indicated (indication I>-stage(cmp) blk.(Ic<)).
In this case, normalization with current Ic will no longer work properly either. Normalization is canceled. This
means that the non-normalized value will be used instead of the normalized value (see Figure 7-22).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Charging/Energizing the Capacitor Bank or a Phase of the Bank

Charging of the bank takes place when the discharged bank is switched on to the network. Charging of a
phase can occur in case of network faults. If a phase-to-ground voltage drops to 0 V due to a network fault,
the respective phase is discharged and the return of the phase-to-ground voltage (after the fault has been
cleared) will charge the phase.
Charging the bank causes inrush currents in the respective phases. To avoid overfunction in case of sensitive
threshold settings, the stages using compensated unbalanced values are blocked by setting Iunbal.,comp. to 0 A.
These stages are:
• Counter stage
• I> stage, if set to operate with compensated unbalanced values

The blocking (Iunbal.,comp. set to 0 A) lasts for 250 ms after energizing detection. Afterwards, the calculated
Iunbal.,comp. is processed again.
Energizing detection takes place by monitoring the phases currents Ic flowing into the bank. If all 3-phase
currents exceed the threshold Current Thresh.CB Open, energizing is detected.
Logic for Counting Faulty C-Elements

This part of the General functionality is only important if counter stages are used.
[lo_cnt EF_1ph, 4, en_US]
Figure 7-23 Counting Faulty C-Elements

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Activation/Blocking Counting
If at least one counter stage is enabled, the counting function is active. Furthermore, the counting function
works only if the automatic compensation is enabled.
To prevent counting as a consequence of the charging process, the counting function is implicitly blocked for
250 ms by setting Iunbal.,comp. to 0 A, after the capacitor energizing has been detected.
If the 3-phase capacitor bank is not fully symmetrical, a bank-external fault (for example, a phase-to-ground
fault near the capacitor bank) may lead to the incorrect counting of C-elements for the counter stage. To avoid
this situation, the binary input >Block counting can be used to block the counting (refer to Blocking the
Counting for Bank-External Faults, Page 1311). The binary input is started by a pickup signal of a (protection)
function which is used for detecting a bank-external fault. The binary input >Block counting also blocks
the cyclic compensation.
Measurands, Counting
The measurand is the 1-phase compensated unbalanced current Iunbal.,comp.. If a single C-element is faulty, an
unbalance occurs between the neutral points of the 2 capacitor banks. This unbalance causes an unbalanced
current; this means, a small current jump occurs in the unbalanced current. Set the parameter Thresh.
defective C-elem., so that this current jump can be detected (see also 7.5.3.2 Application and Setting
Notes). The unbalanced current that was caused by the fault must exceed the threshold for 100 ms before the
affected phase and the affected group are determined and counting (incrementing the counter) takes place.
The angle reference of the unbalanced-current phasor to the reference current Ic,A is used to determine the
phase of the faulty C element. Thus, phase-segregated counting is possible. There is one counter for each
phase and group. After the counting, the existing unbalance is compensated; this means, the unbalance is
reset to 0 A. If the faulty group cannot be determined, the unbalance is also compensated.
Resetting/Setting the Counters

You can reset or set the counters of group 1 and group 2 via:
• On-site operation panel directly on the device
• Online DIGSI connection to the device
• Binary input >Reset all counters (only reset of all counters)
• Communication connection with the control center

You can directly set or reset the counters via IEC 61850 by setting the counter values to the desired value.
If you want to reset the counters via DNP3, IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus, or IEC 60870-5-104, an additional
configuration with CFC is necessary. For more information, refer to chapter 7.5.3.2 Application and Setting
Notes.

(_:2311:300) Iunbl.cp Compensated unbalanced kA A Parameter Rated primary
current Iunbal.,comp. current
(_:2311:301) Iunbl. Non-compensated unbal- kA A Parameter Rated primary
anced current Iunbal. current
(_:2311:323) Cp.vect. Compensation vector Icomp.,vect. kA A Parameter Rated primary
current
You can find the value of the parameter Rated primary current of the preceding table in the chapter
6.1.9 Settings according to the specified parameter MP selection.
Icomp.,vect. is normalized with Ic. The normalization is carried out no matter if the parameter Normalization
with Ic is set to yes or no. Icomp.,vect. keeps its value unchanged until the next compensation occurs.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[fo_compensation vector, 1, en_US]
Where:
I unbal.op. Operational unbalanced current at the moment the compensation is carried out
Ic,rated Rated current of the capacitor bank
Ic Current of the capacitor bank at the moment the compensation is carried out
Definition of the Group and Fault Location

If the capacitor is designed as a double neutral-point circuit, the following definition is assumed:
[dw_fehlerortinf_iunsy1ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-24 Definition of the Fault-Location Information
• Group 1: C1
• Group 2: C2
To determine the fault location (group 1 or 2) correctly, use the parameter Capacitor element type (in
FB General of the Capacitor bank function group) to tell the device whether the elements of the capacitor
bank have internal fuses or not.
The angle reference of the unbalanced-current phasor to the reference current Ic is used to determine the
direction of the unbalanced current and, thus, the affected group is determined. If the direction cannot be
determined with confidence, an appropriate indication will be generated.

With the MP selection parameter, you can select from a list the measuring point that is connected to the
I Unbalanced interface of the Capacitor bank function group.
The setting applies equally to all stages of the function.
select a measuring point, an inconsistency is indicated via the read-only parameter Consistency failure.
Parameter: Automatic compensation
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Automatic compensation = no

The parameter applies equally to all stages of the function that work with compensated measurands.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If no counter stages are applied, Siemens recommends switching the automatic compensation off and use the
manual compensation. You can find more information on this recommendation in chapter 7.5.4.2 Application
and Setting Notes (setting notes for the operate delay of the I> stage).
If the counter stages are applied, the automatic compensation must be switched on, otherwise the counting
function will not work.
Parameter: De-energ.time w/o comp.
• Default setting (_:2311:104) De-energ.time w/o comp. = 2.00 s

In case of networks faults, the faulty phases are discharged. With the returning voltage after fault clearance,
charging takes place. For such conditions, Siemens recommends that no automatic full compensation takes
place in the affected phases. Otherwise, C-element defects occurring in this period (for example, because of
discharging stress due to network-fault inception) will not be detected.
With the parameter De-energ.time w/o comp., you define the duration of short de-energization after
which no automatic compensation takes place. The parameter must be set to a value larger than the slowest
fault clearing time in your network plus a safety margin.
If the setting is set to 0 s, an automatic full compensation is carried out after each energizing detection.
Parameter: Normalization with Ic
• Default setting (_:2311:100) Normalization with Ic = no

This parameter applies equally to all stages of the function.
no Select this setting if you can safely assume that Ic will not change for
operational reasons or if you do not desire normalization of the unbalanced
current with Ic.
Consider that the protection sensitivity will decrease with decreasing Ic.
yes Select this setting if you want to keep the sensitivity of the protection stages
constant during changes of Ic.
Parameter: Thresh. defective C-elem.
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Thresh. defective C-elem.= 0.030 A

Set the parameter Thresh. defective C-elem. to ensure that the jump in the unbalanced current
caused by the faulty C-element is detected. Information about occurring unbalanced current as a consequence
of single faulty C-elements will be provided by the manufacturer of the capacitor bank. Siemens recommends
setting the threshold value to approx. 75 % of the unbalanced current that occurs after the fault of the 1st
C-element.
Example 1: Information about the Unbalanced Current Available from the Manufacturer of the Capacitor Bank
Table 7-2 Unbalanced Current, Depending on the Number of Faulty C-Elements
Number of Faulty C-Elements Primary Unbalanced Current

0 0.00 A
1 0.71 A
2 1.47 A
3 2.29 A
... ...
Assumed current transformer ratio: 10 A/1 A

Primary unbalanced current if 1st C-element fails: 0.71 A
Secondary unbalanced current if 1st C-element fails: 0.071 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Secondary setting value: 0.75 ⋅ 0.071 A = 0.053 A
NOTE
Blocking the Counting for Bank-External Faults

To avoid the incorrect counting of C-elements for the counter stage due to a bank-external fault, Siemens
recommends using the binary input >Block counting to block the counting by a pickup signal of a
(protection) function, which is applied to detect the bank-external fault.
Siemens recommends using the function Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage or the
function Negative-sequence protection (based on current measurement) to detect the bank-external fault.
The following function chart (CFC) is an example to block the counting by a pickup signal of the function
Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage.
EXAMPLE
Create a CFC as follows:
• Connect the signal Pickup of the function Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage as
input.
If you use the function Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage only for blocking the
counting, you must set the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked of this function to yes to
block tripping, fault recording, and fault logging of this function.
• Connect the signal >Block counting as output.
[sc_CFC_blockcounting, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-25 CFC for Blocking the Counting
Resetting the Counters via Protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3, or Modbus
The following example shows how to use a function chart (CFC) to reset the counters with the protocols
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3, or Modbus.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
EXAMPLE
• Add a Marker command (SPC) signal to the information list.
[sc_add_spc_signal_1ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-26 Adding Marker Command (SPC) Signal to Information List
• Set up the following CFC. Connect the SPC signal as input, and the signal >Reset all counters as
output.
[sc_CFC_60C_1ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-27 Function Chart (CFC): Activating the Binary Input Signal
• Send a single-point control command from the control center to the SPC signal to activate the signal
>Reset all counters. Then the counters are reset.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.5.3.3 Settings

MP selection
failure ured
tion configuration
General
_:2311:101 General:Automatic • no no
compensation
• yes
_:2311:100 General:Normalization • no no
with Ic
• yes
_:2311:102 General:Thresh. defec- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
tive C-elem. 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.150 A
_:2311:104 General:De-energ.time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 2.00 s
w/o comp.

(Type)
Group indicat.
General
_:2311:502 General:>Reset all counters SPS I
_:2311:503 General:>Block counting SPS I
_:2311:304 General:Comp. via BI blk.(Ic<) SPS O
_:2311:305 General:I>-stage(cmp) blk.(Ic<) SPS O
_:2311:306 General:No auto. comp. config. SPS O
_:2311:307 General:C defect counted SPS O
_:2311:308 General:Unknown dir. phase A SPS O
_:2311:309 General:Unknown dir. phase B SPS O
_:2311:310 General:Unknown dir. phase C SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:2311:300 General:Iunbl.cp CMV O
_:2311:301 General:Iunbl. CMV O
_:2311:323 General:Cp.vect. CMV O
7.5.4 Overcurrent-Protection Stage I>
7.5.4.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[lo_ocp-cap-bank_Iunbalstu1ph, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-28 Logic Diagram of the Overcurrent-Protection Stage I>

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measurands
Within the protection stage, the compensated and the non-compensated unbalanced currents are available.
Use parameter Measured value to select one of the 2 values. Both values are displayed as measured values
of the function at the function stage.
Pickup, Operate Delay

If the selected measurand exceeds the threshold, the pickup delay of 1 network period starts. If the threshold
remains exceeded during the pickup delay, the stage picks up. The pickup starts the operate delay, and
a fault-location information is issued. More information can be found in this chapter under Fault-Location
Information, Page 1315. If the threshold is exceeded during the entire operate delay, the operate indication is
issued.
Please note that, when using the compensated measurands as well as the automatic compensation, the
currently measured current unbalance (that resulted in the threshold being exceeded) is gradually compen-
sated. This means that even in case of a constantly existing unbalance in the primary system, the compen-
sated measurand becomes gradually lower and may therefore fall below the threshold again at some time.
The timing depends on by how much the threshold is exceeded.
For this reason and under those conditions, long time delays must not be set, see also chapter 7.5.4.2 Applica-
tion and Setting Notes.
This effect does not occur if manual compensation or the non-compensated measurand is used.
Blocking While Charging

In order to prevent pickup as a consequence of the charging process, the I> stage is implicitly blocked for
250 ms by setting Iunbal.,comp. to 0 A, after capacitor energizing has been detected. Blocking only takes place if
the stage operates with compensated unbalanced values.
Fault-Location Information
When picking up, the stage provides information about the faulty group of the capacitor bank. If the location
can be safely determined, the corresponding indication Fault position group 1 or Fault position
group 2 is issued.
Both indications also contain the information about the faulty phase. If the capacitor is implemented with
2 neutral points, the following definition is assumed:
[dw_fehlerortinf_iunsy1ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-29 Definition for the Fault-Location Information
• Group 1: C1
• Group 2: C2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Non-Compensated Status
If no compensated values are available and the stage has been set to use such values, the stage will be
blocked. The readiness of the stage turns to Warning. This condition will be reported on the function stage
(indication Alg. not compensated ).
• Default setting (_:16231:100) Measured value = compensated

With this parameter you set the Measured value .
compensated The stage uses compensated unbalanced values. This means an operational
current unbalance will be eliminated. This allows you to increase signifi-
cantly the sensitivity of the measurement.
Note: If any phase current Ic is lower than the threshold Current
threshold CB open, the stage is rendered inactive by setting Iunbal.,comp.
to 0 A. This condition is held for 250 ms after energizing has been detected
in order to avoid a pickup as a consequence of the charging process.
Siemens recommends using compensated unbalanced values. In case that
automatic compensation is applied, consider the setting notes for the
operate delay.
non-compensated The stage works with non-compensated unbalanced values. This means the
measurand may contain an existing operational current unbalance.

When using compensated unbalanced values, very sensitive settings are possible. When using non-compen-
sated unbalanced values, the threshold must be higher than the maximum operational unbalanced current.
NOTE
i If the function has been set to automatic compensation and the stage works with compensated values,
the maximum permitted operate delay is 80 ms. If the operate delay is set to longer than 80 ms the
automatic compensation might cause dropout of the picked-up stage. This risk does not exist when manual
compensation or non-compensated values are used.
7.5.4.3 Settings

I> 1
_:16231:1 I> 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:16231:100 I> 1:Measured value • compensated compensated
• non-compensated
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.000 A

(Type)
I> 1
_:16231:53 I> 1:Health ENS O
_:16231:55 I> 1:Pickup ACD O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.5.5 Counter Stage
7.5.5.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[lo_cnt-stage_1ph, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-30 Logic Diagram of the Counter Stage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measurands/Input Values
The measurand/input values of the counter stage are phase-segregated and group-segregated counter
contents that are determined in the General FB.
Pickup, Operate Delay

With the parameter Type of counting phases, a selection is made whether the supervision function
occurs in a phase-segregated way or with the sum value of the phases. With the parameter Type of
counting groups, a selection is made whether the supervision function occurs in a group-segregated way
or with the sum value of both groups. If a counter reaches the set threshold, the stage picks up. The pickup
starts the time delay. If the time delay has elapsed, the operate indication will be issued.
If the automatic compensation function is enabled, the counter stage is working. If this is not the case, the
readiness status of the stage changes to the state Warning.
General Notes
• The setting notes for the current-threshold value for counting faulty C-elements are provided in chapter
7.5.3.2 Application and Setting Notes as you must set this parameter across all stages.
• In order to react quickly to the simultaneous fault of many C-elements, always use an overcurrent-protec-
tion stage I> with a short operate delay (< 100 ms) in addition to the counter stage. This is necessary as
the counter function counts each current jump only once, regardless of its height.
Parameter: Type of counting groups
• Default setting (_:16261:101) Type of counting groups = segregated

With the parameter Type of counting groups, you specify whether the group-segregated counter status
or the sum value of both group counters are compared to the threshold.
Parameter: Type of counting phases
• Default setting (_:16261:102) Type of counting phases = segregated

With the parameter Type of counting phases, you specify whether the supervision function occurs in a
phase-segregated way or with the sum value of the phases.
Parameter: Maximum Number of Faulty Elements, Operate delay
• Default setting (_:16261:103) Max. no. of def. elem. phs A = 10
• Default setting (_:16261:104) Max. no. of def. elem. phs B = 10
• Default setting (_:16261:105) Max. no. of def. elem. phs C = 10
• Default setting (_:16261:106) Max. no. of def. elem. = 10

Set the parameters for the specific application.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
It is possible to configure several stages for different tasks:
• Reporting only (with or without fault record)

Use this stage to report 1 or 2 faulty C-elements. To do this, set the parameters Max. no. of def.
elem. phs A, Max. no. of def. elem. phs B , Max. no. of def. elem. phs C , or
Max. no. of def. elem. to a small value (1 or 2). The parameter Operate delay can be set to 0.
If you would like to prevent the operate (tripping) and fault logging (fault log and fault record), set the
parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes.
If you would like to prevent only the operate (tripping) and the fault logging must occur, remove this
stage from the interface Trip to the circuit breaker (see also 5.4.2 Structure of the Function Group
Interfaces with Circuit-Breaker Function Group).
• Indication with delayed operate

Use this stage to report in case of some faulty C-elements and to set a relatively long time delay of
the operate, for example, 2 hours. During this time, the fault of the C-elements can be clarified. If it is
possible to find a solution, the counter status can be reset manually. This way, the stage drops out. If a
solution cannot be found within 2 hours, the stage trips and disconnects the capacitor bank.
• Immediate operate
The stage is used to initiate the operate immediately after a larger number of C-elements became faulty.
7.5.5.3 Settings

Counter 1
_:16261:1 Counter 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:16261:2 Counter 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
counting groups
• sum
counting phases
• sum
def. elem. phs A
def. elem. phs B
def. elem. phs C
def. elem.
_:16261:6 Counter 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 10000.00 s 0.00 s

(Type)
Counter 1
_:16261:81 Counter 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:16261:54 Counter 1:Inactive SPS O
_:16261:52 Counter 1:Behavior ENS O
_:16261:53 Counter 1:Health ENS O
_:16261:55 Counter 1:Pickup ACD O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:16261:56 Counter 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:16261:57 Counter 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.6 Neutral-Point Voltage-Unbalance Protection for Isolated Capacitor Banks in Star Connection
7.6 Neutral-Point Voltage-Unbalance Protection for Isolated Capacitor

Banks in Star Connection
The function Neutral-point voltage-unbalance protection (ANSI 59NU) is applicable to isolated capacitor
banks in star connection.
The function responds to an overvoltage condition of the neutral-point displacement voltage, as a result of
capacitor-element (C-element) failures in the capacitor bank. If the phase-to-ground voltages of the capacitor
bank are balanced, the neutral-point displacement voltage is 0. If C-elements in the bank are faulty, the
capacitor bank becomes unbalanced and the neutral-point displacement voltage increases.
The function:
• Protects in case of faults in C-elements of an isolated capacitor bank
• Calculates the operating voltage and the restraint voltage
• Is stabilized against bank-external faults
• Provides compensation of an unbalance that is not caused by a fault
The function Neutral-point voltage-unbalance protection is used in the function group Capacitor bank.
The function comes factory-set with 1 protection stage. A maximum of 4 protection stages can be operated
simultaneously within the function.
The general functionality works across all stages.
• Pickup
• Operate
[dw_structure_59NU, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-31 Structure of the Function Neutral-Point Voltage-Unbalance Protection

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.6.3.1 Description
The General functionality is structured in the following parts:
• Calculation of the operating voltage Vop. and the restraint voltage Vrestr.
• Compensation for the operating voltage Vop.
• Blocking for closing
Logic of the General Functionality
[lo_59NU_FB_General, 1, en_US]

The function receives measurands via different interfaces of the function group Capacitor bank as follows:
• 3-phase busbar voltage measurands (VA, VB, VC, V0) via the 3-phase voltage interface V 3ph
The voltages VA, VB, and VC are measured via a 3-phase measuring point Meas.point V-3ph. The
Meas.point V-3ph must be connected to the 3-phase voltage interface V 3ph of the function group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Capacitor-bank neutral-point displacement voltage (VN) via the voltage-unbalance interface V unbalance
The voltage VN is measured via a 1-phase measuring point Meas.point V-1ph. The Meas.point V-1ph
must be connected to the voltage-unbalance interface V unbalance of the function group.
[sc_Measuring_points_FG, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-33 Connecting Measuring Points to the Function Group Capacitor Bank for an Isolated Capacitor
Bank
nent numerically.
The vector values of voltage measurands are used for calculating the operating voltage, the restraint voltage,
and the voltage-unbalance factors.
The compensated or non-compensated operating voltage and the restraint voltage are provided to the protec-
tion stage for further processing.
Voltage-Unbalance Factors
In the calculation of the operating voltage Vop., the voltage-unbalance factors between the phases A and B
(kAB) and between the phases A and C (kAC) of the capacitor bank are used:
kAB = CB/CA
kAC = CC/CA
CA, CB, and CC indicate the capacitance per phase. If CA, CB, and CC are equal, kAB and kAC are both 1.0. The
capacitor-bank and the phase-to-ground voltages are balanced.
The voltage-unbalance factors are applied as follows:
• If no compensation is carried out, the voltage-unbalance factors of 1.0 are applied, which means that the
3-phase capacitor bank is considered as balanced.
• If the compensation is carried out, the function calculates the voltage-unbalance factors in the compen-
sation functionality instead of applying the factors 1.0. For details, refer to General Notes on the
Compensation, Page 1326.
If the compensation is reset, the voltage-unbalance factors of 1.0 are applied again.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Calculation of the Operating Voltage
[dw_voltage_measurement_isolated_59NU, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-34 Voltage Measurement for an Isolated Capacitor Bank
The following formula is used to calculate the operating voltage Vop.:
[fo_Operating_voltage_1, 1, en_US]
VA, VB, VC Vector values of the 3-phase busbar voltages

3V0 3V0 = VA + VB + VC
VN Vector value of the neutral-point displacement voltage
kAB Voltage-unbalance factor between the phases A and B
kAC Voltage-unbalance factor between the phases A and C
If the capacitor bank is a 3-phase symmetric system, the unbalance factors kAB and kAC are both 1.0. Then Vop.
is calculated as follows:
[fo_Operating_voltage_2, 1, en_US]
Stabilization against External Faults

The function is stabilized against bank-external faults via the following 2 measures:
• By subtracting the zero-sequence voltage V0 from the measured neutral-point displacement voltage (VN)
(For details, refer to Calculation of the Operating Voltage, Page 1325.)
• By calculating a restraint voltage and implementing an operating characteristic which makes the opera-
tion less sensitive for higher VN and V0 values (For details, refer to Figure 7-37.)
The restraint voltage Vrestr. is calculated as follows:
[fo_Restraint_voltage, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Due to capacitor aging and manufacturing tolerances, the 3-phase capacitor bank is not absolutely balanced.
It means that the operating voltage Vop. is not 0 even in normal operation conditions.
To eliminate this influence on Vop., a compensation mechanism is implemented by calculating the actual
voltage-unbalance factors kAB and kAC. After compensation, the calculated factors are used in the Vop. calcula-
tion so that Vop. is 0.
Table 7-3 Compensation Status
Status = Compensated Status = Not Compensated

Condition Upon activation of the binary input signal If one of the following conditions is met, the function
>Compensate, the compensation is triggered. works in the non-compensated state:
• Initial startup of the device before any compensa-
tion has been carried out
• Activation of the binary input >Reset comp.
val.
Indication Compens. succeeded: Alg. not compensated:
If the existing unbalance has been compen- The algorithm is not compensated. Compensated values
sated manually, this indication is issued as a are not available.
fleeting indication.
Result After compensation, the calculated In the non-compensated state, the voltage‑unbalance
voltage‑unbalance factors are used in the Vop. factors of 1.0 are used in the Vop. calculation.
calculation.
For the reliability of manual compensation, the binary input signals >Compensate and >Reset comp.
val. have a preset software filtering time (configurable in DIGSI) of 20 ms.
NOTE
i If the measured busbar voltage is too low, the compensation cannot be performed. The compensation is
only carried out under the following condition:
Min (VA, VB, VC) > 25 % ⋅ Vphs-gnd rated
Where
Vphs-gnd rated = Parameter Capacitor reference volt./√3
The parameter Capacitor reference volt. defines the reference voltage of the capacitor bank.

V op. Calculated operating voltage kV V Parameter Capacitor refer-
ence volt.
V restr. Calculated restraint voltage kV V Parameter Capacitor refer-
ence volt.
Vunbal. Neutral-point displacement voltage kV V Parameter Capacitor refer-
ence volt.
KAB Voltage-unbalance factor between the – – –
phases A and B
KAC Voltage-unbalance factor between the – – –
phases A and C
You can find the parameter Capacitor reference volt. in the function block General of the function
group Capacitor bank.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i If the function works in the non-compensated state, the displayed functional measured values KAB and
KAC are 1.0000.
Blocking for Closing

To avoid an overfunction caused by the transient unbalance voltage during the circuit-breaker closing process,
the function is blocked if the capacitor bank is in the offline or closing state.
The closing state means that the capacitor-bank status is changing from offline to online. If the parameter
Blocking time is not set to 0 s, the blocking starts with the detection of the offline state. With the
detection of the closing state, the timer of the Blocking time is started. The blocking remains active until
the timer has expired.
The detailed logic is as follows:
[lo_block_by_closing, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-35 Blocking by the Offline or Closing State of the Capacitor Bank
Parameter: Blocking time
• Default setting (_:15781:103) Blocking time = 0.25 s

With this parameter, you set the blocking time for the capacitor-bank closing state to avoid an overfunction
due to a transient unbalance voltage.
Siemens recomends using the default setting. If you set the parameter to 0, no blocking takes place.
7.6.3.3 Settings

General
_:15781:103 General:Blocking time 0.00 s to 2.00 s 0.25 s

(Type)
General
_:15781:308 General:Blocked for closing SPS O
_:15781:300 General:V op. MV O
_:15781:301 General:V restr. MV O
_:15781:307 General:Vunbal. CMV O
_:15781:305 General:KAB MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:15781:306 General:KAC MV O
7.6.4.1 Description
Logic of the Protection Stage
[lo_59nu_stage, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-36 Logic of the Protection Stage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measurand
In the protection stage, the values of the operating voltage Vop. and restraint voltage Vrestr. are converted to
p.u. values in relation to the capacitor-bank reference voltage.
Pickup and Operate

The stage determines the pickup and operate according to the following curve.
[dw_Operate_curve_59NU, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-37 Pickup and Operate Curve
With:
Vop. Operating voltage
Vrestr. Restraint voltage
Threshold Value of the parameter Threshold
Slope Value of the parameter Slope
α arc tan (Slope)
The stage issues a Pickup signal if both of the following criteria are met:
• Vop. > Threshold
• Vop. > Vrestr. ⋅ Slope
If the preceding criteria are continuously met during the operate delay (specified by the parameter Operate
delay), an Operate signal is issued.
Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signals

Blocking for Closing

The internal signal Blocked for closing blocks the stage if the capacitor bank is in the offline or
closing state. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage is reset. For details, refer to Blocking for Closing,
Page 1327.

The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure of the busbar voltage occurs. In the event of blocking,
the picked up stage is reset.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• From inside on pickup of the function Measuring-voltage failure detection
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that the function Measuring-voltage
failure detection blocks the stage or not.
• Default setting (_:24151:3) Threshold = 0.0500 p.u.

The parameter Threshold is set as a p.u. value related to the parameter Capacitor reference volt.
in the function group Capacitor bank. The parameter Capacitor reference volt. is defined as a rated
voltage and therefore is usually set in relation to a phase-to-phase voltage.
The setting of the parameter Threshold depends on the operating voltage that occurs with the number of
defective C-elements for which a warning indication or a trip command shall be generated. Determine this
operating voltage and set the Threshold slightly lower, for example, to 80 % of the value.
According to the measuring accuracy of the device, the secondary pickup threshold must be greater than or
equal to 100 mV to avoid chattering of the pickup signal.
Example of the Relationship between the p.u. Value and the Absolute Primary and Secondary Values of the Pickup
Threshold
For example, the setting values are as follows:
Setting value of Capacitor reference volt., primary value related to a 69 kV
phase‑to‑phase voltage
Setting value of Threshold 0.01 p.u.
Voltage transformer ratio of the neutral-point displacement voltage 100 kV/100 V = 1000
Then, the absolute primary and secondary values of the pickup threshold are as follows:
Primary pickup threshold 69 kV ⋅ 0.01 = 0.69 kV
Secondary pickup threshold 0.69 kV/1000 = 0.69 V
Parameter: Slope
• Default setting (_:24151:100) Slope = 0.100

With the Slope parameter, you stabilize the stage pickup against bank-external faults which may cause
increased inaccuracy in the VN and V0 measurement.
The default setting 0.100 is sufficient for many applications.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The following figure shows an example of the default slope.
[dw_slope examples, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-38 Example of the Default Slope
As shown in the preceding figure, if the slope is 0, the operate curve is independent of the restraint voltage
Vrestr..


You can use the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure to control the response of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure of the busbar voltage is detected.
• The device-internal function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected
to the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. This binary input is available in the voltage transformers
connected to the busbar voltage.

no The stage is not blocked when a measuring-voltage failure is detected.
yes The stage is blocked when a measuring-voltage failure is detected. Siemens
recommends using the default setting, as a correct operation of the stage
cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-voltage failure occurs.
7.6.4.3 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:24151:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.0010 p.u. to 1.0000 p.u. 0.0500 p.u.
_:24151:100 Stage 1:Slope 0.000 to 1.000 0.100

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.7 Peak Overvoltage Protection for Capacitors
The Peak overvoltage protection for capacitors (ANSI 59C) function protects capacitors against:
• Peak overvoltages that stress the dielectric medium in the capacitor causing accelerated aging
• Peak overvoltages that in extreme cases can destroy the dielectric medium in the capacitor
The Peak overvoltage protection for capacitors function can be applied in the Capacitor bank function
group.
3 types of stages are available:
• Stage with inverse-time characteristic curve according to IEC and IEEE Standards
• Stage with definite-time characteristic curve
• Stage with user-defined characteristic curve

The function is preconfigured at the factory with a stage having an inverse-time characteristic curve and a
stage having a definite-time characteristic curve.
Within the function, the following maximum number of stages can be operated simultaneously:
• 1 stage with an inverse-time characteristic curve
• 4 stages with a definite-time characteristic curve
• 1 stage with a user-defined characteristic curve
[dw_strpea, 3, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.7.3.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo_peainv, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-40 Logic Diagram of the Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
(1) With down integration time

(2) With dropout delay
Measurand, Method of Measurement

The function calculates the peak voltage in a phase-segregated way from the fundamental component and
superimposed harmonics. Integration of the phase currents then yields the voltage. This approach captures
the higher harmonics considerably better since they are transferred better by current transformers than by
voltage transformers.
The peak voltage determined is then set with reference to the rated voltage of the capacitor. The resulting
measurand is Û/VC-rated(t). The threshold value for the stage is thus set as a referenced quantity.
The phase-selective peak overvoltages Û/VC-rated(t) are available as measured values for display or further
processing.
Frequency Restriction
If the frequency deviates from the rated frequency for more than 3 Hz, the peak-voltage calculation becomes
less accurate. Due to this situation, the calculation is blocked under this condition and the functional
measured values VpeakA, VpeakB, and VpeakC are shown as "---" (not calculated). The definite-time and
inverse-time stages of peak overvoltage protection do not operate. In this condition, the signal Freq. oper.
range left is issued.
Pickup, Tripping, and Dropout Behavior with the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
If the measurand Û/VC-rated(t) exceeds 1.045 times the set threshold value (for example, 1.045 × 1.1 ≈ 1.15),
pickup occurs and the inverse-time characteristic curve is then followed. For each input value that exceeds the
pickup value (1.045 × threshold value), the time value Ttrip is calculated. An integrator accumulates the value
1/ Ttrip. When the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value of 1, the stage trips.
If the measurand falls below 1.045 times the set threshold value (pickup value), processing of the character-
istic (accumulation of the time values) stops. In the hysteresis region between the pickup value and dropout
value (95 % of the pickup value, for example, 0.95 × 1.15 = 1.0925), the integral value remains unchanged.
The stage, however, remains in the picked-up state.
Use the parameter Dropout principle to select the method for the dropout of the stage:
• Method with down integration time:

If the measurand falls below the dropout threshold, the pickup drops out immediately. If the value drops
below the pickup threshold, the internal integral value that depends on the selected Down integra-
tion time is slowly reduced. The Down integration time defines the duration in order to reduce
the internal integral value linear from 100 % to 0 %. The internal integral value is limited to 100 % and is
reached with the tripping function.
• Method with dropout delay:

If the measurand falls below the dropout threshold, the pickup drops not out immediately. The pickup
remains for the duration of the set Dropout delay. The integral value remains frozen during this time.
If the pickup value is not exceeded again during this time, a dropout occurs and the integral value is reset
to 0. If the pickup value is exceeded during this time again, the integrator continues with the integration
of frozen values. The pickup remains active and the Dropout delay is reset.
Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve

The characteristic curve is defined by the Standards IEC 60871-1:2014 and IEEE Std 1036-2020, see
Figure 7-41.
The points on the characteristic curve defined in the standards result from a threshold setting of 1.1.
Threshold values differing from this value shift the characteristic as shown in Figure 7-41.
Straight-line segments are implemented between the defined points on semi-logarithmic coordinates.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_pecinv, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-41 Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Phase-Segregated Operate Indications

In contrast to what normally occurs in a 3-phase protection device, the function generates phase-segregated
operate indications. These indications are needed for supervision applications.

(_:2311:301) VpeakA Peak voltage phase A kV V Parameter Capacitor
reference volt./√3
(_:2311:302) VpeakB Peak voltage phase B kV V Parameter Capacitor
(_:2311:303) VpeakC Peak voltage phase C kV V Parameter Capacitor
You can find the parameter Capacitor reference volt. of the preceding table in the function block
General of the function group Capacitor bank.
Parameter: Capacitor rated current
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Capacitor rated current = 1000.0 A

With the Capacitor rated current parameter, you set the primary rated current IC-rated of the capacitor
or the capacitor bank.
Keep in mind that the rated current of the capacitor considers harmonics in addition to the fundamental
component.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The rated current IC-rated is determined from the rated capacity and the rated voltage across the bank. Both
values are listed in the Technical Data for the capacitor. Take note of the following:
• The rated voltage for the capacitor also takes harmonics into account. This is not the rated voltage of the
system.
• The rated voltage to be used is the voltage applied across the capacitor; depending on the application,
this can be a phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltage.
Example: Determining the Capacitor Rated Current for a Capacitor in a Star Connection
[dw_UC-Y-Schalt, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-42 Capacitor in Star Connection
Rated voltage of the system 220 kV

Rated capacity per phase 5.233 µF
Capacitor rated voltage VC-rated 192.30 kVrms
Rated frequency f 50 Hz
IC-rated = ωC × UC-rated = 2πf × C × UC-rated = 2 π 50 × 5.233 10-6 × 192.3 103 [Hz × F × U] = 316.1 [A]

The peak voltage determined is then set with reference to the rated voltage of the capacitor. The threshold
value is thus set as a referenced quantity.
The points on the characteristic curve defined in the Standards IEC 60871-1:2014 and IEEE Std 1036-2020
result from a threshold setting of 1.10 (see Figure 7-41). Threshold values differing from this shift the
characteristic as shown in Figure 7-41.
Parameter: Dropout principle
• Default setting (_:13861:103) Dropout principle = with down integration

Use the parameter Dropout principle to select the method for the dropout of the stage:
with down integra- If the measurand for the dropout threshold falls below the limit, the pickup
tion drops out immediately.
If the value drops below the pickup threshold, the internal integral value that
depends on the selected down integration time is reduced from 100 % to 0 %
with dropout delay If the measurand falls below the dropout threshold, the measurand remains
active for the duration of the preset dropout delay. The integral value remains
frozen during this time.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Down integration time
• Default setting (_:13861:102) Down integration time = 3.00 min

Use the parameter Down integration time in order to determine the duration until the internal integra-
tion value is linearly reduced from 100 % to 0 %.
For example, if the integration value is 52 %, a duration of 52 % × down integration time is required until the
integration value 0 % is reached. When using this parameter, the preloading of a capacitor can be considered
and therefore released quicker.
If you are knowledgeable about recovery time of stressed capacitors, they can be considered with this
parameter.

The parameter Dropout delay can be used to prevent resetting of the integral value in the event that the
measured value briefly falls below the dropout threshold.
7.7.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Capacitor rated 1.0 A to 100000.0 A 1000.0 A
current
Inverse-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13861:103 Inverse-T 1:Dropout prin- • with dropout delay with down inte-
ciple gration
• with down integration
_:13861:3 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 0.80 p.u. to 3.00 p.u. 1.10 p.u.
_:13861:102 Inverse-T 1:Down inte- 1 min to 1500 min 3 min
gration time
_:13861:7 Inverse-T 1:Dropout 0.00 s to 3600.00 s 1.00 s
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:VpeakA MV O
_:2311:302 General:VpeakB MV O
_:2311:303 General:VpeakC MV O
_:2311:304 General:Freq. oper. range left SPS O
Group indicat.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Inverse-T 1
_:13861:301 Inverse-T 1:Down integr. running SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.7.4.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo_peadef, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-43 Logic Diagram of the Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measurand, Method of Measurement

The function calculates the peak voltage in a phase-segregated way from the fundamental component and
superimposed harmonics. Integration of the phase currents then yields the voltage. This approach captures
the higher harmonics considerably better since they are transferred better by current transformers than by
voltage transformers.
The peak voltage determined is then set with reference to the rated voltage of the capacitor. The resulting
measurand is Û/VC-rated(t). The threshold value for the stage is thus set as a referenced quantity.
The phase-selective peak overvoltages Û/VC-rated(t) are available as measured values for display or further
processing.
Frequency Restriction
If the frequency deviates from the rated frequency for more than 3 Hz, the peak-voltage calculation becomes
less accurate. Due to this situation, the calculation is blocked under this condition and the functional
measured values VpeakA, VpeakB, and VpeakC are shown as "---" (not calculated). The definite-time and
inverse-time stages of peak overvoltage protection do not operate. In this condition, the signal Freq. oper.
range left is issued.
Pickup, Tripping and Dropout Behavior with the Definite-Time Characteristic Curve
If the measurand Û/VC-rated(t) exceeds the set threshold value, pickup occurs and the tripping delay starts. If the
measurand remains above the dropout value (95 % of the threshold value) during the tripping delay, the stage
trips.
Phase-Segregated Operate Indications

In contrast to what normally occurs in a 3-phase protection device, the function generates phase-segregated
operate indications. These indications are needed for supervision applications.

For the detailed information of the functional measured values, refer to Functional Measured Values,
Page 1336.
Parameter: Capacitor rated current
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Capacitor rated current = 1000.0 A

You can find the setting notes for the parameter Capacitor rated current under Parameter: Capac-
itor rated current, Page 1336.

The peak voltage determined is then set with reference to the rated voltage of the capacitor. The Threshold
is thus set as a referenced quantity.
The setting depends on the application of the stage. If this stage is intended to operate as a warning stage,
a very sensitive setting of approx. 1.05 can be selected. If the stage is used for instantaneous tripping in
addition to the stage with inverse-time characteristic curve, Siemens recommends a setting of ≥ 3.00.

The setting depends on the application of the stage. If this stage is intended to operate as a warning stage, the
time delay can be selected in a range of seconds. If the stage is used for instantaneous tripping in addition to
the stage with inverse-time characteristic curve, the Operate delay can be set to 0.00 s.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.7.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Capacitor rated 1.0 A to 100000.0 A 1000.0 A
current
Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13831:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 0.80 p.u. to 10.00 p.u. 5.00 p.u.
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:VpeakA MV O
_:2311:302 General:VpeakB MV O
_:2311:303 General:VpeakC MV O
_:2311:304 General:Freq. oper. range left SPS O
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
7.7.5.1 Description
This stage is structured the same way as the stage with a voltage-dependent characteristic (see chapter
7.7.3.1 Description). The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired. This means
that you can also define a dropout characteristic curve. This makes the dropout delay parameter superfluous
and unneeded.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

value pairs of voltage and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic curve from
Pickup and Dropout Behavior with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve

If the measurand Û/VC-rated(t) exceeds the threshold value, the characteristic is followed. An integrating
method of measurement summarizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the characteristic
curve. This means that the time associated with the present measured value is determined from the character-
istic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
If the measured value falls below 95 % of the set threshold value, the dropout is initiated. The pickup will be
indicated as clearing. The weighted time results from the dropout characteristic curve. The integral value is
reduced until it reaches 0.
[dw_pecuse, 2, en_US]

This stage is structured the same way as the stage with a inverse-time characteristic (see chapter
7.7.3.2 Application and Setting Notes). The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve
as desired. This chapter provides only application and setting notes for setting characteristic curves.
Parameter: Voltage/Time Value Pairs (from the Operate Curve)

Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a voltage/time value pair for each point on the
characteristic curve. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the voltage to a multiple of the threshold value. In order to obtain a simple relation, Siemens recommends
setting the Threshold parameter to 1.00. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards if you
want to shift the characteristic curve.
Set the number of value pairs to be used with DIGSI. You can define a maximum of 30 value pairs.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE

Where no time grading of tripping and thus no shifting of the characteristic curve is required, leave the
parameter Time dial at 1.
Parameter: Voltage/Time Value Pairs (from the Dropout Characteristic Curve)

Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a voltage/time value pair for each point on the
characteristic curve. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the voltage to a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends setting the Threshold parameter
to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value afterwards if you want to
shift the characteristic curve.
Set the number of value pairs to be used with DIGSI. You can define a maximum of 30 value pairs.
NOTE
7.7.5.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:3 User curve #:Threshold 0.80 p.u. to 3.00 p.u. 1.10 p.u.

(Type)
User curve #
_:301 User curve #:Down integr. running SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.8 Voltage Differential Protection for Capacitors
The Voltage differential protection function (ANSI 87V) can be applied if the capacitor offers a voltage tap to
measure the 3-phase voltage within the capacitor installation. The function:
• Calculates the differential voltage between busbar and tap voltage by applying a matching factor
• Works as a capacitor unbalance function for protection of faults in capacitor elements (C elements)
The Voltage differential protection function is used in the Capacitor bank function group. The function is
preconfigured at the factory with one protection stage Vdiff>.
A maximum of 4 protection stages Vdiff> can be operated simultaneously in the function.
The General functionality (including compensation) works across all stages.
[dw_strucVoldi-060213-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-45 Structure of the Voltage Differential Protection Function
7.8.3.1 Description
The General functionality is structured in the following parts:
• Calculation of the differential voltage Vdiff.
• Compensation of an operational differential voltage Vdiff.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic for Calculation and Compensation
[Lo_voltdiffgeneral_20140714.vsd, 4, en_US]

The function receives the 3-phase busbar and tap voltage measurands (see also VBB and Vtap in Figure 7-46)
via the 3-phase voltage and 3-phase voltage CB tap interfaces of the Capacitor bank function group. For an
isolated capacitor-bank system, the function receives the capacitor-bank neutral-point displacement voltage
VN via the Voltage unbalance interface. The method of measurement used processes the sampled voltage
values and filters out the fundamental component numerically.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Based on the grounding type of the capacitor-bank neutral point, different values of voltage measurands
are used for calculating the differential voltages and for calculating the voltage matching factors at the
compensation moment:
• For a grounded capacitor-bank system, absolute values such as VBB and Vtap are used.
• For an isolated capacitor-bank system, vector values such as VBB and Vtap are used.
The compensated or non-compensated differential voltages are provided to the protection stage for evalua-
tion.
Voltage Matching Factor, Setting of the Matching Factor

The voltage matching factor k is used as a multiplier for the tap voltage to obtain an equivalent voltage
value compared to the busbar voltage. With the parameter Matching-factor setting, you can select
to set the matching factor phase-selectively using the parameters Volt. match. factor phs A, Volt.
match. factor phs B, and Volt. match. factor phs C, or to set it for all phases together using
the parameter Voltage matching factor. If the compensation is carried out, the function obtains the
matching factors from the compensation functionality instead of applying the setting values. In case the
compensation is reset, the setting values are applied again.
Calculation of the Differential Voltage

The calculation of the differential voltage depends on the way the capacitor-bank neutral point is grounded.
With the parameter Cap.-bank neutral point, you can set the grounding type.
2 ways of capacitor-bank neutral-point grounding are possible:
• Grounded capacitor-bank system
[dw_voltage_measurement_grounded, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-47 Voltage Measurement for a Grounded Capacitor-Bank System
The following formula is used to calculate the differential voltage Vdiff. of phase A from the absolute values of
the busbar and tap voltage:
Vdiff,A = |VBB,A - kA ⋅ Vtap,A|
VBB,A Absolute value of the busbar voltage, phase A

Vtap,A Absolute value of the tap voltage, phase A
kA Absolute value of the voltage matching factor, phase A
This calculation also applies to the calculation of the Vdiff. of phase B and phase C.
The voltage measuring-points are connected to the corresponding function-group interfaces.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[Sc_grounded_ground, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-48 Connecting Measuring Points to the Capacitor Bank Function Group for the Grounded Capac-
itor-Bank System
• Isolated capacitor-bank system
[dw_voltage_measurement_isolated, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-49 Voltage Measurement for an Isolated Capacitor-Bank System
The following formula is used to calculate the differential voltage Vdiff. of phase A from the vector values of the
busbar and tap voltage:
Vdiff,A = |(VBB,A - VN) - kA ⋅ (Vtap,A - VN)|
VBB,A Vector value of the busbar voltage, phase A

Vtap,A Vector value of the tap voltage, phase A
kA Vector value of the voltage matching factor, phase A
VN Vector value of the neutral-point-to-ground voltage
This calculation also applies to the calculation of the Vdiff. of phase B and phase C.
The voltage VN is measured via a 1-phase measuring point V-1ph. The measuring point V-1ph must be
connected with the Vunbalance (voltage unbalance) interface of the function group.
[Sc_isolate_ground, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-50 Connecting Measuring Points to the Capacitor Bank Function Group for the Isolated Capacitor-
Bank System

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Both the capacitor-bank tap voltage and the calculated differential voltage are displayed as measured values of
the function.

An operational differential voltage is added to a differential voltage resulting from faulty capacitor elements.
This corrupts the measuring result.
The operational differential voltages can result from the following factors:

The compensation eliminates the operational differential voltage by adjusting the voltage matching factors.
The adjusted phasors of the matching factor are calculated at the compensation moment, with the following
formula (for phase A):
• Grounded capacitor-bank system (absolute values are used for calculation)

kcp,A = VBB,A / Vtap,A
• Isolated capacitor-bank system (vector values are used for calculation)

kcp,A = (VBB,A - VN) / (Vtap,A - VN)
With
VBB,A and VBB,A Busbar voltage, phase A
Vtap,A and Vtap,A Tap voltage, phase A
kcp,A and kcp,A Calculated matching factor at the compensation moment, phase A
VN Neutral-point-to-ground voltage
The calculation also applies to the calculation of the voltage matching factors of phase B and phase C.
The phasors of the calculated voltage matching factors kcp are stored and used for calculation of the differen-
tial voltage until the next compensation is applied or until the compensation is reset.
The phasors of the calculated voltage matching factors kcp are displayed as functional measured values
after the compensation is applied. In addition, the compensated differential voltage Vdiff.cp is available
as a functional measured value. Vdiff.cp is the differential voltage at the moment of the compensation
compared to the not compensated status. The compensated differential voltage Vdiff.cp is calculated with
the following formula (for phase A):
• Grounded capacitor-bank system (absolute values are used for calculation)

Vdiff.cp,A = | VBB,A - kcp,A ⋅ Vtap,A|
• Isolated capacitor-bank system (vector values are used for calculation)

Vdiff.cp,A = | (VBB,A - VN) - kcp,A ⋅ (Vtap,A - VN)|
With
kcp,A and kcp,A Calculated matching factor at the compensation moment, phase A
VBB,A and VBB,A Busbar voltage, phase A
Vtap,A and Vtap,A Tap voltage, phase A
VN Neutral-point-to-ground voltage
This calculation also applies to the calculation of the compensated differential voltages of phase B and phase
C.

Manual compensation via binary input signals is available.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Alg. not compensated The algorithm is not compensated. Compensated values are not available.
Compens. succeeded If the existing unbalance has been compensated manually, this indication is
issued (as transient indication).
By activation of the binary input signal >Compensate, the manual compensation is started and the differen-
tial voltage that exists at that moment is compensated to 0. The value of Vdiff. becomes 0.
NOTE
i If the measured busbar voltage or tap voltage is too low, the manual compensation cannot be performed.
No manual compensation is carried out under the following conditions:
• In the grounded system:

VBB < 10 % ⋅ VBB,rated or Vtap,sec < 1 V
• In the isolated system:
[fo_isolated-system, 2, en_US]

If one of the following conditions is met, the function works in the non-compensated status:
• Initial startup of the device before any compensation has been carried out
• Activation of the binary input >Reset comp. val.
• Change of the parameter Cap.-bank neutral point in the Capacitor bank function group (refer to
chapter 5.4.3 Application and Setting Notes)
The non-compensated status is indicated via the signal Alg. not compensated.

(_:15781:300) Vtap Tap voltage kV V Parameter Capacitor refer-
ence volt./√3
(_:15781:304) Neutral-point displacement kV V Parameter Capacitor refer-
Vunbal. voltage ence volt.
(_:15781:301) Differential voltage kV V Parameter Capacitor refer-
Vdiff. ence volt./√3
(_:15781:306) Compensated differential voltage kV V Parameter Capacitor refer-
Vdiff.cp at the compensation moment ence volt./√3
(_:15781:305) Voltage matching factor – – –
Mat.fac.
You can find the parameter Capacitor reference volt. in the General function block of the Capacitor
bank function group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i If the function works in the non-compensated status, the settings of the voltage matching factors are
displayed as functional measured values, and the functional measured values of Vdiff.cp are shown as
---.
Parameter: Matching-factor setting
• Default setting (_:15781:102) Matching-factor setting = not phase-selective

With the parameter Matching-factor setting, you select to set the voltage matching factor in a phase-
selective way or not.
not phase-selective Select this setting if you want to apply the same voltage matching factor for
all 3 phases.
phase-selective Select this setting if you want to apply different voltage matching factors for
all 3 phases.
Parameter: Voltage matching factor, Volt. match. factor phs A, Volt. match. factor phs B,
Volt. match. factor phs C
• Default setting (_:15781:101) Voltage matching factor = 2.0000
• Default setting (_:15781:103) Volt. match. factor phs A = 2.0000
• Default setting (_:15781:104) Volt. match. factor phs B = 2.0000
• Default setting (_:15781:105) Volt. match. factor phs C = 2.0000

The voltage matching factors are applied as multipliers for the primary tap voltage to calculate the differential
voltage. It depends on the position of the tap-voltage measurement in the specific capacitor installation. The
setting is defined as the ratio of the capacitor-bank reference voltage to the tap voltage.
EXAMPLE
The application consists of:
• Capacitor-bank busbar, with a rated voltage of 345 kV
• Capacitor bank, consisting of 15 can levels in series
• Capacitor-bank tap-voltage measurement between levels 14 and 15

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_application example, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-51 Application Example for Setting the Voltage Matching Factor
Capacitor-bank busbar voltage as phase-to-phase voltage: 345 kV

(it equals to a phase-to-ground voltage of 199.2 kV)
Capacitor-bank tap voltage as phase-to-phase voltage: 23 kV
(it equals to a phase-to-ground voltage of 13.28 kV)
Voltage matching factors are set as: 345 kV/23 kV = 15
The voltage measuring points must be set as indicated in the figure:

Busbar transformer, rated primary voltage: 345 kV
Busbar transformer, rated secondary voltage: 110 V
Transformer to tap the voltage, rated primary voltage: 22 kV
Transformer to tap the voltage, rated secondary voltage: 110 V
Under normal operation, these settings result in a differential voltage of approximately 0 V and in the primary
and secondary measured voltage values as indicated in the 7.8.3.1 Description.
NOTE
i The sound secondary tap voltage must not be smaller than 1 V. Otherwise the function cannot work
properly. Fulfill this condition by applying an appropriate voltage transformer for the tap voltage. Siemens
recommends applying a tap voltage transformer which provides under normal operation a secondary
voltage in the area of the rated secondary voltage.
EXAMPLE
In the grounded system:

Ratio of the capacitor-bank busbar voltage to the tap voltage (matching 400 kV/400 V = 1000
factor k):
Busbar transformer, rated primary voltage: 400 kV
Busbar transformer, rated secondary voltage: 100 V
To ensure an optimal tap-voltage measurement, the following transformer ratio is recommended:

Transformer to tap the voltage, rated primary voltage: 400 kV
Transformer to tap the voltage, rated secondary voltage: 100 V

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.8.4.1 Description
Logic of the Stage Vdiff>
[lo_voltdiffstage, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-52 Logic of the Protection Stage Vdiff>
Measurand, Pickup and Operate

In the protection stage, the differential-voltage value is converted to a p.u. value in relation to the capacitor-
bank reference voltage.
If the converted value exceeds the Threshold value, a Pickup indication is issued. If the threshold is
exceeded continuously during the operate delay, an Operate signal is issued.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Blocking the Stage

stage:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source.
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 9.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions). The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be set so that the meas-
uring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the Volt.-transf. c. b. function block, which
links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure can be set so that the measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
Stage Blocking during Bank Switch-off

After the bank is switched off (the bank CB is opened), the tap voltage begins to decrease while the bus
voltage remains its normal value. If no measure is taken, the protection stage will pick up and also operate
after the operate delay expires. To avoid this, the stage can be blocked via the binary input >Block stage.
The stage must be blocked during the entire bank switch-off period and until the device is measuring the
complete tap voltage after the bank is energized again.
Different blocking schemes can be selected depending on user philosophy and experience:
• Starting of the blocking with detection of the CB position "not closed" (with leaving the CB position
"closed")
In rare cases this scheme could result in a racing condition depending on the time delay of the respective
CB auxiliary contact. Stage pickup might occur in case of a long delay (> 20 ms) of auxiliary contacts.
Stage operate is avoided due to the operate delay.
The blocking should be maintained for an additional time delay of 100 ms after the CB position is
detected as “closed” again.
• Starting of the blocking with issue of the CB-open command and in parallel with detection of the CB
position "not closed"
In case of a long delay (> 20 ms) of auxiliary contacts, blocking can be initiated with the CB-open
command and be held with the CB position "not closed". This scheme safely avoids a stage pickup.
The blocking should be maintained for an additional time delay of 100 ms after the CB position is
detected as “closed” again.
• Blocking with detection of the phase currents dropping below a low set CB-open threshold, for example,
by applying the Undercurrent protection function
This scheme will result in a racing condition. Stage pickup possibly occurs but stage operate is avoided
due to the operate delay.
The blocking should be maintained for an additional time delay of 100 ms after the Undercurrent
protection function drops out.
• Default setting (_:15811:3) Threshold = 0.2000 p.u.

The parameter Threshold is set as a p.u. value related to the parameter Capacitor reference
voltage in the Capacitor bank function group. The parameter Capacitor reference voltage is
defined as a rated voltage and therefore is set in relation to a phase-to-phase voltage.
The setting of the parameter Threshold depends on the differential voltage that occurs with the number of
defective C elements for which a warning indication or a trip command shall be generated. Determine this
differential voltage and set the Threshold slightly lower, for example, to 80 % of the value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Example of the relationship between the p.u. value and the absolute primary and secondary values of the pickup
threshold
For example, the setting values are as follows:
Setting value of Capacitor reference voltage, primary value related to a 69 kV
phase‑to‑phase voltage
Setting value of Threshold 0.05 p.u.
Voltage transformer ratio (Setting value of Rated primary voltage divided 1000
by setting value of Rated secondary voltage)
Then, the absolute primary and secondary values of the pickup threshold are as follows:
Primary pickup threshold, related to a phase-to-phase voltage 69 kV ⋅ 0.05 = 3.45 kV
Secondary pickup threshold, related to a phase-to-phase voltage 3.45 kV/1000 = 3.45 V
Secondary pickup threshold, related to a phase-to-ground voltage 3.45 V/√3 = 2.00 V


You can use the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure to control the response of the stage when a
• The binary input signal >Open of the Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function block is connected
to the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. This binary input is available in the voltage transformers
connected to the bus voltage and capacitor-bank tap voltage. The binary input is also available in the
voltage transformer connected to the VN voltage in case of an isolated capacitor bank.

no The stage Vdiff> is not blocked when a measuring-voltage failure is detected.
yes The stage Vdiff> is blocked when a measuring-voltage failure is detected.
Siemens recommends using the default setting, as correct operation of the
stage cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-voltage failure occurs.
7.8.4.3 Settings

General
_:15781:102 General:Matching-factor • not phase-selective not phase-selec-
setting tive
• phase-selective
_:15781:101 General:Voltage 0.5000 to 2000.0000 2.0000
matching factor
_:15781:103 General:Volt. match. 0.5000 to 2000.0000 2.0000
factor phs A
factor phs B
factor phs C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Vdiff> 1
_:15811:1 Vdiff> 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:15811:2 Vdiff> 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:15811:10 Vdiff> 1:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:15811:3 Vdiff> 1:Threshold 0.0010 p.u. to 1.0000 p.u. 0.2000 p.u.
_:15811:6 Vdiff> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s

(Type)
General
_:15781:300 General:Vtap WYE O
_:15781:304 General:Vunbal. CMV O
_:15781:301 General:Vdiff. WYE O
_:15781:306 General:Vdiff.cp WYE O
_:15781:305 General:Mat.fac. WYE O
Group indicat.
Vdiff> 1
_:15811:81 Vdiff> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:15811:51 Vdiff> 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:15811:54 Vdiff> 1:Inactive SPS O
_:15811:52 Vdiff> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:15811:53 Vdiff> 1:Health ENS O
_:15811:55 Vdiff> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:15811:56 Vdiff> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:15811:57 Vdiff> 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.9 Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks
The function Differential protection for capacitor banks (ANSI 87C):
• Detects ground faults and multiphase short circuits at capacitor banks
• Detects ground faults during the operation of capacitors in systems with a grounded neutral point
• Uses the necessary stabilization procedures during energizing operations
• Trips safely and very fast in the case of internal high-current faults through an additional high-current
stage
The Differential capacitor bank protection function is used in the Capacitor bank diff protection function
group. The function depends upon application in the corresponding application template preconfigured by the
manufacturer and can be copied during the engineering into the corresponding function group.
The Capacitor bank diff function consists of the 2 tripping stages I-DIFF and I-DIFF fast. In addition, the
tripping stage I-DIFF unrestrained is available. You can select this tripping stage from the function catalog and
copy it into the Capacitor bank diff protection function group. The stages can be blocked, in addition you can
switch the stages on and off.
The Capacitor bank side function group has the following characteristics:
• The side-related protection settings are performed
• The side-related calculations are performed
• All data (setting values, detected currents) are relayed to the Capacitor bank diff function group
The side-related protection functions can run in the Capacitor bank side function group, for example over-
load protection, overcurrent protection, etc.
[dweimcapbk-030314-01, 3, en_US]
Basic Principle of Differential Protection

Differential protection is based on a comparison of currents (Kirchhoff current law). When comparing the
current, use is made of the fact that a protected object uses the same current I in a non-faulty operating state
on both sides (dotted in Figure 7-54). This current flows into the range being observed on one side and leaves
it again on the other side. A current differential is a sure indication of a fault within the protected object.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The calculation of the difference is determined through the current-direction definition. The current direction
is defined as positive to the protected object. The current difference results from the vector addition of the
currents.
[dwprin2s-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-54 Basic Principle of Differential Protection Using the Example of 2 Sides
For safe operation, additional functions are required. The implementation of these additional functions is
described in chapter I-DIFF Differential Protection Function, Page 1363.
Current Stabilization
If very large currents flow through the protection range in the case of external faults, with different transmis-
sion behavior of the transformers T1 and T2 (Figure 7-54), a corresponding differential current Idiff occurs.
When this is larger than the corresponding pickup threshold, the device can issue a trip command, even
though no fault is present in the protection range. Such a malfunction of the protection is avoided by the
restraint current (Irest) and is implemented in the form of a characteristic curve Idiff = f(Irest).
The largest current of 2 or more measuring points of the protected object is used for stabilization.
The definition for 2 measuring points is:
A trip or differential current is
Idiff = (I1 + I2)
as well as a restraint current of
Irest = Max (|I1| ; |I2|)
For more than 2 measuring points, this definition is expanded. This restraint method allows a reliable trip
decision for more than 2 measuring points and different feeding behavior for internal short circuits.
Irest = Max (|I1| ; |I2| ; ... |In|)
To clarify the effect, 3 important operating states are observed with ideal and adapted measurands.
• Through fault current in healthy operation or externally caused error:

I1 flows into the protection range, I2 flows out of the protection range, that is, negative compared with
the prefix definition, thus I2 = -I1;
in addition |I2| = |I1|
Idiff = |I1 + I2| = |I1 - I1| = 0
Irest = Max (|I1| ; |I2|) = |I1| = |I2|
No tripping quantity (Idiff = 0); the stabilization (Irest) corresponds to the flowing current.
• Internal short circuit, feed from both sides with equal amount of currents, for example:
Then I2 = I1; In addition |I2| = |I1|;
Idiff = |I1 + I2| = |I1 + I1| = 2 · |I1|
Irest = Max (|I1| ; |I2|) = |I1| = |I2|
The tripping quantity (Idiff) is twice as large as the short-circuit current and the restraining quantity (Irest).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Internal short circuit, feed only from one side:

Then I2 = 0
Idiff = |I1 + I2| = |I1 + 0| = |I1|
Irest = Max (|I1| ; |I2|) = |I1|
The tripping quantity (Idiff) and the restraining quantity (Irest) are of the same size and correspond to the
short-circuit current.
Additional Stabilization with External Short Circuits

In case of an external short circuit, high short-circuit currents flowing through can lead to current-transformer
saturation. This saturation can be more or less strongly pronounced at the measuring points, and in this
way simulate a differential current. The differential current can lie in the tripping range of the characteristic
curve for a certain time and lead to unwanted tripping without any particular measures. In accordance with
Figure 7-55, there are 2 typical scenarios:
• High-current, external short circuit

First, the current on both sides is transferred and leads to a large restraint current. After this, a trans-
former becomes saturated, resulting in a differential current Idiff that can exceed the operate curve.
Simultaneously, the restraint current Irest drops. Once the transformer is no longer saturated, the differen-
tial current decreases and falls below the characteristic curve.
• Low-current, external short circuit

Current transformers can also become saturated through the large direct-current time constant
(switching of transformers, motors), but small currents flowing through. This manifests itself as a phase-
angle rotation of the current. Exceeding the characteristic curve in a non-stabilized area is possible.
Intelligent saturation-detection methods capture this state and lead to a temporally limited blocking of the
Differential protection function.
[dwislauf-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-55 Principle Current Course in External Short Circuit and Temporary Current-Transformer Satura-
tion on One Side
Inrush-Current Detection
The inrush-current detection evaluates the calculated instantaneous values of the differential current. The
inrush current develops with Sympathetic Inrush – connection of a parallel transformer or Recovery Inrush –
inrush current subsequent to returning voltage after fault in the system considerably higher than in the side
currents. An assignment to the corresponding blocking phases is possible only in the differential current due
to the vector-group correction.
The inrush-current detection is activated when the pickup characteristic is exceeded. It is deactivated when it
is blocked by an external fault.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
For inrush-current detection, 2 methods working in parallel are used:
• Component of the 2nd harmonic relative to the fundamental component in the differential current
(I2nd harm/I1st harm)
As Figure 7-56 also shows, the 2nd harmonic is clearly pronounced in the inrush current. If the share
of the 2nd harmonic exceeds the set threshold value (parameter: 2nd harmonic content), a phase-
segregated blocking occurs. The harmonics develop differently in the different phases. If exceeding of
the 2nd harmonic is detected in a phase, it may be necessary to block all phases simultaneously. This
blocking must be limited with regard to time and is controlled by the parameter Crossblock. time
2nd har.. The correct positioning of the filter windows is controlled by the internal pickup.
If you want only one method to be active, the other method can be changed to inactive. For this, parameter
Blocking with 2. harmonic = no is used.
[scinrush-120120-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-56 Inrush Current with Pronounced Flat Areas
Figure 7-57 shows the logical input and output signals.
[loblkcap-290414-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-57 Logic Inrush-Current Detection

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lomesmgr-190713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-58 Logic Diagram of the Differential Protection Function

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The interaction of the I-DIFF, I-DIFF fast, and I-DIFF unrestrained tripping stages is shown in the following
operate curve.
[dw_charac_function_trans-dif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-59 Operate Curve of the Differential Protection Function
Measurand Processing
Amount Correction
Since the current transformers cannot be adapted exactly to the rated currents of the protected object with
regard to their primary rated data, a standardization to the nominal sizes of the protected object takes
place. The conversion occurs every sampling time (thus, for instantaneous values). The differential protection
function processes 20 sampled values per period. In addition, the sampled values tracked are used. A high
degree of accuracy can be attained over the entire tracking range (from 10 Hz to 90 Hz).
The IDIFF-fast tripping and the IDIFF-unrestrained tripping stages work on non-frequency tracked values and
thus, implement fast operate times at low frequencies.
The amount is adapted via the following formula:
[fobetr07-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
iphsx* Adapted instantaneous value per phase (x = A, B, C)

iphsx Instantaneous value per phase (x = A, B, C)
k Correction value per measuring point
Irated prim,Sx Primary transformer rated current per measuring point
Irated obj,Sx Primary rated current of the protected object
Srated,ref Reference power (maximum rated apparent power of the protected object)
Vrated,Sx Rated voltage of the respective side (measuring point) of the protected object
NOTE
i For more than 2 capacitor bank sides (teed feeder),, the winding with the highest power is used as the
reference winding. If several sides have the same highest amount of power, then the highest current side
is selected as reference side. The amount of the neutral-point transformer is also adapted according to the
previous formula. In this case, the amount should be adapted to the side with the greatest power.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Vector-Group Correction
The vector groups of the capacitor bank sides occur due to couplings that are different on each side. There-
fore, the measured currents cannot be used directly for summation. The vector-group correction replicates
the coupling of the capacitors and makes the measured currents comparable. The correction occurs such
that each side is converted to vector group 0. Since you are in the 3-phase system, the conversion occurs
via matrices which are stored for the respective vector-group type. The general description is given in the
following formula. In the same calculation step, the absolute value is corrected:
[foscha08-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
iphsx* Adapted instantaneous value per phase (x = A, B, C)
iphsx Instantaneous value per phase (x = A, B, C)
k Absolute-value correction per measuring point
MSG Correction matrix
I-DIFF Differential Protection Function

A differential current per phase based on the instantaneous value variables is calculated from the processed
currents (see section Measurand Processing). The direction of current flow is defined as to the protected
object as positive. The fundamental component contribution to the differential current (Idiff) is calculated via
a Fourier filter (filter length = 1 period (20 sampled values)).
The currents of that measuring point whose RMS value is the largest are used as restraint current. If, for
example, the current collapses at a measuring point as a consequence of current-transformer saturation,
the measuring point that has the largest current is automatically switched to at the point in time of the
calculation.
NOTE
i Differential protection does not work with sensitive ground-current transformers. Since sensitive trans-
formers can go into saturation too quickly, false differential currents arise.
[fogrds16-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With
x Variable (1, 2, 3) for the phase currents (A, B, C)
m Variable (1, 2, ..., N) for the measuring points
N Number of measuring points
n Number of samples per period (n = 20)
FIR Fourier filter
MAX Maximum value determination

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 7-60 shows the pickup characteristic of the differential protection. The characteristic curve branch
a represents the sensitivity threshold of the differential protection (parameter Threshold) and considers
constant fault currents like magnetizing currents.
The characteristic branch b (parameter Intersection 1 Irest and Slope 1) considers current-propor-
tional faults under normal operating conditions.
These faults can occur for the following reasons:
• Transformation errors in the current transformer and the input transformer of the device
• Adaptation deviations
The characteristic curve branch c (parameter Intersection 2 Irest and Slope 2) protects the differ-
ential protection against overfunction in case of high-current external faults and transformer saturation. In
this range, transformer saturation can arise due to high short-circuit currents, and because of this, a higher
differential current results.
In order to avoid overfunction in the event of external faults with current-transformer saturation, a logic is
implemented that uses the characteristic curve Additional stabilization of external faults. If the operating
point is located in the additional stabilization range and exceeds the operate curve from there, then the logic
becomes active and blocks the differential protection.
The additional stabilization range is derived from the Threshold add-on stabiliz. and Slope 1
parameters.
[dwdifaus-030912-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-60 Pickup Characteristic of the Differential Protection

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If the differential current multiplied by the dropout ratio of 0.7 does not reach the pickup characteristic, the
pickup drops out.
Detection of External Faults

To detect external faults with transformer saturation in a reliable way, the measurand curve is evaluated in the
Diff.-Rest level by means of a detector.
The detector has 2 essential tasks:
• Blocking in the case of a definite high-current external fault

The differential current and the restraint current are monitored on a phase basis in the Diff/Restr level
immediately after fault inception. To ensure the stability of the saturation detection for low saturation-
free times of the primary current transformer, estimated values based on the difference quotients of the
instantaneous values are used.
If the estimated restraint current exceeds the Threshold add-on stabiliz. parameter and the
expected value of the differential current of all phases is in the additional stabilization range (parameter
Slope 1) (Figure 7-60) at the same time, the detector is active and the indication Blocked by ext.
fault phsx appears. The tripping of the Differential protection function is blocked.
If an external fault arises and is cleared by the protection responsible for it, the additional stabilization
drops out. If the dropout ratio (0.7) of the RMS value of the restraint current does not reach the
Threshold add-on stabiliz. parameter (Figure 7-60), the additional stabilization drops out. The
indication Blocked by ext. fault phsx is reset.
If the differential current exceeds Slope 1 as a result of transformer saturation, that is, there is a pickup
phsx, the blocking is limited in time (parameter: Time of add-on stabiliz.).
Starting with the indication Blocked by ext. fault phsx, the other phases can be blocked with
it via the Crossblk. time add-on st. parameter. If differential currents due to transformer satura-
tion spread to the other phases through the vector-group correction or residual current elimination, this
blocking is necessary.
• Removal of the blocking with a change in fault location from external to internal
An internal fault can arise as a consequence of an external fault. This fault change must be recognized
and the blocking must be removed. The critical case is a short-circuit with current-transformer saturation.
The saturation detection examines here the instantaneous values of the differential current. With trans-
former saturation, the instantaneous values fall below an internal threshold in the saturation-free time.
If this threshold is permanently exceeded and a pickup is present in the corresponding phase, an internal
error is assumed. The other phases are also examined during the parameterization with crossblock.
The blocking of the tripping is removed and the indication Blocked by ext. fault phsx is reset.
DC-Component Detection
Low-current external faults with large DC components can also lead to exceeding of the operate curve. The
additional stabilization range is not attained, however.
To avoid an overfunction, the following steps are taken:
• The restraint current Irest.;phsx is monitored for a jump.
• If the jump occurs, the DC component is calculated, with a temporal delay (1 period), from the instanta-
neous value of the restraint current (current at the measuring point with the largest current) irest.,phsx =
iphsx,Mm. The result is Irest.DC,phsx. This current is compared to the restraint current Irest., phsx and is checked for
exceeding of the internal threshold.
• The differential current Idiff,phsx must lie below the dropout characteristic curve (characteristic curve · 0.7)
in all 3 phases.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• If the first 3 points lead to positive results, then the operate curve is raised by the parameter Factor
increasing char. with a default setting of 2.3. Here, only the threshold value and the slope 1
are raised (see Figure 7-61). The indication Increase of char. (DC) is output. If the product of
parameter Factor increasing char. and Slope 1 exceeds 0.85, the maximum increase of the
raised Slope 1 is limited to 0.85.
• As additional criterion, the pickup indication Pickup (internal fault is present) or the indication of the
additional stabilization Blocked by ext. fault phsx (high-current external fault) is interrogated.
If one of the 2 conditions is present, the characteristic-curve increase is stopped. A retroactive pickup no
longer resets the characteristic-curve increase. A pickup with DC-component detection occurs only if the
raised operate curve is exceeded.
If the DC component Irest.DC,phsx falls below the internal dropout threshold, the dropout delay is determined as
follows:
It is assumed that the de- and re-magnetization of the transformer last equally long. The magnetization is at
the highest at the point in time in which the internal dropout threshold is attained. The time is measured from
the start of the DC-component detection until the internal dropout threshold is reached. Added to this time
are 5 periods and from this, the dropout delay is derived. Following this, the characteristic-curve increase is
reset to the original value. Figure 7-62 shows the overall logic.
[dwdcerkn-201112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-61 Increasing the Characteristic Curve after DC Detection

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lodcerkn-170712-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-62 Logic DC Detection
Startup Detection
The startup detection is particularly useful in the case of motors. In contrast to transformers, the inrush
current with motors is a flowing current. Differential currents can arise, however, by the current transformers
having different residual magnetization and being supplied with current at different operating points of their
hysteresis. These differential currents are low in fact, but they can lead to overfunction with sensitive setting
of the differential protection.
As additional security against overfunction when switching in a previously protected object that carries no
current, you can use the pickup-value increase at startup. If the restraint current falls below a settable value
Thresh. startup detection in all phases, the pickup-value increase is activated. The pickup value
Threshold and Slope 1 are raised by the set value in accordance with parameter Factor increasing
char.. As a rule here, Slope 1 cannot exceed a value of 0.85.
If the parameter Thresh. startup detection is exceeded, dropout occurs and a timing element (param-
eter: Max. perm. Start. time) is activated. Once this time has elapsed, the characteristic curve that
was increased in all phases is reset to its original value. Figure 7-63 shows the logic diagram of the startup
detection and Figure 7-64 the increased characteristic curve.
[loanlauf-170712-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-63 Logic Startup Detection

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dwanlken-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-64 Characteristic-Curve Increase at Startup
Trip Logic of the Differential Protection Function I-DIFF

Figure 7-65 shows the trip logic. If the characteristic curve is exceeded (see Figure 7-60) a pickup occurs.
Redirection of the information for tripping can be blocked by the additional functions.
Blocking is possible through use of the following influencing variables:
• Recognition of external faults that can simulate an internal fault through transformer saturation
• Recognition of the connection process (2nd harmonic)

In addition, in case of blocking due to an external error, a Crossblock mechanism comes into effect.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_aus_cod, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-65 Trip Logic of I-DIFF
I-DIFF Fast Differential Protection Function

As a supplement to the I-DIFF differential protection function, the function I-DIFF fast is available. The main
task consists in switching off high-current internal faults in the shortest amount of time. The method controls
current-transformer saturation and is stable in the event of external transverse faults (integration in breaker-
and-a-half arrangements).
Metrologically, 2 methods are combined:
• Instantaneous-value method
• Filter-based method
Instantaneous-Value Method
Through the instantaneous-values method, an immediate evaluation of the sampled values of the differential
iDiff(t) and restraint current irest(t) occurs. The absolute-value and vector-group adapted currents (i*) are also
the basis. The currents are defined positively to the node. The restraint current is the maximum current of all
measuring points.
[fomome27-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
where
x Variable (1, 2, 3) for the phase currents (A, B, C)
m Variable (1, 2, ..., N) for the measuring points
N Number of measuring points
The evaluation of the restraint current is used to recognize saturated, high-current external faults.
Figure 7-66 shows the operate curve. The parameter Threshold is set here such that it lies over the
maximum fault current flowing. The slope of the characteristic curve is fixed at 0.8.
In the algorithm, the following conditions are processed:
• Condition 1: The increase of the restraint current direst(t)/dt is determined continuously and compared
with an internal threshold value.
• Condition 2: After that, a comparison determines whether the differential current is larger than the
restraint current (characteristic curve Slope in Figure 7-66): idiff(t) > 0.8 · irest(t).
• Condition 3: After that, a comparison determines whether the differential current exceeds the parameter
Threshold.
When all conditions are met, tripping occurs immediately. If the 1st condition is recognized and not the 2nd
condition, then the function is blocked for 300 ms.
[dwidfast-300114-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-66 I-DIFF Fast Characteristic Curve
The 2 following figures show the behavior during an internal and an external fault. It is typical for the
internal fault (Figure 7-67) that the differential current rises more quickly than the restraint current. After a
few sampled values, the trip signal is issued. In case of an external fault, a differential current arises only
after transformer saturation occurs. You can always assume, however, that the current is transferred a few
milliseconds after occurrence of the fault. In accordance with Figure 7-69, the restraint current is larger than
the differential current after occurrence of the fault, but condition 2 is not met and the function is therefore
blocked.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dwinnfel-201112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-67 Curve Plot for Internal Fault with Transformer Saturation (k= 0.65)
[dwextfel-170712-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-68 Curve Plot for External Fault with Transformer Saturation (k= 0.65)
Fundamental-Component Method
Parallel to the instantaneous-value method, the fundamental component works with a temporal delay. Here,
the same measured values are processed as with the I-DIFF method. The fundamental component of the
differential current Idiff and the stabilization value (maximum current of a measuring point) Irest. are ordered in
the operate curve according to Figure 7-66 and the trip decision is made.
Figure 7-69 shows the overall logic.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_id_fast, 4, en_US]
Figure 7-69 Logic of the I-DIFF Fast Differential Protection Function
I-DIFF Unrestrained Differential Protection Function

In addition to the I-DIFF and I-DIFF fast differential protection function, the function I-DIFF unrestrained is
available. The main task of this function consists in switching off high-current internal short circuits in the
shortest amount of time. The method controls current-transformer saturation.
High-current faults in the protection range can always be switched off immediately without consideration of
the restraint currents if, due to the current magnitude, it is determined that an external fault is not involved. In
the case of protected objects with a large intrinsic longitudinal impedance (transformer, generator, reactor), a
current can be found that is never exceeded by a flowing short-circuit current.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
For a transformer, for example, the (primary) value is:
[fo_Idiff-error, 1, en_US]
The I-DIFF unrestrained stage also acts if, for example, due to current-transformer saturation because of
a DC component in the short-circuit current, a 2nd harmonic occurs. The inrush-current detection could
interpret this as the closed-circuit current.
The I-DIFF unrestrained protection stage operates both with the fundamental component of the differential
protection and with the instantaneous value.
Metrologically, 2 methods are combined:
• Instantaneous-value method
• Filter-based method
Instantaneous-Value Method
With the instantaneous-values method, an immediate evaluation of the sampled values of the differential
current iDiff(t) occurs. The absolute-value and vector-group adapted currents (i*) are also the basis.
Fundamental-Component Method
Parallel to the instantaneous-value method, the fundamental component works with a temporal delay. Here,
the same measured values are processed as with the I-DIFF method. The fundamental component of the
differential current Idiff is ordered in the operate curve Figure 7-70 and the trip decision is made.
[dw_idffunres, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-70 I-DIFF Unrestrained Characteristic Curve
Figure 7-71 shows the overall logic.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_idff-unres, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-71 Logic of the I-DIFF Unrestrained Differential Protection Function
Trip Logic of the Differential Protection

A common trip signal is formed from the subfunctions I-DIFF, I-DIFF fast, and I-DIFF unrestrained. Figure 7-72
shows the corresponding logic.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_gesamt, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-72 Overall Trip Logic
Fault Logging and Fault Recording

A fault is opened with every protection pickup. This means that a fault log and a fault recording are started.
Saving of the fault record depends on the setting (see 3.5.3 Function Description). Since pickup and tripping
are the same in differential protection, the recording setting can be used with the pickup function. To enable
fault recording even with external errors, along with the exceedance of the characteristic curve, a fault record
is opened in case of a blocking by an external error or in case of a characteristic-curve increase through a
DC-component detection. This has the advantage that you can evaluate the transformer transfer method of
the current transformers very well in case of a fault.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Figure 7-73 shows the application of the differential protection using a capacitor bank with a simplified
example.
[dwanslbca-130514-01, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-73 Connection Example
The measuring points must be interconnected with the corresponding function groups.
Figure 7-74 shows the corresponding screenshot from DIGSI 5.
[sccapbak-130514-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-74 Internal Interconnection in DIGSI 5

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Function Group Capacitor Bank

Only the parameters important for the application of the differential protection function are discussed here.
You can find setting notes for more parameters in chapter 5.4.3 Application and Setting Notes (Capacitor
bank function group).
• Default setting (_:14641:101) Capacitor reference curr. = 1000 A

With the parameter Capacitor reference curr., you determine the reference current of the capacitor
For differential protection these values are added to the correction amount (rated current of the protected
object).
Depending on user philosophy you use the rated current of the capacitor bank as a reference value including
the harmonic or the fundamental component current.
Function Group Capacitor Bank Side

Make the following settings in the Capacitor bank side function group:
• Default setting (_:1781:15571:101) Capacitor reference curr. = 1000 A

With the parameter Capacitor reference curr., you determine the reference current of the capacitor
For differential protection these values are added to the correction amount (rated current of the protected
object).
If the capacitor bank is in a delta connection, the value to be set can differ from the capacitor-bank reference
current set in the function group Capacitor bank (by a factor √3). Otherwise always use the same value
settings.
Depending on user philosophy you use the rated current of the capacitor bank as a reference value including
the harmonic or the fundamental component current.
• Default setting (_:1781:15571:102) Capacitor reference volt. = 400.00 kV

With the parameter Capacitor reference volt., you set the reference voltage of the capacitor bank to
be protected. The reference voltage set here is the reference value for the percentage measured values and
setting values in percent.
Depending on user philosophy you can set the system reference value of the system voltage (busbar voltage)
or the capacitor rated voltage as a reference.
Parameter: Neutral point
• Default setting (_:1781:15571:149) Neutral point = isolated

With the parameter Neutral point, you specify whether the the neutral point in the protection range of
the differential protection is grounded or isolated. As this is not the case for the example application
described, use the default setting isolated.
You can find further information in the device manual 7UT8, chapter 6.2.3 Function Description Neutral-Point
Current Treatment.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i You do not need to change the parameters Winding configuration and Vector group numeral
for the example application described. You must establish the phase reference by way of the vector group
if the capacitor bank is in a delta connection.
You can find further information in the device manual 7UT8, chapter 6.2.3 Description Vector-Group
Correction.
Parameter: Winding configuration
• Default setting (_:1781:15571:104) Winding configuration = Y (Wye)

With the parameter Winding configuration, you set D (Delta) for a delta connection. A further
star-connection setting option is Y (Wye). The parameter Winding configuration is relevant for the
differential protection function. You do not need to change this setting for the example application described.
Parameter: Vector group numeral
• Default setting (_:1781:15571:100) Vector group numeral = 0

This parameter is used to account for phase-angle rotation, which is expressed by a number.
Phase-angle rotation 0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180° 210° 240° 270° 300° 330°
Vector group 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
numeral
In the function group, the following information is displayed additionally in the setting sheet:
• Side number
• Identification of the measuring points used
• Adaptation factor for the 3-phase measuring point (with reference to the side)
You can set each Vector group numeral from 0 to 11 to the extent possible. Thus, for example, only even
numbers are possible for the vector groups Yy and Dd and only odd numbers are possible for Yd and Dy.
You do not need to change this setting for the example application described.
Function Group Capacitor Bank diff

Proceed with the following settings in the Capacitor bank diff function group for the I-DIFF function:
Parameter: Threshold (Setting the Characteristic-Curve Parameters)
• Default setting (_:11041:3) Threshold = 0.20 I/Irated,obj

You set the pickup threshold for the differential current with this parameter. This is the total current flowing
into the protection range during a short circuit, regardless of how it is distributed on the sides of the protected
object. The pickup value is relative to the rated current of the protected object. The default setting of 0.20
I/Irated,obj is a practical value between sensitivity and possible disturbing influence.
Parameter: Intersection 1 Irest
• Default setting (_:11041:101) Intersection 1 Irest = 0.67 I/Irated,obj

The maximum current of the measuring point is used as restraint current. If you have to expect dynamic
transmission faults of the current transformer even with small currents, half of the rated current is an
appropriate setting value.
Parameter: Slope 1
• Default setting (_:11041:100) Slope 1 = 0.30

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the Slope 1, you avoid an overfunction of the differential protection with low-current external faults as
a consequence of current-transformer transmission faults (stationary and dynamic faults). The default setting
of 0.30 is sufficient for many applications.
Parameter: Intersection 2 Irest
• Default setting (_:11041:103) Intersection 2 Irest = 2.50 I/Irated,obj
NOTE
i If excessive current flows are cause to expect transmission problems for the current transformer, set Slope
2 to a higher value.
The parameter Intersection 2 Irest determines from which restraint current the Slope 2 begins. The
default setting 2.50 I/Irated,obj is a practical value.
Parameter: Slope 2
• Default setting (_:11041:102) Slope 2 = 0.70

With the parameter Slope 2, an overfunction of the differential protection is avoided with high-current
external faults as a consequence of current-transformer transmission faults (for example, due to saturation).
A value greater than or equal to double the value of Slope 1 is practical. As the default setting, 0.70 was
selected.
[dwdifaus-030912-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-75 Characteristic Curve with the Default Settings

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Starting detection
• Default setting (_:11041:106) Starting detection = yes

To avoid an overfunction when connecting the capacitor banks, you can set the parameter Starting
detection = yes. Siemens recommends using the setting Starting detection = yes.
Parameter: Thresh. startup detection
• Default setting (_:11041:107) Thresh. startup detection = 0.1 I/Irated,obj

If the restraint current falls below this threshold value, the subsequently set characteristic-curve increase
becomes effective with activated function. The default setting value of 0.1 I/Irated,obj is recommended
for the application.
Parameter: Factor increasing char.
• Default setting (_:11041:108) Factor increasing char. = 2.0

An increase to the value 2.0 has proven itself to be sufficient for many applications.
Parameter: Max. perm. Start. time
• Default setting (_:11041:109) Max. perm. Start. time = 5.0 s

The setting value must lie above the maximum permissible starting time of the connected capacitor bank.
To ensure tripping by the capacitor-bank protection (make time/starting time supervision) and avoid overfunc-
tions, select a somewhat longer time (factor of 1.2 or higher).
Parameter: Factor increasing char. DC (DC-Component Detection)
• Default setting (_:11041:110) Factor increasing char. DC = 2.3

DC-component detection is always active. As a result of the DC components, transmission problems can arise
(for example, phase-angle rotations) in current transformers with small currents flowing. For this reason, the
Threshold and the Slope 1 are raised by the set factor. The default setting of 2.3 has proven itself with
numerous applications.
Parameter: Blocking with 2. harmonic (Inrush-Current Detection)
• Default setting (_:11041:115) Blocking with 2. harmonic = no

The inrush-current detection is not necessary for the capacitor-bank applications.
• Default setting (_:11041:116) 2nd harmonic content = 15 %

For many practical applications, the default setting value of 15 % has proven useful. In exceptional cases, the
setting value can be decreased with a small proportion of 2nd harmonic. Avoid a setting under 10 %, however.
With an internal fault and current-transformer saturation, some proportion of 2nd harmonic also arises. Too
sensitive of a setting leads to a blocking of the protection function.
Parameter: Crossblock. time 2nd har.
• Default setting (_:11041:117) Crossblock. time 2nd har. = 0.00 s

Since the inrush currents develop differently in the 3 phases, the pickup value, for example, is not attained
in a phase, but the differential current exceeds the characteristic curve. Corrective action creates a mutual
blocking. If a time unequal to 0 s is set, the crossblock function works. If an overfunction arises, the setting
cannot be made until commissioning takes place. Do not set the duration for an excessive amount of time.
Practical values showed a setting between 3 and 5 periods.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Detection of External Faults

In Figure 7-75, the range Add-on stabilization of external faults is represented. The range is described
by the parameters Threshold add-on stabiliz. and Slope 1. With an external short circuit, the
differential currents can increase beyond this range and reach into the tripping area. With the following
parameters, time-limited blocking can be performed.
Parameter: Threshold add-on stabiliz.
• Default setting (_:11041:128) Threshold add-on stabiliz. = 2.00

The Threshold add-on stabiliz. parameter allows you to set the pickup value for the additional
stabilization. Due to the selected method of measurement, a setting value of 2.00 is practical. The additional
stabilization range is limited by the parameters Threshold add-on stabiliz. and Slope 1.
Parameter: Time of add-on stabiliz.
• Default setting (_:11041:129) Time of add-on stabiliz. = 0.30 s

As orientation for the setting value, you can use the operate time of the external feeder protection. Addition-
ally, take into account the break time of the circuit breaker. Thus, the following calculation rule results:
tZ rest ≥ tTrip,ext protection + tTrip,circuit breaker
The default value is a practical value. You must adapt the value appropriately to use. The value 0 deactivates
the detection of external faults.
Parameter: Crossblk. time add-on st.
• Default setting (_:11041:130) Crossblk. time add-on st. = 0.30 s

The additional stabilization acts separately on each phase. However, it can be extended to block all phases.
Siemens recommends the activation of the crossblock function with a corresponding setting of the time. The
set time must be identical to the time that is set for the duration of the additional stabilization.
Protection Stage I-DIFF Fast

The task of this protection stage is the fast detection of high-current internal short circuits (see also I-DIFF Fast
Differential Protection Function, Page 1369). For this reason, the protection stage must always be activated.
• Default setting (_:11071:3) Threshold = 7.5 I/Irated,obj

Siemens recommends that the threshold value is set greater or equal to the starting current.
Protection Stage I-DIFF Unrestrained

The task of this protection stage is the fast detection of high-current internal faults (see also I-DIFF Unre-
strained Differential Protection Function, Page 1372).
• Default setting (_:18002:3)Threshold = 10.0 I/Irated,obj

Use the description of the protection stage I-DIFF fast (Protection Stage I-DIFF Fast, Page 1381) to set the
threshold value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.9.5 Settings

General
_:11041:1 I-DIFF:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11041:2 I-DIFF:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
_:11041:6 I-DIFF:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
Operate curve
_:11041:3 I-DIFF:Threshold 0.05 I/IrObj to 2.00 I/IrObj 0.20 I/IrObj
_:11041:100 I-DIFF:Slope 1 0.00 to 0.80 0.30
_:11041:101 I-DIFF:Intersection 1 Irest 0.00 I/IrObj to 5.00 I/IrObj 0.67 I/IrObj
_:11041:102 I-DIFF:Slope 2 0.25 to 0.95 0.70
_:11041:103 I-DIFF:Intersection 2 Irest 1.00 I/IrObj to 20.00 I/IrObj 2.50 I/IrObj
Starting detection
_:11041:106 I-DIFF:Starting detection • no no
• yes
_:11041:107 I-DIFF:Thresh. startup 0.1 I/IrObj to 2.0 I/IrObj 0.1 I/IrObj
detection
_:11041:108 I-DIFF:Factor increasing 1.0 to 5.0 2.0
char.
_:11041:109 I-DIFF:Max. perm. Start. 0.1 s to 180.0 s 5.0 s
time
DC offset detection
_:11041:110 I-DIFF:Factor increasing 1.0 to 5.0 2.3
char. DC
Inrush blocking
_:11041:115 I-DIFF:Blocking with 2. • no no
harmonic
• yes
_:11041:116 I-DIFF:2nd harmonic 10% to 45% 15%
content
_:11041:117 I-DIFF:Crossblock. time 0.00 s to 200.00 s; ∞ 0.00 s
2nd har.
Ext. fault detection
_:11041:128 I-DIFF:Threshold add-on 1.00 I/IrObj to 20.00 I/IrObj 2.00 I/IrObj
stabiliz.
_:11041:129 I-DIFF:Time of add-on 0.00 s to 5.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
stabiliz.
_:11041:130 I-DIFF:Crossblk. time 0.00 s to 2.00 s; ∞ 0.30 s
add-on st.
I-DIFF fast
_:11071:1 I-DIFF fast:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11071:3 I-DIFF fast:Threshold 0.5 I/IrObj to 35.0 I/IrObj 7.5 I/IrObj
_:11071:6 I-DIFF fast:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:11071:100 I-DIFF fast:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
I-DIFF unrestr
_:1 I-DIFF unrestr:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3 I-DIFF unrestr:Threshold 0.5 I/IrObj to 35.0 I/IrObj 10.0 I/IrObj
_:6 I-DIFF unrestr:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:100 I-DIFF unrestr:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:I diff. WYE O
_:2311:301 General:I restr. WYE O
_:2311:311 General:I diff. operate phA MV O
_:2311:312 General:I diff. operate phB MV O
_:2311:313 General:I diff. operate phC MV O
_:2311:314 General:I restr. operate phA MV O
_:2311:315 General:I restr. operate phB MV O
_:2311:316 General:I restr. operate phC MV O
_:2311:317 General:Adapt. adjustm. inact. SPS O
I-DIFF
_:11041:81 I-DIFF:>Block stage SPS I
_:11041:51 I-DIFF:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:11041:54 I-DIFF:Inactive SPS O
_:11041:52 I-DIFF:Behavior ENS O
_:11041:53 I-DIFF:Health ENS O
_:11041:55 I-DIFF:Pickup ACD O
_:11041:56 I-DIFF:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:11041:57 I-DIFF:Operate ACT O
_:11041:301 I-DIFF:Slope 1 MV O
_:11041:302 I-DIFF:Incr. of char. (Start) SPS O
_:11041:303 I-DIFF:Increase of char. (DC) SPS O
_:11041:304 I-DIFF:Blocked by inrush SPS O
_:11041:305 I-DIFF:Blocked by 2.Harmon. ACT O
_:11041:306 I-DIFF:Crossblock by 2.Harm. SPS O
_:11041:312 I-DIFF:Blocked by ext. fault ACT O
_:11041:313 I-DIFF:Crossbl. by ext. fault SPS O
_:11041:316 I-DIFF:CWA int. fault detected SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
I-DIFF fast
_:11071:81 I-DIFF fast:>Block stage SPS I
_:11071:51 I-DIFF fast:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:11071:54 I-DIFF fast:Inactive SPS O
_:11071:52 I-DIFF fast:Behavior ENS O
_:11071:53 I-DIFF fast:Health ENS O
_:11071:55 I-DIFF fast:Pickup ACD O
_:11071:57 I-DIFF fast:Operate ACT O
_:11071:56 I-DIFF fast:Operate delay expired ACT O
I-DIFF unrestr
_:18002:81 I-DIFF unrestr:>Block stage SPS I
_:18002:54 I-DIFF unrestr:Inactive SPS O
_:18002:52 I-DIFF unrestr:Behavior ENS O
_:18002:53 I-DIFF unrestr:Health ENS O
_:18002:55 I-DIFF unrestr:Pickup ACD O
_:18002:57 I-DIFF unrestr:Operate ACT O
_:18002:56 I-DIFF unrestr:Operate delay expired ACT O
Group indicat.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
7.10 Detuning Supervision for Capacitor Banks
7.10.1 AC-Filter Detuning Supervision
Tuned AC filters serve to provide reactive power and to absorb specific frequencies from the busbar. They
usually consist of the upper-voltage side capacitor (for providing reactive power) and the tuning section (for
tuning to the frequencies to be absorbed). The tuning section consists of primary C, L and, if required, R
elements, refer also to Figure 7-76.
Under normal operation, the RLC characteristics of the filter – the impedances – are identical per phase. A
change in the impedance of one phase indicates that the filter characteristic of this phase has changed. This
situation (a detuned filter) is not wanted and shall be detected.
The primary elements of the AC filter shall be subject of regular maintenance intervals where the compliance
with the tolerances of the rated values specified in the design need to be checked. For the detection of
detuning between the maintenance intervals, the protection device can be applied. Detuning supervision for
the upper-voltage side voltage capacitor can be achieved by applying the phase-selective Current unbalance
function (ANSI 60C), especially by using the counter function.
A criterion for the supervision of the primary elements of the tuning section is the ground or zero-sequence
current (3I0) of the AC filter. The fundamental phase current of the AC filter is determined by the phase
capacitance of the upper-voltage side capacitor. Consequently, a difference in the phase capacitances of
the upper-voltage side capacitor will cause a fundamental ground current. Therefore it is not sufficient for
the tuning-section supervision to evaluate only the fundamental ground current. Under normal operation
and symmetrical network conditions, the fundamental ground current will be 0. An unbalance in the phase
impedances (detuning) will cause a ground current. A detuning of the tuning section will mainly cause
harmonics in the ground current. Thus, the RMS value of the ground current needs to be evaluated. For a
detuning supervision of the tuning section, the function OCP, ground (ANSI 50N) with the measuring method
RMS value is applied. This allows detecting harmonics up to the 50th harmonic with high precision (refer also
to Technical data).
When selecting the settings (pickup value, operate delay and function mode) for the function OCP, ground
(ANSI 50N) the present network connecting conditions must be considered! Otherwise short-term power-
system unbalances (for example, 1-pole fast auto reclosing) or statically present harmonics in the zero-
sequence system may cause an overfunction. Since the primary elements of the AC filter are directly or
inherently protected by other protection functions and due to the possible influence of the network conditions
on the function OCP, ground (ANSI 50N), this function should be configured only as alarm function and not as
tripping function.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_AC-Filter_detuning-supervision, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-76 Application Overview

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
8 Control Functions
8.1 Introduction 1388

8.2 Switching Devices 1391
8.3 Control Functionality 1421
8.4 Synchronization Function 1446
8.5 Switching Sequences 1513
8.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control] 1520
8.7 CFC-Chart Settings 1525
8.8 Tap Changers 1527
8.9 Voltage Controller 1539
8.10 Point-on-Wave Switching 1617

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.1 Introduction
8.1 Introduction
8.1.1 Overview
The SIPROTEC 5 series of devices offers powerful command processing capability as well as additional func-
tions that are needed when serving as bay controllers for the substation automation technology or when
providing combi-protection. The object model for the devices is based on the IEC 61850 standard, making
the SIPROTEC 5 series of devices ideally suited for use in systems employing the IEC 61850 communication
protocol. In view of the function blocks necessary for the control functions, other logs are also used.
8.1.2 Concept of Controllables
The concept of so-called controllables is based on the data model described in IEC 61850. Controllables are
objects that can be controlled, such as a switch with feedback. The model of a transformer tap changer, for
example, contains controllables. The controllables are identifiable by their last letter C of the data type (for
example, DPC = Double Point Controllable/Double Command with feedback or BSC = Binary-Controlled Step
Position Indication / transformer tap command with feedback).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.1 Introduction
[sc_control, 1, en_US]
(1) Position (connect with binary inputs)

(2) Signalization of the current condition
(3) Command output (connect with relay)
The trip, opening, and the close commands are connected to the relays. For the trip command, a choice
between saved and unsaved output is possible. The position is connected with 2 binary inputs (double-point
indication). In addition, signals are available that display the current state of the switch (not selected, off,
on, intermediate position, disturbed position). These signals can be queried in CFC, for example, in order to
build interlocking conditions.
Control Models
You can set the operating mode of the controllables by selecting the control model.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.1 Introduction
4 different control models are available:
• Direct without feedback monitoring (direct w. normal secur.)
• With reservation (SBO)49 without feedback monitoring (SBO w. normal secur.)
• Direct with feedback monitoring (direct w. enh. security)
• With SBO with feedback monitoring (SBO w. enh. security)

The next figure shows the command sources, command types, and control models.
[dw_steuer, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-1 Command Sources, Command Types, and Control Models
The figure shows the control models (right) with the respective control mechanisms (center). The standard
control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850 compliant system is SBO with feedback monitoring
(SBO w. enh. security). This control model is the default setting for newly created switching devices.
49 SBO: Select Before Operate

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.2 Switching Devices
8.2.1 General Overview
You can find the following switching devices in the DIGSI 5 library in the function groups Circuit breaker and
Switching devices (see following figures).
[sc_cb_ausw, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-2 Selecting the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device Using the DIGSI Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Menu
[scswausw, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-3 Selecting the Remaining Switching Devices Using the DIGSI Switching-Devices Menu
8.2.2 Switching Device Circuit Breaker
8.2.2.1 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device

This chapter describes the control properties of the Circuit-breaker switching device.
The Circuit-breaker switching device contains the following function blocks that are needed for control:
• Function block Circuit breaker
• Function block Interlocking

This corresponds to the logical nodes XCBR, CSWI, and CILO in IEC 61850.
In the case of protection devices or combined protection and control devices, additional functions can be
contained in the Circuit-breaker switching device, for example, Synchrocheck, the Automatic reclosing
(AREC), the Trip logic, or Manual On function. However, these are not relevant for the control function. You
can find the description of these functions in the chapter Protection and Automatic Functions. In addition,
other functions can be initialized. You can find the description of these functions in the chapter Protection
Functions.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_breake, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-4 Control Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device
The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is linked with the binary inputs that acquire the switch position via informa-
tion routing. The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is also linked with the binary outputs that issue the switching
commands.
NOTE
i When setting the parameters of a device, you will find 2 circuit-breaker types in the DIGSI 5 library:
- 3-pole circuit breaker or 1-pole circuit breaker, depending on the device type selected (3-pole or 1-pole
tripping)
- Circuit breaker [status only]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Function Blocks of the Circuit Breaker
Table 8-1 Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Function Description Parameter Function

Block
Circuit The Circuit-breaker function Output time The circuit breaker forms the
breaker block in the SIPROTEC 5 switch position from the posi-
device represents the physical tions of the binary inputs and
switch. also outputs the command via
the binary outputs.
Control Command processing Control model Command check, communi-
SBO time-out cation with the command
Feedback monitoring time source and with the function
block Circuit breaker
Check switching
authority
Check if pos. is reached
Check double activat.
blk.
Check blk. by protection
Inter- Switchgear interlocking Interlocking condition (depos- The functionality Interlocking
locking protection ited in CFC) generates the releases
for switchgear interlocking
protection.
For the setting values of the parameter, refer to 8.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Additional Setting Options of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Element

The setting options of the circuit breaker are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance.
Additional setting options of the circuit breakers that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function
blocks are nevertheless available:
Table 8-2 Setting Options of the Controllable Cmd. with feedback in the Function Block Control of
the Circuit Breaker.
Properties Function To Be Found in

Software filtering time Software filtering time for position Position of the function block
detection Control 50
Retrigger filter (yes/no) Switching retriggering of the Position of the function block
filtering time on/off by changing Control 50
the position
Message time before Consideration of the hardware Position of the function block
filtering (yes/no) filtering time for position-detection Control50
time stamp
Suppress intermediate When activated, only the inter- Position of the function block
position (yes/no) mediate position is suppressed Control 50
by the duration of the software
filtering time.
50 First click Position and then click the Details key in the Properties window (below).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

Treatment of spontaneous If you select the General soft- Position of the function block
position changes (Gen. Soft- ware filter setting, the general Control 50
ware Filt./Spont. Software Filt.) settings for software filtering of
spontaneous position changes and
for position changes caused by
a switching command apply. By
selecting Spontaneous soft-
ware filter, a separate filtering
is activated for spontaneous posi-
tion changes.
Spontaneous software Software filtering time for sponta- Position of the function block
filtering time neous position changes Control 50
Spontaneous retrigger Switching on/off retriggering of the Position of the function block
filter (yes/no) filtering time by spontaneous posi- Control 50
tion change
Spontaneous indication Consideration of the hardware Position of the function block
timestamp before filtering filtering time for position-detection Control 50
(yes/no) time stamp in case of a sponta-
neous change
Inhibit intermediate posi- When activated, only the sponta- Position of the function block
tion for a spontaneous neous change to the intermediate Control 50
chng. (yes/no) position is suppressed by the dura-
tion of the software filtering time.
Table 8-3 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)

Chatter blocking (yes/no) Switching chatter blocking on/off Position of the function block
Circuit breaker50
Table 8-4 Additional Settings in the Device Settings Having Effects on the Circuit Breaker

Number of permissible Chatter-blocking setting value: Device settings (to be found under
status changes Once for the entire device Settings)
Chatter test time
Number of chatter tests
Chatter idle time
Chatter check time
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the function blocks Circuit breaker and Control are
described in the next section (refer to 8.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker).
Interlocking
The function block Interlocking generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, refer to the general chapter
8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.
Circuit Breaker
The Circuit-breaker function block in the SIPROTEC 5 device represents the physical switch device. The task of
the circuit breaker is to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Circuit-breaker function block.
[dw_func_ls, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-5 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Blocks
Table 8-5 and Table 8-6 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect of Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
EXAMPLE
If the signal >Ready has the Quality = invalid, then the value is set to cleared. In problematic operating
states, the circuit breaker should signal that it is not ready for an Off-On-Off cycle.
Table 8-5 Inputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
Signal Name Description Type Default Value if

Signal Quality =
invalid
>Ready The signal >Ready indicates that the OFF-ON-OFF SPS Going
cycle is possible with the circuit breaker.
This signal is used for the AREC standby status.
>Acquisition The binary input activates acquisition blocking. You SPS Unchanged
blocking can also set this binary input with an external toggle
switch.
>Reset Acquisition blocking and the substitution of the circuit SPS Unchanged
AcqBlk&Subst breaker are reset with this input. If the input is acti-
vated, setting the acquisition blocking and the substi-
tution is blocked.
>Reset switch Among other things, the binary input sets the opera- SPS Unchanged
statist. tion counter for the switch to the value 0.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Signal Name Description Type Default Value if

Signal Quality =
invalid
External health The binary input External health reflects the ENS Unchanged
circuit-breaker status (EHealth).
This input will be set by the CFC using the BUILD_ENS
block. In turn, BUILD_ENS can query binary inputs that
represent the conditions OK, Warning, or Alarm (as
a result of the function Trip-circuit supervision).
Position The signal Position can be used to read the circuit- DPC Unchanged
breaker position with double-point indication.
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (EHealth) of the
Circuit-breaker function block is set to Warning.
Table 8-6 Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
Signal Name Description Type

Definitive trip Protection has finally been tripped. SPS
Alarm suppression The signaling contact for external alarm inhibition is suppressed during SPS
the runtime of automatic reclosing (optional) as well as during the
command output of switching commands.
Op.ct. The information counts the number of switching cycles of the circuit INS
breaker.
Trip/open cmd. This logic output is responsible for the command output Off. SPS
Close command This logic output is responsible for the command output On. SPS
Command active The binary output Command active is responsible for signaling a SPS
running command (relay active or selected switching device (SEL)).
CB open hours The statistical value counts the hours the circuit breaker is open. INS
Operating hours The statistical value counts the hours where at least one phase current is INS
greater than the Current thresh. CB open parameter.
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the circuit breaker. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed
(see also chapter 8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation51), the switching device is reserved prior to the
actual switching operation, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These 2 options can be selected individually in
the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security52 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
51 In the IEC 61850 standard, reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
52 This default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 1.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
advanced
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes
(_:4201:107) Check blk. by protection yes no
yes
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Control function block.
[dw_steue1, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-6 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Control Function Block
Table 8-7 Control Function Block Input and Output
Signal Description Type Value if Signal

Name Quality=Invalid
Cmd. with With the Cmd. with feedback signal, the circuit- Controllable Unchanged
feedback breaker position is accepted via the double-point indi- (DPC)
cation of the Circuit-breaker function block and the Unchanged
command is issued.
In the information routing of DIGSI 5, you may select a function key as a possible command source. In
addition, it is displayed here if the command is activated by CFC. The logging is routed here.
8.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker

For each switching device, you can establish the number of poles (for example, 1-pole, 1.5-pole or 2-pole) that
are switched with or without feedback. This results in the necessary amount of information to be processed,
thus establishing the command type.
Whether the circuit breaker is triggered 1-, 1.5-, or 2-pole, depends on the design of the auxiliary and
control-voltage system. In most cases, the activation of the opening coil of the circuit breaker is 1-pole.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Table 8-8 Meaning of the Abbreviations of the Connection Variants
Abbreviation Meaning of the Abbreviation of the Connection Variants

BO Binary output
L+; L- Control voltage
A Trip command
Gnd Close command
Table 8-9 Meaning of the Abbreviations in DIGSI
Abbreviation Description of the Input in DIGSI

V Unsaved trip command
Click the right mouse button and enter V.
X Close Command
Click the right mouse button and enter X for the respective binary output.
OH The switching-device feedback is in the position OFF, if there is voltage present at the
routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter OH.
OL The switching-device feedback is in the position OFF, if there is no voltage present at
the routed binary input (L).
Click the right mouse button and enter OL.
CH The switching-device feedback is in the position ON, if there is voltage present at the
routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter CH.
CL The switching-device feedback is in the position ON, if there is no voltage present at
the routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter CL.
TL Trip command stored
Click the right mouse button and enter TL.
Connection Variant: 3-Pole Circuit Breaker

This is the standard type for the control function. All 3 individual poles of the circuit breaker are triggered
together by a double command.
[dw_3-pole_ls, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-7 3-Pole Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
1-Pole Triggering
[dw_1-pole, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-8 1-Pole Triggering
[sc_rang1p_cb1p, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-9 1-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another. The
letter U represents an unlatched command. Alternatively, TL (latched tripping) can be selected.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
1.5-Pole Triggering
Figure 8-10 1.5-Pole Triggering
[sc_rang_1p_cb15p, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-11 1.5-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
2-Pole Triggering
[dw_2-pole-open, 1, en_US]
[sc_rang_1p_cb13p, 1, en_US]
Connection Variant: 1-Pole Circuit Breaker

The 1-pole circuit breaker is used for separate activation and acquisition of the individual poles of a circuit
breaker. It is intended for joint use by 1-pole protection and control functions.
NOTE
i The wiring of the Circuit-breaker function group with binary inputs and binary outputs occurs 1 time per
device.
The control function in this type switches all 3 poles on or off simultaneously.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
The protection functions can switch off 1-pole. The close command is always 3-pole. Optionally only the open
poles are closed.
[dw_1polls, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-14 Circuit Breaker with 1-Pole Triggering
For the circuit breaker with 1-pole triggering, triggering takes place via one relay per phase for the trip
command and via a 4th relay for the close command (see next figure).
[dw_1panls, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-15 1-Pole Connection of a Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_rang_1p_cb13pz, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-16 Routing in DIGSI
In the previous figure, the switch is connected 1-pole. The protection trip command is routed individually for
the 3 phases (Trip only pole A to Trip only pole C). The protection trip command is routed for the
3 phases (Trip/open cmd. 3-pole). The control always switches off the 3 poles of the switch. In addition,
the 3 U (Unlatched) routings of the trip command and open command are set to 3-pole. This routing is also
used by protection functions that trip 3 poles. The close command is issued simultaneously for all 3 phases.
Example: Trip Command during Transition from 1-Pole to 3-Pole

During a transition from 1-pole to 3-pole tripping Trip only pole A remains active. When, for example
informing an external AREC whether it is a 1-pole or 3-pole tripping, you can use the indication Trip
logic:Trip indication:1-pole and Trip logic:Trip indication:3-pole.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_trip-command_between_1p-3p, 1, en_US]
Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Position

The binary inputs for feedback of the switch position are routed as shown in the previous figure (see also see
5.7.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information ).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_rang_1p_cb_Hk, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-17 Routing of the 1-Pole in DIGSI
You can find the meaning of abbreviations in Table 8-8 and Table 8-9.
The indication Command active can also be routed to a binary output. This binary output is always active if
either a close or trip command is pending, or the switching device was selected by the command control.
8.2.2.4 Settings

Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
normal current
_:2311:102 General:Rated 0.10 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
voltage
Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
thresh. CB open 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:136 General:Op. mode • unbalancing unbalancing
BFP
• I> query

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

Trip logic
_:5341:103 Trip logic:Reset of • with I< with I<
trip command
• with dropout
Circuit break.
_:4261:101 Circuit 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 0.10 s
break.:Output time
_:4261:105 Circuit • with trip always
break.:Indicat. of
breaking values
• always
Manual close
_:6541:101 Manual 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
close:Action time
_:6541:102 Manual close:CB 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
open dropout delay
Control
_:4201:101 Control:Control • status only SBO w. enh.
model security
• direct w. normal secur.
• SBO w. normal secur.
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:4201:102 Control:SBO time- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
out
_:4201:103 Control:Feedback 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
monitoring time
_:4201:104 Control:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
• advanced
_:4201:105 Control:Check if • no yes
pos. is reached
• yes
_:4201:106 Control:Check • no yes
double activat. blk.
• yes
_:4201:107 Control:Check blk. • no yes
by protection
• yes
Switching authority
_:4201:151 Control:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth.
• 1
_:4201:152 Control:Specific sw. • 0 true
authorities
• 1
_:4201:115 Control:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for
• station/remote
• remote
_:4201:153 Control:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:4201:155 Control:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

sw.auth. 2
sw.auth. 3
sw.auth. 4
sw.auth. 5
_:4201:154 Control:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth.
• 1
CB test
_:6151:101 CB test:Dead time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
_:6151:102 CB test:Trip only • 0 false
• 1
_:6151:103 CB test:Consider • 0 false
current criterion
• 1
_:6151:104 CB test:Current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A

(Type)
Trip logic
_:5341:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O
_:5341:58 Trip logic:Trip ind.:Busbar diff.prt. ACT O
_:5341:59 Trip logic:Trip ind.:Busbar BFP ACT O
_:5341:60 Trip logic:Trip ind.:Busbar ext.trip ACT O
_:5341:52 Trip logic:Behavior ENS O
_:5341:53 Trip logic:Health ENS O
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:4261:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:4261:505 Circuit break.:>Trip release BBP SPS I
_:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:4261:52 Circuit break.:Behavior ENS O
_:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position 3-pole DPC C
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. 3-pole SPS O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:4261:410 Circuit break.:Open cmd. 1-pole phsA SPS O
_:4261:411 Circuit break.:Open cmd. 1-pole phsB SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
_:4261:412 Circuit break.:Open cmd. 1-pole phsC SPS O
_:4261:413 Circuit break.:Close cmd. 1-pole phsA SPS O
_:4261:414 Circuit break.:Close cmd. 1-pole phsB SPS O
_:4261:415 Circuit break.:Close cmd. 1-pole phsC SPS O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:4261:416 Circuit break.:PoW capability ENS O
_:4261:326 Circuit break.:BBP trip relays blocked SPS O
_:4261:327 Circuit break.:no release of trip cmd SPS O
_:4261:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:4261:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. BCR O
_:4261:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. BCR O
_:4261:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. BCR O
_:4261:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk. BCR O
_:4261:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:4261:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:4261:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:4261:317 Circuit break.:Break. current 3I0/IN MV O
_:4261:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:4261:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:4261:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:4261:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:4261:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O
Manual close
_:6541:501 Manual close:>Block manual close SPS I
_:6541:500 Manual close:>Input SPS I
_:6541:300 Manual close:Detected SPS O
_:6541:52 Manual close:Behavior ENS O
_:6541:53 Manual close:Health ENS O
Reset LED Group
Control
_:4201:503 Control:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:4201:504 Control:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:4201:505 Control:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:4201:506 Control:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:4201:52 Control:Behavior ENS O
_:4201:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:4201:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C
_:4201:302 Control:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:4201:308 Control:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
_:4201:313 Control:Switching authority ENS O
_:4201:314 Control:Switching mode ENS O
Interlocking
_:4231:500 Interlocking:>Enable opening SPS I
_:4231:501 Interlocking:>Enable closing SPS I
_:4231:502 Interlocking:>Enable opening(fixed) SPS I
_:4231:503 Interlocking:>Enable closing (fixed) SPS I
_:4231:52 Interlocking:Behavior ENS O
_:4231:53 Interlocking:Health ENS O
CB test
_:6151:52 CB test:Behavior ENS O
_:6151:53 CB test:Health ENS O
_:6151:301 CB test:Test execution ENS O
_:6151:302 CB test:Trip command issued ENS O
_:6151:303 CB test:Close command issued ENS O
_:6151:304 CB test:Test canceled ENS O
_:6151:311 CB test:3-pole open-close SPC C
8.2.3 Disconnector Switching Device
8.2.3.1 Structure of the Disconnector Switching Device

Like the circuit breaker, the Disconnector switching device contains the following 3 function blocks:
• Function block Disconnector
• Function block Interlocking

This corresponds to the logical nodes XSWI, CSWI, and CILO in IEC 61850.
NOTE
i In contrast to the Circuit-breaker switching device, the Disconnector switching device cannot contain
any additional functions because protection functions or synchronization can have no effect on the discon-
nector.
The following figure shows the structure of the Disconnector switching element:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_discon, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-18 Control-Relevant Function Blocks of the Disconnector Switching Device
The Disconnector switching device behaves like the Circuit-breaker switching device. The only difference
is the designation of the function block that the physical switch provides (disconnector instead of circuit
breaker). Blocking by protection is not provided in the analysis of the Control function block.
The Disconnector switching device is available in the DIGSI 5 library in 2 different variants:
• Disconnector with 3-pole connection

The device switches all 3 poles of the disconnector on or off simultaneously.
• Disconnector without triggering (only status detection, no control)

This variant is rarely encountered. It is encountered with grounding switches that frequently cannot
be controlled, but only provide their current position. In addition, the position of a disconnector in a
neighboring bay can be acquired.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Function Blocks of the Disconnector
Table 8-10 Function Blocks of the Disconnector Function Group
Function Description Parameter Function

Block
Discon- The disconnector represents Maximum output time The disconnector replicates
nector the physical switch in the Seal-in time the switch position from
SIPROTEC 5 device. Switching-device type the status of the binary
inputs and also transmits
the command via the binary
outputs.
Control Command processing Control model Command checks, commu-
SBO time-out nication with the command
Feedback monitoring time source and with the func-
tion block Disconnector
Check switching authority
Check if pos. is reached
Check double activat.
blk.
Inter- Switchgear interlocking Interlocking condition (deposited The Interlocking function-
locking protection in CFC) ality generates the releases
for switchgear interlocking
protection.
You can find the setting values of the parameter in 8.2.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Additional Settings of Disconnector Switching Element

The settings of the disconnector are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance. Additional
disconnector settings that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function blocks and are identical to the
circuit-breaker settings are available:
Table 8-11 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function
Block of the Circuit Breaker
Characteristics Function To Be Found in

Software filtering time Software filtering time for position Position of the Control(1) function
detection block
Retrigger filter (yes/no) Switching retriggering of the Position of the Control(1) function
filtering time on/off by changing block
the position
Message time before Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control(1) function
filtering (yes/no) filtering time for position-detection block
time stamp
Suppress intermediate When activated, only the inter- Position of the Control(1) function
position (yes/no) mediate position is suppressed block
by the duration of the software
filtering time.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

Spontaneous position If the General software Position of the Control(1) function
changes filtered by (Gen. filter setting is selected, the block
Software Filt./Spont. Software Filt.) general settings for software
filtering of spontaneous position
changes and for position changes
caused by a switching command
apply. By selecting Spontaneous
software filter, a separate
filtering is activated for sponta-
neous position changes.
Spontaneous software Software filtering time for sponta- Position of the Control(1) function
filter time neous position changes block
Spontaneous retrigger Switching on/off retriggering of the Position of the Control(1) function
filter (yes/no) filtering time by spontaneous posi- block
tion change
Spontaneous indication Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control(1) function
timestamp before filtering filtering time for position-detection block
(yes/no) time stamp in case of a sponta-
neous change
Spontaneous suppress When activated, only the sponta- Position of the Control(1) function
intermediate position neous change to the intermediate block
(yes/no) position is suppressed by the dura-
tion of the software filtering time.
(1) First click Position and then click the Details button in the Properties window (below).
Table 8-12 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Disconnector Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)

Chatter blocking (yes/no) Switching chatter blocking on/off Position of the Disconnector (1)
function block
(1) First click Position and then click the Details button in the Properties window (below).
Table 8-13 Additional Settings in the Device Settings with Effects on the Disconnector

Number of permissible Chatter-blocking setting value: Device settings (to be found under
state changes Once for the entire device Settings)
Chatter test time
Number of chatter tests
Chatter dead time
Chatter test time
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Disconnector switch function block are described
in 8.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector. The Control function block is described identically as the
Circuit-breaker function block, with the exception that the command check blocking is available through
protection only with the circuit breaker.
You can find more information on this in 8.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The
actual interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, see the general chapter
8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Disconnector
The disconnector represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device. The task of the disconnector is to
replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.
The Disconnector function block is linked automatically via the information matrix with the binary inputs that
register the switch position and with the binary outputs that issue the switching commands.
The Disconnector function block makes the following settings available (see next table).
(_:5401:101) Maximum output time 10.00 s 0.02 s to 1800 s
The Maximum output time specifies the dura- (Increment: 0.01 s)
tion of the output pulse created by the switching
command.
(_:5401:102) Seal-in time 0.00 s 0 s to 60 s
If the target actuating position is not yet attained
although feedback has already been received, the
output time is extended by the Seal-in time.
The Seal-in time is relevant for equipment that
sends feedback before the switching operation is
completely performed. The Seal-in time is only
considered for control models with feedback moni-
toring.
(_:5401:103) Switching-device type disconnector switch-disconnector
The Switching-device type specifies the type of disconnector
the switching device. grounding switch
fast grounding switch
NOTE
i The parameter Switching-device type is effective only on the IEC 61850 interface. This parameter is
used to set the disconnector switching device type for communication via IEC 61850. It is a mandatory data
object in the IEC 61850 standard.
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Disconnector function block.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_out_inp, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-19 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Disconnector Function Block
Table 8-14 and Table 8-15 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect of Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
Table 8-14 Inputs of the Disconnector Function Block
Signal Name Description Type Value if Signal

Quality=Invalid
>Acquisition The binary input activates acquisition blocking. You SPS Unchanged
blocking can also set this binary input with an external toggle
switch.
>Reset Acquisition blocking and the substitution of the circuit SPS Unchanged
AcqBlk&Subst breaker are reset with this input. If the input is acti-
vated, setting of the acquisition blocking and of the
substitution is blocked.
>Reset switch The binary input sets the operation counter for the SPS Unchanged
statist. switch to the value 0.
Position The binary input Position can be used to read the DPC Unchanged
disconnector position with double-point indication.
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (Health) of the
Disconnector function block is set to Warning.
Table 8-15 Outputs of the Disconnector Function Block

Open command This binary output is responsible for the command SPS
output Off.
Close command This binary output is responsible for the command SPS
output On.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

Command active The binary output Command active is a running SPS
command for the signalization (command active or
selected switching device). During Command active
either an On or Off command is active.
Op.ct. The information counts the number of disconnector INS
switching cycles.
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the disconnector. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed
(see also chapter 8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation53), the switching device is reserved prior to the
actual switching operation, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These two options can be selected individually in
the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security54 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s -
(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 10.00 s -
(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
advanced
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes
8.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector

The activation types are identical to those for the circuit breaker. The meaning of abbreviations can be found
in 8.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker and 8.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker.
Whether the disconnector is triggered for 1-, 1.5-, or 2-phases depends on the design of the auxiliary and
control voltage system.
53 In the IEC 61850 standard, Reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
54 This default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
1-Pole Triggering
[dw_1ptren, 1, en_US]
[scrangtrenn1p, 1, en_US]
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
1.5-Pole Triggering
Figure 8-22 1.5-Pole Triggering
Figure 8-23 1.5-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
2-Pole Triggering
[dw_2-pole-open, 1, en_US]
The feedback is routed via the position with the disconnector.
8.2.3.4 Settings

Control
_:4201:101 Control:Control model • status only SBO w. enh.
security
_:4201:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:4201:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
toring time

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:4201:104 Control:Check switching • no yes
authority
• yes
_:4201:105 Control:Check if pos. is • no yes
reached
• yes
_:4201:106 Control:Check double • no yes
activat. blk.
• yes
Disconnector
_:5401:101 Disconnector:Maximum 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
output time
_:5401:102 Disconnector:Seal-in time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:5401:103 Disconnector:Switching- • switch-disconnector disconnector
device type
• disconnector
• grounding switch
• fast grounding switch

(Type)
Control
_:4201:503 Control:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:4201:504 Control:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:4201:505 Control:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:4201:506 Control:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:4201:52 Control:Behavior ENS O
_:4201:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:4201:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C
_:4201:302 Control:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:4201:313 Control:Switching authority ENS O
_:4201:314 Control:Switching mode ENS O
Interlocking
_:4231:500 Interlocking:>Enable opening SPS I
_:4231:501 Interlocking:>Enable closing SPS I
_:4231:502 Interlocking:>Enable opening(fixed) SPS I
_:4231:503 Interlocking:>Enable closing (fixed) SPS I
_:4231:52 Interlocking:Behavior ENS O
_:4231:53 Interlocking:Health ENS O
Disconnector
_:5401:500 Disconnector:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:5401:501 Disconnector:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:5401:504 Disconnector:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:5401:52 Disconnector:Behavior ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
_:5401:53 Disconnector:Health ENS O
_:5401:58 Disconnector:Position DPC C
_:5401:300 Disconnector:Open command SPS O
_:5401:301 Disconnector:Close command SPS O
_:5401:302 Disconnector:Command active SPS O
_:5401:305 Disconnector:Op.ct. INS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.3 Control Functionality
8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection
Before switching commands can be issued by the SIPROTEC 5 device, several steps are used to check the
command:
• Switching mode (interlocked/non-interlocked)
• Switching authority (local/DIGSI/station/remote)
• Switching direction (set=actual)
• Bay interlocking and substation interlocking
• 1-out-of-n check (double-activation blocking)
• Blocking by protection function
Confirmation IDs (with Inactive RBAC)

SIPROTEC 5 devices can operate using role-based access control (RBAC). If RBAC is active in the device, the
authorizations to execute various actions are linked directly to the role concept.
If RBAC is inactive in the device, various actions are secured using the confirmation IDs. The following
confirmation IDs from the Safety menu apply to the control functions:
[sc_conf, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-26 Confirmation IDs in DIGSI 5: Settings Menu
The following table identifies the meanings of the confirmation IDs:
Table 8-16 Relevant Confirmation IDs for Controls
Confirmation ID Meaning Description

Setting Changing settings The confirmation ID is requested before the
device parameters can be changed.
Operation (function keys) Process data access via Access to process data is possible with the help of
function buttons push-buttons and function buttons. The confirma-
tion ID of Set/operation is requested.
Switching General release for control The confirmation ID is usually not needed for bay
of switching devices controllers. In the case of protection devices, this
confirmation ID can be used to safeguard control
of switching devices.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Confirmation ID Meaning Description

Switch./interl.check Switching non-interlocked Switching mode:
Release for switching without querying the inter-
locking conditions (S1 operation). The fixed
interlocking conditions (for example, >Enable
opening(fixed) and >Enable closing
(fixed)) are still queried if this is set in the
parameters.
The confirmation ID is queried only for devices
without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with
the key switch position.
Switch./switch.auth. Release for switching The confirmation ID is queried only for devices
authority Local without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with
the key switch position.
The confirmation IDs are preset with the following values:
• Setting 222222
• Switching 333333
• Switch./interl.check 444444
• Switch./switch.auth. 666666
If you have configured a device with key switches, the confirmation IDs for non-interlocked switching and
switching authority are not displayed or editable in DIGSI; the function is handled by the position of the key
switch.
To increase security, change these codes with DIGSI.
Switching Mode (Interlocked/Non-Interlocked)

The switching mode determines whether or not the switchgear interlocking that has been configured in the
CFC is checked before the command is output.
You can change the switching mode with the key switch S1 (interlocking off/normal). For devices without a
key switch, you can change the switching mode with a corresponding menu item on the display (after input
of a confirmation ID). You can also set the switching mode for switching commands from the sources DIGSI,
station or remote.
! DANGER
If the switching mode = non-interlocked, the switchgear interlocking protection is shut off.
Erroneous switching operations can lead to severe or fatal injuries.
² Ensure manually that all checks have been implemented.
In addition, you can set the switching mode directly with a binary input or CFC. Use the General function
block (see next figure).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_moscha, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-27 Switching Mode in Function Block General
The following table shows the effects of changing the switching mode to use command checks.
Table 8-17 Relationship Between Switching Mode and Command Checks
Command Check Switching Mode

Interlocked Non-Interlocked
Switching authority Checked Checked
Switching direction (set=actual) Checked Checked
Fixed interlocking conditions Checked Checked
Interlocking conditions Checked Not checked
1-out-of-n check (double-activation blocking) Checked Not checked
Blocking by protection function Checked Not checked

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Switching Authority
The switching authority determines which command source is allowed. The following command sources are
possible:
• Local:
A switching command from the local control (cause-of-error source Local) is possible only if the
switching authority is set to Local and the device is capable of on-site operation. Setting the switching
authority to Local is typically accomplished with key switch S5 (Local/Remote). In this case, commands
from all other sources are rejected. If the switching authority is set to Local, the setting cannot be
changed remotely.
• DIGSI:
A switching command from DIGSI (connected via USB or Ethernet, cause-of-error source Maintenance)
is accepted only if the switching authority in the device is set to Remote. Once DIGSI has signed on the
device for command output, no commands from other command sources or a different DIGSI PC will be
executed.
• Station:
This switching authority level can be activated via a parameter in the General function block. A switching
command from the station level (cause-of-error source Station or Automatic station) is accepted if the
switching authority is set to Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is set. This is
accomplished by a command from the substation automation technology. Switching commands from
the device or from outside the station (cause-of-error source Local, Remote or Automatic remote) are
rejected.
Full support of the switching-authority level is assured only when using the IEC 61850 protocol.
• Remote:
This switching authority level stands from remote control directly from the network control center or (if
the switching authority level Station is not activated) generally for Remote control. The cause-of-error
source is Automatic remote. Commands from this level are accepted if the switching authority is set
to Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is not set. Switching commands from the
device or from the station (cause-of-error source Local, Station or Automatic station) are rejected.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_moscha, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-28 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in Information Routing (in Function Block
General)
Sw. authority key/set and Sw.mode key/set indicate the current state of the key switch or parameter for
switching authority or switching mode and provide this information for further processing in the CFC. In
the CFC, for example, it is possible to set up an automatic routine to ensure that the switching authority is
automatically set to Local when the key switch is set to non-interlocked.
The following table shows the dependency of the switching mode on the key-switch position and the
switching authority. In the case of switching commands from Remote, the information on whether switching
is to be made to locked or unlocked is also sent. For this reason, the position of the key switch is irrelevant for
the switching mode in these cases. The information in the table assumes that, in the case of remote switching
commands or those from the station, the switching mode is interlocked in each case.
Table 8-18 Dependency of the Switching Mode on the Key-Switch Position and Switching Authority
Switching Authority
Key Switch for Switching Mode Local Remote Station
Interlocked Interlocked Interlocked Interlocked
Not interlocked Non-interlocked Interlocked Interlocked

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
The signals shown in Figure 8-28 in DIGSI 5 information routing have the following relationship:
• In terms of switching authority and switching mode, the respective key switch position serves as the
input signal and the input signals in the matrix.
• The state of the switching authority and switching mode is indicated by corresponding output signals.
• The Switching authority and Switching mode functions link the input signals and in this way establish
the output signals (see Figure 8-29 and Figure 8-30).
[dw_authority, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-29 Establishing Switching Authority
[dw_modsch, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-30 Establishing Switching Mode
In the case of both functions, the input signals overwrite the state of the key switch. This allows external
inputs to also set the switching authority or switching mode, if desired (for instance, by querying an external
key switch).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
The following additional settings are available for the switching authority:
• Enable sw.auth. station (defined in IEC 61850 Edition 2):

If you would like to use this switching authority, set the check mark General/Control.
• Multiple sw.auth. levels:

This option permits switching commands from several command sources in the device if the switching
authority Remote is selected. Subsequently, a distinction between these command sources can also be
made. You can find more details in the following table. Activate this option by setting the check mark
General/Control.
• Specific sw. authorities:

You can enable additional options for the switching authority check. You can find more information
about these options in Specific Switching Authority, Page 1428. By default, these are not used.
• Show int.lck.cond. on HMI:

You can activate the parameter to show the status of interlocking conditions in the device. For additional
information refer to Specific Switching Authority, Page 1428. By default, this parameter is inactive.
[sc_akt_hoh, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-31 How to Activate the Station Switching Authority and to Enable Several Switching-Authority
Levels

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Table 8-19 Effect on Switching Authority when Several Switching-Authority Levels Are Enabled with/
without Activation of the Station Switching Authority
Release Several Switching Status of DIGSI Station State of the Resulting

Switching Authority in the in the Device Switching Station Switching
Authority Device Authority Acti- Switching Authority
Levels vated Authority
Local – – – Local
No Signed on – – DIGSI
Remote No – Station and

Not signed on
remote
Yes Set Station
Not set Remote
Local – – – Local
Yes Signed on – – DIGSI
Remote No – Local and station

Not signed on
and remote
Yes Set Local and station
Not set Local and station
and remote
The following table shows the result of the switching-authority check, based on the set switching authority
and the cause of the command. This overview represents a simplified normal case (no multiple command
sources when using Station and Remote).
Table 8-20 Result of a Switching-Authority Check
Cause Source Switching Authority

Local DIGSI Station Remote
Local Release Blocked Blocked Blocked
Station Blocked Blocked Release Blocked
Remote Blocked Blocked Blocked Release
Local automatic Release Release Release Release
operation
Station automatic Blocked Blocked Release Blocked
operation
Remote automatic Blocked Blocked Blocked Release
operation
DIGSI Blocked Release Blocked Blocked
Specific Switching Authority

Special switching authorities can be configured as extension of the switching-authority check. This makes it
possible to differentiate the Remote command sources at the bay level. Switching authority can be routed
to or revoked from different control centers that can, for example, belong to different companies. Thus,
precisely one of these command sources can switch at a certain time. This function is based on extending
the switching-authority check by verifying the identifier of the command source (field Originator/orIdent of
switching command). In order to turn on the function, go to General/Control and set the check mark for
the parameter Specific sw. authorities. More settings for the configuration of the identifiers and the
behavior of the function as well as additional signals appear (see Figure 8-33). In order to permit an additional
command source to switch, you must activate this specific switching authority. In order to do this, set the
controllable Enable sw. auth. 1 to Enable sw. auth. 5.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_act additional options sw authority, 4, en_US]
Figure 8-32 Activating Additional Options of the Switching Authority
The additional parameters allow you to set the following options:
• Specific sw.auth. valid for (for station/remote, only remote or only station):
With this parameter, you determine for which command source the extended switching-authority check
is used.
Table 8-21 Result Derived from the Combination of the Parameter Value Specific sw.auth. valid
for and the Level of the Command Source (Field Originator/orCat of the Switching
Command)
Command Source Specific sw.auth. valid for

station station/remote remote
Local, local automatic No check No check No check
Station, station automatic Check Check No check

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Command Source Specific sw.auth. valid for

station station/remote remote
Remote, remote auto- No check Check Check
matic
DIGSI No check No check No check
• Num. of specific sw.auth.:

With this parameter, you determine how many specific switching authorities are available. This deter-
mines the number of parameters Identifier switching authority as well as the controllable
Active. Sw. auth..
• Identifier switching authority 1 to Identifier switching authority 5:

The number of names that appear corresponds to the number set in the previous parameter. You can
select the names as you wish, 1 to 64 characters are allowed. The command check verifies whether these
titles correspond with those sent by the command source. This applies to the switching commands as
well as to the activation of a specific switching authority. The requirement for this is the system interface
IEC 61850. The field Originator/orIdent is used.
• Multiple specific sw.auth. ensures the simultaneous validity of the various command sources.
The following table shows how to determine the resulting specific switching authority when activating
the command sources of Remote or Station. If this parameter is activated, all parameterized command
sources get permissible automatically (see last row in the table) and they cannot be deactivated via the
controllable Enable sw. auth. 1 to Enable sw. auth. 5. Otherwise, the enabled command
source with the lowest number has always the highest priority and prevails against the other numbers.
Table 8-22 Determining Switching Authority if Multiple Command Sources Are Available
Multiple Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Resulting
specific auth. 1 auth. 2 auth. 3 auth. 4 auth. 5 Specific
sw.auth. Switching
Authority
No On * * * * Switch. auth. 1
No Off On * * * Switch. auth. 2
No Off Off On * * Switch. auth. 3
No Off Off Off On * Switch. auth. 4
No Off Off Off Off On Switch. auth. 5
No Off Off Off Off Off None
Yes On On On On On All
The * symbol in the previous table refers to any value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_sw authority and mode in info routing, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-33 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in the Information Routing (in Function
Block General), Example of 2 Activated Remote Switching Authorities
Individual Switching Authority and Switching Mode for the Switching Devices
In a standard case, the functionalities switching authority, switching mode, and specific switching authority
as described in the previous sections, are applicable to the entire bay unit and, therefore, are valid for all
switching devices that are controlled by this bay unit. In addition, you can configure an individual switching
authority and specific switching authority as well as individual switching modes for single switching devices.
Therefore, individual switching devices can accept various switching authorities and switching modes simulta-
neously.
This is offered for the following function groups and function blocks:
• Disconnector function group
• Transformer tap changer function group
• Switching sequence function block

This allows to select individual settings for each switching device. This is useful if, for example, switching
devices of different utilities are managed within a single bay.
In order to activate this option, go to the function block Control of a switching device and set the parameter
Check switching authority to advanced. An additional table containing initially 2 parameters is
displayed.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_add parameters sw authority sw device, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-34 Additional Parameters for Switching Authorities in the Parameters of a Switching Device
When activating the parameter Swi.dev. related sw.auth., an individual switching authority as well as
an individual switching mode for this switching device are configured. Additional signals are displayed in the
Control function block of the corresponding switching device.
[sc_extended parameters sw authority sw device, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-35 Expanded Parameters for the Switching Authority in the Switching Device
[sc_switching auth sw mode changeable, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-36 Individually Modifiable Switching Authority and Switching Mode for Switching Devices
The new input signals that are displayed allow you to set the individual switching authority and switching
mode for the switching devices. For this switching device, these inputs overwrite the central switching

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
authority and the switching mode. The outputs Switching authority and Switching mode indicate the
states only for this switching device.
When activating Specific sw. authorities, an individual specific switching authority for this switching
device is configured. Additional parameters are displayed.
[sc_parameters FB control all additional options, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-37 Parameters of the FB Control with All Additional Options
The functionality of the specific switching authority for the individual switching device and the significance
of the additional parameters is identical to the operating mode of the central specific switching authority.
Additional signals are displayed in the Control function block.
[sc_specific sw authority changeable per sw device, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-38 Specific Switching Authority, Modifiable for Each Switching Device
Switching Direction (Set = Actual)

With this check, you avoid switching a switching device into a state that has already been achieved. For
instance, before a trip command is issued to a circuit breaker, its current position is determined. If this circuit
breaker is already in the Off position, no command is issued. This is logged accordingly.
Switchgear Interlocking Protection

Switchgear interlocking protection means avoiding maloperation by checking the bay and substation inter-
locking and thus preventing equipment damage and personal injury. The interlocking conditions are always
system-specific and for this reason are stored as CFC charts in the devices.
SIPROTEC 5 devices recognize 2 different types of interlocking conditions:
• Normal interlocking conditions:

These can be revoked by changing the switching mode to non-interlocked.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
• Non-revocable (fixed) interlocking conditions:

These are still checked even if the switching mode is set to non-interlocked.
Application: Replacing mechanical interlocking, for example, that prevent actuation of a medium-
voltage switch.
Each of the 2 categories has 2 release signals (for the On and Off switching directions) that represent the
result of the interlocking plan, so that interlocking is in effect during the command check (see the figure
below). The default setting for all release signals is TRUE, so that no switchgear interlocking checks take place
if no CFC charts have been prepared.
[sc_verrie, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-39 Interlocking Signals in Function Block Interlocking
By default, the status of interlocking conditions is not visible in the device, see the following figure.
[sc_HMI_WO_Position, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-40 The Status of Interlocking Conditions is not Visible in the Control Display

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_HMI_WO_Position2, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-41 The Status of Interlocking Conditions is not Visible in the Control Menu
But, if you activate the parameter Show int.lck.cond. on HMI by navigating to Settings > Device
settings > General > Control in DIGSI 5, you can get the status of interlocking conditions in the device.
[sc_HMI_W_Position, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-42 The Status of Interlocking Conditions is Visible in the Control Display

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_HMI_W_Position2, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-43 The Status of Interlocking Conditions is Visible in the Control Menu
EXAMPLE
For Interlocking
For the making direction of the circuit breaker QA in bay E01 (see the figure below), it is necessary to check
whether the disconnectors QB1, QB2, and QB9 are in the defined position, that is, either On or Off. Opening
the circuit breaker QA should be possible at any time.
The interlocking equations are: QA_On = ((QB1 = On) or (QB1 = Off)) and ((QB2 = On) or (QB2 = Off)) and
((QB9 = On) or (QB9 = Off)). There is no condition for opening.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_abgang, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-44 Feeder Bay for a Double Busbar System
The CFC chart that is required to implement the interlocking equation is shown in the next figure.
[sc_verpla, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-45 Interlocking Chart for Bay Interlocking
Since the Disconnector function block provides the defined position On or Off, the exclusive OR gate XOR is
not necessary for the linkage. A simple OR suffices.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
As can be seen in the CFC chart, the result of the check is connected to the >Release on signal in the
Interlocking function block in the Circuit breaker QA function group (see Figure 8-45).
EXAMPLE
For System Interlocking

This example considers the feeder = E01 from the previous example (bay interlocking) and additionally the
coupler bay = E02 (see the figure below).
[sc_system, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-46 System with Feeder and Coupler Bays
The circuit breaker QA in coupler bay = E02 will be considered next. As the multibay interlocking condition,
you must provide the bus-coupler circuit-breaker command block at the end:
If the 2 busbars in bay = E01 are connected, that is, if the 2 disconnectors QB1 and QB2 in bay =E01 are
closed, the circuit breaker QA in bay = E02 is not allowed to be switched off. Accordingly, bay = E01 in the CFC
of the device generates the indication Bus coupler closed from the positions of the switches QB1 and
QB2 and, using IEC 61850-GOOSE, transmits it to bay = E02 in the device. You must then store the following
interlocking condition in bay = E02:
QA_Off = NOT (= E01/Bus coupler closed)
In the CFC chart for the bus coupler device = E02, you must create the following CFC chart (see the figure
below).
[sc_planve, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-47 Interlocking Chart for System Interlocking

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
1-Out-of-n Check (Double-Activation Blocking)

The double-activation blocking prevents 2 commands from being executed in the device simultaneously. You
can set the device-internal check for each switching device as a parameter in the Control function block.
The default setting is Yes, that is, double-activation blocking is active (see the figure below).
[sc_double, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-48 Activating the Double-Activation Blocking
With SIPROTEC 5, it is also possible to achieve multibay double-activation blocking.

In this case, send the signal not selected to other devices for analysis using IEC 61850-GOOSE. This signal
is available under Position in every Circuit breaker or Disconnector function block in the switching device
function groups (see figure below).
[sc_notselected, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-49 Signal not selected in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
The signal is then queried in the CFC interlocking conditions for the associated switching devices and is used
to generate the release signal (for example, >Release on).
Blocking by Protection Function
• Default setting (_:107) Check blk. by protection = yes

In devices with protection and control functions, Siemens recommends that no switching commands can be
issued while protection functions have picked up.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
This applies to automatic reclosing as well. Switching commands must be prevented as long as automatic
reclosing is active.
The default setting for blocking by the protection function is therefore yes. If necessary, you can disable this
blocking. You can find the settings on the same page as the double-activation blocking (see Figure 8-48).
NOTE
i Remember, for instance, that pickup of the thermal overload protection can create a fault as well and thus
prevent switching commands.
NOTE
i The command check Blocking by protection function is only available for controlling circuit breakers,
because in this case a unique relationship with protection functions and automatic reclosing has been
configured. In disconnectors, this relationship is not always unique, precisely with regard to the 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layout, and it must be mapped for each system using CFC charts.
To carry out the command check Blocking by protection function for disconnectors, use the following
indications (if present) in your interlocking conditions:
• Group indication: Pickup (Function group Line)
• Circuit-breaker failure protection: Pickup (Circuit-breaker failure protection)
• General: In progress (Automatic reclosing function)
8.3.2 Command Logging
All commands in the sequence are logged. The command log contains:
• Date and time
• Name of the switching device (or function group)
• Reason for the transmission (SEL = Selected, OPR = Operate, CMT = Command execution end, SPN =
Spontaneous)
• Status or switching direction
EXAMPLE
The following example illustrates control of a disconnector QB1 for various cases.
• Successful command output
• Interrupted command
• Command interrupted by switchgear interlocking
• Command ended due to missing feedback
• Spontaneous change of switch position without command output

Figure 8-50 to Figure 8-56 indicate command logging for various scenarios of the standard control model SBO
with feedback monitoring.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_poscas, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-50 Positive Case (Display 1)
[sc_posca2, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-51 Positive Case (Display 2)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_poscan, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-52 Positive Case with Command Cancellation
[sc_negint, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-53 Negative Case (Blocked by Switchgear Interlocking)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_negtim, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-54 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 1)
[sc_negti2, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-55 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 2)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_sponta, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-56 Spontaneous Status Change
Depending on the transmission reason, the desired control value or the actual state value of the controllable
and the switching device can be contained in the log.
The following table shows the relationship.
Table 8-23 Relationship between the Reason for Transmission and the Value Logged
Reason for Transmission Value

Selected (SEL) Desired value
Operate (OPR) Desired value
Command cancellation (CNC) Desired value
Command execution and termination (CMT) Actual value
Spontaneous change (SPN) Actual value
8.3.3 Settings

Control
_:101 Control:Control model • status only SBO w. enh.
security
_:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
toring time
_:104 Control:Check switching • no yes
authority
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:105 Control:Check if pos. is • no yes
reached
• yes
_:106 Control:Check double • no yes
activat. blk.
• yes
_:107 Control:Check blk. by • no yes
protection
• yes

(Type)
Control
_:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.4 Synchronization Function
The 1-channel Synchronization function (ANSI 25) checks whether the activation is permissible without a risk
to the stability of the system when interconnecting 2 parts of an electrical power system.
Typical applications are as follows:
• Synchronization of a line and a busbar
• Synchronization of 2 busbars via a cross-coupling
• Synchronization of a generator and a busbar

A power transformer between the 2 measuring points can also be taken into consideration.
The following operating modes are covered:
• Synchrocheck
• Switching synchronous power systems
• Switching asynchronous power systems
• Switching to dead line/busbar
The function Synchronization is used in the function group Circuit-breaker.

The following stage types can be used within the function:
• Synchrocheck stage
• Synchronous/asynchronous stage
• Synchronous/asynchronous stage with balancing commands
NOTE
i Siemens recommends using the synchronization functions for the following powers of the plant:
• 1-channel synchronization function for a plant with a power of < 10 MVA
• 1.5-channel paralleling function for a plant with a power of < 100 MVA
• 2-channel paralleling function for a plant with a power of ≥ 100 MVA

For a 1-channel synchronization function, the probability for a correct switching or for erroneous switching
is identical. With the 1.5-channel paralleling function, you can achieve much greater reliability. In this
function, a 2-out-of-2 decision has already been made, but only one channel switches. You can achieve the
best reliability with the 2-channel paralleling function. In this function, there is also a 2-out-of-2 decision,
but both channels are part of the close-command creation. The SIPROTEC 5 device 7VE85 with a 1.5- or
2-channel paralleling function is suitable for plants with a higher power (≥ 10 MVA).
The stage types Synchrocheck and Synchronous/Asynchronous (Sychr./Asycr.) are preconfigured at the
factory.
In addition, the stage types Extended delta-f options and Synchronous/asynchronous with balancing
commands (Syn./Asy.bal.) are available in the function library. These have not been preconfigured.
You can operate a maximum of 2 stages of the stage type Synchrocheck or 6 stages of the Synchro-
nous/asynchronous or Synchronous/asynchronous with balancing commands in parallel.
As soon as the function is available in the device, the functional measured values are calculated and displayed.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_syn-asyn-stage_with_adjusting_com, 2, en_US]
8.4.3 Connection and Definition
Connection
You can find examples for the synchronization of line and busbar in the following 2 figures. Figure 8-60 shows
an example for the synchronization of 2 busbars via bus coupler.
The synchronization function uses 2 voltages to check the connecting conditions: a voltage of the reference
side 1 (V1) as well as a voltage to be used as a reference on side 2 (V2). The reference voltage of side 1 is
designated in the synchronization function as V155.
This is always the voltage of the measuring point that is connected to the Sync. voltage 1 interface of the
Circuit-breaker function group. The voltage to be set as reference is designated with V255. This is always the
voltage of the measuring point that is connected to the Sync. voltage 2 interface of the Circuit-breaker
function group. The assignment of the measuring points to the interfaces of the Circuit-breaker function
group can be configured, see 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device.
The selection of the voltages used for the synchronization depends on the device connection to the primary
system:
• Connection of the primary system via 4 voltage inputs and hence use of a 1-phase and a 3-phase
measuring point (Figure 8-58 and Figure 8-60):
The voltage connected to the 1-phase measuring point is definitive here. If. for example, this is the
phase-to-ground voltage VA, the voltage VA is also used by the other side of the 3-phase measuring point.
• Connection of the primary system via 6 voltage inputs and hence use of two 3-phase measuring points
(Figure 8-59):
The phase-to-phase voltage VAB of both sides is always used for the test.
You can connect both the phase-to-ground voltages and the phase-to-phase voltages to the device. The
possible interface connections are listed in the Appendix.
55 Do not confuse the designations V1 and V2 with the numbering of the voltage inputs V1 to V4 (Figure 8-58) and V1 to V8
(Figure 8-59).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_syns01-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-58 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs
Figure 8-59 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 6 Voltage Inputs

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Figure 8-60 Synchronization of 2 Busbars via Cross-Coupling, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs
Definition of the Variables

The definition of the variables is important for understanding the following implementation. The reference
side 1 indicates the function with 1. This yields the reference values voltageV1, frequencyf1, and phase angle
α1. The side to be synchronized indicates the function with 2. The electrical variables of side 2 are then the
voltageV2, frequencyf2, and phase angle α2.
When forming the differential variables, the function is oriented to the definition of the absolute measuring
error (Δ x = measured value – real value). The reference value and hence the real value is side 1. This results in
the following calculation specifications:
Differential voltage dV = V2 – V1
A positive sign means that the voltage V2 is greater than the voltage V1. In other cases, the sign is negative.
Differential frequency df = f2 – f1
A positive result means that according to the example from Figure 8-58 the busbar frequency is greater than
the line frequency.
Phase-angle difference dα = α2 – α1
The representation is limited to ±180o. A positive result means that α2 leads by a maximum of 180o. In the
case of a negative value, α2 lags by a maximum of 180o. Figure 8-61 shows the circumstances. The phase
angle α1 was added to the zero axis as a reference system.
If asynchronous systems are present and the frequency f2 is greater than f1, the angle dα then changes from
the negative value to 0 and then to the positive value. As shown in Figure 8-61, the direction of rotation is
counterclockwise (mathematically positive). At f2 < f1, the direction of rotation is clockwise.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_synp_04, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-61 Phase-Angle Difference Representation dα
Only positive values are permissible for the setting parameters. Inequalities are used to characterize the
setting parameters uniquely. The representation is explained with the example of differential voltage. 2
setting values are necessary to allow unbalanced settings.
The inequality V2 > V1 yields a positive value for dV. The associated parameter is Max. voltage diff.
V2>V1. For the 2nd setting parameter Max. voltage diff. V2<V1, the inequality V2 < V1 applies. It
corresponds to a negative dV.
The procedure is the same for the differential frequency and differential phase angle.
8.4.4.1 Description
Overview of a Synchronization Stage (Sync Stage)

A synchronization stage can be integrated in the following blocks (see Figure 8-62):
• Stage control with mode, state control, standby, and blocking (description in this chapter)
• Supervision (description in this chapter)
• Functional sequence for issuing the closing release (see 8.4.6 Sequence of Functions)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[lo_syn001-01, 6, en_US]
Figure 8-62 Overview of the Stage Logic
Stage Control
The normal stage control is used for a synchronization stage (see Figure 8-62).
Note the following special features:
• For control via IEC 61850, a parameterized function Synchrocheck is only executed if the service param-
eter Synchrocheck is set to true. The function control also provides the service parameter Inter-
lock-Check. If the service parameter Synchrocheck is set to false, switching is not synchronized.
Siemens recommends checking the desired behavior for control from remote via IEC 61850 before the
commissioning.
• As soon as there is a synchronization function available in the device, the measured values are calculated
and displayed. One stage must be activated for calculating all Delta settings. It is not necessary to start
the stage for this purpose.
• If all synchronization stages are deactivated within the function, closure via the control will no longer be
possible, as none of the stages can generate a closing release. If the synchronization function is deleted,
the circuit breaker is no longer regarded as subject to compulsory synchronization. In this case, it is
possible to activate via the control without synchronization.
• If more than one synchronization stage is activated, the >Selection signal must be active for exactly
one stage, so that it can be activated via the controls.
You can block the entire synchronization stage via the binary signal >Block stage. A started process is
completed and the entire stage reset after blocking. The stage must be restarted to initiate a new switching

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
procedure. The blocking only affects the test process for the closing conditions. The measured values are still
calculated and displayed.
Operating Range
[lo_syn002-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-63 Logic of the Operating Ranges
The operating range of the synchronization function is defined by the configurable voltage limits Min.
operating limit Vmin and Max. operat. limit Vmax, as well as by the specified frequency band
frated ±4 Hz.
If one or both voltages are outside the permitted operating range when the measurement is started or
a voltage leaves the range, this is displayed via corresponding indications Frequency f1 > fmax,
Frequency f1 < fmin, Voltage V1 > Vmax, Voltage V1 < Vmin, etc. The closing conditions are
then not checked.
Supervision
The supervisions listed below are executed in a function-specific manner. If one of the supervisions picks up,
the indication Health goes to Warning. The stage is indicated as Inactive. A closing release or direct close
command is not possible in this case.
• For consistency of settings of specific parameters

Definite threshold-value settings are checked after a parameter change. If there is an inconsistency, the
error message Setting error is issued.
• For multiple selection of the stage at the start time of the synchronization
If there is a simultaneous selection of multiple closed synchronization stages at the start time, the error
message Multiple selection is issued.
Measuring-Voltage Failure
If a voltage-transformer fault (measuring-voltage failure) is recorded via the binary input signal >Open of
one of the voltage-measuring points, then the closing conditions of the synchronization stage are no longer

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
tested. This means that a release of the closure based on the measurement is no longer possible. The
readiness of the stage turns to Warning. Direct close command is still possible.
The device-internal supervision function measuring-voltage failure detection (Fuse Failure Monitor) does not
have any effect on the synchronization stage.

The functional measured values for the Synchronization function are displayed in their own primary, secon-
dary, and percentage measured value windows. Voltage measurements are always displayed as ph-ph
voltages, even if the associated measuring point records phase-to-ground voltages. The functional measured
values are determined and displayed as soon as the device is functional. The difference values are calculated
as soon as the stage is activated.
Table 8-24 Protection-Specific Values of the Synchronization
Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
V1 Reference voltage V1 kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
V2 Voltage to be synchronized V2 kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
f1 Frequency of the voltage V1 Hz Hz Rated frequency
f2 Frequency of the voltage V2 Hz Hz Rated frequency
dV Voltage difference V2–V1 kV V –
df Frequency difference f2–f1 Hz Hz –
dα Angle difference α2–α1 o – –
Multiple Synchronization Points

The synchronization function can only be used within a Circuit-breaker function group. It always operates on
the circuit breaker that is linked to the Circuit-breaker function group. The reference to the circuit breaker is
therefore unique. If you wish to switch several circuit breakers (synchronization points) with the device, you
must create several Circuit-breaker function groups.
Different Synchronization Conditions per Synchronization Point

Within the synchronization function, you can operate maximum 2 stages of the stage type Synchrocheck
and maximum 6 stages of the type Synchronous/asynchronous in parallel. All setting parameters for a
synchronization point are included in each synchronization stage.
If you have to synchronize with different synchronization conditions (parameter settings), several synchroniza-
tion stages are used for a synchronization point/circuit breaker. In this case, you must define which of the
synchronization stages is currently active via the binary signal >Selection (synchronization stage x). The
closing conditions are checked if the respective stage is activated via the >Selection binary signal and the
stage is activated.
The fault indication Multiple selection is issued upon simultaneous selection of different synchroniza-
tion stages. If several synchronization stages are activated and the input signal >Selection (synchronization
stage x) is missing at the starting time, a valid selection is awaited during the supervision time Max.durat.
sync.process. If this does not come, the process is terminated.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Different Voltage-Transformer Ratios from Both Sides of the Electrical Power System
The synchronization function automatically takes different transformation ratios of the voltage measuring
points into account on both sides of the power system. Set the parameter Voltage adjustment in the
synchronization function for the following cases:
• Without a power transformer between the voltage measuring points of the circuit breaker to be
synchronized, if the rated primary voltages are different on both sides of the electrical power system.
• With a power transformer between the voltage measuring points of the circuit breaker to be synchron-
ized, if the transfer ratios of the rated primary voltages on the voltage transformer are different on both
sides of the electrical power system.
For more information about the parameter Voltage adjustment, refer to 8.4.4.2 Application and Setting
Notes, Parameter: Voltage adjustment, Page 1457.
Synchronization via a Transformer

There are systems in which a power transformer is located between the voltage measuring points of the
circuit breaker to be synchronized. The device automatically considers the different voltage stages by setting
the rated primary voltages of the power transformer from 2 sides of the electrical power system. A phase
displacement must be taken into account based on the transformer vector group via the parameter Angle
adjust. (transform.).
The parameter is defined as -Δα = –(α2 – α1).
To calculate the delta variables Δα and ΔU, the voltage of side 2 is converted to that of side 1 using the
settings of the 2 parameters Angle adjust. (transform.) and Voltage adjustment.
The displayed voltage V2 in the device display is the voltage from the power-transformer side, which is close
to the point to be synchronized, and not the measured voltage of the voltage transformer of side 2.
For more information, refer to 8.4.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Different Connection Types on Both Sides

If both the measuring points used by the synchronization functions record different voltages of the 3-phase
system, the calculation of the phase-angle difference is automatically considered.
EXAMPLE:
The 1-phase measuring point connected with Sync-voltage 1 records the phase-to-phase voltage VAB. The
1-phase measuring point connected with Sync-voltage 2 records VA. In this case the phase angle between VAB
and VA takes into consideration the delta variable Δα during calculation.
This automation guarantees that several voltage sources can be switched between during running operation,
each of which records different voltages.
Stage-Type Selection
The following 2 types of stages are available:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Stage Type Application

Synchrocheck stage Select this type of stage to issue, for example, an additional release
during an automatic reclosing or a manual reclosing for safety reasons.
With this type, the variables ΔV, Δf, and Δα are checked before
connecting the 2 parts of the power system.
Synchronous/asynchronous stage Select this type of stage if it is necessary to differentiate between
synchronous and asynchronous systems, depending on the switch posi-
tion.
If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous
systems are present. A typical characteristic of synchronous systems is
equality of frequency (Δf ≈ 0). In this state, the conditions Δα and ΔV
are checked.
If the systems are galvanically isolated, asynchronous systems can be
present. At the same time, compliance with the voltage difference ΔV
and frequency difference Δf conditions is checked. The time of the
direct close command is calculated taking into account the angle differ-
ence Δα and the make time of the circuit breaker. The time of the direct
close command is calculated such that the voltages are equal at the
moment the circuit-breaker poles come into contact (ΔV ≈ 0, Δα ≈ 0).
Configuration of the Voltages V1 (Reference Side) and V2

The voltages V1 and V2 are established via the connection of the measuring points to the interface of the
function groups (refer to chapter 8.4.3 Connection and Definition). The measuring point connected to the
interface Voltage is the reference side 1 with the reference voltage V1. The measuring point connected to the
interface Sync. voltage is the side 2 with V2. The definition of the Delta parameters that can be derived from
this is also described in chapter 8.4.3 Connection and Definition.
Parameter: Min. operating limit Vmin, Max. operat. limit Vmax
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:101) Min. operating limit Vmin = 90 V
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:102) Max. operat. limit Vmax = 110 V

The values define the voltage operating range of the synchronization stage. A normal setting is approx. ±10 %
of the rated voltage.
NOTE
i All voltages connected according to the parameterized measuring-point connection type are subjected
to the appropriate Vmin/Vmax test. Therefore, connected phase-to-ground voltages are multiplied by √3,
since the threshold values must be set with reference to the rated voltage (phase-to-phase voltage).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[lo_hyster-01, 2, en_US]
If the Synchronization function is started within the hysteresis, no switching is performed as a result of the
minimum and maximum operating limit (parameters Min. operating limit Vmin and Max. operat.
limit Vmax). If the Synchronization function is started within the voltage operating range and the voltage
exceeds the minimum or maximum operating limit during the synchronization process, selecting can occur in
the area of the hysteresis.
Parameter: Max.durat. sync.process
• Default setting (_:5071:110) Max.durat. sync.process = 30 s

The parameterized conditions must be fulfilled within this time. If the conditions are not fulfilled, no further
closing release takes place and the synchronization stage is stopped. If this time is set to ∞, conditions
are checked until they are fulfilled. This is also the default setting. Observe the operating conditions when
defining the time limitation. This must be defined specifically for each system. If 0 or 0.01 s is set, then all
conditions are checked once at the starting time. Thereafter the process is stopped immediately.
If the closure release is assigned, the synchronization is terminated. If the synchrocheck is to continuously
display the switching conditions, without issuing a direct close command at synchronization, proceed as
follows:
EXAMPLE:
For Continuous Checking of the Switching Conditions without Issuing a Direct Close Command
With the aid of the following CFC chart you can set the input >Block stage of the corresponding synchro-
check stage permanently:
[sc_sync_CFC, 3, en_US]
If you route the indication All sync. conditio. OK to the corresponding binary output, you receive a
separate release of the closure for an external synchronization unit.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_sync_routing, 2, en_US]
If you wish to permanently report each occasion on which synchronization conditions are reached following
the start of synchronization, you set the parameter Max.durat. sync.process to ∞.
[sc_sync_setting, 2, en_US]
Parameter: Voltage adjustment
• Default setting (_:5071:126) Voltage adjustment = 1.00

The parameter can be used for correction of amplitude errors, for example, due to indirect measurement (for
example, transformer tap changer).
To apply a transformer between measuring points, the Voltage adjustment parameter is not needed. The
transformer ratios are set for the measuring points and the function will take them into account automatically.
To apply a transformer between the voltage measuring points, the transformer ratio does not have to be taken
into account. When you set the parameter Voltage adjustment, the transformer ratio is automatically
taken into account. In the following, you can find 2 examples for the setting of the parameter Voltage
adjustment:
Example 1:
In the electrical power system, no power transformer exists between the voltage measuring points of the
circuit breaker to be synchronized. The rated primary voltages of 2 sides of the electrical power system are
different.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_example w.o. power transformer, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-64 Example: the Electrical Power System without a Power Transformer
(1) The virtual VT does not exist in the primary voltage system. It is just a virtual voltage transformer
to show the displayed V2 on the device display. The virtual VT has the same transformer ratio as
VT1.
The displayed V2 is a processed voltage from VT2.
[fo_ex1_V adjustment, 1, en_US]
With:
V2rated prim. Rated primary voltage of VT2
For this example, the displayed voltage V2 on the device display is from the virtual VT, not from VT2.
The primary voltages, secondary voltages, and percentage values of the measured values are shown in the
following table.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Table 8-25 Primary Voltage, Secondary Voltage, and Percentage Value
Measured Value Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Percentage Value

V1 400 kV
V2 400 kV
Displayed V2 400 kV
Example 2:
In the electrical power system, a power transformer is located between the voltage measuring points of the
circuit breaker to be synchronized. The power transformer ratio differs from the ratio between the rated
primary voltages of the voltage transformers of 2 sides of the electrical power system.
[dw_example w. power transformer, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-65 Example: the Electrical Power System with a Power Transformer
(1) The virtual VT does not exist in the primary voltage system. It is just a virtual voltage transformer
to show the displayed V2 on the device display. The virtual VT has the same transformer ratio as
VT1.
The displayed V2 is a processed voltage from VT2.
(2) This ratio is not the rated transformer ratio on the transformer name plate. This ratio is an actual
ratio which considers the tap-changer scenarios when the Tap changer function is not used in
the device. The rated transformer ratio is 220 kV/10 kV.
[fo_ex2_V adjustment, 1, en_US]
With:
RPT Transformer ratio of the power transformer
For this example, the displayed voltage V2 on the device display is from the virtual VT, not from VT2.
The primary voltages, secondary voltages, and percentage values of the measured values are shown in the
following table.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Table 8-26 Primary Voltage, Secondary Voltage, and Percentage Value
Measured Value Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Percentage Value

V1 220 kV
V2 10.5 kV
Displayed V2 220 kV
Parameter: Angle adjust. (transform.)
• Default setting (_:2311:127) Angle adjust. (transform.) = 0 o

The parameter can be applied under the following conditions:
• 1. Phase-angle rotation by power transformer between the measuring points
• 2. Correction of phase-angle errors

1. Phase-angle rotation by power transformer between the measuring points:
[dw_transformer between the measuring points, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-66 Transformer between the Measuring Points
If there is a power transformer between the voltage transformers of the circuit breaker to be synchronized,
you then have to correct the phase-angle rotation for a vector group deviating from 0. Figure 8-66 shows such
an application. The Angle adjust. (transform.) parameter is used to save the phase-angle rotation.
The transformer vector group is defined from the upper-voltage side to the undervoltage side. If the reference
voltage transformer V1 is connected on the upper-voltage side of the transformer (as in Figure 8-66), enter
the phase-angle rotation directly according to the vector group. A vector-group figure of 5, for example,
means an angular rotation of 5 ⋅ 30o = 150o. Set this value for the Angle adjust. (transform.)
parameter.
If the voltage connection V1 is on the undervoltage side due to the system, you then have to apply
the extension angle with 360o. A transformer with vector group 5 yields an angular adjustment of 360o –
(5 ⋅ 30o) = 210o.
2. Correction of phase-angle errors:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
You can correct a phase-angle error between the voltage transformers in increments. Ascertain a possible
correction value during commissioning.
Parameter: CB make time
• Default setting (_:5041:113) CB make time = 0.060 s

If you are to interconnect under asynchronous system conditions with the device as well, the make time
of the circuit breaker must be taken into account. The device uses this to calculate the time of the direct
close command, so that the voltages are in phase at the moment of closure of the switch poles. Note that
apart from the operating time of the switch, this also includes the pickup time of an auxiliary relay that may
be upstream. You can determine the make time using the protection device (see commissioning notes in
12.13 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function).
This parameter only occurs for the stage type Synchronous/asynchronous.
8.4.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:127 General:Angle adjust. -179.0 ° to 180.0 ° 0.0 °
(transform.)
General
_:5071:1 Synchrocheck 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5071:101 Synchrocheck 1:Min. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
operating limit Vmin
_:5071:102 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:5071:110 Synchrocheck 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
1:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:5071:108 Synchrocheck 1:Direct • no no
close command
• yes
_:5071:126 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
General
_:5041:1 Sychr./Asycr.1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5041:101 Sychr./Asycr.1:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
_:5041:102 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:5041:110 Sychr./ 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
Asycr.1:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:5041:108 Sychr./Asycr.1:Direct • no no
close command
• yes
_:5041:126 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.4.5 Dynamic Measuring-Point Switching
Dynamic measuring-point switching provides the capability to connect the voltages used in the Synchro-
check function to various measuring points. In this way, for example, it is possible to use the correct voltage
on the basis of the switch position on the switching devices. If more than 1 measuring point is connected to
V sync1 or V sync2, you must create the V sync select. function block in the function group Circuit
breaker.
Selection of the desired voltage measuring points (V sync1 and V sync2) for the function group Circuit
breaker is controlled via Continuous Function Chart.
Connecting Measuring Points to Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The following figure shows the connection of the function group Circuit breaker with several measuring
points in DIGSI. The ID of each measuring point appears in parentheses after the name.
[scdynms2-211212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-67 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Function Group Circuit-Breaker
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface.
• It is not permitted to route a measuring point to the function group using the option VN.
same interface.
• If more than 1 measuring point is connected to 1 voltage interface, a function block must be expanded to
enable selection of the synchronization voltage.
CFC Control
The voltages are selected by CFC logic on the basis of the measuring point IDs. If more than one measuring
point is connected to interfaces Vsync1 or Vsync2 of the function group Circuit breaker, the function blockV
sync select. has to be removed from the library in the function group Circuit breaker. A CFC logic (see
following example) has to define IDs for the V sync1 or V sync2 inputs of this function block in order to
ensure the correct measuring point connection for the Synchrocheck function.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[scdynmsx-160212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-68 CFC Logic: Voltage Selection Using Measuring Point ID
If (defined by the switch or disconnector positions) no measuring point can be selected, the ID0 is used. If ID0
is selected, the indication (_:2311:304) Blocked no V selected is set. The synchrocheck is blocked. If
you have activated the parameter (_:5071:108) Direct close command, unsynchronized switching is
still possible.
8.4.6 Sequence of Functions
[lo_synf01_01, 6, en_US]
Figure 8-69 Sequence of Functions

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Start
The synchronization stage must be started to check the closing conditions. The synchronization stage can be
started device-internally by the control and the reclosing, or externally via binary input signals, for example, by
an external automatic reclosing (AREC), (see 8.4.13 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing (AREC), and
External Triggering).
At the start, the system checks whether there is a multiple selection of the synchronization stage (see Supervi-
sion in 8.4.4.1 Description). If this is the case, the process is terminated. After a successful start, the indication
In progress is cleared and the supervision time for the maximum duration of the synchronization process
(parameter Max.durat. sync.process) is started. The system also checks whether the voltages and
frequencies are in the operating range (see 8.4.4.1 Description). If this is not the case, the closing conditions
are not checked.
Checking the Closing Conditions, Closure

After starting, the parameterized closing conditions are checked, depending on the selected operating mode
(see 8.4.8.1 Description to 8.4.12 Direct Close Command ). Every condition fulfilled is explicitly indicated
here. Conditions not fulfilled are also indicated. If all conditions are fulfilled, the synchronization stage sets
the indication All sync. conditio. OK. The indication is active until all conditions are fulfilled. The
further behavior for issuing the release for closing depends on the type of the stage (see 8.4.7.1 Description
and 8.4.8.1 Description). The release is signaled via the Release close cmd. indication. This indication is
active for 100 ms. With an internal start, the control or the AREC performs the actual closure, depending on
the internal starting source.
Switching to Dead Line/Busbar

If operating modes for switching to dead parts of an electrical power system are configured, the associated
conditions are also checked after the start (see 8.4.11.1 Description). The fulfilled conditions are signaled. An
adjustable supervision time starts after the closure conditions are fulfilled (parameter Supervision time).
If the conditions remain valid until expiry of the time, the function gives the release for closure after expiry of
the time.
Direct Close Command

If the Direct close command operation is active, the function instantaneously initiates the release for closure
after the successful start (see chapter 8.4.12 Direct Close Command ). A combination of direct close command
with other release conditions is not advisable, as these conditions are bypassed by the direct close command.
End of the Process

If the function is started via the device-internal control or AREC, these functions also terminate the synchroni-
zation process upon closure. The process is terminated via the corresponding binary signals in case of external
starting.
If the supervision time (Max.durat. sync.process parameter) has expired, the process is also completed
and the indication Max. time exceeded is issued. A renewed synchronization is only possible if the stage is
restarted.
Blocking Closure
You can use the input signal >Block close command to block the release signal for the closure (signal
Release close cmd.) as well as the closure itself. The measurement continues to operate during the
blocking. If the blocking is revoked and the release conditions are still fulfilled, the release is given for closure.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.4.7 Stage Synchrocheck
8.4.7.1 Description
Checking Closing Conditions
[lo_synche-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-70 Closing Conditions for the Synchrocheck Function
With this operating mode, the values ΔV, Δf, and Δα are checked before connecting the 2 parts of the elec-
trical power system. The indication All sync. conditio. OK signals that the setting values (conditions)
have been reached and that the release for closure has been given (see Checking the Closing Conditions,
Closure in 8.4.6 Sequence of Functions).
Every fulfilled condition is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK, Frequency
diff. OK, and Angle difference OK.
If a condition is not fulfilled, detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via
indications. If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, for example, the indication V dif.too
large(V2<V1) is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be
increased for a successful synchronization.
With the Expanded delta-f options stage type configured and an activated (_:140) Limit dfdiff/dt
for sync. op parameter, the frequency difference rate of change is also checked. If the permissible
frequency change rate (parameter (_:141) Max. value dfdiff/dt syn) is exceeded, the indication
(_:329) dfdiff/dt too large is issued.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Continuous Supervision
With the parameter Continuous supervision selected, even if there is no start command for the signal
start, the device can continuously monitor the voltage difference, frequency difference, and angle differ-
ence of the circuit breaker. Meanwhile, the indications in progress, release close command, and
max. duration time expired are not issued.
If you want to release the close command, a start command for the signal start is necessary.
If you keep the default setting, then the stage Synchrocheck runs as normal.
Parameter: Sync. operating mode
• Default setting Sync. operating mode = on

With the parameter Sync. operating mode, you can switch the operating mode of the synchronization
condition on or off. The operating mode is activated in the default setting.
Parameter: Maximum Differential Values of Voltage, Frequency and Angle
• Default setting (_:5071:122) Max. voltage diff. V2>V1 = 5.0 V
• Default setting (_:5071:123) Max. voltage diff. V2<V1 = 5.0 V
• Default setting (_:5071:117) Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 = 0.10 Hz
• Default setting (_:5071:118) Max. frequency diff. f2<f1 = 0.10 Hz
• Default setting (_:5071:124) Max. angle diff. α2>α1 = 10o
• Default setting (_:5071:125) Max. angle diff. α2<α1 = 10o

2 parameters are available for the differential values voltage, frequency, and angle. Unbalanced closing ranges
can be set with this, if required.
The permissible differential values must ensure that no protection tripping or damage occurs in the system
owing to compensation processes (circulating current) and power swings after interconnection of the parts
of the power system. The settings must not be configured too closely on the other side so that necessary
closures are not blocked.
Typical differential values are selected in the default setting. Depending on the system, the settings must be
checked and adjusted, if necessary.
8.4.7.3 Settings

General
_:1 Synchrocheck #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:113 Synchrocheck #:Contin- • false false
uous supervision
• true
_:101 Synchrocheck #:Min. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
_:102 Synchrocheck #:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:110 Synchrocheck 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
#:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:108 Synchrocheck #:Direct • no no
close command
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:126 Synchrocheck #:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:105 Synchrocheck #:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2>
• yes
cmd. at V1> & V2<
• yes
cmd. at V1< & V2<
• yes
_:103 Synchrocheck #:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
_:104 Synchrocheck #:V1, V2 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
with voltage
_:109 Synchrocheck #:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
Synchr. conditions
_:115 Synchrocheck #:Sync. • off on
operating mode
• on
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:117 Synchrocheck #:Max. 0.000 Hz to 2.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2>f1
_:118 Synchrocheck #:Max. 0.000 Hz to 2.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2<f1
_:124 Synchrocheck #:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2>α1
_:125 Synchrocheck #:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2<α1

(Type)
Synchrocheck #
_:81 Synchrocheck #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Synchrocheck #:>Selection SPS I
_:502 Synchrocheck #:>Start/stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:503 Synchrocheck #:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:504 Synchrocheck #:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:506 Synchrocheck #:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:505 Synchrocheck #:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:507 Synchrocheck #:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:508 Synchrocheck #:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:501 Synchrocheck #:>Block close command SPS I
_:51 Synchrocheck #:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:54 Synchrocheck #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Synchrocheck #:Behavior ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
_:53 Synchrocheck #:Health ENS O
_:328 Synchrocheck #:In progress SPS O
_:324 Synchrocheck #:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:305 Synchrocheck #:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:325 Synchrocheck #:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:326 Synchrocheck #:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:327 Synchrocheck #:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:307 Synchrocheck #:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:306 Synchrocheck #:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:308 Synchrocheck #:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:309 Synchrocheck #:Frequency f1 > fmax SPS O
_:310 Synchrocheck #:Frequency f1 < fmin SPS O
_:311 Synchrocheck #:Frequency f2 > fmax SPS O
_:312 Synchrocheck #:Frequency f2 < fmin SPS O
_:313 Synchrocheck #:Voltage V1 > Vmax SPS O
_:314 Synchrocheck #:Voltage V1 < Vmin SPS O
_:315 Synchrocheck #:Voltage V2 > Vmax SPS O
_:316 Synchrocheck #:Voltage V2 < Vmin SPS O
_:317 Synchrocheck #:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:318 Synchrocheck #:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O
_:319 Synchrocheck #:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O
_:320 Synchrocheck #:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:329 Synchrocheck #:dfdiff/dt too large SPS O
_:321 Synchrocheck #:α dif.too large(α2>α1) SPS O
_:322 Synchrocheck #:α dif.too large(α2<α1) SPS O
_:304 Synchrocheck #:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:323 Synchrocheck #:Setting error SPS O
8.4.8 Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous
8.4.8.1 Description
A distinction according to synchronous and asynchronous systems can be made with this type of stage.
If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous systems are present. A typical character-
istic for synchronous systems is equality of frequency (Δf ≈ 0). If the frequency difference falls below the
setting value of the f-threshold ASYN<->SYN parameter, synchronous systems are to be assumed. If the
frequency difference exceeds the setting value of the f-threshold ASYN<->SYN parameter, asynchronous
systems are to be assumed. This status occurs in galvanically isolated systems, for example.
Both states have their own operating mode with its own closing conditions. Both operating modes can be
switched on and off separately (parameter Sync. operating mode and Async. operating mode). The
following combinations result from this:
Sync. operating mode Async. operating Functionality
mode
on on If the frequency difference is below the set
threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the
operating mode synchronous is active. In other
cases, the operating mode asynchronous is active.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
off on Regardless of the frequency difference and the

operating mode is exclusively active asynchro-
nously.
on off If the frequency difference is below the set
operating mode synchronous is active. In other
cases, the stage is inactive, that is, a switching
release cannot be issued.
off off Both operating modes are deactivated. No acti-
vation release can be given via these operating
modes either.
Checking the Closing Conditions in Synchronous Systems
[lo_synsyn-01, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-71 Closing Conditions when Switching Synchronous Systems
The frequency difference is very low in the synchronous systems operating mode. It is below the threshold
value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN. The status is signaled via the State f-synchronous indication.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
The parameters ΔV and Δα are checked for issuing an activation release (see Figure 8-72). The indication All
sync. conditio. OK signals that both setting values (conditions) are reached. If the conditions remain
fulfilled over the set time delay (parameter Delay close command), the release for closing is given (see
also 8.4.7.1 Description).
Every condition fulfilled is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK and Angle
difference OK.
indications. If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, for example, the indication V dif.too
large(V2<V1) is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be
increased for a successful synchronization.
With the Expanded delta-f options stage type configured and an activated (_:142) Limit dfdiff/dt
for asyn. op parameter, the frequency difference rate of change is also checked. If the permissible
frequency change rate (parameter (_:143) Max. value dfdiff/dt asyn) is exceeded, the indication
(_:329) dfdiff/dt too large is generated.
[lo_synzus-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-72 Connecting Under Synchronous System Conditions

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Checking Closing Conditions in Asynchronous Systems
[lo_synasy-01, 4, en_US]
Figure 8-73 Closing Conditions when Switching Asynchronous Systems
In this operating mode, compliance with the voltage difference ΔV and frequency difference Δf conditions
is checked. The function calculates the time point of the close command taking into account the angular
difference Δα and the make time of the circuit breaker. This is calculated so that the voltage phasors are equal
at the moment of pole contact by the circuit breaker (ΔV ≈ 0, Δα ≈ 0).
Ranges in the Voltage-Frequency Diagram (V-f Diagram)

Figure 8-74 shows the setting parameters for synchronous and asynchronous conditions in the V-f diagram.
The frequency band is very narrow owing to the functional principle in the case of synchronous systems.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[lo_synarb-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-74 Operating Range under Synchronous and Asynchronous Conditions for Voltage (V) and
Frequency (f)
Continuous Supervision
With the parameter Continuous supervision activated, even if there is no start command for the signal
start, the device can continuously monitor the synchronous condition of the circuit breaker. Meanwhile,
the indications in progress, release close command, and max. duration time expired are not
issued.
If you want to release the close command, a start command for the signal start is necessary.
If you keep the default setting, then the stage Synchronous/Asynchronous runs as normal.
Parameter: Synchronous operating mode, Asynchronous operating mode
• Default setting (_:5041:119) Sync. operating mode = on
• Default setting (_:5041:114) Async. operating mode= on

The operating modes of the stages can be activated or deactivated via the parameters. The operating modes
are deactivated in the default setting for safety reasons.
The following combination options are possible:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Sync. operating mode Async. operating mode Description

on on If the frequency difference is below the set threshold
value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the operating
mode synchronous is active. In other cases, the oper-
ating mode asynchronous is active.
If you wish to interconnect galvanically isolated
systems, then select this operating mode.
asynchronous operating mode is exclusively active.
The make time of the circuit breaker is always taken
into account for determining the connecting point.
Select this operating mode if you wish to activate
machines, for example generators or asynchronous
motors.
However, if synchronous conditions with a low Δf are
present, a close command is generated in this oper-
ating mode without a kick pulse.
on off Use this operating mode for galvanically connected
systems.
Closure is only possible with synchronous systems
(with low Δf).
off off Both operating modes are deactivated. No closing
release can therefore be given via this operating
mode.
This configuration is only advisable for special applica-
tions. Select this operating mode if you only wish to
switch, for example de-energized parts of the power
system.
Parameter for asynchronous operation: Max. voltage diff. of voltage and frequency
• Default setting (_:5041:117) Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 = 0.10 Hz
• Default setting (_:5041:118) Max. frequency diff. f2<f1 = 0.10 Hz

For more information, see Parameter for synchronous operation.
Parameter for synchronous operation: Maximum voltage diff. of voltage and angle
• Default setting (_:5041:124) Max. angle diff. α2>α1 = 10o
• Default setting (_:5041:125) Max. angle diff. α2<α1 = 10o

2 parameters are available for the differential values voltage, frequency, and angle. Unbalanced closing ranges
can be set with this, if required.
The permissible differential values must ensure that no protection tripping or damage occurs in the system
owing to compensation processes (circulating current) and power swings after interconnection of the parts
of the power system. The settings must not be configured too closely on the other side so that necessary
closures are not blocked.
Typical differential values are selected in the default setting. Depending on the system, the settings must be
checked and adjusted, if necessary.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Parameter: Switchover between synchronous and asynchronous operation
• Recommended setting value (_:5041:120) f-threshold ASYN<->SYN = 0.01 Hz

This parameter is used to set the frequency difference for switching over between synchronous and asynchro-
nous operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting of 0.01 Hz.
8.4.8.3 Settings

General
_:1 Sychr./Asycr.#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:127 Sychr./Asycr.#:Contin- • false false
uous supervision
• true
_:101 Sychr./Asycr.#:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
_:102 Sychr./Asycr.#:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:110 Sychr./ 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
Asycr.#:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:108 Sychr./Asycr.#:Direct • no no
close command
• yes
_:126 Sychr./Asycr.#:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:105 Sychr./Asycr.#:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2>
• yes
cmd. at V1> & V2<
• yes
cmd. at V1< & V2<
• yes
_:103 Sychr./Asycr.#:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
_:104 Sychr./Asycr.#:V1, V2 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
with voltage
_:109 Sychr./Asycr.#:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
Asynchr. op.mode
_:114 Sychr./Asycr.#:Async. • off on
operating mode
• on
_:113 Sychr./Asycr.#:CB make 0.010 s to 0.600 s 0.060 s
time
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:117 Sychr./Asycr.#:Max. 0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:118 Sychr./Asycr.#:Max. 0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
Synchr. op.mode
_:119 Sychr./Asycr.#:Sync. • off on
operating mode
• on
_:120 Sychr./Asycr.#:f- 0.010 Hz to 0.200 Hz 0.010 Hz
threshold ASYN<->SYN
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:124 Sychr./Asycr.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2>α1
_:125 Sychr./Asycr.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2<α1
_:121 Sychr./Asycr.#:Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
close command

(Type)
Sychr./Asycr.#
_:81 Sychr./Asycr.#:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Sychr./Asycr.#:>Selection SPS I
_:502 Sychr./Asycr.#:>Start/stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:503 Sychr./Asycr.#:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:504 Sychr./Asycr.#:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:506 Sychr./Asycr.#:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:505 Sychr./Asycr.#:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:507 Sychr./Asycr.#:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:508 Sychr./Asycr.#:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:501 Sychr./Asycr.#:>Block close command SPS I
_:51 Sychr./Asycr.#:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:54 Sychr./Asycr.#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Sychr./Asycr.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Sychr./Asycr.#:Health ENS O
_:328 Sychr./Asycr.#:In progress SPS O
_:324 Sychr./Asycr.#:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:305 Sychr./Asycr.#:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:303 Sychr./Asycr.#:State f-synchronous SPS O
_:325 Sychr./Asycr.#:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:326 Sychr./Asycr.#:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:327 Sychr./Asycr.#:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:307 Sychr./Asycr.#:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:306 Sychr./Asycr.#:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:308 Sychr./Asycr.#:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:309 Sychr./Asycr.#:Frequency f1 > fmax SPS O
_:310 Sychr./Asycr.#:Frequency f1 < fmin SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
_:311 Sychr./Asycr.#:Frequency f2 > fmax SPS O
_:312 Sychr./Asycr.#:Frequency f2 < fmin SPS O
_:313 Sychr./Asycr.#:Voltage V1 > Vmax SPS O
_:314 Sychr./Asycr.#:Voltage V1 < Vmin SPS O
_:315 Sychr./Asycr.#:Voltage V2 > Vmax SPS O
_:316 Sychr./Asycr.#:Voltage V2 < Vmin SPS O
_:317 Sychr./Asycr.#:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:318 Sychr./Asycr.#:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O
_:319 Sychr./Asycr.#:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O
_:320 Sychr./Asycr.#:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:329 Sychr./Asycr.#:dfdiff/dt too large SPS O
_:321 Sychr./Asycr.#:α dif.too large(α2>α1) SPS O
_:322 Sychr./Asycr.#:α dif.too large(α2<α1) SPS O
_:304 Sychr./Asycr.#:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:323 Sychr./Asycr.#:Setting error SPS O
8.4.9 Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous with Balancing Commands
8.4.9.1 Description
With this stage type, a distinction between synchronous and asynchronous systems can be made.
Additionally, the stage provides the balancing commands for adjustment of the voltage and frequency (speed)
to the target conditions. The stage is used for automatic synchronization of generators. The stage has the
functionality of a 1-channel parallel switching function.
If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous systems are present. A typical feature for
synchronous systems is equality of frequency (Δf ≈ 0). If the frequency difference falls below the setting value
of the parameter f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, synchronous systems are to be assumed. If the frequency
difference exceeds the setting value of the parameter f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, asynchronous systems
are to be assumed. This status occurs in galvanically separated systems, for example.
Both states have their own operating mode with their own closing conditions. You can switch both operating
modes on and off separately (parameters Sync. operating mode and Async. operating mode). The
following combinations result from this:
Sync. operating mode Async. operating Functionality
mode
on on If the frequency difference is below the set
synchronous operating mode is active. In other
cases, the asynchronous operating mode is active.
threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN,
the asynchronous operating mode is exclusively
active.
on off If the frequency difference is below the set
synchronous operating mode is active. In other
cases, the stage is inactive, that is, a switching
release cannot be issued.
off off Both operating modes are deactivated. No closure
release can be given via these operating modes
either.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Checking Closing Conditions of Synchronous Systems
[lo_synsyn_adj_comm, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-75 Closing Conditions when Switching Synchronous Systems
The frequency difference is very low in the synchronous systems operating mode. It is below the threshold
value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN. The status is signaled via the indication State f-synchronous.
The parameters ΔV and Δα are checked for issuing a closure release (see Figure 8-76). The indication All
sync. conditio. OK signals that both setting values (conditions) are reached. If the conditions remain
fulfilled over the set time delay (parameter Delay close command), the release for closing is issued (see
also chapter 8.4.7.1 Description).
Every fulfilled condition is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK and Angle
difference OK.
indications. If, for example, the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, the indication V dif.too
large(V2>V1) is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 must be reduced
for successful synchronization.
If the stage type Expanded delta-f options is configured and the parameter (_:142) Limit dfdiff/dt
for asyn. op is activated, the rate of change of the differential frequency is also checked. If the permissible
frequency change rate (parameter (_:143) Max. value dfdiff/dt asyn) is exceeded, the indication
(_:329) dfdiff/dt too large is generated.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[lo_synzus_adj_comm, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-76 Connecting Under Synchronous System Conditions

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Checking Closing Conditions of Asynchronous Systems
[lo_synasy_adj_comm, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-77 Closing Conditions when Switching Asynchronous Systems
In this operating mode, compliance with the voltage difference ΔV and frequency difference Δf conditions is
checked. The function calculates the time of the close command taking into account the angle difference Δα
and the make time of the circuit breaker. This is calculated in such a way that the voltage phasors are equal at
the moment of closing the circuit-breaker poles (ΔU ≈ 0, Δα ≈ 0).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Ranges in the Voltage-Frequency Diagram (V-f Diagram)

The following figure shows the setting parameters for synchronous and asynchronous conditions in the V-f
diagram. For synchronous systems, the frequency band is very narrow owing to the functional principle.
[lo_synarb_adj_comm, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-78 Operating Range under Synchronous and Asynchronous Conditions for Voltage (V) and
Frequency (f)
Balancing Commands for Voltage and Frequency

The stage has 2 separate blocks, split according to balancing commands for the voltage and the frequency.
The balancing pulses for increasing or decreasing the voltage and the frequency are generated in each block.
The following values affect the pulse width of the balancing command:
• Current measured values for differential voltage
• Current measured values for differential frequency
• Set gradients dV/dt and df/dt

In addition, the minimum pulse duration (T V pulse min, T f pulse min) and the maximum pulse
duration (T V pulse max, T f pulse max) are defined. The minimum pulse duration allows for a safe
reaction of the controllers while the maximum pulse duration prevents an overreaction, that is an exceedance
of the desired target value. A settable dead time intercepts transient states.
The balancing commands are active once the synchronization function has been started.
Balancing Commands for Voltage

The parameters Max. voltage diff. V2>V1 and Max. voltage diff. V2<V1 are used to determine
the voltage range that defines the admissible voltage difference for asynchronous parallel switching. The
middle of the voltage range is defined as the set point value for the balancing commands.
The parameters T V pulse min and T V pulse max define the minimum and maximum duration of the
balancing pulse.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
The parameter dV per second defines the speed for the set point value change of the voltage control.
The functionality uses the measured current voltage difference and the setting value of the parameter to
determine the actuating time. The following equation applies:
[fo_voltage-adujsting-command, 2, en_US]
with:
dVMeasured value Measured differential voltage
dV per second Parameter for default speed of set point value change
The following figure shows the effect of the functionality. When the voltage range limits fall short by approxi-
mately 1/8 of the voltage range, the stage no longer issues any voltage balancing commands.
[dw_build_voltage-adjusting-com, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-79 Generation of Balancing Commands for Voltage
Balancing Commands for Frequency

The parameters Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 and Max. frequency diff. f2<f1 are used to
determine the frequency band that defines the admissible frequency difference for asynchronous parallel
switching. The set point value for the balancing commands is not the middle of the frequency band, but the
value defined with the parameter Δf set point for balancing. If you specify a positive value, the
generators are supersynchronously switched in parallel to the network and can immediately transmit active
power to the network.
The parameters T f pulse min and T f pulse max define the minimum and maximum duration of
the balancing pulse. The parameter df/dt of the controller defines the speed for the set point value
change of the frequency control. The functionality uses the measured current frequency difference and the
setting value of the parameter to determine the actuating time. The following equation applies:
[fo_frequency-adujsting-command, 2, en_US]
with:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
dfMeasured value Measured differential frequency

Δf set point for Parameter for default set point value for the frequency balancing
balancing commands
df/dt of the controller Parameter for default speed of set point value change
The following figure shows the effect of the functionality.
[dw_build_frequency-adjusting-com, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-80 Generation of Balancing Commands for Frequency
If the speed (frequency) was adjusted in such a way that the differential frequency df ≈ 0, the voltage phasors
of V1 and V2 are practically standing still. This can result in an angle difference that does not allow any
switching. A certain frequency difference is required for safe switching. A kick pulse is emitted to attain
this state. With the parameter Release for the kick pulse, you can control the generation of a kick
pulse. A kick pulse is only emitted if the frequency difference falls below the setting value for the parameter
f-threshold ASYN<->SYN. You can find the parameter f-threshold ASYN<->SYN in the entry block
Synchr. op.mode. The actuating time of the kick pulse is defined with the parameter Δf for the kick
pulse. The following equation applies:
[fo_frequency-adujsting-command_01, 2, en_US]
with:
tfact Pulse duration
Δf for the kick pulse Parameter for default set point value for the kick pulse
df/dt of the controller Parameter for adapting the balancing commands to the controller
The following figure shows the overall effect of the balancing commands:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_kick-pulse_freq-adj-com, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-81 Kick Pulse and Frequency Adjustment Ranges
Stabilization and Supervision Actions

The parameter Smoothing causes a smoothing of the relevant measuring signal (dV and df) via a recursive
filter. The smoothing of the signals prevents wrong balancing commands from being issued to control the
voltage and frequency in case of a strong fluctuation of the signals. The smoothing has a low-pass behavior
corresponding to a delay element of the 1st order (for PT1 behavior, see also Figure 8-88).
When the voltage and the frequency are adjusted simultaneously, you must ensure that the admissible
overexcitation limit for the generator is not exceeded. The overexcitation is determined by monitoring the (V/
Vrated)/(f/frated) ratio and compared to the admissible threshold value (parameter (V/Vrated)/(f/frated)).
When the threshold value is exceeded, a voltage balancing command is issued. In this way, the generator
returns to the admissible operating range. The maximum admissible voltage threshold (V2max) for V2 is
determined using the overexcitation parameter and the f2/frated ratio.
A generator can only be synchronized with a system when there is a certain amount of slip. The frequency
difference is a measure for the slip within the functionality. A practically constant frequency difference is
assumed when determining the switching point. When adjusting the frequency, take care that no frequency
balancing commands are issued near a potential switching point. When the frequency is in the admissible
band (parameters Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 and Max. frequency diff. f2<f1; see also
Figure 8-81), the currently determined angle difference of the voltage (dα) is used to calculate the speed
of change (dα/dt). This can be used to calculate the remaining time up to the synchronized point (dα → 0)
continuously. If the determined time reaches the value for the parameter T close without balancing or
falls below it, a frequency balancing command will no longer be issued and any active frequency adjustment
will be discontinued.

Use the Synchronous/asynchronous stage type with balancing commands (Syn./Asy.bal.) for synchro-
nizing generators automatically.
You can find the Syn./Asy.bal. stage in the DIGSI 5 library under FG Circuit Breaker → Synchronization →
Function extensions.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_FB_Adjcomm, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-82 Extract from the DIGSI Library
Delete the stages of the synchronization function that are not used.
Routing the Voltage Transformers to the Measuring Points
NOTE
i Ensure that the transformer connections available in the specific application are routed to the correct
measuring point!
You can find the routing in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Function-group connections → Connect
measuring points to function group.
• Route the system-side transformer connections in the FG Circuit breaker to the input V Sync 1.
• Route the generator-side transformer connections in the FG Circuit breaker to the input V Sync 2.
The following figures show possible connection variants for the voltage transformers:
[dw_dim_two_3ph-voltage-trans, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-83 Connection of Two 3-Phase Voltage Transformers

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_dim_3ph_and_1ph-voltage-trans, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-84 Connection of a 3-Phase and a 1-Phase Voltage Transformer (Phase-to-Phase Voltage)
[dw_dim_two_1ph-voltage-trans, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-85 Connection of Two 1-Phase Voltage Transformers (Phase-to-Phase Voltage)
If you have routed the voltage transformers to the measuring points, set the corresponding transformer data
in the System data.
In the FG Circuit breaker, under General, set the rated voltage that is used as a reference for percentage-
value scaling.
Siemens recommends routing the functional measured values into the fault record in addition to the
logical signals. Route at least the functional measured values (_:2311:300) dV, (_:2311:301) df, and
(_:2311:302) dα into the fault record. This allows you to document the commissioning and subsequently
the quality of synchronization.
The asynchronous operating mode defines the automatic synchronization of generators. For this reason, the
parameters for this operating mode are described in the following sections.
You can find the basic parameters in DIGSI 5 for the Syn./Asy.bal. stage in the General block. The default
settings for the parameters are typical values. You can use the default settings if the transformer has a
secondary rated voltage of 100 V.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_FB0_adj_comm, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-86 General Block for Syn./Asy.Bal. Stage in the DIGSI Setting Sheet
If you want to switch the generator to a dead busbar (black start), Siemens recommends keeping the default
values and controlling the release via the binary input signal (_:506) >Op. mode 'V1<V2>'.
The preset voltage ranges V1 < 5 V (dead busbar) and V2 > 80 V (live generator) are tested only once the
binary input signal (_:506) >Op. mode 'V1<V2>' is active. Siemens recommends this procedure.
If you set the parameter (_:105) Close cmd. at V1< & V2> = yes, on the other hand, the voltage
ranges are tested automatically once synchronization has started. The condition V1 < 5 V is met if the voltage
is really 0 V or in case of an interruption.
In case of an interruption, the current voltage state of the busbar is unknown and there is a risk of wrong
synchronization. In this case, you can increase safety with the following measures:
• The operational crew deliberately releases synchronization.
• Alternatively, you can control release via a redundant 2nd channel. If V1 < 5 V (dead busbar), the binary
input signal (_:506) >Op. mode 'V1<V2>' is active.
[sc_FB_spglos_sch, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-87 De-en.gized Switch. Block for Syn./Asy.Bal. Stage in the DIGSI Setting Sheet
NOTE
i In the black-start application, a 3-phase voltage connection provides the advantage that all voltages are
monitored. This increases the safety of this application.
Parameters: Sync. operating mode, Async. operating mode
• Default setting (_:119) Sync. operating mode = off
• Default setting (_:114) Async. operating mode = off

With these parameters, you can switch the operating mode of the stage on or off individually. The operating
modes are deactivated in the default setting for safety reasons. Set the parameter Async. operating
mode to on.
You can find possible combinations of operating modes in chapter 8.4.8.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Parameter for Asynchronous Operation: Maximum Differential Values for Voltage and Frequency
• Default setting (_:113) CB make time = 0.060 s
• Default setting (_:115) Max. voltage diff. V2>V1 = 2.0 V

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
• Default setting (_:116) Max. voltage diff. V2<V1 = 2.0 V
• Default setting (_:117) Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 = 0.10 Hz
• Default setting (_:118) Max. frequency diff. f2<f1 = 0.10 Hz

The default settings are typical values you can use to synchronize generators. For example, if you only want to
connect to the network supersynchronously, set the parameter (_:118) Max. frequency diff. f2<f1
= 0 Hz.
With the parameter (_:113) CB make time, you set the make time of the closing circuit (circuit-breaker
operating time + times of auxiliary relay, where applicable). You must measure this time during commis-
sioning.
Parameter: f-threshold ASYN<->SYN
• Recommended setting value (_:120) f-threshold ASYN<->SYN = 0.01 Hz

With the parameter f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, you set the frequency difference for switching over
between synchronous and asynchronous operation. You can find this parameter in the Synchr. op.mode
block.
Siemens recommends keeping the default setting value of 0.01 Hz.
This parameter is also taken into account when the kick pulse has been activated (see Figure 8-81).
Parameters for Balancing Commands used to Control the Voltage

The following parameters are used as balancing commands to control the voltage:
• (_:131) Balancing voltage V2
• (_:132) T V pulse min
• (_:133) T V pulse max
• (_:134) dV per second
• (_:135) T pause V
• (_:136) Smoothing
• (_:137) (V/Vrated)/(f/frated)
Parameter: Balancing voltage V2
• Default setting (_:131) Balancing voltage V2 = off

With the parameter Balancing voltage V2, you specify whether you wish to issue balancing commands
for the voltage V2 on the generator side or not. If you wish to issue balancing commands for the voltage, 2
alternatives are available for voltage control.
off If you select this setting value, no balancing commands are issued for the
voltage V2 on the generator side.
transformer tap If you select this setting value, the balancing commands are issued to the
voltage controller. The balancing commands control the voltage via the tap
changer on the transformer with the pulse duration T V pulse max.
balancing pulses If you select this setting value, balancing commands are issued for the
voltage V2 to the voltage controller of the generator.
Parameter: T V pulse min
• Default setting (_:132) T V pulse min = 0.10 s

With the parameter T V pulse min, you set the minimum time of the control pulse. It corresponds to the
minimum time to which the voltage controller responds. Set the parameter T V pulse min to this limiting
value. The default setting is a practicable value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Parameter: T V pulse max
• Default setting (_:133) T V pulse max = 1.00 s

With the parameter T V pulse max, you set the maximum time of the control pulse. The default setting is a
practicable value. This allows you to avoid overadjustment of the voltage in case of major voltage differences.
Parameter: dV per second
• Default setting (_:134) dV per second = 2.00 V

With the parameter dV per second, you adjust the balancing commands to the controller. You can thus
correctly define the set point value. The duration of the control pulse is derived from the measured differential
voltage and from the setting value of the parameter. The default setting is a practicable value. Use the
following equation to estimate the actuating time.
[fo_voltage-adujsting-command, 2, en_US]
with:
dVMeasured value Measured differential voltage
dV per second Parameter for specifying the speed of set point value change
EXAMPLE:
The following values apply to the example:
Measured differential voltage dV = 4 V
Parameter setting value dV per second = 2 V
Use the following equation to estimate the duration of the balancing pulse:
[fo_du-dt_2v-s, 2, en_US]
The calculated duration of the setting pulse is 2 s. The setting value of the parameter (_:133) T V pulse
max limits the maximum duration of the setting pulse to 1 s. In this case, the value of 1 s applies.
Parameter: T pause V
• Default setting (_:135) T pause V = 5.00 s

With the parameter T pause V, you set the dead time between the balancing commands. This allows
the controller or generator to respond to the control pulse. Determine the final setting value during commis-
sioning.
Parameter: Smoothing
• Default setting (_:136) Smoothing = 1

The parameter Smoothing is used for additional smoothing of the dV voltage measured values.
If the measured differential voltage dV fluctuates during commissioning, increase the default setting. The
smoothing has low-pass behavior (PT1 behavior).
Figure 8-88 allows you to estimate the effect of the setting value of the parameter. The following figure shows
the step response. The longer the delay, the greater the smoothing effect.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_characteristic-adjusting-com, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-88 Effect of Smoothing Depending on the Set Parameter
Parameter: (V/Vrated)/(f/frated)
• Default setting (_:137) (V/Vrated)/(f/frated) = 1.10

With the parameter (V/Vrated)/(f/frated), you specify the overexcitation threshold.
The default setting is a typical value. Note that the thresholds refer to primary voltages. You can also easily
calculate with secondary values, as the voltage transformers are usually exactly adjusted to the rated voltage
of the plant. In case of deviations, you must correct the default setting.
EXAMPLE:
Permissible value (V/Vrated)/(f/frated) 1.1

Primary rated voltage of the generator Vprim = 10.5 kV
Primary voltage of the voltage transformer Vprim, trans. = 10 kV
This results in the following secondary setting value:
[fo_v-rated_the_generator, 2, en_US]
Parameters for Balancing Commands used to Control the Frequency

The following parameters are used as balancing commands to control the frequency:
• Balancing frequency f2
• T f pulse min
• T f pulse max
• df/dt of the controller

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
• T pause f
• Δf set point for balancing
• Smoothing
• T close without balancing
• Release for the kick pulse
• Δf for the kick pulse
• Stabilization
Parameter: Balancing frequency f2
• Default setting (_:141) Balancing frequency f2 = off

With the parameter Balancing frequency f2, you specify whether you wish to issue balancing
commands for the frequency f2 on the generator side or not.
off If you select this setting value, no balancing commands are issued for the
frequency f2 on the generator side.
balancing pulses If you select this setting value, balancing commands are issued for the
frequency f2 on the generator side.
Parameter: T f pulse min
• Default setting (_:142) T f pulse min = 0.10 s

With the parameter T f pulse min, you set the minimum time of the control pulse. It corresponds to the
minimum time to which the frequency controller responds. Set the time to this limiting value. The default
setting is a practicable value.
Parameter: T f pulse max
• Default setting (_:143) T f pulse max = 1.00 s

With the parameter T f pulse max, you set the maximum time of the control pulse. The default setting
is a practicable value. This allows you to avoid overadjustment of the speed in case of major frequency
differences.
Parameter: df/dt of the controller
• Default setting (_:144) df/dt of the controller = 1.00 Hz/s

With the parameter df/dt of the controller, you adjust the balancing commands to the controller.
This allows the set point value to be specified correctly. The control pulse is derived from the measured
differential frequency, the setting value of the parameter df/dt of the controller, and the set point
value Δf set point for balancing. The default setting is a practicable value.
Use the following equation to estimate the duration of the balancing pulse:
[fo_frequency-adujsting-command, 2, en_US]
with:
dfMeasured value Measured differential frequency
Δf set point for Parameter for specifying the set point value for the frequency balancing
balancing commands
df/dt of the controller Parameter for specifying the speed of set point value change

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Parameter: T pause f
• Default setting (_:145) T pause f = 10.00 s

With the parameter T pause f, you set the dead time between the balancing commands. This allows
the controller and the generator to respond to the control pulse. Determine the final setting value during
commissioning.
Parameter: Δf set point for balancing
• Default setting (_:146) Δf set point for balancing = 0.04 Hz

With the parameter Δf set point for balancing, you define the set point value for the frequency
adjustment. The default setting is a practicable value.
EXAMPLE:
Measured differential frequency df = 0.5 Hz

Parameter setting value df/dt of the controller = 1 Hz/s
Set point value Δf set point for balancing = 0.04 Hz
Use the following equation to calculate the duration of the balancing pulse:
[fo_df-dt_1hz-s, 2, en_US]
Parameter: Smoothing
• Default setting (_:147) Smoothing = 1

The parameter Smoothing is used for additional smoothing of the df frequency measured values. If the meas-
ured differential frequency df fluctuates during commissioning, increase the default setting. For hydropower
plants, in particular, the generator speed may fluctuate, necessitating corresponding adjustment.
Smoothing results in proportional transmission behavior with a delay of the 1st order (PT1 behavior).
Figure 8-88 allows you to estimate the effect of the setting value of the parameter.
Parameter: T close without balancing
• Default setting (_:148) T close without balancing = 5.00 s

With the parameter T close without balancing, you set the time within which no balancing commands
are to be issued. This avoids having the frequency change at the moment of switching. The time is thus the
remaining duration up to a possible switching. The parameter T close without balancing is active if
the frequency difference is within the set band (see Figure 8-81).
Proceed as follows to estimate the time:
Use the set frequency difference to calculate the period duration. The phasors are in phase opposition after
half of that time. Do not adjust the frequency within the range from approximately 120° to a maximum of
180° before switching.
EXAMPLE:
The set frequency band in the example is df = 0.1 Hz.
At this threshold, the period duration is as follows:
[fo_Tdf, 2, en_US]
Assuming a constant differential frequency of 0.1 Hz, dα changes by 360° in 10 s.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
The rule of three may be used to estimate the minimum dead time as follows:
360° = 10 s
120° = tmin
[fo_frequenzband, 2, en_US]
Set the parameter T close without balancing to a higher value, as in a practical case, the current
differential frequency is less than 0.1 Hz (for example, set point value 0.04 s).
At a differential frequency of 0.04 Hz, a 360° rotation takes 25 s and this leads to a minimum dead time of
approximately 8 s.
The example shows that the default setting of 5.00 s is a practicable value.
Parameter: Release for the kick pulse
• Default setting (_:149) Release for the kick pulse = off

With the parameter Release for the kick pulse, you can activate the kick pulse.
If you need a kick pulse for your application, change the default setting.
Parameter: Δf for the kick pulse
• Default setting (_:150) Δf for the kick pulse = 0.04 Hz

With the parameter Δf for the kick pulse, you define the set point value for the kick pulse. The pulse
duration is derived from this.
Set the parameter Δf for the kick pulse to the same value as the parameter Δf set point for
balancing.
The setting value of 0.04 Hz leads to the following duration for the kick pulse:
[fo_frequency-adujsting-command_02, 2, en_US]
If the controller does not respond to this brief pulse (tfact < t pulse min), the minimum pulse T f pulse
min applies.
Parameter: Stabilization
• Default setting (_:151) Stabilization = no

If the dead time is too short, the parameter Stabilization results in a faster compensation of the speed
controller.
no The default setting no is a practicable value for typical synchronization
applications.
yes If the dead time is short, the transition process has not yet been completed
after a control pulse for the frequency. The frequency can fluctuate around
its set point value.
If you set the parameter Stabilization = yes, the transient status is
attenuated by canceling the control pulse or by issuing a control pulse in
the reverse direction in time.
Siemens only recommends this setting value if you wish to achieve fast
synchronization by means of short dead times or for special applications.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.4.9.3 Settings

General
_:1 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
_:102 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:110 Syn./ 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
Asy.bal.#:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:108 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Direct • no no
close command
• yes
_:126 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:105 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2>
• yes
cmd. at V1> & V2<
• yes
cmd. at V1< & V2<
• yes
_:103 Syn./Asy.bal.#:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
with voltage
_:109 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
Asynchr. op.mode
_:114 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Async. • off off
operating mode
• on
_:113 Syn./Asy.bal.#:CB make 0.010 s to 0.600 s 0.060 s
time
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:117 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
Synchr. op.mode
_:119 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Sync. • off off
operating mode
• on
_:120 Syn./Asy.bal.#:f- 0.010 Hz to 0.200 Hz 0.010 Hz

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:124 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2>α1
_:125 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2<α1
_:121 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
close command
Balancing V
_:131 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Balancing • off off
voltage V2
• transformer tap
• balancing pulses
_:132 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T V pulse 0.01 s to 1.00 s 0.10 s
min
max
_:134 Syn./Asy.bal.#:dV per 0.100 V to 50.000 V 2.000 V
second
_:135 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T pause V 0.10 s to 60.00 s 5.00 s
_:136 Syn./ 1 to 100 1
Asy.bal.#:Smoothing
_:137 Syn./Asy.bal.#:(V/ 1.00 to 1.40 1.10
Vrated)/(f/frated)
Balancing f
frequency f2
_:142 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T f pulse 0.01 s to 1.00 s 0.10 s
min
max
_:144 Syn./Asy.bal.#:df/dt of 0.05 Hz/s to 5.00 Hz/s 1.00 Hz/s
the controller
_:145 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T pause f 0.10 s to 60.00 s 10.00 s
_:146 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Δf set -1.00 Hz to 1.00 Hz 0.04 Hz
point for balancing
_:147 Syn./ 1 to 100 1
Asy.bal.#:Smoothing
_:148 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T close 1.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
without balancing
_:149 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Release • off off
for the kick pulse
• on
_:150 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Δf for the -1.00 Hz to 1.00 Hz 0.04 Hz
kick pulse
_:151 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Stabiliza- • no no
tion
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
Syn./Asy.bal.#
_:81 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Selection SPS I
_:502 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Start/stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:503 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:504 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:506 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:505 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:507 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:508 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:501 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Block close command SPS I
_:511 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Block balancing SPS I
_:513 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Block V2 balancing SPS I
_:514 Syn./Asy.bal.#:>Block f2 balancing SPS I
_:51 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:54 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Health ENS O
_:328 Syn./Asy.bal.#:In progress SPS O
_:324 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:305 Syn./Asy.bal.#:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:303 Syn./Asy.bal.#:State f-synchronous SPS O
_:325 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:326 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:327 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:307 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:306 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:308 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:309 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Frequency f1 > fmax SPS O
_:310 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Frequency f1 < fmin SPS O
_:311 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Frequency f2 > fmax SPS O
_:312 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Frequency f2 < fmin SPS O
_:313 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Voltage V1 > Vmax SPS O
_:314 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Voltage V1 < Vmin SPS O
_:315 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Voltage V2 > Vmax SPS O
_:316 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Voltage V2 < Vmin SPS O
_:317 Syn./Asy.bal.#:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:318 Syn./Asy.bal.#:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O
_:319 Syn./Asy.bal.#:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O
_:320 Syn./Asy.bal.#:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:329 Syn./Asy.bal.#:dfdiff/dt too large SPS O
_:321 Syn./Asy.bal.#:α dif.too large(α2>α1) SPS O
_:322 Syn./Asy.bal.#:α dif.too large(α2<α1) SPS O
_:304 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:323 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Setting error SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
_:332 Syn./Asy.bal.#:V2 control pulse higher SPS O
_:331 Syn./Asy.bal.#:V2 control pulse lower SPS O
_:334 Syn./Asy.bal.#:f2 control pulse higher SPS O
_:333 Syn./Asy.bal.#:f2 control pulse lower SPS O
8.4.10 Expanded Checks (df/dt and Smoothing of Oscillations)
When configuring the function block Expanded delta-f options, you can expand the synchronization checks
to include the following aspects:
• Limitation of the frequency change rate

With this option, you can define additional upper limits for the rate of permissible frequency difference
change. The release checks for both stage types take these additional upper limits into consideration.
Both activation (parameters (_:140) Limit dfdiff/dt for sync. op and (_:142) Limit
dfdiff/dt for asyn. op) and the upper limits (parameters (_:141) Max. value dfdiff/dt
syn and (_:143) Max. value dfdiff/dt asyn) for the frequency change rate are adjustable
selectively for synchronous and asynchronous conditions. Both stage types consider the frequency
change rate when issuing the release for switching and indicate when the rate is exceeded.
If you also activate the option to compensate for low-frequency oscillations (parameter (_:150)
Suppr. frequ. oscillations), the frequency change rate is stabilized in the presence of such
oscillations. Stabilization is in effect for asynchronous as well as synchronous operating modes.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
• Compensation for low-frequency oscillations

If you activate this option (parameter (_:150) Suppr. frequ. oscillations), low-frequency
oscillations, for example, as a consequence of power swings in the range of 0.8 Hz to 1.6 Hz, are
detected and smoothed. This stabilizes the release checks in the presence of frequently changing viola-
tions of upper and lower limits for the specified frequency threshold values. The option affects the
frequency check of the stage type Synchrocheck and the synchronous operating mode of the stage type
Synchronous/Asynchronous. It does not affect the asynchronous operating mode.
In the example of the following figure, the synchrocheck function would initiate energization, if the
allowed frequency difference was set to 10 mHz without the parameter Suppr. frequ. oscilla-
tions as soon as the frequency f2 enters the 10-mHz band. If the parameter Suppr. frequ. oscil-
lations is activated, energization is not initiated, since the average value of f2 is outside the band.
[dw_synfre-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-89 Example: Frequency Difference between the Constant Frequency f1 and the Sinusoidal
Oscillating Frequency f2
With this option active, the range of function measured values is expanded by the smoothed frequency.
Release of switching in synchronous networks occurs after one second at the earliest. This time is needed
to smooth the frequency measured values.
The actual frequency can be larger or smaller than the smoothed value at any instant. The parameter
Max. diff. "f threshold" makes it possible to limit the increase in instantaneous frequency value
in relation to the respective frequency threshold value.
8.4.11 Closing at De-Energized Line/Busbar
If at least one of 2 parts of an electrical power system is de-energized, the parts of the electrical power system
can be connected together via the following operating modes.
If the measured voltage is less than the threshold V1, V2 without voltage, the zero potential of the
part of the electrical power system is detected. In this case, all phases are compared to the parameter V1,
V2 without voltage. The energized side must be in the defined operating range with respect to voltage
and frequency (see chapter 8.4.4.1 Description) and all phases must exceed the threshold V1, V2 with
voltage.
The following additional closing conditions can be selected, which are then applied next to the closing
conditions for the synchronism:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Settings Description
Close cmd. at V1> & V2< Closing release under the condition that the part V1 of the power
system is energized and the part of the electrical power system
U2 is de-energized.
Close cmd. at V1< & V2> Closing release under the condition that the part V1 of the power
system is de-energized and the part of the electrical power
system U2 is energized.
Close cmd. at V1< & V2< Closing release provided mains adapters V 1 and V2 are de-ener-
gized.
Each of these conditions can be made effective individually via parameters or binary input. You can also set
parameters for combinations, for example a release for closure, if Close cmd. at V1> & V2< or Close
cmd. at V1< & V2> has been fulfilled.
[lo_syn003-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-90 Release Conditions for Switching to De-Energized Line/Busbar
The indications Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled, Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled and Cond. V1<V2<
fulfilled indicate that the relevant conditions are fulfilled.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
If the following 2 conditions are met, these indications refresh automatically:
• You set the parameter Sync. operating mode to on.
• You select the parameter Continuous supervision.

You can use the Supervision time parameter to set a supervision time for which the closing conditions
must at least be fulfilled with de-energized connection, before closing is allowed.

If at least one of 2 parts of an electrical power system is de-energized, the parts of the electrical power system
can be connected together via the following operating modes. The above potential release conditions are
independent of one another and can also be combined.
NOTE
i For reasons of safety, the releases have been deactivated in the default setting and are therefore at no.
Even if you wish to apply one of these operating modes, Siemens recommends leaving the setting at no
for reasons of safety. Set the operating mode only dynamically via the assigned binary input signal (for
example >Operating mode 'U1>U2<') (see also Figure 8-90). This prevents one of these operating
modes from being incorrectly activated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching.
Parameter: Close cmd. at V1< & V2>
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:105) Close cmd. at V1< & V2> = no
no No release for closing is possible via this operating mode.
yes If part V1of the power system is de-energized and part V2 of the power
system is energized, the release for closure is given upon starting the
synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed.
The setting depends on the operational requirements. Note the above
information.
Parameter: Close cmd. at V1> & V2<
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:106) Close cmd. at V1> & V2< = no
yes If part V1of the power system is energized and part V2 of the power
system is de-energized, the release for closure is given upon starting the
synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed.
information.
Parameter: Close cmd. at V1< & V2<
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:107) Close cmd. at V1< & V2< = no
yes If the parts V1 and V2 of the power system are de-energized, the release
for closure is given upon starting the synchronization stage after the
supervision time has passed.
information.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Parameter: V1, V2 with voltage
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:104) V1, V2 with voltage = 80 V

The setting value indicates the voltage above which a part of the power system (feeder or busbar) can be
regarded as activated with certainty.
You must set the value below the minimum expected operational undervoltage. Siemens therefore recom-
mends a setting value of approx. 80 % of the rated voltage. All voltages connected according to the parame-
terized measuring-point connection type are subjected to the appropriate Vmin/Vmax test.
Parameter: V1, V2 without voltage
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:103) V1, V2 without voltage = 5 V

The setting value indicates the voltage below which a part of the power system (feeder or busbar) can be
regarded as deactivated with certainty.
Siemens recommends a setting value of approx. 5 % of the rated voltage for this. All voltages connected
according to the parameterized measuring-point connection type are subjected to the appropriate Vmin/Vmax
test.
Parameter: Supervision time
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:109) Supervision time = 0.1 s

The parameter defines a supervision time for which the above additional closing conditions have to be at
least fulfilled at de-energized switching, before the release for closing is given. In order to include transient
phenomena, Siemens recommends a value of 0.1 s.
Parameter: Direct close command
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:108) Direct close command = no

In this operating mode, the function initiates a closing release without any testing upon start of the synchroni-
zation stage. The closure occurs immediately.
NOTE
i For safety reasons, Siemens recommends leaving the setting atno. If a direct close command is necessary,
Siemens recommends only using this operating mode dynamically via the binary input signal >Op. mode
'dir.cls.cmd' (see also Figure 8-92). This prevents this operating mode from being incorrectly acti-
vated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching.
8.4.12 Direct Close Command
You can activate the operating mode direct close command statically via the Direct close command
parameter or dynamically with the binary input signal >Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' (see Figure 8-91).
[lo_syndir_01, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-91 Activation of the Operating Mode Direct Close Command
The operating mode Direct close command function initiates a closure release without any testing upon start
of the synchronization stage. The closure occurs immediately.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
The combination Direct close command with other operating modes is not recommended, as the other
operating mode is bypassed.
If the synchronization function is defective (standby of the sync stage = alarm or warning), a direct close
command is executed or not executed, depending on the type of fault (see also supervisions in chapter
8.4.4.1 Description).
8.4.13 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing (AREC), and External Triggering
With Control
The control and synchronization functions are always located in a Circuit-breaker function group. The control
and also the synchronization function always operate with the circuit breaker, which is linked to the function
group Circuit breaker.
As soon as the synchronization function is in the Circuit-breaker function group, the circuit breaker is subject
to compulsory synchronization. If all synchronization stages are deactivated, the circuit breaker cannot be acti-
vated via the control, as no release can be generated for the closure. The circuit breaker is no longer subject to
compulsory synchronization after deletion of the synchronization function. Closure without synchronization is
then possible via the control.
If closure is to be synchronized via the control, the control automatically generates an internal signal which
starts the synchronization function. The functional sequence is described in chapter 8.4.6 Sequence of Func-
tions. After fulfilling all closing conditions, the synchronization sends a release signal to the control, which
closes the circuit breaker and then stops and synchronization function.
[lo_synaw1-01, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-92 Interaction of the Control with the Synchronization Function
With Automatic Reclosing

The automatic reclosing mechanism (AREC) can also work with the synchronization function. Both functions
are always located in a function group Circuit breaker. Consequently the AREC and synchronization function
always work with the circuit breaker that is linked to the function group Circuit breaker.
You must select a synchronization stage via settings within the AREC so that closure is synchronized by the
AREC. The tests for the synchronization stage are used for the closure by the AREC. If no synchronization stage
is selected, the AREC then activates without synchronization.
If closure is to be synchronized via the AREC, the AREC automatically generates an internal signal which starts
the synchronization function. The functional sequence is described in chapter 8.4.6 Sequence of Functions.
After fulfilling all closing conditions, the synchronization sends a release signal to the AREC, which closes the
circuit breaker and then stops and synchronization function.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Figure 8-93 Connection of the AREC to the Synchronization Function
With External Control

You have the option of controlling the synchronization function externally via binary input signals. This can be
done as follows:
• Edge-controlled
• Via the signals >Start syn. process and >Stop syn. process
• State-controlled via the signal >Start/stop syn.proc. (see also 8.4.6 Sequence of Functions).
The start is followed by the functional sequence (see 8.4.6 Sequence of Functions). If the conditions are
fulfilled, the output signal Release close cmd. is output. The switched object QAx of the function group
Circuit breaker is not closed. The output signal Release close cmd. must be explicitly routed to the
binary output in order to close the circuit breaker.
Figure 8-94 Interaction of the Synchronization Function with External Control

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.4.14 External Synchronization
The purpose of the External synchronization function is to control an external synchronization device.
[dw_ctrl_ext_sync_device, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-95 Triggering an External Synchronization Device
The bay controller in bay x should switch the circuit breaker in bay x in synchrony. The synchronization check
is carried out in the central paralleling device 7VE6. In addition to the paralleling device, another central bay
controller ensures the switching of the correct measuring voltages and the routing of the CB close command
from the 7VE6 to the correct circuit breaker in bay x. The bay controller x provides the information to the
central bay controller via IEC61850-GOOSE.
The External synchronization is designed as a function block which can be used in the Circuit-breaker func-
tion group. The additional External synchronization function block integrates the external synchronization
into command processing, so that the corresponding feedback can be forwarded to the command source.
If a circuit-breaker close command with a synchronization requirement is present, the external synchroniza-
tion device is started. After successfully checking the synchronization conditions, the close command is
issued from the external synchronization device to the circuit breaker. If a circuit-breaker close command
without synchronization requirement is present, the circuit-breaker close command is issued directly from the
Circuit-breaker function group to the circuit breaker. Also, each circuit-breaker trip command is issued directly
to the circuit breaker.
In case of a failure of the external synchronization device, you can also close the circuit breaker directly
without considering the synchronization conditions.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_extsyn-02, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-96 Interaction between Control and External Synchronization
Parameterization with DIGSI

In the DIGSI library, the function is visible inside the Circuit-breaker function group as the External synchro-
nization function block. You can instantiate the function block in the Circuit-breaker function group and the
Circuit-breaker (control) function group. You can instantiate only 1 External synchronization function block
within these function groups at a time.
[scextsyn-041116-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-97 Instantiating the External Synchronization Function Block in the Circuit-Breaker Function
Group
It is not possible to jointly instantiate the External synchronization function block with the 25 synchroniza-
tion function in the same Circuit-breaker function group.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Notes for Optional Input Interconnections

You have the option of connecting the input signals >Close cmd. released and >In progress. If you
omit these interconnections, observe the following instructions:
Input >Close cmd. released:
If you do not interconnect the input signal >Close cmd. released the execution of a circuit-breaker close
command with synchronization requirement is confirmed directly (execution successful: OPR+), as soon as
the output signal Start syn. process is set. In this case, the (_:109) Max.durat. sync.process
setting has no meaning. If you use a control model with feedback monitoring, consider that the feedback
monitoring will start immediately when the Start syn. process signal is tripped. The (_:4201:103)
Feedback monitoring time setting must therefore be set higher than the maximum synchronization
time of the external synchronization device plus the circuit-breaker make time. If >Close cmd. released
is not routed, the output Start/stop syn. proc. is not set.
Input>In progress:
The interconnection of the input signal >In progress is intended to check whether the synchronization
device has received the Start syn. process signal. If you do not interconnect this input signal and the
external synchronization device rejects a start command, the negative acknowledgment of the circuit-breaker
close command does not occur until the maximum synchronization time (parameter (_:109) Max.durat.
sync.process) has expired.
Input >Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd':
In case of a failure of the external synchronization device, you can also close the circuit breaker directly
without considering the synchronization conditions. To do this, activate the input signal >Op. mode
'dir.cls.cmd' or the parameter (_:110) Direct close command. The close command is then issued
directly by the bay controller.
8.4.14.2 Application and Setting Notes (External Synchronization)
Parameter: Mode

With the Mode parameter, you switch the external synchronization function on or off. If you set the Mode
parameter to off, a circuit-breaker close command with synchronization requirement is rejected.
Parameter: Max.durat. sync.process
• Default setting (_:109) Max.durat. sync.process = 30 s

The Max.durat. sync.process parameter defines the maximum synchronization time. The time starts
when the External synchronization function block sends a close command to the external synchronization
device. The command must be executed within this time. If the close command is not executed within
this time, the External synchronization function block sends a command to cancel closing to the external
synchronization device.
Parameter: Direct close command
• Default setting (_:110) Direct close command = no

In case of a failure of the external synchronization device the Direct close command parameter is used
to close the circuit breaker directly without considering the synchronization conditions. If the parameter is
activated a close command with synchronization requirement will not be transmitted to the external synchro-
nization device, but directly carried out by the bay controller.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.4.14.3 Settings

General
_:1 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
operat. limit Vmax
_:110 Syn./ 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
Asy.bal.#:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:108 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Direct • no no
close command
• yes
_:126 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
cmd. at V1< & V2>
• yes
cmd. at V1> & V2<
• yes
cmd. at V1< & V2<
• yes
without voltage
with voltage
_:109 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
Asynchr. op.mode
_:114 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Async. • off off
operating mode
• on
_:113 Syn./Asy.bal.#:CB make 0.010 s to 0.600 s 0.060 s
time
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
Synchr. op.mode
_:119 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Sync. • off off
operating mode
• on
_:120 Syn./Asy.bal.#:f- 0.010 Hz to 0.200 Hz 0.010 Hz

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:124 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2>α1
_:125 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2<α1
_:121 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
close command
Balancing V
voltage V2
• transformer tap
min
max
_:134 Syn./Asy.bal.#:dV per 0V/sto0 V/s 0 V/s
second
_:135 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T pause V 0.10 s to 60.00 s 5.00 s
_:136 Syn./ 1 to 100 1
Asy.bal.#:Smoothing
_:137 Syn./Asy.bal.#:(V/ 1.00 to 1.40 1.10
Vrated)/(f/frated)
Balancing f
frequency f2
min
max
_:144 Syn./Asy.bal.#:df/dt of 0.05 Hz/s to 5.00 Hz/s 1.00 Hz/s
the controller
_:145 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T pause f 0.10 s to 60.00 s 5.00 s
_:146 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Δf set -1.00 Hz to 1.00 Hz 0.04 Hz
point for balancing
_:147 Syn./ 1 to 100 1
Asy.bal.#:Smoothing
_:148 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T close 1.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
without balancing
_:149 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Release • off off
for the kick pulse
• on
_:150 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Δf for the -1.00 Hz to 1.00 Hz 0.04 Hz
kick pulse
_:151 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Stabiliza- 0 to 1000 0
tion

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

External sync.
_:1 External sync.:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:109 External 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
sync.:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:110 External sync.:Direct • 0 false
close command
• 1

(Type)
External sync.
_:506 External sync.:>Synch. device ready SPS I
_:508 External sync.:>In progress SPS I
_:507 External sync.:>Close cmd. released SPS I
_:509 External sync.:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:52 External sync.:Behavior ENS O
_:54 External sync.:Health ENS O
_:55 External sync.:Start syn. process SPS O
_:56 External sync.:Stop syn. process SPS O
_:57 External sync.:Start/stop syn. proc. SPS O
8.4.15 Settings

General
_:2311:127 General:Angle adjust. -179.0 ° to 180.0 ° 0.0 °
(transform.)
General
_:5071:1 Synchrocheck 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5071:113 Synchrocheck 1:Contin- • false false
uous supervision
• true
_:5071:101 Synchrocheck 1:Min. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:5071:110 Synchrocheck 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
1:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:5071:108 Synchrocheck 1:Direct • no no
close command
• yes
_:5071:126 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

De-en.gized switch.
_:5071:105 Synchrocheck 1:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2>
• yes
cmd. at V1> & V2<
• yes
cmd. at V1< & V2<
• yes
_:5071:103 Synchrocheck 1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
_:5071:104 Synchrocheck 1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
with voltage
_:5071:109 Synchrocheck 1:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
Synchr. conditions
_:5071:115 Synchrocheck 1:Sync. • off on
operating mode
• on
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:5071:117 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 Hz to 2.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
_:5071:118 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 Hz to 2.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
_:5071:124 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2>α1
_:5071:125 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2<α1
General
_:5041:1 Sychr./Asycr.1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5041:127 Sychr./Asycr.1:Contin- • false false
uous supervision
• true
_:5041:101 Sychr./Asycr.1:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
operat. limit Vmax
_:5041:110 Sychr./ 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
Asycr.1:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:5041:108 Sychr./Asycr.1:Direct • no no
close command
• yes
_:5041:126 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:5041:105 Sychr./Asycr.1:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2>
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

cmd. at V1> & V2<
• yes
cmd. at V1< & V2<
• yes
_:5041:103 Sychr./Asycr.1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
_:5041:104 Sychr./Asycr.1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
with voltage
_:5041:109 Sychr./Asycr.1:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
Asynchr. op.mode
_:5041:114 Sychr./Asycr.1:Async. • off on
operating mode
• on
_:5041:113 Sychr./Asycr.1:CB make 0.010 s to 0.600 s 0.060 s
time
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:5041:117 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
_:5041:118 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
Synchr. op.mode
_:5041:119 Sychr./Asycr.1:Sync. • off on
operating mode
• on
_:5041:120 Sychr./Asycr.1:f- 0.010 Hz to 0.200 Hz 0.010 Hz
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:5041:124 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2>α1
_:5041:125 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2<α1
_:5041:121 Sychr./Asycr.1:Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
close command

(Type)
Measurements
_:2311:303 General:Multiple selection SPS O
_:2311:304 General:Blocked no V selected SPS O
_:2311:330 General:f1 MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
_:2311:332 General:f2 MV O
_:2311:300 General:dV MV O
_:2311:301 General:df MV O
_:2311:302 General:dα MV O
Synchrocheck 1
_:5071:81 Synchrocheck 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5071:500 Synchrocheck 1:>Selection SPS I
_:5071:502 Synchrocheck 1:>Start/stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:5071:503 Synchrocheck 1:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:5071:504 Synchrocheck 1:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:5071:506 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:5071:505 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:5071:507 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:5071:508 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:5071:501 Synchrocheck 1:>Block close command SPS I
_:5071:51 Synchrocheck 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:5071:54 Synchrocheck 1:Inactive SPS O
_:5071:52 Synchrocheck 1:Behavior ENS O
_:5071:53 Synchrocheck 1:Health ENS O
_:5071:328 Synchrocheck 1:In progress SPS O
_:5071:324 Synchrocheck 1:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:5071:305 Synchrocheck 1:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:5071:325 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:5071:326 Synchrocheck 1:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:5071:327 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:5071:307 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:306 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:308 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:309 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f1 > fmax SPS O
_:5071:310 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f1 < fmin SPS O
_:5071:311 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f2 > fmax SPS O
_:5071:312 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f2 < fmin SPS O
_:5071:313 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V1 > Vmax SPS O
_:5071:314 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V1 < Vmin SPS O
_:5071:315 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V2 > Vmax SPS O
_:5071:316 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V2 < Vmin SPS O
_:5071:317 Synchrocheck 1:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:5071:318 Synchrocheck 1:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O
_:5071:319 Synchrocheck 1:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O
_:5071:320 Synchrocheck 1:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:5071:321 Synchrocheck 1:α dif.too large(α2>α1) SPS O
_:5071:322 Synchrocheck 1:α dif.too large(α2<α1) SPS O
_:5071:304 Synchrocheck 1:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:5071:323 Synchrocheck 1:Setting error SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
Sychr./Asycr.1
_:5041:81 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5041:500 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Selection SPS I
_:5041:502 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Start/stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:5041:503 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:5041:504 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:5041:506 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:5041:505 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:5041:507 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:5041:508 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:5041:501 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Block close command SPS I
_:5041:51 Sychr./Asycr.1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:5041:54 Sychr./Asycr.1:Inactive SPS O
_:5041:52 Sychr./Asycr.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5041:53 Sychr./Asycr.1:Health ENS O
_:5041:328 Sychr./Asycr.1:In progress SPS O
_:5041:324 Sychr./Asycr.1:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:5041:305 Sychr./Asycr.1:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:5041:303 Sychr./Asycr.1:State f-synchronous SPS O
_:5041:325 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:5041:326 Sychr./Asycr.1:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:5041:327 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:5041:307 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:306 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:308 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:309 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f1 > fmax SPS O
_:5041:310 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f1 < fmin SPS O
_:5041:311 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f2 > fmax SPS O
_:5041:312 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f2 < fmin SPS O
_:5041:313 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V1 > Vmax SPS O
_:5041:314 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V1 < Vmin SPS O
_:5041:315 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V2 > Vmax SPS O
_:5041:316 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V2 < Vmin SPS O
_:5041:317 Sychr./Asycr.1:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:5041:318 Sychr./Asycr.1:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O
_:5041:319 Sychr./Asycr.1:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O
_:5041:320 Sychr./Asycr.1:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:5041:321 Sychr./Asycr.1:α dif.too large(α2>α1) SPS O
_:5041:322 Sychr./Asycr.1:α dif.too large(α2<α1) SPS O
_:5041:304 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:5041:323 Sychr./Asycr.1:Setting error SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.5 Switching Sequences
Switching sequences may be running inside the device that switch the switchgear automatically in a prespeci-
fied sequence.
A switching sequence consists of a special function block Switching sequence (Swi. seq.) from the DIGSI 5
Library and the project-specific list of the switching commands that are generated in the CFC.
The function block Switching sequence is located in folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 Library.
[sc_udeffb, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-98 Function Block Switching Sequence in the Library
These function blocks can be used in the information matrix on the highest level (level of the function groups)
or in a user-defined function group.
One Switching sequence function block is used per switching sequence. The function block is the interface
for controlling and monitoring the condition of the CFC switching sequence. The task of the function block
is to verify the relative conditions for control commands, for example, switching authority, interlocking
conditions, etc. You can connect the signals of the function block with the CFC chart. They start and stop the
switching sequence and provide data about the status of the switching sequence (see Figure 8-99). The CFC
chart is used to activate the switching device that must be switched. The CFC blocks define, among other
things, the switching devices that must be switched.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_swseq1, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-99 Switching Sequence Function Block
Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence

One of the following methods can be used to start a switching sequence:
• On-site operation: menu or display page
• Input >Start during rising edge, for example, via binary input
• Controllable Start for the start via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103, or DNP
• Input >Start via a function key
• Controllable Start via a function key

One of the following methods can be used to cancel a switching sequence:
• On-site operation: menu or display page
• Input >Cancel during rising edge, for example, via binary input
• Controllable Cancel for the cancelation via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103, or
DNP
• Input >Cancel via a function key
• Controllable Cancel via a function key
On-Site Operation
If at least one Switching sequence function block is used in the device, a new Switching sequences entry
is shown in the first line of the Control menu. If this menu item is selected, an overview of all switching
sequences and the current status will be displayed (see Figure 8-100, example with 2 switching sequences).
You can start or cancel the switching sequences from this menu.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Figure 8-100
Overview of the Switching Sequences on the Device Display
The function block offers similar settings to the Control function block of a circuit breaker or disconnector (see
chapter 8.2.1 General Overview).
[sc_ccs4pa, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-101 Settings of the Switching Sequence Function Block
Parameter: Check switching authority
• Default setting (_:101) Check switching authority = yes

With the Check switching authority parameter, you can determine whether the switching authority
should be checked before the execution of the switching sequence.
Parameter: Check double activat. blk.
• Default setting (_:102) Check double activat. blk. = yes

With the Check double activat. blk. parameter, you can determine whether the double activation
of switching devices should be checked. The setting value yes indicates that a switching sequence will
be started only if no switching commands for a circuit breaker and disconnector are active, provided that
double-activation blocking was activated for those switching devices.
Parameter: Time-out monitoring
With the Time-out monitoring parameter, you can determine whether the feedback from the process
should be evaluated. The feedback is gathered via the inputs >Successful and >Failed.
Parameter: Monitoring time
• Default setting (_:104) Monitoring time = 30.00 s

With the Monitoring time parameter, you can determine the duration of the monitoring time.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Parameter: Control model
• Default setting (_:105) Control model = SBO w. normal secur.

With the Control model parameter, you select between direct w. normal secur. or SBO w.
normal secur. to start the switching sequence.
It is not possible to set a control model for cancelation of the switching sequence. The control model direct
w. normal secur. is always used to cancel the function.
Information
The Switching sequence function block provides the following data:
[sc_infof1, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-102 Data Provided by the Switching Sequence Function Block
In the Switching sequence function block, the interlocking is analog to the Interlocking function block and it
is possible to use it in the switching sequence:
• >Enable start: Connection to interlocking conditions (CFC) for the start of the entire switching
sequence. Not in effect in the non-interlocked switching mode.
• >Enable start (fixed): Non-revocable interlocking conditions for the start of the entire switching
sequence. In effect regardless of the switching mode.
If the time-out monitoring is activated (parameter Time-out monitoring), the process feedback must take
place via the inputs >Successful and >Failed. If the last switching command of the switching sequence
was executed successfully, the input >Successful usually is set. To do this, connect the feedback of the last
switching command from the CFC with this input of the function block during the device parameterization.
If a switching command fails, this feedback can be captured by the input >Failed. The active switching
sequence will be ended immediately and does not have to wait for a time-out.
The indication Execution signals the current state of the switching sequence. The events running,
canceled, failed, and successful are generated only while the time-out monitoring is activated. The
event Start Trigger is used to start the switching sequence in the CFC chart.
Example for a Switching Sequence with CFC

The following figure shows a single-line diagram for a substation with 4 bays: Busbar grounding, infeed,
bus-coupler circuit-breaker, and feeder bay.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_bspunt, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-103 Example of a Substation
The switching sequence C4 Off (Figure 8-104) should switch off feeder bay C4. The circuit breaker is opened;
followed by opening of one of the 2 busbar disconnectors.
[sc_ssc4as, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-104 CFC Switching Sequence C4 Off

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Command Execution
As described in section Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence, Page 1514, the display page or the
Control menu can be used to start the switching sequence. The Start Trigger signal for indication
Execution is used to recognize the start and initiates the switching sequence by pickup of TRIG in the
DPC-DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1. Building blocks DPC-DEF and DPC-EXE are always used in pairs.
The DEF building block controls the type and nature of the command
• VAL = Switching direction (0 = Off, 1 = On)
• SELECT = Select switching device (2 = Select with a value suitable for the preset control model SBO w.
enh. security)
• OPERATE = Switch switching device (1 = Switching device is switched on or off)

Using the connected DPC-EXE building block, the command checks can be deactivated (REL_...). In the
application example, all inputs are set to 0 and therefore, all checks are activated.
After the open command of circuit breaker QA1 is acknowledged via the auxiliary contacts, the OK output of
the CFC block DPC_EXE becomes active and triggers the next switching object. With the input PT the signal
for the OK output is time-delayed (in the example by 10 ms) and creates a dead time between individual
switching commands and the switching sequence. This dead time is important for the updating of the
interlocking conditions.
If QB1 is closed, QB1 will be opened. If QB2 is closed, QB2 will be opened. In order to implement this logic, the
OK output signal of QA1 is linked with the respective positions of circuit breakers QB1 and QB2 via the logical
AND function. This signal serves as a trigger for the trip command of QB1 or QB2.
Because in this example the time-out monitoring is activated, the feedback about the successful or unsuc-
cessful execution of the switching sequence must be parameterized. The Switching sequence function block
provides the inputs >Successful and >Failed. In order to acknowledge the entire switching sequence
positively, the OR operation of the OK outputs for the disconnectors QB1 and QB2 is sufficient. The feedback
of all failed executions takes place via the OR operation of all ERR outputs of the switching devices. The
benefit of such assessment is the fact that, in case of a failure, waiting for the time-out is not necessary, but
the active switching sequence can be ended immediately.
In this example, the use of the EN_I input of building block DPC-DEF fulfills 2 tasks:
• Cancelation of the entire switching sequence
• Resetting of the outputs OK and ERR on building block DPC-EXE

By linking all EN_I inputs and EN_O outputs of building blocks DPC-DEF and DPC-EXE, the execution of the
switching sequence can be controlled centrally since the value is transmitted between the building blocks.
Only if input EN_I on the DPC-EXE is set to 1, a switching command is issued. If the input drops back to 0 while
a command is being processed, this command will be canceled. With this behavior, cancelation of an entire
switching sequence can be achieved. As recognition of a cancelation, the canceled signal of the indication
Execution is used in the CFC chart and connected with the input EN_I of the first switching device, in this
example, with the DPC-DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1.
Since the OK and ERR outputs of the DPC-EXE building block maintain their value until execution of the next
command, it is necessary to reset the continuous output after each execution of the switching sequence for
correct execution of the entire CFC switching sequence multiple times. In this case, the use of the EN_I input
is also helpful. In the input drops back to 0, the OK and ERR outputs are also reset to 0. The triggers for ending
the switching sequence are the events failed and successful. For this reason, in the above example, the
signals failed and successful of the indication Execution were connected with EN_I of the DPC-DEF
building block.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.5.4 Settings

Swi. seq. #
_:101 Swi. seq. #:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
• advanced
_:102 Swi. seq. #:Check double • no yes
activat. blk.
• yes
_:103 Swi. seq. #:Time-out • 0 true
monitoring
• 1
_:104 Swi. seq. #:Monitoring 0.02 s to 3600.00 s 30.00 s
time
_:105 Swi. seq. #:Control • direct w. normal secur. SBO w. normal
model secur.
_:106 Swi. seq. #:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
Switching authority
_:151 Swi. seq. #:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth.
• 1
_:152 Swi. seq. #:Specific sw. • 0 true
authorities
• 1
_:115 Swi. seq. #:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for
• station/remote
• remote
_:153 Swi. seq. #:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:154 Swi. seq. #:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth.
• 1

(Type)
Swi. seq. #
_:501 Swi. seq. #:>Enable start SPS I
_:502 Swi. seq. #:>Enable start (fixed) SPS I
_:503 Swi. seq. #:>Start SPS I
_:504 Swi. seq. #:>Cancel SPS I
_:505 Swi. seq. #:>Successful SPS I
_:506 Swi. seq. #:>Failed SPS I
_:53 Swi. seq. #:Health ENS O
_:302 Swi. seq. #:Execution ENS O
_:304 Swi. seq. #:Start SPC C
_:305 Swi. seq. #:Cancel SPC C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control]
The User-defined function block [control] allows the switching-authority check of a control command,
the check of whether the position has been reached, a double-activation blocking, and the definition of
interlocking conditions for user-defined controllables.
The User-defined function block [control] is located in the folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5
Library.
You can instantiate the user-defined function blocks on the top level (in parallel to other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
The task of the function block is to check the switching authority and the interlocking conditions for the
user-defined control commands instantiated within it. For these control commands, the function block checks
whether the required switch position is equal to the current switch position (actual/set point comparison).
If you activate the double-activation blocking, commands from switching objects and user-defined control
signals will be rejected as long as a command is still being performed for one of the other switching objects for
which double-activation blocking has also been set.
With the binary release signals, you can determine a switchgear interlocking protection for all the user-defined
control signals instantiated in the function block. Unlike the switching devices (circuit breaker, disconnector),
there is only one release input here, since there is only one switching direction for the signal types INC and
APC. The signal types DPC, SPC, and BSC have 2 switching directions, but still only one release input. This
release input can be operated based on the result of a logic created in the CFC, or can be directly connected to
a binary input or a variable. If the input >Enable is activated, the switching command can be performed. If it
is not activated, the switching command is rejected, with the reason Interlocking violation.
This applies in a similar way to the input >Enable (fixed), although with this input, the interlocking
cannot be revoked by key switch S1 or an unlocked switching authority.
The following table shows the reaction of the function to the assignment of its inputs.
Input >Enable Input >Enable (fixed) Effect on control command
1 0 Rejected
0 1 Successful if device mode = unlocked
Rejected if device mode = locked
1 1 Successful
0 0 Rejected
NOTE
i The default setting for the state of the inputs is 1, that is, the switching commands are not locked.
You can instantiate every user-defined signal (for example, SPS, DPC, INC) in the function block and route the
corresponding indications (see following figure).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_user_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-105 Information Routing with Inserted User-Defined Function Block [Control]: Process Indications
and Some Single-Point Indications
The function block contains the parameters (_:104) Check switching authority, (_:105) Check
if pos. is reached, (_:106) Check double activat. blk., and (_:150) Check swi.auth.
for Mode. The parameter settings Check switching authority and Check if pos. is reached
affect all controllables instantiated in the function block. Other signal types are not affected by these parame-
ters and objects.
On the other hand, the parameter setting Check swi.auth. for Mode affects the controllable Mode
(controllable) of the function block.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_user_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-106 Parameterization Options of the User-Defined Function Block [Control]

With the Check switching authority parameter, you determine whether the command source of
switching commands must be checked (see chapter 8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking
Protection).
Parameter: Check if pos. is reached
• Default setting (_:105) Check if pos. is reached = yes

With the Check if pos. is reached parameter, you check at a switching command whether the
switching direction equals the current position.
Parameter: Check double activat. blk.
• Default setting (_:106) Check double activat. blk. = no

With the Check double activat. blk. parameter, you check whether commands from switching
objects and user-defined control signals should be rejected, as long as a command is still being executed
for one of the other objects.
Parameter: Check swi.auth. for Mode
• Default setting (_:150) Check swi.auth. for Mode = no

With the Check swi.auth. for Mode parameter, you specify whether the switching authority for the
command source must be checked when switching the controllable Mode (controllable) to the mode
On, Off, or Test. If you set the parameter Check swi.auth. for Mode to yes, the switching command
is only executed with the appropriate switching authority (see chapter 8.3.1 Command Checks and Switch-
gear Interlocking Protection).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.6.4 Settings

U-def.FB ctl.#
_:104 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
• advanced
_:105 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check if • no yes
pos. is reached
• yes
_:106 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check • no no
double activat. blk.
• yes
Switching authority
_:150 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check • no no
swi.auth. for Mode
• yes
_:151 U-def.FB ctl.#:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth.
• 1
_:152 U-def.FB ctl.#:Specific • 0 true
sw. authorities
• 1
_:115 U-def.FB ctl.#:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for
• station/remote
• remote
_:153 U-def.FB ctl.#:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:155 U-def.FB ctl.#:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 1
sw.auth. 2
sw.auth. 3
sw.auth. 4
sw.auth. 5
_:154 U-def.FB ctl.#:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth.
• 1

(Type)
U-def.FB ctl.#
_:501 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Enable SPS I
_:502 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Enable (fixed) SPS I
_:503 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:504 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:505 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:506 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:51 U-def.FB ctl.#:Mode (controllable) ENC C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
_:52 U-def.FB ctl.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 U-def.FB ctl.#:Health ENS O
_:302 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:308 U-def.FB ctl.#:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:313 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching authority ENS O
_:314 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching mode ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.7 CFC-Chart Settings
If you want to process a parameter in a CFC chart and this parameter is to be changeable during runtime
using DIGSI or HMI, you can use the function blocks CFC chart of Boolean parameters, the CFC chart of
integer parameters and the CFC chart of floating-point parameters. Instantiate the appropriate function
block depending on the parameter value needed (logical, integer, or floating point). In this way, the current
value of the parameter can then be used in the CFC chart at runtime.
You can find the CFC-chart parameters Chrt sett.Bool, Chart setting Int, and Chrt sett.real
in the DIGSI library in the User-defined functions folder. Drag and drop the desired function block into a
function group or a function. Set the appropriate parameter value of the function block in DIGSI using the
parameter editor or via HMI under the Settings menu item. You can then use the parameter as an input signal
in CFC charts.
With Exp. options, you define the range and the unit of the value. This prevents users from entering incorrect
setting values.
NOTE
i The user-defined function groups and the user-defined functions can be used to group the CFC-chart
parameters. You can rename for the function block and change the parameter value in the DIGSI Informa-
tion routing matrix to suit your specific application.
[sc_cfc_param, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-107 CFC-Chart Parameters within Information Routing

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Parameter: Chrt sett.Bool
• Default setting Chrt sett.Bool = False

You can use the parameter Chrt sett.Bool in a CFC chart as an input signal with a Boolean value. This
input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
Parameter: Chart setting Int
• Default setting Chart setting Int = 10

You can use the parameter Chart setting Int in a CFC chart as an input signal with an integer value.
This input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
Parameter: Chrt sett.real
• Default setting Chrt sett.real = 100.000

You can use the parameter Chrt sett.real in a CFC chart as an input signal with a floating-point number.
This input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
8.7.4 Settings

Chrt sett.Bool
_:105 Chrt sett.Bool:Value • 0 false
• 1

Chart setting Int
_:105 Chart setting Int:Value -2147483648 to 2147483647 10

Chrt sett.real
_:105 Chrt sett.real:Value -10000000000.000 % to 100.000 %
10000000000.000 %

(Type)
Chrt sett.Bool
_:305 Chrt sett.Bool:Setting value SPS O

(Type)
Chart setting Int
_:305 Chart setting Int:Setting value INS O

(Type)
Chrt sett.real
_:305 Chrt sett.real:Setting value MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.8 Tap Changers
8.8 Tap Changers
With the device control function, you can change a transformer tap by moving it higher or lower and monitor
the proper execution of the adjusting commands.
The function has built-in comprehensive options for measuring the tap changer position as well as supervision
and monitoring functions. The supervision and monitoring functions are used to check the voltage and supply
information about the tap position for adaptive matching of the transformer differential protection
The following options are provided for control:
• Direct user commands via the device keypad or routed binary inputs
• User-defined conditions via the CFC

If the tap changer reaches the end positions, the control function issues the (_:301) End higher
pos.reached or (_:302) End lower pos.reached indication.
The transformer tap controller is controlled by the function group Tap changer, which you can select from the
DIGSI library (group Switching devices).
[sc_tssdig, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-108 Tap Changer Functionality in the DIGSI Information Matrix
The central element is the Controllable Position of type BSC (Binary Controlled Step Position Information,
based on IEC 61850). You connect this Controllable in the matrix to the desired number of binary inputs that
indicate the current tap position.
For more information, refer to8.8.2 Application and Setting Notes.
The Position Controllable also contains parameters. If you wish to change the settings, you must select the
Controllable in the DIGSI information matrix and change the settings by way of the Properties dialog. The taps
are controlled via the commands Higher command and Lower command, each of which must be connected
to one binary output.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.8 Tap Changers
Example
The following 2 figures show a CFC chart as an example for transformer tap control with the routing of the
function keys for stepping up or stepping down.
[schilocd-280316-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-109 Routing of the Function Keys and CFC Signals
To use the function keys, you create 2 user-defined single-point indications (SPS). These are used for the
function keys (for example, <F1>, Higher function key and <F2>, Lower function key) and as the input signals
for the appropriate CFC blocks. In addition, you must use the controllable Cmd. with feedback for the CFC
chart and set the control model to direct w. enh. security.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.8 Tap Changers
You can select the control direction using the following values at the Val input of the BSC_DEF building block:
• 1 means step up
• 0 means step down
[sc_bivctv, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-110 CFC Chart
Pressing the function keys to step up or down incrementally can be displayed using this simple CFC chart.
Motor Supervision Time

The runtime of the motor-drive mechanism can be monitored from the device. This function is used to identify
failures of the motor-drive mechanism during the switching procedure and to trip actions if necessary. To use
the Motor supervision time, you must route the motor sliding contact (most significant binary input)
and set the proper motor runtime.
The motor sliding contact is active until the tap changer has reached the new position. This time is compared
to the Motor supervision time. If the new tap position is not reached within the motor runtime, the
Motor sup. time expired indication is set. TheTrigger motor prot. sw. indication with which the
motor can be switched off is output for a duration of 1.5 s.
Adjusting-Command Supervision
Adjusting-command supervision is used for checking the proper operation of the tap-changer mechanism. The
Tap changer function calculates the next logical tap position as a result of the higher/lower tap command.
The time of position detection is determined as a function of the availability of the motor sliding contact.
After resetting the active motor sliding contact, the Tap changer function reads the new tap position value.
If the value for the calculated tap position could not be received within the parameterized time Motor
supervision time, the error message Position failure is output.
The following position errors of the tap changer are taken into consideration during this:
• Invalid tap position: The tap position is outside the predefined range of minimum value and maximum
value
• Adjusting command in the wrong direction (for example, if a higher tap was commanded and the tap
changer responds with a lower position and vice versa)
• No operation of the tap changer (for example, if the tap-changer motor is defective or the position
indication is not functioning)
• Illogical tap-change operation (for example, if no logical tap position following the previous position is
indicated)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.8 Tap Changers
The value of 0 during an unexpected interruption of the auxiliary voltage represents a special case. An invalid
tap-changer position without a corresponding adjusting command is signaled in the Position controllable
only as an invalid tap position.
[lo_tcmoue, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-111 Position and Motor Supervision Logic
The user-defined signals Higher command and Lower command are provided via a CFC chart (refer to
8.8.1 Function Description).
Supervision Behavior
Depending on the setting of the Supervision behavior parameter, the function reaches a health state
of Alarm or Warning. You can set the parameter Supervision behavior to off, alarm block or
warning.
In the alarm block mode, the function is set to the health state Alarm. All tap-changer commands are
blocked.
In the warning mode, the function is set to the health state Warning. Executing tap-changer commands is
still possible.
You can manually reset the health state of alarm block or warning using the controllable Reset errors
(Main menu → Device functions → Reset functions → Tap changer). As an alternative to this, you can also
switch off the supervision function and then switch it on again.
Operating Counter
The device counts the number of successfully completed adjusting commands with the Op.ct. switching
cycle counting value. The counting and memory levels are protected against an auxiliary-voltage failure. The
switching cycle counting value can be set to 0 or to any other starting value.
You can access the statistical values via the operation panel on the device (measured values/statistics), via
DIGSI, or using various communication protocols.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.8 Tap Changers
Parameters of the Tap Changer Function Group
[scstuslt-100713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-112 Parameters of the Tap Changer
NOTE
i If run positions, this means internal tap changer positions without voltage changes, are available, the
following must be observed:
If these tap changer positions contain a suffix a and c or + and -, and additional switching pulses are not
required, adjust the parameter for the feedback and motor supervision time to the actual motor runtime
when passing through a run position. Siemens recommends parameterization with capturing of the motor
sliding contact.

With the Check switching authority parameter, you specify whether the switching authority (on site,
remote) is checked in the case of an adjusting command (see also chapter 8.3.1 Command Checks and
Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
• Default setting (_:108) Control model = SBO w. enh. security

Use the Control model parameter to specify the control model according to IEC 61850-7-2. The following
selection options are available:
• status only

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.8 Tap Changers
Parameter: SBO time-out
• Default setting (_:109) SBO time-out = 30 s

With this setting, you specify the time for detecting the time-out of the SBO command. The range of values
extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. This is the time that can elapse between command acceptance and
command execution (command model as per IEC 61850-7-2).
Parameter: Feedback monitoring time
• Default setting (_:110) Feedback monitoring time = 10 s

Reaching a new tap position after the switching command is monitored. If a new tap position is not reached,
you specify with this setting the time when the command is canceled. The range of values extends from 0.01 s
to 1800.00 s.
Parameter: Maximum output time
• Default setting (_:111) Maximum output time = 1.50 s

This parameter specifies the maximum output time. The range of values extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. For
activating motors to change the tap position, a time of 1.50 s is practical.
Parameter: Supervision behavior
• Default setting (_:112) Supervision behavior = alarm block

You can select whether the supervision is switched off (off) or if only a warning is indicated (warning). With
the alarm block setting, an alarm indication is generated and the function is blocked.
Parameter: Motor supervision time
• Default setting (_:113) Motor supervision time = 10 s

After the motor supervision time has elapsed, the indication Motor sup. time expired is displayed. You
can find additional information in 8.8.1 Function Description. The range of values extends from 5 s to 100 s.
Parameter: Highest tap changer pos.
• Default setting (_:116) Highest tap changer pos. = Lowest voltage tap
With the Highest tap changer pos. parameter, you specify whether the lowest or highest voltage is
present at the highest tap changer position.
Additional Settings (Properties Dialog Position)

Additional settings are assigned to the controllable Position. To display and adjust the settings, select
Position in the DIGSI information matrix and select the Properties dialog. To do this, click the Properties
tab.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.8 Tap Changers
[sc_deegts, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-113 Properties Dialog
Parameter: Minimum value
• Default setting Minimum value = 1
Parameter: Maximum value
• Default setting Maximum value = 15

The parameters Minimum value and Maximum value are initially calculated by DIGSI 5 on the basis of
the tap coding, the Number of tap positions and the Tap-display offset. They represent the
allowed control area of the position value. Positions outside this area are defined as invalid. This control
area can be further restricted within the initially set physical range (see Number of tap positions and
Tap-display offset).
Parameter: Tap-display offset
• Default setting Tap-display offset = 0

If you want to move the height of the displayed value in a positive or the negative direction with respect to
the height of the actual value, enter the value for this in the Tap-display offset field.
Parameter: Number of bits f. tap code
• Default setting Number of bits f. tap code = 4

With the Number of bits f. tap code parameter, you set the number of bits you need for encoding
the transformer taps. The number is dependent on the selected Encoding and on the Moving contact. For
example, you need 3 bits for 7 binary-encoded transformer taps. The range of values extends from 2 to 32.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.8 Tap Changers
Parameter: Number of tap positions
• Default setting Number of tap positions = 15

With the Number of tap positions parameter, you set the number of transformer taps. The range of
values extends from 2 to 127. The output of the tap position is limited from -63 to +63. If the number of taps
is > 63, set the Tap-display offset parameter so that the output of the tap position is within the range of
-63 to +63.
Parameter: Tap-coding type
• Default setting Tap-coding type = binary

In the Tap-coding type list box, select the interpretation type of the indication pending at the binary input.
You can select from the following options:
• binary
• 1-of-n
• BCD
• table
• BCD signed
• gray
The tap changer position can also be routed via a GOOSE signal (BSC) or a 20-mA measuring transducer input.
You can find more information on this in the document Measuring the transformer tap changer using an
analog measuring transducer input in SIPROTEC 5 in the Download area under SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI
5 downloads → SIPROTEC 5 General → Application Notes → Control.
A selection of tap-coding types is described in greater detail using examples in the following text.
Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type binary)

The following table shows the routing of 3 binary inputs (BI 1 to BI 3) with 4 transformer tap positions
designated 3 to 6. BI4 is the moving contact. The encoding is in binary.
Table 8-27 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type binary)
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Tap changer X X X X – –
Meaning Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Moving – –
contact
Tap = 1 1 0 0 – –
With 3 binary inputs, a maximum of 23 -1 = 7 tap positions can be mapped in binary code. If all routed binary
inputs indicate 0, this is interpreted as a connection error and is reported by Position --- or -64 with quality
invalid. The representation of transformer taps should start with the metered value 3. You must configure the
information properties as follows for the example:
Tap-coding type: binary
Number of tap positions: 7
Number of bits f. tap code: 4
Tap-display offset: 2
Moving contact (highest binary input): Yes
The 3 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially, for example, BI 1, BI 2, BI 3, and BI 4 for the moving
contact.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.8 Tap Changers
Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD)

The following table shows the routing of 6 binary inputs (BI 1 to BI 6) with 39 transformer tap positions
designated 1 to 39. The encoding is in BCD. BI 7 is the moving contact.
Table 8-28 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD)
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7
Tap changer X X X X X X X
Meaning BCD 1 BCD 2 BCD 4 BCD 8 BCD 10 BCD 20 Moving
contact
Tap = 21 1 0 0 0 0 1 –
With 6 binary inputs, a maximum of 39 tap positions can be mapped with the tap-coding type of BCD. This
yields the number of tap positions from 1 to 39. If all routed binary inputs indicate 0, this is detected as tap 0.
The 7 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially, for example, BI 1, BI 2, BI 3, BI 4, BI 5, BI 6, and BI 7 for
the moving contact.
Tap-coding type: BCD
Moving contact (highest binary input): Yes
Individual Tap-Coding Type (table)

With the table parameter setting, you can specify an individual Tap-coding type.
In the Representation of encoding section, select the number system in which your code table entries
will take place, alternatively:
• Binary (2 characters)
• Octal (8 characters)
• Decimal (10 characters)
• Hexadecimal (16 characters)

The selected option is valid for all inputs in the Encoding column.
If you change the number system and there are already entries in this column, these will be converted to the
new number system. The selection area becomes visible as soon as you have selected the setting table in the
Tap-coding type list box.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.8 Tap Changers
[sc_cotabi, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-114 Code Table for the Tap-Coding Type table
NOTE
i If the binary inputs used for encoding are all inactive, this indicates an invalid tap position (regardless of
the display offset). For an invalid tap position, the display shows the position --- or -64 with quality invalid,
exception BCD signed, see Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD signed), Page 1536.
Enter the encoding for the tap in the Encoding column in the Code table. Enter the value according to the
number system previously selected. Select the desired number of taps and number of bits for tap coding. Taps
with the same encoding and taps with 0 coding are not permitted.
Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD signed)

The following table shows the routing of 3 binary inputs (BI 1 to BI -3) with 7 transformer tap positions
designated 3 to 3. The encoding uses BCD signed.
Table 8-29 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD signed)
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Tap changer X X X – – –
Meaning BCD 1 BCD 2 Sign – – –
Tap = 1 1 0 1 – – –
Using 3 binary inputs, a maximum of 7 tap positions can be mapped with the tap coding type of BCD signed.
This yields the number of tap positions from -3 to 3. If all routed binary inputs indicate 0, this is recognized as
tap 0. The 3 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially.
Tap-coding type: BCD signed
Moving contact (highest binary input): No

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.8 Tap Changers
Routing the Tap Position to Binary Outputs

For the output of the adjusting commands, route the information step up and step down on one relay each,
see following figure.
[sc_trass7, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-115 Routing the Tap Setting Commands
Parameter: Moving contact (highest binary input)
• Default setting Moving contact (highest binary input) = no

If the tap position is only to be recognized as valid and implemented when the motor sliding contact signals
that it has reached the taps, then activate the Moving contact (highest binary input) option. If this
parameter is set, the new position is only labeled with an * when the moving contact drops out.
Parameter: Software filter time
• Default setting Software filter time = 1000 ms

With this parameter, you set the Software filter time for capturing the tap position. The range of
values extends from 0 ms to 100 000 ms. Within this time, brief changes on the binary inputs are suppressed.
Parameter: Retrigger filter
• Default setting Retrigger filter = Yes

With this parameter, you switch retriggering of the filtering time by a position change on or off.
Parameter: Indication timestamp before filtering
• Default setting Indication timestamp before filtering = no

With this parameter, you specify whether the hardware filtering time is accounted for in the time stamp of
position capture.
Parameter: Chatter blocking
• Default setting Chatter blocking = no

With this parameter, you switch Chatter blocking on or off.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.8 Tap Changers
8.8.3 Settings

Tap changer
_:104 Tap changer:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
_:108 Tap changer:Control model • status only SBO w. enh.
security
_:109 Tap changer:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:110 Tap changer:Feedback 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
monitoring time
Tap changer
_:111 Tap changer:Maximum 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 1.50 s
output time
_:112 Tap changer:Supervision • off alarm block
behavior
• warning
• alarm block
_:113 Tap changer:Motor supervi- 5 s to 100 s 10 s
sion time

(Type)
Tap changer
_:500 Tap changer:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:501 Tap changer:>Enable SPS I
_:53 Tap changer:Health ENS O
_:301 Tap changer:End higher pos.reached SPS O
_:302 Tap changer:End lower pos.reached SPS O
_:308 Tap changer:Position BSC C
_:305 Tap changer:Higher command SPS O
_:306 Tap changer:Lower command SPS O
_:307 Tap changer:Command active SPS O
_:309 Tap changer:Motor sup. time expired SPS O
_:310 Tap changer:Trigger motor prot. sw. SPS O
_:311 Tap changer:Position failure SPS O
_:312 Tap changer:Op.ct. INS O
_:319 Tap changer:Reset failure SPC C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.9 Voltage Controller
The transformer voltage controller functionality (ANSI 90V) is used to control power transformers (two-
winding transformers, three-winding transformers, grid coupling transformers) and auto transformers using
a motor-operated tap changer. In addition, the voltage control can be used for two-winding transformers
connected in parallel.
The function provides automatic voltage control within a specified voltage range on the secondary side of
the transformers or, as an alternative, at a remote load point (Z compensation or R/X compensation) in the
network. In order to compensate for the voltage variations in the meshed system, use the LDC-Z procedure (Z
compensation). For voltage drops on the line, use the LDC-XandR procedure (R/X compensation).
The control principle is based on the fact that a higher or lower adjusting command to the tap changer, as a
function of the voltage change (ΔV) per tap, causes a voltage increase or decrease.
The voltage control operates on a tap-for-tap basis and compares the measured actual voltage (Vact) with the
specified target voltage (Vtarget). If the voltage difference is greater than the set bandwidth (B), a higher or
lower adjusting command is sent to the tap changer once the set time delay (T1) has elapsed. Specifying the
time delay (T1) depends on the set controller response (inverse or linear), so as to avoid unnecessary adjusting
commands during brief voltage deviations from the target value and for coordination with other automatic
voltage controllers in the system.
The voltage controller function also monitors the currents on the upper-voltage side and the low-voltage side
of the transformer to block the voltage controller during impermissible operating states (overcurrent/under-
current/undervoltage). The voltage controller function also has limiting values that, in special operating cases,
suppress higher adjusting commands in the case of overvoltage and lower adjusting commands in the case of
undervoltage.
You can also use the voltage controller function for parallel control of up to 8 two-winding transformers in
different groups. You can carry out parallel control based on the Master-Follower method or using circulating
reactive current minimization method.
The Two-winding transformer voltage controller, Three-winding transformer voltage controller, and Grid
coupling transformer voltage controller function groups consist of 5 function blocks. Depending on the
application, the function groups are preconfigured in the relevant application template by the manufacturer or
can be copied into the corresponding device project during engineering.
The following figure shows, for example, the functional scope of the Two-winding transformer voltage
controller function group.
[dwvolctl-060913-01.vsd, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-116 Structure/Embedding of the Function Group

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
The functions General (GAPC), Tap changer (YLTC), and Voltage controller (ATCC) are logical node points in
IEC 61850-8-1.
The tap changer (YLTC) is the interface between the voltage controller (ATCC) and the motor-operated tap
changer of the transformer (OLTC). This means that the voltage controller (ATCC) sends higher and lower
adjusting commands to the tap changer. This tap changer issues command pulses to the motor-operated tap
changer of the transformer (OLTC). The tap changer (YLTC) measures the tap positions and monitors the
action of the motor-operated tap changer (OLTC).
The Parallel control function is needed for the parallel operation of 2 to 8 transformers. The Parallel control
function can only be instantiated in the Voltage controller function group.
The function group has interfaces to the following measuring points:
• Two-winding transformer:
– Voltage, 3-phase
– Current, 3-phase (optional)
• Three-winding transformer:
– 2 x voltage, 3-phase
– 2 x current, 3-phase (optional)
• Grid coupling transformer:

– 2 x voltage, 3-phase
– 2 x current, 3-phase
The Voltage controller (ATCC) function group operates only with a 3-phase voltage connection and uses the
positive-sequence voltage as control variable. Due to power-system unbalances, the positive-sequence voltage
provides a more stable value. For version 8.01 and higher, you can select the control variable, depending on
the connection type, via a selection parameter in the Voltage controller function group.
Figure 8-117 shows these interfaces as a block structure.
[dwvocnti-060913-01.vsd, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-117 Structure of the Voltage Control Function Group
You can find the information and functional measured values of the voltage controller in the DIGSI routing
matrix.
8.9.3.1 General
If the load is increased in an electricity-supply system, the voltage is reduced and vice versa. The power
transformers are usually equipped with transformer tap changers (OLTC) so as to keep the power-system
voltage at a constant level.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
As a result, the transformer ratio is changed in predefined steps. Changes to the transformer taps cause the
voltage to change.
The Voltage control function is intended to control transformers with motor-operated transformer tap
changers.
This function is designed to control the following:
• For two-winding transformers (2W): the voltage on the secondary circuit of the power transformer and
parallel control of several transformers feeding the same busbar or a nodal point of a system
• For three-winding transformers (3W): the voltage of the secondary winding 1 or winding 2
• For grid coupling transformers (GC): voltage of winding 1 or winding 2, selectively depending on the
power direction
Control operation is based on a step-by-step principle. To move the tap changer one position higher or lower,
a single control pulse is issued to the motor-drive mechanism of the tap changer. The length of the control
pulse can be set over a large range so as to handle the different types of tap-changer drives. The control pulse
is issued if the measured voltage deviates from the set reference value by more than the preset voltage range
for more than a given time period.
The voltage can be controlled at the voltage measuring point or at the load point in the electrical power
system. In this case, the load-point voltage is calculated on the basis of the measured load current and the
known impedance between the voltage measuring point and the load point.
The following figures show possible configurations of the voltage controller for two-winding transformers
with and without current measurement.
[dwkonlst-060913.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-118 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Two-Winding Transformers with Current Measurement for
Load Compensation at the End of the Line
(1) Only if a transformer side is present

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dwkonlsK-060913.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-119 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Two-Winding Transformers without Current Measurement
Three-Winding Transformers
Three-winding transformers are special power transformers that have 2 separate windings on the secondary
circuit and typically supply 2 different busbars. The voltage levels on the secondary circuit of the power
transformers can either be the same or different. In addition to designs with 2 tap changers on the secondary
circuits, in most cases, three-winding transformers are equipped with only one tap changer or on-load tap
changer on the primary side. It is therefore necessary to feed both voltages of the secondary windings to
the voltage measuring inputs (V1, V2) and to specify one of them, depending on the busbar situation, to the
voltage controller as the control variable.
The voltages of side 1 and 2 of the three-winding transformer are simultaneously monitored. In the process,
the voltage to be controlled can be automatically selected via the load current of both sides or by using one
parameter. This parameter is the settings group switching via binary input, protocol, or function keys. The
uncontrolled voltage can be monitored in parallel to ensure that it remains within the defined voltage limits.
If a current measuring point is assigned to a function group, the voltage to be controlled can be automatically
selected dependent on the load.
For automatic on-load tap changing, the voltage of the transformer side into which the larger load current
flows is controlled. The respective uncontrolled voltage is monitored for undervoltage and overvoltage.
In contrast to overvoltage on the controlled side, for overvoltage on the uncontrolled side, the higher
adjusting command is blocked and no fast step down to a lower tap occurs. In case of undervoltage on
the uncontrolled side, the lower adjusting commands are blocked if this behavior is activated for undervoltage
supervision.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_V-constell-3wind-with-imeas.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-120 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Three-Winding Transformers with Current Measurement
for Load Compensation at the End of the Line
(1) Only if a transformer side is available

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_V-constell-3wind-without-imeas-091014.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-121 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Three-Winding Transformers without Current Measure-
ment
Grid Coupling Transformers

Grid coupling transformers are special power transformers that connect 2 electrical power systems to one
another. The load-side voltage is controlled. The power flow can change during operation. That is why both
voltages and currents, winding 1 and winding 2, voltage measuring inputs (V1, V2) and current measuring
inputs (I1 and I2) must be fed. A voltage must be specified as a function of the load situation to the voltage
controller as the control variable.
The voltages of the windings 1 and 2 of the grid coupling transformers are simultaneously monitored. In the
process, you can select the voltage to be controlled using one parameter. This parameter can be changed
using the settings group switching via the binary input, protocol, or function keys.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dw_V-constell-2wind-coupl-transf.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-122 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Grid Coupling Transformers
On-Load Tap Changer

On-load tap changers are used to set the desired tap of a stepped winding of the transformer while under
load. During switchover, the desired tap of the stepped winding is first selected by means of the tap selector.
Next, the on-load tap changer switches over from the current-carrying tap to the selected tap. During this
switchover, one tap of the stepped winding is briefly bridged by an ohmic resistor so that the load switchover
takes place without current interruption. Physically, the tap changer is installed in the transformer tank or in a
separate tank.
Tap Changer
The Tap changer function issues the adjusting commands to the on-load tap changer and receives the
corresponding feedback. The function of the tap changer inside the voltage controller corresponds to that of
the separate tap changer. The higher and lower adjusting commands are generated by the voltage controller.
The Check switching authority, Control model, SBO time-out, and Feedback monitoring
time parameters are set only in the voltage controller.
You can find more information in chapter 8.9.4.1 General.
Voltage Controller
The Voltage controller function controls the voltage within the bandwidth and within the set voltage limits.
Using the Mode parameter, you can turn the voltage controller on or off or set it for test mode.
With the Number of target voltage parameter, you can specify up to 4 target voltages. You can only
activate one of these target voltages at a time using function key, communication, or a binary input. Use the
Set point mode active parameter to specify a valid target voltage via a communication network.
If the voltage controller is switched off, adjusting commands cannot be given to the tap changer in automatic
operation or in manual operation. The set on-site or remote switching authority is independent of this.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
You can set the voltage controller operating mode using the Operating mode parameter or the Oper-
ating mode command to automatic operation or manual operation. In automatic operation, the voltage is
controlled automatically in accordance with the set parameters.
Three-Winding Transformer Voltage Controller

For the two-winding transformer voltage controller, the measurands that are used to manage the feedback
control are permanently defined.
With the voltage controller for the three-winding transformer, these measurands can be specified using one
parameter (parameter Winding selection = Winding 1 or Winding 2) or they can be automatically
selected (Winding selection = WithMaxLoad).
The winding is automatically selected by evaluating the load current in the windings. If the load current in one
of the two windings is greater than the load current in the other winding by 5 % of the rated current for 10 s,
then the winding voltage is controlled using the larger load current.
Grid Coupling Transformer Voltage Controller

For the two-winding transformer voltage controller, the measurands that are used to manage the feedback
control are permanently defined.
With the grid coupling transformer voltage controller, these measurands can be selected using a parameter
(parameter Winding selection = Winding 1 or Winding 2).
You can change the winding selection during operation using the settings group switching.
You can monitor the power-flow direction. If the difference in the power of Winding 1 and Winding 2 is
greater than 10 % of the rated power on the control side, the indication Power-flow superv. appears and
the function switches to alarm status.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.9.3.2 Logic of the Function
[lo_volt-control, 7, en_US]
Figure 8-123 Superordinate Logic of the Voltage Controller
1) Manual operation
2) Automatic operation
3) Controllable
4) Command
5) Position and motor supervision (8.8.1 Function Description)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
In accordance with the IEC 61850 standard, DOI LTCBlk (Block automatic operation command), automatic
control can be blocked with a command.
The voltage controller measures the actual voltage (Vact) and compares it to the target voltage (Vtarget). If
the difference between the measured voltage (control deviation D) is greater than the set bandwidth (B), a
higher or lower adjusting command is sent to the tap changer once the set time delay (T1) has elapsed.
You can change the settings for control during operation with the settings group switching.
You can switchover the settings groups via the following alternatives:
• Via the on-site operation panel directly on the device
• Via an online DIGSI connection to the device
• Via binary inputs
• Via a communication connection to substation automation technology (IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850)
You can find more information on this in chapter 3.11.2 Settings-Group Switching.
Measuring-Voltage Selection
The control measurand can be selected, depending on the connection type, via a selection parameter in the
Voltage controller function group. The associated current is automatically selected for the set voltage type.
The load voltage calculated for the line compensation is likewise influenced by selection with the Measured
value parameter. The load current (Iload) and the voltage to be controlled at the transformer are replaced
according to the following table:
[fo_vload_in_percent, 1, en_US]
Measured value Load current Control voltage Angle

Connection type V1 I1 √3 ⋅ V1 φ = φV1 – φI1
Phase-to-ground VA, VA IA √3 ⋅ VA φ = φVA – φIA
VB, VC VB IB √3 ⋅ VB φ = φVB – φIB
VC IC √3 ⋅ VC φ = φVC – φIC
Phase-to-ground VA, VA-B calc IA Calculated VA-B φ = φVA – φIA
VB, VC VB-C calc IB Calculated VB-C φ = φVB – φIB
VC-A calc IC Calculated VC-A φ = φVC – φIC
Phase-to-phase VA-B, VA-B meas IA Measured VA-B φ = φVA-VB – φxA – φIA
VB-C, VC-A VB-C meas IB Measured VB-C φ = φVB-VC – φxB – φIB
VC-A meas IC Measured VC-A φ = φVC-VA – φxC – φIC
The angle φx is between the angles of the phase-to-phase voltage φVA-VB and the phase-to-ground voltage φVA.
If the 3-phase voltage is symmetric, then the angle φx = 30°. If the measured voltage is not symmetric, then
you can use the following formula for calculating the angle φx:
[fo_angle_bet_phases, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.9.3.3 Control Response
Control Deviation
The control deviation is calculated from the present actual voltage and the target voltage in relation to the
rated voltage.
[fokonisk-211013, 2, en_US]
D = Control deviation
Bandwidth
To minimize the number of switching operations by the tap changer, a permitted bandwidth is defined. If
the actual voltage is within the bandwidth, no adjusting control commands are issued to the tap changer. If
the actual voltage exceeds the defined bandwidth, an adjusting command is issued after the set time delay
T1 delay. If the actual voltage returns to the voltage range of the bandwidth before T1 delay elapses, no
adjusting control command is issued.
If the actual voltage returns to the voltage range of the bandwidth within the time delay T1, the running time
delay T1 continues to count down, starting at the already elapsed time. If the actual voltage returns again to
the set bandwidth while the time is counting down, the time delay T1 is started at the remaining time. In this
way, the time delay is reduced in the event of frequent violations of the lower limit of the bandwidth. With the
Set point mode active parameter, you can specify a valid bandwidth via a communication network.
[dwistspn-060913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-124 Actual-Voltage Curve during Control Deviation
(a) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth

(b) Actual voltage before T1 elapses within the bandwidth - no switching
(c) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth, T1 begins to elapse
(d) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth after T1, switching procedure initiated
(e) Switching procedure concluded, actual voltage within the bandwidth
Linear, Inverse
With linear control response, the voltage controller reacts independently of the control deviation after the set
time T1 delay. If more than one tap-position change is required to bring the actual voltage back within the
bandwidth, the set time T2 delay takes effect.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
With inverse control response, the time T1 delay depends on the magnitude of the control deviation. Small
deviations are tolerated for longer than larger ones. If the time delay is very small in accordance with the set
characteristic curve, the time T1 Inverse Min takes effect.
The set inverse characteristic curve is a function of the parameter T1 delay. The characteristic curves arising
for different settings of the time T1 delay are shown in chapter 8.9.4.1 General, margin title Parameter: T1
characteristic.
Zero Potential or Voltage Recovery

If the actual voltage is not within the defined bandwidth after a voltage recovery, it can be necessary for
the voltage controller to send the 1st adjusting command with the T2 time. For this purpose, the parameter
Regulate with T2 at start must be activated.
[dw_istgro-130215, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-125 Actual-Voltage Curve during Control with T2
(1) Actual voltage below the minimum voltage

(2) After switching on, the change to a higher tap occurs with time T2
(3) After the voltage recovery, the actual voltage is above the bandwidth
(4) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth. A fast step down mode is carried out with the time T2 until
the bandwidth is reached.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Larger Voltage Deviations
[dwistgro-060913-01.vsd, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-126 Actual-Voltage Curve During Larger Control Deviations
(1) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth

(2) The change to a higher tap occurs after T1 and then T2
(3) Actual voltage inside the bandwidth
(4) Actual voltage outside the limit for a fast step down. A fast step down mode is carried out until
the bandwidth is reached.
Fast Step Up Mode and Fast Step Down Mode

The fast step down mode and the fast step up mode allow a quick reaction to abnormal voltage situations.
Figure 8-126 shows such a situation at point (4). A fast step down mode occurs until the bandwidth has been
reached. The tap-position time between 2 consecutive lower adjusting commands results from the following 2
conditions:
• The completion of a tap change command after the new valid position was detected
• The measurement time for capturing the new actual voltage

The activity of the fast step down mode and the fast step up mode is displayed with the indications
(_:14011:308) Fast Step Down active and (_:14011:307) Fast Step Up active.
[losnlruk-090913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-127 Logic of the Fast Step Down Mode
The fast step up mode works in a similar fashion.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.9.3.4 Function Supervision
Automatic Operation
If the actual voltage exceeds or falls below the set bandwidth for longer than the set time delay, this situation
is shown by the indication (_:14011:309) Auto Monitor. If the actual voltage returns to the voltage
range, the indication is reset. You can switch off the function monitor with a time delay = 0 min.
[lofktueb-090913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-128 Logic of the Function Supervision for Automatic Operation
8.9.3.5 Dynamic Voltage Control (DVC)

The increasing use of renewable energy sources is a new challenge for the energy distribution system.
The decentralized energy infeeds can lead to a change in the direction of the power flow, especially in
medium-voltage systems. Thus, a strong infeed can lead to overvoltages in the individual nodal points and the
limits according to the power-quality standard DIN EN 50160 can be reached. A dynamic procedure can be
used to adapt the voltage target value. Thus, a voltage dip in case of higher load or a voltage increase due to
decentralized infeed can be compensated.
Figure 8-129shows an example of an application. The decentralized generating units are in the medium-
voltage and the low-voltage network. The active power is defined as positive (+P) in the direction of the
medium-voltage busbar.
The direction of the current (neutral point of the transformer) is defined in the direction of the protected
object transformer. If you use, for example, the LDC or the DVC method in the voltage controller, you must
take into account the direction of the current for correct functioning.
[scfuncgrpconn-260221, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-129 Setting the Direction of the Current in the Function-Group Connections

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
To fit the definition of the power direction, in this case, the current measuring point must be inverted in the
Measuring-points routing of DIGSI 5.
[dw_dsg-controller, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-130 Infeed Application Example
HS: High voltage

MS: Medium voltage
NS: Low voltage
If the transformer feeds into the medium-voltage system (+P), the voltage drops on the busbar depending on
the load. According to the characteristic curve in Figure 8-129, the voltage controller (Vtarget comp > Vtarget (with
P = 0)) increases the voltage.
If the decentralized generating units have a high infeed, this can lead to a power reversal. The medium-
voltage system now feeds into the high-voltage system. The high infeed increases the voltage on the medium-
voltage busbar. In this scenario, the measured active power is negative (-P). According to the characteristic
curve in Figure 8-129, the voltage controller (Vtarget comp > Vtarget (with P = 0)) decreases the voltage.
With the dynamic voltage control (DVC), the voltage target value of the voltage controller is adapted via a
characteristic curve depending on the power direction. Depending on the measured positive or negative active
power, the calculation of the dynamic voltage target value Vtarget comp is based on one of the 2 linear equations
(see Figure 8-129).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
NOTE
i As a prerequisite for the dynamic voltage control (DVC), the voltage and current must be measured by the
device. The dynamic voltage control cannot be activated in parallel to the LDC function or the paralleling
function.
[dw_dtvc, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-131 Characteristic Curve of the Dynamic Voltage Control
Behavior when Falling below Active power min (Pmin)

If the measured active power Pmeas falls below the set value for Pmin, the voltage value at Pmin is taken as the
current voltage target value:
Pmeas ≤ Pmin ⇒ Vtarget min is Vtarget comp
Behavior when Exceeding Active power max (Pmax)
If the measured active power Pmeas exceeds the set value for Pmax, the voltage value at Pmax is taken as the
current voltage target value:
Pmeas ≥ Pmax ⇒ Vtarget max is Vtarget comp
Behavior for a Measured Active Power Pmeas = 0 MW
If the measured active power Pmeas = 0 MW, the function takes the voltage target value Vtarget set in the voltage
controller.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Linear Behavior of the Voltage Controller in Case of Negative Active Power

If the measured active power Pmeas is in the range Pmin ≤ Pmeas ≤ 0, the value for the voltage target value is
calculated as follows:
[fo_Vtargetcomp_Pmin, 2, en_US]
Linear Behavior of the Voltage Controller in Case of Positive Active Power

If the measured active power Pmeas is in the range 0 ≤ Pmeas ≤ Pmax, the value for the voltage target value is
calculated as follows:
[fo_Vtargetcomp_Pmax, 1, en_US]
8.9.3.6 Line Compensation

When using line compensation, the voltage drop of a phase that is connected to a transformer can be
included. In this case, 2 processes are available:
• Z compensation (LDC-Z)
• X and R compensation (LDC-XandR)
NOTE
i Line compensation is only active if power is flowing in the direction of the line.
Z Compensation (LDC-Z)
Z compensation allows you to include the voltage drop of a line connected to the transformer. You can
switch the Z compensation on or off. If cos φ is roughly constant, you can use the Z compensation. Setting
the parameters requires the calculation of the voltage increase (Target voltage rising) taking into
consideration the load current (Max load current).
The parameter Target voltage rising represents the voltage drop across the line as a % under rated
load.
You can find more information and the calculation in chapter 8.9.4.1 General.
In case of active Z compensation, you must limit the maximum permitted voltage increase in relation to
the target voltage to avoid too high voltage at the transformer. To do this, set the parameter Max load
current. In addition, the parameter Vmax threshold is active. If the actual voltage exceeds this threshold
value, no more higher adjusting commands are issued.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[dwregchr-090913-01.vsd, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-132 Control Characteristic with Z Compensation
X and R Compensation (LDC-XandR)

During the application of the X and R compensation, you need the phase data. With this data, it is possible
to precisely compensate the voltage drop of the transmission lines. This method of line compensation also
operates with negative active-power values. The following figure shows the effect of this compensation type.
[dw-line-drop-kompensation-250214-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-133 Phasor Diagram of the X and R Compensation
Vtransf Voltage on the transformer, voltage to be controlled

Vload Voltage of load point (target voltage, Vload = Vtransf - Vdrop)
Vdrop Voltage drop of the phase
IR, IX Voltage drop due to R and X of the line

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Iload Load current

φ Rotor angle
You can also use X and R compensation for parallel control of transformers. If the X value is positive,
the voltage losses of the phase are compensated. If you are implementing parallel control with X and R
compensation, then the X value is negative and considers the voltage increase from the busbar to the
transformer.
If the X and R compensation you must limit the maximum permitted voltage increase in relation to the
target voltage in order to avoid a voltage at the transformer that is too high. To do this, set the parameter
Vmax threshold. If the actual voltage exceeds this threshold value, no more higher adjusting commands
are issued.
8.9.3.7 Limiting Values

The limiting values cause no higher or lower adjusting commands to be given to the tap changer in the event
of an upper limit violation (Vmax threshold) or lower limit violation (Vmin threshold). In this way,
changing taps under abnormal voltage conditions and changing taps in the incorrect direction (for example, in
the event of wiring errors) is prevented.
The lower and upper tap changer limits are included in the limiting values. The parameters Lower tap-
position limit and Higher tap-position limit cause an additional restriction of the control range.
8.9.3.8 Blockings
The blockings prevent tap positions under abnormal network conditions. The following blocking functions are
available:
• Undervoltage
• Overcurrent, load current
• Undercurrent
• External blocking (binary input)
• Blocking command LTCBlock IEC 61850
• Blocking in the event of pickup of the transformer differential protection

Using the parameter Blocking behavior, you specify whether the blockings are to take effect only in
automatic operation (Auto) or in both automatic and manual operation (Auto-Manual).
Overcurrent blocking prevents tap-change operations in the event of an overload. For the current blockings,
the positive-sequence system of the load current and of the current on the upper-voltage side of transformers
is calculated.
By assigning the tap changer to the transformer side, you also arrange the current of the upper-voltage side.
Perform this assignment in the appropriate Transformer side function group. Here, you must use the tap
changer of the voltage controller.
Undervoltage blocking prevents tap-change operations in the event of a network collapse. The output signals
of the voltage controller are blocked and, depending on the operating mode, the indication Auto Blocking
and/or Manual Blocking is issued.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[loblokir-090913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-134 Logic Blockings
1) If transformer differential protection is available

2) If a current measurement is available
3) If parallel proxys are available (max. 7)
If assignment of the tap changer for the transformer side is available, the current of the upper-voltage side is
also monitored and the differential-protection pickup automatically blocks the voltage controller.
Additional Blockings for the Three-Winding Transformer Voltage Controller

The blockings described in the above sections also apply to the controlled winding of the three-winding
transformer. In addition, the blockings for undervoltage, minimum voltage, and overcurrent are used for the
measurands of the uncontrolled side.
Additional Blockings for the Grid Coupling Transformer Voltage Controller

For voltage control in grid coupling transformers, the voltages and currents of both windings are always used
for the blockings.
8.9.3.9 Parallel Operation
General
The parallel operation of 2 or more power transformers is intended to increase the electrical throughput or
short-circuit power at a power-system node. An additional reason for the parallel operation of transformers is
a reserve in the event of a failure of a transformer.
If power peaks are to be expected in the power system, multiple transformers can be connected in parallel
on different busbars. This allows several feeders to be supplied simultaneously. You can control up to 8
transformers in parallel in one group. The evaluation of the measured and status values takes place via the IEC
61850 GOOSE communication.
If for the transformers used the tap positions differ, therefore creating a different transformation ratio,
the no-load voltages on the low-voltage side will be different. A circulating reactive current flows via the
transformers. Since the transformer impedance consists mainly of leakage inductance, the current is inductive.
These currents can result in the overloading of the transformer.
The parallel operation is intended for two-winding transformers. For this application, additionally instantiate
the function Parallel operation. For each of the transformers connected in parallel you need an additional
function block ParallelProxy. The 1st ParallelProxy is preinstantiated. For a configuration with 8
transformers working in parallel, you can instantiate a maximum of 7 ParallelProxy. The exchange of the
necessary information takes place via this proxy. 8 transformers can be configured to a maximum of 4 groups.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
For the Parallel operation the following 2 methods are available:
• Master-follower method
• Method of minimizing the circulating reactive current
Table 8-30 Conditions for the Use of Both Methods
Requirements for the Transformers Requirement for the Voltage Method

Controller
Voltage change Rated power Short-circuit Current meas- Tap position
per tap voltage devia- urement
tion
Same Same or <10 % Optional Necessary Master/Follower
different
Different Same or Different Necessary Recommended Minimizing circu-
different lating reactive
current
As the preceding table shows, before selecting the method, you must check whether the corresponding
requirements are met. If you place transformers in parallel, whose short-circuit voltages differ by more than
10 % from each other, then Siemens recommends the Method of minimizing circulating reactive current.
Control of the Function

You can control the Parallel operation function using setting values or commands.
Parameters Values
With setting values Parallel mode Master, No mode, Follower, Circulat. react
current
Parallel mode changeable by setting, controllable
Force master changeable by setting, controllable
With command Parallel operation (ParOp) independent, parallel
Set master (ForceMast) off, on
Parallel groups (ParGrp) 1 to 4
The state of the control is reported as:
• No mode
• Independent
• Master
• Follower
• Circulating reactive current

If the Parallel operation is connected via the communication to further transformers, the state is checked
for correctness. If this is not the case, an inconsistency indication is output. The communication to the
transformers of a group is also monitored. If a fault is present, this is reported.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_infogroup, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-135 Assigned Control Modules in Information Routing
Grouping
Each transformer in the parallel operation is assigned to a group. The group number can be set by a superordi-
nate control system or locally using a CFC logic. Once the group assignment is fixed, enter a value for the
initial start via the Properties tab of the command Parallel group in the information routing of DIGSI 5.
[sccfcgrouprel, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-136 CFC Chart for Group Assignment and Group Display

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_para_grouping_vc, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-137 Properties Tab of the Parallel Group
During operation you can change this assignment by command, depending on the switching state of the
transformers.
[lo_proxy-logic-part_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-138 Grouping Logic
Parallel-Operation Detection via Group Inputs

You can control up to 8 transformers in parallel in one group or in 4 groups without detecting the system
topology. The devices in parallel operation use exclusively the information transmitted from devices of the

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
same parallel-operation group via GOOSE. The groups of the transformers to be controlled in parallel are set
and changed using the control Parallel group, where you assign the device to a parallel-operation group.
This can be done remotely or locally on the device. If No mode is set for the parallel operation, no group
assignment takes place.
Parallel-Operation Detection via Topology

In addition, you have the option to detect the group assignment in parallel operation based on the position of
the disconnectors and circuit breakers. To report its status, every disconnector and circuit breaker is equipped
with a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact. These binary signals can be processed in a CFC chart and dynamically
adapted to the switching state of the system.
The signals Parallel group, Remote parallel mode and Parallel mode active are transmitted
via the GOOSE communication between the other transformers in the group.
Figure 8-139 Logic of the Blocking of Automatic Operation in the ParallelProxy
1) Only applies to the Master-follower method
The signals automatic operation, automatic-block. local, Health and Remote parallel
mode are transmitted via the GOOSE communication between the other transformers in the group.
If the other voltage controllers in the group are set to the mode No mode or the communication is disturbed,
the automatic operation is blocked. The blocking is reported. If a fault in the tap position is detected via the
difference in the tap positions of the transformers, the indication Error tap difference is issued.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Figure 8-140 Logic of the Parallel-Operation State Detection
Controlling Locally/Remote
The parallel operation can be done with a parameter or via the control. With the parameter setting
controllable, you can also use a binary input and the status signal of a circuit breaker with a CFC block
(Figure 8-143).
First, for the control of the Parallel operation, set the parameters Parallel mode changeable and
Force master changeable.
You can select one of the 2 options:
• by setting
• controllable
[sc_para_oper_change, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-141 Selection for Parallel Operation

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
If you set Parallel mode changeable to controllable, you can read and change the settings for the
parallel operation on the device under the following path:
• Main menu → Commands → Functionality → Voltage cont. 2w1 → Operation
[sc_para_hmi_oper, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-142 Menu Item for Parallel Operation on the Device Display
Figure 8-143 shows an example of a CFC chart for switching to parallel mode via the binary input of the circuit
breaker.
[sc_switchparop_cfc, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-143 CFC Chart
Master-Follower Method
As a prerequisite for the application of this method, the following values must be almost equal:
• Transformation ratios of the transformers used
• Number of the taps
• Voltage differential between the taps

The Master-Follower method regulates the Follower devices to the same tap position as the Master trans-
former. One voltage controller takes the lead (Master device), whilst the other voltage controllers (Follower
devices) follow its tap position (Master-Follower method). The Master device controls the busbar voltage auto-
matically according to the same principles of the available voltage-controller functionality for a two-winding
transformer. Compared with the Master-Slave method, this method has the advantage that losing a higher/
lower adjusting command (for example due to communication loss or auxiliary-voltage failure of the Follower
device) does not result in asynchronicity of the transformers.
The Master-Follower method is suitable for transformers of the same design. If transformers of different
power are controlled with the Master-Follower method, you must be aware that the same tap positions will

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
result in the same ratios. The relative short-circuit voltages of the transformers must not deviate significantly
from each other (max. 10 %).
Logic of the Master-Follower Method
[lo_parallel_voltage_contrl-master-follower, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-144 Logic of the Master-Follower Method
The Master-Follower method can be blocked using the automatic function in the systems control. In case of a
communication failure the function is also blocked.
The Master device controls the voltage of the transformer. The Follower device updates the tap position of
the Master device. When doing so, the maximum tap-position difference between the transformers is taken
into account. If the tap-position difference is exceeded for a predefined time, an error is reported (Error tap
difference). If the supervision of a group detects that there is more than one Master device, this is reported
and the automatic operation is blocked.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Manual Operation Master-Follower

Changing the tap of the tap changer using the Master device leads to an adjustment of the taps by all follower
devices within the group.
If a communication error is present, a tap change can be done by the Follower device by switching to manual
operation. In the Master device and all Follower devices the Automatic mode is blocked.
Method of Minimizing Circulating Reactive Current

If the ratios of the transformers connected in parallel are different (>10 %), Siemens recommends the method
of Minimizing circulating reactive current. The prerequisite for the method of Minimizing circulating reac-
tive current is a data exchange between the ATCC function blocks (one ATCC function for each transformer
in the parallel group). The data exchange for ATCC functions in different devices occurs via the GOOSE
communication of the IEC 61850 protocol. All data of the devices in a group is exchanged cyclically via
GOOSE, both analog and binary signals are exchanged.
The following advantages can be achieved with the method of Minimizing circulating reactive current for
parallel voltage control:
• Setting the load voltage to a preset value
• Minimizing the circulating reactive current for transformers operated in parallel
Calculation of the Circulating Reactive Current

To calculate the circulating reactive current, the measured values of the individual transformers must be
transmitted between the affected voltage controllers. The suitable reference variable for all transformers in
a parallel group is the bus voltage. With this, there is a common reference between all devices within one
parallel transformer group. The measured bus voltage is the reference value of the devices used.
[dw_CCM_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-145 Detection of the Circulating Reactive Current of a Parallel Group
The following formulas are used to calculate the circulating reactive current.
For each device, a direct-axis reactance relating to the control side of the transformer is calculated from the
following 3 parameters:
• Rated apparent power Srated of the transformer
• Rated voltage Vrated of the transformer
• Short-circuit voltage of the transformer VSC in percent

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
If the ohmic longitudinal resistance is neglected, the direct-axis reactance of the transformer Tk (k = 1,2,3 ... n
in the example) relating to the control side results in:
[fo_reakccm, 1, en_US]
This direct-axis resistance is transferred to the other voltage controllers as a measured value with GOOSE. This
value is displayed as a check. To determine the total load current, from each voltage controller the measured
current with magnitude and phase angle is transferred as a GOOSE CMV measured value.
The total load current results in:
[fo_summccm, 1, en_US]
The total inductive susceptance, the total susceptance of all transformers results in:
[fo_suszccm, 1, en_US]
The partial load current value of the individual transformers results from the ratio between susceptance and
total susceptance multiplied with the total load current. Only the inductive value, namely the imaginary part
Im(IA) of the calculated total load current is used.
[fo_loadcurccm, 1, en_US]
The circulating reactive current at transformer k is the difference of the current measured at the transformer
and the calculated partial load current ILkImag. This is multiplied with -1 so that its positive no-load voltage
difference results in a positive circulating reactive current:
[fo_ccmtrafo, 1, en_US]
where:
ILkImag Calculated inductive part (imaginary part) of the partial load current of transformer k
IKBSk Circulating reactive current
IkImag Measured inductive part of the current at transformer k
ISC Measured current at the transformer
X Reactance of the transformer
k 1, 2, 3, ... 8 (number of the transformer)
Calculation of the Control Deviation

The control deviation DKBSk is calculated from the calculated circulating reactive current IKBSk:
[fo_regelabwdcc, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
where:
Xk Reactance of the transformer
Bp Total susceptance (total susceptance value) of all parallel transformers (sum of the reciprocals
of the transformer reactance)
Bk Susceptance of the transformer (reciprocal of the reactance)
Vrated Rated voltage of the transformer
With the parameter Reactive I control factor you can adjust the control deviation DKBSk so that
the circulating reactive current caused by a tap difference results in exceeding the control bandwidth. A
Reactive I control factor which is set too high can affect the control stability. In most cases, control
quality and control stability are available with the default setting of 1.
The sum of the control deviation resulting from voltage deviation DV and the control deviation DKBSk, caused by
the circulating reactive current, results in:
Dk = DKBSk + DV
and is compared with the set bandwidth. The following 2 diagrams explain the summations of the control
deviation at negative and positive voltage deviation. A possible control deviation initiated by the circulating
reactive current, is on transformer T1 in contrast to transformer T2. This results for both voltage controllers in a
different total deviation.
Negative voltage deviation -DV Positive voltage deviation DV

Changing to higher tap of T2 with DV + DKBS2 < -B Changing to lower tap of T1 with DV + DKBS1 > B
For the calculation of the voltage deviation, the voltages of all voltage controllers are transferred with GOOSE
as a measured value and an average value is calculated. The voltage can be monitored. If the data are not
plausible the voltage controller is blocked after a time delay which can be set.
Error Behavior
If the value of the circulating reactive current exceeds the set time delay Circul. current time delay
for a longer time than the threshold value Circul. current threshold, the indication Circul.
current blocking is issued and the voltage control blocked.
If the circulating reactive current value drops below the preset value, the signal is automatically reset. This can
be achieved using the manual control of the tap changer.
Blocking the Tap Changer in Case of a Fault

To activate the supervision functions in Follower mode when used with the transformer differential protec-
tion, you must set the parameter Blocking in the voltage controller function to Auto-Manual.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[scblockVC-240117-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-146 Parameter in the Voltage Controller
The blockings prevent tap positions under abnormal network conditions.
[loblokir-090913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-147 Blocking Logic
1) If transformer differential protection is available

2) If a current measurement is available
3) If parallel proxies are available (max. 7)
In addition to the blockings present with a parallel operation the number of proxies used is taken into account.
Maintenance of Transformers Connected in Parallel

If you want to take the device out of service and disconnect it from the power supply, you must first
functionally log off the device. Once you functionally log off the device, all data objects generated in the
device (state and measured values) receive the quality attribute OperatorBlocked = TRUE. This also applies
to the output from CFC charts.
If objects are transferred via a GOOSE message, the receiver devices can analyze the quality. After a switch
off of the transmitting device, the receiver devices detect that the transmitting device has been functionally
logged off and did not fail. Now the receiving objects can automatically be set to defined states.
Table 8-31 Decommissioning
Binary input
Controllable/device display
NOTE
i Decommissioning the device is only allowed if the Parallel mode of the voltage controller is set to No
mode. After the decommissioning you must commission the voltage controller again.
The decommissioning can be done with binary input indications or via the control.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Supervision of the Communication

A communication fault can occur in the following cases:
• The connection between 2 SIPROTEC 5 devices is interrupted.
• A hard- or software error is present in the device.
• The supply voltage of one or more devices is not present.

If the receipt of GOOSE messages is disturbed, a GOOSE time-out is signaled and all GOOSE messages arriving
are signaled as invalid. If No mode is set in one of the devices, then the parallel operation is not blocked. If
a communication error is present, the parallel mode in the Master and Follower device cannot be determined.
In this case the operating mode automatic operation in the Master and Follower device is blocked for security
reasons. Once the communication error has been cleared, the blocking is removed.
For more information about setting a GOOSE connection between the devices, refer to the following chapter.
8.9.3.10 Creating a GOOSE Later Binding for Parallel Control

To create the GOOSE later binding between the devices for parallel control, proceed as described in the
following example:
[dw_overview_sys-config_and_iec61850-goose, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-148 Example of a Parallel Control
Step 1
• Create the 1st device for parallel control in the DIGSI 5 project.
• Create the configurations and make the necessary settings for the IEC 61850 structure.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_para_dev_set, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-149 IEC 61850 Structure Settings
For using Port J for the GOOSE communication:
• Activate the device functionality for Port J.
[sc_para_dev_func, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-150 Setting for the Integrated Ethernet Interface
• Instantiate the voltage controller function for the two-winding transformer and the Parallel control
function and the proxies that are necessary for parallel operation. One ParallelProxy is required
for each transformer to be controlled in parallel, that is, for 3 transformers in the project, it must be
additionally instantiate 2 ParallelProxies.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_para_instanz, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-151 Selecting Parallel Control
• Make the necessary communication settings.
[sc_para_com_prot, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-152 Ethernet-interface settings
NOTE
i Note that you must assign a separate IP address for each device.
NOTE
i Note the hardware equipment of the device and the settings for the IEC 61850 communication (IEC 61850
Edition 2 required).
• Under Device Information in DIGSI, change IEC 61850 Edition 1 to Edition 2.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_change_edition, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-153 Changing the IEC 61850 Edition
• Confirm the conversion to IEC 61850 Edition 2 with Yes.

Step 2
• Copy the 1st device as many times as are needed for the parallel transformers. The copied devices
contain the same settings.
• Adapt the IP addresses of the copied devices in the project tree under Hardware and protocols.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_para_ether_portj, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-154 Adapting the IP Address
• Adapt the entries of the copied devices for the other transformers (device name and IEC 61850 name).
[sc_lbnametrafo, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-155 Adapting the Devices in DIGSI
• Assign a unique transformer ID for the other transformers in the copied devices.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
NOTE
i Note that in the Master-Follower method, you must configure one device as the Master device and the
additional devices as Follower devices.
[sc_par_trafo_id, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-156 Adapting the Parallel Transformer ID in DIGSI
Step 3
• Double-click Add new station.
• Double-click the first IEC 61850 station.
• Change the IEC 61850 station name for example in parallel operation.
• Change IEC 61850 Edition 1 to Edition 2.
[sc_par_stat_iec_edi, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-157 Selecting the IEC 61850 Edition
• Confirm the conversion to IEC 61850 Edition 2 with Yes.
• Use >> to assign the devices to the IEC 61850 station.
[sc_par_assign_syscon, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-158 Assigning the Devices
• Export the IEC 61850 station as an ICD file to the IEC 61850 System Configurator.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_par_exp_syscon, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-159 Export to the IEC 61850 System Configurator
If the following dialog appears, confirm with OK and specify a storage location for the SCD file.
[sc_para_assinged, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-160 Export dialog
Step 4
• Import the ICD files into the system configurator. After the export to the system configurator, the
configurator starts automatically.
• Create a single-line configuration in the system configurator.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
[sc_para_single_line_konfig, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-161 Creating a Single-Line Configuration in the System Configurator
• Create a substation. Right-click Parallel operation and select Substation.
• Create the individual bays (bays 1-3) and instantiate for each a function and subfunction.
• Rename the function to VoltageControlParallel.
• Rename the subfunction to Proxies.
NOTE
i If you use the specified function and subfunction names, the GOOSE application will be created without
faults.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
• Connect the LN Trafo1\VCtrl1\ATCC1 of the device to the function and the other LN
Trafo2\Ctrl_90VParallelOperation\ProxyATCC1 to the proxies according to Figure 8-161.
Step 5
• Create a new GOOSE application and subsequently perform the GOOSE later binding using the applica-
tion template. With the GOOSE application template, all the links between the devices and the proxies
are automatically connected.
• Set all the settings for GOOSE communication between the Master and the Follower devices in the
IEC 61850 System Configurator.
• If you have done all the links and settings in the IEC 61850 System Configurator, save the project and
close the IEC 61850 System Configurator.
[sc_parasyscon_goose, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-162 Creating the GOOSE Application
Step 6
• Import the SCD file generated and stored in the IEC 61850 System Configurator back to DIGSI.
[sc_para_import, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-163 Import from the IEC 61850 System Configurator into DIGSI
• Load the created configuration to the devices.
8.9.3.11 Functional Measured Values

You can read the current status of the measured values for the two-winding transformer, the parallel control/
proxy, the three-winding and grid coupling transformer at any time. The following tables show you the
available measured values.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Measured Values, Two-Winding Transformer
Measured Value Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to

V act. Current, measured positive- kV V Target voltage of the primary
sequence voltage (referenced system referenced to the rated
to phase-to-phase) voltage
ΔV act. Voltage difference between % % Voltage difference referenced
the target voltage and the to the rated voltage of the
actual voltage controlled winding
I load Current measured load current A A Load current referenced to the
(positive-sequence system) rated value of the function
V max Maximum positive-sequence kV V Maximum voltage of the
voltage ever measured (refer- winding referenced to the
enced to phase-to-phase) rated voltage of the winding
V min Minimum positive-sequence kV V Minimum voltage of the
voltage ever measured (refer- winding referenced to the
ence to phase-to-phase) rated voltage of the winding
V target Calculated target voltage with kV V Target voltage of the winding
consideration of Z compensa- referenced to the rated voltage
tion of the winding
PhAng Phase angle of the currently ° ° -
measured load current
I load Σ Sum of the currently measured A A Load current referenced to the
load currents. Active when line rated current of the function
compensation is activated.
I circul. Currently measured circulating A A Circulating reactive current
reactive current
Vact.m Currently measured control kV V Current voltage of the control
voltage referenced to the rated voltage
of the function
ΔV act V Voltage difference % % Voltage difference referenced
to the rated voltage of the
function
ΔV act C Voltage difference % % Voltage difference referenced
to the rated voltage of the
function
The function measured values V max and V min can be reset with the input indication >Reset min./max..
For the two-winding transformer, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of the
device:
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 2w → 90V V.contr.2w
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 2w → Statistics → 90V V.contr.2w
Measured Values for Parallel Control, Proxy

V act. Actual voltage of winding kV V Target voltage of the primary
system referenced to the rated
voltage of the function
1/X trf. Susceptance, internal value for 1/Ω
GOOSE transmission

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

I load Load current A - Load current referenced to the
rated current of the function
PhAng Phase angle of the load current ° ° Phase angle of the load current
relative to the voltage with a 100 % = 180°
power factor of 1.0
For the parallel control, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of the device:
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 2w → Functional measured values → Parallel operation
Measured Values, Three-Winding Transformer

Vact.w1 Actual voltage of winding 1 kV V Target voltage of the primary
voltage
voltage
I load w1 Load current of winding 1 A A Load current referenced to the
rated current of winding 1
Vmax 1 Maximum voltage of winding 1 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 1
referenced to the rated voltage
of winding 1
of winding 2
Vmin 1 Minimum voltage of winding 1 kV V Minimum voltage of winding 1
of winding 1
of winding 2
V tar.w1 Target voltage of winding 1 kV V Target voltage of winding 1
of winding 1
of winding 2
The function measured values Vmax 1, Vmax 2, Vmin 1, and Vmin 2 can be reset with the input indication
>Reset min./max..
For the three-winding transformer, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of
the device:
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 3w → 90V V.contr.3w
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 3w → Statistics → 90V V.contr.3w

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Measured Values Grid Coupling Transformer

voltage
voltage
of winding 1
of winding 2
referenced to rated voltage of
winding 1
referenced to rated voltage of
winding 2
of winding 1
of winding 2
The function measured values Vmax 1, Vmax 2, Vmin 1, and Vmin 2 can be reset with the input indication
>Reset min./max..
For the grid coupling transformer, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of the
device:
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control gc → 90V V.contr.gc
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control gc → Statistics → 90V V.contr.gc
Fundamental-Component Values and Power Measured Values

The fundamental-component values and power measured values are always present in the Two-winding
transformer voltage controller, Three-winding transformer voltage controller, and Grid coupling trans-
former voltage controller function groups. Furthermore, you can find the fundamental-component values
and power measured values for winding 1 and winding 2 in the Three-winding transformer voltage
controller and Grid coupling transformer voltage controller function groups. These values cannot be
deleted.
The following tables show Table 8-32 and Table 8-33 the total scope for the case in which a 3-phase voltage
measuring point is also connected.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Table 8-32 Possible Fundamental Values for the Voltage Controller Function Group
Fundamental-Component Values Primar Secon- % Referenced to

y dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the
primary system
IN Zero-sequence current A A Rated operating current of the
primary system
VA, VB,VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary system/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary system
VN Measured neutral-point displace- kV V Rated operating voltage of the
ment voltage primary system/√3
Table 8-33 Possible Power Measured Values of the Voltage Controller Function Group
Power Measured Value Primar Secon- % Referenced to

y dary
Ptotal Active power MW W Active power of the primary system
(total power) √3 ⋅ Vrated ⋅ Irated
Qtotal Reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary
(total power) system
√3 ⋅ Vrated ⋅ Irated
Stotal Apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary
(total power) system
√3 ⋅ Vrated ⋅ Irated
Cos φ Active power factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to cos φ = 1
8.9.4.1 General
The following application and setting notes refer to a two-winding transformer. The additional parameters for
a three-winding transformer or a grid coupling transformer are marked correspondingly.
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated current = 1000.00 A


The measured values of the voltage controller can be displayed as primary values, secondary values, or in
percent. With the Rated current and Rated voltage parameters, you set the reference value for the
percentage values.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Additional Parameters for the Three-Winding Transformer or the Grid Coupling Transformer
Winding 1

Winding 2


The measured values of the voltage controller can be displayed as primary values, secondary values, or in
percent. With the Rated current and Rated voltage parameters, you set the reference value for the
percentage values.
Tap Changer
The parameters of the tap changer inside the voltage controller correspond to those of the tap changer in
chapter 8.8.2 Application and Setting Notes.
For the tap changer inside the voltage controller, the parameters for the control model are copies of those
from the voltage controller. This concerns the parameters:
• Checking the switching authority
• Control model
• SBO56 Time-out
• Feedback.monitor.time
General
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:14011:1) Mode = on

With the Mode parameter, you switch the voltage controller in on, off, or in test operation.
• Default setting (_:14011:101) Operating mode = Manual

With the Operating mode parameter, you specify whether the voltage controller operates in Auto or in
Manual mode.
Parameter: Minimal voltage
• Default setting (_:14011:104) Minimal voltage = 5 %

With the Minimal voltage parameter, you specify the threshold value at which the voltage controller
operates. If the value is below the set threshold value, the entire measurement is not displayed and the binary
output Auto inactive is activated.
56 In the IEC 61850 standard, reservation is known as Select Before Operate (SBO).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Three-Winding Transformer only:

Parameter: Winding selection
• Default setting (_:15601:157) Winding selection = Winding 1

With the Winding selection parameter, you specify whether the voltage controller controls the voltage
of Winding 1 or Winding 2. With the WithMaxLoad parameter, the voltage to be controlled is selected
automatically depending on the load current. With this method, you can toggle using the parameter
Winding selection or the controllable Automatic winding selection.
If the controllable Automatic winding selection is set to Off or is not set, you can influence the
winding to be controlled using the following 2 options:
• Using the Winding selection parameter

• Using the Manual winding selection controllable
The function value Active winding shows the winding selection.
Grid Coupling Transformer only:

Parameter: Winding selection
• Default setting (_:16351:161) Winding selection = Winding 1

With the Winding selection parameter, you specify whether the voltage controller controls the voltage
of Winding 1 or Winding 2.
You may select the winding to be controlled using the Winding selection parameter or the Manual
winding selection controllable. The function value Active winding shows the winding selection.
8.9.4.2 Controlling

With the Check switching authority parameter, you specify whether the switching authority (On-site,
Remote) is checked during an adjusting command.
• Default setting (_:109) Control model = SBO w. enh. security

This parameter Control model specifies the control model according to IEC 61850-7-2 that corresponds to
the behavior of the data (SBO – Select Before Operate).
You can select one of the following settings:

Parameter: SBO time-out
• Default setting (_:110) SBO time-out = 30.00 s

This parameter specifies the time for detecting the time-out of the SBO command. The range of values
extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. This is the time that can elapse between command acceptance and
command execution (command model as per IEC 61850-7-2).
Parameter: Feedback monitoring time
• Default setting (_:111) Feedback monitoring time = 10.00 s

Reaching a new tap position after the adjusting command is monitored via the feedback-monitoring time. If a
new tap position is not reached, the command is canceled after this time.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.9.4.3 Voltage Controller

• Default setting (_:14011:100) Measured value = positive-seq. voltage

With the parameter Measured value, you select the control voltage with which the voltage controller
operates. Depending on the connection type, you can select the following settings between measured and
calculated voltage.
positive-seq. voltage
VA measured
VB measured
VC measured
VAB measured
VBC measured
VCA measured
VAB calculated
VBC calculated
VCA calculated
Parameter: Number of target voltage
• Default setting (_:14011:156) Number of target voltage = 1

With this parameter, you specify the number of available target voltages (1 to 4). You can select a target
voltage from those available using the function key, communication, or binary input.
NOTE
i Keep in mind that the parameter Number of target voltage cannot be influenced by way of the
settings group switching.
You can specify the target voltages (1 to 4) in primary, secondary, or in percent.
For the activation of the target voltage 1 to 4 via a binary input, you need a CFC chart.
Parameter: Target voltage 1
• Default setting (_:14011:112) Target voltage 1 = 110.000 V

With the Target voltage 1parameter, you specify the voltage to be reached by the voltage controller.

With the Target voltage 2 parameter, you specify the 2nd voltage to be reached by the voltage
controller.

With the Target voltage 3 parameter, you specify the 3rd voltage to be reached by the voltage controller.

With the Target voltage 4 parameter, you specify the 4th voltage to be reached by the voltage controller.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Three-Winding Transformer only:


With this parameter, you specify the number of available target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2). You can
select a target voltage from those using the function key, communication, or binary input.
Note:
Keep in mind that the parameter Number of target voltage cannot be influenced by way of the
You can specify the target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2) in primary, secondary, or in percent.
Parameter: Target voltage 1 w1
• Default setting (_:15601:112) Target voltage 1 w1 = 110.000 V








C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions


With this parameter, you specify the number of available target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2). You can
select a target voltage from those using the function key, communication, or binary input.
Note:
Keep in mind that the parameter Number of target voltage cannot be influenced by way of the
You can specify the target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2) in primary, secondary, or in percent.







Parameter: Bandwidth
• Default setting (_:113) Bandwidth = 1.0 %

With the Bandwidth parameter, you specify the voltage range where no control action higher or lower is to
occur at the Target voltage 1. If the actual voltage is outside the bandwidth referenced to the Target
voltage 1, a correction is made.
Calculation of the Bandwidth:
NOTE
i When calculating the Bandwidth B, keep the maximum accepted voltage deviation in the electrical power
system and the tap voltage of the tap changer on the secondary side of the transformer in mind. Select the
bandwidths so that it is not passed through within an increment.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
NOTE
i Instable Controlling (Hunting)

The tolerance band is defined by the double bandwidth. If you select the bandwidth – and thus the admis-
sible control deviation D – such that the tolerance band is smaller than the increment of the transformer,
then, with the next increment operation, the voltage controller adjusts over the other side of the band after
exceeding the tolerance band. In this case, stable controlling is not possible. This operation is also referred
to as Hunting. Also note that the load of the tap changer, – that is the number of increments performed –
increases the lower the bandwidth.
On the secondary side, the increment ∆Vsec is not linear. The largest ∆Vmax,sec in an increment results with the
increment to the highest stage (smallest ratio) and with maximum power-system voltage on the primary side.
[fobdnvrz-150816, 1, en_US]
If the control deviation and the bandwidth are thus correlated, this results in a minimal bandwidth that is to be
set:
[fospnvrz-150816, 1, en_US]
Vrated,sec Secondary rated voltage of the transformer

VN,prim Primary tap voltage of the transformer of stage N
V(N-1),prim Primary tap voltage of the transformer of stage N-1
Vmax,prim Maximum primary voltage of the transformer
Vmax,sec Maximum secondary voltage of the transformer
Parameter: T1 characteristic
• Default setting (_:114) T1 characteristic = Linear

Parameter: T1 delay
• Default setting (_:115) T1 delay = 40 s

You can adjust the control action so that the smallest number of adjusting commands possible is necessary. To
do so, use T1 characteristic to set the control response and T1 delay to set a time delay.
In the Linear setting (linear control response), the control response is independent of the voltage deviation.
A constant time delay applies here.
In the Inverse setting (inverse control response), the time delay is a function of the voltage deviation
referenced to Target voltage 1. The greater the control deviation, the faster the control response. The
control quality improves, but the switching frequency increases. If the voltage control is blocked during the
time delay, the accumulated time delay T1 delay is reset.
The effective time delay is the result of:
[fovrzzet-211013, 2, en_US]
T1 – Parameter T1 delay
[fokonisk-211013, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
D = Control deviation
[dwrglchr-160913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-164 Inverse Control Characteristic
Parameter: T1 Inverse Min
• Default setting (_:116) T1 Inverse Min = 5 s

With the T1 Inverse Min parameter, you define the minimum time delay for the control action. This time
applies only to the control response Inverse and the response cannot be shorter.
Parameter: T2 delay
• Default setting (_:117) T2 delay = 5 s

With the T2 delay parameter, you set the time the tap changer has to wait from one tap position to the
next. During this time, several adjusting commands can be sent to the tap changer in one direction, which
permits a correction of the actual voltage. The time delay T2 has an independent characteristic. The time T2
is generally set shorter than the time T1. If the time T2 is switched off by a setting equal to 0, the delay T1 is
always active. If the voltage control is blocked during the time delay, the accumulated time delays T1 delay
and T2 delay are reset.
Parameter: Fast step up
• Default setting (_:118) Fast step up = off

Parameter: Fast step up limit
• Default setting (_:119) Fast step up limit = –6.0 %

Parameter: Fast step up T delay
• Default setting (_:120) Fast step up T delay = 2.0 s

With this parameter, you specify the time delay of the fast step-up mode. If the actual voltage is less than the
value of the limit for the fast step-up mode (_:119), the fast step up mode is activated. A fast step-up mode
is not activated if the value drops below the voltage limit for only a brief period within the time delay. If the
voltage control is blocked during the time delay, the accumulated time delay Fast step up T delay is
reset.
Parameter: Fast step down

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
• Default setting (_:121) Fast step down = on

Parameter: Fast step down limit
• Default setting (_:122) Fast step down limit = 6.0 %

Parameter: Fast step down T delay
• Default setting (_:123) Fast step down T delay = 0.0 s

With this parameter, you specify the time delay of the fast step-down mode. If the actual voltage is greater
than the value of the limit for the fast step-down mode (_:122), the fast step-down mode is activated. A fast
step-down mode is not activated if the voltage limit is exceeded for only a brief period within the time delay.
If the voltage control is blocked during the time delay, the accumulated time delay Fast step down T
delay is reset.
Parameter: Function monitoring
• Default setting (_:124) Function monitoring = 15 min

You can delay the pickup of the function monitor. With the Function monitoring = 0 min parameter, the
function monitor is switched off.
Parameter: Power-flow supervision
• Default setting (_:16351:162) Power-flow supervision = on

With the Power-flow supervision parameter, you monitor the power flow. You can switch the param-
eter on or off.
Parameter: Regulate with T2 at start
• Default setting (_:14011:155) Regulate with T2 at start = on

With the Regulate with T2 at start parameter, you can activate a shorter time than T1. This can be
necessary for controlling a voltage recovery or after switching on a transformer. If voltage was not present
beforehand, this setting controls with the shorter time T2 when starting the control action. You can switch
this functionality on or off. If you always want to use the time T2 for control, you must set the Block T1
controllable to On.
For the three-winding transformer, the address of the parameter Regulate with T2 at start is
_:15601:163 and it is _:16351:163 for the grid coupling transformer.
Parameter: Set point mode active
• Default setting (_:14011:160) Set point mode active = on

With the Set point mode active = on parameter, you send a target voltage to the voltage controller via
a communication network. The voltage controller uses the specified voltage value as the target voltage and
the specified bandwidth instead of the parameterized bandwidth. If the voltage controller does not receive
any valid voltage values or bandwidth, it uses the original target voltage or bandwidth respectively. You can
enable or disable the parameter.
For the three-winding transformer, the address of the parameter Set point mode active is
_:15601:171 and it is _:16351:171 for the grid coupling transformer.
8.9.4.4 Dynamic Voltage Control (DVC)

Parameter: DVC mode
• Default setting (_:14011:177) DVC mode = off

With the parameter DVC mode, you can adapt the voltage target value of the voltage controller via a
characteristic curve depending on the power direction. You can activate or deactivate the dynamic voltage
control with the settings on (activate) or off (deactivate).
Parameter: Active power max
• Default setting (_:14011:176) Active power max = 30 %

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
With the parameter Active power max, you define the maximum value of the active power in percent.
Parameter: Active power min
• Default setting (_:14011:175) Active power min = -20 %

With the parameter Active power min, you define the minimum value of the active power in percent.
Parameter: Target Voltage max
• Default setting (_:14011:174) Target Voltage max = 114 V

With the parameter Target Voltage max, you define the maximum value of the target voltage.
Parameter: Target Voltage min
• Default setting (_:14011:173) Target Voltage min = 106 V

With the parameter Target Voltage min, you define the minimum value of the target voltage.
Only Three-Winding Transformer:
Parameter: DVC mode

Parameter: Active power max w1
• Default setting (_:15601:185) Active power max w1 = 30 %

Parameter: Active power min w1
• Default setting (_:15601:183) Active power min w1 = -20 %



Parameter: Target Voltage min w1
• Default setting (_:15601:179) Target Voltage min w1 = 106 V

Parameter: Target Voltage max w1
• Default setting (_:15601:181) Target Voltage max w1 = 114 V



C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Only Grid Coupling Transformer:

Parameter: DVC mode








8.9.4.5 Line Compensation

Parameter: Line drop compensation
• Default setting (_:14011:125) Line drop compensation = off

You can use the Line drop compensation parameter to select the correction procedure of the load-
dependent line voltage drop. There are 2 procedures available for selection: LDC-Z and LDC-XandR. The
setting of the parameter Set point mode active is also taken into account here.
For setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-Z, consider the following parameter:
Parameter: Target voltage rising
• Default setting (_:14011:126) Target voltage rising = 4.0 %

With the Target voltage rising parameter, you set the voltage drop across the line. The value repre-
sents the voltage rising in % of the Target voltage 1 that occurs at rated load. Only the magnitude of the
current is considered. The set value is added to Target voltage 1.
Target voltage rising [%] = ΔVload [%], if Iload = 100 %
[foschlst-211013, 2, en_US]
where:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
VSetComp Target voltage at the end of the line

VSet Target voltage
Iload Load current in %
With the following equation, you can determine the percentage of the primary load current of the line from
the rated current of the transformer k (k = 1, 2, …, 8).
[fo_ibs_load_cur_perc, 1, en_US]
where:
Iload Primary load current
Irated Rated current of the transformer
Example
Application example of the LDC-Z line compensation for the voltage control of 2 transformers connected in
parallel.
[dw_target_voltage_2exam, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-165 LDC-Z Line Compensation with 2 Parallel Transformers
In the example, a load current of Iload = 1430 A results in a voltage drop of Vload = 500 V.
Value Transformer T1 Transformer T2
Iload(%) 100 % 50 %
Target voltage rising ΔVload(%) 4.8 % 9.6 %

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
NOTE
i Make sure that you configure the parameter Max load current on the voltage controller on the
transformer T1 to 200 %, as this summation load current is used for the line compensation.
Parameter: LDC is calculated
• Default setting (_:14011:172) LDC is calculated = on target voltage

For the parameter LDC is calculated, you can select between the settings on target voltage and on
measured voltage. The voltage compensation is added to the target voltage with the setting on target
voltage, and to the measured voltage with the setting on measured voltage.
Parameter: Max load current
• Default setting (_:14011:127) Max load current = 100.0 %

With the setting of the parameter Max load current, you can prevent the voltage at the transformer from
becoming too high in the event of extraordinarily high load current. If the load current exceeds the set value,
no additional load-current compensation is calculated.
For setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-XandR, consider the following parameters:
Parameter: R line
• Default setting (_:14011:153) R line = 0.00 Ω

With the R line parameter, you to set the ohmic resistance of the line.
Parameter: X line
• Default setting (_:14011:154) X line = 0.00 Ω

With the X line parameter, you set the reactance for the line to be protected.
In order to determine the voltage drop by the line, entering the parameters R line and X line is necessary
for the procedure Line drop compensation = LDC-XandR. If the primary values are known and you
would like to set the secondary values, use the following formula for the calculation:
[fo-I-V-Ratio-250214, 1, en_US]
As an example, calculate Xsec with the following parameters:
Current transformer ratio : 1000 A/1 A

Voltage transformer ratio : 380 kV/0.1 kV
Xprim : 21 Ω
Therefore, the result for Xsec is:
[fo-I-V-Ratio_Value-250214, 1, en_US]
If you are implementing a parallel control with the X and R compensation, then the X value is negative and
considers the voltage rising from the busbar to the transformer.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Additional Parameters for the Three-Winding Transformer and for the Grid Coupling Transformer
Parameter: Line drop compensation
• Default setting (_:125) Line drop compensation = off

For setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-Z, consider the following parameters:
Parameter: Target voltage rising w1
• Default setting (_:126) Target voltage rising w1 = 4.0%

Parameter: Target voltage rising w2
• Default setting (_:147) Target voltage rising w2 = 4.0%

Parameter: Max load current
• Default setting (_:127) Max load current = 100.0 %

For setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-XandR, consider the following parameters:
Parameter: R line w1
• Default setting (_:153) R line w1 = 0.0 Ω

Parameter: R line w2
• Default setting (_:155) R line w2 = 0.0 Ω

Parameter: X line w1
• Default setting (_:154) X line w1 = 0.0 Ω

Parameter: X line w2
• Default setting (_:156) X line w2 = 0.0 Ω
8.9.4.6 Limiting Values

Parameter: Lower tap-position limit
• Default setting (_:14011:102) Lower tap-position limit = 1

Parameter: Higher tap-position limit
• Default setting (_:14011:103) Higher tap-position limit = 1

With the parameters Lower tap-position limit and Higher tap-position limit, you can restrict
the taps available in automatic operation. For example, using the parameter Higher tap-position
limit, changes to higher taps to excessive ratios that would result in overvoltages in the event of a sudden
loss of load are blocked.
Parameter: Vmin limiting
• Default setting (_:14011:128) Vmin limiting = on

Parameter: Vmin threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:129) Vmin threshold = 105.000 V

Parameter: Vmin time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:130) Vmin time delay = 10 s

Parameter: Vmax limiting
• Default setting (_:14011:131) Vmax limiting = on

Parameter: Vmax threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:132) Vmax threshold = 115.000 V

Parameter: Vmax time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:133) Vmax time delay = 10 s

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
The voltage limits are necessary only for special control situations. The overvoltage limit prevents a change to
a higher tap by the voltage controller if the limiting value Vmax threshold is exceeded. The undervoltage
limit prevents a change to a lower tap by the voltage controller if the voltage drops below the limiting value
Vmin threshold.
Additional Parameters for the Three-Winding Transformer and for the Grid Coupling Transformer
Parameter: Vmin threshold w1
• Default setting (_:129) Vmin threshold w1 = 105.000 V

Parameter: Vmin threshold w2
• Default setting (_:148) Vmin threshold w2 = 105.000 V
Parameter: Vmax threshold w1
• Default setting (_:132) Vmax threshold w1 = 115.000 V

Parameter: Vmax threshold w2
• Default setting (_:149) Vmax threshold w2 = 115.000 V
8.9.4.7 Blockings
Parameter: Blocking behavior
• Default setting (_:14011:134) Blocking behavior = Auto-Manual

If the corresponding voltage limits are exceeded in either direction, the blockings prevent a change to a lower
or higher tap. On the one hand, this prevents excessive wear of the contacts of the tap changer and, on the
other hand, it prevents a system incident. With the parameter Blocking behavior, you set whether these
blockings are effective only in automatic operation or in both automatic and manual operation.
Parameter: V< Blocking
• Default setting (_:14011:135) V< Blocking = on

Parameter: V< Threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:136) V< Threshold = 90.000 V

Parameter: V< Time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:137) V< Time delay = 0 s

Parameter: I> Blocking
• Default setting (_:14011:138) I> Blocking = on

Parameter: I> Threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:139) I> Threshold = 150 %

Parameter: I> Time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:140) I> Time delay = 0 s

If the load current exceeds the threshold value I> Threshold for the time I> Time delay, the overcur-
rent blocking prevents changing to a higher or lower tap. Set the threshold value I> Threshold in % in
relation to the rated current. To do this, set the parameter I reference for % values.
Parameter: I< Blocking
• Default setting (_:14011:141) I< Blocking = off

Parameter: I< Threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:142) I< Threshold = 10 %

Parameter: I< Time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:143) I< Time delay = 10 s

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
If the load current drops below the threshold value I< Threshold for the time I< Time delay, the
undercurrent blocking prevents changing to a higher or lower tap. Set the threshold value I< Threshold in
% in relation to the rated current. To do this, set the parameter I reference for % values.
Additional Pararmeters for Three-Winding Transformers and for Grid Coupling Transformers
Parameter: V< Threshold w1
• Default setting (_:136) V< Threshold w1 = 90.000 V

Parameter: V< Threshold w2
• Default setting (_:150) V< Threshold w2 = 90.000 V
You can find the parameter and information lists in chapter 8.9.5 Settings.
8.9.4.8 Parallel Control

Parameter: Parallel mode
• Default setting (_:14011:161) Parallel mode = No mode

With the Parallel mode parameter, you can switch the voltage controller into one of the following modes:
No mode
Master
Follower
Circulat. react current
Parameter: Parallel-transfomer id
• Default setting (_:14011:168) Parallel-transfomer id = 1

The Parallel-transfomer id parameter indicates the ID of the transformer.
With this parameter, you identify individual transformers in a parallel group. Transformers belonging to the
same parallel group must be uniquely identifiable based on the ID. The unique identification applies to all
transformers which communicate via GOOSE.
Parameter: Parallel mode changeable
• Default setting (_:14011:164) Parallel mode changeable = by setting

With the Parallel mode changeable parameter, you influence the parallel control by setting or via
the setting controllable.
Parameter: Force master changeable
• Default setting (_:14011:165) Force master changeable = by setting

With the Force master changeable parameter, you determine by setting or via the setting control-
lable which device is the Master in the parallel operation. In a group of transformers working in parallel, only
one device can be the Master. The presence of a Master is monitored.
Parameter: Maximal tap difference
• Default setting (_:14011:166) Maximal tap difference = 2

With the Maximal tap difference parameter, you set the maximum permissible difference of the tap-
changer positions between the transformers of a group.
Parameter: Reactive I control factor
• Default setting (_:14011:169) Reactive I control factor = 1.00

The voltage deviation between the transformers is influenced with the parameter Reactive I control
factor. This means that a deviation from one stage exceeds the bandwidth of the voltage controller. This
allows the control deviation DCRC, initiated by the circulating reactive current, to be adjusted individually for
each parallel operation.
Parameter: VT supervision
• Default setting (_:14011:146) VT supervision = on

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
With the VT supervision parameter, you switch the voltage supervision on or off. The average voltage
of all voltage controllers is compared with the measured voltage as a criterion and is blocked if it exceeds
the setting value. Siemens recommends setting the VT supervision parameter to on to minimize the
circulating reactive current.
NOTE
i In the Master-Follower Method, you can use this parameter only if the follower is also measuring the
voltage.
Parameter: VT supervision threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:147) VT supervision threshold = 10.0 %

With the VT supervision threshold parameter, you set the threshold value for the voltage supervision.
Parameter: VT supervision time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:148) VT supervision time delay = 10 s

With the VT supervision time delay parameter, you set the time for which exceeding the voltage
supervision threshold does not lead to a blocking.
Parameter: Circul. current blocking
• Default setting (_:14011:149) Circul. current blocking = on

With the Circul. current blocking parameter, you switch the supervision of the circulating reactive
current off or on.
Parameter: Circul. current threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:150) Circul. current threshold = 50 %

With the Circul. current threshold parameter, you set the level of the circulating reactive current at
which the supervision should pick up.
Parameter:Circul. current time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:151) Circul. current time delay = 60 s

With the Circul. current time delay parameter, you set the time for which exceeding the threshold
value of the circulating reactive current supervision does not lead to a blocking.
8.9.5 Settings
Two-Winding Transformer and Parallel Control

Ref. for %-values
_:2311:106 General:Rated app. 0.20 MVA to 5000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA
power transf.
_:2311:108 General:Imp(Z): short 1.00 % to 20.00 % 10.00 %
circuit imp.
_:2311:124 General:Freq tracking 1 to 100 1
group ID
Tap changer
_:13981:111 Tap changer:Maximum 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 1.50 s
output time

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:13981:112 Tap changer:Supervision • off alarm block
behavior
• warning
• alarm block
_:13981:113 Tap changer:Motor 5 s to 100 s 10 s
supervision time
_:13981:116 Tap changer:Highest tap • Lowest voltage tap Lowest voltage
changer pos. tap
• Highest voltage tap
_:13981:114 Tap changer:Lowest tap -64 to 64 1
position
_:13981:115 Tap changer:Highest tap -64 to 64 15
position
General
_:14011:1 90V V.contr.2w:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:14011:101 90V V.contr.2w:Oper- • Manual Manual
ating mode
• Auto
_:14011:104 90V V.contr.2w:Minimal 0 % to 100 % 5%
voltage
_:14011:100 90V V.contr.2w:Meas- • positive-seq. voltage positive-seq.
ured value voltage
• VA measured
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
Control tap changer
_:14011:107 90V V.contr.2w:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
_:14011:109 90V V.contr.2w:Control • direct w. normal secur. SBO w. enh.
model security
_:14011:110 90V V.contr.2w:SBO 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
time-out
_:14011:111 90V V.contr.2w:Feed- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
back monitoring time
Voltage Control
_:14011:156 90V V.contr.2w:Number • 1 1
of target voltage
• 2
• 3
• 4

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:14011:112 90V V.contr.2w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 1
voltage 2
voltage 3
voltage 4
_:14011:113 90V V.contr.2w:Band- 0.2 % to 10.0 % 1.0 %
width
_:14011:114 90V V.contr.2w:T1 char- • Linear Linear
acteristic
• Inverse
_:14011:115 90V V.contr.2w:T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s
_:14011:116 90V V.contr.2w:T1 5 s to 100 s 5s
Inverse Min
_:14011:117 90V V.contr.2w:T2 delay 0 s to 100 s 5s
_:14011:118 90V V.contr.2w:Fast step • off off
up
• on
_:14011:119 90V V.contr.2w:Fast step -50.0 % to 0.0 % -6.0 %
up limit
_:14011:120 90V V.contr.2w:Fast step 0.0 s to 10.0 s 2.0 s
up T delay
_:14011:121 90V V.contr.2w:Fast step • off on
down
• on
_:14011:122 90V V.contr.2w:Fast step 0.0 %to 50.0 % 6.0 %
down limit
down T delay
_:14011:124 90V V.contr.2w:Function 0 min to 120 min 15 min
monitoring
_:14011:155 90V V.contr.2w:Regulate • off on
with T2 at start
• on
_:14011:160 90V V.contr.2w:Set • off on
point mode active
• on
Parallel operation
_:14011:161 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel • No mode No mode
mode
• Master
• Follower
• Circulat. react current
_:14011:168 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel- 1 to 8 1
transfomer id
_:14011:164 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel • by setting by setting
mode changeable
• controllable
_:14011:165 90V V.contr.2w:Force • by setting by setting
master changeable
• controllable
_:14011:166 90V V.contr.2w:Maximal 1 to 9 2
tap difference

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:14011:169 90V V.contr.2w:Reactive 0.01 to 100.00 1.00
I control factor
_:14011:146 90V V.contr.2w:VT • off on
supervision
• on
_:14011:147 90V V.contr.2w:VT 0.5 % to 10.0 % 10.0 %
supervision threshold
_:14011:148 90V V.contr.2w:VT 1 s to 600 s 10 s
supervision time delay
_:14011:149 90V V.contr.2w:Circul. • off on
current blocking
• on
_:14011:150 90V V.contr.2w:Circul. 10 % to 500 % 50 %
current threshold
_:14011:151 90V V.contr.2w:Circul. 0 s to 1000 s 60 s
current time delay
Line drop comp.
_:14011:125 90V V.contr.2w:Line • off off
drop compensation
• LDC-Z
• LDC-XandR
_:14011:126 90V V.contr.2w:Target 0.0 %to 20.0 % 4.0 %
voltage rising
_:14011:127 90V V.contr.2w:Max 0.0 % to 500.0 % 100.0 %
load current
_:14011:153 90V V.contr.2w:R line 0.00 Ω to 30.00 Ω 0.00 Ω
_:14011:154 90V V.contr.2w:X line -30.00 Ω to 30.00 Ω 0.00 Ω
_:14011:172 90V V.contr.2w:LDC is • on target voltage on target
calculated voltage
• on measured voltage
Dyn. voltage control
_:14011:177 90V V.contr.2w:DVC • off off
mode
• on
Voltage min
Voltage max
_:14011:175 90V V.contr.2w:Active -100.00 % to 0.00 % -20.00 %
power min
_:14011:176 90V V.contr.2w:Active 0.00 % to 100.00 % 30.00 %
power max
Limiting
_:14011:102 90V V.contr.2w:Lower -128 to 127 1
tap-position limit
_:14011:103 90V V.contr.2w:Higher -128 to 127 15
tap-position limit
_:14011:128 90V V.contr.2w:Vmin • off on
limiting
• on
_:14011:129 90V V.contr.2w:Vmin 10.000 V to 340.000 V 105.000 V
threshold
_:14011:130 90V V.contr.2w:Vmin 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:14011:131 90V V.contr.2w:Vmax • off on
limiting
• on
_:14011:132 90V V.contr.2w:Vmax 10.000 V to 340.000 V 115.000 V
threshold
_:14011:133 90V V.contr.2w:Vmax 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
Blocking
_:14011:134 90V V.contr.2w:Blocking • Auto Auto-Manual
behavior
• Auto-Manual
_:14011:135 90V V.contr.2w:V< • off on
Blocking
• on
_:14011:136 90V V.contr.2w:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold
_:14011:137 90V V.contr.2w:V< Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:14011:138 90V V.contr.2w:I> • off on
Blocking
• on
_:14011:139 90V V.contr.2w:I> 10 % to 500 % 150 %
Threshold
_:14011:140 90V V.contr.2w:I> Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:14011:141 90V V.contr.2w:I< • off off
Blocking
• on
_:14011:142 90V V.contr.2w:I< 3 % to 100 % 10 %
Threshold
_:14011:143 90V V.contr.2w:I< Time 0 s to 20 s 10 s
delay
Three-Winding Transformer

Winding 1
Winding 2
Rated values
group ID
Tap changer
output time
behavior
• warning
• alarm block
supervision time

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

changer pos. tap
position
position
General
_:15601:1 90V V.contr.3w:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:15601:101 90V V.contr.3w:Oper- • Manual Manual
ating mode
• Auto
_:15601:104 90V V.contr.3w:Minimal 0 % to 100 % 5%
voltage
ured value winding 1 voltage
• VA measured
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
• VA measured
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
_:15601:157 90V V.contr.3w:Winding • Winding 1 Winding 1
selection
• Winding 2
• WithMaxLoad
_:15601:161 90V V.contr.3w:Winding • Winding 1 Winding 1
selection
• Winding 2
Control tap changer
_:15601:107 90V V.contr.3w:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:15601:109 90V V.contr.3w:Control • direct w. normal secur. SBO w. enh.
model security
_:15601:110 90V V.contr.3w:SBO 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
time-out
_:15601:111 90V V.contr.3w:Feed- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
back monitoring time
Voltage Control
_:15601:164 90V V.contr.3w:Number • 1 1
of target voltage
• 2
• 3
• 4
voltage 1 w1
voltage 2 w1
voltage 3 w1
voltage 4 w1
voltage 1 w2
voltage 2 w2
voltage 3 w2
voltage 4 w2
_:15601:113 90V V.contr.3w:Band- 0.2 % to 10.0 % 1.0 %
width
_:15601:114 90V V.contr.3w:T1 char- • Linear Linear
acteristic
• Inverse
_:15601:115 90V V.contr.3w:T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s
_:15601:116 90V V.contr.3w:T1 5 s to 100 s 5s
Inverse Min
_:15601:117 90V V.contr.3w:T2 delay 0 s to 100 s 5s
_:15601:118 90V V.contr.3w:Fast step • off off
up
• on
_:15601:119 90V V.contr.3w:Fast step -50.0 % to 0.0 % -6.0 %
up limit
up T delay
_:15601:121 90V V.contr.3w:Fast step • off on
down
• on
_:15601:122 90V V.contr.3w:Fast step 0.0 %to 50.0 % 6.0 %
down limit
down T delay

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:15601:124 90V V.contr.3w:Function 0 min to 120 min 15 min
monitoring
_:15601:162 90V V.contr.3w:Power- • off on
flow supervision
• on
_:15601:163 90V V.contr.3w:Regulate • off on
with T2 at start
• on
_:15601:171 90V V.contr.3w:Set • off on
point mode active
• on
Line drop comp.
_:15601:125 90V V.contr.3w:Line • off off
drop compensation
• LDC-Z
• LDC-XandR
_:15601:172 90V V.contr.3w:LDC is • on target voltage on target
calculated voltage
voltage rising w1
voltage rising w2
_:15601:127 90V V.contr.3w:Max 0.0 % to 500.0 % 100.0 %
load current
w1
w1
w2
w2
_:15601:178 90V V.contr.3w:DVC • off off
mode
• on
Voltage min w1
Voltage max w1
power min w1
power max w1
Voltage min w2
Voltage max w2
power min w2
power max w2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

Limiting
_:15601:102 90V V.contr.3w:Lower -128 to 127 1
tap-position limit
_:15601:103 90V V.contr.3w:Higher -128 to 127 15
tap-position limit
_:15601:128 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin • off on
limiting
• on
threshold w1
threshold w2
_:15601:130 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
_:15601:131 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax • off on
limiting
• on
threshold w1
threshold w2
_:15601:133 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
Blocking
_:15601:134 90V V.contr.3w:Blocking • Auto Auto-Manual
behavior
• Auto-Manual
_:15601:135 90V V.contr.3w:V< • off on
Blocking
• on
_:15601:136 90V V.contr.3w:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold w1
_:15601:150 90V V.contr.3w:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold w2
_:15601:137 90V V.contr.3w:V< Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:15601:138 90V V.contr.3w:I> • off on
Blocking
• on
_:15601:139 90V V.contr.3w:I> 10 % to 500 % 150 %
Threshold
_:15601:140 90V V.contr.3w:I> Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:15601:141 90V V.contr.3w:I< • off off
Blocking
• on
_:15601:142 90V V.contr.3w:I< 3 % to 100 % 10 %
Threshold
_:15601:143 90V V.contr.3w:I< Time 0 s to 20 s 10 s
delay
Grid Coupling Transformer

Winding 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

Winding 2
Rated values
group ID
Tap changer
output time
behavior
• warning
• alarm block
supervision time
changer pos. tap
position
position
General
_:16351:1 90V V.contr.gc:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:16351:101 90V V.contr.gc:Oper- • Manual Manual
ating mode
• Auto
_:16351:104 90V V.contr.gc:Minimal 0 % to 100 % 5%
voltage
_:16351:173 90V V.contr.gc:Meas- • positive-seq. voltage positive-seq.
• VA measured
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:16351:174 90V V.contr.gc:Meas- • positive-seq. voltage positive-seq.
• VA measured
• VB measured
• VC measured
• VAB measured
• VBC measured
• VCA measured
• VAB calculated
• VBC calculated
• VCA calculated
_:16351:157 90V V.contr.gc:Winding • Winding 1 Winding 1
selection
• Winding 2
• WithMaxLoad
_:16351:161 90V V.contr.gc:Winding • Winding 1 Winding 1
selection
• Winding 2
Control tap changer
_:16351:107 90V V.contr.gc:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
_:16351:109 90V V.contr.gc:Control • direct w. normal secur. SBO w. enh.
model security
_:16351:110 90V V.contr.gc:SBO 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
time-out
_:16351:111 90V V.contr.gc:Feedback 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
monitoring time
Voltage Control
_:16351:164 90V V.contr.gc:Number • 1 1
of target voltage
• 2
• 3
• 4
_:16351:112 90V V.contr.gc:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 1 w1
voltage 2 w1
voltage 3 w1
voltage 4 w1
voltage 1 w2
voltage 2 w2
voltage 3 w2
voltage 4 w2

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:16351:113 90V V.contr.gc:Band- 0.2 % to 10.0 % 1.0 %
width
_:16351:114 90V V.contr.gc:T1 char- • Linear Linear
acteristic
• Inverse
_:16351:115 90V V.contr.gc:T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s
_:16351:116 90V V.contr.gc:T1 5 s to 100 s 5s
Inverse Min
_:16351:117 90V V.contr.gc:T2 delay 0 s to 100 s 5s
_:16351:118 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step • off off
up
• on
_:16351:119 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step -50.0 % to 0.0 % -6.0 %
up limit
_:16351:120 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step 0.0 s to 10.0 s 2.0 s
up T delay
_:16351:121 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step • off on
down
• on
_:16351:122 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step 0.0 %to 50.0 % 6.0 %
down limit
_:16351:123 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step 0.0 s to 10.0 s 0.0 s
down T delay
_:16351:124 90V V.contr.gc:Function 0 min to 120 min 15 min
monitoring
_:16351:162 90V V.contr.gc:Power- • off on
flow supervision
• on
_:16351:163 90V V.contr.gc:Regulate • off on
with T2 at start
• on
_:16351:171 90V V.contr.gc:Set point • off on
mode active
• on
Line drop comp.
_:16351:125 90V V.contr.gc:Line drop • off off
compensation
• LDC-Z
• LDC-XandR
_:16351:172 90V V.contr.gc:LDC is • on target voltage on target
calculated voltage
_:16351:126 90V V.contr.gc:Target 0.0 %to 20.0 % 4.0 %
voltage rising w1
_:16351:147 90V V.contr.gc:Target 0.0 %to 20.0 % 4.0 %
voltage rising w2
_:16351:127 90V V.contr.gc:Max load 0.0 % to 500.0 % 100.0 %
current
_:16351:153 90V V.contr.gc:R line w1 0.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω
_:16351:154 90V V.contr.gc:X line w1 -30.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω
_:16351:155 90V V.contr.gc:R line w2 0.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω
_:16351:156 90V V.contr.gc:X line w2 -30.0 Ω to 30.0 Ω 0.0 Ω
_:16351:178 90V V.contr.gc:DVC • off off
mode
• on

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

Voltage min w1
Voltage max w1
_:16351:183 90V V.contr.gc:Active -100.00 % to 0.00 % -20.00 %
power min w1
_:16351:185 90V V.contr.gc:Active 0.00 % to 100.00 % 30.00 %
power max w1
Voltage min w2
Voltage max w2
_:16351:184 90V V.contr.gc:Active -100.00 % to 0.00 % -20.00 %
power min w2
_:16351:186 90V V.contr.gc:Active 0.00 % to 100.00 % 30.00 %
power max w2
Limiting
_:16351:102 90V V.contr.gc:Lower -128 to 127 1
tap-position limit
_:16351:103 90V V.contr.gc:Higher -128 to 127 15
tap-position limit
_:16351:128 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin • off on
limiting
• on
_:16351:129 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 10.000 V to 340.000 V 105.000 V
threshold w1
_:16351:148 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 10.000 V to 340.000 V 105.000 V
threshold w2
_:16351:130 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
_:16351:131 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax • off on
limiting
• on
_:16351:132 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 10.000 V to 340.000 V 115.000 V
threshold w1
_:16351:149 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 10.000 V to 340.000 V 115.000 V
threshold w2
_:16351:133 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
Blocking
_:16351:134 90V V.contr.gc:Blocking • Auto Auto-Manual
behavior
• Auto-Manual
_:16351:135 90V V.contr.gc:V< • off on
Blocking
• on
_:16351:136 90V V.contr.gc:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold w1
_:16351:150 90V V.contr.gc:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold w2
_:16351:137 90V V.contr.gc:V< Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:16351:138 90V V.contr.gc:I> • off on
Blocking
• on

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

_:16351:139 90V V.contr.gc:I> 10 % to 500 % 150 %
Threshold
_:16351:140 90V V.contr.gc:I> Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:16351:141 90V V.contr.gc:I< • off off
Blocking
• on
_:16351:142 90V V.contr.gc:I< 3 % to 100 % 10 %
Threshold
_:16351:143 90V V.contr.gc:I< Time 0 s to 20 s 10 s
delay
Two-Winding Transformer and Parallel Control

(Type)
General
Tap changer
_:13981:500 Tap changer:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:13981:501 Tap changer:>Enable SPS I
_:13981:52 Tap changer:Behavior ENS O
_:13981:53 Tap changer:Health ENS O
_:13981:301 Tap changer:End higher pos.reached SPS O
_:13981:302 Tap changer:End lower pos.reached SPS O
_:13981:308 Tap changer:Position BSC C
_:13981:305 Tap changer:Higher command SPS O
_:13981:306 Tap changer:Lower command SPS O
_:13981:307 Tap changer:Command active SPS O
_:13981:309 Tap changer:Motor sup. time expired SPS O
_:13981:310 Tap changer:Trigger motor prot. sw. SPS O
_:13981:311 Tap changer:Position failure SPS O
_:13981:312 Tap changer:Op.ct. INS O
_:13981:319 Tap changer:Reset failure SPC C
90V V.contr.2w
_:14011:81 90V V.contr.2w:>Block SPS I
_:14011:85 90V V.contr.2w:>Reset min./max. SPS I
_:14011:53 90V V.contr.2w:Health ENS O
_:14011:54 90V V.contr.2w:Inactive SPS O
_:14011:339 90V V.contr.2w:Auto inactive SPS O
_:14011:52 90V V.contr.2w:Behavior ENS O
_:14011:301 90V V.contr.2w:End Higher pos. Auto SPS O
_:14011:302 90V V.contr.2w:End Lower pos. Auto SPS O
_:14011:326 90V V.contr.2w:Cmd. with feedback BSC C
_:14011:329 90V V.contr.2w:Block auto SPC C
_:14011:312 90V V.contr.2w:Operating mode SPC C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
_:14011:305 90V V.contr.2w:Bandwidth > SPS O
_:14011:306 90V V.contr.2w:Bandwidth < SPS O
_:14011:307 90V V.contr.2w:Fast Step Up active SPS O
_:14011:308 90V V.contr.2w:Fast Step Down active SPS O
_:14011:309 90V V.contr.2w:Auto Monitor SPS O
_:14011:310 90V V.contr.2w:Vmin Limiting SPS O
_:14011:311 90V V.contr.2w:Vmax Limiting SPS O
_:14011:315 90V V.contr.2w:Auto Blocking SPS O
_:14011:316 90V V.contr.2w:Manual Blocking SPS O
_:14011:317 90V V.contr.2w:V< Blocking SPS O
_:14011:318 90V V.contr.2w:I> Blocking SPS O
_:14011:319 90V V.contr.2w:I< Blocking SPS O
_:14011:366 90V V.contr.2w:VT supervision SPS O
_:14011:367 90V V.contr.2w:Circul. current blocking SPS O
_:14011:320 90V V.contr.2w:V act. MV O
_:14011:333 90V V.contr.2w:Vact.m MV O
_:14011:321 90V V.contr.2w:ΔV act. MV O
_:14011:334 90V V.contr.2w:ΔV act V MV O
_:14011:335 90V V.contr.2w:ΔV act C MV O
_:14011:322 90V V.contr.2w:I load MV O
_:14011:364 90V V.contr.2w:PhAng MV O
_:14011:336 90V V.contr.2w:I load Σ MV O
_:14011:365 90V V.contr.2w:I circul. MV O
_:14011:323 90V V.contr.2w:V max MV O
_:14011:324 90V V.contr.2w:V min MV O
_:14011:325 90V V.contr.2w:V target MV O
_:14011:354 90V V.contr.2w:Target voltage 1 SPC C
_:14011:358 90V V.contr.2w:Set target voltage APC C
_:14011:368 90V V.contr.2w:Set bandwidth APC C
_:14011:359 90V V.contr.2w:Block T1 SPC C
_:14011:337 90V V.contr.2w:No. of master is not 1 SPS O
_:14011:338 90V V.contr.2w:Automatic block. local SPS O
_:14011:328 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel operation SPC C
_:14011:331 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel group INC C
_:14011:332 90V V.contr.2w:Force master SPC C
_:14011:360 90V V.contr.2w:Local parallel mode ENS O
_:14011:363 90V V.contr.2w:Local para. transf. id INS O
_:14011:361 90V V.contr.2w:Cause of par.op. error ENS O
_:14011:362 90V V.contr.2w:Parallel-operation error SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
Three-Winding Transformer

(Type)
General
Tap changer
90V V.contr.3w
_:15601:81 90V V.contr.3w:>Block SPS I
_:15601:85 90V V.contr.3w:>Reset min./max. SPS I
_:15601:53 90V V.contr.3w:Health ENS O
_:15601:54 90V V.contr.3w:Inactive SPS O
_:15601:371 90V V.contr.3w:Auto inactive SPS O
_:15601:52 90V V.contr.3w:Behavior ENS O
_:15601:301 90V V.contr.3w:End Higher pos. Auto SPS O
_:15601:302 90V V.contr.3w:End Lower pos. Auto SPS O
_:15601:332 90V V.contr.3w:Cmd. with feedback BSC C
_:15601:335 90V V.contr.3w:Block auto SPC C
_:15601:336 90V V.contr.3w:Operating mode SPC C
_:15601:305 90V V.contr.3w:Bandwidth > SPS O
_:15601:306 90V V.contr.3w:Bandwidth < SPS O
_:15601:307 90V V.contr.3w:Fast Step Up active SPS O
_:15601:308 90V V.contr.3w:Fast Step Down active SPS O
_:15601:309 90V V.contr.3w:Auto Monitor SPS O
_:15601:357 90V V.contr.3w:Power-flow superv. SPS O
_:15601:310 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin Limiting w1 SPS O
_:15601:311 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin Limiting w2 SPS O
_:15601:312 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax Limiting w1 SPS O
_:15601:313 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax Limiting w2 SPS O
_:15601:314 90V V.contr.3w:Auto Blocking SPS O
_:15601:315 90V V.contr.3w:Manual Blocking SPS O
_:15601:316 90V V.contr.3w:V< Blocking w1 SPS O
_:15601:317 90V V.contr.3w:V< Blocking w2 SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
_:15601:318 90V V.contr.3w:I> Blocking SPS O
_:15601:319 90V V.contr.3w:I< Blocking SPS O
_:15601:320 90V V.contr.3w:Vact.w1 MV O
_:15601:321 90V V.contr.3w:Vact.w2 MV O
_:15601:322 90V V.contr.3w:ΔV act. MV O
_:15601:323 90V V.contr.3w:I load w1 MV O
_:15601:324 90V V.contr.3w:I load w2 MV O
_:15601:325 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax 1 MV O
_:15601:326 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax 2 MV O
_:15601:327 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin 1 MV O
_:15601:328 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin 2 MV O
_:15601:372 90V V.contr.3w:PhAng 1 MV O
_:15601:373 90V V.contr.3w:PhAng 2 MV O
_:15601:329 90V V.contr.3w:V tar.w1 MV O
_:15601:330 90V V.contr.3w:V tar.w2 MV O
_:15601:358 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 1 w1 SPC C
_:15601:366 90V V.contr.3w:Set target voltage w1 APC C
_:15601:367 90V V.contr.3w:Set target voltage w2 APC C
_:15601:374 90V V.contr.3w:Set bandwidth APC C
_:15601:368 90V V.contr.3w:Block T1 SPC C
_:15601:356 90V V.contr.3w:Winding act. INS O
_:15601:369 90V V.contr.3w:Winding selec. manual SPC C
_:15601:370 90V V.contr.3w:Winding selec. auto SPC C
Grid Coupling Transformer

(Type)
General
Tap changer

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
90V V.contr.gc
_:16351:81 90V V.contr.gc:>Block SPS I
_:16351:85 90V V.contr.gc:>Reset min./max. SPS I
_:16351:53 90V V.contr.gc:Health ENS O
_:16351:54 90V V.contr.gc:Inactive SPS O
_:16351:371 90V V.contr.gc:Auto inactive SPS O
_:16351:52 90V V.contr.gc:Behavior ENS O
_:16351:301 90V V.contr.gc:End Higher pos. Auto SPS O
_:16351:302 90V V.contr.gc:End Lower pos. Auto SPS O
_:16351:332 90V V.contr.gc:Cmd. with feedback BSC C
_:16351:335 90V V.contr.gc:Block auto SPC C
_:16351:336 90V V.contr.gc:Operating mode SPC C
_:16351:305 90V V.contr.gc:Bandwidth > SPS O
_:16351:306 90V V.contr.gc:Bandwidth < SPS O
_:16351:307 90V V.contr.gc:Fast Step Up active SPS O
_:16351:308 90V V.contr.gc:Fast Step Down active SPS O
_:16351:309 90V V.contr.gc:Auto Monitor SPS O
_:16351:357 90V V.contr.gc:Power-flow superv. SPS O
_:16351:310 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin Limiting w1 SPS O
_:16351:311 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin Limiting w2 SPS O
_:16351:312 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax Limiting w1 SPS O
_:16351:313 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax Limiting w2 SPS O
_:16351:314 90V V.contr.gc:Auto Blocking SPS O
_:16351:315 90V V.contr.gc:Manual Blocking SPS O
_:16351:316 90V V.contr.gc:V< Blocking w1 SPS O
_:16351:317 90V V.contr.gc:V< Blocking w2 SPS O
_:16351:318 90V V.contr.gc:I> Blocking SPS O
_:16351:319 90V V.contr.gc:I< Blocking SPS O
_:16351:320 90V V.contr.gc:Vact.w1 MV O
_:16351:321 90V V.contr.gc:Vact.w2 MV O
_:16351:322 90V V.contr.gc:ΔV act. MV O
_:16351:323 90V V.contr.gc:I load w1 MV O
_:16351:324 90V V.contr.gc:I load w2 MV O
_:16351:325 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 1 MV O
_:16351:326 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 2 MV O
_:16351:327 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 1 MV O
_:16351:328 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 2 MV O
_:16351:372 90V V.contr.gc:PhAng 1 MV O
_:16351:373 90V V.contr.gc:PhAng 2 MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions

(Type)
_:16351:329 90V V.contr.gc:V tar.w1 MV O
_:16351:330 90V V.contr.gc:V tar.w2 MV O
_:16351:358 90V V.contr.gc:Target voltage 1 w1 SPC C
_:16351:366 90V V.contr.gc:Set target voltage w1 APC C
_:16351:367 90V V.contr.gc:Set target voltage w2 APC C
_:16351:374 90V V.contr.gc:Set bandwidth APC C
_:16351:368 90V V.contr.gc:Block T1 SPC C
_:16351:356 90V V.contr.gc:Winding act. INS O
_:16351:369 90V V.contr.gc:Winding selec. manual SPC C
_:16351:370 90V V.contr.gc:Winding selec. auto SPC C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Control Functions
8.10 Point-on-Wave Switching
8.10 Point-on-Wave Switching

The Point-on-wave switching function in SIPROTEC 5 is used to reduce increased electrodynamic and dielec-
tric loads which are caused by non-optimal switching of circuit breakers in the network. In extreme cases,
these loads reduce the reliability and life of the equipment installed in the network or lead to unnecessary
opening operations by the protection device. To avoid effects such as overvoltages and inrush currents, this
function can control the closing and opening instants of circuit breakers.
Table 8-34 Avoided Effects in Different Load Types
Load Type Switching Operation Avoided Effect

Inductive load: Opening Restriking, overvoltage
Transformer, reactance coil Closing Inrush current
Capacitive load: Opening Restriking, overvoltage
Capacitor bank, unloaded lines/cables, filter Closing Overvoltage, inrush current
The Point-on-wave switching function is always started via a control command, either from the device
internal control or from an external control function. Protection functions generally directly trip the circuit
breaker and have no interaction with the Point-on-wave switching function.
You can find more information about this function in the Point-on-Wave Switching Function Manual.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
9 Supervision Functions
9.1 Overview 1620

9.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision 1621
9.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 1626
9.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware 1688
9.5 Supervision of Device Firmware 1693
9.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration 1694
9.7 Supervision of Communication Connections 1695
9.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures 1696
9.9 Group Indications 1705

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Supervision Functions
9.1 Overview
9.1 Overview
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with an extensive and integrated supervision concept. Continuous supervi-
sion:
• Ensures the availability of the technology used
• Avoids subfunction and overfunction of the device
• Protects persons and primary technical devices
• Offers effective assistance during commissioning and testing

The following areas are monitored:
• Supervision the resource consumption of the application
• Supervision of the secondary system, including the external auxiliary power supply
• Supervision of device hardware
• Supervision of device firmware
• Supervision of hardware configuration
• Supervision of communication connections

When the supervision functions pick up, that will be displayed and also indicated. Error responses are defined
for the device. The error responses are grouped in defect severities.
The supervision functions work selectively. When the supervision functions pick up - as far as possible - only
the affected parts of the hardware and firmware are blocked. If this is not possible, the device goes out of
operation into a secure state (fallback mode). In addition to safety, this warrants a high degree of availability.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
9.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
9.2.1 Load Model
SIPROTEC 5devices are freely configurable. A load model is integrated in DIGSI 5. The load model prevents you
from overloading the device with an excessively large application.
The load model shows the device utilization and the response times for device functions. If it determines that
an application created is likely to overload the device, DIGSI prevents the application from being loaded into
the device.
In this rare case, you must then reduce the application in order to be able to load it into the device.
The load model can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Device information. In
the operating range, select the Resource consumption setting sheet. The following figure shows an example
of the view of the load model in DIGSI 5:
[sc_lastmo_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-1 Visualization of the Load Model in DIGSI
A green total display for the processor response time indicates that the device is not overloaded by the present
application. On the other hand, if you see a red exclamation mark, the planned application is overloading the
device.
The list below the total display shows the individual functional areas. These areas combine functions with
the same real-time requirements. A green display in front of an area (see Figure 9-1) indicates that the
response times of the functions grouped in this area can be maintained. A red exclamation mark indicates that
functions may have longer response times than specified in the Technical data for the device. In such a case,
loading of the application into the device is blocked.
The following table provides an overview of the functional areas and the most important influencing quanti-
ties on device utilization:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Functional Short Description Change in Load

Area
CFC event-trig- CFC charts that must be Adding or removing CFC charts in the fast event-triggered
gered, fast processed especially fast (for process range
example, to invoke interlock-
ings between protection func-
• Create CFC chart
tions) • Delete CFC chart
• Change the process range in the properties of the CFC
chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the fast event-trig-
gered process area
Measuring Provision of measured values Adding or removing
points for protection, control, and
measurement functions
• Measuring points (in the Measuring-points routing
Editor)
• Function groups that provide measured-value prepro-
cessing for insertable functions (for example, Line
function group and Circuit-breaker function group)
• FG • Interaction between indi- Adding or removing
connec- vidual function groups,
tions for example, between the
• Protection functions and their stages
• Fast Line function group and • Circuit-breaker function groups

GOOSE the Circuit-breaker func- • Fast GOOSE connections
tion group
• Fast GOOSE communica-
tion
Protection Signal transmission via protec- Adding or removing
Communica- tion communication and differ-
tion ential protection communica-
• Communication modules for the protection interface
(in the DIGSI 5 Hardware and logs view)
tion
• Routings to the protection interface
Function Function groups Adding or removing function groups such as:
groups
• FG V/I 3-phase
Overcurrent Overcurrent protection Adding or removing
protection
• Overcurrent protection, phases
Measuring • Measuring-point supervi- Adding or removing measuring points or individual super-
point super- sion functions vising functions, such as
vising func-
tion, protec-
• Scope of the data trans- • 3-phase current measuring point
mission via the protection
tion communi- communication
• 3-phase voltage measuring point
cation • Measuring-voltage failure detection
Add to or remove from transmission values via the protec-
tion communication
• Single-point indications
• Measured values
Other protec- Protection functions with low Adding or removing
tion requirements for fast operate
times
• Overload protection functions
• Functions and stages of voltage protection
• All functions not listed previously

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Functional Short Description Change in Load

Area
CFC event-trig- CFC charts with a maximum Adding or removing CFC charts in the event-triggered
gered, processing time of 40 ms process range
standard
GOOSE
• Create CFC chart
• Delete CFC chart
• Change the process range in the properties of the CFC
chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the event-triggered
process area
• Control • Control and interlocking Adding or removing
• Other CFC • CFC charts in the area • Function blocks for control and interlocking
chart of control, measured-value
preprocessing, and event-
• CFC charts in the control area
• Opera-
controlled • Switching devices (except circuit breakers), for
tional
example, Disconnector function groups
measured • Operational measured
values values • Operational measured values
• CFC charts in the measured values area
If the load model displays a warning, bear in mind the following general instructions:
The areas named in the table are listed in descending order of real-time requirements. If a warning appears to
the effect that the guaranteed response times may be exceeded in an area, you can return to the permitted
area by taking the following measures:
• Reduce the functional scope in the marked area (red exclamation mark)
• Reduce the functional scope in another area with higher real-time requirements
When you have reduced the application, check the display in resource consumption! If a function or stage has
been switched off, it will continue to represent a load for the area. If you do not need the function or stage,
delete it rather than switching it off.
Use the general Circuit-breaker function group only in the following cases:
• Interaction with a protection-function group is essential.

That is to say, operate indications of protection functions cause the circuit breaker assigned to the
Circuit-breaker function group to be switched off.
• You want to use functions such as the automatic reclosing function or circuit-breaker failure protection in
the Circuit-breaker function group.
If a circuit breaker is only to be modeled for control purposes, use the Circuit-breaker [state only] function
group.
9.2.2 Function Points
When you order a SIPROTEC 5 device, you are also ordering a function-points account for use of additional
functions.
The following figure illustrates consumption of function points in the current application with respect to the
existing function-points account.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_fpunkt, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-2 Resource Overview: Function-Points Consumption
The remaining white bar shows the function points that have not yet been used up by your configuration.
The number of function points available in a device depends on the device purchase order (position 20 of the
product code). You can also order function points subsequently, and so increase the function-points account
for the device.
NOTE
i Find out the function-points requirement for the desired application before ordering the device. For this,
you can use the device configurator. Alternatively, you order the device with 0 function points and create
the license file with the required point credits ad hoc using the SIPROTEC function point manager (refer to
2.2 Application Templates/Adaptation of Functional Scope).
9.2.3 CFC Resources
Task Levels of the CFC Function

A CFC chart, and thus the configured CFC function, runs in the SIPROTEC 5 device on exactly one of the 4 task
levels. The individual task levels differ, on the one hand, in the priority of processing tasks and, on the other,
in the cyclic or event-triggered processing of the CFC charts.
You can select between the following task levels:
Task Level Description
High priority Event- Use the High priority Event-triggered task level for time-critical
triggered tasks, for example, if a signal should block a protection function within
2 ms to 3 ms. Functions on this task level are processed in an event-trig-
gered way with the highest priority. Each change to a logical input signal is
immediately processed. Processing can interrupt the execution of protection
functions and functions on the Event-Triggered task level.
Event-triggered Use the Event-triggered task level preferably for logic functions that
need not be executed with highest priority. Each change to a logical input
signal is immediately processed. Protection functions or functions on the
High priority Event-triggered task level can disrupt processing.
Functions on the Event-triggered task level are typically processed
within a maximum of 5 ms in all devices. For busbar protection or
line protection, the functions on the Event-triggered task level are
processed within a maximum of 10 ms.
Low priority Cyclic- Use the Low priority Cyclic-triggered task level for processing
triggered measured values. Functions on this task level are processed cyclically every
500 ms.
Low priority Event- Use the Low priority Event-triggered task level preferably for
triggered logic functions that should be executed with lower priority than functions
in the Event-triggered task level. If the available ticks of the Event-
triggered task level shown in the following figure are sufficient for the
required CFC functionality, you do not need to use the Low priority
Event-triggered task level.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
All CFC function blocks can be assigned to all the task levels. There are no device-specific function blocks. If
enough ticks are available, all CFC charts can be created in the same task level. A tick is the measure of the
performance requirement of CFC blocks.
The number of available ticks for each task is calculated depending on the created device configuration.
This calculation is based on the previously described load model. In this process, it is recommended to
create all selected functions and objects first followed by configuration of the CFC charts so that a realistic
information about the remaining system capacitance for CFC charts is available. Significantly exceeding the
typical response time is prevented by the load model by limiting the number of CFC function blocks in the
corresponding task level via the number of ticks available.
The typical response times for CFC tasks are listed in the Technical Data.
The following figure shows an example of the CFC chart capacitances in DIGSI calculated by the load model.
The ticks available for each task are shown here. The green bars represent the ticks used in the task levels. You
reach this dialog with the following call: Device → Device information → Resource consumption.
[sc_cfc-statistic, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-3 CFC Statistics
NOTE
i High priority Event-triggered CFC charts have the highest priority and are processed before all other tasks.
At this level, a considerable smaller number of ticks are available than at all other tasks. It is recommended
to configure only very-high-priority logic functions at this task and to configure the other logic functions in
any other level.
NOTE
i Empty CFC charts also consume system resources. Empty charts that are not required any more should be
deleted.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
9.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
9.3.1 Overview
The secondary circuits establish a connection to the power system from the point of view of the device.
The measuring-input circuits (currents, voltages) as well as the command circuits to the circuit breakers are
monitored for the correct function of the device. The connection to the station battery is ensured with the
supervision of the external auxiliary voltage. The secondary system has the following supervision systems:
Measuring circuits (voltage):
• Measuring-voltage failure
• Voltage-transformer circuit breaker
• Voltage balance
• Voltage sum
• Voltage rotating field

Measuring circuits (current):
• Broken conductor of the current circuits
• Current balance
• Current sum
• Current rotating field
Trip Circuits
When the supervisions listed in the previous section pick up, corresponding warning indications are output.
Some supervisions lead directly to the blocking of affected protection functions or to the marking of meas-
uring points that have become invalid, so that affected protection functions can go into a secure state.
A detailed description of the supervision mechanisms and their error responses can be found in the respective
function descriptions.
External Auxiliary Voltage

The supervision of the external auxiliary voltage is described in Error Responses and Corrective Measures
starting with 9.8.1 Overview.
9.3.2 Measuring-Voltage Failure

The Measuring-voltage failure detection function monitors the voltage transformer secondary circuits:
• Non-connected transformers
• Pickup of the voltage transformer circuit breaker (in the event of short circuits in the secondary circuit)
• Broken conductor in one or more measuring loops

All these events cause a voltage of 0 in the voltage transformer secondary circuits which can lead to failures of
the protection functions.
Each of the following protection functions has the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure. Using the
setting value of the parameter, you can specify whether the protection functions react to a measuring-voltage
failure or not (block/not block).
• Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
• Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
• Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
• Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
• Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
• Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

The following protection functions are automatically blocked in the case of a measuring-voltage failure:
• Distance protection
• Directional Negative-Sequence Protection
• Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

The function is part of protection function groups which are connected with a 3-phase voltage and current
measuring point.
[dw_strffm, 1, en_US]
The function is broken down into 3 subfunctions (see Figure 9-5):
• Supervision for unbalanced measuring-voltage failure
• Supervision for 3-phase measuring-voltage failure
• Supervision for switching onto a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_ffm-3p_zusamm, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-5 Breakdown of the Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection Function
Each subfunction creates its own monitoring indication. The function summarizes these indications via the
group indication Alarm.
The response to the detection of a measuring-voltage failure is explained in the specific protection-function
descriptions.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
9.3.2.3 Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure
Logic
[lo_oppode, 5, en_US]
Figure 9-6 Logic Diagram Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection
The criterion for detection of an unbalanced measuring-voltage failure is the voltage unbalance. This unbal-
ance is determined based on the ratio between negative and positive-sequence voltage. If the threshold value
is exceeded and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the monitoring picks up (see Figure 9-6). The
indication Asym.fail.-inst.alarm is output.
The monitoring is released as soon as a certain minimum voltage is exceeded. This prevents a spurious
response in the presence of low voltage measurands or a measurand of 0 (for example, circuit breaker
open). Instantaneous monitoring also requires the presence of a minimum current. This prevents a spurious
instantaneous pick up of the monitoring in the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current)
combined with a power-system incident.
If the voltage unbalance is blocked by unbalanced faults in the primary system, the supervision is blocked.
The device detects an unbalanced fault based on the ratio between negative-sequence and positive-sequence
current.
Delay/Seal-In
In the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current), certain protection functions require more
time for detection of a system incident. For this purpose, monitoring can be delayed using the parameter
Asym.fail. - time delay.
If a system incident is detected during the time delay, the supervision drops off. This is because the function
assumes that the unbalance - and consequently the pickup of the supervision - is due to the system incident.
After the time delay has elapsed, it definitely assumes a measuring-voltage failure. Monitoring seals in and
the Asym.fail.-alarm indication is output. The dropout does not happen until the voltage unbalance has
disappeared after a seal-in time of 10 s. In the presence of 3-pole close-in faults outside the protection zone,
this seal-in time prevents the monitoring from dropping off too quickly and thus releasing the protection
functions.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The sealing-in function can be deactivated using the Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt. parameter. As soon
as a system incident is detected, the monitoring drops off instantaneously.
9.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Logic
[lo_symmet, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-7 Logic Diagram 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Balanced Fault – VA, VB, VC <

A 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultaneously:
• All 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop below the threshold value 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <
• A jump of the voltage (signal Jump V)

If these criteria are fulfilled and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the 3ph.failure-alarm
indication is output. When the voltage returns (even as 1-phase), the monitoring drops out.
Release by Phase Current

When all phase currents exceed the threshold value 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release the monitoring is
released.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Blocking in the Case of a System Incident

In the case of a 3-phase system incident, supervision must be blocked. The device detects a 3-phase system
incident with a jump in the current. This change is detected via the internal signal Jump I or when the
change in current of a phase current exceeds the threshold value 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump. The
change in current of phase currents is formed from the difference between the present current phasor and the
current phasor of the previous period. This allows to take into account a jump of the current phase.
NOTE
i If a voltage-transformer circuit breaker is installed in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformers, its
position is communicated to the device via a binary input (see chapter 9.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
9.3.2.5 Switching onto a 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure, Low Load
Logic
[lo_zuscha, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-8 Logic Diagram Switching to 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Switching onto a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultane-
ously:
• All 3 phase-to-ground voltages have dropped below the threshold value 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <.
• The circuit breaker is detected to be in closed position. The detection takes place either via the phase
currents or via the ≥1-pole closed signal, which is generated via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
For more detailed information, refer to 5.9.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object.
A voltage jump – such as in a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure with closed circuit breaker (refer to 9.3.2.4 3-
Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure) – does not occur in the case of switching to a 3-phase measuring-voltage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
failure. If the monitoring is not blocked, the time delay SO 3ph.fail. - time delay is started. After the
time has elapsed, the indication SO 3ph.failure-alarm is displayed. A dropout of the monitoring is only
possible by a recovery of the voltage.
The supervision is blocked as soon as a pickup of a protection function is detected within a protection function
group and the time delay of the supervision has not yet elapsed.
This subfunction also covers the situation of a low load with 3-phase measuring-voltage failure and closed
circuit breaker, because the circuit-breaker position is also determined from the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts. The subfunction for detecting a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure (refer to 9.3.2.4 3-Phase Meas-
uring-Voltage Failure) is not released in this situation, for example, because the current flow is too low.
This subfunction can be switched on or off separately using the Switch-on 3ph. failure parameter.
Parameter: Asym.fail. - time delay
• Recommended setting value (_:113) Asym.fail. - time delay = 10.00 s

The Asym.fail. - time delay parameter allows you to set the time during which a system incident
detected after the occurrence of the unbalance resets the monitoring. This setting is important in the case of
weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current) in order to give certain protection functions (such as distance
protection) more time for detecting system incidents. As long as the time delay runs, it is assumed that the
unbalance is due to a system incident.
As soon as the time has elapsed, the supervision assumes a measuring-voltage failure and seals in.
If you want the seal-in function to operate sooner or at once, you can reduce the time.
Parameter: Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt.
• Recommended setting value (_:115) Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt. = No

no After elapse of the time delay the supervision function seals in. Even if the
system incident criterion is fulfilled, the protection functions concerned will
remain blocked.
This avoids an unselective tripping of the protection functions due to an
absence of the measuring voltage in the case of an unbalanced system
incident.
This is the default setting.
yes The seal-in function is switched off. The supervision drops out immediately
when a system incident is detected. With this setting, the unbalanced meas-
uring-voltage failure is only reported, and in the event of a double failure
(measuring-voltage failure and system incident in parallel), unselective trip-
ping is preferred.
Parameter: 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <
• Recommended setting value (_:101) 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < = 5 V

The 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < parameter allows you to set the pickup value of the monitoring.
If you expect major disturbances acting upon the voltage inputs, you can increase this value. Increasing the
values makes the supervision more sensitive to 3-phase system incidents.
Parameter: 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release
• Recommended setting value (_:102) 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or

0.5 A for Irated = 5 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release parameter is used to define the phase current threshold above
which the monitoring is released.
Parameter: 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump
• Recommended setting value (_:103) 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or
0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump parameter is used to set the differential current between the present
current phasor and the stored phasor (from the previous period). If the value is exceeded, the function detects
a system incident and blocks the monitoring.
Parameter: SO 3ph.fail. - time delay
• Recommended setting value (_:106) SO 3ph.fail. - time delay = 3.00 s

The SO 3ph.fail. - time delay parameter allows you to set the delay of the monitoring.
NOTE
i Adapt the SO 3ph.fail. - time delay parameter to the inherent time of protection functions which
are intended to block the monitoring function.
Note that with parameter values 0 s blocking of the monitoring function via a protection stimulation will
not be possible any more.
Parameter: Switch-on 3ph. failure
• Recommended setting value (_:107) Switch-on 3ph. failure = on

on The subfunction Switching to a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is
active.
In the case of low loads, the subfunction for detection of a 3-phase meas-
uring-voltage failure is not released, for example, because the current flow
is too low. In this situation, the subfunction Switching to a 3-phase meas-
uring-voltage failure can perform the monitoring task.
Siemens recommends switching that subfunction on.
off With the setting off the subfunction Switching to a 3-phase measuring-
voltage failure is not active.
9.3.2.7 Settings

Mes.v.fail.det
_:1 Mes.v.fail.det:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:115 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.- • no yes
DO on netw.flt.
• yes
_:113 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail. 0.00 s to 30.00 s 10.00 s
- time delay

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:102 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
phs.curr.release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:103 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
phs.curr. jump 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:101 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 0.300 V to 340.000 V 5.000 V
VA,VB,VC <
_:107 Mes.v.fail.det:Switch-on • off on
3ph. failure
• on
_:106 Mes.v.fail.det:SO 0.01 s to 30.00 s 3.00 s
3ph.fail. - time delay
_:114 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.- 10.00 s to 10.00 s 10.00 s
dropout delay

(Type)
Mes.v.fail.det
_:82 Mes.v.fail.det:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Mes.v.fail.det:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Mes.v.fail.det:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Mes.v.fail.det:Health ENS O
_:300 Mes.v.fail.det:Alarm SPS O
_:304 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.-inst.alarm SPS O
_:303 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.-alarm SPS O
_:301 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.failure-alarm SPS O
_:302 Mes.v.fail.det:SO 3ph.failure-alarm SPS O
9.3.3 Signaling-Voltage Supervision

Signaling-voltage supervision is used to evaluate the validity of binary signals connected to the SIPROTEC
device via binary inputs. For this purpose, one binary input is used to monitor the signaling voltage. If the
signaling voltage fails, the associated binary signals are marked as invalid and a Signaling-voltage malfunc-
tion indication is issued.
Several signaling-voltage supervision groups can be created in one SIPROTEC device. Each of these groups
monitors an adjustable area with binary inputs.

The Signaling-voltage supervision function group contains, besides the general functionality, one preinstan-
tiated Supervision group stage. The Supervision group stage can be instantiated in DIGSI 5 multiple times.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_ivsstr, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-9 Structure/Embedding of the Function Group

You can instantiate the Signaling-voltage supervision function group in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
It contains 1 pre-instantiated Superv.Grp. function block (see the following figure). You can instantiate a
maximum of 25 supervision groups.
[sc_ivslib, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-10 Entry in the Global Library
Following the instantiation of the function group in the DIGSI project tree, it appears in the information
routing of DIGSI (see the following figure). The status indications of the supervision groups can be routed
here, for example, to existing binary outputs and/or logs.
[sc_ivsrou, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-11 Information Routing
Set the binary input used for signaling-voltage supervision within one input/output module using the setting
option (see the following figure). This binary input monitors the presence of the signaling voltage. If the
signaling voltage fails, this sets the quality attribute for all other binary inputs of the parameterized input/
output module to invalid. The signal status of each of these binary inputs is frozen with its last valid value
prior to the occurrence of the fault. The quality attribute of the binary inputs for other input/output modules
are not taken into consideration by this.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If the signaling voltage again exceeds the binary threshold, the quality attribute of the binary inputs is reset to
valid.
[sc_ivsgrp, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-12 Parameterization Menu of the Supervision Group (I)
NOTE
i Each status change of the monitored binary inputs is delayed by 3 ms.
You can also combine binary inputs across modules in one Superv.Grp. function block and define any
binary input within this group for supervision of the signaling voltage. For this purpose, place a check mark at
the parameter (_:102) Enable variable group when configuring the supervision group. This extends
the parameterization menu by the sections Supervis. grp. start and Supervis. grp. end (see the
following figure).
[sc_gruppe_de, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-13 Parameterization Menu of the Supervision Group (II)
There, for example, you are able to combine 1 to n different binary inputs into one supervision group. When
doing so, the binary inputs on the input/output modules assignable to a supervision group must be related
logically. With 3 input/output modules, for example, this allows only consecutive binary inputs to be grouped
on the modules 1 and 2 or 2 and 3, but no binary inputs on modules 1 and 3. The binary inputs used for
supervision can be located on any input/output module within the group defined in this manner.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If you have to monitor several binary inputs that, for example, work with different signaling voltages from
different sources, then you can also instantiate and configure several Superv.Grp. function blocks within
the Signaling-voltage supervision function group accordingly.
Within different supervision groups, only those consecutive binary inputs that are not already assigned to
another supervision group can be grouped. The overlapping of binary inputs in different supervision groups is
not permitted.
Error parameters are displayed to you by inconsistency indications in DIGSI.
Example
There are 4 input/output modules available.
Binary inputs of input/output modules 1 and 2 are already combined in supervision group 1. The 2 last binary
inputs on module 2 are not included in the grouping.
In supervision group 2, only these 2 binary inputs of the input/output module 2 not used in supervision group
1 as well as further consecutive binary inputs of the input/output modules 3 and 4 can be combined.
Parameter (General): Mode

With the Mode parameter, you specify whether you want to activate, deactivate, or test the supervision of
the signaling voltage for the appropriate group. If you put the group into test mode, the Sig. volt.
disturbed indication is given a test flag.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): I/O module ID
• Default setting (_:104) I/O module ID = I/O module 1

Using the I/O module ID parameter, you specify the I/O module for which you want to activate supervision
of the signaling voltage. Counting of the I/O modules starts in increasing order with the binary inputs of the
base module. The binary inputs of the PS201 power-supply module permanently installed in the base module
count as the 2nd I/O module followed by additional I/O modules (3 to n) on expansion boards of the device.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): Binary input
• Default setting (_:105) Binary input = 1

Using the Binary input parameter, you specify the binary input responsible for teh supervision of the
signaling voltage for the parameterized I/O module. The quality attribute of all other binary inputs for this
module are set to valid or invalid depending on the presence of the signaling voltage at the parameterized
binary input.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): Enable variable group
• Default setting (_:102) Enable variable group = untrue

You can activate the parameter Enable variable group by placing the checkmark. If you have not set
the check mark (default setting), only these 2 parameters are available for the configuration of the supervision
signal. If you have set the check mark, the parameter menu is extended by the areas Start supervision group
and End supervision group. You can then use that to carry out the grouping of binary inputs for supervision
groups explained in the function description.
Parameter (Start Supervision Group): I/O module ID

Parameter I/O module ID is used to define the first I/O module that you want to assign to a supervision
group. As the counting of the I/O module starts in ascending order with the binary inputs of the base module,
this is the module with the lowest counter number that you can use for carrying out a grouping.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter (Start Supervision Group): Binary input

Parameter Binary input is used to define the lowest binary input for the first I/O module (see (_:106)
I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.
Parameter (End Supervision Group): I/O module ID

Parameter I/O module ID is used to define the last I/O module that you want to assign to a supervision
group. As the counting of the I/O module starts in ascending order with the binary inputs of the base module,
this is the module with the highest counter number that you can use for carrying out a grouping.
Parameter (End Supervision Group): Binary input

Parameter Binary input is used to define the highest binary input for the last I/O module (see (_:108)
I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.
9.3.3.5 Settings

General
_:1 Superv.Grp.#:Mode • off on
• on
• test
Superv. signal
_:104 Superv.Grp.#:I/O module • I/O module 1 I/O module 1
ID
• I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
_:105 Superv.Grp.#:Binary 1 to 256 1
input
_:102 Superv.Grp.#:Enable • 0 false
variable group
• 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Supervis. grp. start
ID
• I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
input
Supervis. grp. end
ID
• I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
input

(Type)
Superv.Grp.1
_:15031:52 Superv.Grp.1:Behavior ENS O
_:15031:54 Superv.Grp.1:Health ENS O
_:15031:55 Superv.Grp.1:Sig. volt. disturbed SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
9.3.4 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker

The function Voltage-transformer circuit breaker detects the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker due to short circuits in the voltage-transformer secondary circuits.
The Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function works independently of Measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion and should be used – if possible – in parallel to it.
The tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker impacts the quality of the recorded measured-value
data (refer to 3.4 Processing Quality Attributes).
The following protection function is automatically blocked if the voltage-transformer circuit breaker trips:
• Directional negative-sequence protection

For the following functions the reaction (block/not block) can be set within the function in cases of a tripping
of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker:
• Directional overcurrent protection, ground
• Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
• Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage
• Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage
• Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage
NOTE
i If the voltage signal is generated using the optional Merging unit function, the quality of the voltage
signal is sent as invalid in the sampled value stream, depending on the status of the voltage-transformer
circuit breaker. For more information about configuring the voltage-transformer circuit breaker function for
devices with merging unit and process-bus client, refer to the Process Bus manual.

The Figure 9-14 shows the position of the function in the device. Every voltage measuring point contains the
Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function.
[dw_mcbstr, 1, en_US]

The tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker is captured via the binary input signal >Open. With an
active input signal the information about the measuring-voltage failure is relayed to the affected functions
(see 9.3.4.1 Overview of Functions). The response to the detection of a measuring-voltage failure is explained
in the specific protection-function descriptions.
Response Time of the Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker

The response time of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker can be slower than the pickup time of the
distance protection. This bears the risk of an overfunction. The response time is communicated to the device

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
with the Response time parameter. For a timely detection of the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker, the pickup of the distance protection is delayed by that response time.

The function is always active and need not be switched on.
Input Signal: >Open
• Input signal: (_:500) >Open

The input signal >Open must be connected to the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. As a rule,
this occurs via the routing to a binary input.
Parameter: Response time of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Response time = 0 ms

When the voltage-transformer circuit breaker drops out, the device must block the distance protection imme-
diately to prevent an unwanted tripping of the distance protection due to the absence of the measuring
voltage while the load current is flowing.
The blocking must be faster than the 1st stage of the distance protection. This requires an extremely short
response time of the miniature circuit breaker (≤ 4 ms at 50 Hz, ≤ 3 ms at 60 Hz rated frequency). If the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact does not fulfill this requirement, you have to set the response time accordingly.
9.3.4.5 Settings

VT miniatureCB
_:101 VT miniatureCB:Response 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
time

(Type)
Definite-T #
_:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I
9.3.5 Voltage-Balance Supervision

In healthy system operation, a certain balance between voltages can be assumed.
The Voltage-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
• Unbalance of phase-to-phase voltages in the secondary circuit
• Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Voltage-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase voltage
measuring point.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_strusy, 2, en_US]

The voltage balance is checked by a magnitude supervision function. This function relates the smallest
phase-to-phase voltage to the largest phase-to-phase voltage. Unbalance is detected if
|Vmin| / |Vmax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Vmax > Release threshold
[lo_kenuns, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-16 Characteristic of the Voltage-Balance Supervision

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_sp_asym, 5, en_US]
Figure 9-17 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Balance Supervision
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which a phase-to-phase voltage unbalance is meas-
ured. The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum (Vmax) phase-to-phase
voltage.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage (Vmax) with the parameter Release
threshold. This specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.
Delay failure indication

If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase-to-phase
voltage exceeds the Release threshold, the delay of the failure indication (parameter: Delay failure
indication) starts. If both conditions persist during this time, the indication Failure is generated.

The following blockings reset the picked up function completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block function
• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the Failure indication.
Parameter: Threshold min/max
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.75

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum
(Vmax) phase-to-phase voltage. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Release threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 50 V

With the Release threshold parameter you set the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage
(Vmax). Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Delay failure indication
• Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s

Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as
switching operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
9.3.5.5 Settings

Supv. balan. V
_:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:102 Supv. balan. V:Threshold 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. balan. V
_:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O
9.3.6 Voltage-Sum Supervision

In healthy system operation, the sum of all voltages at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Voltage-sum supervision monitors the sum of all voltages of one measuring point in the secondary circuit.
It detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit.
For summation of the voltages, the 3 phase-to-ground voltages and the residual voltage (da-dn - voltage of an
open-circuited delta winding) are required.
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i For the Voltage-sum supervision, the externally generated residual voltage must be connected to the 4th
voltage measuring input.
For the Voltage-sum supervision to work correctly, the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter must be
set accordingly.

The Voltage-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data function group of each 3-phase
voltage measuring point.
[dw_strvss, 2, en_US]

The voltage sum is generated by addition of the voltage phasors. Errors in the voltage circuits are detected if
VF = |VA + VB + VC - Vph/VN • VN| > Threshold, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN
parameter.
[lo_kenvss-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-19 Characteristic of the Voltage-Sum Supervision

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_volt-sum-supervision, 5, en_US]
Figure 9-20 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Sum Supervision
The device measures the phase-to-ground voltage and the ground voltage of the lines to be protected. The
sum of the 4 voltages must be 0.
Threshold
If the calculated fault voltage (VF) exceeds the Threshold the parameter Delay failure indication
triggers the indication Failure.
The device calculates the fault voltage (VF) with the formula:
VF = |VA + VB + VC - Vph/UN • UN|, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter.
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter takes into account the differing transformation ratios between
the residual voltage input and the phase-voltage inputs.
You can find more information in this respect in chapter 9.3.6.1 Overview of Functions ).

When the threshold value for the delay of the failure indication (parameter: Delay failure indication)
is exceeded, the indication Failure is generated.


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Recommended setting value (_:3) Threshold = 25 V

The Threshold parameter is used to set the voltage which the device uses to recognize the calculated fault
voltage (VF) as a failure of the voltage sums. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

9.3.6.5 Settings

Supv. sum V
_:1 Supv. sum V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 43.300 V
_:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. sum V
_:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O
9.3.7 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision

The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
voltages by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the voltages. This enables
the device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the
setting of the Phase sequence parameter.

The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase
voltage measuring point.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_strvrs, 3, en_US]
Logic
[lo_volt-phs-rotation-supervision, 5, en_US]
Figure 9-22 Logic Diagram of the Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. You can set the phase sequence with the Phase sequence parameter in the function block General of
the power-system data (see chapter 6.1 Power-System Data).
To supervise the phase rotation, the device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase
sequence. For abnormal phase sequences, the indication Failure is generated.
The connection of the voltages to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence. The connec-
tion diagrams are shown in chapter A Appendix.
Release Condition
The supervision of the voltage phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase-to-phase voltages are
greater than 40 V.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Blocking of the Function

The following blockings reset the function completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block function from an external or internal source
• Via a protection pickup

The pickup signal from a protection function blocks the indication Failure.

When the device detects an inverted phase-rotation direction for the duration of the Delay failure
indication, the indication Failure is generated.

9.3.7.5 Settings

Supv. ph.seq.V
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O
9.3.8 Voltage-Comparison Supervision

The Voltage-comparison supervision function (ANSI 60):
• Monitors the voltage-transformer circuits by comparing the voltages from 2 voltage transformers
If failures in the voltage circuits are detected, voltage-related protection functions can be blocked.
• Requires the connection of 2 voltage measuring points to the voltage interface of the function group
You can take one of the voltages as the reference voltage and then the other becomes the main voltage.
The reference voltage is used for comparison.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i The voltage selection for the protection function in the FGs works independent of the status of the
Voltage-comparison supervision function.

The Voltage-comparison supervision function can be used in the following function groups:
• Generator stator
• Generator side
• Voltage-current 3-phase (VI 3ph)
• Transformer side
• Auto transformer autoside (Auto trf. autoside)

The Voltage-comparison supervision function supports only 1 stage. The stage is preconfigured at the
factory.
[dw_structure_VBP, 1, en_US]
9.3.8.3 Description
Function Application
The following figure shows an application example.
[dw_VBP application, 1, en_US]
Connecting Measuring Points to a Function Group

The following figure shows the connection of the function group Generator stator with several measuring
points in DIGSI. The ID of each measuring point appears in the brackets after the name.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_VBStoFG, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-25 Connecting the Measuring Points to the Generator Stator Function Group
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the
function group.
same interface.
• 2 voltage measuring points must be connected to one voltage interface.
• Either the Voltage-comparison supervision function or the Voltage measuring-point selection func-
tion must be instantiated. They must not be instantiated at the same time.
About the Voltage measuring-point selection function, you can find more information in chapter
Voltage Selection
2 voltage measuring points are connected to a voltage interface of a function group. In the Voltage-compar-
ison supervision function, you can set one of the voltages as the reference voltage via the parameter
Reference voltage, and the other voltage becomes the main voltage.
• The reference voltage is used for voltage comparison.
• The main voltage is used for all voltage-related functions in the FGs that contain the Voltage-compar-
ison supervision function.
If the main voltage transformer is disconnected, the Voltage-comparison supervision function issues
the blocking signal Meas.-volt failure. The signal is transmitted to all voltage-related protection
functions which are used in the same FGs as the Voltage-comparison supervision.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic of the Stage
[lo_stage VBP, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-26 Logic Diagram of the Supervision Stage
The voltage inputs in the preceding figure are calculated with the following equations:
ΔV1 = |v(n)ref.| - |v(n)main|
ΔV2 = |v(n)main| - |v(n)ref.|
ΔV3 = |Vref. - Vmain|
ΔV4 = Max. (V1ref., V1main)
The following table shows the description of the voltages.
Table 9-1 Voltage Description
Voltages Description
v(n)ref. Sampled value of the reference voltage
v(n)main Sampled value of the main voltage
Vref. Fundamental value of the reference voltage
Vmain Fundamental value of the main voltage

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Voltages Description
V1ref. Positive-sequence value of the reference voltage
V1main Positive-sequence value of the main voltage
Pickup
If the voltage difference between each 2 of 3 continuous sampling points is over 8 % Vrated of the plant, the
supervision stage picks up.
Voltage Supervision
For the Voltage-comparison supervision function, the following 2 connection types are allowed:
• Phase-to-ground
The phase-to-ground voltages are used for the voltage-difference comparison.
• Phase-to-phase
The phase-to-phase voltages are used for the voltage-difference comparison.
NOTE
i The 2 ph-to-ph volt. + VN and 2 ph-to-ph voltages connection types are not allowed.
Voltage-Failure Indication
For different connection types, the indications are different.
• Phase-to-ground
You can get the voltage-failure information from the output signals Main-voltage failure and
Ref.-voltage failure.
• Phase-to-phase
– If one phase is influenced, the phase information is indicated.
– If more than one phase is influenced, the phase-to-phase information is indicated.
Take the main voltage transformer for example. You can determine the faulty phase with the
following table.
Determination Criteria Calculated Result

(|vAB(n)ref.| - |vAB(n)main|) - 8 % Vrated >0 >0 <0
(|vBC(n)ref.| - |vBC(n)main|) - 8 % Vrated <0 >0 >0
(|vAC(n)ref.| - |vAC(n)main|) - 8 % Vrated >0 <0 >0
Failure Information Phase A is failed. Phase B is failed. Phase C is failed.
Release Voltage
If the main positive-sequence voltage or the reference positive-sequence voltage is between 50 % Vrated and
130 % Vrated, the function is released.
Selection Invalid
An invalid measuring-point selection results in the following:
• The voltage measured values are displayed as Failure.
• The validity of the voltage measured values is set to Invalid.
• The indication Health is set to Alarm.
• The indication Selection invalid becomes true.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

In the event of blocking, the picked up function is reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the
Parameter: Reference voltage
• Default setting Reference voltage = None

With the parameter Reference voltage, you can set a measured voltage as the reference voltage.
NOTE
i You must assign a voltage measuring point to the parameter Reference voltage. The assignment influ-
ences the voltage-related protection functions which are used in the same FGs as the Voltage-comparison
supervision function. These voltage-related protection functions use the unassigned voltage measuring
point, which is defined as the main voltage in the Voltage-comparison supervision function. You can find
more information in section Voltage Selection, Page 1651.
EXAMPLE
Meas.point V-3ph 1 and Meas.point V-3ph 2 are connected to the Voltage-comparison supervision func-
tion. Then you have 2 more setting options, as shown in the following figure. You must select one of these
setting options for the parameter Reference voltage.
[sc_VBS_ref_voltage, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:2311:1) Mode = off

With the parameter Mode, you can activate and deactivate the Voltage-comparison supervision function. If
you switch to test mode, the Voltage-comparison supervision function is marked as invalid.
9.3.8.5 Settings

VolCmpSup 1
_:2311:1 General:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2311:101 General:Reference Setting options depend on None
voltage configuration

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
VolCmpSup 1
_:2311:81 General:>Block stage SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>MP-ID selection INS I
_:2311:307 General:Main-voltage failure ACD O
_:2311:308 General:Ref.-voltage failure ACD O
_:2311:309 General:Selection invalid SPS O
9.3.9 Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Supervision

The function Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision:
• Measures the auxiliary direct-voltage of a substation battery system
• Provides sampled values for fault recording
• Monitors the battery direct-voltage by checking whether the measured voltage is greater or smaller than
the specified threshold
The direct-voltage input is located on the plug-in module type ANAI-CE-2EL (1 input per module).
Once you have configured the plug-in module ANAI-CE-2EL, the function Auxiliary direct-voltage supervi-
sion is visible under the function group Analog units. You can find the function group Analog units in the
Settings folder of the device in the DIGSI 5 project tree.

The function Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision can work only in the function group Analog units.
The function comes factory-set with 1 fixed function block Auxiliary direct-voltage measurement, 1 stage
Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - overvoltage, and 1 stage Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision -
undervoltage.
• 3 stages Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - overvoltage
• 3 stages Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - undervoltage

Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure. The stages are identical in
structure.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_DC supervision_Structure, 1, en_US]
9.3.9.3 Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Measurement
Logic
[lo_DC voltage measurement, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-28 Logic Diagram of the Function Block Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Measurement
Calculation of Average Direct-Voltage Values

The FB Auxiliary direct-voltage measurement receives the sampled direct-voltage values from the interface
of the plug-in module ANAI-CE-2EL and calculates an average value by a settable time interval (via the
parameter Measuring window).
The calculation formula is:
[fo_DC_volt_supervision, 1, en_US]
Where
Vavg Average direct-voltage value
Vn Sampled direct-voltage value in a measuring window
m Number of sampled values in a measuring window
Value Description
Average value Average value calculated from the sampled direct-voltage values

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
The logic of the stage Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - overvoltage is the same as that of the stage
Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - undervoltage. The following figure shows the logic of the stage
Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - overrvoltage as an example.
[lo_DC supervision, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-29 Logic Diagram of the Stage Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Supervision - Overvoltage
(1) For the stage Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - undervoltage, the symbol is:
Measurand
The stage obtains the average direct-voltage value from the FB Auxiliary direct-voltage measurement.

The stage compares the average direct-voltage value with the Threshold:
• Overvoltage stage
If the average direct-voltage value exceeds the Threshold, the pickup delay (specified by the parameter
Pickup delay) starts. If the value keeps exceeding the Threshold during the pickup delay, the pickup
signal is issued.
• Undervoltage stage
If the average direct-voltage value falls below the Threshold, the pickup delay (specified by the param-
eter Pickup delay) starts. If the value stays below the Threshold during the pickup delay, the pickup
signal is issued.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the parameter Dropout ratio, you can define the ratio of the dropout threshold to the Threshold.
NOTE

Recording of Sampled Direct-Voltage Values

The recording of sampled direct-voltage values cannot be started via the pickup of stages. If you want to
record the sampled direct-voltage values, you could use other starting methods. For more information about
the methods, refer to 3.5 Fault Recording.
• Default setting (_:24781:142) Measuring window = 20 ms

With the parameter Measuring window, you set the measuring window that is used to determine the
average value from the sampled values. If this parameter is set to 20 ms, the average value is calculated from
the sampled values in the measuring window of 20 ms.
Extending the measuring window can improve the measurement accuracy but will increase the pickup time. If
there are no specific requirements, Siemens recommends using the default setting of 20 ms.
• Default setting (_:24691:3) Threshold = 264.0 V (for the Overvoltage stage)
• Default setting (_:24721:3) Threshold = 176.0 V (for the Undervoltage stage)

• Default setting (_:24691:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95 (for the Overvoltage stage)
• Default setting (_:24721:4) Dropout ratio = 1.05 (for the Undervoltage stage)
For the Overvoltage stage, the recommended setting value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To
achieve high-precision measurements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, for example, to 0.98.
For the Undervoltage stage, the recommended setting value of 1.05 is appropriate for most applications. To
achieve high-precision measurements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, for example, to 1.02.

With the parameter Pickup delay, you define a time interval during which a pickup is not generated if
the voltage exceeds the threshold (for the Overvoltage stage) or falls below the threshold (for the Under-
voltage stage).
With the pickup delay, you can achieve that a short auxiliary-voltage disturbance will not be reported. If you
want to detect all disturbances, use the default value of 0.00 s.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The parameter Operate delay determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to
NOTE
9.3.9.6 Settings

V-DC measurem.
_:24781:142 V-DC measurem.:Meas- • 10 ms 20 ms
uring window
• 20 ms
• 40 ms
• 60 ms
• 80 ms
• 100 ms
Aux.V sup. V>1
_:24691:1 Aux.V sup. V>1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:24691:3 Aux.V sup. 10.0 V to 295.0 V 264.0 V
V>1:Threshold
_:24691:4 Aux.V sup. V>1:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:24691:102 Aux.V sup. V>1:Pickup 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:24691:6 Aux.V sup. V>1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay
Aux.V sup. V<1
_:24721:1 Aux.V sup. V<1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:24721:3 Aux.V sup. 10.0 V to 295.0 V 176.0 V
V<1:Threshold
_:24721:4 Aux.V sup. V<1:Dropout 1.01 to 1.10 1.05
ratio
_:24721:102 Aux.V sup. V<1:Pickup 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:24721:6 Aux.V sup. V<1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay

(Type)
V-DC measurem.
_:24781:302 V-DC measurem.:Average value MV O
_:24781:306 V-DC measurem.:Sampled values SAV O
_:24781:300 V-DC measurem.:Behavior ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:24781:303 V-DC measurem.:Health ENS O
Aux.V sup. V>1
_:24691:81 Aux.V sup. V>1:>Block stage SPS I
_:24691:51 Aux.V sup. V>1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:24691:54 Aux.V sup. V>1:Inactive SPS O
_:24691:52 Aux.V sup. V>1:Behavior ENS O
_:24691:53 Aux.V sup. V>1:Health ENS O
_:24691:55 Aux.V sup. V>1:Pickup ACD O
_:24691:57 Aux.V sup. V>1:Operate ACT O
Aux.V sup. V<1
_:24721:81 Aux.V sup. V<1:>Block stage SPS I
_:24721:51 Aux.V sup. V<1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:24721:54 Aux.V sup. V<1:Inactive SPS O
_:24721:52 Aux.V sup. V<1:Behavior ENS O
_:24721:53 Aux.V sup. V<1:Health ENS O
_:24721:55 Aux.V sup. V<1:Pickup ACD O
_:24721:57 Aux.V sup. V<1:Operate ACT O
9.3.10 Broken-Wire Detection

The Broken-wire detection detects interruptions in the secondary circuit of the current transformers during
steady-state operation.
An interruption in the secondary circuit of the current transformer cannot always be distinguished from a
broken conductor in the primary circuit.
The Broken-wire detection is unavailable for the connection type 2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep and the
connection type 2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep.

The Broken-wire detection function is located in the power-system data of each 3-phase current measuring
point.
[dw_bwsjsk, 3, en_US]
The tasks of Broken-wire detection are:
• The instantaneous values of all current measuring points are checked on a phase-selective basis for
implausible values.
• The affected phases are marked with wire-break suspected.
• Depending on the supervision mode, you can add a marker for blocking protection functions for the
affected phases.
• After 15 ms of broken-wire check, an assured wire break is signaled.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Broken-Wire Detection
The function Broken-wire detection searches for current interruptions at all current measuring points. For
this purpose, the instantaneous values of the currents are checked for their plausibility. In addition, further
criteria must be met before a wire break can be detected and signaled with assurance.
Detection:
A wire break initially manifests itself as a sudden decrease of the current below the minimum threshold
of 0.06 I/Irated. A plausibility test with the instantaneous values from the previous cycle confirms that the
current has fallen below the minimum threshold. If the criteria for a wire break are satisfied, the affected
phase is marked with Broken wire suspected. The following messages are generated: (_:301) Phs A BW
suspected, (_:302) Phs B BW suspected, and/or (_:303) Phs C BW suspected, and (_:307)
Broken wire suspected.
Resetting:
A broken-wire suspicion is reset by phase current flowing again, by a binary input signal, or by a controllable.
The function Broken-wire detection cannot block the function Differential protection for capacitor banks.
Parameter: Mode
• Recommended setting value (_:1) Mode = off

The parameter Mode is used to switch the Broken-wire detection to on or off or to activate the state test.
9.3.10.5 Settings

Brk.wire det.
_:1 Brk.wire det.:Mode • off off
• on
• test

(Type)
Brk.wire det.
_:82 Brk.wire det.:>Block function SPS I
_:83 Brk.wire det.:>Reset broken wire SPS I
_:55 Brk.wire det.:Reset broken wire SPC C
_:54 Brk.wire det.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Brk.wire det.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Brk.wire det.:Health ENS O
_:301 Brk.wire det.:Phs A BW suspected SPS O
_:302 Brk.wire det.:Phs B BW suspected SPS O
_:303 Brk.wire det.:Phs C BW suspected SPS O
_:304 Brk.wire det.:Phase A broken wire SPS O
_:305 Brk.wire det.:Phase B broken wire SPS O
_:306 Brk.wire det.:Phase C broken wire SPS O
_:307 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire suspected SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:308 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire confirmed SPS O
_:51 Brk.wire det.:Mode (controllable) ENC C
9.3.11 Current-Balance Supervision

In healthy network operation, a certain balance between currents can be assumed.
The Current-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
• Unbalance of phase currents in the secondary circuit
• Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Current-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current
measuring point.
[dw_str_sym, 3, en_US]

The current balance is checked by a magnitude monitoring function. This function relates the smallest phase
current to the largest phase current. Unbalance is detected if
|Imin| / |Imax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Imax > Release threshold.
[lo_symmke, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-32 Characteristic of the Current-Balance Supervision

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_cb_symm, 4, en_US]
Figure 9-33 Logic Diagram of the Current-Balance Supervision
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which unbalance in the phase currents is measured.
The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax) phase current.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax) with the parameter Release threshold. This
specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.

If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max at the same time as the maximum phase current
exceeds the Release threshold, the operate delay of the failure indication (parameter Delay failure
indication) starts. If both conditions persist during this time, the indication Failure is generated.

The following blockings completely reset the picked up function:
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the indication Failure.
Parameter: Threshold min/max
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.5

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum
(Imax) phase current.
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 0.5 A for Irated = 1 A or 2.5 A for Irated
=5A
The Release threshold parameter is used to set the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax).

switching operations) are avoided.
9.3.11.5 Settings

Supv. balan. I
_:1 Supv. balan. I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv. balan. I:Release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:102 Supv. balan. I:Threshold 0.10 to 0.95 0.50
min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. balan. I
_:82 Supv. balan. I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. balan. I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. I:Failure SPS O
9.3.12 Current-Sum Supervision

In healthy system operation, the sum of all currents at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Current-sum supervision function monitors the sum of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary
circuit. It detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary
circuit.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
For summation of the currents, the device requires the phase currents and the ground current of the current
transformer neutral point or of a separate ground-current transformer at this measuring point. Select the
following connection variant:
• Current-transformer connections connected to 3 current transformers and the neutral point (see
Figure A-13 in the Attachment)
NOTE
i For current-sum supervision, the ground current of the line to be protected must be connected to the 4th
current measurement input (IN).

The Current-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current meas-
urement point.
[dw_str_css, 3, en_US]

The current sum is generated by addition of the current phasors. Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |IA + IB + IC + kl• IN| > Threshold + Slope factor •Σ | I |.
[lo_kensum, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-35 Characteristic of the Current-Sum Supervision

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_cs_summ, 4, en_US]
Figure 9-36 Logic Diagram of the Current-Sum Supervision
Slope of the Characteristic Curve

The Slope factor • Σ | I | part takes into account permissible current-proportional transformation errors of
the transformer, which can occur in the case of high short-circuit currents.
The Slope factor and Threshold parameters are used to set the fault-current limit (IFmax) for the current-
sum supervision. The device calculates this fault current limit with the formula:
IFmax = Threshold + Slope factor • Σ| I |
The device uses the current inputs (IA, IB, IC and IN) to calculate:
• The fault current IF = |IA + IB + IC + kl• IN|
• The maximum current Σ| I | = | IA| + |IB| +| IC| + |kl• IN|

with kI taking into account a possible difference from the transformation ratio of a separated ground-current
transformer (IN), for example, cable type current transformer.
• Transformation ratio of zero-sequence current converter: RatioN
• Transformation ratio of phase-current converter: Ratioph

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[fo_glchki, 1, en_US]
Threshold
The Threshold parameter is the lower limit of the operating range of the Current-sum supervision func-
tion.

When the calculated fault current (IF) exceeds the calculated fault current limit (IFmax), the delay of the failure
indication (parameter: Delay failure indication) starts. If the threshold-value violation persists for
that time, the Failure indication is generated.

Parameter: Slope factor
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Slope factor = 0.1

The Slope factor parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax)
phase current. This function calculates the RMS values.
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or 0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The Threshold parameter is used to set the maximum phase current (Imax).

switching operations) are avoided.
9.3.12.5 Settings

Supv. sum I
_:1 Supv. sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:102 Supv. sum I:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:101 Supv. sum I:Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 0.10
_:6 Supv. sum I:Delay failure 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
indication

(Type)
Supv. sum I
_:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum I:Failure SPS O
9.3.13 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision

The Current phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
currents by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the currents. This enables
the device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the
setting of the Phase sequence parameter.
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Current phase-rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase
current measurement point.
[dw_str_crs, 4, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_cr_symm, 6, en_US]
Figure 9-38 Logic Diagram of the Current Phase-Rotation Supervision
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. You can set the phase sequence with the Phase sequence parameter in the function block General of
the power-system data (see 6.1 Power-System Data).
To supervise the phase rotation, the device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase
sequence. For abnormal phase sequences, the indication Failure is generated.
The connection of the currents to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence. For connection
diagrams see A Appendix.
Release Condition
The supervision of the current phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase currents are greater than
the value of the Release threshold parameter.
Blocking of the Function

The following blockings reset the function completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block function from an external or internal source
• Via a protection pickup

The pickup signal from a protection function blocks the indication Failure.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

When the device detects an inverted phase sequence for the duration of the Delay failure indication,
the indication Failure is generated.
• Default setting (_:102) Release threshold = 0.500 A for Irated = 1 A or 2.50 A for Irated = 5 A
With the Release threshold parameter, you specify the lower limit of the phase current for phase-rotation
supervision.
• Default setting (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s

9.3.13.5 Settings

Supv. ph.seq.I
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
_:102 Supv. ph.seq.I:Release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A

(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.I:Failure SPS O
9.3.14 Trip-Circuit Supervision

The Trip-circuit supervision function recognizes disruptions in the trip circuit. When 2 binary inputs are used,
the function recognizes all disruptions in the trip circuit. If only 1 binary input is available, it will not recognize
disruptions at the circuit breaker.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The control voltage for the circuit breaker must be greater than the sum of the minimum voltage drops at the
binary inputs VCtrl > 2 VBImin. At least 19 V are required for each binary input. This makes the supervision usable
only with a system-side control voltage of > 38 V.

The trip-circuit supervision is integrated into the Circuit-breaker function group. Depending on the number of
available binary inputs, it works with 1 or 2 binary inputs.
[dw_tcsueb, 1, en_US]
9.3.14.3 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs

In order to recognize disruptions in the trip circuit for each switch position, you need 2 binary inputs. One
input is connected parallel to the respective command relay of the protection, the other parallel to the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact.
The following figure shows the principle of the trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs.
[dw_tcs_2be, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-40 Principle of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs
CR Command relay
CB Circuit breaker (open)
CB coil Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (make contact)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (break contact)
V-Ctrl Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI1 Input voltage for binary input 1

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Supervision with 2 binary inputs identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the outage of the control voltage.
It also monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker by way of the position of the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts.
Depending on the switch position of the command relay and circuit breaker, the binary inputs are either
activated (H) or not (L). If both binary inputs are not activated, there is a fault. The fault can be a disruption
or a short circuit in the trip circuit, an outage of the battery voltage or a fault in the mechanics of the circuit
breaker. With intact trip circuits, this state will occur only briefly while the command relay is closed and the
circuit breaker has not yet been opened.
No. Command CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI 1 BI 2 Dynamic State Static State
Relay
(CR)
1 Open ON Closed Open H L Normal operation with closed circuit
breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H H Normal operation with open circuit
breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L L Transmission or fault Fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L H CR successfully activated the circuit
breaker
With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip circuit, the
failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signals >Trip relay or >CB auxiliary contact are not routed on the binary inputs
of the device, then the Input sig. not routed indication is generated and the Trip-circuit supervision
function is ineffective.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs.
[lo_tcs_2be, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-41 Logic Diagram of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs
9.3.14.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input

When using 1 binary input, you will not identify any disruptions on the circuit breaker. The binary input is
connected in parallel with the respective command relay of the protection device. The circuit-breaker auxiliary
contact is bridged with a high-resistance equivalent resistance R.
The following figure shows the principle of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_tcs_1be, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-42 Principle of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input
CR Command relay
CB Circuit breaker (open)
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (make contact)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (break contact)
V-BI Input voltage for binary input
R Equivalent resistance
The supervision with 1 binary input identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the outage of the control
voltage.
In normal operation, the binary input is activated with the command relay open and the trip circuit intact (H).
The supervision circuit is closed with the equivalent resistance R or with the auxiliary contact AuxCon1 of the
closed circuit breaker. The binary input is not activated while the command relay is closed (L). If the binary
input is not activated for a prolonged time, there is a disruption in the trip circuit or the control voltage has
failed.
No. Command CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI Dynamic State Static State
Relay
1 Open ON Closed Open H Normal operation with closed
circuit breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H Normal operation with open
circuit breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L Transmission or Fault
fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L CR successfully activated the
circuit breaker
Use the parameter Blk.by trip/open cmd from to set the conditions under which the trip-circuit
supervision is blocked. The following conditions can cause a blocking of the trip-circuit supervision function:
• The Trip/open cmd. of the circuit breaker is activated.
• One of the trip commands of the circuit-breaker failure protection is activated.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
As long as the trip-circuit supervision function is blocked, the closed contact of the command relay does not
cause a failure indication.
If the command contacts of other devices work in parallel on the trip circuit, the failure indication must be
delayed. With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip
circuit, the failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signal >Trip relay is not routed to a binary input of the device (information routing
in DIGSI 5), then the Input sig. not routed indication is generated and the Trip-circuit supervision
function is not in effect.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.
[lo_tcs_1be, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-43 Logic Diagram of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input
Equivalent Resistance R
The equivalent resistance R must be dimensioned such that the circuit-breaker coil is no longer activated when
the circuit breaker is open. Simultaneously, the binary input must still be activated when the command relay is
open.
In order to ensure the minimum voltage for activating the binary input, Rmax results in:
[fo_r_max, 1, en_US]
So that the circuit-breaker coil does not remain activated, Rmin results in:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[fo_r_min, 1, en_US]
with:
VCtrlst Control voltage for the trip circuit
VBI min Minimum activate voltage for BI
RCBC Ohm's resistance of the CB coil
IBI(High) Constant current with activated BI
VCBC (Low max) Maximum voltage at the CB coil that does not lead to a tripping
You can calculate the optimal value for the equivalent resistance R from the 2 values Rmin and Rmax:
[fo_r, 1, en_US]
The following applies for the power consumption of the equivalent resistance R:
[fo_pr, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Alarm delay
• Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 2 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary
inputs)
• Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 300 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary
input)
With the parameter Alarm delay, you can set the time for the delayed output of the indication Trip-
circuit failure.
For Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs, you set the Alarm delay parameter so that the short-
term transient states do not cause the function to activate.
For the Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input, you set the Alarm delay so that the longest duration
of a trip command is bridged without fail. This ensures that the indication is emitted only if the trip circuit is
actually interrupted.
Parameter: Blk.by trip/open cmd from
• Possible settings, application-dependent

The parameter works only with the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.
Use the parameter Blk.by trip/open cmd from to set the conditions under which the trip-circuit
supervision is blocked. The following conditions can cause a blocking of the trip-circuit supervision function:
• The Trip/open cmd. of the circuit breaker is activated.
• One of the trip commands of the circuit-breaker failure protection is activated.
• One of the trip commands of the circuit-breaker reignition protection is activated.

The circuit-breaker failure protection is set to protect a different trip circuit than the local circuit breaker. Using
the configuration options of the Blk.by trip/open cmd from parameter, multiple trip-circuit supervision
functions can be operated in parallel. For instance, a trip-circuit supervision function dedicated to a local

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
circuit breaker can also be operated parallel to a higher-level circuit breaker upon which the circuit-breaker
failure protection acts.
9.3.14.6 Settings

74TC sup.1BI #
_:1 74TC sup.1BI #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:100 74TC sup.1BI #:Alarm 0.50 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s
delay
_:102 74TC sup.1BI #:Blk.by Setting options depend on
trip/open cmd from configuration
74TC sup.2BI #
_:1 74TC sup.2BI #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:100 74TC sup.2BI #:Alarm 0.50 s to 30.00 s 2.00 s
delay

(Type)
74TC sup.1BI #
_:82 74TC sup.1BI #:>Block function SPS I
_:500 74TC sup.1BI #:>Trip relay SPS I
_:54 74TC sup.1BI #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 74TC sup.1BI #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 74TC sup.1BI #:Health ENS O
_:71 74TC sup.1BI #:Trip-circuit failure SPS O
_:301 74TC sup.1BI #:Input sig. not routed SPS O
74TC sup.2BI #
_:82 74TC sup.2BI #:>Block function SPS I
_:500 74TC sup.2BI #:>Trip relay SPS I
_:503 74TC sup.2BI #:>CB auxiliary contact SPS I
_:54 74TC sup.2BI #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 74TC sup.2BI #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 74TC sup.2BI #:Health ENS O
_:71 74TC sup.2BI #:Trip-circuit failure SPS O
_:301 74TC sup.2BI #:Input sig. not routed SPS O
9.3.15 Closing-Circuit Supervision

The function Closing-circuit supervision detects disruptions in the closed circuit of the circuit breaker.
The control voltage for the closed circuit must be greater than the sum of the minimum voltage drops at the
binary inputs, that is, VCtrl > 2 ⋅ Vhigh or VCtrl > 3 ⋅ Vhigh depending on the number of available binary inputs .

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

The function Closing-circuit supervision is integrated into the function group Circuit breaker. Depending on
the available number of the binary inputs, the function works with 3 binary inputs, 2 binary inputs or 1 binary
input.
The following stages can be operated simultaneously in the function group Circuit breaker:
• Maximum of 3 stages Closing-circuit supervision with 3 binary inputs
• Maximum of 3 stages Closing-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs
• Maximum of 3 stages Closing-circuit supervision with 1 binary input
[dw_CCS_structure_3BI, 1, en_US]
9.3.15.3 Closing-Circuit Supervision with 3 Binary Inputs
Precondition
To use the function block Closing-circuit supervision with 3 binary inputs, set the control voltage larger
than 3 times the voltage of the binary input (VCtrl > 3 ⋅ Vhigh).
In the following descriptions, the minimum Vhigh of the binary input is 19 V.
Closing-Circuit Supervision with 3 Binary Inputs

In order to recognize disruptions in the closed circuit for each switch position, you need 3 binary inputs.
2 inputs are connected parallel to the respective command relays of the protection, another is connected
parallel to the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_closed-circuit supervision_3BIs, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-45 Principle of the Closing-Circuit Supervision with 3 Binary Inputs
CCR 1 Closed-command relay 1

CB Circuit breaker (closed)
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (closed if the CB is closed)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (open if the CB is closed)
The stage Closing-circuit supervision with 3 binary inputs identifies disruptions in the closed circuit and the
outage of the control voltage. It also monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker by way of the position of the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
Depending on the switch position of the closed-command relay and the circuit breaker, the binary inputs are
either activated (H) or deactivated (L). If both binary inputs are deactivated, a fault occurs. The fault can be a
disruption or a short circuit in the closed circuit, a failure of the voltage of the binary inputs or a fault in the
mechanics of the circuit breaker. With intact closed circuits, this state occurs only briefly while the command
relay is closed and the circuit breaker is not opened.
Closed CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 >Closed >Closed >CB auxiliary State
Command contact contact 2 contact
No Closed Closed Open H H H Normal operation
with closed circuit
breaker
No Open Open Closed H H L Normal operation
with open circuit
breaker
Yes Open Open Closed L L L Transient process
Yes Closed Closed Open L L H Transient process
No – – – L L – Fault

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Closed CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 >Closed >Closed >CB auxiliary State

Command contact contact 2 contact
No – – – H L – Fault
No – – – L H – Fault
Closing-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs and 1 Resistance

In Figure 9-45, when the circuit breaker is closed, the binary input >CB auxiliary contact is used to
form the complete supervision circuit and limit the inductive current. Therefore, the function Closing-circuit
supervision also works with 2 binary inputs and 1 resistance.
[dw_closed-circuit supervision_2BIs, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-46 Principle of the Closing-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs and 1 Resistance

CB Circuit breaker (closed)
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (closed if the CB is closed)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (open if the CB is closed)
The equivalent resistance R must be dimensioned in such a way that the circuit-breaker coil is no longer
activated when the circuit breaker is open. Simultaneously, the binary input must still be activated when the
command relay is open.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[fo_closed_circuit_supervision_1, 2, en_US]
If there is no closed command, the current flows via the binary inputs. Then the circuit current is limited to
2.5 mA at most. The closed circuit-breaker coil remains activated.
The following formula applies for the power consumption of the equivalent resistance R:
[fo_closed_circuit_supervision_2, 1, en_US]
In the following examples, you can find the calculation of R under different control voltages.
• The control voltage is 110 V.

In the following example, if RCBC is 90 Ω, Rmax is calculated as follows:
[fo_closed_circuit_supervision_RMax_110V, 2, en_US]
Siemens recommends the resistance R of 18 kΩ, then the calculated maximum power is 0.11 W.
[fo_closed_circuit_supervision_PR_110V, 1, en_US]
If the closed-command relay is open, the maximum voltage on the circuit-breaker coil and the minimum
voltage on each binary input is calculated as follows:
[fo_closed_circuit_supervision_Vmax_110V, 3, en_US]
The circuit-breaker coil is not activated.
[fo_closed_circuit_supervision_Vmin_110V, 3, en_US]
The binary input is activated.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• The control voltage is 220 V.

In the following example, if RCBC is 36 Ω, Rmax is calculated as follows:
[fo_closed_circuit_supervision_RMax_220V, 2, en_US]
Siemens recommends the resistance R of 51 kΩ, then the calculated maximum power is 0.32 W.
[fo_closed_circuit_supervision_PR_220V, 1, en_US]
If the closed-command relay is open, the maximum voltage on the circuit-breaker coil and the minimum
voltage on each binary input is calculated as follows:
[fo_closed_circuit_supervision_Vmax_220V, 3, en_US]
The circuit-breaker coil is not activated.
[fo_closed_circuit_supervision_Vmin_220V, 3, en_US]
The binary input is activated.
Logic
With the parameter Alarm delay, you can set the time delay. After fixing the faults in the closed circuit, the
failure indication automatically expires after the Alarm delay time.
If the binary input signal >Closed contact or >Closed contact 2 is not routed to the binary input of
the device (Information routing in DIGSI 5), the function Closing-circuit supervision does not work.
[lo_closed-circuit supervision_3BIs, 4, en_US]
Figure 9-47 Logic Diagram of the Stage Closing-Circuit Supervision with 3 Binary Inputs

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The indication Closing-circuit failure is generated when the following 2 conditions are met:
• The binary input signal >Closed contact or >Closed contact 2 is deactivated.
• The Alarm delay has elapsed.

The indication Closing-circuit failure disappears only when the following 2 conditions are met:
• The binary input signals >Closed contact and >Closed contact 2 are activated.
9.3.15.4 Closing-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs
Principle
In order to detect disruptions in the closed circuit for each switch position, 2 binary inputs are necessary:
• One binary input is connected in parallel to the close-command relay.
• Another binary input is connected in series with the circuit‑breaker auxiliary contact.
[dw_CCS_2BI, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-48 Principle of the Closing-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs
CCR Close-command relay

CB Circuit breaker
CB closing coil Circuit-breaker closing coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact 1 (open if the CB is closed)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact 2 (closed if the CB is closed)
V-Ctrl Control voltage for the closed circuit
The stage Closing-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs detects disruptions in the closed circuit. It also
monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker via the position of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Depending on the switch position of the close-command relay and the circuit breaker, the binary inputs are
either activated (H) or deactivated (L). If both binary inputs are deactivated, a fault occurs. The fault can be
one of the following conditions:
• A disruption
• An outage of the battery voltage
• An adhesion present on the contact surface of the CCR

The following table shows all the states of the closed circuit:
CCR CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 >Closed >CB auxil- Dynamic Static State
contact iary contact State
Open Open Closed Open H L Normal operation with an
open circuit breaker
Open Closed Open Closed H H Normal operation with a
closed circuit breaker
Closed Open Closed Open L L Transient Fault
Closed Closed Open Closed L H Transient, CCR is activated
Logic
[lo_CCS_2BI, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-49 Logic Diagram of the Stage Closing-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs
• The binary inputs >Closed contact and >CB auxiliary contact are both deactivated.
9.3.15.5 Closing-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input
Principle
In the stage Closing-circuit supervision with 1 binary input, 1 binary input is used to detect the disruption
in the closed circuit. The binary input is connected parallel to the close-command relay. The circuit-breaker
auxiliary contact is bridged with an equivalent resistance R.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_CCS_1BI, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-50 Principle of the Closing-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input
CCR Close-command relay

CB Circuit breaker
CB closing coil Circuit-breaker closing coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact 1 (open if the CB is closed)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact 2 (closed if the CB is closed)
V-Ctrl Control voltage for the closed circuit
V-BI Input voltage for binary input
Depending on the switch position of the close-command relay, the binary input is either activated (H) or
deactivated (L). If the binary input is deactivated, a fault occurs. The fault can be one of the following
conditions:
• A disruption
• An outage of the battery voltage
• An adhesion present on the contact surface of the CCR

The following table shows all the states of the closed circuit:
CCR CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 >Closed Dynamic State Static State
contact
Open Open Closed Open H Normal operation with an open
circuit breaker
Open Closed Open Closed H Normal operation with a closed
circuit breaker
Closed Open Closed Open L Transient Fault
Closed Closed Open Closed L Transient, CCR is activated

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_CCS_1BI, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-51 Logic Diagram of the Stage Closing-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input
• The binary input >Closed contact is deactivated.
The equivalent resistance R must be dimensioned such that the circuit-breaker closing coil is no longer
activated when the circuit breaker is open. Simultaneously, the binary input must still be activated when the
command relay is open.
[fo_CCS_general_Rmax, 1, en_US]
Because the circuit-breaker closing coil does not remain activated, Rmin results in:
[fo_CCS_general_Rmin, 1, en_US]
You can calculate the optimal value for the equivalent resistance R from the 2 values Rmin and Rmax:
[fo_CCS_general_R, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The following equation applies for the power consumption of the equivalent resistance R:
[fo_CCS_general_P, 1, en_US]
With:
VCtrl Control voltage for the closed circuit
VBImin The minimum voltage to activate the binary input
IBImax The maximum current to activate the binary input
RCBC The resistance of the circuit-breaker closing coil
VCBC(Lowmax) The maximum voltage flow through the circuit-breaker closing coil, which does not result in
the closing of the circuit breaker
Parameter: Alarm delay
• Default setting (_:100) Alarm delay = 2.00 s (Closing-circuit supervision with 3 binary inputs)
• Default setting (_:100) Alarm delay = 2.00 s (Closing-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs)
• Default setting (_:100) Alarm delay = 300.00 s (Closing-circuit supervision with 1 binary input)
With the parameter Alarm delay, you can set the time for the delayed output of the indication Closing-
circuit failure.
For the stage Closing-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs or Closing-circuit supervision with 3 binary
inputs, set the parameter Alarm delay so that the short-term transient states do not cause the function to
activate.
For the stage Closing-circuit supervision with 1 binary input, set the parameter Alarm delay so that the
longest duration of a close command is bridged without fail. This setting ensures that the function is activated
only when the closed circuit is disrupted.
9.3.15.7 Settings

74CC sup.1BI #
_:1 74CC sup.1BI #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:100 74CC sup.1BI #:Alarm 0.50 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s
delay
74CC sup.2BI #
• on
• test
delay

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

74CC sup.3BI #
• on
• test
delay

(Type)
74CC sup.1BI #
_:82 74CC sup.1BI #:>Block function SPS I
_:500 74CC sup.1BI #:>Closed contact SPS I
_:54 74CC sup.1BI #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 74CC sup.1BI #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 74CC sup.1BI #:Health ENS O
_:71 74CC sup.1BI #:Closing-circuit failure SPS O
74CC sup.2BI #
_:503 74CC sup.2BI #:>CB auxiliary contact SPS I
74CC sup.3BI #
_:503 74CC sup.3BI #:>CB auxiliary contact SPS I
_:501 74CC sup.3BI #:>Closed contact 2 SPS I
_:51 74CC sup.3BI #:Mode (controllable) ENC C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
9.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware
9.4.1 Overview
The correct state of the device hardware is a requirement for the correct functioning of the device. The failure
or erroneous function of a hardware component leads to device malfunctions.
The following modules of the device hardware are monitored:
• Base module
• Expansion modules
• Plug-in modules on the interface locations

The error responses result, depending on type and degree of the error, as follows:
Hardware errors where the device remains in operation.
The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example:
• Failure communication module (module x)
• Measuring-transducer module failure (module x)
• USB interface
• Integrated Ethernet interface
• Real-time clock device
• A/D converter (fast current sum)
• Battery voltage
• Faulty or missing compensation values (magnitude/phase)

Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of
operation.
Such errors are, for example:
• Memory error (RAM) in the base module
• Defective module
• Module-connection error (PCB Link)
• Control circuit error binary output
• Outage of an internal auxiliary voltage
NOTE
i If the error has not be rectified after 3 unsuccessful attempts, the system automatically recognizes it as
a severe device malfunction. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
Fatal device errors with outage of central components: The device goes permanently out of operation
into a secure state (fallback mode).
• Memory error (flash) in the base module
• CPU/Controller/FPGA error in the base module
• 3 unsuccessful restarts in a row

You can find the detailed description of the error responses in table form at the end of this chapter. You will
find corresponding corrective measures there.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Device Operating Hours

The Device operating hours statistical value counts the operating hours of the physical device. The
starting time and the time in Fallback mode are not considered.
You can neither reset nor change the statistical value.
9.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum

The function Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters it performs the following tasks:
• Supervision of the correct functioning of the device-internal analog-digital converters, based on the sum
of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary circuit.
• Detection of failures in the device-internal measuring circuits (for example, analog-digital converter)
• Blocking of protection and control functions that process the measured values from this current meas-
uring point (for example, differential protection). This avoids an overfunction of the device.
The supervision principle is based on fast current-sum supervision with connection of the neutral-point current
to the 4th current measuring input. In order to ensure that even the fast tripping stages of the protection
functions can be blocked in time before a spurious pickup, the fast current measurement is based on instanta-
neous values.
For Analog-digital converter supervision, the neutral-point current of the line to be protected must be
connected to the 4th current measuring input (IN). The 4th current measuring input must be routed via the
current-transformer neutral point (IN neutral point) (see next figure).
[ti_phase_2, 4, en_US]
Figure 9-52 Connection to a 3-Phase Current Transformer and Measured Zero-Sequence Current (Current
in Common Return Conductor)
NOTE
i The analog channel supervision via fast current sum is only available when the 4th current input is a protec-
tion-class current transformer. In the DIGSI 5 project tree, under Device → Measuring-point routing, set
the connection type 3-phase + IN for the current measuring point. When using this function, check
the correct connection of the neutral conductor/ground current by supplying an asymmetrical current.
Otherwise, a 1-pole or 2-pole fault could result in an unwanted blocking of the protection.

The Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters function is located in the Power-system
data function group of each 3-phase current measuring point.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_schstr, 1, en_US]

Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN| > Threshold value + Slope of the characteristic 1 •Σ| i | and
IF > Slope of the characteristic 2 • (Σ| i | - Base point 2)
The device uses the current inputs (iA, iB, iC, and iN) to calculate:
• Fault current IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN|
• Maximum current Σ| i | = |iA|+|iB|+|iC|+ |iN|
[lo_kenisu, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-54 Characteristic Curve of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Logic
[lo_sumsch, 4, en_US]
Figure 9-55 Logic Diagram of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters
When the output signal A/D converter monit. is active, certain protection functions are blocked to avoid
failures (see 13.80 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum ).
NOTE
i The parameters are set in the device and cannot be changed.

It is not necessary to change the parameters as a function of the application.
Threshold Value
The threshold value is the lower limit of the operating range of the Supervision of the device-internal
analog-digital converters function.
The threshold value is permanently set to 10 % of the device rated current.
Slope of the Characteristic 1

The component Slope of the characteristic 1 • Σ | i | accounts for permissible errors of the current input that
can occur in the event of slight overcurrents.
The Slope of the characteristic 1 is permanently set to 0.1.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Slope of the Characteristic 2

The component Slope of the characteristic 2 accounts for permissible errors of the current input that can
occur in the event of large overcurrents (high short-circuit currents).
The Slope of the characteristic 2 is permanently set to 0.95. The base point of the Slope of the character-
istic 2 is permanently set to 10.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
9.5 Supervision of Device Firmware
9.5 Supervision of Device Firmware

The device firmware determines essentially the functionality of the device.
The following supervisions ensure the stable function of the device:
• Supervisions of the data and version consistency
• Supervision of the undisturbed sequential activity of the device firmware
• Supervision of the available processor performance

When you start the device, load data via the interfaces and these supervisions of the device firmware will be
in effect during the continuous operation. Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error
responses will result:
Firmware failures where the device remains in operation.

The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in time synchronization
(loss and errors).
Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of
operation.
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. The old parameter set is still present.
• Overloading of the processor
• Program-sequence error
Fatal firmware error. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback mode).
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. No usable parameter set is present.
• Device startup with version error
• CFC-runtime error
• 3 unsuccessful restarts in a row

You can find the detailed description, in table form, of the fault responses at the end of chapter 9.8 Error
Responses and Corrective Measures. You will find corresponding corrective measures there.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
9.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration
9.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration

The modular hardware concept requires adherence to some rules within the product family and the modular
system. Configuration errors show that the hardware configuration saved in the device does not agree with
the hardware actually detected. Impermissible components and unallowed combinations must be detected
just as missing configured components are.
Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error responses will result: The identified hardware
configuration errors are assigned to the defect severities as follows:
Configuration errors for which the device remains in operation.

The failure is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in the IE-converter
configuration (normal/sensitive).
Fatal configuration error: The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
• Missing hardware module (module x)
• Incorrect hardware module (module x)
• Incorrect hardware combination
• Incorrect plug-in module (module x)

You can find the detailed description of the error responses in table form at the end of this chapter. You
will find corresponding corrective measures there. You can resolve configuration errors through another
synchronization with DIGSI.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
9.7 Supervision of Communication Connections
9.7 Supervision of Communication Connections

SIPROTEC 5 devices offer extensive communication options via fixed and optional interfaces. Beyond the
hardware supervision , the transferred data must be monitored with respect to their consistency, failure, or
outage.
Supervision
With the supervision of the communication connections, every communication port is monitored selectively.
• Failures are detected and indicated via the operational log. The device remains in operation!
• Additionally, each port is equipped with a separate communication log which displays details of the
failures, for example the error rate.
Marking Fault Signals/Data

The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected protection functions
can go into a secure state. In the following, some examples are named:
• GOOSE signals can automatically be set to defined values in case of disturbed IEC 61850 communication.
• Disturbed protection interfaces set phasor values, analog measured values, and binary information to
invalid, for example for the differential protection. Binary signal traces can be set to defined values in
cases of failures.
• Disturbed time-synchronization signals can lead to an automatic change of the source of time synchroni-
zation.
You can correct communication failures by checking the external connections or by replacing the affected
communication modules.
For further information on error responses, refer to 9.8.2 Defect Severity 1 to 9.8.4 Defect Severity 3.
Corresponding corrective measures are also be described there.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
9.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
9.8.1 Overview
When device errors occur and the corresponding supervision functions pick up, this is displayed on the device
and also indicated. Device errors can lead to corruption of data and signals. These data and signals are marked
and tagged as invalid, so that affected functions automatically go into a secure state. If the supervision
functions pick up, this will lead to defined error responses.
How Do Device Errors Make Themselves Noticeable

In case of a device error the supervision functions of the device pickup. The device responds according to
the type and severity of the error. To report an error, supervision functions use outputs on the device and
indications.
Run LED (green) The external auxiliary voltage is present. The device is ready for operation.
Error LED (red) The device is not ready for operation. The life contact is open.
Life contact Signaling of device readiness following successful device startup.
Group-warning indication The device remains in operation and signals an error via the prerouted LED
Group warning and the log.
Log of the device Indications of causes for defects and corrective measures
Determination of Causes for Defects and Corrective Measures

To determine the cause for defect and the corresponding corrective measure, proceed step by step.
Step 1: Pick up of supervisions leads to one of the following defect severities in all cases.
• Defect severity 1:
Internal or external device error that is reported. The device remains in operation.
Severe device failure, the device restarts (reset) to correct the cause for defect.
Severe device failure, the device goes to a safe condition (fallback mode), as the
correction of defects cannot be implemented by a restart. In fallback mode, the
protection and automated functions are inactive. The device is out of operation.
Severe device-external failure, the device switches the protection and automatic
functions to inactive for safety, but remains in operation. Normally, the user can
correct the fault by himself.
Step 2: For every defect severity, you will find detailed tables with information about causes
for defects, error responses, and corrective measures in the following chapters.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
All Protection and Automation Functions

Group-Warning Indication
Device-Diagnosis Log
Indication of the
Operational Log
Group Warning
Fallback Mode
Device restart
Indication in
Indication in
Life Contact
are inactive
(Reset)
Defect Severity 1 x x x – – – –
Defect Severity 2 – – x x During the x –
starting time of
the device
Defect Severity 3 – – x x x – x
Defect Severity 4 – x – x x – –
9.8.2 Defect Severity 1
Defect severity 1 faults allow the continued safe operation of the device. Defect severity 1 faults are indicated.
The device remains in operation.
When the supervision functions pick up, corrupted data and signals are marked as invalid. In this way, the
affected functions can go into a secure state. Whether functions are blocked is decided in the appropriate
function itself. For more detailed information, refer to the function descriptions.
Life contact Remains activated
Red error LED Is not activated
Log
For every device fault, a corresponding supervision indication is generated. The device records these indica-
tions with a real-time stamp in the operational log. In this way they are available for further analyses. If
supervisions in the communication interfaces area of the device pick up, there is a separate communication
log available for each port. Extended diagnostic indications and measured values are available there. The
device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive recommendations of corre-
sponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
There is further information on handling the logs in 3.1 Indications.
Group-Warning Indication Group Warning

As delivered, all monitoring indications of Defect Severity 1 are routed to the signal (_:301)Group
warning. In this way, a device error can be indicated with only one indication. The majority of supervision
indications are permanently connected to the Group warning (Group warning column = fixed). However,
some supervision indications are routed flexibly to the Group warning via a logic block chart (Group
warning column = CFC). If necessary, the routings via a CFC chart can be taken from the group indication
again.
In delivery condition, the Group warning is routed to an LED.
The following logic diagram shows the correlation.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_warning_indication, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-56 Forming the Warning Group Indication Group Warning
Overview of Errors
Indication Type Group Explanation

Warning
General:
(_:53) Health ENS CFC If the Health of an individual function block, for example
(_:53) Health = Warning SPS a protection stage or an individual function, goes to the
Warning or Alarm state, this state generates up to the
(_:53) Health = Alarm SPS
general group indication Health (_:53) via the associated
function group.
Check from the operational log from which function or
function block the error originates. In the associated func-
tion description, there is additional information as to
why the Standby of the function or a function block can
change.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Warning
Device:
_:320 Auxiliary Power Fail SPS Fixed Fault with the auxiliary power supply:
Check the external power supply.
This message does not appear if the device has a redun-
dant PS204 power supply module, and is replaced by the
messages described below for a device with PS204.
(_:305) Battery failure SPS Battery fault:
Replace the device battery.
To avoid data loss, Siemens recommends replacing the
device battery with the device supply voltage switched on.
You can find more information on battery disposal in the
hardware manual from version V07.80 (order number:
C53000-G5040-C002-D).
_:312 Compensation error x ENS Calibration error in module x:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Quality: Measured values are marked with the quality
attribute of questionable (measured value display with
≈).
_:314 Offset error x ENS Offset error on module x:
If this indication persists after the device start, contact the
Customer Support Center.
Quality: Measured values are marked with the quality
attribute of questionable (measured value display with
≈).
_:306 Clock fail SPS Internal time failure
• Check the time settings first.

• Then replace the device battery.
• If the fault is not remedied, contact the Customer
Support Center.
Quality: The internal time is marked with the quality
attribute of Clock Failure.
(_:319) Error memory SPS Checksum (cyclic redundancy check) error in monitored
memory areas of the device
Measuring transducer error ENS Hardware failure on the measuring-transducer module on
(x) plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Warning
Device with redundant PS204 power supply module:
_:330 Power sup. Module INS CFC Internal device error on the power supply module at posi-
fail. x tion x57:
• The device remains in operation because it has a

redundant power supply module, provided it is intact.
• Exchange the defective power supply module so that
redundancy is reestablished!
_:331 Power sup. Module OK x INS No internal device error in the power supply module at
position x57.
_:332 Pow. sup. aux. pow. INS Error in the external auxiliary power supply module at posi-
fail. x tion x57:
• The device remains in operation because it has a

redundant power supply module, provided it is intact.
• Check the auxiliary power supply module.
_:333 Power sup.aux.pow.OK x INS The external auxiliary power supply module at position x57
is OK.
_:334 Power sup. Module SPS Fixed At least one power supply module has an internal device
fail. x error
_:335 Pow. sup. aux. pow. SPS Fixed At least one power supply module does not have an
fail. x adequate auxiliary power supply
Handling an alarm:
(_:504) >Group Warning SPS Fixed Input signal for user-defined generation of group warning
Time sync.:
(_:305) Time sync. error SPS Fixed Time synchronization error, the timing master is faulty:
• Check the external time source first.

• Check the external connections.
Support Center.
Quality: The internal time is marked with the quality
attribute of Clock not synchronized.
Power-system data:meas. point Current balance failure (see 9.3.11.1 Overview of Func-
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv. Bal. I: tions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point Failure of the current phase-rotation supervision system
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv. Phsseq.I: (see 9.3.13.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point Failure of the current sum (see 9.3.12.1 Overview of Func-
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv. Sum I tions)
(_:71) Failure
57 x refers to the PCB assembly slot (x =1,2,3,...)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

Warning
Power-system data:meas. point Failure of the fast current sum (see 9.4.2.1 Overview of
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv.ADC sum.I: Functions)
(_:71) Failure The failure indication indicates a fault in the analog-digital
converter at the power input.
• Check the exterior wiring.

Support Center.
Quality: The internally managed current measured values
are marked with the invalid quality attribute.
Blocking: The protection functions based on current meas-
urement are blocked.
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is open.
SPS CFC
Volt.Trans.Cir.B: Blocking: Appropriate functions are either blocked defi-
(_:500) >Open nitely or the blocking can be set individually.
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage balance (see 9.3.5.1 Overview of
SPS CFC
Superv. of Bal. V: Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage phase-rotation supervision (see
SPS CFC
Superv. Phsseq.V: 9.3.7.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage sum (see 9.3.6.1 Overview of Func-
SPS CFC
Superv. of Sum V: tions )
(_:71) Failure
2 devices prot. comm.: Protection inter- Protection interface connection defective:
face #:
• Check the connections and the external communica-
(_:303) Connection broken SPS CFunc- tion infrastructure.
SPS tionC58
(_:316) Error rate / min
exc.
Support Center.
(_:317) Error rate / hour SPS
Transferred Signals: Faulty or not received telegrams are
exc.
detected at the receive end and discarded. They do not
(_:318) Time delay exceeded SPS result in failure of the applications. Configured binary
(_:320) Time delay jump SPS signals are reset after a time that can be set.
VI-3ph: Mess.Volt.Fail detected: Measuring-voltage failure detected:
SPS CFC
(_:300) Failure Check the exterior wiring.
Blocking: Appropriate functions are either blocked defi-
nitely or the blocking can be set individually.
Device: SPS SEU memory fault:
(_:343) SEU happened Cosmic radiation can result in a Single Event Upset, which
can be detected through bit flips (changes in the status
of a bit) in the memory blocks. A reset to reinitialize the
memory is initiated. You will find additional explanations
on the physical background in a special SEU whitepaper.
Faults of defect severity 2 are fatal device faults that lead to an immediate restart of the device (reset).
58 The indications are not pre-routed in the logic block chart. The indications must be added to by the user in the logic block chart!

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
This occurs when the device data is corrupted (for example, RAM memory), if a restart prevents restoration of
data consistency. The device goes briefly out of operation, a failure is avoided.
Life contact Is terminated during the restart
Red error LED Is activated during the restart
NOTE
i If the fault of defect severity 2 has not been removed after 3 unsuccessful restarts (reset), the fault is
automatically assigned to defect severity 3. The device will automatically turn to the fallback mode.
Log
For every device error with a subsequent restart (reset), only the restart can be detected in the operational
log. The actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault
detection and before the restart. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus available
for later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There, you also receive
recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
For further information on handling the logs, refer to chapter 3.
Overview of Errors
Number Device-Diagnosis Log

826 Processor error on the base module:
If the fault occurs numerous times, contact the Customer Support Center.
830 FPGA hardware error on the base module:
834 Memory error (short term):
Reset initiated.
3823 Program run error:
826 CPU overload:
11160 SEU memory fault (short term): Reset initiated
Miscellaneous Internal firmware error:
Faults of defect severity 3 are fatal device faults that lead to device immediately going into the fallback mode.
The signal ( :301) Physical health goes to the Alarm state. The Warning state is not supported for
this signal.
Fatal device errors are errors that cannot be resolved by a restart of the device. In this case, contact the
Customer Support Center. The device goes permanently out of operation, a failure is avoided. In the fallback
mode, minimal operation of the device via the on-site operation panel and DIGSI is possible. In this way, for
example, you can still read out information from the device-diagnosis log.
Life contact Is terminated in the fallback mode
Red error LED Is activated in the fallback mode
Log
For every device error that immediately leads to entry into the fallback mode, entries from supervision
messages and the signal ( :301) Physical health into the operational log are not possible. The actual
supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detection, that

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
is, before entry into the fallback mode. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus
available for later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There, you are
offered recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.1 Indications.
Overview of Errors
Number Device-Diagnosis Log

2822 Memory error (continuous)
4727, 5018-5028 Hardware failure at module 1-12:
4729 Device bus error (repeated):
• Check the module configuration and the module connections.

• Contact the Customer Support Center.
4733 Incorrect hardware configuration:
Synchronize the hardware configuration of the device with DIGSI.
5037-5048 Wrong module 1-12 detected:
5031-5035 Identified wrong plug-in module on plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:
Wrong application configuration:
Search for the cause in the operational log and load a valid configuration to the device.
3640, 4514 Data-structure error:
956 Firmware-version error:
2013, 2025 Signature error:
CFC error:
In DIGSI, check your CFC chart for the cause.
5050-5061 Binary-output error in module 1 - 12:
5088, 5089 A missing display configuration was established:
9.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)
Errors of defect severity 4 are not device failures in the classical meaning. These errors do not affect the
device hardware and are not detected or reported by internal device supervision functions. The condition of
the defect severity 4 – the group alarm – is set user-specifically by the binary input signal (_:503) >Group
alarm. If the binary input signal is reset, the device is no longer in the Group alarm condition and all
functions return to the normal operating state.
If the group alarm is generated, the device reacts as follows:
• The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is generated and recorded in the operational log.
• The life contact is terminated.
• The red Error LED is activated.
• All protection and automation functions are blocked.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• The device remains in operation, does not carry out any restart (reset), and does not switch to the safe
condition (Fallback mode).
• The signals managed internally are marked with the invalid quality attribute. Signals managed inter-
nally are, for example, measured values, binary input and output signals, GOOSE and CFC signals.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive, that initiates the Group
alarm (see chapter 9.9 Group Indications).
Life contact Is terminated in case of Group alarm
Red error LED Is initiated in case of Group alarm
Log
The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is recorded in the operational log. Depending on the cause of
the initiation, further information can be found in the operational log.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
9.9 Group Indications

The following group indications are available:
• (_:300) Group alarm

• (_:301) Group warning
• (_:302) Group indication
You can find the signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Information routing. In the
working area, you can find the signals under Alarm handling (see the following figure).
[sc_grwarn, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-57 Group Monitoring Indication in the DIGSI 5 Information Routing Matrix
Group Indication Group Alarm

The indication (_:300) Group alarm is the group indication for defect severity 4 monitoring. This
monitoring has a special purpose, as it is set user-specifically by a binary input signal and not by internal
device supervision. Nevertheless, the response of the device is serious, such as blocking all protection and
automatic functions (refer to 9.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)).
If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is set, the group indication (_:300) Group alarm
becomes active. If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is reset, the signal (_:300) Group
alarm is also reset and the device returns to the normal operating state.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive that initiates the >Group
Alarm. This CFC chart checks whether the device is still accidentally in the simulation or commissioning
mode.
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of
the device → Charts.
Group Indication Group Warning

The indication (_:301) Group warning is the group indication for defect severity 1 monitoring. Some
error messages of defect severity 1 are firmly linked to the signal (_:301) Group warning, others are
connected flexibly in the device delivery condition via a CFC chart. This assignment is described in chapter
9.8.2 Defect Severity 1.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Group warning, that initiates the Group warning.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of
the device → Charts.
The group-warning indication (_:301) Group warning is prerouted to an LED of the base module.
Group Indication
The Group indication is exclusively for user-specific purposes. There is no internal device supervision
function that activates this indication. If the binary input signal (_:505) >Group indication is set,
the indication (_:302) Group indication becomes active and is recorded in the operational log. This
warning indication does not result in blocking a protection function. If the binary input signal is reset, the
signal (_:302) Group indication drops out. Using a CFC chart, you can define when the binary input
signal (_:505) >Group indication is to be set.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision
of the Primary System
10.1 Overview of Functions 1708

10.2 Structure of the Function 1709
10.3 Operational Measured Values 1711
10.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components 1712
10.5 Average Values 1713
10.6 Minimum/Maximum Values 1716
10.7 Energy Values 1718
10.8 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) 1721
10.9 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring 1746
10.10 Disconnector-Switch Monitoring 1806
10.11 User-Defined Metered Values 1815
10.12 Measuring Transducers 1819
10.13 Statistical Values of the Primary System 1826

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
10.1 Overview of Functions
10.1 Overview of Functions

The measurands are recorded at the measuring points and forwarded to the function groups.
Within the function groups, further measurands are calculated from these measured values, which are
required for the functions of this function group. This is how, for example, the electric power is calculated
from the voltage and current measurands.
Measuring transducers are an exception as they already form various calculation parameters from the analog
current and voltage inputs themselves.
You can find basic instructions for recording and editing process data in 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the
Device.
[dw_om_verf, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-1 Structure of Measured-Value Acquisition and Processing
For the display, the measured values of a SIPROTEC 5 device are summed up in the following groups:
• Fundamental and symmetrical components
• Function-specific measured values
• Minimum values, maximum values, average values
• Energy metered values
• User-defined measured and metered values
• Statistical values

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.2 Structure of the Function

Depending on the interconnection of the function groups, these can contain different measured-value groups.
2 typical function groups are displayed below.

In the simplest version, the Voltage/current 3-phase function group obtains the measured values of the
3-phase voltage and current system and contains the following measured-value groups:
[dw_strciv, 1, en_US]
The Minimum values/Maximum values/Average values and User-defined values can be inserted from the
library into the Voltage/Current 3-phase function group.
Details regarding the individual measured value groups can be found in the tables in the following chapters.
Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The Circuit-breaker function group may contain the following measured values:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_om_vls1, 1, en_US]
Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values

The calculated, directional values in the operational measured values (power, power factor, energy and
minimum, maximum, and average values based on these) are normally defined as positive in the direction of
the protected object. This requires that the connection polarity for the used measuring points be correctly set
(see also parameter (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj of the measuring point current,
3-phase). It is, however, possible, to set the "forward" direction for the protection functions and the positive
direction for the powers, etc., differently, for example, such that the active power consumption (from the
line to the busbar) is displayed positively. Then set the option reversed in the affected function groups at
the parameter P, Q sign. With the setting not reversed (default setting), the positive direction for the
powers etc. corresponds to the "forward" direction for the protection functions.
The affected values are given in detail in the chapters 10.3 Operational Measured Values - 10.13 Statistical
Values of the Primary System.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.3 Operational Measured Values
10.3 Operational Measured Values

Operational measured values are assigned to different function groups.
The values can be displayed as primary and secondary values and as percentage values. They are updated
every 180 ms.
The frequency is calculated using the filter algorithm, which is derived from the voltage or current. The
voltage input has higher priority than the current input. If no voltage or current is present, the value contains
the last valid frequency. – is displayed on the user interface.
The operational measured values are calculated according to the following definition equations:
RMS values
Active power (per phase)
With x = 1 to 3
vphsx(t) – Instantaneous value of the phase voltage, that is, vA, vB, vC
iphsx(t) – Instantaneous value of the phase current, that is, iA, iB, iC
Active power (total)
Apparent power (per phase)
With Vphsx – RMS value of the phase-to-ground voltage (true RMS):
With x = A to C
Iphsx – RMS value of the phase current (true RMS); with x = A to C
Apparent power (total)
Reactive power (per phase)
With:
n – Harmonic order (up to n = 50)
φn – Angle difference between voltage and current of the nth harmonic
Reactive power (total)
Power factor
Active factor

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components
10.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components

The fundamental components are calculated from the frequency-tracked instantaneous values through a
Fourier filter (integration interval: one period). The results are phasor values that are described by way of the
amount and phase angle.
In accordance with the transformation matrix, the symmetrical components are calculated from the voltage
and current phasors. These are also phasor quantities.
Fundamental Components
Table 10-1 Fundamental Components
Values Primary Secon- Phase % Referenced to

dary Angle
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltage kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
values/√3
VN Measured neutral-point displace- kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
ment voltage values/√3
V12, V23, Phase-to-phase voltage kV V ° Rated operating voltage of the
V31 primary values
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A ° Rated operating current of the

primary values
IN Neutral-point phase current A A ° Rated operating current of the
primary values
Symmetrical Components
Table 10-2 Symmetrical Components
Values Primary Secon- Phase % Referenced to

dary Angle
V0 Zero-sequence component of the kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
V1 Positive-sequence component of kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
the voltage values/√3
V2 Negative-sequence component of kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
the voltage values/√3
I0 Zero-sequence component of the A A ° Rated operating current of the
current primary values
I1 Positive-sequence component of A A ° Rated operating current of the
the current primary values
I2 Negative-sequence component of A A ° Rated operating current of the
the current primary values

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.5 Average Values
10.5 Average Values
10.5.1 Function Description of Average Values
Average values can be formed based on different measurands:
• Symmetrical components
Through the settings, you can set how and when the average values are formed. The settings describe:
• Time slot over which the average value is formed

(Parameter: Average calc. interval )
• Update interval for the display of the average values

(Parameter: Average update interval )
• Synchronization time for establishing the date of commencement updating information, for example, at
the top of the hour (hh:00) or at one of the other times (hh:15, hh:30, hh:45).
(Parameter: Average synchroniz. time )
Average values are formed through the following measurands:
• Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
• Amounts of the symmetrical components

You reset the average value formation via the
• Binary input >Reset average value
• DIGSI
• The integrated operation panel
NOTE
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 10.2 Structure of the Function Structure of
the Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active power (total): P total
• Reactive power (total): Q total
10.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values
The average value formation functionality is not preconfigured with the devices in the function group. If you
use the functionality, you must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the average values can be set with DIGSI and at the device.
You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Average calc. interval
• Default setting: (_:104) Average calc. interval = 60 min

1 min to 60 min Time slot for averaging, for example 60 minutes
Parameter: Average update interval
• Default setting: (_:105) Average update interval = 60 min

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.5 Average Values

1 min to 60 min Update interval for displaying the average value, for example 60 minutes
Parameter: Average synchroniz. time
• Default setting: (_:106) Average synchroniz. time = hh:00

The parameter describes the synchronization time for average value formation.

hh:00 The parameter Average update interval will be
effective on the full hour
effective 15 minutes after the full hour
NOTE
i The average value calculation restarts after
• Changing one of the 3 settings for the average-value calculation
• Resetting the device (initial or normal reset)
• Changing the time
• Resetting the average values

The average values are reset immediately. The display changes to "---".
The following examples explain how to set parameters and to make a change.
Average calc. interval = 60 min

Average update interval = 30 min
Average synchroniz. time = hh:15.
A new average value is formed every 30 min, at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour) and hh:45 (15 min
before the top of the hour). All measured values obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value
formation.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 12:15:00.
In this example, the Average synchroniz. time = hh:45 acts as described above for = hh:15.

A new average value is formed every 60 min at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour). All measured values
obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value formation.


C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.5 Average Values
A new average value is formed every 10 min at hh:00, hh:10, hh:20, hh:30, hh:40, hh:50. All measured
values obtained during the last 5 min are used to form the average value.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.6 Minimum/Maximum Values
10.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values
Minimum and maximum values can be formed based on different measured or calculated measurands:
• Symmetrical components
• Selected values
You can set which measurand will be used. The measurands for the minimum/maximum formation are loaded
from DIGSI.
Calculation and resetting of the minimum and maximum values are controlled through settings. The settings
describe the following points:
• Memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0 cyclically or not at all.

(Setting Min/Max cyclic reset )
• Point in time when the memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0.
(Setting Min/Max reset each and setting Min/Max reset minute )
• Point in time at which the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum/maximum values begins (after the
parameterization)
(Setting Min/Max days until start )
The following figure shows the effect of the settings.
[dw_min_max, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-2 Minimum and Maximum-Value Formation
Minimum and maximum values are time-stamped.

Minimum/maximum values are formed through:
• Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
• Amounts of the symmetrical components
• Average values
The minimum and maximum values are reset on a regular basis or via the
• Binary input >Reset min/max
• DIGSI
• The integrated operation panel

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 10.2 Structure of the Function Structure of
the Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Minimum/maximum values of the active and reactive power:

Min:Ptotal, Max:Ptotal, Min:Qtotal, Max:Qtotal
• Minimum/maximum values of the average values of the active and reactive power:
AverageMin:Ptotal, AverageMax:Ptotal, AverageMin:Qtotal, AverageMax:Qtotal
10.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values
The minimum/maximum values functionality is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you
must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the minimum/maximum values can be set with DIGSI or at
the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Min/Max cyclic reset
• Default setting: (_:107) Min/Max cyclic reset = yes

Yes Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is acti-
vated
No Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is deacti-
vated
None of the following parameters are visible
Parameter: Min/Max reset each
• Default setting: (_:108) Min/Max reset each = 1 day

1 day to 365 days Resetting of the minimum value and the maximum value, cyclically on all
specified days, for example each day (1 day)
Parameter: Min/Max reset minute
• Default setting: (_:109) Min/Max reset minute = 0 min

0 min to 1439 min Resetting the minimum value and the maximum value at the specified
minute of the day, which is stated in the parameter Min/Max Reset
takes place every, for example 0 min 0 min (= 00.00)
Parameter: Min/Max days until start
• Default setting: (_:110) Min/Max days until start = 1 day

1 day to 365 days Indication of when the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum values and
maximum values begins, for example in 1 day (after the parameterization)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.7 Energy Values
10.7 Energy Values
10.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values
The device continually determines the values for the active and reactive energy from the power-measured
values. It calculates the exported and imported electrical energy. The calculation (summation over time)
begins immediately after the device startup. You can read the present energy values on the device display or
through DIGSI, delete the energy value (set to 0), or set it to any initial value. After input, the energy-value
calculation will continue with the new setting values.
Energy values can be transferred to a control center through an interface. The energy values are converted
into energy metered values. Here the following applies:
[fo_omverg, 1, en_US]
Through the settings, you set how the metered values are processed. The setting parameters apply for all
energy metered values of the device, and do not have a function-group specific effect. You determine the
following points:
• Parameter Energy restore time

Hour-related point in time; at this point in time, the device will provide a metered value at the communi-
cation interface for transmission. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore interval
will be deactivated automatically.
• Parameter Energy restore interval

Adjustable period in minutes until the first and every further transfer of the metered value to the
communication interface of the device. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected
log.
Note: The transfer interval is used alternatively to the transfer time, and deactivates the set transfer time.
The display of the device is always up to date.
You will find these parameters in the device settings under measured values.
In addition, restoring can be triggered via a routable binary input (>Restoring). The rising edge of the binary
input leads to restoring, that is, provision of the energy-metered value at the communication interface.
The metered-value memory and the energy values can be set to 0 via a binary input (>Resetting) if there is
a rising edge.
Note: The binary inputs affect all energy/energy metered values simultaneously.
The following energy values are available:
Energy Values Primary
Wp+ Active energy, output kWh, MWh, GWh
Wp- Active energy, input kWh, MWh, GWh
Wq+ Reactive energy, output kvarh, Mvarh, Gvarh
Wq- Reactive energy, input kvarh, Mvarh, Gvarh
In compliance with IEC 61850, when individually measured values are missing, the quality of the energy-
metered values changes to the state Questionable.
This quality state is retained until a new meter content is specified for the energy value by:
- Confirmation of the current meter content via Set
- Setting a new counter status
- Resetting the counter status to 0

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.7 Energy Values
NOTE
of the respective function group can be inverted (see chapter 10.2 Structure of the Function, section on the
Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active energy, output: Wp+
• Active energy, input: Wp-
• Reactive energy, output: Wq+
• Reactive energy, input: Wq-
10.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Energy Values
The set parameters apply for all electricity meters of the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the
project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Energy restore interval
• Default setting: (_:111) Energy restore interval = 10 min

0 min Restoring deactivated
60 min Cyclical restoring after the set time 1 minute to 60 minutes
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore time is not in
effect and will be deactivated automatically.
Parameter: Energy restore time
• Default setting: (_:112) Energy restore time = none

none Deactivated
hh:00 Restoring on the full hour
hh:15 Restoring 15 minutes after the full hour
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore interval is
not in effect and will be deactivated automatically.
Parameter: Energy restore
• Default setting: (_:120) Energy restore = latest value

latest value Restoring of the current energy value
delta value Restoring the difference value between the current energy value and the
energy value of the last restoring operation
Parameter: Energy restore by A.time
• Default setting: (_:121) Energy restore by A.time = false

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.7 Energy Values

False Restoring deactivated
True The cyclic restoring after the set time of the parameter (_:111) Energy
restore intervalwill also be synchronized with the system time.
Example: Energy restore interval = 30 min; current system time:
12:10 o'clock First restore: 12:30 o'clock; next restore: 13:00 o'clock etc.
Note: When the parameter is activated, the following setting values are possible for the parameter (_:111)
Energy restore interval: 1 min; 2 min; 3 min; 4 min; 5 min; 6 min; 10 min; 12 min; 15 min; 20 min;
30 min; 60 min.
Input Signals: >Restoring and >Resetting
Binary Inputs Description

>Restoring The restoring of the metered values is initiated via a binary input.
>Reset The metered value memory is set to 0 through the binary input.
You route these logical signals in the DIGSI routing matrix. Open the function group, for example, Line, where
you created the energy value. There, under the tab Measured values you will find the tab Energy, 3-phase.
In this tab, you will find the logical signals in addition to the measured values.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.8 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
A Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) measures the phasor values of current and voltage. These values get a
high precision time stamp and together with the values of power frequency, power frequency change rate and
optional binary data that are also time stamped are transmitted to a central analysis station. The standardized
transmission protocol IEEEC 37.118 is used to do this.
The PMU function group is activated by selecting the protocol IEEE C37.118PMU on an Ethernet module
(electrical or optical). The PMU obtains the measured values from the measuring points and the precise time
from time synchronization. The time-stamped synchrophasors for current and voltage are formed from this
and transferred together with additional values via the communication module to a server (PDC, Phasor Data
Concentrator).
[dw_strpmu, 2, en_US]
The synchrophasors, sent from the PMU in a continuous data stream to a PDC, are provided with time stamps
and thus are comparable with the measured values of other PMUs. The power frequency, the power frequency
change rate and optional binary information are also transmitted as time-stamped measured values. There-
fore, you receive an overview of the transient processes in a distributed energy transfer system, for example
network fluctuations and compensating processes.
The following table shows the differences between the PMU measured values and the remaining measured
values of the device.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table 10-3 Comparison of Synchrophasors and Conventional Measured Values
Synchrophasors of the PMU Measured Values from the Measuring Points

Continuous updating (measured value of current) Slow updating (typically every 5 seconds)
with, for example, 10 values per second (reporting
rate)
Every measured value has a time stamp No time stamp for the measured values
Phasor values of current and voltage (amplitude and RMS values without phase angle
phase angle)
The following figure shows the structure of such a Wide Area Monitoring System. The data delivered from the
PMUs on the PDC are transmitted via the Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol (ICCP) according to
DIN EN 60870-6 to the network control center.
[dw_strwam, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-4 Structure of a Wide-Area Monitoring System with Phasor Measurement Units
The phasor measurement units each have 2 communication interfaces: an Ethernet module for synchrophasor
communication via IEEE C37.118 and another module for communication with the substation automation
technology, for example, through the IEC 61850 protocol. If you use an ETH-BD-2FO communication module,
you can activate IEEE C37.118 and IEC 61850-8-1 on the same module.
The central evaluation system, for example SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data Processor, receives the data, files,
archives them and graphically displays them on a User Interface. In this system, a self-checking function may
also be performed, for example, on undamped power swings. The further distribution of information to other
PDCs or to a control center is done here.
To maintain the required maximum errors (TVE) required in the standard IEEE C37.118, the time tolerance
relative to the UTC time reference (UTC = Universal Time Coordinated) may be maximum 10 μs. Therefore, the
device must be directly synchronized with a GPS precise time signal for the correct function of the PMU.
Phasors
A phasor u(t) = Uejωt can be displayed as a phasor that moves counterclockwise in the complex plane at the
angular frequency ω. Therefore, the voltage function u(t) = Re{u(t)} is obtained as a projection of the phasor
u(t) on the real axis.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_geopdc, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-5 Geometric Representation of a Phasor
Reference Point for Determining the Angle

The phase angle of a measuring signal Xm is determined relative to a cosine function having a rated frequency,
which is synchronized with the UTC time reference (see Figure 10-6).
[dw_utcphi, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-6 Determination of Phase Angle ρ of Measuring Signal Xm Relative to the Cosine Function

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
The number of phasors that are transmitted per second is configurable. The transmission rate is defined
according to IEEE C37.118 as the reporting rate. The reporting rate defines the number of phasors that are
transmitted per second. Extremely precise time synchronization is essential so that phasor measurement can
be carried out to enable phasors from different sites to be compared via GPS.
Reporting Rate
You use the configurable reporting rate (parameter (_:10621:102) Reporting rate) to specify the
number of telegrams that are generated and sent to the PDC per second. It is adjustable, depending on the
rated frequency, and applies to all currents and voltages of the relevant PMU function group. If several PMU
function groups are created on the device, these can work with different reporting rates.
Total Vector Error (TVE)

The TVE describes the error between the actual and the measured values of the input signal. The Synchro-
phasor Standard IEEE 37.118 defines upper limiting values of 120 % VN and 200 % IN, among other things. Up
to these limiting values, the TVE of 1 % must not be exceeded for stationary signals. The standard defines the
2 performance classes, Class P and Class M, as ranges within which influencing variables are acceptable and
the TVE of ≤1 % must be maintained. The SIPROTEC 5 devices support Class P and Class M, which specify the
following influencing variables for a TVE of 1 %:
• Signal frequency (relative to fN)
• Signal magnitude (relative to 100 % nominal magnitude) for voltage and current
• Phase angle (relative to 0°)
• Harmonic distortions (relative to < 0.2 % (THD) up to the 50th harmonic

The following figure graphically represents the total vector error. As well as the amplitude, the TVE also enters
into the angle error.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_klatve, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-7 Representation of the Total Vector Error
The TVE is defined as follows:
[fo_utcphi_new, 1, en_US]
Where:
• Xr(n) = Real part of measured signal
• Xi(n) = Imaginary part of measured signal
• Xr = Real part, input signal
• Xi = Imaginary part, input signal
Variables that influence the TVE are:
• Amplitude errors
• Phase errors
• Synchronization accuracy (deviation from the UTC)

Synchronization accuracy is affected by a GPS timer and the precise correction of the time delay within the
GPS receiver module, as well as by the optimal mounting arrangement of the GPS antenna.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.8.4 Transmitted Data
The following data is transmitted from the PMU to the PDC:
• Current and voltage phasors
• Frequency
• Frequency rate of change
• Analog-channel data (active/reactive power)
• Binary information
The current and voltage channels transferred from a PMU function group are selected through the Function
group connections editor in DIGSI 5. The frequency and frequency change rate are determined once per
PMU. In this case, only the current and voltage channels selected via the Function group connections editor
for this PMU are taken into consideration. You may route the binary information in the information routing
matrix of DIGSI 5. You can instantiate the analog-channel data from the Global DIGSI 5 library in the PMU
function group.
The channel used for specifying the frequency is selected dynamically during the device runtime. Each
channel is checked for the presence of a signal in the following order:
1. 3-phase voltage measuring points
2nd 1-phase voltage measuring points
3rd 3-phase current measuring points
4th 1-phase current measuring points
The 1st measuring point found with a valid signal is used for specifying the frequency in the PMU function
group.
In the case of 3-phase measuring points, the positive-sequence system can also be transmitted instead of or
in addition to 3 individual sychrophasors. You can make the selection using the (_:10621:103) Positive
sequence parameter, see 10.8.8 Application and Setting Notes, Parameter: Positive sequence, Page 1743.
10.8.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)
PMU communication according to standard IEEE C37.118 is a client-server communication format in which the
PDC (Phasor Data Concentrator) functions as both the client and the server.
Once the PDC has been successfully connected to the device PMU and the PMU configuration data has been
queried, the PDC initiates transmission of the synchrophasor data by sending a close command to the PMU.
If you use the method of spontaneous data transmission via UDP, data output starts immediately after the
device boots without a close command to the PMU.
The values and names for the values are transmitted for the phasors, binary information, and analog channels.
The names for the phasors and binary information are automatically generated by the respective PMU function
groups. You must enter the analog-channel names yourself.
If necessary, you can edit the names for the phasors, binary information, and analog-channel data and assign
your own designations for them. For more information, see chapter 10.8.6 Parameterizing the PMU with
DIGSI.
As an example, the names (generated) for measuring points or binary information may be as follows:

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Table 10-4 Possible Measuring-Points Names
Name Displayed in the DIGSI Function Depending on the Connection Type, Name Transferred to the
Group Connections PDC (in case it cannot be assigned automatically)
Measuring point V-3ph 1[ID 1] MP-V3ph VAB ID01
MP-V3ph VBC ID01
MP-V3ph VCA ID01
MP-V3ph VA ID01
MP-V3ph VB ID01
MP-V3ph VC ID01
MP-V3ph V1 ID01
MP-V3ph VN ID01
Measuring point I-3ph 1[ID 2] MP-I3ph IA ID02
MP-I3ph IB ID02
MP-I3ph IC ID02
MP-I3ph I1 ID02
MP-I3ph IN ID02
Measuring point I-1ph 1[ID 3] MP-I1ph ID03
Measuring point V-1ph 1[ID 4] MP-V1ph ID04
Table 10-5 Possible Binary-Information Names
Path Displayed in DIGSI 5 Name Transferred to the PDC

(Can Be Edited)
PMU 1: BIN-01-INFO-6
Transf.bin.1:
>BinaryInfo.6
Transf.bin.2:
>BinaryInfo.8
Transf.bin.10:
>BinaryInfo.3
Data is transmitted continuously from the PMU to the PDC at the configured reporting rate. The transmission is
terminated by a corresponding trip command from the PDC or when the connection between the PDC and the
PMU is interrupted.
Communication between the PMU and the PDC can be passed via TCP or UDP protocols.
The following ports are used for data transmission by default:
• TCP: Port 4712
• UDP: Port 4713

You can configure the ports anyway you wish in a range of 1 to 65535 using the TCP port and UDP port
parameters.
NOTE
i When configuring the ports, do not set any ports already being used by other communication protocols.
Configuring ports used elsewhere prevents communication with the PMU. In this case, data packets from
the PDC cannot be received, and inquiries from the PMU cannot be transmitted.
If you are using the UDP protocol for communication between the PMU and the PDC, you can set either
command mode or asynchronous response mode as the communication mode. In asynchronous
response mode, data can be transmitted continuously to preset PDC destination addresses in IEEE C37.118

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
format without a PDC having to request transmission of the synchrophasor data via a close command to the
PMU.
Up to 4 different PDCs can be connected to one device PMU at the same time. The IP addresses of the
maximum 4 PDCs are set in the PMU function group. If 4 device PMUs are configured, this enables support for
up to 16 PDCs.
10.8.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI
You configure and parameterize the Phasor Measurement Unit with DIGSI. After a device has been added
in a DIGSI project, one or more communication modules that support synchrophasors can be configured
as PMUs. The device module supports a maximum of 2 communication modules that can be configured as
PMUs. If more than 2 PMUs are needed, the device must be expanded with a CB202 plug-in module assembly
(expansion module), which can accommodate 2 more communication modules.
The following communication modules support synchrophasors:
• ETH-BA-2EL (2 x Ethernet electric, RJ45)
• ETH-BB-2FO (2 x Ethernet optical, 2 km, LC duplex)
• ETH-BD-2FO (2 x Ethernet optical, 2 km, LC duplex)

These modules are then freely assignable to ports E, F, N, or P of the device, see Figure 10-8. You can view the
selected port in the (_:10621:104) Port. This parameter is automatically managed by DIGSI and cannot
be changed.
[sc_commod, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-8 Placement of Communication Modules
NOTE
i Port M of the CB202 plug-in module assembly is used to accommodate measuring-transducer modules and
cannot be used for the installation of communication modules.
Addressing
You must configure the respective Ethernet address (IP address, subnet mask, etc.) for each communication
module in DIGSI. This is done in the DIGSI General settings properties dialog of the communication module in
item Ethernet addresses and so forms the IP address for the respective PMU.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_ethern, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-9 Ethernet-Address Configuration
In the Protocols – Communication menu, select the synchrophasor protocol; see the following figure.
[sc_protoc, 2, en_US]
After you have selected the synchrophasor protocol for the communication module, a settings dialog for
PMU-specific configuration opens in Settings; see the following figure.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_wildcard, 3, en_US]
Figure 10-11 PMU-Specific Configuration
You configure the specific settings for the communication protocol in the top section of this settings dialog. In
the bottom section, you specify the corresponding PMU-specific settings.
In order to permit a better configuration of larger wide-area supervision systems, changes have been imple-
mented in the IEEE C37.118 communication configuration that permit a flexible IP configuration without the
loss of safety aspects in the networks administered.
Configurable placeholders are allowed for every PDC/IP address with the TCP PMU transmission protocol in
general and with UDP in the Communication mode Commanded operation. These placeholders allow
you to define a range of IP addresses where they are accepted within these accesses. The purpose of this is
to permit each individual device or system access within the respective network without limits with regard
to their hierarchy level. Therefore, with regard to security aspects, the limitation to individual IP addresses is
eliminated. You are thus allowed to configure complete sections of IP addresses in each PMU and, as a result,
very flexible when making changes to the configuration of the entire network, for example. The placeholder
character must follow consecutively at the bit level, starting with the bit with the lowest value.
EXAMPLE of Placeholder Characters:

Example 1:
• binary 00000000.00000000.00000000.00101011 is not permitted
• binary 00000000.00000000.00000000.00111111 is permitted

Example 2:
• The PDC IP address is: 192.172.16.1
• Placeholder: 0.0.0.127
The device accepts requests within the IP address range of 192.172.16.1 to 192.172.16.127.
Example 3:
• The PDC IP address is: 192.172.16.100
• Placeholder: 0.0.0.3
The device accepts requests within the IP address range of 192.172.16.100 to 192.172.16.103.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If a PDC attempts to establish a connection to the device, the PDC IP addresses and corresponding place-
holders are checked in the same order as they had been configured (IP address PDC1, IP address PDC2,
IP address PDC3). Running through the list is stopped with the first match of the IP address, placeholder, and
requested IP-address range and the connection is built-up. If there are no matches, the attempt to connect is
rejected.
If you have configured the IP address 0.0.0.0 and the placeholder 255.255.255.255, every IP address received
is accepted as valid. This could be of use in the course of commissioning measures.
NOTE
i You must have configured at least one IP address to establish a connection between the device and the
PDC.
If you set UDP as the transmission protocol, you can transmit PMU data to groups of PDCs using IP multicast.
Using multicast, considerably more PDCs can be reached via one communication module than when every
PDC connects in unicast mode. Usually, the address range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used.
NOTE
i The router used must support the IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) V3 protocol.
[sc_PMU_multicast01, 1, en_US]
Make a checkmark at the Use multicast parameter. If Use multicast is checked, you can set up to
2 multicast IP addresses. If you do not put the checkmark in place, the settings for the multicast IP addresses
are not displayed.
NOTE
i DIGSI does not check the validity of the set multicast IP address. A multicast IP address of 0.0.0.0 is ignored.
You can set the settings for the multicast IP addresses and the PDC IP addresses in the Access Control List.
If Use multicast is active, all data packages of the PMU are transmitted to the parameterized multicast
IP addresses, but not to the PDC IP addresses. Commands from PDCs in the Access Control List are processed
as if operating without multicast. Responses are only transmitted by way of the multicast IP addresses. In the
Command mode UDP communication mode, you need at least one additional PDC IP address in the Access
Control List to start PMU data transmission (see Figure 10-12).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_PMU_Multicast_Access, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-12 Access Control List
EXAMPLE
Multicast Operation
[dw_PMU_multicast_config_with_whitellist_PDC, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-13 PMU Multicast Configuration in Asynchronous Response Mode
Select the communication module in the Hardware and protocols menu in DIGSI. Set the IP address of the
PMU (192.168.100.1) under Properties → Ethernet addresses.
[sc_IP_comm-mode_de, 1, en_US]
After you have selected the synchrophasor protocol for the communication module, a settings dialog for
PMU-specific configuration opens in Settings; see the following figure. Set the communication mode to
Asynchronous response mode.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_general_spon_mode, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-14 PMU Settings
In the following dialog, you set the IP addresses of the multicast routers:
Figure 10-15 Additional Multicast IP Addresses During PMU Transport: UDP and Multicast
If you are using the asynchronous data transmission method, set the PMU transport parameter to UDP
and the Communication mode parameter to Spontaneous operation. The PMU data are then sent cycli-
cally via UDP to every PDC/IP address permanently configured in DIGSI. You may not configure placeholders for
PDC/IP address ranges in this communication mode.
Data output starts immediately after the device has booted. In this way, a starting signal from the PDC is not
necessary to start data transmission.
[sc_spontan, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-16 PMU Configuration for Spontaneous Transmission
The configuration dataset is transmitted 1x per minute. With the Spont. mode config type parameter,
you select the type for the configuration data record. With the Reporting rate parameter, you configure
the number of cyclic repetitions of the data packages. As UDP is a connectionless protocol, a preconfigured
destination device with its PDC/IP address is not required to be physically present and/or connected. This
allows uninterrupted provision of the data without bidirectional communication.
NOTE
i If you have not configured valid PDC/IP addresses and still activate option for spontaneous data transmis-
sion, no cyclic data telegrams are sent.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i It is possible to configure IP addresses for various PDCs that are not present in the same subnetwork as the
COM module. Such configurations are considered valid and can be loaded into the device. However, if the
device transmits spontaneous data and configuration packages to these IP addresses, the PDC cannot be
reached with the deviating subnetwork destination addresses.
NOTE
i Commands or requests from an invalid PMU IP address are ignored.
EXAMPLE
COM-Module Address Configuration
• IP address: 192.168.100.1
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

PDC Address Configuration
• IP address for PDC1: 192.168.100.160
• IP address for PDC2: 86.168.100.161

Only PDC1 receives the data because the IP address is in the same subnetwork as the COM module.
PDC2 cannot be reached because the subnetwork address (86.x) differs from the subnetwork address of the
COM module (192.x). The PMU cannot transmit data to this address.
In addition to the PDCs IP addresses, the port can also be configured, which ensures the communication
between the PMU and PDC. You can find the TCP or UDP port parameter in place for this purpose, depending
on the configured transmission protocol. With the parameters, you can configure the port in a range of
1 to 65 535. The setting for these parameters is stored, even when the parameter is not visible due to
the configuration of the transmission protocol. If, for example, TCP has been configured as a transmission
protocol, the TCP port is not visible, but the setting has been stored in the background in DIGSI and is still
available for use later on.
Measuring-Point Assignment
After adding measuring points to the device, you can assign these measuring points to each configured PMU.
Figure 10-17 shows an example of how the device configuration can be supplemented with 2 additional
input/output modules. You connect the current and voltage inputs of these I/O modules to measuring points
via the DIGSI routing matrix, see example in Figure 10-18.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_addios, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-17 Adding Additional Input/Output Modules
[sc_routin, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-18 Assignment of the Current and Voltage Inputs of the Added Input/Output Modules on Meas-
uring Points
NOTE
i Consider that the maximum amount of measuring points that can be routed is limited by the device.
The maximum numbers of measuring points that can be routed for one PMU are:
• 20 x 3-phase voltage measuring points
• 20 x 3-phase current measuring points
• 40 x 1-phase voltage measuring points
• 40 x 1-phase current measuring points

You can assign all supported measuring points to any PMU, see the following figure. Each PMU must be
connected to at least one measuring point, and the total number of phasors (a 3-phase measuring point = 4

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
phasors) must not exceed 80 per PMU. The limitation of the load model must also be considered, depending
on the device configuration.
[sc_fgconn, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-19 Connecting Measuring Points to the Configured PMU Function Groups
When these setting steps have been completed, the PMUs are fully configured. The PMU is a function group
that functions independently of all the other function groups instantiated in the device.
Changing the Channel Names of Phasors

You can edit the names of the individual phasor channels for voltages and currents in DIGSI. Clearly structured
channel designations support the testing and commissioning of PMU systems. Furthermore, only the names
visible in the IEEE C37.118 interface can be changed. The function block designations themselves cannot.
The IEEE C37.118 defines the ASCII character set for changing the channel names. Due to the protocol, the
designation length is limited to 255 ASCII characters per channel for CFG3, and to 16 ASCII characters per
channel for CFG2.
In order to define your own channel names, firstly instantiate the required number of Phasor names function
blocks in the PMU function group. Assignment to the corresponding measuring points is performed by the
Measuring point selection. For this purpose, DIGSI shows all measuring points routed to the PMU in the
function group connections (see following figure).
[sc_phasor_edit, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-20 Options for Editing the Names of the Individual Phasors

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i You can only rename each individual phasor when you set the parameter Positive sequence to no or
additionally in the function settings. Otherwise you will only be offered one single phasor for each
3-phase measuring point for renaming.
Changing the Channel Names of Binary Channels

You can edit the names of the binary channels in DIGSI. Clearly structured channel designations support the
testing and commissioning of PMU systems. You can edit the names of the binary channels visible in the
IEEE C37.118 interface in DIGSI. To do this, tick the My binary info names check box in the Binary info
transmission function block (see Figure 10-21).
The IEEE C37.118 defines the ASCII character set for changing the channel names. Due to the protocol, the
designation length is limited to 255 ASCII characters per channel for CFG3, and to 16 ASCII characters per
channel for CFG2.
[sc_PMU_bin_info_edit, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-21 Options for Editing the Names of the Individual Binary Channels
Routing Binary Signals

You can connect binary inputs via DIGSI information routing to binary channels of the PMU. As an alternative,
you can also route the binary inputs via a function chart (CFC). You will find, in the Phasor Measurement
Unit (PMU) folder, the Binary information transmission function block in the DIGSI function library (see the
following figure). You can instantiate this function block up to 10 times in one PMU function group. Each of
these function blocks contains 8 options for routing binary channels.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_pmu_bif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-22 Information Routing in DIGSI 5
Routing Analog-Channel Data

In a PMU function group, you can instantiate the analog-channel data using the FBs AnalogCh 1ph or
AnalogCh 3ph. In this case, a maximum of 30 instances per function-block type can be used.
With the parameters of the FBs AnalogCh 1ph or AnalogCh 3ph, you can assign the measuring points. You
can only use the measuring points that have previously been assigned to the PMU function group.
You can also adjust whether the active or reactive power must be transmitted and assign a name to the analog
channel. Due to the protocol, the designation length is limited to 255 ASCII characters for CFG3 and to 16
ASCII characters for CFG2.
[sc_analog_channel, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-23 Routing Analog-Channel Data

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Routing Indications
The routable indication ChannelLive of the PMU log
• raises when the PMU is connected to the PDC
• clears when the connection to the PDC is interrupted.
[sc_parami, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-24 Log Indication for Display of the PMU/PDC Connection
10.8.7 Parameterizing the PMU on the Device
You can also change the PMU settings directly on the device. To do this, select the desired PMU instance
on the device display. By selecting menu item Settings you then access the editable setting values (see
Figure 10-25). Note that the parameter Port cannot be changed, because this corresponds to the physical
slot position of the communication module in question.
[sc_devpmu, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-25 Changing the PMU Setting Values via the Device Display
You can also change the communication settings in the same way. To do this, select the corresponding
communication port in the Communication menu on the device display. From the Channel 1 menu item, you
can then access the detailed setting options for the IP or PMU communication settings (see Figure 10-26).

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[sc_compmu, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-26 Changing the Communication Setting Values via the Device Display
Time Synchronization
In order to ensure the time accuracy of the PMU, you must select IRIG-B as the protocol for the GPS clock
(Figure 10-27) or, if an ETH-BD-2FO communication module is present, IEEE 1588 (Figure 10-28). With other
settings, the PMU function function group indicates that it is not time synchronized.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Setting Time Synchronization – IRIG-B
[sc_setting time source, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-27 Setting Time Synchronization – IRIG-B
To detect a lack of synchronization quickly, also set the waiting time for the failure indication of the loss of
time synchronization to the smallest possible value, thus to 1 s.
Setting Time Synchronization – IEEE 1588 (Precision Time Protocol (PTP))

Activate IEEE 1588 on the ETH-BD-2FO communication module.
NOTE
i For PMU applications, use the IEEE 1588 protocol on the communication modules ETH-BD-2FO, ETH-
BA-2FO (revision 2), or ETH-BB-2FO (revision 2), because the IEEE 1588 protocol that can be activated on
the other modules does not deliver the required accuracy.
[sc_activate_ieee_1588, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-28 IEEE 1588 Activation for the ETH-BD-2FO Module

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Ensure that the domain number in the IEEE 1588 settings matches that of the switch used.
[sc_para_ieee_1588, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-29 IEEE 1588 settings on the ETH-BD-2FO module
Select IEEE 1588 as the time source in the time configuration.
[sc_choose_of_time, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-30 Selection of Time Source
When selecting the switch used, make sure it supports the PTP standard IEEE 1588. Siemens recommends the
RUGGEDCOM RSG2488.
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:10621:1) Mode = on

With the parameter Mode, you activate or deactivate the PMU, or you switch it to test mode. The possible
setting values are on, off and test. In Test mode, the PMU data is marked as invalid.
Parameter: Reporting rate
• Default setting (_:10621:102) Reporting rate = 10 frames/s

With the parameter Reporting rate, you specify the number of telegrams that are compiled and sent to
the PDC per second.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i Different setting values are shown or hidden, depending on the rated frequency set. You can set a
reporting rate of 200 frames/s (50 Hz) or 240 frames/s (60 Hz) only when using an ETH-BD-2FO module.
Parameter: Positive sequence
• Default setting (_:10621:103) Positive sequence = no

With the parameter Positive sequence, you can set whether the PMU transmits the positive-sequence
system. The following setting values can be used:
Parameter Value Meaning
no The PMU only transmits the 3 individual synchrophasors for the 3-phase
measuring points.
only The PMU only transmits the positive-sequence system instead of the 3 indi-
vidual synchrophasors for the 3-phase measuring points.
additionally The PMU transmits the positive-sequence system in addition to the 3 indi-
vidual synchrophasors for the 3-phase measuring points.
The setting you make here is then valid for all PMUs with 3-phase measuring points.
Parameter: Transmit measured VN, IN
• Default setting (_:10621:104) Transmit measured VN, IN = no

This parameter is only visible if you route the Measuring point V-3ph or the Measuring point I-3ph with
VN or IN to the PMU in DIGSI 5. The routing option is in the DIGSI 5 project tree in Device Name →
Function-group connections in the Measuring points ↔ Function group settings sheet.
With this parameter, you define whether or not the PMU transmits VN and IN.
Parameter: Class
• Default setting (_:10621:101) Class = Class P

With the parameter Class, you set which performance class is used for the calculation of the measured
values. Class P is the standard case for PMUs. In this case, filters are used that provide a short response time
and that are therefore suitable for recording dynamic processes. Class M is intended for applications that are
unfavorably affected by alias effects and in which short response times are not relevant.
Parameter: Global PMU ID
• Default setting (_:10621:142) Global PMU ID = Freely editable text

With the parameter Global PMU ID, you enter a global ID for the PMU, which can contain up to 16
characters.
Parameter: PMU Latitude
• Default setting (_:10621:143) PMU Latitude = 0.00000000 °

With the parameter PMU Latitude, you set the latitude to a value between -90,00000000 ° and
+90,00000000 °.
Parameter: PMU Longitude
• Default setting (_:10621:144) PMU Longitude = 0.00000000 °

With the parameter PMU Longitude, you set the current longitude to a value between -180,00000000 ° and
+180,00000000 °.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: PMU Elevation
• Default setting (_:10621:145) PMU Elevation = 0.00 m

With the parameter PMU Elevation, you set the current height above sea level to a value between
-50 000.00 m and +50 000.00 m.
Parameter: Port
This parameter cannot be set, because the Port results from the physical position where the corresponding
communication module is inserted.
10.8.9 Settings

Func. settings
_:10621:1 Func. settings:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:10621:101 Func. settings:Class • Class P Class P
• Class M
_:10621:142 Func. settings:Global Freely editable text
PMU ID
_:10621:143 Func. settings:PMU Lati- -90.000000 ° to 90.000000 ° 0.000000 °
tude
_:10621:144 Func. settings:PMU -180.000000 ° to 180.000000 0.000000 °
Longitude °
_:10621:145 Func. settings:PMU -50000.00 m to 50000.00 m 0.00 m
Elevation
_:10621:102 Func. settings:Reporting • 1 frame/s 10 frames/s
rate
• 5 frames/s
• 6 frames/s
• 10 frames/s
• 12 frames/s
• 15 frames/s
• 20 frames/s
• 25 frames/s
• 30 frames/s
• 50 frames/s
• 60 frames/s
• 100 frames/s
• 120 frames/s
• 200 frames/s
• 240 frames/s
_:10621:103 Func. settings:Positive • no no
sequence
• only
• additionally
_:10621:105 Func. settings:Transmit • no no
measured VN, IN
• yes

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:10621:104 Func. settings:Port • port F port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
_:10621:141 Func. settings:Freq 1 to 100 1
tracking group ID

(Type)
General
_:10621:52 Func. settings:Behavior ENS O
_:10621:53 Func. settings:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.9 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring
The Circuit-breaker monitoring function:
• Detects the abrasion of the circuit breakers phase-selectively
• Allows an adaptation of maintenance intervals for switching contacts of the circuit breakers according to
the real abrasion
• Sends a warning signal when the abrasion of the circuit breaker reaches a certain degree
• Allows the supervision of the circuit-breaker make time
• Allows the supervision of the circuit-breaker break time

One of the main advantages of this function is the reduction of maintenance and service costs.
The function Circuit-breaker monitoring can be used in the function group Circuit-breaker.
The function offers 9 independent operating methods with different methods of measurement:
• ΣIx-method
Sum of the breaking-current potentials
• 2P-method
2 points method for calculating the remaining switching cycles
• I2t-method
Sum of all breaking-current square integrals
• Make time
Monitoring of the circuit-breaker make time
• Break time
Monitoring of the circuit-breaker break time
• Pole scatter time open

Supervision of the difference in the switch-off times of the individual phases
• Pole scatter time close

Supervision of the difference in the switch-on times of the individual phases
• Mechanical switching time open

Supervision of the switching time open detected via the feedback contacts
• Mechanical switching time close

Supervision of the switching time close detected via the feedback contacts
• Operation counter
Supervision of the number of switching cycles performed

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Start Criterion for the Function Circuit-Breaker Monitoring

The methods ΣIx, 2P and I2t are started if one of the following criteria is met:
• The circuit breaker is opened via a command or a protection tripping.
• The binary input signal >Start calc. for open is initiated, for example, via an external signal.
• The signal for the closed position of the circuit breaker is going. This signal is built via the circuit-breaker
auxiliary-contacts. Thus, a manual opening of the circuit breaker is detected.
The methods Make time, Mechanical switching time close are started if one of the following criteria is met:
• The circuit breaker is closed via a command.
• The binary input signal >Start calc. for close is initiated, for example, via an external signal.
The methods Break time, Mechanical switching time open and Pole scatter time open are started if one of
the following criteria is met:
• The circuit breaker is opened via a command.
• The circuit breaker is opened via a protection tripping.
• The binary input signal >Start calc. for open is initiated, for example, via an external signal.
Definition of the Times when Opening and Closing the Circuit Breaker
With the paramter Make time, you define the point in time when the circuit-breaker poles are closed and the
current has reached a constant value.
[dw_maketime, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-31 Definition of Make Time
With the parameter Opening time, you define the point in time when the circuit-breaker poles begin to
open. With the parameter Break time, you define the point in time when the circuit-breaker poles are
separated and the arc is extinct. The following graphic shows the relation between these 2 points in time of
the circuit breaker.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_breaktime, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-32 Circuit-Breaker Times
Parameter: Apply PhaseA config to all
• Default setting (_:2311:1) Apply PhaseA config to all = inactive

If the parameter Apply PhaseA config to all is activated, all settings of phase A are adopted for
phases B and C.
NOTE
i The following parameters apply to one phase. The descriptions apply similarly to the parameters of the
remaining phases.
Parameter: Opening time
• Default setting (_:23971:101) Opening time = 65 ms

With the parameter Opening time, you define the interval between the activation of the shunt release for
the circuit breaker and the moment, when the circuit-breaker poles open.
For information on the setting value, refer to the technical data of the used circuit breaker. For futher
information, refer to Figure 10-32.
Parameter: Break time
• Default setting (_:23971:102) Break time = 80 ms

With the parameter Break time, you define the interval between the activation of the shunt release for the
circuit breaker and the moment, when the arc extincts (and the circuit-breaker poles are open).
For information on the setting value, refer to the technical data of the used circuit breaker. For further
information, refer to Figure 10-32.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Make time
• Default setting (_:23971:103) Make time = 80 ms

With the parameter Make time, you define the typical time interval between the activation of the closing
procedure for the circuit breaker and the point in time when the first current flows.
For information on the setting value, refer to the technical data of the used circuit breaker.
10.9.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:1 General:Apply PhaseA • 0 False
config to all
• 1
General
_:23971:1 Phase A:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:23971:101 Phase A:Opening time 1 ms to 500 ms 65 ms
_:23971:102 Phase A:Break time 1 ms to 600 ms 80 ms
_:23971:103 Phase A:Make time 1 ms to 600 ms 80 ms
General
_:24002:1 Phase B:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:24002:101 Phase B:Opening time 1 ms to 500 ms 65 ms
_:24002:102 Phase B:Break time 1 ms to 600 ms 80 ms
_:24002:103 Phase B:Make time 1 ms to 600 ms 80 ms
General
_:24033:1 Phase C:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:24033:101 Phase C:Opening time 1 ms to 500 ms 65 ms
_:24033:102 Phase C:Break time 1 ms to 600 ms 80 ms
_:24033:103 Phase C:Make time 1 ms to 600 ms 80 ms

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Start calc. for open SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Start calc. for close SPS I

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.9.4 ΣIx Method
[lo_Ix-calc, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-33 Logic of the ΣIx Method
Determination of the Tripping/Opening Current Value

RMS values of the fundamental components are stored for each phase in a buffer during the time between the
start criterion and the pole-opening-starts criterion. With the coming pole-opening-starts criterion, the latest
value in the buffer is searched for whose value is above the setting of parameter Current thresh. CB
open. The one period prior value is used as tripping/opening current for further calculation.
If no value within the buffer is above the setting value, this circuit-breaker opening affects only the mechan-
ical lifetime of the circuit breaker and is consequently not considered by this method.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_cb_wixf, 3, en_US]
Figure 10-34 Logic of the Determination of the Tripping Current Value
(1) Current-flow criterion fulfilled

(2) 1 period prior value
Calculation of the Wear

If the ΣIx-method stage receives the logic release signal, the determined tripping current is used in the
calculation of wear. The calculation results are then added to the existing statistic values of the ΣIx method as
follows, with phase A as example.
[fo_CB-WI-xA, 1, en_US]
Mit:
x Parameter exponent
q No. of circuit-breaker switching cycle
Tripping/opening current of phase A to the power of x in the qth circuit-breaker operation
Rated normal current to the power of x
Statistic value of current phase A calculated with the ∑Ix method
m Total number of switching cycles
The phase-selective ΣIx value is available as statistical value. You can reset or preset the statistics according to
the specific application.
To simplify the interpretation of the sum of the tripping current powers, the values are set in relation to the
exponentiated rated normal current Irated of the circuit-breaker (see also setting notes).
Circuit-Breaker Maintenance Warning

If the summated ΣIx value of any phase is greater than the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is
generated.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
remaining phases.
Parameter: Active
• Default setting (_:23971:120) Active = inactive

With the parameter Active, you switch on the method.
Parameter: Exponent
• Default setting (_:23971:121) Exponent = 2.0
With the parameter Exponent, you specify the exponent for the ΣIx method.
A typical value is the default setting of 2. However, due to practical experiences with individual circuit
breakers, slightly different values may be requested.
• Default setting (_:23971:122) Threshold = 10 000.00

With the parameter Threshold, you define the threshold of the statistic value.
The relation of the tripping current powers to the exponentiated rated normal current Irated allows the limiting
value of the ΣIx method to correspond to the maximum number of make-break operations. For a circuit
breaker, whose contacts have not yet been worn, the maximum number of make-break operations can be
entered directly as limiting value.
10.9.4.3 Settings

ΣIx-method
_:23971:120 Phase A:Active • 0 False
• 1
_:23971:121 Phase A:Exponent 1.0 to 3.0 2.0
_:23971:122 Phase A:Threshold 0 to 10000000 10000
ΣIx-method
_:24002:120 Phase B:Active • 0 False
• 1
_:24002:121 Phase B:Exponent 1.0 to 3.0 2.0
_:24002:122 Phase B:Threshold 0 to 10000000 10000
ΣIx-method
_:24033:120 Phase C:Active • 0 False
• 1
_:24033:121 Phase C:Exponent 1.0 to 3.0 2.0
_:24033:122 Phase C:Threshold 0 to 10000000 10000

(Type)
Phase A
_:23971:51 Phase A:Mode (controllable) ENC C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:23971:54 Phase A:Inactive SPS O
_:23971:52 Phase A:Behavior ENS O
_:23971:53 Phase A:Health ENS O
_:23971:300 Phase A:2P abrasion remaining INS O
_:23971:301 Phase A:2P abrasion cumulated MV O
_:23971:302 Phase A:2P abrasion last sw.op. MV O
_:23971:303 Phase A:2P abrasion warning SPS O
_:23971:304 Phase A:2P abrasion alarm SPS O
_:23971:310 Phase A:ΣIx BCR O
_:23971:311 Phase A:Warning ΣIx SPS O
_:23971:320 Phase A:ΣI²t BCR O
_:23971:321 Phase A:Warning ΣI²t SPS O
_:23971:330 Phase A:Make time MV O
_:23971:331 Phase A:Make-time warning SPS O
_:23971:332 Phase A:Make-time alarm SPS O
_:23971:340 Phase A:Break time MV O
_:23971:341 Phase A:Break-time warning SPS O
_:23971:342 Phase A:Break-time alarm SPS O
_:23971:350 Phase A:Aux.-contact time open MV O
_:23971:351 Phase A:Aux.c. time open warn. SPS O
_:23971:352 Phase A:Aux.c. time open alarm SPS O
_:23971:353 Phase A:Reaction time open MV O
_:23971:354 Phase A:React. time open warn. SPS O
_:23971:355 Phase A:React. time open alarm SPS O
_:23971:356 Phase A:Aux.c. travel time open MV O
_:23971:360 Phase A:Aux.-cont. time close MV O
_:23971:361 Phase A:Aux.c. time close warn. SPS O
_:23971:362 Phase A:Aux.c. time close alarm SPS O
_:23971:363 Phase A:Reaction time close MV O
_:23971:364 Phase A:React. time close warn. SPS O
_:23971:365 Phase A:React. time close alarm SPS O
_:23971:366 Phase A:Aux.c. travel time close MV O
Phase B
_:24002:51 Phase B:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:24002:54 Phase B:Inactive SPS O
_:24002:52 Phase B:Behavior ENS O
_:24002:53 Phase B:Health ENS O
_:24002:300 Phase B:2P abrasion remaining INS O
_:24002:301 Phase B:2P abrasion cumulated MV O
_:24002:302 Phase B:2P abrasion last sw.op. MV O
_:24002:303 Phase B:2P abrasion warning SPS O
_:24002:304 Phase B:2P abrasion alarm SPS O
_:24002:310 Phase B:ΣIx BCR O
_:24002:311 Phase B:Warning ΣIx SPS O
_:24002:320 Phase B:ΣI²t BCR O
_:24002:321 Phase B:Warning ΣI²t SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:24002:330 Phase B:Make time MV O
_:24002:331 Phase B:Make-time warning SPS O
_:24002:332 Phase B:Make-time alarm SPS O
_:24002:340 Phase B:Break time MV O
_:24002:341 Phase B:Break-time warning SPS O
_:24002:342 Phase B:Break-time alarm SPS O
_:24002:350 Phase B:Aux.-contact time open MV O
_:24002:351 Phase B:Aux.c. time open warn. SPS O
_:24002:352 Phase B:Aux.c. time open alarm SPS O
_:24002:353 Phase B:Reaction time open MV O
_:24002:354 Phase B:React. time open warn. SPS O
_:24002:355 Phase B:React. time open alarm SPS O
_:24002:356 Phase B:Aux.c. travel time open MV O
_:24002:360 Phase B:Aux.-cont. time close MV O
_:24002:361 Phase B:Aux.c. time close warn. SPS O
_:24002:362 Phase B:Aux.c. time close alarm SPS O
_:24002:363 Phase B:Reaction time close MV O
_:24002:364 Phase B:React. time close warn. SPS O
_:24002:365 Phase B:React. time close alarm SPS O
_:24002:366 Phase B:Aux.c. travel time close MV O
Phase C
_:24033:51 Phase C:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:24033:54 Phase C:Inactive SPS O
_:24033:52 Phase C:Behavior ENS O
_:24033:53 Phase C:Health ENS O
_:24033:300 Phase C:2P abrasion remaining INS O
_:24033:301 Phase C:2P abrasion cumulated MV O
_:24033:302 Phase C:2P abrasion last sw.op. MV O
_:24033:303 Phase C:2P abrasion warning SPS O
_:24033:304 Phase C:2P abrasion alarm SPS O
_:24033:310 Phase C:ΣIx BCR O
_:24033:311 Phase C:Warning ΣIx SPS O
_:24033:320 Phase C:ΣI²t BCR O
_:24033:321 Phase C:Warning ΣI²t SPS O
_:24033:330 Phase C:Make time MV O
_:24033:331 Phase C:Make-time warning SPS O
_:24033:332 Phase C:Make-time alarm SPS O
_:24033:340 Phase C:Break time MV O
_:24033:341 Phase C:Break-time warning SPS O
_:24033:342 Phase C:Break-time alarm SPS O
_:24033:350 Phase C:Aux.-contact time open MV O
_:24033:351 Phase C:Aux.c. time open warn. SPS O
_:24033:352 Phase C:Aux.c. time open alarm SPS O
_:24033:353 Phase C:Reaction time open MV O
_:24033:354 Phase C:React. time open warn. SPS O
_:24033:355 Phase C:React. time open alarm SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:24033:356 Phase C:Aux.c. travel time open MV O
_:24033:360 Phase C:Aux.-cont. time close MV O
_:24033:361 Phase C:Aux.c. time close warn. SPS O
_:24033:362 Phase C:Aux.c. time close alarm SPS O
_:24033:363 Phase C:Reaction time close MV O
_:24033:364 Phase C:React. time close warn. SPS O
_:24033:365 Phase C:React. time close alarm SPS O
_:24033:366 Phase C:Aux.c. travel time close MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.9.5 2P Method
Logic of the Stage
[lo_2P-calc, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-35 Logic 2P Method
Calculation of Remaining Switching Cycles

A double-logarithmic diagram provided by the circuit-breaker manufacturer illustrates the relationship of
permitted switching cycles and the tripping/opening current, see the following figure. According to the
example, this circuit breaker can operate approximately 1000 times at a tripping current of 10 kA.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
2 points and their connecting line determine the relationship of switching cycles and tripping current. Point
P1 is determined by the number of permitted switching cycles at rated normal current Irated. Point P2 is
determined by the maximum number of switching cycles at rated short-circuit breaking current Isc. The 4
associated values can be configured with the parameters Rated normal current, Switching cycles
at Ir, Rated short-circ.cur. Isc, and Switching cycles at Isc.
[dw_CB_WOpC, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-36 Diagram of Switching Cycles for the 2P Method
As shown in the preceding figure, a double-logarithmic diagram, the straight line between P1 and P2 can be
expressed by the following exponential function:
[fo_CB-W2-P1, 2, en_US]
Where:
Itrip Tripping/opening current
Irated Rated normal current
m Slope coefficient
b Switching cycles at rated normal current
n Number of switching cycles
The general line equation for the double-logarithmic representation can be derived from the exponential
function and leads to the coefficients b and m.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
NOTE
i Since a slope coefficient of m < -4 is technically irrelevant, but could theoretically be the result of incorrect
settings, the slope coefficient is limited to -4. If a coefficient is smaller than -4, the exponential function
in the switching-cycles diagram is deactivated. The maximum number of switching cycles with Isc is used
instead as the calculation result for the current number of switching cycles, as the dashed line with m =
-4.48 shows in following figure.
[dw_CB_WSlo, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-37 Value Limitation of Slope Coefficient
(1) Applied function from m < -4

(2) Parameterized function with m = -4.48
(3) Parameterized function with m = -1.77
If the 2P-method stage receives the logic release signal, the current number of used up switching cycles (in
relation to the number of switching cycles at rated normal current) is calculated based on the determined
tripping current. This value is subtracted from the the remaining lifetime (switching cycles). The remaining
lifetime is available as statistic value. For better understanding, refer to the example below.
You can reset or preset the statistical values according to the specific application. The reset operation changes
the statistic values to 0, and not to their default values of 10 000.
The statistic value of the residual switching cycles is calculated according to the following formula:
[fo_CB-2P-wear-rest_01, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Where:
i No. of latest circuit-breaker switching cycle
2p wear resti Residual switching cycles with rated normal current, after the ith switching cycle
nrated Overall permissible switching cycles at rated normal current
ntrip Overall permissible switching cycles at tripping current Itrip
nrated/ntrip Lost switching cycles referring to rated normal current
EXAMPLE
For calculating the residual switching cycles of a circuit breaker, the following is assumed:
P1 (2.5 kA, 10 000)
P2 (50.0 kA, 50)
The circuit breaker has made 100 opening operations with rated normal current, 2 tripping operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current, and 3 tripping operations with 10 kA tripping current. Then, the residual
switching cycles with rated normal current are:
[fo_CB-2P-wear-rest_02, 2, en_US]
There are still 9465 possible break operations at rated normal current.
Cumulated Abrasion and Abrasion of the Last Switching Operation

In addition to the remaining switching cycles, the cumulated wear and the wear of the last switching opera-
tion is calculated. These are available as percentage values 2P abrasion cumulated and 2P abrasion
last sw.op..
Circuit-Breaker Maintenance Warning and Alarm

If the adjustable threshold values are undershot, phase-selective warnings and alarms are generated.
NOTE
remaining phases.
Parameter: Active

Parameter: Switching cycles at Ir
• Default setting (_:23971:111) Switching cycles at Ir = 10 000

With the parameter Switching cycles at Ir, you define the number of permitted switching cycles at
rated normal current.
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Rated short-circ.cur. Isc
• Default setting (_:23971:112) Rated short-circ.cur. Isc = 25 000 A

With the parameter Rated short-circ.cur. Isc, you define the rated short-circuit breaking current.
Parameter: Switching cycles at Isc
• Default setting (_:23971:113) Switching cycles at Isc = 50

With the parameter Switching cycles at Isc, you define the number of permitted switching cycles at
rated short-circuit breaking current.
Parameter: Abrasion warn. threshold
• Default setting (_:23971:114) Abrasion warn. threshold = 1000

With the parameter Abrasion warn. threshold, you define the threshold value for the remaining
switching cycles with rated operating current. If the statistical value is below the threshold value, a warning
signal is generated.
Parameter: Abrasion alarm threshold
• Default setting (_:23971:115) Abrasion alarm threshold = 500

With the parameter Abrasion alarm threshold, you define the threshold value for the remaining
switching cycles with rated operating current. If the statistical value is below the threshold value, an alarm
signal is generated.
Example
Here is an example that shows you how to set the threshold parameters. Assuming a circuit breaker with the
same technical data as provided in the example for residual switching cycles, 50 breaking operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current are permitted.
A warning signal should be issued when the number of possible breaking operations with rated short-circuit
breaking current is less than 3. For that condition, you set the threshold value based on the following
calculation:
[fo_CB-W2-P4, 2, en_US]
10.9.5.3 Settings

2P-method
• 1
_:23971:111 Phase A:Switching cycles 100 to 10000000 10000
at Ir
_:23971:112 Phase A:Rated short- 10 A to 100000 A 25000 A
circ.cur. Isc
_:23971:113 Phase A:Switching cycles 1 to 1000 50
at Isc
_:23971:114 Phase A:Abrasion warn. 0 to 10000000 100
threshold

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:23971:115 Phase A:Abrasion alarm 0 to 10000000 50
threshold
2P-method
• 1
_:24002:111 Phase B:Switching cycles 100 to 10000000 10000
at Ir
_:24002:112 Phase B:Rated short- 10 A to 100000 A 25000 A
circ.cur. Isc
_:24002:113 Phase B:Switching cycles 1 to 1000 50
at Isc
_:24002:114 Phase B:Abrasion warn. 0 to 10000000 100
threshold
_:24002:115 Phase B:Abrasion alarm 0 to 10000000 50
threshold
2P-method
• 1
_:24033:111 Phase C:Switching cycles 100 to 10000000 10000
at Ir
_:24033:112 Phase C:Rated short- 10 A to 100000 A 25000 A
circ.cur. Isc
_:24033:113 Phase C:Switching cycles 1 to 1000 50
at Isc
_:24033:114 Phase C:Abrasion warn. 0 to 10000000 100
threshold
_:24033:115 Phase C:Abrasion alarm 0 to 10000000 50
threshold

(Type)
Phase A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Phase B

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Phase C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.9.6 I2t Method
Logic of the Stage
[lo_I2t-calc, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-38 Logic of the I2t Method
Calculation of the Wear

The I2t method evaluates the wear of a circuit breaker based the sampled measuring values of the phase
currents during the arc time. The duration of the arc time is defined by the difference between the 2 settings
of parameters Break time and Opening time (see also Start Criterion for the Function Circuit-Breaker
Monitoring, Page 1747). The stage determines the ending point of the arc time by searching backward the
zero-crossing point of the phase currents after it receives the logic release signal. Then, the squared fault
currents during the arc time are integrated phase-selectively. The integrals are referred to the squared rated
normal current of the circuit breaker as shown in the following formula, with phase A as example.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[fo_CB-WI-2T, 2, en_US]
Where:
Irated Rated normal current
iA(t) Sampled measured current value of phase A
The calculated squared tripping current integrals are added to the existing statistic values.You can reset or
preset the statistic value according to the specific application.
Circuit-Breaker Maintenance Warning

If the statistic value of any phase lies above the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is generated.
Parameter: Active

• Default setting (_:24033:131) Threshold = 10 000.00 I/Ir*s

With the parameter Threshold, you specify the maximum permitted integral of squared sampled measured
values of the phase currents. The same applies to the threshold values of the other phases.
10.9.6.3 Settings

I2t-method
• 1
_:23971:131 Phase A:Threshold 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21400000.00 I/ 10000.00 I/Ir*s
Ir*s
I2t-method
• 1
_:24002:131 Phase B:Threshold 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21400000.00 I/ 10000.00 I/Ir*s
Ir*s
I2t-method
• 1
_:24033:131 Phase C:Threshold 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21400000.00 I/ 10000.00 I/Ir*s
Ir*s

(Type)
Phase A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Phase B

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Phase C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.9.7 Make Time
Logic of the Stage
[lo_LS-Überwachung_Einschaltzeit, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-39 Logic of the Make Time
Operating Mode
The stage for the monitoring of the circuit-breaker make time calculates phase-selectively the time between
the circuit-breaker closing command and the point in time when the current exceeds the Oper.current
threshold. If this threshold has not been exceeded after 2.5 times the value of the parameter Make time,
the measurement is canceled and the output value Make time is set to 0 and marked with the quality invalid.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
If one phase of the current has exceeded the parameter Oper.current threshold or the parameter
Current thresh. CB open at the time of the circuit-breaker closing command, the measurement is
canceled and the output value Make time is marked with the quality invalid.
You can define 2 independent thresholds for the monitoring of the measured make time. When these thresh-
olds are exceeded or undershot, the corresponding outputs Make-time warning and Make-time alarm
are activated for 100 ms. These can be routed in the log.
NOTE
remaining phases.
Parameter: Active

Parameter: Threshold for warning
• Default setting (_:23971:141) Threshold for warning = 5 %

With the parameter Threshold for warning, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed or undershot the parameter Make time at the output Make time , before the output Make-time
warning is set. The output Make-time warning then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Threshold for alarm
• Default setting (_:23971:142) Threshold for alarm = 10 %

With the parameter Threshold for alarm, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed or undershot the parameter Make time at the output Make time, before the output Make-time
alarm is set. The output Make-time alarm then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Oper.current threshold
• Default setting (_:23971:143) Oper.current threshold = 0.100 A

With the parameter Oper.current threshold, you define the current threshold. If the measured value
exceeds this threshold, the measured value is detected as flowing operating current. As soon as an operating
current flows, the end of the time interval Make time is detected.
Parameter: Delay correction time
• Default setting (_:23971:144) Delay correction time = 0.000 s

With the parameter Delay correction time, you define a correction value which will be subtracted from
the Make time during calculation. This allows you to compensate delays caused by the system, for example,
relay residual times, if necessary.
10.9.7.3 Settings

Make time
• 1
_:23971:141 Phase A:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:23971:142 Phase A:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 10 %
alarm
_:23971:143 Phase A:Oper.current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:23971:144 Phase A:Delay correction -50 ms to 50 ms 0 ms
time
Make time
• 1
_:24002:141 Phase B:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning
_:24002:142 Phase B:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 10 %
alarm
_:24002:143 Phase B:Oper.current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:24002:144 Phase B:Delay correction -50 ms to 50 ms 0 ms
time
Make time
• 1
_:24033:141 Phase C:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning
_:24033:142 Phase C:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 10 %
alarm
_:24033:143 Phase C:Oper.current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:24033:144 Phase C:Delay correction -50 ms to 50 ms 0 ms
time

(Type)
Phase A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Phase B

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Phase C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.9.8 Break Time
Logic of the Stage
[lo_LS-Überwachung_Ausschaltzeit, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-40 Logic of the Break Time
Operating Mode
The stage for the monitoring of the circuit-breaker break time calculates phase-selective the time between
the circuit-breaker opening command and the point to which no load current flows. In the event of a restrike
after the current was lost, the measurement of the break time is extended accordingly. If a current is still
measured after 2.5 times of the value parameter Break time, the measurement is canceled and the output
value Break time is set to 0 and marked with the quality invalid.
If no load current is measured at the time of the break time command, the measurement for the relevant
phase is canceled and the output value Break time is marked with the quality invalid.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
You can define 2 independent thresholds for the monitoring of the measured break time. When these
thresholds are exceeded or undershot, the corresponding outputs Break-time warning and Break-time
alarm are activated for 100 ms. These can be routed in the log.
NOTE
remaining phases.
Parameter: Active

• Default setting (_:23971:151) Threshold for warning = 5 %

With the parameter Threshold for warning, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed
to exceed or undershot the parameter Break time at the output Break time, before the output Break-
time warning is set. The output Break-time warning then drops out after 100 ms.
• Default setting (_:23971:152) Threshold for alarm = 10 %

With the parameter Threshold for alarm, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed
to exceed or undershot the parameter Break time at the output Break time, before the output Break-
time alarm is set. The output Break-time alarm then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Delay correction time
• Default setting (_:23971:153) Delay correction time = 0.000 s

With the parameter Delay correction time, you define a correction value which will be subtracted
from the Break time during calculation. This allows you to compensate delays caused by the system, for
example, relay residual times, if necessary.
10.9.8.3 Settings

Break time
• 1
_:23971:151 Phase A:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning
_:23971:152 Phase A:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 10 %
alarm
_:23971:153 Phase A:Delay correction -50 ms to 50 ms 0 ms
time
Break time
• 1
_:24002:151 Phase B:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:24002:152 Phase B:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 10 %
alarm
_:24002:153 Phase B:Delay correction -50 ms to 50 ms 0 ms
time
Break time
• 1
_:24033:151 Phase C:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning
_:24033:152 Phase C:Threshold for 1 % to 100 % 10 %
alarm
_:24033:153 Phase C:Delay correction -50 ms to 50 ms 0 ms
time

(Type)
Phase A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Phase B
Phase C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.9.9 Pole Scatter Time Open
Logic of the Stage
[lo_stage_pole-scatter_open, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-41 Logic of the Stage Pole Scatter Time Open
Operating Mode
The time between the extinction of the current of the first phase until the extinction of the last phase current
when opening the circuit breaker is the pole scatter time. A greater time difference can lead to conclusions on
the circuit-breaker abrasion.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[dw_charact_pole-scatter, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-42 Pole Scatter Time
The start criterion can be either the trip command of the circuit breaker or the input signal >Start calc.
for open. You can set 2 independent threshold values for the supervision of the measured pole scatter time.
If a threshold value is exceeded, the corresponding output Warning/Alarm is activated for 100 ms.
• Default setting (_:26461:151) Threshold for warning = 5 ms

With the parameter Threshold for warning , you define from which measured pole scatter time the
output ScatterTm open warn. is set. The output ScatterTm open warn. drops out after 100 ms.
• Default setting (_:26461:152) Threshold for alarm = 10 ms

With the parameter Threshold for alarm, you define from which measured pole scatter time the output
ScatterTm open alarm is set. The output ScatterTm open alarm drops out after 100 ms.
10.9.9.3 Settings

Pole scatter time open
_:26461:150 3-Phase:Active • 0 unwahr
• 1
_:26461:151 3-Phase:Threshold for 1 ms to 100 ms 5 ms
warning
_:26461:152 3-Phase:Threshold for 1 ms to 100 ms 10 ms
alarm

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Phase C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.9.10 Pole Scatter Time Close
Logic of the Stage
[lo_stage_pole-scatter_close, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-43 Logic of the Stage Pole Scatter Time Close
Operating Mode
The time between reaching the operating current threshold of the first phase and reaching the operating
current threshold of the last phase when closing the circuit breaker is the pole scatter time. A change of the
time difference can lead to conclusions on the wear condition of the circuit breaker.
The start criterion can be either the close command of the circuit breaker or the input signal >Start calc.
for close. You can set 2 independent threshold values for monitoring the measured pole scatter time. If a
threshold value is exceeded, the corresponding output Warning/alarm is activated for 100 ms.
If the calculation is not finished after one second, it is canceled and the output signal Pole scatter time
close is set to 0 and marked with the quality invalid.
• Default setting (_:26461:181) Threshold for warning = 5 ms

With the parameter Threshold for warning, you define from which measured pole scatter time the
output ScatterTm close warn. is set. The output ScatterTm close warn. drops out after 100 ms.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
• Default setting (_:26461:182) Threshold for alarm = 10 ms

With the parameter Threshold for alarm, you define from which measured pole scatter time the output
ScatterTm close alarm is set. The output ScatterTm close alarm drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Oper.current threshold
• Default setting (_:26461:183) Oper.current threshold = 0.1 A

With the parameter Oper.current threshold, you define from which measured current the poles of
the circuit breaker are considered to be closed. The pole scattering time is determined from the time span
between exceeding the threshold of the 1st phase and exceeding the threshold of the last phase.
10.9.10.3 Settings

Pole scatter time close
_:26461:180 3-Phase: Active • 0 false
• 1
_:26461:181 3-Phase: Threshold for 1 ms to 100 ms 5 ms
warning
_:26461:182 3-Phase: Threshold for 1 ms to 100 ms 10 ms
alarm
_:26461:183 3-Phase: Oper.current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A

(Type)
3-Phase
_:26461:51 3-Phase:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:26461:54 3-Phase:Inactive SPS O
_:26461:52 3-Phase:Behavior ENS O
_:26461:53 3-Phase:Health ENS O
_:26461:340 3-Phase:Pole scatter time open MV O
_:26461:341 3-Phase:ScatterTm open warn. SPS O
_:26461:342 3-Phase:ScatterTm open alarm SPS O
_:26461:370 3-Phase:Pole scatter time close MV O
_:26461:371 3-Phase:ScatterTm close warn. SPS O
_:26461:372 3-Phase:ScatterTm close alarm SPS O
_:26461:350 3-Phase:Aux.-contact time open MV O
_:26461:351 3-Phase:Aux.c. time open warn. SPS O
_:26461:352 3-Phase:Aux.c. time open alarm SPS O
_:26461:353 3-Phase:Reaction time open MV O
_:26461:354 3-Phase:React. time open warn. SPS O
_:26461:355 3-Phase:React. time open alarm SPS O
_:26461:356 3-Phase:Aux.c. travel time open MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:26461:360 3-Phase:Aux.-cont. time close MV O
_:26461:361 3-Phase:Aux.c. time close warn. SPS O
_:26461:362 3-Phase:Aux.c. time close alarm SPS O
_:26461:363 3-Phase:Reaction time close MV O
_:26461:364 3-Phase:React. time close warn. SPS O
_:26461:365 3-Phase:React. time close alarm SPS O
_:26461:366 3-Phase:Aux.c. travel time close MV O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.9.11 Mechanical Switching Time Open
Logic of the Stage
[lo_mechanical_Break-time_3phs, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-44 Logic of the Stage Mechanical Switching Time Open for Circuit Breakers 3-Pole

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_mechanical_Break-time_1phs, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-45 Logic of the Stage Mechanical Switching Time Open for Circuit Breakers 1-Pole

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Operating Mode
[dw_charact_cb-breaktime, 1, en_US]
t2 - t0: Auxiliary-contact time opening

t1 - t0: Response time opening
t2 - t1: Auxiliary-contact moving time opening
The stage for supervision of the mechanical switching time opening of the circuit breaker measures the time
between the starting criterion (t0) and the point in time when the position of the circuit breaker switches
to Intermediate position (t1). The stage measures the time between the starting criterion (t0) and the
point in time when the position of the circuit breaker switches to Open (t2). Additionally, it calculates the
auxiliary-contact moving time from the intermediate position (t1) until reaching the position Open (t2).
The starting criterion can be either the opening command of the circuit breaker, trip from a protection
function or the input signal >Start calc. for open.
You can set 2 independent threshold values for the supervision of the measured time t1-t0. If a threshold
value is exceeded, the corresponding output Warning/Alarm is activated for 100 ms. You can set 2 inde-
pendent threshold values for the supervision of the measured time t2-t0. If a threshold value is exceeded, the
corresponding output Warning/Alarm is activated for 100 ms. For t2-t1, only the calculated time is to be
indicated. There is no warning or alarm threshold.
If you use a 1-pole circuit breaker, the settings and indications are phase-selective. For 3-pole circuit breakers
times cannot be determined phase selective. The settings are done in the section 3-phase.
A precondition for the monitoring of the mechanical switching times is the routing of the open and closed
circuit-breaker position in the function group Circuit breaker. If you route only one or no circuit-breaker
feedbacks, the function Mechanical switching time open cannot work and indicates the status Warning.
NOTE
remaining phases.
Parameter: Auxiliary-contact time
• Default setting (_:24002:161) Auxiliary-contact time = 35 ms

With the parameter Auxiliary-contact time, you define the time period from the circuit-breaker open
command until the feedback contacts of the CB indicate Open.
Parameter: Thres. aux.c. time warn
• Default setting (_:24002:162) Thres. aux.c. time warn = 5 ms

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
With the parameter Thres. aux.c. time warn, you define by how many ms the auxiliary-contact time
can be exceeded or undershot before the output Aux.c. time open warn. is set. The output Aux.c.
time open warn. drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Thres. aux.c. time alarm
• Default setting (_:24002:163) Thres. aux.c. time alarm = 10 ms

With the parameter Thres. aux.c. time alarm, you define by how many ms the auxiliary-contact time
can be exceeded or undershot before the output Aux.c. time open alarm is set. The output Aux.c.
time open alarm drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Reaction time
• Default setting (_:24002:164) Reaction time = 15 ms

With the parameter Reaction time, you define the time between the circuit-breaker opening command
and the indication Intermediate position by the feedback contacts of the CB.
Parameter: Thres. react. time warn
• Default setting (_:24002:165) Thres. react. time warn = 3 ms

With the parameter Thres. react. time warn, you define by how many ms the reaction time can be
exceeded or undershot before the output React. time open warn. is set. The output React. time
open warn. drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Thres. react. time alarm
• Default setting (_:24002:166) Thres. react. time alarm(_:24033:166) Thres. react.

time alarm = 5 ms
With the parameter Thres. react. time alarm, you define by how many ms the reaction time can be
exceeded or undershot before the output React. time open alarm is set. The React. time open
alarm drops out after 100 ms.
10.9.11.3 Settings

Mechanical sw. time open
• 1
_:26461:161 3-Phase:Auxiliary- 1 ms to 1000 ms 35 ms
contact time
_:26461:162 3-Phase:Thres. aux.c. 1 ms to 1000 ms 5 ms
time warn
time alarm
_:26461:164 3-Phase:Reaction time 1 ms to 1000 ms 15 ms
_:26461:165 3-Phase:Thres. react. 1 ms to 1000 ms 3 ms
time warn
time alarm
_:23971:160 Phase A:Active • 0 unwahr
• 1
_:23971:161 Phase A:Auxiliary- 1 ms to 1000 ms 35 ms
contact time

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

_:23971:162 Phase A:Thres. aux.c. 1 ms to 1000 ms 5 ms
time warn
_:23971:163 Phase A:Thres. aux.c. 1 ms to 1000 ms 10 ms
time alarm
_:23971:164 Phase A:Reaction time 1 ms to 1000 ms 15 ms
_:23971:165 Phase A:Thres. react. 1 ms to 1000 ms 3 ms
time warn
_:23971:166 Phase A:Thres. react. 1 ms to 1000 ms 5 ms
time alarm
_:24002:160 Phase B:Active • 0 unwahr
• 1
_:24002:161 Phase B:Auxiliary-contact 1 ms to 1000 ms 35 ms
time
_:24002:162 Phase B:Thres. aux.c. 1 ms to 1000 ms 5 ms
time warn
_:24002:163 Phase B:Thres. aux.c. 1 ms to 1000 ms 10 ms
time alarm
_:24002:164 Phase B:Reaction time 1 ms to 1000 ms 15 ms
_:24002:165 Phase B:Thres. react. 1 ms to 1000 ms 3 ms
time warn
_:24002:166 Phase B:Thres. react. 1 ms to 1000 ms 5 ms
time alarm
_:24033:160 Phase C:Active • 0 unwahr
• 1
_:24033:161 Phase C:Auxiliary-contact 1 ms to 1000 ms 35 ms
time
_:24033:162 Phase C:Thres. aux.c. 1 ms to 1000 ms 5 ms
time warn
_:24033:163 Phase C:Thres. aux.c. 1 ms to 1000 ms 10 ms
time alarm
_:24033:164 Phase C:Reaction time 1 ms to 1000 ms 15 ms
_:24033:165 Phase C:Thres. react. 1 ms to 1000 ms 3 ms
time warn
_:24033:166 Phase C:Thres. react. 1 ms to 1000 ms 5 ms
time alarm

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Start calc. for open SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Start calc. for close SPS I
3-Phase
_:26461:51 3-Phase:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:26461:54 3-Phase:Inactive SPS O

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
_:26461:52 3-Phase:Behavior ENS O
_:26461:53 3-Phase:Health ENS O
_:26461:340 3-Phase:Pole scatter time open MV O
_:26461:341 3-Phase:ScatterTm open warn. SPS O
_:26461:342 3-Phase:ScatterTm open alarm SPS O
_:26461:370 3-Phase:Pole scatter time close MV O
_:26461:371 3-Phase:ScatterTm close warn. SPS O
_:26461:372 3-Phase:ScatterTm close alarm SPS O
_:26461:350 3-Phase:Aux.-contact time open MV O
_:26461:351 3-Phase:Aux.c. time open warn. SPS O
_:26461:352 3-Phase:Aux.c. time open alarm SPS O
_:26461:353 3-Phase:Reaction time open MV O
_:26461:354 3-Phase:React. time open warn. SPS O
_:26461:355 3-Phase:React. time open alarm SPS O
_:26461:356 3-Phase:Aux.c. travel time open MV O
_:26461:360 3-Phase:Aux.-cont. time close MV O
_:26461:361 3-Phase:Aux.c. time close warn. SPS O
_:26461:362 3-Phase:Aux.c. time close alarm SPS O
_:26461:363 3-Phase:Reaction time close MV O
_:26461:364 3-Phase:React. time close warn. SPS O
_:26461:365 3-Phase:React. time close alarm SPS O
_:26461:366 3-Phase:Aux.c. travel time close MV O
Phase A

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)
Phase B
Phase C

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023

(Type)

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
10.9.12 Mechanical Switching Time Close
Logic of the Stage
[lo_mechanical_Make-time_3phs, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-46 Logic of the Stage Mechanical Switching Time Close for Circuit Breakers 3-Pole

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
[lo_mechanical_Make-time_1phs, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-47 Logic of the Stage Mechanical Switching Time Close for Circuit Breakers 1-Pole

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Operating Mode
[dw_charact_cb-maketime, 1, en_US]
t2 - t0: Auxiliary-contact time closing

t1 - t0: Response time closing
t2 - t1: Auxiliary-contact moving time closing
The stage for supervision of the mechanical switching time closing of the circuit breaker measures the time
between the closing command of the circuit breaker (t0) and the point in time when the position of the circuit
breaker switches to Intermediate position (t1). The stage measures the time between the close command of
the circuit breaker (t0) and the point in time when the position of the circuit breaker switches to Close (t2).
Additionally, it calculates the auxiliary-contact moving time from the intermediate position (t1) until reaching
the position Close (t2).
The starting criterion can be either the closing command of the circuit breaker or the input signal >Start
calc. for close.
You can set 2 independent threshold values for the supervision of the measured time t1-t0. If a threshold
value is exceeded, the corresponding output Warning/Alarm is activated for 100 ms. You can set 2 inde-
pendent threshold values for the supervision of the measured time t2-t0. If a threshold value is exceeded, the
corresponding output Warning/Alarm is activated for 100 ms. For t2-t1, only the calculated time is to be
indicated. There is no warning or alarm threshold.
If you use a 1-pole circuit breaker, the settings and indications are phase-selective. For 3-pole circuit breakers
times cannot be determined phase selective. The settings are done in the section 3-phase.
A precondition for the monitoring of the mechanical switching times is the routing of the open and closed
circuit-breaker position in the function group Circuit breaker. If you route only one or no circuit-breaker
feedbacks, the function Mechanical switching time close cannot work and indicates the status Warning.
NOTE
remaining phases.
Parameter: Auxiliary-contact time
• Default setting (_:23971:171) Auxiliary-contact time = 35 ms

With the parameter Auxiliary-contact time, you define the time period from the circuit-breaker close
command until the feedback contacts of the CB indicate Closed.

C53000-G5040-C017-M, Edition 12.2023
Parameter: Thres. aux.c. time warn
• Default setting (_:23971:172) Thres. aux.c. time warn = 5 ms

With the parameter Thres. aux.c. time warn, you define by how many ms the auxiliary-contact time
can be exceeded or undershot before the output Aux.c. time close warn.is set. The output Aux.c.
time close warn. drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Thres. aux.c. time alarm
• Default setting (_:23971:173) Thres. aux.c. time alarm = 10 ms

With the parameter Thres. aux.c. time alarm, you define by how many ms the auxiliary-contact time
can be exceeded or undershot before the output Aux.c. time close alarm is set. The output Aux.c.
time close alarm drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Reaction time
• Default setting (_:23971:174) Reaction time = 15 ms

With the parameter Reaction time, you define the time between the circuit-breaker closing command and
the indication Intermediate position by the feedback contacts of the CB.
Parameter: Thres. react. time warn
• Default setting (_:23971:175) Thres. react. time warn = 3 ms

With the parameter Thres. react. time warn, you define by how many ms the reaction time can be
exceeded or undershot before the output React. time close warn. is set. The output React. time
close warn. drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Thres. react. time alarm
• Default setting (_:23971:176) Thres. react. time alarm = 5 ms

With the parameter Thres. react. time alarm, you define by how many ms the reaction time can be
exceeded or undershot before the output React. time close alarm is set. The React. time close
alarm drops out after 100 ms.
10.9.12.3 Settings

Mechanical sw. time close
• 1
_:26461:171 3-Phase:Auxiliary- 1 ms to 1000 ms 35 ms
contact time
time warn
time alarm
_:26461:174 3-Phase:Reaction time 1 ms to 1000 ms 15 ms
time warn
time alarm
Mechanical sw. time close
_:23971:170 Phase A:Active • 0 unwahr

SIP5 7SJ82-85 V09.70 Manual C017-M en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIP5 7SJ82-85 V09.70 Manual C017-M en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIP5 7SJ82-85 V09.70 Manual C017-M en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Purpose of the Manual

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual 3

• Communication protocol manual

• Process bus manual

• DIGSI 5 online help

• SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial

4 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual

The technical data of the product is approved in accordance with UL.

IND. CONT. EQ.

Customer Support Center

Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual 5

Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

• Proper storage, setup and installation

• Proper operation and maintenance

Selection of Used Symbols on the Device

Nr. Symbol Beschreibung

1 Direct current, IEC 60417, 5031

2 Alternating current, IEC 60417, 5032

6 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual

Nr. Symbol Beschreibung

3 Direct and alternating current, IEC 60417, 5033

4 Earth (ground) terminal, IEC 60417, 5017

5 Protective conductor terminal, IEC 60417, 5019

6 Caution, risk of electric shock

7 Caution, risk of danger, ISO 7000, 0434

8 Protective insulation, IEC 60417, 5172, safety class II devices

9 Guideline 2002/96/EC for electrical and electronic devices

10 Guideline for the Eurasian market

11 Mandatory conformity mark for electronics and electrotechnical products in Morocco

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual 7

2 Basic Structure of the Function.................................................................................................................. 51

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual 9

3.3.4 Frequency Tracking Groups – Interpretation of Measured Values................................ 107

10 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual

3.6.8.5 Device Combination of 6 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media.....................213

5 Function-Group Types and Bay Proxy.......................................................................................................283

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual 11

5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group................................................................................ 284

12 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual

5.6.4 20-mA Unit Serial...................................................................................................... 338

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual 13

14 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual

5.9.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion).............................................. 438

6 Protection and Automation Functions..................................................................................................... 455

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual 15

6.3.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 493

16 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual

6.5.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 554

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual 17

6.7.4 Stage Control............................................................................................................ 616

18 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual

6.9.3 Standard Release Procedure....................................................................................... 670

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual 19

6.12.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse Char-

20 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ82/7SJ85, Manual

6.16 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection.................................................................................... 757